Bizhub PRESS C7000 C7000P C70hc C6000 PRO C6000L E SM v4.1

SERVICE MANUAL
Date: 2012/12/26
Table of Contents
Revision List...........................................................................................................................................1
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 Ver. 2.0.......................................................................................................1
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, bizhub PRO C6000L Ver. 4.1....................................................................7
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS............................................................................A-1
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE.................................................................................................................................................A-2
2. DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION..........................................................................A-3
2.1 Description items in this Service Manual...................................................................................................................................A-3
2.2 Description items for safety and important warning items.........................................................................................................A-3
3. SAFETY WARNINGS..................................................................................................................................................A-4
3.1 MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC......................................A-4
3.1.1 Actions requiring special attention...................................................................................................................................A-4
3.2 POWER PLUG SELECTION.....................................................................................................................................................A-5
3.2.1 Power Cord Set or Power Plug.......................................................................................................................................A-5
3.3 CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE...................................................................................................A-6
3.3.1 Power Supply..................................................................................................................................................................A-7
3.3.2 Installation Requirements..............................................................................................................................................A-11
3.3.3 After Service..................................................................................................................................................................A-13
3.4 FUSE.......................................................................................................................................................................................A-18
3.5 Used Batteries Precautions.....................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5.1 ALL Areas......................................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5.2 Germany........................................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5.3 France...........................................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5.4 Denmark........................................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5.5 Finland, Sweden............................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5.6 Norway..........................................................................................................................................................................A-19
4. WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE.........................................................................................................A-20
4.1 Warning indications inside the machine..................................................................................................................................A-20
4.2 Warning indications on the boards..........................................................................................................................................A-26
5. MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT...............................................................................................A-28
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS ...............................................................................................B -1
1. PRECAUTION ON HANDLING THIS MANUAL ........................................................................................................B -1
2. PRODUCT NAME .....................................................................................................................................................B -2
3. TRADEMARK ............................................................................................................................................................B -3
3.1 TRADEMARKS OF OTHER COMPANIES .............................................................................................................................B -3
3.2 OWN TRADEMARKS ..............................................................................................................................................................B -3
4. ELECTRICAL PARTS AND SIGNALS.......................................................................................................................B -4
5. PAPER FEED DIRECTION .......................................................................................................................................B -6
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................................C -1
1. bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, bizhub PRO C6000L........................................................................C -1
1.1 Type ........................................................................................................................................................................................C -1
1.2 Functions .................................................................................................................................................................................C -1
1.3 Paper .......................................................................................................................................................................................C -2
(1) Paper weight .....................................................................................................................................................................C -2
(2) Type of paper ....................................................................................................................................................................C -2
1.4 Recommended paper...............................................................................................................................................................C -2
1.4.1 Inch................................................................................................................................................................................C -2
1.4.2 Metric.............................................................................................................................................................................C -2
1.5 Materials ..................................................................................................................................................................................C -3
(1) C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000...........................................................................................................................................C -3
(2) C6000L..............................................................................................................................................................................C -3
1.6 Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................................................C -4
1.7 Machine data ...........................................................................................................................................................................C -4
1.8 Operating environment ............................................................................................................................................................C -4
1.9 Note regarding the specifications ............................................................................................................................................C -5
2. DF-622 ......................................................................................................................................................................C -6
2.1 Type ........................................................................................................................................................................................C -6
2.2 Functions .................................................................................................................................................................................C -6
2.3 Type of paper ..........................................................................................................................................................................C -6
i
2.4 Machine data ...........................................................................................................................................................................C -6
3. PF-602 ......................................................................................................................................................................C -7
3.1 Type ........................................................................................................................................................................................C -7
3.2 Functions .................................................................................................................................................................................C -7
3.3 Type of paper ..........................................................................................................................................................................C -7
3.4 Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................................................C -7
3.5 Machine data ...........................................................................................................................................................................C -7
4. HT-504/505 ...............................................................................................................................................................C -8
4.1 Type ........................................................................................................................................................................................C -8
4.2 Machine data ...........................................................................................................................................................................C -8
5. LU-202 ......................................................................................................................................................................C -9
5.1 Type ........................................................................................................................................................................................C -9
5.2 Functions .................................................................................................................................................................................C -9
5.3 Type of paper ..........................................................................................................................................................................C -9
5.4 Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................................................C -9
5.5 Machine data ...........................................................................................................................................................................C -9
6. HT-503 ....................................................................................................................................................................C -10
6.1 Type ......................................................................................................................................................................................C -10
6.2 Machine data .........................................................................................................................................................................C -10
6.3 Operating environment ..........................................................................................................................................................C -10
6.4 Note regarding the specifications ..........................................................................................................................................C -10
7. MB-504 ....................................................................................................................................................................C -11
7.1 Type ......................................................................................................................................................................................C -11
7.2 Functions ...............................................................................................................................................................................C -11
7.3 Type of paper ........................................................................................................................................................................C -11
7.4 Machine data .........................................................................................................................................................................C -11
8. HD-514 ....................................................................................................................................................................C -12
8.1 Type ......................................................................................................................................................................................C -12
8.2 Functions ...............................................................................................................................................................................C -12
8.3 Machine data .........................................................................................................................................................................C -12
9. PH-102 ....................................................................................................................................................................C -13
9.1 Type ......................................................................................................................................................................................C -13
9.2 Functions ...............................................................................................................................................................................C -13
9.3 Machine data .........................................................................................................................................................................C -13
10. RU-509 ..................................................................................................................................................................C -14
10.1 Type ....................................................................................................................................................................................C -14
10.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C -14
10.3 Type of paper.......................................................................................................................................................................C -14
10.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C -14
10.5 Operating environment ........................................................................................................................................................C -14
10.6 Note regarding the specifications ........................................................................................................................................C -14
11. HM-102 .................................................................................................................................................................C -15
11.1 Type ....................................................................................................................................................................................C -15
11.2 Function ...............................................................................................................................................................................C -15
11.3 Type of paper.......................................................................................................................................................................C -15
11.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C -15
12. FS-521 ..................................................................................................................................................................C -16
12.1 Type ....................................................................................................................................................................................C -16
12.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C -16
(1) Function...........................................................................................................................................................................C -16
(2) Number of staple sheets .................................................................................................................................................C -16
ii
(3) Staple position ................................................................................................................................................................C -16
(4) Maximum tray capacity of the main tray .........................................................................................................................C -16
(5) Maximum tray capacity of the sub tray ...........................................................................................................................C -17
12.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C -18
(1) Staple ..............................................................................................................................................................................C -18
12.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C -18
13. FS-531 ..................................................................................................................................................................C -19
13.1 Type ....................................................................................................................................................................................C -19
13.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C -19
(1) Functions ........................................................................................................................................................................C -19
(2) Staple ..............................................................................................................................................................................C -19
(3) Maximum tray capacity ...................................................................................................................................................C -19
13.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C -19
(1) Staple mode ....................................................................................................................................................................C -19
13.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C -20
14. FS-612 ..................................................................................................................................................................C -21
14.1 Type ....................................................................................................................................................................................C -21
14.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C -21
(1) Function...........................................................................................................................................................................C -21
(2) Staple ..............................................................................................................................................................................C -21
(3) Folding ............................................................................................................................................................................C -21
(4) Maximum tray capacity*1 ................................................................................................................................................C -21
14.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C -22
(1) Staple mode ....................................................................................................................................................................C -22
(2) Saddle stitching mode ....................................................................................................................................................C -22
(3) Half-Fold mode ...............................................................................................................................................................C -22
(4) Tri-folding mode ..............................................................................................................................................................C -23
14.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C -23
15. PK-512/513............................................................................................................................................................C -24
15.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C -24
15.2 Functions..............................................................................................................................................................................C -24
15.3 Type of paper.......................................................................................................................................................................C -24
15.4 Machine data........................................................................................................................................................................C -24
16. PI-502 ....................................................................................................................................................................C -25
16.1 Type ....................................................................................................................................................................................C -25
16.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C -25
16.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C -25
16.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C -25
17. LS-505 ...................................................................................................................................................................C -26
17.1 Type ....................................................................................................................................................................................C -26
17.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C -26
(1) Function...........................................................................................................................................................................C -26
17.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C -26
17.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C -27
18. FD-503 ..................................................................................................................................................................C -28
18.1 Type ....................................................................................................................................................................................C -28
18.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C -28
(1) Function...........................................................................................................................................................................C -28
18.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C -29
(1) Punching function ...........................................................................................................................................................C -29
(2) Folding functions .............................................................................................................................................................C -29
(3) PI functions .....................................................................................................................................................................C -29
18.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C -30
iii
19. SD-506 ..................................................................................................................................................................C -31
19.1 Type ....................................................................................................................................................................................C -31
19.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C -31
(1) Function...........................................................................................................................................................................C -31
19.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C -31
(1) Straight/sub tray mode ....................................................................................................................................................C -31
(2) Saddle stitching mode ....................................................................................................................................................C -31
(3) Trimming mode ...............................................................................................................................................................C -33
(4) Multi-center folding mode ...............................................................................................................................................C -33
(5) Overlap tri-folding mode .................................................................................................................................................C -34
19.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C -34
20. PB-503 ..................................................................................................................................................................C -35
20.1 Type ....................................................................................................................................................................................C -35
20.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C -35
(1) Function...........................................................................................................................................................................C -35
(2) Binding sheets ................................................................................................................................................................C -35
(4) Others .............................................................................................................................................................................C -35
20.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C -35
(1) Paper size .......................................................................................................................................................................C -35
(2) Paper weight ...................................................................................................................................................................C -36
(3) Applicable paper in each mode.......................................................................................................................................C -36
20.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C -38
21. IC-601 ...................................................................................................................................................................C -39
21.1 Type ....................................................................................................................................................................................C -39
21.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C -39
21.3 Paper ...................................................................................................................................................................................C -39
21.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C -39
22. RU-506...................................................................................................................................................................C -40
22.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C -40
22.2 Functions..............................................................................................................................................................................C -40
22.3 Paper type............................................................................................................................................................................C -40
22.4 Machine data........................................................................................................................................................................C -40
23. GP-501...................................................................................................................................................................C -41
23.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C -41
23.2 Modes of Operation..............................................................................................................................................................C -41
23.3 Machine data........................................................................................................................................................................C -41
23.4 Software...............................................................................................................................................................................C -41
23.5 Electronic..............................................................................................................................................................................C -41
23.6 Inputs....................................................................................................................................................................................C -41
(1) Media Input from Printer..................................................................................................................................................C -41
(2) Power...............................................................................................................................................................................C -42
23.7 Outputs.................................................................................................................................................................................C -42
23.8 Performance.........................................................................................................................................................................C -42
(1) Reliability.........................................................................................................................................................................C -42
23.9 Operation Environment, Storage, Transport........................................................................................................................C -42
23.10 Safety /Regulatory..............................................................................................................................................................C -42
(1) Safety Compliance...........................................................................................................................................................C -42
(2) Electromagnetic Compliance...........................................................................................................................................C -42
23.11 Appendix A.........................................................................................................................................................................C -43
23.12 Appendix B.........................................................................................................................................................................C -43
23.13 Appendix C.........................................................................................................................................................................C -44
23.14 Glossary of Terms..............................................................................................................................................................C -45
D OVERALL COMPOSITION .........................................................................................................D -1

1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ....................................................................................................................................D -1
1.1 System configuration (C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000).............................................................................................................D -1
1.2 Configuration for optional device (C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000)...........................................................................................D -2
1.2.1 Coupling combination of the main body and the paper feed option ..............................................................................D -2
1.2.2 Coupling combination of the main body and the finisher option ....................................................................................D -2
iv
1.3 System configuration (C6000L)................................................................................................................................................D -3
1.4 Configuration for optional device (C6000L)..............................................................................................................................D -4
1.4.1 Coupling combination of the main body and the paper feed option ..............................................................................D -4
1.4.2 Coupling combination of the main body and the finisher option ....................................................................................D -4
2. MAIN BODY UNIT CONFIGURATION......................................................................................................................D -5
3. PAPER PATH ...........................................................................................................................................................D -6
4. CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM ..................................................................................................................................D -7
5. IMAGE CREATION PROCESS ................................................................................................................................D -8
5.1 Image creation flow and functions ...........................................................................................................................................D -8
5.2 Charging process (Step 1) ......................................................................................................................................................D -8
5.3 Laser exposure process (Step2)..............................................................................................................................................D -9
5.4 Developing process (Step 3) ...................................................................................................................................................D -9
5.5 Intermediate transfer process (Step 4) ....................................................................................................................................D -9
5.6 2nd transfer process (Step 5) ................................................................................................................................................D -10
5.7 Separation process (Step 6) ..................................................................................................................................................D -10
5.8 Drum cleaning (Sub step 1) ...................................................................................................................................................D -11
5.9 Exposure before charging (Sub step 2) .................................................................................................................................D -11
5.10 Transfer belt cleaning (Sub step 3) .....................................................................................................................................D -11
5.11 2nd transfer roller /Lw cleaning (Sub step 4) .......................................................................................................................D -12
5.12 Toner collection (Sub step 5) ..............................................................................................................................................D -12
6. IMAGE CREATION CONTROL ..............................................................................................................................D -14
7. PROCESS SPEED .................................................................................................................................................D -16
7.1 bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc...................................................................................................................................D -16
7.2 bizhub PRESS C6000, bizhub PRO C6000L.........................................................................................................................D -16
E SERVICE TOOL ..........................................................................................................................E -1

1. bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc, bizhub PRO C6000L....................................................................................E -1
1.1 Service material list .................................................................................................................................................................E -1
1.1.1 Service material list .......................................................................................................................................................E -1
1.2 Jig list .......................................................................................................................................................................................E -1
1.2.1 Jig list ............................................................................................................................................................................E -1
1.3 Mail remote notification system ...............................................................................................................................................E -2
1.3.1 Outline ...........................................................................................................................................................................E -2
1.3.2 Operating environment ..................................................................................................................................................E -3
1.3.3 Major functions ..............................................................................................................................................................E -3
1.3.4 Initial setting ..................................................................................................................................................................E -3
1.3.5 Operating instructions of the mail remote notification system .......................................................................................E -5
1.3.6 Mail sending ..................................................................................................................................................................E -5
1.4 Job history list ..........................................................................................................................................................................E -6
1.4.1 Outline ...........................................................................................................................................................................E -6
1.4.2 Major functions ..............................................................................................................................................................E -6
1.4.3 Setting method ..............................................................................................................................................................E -6
1.5 Counter list acquisition using USB memory ............................................................................................................................E -8
1.5.1 Outline ...........................................................................................................................................................................E -8
1.5.2 List that can be acquired ...............................................................................................................................................E -8
1.5.3 Acquisition method ........................................................................................................................................................E -9
1.6 Panel log ..................................................................................................................................................................................E -9
1.6.1 Outline............................................................................................................................................................................E -9
1.6.2 Log acquisition method .................................................................................................................................................E -9
1.7 ORU-M Counter Rewrite .......................................................................................................................................................E -10
1.7.1 Load from external memory ........................................................................................................................................E -10
1.7.2 Store to external memory ............................................................................................................................................E -11
1.8 Management Tool ..................................................................................................................................................................E -12
1.8.1 Outline .........................................................................................................................................................................E -12
1.8.2 Installation of Management Tool .................................................................................................................................E -14
1.8.3 Starting up of Management Tool .................................................................................................................................E -14
1.8.4 Technician mode .........................................................................................................................................................E -16
1.8.5 bizhub PRESS C8000 replacement procedure............................................................................................................E -26
1.8.6 bizhub PRESS C7000/6000 replacement procedure...................................................................................................E -28
1.8.7 bizhub PRESS 1250/1250P/1052 replacement procedure..........................................................................................E -32
1.8.8 Administrator mode .....................................................................................................................................................E -36
1.8.9 Various setting for the software ...................................................................................................................................E -38
1.8.10 Error message list .....................................................................................................................................................E -44
1.9 Acquisition of the controller log ..............................................................................................................................................E -45
1.9.1 Outline .........................................................................................................................................................................E -45
1.9.2 Preparation ..................................................................................................................................................................E -45
1.9.3 Procedure for acquisition .............................................................................................................................................E -45
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE ....................................................................................................F -1
v
1. MAINTENANCE ITEM ...............................................................................................................................................F -1
1.1 bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, bizhub PRO C6000L......................................................................................F -1
1.1.1 Replacing procedure of the periodical replacement parts .............................................................................................F -1
1.1.2 Periodic maintenance 1 (Every 50,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C6000L))...............................................F -1
1.1.3 Periodic maintenance 2 (Every 160,000 prints (C6000/C6000L))..................................................................................F -1
1.1.5 Periodic maintenance 2 (Every 200,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc)) .....................................................................F -1
1.1.6 Periodic maintenance 3 (Every 220,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc)) .....................................................................F -2
1.1.8 Periodic maintenance 4 (Every 340,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc))/Periodic maintenance 5 (Every 300,000 prints
(C6000/C6000L))......................................................................................................................................................................F -2
1.1.9 Periodic maintenance 5 (Every 350,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc))/Periodic maintenance 5 (Every 300,000 prints
(C6000/C6000L))......................................................................................................................................................................F -3
1.1.10 Periodic maintenance 6 (Every 400,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C6000L))...........................................F -3
1.1.11 Periodic maintenance 7 (Every 450,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C6000L))...........................................F -3
1.1.12 Periodic maintenance 8 (Every 600,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc)) ...................................................................F -4
1.1.13 Periodic maintenance 8 (Every 600,000 prints (C6000/C6000L))................................................................................F -4
1.1.14 Periodic maintenance 9 (Every 700,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc)) ...................................................................F -4
1.1.15 Periodic maintenance 9 (Every 900,000 prints (C6000/C6000L))................................................................................F -5
1.1.16 Periodic maintenance 10 (Every 900,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C6000L)).........................................F -5
1.1.17 Periodic maintenance 11 (Every 1,000,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C6000L))......................................F -5
1.1.18 Periodic maintenance 12 (Every 1,020,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc)) ..............................................................F -5
1.1.19 Periodic maintenance 13 (Every 1,050,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc)) ..............................................................F -6
1.1.20 Periodic maintenance 14 (Every 1,400,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc))/Periodic maintenance 12 (Every 1,400,000
prints (C6000/C6000L))............................................................................................................................................................F -6
prints (C6000/C6000L))............................................................................................................................................................F -6
prints (C6000/C6000L))............................................................................................................................................................F -6
prints (C6000/C6000L))............................................................................................................................................................F -6
prints (C6000/C6000L))............................................................................................................................................................F -6
prints (C6000/C6000L))............................................................................................................................................................F -7
prints (C6000/C6000L))............................................................................................................................................................F -7
1.1.27 Spot replacement (Every 3,600,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C6000L)).................................................F -7
1.2 DF-622 .....................................................................................................................................................................................F -7
1.2.1 Spotted replacement (Every 625,000 feeds) .................................................................................................................F -7
1.3 PF-602 .....................................................................................................................................................................................F -7
1.3.1 Periodic maintenance 1 (Every 200,000 prints) .............................................................................................................F -7
1.3.3 Periodic maintenance 3 (Every 2,400,000 prints) ..........................................................................................................F -8
1.4 LU-202 .....................................................................................................................................................................................F -8
1.4.3 Periodic maintenance 3 (Every 2,400,000 prints) ..........................................................................................................F -9
1.5 RU-509/HM-102 .......................................................................................................................................................................F -9
1.5.3 Spotted replacement (Every 300,000 prints) .................................................................................................................F -9
1.5.4 Spotted replacement (Every 1,500,000 prints) ..............................................................................................................F -9
1.6 FS-521 .....................................................................................................................................................................................F -9
1.6.2 Periodic maintenance 2 (Every 3,000,000 prints) ........................................................................................................F -10
1.6.3 Spotted replacement (Every 500,000 operations) .......................................................................................................F -10
1.6.4 Spotted replacement (Every 600,000 feeds) ...............................................................................................................F -10
1.7 FS-531 ...................................................................................................................................................................................F -10
1.7.1 Periodic maintenance 1 (Every 200,000 prints) ...........................................................................................................F -10
1.7.2 Spotted replacement (Every 200,000 prints) ...............................................................................................................F -10
1.7.4 Spot replacement (Every 500,000 staples) .................................................................................................................F -11
1.8 FS-612 ...................................................................................................................................................................................F -11
1.8.4 Spot replacement (Every 200,000 staples) .................................................................................................................F -11
1.9 PI-502 ....................................................................................................................................................................................F -12
vi
1.9.5 Spotted replacement (Every 1,000,000 feeds) ............................................................................................................F -12
1.10 LS-505 .................................................................................................................................................................................F -12
1.10.1 Periodic maintenance 1 (Every 1,500,000 prints) ......................................................................................................F -12
1.11 FD-503 .................................................................................................................................................................................F -12
1.11.4 Spotted replacement (100,000 feeds) .......................................................................................................................F -13
1.11.5 Spotted replacement (Every 200,000 prints) .............................................................................................................F -13
1.12 SD-506 .................................................................................................................................................................................F -13
1.12.1 Periodic maintenance 1 (Every 600,000 prints) .........................................................................................................F -13
1.12.3 Spotted replacement (Every 18,900 cuts) .................................................................................................................F -14
1.12.4 Spotted replacement (Every 37,500 cuts) .................................................................................................................F -14
1.12.5 Spotted replacement (Every 500,000 cuts) ...............................................................................................................F -14
1.12.6 Spotted replacement (Every 500,000 times) .............................................................................................................F -14
1.12.8 Spotted replacement (Every 1,000,000 sets) ............................................................................................................F -14
1.13 PB-503 .................................................................................................................................................................................F -15
1.13.1 Periodic maintenance 1 (Every 750,000 prints) .........................................................................................................F -15
1.13.3 Spotted replacement (Every 3,000,000 operations) ..................................................................................................F -16
1.13.4 Spotted replacement (Every 600,000 prints) .............................................................................................................F -16
1.13.5 Spotted replacement (Every 120 hours) ....................................................................................................................F -16
1.13.6 Spotted replacement (Every 240 hours) ....................................................................................................................F -16
1.13.7 Spotted replacement (Every 2000 hours) ..................................................................................................................F -16
1.14 RU-506.................................................................................................................................................................................F -16
1.14.1 Maintenance 1 (Every 600,000 prints)........................................................................................................................F -16
1.14.2 Spotted replacement (Every 5,000,000 operations)...................................................................................................F -16
1.15 GP-501.................................................................................................................................................................................F -17
1.15.3 Maintenance 3 (Every 3,000,000 prints).....................................................................................................................F -17
1.15.4 Maintenance 4 (Every 12,000,000 prints)...................................................................................................................F -17
1.15.5 Spotted replacement (Every 500,000 punches).........................................................................................................F -18
1.15.6 Spotted replacement part (Every 4,000,000 cycle)....................................................................................................F -18
2. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS LIST ............................................................................................................F -19
2.1 Periodical replacement parts .................................................................................................................................................F -19
2.2 bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, bizhub PRO C6000L....................................................................................F -19
2.2.1 Periodically replaced parts list (C7000/C7000P/C70hc) ..............................................................................................F -19
2.2.2 Periodically replaced parts list (C6000/C6000L)..........................................................................................................F -21
2.2.3 Spotted replacement parts list .....................................................................................................................................F -23
3. ORU-M PARTS .......................................................................................................................................................F -25
3.1 Life value of the ORU-M parts ...............................................................................................................................................F -25
(1) ORU-M corresponding parts ...........................................................................................................................................F -25
3.2 ORU-M parts list ....................................................................................................................................................................F -25
(1) ORU-M parts list ..............................................................................................................................................................F -25
3.3 ORU-M parts replacement timing ..........................................................................................................................................F -27
(1) ORU-M target unit life setting ..........................................................................................................................................F -27
(2) ORU-M warning icon display ...........................................................................................................................................F -27
3.4 Management of ORU-M parts counter ...................................................................................................................................F -27
(1) Counter display ...............................................................................................................................................................F -27
(2) Counter clear ...................................................................................................................................................................F -27
4. LIFE VALUE ............................................................................................................................................................F -28
4.1 Life value of materials/parts ...................................................................................................................................................F -28
4.2 Life value determining condition ............................................................................................................................................F -28
5. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, bizhub PRO C6000L....
F -29
5.1 External section .....................................................................................................................................................................F -29
5.1.1 Replacing the filter box, developing dust proof filter ....................................................................................................F -29
5.1.2 Replacing the dust proof filter on rear side ..................................................................................................................F -29
5.2 Write section ..........................................................................................................................................................................F -30
5.2.1 - Cleaning the dust proof glass ....................................................................................................................................F -30
5.3 Photo conductor section ........................................................................................................................................................F -31
5.3.1 Disassembling procedure of the process unit section .................................................................................................F -31
5.3.2 Opening /closing the toner supply door section. ..........................................................................................................F -32
5.3.3 Pulling out the process unit .........................................................................................................................................F -32
vii
5.3.4 Replacing the drum cartridge ......................................................................................................................................F -32
5.4 Charging section ....................................................................................................................................................................F -33
5.4.1 Replace the charging corona. ......................................................................................................................................F -33
5.4.2 Replacing the charging dust proof filter .......................................................................................................................F -34
5.5 Intermediate transfer section .................................................................................................................................................F -34
5.5.1 Removing/reinstalling the intermediate transfer unit ...................................................................................................F -34
5.5.2 Replacing the transfer belt cleaning unit .....................................................................................................................F -36
5.5.3 Replacing the belt cleaning blade ................................................................................................................................F -37
5.5.4 Replacing the toner collection sheet ............................................................................................................................F -37
5.5.5 Replacing the transfer belt separation claw .................................................................................................................F -38
5.5.6 Cleaning the intermediate transfer belt/rollers .............................................................................................................F -38
5.5.7 Replacing the first transfer roller and the transfer roller bearing. ................................................................................F -40
5.5.8 Replacing the 2nd transfer roller /Up ...........................................................................................................................F -41
5.5.9 Replacing the belt separation claw solenoid (SD1) .....................................................................................................F -42
5.5.10 Replacing the separate discharging plate Assy .........................................................................................................F -42
5.5.11 Replacing the 2nd transfer roller /Lw and the 2nd transfer earth plate Assy .............................................................F -43
5.6 Developing section ................................................................................................................................................................F -44
5.6.1 Replacing the developers /Y, /M, /C and /K .................................................................................................................F -44
5.6.2 Replacing the developing units /C, /M, /Y, and /K .......................................................................................................F -46
5.7 Toner collect box ...................................................................................................................................................................F -47
5.7.1 Replacing the toner collect box ...................................................................................................................................F -47
5.8 Paper feed section .................................................................................................................................................................F -48
5.8.1 Replacing the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller rubber .....................................................................................F -48
5.8.2 Replacing the separation roller rubber ........................................................................................................................F -49
5.8.3 Replacing the paper feed clutch and the pre-registration clutch .................................................................................F -49
5.9 Vertical conveyance section ..................................................................................................................................................F -50
5.9.1 Replacing the intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (CL13) ...........................................................................................F -50
5.10 Registration section .............................................................................................................................................................F -51
5.10.1 Replacing the registration cleaning sheet ..................................................................................................................F -51
5.10.2 Replacing the registration roller .................................................................................................................................F -52
5.11 Duplex section .....................................................................................................................................................................F -54
5.11.1 Replacing the intermediate conveyance clutches /2 (CL4) and /3 (CL5) ..................................................................F -54
5.11.2 Replacing the ADU conveyance clutches /1 (CL1), /2 (CL2), /3 (CL3), ADU pre-registration clutch (CL18) ............F -56
5.12 Reverse/exit section ............................................................................................................................................................F -56
5.12.1 Replacing the reverse de-curler roller .......................................................................................................................F -56
5.12.2 Replacing the paper exit drive gear, paper exit de-curler roller..................................................................................F -57
5.13 Fusing section ......................................................................................................................................................................F -60
5.13.1 Removing/reinstalling the fusing unit .........................................................................................................................F -60
5.13.2 Replacing the fusing drive gear /B, fusing duct assy .................................................................................................F -60
5.13.3 Replacing the fusing separation plate assy................................................................................................................F -63
5.13.4 Replacing the fusing drive gear /M ............................................................................................................................F -64
5.13.5 Replacing the fusing lamp assy /Up ..........................................................................................................................F -66
5.13.6 Replacing the fusing roller /2, fusing bearing /2, fusing drive gear /O .......................................................................F -68
5.13.7 Replacing the fusing belt, fusing roller /1, insulating sleeve /Up, fusing bearing /Up, belt regulating sleeve ............F -70
5.13.8 Replacing the fusing heater lamp /4 (L5) ...................................................................................................................F -71
5.13.9 Replacing the fusing roller /Lw, fusing bearing /Lw, insulating sleeve /Lw ................................................................F -73
5.13.10 Replacing the fusing temperature sensor assy /Lw (edge) .....................................................................................F -74
5.13.11 Replacing the fusing temperature sensor assy /Up (edge) .....................................................................................F -74
5.13.12 Replacing the fusing paper exit roller /Up ................................................................................................................F -75
5.13.13 Replacing the fusing regulating gear /A, fusing limiter ............................................................................................F -76
5.14 OT-502 .................................................................................................................................................................................F -77
5.14.1 Replacing the paper hold roller ..................................................................................................................................F -77
5.14.2 Replacing the paper exit roller ...................................................................................................................................F -77
5.14.3 Replacing the paper exit driven roller /2 ....................................................................................................................F -78
6. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE DF-622 ...........................................................................................F -80
6.1 Precautions on maintenance .................................................................................................................................................F -80
6.2.1 Removing/reinstalling the paper feed unit ...................................................................................................................F -80
6.2.2 Replacing the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller .................................................................................................F -81
6.2.3 Replacing the separation roller ....................................................................................................................................F -82
6.2.4 Cleaning the timing sensor (PS302) ............................................................................................................................F -83
6.2.5 Removing/reinstalling the registration roller cover .......................................................................................................F -84
6.2.6 Cleaning the registration roller .....................................................................................................................................F -84
6.2.7 Cleaning the registration sensor (PS301) ....................................................................................................................F -85
7. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PF-602 ...........................................................................................F -86
7.2 Tray section ...........................................................................................................................................................................F -86
7.2.1 Precautions on maintenance of the tray section ..........................................................................................................F -86
7.2.2 Replacing the Pick-up rubber/paper feed roller ...........................................................................................................F -86
viii
7.2.4 Replacing the paper feed clutch (CL1/CL4) and the separation clutch (CL2/CL5) ......................................................F -91
7.3 Conveyance section ..............................................................................................................................................................F -92
7.3.1 Replacing the vertical conveyance clutch/1 (CL7), /2 (CL8), and /3 (CL9) ..................................................................F -92
7.3.2 Replacing the horizontal conveyance clutch/1 (CL10), /2 (CL11), and pre-registration clutch (CL12) ........................F -93
8. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE LU-202 ...........................................................................................F -95
8.1.1 Precautions on maintenance .......................................................................................................................................F -95
8.1.2 Cleaning/pre-registration roller ....................................................................................................................................F -95
8.1.3 Removing/installing paper feed roller Assy .................................................................................................................F -95
8.1.4 Replacing the paper feed roller/pick-up roller ..............................................................................................................F -95
8.1.6 Replacing paper feed clutch (CL101) /pre-registration clutch (CL102) .......................................................................F -97
9. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE MB-504 ..........................................................................................F -99
9.2.1 Replacing the pick-up roller /BP and the paper feed roller rubber /BP ........................................................................F -99
9.2.2 Replacing the separation roller rubber /BP ................................................................................................................F -100
9.2.3 Replacing the paper feed clutch /BP (CL6) ...............................................................................................................F -100
10. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE RU-509/HM-102 ........................................................................F -102
10.1 Precautions on maintenance .............................................................................................................................................F -102
10.2 Output paper density detection section .............................................................................................................................F -102
10.2.1 Cleaning the shutter ................................................................................................................................................F -102
10.3 Humidification section (HM-102) ........................................................................................................................................F -102
10.3.1 Replacing the humidification rollers /Rt and /Lt and the water feed roller ...............................................................F -102
10.3.2 Replacing the water feed filter .................................................................................................................................F -108
11. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FS-521 .......................................................................................F -110
11.2 Conveyance section ..........................................................................................................................................................F -110
11.2.1 Lubrication to bypass roller /Lw pressure release cam ...........................................................................................F -110
11.3 Stacker section ..................................................................................................................................................................F -110
11.3.1 Replacing the intermediate roller release solenoid (SD7) .......................................................................................F -110
11.3.2 Lubrication to worm gear and cam ..........................................................................................................................F -111
11.4 Stapler section ...................................................................................................................................................................F -111
11.4.1 Replacing the stapler assy ......................................................................................................................................F -111
11.4.2 Replacing the staples ..............................................................................................................................................F -115
11.4.3 Cleaning the cut staple box .....................................................................................................................................F -116
11.5 Main tray section ................................................................................................................................................................F -116
11.5.1 Replacing the paper exit roller .................................................................................................................................F -116
11.5.2 Replacing the paper exit opening solenoid assy (SD9) ...........................................................................................F -117
12.2.1 Replacing the paper exit roller (sponge roller) .........................................................................................................F -120
12.2.2 Replacing the intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller) ................................................................................F -121
12.3.1 Replacing the paper assist roller (sponge roller) .....................................................................................................F -121
12.3.2 Replacement of the cleaning plate Assy .................................................................................................................F -122
12.4.1 Replacing the stapler unit ........................................................................................................................................F -122
13.2.1 Replacing the paper exit roller (sponge roller) .........................................................................................................F -124
13.2.2 Replacing the intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller) ................................................................................F -125
13.3.1 Replacing the paper assist roller (sponge roller) .....................................................................................................F -125
13.4.1 Removing/reinstalling the stapler unit cover ............................................................................................................F -126
13.4.2 Replacing the stapler unit ........................................................................................................................................F -126
14. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PI-502 ........................................................................................F -130
14.2 Paper feed section .............................................................................................................................................................F -130
14.2.1 Replacing the pick-up roller /Up and the paper feed roller /Up ................................................................................F -130
14.2.2 Replacing the pick-up roller /Lw and the paper feed roller /Lw ................................................................................F -131
14.2.3 Replacing the separation roller /Up and the torque limiter /Up ................................................................................F -131
14.2.4 Replacing the separation roller /Lw and the torque limiter /Lw ................................................................................F -132
14.2.5 Replacing the paper feed clutch /Up (CL201) and /Lw (CL202)...............................................................................F -133
15. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE LS-505 .......................................................................................F -135
ix
15.2.1 Replacing the stacker tray up down motor (M1) ......................................................................................................F -135
15.2.2 Replacing the paper press solenoid /3 (SD8) ..........................................................................................................F -135
15.2.5 Replacing the rear stopper solenoid (SD3) .............................................................................................................F -139
16. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FD-503 .......................................................................................F -141
16.2.1 Replacing roller solenoids /1 (SD5) to /4 (SD8) .......................................................................................................F -141
16.2.2 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18) ...........................................................................................................................F -141
16.3 Punch section ....................................................................................................................................................................F -143
16.3.1 Replacing the punch unit .........................................................................................................................................F -143
16.3.2 Cleaning the punch shaft and the punch support board ..........................................................................................F -144
16.3.3 Lubricating the punch drive section .........................................................................................................................F -144
16.4 Main tray section ................................................................................................................................................................F -145
16.4.1 Replacing the tray up down motor (M11) ................................................................................................................F -145
16.5 PI section ...........................................................................................................................................................................F -146
16.5.1 Replacing the pick-up rubber (Upper stage) ............................................................................................................F -146
16.5.2 Replacing the paper feed rubber (Upper stage) ......................................................................................................F -148
16.5.3 Replacing the separation rubber (upper stage) .......................................................................................................F -149
16.5.4 Replacing the pick-up rubber (Lower stage) ............................................................................................................F -150
16.5.5 Replacing the paper feed rubber (lower stage) .......................................................................................................F -151
16.5.6 Replacing the separation rubber (lower stage) ........................................................................................................F -152
17. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE SD-506 ......................................................................................F -153
17.2 Right angle conveyance section ........................................................................................................................................F -153
17.2.1 Replacing the roller release solenoid /1 (SD5) ........................................................................................................F -153
17.2.3 Replacing the right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2) ....................................................................................F -154
17.3 Saddle stitching section .....................................................................................................................................................F -159
17.3.1 Replacing the stapler assy ......................................................................................................................................F -159
17.3.2 Replacing the slope unit ..........................................................................................................................................F -162
17.3.3 Pulling out the saddle stitching unit .........................................................................................................................F -164
17.3.4 Replacing the saddle stitching unit ..........................................................................................................................F -166
17.4 Trimmer section .................................................................................................................................................................F -167
17.4.1 Removing/installing the trimmer paddle assy ..........................................................................................................F -167
17.4.2 Replacing the trimmer blade kit ...............................................................................................................................F -167
17.4.3 Replacing the trimmer board assy ...........................................................................................................................F -169
17.4.4 Replacing the trimming unit .....................................................................................................................................F -170
17.4.5 Replacing the trimmer press motor (M32) ...............................................................................................................F -172
17.4.6 Replacing the trimmer blade motor (M31) ...............................................................................................................F -173
17.4.7 Lubrication to the trimmer unit .................................................................................................................................F -177
17.5 Bundle processing section .................................................................................................................................................F -178
17.5.1 Replacing the bundle press stage gear ...................................................................................................................F -178
17.5.2 Replacing the bundle press stage unit ....................................................................................................................F -180
18. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PB-503 .......................................................................................F -185
18.1 Sub compile (SC) section ..................................................................................................................................................F -185
18.1.1 Precautions on maintenance ...................................................................................................................................F -185
18.1.2 Replacing the switchback roller ...............................................................................................................................F -185
18.1.3 Replacing the SC switchback release motor (M13) and the one-way clutches /A and /B .......................................F -186
18.1.4 Replacing the SC pressure arm solenoid (SD13) ....................................................................................................F -189
18.1.5 Replacing the FD alignment solenoid (SD11) .........................................................................................................F -190
18.1.6 Lubrication to the sub scan alignment plate shaft ...................................................................................................F -191
18.2 Cover paper table section ..................................................................................................................................................F -192
18.2.1 Precautions on maintenance ...................................................................................................................................F -192
18.2.2 Replacing the roller cutter blade assy .....................................................................................................................F -192
18.2.3 Cleaning the cover paper folding plate and the book spine backing plate ..............................................................F -193
18.2.4 Lubrication to the cover paper alignment plate shaft ...............................................................................................F -194
18.3 Cover paper supply section ...............................................................................................................................................F -195
18.3.1 Removing/reinstalling the pick-up roller assy and the separation roller assy ..........................................................F -195
18.3.2 Replacing the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller .............................................................................................F -198
18.3.3 Replacing the separation roller ................................................................................................................................F -200
18.3.4 Replacing the cover paper feed clutch (CL71) and the cover paper separation clutch (CL72) ...............................F -200
18.4.1 Replacing the sub tray exit solenoid (SD4) .............................................................................................................F -201
18.5 Framework section ............................................................................................................................................................F -203
18.5.1 Replacing the exhaust filters /A and /B ....................................................................................................................F -203
x
18.6 Glue tank section ...............................................................................................................................................................F -204
18.6.1 Replacing the glue apply roller drive gear bearing ..................................................................................................F -204
18.6.2 Lubrication to the glue apply roller drive gear ..........................................................................................................F -206
18.6.3 Replacing the pellet supply cooling fan (FM4) .........................................................................................................F -207
18.6.4 Replacing the glue tank assy ...................................................................................................................................F -207
18.7 Clamp section ....................................................................................................................................................................F -210
18.7.1 Lubrication to the clamp pressing board shaft .........................................................................................................F -210
18.8 Book stock section .............................................................................................................................................................F -210
18.8.1 Lubrication to the guide shafts /Rt and /Lt ...............................................................................................................F -210
19. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE RU-506.......................................................................................F -212
19.1 Caution for maintenance procedure...................................................................................................................................F -212
19.2 Conveyance section...........................................................................................................................................................F -212
19.2.1 Replacing the entrance conveyance motor (M1), the paper exit motor (M2), the paper exit conveyance belt.........F -212
19.2.2 Replacing the conveyance pulley, the paper exit conveyance pulley.......................................................................F -213
19.2.3 Replacing the entrance roller /1, the bearing /K.......................................................................................................F -214
19.2.4 Replacing the entrance roller /2, the stacker entrance roller, the stacker entrance conveyance belt, the stacker
entrance roller pressure springs /Fr and /Rr, the bearing /K.................................................................................................F -215
19.2.5 Replacing the paper refeed roller, the merging section roller, the paper exit roller, the bearing /K..........................F -217
19.2.6 Replacing the straight gate.......................................................................................................................................F -220
19.2.7 Replacing the straight gate solenoid (SD1) and the straight gate spring.................................................................F -221
19.3 Stacker section...................................................................................................................................................................F -223
19.3.1 Replacing the stacker exit shutter solenoid (SD2)....................................................................................................F -223
19.3.2 Replacing the stack switching solenoid (SD3)..........................................................................................................F -224
19.3.3 Replacing the stacker entrance guide plate solenoid (SD4).....................................................................................F -225
20. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE GP-501.......................................................................................F -227
20.1 Caution for maintenance procedure...................................................................................................................................F -227
20.2 DIE SET SERVICE.............................................................................................................................................................F -227
20.2.1 Die Set Service.........................................................................................................................................................F -227
20.2.2 Die Set Life Expectancy...........................................................................................................................................F -227
20.2.3 Die Set Components................................................................................................................................................F -227
20.2.4 Checking and Replacing the Die Set........................................................................................................................F -229
20.2.5 Checking and lubricating the Die Set pins and Die Set shoulder bolts.....................................................................F -229
20.2.6 Hole Alignment inspection........................................................................................................................................F -230
20.3 CHECK, CLEANING, AND LUBRICATION........................................................................................................................F -230
20.3.1 CHECK, CLEANING, AND LUBRICATION..............................................................................................................F -230
20.3.2 External Cleaning.....................................................................................................................................................F -231
20.3.3 Internal Cleaning......................................................................................................................................................F -231
20.3.4 Operational Inspection..............................................................................................................................................F -231
20.3.5 Internal Inspection....................................................................................................................................................F -231
20.3.6 Cleaning the base.....................................................................................................................................................F -231
20.3.7 Cleaning the Die guide.............................................................................................................................................F -232
20.3.8 Checking the Door Latch..........................................................................................................................................F -232
20.3.9 Cleaning and Checking the aligner paper path and panels......................................................................................F -233
20.3.10 Cleaning and Checking the Aligner Idler Roller......................................................................................................F -233
20.3.11 Cleaning the Aligner (Green) Drive Belt.................................................................................................................F -234
20.3.12 Cleaning and Checking the Back Gauge Solenoid.................................................................................................F -234
20.3.13 Cleaning and Checking the Idler Rollers................................................................................................................F -235
20.3.14 Cleaning and Checking the punch idler rollers.......................................................................................................F -237
20.3.15 Cleaning and Checking the Drive Rollers...............................................................................................................F -239
20.3.16 Checking the Aligner Latch.....................................................................................................................................F -239
20.3.17 Cleaning the Optical Sensors.................................................................................................................................F -240
20.3.18 Cleaning and Checking the Bypass Paper Path.....................................................................................................F -241
20.3.19 Cleaning and Checking the Punch Paper Path......................................................................................................F -241
20.3.20 Cleaning and Checking the Timing Belt.................................................................................................................F -242
20.3.21 Bypass panel..........................................................................................................................................................F -242
20.3.22 Bypass panel Removal...........................................................................................................................................F -243
20.3.23 Aligner panels.........................................................................................................................................................F -244
20.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal...........................................................................................................................................F -244
20.3.25 Aligner Idler Roller Replacement............................................................................................................................F -245
20.3.26 Aligner Drive Belt Replacement..............................................................................................................................F -246
20.3.27 Cleaning and checking the energy drive roller.......................................................................................................F -251
20.3.28 Replacing the back gauge mechanism...................................................................................................................F -251
20.3.29 Back Gauge Removal.............................................................................................................................................F -252
20.3.30 Solenoid Spring Replacement................................................................................................................................F -254
20.3.31 Back Gauge Paddle................................................................................................................................................F -254
20.3.32 Back Gauge Assembly Adjustment........................................................................................................................F -255
20.3.33 Punch module.........................................................................................................................................................F -255
20.3.34 Punch Module Removal.........................................................................................................................................F -256
20.3.35 Lubricating to the Punch Drive Cams.....................................................................................................................F -258
20.3.36 Punch Clutch Replacement....................................................................................................................................F -258
xi
20.3.37 Punch Module Brake Replacement and Adjustment..............................................................................................F -260
20.3.38 Punch Module Brake Replacement........................................................................................................................F -261
20.3.39 Punch Module Brake Adjustment...........................................................................................................................F -261
20.3.40 Punch Module Motor Replacement........................................................................................................................F -261
20.3.41 Punch Module Motor Drive Belt Replacement........................................................................................................F -262
20.3.42 Punch Module Drive Roller Replacement...............................................................................................................F -262
20.3.43 Belt replacement.....................................................................................................................................................F -264
20.3.44 Tools.......................................................................................................................................................................F -264
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING .........................................................................................G -1
1. ITEMS NOT ALLOWED TO BE DISASSEMBLED ...................................................................................................G -1
1.1 Screw-lock applied screw ........................................................................................................................................................G -1
1.2 Prohibition of adjusting the volume of boards .........................................................................................................................G -1
1.3 Precaution on removing the boards ........................................................................................................................................G -1
1.4 CCD unit ..................................................................................................................................................................................G -1
1.4.1 Positions from which removing the screws is prohibited ...............................................................................................G -1
1.4.2 Reason of prohibition ....................................................................................................................................................G -1
1.5 Mirror unit/exposure unit .........................................................................................................................................................G -1
1.6 Writing unit cover ....................................................................................................................................................................G -2
1.6.1 Positions from which removing is prohibited .................................................................................................................G -2
1.7 Photo conductor section ..........................................................................................................................................................G -2
1.8 Intermediate transfer section ...................................................................................................................................................G -3
1.9 Fusing unit ...............................................................................................................................................................................G -3
2. bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, bizhub PRO C6000L........................................................................G -5
2.1 List of disassembling and assembling parts ............................................................................................................................G -5
2.2 Disassembling and assembling procedures ............................................................................................................................G -6
2.2.1 Rear cover /Up1, /Up2, /Lw ...........................................................................................................................................G -6
2.2.2 Left cover ......................................................................................................................................................................G -6
2.2.3 Right cover /Up1, /Up2, /Up3, /Up4, /Lw1, /Lw2 ...........................................................................................................G -6
2.2.4 Original glass assy ........................................................................................................................................................G -7
2.2.5 Upper cover /Fr, /Rt, /Lt, connector cover /Fr, /Rr, switch cover assy ..........................................................................G -8
2.2.6 Upper cover /Rr1, /Rr2 ................................................................................................................................................G -10
2.2.7 Main board unit ...........................................................................................................................................................G -10
2.2.8 CCD unit .....................................................................................................................................................................G -15
2.2.9 Exposure unit ..............................................................................................................................................................G -16
2.2.10 Exposure lamp ..........................................................................................................................................................G -18
2.2.11 Removing the scanner wire ......................................................................................................................................G -18
2.2.12 Reinstalling the scanner wire ....................................................................................................................................G -19
2.2.13 Writing unit ................................................................................................................................................................G -21
2.2.14 Process unit ..............................................................................................................................................................G -23
2.2.15 Image correction unit ................................................................................................................................................G -24
2.2.16 Belt collection pipe, Vertical conveyance pipe, Horizontal conveyance pipe ............................................................G -24
2.2.17 Duplex section ..........................................................................................................................................................G -31
2.2.18 Replacing the lock levers /1 and /2 ...........................................................................................................................G -32
2.2.19 Paper feed trays /1 to /3 ............................................................................................................................................G -33
2.2.20 Tray up/down wire .....................................................................................................................................................G -34
2.2.21 Fusing large/small recognition connector..................................................................................................................G -36
2.2.22 Temperature sensor /1 (TH1), thermostat /1 (TS1), /2 (TS2) ...................................................................................G -37
2.2.23 Temperature sensor /2 (TH2), thermostat /3 (TS3) ..................................................................................................G -38
2.2.24 OT .............................................................................................................................................................................G -40
3. DF-622 ....................................................................................................................................................................G -41
3.1 List of disassembling and assembling parts ..........................................................................................................................G -41
3.2 Disassembling and assembling procedures ..........................................................................................................................G -41
3.2.1 Precautions on disassembling and assembling ..........................................................................................................G -41
3.2.2 DF ...............................................................................................................................................................................G -41
3.2.3 Front cover ..................................................................................................................................................................G -42
3.2.4 Rear cover ..................................................................................................................................................................G -42
3.2.5 Conveyance belt .........................................................................................................................................................G -42
4. PF-602 ....................................................................................................................................................................G -44
xii
4.2.2 Right cover ..................................................................................................................................................................G -44
4.2.3 Rear cover /Lt2 ...........................................................................................................................................................G -45
4.2.4 The rear cover/Lt1 and /Rt ..........................................................................................................................................G -45
4.2.5 Front door ...................................................................................................................................................................G -46
4.2.6 Tray .............................................................................................................................................................................G -46
4.2.7 Lift wire ........................................................................................................................................................................G -48
4.2.8 Paper lift motor/1 (M2) and /2 (M3) .............................................................................................................................G -53
4.2.9 Vertical conveyance unit .............................................................................................................................................G -54
4.2.10 Horizontal conveyance unit .......................................................................................................................................G -55
4.2.11 The multi feed detection board (MFDBR and S) .......................................................................................................G -56
5. LU-202 ....................................................................................................................................................................G -59
5.2.2 Upper door ..................................................................................................................................................................G -59
5.2.3 The clutch cover ..........................................................................................................................................................G -59
5.2.4 The paper feed cover ..................................................................................................................................................G -59
5.2.5 Right cover ..................................................................................................................................................................G -60
5.2.6 Front cover ..................................................................................................................................................................G -60
5.2.7 Rear cover ..................................................................................................................................................................G -61
5.2.8 Replacing the lift wire ..................................................................................................................................................G -61
5.2.9 Paper size VR (VR1) ...................................................................................................................................................G -69
6. RU-509/HM-102 ......................................................................................................................................................G -70
6.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled/reassembled .............................................................................................................G -70
6.1.1 Color density sensor unit ............................................................................................................................................G -70
6.3.2 Front door ...................................................................................................................................................................G -71
6.3.3 Rear cover ..................................................................................................................................................................G -71
6.3.4 Upper cover ................................................................................................................................................................G -72
6.3.5 Humidification unit .......................................................................................................................................................G -72
6.3.6 Water feed tank ...........................................................................................................................................................G -75
6.3.7 Pump motor (P1) .........................................................................................................................................................G -76
6.3.8 Color density sensor unit ............................................................................................................................................G -76
6.3.9 Shutter ........................................................................................................................................................................G -77
6.3.10 Note for replacing the board .....................................................................................................................................G -78
7. FS-521 ....................................................................................................................................................................G -79
7.2.2 Front door ...................................................................................................................................................................G -79
7.2.3 Sub tray .......................................................................................................................................................................G -80
7.2.4 Upper cover /1 ............................................................................................................................................................G -80
7.2.5 Upper cover /2 ............................................................................................................................................................G -81
7.2.6 Left cover /Fr ...............................................................................................................................................................G -82
7.2.7 Rear cover ..................................................................................................................................................................G -82
7.2.8 Stacker unit .................................................................................................................................................................G -82
7.2.9 Main tray .....................................................................................................................................................................G -85
7.2.10 Lift wire ......................................................................................................................................................................G -85
7.2.11 Tray up down motor ..................................................................................................................................................G -89
7.2.12 Handling of the clogged stapler 1 .............................................................................................................................G -89
7.2.13 Handling of the clogged stapler 2 .............................................................................................................................G -89
7.2.14 Note for replacing the board .....................................................................................................................................G -90
8. FS-531 ....................................................................................................................................................................G -92
8.2.2 Upper cover /1 ............................................................................................................................................................G -92
8.2.3 Upper cover /2 ............................................................................................................................................................G -92
8.2.4 Front door ...................................................................................................................................................................G -93
8.2.5 Rear cover ..................................................................................................................................................................G -93
8.2.6 Left cover ....................................................................................................................................................................G -93
8.2.7 Main tray .....................................................................................................................................................................G -93
8.2.8 Replacing the up/down wire ........................................................................................................................................G -94
8.2.9 Stacker unit .................................................................................................................................................................G -97
8.2.10 Paper exit opening unit .............................................................................................................................................G -99
8.2.11 Note for replacing the board ...................................................................................................................................G -100
xiii
9. FS-612 ..................................................................................................................................................................G -101
9.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled/reassembled ...........................................................................................................G -101
9.1.1 Screw not allowed to be removed on the folding stopper .........................................................................................G -101
9.2 List of disassembling and assembling parts ........................................................................................................................G -101
9.3 Disassembling and assembling procedures ........................................................................................................................G -101
9.3.1 Precautions on disassembling and assembling ........................................................................................................G -101
9.3.2 Upper cover /1 ..........................................................................................................................................................G -102
9.3.3 Upper cover /2 ..........................................................................................................................................................G -102
9.3.4 Front door .................................................................................................................................................................G -102
9.3.5 Rear cover ................................................................................................................................................................G -103
9.3.6 Left cover ..................................................................................................................................................................G -103
9.3.7 Main tray ...................................................................................................................................................................G -103
9.3.8 Replacing the up/down wire ......................................................................................................................................G -104
9.3.9 Stacker unit cover .....................................................................................................................................................G -107
9.3.10 Stacker unit .............................................................................................................................................................G -107
9.3.11 Paper exit opening unit ...........................................................................................................................................G -109
9.3.12 Note for replacing the board ...................................................................................................................................G -109
10. PK-512/513..........................................................................................................................................................G -111
10.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled and adjusted..........................................................................................................G -111
10.1.1 Punch unit................................................................................................................................................................G -111
10.2 Disassembly/reassembly parts list.....................................................................................................................................G -111
10.3 Disassembly/reassembly procedure..................................................................................................................................G -111
10.3.1 Precautions on disassembling and assembling ......................................................................................................G -111
10.3.2 Punch unit................................................................................................................................................................G -111
11. PI-502 .................................................................................................................................................................G -113
11.1 List of disassembling and assembling parts ......................................................................................................................G -113
11.2 Disassembling and assembling procedures ......................................................................................................................G -113
11.2.2 Upper cover ............................................................................................................................................................G -113
11.2.3 Rear cover ..............................................................................................................................................................G -113
11.2.4 Operation panel cover .............................................................................................................................................G -113
11.2.5 PI unit.......................................................................................................................................................................G -114
12. LS-505 ................................................................................................................................................................G -115
12.2.2 Cover ......................................................................................................................................................................G -115
12.2.3 Replacing the stacker tray up/down wire ................................................................................................................G -117
12.2.4 Caution when setting models using toggle SW .......................................................................................................G -120
13. FD-503 ................................................................................................................................................................G -121
13.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled/reassembled .........................................................................................................G -121
13.1.2 Folding/conveyance switching position adjustment section ....................................................................................G -121
13.3.1 Upper cover /Fr + PI cover /Fr ................................................................................................................................G -122
13.3.2 Upper cover /Rr + PI cover /Rr ................................................................................................................................G -122
13.3.3 Upper door ..............................................................................................................................................................G -123
13.3.4 Rear cover ..............................................................................................................................................................G -123
13.3.5 Left cover /Fr ...........................................................................................................................................................G -123
13.3.6 Left cover /Rr ..........................................................................................................................................................G -124
13.3.7 Paper exit stopper cover .........................................................................................................................................G -124
13.3.8 Right cover ..............................................................................................................................................................G -124
13.3.9 Left cover /Up ..........................................................................................................................................................G -125
13.3.10 Mount cover ..........................................................................................................................................................G -125
13.3.11 Front door .............................................................................................................................................................G -125
13.3.12 Cleaning the 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53) ...........................................................................................G -126
13.3.13 Cleaning the 3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54) ............................................................................................G -127
13.3.14 Cleaning the 3rd folding roller ...............................................................................................................................G -127
13.3.15 Folding conveyance section ..................................................................................................................................G -128
13.3.16 Main tray up/down wire .........................................................................................................................................G -131
13.3.17 Way to distinguish between new and old types of the multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2).G -136
13.3.18 Multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2) (new type)....................................................................G -137
13.3.19 Multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2) (old type).....................................................................G -139
13.3.20 Note for replacing the board .................................................................................................................................G -140
14. SD-506 ................................................................................................................................................................G -142
14.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled/reassembled .........................................................................................................G -142
14.1.1 Trimmer blade home sensor (PS50), Trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51) ....................................................G -142
14.1.2 Trimmer completion sensor (PS62) ........................................................................................................................G -142
xiv
14.1.3 Wire slack prevention sensor (PS66) ......................................................................................................................G -142
14.1.4 Trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52), Trimmer press home sensor (PS53) ....................................................G -143
14.1.5 Trimmer press brake ...............................................................................................................................................G -144
14.1.6 Fixing screw of the trimmer press timing belt ..........................................................................................................G -144
14.3.2 Rear cover /Lt .........................................................................................................................................................G -145
14.3.3 Rear cover /Rt .........................................................................................................................................................G -145
14.3.4 Left cover ................................................................................................................................................................G -146
14.3.5 Upper cover /Fr .......................................................................................................................................................G -146
14.3.6 Upper cover /Rr3 .....................................................................................................................................................G -147
14.3.7 Sub tray cover .........................................................................................................................................................G -147
14.3.8 Front door /Lt ..........................................................................................................................................................G -148
14.3.9 Front door /Rt ..........................................................................................................................................................G -148
14.3.10 Folding unit ...........................................................................................................................................................G -149
14.3.11 Note for replacing the board .................................................................................................................................G -151
15. PB-503 ................................................................................................................................................................G -152
15.2.2 Front door ...............................................................................................................................................................G -153
15.2.3 Front cover ..............................................................................................................................................................G -154
15.2.4 Booklet door ............................................................................................................................................................G -155
15.2.5 Rear cover /Rt .........................................................................................................................................................G -155
15.2.6 Rear cover /Lt .........................................................................................................................................................G -156
15.2.7 Left cover ................................................................................................................................................................G -156
15.2.8 Relay conveyance gear cover /Fr ...........................................................................................................................G -157
15.2.9 Relay conveyance gear cover /Rr ...........................................................................................................................G -157
15.2.10 Pellet supply cover ................................................................................................................................................G -157
15.2.11 SC cover /Fr ..........................................................................................................................................................G -158
15.2.12 SC cover /Up .........................................................................................................................................................G -159
15.2.13 Upper cover /FrRt .................................................................................................................................................G -160
15.2.14 Upper cover /FrLt ..................................................................................................................................................G -160
15.2.15 Upper cover /RrRt .................................................................................................................................................G -160
15.2.16 Upper cover /RrLt ..................................................................................................................................................G -161
15.2.17 Upper cover /Md ...................................................................................................................................................G -161
15.2.18 Deodorant unit ......................................................................................................................................................G -161
15.2.19 Pellet supply unit ...................................................................................................................................................G -163
15.2.20 Glue tank unit ........................................................................................................................................................G -164
15.2.21 SC unit ..................................................................................................................................................................G -166
15.2.22 Clamp unit .............................................................................................................................................................G -168
15.2.23 PB left unit .............................................................................................................................................................G -169
15.2.24 Book lift wire ..........................................................................................................................................................G -172
15.2.25 Cart wire ................................................................................................................................................................G -175
15.2.26 Conveyance unit /Lw .............................................................................................................................................G -176
15.2.27 Relay conveyance unit ..........................................................................................................................................G -177
15.2.28 Cover paper tray ...................................................................................................................................................G -178
15.2.29 Cover paper lift wire ..............................................................................................................................................G -180
15.2.30 Binding mode procedure with manual operating function .....................................................................................G -183
15.2.31 Multi feed detection boards /S (MFDBS) and /R (MFDBR) ...................................................................................G -184
16. IC-601 .................................................................................................................................................................G -187
16.2.2 Flow of disassembling the IC unit ...........................................................................................................................G -187
16.2.3 Box cover ................................................................................................................................................................G -187
16.2.4 SSD/HDD unit .........................................................................................................................................................G -188
16.2.5 HDD cooling fan (FM3) ...........................................................................................................................................G -190
16.2.6 DIMM (DIMM) .........................................................................................................................................................G -190
16.2.7 Video interface board (VIB) .....................................................................................................................................G -191
16.2.8 System control board (SCB) ...................................................................................................................................G -192
16.2.9 BOX ventilation fan (FM1) .......................................................................................................................................G -193
16.2.10 DC power supply (DCPS) .....................................................................................................................................G -193
17. RU-506.................................................................................................................................................................G -195
17.2.2 Front cover...............................................................................................................................................................G -195
17.2.3 Rear cover...............................................................................................................................................................G -196
xv
17.2.4 Left cover.................................................................................................................................................................G -196
17.2.5 Note to keep in mind when replacing the board.......................................................................................................G -196
18. GP-501.................................................................................................................................................................G -198
18.1 Centering punched holes...................................................................................................................................................G -198
18.2 Door latch...........................................................................................................................................................................G -200
18.2.1 Door latch check......................................................................................................................................................G -200
18.2.2 Door Latch Adjustment............................................................................................................................................G -200
18.2.3 Door Latch and Switch Replacement.......................................................................................................................G -200
18.3 Preparing the GP-501 punch for service............................................................................................................................G -201
18.3.1 Preparing the GP-501 punch for service..................................................................................................................G -201
18.3.2 Separating the Punch From the Printer...................................................................................................................G -201
18.3.3 Removing the Rear Cover.......................................................................................................................................G -201
18.4 Leveling and aligning to the printer....................................................................................................................................G -201
(1) Procedure......................................................................................................................................................................G -202
(2) Tool Required................................................................................................................................................................G -202
(3) To level the punch:........................................................................................................................................................G -202
19. COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE PARTS...............................................................................................................G -203
19.1 Reinstalling the status indicator light .................................................................................................................................G -203
19.1.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................G -203
19.1.2 Connector ...............................................................................................................................................................G -203
19.1.3 Procedure ...............................................................................................................................................................G -204
19.2 Key counter (KCT) ............................................................................................................................................................G -205
19.2.1 Connector ...............................................................................................................................................................G -205
19.2.2 Procedure ...............................................................................................................................................................G -205
H CLEANING/LUBRICATION ........................................................................................................H -1
1. CLEANING/LUBRICATION PROCEDURES ............................................................................................................H -1
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING ..............................................................................................................I -1
1. CHECKING BEFORE STARTING WORK ..................................................................................................................I -1
2. CHECKPOINTS WHEN CONDUCTING ON-SITE SERVICE ....................................................................................I -2
3. UTILITY ......................................................................................................................................................................I -3
3.1 List of utility menus ...................................................................................................................................................................I -3
3.2 Start/exit ....................................................................................................................................................................................I -5
3.2.1 Start method ...................................................................................................................................................................I -5
3.2.2 Exit method .....................................................................................................................................................................I -5
4. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS .................................................................................................................................I -6
4.1 Priority for Adjustment/Setting after replacing parts ..................................................................................................................I -6
5. SERVICE MODE ........................................................................................................................................................I -9
5.1 Service Mode List......................................................................................................................................................................I -9
5.2 Start/exit ..................................................................................................................................................................................I -11
5.2.1 Start method .................................................................................................................................................................I -11
5.2.2 Exit method ...................................................................................................................................................................I -12
5.3 Machine Adjustment................................................................................................................................................................I -12
5.3.1 Restart Timing Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) ..........................................................................................................I -12
5.3.2 Centering Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) ..................................................................................................................I -13
5.3.3 FD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) ....................................................................................................................I -13
5.3.4 CD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) ...................................................................................................................I -14
5.3.5 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) ......................................................................................................I -14
5.3.6 Registration Loop Adj. (Printer Adjustment) .................................................................................................................I -15
5.3.7 Pre-registration Adj. (Printer Adjustment) .....................................................................................................................I -16
5.3.8 Belt Line Speed Adj. (Printer Adjustment) ....................................................................................................................I -16
5.3.9 Skew Initial Position Memory (Printer Adjustment - Writing Initial Pos. Memory) .........................................................I -17
5.3.10 Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment) ......................................................................................................I -17
5.3.11 Color Registration Manual (Printer Adjustment) .........................................................................................................I -17
5.3.12 Adjustment when replacing the multi feed detection board (PF) ................................................................................I -19
5.3.13 CD-Mag. Skew Adj. (Printer Adjustment) ...................................................................................................................I -20
5.3.14 Beam Pitch Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) .............................................................................................................I -21
5.3.15 Moire Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) .......................................................................................................................I -22
5.3.16 Recall Standard Data (Printer Adjustment) .................................................................................................................I -23
5.3.17 Restart Timing Adjustment (Scanner Adjustment) ......................................................................................................I -23
5.3.18 Centering Adjustment (Scanner Adjustment) .............................................................................................................I -24
5.3.19 FD-Mag. Adjustment (Scanner Adjustment) ...............................................................................................................I -24
5.3.20 Scan Gradation/Color Adj. (Scanner Adjustment) ......................................................................................................I -25
5.3.21 Recall Standard Data (Scanner Adjustment) ..............................................................................................................I -25
5.3.22 Printer Gamma Offset Adj. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment) .........................................................I -26
5.3.23 Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment) .......................................................I -27
5.3.24 Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (RU) (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)................................................I -28
5.3.25 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment) ........................................................I -29
xvi
5.3.26 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj. (RU) (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)................................................I -30
5.3.27 Printer Screen Gradation (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment) ............................................................I -31
5.3.28 Sharpness Adjustment (Quality Adjustment) ..............................................................................................................I -31
5.3.29 Contrast Adjustment (Quality Adjustment) ..................................................................................................................I -31
5.3.30 Dot Detect Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Image Distinction Level) ......................................................................I -32
5.3.31 Color Text Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Image Distinction Level) ......................................................................I -32
5.3.32 Dot Detect Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Image Distinction Level) ......................................................................I -33
5.3.33 ACS Adjustment (Quality Adjustment) ........................................................................................................................I -33
5.3.34 AE(AES) Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment) ...............................................................................I -34
5.3.35 Copy Density Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment) ........................................................................I -34
5.3.36 Back. Removal (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment) ........................................................................................I -35
5.3.37 Bleed Prevention (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment) .....................................................................................I -35
5.3.38 Tone Adjustment (Quality Adjustment) .......................................................................................................................I -35
5.3.39 Recall Standard Data (Quality Adjustment) ................................................................................................................I -36
5.4 Process Adjustment ................................................................................................................................................................I -37
5.4.1 1st Transfer Manual Adj. (High Voltage Adjustment) ....................................................................................................I -37
5.4.2 2nd Transfer Manual Adj. (High Voltage Adjustment) ..................................................................................................I -37
5.4.3 HV Adj.(Separation AC) (High Voltage Adjustment) .....................................................................................................I -37
5.4.4 HV Adj. (Separation DC) (High Voltage Adjustment) ....................................................................................................I -37
5.4.5 Pre-transfer Guide Confirm (High Voltage Adjustment) ................................................................................................I -37
5.4.6 Blade Setting Mode (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment) ......................................................................................................I -37
5.4.7 Gamma Automatic Adj. (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment) ................................................................................................I -37
5.4.8 Auto. Developer Charge (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment) ..............................................................................................I -38
5.4.9 Toner Density Sensor Init. (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment) ...........................................................................................I -40
5.4.10 Initial Drum Rotation (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment) ..................................................................................................I -40
5.4.11 Toner Density Revert (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment) .................................................................................................I -41
5.4.12 Toner Density Sensor Speed (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment) .....................................................................................I -41
5.4.13 IDC Sensor Output (Sensor Output Confirm) .............................................................................................................I -41
5.4.14 Toner Density Sensor Output (Sensor Output Confirm) .............................................................................................I -41
5.4.15 Humidity/Temperature Output (Sensor Output Confirm) ............................................................................................I -42
5.4.16 Background Margin Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment) ..........................................................................................I -42
5.4.17 Develop AC Bias Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment) ..............................................................................................I -43
5.4.18 Develop AC Frequency (Process Fine Adjustment) ...................................................................................................I -43
5.4.19 Toner Density Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment) ...................................................................................................I -43
5.4.20 Drum Small Rotation Interval (Interval/Quantity Adj.) .................................................................................................I -44
5.4.21 Automatic Refresh Interval (Interval/Quantity Adj.) .....................................................................................................I -44
5.4.22 Toner Density Sensor Interval (Interval/Quantity Adj.) ...............................................................................................I -44
5.4.23 Recall Standard Data ..................................................................................................................................................I -45
5.5 System Setting ........................................................................................................................................................................I -45
5.5.1 Software DIPSW setting procedures ............................................................................................................................I -45
5.5.2 Software DIPSW setting list ..........................................................................................................................................I -46
5.5.3 Service Center TEL/FAX ..............................................................................................................................................I -63
5.5.4 M/C Serial Number Setting ...........................................................................................................................................I -63
5.5.5 Setup Date/Business Setting ........................................................................................................................................I -63
5.5.6 Restrictions on banner print...........................................................................................................................................I -64
5.6 Counter/Data ...........................................................................................................................................................................I -64
5.6.1 Maintenance Counter ...................................................................................................................................................I -64
5.6.2 Data collection procedures ...........................................................................................................................................I -65
5.6.3 Paper Size Counter (Total/copy/print) ..........................................................................................................................I -65
5.6.4 ADF Counter .................................................................................................................................................................I -66
5.6.5 Coverage Data History .................................................................................................................................................I -66
5.6.6 Paper JAM History ........................................................................................................................................................I -69
5.6.7 JAM/JAM Counter for Individual Section ......................................................................................................................I -69
5.6.8 Counter of Each Copy Mode(1) ....................................................................................................................................I -78
5.6.9 Counter of Each Copy Mode(2) ....................................................................................................................................I -83
5.6.10 SC Counter/SC Counter Individual Sec. .....................................................................................................................I -88
5.6.11 SC data of time series ................................................................................................................................................I -99
5.6.12 Maintenance Counter Reset (Maintenance History) ...................................................................................................I -99
5.6.13 Parts History in Time Series (Maintenance History) .................................................................................................I -100
5.6.14 ORU-M Maintenance History ...................................................................................................................................I -101
5.6.15 Checking, setting and resetting procedure of the Special Parts Counter .................................................................I -102
5.6.16 Special Parts Counter ...............................................................................................................................................I -102
5.6.17 Voluntary Part Counter (Parts Counter) ....................................................................................................................I -111
5.6.18 Custom size counter threshold setting ......................................................................................................................I -112
5.7 State Confirmation ...............................................................................................................................................................I -112
5.7.1 I/O Check Mode ..........................................................................................................................................................I -112
5.7.2 Input check procedures ..............................................................................................................................................I -113
5.7.3 Output check procedures ............................................................................................................................................I -113
5.7.4 IO check mode list ......................................................................................................................................................I -113
5.7.5 Adjustment when replacing the multi feed detection board (PI) (new type).................................................................I -156
xvii
5.7.6 Adjustment when replacing the multi feed detection board (PI) (old type)..................................................................I -158
5.7.7 Adjustment when replacing the cover paper multi feed detection board (PB) ............................................................I -159
5.7.8 FD, SD, FS and PB data EEPROM storage ...............................................................................................................I -161
5.7.9 Main body adjustment data NVRAM board storage ...................................................................................................I -161
5.7.10 Printer image processing board line memory check .................................................................................................I -161
5.7.11 Hard disk check ........................................................................................................................................................I -161
5.7.12 Hard disk replacing procedure ..................................................................................................................................I -162
5.7.13 Replacing procedure of the write unit .......................................................................................................................I -162
5.8 ADF Adjustment.....................................................................................................................................................................I -163
5.8.1 ADF Original Size Adj. ................................................................................................................................................I -163
5.8.2 ADF Orig. Stop Position ..............................................................................................................................................I -163
5.8.3 ADF Sensor Adjustment .............................................................................................................................................I -163
5.8.4 ADF Registration Loop Adj .........................................................................................................................................I -164
5.9 Finisher Adjustment ..............................................................................................................................................................I -164
5.9.1 Staple Center Position (Staple Finisher Position Adjustment) ....................................................................................I -164
5.9.2 Paper Width Adj.(Staple) (Staple Finisher Position Adjustment) ................................................................................I -165
5.9.3 Paper Width Adj.(Straight) (Staple Finisher Position Adjustment) ..............................................................................I -165
5.9.4 Exit Guide Center Pos. Adj. (Staple Finisher Position Adjustment) ............................................................................I -166
5.9.5 Exit Guide Paper Width Adj. (Staple Finisher Position Adjustment) ...........................................................................I -167
5.9.6 Paper Width Adjustment (Multi Folder(Punch) Adj.) ...................................................................................................I -167
5.9.7 Punch Vertical Position Adj. (Multi Folder(Punch) Adj.) ..............................................................................................I -168
5.9.8 Half Fold Position Adjustment (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.) .............................................................................................I -169
5.9.9 Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.) ............................................................................................................I -169
5.9.10 Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.) ........................................................................................................I -170
5.9.11 Double Parallel Pos. Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.) ..................................................................................................I -171
5.9.12 Z-Fold Position Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.) ...........................................................................................................I -172
5.9.13 Gate Position Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.) .............................................................................................................I -172
5.9.14 Fold Registration Loop Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.) ...............................................................................................I -173
5.9.15 Multi Folder(PI) Adjustment ......................................................................................................................................I -174
5.9.16 Paper Width Adjustment (Stacker Adjustment) ........................................................................................................I -174
5.9.17 Paper Length Adjustment (Stacker Adjustment) .......................................................................................................I -174
5.9.18 Staple Center Position (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.) ...................................................................................................I -175
5.9.19 Staple Paper Width Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.) ................................................................................................I -175
5.9.20 Staple Pitch Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.) ................................................................................................I -176
5.9.21 Half-Fold Position Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.) ...................................................................................................I -176
5.9.22 Tri-Fold Position Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.) .....................................................................................................I -177
5.9.23 Fold Paper Width Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.) ....................................................................................................I -178
5.9.24 Trimming Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.) .....................................................................................................I -178
5.9.25 Trimmer Receiver Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.) ...................................................................................................I -179
5.9.26 Cover Trimming Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment) ....................................................................................................I -179
5.9.27 Cover Lead Edge Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment) .................................................................................................I -180
5.9.28 Spine Corner form Pos. (Perfect Binder Adjustment) ...............................................................................................I -180
5.9.29 Glue Start Position (Perfect Binder Adjustment) .......................................................................................................I -181
5.9.30 Glue Finish Position (Perfect Binder Adjustment) .....................................................................................................I -182
5.9.31 Temperature Adjustment (Perfect Binder Adjustment) .............................................................................................I -182
5.9.32 Sub Compile CD Width Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment) ........................................................................................I -183
5.9.33 Clamp CD Width Adjustment (Perfect Binder Adjustment) .......................................................................................I -183
5.9.34 Cover Up/Down CD Width Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment) ....................................................................................I -184
5.9.35 Clamp FD Position Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment) ...............................................................................................I -184
5.9.36 Fold & Staple Stopper Adjustment ............................................................................................................................I -185
5.9.37 Half-Fold Stopper Adj. ..............................................................................................................................................I -185
5.9.38 Vertical Position Adj. (Punch Adjustment) ................................................................................................................I -186
5.9.39 Horizontal Position Adj. (Punch Adjustment) ............................................................................................................I -186
5.9.40 Registration Adjustment (Punch Adjustment) ...........................................................................................................I -187
5.9.41 Paper Edge Detect Sensor (Punch Adjustment) ......................................................................................................I -187
5.9.42 Tri-Fold Adjustment ..................................................................................................................................................I -188
5.9.43 2 Position Staple Pitch ..............................................................................................................................................I -188
5.9.44 Post Inserter Tray Size .............................................................................................................................................I -189
5.9.45 Output Quantity Limit ................................................................................................................................................I -189
5.9.46 Curl Adjustment ........................................................................................................................................................I -189
5.9.47 Recall Standard Data ................................................................................................................................................I -190
5.10 Firmware Version ................................................................................................................................................................I -190
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -190
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -190
5.11 CS Remote Care .................................................................................................................................................................I -191
5.11.1 Outline ......................................................................................................................................................................I -191
5.11.2 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care (When using E-mail) ...............................................................................I -191
5.11.3 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care (When using phone line modem) ............................................................I -193
5.11.4 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care (When using WebDAV server) ................................................................I -194
5.11.5 List of combinations of E-mail CS Remote Care and Mail remote notification system .............................................I -196
xviii
5.11.6 Mail initial setting (In the case of the main body NIC) ...............................................................................................I -197
5.11.7 E-mail Initial Setting (In the case of controller NIC) ..................................................................................................I -197
5.11.8 http communication setting (In the case of the main body NIC) ...............................................................................I -198
5.11.9 http Communication Setting (In the case of controller NIC) ......................................................................................I -198
5.11.10 Input procedure of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care ......................................................................................I -198
5.11.11 List of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care .........................................................................................................I -198
5.11.12 Setup confirmation ..................................................................................................................................................I -205
5.11.13 Maintenance call .....................................................................................................................................................I -205
5.11.14 Center call from administrator .................................................................................................................................I -205
5.11.15 Confirm communication log ....................................................................................................................................I -205
5.11.16 Initialization of RAM for CS Remote Care ..............................................................................................................I -206
5.11.17 CS Remote Care error code list ..............................................................................................................................I -206
5.11.18 TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................................................................................................I -208
5.12 List Output ...........................................................................................................................................................................I -208
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -208
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -208
5.13 Test Mode ...........................................................................................................................................................................I -209
5.13.1 Running Test Mode ..................................................................................................................................................I -209
5.13.2 Test Pattern Output Mode ........................................................................................................................................I -209
5.13.3 Test Pattern No.11 Beam check ...............................................................................................................................I -209
5.13.4 Test Pattern No.16 Linearity evaluation pattern .......................................................................................................I -210
5.13.5 Test Pattern No.40 Image skew check pattern (Full-bleed print of Test Pattern No.16)...........................................I -210
5.13.6 Test Pattern No.49 RU color sensor gamma correction (Output paper density adjustment chart i1-iSis/i1-Pro) .....I -211
5.13.7 Test Pattern No.51 Gradation evaluation pattern (Main scan) .................................................................................I -211
5.13.8 Test Pattern No.52 Gradation evaluation pattern (Sub scan) ...................................................................................I -212
5.13.9 Test Pattern No.53 Overall halftone .........................................................................................................................I -212
5.13.10 Test Pattern No.54 Gradation evaluation pattern ...................................................................................................I -213
5.13.11 Test Pattern No.55 5% coverage ............................................................................................................................I -214
5.13.12 Test Pattern No.58 Stripe check pattern .................................................................................................................I -214
5.13.13 Test Pattern No.62 Uneven density check pattern .................................................................................................I -214
5.13.14 Test Pattern No.75 Density correction pattern i1-iSis XL .......................................................................................I -215
5.13.15 Test Pattern No.76 Density correction pattern i1-Pro (Type1/Type2) .....................................................................I -215
5.13.16 Test Pattern No.77 Density correction pattern Manual ...........................................................................................I -216
5.13.17 Test Pattern No.80 Print peculiarity evaluation pattern ..........................................................................................I -217
5.13.18 Test Pattern No.88 Chart file output .......................................................................................................................I -217
5.14 Setting Data ........................................................................................................................................................................I -218
5.14.1 Load from external memory ......................................................................................................................................I -218
5.14.2 Store to external memory .........................................................................................................................................I -218
5.15 Log Store ...........................................................................................................................................................................I -219
5.15.1 Log Store Setting ......................................................................................................................................................I -219
5.15.2 Execute Log Storing .................................................................................................................................................I -220
5.16 ORU-M Setting.....................................................................................................................................................................I -220
5.16.1 ORU-M object/Life setting..........................................................................................................................................I -220
5.16.2 ORU-M Life Threshold Setting...................................................................................................................................I -221
5.16.3 ORU-M Password Setting..........................................................................................................................................I -221
6. IC-601 SERVICE MODE ........................................................................................................................................I -223
6.1 IC Service Mode List..............................................................................................................................................................I -223
6.2 Start/exit of Service Mode .....................................................................................................................................................I -223
6.2.1 Method to activate IC service mode ...........................................................................................................................I -223
6.2.2 Method to exit IC service mode ..................................................................................................................................I -223
6.3 System Setting ......................................................................................................................................................................I -223
6.3.1 IC software DIPSW setting procedures ......................................................................................................................I -223
6.3.2 IC software DIPSW list ...............................................................................................................................................I -224
6.4 Firmware Version ..................................................................................................................................................................I -224
(1) Functions ........................................................................................................................................................................I -224
(2) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -224
(3) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -224
6.5 Firmware Version Up.............................................................................................................................................................I -225
6.5.1 ISW outline .................................................................................................................................................................I -225
6.5.2 Method of the USB memory ISW ................................................................................................................................I -225
6.5.3 Method of Internet ISW ...............................................................................................................................................I -227
6.5.4 ISW error list ...............................................................................................................................................................I -230
6.6 IC HDD Format .....................................................................................................................................................................I -231
(1) Functions ........................................................................................................................................................................I -231
(2) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -231
(3) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -231
6.7 CSV File Import/Export .........................................................................................................................................................I -232
6.7.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................I -232
6.7.2 Procedure....................................................................................................................................................................I -232
6.8 Font Backup ..........................................................................................................................................................................I -234
xix
6.8.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................................I -234
6.8.2 Preparation of backup/restore ....................................................................................................................................I -234
6.8.3 Backup method ...........................................................................................................................................................I -234
6.8.4 Method to restore ........................................................................................................................................................I -235
6.9 Log File Check ......................................................................................................................................................................I -236
(1) Function...........................................................................................................................................................................I -236
(2) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -236
(3) Procedure........................................................................................................................................................................I -236
7. CE/ADMINISTRATOR SECURITY SETTING ........................................................................................................I -237
7.1 CE/Administrator Security Setting List ..................................................................................................................................I -237
7.2 Start/exit ................................................................................................................................................................................I -237
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -237
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -237
7.3 CE Authentication .................................................................................................................................................................I -237
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -237
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -237
7.4 CE Auth. Password ...............................................................................................................................................................I -237
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -237
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -237
7.5 Admin. Authentication ...........................................................................................................................................................I -238
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -238
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -238
7.6 Administrator Password ........................................................................................................................................................I -238
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -238
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -238
8. FEE COLLECTION SETTING ................................................................................................................................I -239
8.1 Fee Collection Setting List.....................................................................................................................................................I -239
8.2 Start/exit ................................................................................................................................................................................I -239
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -239
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -239
8.3 Management Function ..........................................................................................................................................................I -239
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -239
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -239
8.4 Billing Coefficient Setting ......................................................................................................................................................I -239
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -239
(2) Functions ........................................................................................................................................................................I -239
(3) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -239
9. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD ......................................................................................................................................I -240
9.1 Process Adjustment ..............................................................................................................................................................I -240
9.1.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................................I -240
9.1.2 2nd Transfer Output Adj. (Front) .................................................................................................................................I -240
9.1.3 2nd Transfer Output Adj. (Back) .................................................................................................................................I -240
9.1.4 2nd Transfer-Lead Edge(Front)...................................................................................................................................I -240
9.1.5 2nd Transfer-Lead Edge(Back)...................................................................................................................................I -241
9.1.6 2nd Transfer-Rear Edge(Front) ..................................................................................................................................I -241
9.1.7 2nd Transfer-Rear Edge(Back) ...................................................................................................................................I -241
9.1.8 Separation AC ............................................................................................................................................................I -242
9.1.9 Separation AC ............................................................................................................................................................I -242
9.1.10 Separation DC(Front) ...............................................................................................................................................I -243
9.1.11 Separation DC(Back) ................................................................................................................................................I -243
9.1.12 Temperature of fusing upper roller (Idling) ...............................................................................................................I -244
9.1.13 Temperature of fusing upper roller (Printing) ............................................................................................................I -244
9.1.14 Temperature of fusing lower roller (Idling) ................................................................................................................I -245
9.1.15 Temperature of fusing lower roller (Printing) ............................................................................................................I -245
9.1.16 Temperature to turn OFF the upper edge heater forcibly / Paper width: less than 261mm ......................................I -246
9.1.17 Temperature to turn OFF the upper edge heater forcibly / Paper width: 261mm or more ........................................I -246
9.1.18 Speed Down .............................................................................................................................................................I -247
9.1.19 2nd transfer pressure ................................................................................................................................................I -247
9.1.20 CPM Down ................................................................................................................................................................I -247
9.1.21 Fusing Air Separation Air Level Setting ....................................................................................................................I -247
10. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, bizhub PRO C6000L..................I -248
10.1 Centering adjustment of the paper feed trays /1 to /3 .........................................................................................................I -248
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -248
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -248
10.2 Separation pressure adjustment of the paper feed trays /1 to /3 ........................................................................................I -248
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -248
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -248
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT DF-622 ................................................................................................................I -249
11.1 Hinge angle adjustment (70 degrees and 40 degrees) .......................................................................................................I -249
xx
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -249
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -249
11.2 Hinge angle adjustment (90 degrees) .................................................................................................................................I -249
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -249
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -249
12. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PF-602 ................................................................................................................I -250
12.1 Paper feed pick-up amount adjustment ..............................................................................................................................I -250
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -250
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -250
12.2 Pick-up roller height adjustment ..........................................................................................................................................I -251
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -251
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -251
12.3 Separation pressure adjustment .........................................................................................................................................I -253
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -253
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -253
12.4 Lift plate horizontal adjustment ...........................................................................................................................................I -253
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -253
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -253
12.5 Horizontal adjustment .........................................................................................................................................................I -254
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -254
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -254
13. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT LU-202 ................................................................................................................I -256
13.1 Separation pressure adjustment .........................................................................................................................................I -256
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -256
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -256
13.2 Paper lift plate horizontal adjustment ..................................................................................................................................I -256
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -256
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -257
13.3 Paper centering adjustment ................................................................................................................................................I -257
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -257
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -258
13.4 Paper skew adjustment .......................................................................................................................................................I -258
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -258
(2) Preparation .....................................................................................................................................................................I -258
(3) Adjustment procedure of all the paper skew regularly ...................................................................................................I -259
(4) Adjustment procedure of each paper skew irregularly ...................................................................................................I -259
13.5 (Maximum) Paper feed height adjustment ..........................................................................................................................I -259
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -259
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -260
13.6 Pick-up roller separation adjustment ...................................................................................................................................I -260
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -260
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -261
14. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT MB-504 ...............................................................................................................I -262
14.1 Paper feed roller /BP load adjustment ................................................................................................................................I -262
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -262
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -262
14.2 (Maximum) Paper feed height adjustment (bypass) ...........................................................................................................I -262
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -262
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -262
14.3 Pick-up shift amount adjustment (bypass) ..........................................................................................................................I -262
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -262
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -263
15. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT RU-509 ................................................................................................................I -264
15.1 Height adjustment ...............................................................................................................................................................I -264
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -264
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -264
15.2 Position adjustment of the shutter solenoid (SD5)...............................................................................................................I -264
(1) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -264
(2) Procedure........................................................................................................................................................................I -265
16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT FS-521 ................................................................................................................I -266
16.1 Adjusting the flat-stapling stopper position .........................................................................................................................I -266
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -266
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -266
16.2 Adjusting the alignment plate position ................................................................................................................................I -267
(1) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -267
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -268
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -269
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -269
xxi
17.1 Adjustment the bypass gate ................................................................................................................................................I -270
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -270
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -270
17.2 Adjusting the shift position ..................................................................................................................................................I -271
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -271
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -271
17.3 Adjusting the paper exit opening solenoid ..........................................................................................................................I -271
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -271
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -272
17.4 Adjusting the mounting position of the paper exit arm ........................................................................................................I -273
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -273
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -273
17.5 Adjusting the mounting position of the alignment plate /Up ................................................................................................I -274
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -274
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -274
17.6 Staple position adjustment ..................................................................................................................................................I -275
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -275
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -275
18.1 Adjustment the bypass gate ................................................................................................................................................I -277
(1) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -277
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -277
18.2 Adjusting the shift position ..................................................................................................................................................I -278
(1) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -278
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -278
18.3 Adjusting the paper exit opening solenoid ..........................................................................................................................I -278
(1) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -278
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -279
18.4 Adjusting the mounting position of the paper exit arm ........................................................................................................I -280
(1) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -280
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -280
18.5 Adjusting the mounting position of the alignment plate /Up ................................................................................................I -281
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -281
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -281
18.6 Adjusting the mounting position of the alignment plate /Lw ................................................................................................I -282
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -282
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -282
(1) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -283
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -283
18.8 Staple position adjustment (Saddle stitching) .....................................................................................................................I -284
(1) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -284
(2) Procedure........................................................................................................................................................................I -284
18.9 Staple up/down position adjustment ...................................................................................................................................I -285
(1) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -285
(2) Procedure........................................................................................................................................................................I -285
18.10 Half-fold stopper tilt adjustment ........................................................................................................................................I -286
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -286
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -287
18.11 Folding pressure adjustment .............................................................................................................................................I -287
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -287
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -288
18.12 Tri-folding position adjustment ..........................................................................................................................................I -288
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -288
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -288
19. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PK-512/513 .........................................................................................................I -289
19.1 Punch hole position skew adjustment .................................................................................................................................I -289
(1) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -289
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -289
20. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PI-502 .................................................................................................................I -290
20.1 PI tilt adjustment (When PK is connected) ..........................................................................................................................I -290
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -290
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -290
20.2 PK punch position centering adjustment..............................................................................................................................I -290
20.2.1 Usage........................................................................................................................................................................I -290
20.2.2 Adjustment procedure for the cover sheet tray /Up...................................................................................................I -290
20.2.3 Adjustment procedure for the cover sheet tray /Lw...................................................................................................I -291
21. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT LS-505 ................................................................................................................I -293
xxii
21.1 Adjusting the paper press solenoid /1 (SD6) ......................................................................................................................I -293
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -293
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -293
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -293
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -293
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -293
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -294
21.4 Adjusting the job partition solenoid (SD2) ...........................................................................................................................I -294
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -294
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -294
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -294
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -295
21.6 Grip conveyance home sensor adjustment .........................................................................................................................I -295
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -295
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -295
22. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT FD-503 ................................................................................................................I -297
22.1 Roller solenoids /1 (SD5), /2 (SD6), /3 (SD7) and /4 (SD8) position adjustment ................................................................I -297
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -297
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -297
22.2 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18) position adjustment .......................................................................................................I -297
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -297
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -298
22.3 Punch Centering Adjustment ..............................................................................................................................................I -298
(1) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -298
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -298
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -299
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -299
22.5 Paper feed control gear position adjustment (PI tray) .........................................................................................................I -299
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -299
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -299
22.6 Paper feed pick-up volume adjustment (PI tray) .................................................................................................................I -300
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -300
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -300
23. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT SD-506 ................................................................................................................I -301
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -301
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -301
23.2 Folding skew adjustment ....................................................................................................................................................I -301
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -301
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -301
23.3 Second folding position stabilization adjustment ................................................................................................................I -302
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -302
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -302
(1) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -303
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -303
(3) Adjustment Procedure /1 ................................................................................................................................................I -303
(4) Adjustment Procedure /2 ................................................................................................................................................I -304
23.5 Stapler position adjustment .................................................................................................................................................I -304
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -304
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -304
23.6 Tilt/gap adjustment of the clincher ......................................................................................................................................I -305
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -305
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -305
23.7 Roller cutter skew adjustment .............................................................................................................................................I -306
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -306
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -307
23.8 Trimming adjustment ..........................................................................................................................................................I -307
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -307
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -308
24. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PB-503 ................................................................................................................I -309
24.1 Clamp sub scan direction alignment adjustment ................................................................................................................I -309
(1) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -309
(2) Procedure........................................................................................................................................................................I -309
24.2 Clamp main scan direction alignment adjustment ..............................................................................................................I -309
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -309
xxiii
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -310
24.3 Pellet supply arm angle adjustment ....................................................................................................................................I -310
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -310
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -310
24.4 Glue apply roller gap adjustment ........................................................................................................................................I -311
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -311
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -311
24.5 Cover paper glue gap adjustment .......................................................................................................................................I -311
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -311
(2) Gap adjustment procedure in thin coat mode ................................................................................................................I -312
(3) Gap adjustment procedure in thick coat mode ...............................................................................................................I -312
24.6 Glue tank movement rail tilt adjustment ..............................................................................................................................I -313
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -313
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -313
24.7 Cover paper folding plate nipping adjustment .....................................................................................................................I -313
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -313
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -314
24.8 Cover paper folding plate parallel adjustment .....................................................................................................................I -314
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -314
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -314
24.9 Cover paper table up down belt adjustment .......................................................................................................................I -315
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -315
(2) Check point ....................................................................................................................................................................I -315
(3) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -316
24.10 Cover paper alignment plate adjustment ..........................................................................................................................I -316
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -316
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -317
24.11 Cover paper cutting skew adjustment ...............................................................................................................................I -317
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -317
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -317
24.12 Cover paper table positioning ...........................................................................................................................................I -318
(1) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -318
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -318
24.13 Cover paper tray pick-up adjustment ................................................................................................................................I -318
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -318
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -319
24.14 Cover paper tray pick-up roller height adjustment ............................................................................................................I -320
(1) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -320
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -321
24.15 Cover paper tray separation pressure adjustment ............................................................................................................I -322
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -322
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -323
24.16 Cover paper tray Centering Adjustment ............................................................................................................................I -323
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -323
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -323
24.17 Cover paper tray lift plate horizontal adjustment ...............................................................................................................I -323
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -323
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -324
24.18 Height adjustment .............................................................................................................................................................I -326
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -326
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -327
25. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT RU-506.................................................................................................................I -328
25.1 Straight gate solenoid (SD1) position adjustment................................................................................................................I -328
(1) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -328
(2) Procedure........................................................................................................................................................................I -328
25.2 Position adjustment of the stacker exit shutter solenoid (SD2)............................................................................................I -328
(1) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -328
(2) Procedure........................................................................................................................................................................I -329
25.3 Position adjustment of the stack switching solenoid (SD3)..................................................................................................I -329
(1) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -329
(2) Procedure........................................................................................................................................................................I -330
25.4 Position adjustment of the stacker entrance guide plate solenoid (SD4).............................................................................I -330
(1) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -330
(2) Procedure........................................................................................................................................................................I -331
J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE.......................................................................................................J -1
1. OUTLINE ...................................................................................................................................................................J -1
1.1 Precautions on rewriting the firmware ......................................................................................................................................J -1
(1) Check items........................................................................................................................................................................J -1
(2) Target board.......................................................................................................................................................................J -1
xxiv
(3) ISW execution procedures.................................................................................................................................................J -1
(4) DIPSW and toggle SW setting on the boards.....................................................................................................................J -1
(5) Connecting short connector when rewriting firmware.........................................................................................................J -1
(6) Checksum check................................................................................................................................................................J -1
1.2 Combination of firmware and board..........................................................................................................................................J -1
1.2.1 Table of combination (Main body: Printer control board)................................................................................................J -1
1.2.2 Table of combination (FS-521: FNS control board)........................................................................................................J -2
1.3 Firmware data flow ...................................................................................................................................................................J -3
1.4 Main body setting for ISW ........................................................................................................................................................J -3
(1) Type of setting ...................................................................................................................................................................J -3
(2) When in the version up of the program .............................................................................................................................J -3
(3) When writing new firmware (When replacing board and rewriting firmware failed) ...........................................................J -3
1.5 Type .........................................................................................................................................................................................J -3
(1) USB MEMORY ISW ..........................................................................................................................................................J -3
(2) Internet ISW .......................................................................................................................................................................J -3
2. ISWTRNS_G ..............................................................................................................................................................J -5
2.1 Specifications ...........................................................................................................................................................................J -5
2.1.1 ISWTrns_G (PC software) .............................................................................................................................................J -5
2.2 Installation of the ISWTrns_G ..................................................................................................................................................J -5
(1) Procedure ..........................................................................................................................................................................J -5
2.3 Usage of the ISWTrns_G .........................................................................................................................................................J -6
2.3.1 Firmware checksum check ............................................................................................................................................J -6
2.4 Error list ....................................................................................................................................................................................J -7
(1) ISWTrns_G error list ..........................................................................................................................................................J -7
(2) ISWTrns_G troubleshooting ..............................................................................................................................................J -7
3. USB MEMORY ISW....................................................................................................................................................J -8
3.1 Usage of the USB memory ISW ...............................................................................................................................................J -8
(1) Board to be rewritten and firmware ...................................................................................................................................J -8
(2) Procedure ..........................................................................................................................................................................J -8
3.2 Boot USB memory ISW ..........................................................................................................................................................J -10
(1) Board to be rewritten and firmware .................................................................................................................................J -10
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................J -10
3.3 Error list ..................................................................................................................................................................................J -11
(1) Overall control board firmware abnormality .....................................................................................................................J -11
(2) Error list ...........................................................................................................................................................................J -11
4. INTERNET ISW .......................................................................................................................................................J -13
4.1 Outline ....................................................................................................................................................................................J -13
4.2 Operating environment ...........................................................................................................................................................J -13
4.3 Initial setting ...........................................................................................................................................................................J -13
(1) Setting from the operation panel .....................................................................................................................................J -13
(2) Setting from the Web browser .........................................................................................................................................J -13
4.4 Internet ISW using the Web Utilities .......................................................................................................................................J -15
(1) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................J -15
4.5 Usage precautions .................................................................................................................................................................J -16
4.5.1 Notice to administrator .................................................................................................................................................J -16
4.5.2 Power cut during writing ...............................................................................................................................................J -17
4.6 Internet ISW using the operation panel ..................................................................................................................................J -17
(1) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................J -17
(2) Main body error list ..........................................................................................................................................................J -18
4.7 Authentication of the proxy server in Internet ISW .................................................................................................................J -18
(1) Proxy server ....................................................................................................................................................................J -18
(2) Authentication of the proxy server ...................................................................................................................................J -18
(3) Authentication type of the proxy server and the command list ........................................................................................J -18
(4) Remark ............................................................................................................................................................................J -19
K TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................................................K -1
1. JAM INDICATION .....................................................................................................................................................K -1
1.1 Jam code list ............................................................................................................................................................................K -1
2. MALFUNCTION CODE ...........................................................................................................................................K -19
2.1 Trouble reset method ............................................................................................................................................................K -19
2.2 Function to detach defective sections ...................................................................................................................................K -19
(1) User operation ................................................................................................................................................................K -19
(2) DIPSW setting .................................................................................................................................................................K -19
2.3 Malfunction code list ..............................................................................................................................................................K -19
2.4 Malfunction code caused by connector disconnection ..........................................................................................................K -79
2.4.1 bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, bizhub PRO C6000L..........................................................................K -79
2.5 Solution 1 (C-0001_0300) .....................................................................................................................................................K -82
2.5.1 C-0001 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -82
2.5.2 C-0002 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -82
xxv
2.5.3 C-0003 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -82
2.5.4 C-0101 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -83
2.5.5 C-0102 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -83
2.5.6 C-0103 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -83
2.5.7 C-0201 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -84
2.5.8 C-0202 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -84
2.5.9 C-0203 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -85
2.5.10 C-0204 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -85
2.5.11 C-0205 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -86
2.5.12 C-0208 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -86
2.5.13 C-0209 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -86
2.5.14 C-0211 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -87
2.5.15 C-0212 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -87
2.5.16 C-0213 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -87
2.6 Solution 2 (C-0301_0400) .....................................................................................................................................................K -88
2.6.1 C-0301*........................................................................................................................................................................K -88
2.6.2 C-0302*........................................................................................................................................................................K -88
2.6.3 C-0303 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -89
2.6.4 C-0304*........................................................................................................................................................................K -89
2.6.5 C-0305*........................................................................................................................................................................K -89
2.6.6 C-0306 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -90
2.6.7 C-0307 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -90
2.6.8 C-0308 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -90
2.6.9 C-0309 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -90
2.6.10 C-0310 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -91
2.6.11 C-0311 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -91
2.6.12 C-0312 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -91
2.6.13 C-0313 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -92
2.6.14 C-0314 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -92
2.6.15 C-0315 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -92
2.6.16 C-0316 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -93
2.6.17 C-0317 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -93
2.6.18 C-0318 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -93
2.6.19 C-0320 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -94
2.6.20 C-0321 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -94
2.6.21 C-0322 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -94
2.6.22 C-0323*......................................................................................................................................................................K -95
2.6.23 C-0324*......................................................................................................................................................................K -95
2.7 Solution 3 (C-0401_0500) .....................................................................................................................................................K -95
2.7.1 C-0401 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -95
2.7.2 C-0402 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -96
2.7.3 C-0403 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -96
2.7.4 C-0404 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -96
2.7.5 C-0405 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -97
2.7.6 C-0406 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -97
2.7.7 C-0407 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -97
2.7.8 C-0408 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -98
2.7.9 C-0409 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -98
2.7.10 C-0410 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -99
2.7.11 C-0411 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -99
2.7.12 C-0412 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -99
2.7.13 C-0413 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -100
2.7.14 C-0414 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -100
2.7.15 C-0415 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -101
2.7.16 C-0416 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -101
2.7.17 C-0417 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -102
2.7.18 C-0418 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -102
2.8 Solution 4 (C-1001_1126) ...................................................................................................................................................K -103
2.8.1 C-1005 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -103
2.8.2 C-1006 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -103
2.8.3 C-1007 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -103
2.8.4 C-1009 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -104
2.8.5 C-1010 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -104
2.8.6 C-1011 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -104
2.8.7 C-1012........................................................................................................................................................................K -105
2.8.8 C-1013 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -105
2.8.9 C-1014........................................................................................................................................................................K -105
2.8.10 C-1101 (FS-531/612) ..............................................................................................................................................K -106
2.8.11 C-1102 (FS-521) .....................................................................................................................................................K -106
2.8.12 C-1102 (FS-531/612) ..............................................................................................................................................K -107
xxvi
2.8.13 C-1103 (FS-521) .....................................................................................................................................................K -107
2.8.14 C-1103 (FS-531/612) ..............................................................................................................................................K -108
2.8.15 C-1104 (FS-521) .....................................................................................................................................................K -108
2.8.16 C-1104 (FS-531/612) ..............................................................................................................................................K -108
2.8.17 C-1105 (FS-521) .....................................................................................................................................................K -109
2.8.18 C-1105 (FS-531/612) ..............................................................................................................................................K -109
2.8.19 C-1106 (FS-521) .....................................................................................................................................................K -110
2.8.20 C-1106 (FS-531/612) ..............................................................................................................................................K -110
2.8.21 C-1107 (FS-521) .....................................................................................................................................................K -110
2.8.22 C-1107 (FS-612) .....................................................................................................................................................K -111
2.8.23 C-1108 (FS-521) .....................................................................................................................................................K -111
2.8.24 C-1108 (FS-612) .....................................................................................................................................................K -112
2.8.25 C-1109 (FS-521) .....................................................................................................................................................K -112
2.8.26 C-1109 (FS-531/612) ..............................................................................................................................................K -112
2.8.27 C-1110 (FS-521) .....................................................................................................................................................K -113
2.8.28 C-1110 (FS-531/612) ..............................................................................................................................................K -113
2.8.29 C-1111 (FS-612) .....................................................................................................................................................K -114
2.8.30 C-1112 (FS-612) .....................................................................................................................................................K -114
2.8.31 C-1113 (FS-521) .....................................................................................................................................................K -114
2.8.32 C-1113 (FS-612) .....................................................................................................................................................K -115
2.8.33 C-1114 (FS-612) .....................................................................................................................................................K -115
2.8.34 C-1115 (FS-612) .....................................................................................................................................................K -115
2.8.35 C-1116 (FS-612) .....................................................................................................................................................K -116
2.8.36 C-1124 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -116
2.8.37 C-1125 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -117
2.8.38 C-1126 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -117
2.9 Solution 5 (C-1127_1230) ...................................................................................................................................................K -118
2.9.1 C-1127 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -118
2.9.2 C-1132 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -118
2.9.3 C-1137 (FS-531/612) ................................................................................................................................................K -119
2.9.4 C-1140 (FS-521) .......................................................................................................................................................K -119
2.9.5 C-1141 (FS-521) .......................................................................................................................................................K -119
2.9.6 C-1142 (FS-521) .......................................................................................................................................................K -120
2.9.7 C-1143 (FS-521) .......................................................................................................................................................K -120
2.9.8 C-1144 (FS-521) .......................................................................................................................................................K -121
2.9.9 C-1145 (FS-521) .......................................................................................................................................................K -121
2.9.10 C-1146 (FS-521) .....................................................................................................................................................K -122
2.9.11 C-1147 (FS-521) .....................................................................................................................................................K -122
2.9.12 C-1148 (FS-521) .....................................................................................................................................................K -123
2.9.13 C-1201 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -123
2.9.14 C-1202 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -123
2.9.15 C-1203 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -124
2.9.16 C-1204 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -124
2.9.17 C-1205 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -125
2.9.18 C-1206 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -125
2.9.19 C-1211 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -125
2.9.20 C-1212 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -126
2.9.21 C-1213 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -126
2.9.22 C-1214 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -127
2.9.23 C-1215 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -127
2.9.24 C-1216 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -127
2.9.25 C-1221 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -128
2.9.26 C-1222 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -128
2.9.27 C-1223 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -129
2.9.28 C-1224 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -129
2.9.29 C-1225 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -130
2.9.30 C-1226 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -130
2.9.31 C-1227 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -130
2.9.32 C-1228 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -131
2.9.33 C-1229 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -131
2.9.34 C-1230 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -132
2.10 Solution 6 (C-1231_1270) .................................................................................................................................................K -132
2.10.1 C-1231 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -132
2.10.2 C-1232 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -133
2.10.3 C-1233 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -133
2.10.4 C-1234 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -133
2.10.5 C-1235 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -134
2.10.6 C-1241 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -134
2.10.7 C-1242 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -134
2.10.8 C-1243 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -135
xxvii
2.10.9 C-1244 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -135
2.10.10 C-1245 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -136
2.10.11 C-1246 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -136
2.10.12 C-1247 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -137
2.10.13 C-1248 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -137
2.10.14 C-1249 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -138
2.10.15 C-1250 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -138
2.10.16 C-1251 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -139
2.10.17 C-1252 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -139
2.10.18 C-1253 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -140
2.10.19 C-1254 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -140
2.10.20 C-1255 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -141
2.10.21 C-1256 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -141
2.10.22 C-1257 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -142
2.10.23 C-1258 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -142
2.10.24 C-1259 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -143
2.10.25 C-1260 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -143
2.10.26 C-1261 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -144
2.10.27 C-1262 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -144
2.10.28 C-1263 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -145
2.10.29 C-1264 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -145
2.10.30 C-1265 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -145
2.10.31 C-1266 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -146
2.10.32 C-1267 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -146
2.10.33 C-1268 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -147
2.10.34 C-1269 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -147
2.10.35 C-1270 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -148
2.11 Solution 7 (C-1271_1400) .................................................................................................................................................K -148
2.11.1 C-1271 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -148
2.11.2 C-1272 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -148
2.11.3 C-1273 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -149
2.11.4 C-1275 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -149
2.11.5 C-1281......................................................................................................................................................................K -150
2.11.6 C-1282......................................................................................................................................................................K -150
2.11.7 C-1290 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -150
2.11.8 C-1291 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -151
2.11.9 C-1292 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -151
2.11.10 C-1293 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -151
2.11.11 C-1294 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -152
2.11.12 C-1295 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -152
2.11.13 C-1296 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -153
2.11.14 C-1297 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -153
2.11.15 C-1298 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -153
2.11.16 C-1299 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -154
2.11.17 C-1301 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -154
2.11.18 C-1302 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -155
2.11.19 C-1303 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -155
2.11.20 C-1304 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -155
2.11.21 C-1305 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -156
2.11.22 C-1306 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -156
2.11.23 C-1307 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -156
2.11.24 C-1308 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -156
2.11.25 C-1309 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -157
2.11.26 C-1310 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -157
2.11.27 C-1311 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -157
2.11.28 C-1330 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -158
2.11.29 C-1331 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -158
2.11.30 C-1332 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -159
2.11.31 C-1333 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -159
2.11.32 C-1334 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -159
2.11.33 C-1341....................................................................................................................................................................K -160
2.11.34 C-1342....................................................................................................................................................................K -160
2.11.35 C-1351 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -160
2.11.36 C-1352 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -161
2.11.37 C-1353 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -161
2.11.38 C-1354 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -161
2.11.39 C-1355 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -162
2.11.40 C-1356 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -162
2.11.41 C-1357 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -163
2.11.42 C-1358 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -163
xxviii
2.11.43 C-1359 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -163
2.11.44 C-1360 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -164
2.11.45 C-1361 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -164
2.11.46 C-1364 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -165
2.12 Solution 8 (C-1401_1500) .................................................................................................................................................K -165
2.12.1 C-1402 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -165
2.12.2 C-1403 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -165
2.12.3 C-1404 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -166
2.12.4 C-1406 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -166
2.12.5 C-1407 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -166
2.12.6 C-1408......................................................................................................................................................................K -167
2.12.7 C-1411 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -167
2.12.8 C-1431 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -167
2.12.9 C-1432 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -168
2.12.10 C-1433 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -168
2.12.11 C-1435 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -168
2.12.12 C-1436 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -168
2.12.13 C-1437 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -169
2.12.14 C-1438 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -169
2.12.15 C-1439....................................................................................................................................................................K -169
2.12.16 C-1440 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -170
2.12.17 C-1441 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -170
2.12.18 C-1451 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -171
2.12.19 C-1452 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -171
2.12.20 C-1454 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -171
2.12.21 C-1455 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -171
2.12.22 C-1456....................................................................................................................................................................K -172
2.13 Solution 9 (C-1501_1539) .................................................................................................................................................K -172
2.13.1 C-1501 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -172
2.13.2 C-1502 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -173
2.13.3 C-1504 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -173
2.13.4 C-1505 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -173
2.13.5 C-1506 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -174
2.13.6 C-1507 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -174
2.13.7 C-1508 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -175
2.13.8 C-1509 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -175
2.13.9 C-1510 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -175
2.13.10 C-1511 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -176
2.13.11 C-1512 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -176
2.13.12 C-1513 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -177
2.13.13 C-1514 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -177
2.13.14 C-1515 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -177
2.13.15 C-1516 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -178
2.13.16 C-1517 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -178
2.13.17 C-1518 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -179
2.13.18 C-1519 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -179
2.13.19 C-1520 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -179
2.13.20 C-1521 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -180
2.13.21 C-1522 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -180
2.13.22 C-1523 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -181
2.13.23 C-1524 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -181
2.13.24 C-1525 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -181
2.13.25 C-1526 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -182
2.13.26 C-1527 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -182
2.13.27 C-1528 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -183
2.13.28 C-1530 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -183
2.13.29 C-1531 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -183
2.13.30 C-1532 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -184
2.13.31 C-1534 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -184
2.13.32 C-1537 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -185
2.13.33 C-1538 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -185
2.14 Solution 10 (C-1540_1567) ...............................................................................................................................................K -185
2.14.1 C-1540 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -185
2.14.2 C-1541 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -186
2.14.3 C-1542 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -186
2.14.4 C-1543 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -187
2.14.5 C-1544 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -187
2.14.6 C-1545 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -188
2.14.7 C-1546 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -188
2.14.8 C-1547 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -189
xxix
2.14.9 C-1548 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -189
2.14.10 C-1549 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -190
2.14.11 C-1550 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -190
2.14.12 C-1551 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -191
2.14.13 C-1552 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -191
2.14.14 C-1553 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -192
2.14.15 C-1554 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -192
2.14.16 C-1555 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -193
2.14.17 C-1556 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -193
2.14.18 C-1557 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -194
2.14.19 C-1558 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -194
2.14.20 C-1559 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -195
2.14.21 C-1560 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -195
2.14.22 C-1561 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -196
2.14.23 C-1562 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -196
2.14.24 C-1565 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -197
2.14.25 C-1566 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -197
2.14.26 C-1567 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -198
2.15 Solution 11 (C-2001_2400) ...............................................................................................................................................K -198
2.15.1 C-2001 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -198
2.15.2 C-2003 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -198
2.15.3 C-2004 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -199
2.15.4 C-2006 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -199
2.15.5 C-2201*....................................................................................................................................................................K -199
2.15.6 C-2202*....................................................................................................................................................................K -200
2.15.7 C-2203*....................................................................................................................................................................K -200
2.15.8 C-2204*....................................................................................................................................................................K -200
2.15.9 C-2220 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -201
2.15.10 C-2221 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -201
2.15.11 C-2222 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -202
2.15.12 C-2223 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -202
2.15.13 C-2231*..................................................................................................................................................................K -203
2.15.14 C-2232*..................................................................................................................................................................K -203
2.15.15 C-2233*..................................................................................................................................................................K -203
2.15.16 C-2234*..................................................................................................................................................................K -204
2.15.17 C-2241*..................................................................................................................................................................K -204
2.15.18 C-2242*..................................................................................................................................................................K -205
2.15.19 C-2243*..................................................................................................................................................................K -205
2.15.20 C-2244*..................................................................................................................................................................K -205
2.15.21 C-2301 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -206
2.15.22 C-2302*..................................................................................................................................................................K -206
2.15.23 C-2303*..................................................................................................................................................................K -207
2.15.24 C-2304*..................................................................................................................................................................K -207
2.15.25 C-2305*..................................................................................................................................................................K -207
2.15.26 C-2306*..................................................................................................................................................................K -208
2.16 Solution 12 (C-2401_2500) ...............................................................................................................................................K -208
2.16.1 C-2401 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -208
2.16.2 C-2402 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -208
2.16.3 C-2403 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -209
2.16.4 C-2404 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -209
2.16.5 C-2411 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -209
2.16.6 C-2412 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -210
2.16.7 C-2413 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -210
2.16.8 C-2414 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -210
2.16.9 C-2421 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -211
2.16.10 C-2422 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -211
2.16.11 C-2423 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -211
2.16.12 C-2424 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -212
2.16.13 C-2431 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -212
2.16.14 C-2432 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -213
2.16.15 C-2433 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -213
2.16.16 C-2434 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -213
2.16.17 C-2441 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -214
2.16.18 C-2442 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -214
2.16.19 C-2443 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -215
2.16.20 C-2444 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -215
2.16.21 C-2451 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -216
2.16.22 C-2452 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -216
2.16.23 C-2453 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -216
2.16.24 C-2454 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -217
xxx
2.16.25 C-2470 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -217
2.17 Solution 13 (C-2701_2800) ...............................................................................................................................................K -217
2.17.1 C-2701 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -217
2.17.2 C-2702 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -218
2.17.3 C-2703 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -218
2.17.4 C-2704 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -219
2.17.5 C-2711 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -219
2.17.6 C-2712 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -219
2.17.7 C-2713 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -220
2.17.8 C-2714 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -220
2.17.9 C-2720 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -221
2.17.10 C-2721 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -221
2.18 Solution 14 (C-2801_3000) ...............................................................................................................................................K -221
2.18.1 C-2801 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -221
2.18.2 C-2802 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -222
2.18.3 C-2803 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -222
2.18.4 C-2804 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -223
2.18.5 C-2811 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -223
2.18.6 C-2812 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -223
2.18.7 C-2813 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -224
2.18.8 C-2814 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -224
2.18.9 C-2821 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -225
2.18.10 C-2822 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -225
2.18.11 C-2823 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -225
2.18.12 C-2824 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -226
2.18.13 C-2831 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -226
2.18.14 C-2832 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -227
2.18.15 C-2833 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -227
2.18.16 C-2834 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -228
2.18.17 C-2840 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -228
2.18.18 C-2841 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -228
2.19 Solution 15 (C-3001_3500) ...............................................................................................................................................K -229
2.19.1 C-3101 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -229
2.19.2 C-3102 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -229
2.19.3 C-3103 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -230
2.19.4 C-3301*....................................................................................................................................................................K -230
2.19.5 C-3302*....................................................................................................................................................................K -230
2.19.6 C-3303 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -231
2.19.7 C-3304 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -231
2.20 Solution 16 (C-3501_4000) ...............................................................................................................................................K -231
2.20.1 C-3501*....................................................................................................................................................................K -231
2.20.2 C-3502*....................................................................................................................................................................K -232
2.20.3 C-3503*....................................................................................................................................................................K -232
2.20.4 C-3504*....................................................................................................................................................................K -233
2.20.5 C-3505*....................................................................................................................................................................K -233
2.20.6 C-3506*....................................................................................................................................................................K -234
2.20.7 C-3508*....................................................................................................................................................................K -234
2.20.8 C-3509*....................................................................................................................................................................K -235
2.20.9 C-3801*....................................................................................................................................................................K -236
2.20.10 C-3802*..................................................................................................................................................................K -236
2.20.11 C-3803*..................................................................................................................................................................K -237
2.20.12 C-3804*..................................................................................................................................................................K -237
2.20.13 C-3805*..................................................................................................................................................................K -238
2.20.14 C-3806*..................................................................................................................................................................K -239
2.20.15 C-3901*..................................................................................................................................................................K -239
2.20.16 C-3902*..................................................................................................................................................................K -240
2.20.17 C-3903*..................................................................................................................................................................K -240
2.20.18 C-3904*..................................................................................................................................................................K -241
2.20.19 C-3905*..................................................................................................................................................................K -241
2.20.20 C-3906*..................................................................................................................................................................K -242
2.20.21 C-3907*..................................................................................................................................................................K -242
2.20.22 C-3908*..................................................................................................................................................................K -243
2.20.23 C-3909*..................................................................................................................................................................K -244
2.20.24 C-3910*..................................................................................................................................................................K -244
2.20.25 C-3911*..................................................................................................................................................................K -245
2.20.26 C-3912*..................................................................................................................................................................K -245
2.20.27 C-3913*..................................................................................................................................................................K -246
2.20.28 C-3914*..................................................................................................................................................................K -246
2.20.29 C-3915*..................................................................................................................................................................K -247
2.21 Solution 17 (C-4001_5000) ...............................................................................................................................................K -247
xxxi
2.21.1 C-4101 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -247
2.21.2 C-4102 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -248
2.21.3 C-4103 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -248
2.21.4 C-4104 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -248
2.21.5 C-4111 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -249
2.21.6 C-4112 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -249
2.21.7 C-4113 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -249
2.21.8 C-4114 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -250
2.21.9 C-4120 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -250
2.21.10 C-4301 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -250
2.21.11 C-4501 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -251
2.21.12 C-4502 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -251
2.21.13 C-4503 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -251
2.21.14 C-4504 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -252
2.21.15 C-4511 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -252
2.21.16 C-4512 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -252
2.21.17 C-4513 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -253
2.21.18 C-4514 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -253
2.21.19 C-4520 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -253
2.21.20 C-4521 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -254
2.21.21 C-4522 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -254
2.21.22 C-4545 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -254
2.21.23 C-4546 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -255
2.21.24 C-4547 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -255
2.21.25 C-4548 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -255
2.21.26 C-4601 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -256
2.21.27 C-4602 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -256
2.21.28 C-4603 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -257
2.21.29 C-4604 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -257
2.21.30 C-4621 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -257
2.21.31 C-4622 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -258
2.21.32 C-4623 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -258
2.21.33 C-4624 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -259
2.21.34 C-4631 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -259
2.21.35 C-4632 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -260
2.21.36 C-4633 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -260
2.21.37 C-4634 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -261
2.21.38 C-4651 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -261
2.21.39 C-4652 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -262
2.21.40 C-4653 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -262
2.21.41 C-4654 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -262
2.21.42 C-4661 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -263
2.21.43 C-4662 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -263
2.21.44 C-4663 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -264
2.21.45 C-4701 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -264
2.21.46 C-4702 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -265
2.21.47 C-4703 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -265
2.21.48 C-4705 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -265
2.21.49 C-4706 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -266
2.21.50 C-4708 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -266
2.21.51 C-4709 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -266
2.21.52 C-4713 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -267
2.21.53 C-4714 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -267
2.21.54 C-4715 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -267
2.21.55 C-4716 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -268
2.21.56 C-4717 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -268
2.21.57 C-4718 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -268
2.21.58 C-4719 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -269
2.21.59 C-4720 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -269
2.21.60 C-4721 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -269
2.21.61 C-4722 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -270
2.21.62 C-4723 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -270
2.21.63 C-4724 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -270
2.21.64 C-4725 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -271
2.21.65 C-4840 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -271
2.21.66 C-4850*..................................................................................................................................................................K -271
2.22 Solution 18 (C-5001_6000) ...............................................................................................................................................K -271
2.22.1 C-5001 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -271
2.22.2 C-5002 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -272
2.22.3 C-5003 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -272
xxxii
2.22.4 C-5004 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -273
2.22.5 C-5005 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -273
2.22.6 C-5010 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -273
2.22.7 C-5301 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -274
2.22.8 C-5302 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -274
2.22.9 C-5303 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -274
2.22.10 C-5304 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -275
2.22.11 C-5305 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -275
2.23 Solution 19 (C-6001_7000) ...............................................................................................................................................K -275
2.23.1 C-6101 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -275
2.23.2 C-6102 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -276
2.23.3 C-6301 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -276
2.23.4 C-6701 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -276
2.23.5 C-6702 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -277
2.23.6 C-6703 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -277
2.23.7 C-6704 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -277
2.23.8 C-6705 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -278
2.23.9 C-6706 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -278
2.23.10 C-6707 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -279
2.23.11 C-6708 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -279
2.23.12 C-6709 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -279
2.23.13 C-6710 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -280
2.23.14 C-6711 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -280
2.23.15 C-6712 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -280
2.23.16 C-6713 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -281
2.23.17 C-6714 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -281
2.23.18 C-6715 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -281
2.23.19 C-6716 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -282
2.23.20 C-6717 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -282
2.23.21 C-6720 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -282
2.23.22 C-6721 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -282
2.23.23 C-6722 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -283
2.23.24 C-6723 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -283
2.23.25 C-6724 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -284
2.23.26 C-6725 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -284
2.23.27 C-6801 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -284
2.24 Solution 20 (C-7001_9999) ...............................................................................................................................................K -285
2.24.1 C-7001 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -285
2.24.2 C-8001 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -285
2.24.3 C-8101 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -285
2.24.4 C-8102 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -286
2.24.5 C-8103 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -286
2.24.6 C-8401 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -286
2.24.7 C-8402 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -287
2.24.8 C-8403 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -287
2.24.9 C-8404 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -287
2.24.10 C-8405 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -288
2.24.11 C-8406 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -288
2.24.12 C-8407 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -288
2.25 Solution 20 (C-C001_C200) ..............................................................................................................................................K -289
2.25.1 C-C101 ....................................................................................................................................................................K -289
2.25.2 C-C102 ....................................................................................................................................................................K -289
2.25.3 C-C103 ....................................................................................................................................................................K -289
2.25.4 C-C104 ....................................................................................................................................................................K -290
2.25.5 C-C106 ....................................................................................................................................................................K -290
2.25.6 C-C107 ....................................................................................................................................................................K -290
2.25.7 C-C108 ....................................................................................................................................................................K -291
2.25.8 C-C109 ....................................................................................................................................................................K -291
2.25.9 C-C111 ....................................................................................................................................................................K -291
2.25.10 C-C112 ..................................................................................................................................................................K -292
2.25.11 C-C113 ..................................................................................................................................................................K -292
2.25.12 C-C114 ..................................................................................................................................................................K -292
2.25.13 C-C116 ..................................................................................................................................................................K -293
2.25.14 C-C117...................................................................................................................................................................K -293
2.25.15 C-C118...................................................................................................................................................................K -293
2.25.16 C-C119 ..................................................................................................................................................................K -294
2.25.17 C-C120 ..................................................................................................................................................................K -294
2.26 Solution 22 (C-C201_E100) ..............................................................................................................................................K -294
2.26.1 C-D0E0 ....................................................................................................................................................................K -294
2.26.2 C-D0E1 ....................................................................................................................................................................K -295
xxxiii
2.26.3 C-D0E2 ....................................................................................................................................................................K -295
2.26.4 C-D0E3 ....................................................................................................................................................................K -296
2.26.5 C-D0E4 ....................................................................................................................................................................K -296
2.26.6 C-D0E5 ....................................................................................................................................................................K -296
2.26.7 C-D0E6 ....................................................................................................................................................................K -297
2.26.8 C-D0E7 ....................................................................................................................................................................K -297
2.26.9 C-D0E8 ....................................................................................................................................................................K -297
2.26.10 C-D0EF .................................................................................................................................................................K -298
2.26.11 C-D0F0 ..................................................................................................................................................................K -298
2.26.12 C-DC## .................................................................................................................................................................K -299
2.26.13 C-E001 ..................................................................................................................................................................K -299
2.26.14 C-E002 ..................................................................................................................................................................K -299
2.26.15 C-E003 ..................................................................................................................................................................K -300
2.26.16 C-E004 ..................................................................................................................................................................K -300
2.26.17 C-E005 ..................................................................................................................................................................K -300
2.26.18 C-E006 ..................................................................................................................................................................K -301
2.26.19 C-E007 ..................................................................................................................................................................K -301
2.26.20 C-E008 ..................................................................................................................................................................K -301
2.26.21 C-E009 ..................................................................................................................................................................K -302
3. TROUBLES THAT DO NOT DISPLAY THE MALFUNCTION CODE ...................................................................K -303
3.1 The power of main body does not turn ON ..........................................................................................................................K -303
3.1.1 Turn ON the main power switch but the power LED of the operation panel does not light up in red ........................K -303
3.1.2 Turn ON the main power switch and the sub power switch, but the touch panel does not display anything ............K -303
3.1.3 Turn ON the sub power switch but the power LED does not switch from red to green .............................................K -303
3.2 The power is not supplied to DF ..........................................................................................................................................K -304
3.3 The power is not supplied to the paper feed option .............................................................................................................K -304
3.3.1 PF-602 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -304
3.3.2 LU-202 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -304
3.4 The power is not supplied to the finishing option .................................................................................................................K -305
3.4.1 RU-509 ......................................................................................................................................................................K -305
3.4.2 LS-505 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -305
3.4.3 FD-503 ......................................................................................................................................................................K -305
3.4.4 FS-521 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -306
3.4.5 FS-531 /FS-612 .........................................................................................................................................................K -306
3.4.6 SD-506 ......................................................................................................................................................................K -306
3.4.7 PB-503 ......................................................................................................................................................................K -307
4. IMAGE TROUBLE .................................................................................................................................................K -308
4.1 Initial check point .................................................................................................................................................................K -308
4.1.1 Initial check items ......................................................................................................................................................K -308
4.2 Printer system procedure ....................................................................................................................................................K -309
4.2.1 Printer system: White stripe, white band, color stripe, color band in sub scan direction ...........................................K -309
4.2.2 Printer system : White stripe, white band, color stripe, color band in main scan direction ........................................K -311
4.2.3 Printer system: Image memory, Size memory ..........................................................................................................K -312
4.2.4 Printer system: Uneven density in sub scan direction ...............................................................................................K -313
4.2.5 Printer system: Uneven density in main scan direction .............................................................................................K -315
4.2.6 Printer system: Light density (ID lowering) ................................................................................................................K -317
4.2.7 Printer system: Pitch unevenness .............................................................................................................................K -319
4.2.8 Printer system: Gray background ..............................................................................................................................K -320
4.2.9 Printer system: Void areas, White spots ...................................................................................................................K -321
4.2.10 Printer system : Color spots ....................................................................................................................................K -323
4.2.11 Printer system: Moire ..............................................................................................................................................K -324
4.2.12 Printer system: Gradation error ...............................................................................................................................K -325
4.2.13 Printer system: Image blurring ................................................................................................................................K -326
4.2.14 Printer system: Color reproducibility error ...............................................................................................................K -327
4.2.15 Printer system: Color registration error ...................................................................................................................K -328
4.2.16 Printer system: Brush effect, Image bleeding ..........................................................................................................K -329
4.2.17 Printer system: Inky backside ..................................................................................................................................K -330
4.2.18 Printer system: Poor fusing performance, Offset ....................................................................................................K -331
4.2.19 Printer system: Blank print, Black print ....................................................................................................................K -331
4.2.20 Printer system: Uneven gloss, Rough gloss ............................................................................................................K -332
4.2.21 Printer system: Darker at trailing edge of paper ......................................................................................................K -332
4.2.22 Printer system: Ripple unevenness (solid section of red and blue) .........................................................................K -333
4.2.23 Printer system: Image erasure at trailing edge of thick paper .................................................................................K -333
4.3 Scanner system procedure ..................................................................................................................................................K -334
4.3.1 Scanner system: White stripe, white band, color stripe, color band in sub scan direction ........................................K -334
4.3.2 Scanner system: White stripe, white band, color stripe, color band in main scan direction ......................................K -335
4.3.3 Scanner system: Color spots ....................................................................................................................................K -336
4.3.4 Scanner system: Gray background ...........................................................................................................................K -336
4.3.5 Scanner system: Blurred image, brush effect ...........................................................................................................K -337
4.3.6 Scanner system: Color registration error, out of synchronization (Stripe in main scan direction) .............................K -337
xxxiv
4.3.7 Scanner system: Moire ..............................................................................................................................................K -338
4.3.8 Scanner system: Leaning image ...............................................................................................................................K -338
4.3.9 Scanner system: Image distortion..............................................................................................................................K -339
4.3.10 Scanner system: Low image density, Rough image ...............................................................................................K -339
4.3.11 Scanner system: ACS malfunction ..........................................................................................................................K -340
4.3.12 Scanner system: Blank copy, black copy ................................................................................................................K -340
4.3.13 Scanner system: Image abnormality .......................................................................................................................K -341
4.3.14 Scanner system: Uneven density ............................................................................................................................K -341
4.3.15 Scanner system: Faulty density difference between original and copy output ........................................................K -342
4.3.16 Scanner system: Tone difference between original and copy output ......................................................................K -343
5. TROUBLESHOOTING (IC-601).............................................................................................................................K -345
5.1 IC malfunction code list .......................................................................................................................................................K -345
5.2 IC solution ............................................................................................................................................................................K -348
5.2.1 00-001........................................................................................................................................................................K -348
5.2.2 00-002........................................................................................................................................................................K -348
5.2.3 00-003........................................................................................................................................................................K -348
5.2.4 00-004........................................................................................................................................................................K -348
5.2.5 00-005........................................................................................................................................................................K -349
5.2.6 00-010........................................................................................................................................................................K -349
5.2.7 00-011........................................................................................................................................................................K -349
5.2.8 00-012........................................................................................................................................................................K -350
5.2.9 00-013........................................................................................................................................................................K -350
5.2.10 00-014......................................................................................................................................................................K -350
5.2.11 00-015......................................................................................................................................................................K -351
5.2.12 00-017......................................................................................................................................................................K -351
5.2.13 00-020......................................................................................................................................................................K -351
5.2.14 00-021......................................................................................................................................................................K -352
5.2.15 30-001......................................................................................................................................................................K -352
5.2.16 30-002......................................................................................................................................................................K -352
5.2.17 30-003......................................................................................................................................................................K -353
5.2.18 30-010......................................................................................................................................................................K -353
5.2.19 40-001......................................................................................................................................................................K -353
5.2.20 40-002......................................................................................................................................................................K -353
5.2.21 40-003......................................................................................................................................................................K -354
5.2.22 40-004......................................................................................................................................................................K -354
5.2.23 40-005......................................................................................................................................................................K -354
5.2.24 40-006......................................................................................................................................................................K -355
5.2.25 40-007......................................................................................................................................................................K -355
5.2.26 40-008......................................................................................................................................................................K -355
5.2.27 40-009......................................................................................................................................................................K -356
5.2.28 40-010......................................................................................................................................................................K -356
5.2.29 40-011......................................................................................................................................................................K -356
5.2.30 40-012......................................................................................................................................................................K -357
5.2.31 40-013......................................................................................................................................................................K -357
5.2.32 40-014......................................................................................................................................................................K -357
5.2.33 40-015......................................................................................................................................................................K -358
5.2.34 40-016......................................................................................................................................................................K -358
5.2.35 40-017......................................................................................................................................................................K -358
5.2.36 40-018......................................................................................................................................................................K -359
5.2.37 40-019......................................................................................................................................................................K -359
5.2.38 40-020......................................................................................................................................................................K -359
5.2.39 40-021......................................................................................................................................................................K -360
5.2.40 40-022......................................................................................................................................................................K -360
5.2.41 40-023......................................................................................................................................................................K -360
5.2.42 40-024......................................................................................................................................................................K -361
5.2.43 40-025......................................................................................................................................................................K -361
5.2.44 40-026......................................................................................................................................................................K -362
5.2.45 40-027......................................................................................................................................................................K -362
5.2.46 40-028......................................................................................................................................................................K -362
5.2.47 40-029......................................................................................................................................................................K -363
5.2.48 40-030......................................................................................................................................................................K -363
5.2.49 40-031......................................................................................................................................................................K -363
6. TROUBLESHOOTING (GP)...................................................................................................................................K -365
6.1 TROUBLESHOOTING (GP-501)..........................................................................................................................................K -365
6.2 Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................................................K -365
6.2.1 Troubleshooting..........................................................................................................................................................K -365
6.2.2 General.......................................................................................................................................................................K -365
6.2.3 Back Gauge................................................................................................................................................................K -366
6.2.4 Die Set........................................................................................................................................................................K -366
6.3 Initial Service Action.............................................................................................................................................................K -366
xxxv
6.3.1 Initial Service Action...................................................................................................................................................K -366
6.4 Mis-Feed Service Action.......................................................................................................................................................K -366
6.4.1 Mis-Feed Service Action............................................................................................................................................K -366
6.5 Final Service Action..............................................................................................................................................................K -369
6.5.1 Final Service Action....................................................................................................................................................K -369
L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING ...............................................................................L -1

1. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING .....................................................................................................................................L -1
1.1 bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, bizhub PRO C6000L.......................................................................................L -1
1.1.1 Main body rear side 1 ....................................................................................................................................................L -1
1.1.5 Main body right side .......................................................................................................................................................L -3
1.1.6 Main body left side .........................................................................................................................................................L -3
1.1.7 Main body upper surface ...............................................................................................................................................L -4
1.1.8 Main body front side ......................................................................................................................................................L -4
1.1.9 Write section ..................................................................................................................................................................L -5
1.1.10 Process unit .................................................................................................................................................................L -5
1.1.11 Developing section ......................................................................................................................................................L -6
1.1.12 Image correction unit section .......................................................................................................................................L -6
1.1.13 Toner supply section ....................................................................................................................................................L -6
1.1.14 Paper feed tray ............................................................................................................................................................L -7
1.1.15 Vertical conveyance section ........................................................................................................................................L -8
1.1.16 Duplex section 1 ..........................................................................................................................................................L -8
1.1.17 Duplex section 2 ..........................................................................................................................................................L -9
1.1.18 Fusing section1 ............................................................................................................................................................L -9
1.1.19 Fusing section2 ..........................................................................................................................................................L -10
1.1.20 Operation panel section .............................................................................................................................................L -10
1.1.21 OT ..............................................................................................................................................................................L -11
1.1.22 HD-514 ......................................................................................................................................................................L -11
1.2 DF-622 ...................................................................................................................................................................................L -12
1.3 PF-602/HT-504/505 ...............................................................................................................................................................L -12
1.3.1 Configuration front side ................................................................................................................................................L -12
1.3.2 Configuration rear side ................................................................................................................................................L -13
1.3.3 Vertical conveyance section ........................................................................................................................................L -13
1.3.4 Horizontal conveyance section ....................................................................................................................................L -14
1.3.5 Tray section 1 ..............................................................................................................................................................L -14
1.3.6 Tray section2 ...............................................................................................................................................................L -15
1.4 LU-202/HT-503 ......................................................................................................................................................................L -16
1.4.1 Paper feed/up/down section ........................................................................................................................................L -16
1.4.2 Inside the machine .......................................................................................................................................................L -16
1.4.3 HT-503 .........................................................................................................................................................................L -17
1.5 MB-504 ..................................................................................................................................................................................L -17
1.5.1 Paper feed section .......................................................................................................................................................L -17
1.5.2 Tray section .................................................................................................................................................................L -17
1.6 RU-509/HM-102 .....................................................................................................................................................................L -18
1.6.1 Right side .....................................................................................................................................................................L -18
1.6.2 Left-side view ...............................................................................................................................................................L -19
1.6.3 Rear side 1 ..................................................................................................................................................................L -20
1.6.4 Rear side2 ...................................................................................................................................................................L -21
1.6.5 Humidification section front side ..................................................................................................................................L -22
1.6.6 Humidification section rear side ...................................................................................................................................L -22
1.6.7 Output paper density detection section .......................................................................................................................L -23
1.7 FS-521 ...................................................................................................................................................................................L -24
1.7.1 Rear side 1 ..................................................................................................................................................................L -24
1.7.2 Rear side2 ...................................................................................................................................................................L -24
1.7.3 Front side .....................................................................................................................................................................L -25
1.7.4 Stacker inside 1 ...........................................................................................................................................................L -25
1.7.5 Stacker inside2 ............................................................................................................................................................L -26
1.7.6 Stapler .........................................................................................................................................................................L -26
1.7.7 Paper exit alignment ....................................................................................................................................................L -27
1.8 FS-531 ...................................................................................................................................................................................L -27
1.8.1 Front side .....................................................................................................................................................................L -27
1.8.2 Rear side .....................................................................................................................................................................L -28
1.8.3 Stacker section rear side .............................................................................................................................................L -28
1.8.4 Stapler section .............................................................................................................................................................L -29
1.9 FS-612 ...................................................................................................................................................................................L -29
1.9.1 Front side .....................................................................................................................................................................L -29
1.9.2 Rear side .....................................................................................................................................................................L -30
xxxvi
1.9.3 Folding section .............................................................................................................................................................L -30
1.9.4 Stapler section .............................................................................................................................................................L -31
1.10 PK-512/513 ..........................................................................................................................................................................L -31
1.11 PI-502 ..................................................................................................................................................................................L -32
1.12 LS-505 .................................................................................................................................................................................L -32
1.12.1 Front side ...................................................................................................................................................................L -32
1.12.2 Upper surface ............................................................................................................................................................L -33
1.12.3 Rear side ...................................................................................................................................................................L -33
1.12.4 Shift unit .....................................................................................................................................................................L -34
1.13 FD-503 .................................................................................................................................................................................L -34
1.13.1 Conveyance section front side/right side ...................................................................................................................L -34
1.13.2 Major boards in the power source section .................................................................................................................L -35
1.13.3 Conveyance section rear side/left side ......................................................................................................................L -35
1.13.4 PI rear side ................................................................................................................................................................L -36
1.13.5 PI upper surface ........................................................................................................................................................L -36
1.13.6 PI lower tray ...............................................................................................................................................................L -36
1.13.7 Punch section ............................................................................................................................................................L -37
1.13.8 Folding unit front side/right side .................................................................................................................................L -37
1.13.9 Folding unit rear side/left side ....................................................................................................................................L -38
1.14 SD-506 .................................................................................................................................................................................L -38
1.14.1 Horizontal conveyance section ..................................................................................................................................L -38
1.14.2 Right angle conveyance section ................................................................................................................................L -39
1.14.3 Folding section ...........................................................................................................................................................L -39
1.14.4 Saddle stitching section .............................................................................................................................................L -42
1.14.5 Bundle processing section .........................................................................................................................................L -44
1.14.6 Trimmer section .........................................................................................................................................................L -45
1.14.7 Left-side view .............................................................................................................................................................L -46
1.14.8 Front side ...................................................................................................................................................................L -46
1.14.9 Rear side ...................................................................................................................................................................L -47
1.15 PB-503 .................................................................................................................................................................................L -47
1.15.1 SC section .................................................................................................................................................................L -47
1.15.2 Clamp section ............................................................................................................................................................L -48
1.15.3 Pellet supply section ..................................................................................................................................................L -49
1.15.4 Glue tank section .......................................................................................................................................................L -50
1.15.5 Cover paper supply section .......................................................................................................................................L -51
1.15.6 Cover paper table section ..........................................................................................................................................L -52
1.15.7 Book stock section .....................................................................................................................................................L -53
1.15.8 Conveyance section and framework section .............................................................................................................L -54
1.15.9 Relay conveyance section .........................................................................................................................................L -56
1.16 IC-601 ..................................................................................................................................................................................L -57
1.17 RU-506..................................................................................................................................................................................L -57
1.17.1 Stacker section (front side).........................................................................................................................................L -57
1.17.2 Stacker section (front side).........................................................................................................................................L -57
1.17.3 Rear side....................................................................................................................................................................L -58
1.18 GP-501..................................................................................................................................................................................L -59
1.18.1 Rear side 1/Right side 1.............................................................................................................................................L -59
1.18.2 Rear side 2/Left side...................................................................................................................................................L -59
1.18.3 Right side 2.................................................................................................................................................................L -60
1.18.4 Front side....................................................................................................................................................................L -60
1.18.5 Bypass conveyance section.......................................................................................................................................L -60
1.18.6 Punch conveyance section.........................................................................................................................................L -61
2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING IN BOARD .....................................................................................................L -63
2.1 bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, bizhub PRO C6000L.....................................................................................L -63
2.1.1 Color registration board /Fr, /Rr (CRB/Fr, /Rr) .............................................................................................................L -63
2.1.2 High voltage unit /1 (HV1) ............................................................................................................................................L -63
2.1.3 High voltage unit /2 (HV2) ............................................................................................................................................L -64
2.1.4 DC power supply /1 (DCPS1) ......................................................................................................................................L -64
2.1.5 DC power supply /2 (DCPS2) ......................................................................................................................................L -64
2.1.6 AC drive board (ACDB) ...............................................................................................................................................L -65
2.1.7 Toner supply drive board (TSDB) ................................................................................................................................L -65
2.1.8 Conveyance drive board (CDB) ...................................................................................................................................L -65
2.1.9 Printer control board (PRCB) .......................................................................................................................................L -66
2.1.10 Overall control board (OACB) ....................................................................................................................................L -67
2.1.11 Fusing control board /1 (FUSCB1) (Only for Europe) ................................................................................................L -67
2.1.12 Fusing control board /2 (FUSCB2) (Only for Europe) ................................................................................................L -67
2.1.13 CCD board (CCDB) ...................................................................................................................................................L -68
2.1.14 Printer image processing board (PRIPB) ...................................................................................................................L -68
2.1.15 Scanner image processing board (SCIPB) ................................................................................................................L -68
2.1.16 Memory control board /1 (MCB1) ..............................................................................................................................L -69
2.1.17 NVRAM board (NRB) .................................................................................................................................................L -69
xxxvii
2.1.18 Relay board /U (RBU) ................................................................................................................................................L -69
2.1.19 Scanner drive board (SCDB) .....................................................................................................................................L -70
2.1.20 Scanner inverter board (S_INVB) ..............................................................................................................................L -70
2.1.21 Operation board /1 .....................................................................................................................................................L -70
2.1.24 Operation inverter ......................................................................................................................................................L -72
2.1.25 LCD board (LCDB) ....................................................................................................................................................L -72
2.1.26 Memory control board /P (MCB/P) .............................................................................................................................L -72
2.2 DF-622 ...................................................................................................................................................................................L -73
2.2.1 DF control board (DFCB) .............................................................................................................................................L -73
2.2.2 Size sensor board (SSB) .............................................................................................................................................L -73
2.3 PF-602/HT-504/505 ...............................................................................................................................................................L -73
2.3.1 PF drive board (PFDB) ................................................................................................................................................L -73
2.4 LU-202/HT-503 ......................................................................................................................................................................L -74
2.4.1 LU drive board (LUDB) ................................................................................................................................................L -74
2.4.2 AC drive board (ACDB) ...............................................................................................................................................L -74
2.5 RU-509/HM-102 .....................................................................................................................................................................L -74
2.5.1 RU control board (RUCB).............................................................................................................................................L -74
2.5.2 HM drive board (HMDB) ..............................................................................................................................................L -75
2.5.3 DC power supply (DCPS) ............................................................................................................................................L -75
2.5.4 Color density detection board /Y, /M, /C, /K (CDDBY, CDDBM, CDDBC, CDDBK) ....................................................L -75
2.5.5 Color density control board (CDCB) ............................................................................................................................L -76
2.5.6 Color density relay board (CDRLB) .............................................................................................................................L -76
2.5.7 Jam indication board (JAMIB) ......................................................................................................................................L -76
2.6 FS-521 ...................................................................................................................................................................................L -77
2.6.1 FNS control board (FNSCB) ........................................................................................................................................L -77
2.6.2 FNS drive board (FNSDB) ...........................................................................................................................................L -77
2.6.3 Stapler board (STB) .....................................................................................................................................................L -77
2.6.4 Operation board (OB) ..................................................................................................................................................L -78
2.6.5 Jam indication board (JAMIB) ......................................................................................................................................L -78
2.7 FS-531 ...................................................................................................................................................................................L -78
2.7.2 Relay board (RB) .........................................................................................................................................................L -78
2.8 FS-612 ...................................................................................................................................................................................L -79
2.8.2 Relay board (RB) .........................................................................................................................................................L -79
2.9 PK-512/513.............................................................................................................................................................................L -79
2.9.1 Punch drive board (PDB)..............................................................................................................................................L -79
2.9.2 Paper size sensor board...............................................................................................................................................L -79
2.10 PI-502 ..................................................................................................................................................................................L -80
2.10.1 PI drive board (PIDB) .................................................................................................................................................L -80
2.10.2 PI operation board (PIOB) .........................................................................................................................................L -80
2.11 LS-505 .................................................................................................................................................................................L -80
2.11.1 LS control board (LSCB) ............................................................................................................................................L -80
2.11.2 Relay board /1 (RLB/1) ..............................................................................................................................................L -80
2.11.3 Relay board /2 (RLB/2) ..............................................................................................................................................L -80
2.11.4 DC power supply (DCPS) ..........................................................................................................................................L -81
2.11.5 Relay board (RLB) .....................................................................................................................................................L -81
2.12 FD-503 .................................................................................................................................................................................L -81
2.12.1 FD control board (FDCB) ...........................................................................................................................................L -81
2.12.2 Punch drive board (PDB) ...........................................................................................................................................L -82
2.12.3 Folding drive board (FDB) .........................................................................................................................................L -82
2.12.4 PI drive board (PIDB) .................................................................................................................................................L -82
2.12.5 FD operation board (FDOB) ......................................................................................................................................L -83
2.12.6 Jam indication board (JAMIB) ....................................................................................................................................L -83
2.12.7 DC power supply (DCPS) ..........................................................................................................................................L -83
2.12.8 Multi feed detection board /1, /2 (MFDB1, 2) .............................................................................................................L -83
2.13 SD-506 .................................................................................................................................................................................L -84
2.13.1 SD control board (SDCB) ..........................................................................................................................................L -84
2.13.2 SD drive board (SDDB) .............................................................................................................................................L -84
2.13.3 SD drive board /2 (SDDB/2) ......................................................................................................................................L -85
2.13.4 DC power supply /1 (DCPS1) ....................................................................................................................................L -85
2.13.7 Jam indication board /1 (JAMIB/1) .............................................................................................................................L -85
2.13.8 Jam indication board /2 (JAMIB/2) .............................................................................................................................L -86
2.14 PB-503 .................................................................................................................................................................................L -86
2.14.1 PB control board (PBCB) ...........................................................................................................................................L -86
2.14.2 AC drive board (ACDB) .............................................................................................................................................L -86
xxxviii
2.14.3 PB drive board /1 (PBDB1) ........................................................................................................................................L -87
2.14.6 Jam indication board /1 (JAMB1) ...............................................................................................................................L -88
2.14.7 Jam indication board /2 (JAMB2) ...............................................................................................................................L -88
2.14.8 Manual operation board (OB1) ..................................................................................................................................L -88
2.14.9 Booklet stock operation board (OB2) .........................................................................................................................L -88
2.14.10 DC power supply /1 (DCPU/1) .................................................................................................................................L -88
2.15 IC-601 ..................................................................................................................................................................................L -90
2.15.1 System control board (SCB) ......................................................................................................................................L -90
2.15.2 Video interface board (VIB) .......................................................................................................................................L -90
2.16 RU-506..................................................................................................................................................................................L -90
2.16.1 RU control board (RUCB)...........................................................................................................................................L -90
2.16.2 Jam indication board (JAMIB).....................................................................................................................................L -91
2.17 GP-501..................................................................................................................................................................................L -91
2.17.1 Punch Controller PCB.................................................................................................................................................L -91
3. RELAY CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING ...........................................................................................................L -92
3.1 bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, bizhub PRO C6000L.....................................................................................L -92
3.1.1 Main body front side.....................................................................................................................................................L -92
3.1.2 Main body upper surface..............................................................................................................................................L -93
3.1.3 Main body right side -1.................................................................................................................................................L -93
3.1.4 Main body right side -2.................................................................................................................................................L -94
3.1.5 Main body left side -1....................................................................................................................................................L -94
3.1.6 Main body left side -2....................................................................................................................................................L -95
3.1.7 Main body rear side -1..................................................................................................................................................L -95
3.1.8 Main body rear side -2..................................................................................................................................................L -96
3.1.9 Process unit..................................................................................................................................................................L -96
3.1.10 Duplex section............................................................................................................................................................L -97
3.1.11 Fusing unit..................................................................................................................................................................L -97
3.1.12 Tray.............................................................................................................................................................................L -98
3.1.13 HD-514.......................................................................................................................................................................L -99
3.2 SD-506 .................................................................................................................................................................................L -100
3.2.1 Right side ...................................................................................................................................................................L -100
3.2.2 Left side .....................................................................................................................................................................L -101
3.2.3 Rear side-1 ................................................................................................................................................................L -102
3.2.4 Rear side-2 ................................................................................................................................................................L -102
3.2.5 Folding section ...........................................................................................................................................................L -103
3.2.6 Saddle stitching section-1 ..........................................................................................................................................L -104
3.2.7 Saddle stitching section-2 ..........................................................................................................................................L -104
3.3 PB-503 .................................................................................................................................................................................L -105
3.3.1 Rear side-1 ................................................................................................................................................................L -105
3.3.2 Rear side 2 ................................................................................................................................................................L -106
3.3.3 Rear side 3 ................................................................................................................................................................L -107
3.3.4 Rear side 4 ................................................................................................................................................................L -108
3.3.5 Rear side 5 ................................................................................................................................................................L -109
3.3.6 Front side ...................................................................................................................................................................L -110
3.3.7 Sub compile (SC) section ..........................................................................................................................................L -110
3.3.8 Clamp section ............................................................................................................................................................L -111
3.3.9 Cover paper supply section .......................................................................................................................................L -111
3.3.10 Cover paper table section ........................................................................................................................................L -112
3.3.11 Book stock section ...................................................................................................................................................L -112
3.3.12 Conveyance section ................................................................................................................................................L -113
3.3.13 Pellet supply section ................................................................................................................................................L -113
3.3.14 Relay conveyance section .......................................................................................................................................L -113
M TIMING CHART..........................................................................................................................M -1
1. bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, bizhub PRO C6000L.......................................................................M -1
1.1 Time chart when turning ON the power (in the morning) ........................................................................................................M -1
1.2 Time chart when turning ON the power (not in the morning) ..................................................................................................M -2
1.3 Full color, full size, DF 1-sided 2 sheets of original, duplex print, paper tray 1 paper feed .....................................................M -3
2. DF-622 ......................................................................................................................................................................M -4
2.1 Timing chart of the simplex mode (Reverse exit) ....................................................................................................................M -4
2.1.1 Operation condition .......................................................................................................................................................M -4
2.1.2 Timing chart ..................................................................................................................................................................M -4
2.2 Timing chart of the duplex mode .............................................................................................................................................M -4
xxxix
2.2.2 Timing chart ..................................................................................................................................................................M -5
3. PF-602 ......................................................................................................................................................................M -6
3.1 Tray5, A4, 2 sheets of original ................................................................................................................................................M -6
4. LU-202 ......................................................................................................................................................................M -7
4.1 A4, simplex, 2 sheets ..............................................................................................................................................................M -7
4.2 A3, simplex, 2 sheets ..............................................................................................................................................................M -7
5. RU-509/HM-102 ........................................................................................................................................................M -8
5.1 Timing chart of the humidifier OFF mode (bypass conveyance) ............................................................................................M -8
5.1.2 Timing chart ..................................................................................................................................................................M -8
5.2 Timing chart of the humidification mode .................................................................................................................................M -8
5.2.2 Timing chart ..................................................................................................................................................................M -8
6. FS-521 ......................................................................................................................................................................M -9
6.1 Timing chart of the sort mode .................................................................................................................................................M -9
6.1.2 Timing chart ..................................................................................................................................................................M -9
6.2 Timing chart of the sub tray mode ..........................................................................................................................................M -9
6.2.2 Timing chart ................................................................................................................................................................M -10
6.3 Timing chart of the staple mode ............................................................................................................................................M -10
6.3.1 Operation condition .....................................................................................................................................................M -10
6.3.2 Timing chart ................................................................................................................................................................M -11
7. FS-531 ....................................................................................................................................................................M -12
7.1 Timing chart of the sort mode ...............................................................................................................................................M -12
7.1.2 Timing chart ................................................................................................................................................................M -12
7.2 Timing chart of the flat-stapling mode ...................................................................................................................................M -12
7.2.2 Timing chart ................................................................................................................................................................M -13
8. FS-612 ....................................................................................................................................................................M -14
8.1 Timing chart of the sort mode ...............................................................................................................................................M -14
8.1.2 Timing chart ................................................................................................................................................................M -14
8.2 Timing chart of the flat-stapling mode ...................................................................................................................................M -14
8.2.2 Timing chart ................................................................................................................................................................M -15
8.3 Timing chart of the saddle stitching mode ............................................................................................................................M -15
8.3.2 Timing chart ................................................................................................................................................................M -16
8.4 Timing chart of the tri-folding mode ......................................................................................................................................M -16
8.4.2 Timing chart ................................................................................................................................................................M -17
9. PK-512.....................................................................................................................................................................M -18
9.1 Punch, 2 flat stitching staples, A4, 2 originals, 3 copies, Single side.....................................................................................M -18
10. PK-513...................................................................................................................................................................M -19
10.1 Punch, 2 flat stitching staples, A4, 2 originals, 3 copies, Single side...................................................................................M -19
11. PI-502 ...................................................................................................................................................................M -20
11.1 Timing chart of the PI automatic paper feed mode .............................................................................................................M -20
11.1.1 Operation condition ...................................................................................................................................................M -20
11.1.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -20
12. LS-505 ..................................................................................................................................................................M -21
12.1 Timing chart of the straight mode .......................................................................................................................................M -21
12.1.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -21
12.2 Timing chart of the shift mode .............................................................................................................................................M -21
12.2.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -22
12.3 Timing chart of the sub tray mode ......................................................................................................................................M -22
12.3.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -23
12.4 Timing chart of the coupling mode ......................................................................................................................................M -23
12.4.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -24
13. FD-503 ..................................................................................................................................................................M -25
13.1 Timing chart of the letter fold-in mode ................................................................................................................................M -25
xl
13.1.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -25
13.2 Timing chart of the letter fold-out mode ..............................................................................................................................M -25
13.2.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -26
13.3 Timing chart of the double parallel mode ............................................................................................................................M -26
13.3.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -27
13.4 Timing chart of the half-folding mode ..................................................................................................................................M -27
13.4.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -28
13.5 Timing chart of the gate fold mode .....................................................................................................................................M -28
13.5.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -29
13.6 Timing chart of the Z-fold mode ..........................................................................................................................................M -29
13.6.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -30
13.7 Timing chart of the PI cover paper insertion mode .............................................................................................................M -30
13.7.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -31
13.8 Timing chart of the punch mode .........................................................................................................................................M -31
13.8.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -32
14. SD-506 ..................................................................................................................................................................M -33
14.1 Timing chart of the straight mode .......................................................................................................................................M -33
14.1.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -33
14.2 Timing chart of the sub tray mode ......................................................................................................................................M -33
14.2.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -34
14.3 Timing chart of the overlap tri-folding mode ........................................................................................................................M -34
14.3.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -35
14.4 Timing chart of the saddle stitching (trimmer) mode ...........................................................................................................M -36
14.4.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -37
15. PB-503 ..................................................................................................................................................................M -39
15.1 Timing chart of the sub tray paper exit mode ......................................................................................................................M -39
15.1.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -39
15.2 Timing chart of the perfect binding mode (PB cover paper supply) ....................................................................................M -39
15.2.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -40
15.3 Timing chart of the perfect binding mode (Main body cover paper supply) ........................................................................M -40
15.3.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -41
15.4 Timing chart of the relay conveyance mode .......................................................................................................................M -41
15.4.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -42
16. RU-506..................................................................................................................................................................M -43
16.1 Timing chart of the punch mode (GP-501)...........................................................................................................................M -43
16.1.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -43
N WIRING DIAGRAM .....................................................................................................................N -1

1. bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, bizhub PRO C6000L........................................................................N -1
1.1 bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, bizhub PRO C6000L (1/3)..............................................................................N -1
1.4 bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, bizhub PRO C6000L (1/3-1)..........................................................................N -1
1.10 bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, bizhub PRO C6000L (2/3-3)........................................................................N -1
xli
2. DF-622 ......................................................................................................................................................................N -2
3. PF-602 ......................................................................................................................................................................N -3
4. LU-202 ......................................................................................................................................................................N -4
5. RU-509/HM-102 ........................................................................................................................................................N -5
6. FS-521 ......................................................................................................................................................................N -6
7. FS-531 ......................................................................................................................................................................N -7
8. FS-612 ......................................................................................................................................................................N -8
9. PK-512/513................................................................................................................................................................N -9
10. PI-502 ....................................................................................................................................................................N -10
11. LS-505 ...................................................................................................................................................................N -11
12. FD-503 ..................................................................................................................................................................N -12
13. SD-506 ..................................................................................................................................................................N -13
13.1 SD-506 ................................................................................................................................................................................N -13
13.2 SD-506 (1/4) ........................................................................................................................................................................N -13
13.3 SD-506 (2/4) ........................................................................................................................................................................N -13
13.4 SD-506 (3/4) ........................................................................................................................................................................N -13
13.5 SD-506 (4/4) ........................................................................................................................................................................N -13
14. PB-503 ..................................................................................................................................................................N -14
14.1 PB-503 ................................................................................................................................................................................N -14
14.2 PB-503 (1/4) ........................................................................................................................................................................N -14
14.3 PB-503 (2/4) ........................................................................................................................................................................N -14
14.4 PB-503 (3/4) ........................................................................................................................................................................N -14
14.5 PB-503 (4/4) ........................................................................................................................................................................N -14
15. IC-601 ...................................................................................................................................................................N -15
16. RU-506...................................................................................................................................................................N -16
17. GP-501...................................................................................................................................................................N -17
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, bizhub PRO C6000L. . .
O -1
1. INTERFACE SECTION..............................................................................................................................................O -1
1.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................O -1
1.1.1 Main body right side ......................................................................................................................................................O -1
1.1.2 Main body upper side ....................................................................................................................................................O -1
2. SCANNER SECTION................................................................................................................................................O -2
2.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................O -2
2.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................O -2
2.3 Operation ................................................................................................................................................................................O -2
2.3.1 Control when the sub power is turned ON ....................................................................................................................O -2
2.3.2 Control when the start button is turned ON ...................................................................................................................O -3
2.3.3 Original reading area ....................................................................................................................................................O -5
2.3.4 Original size detection control .......................................................................................................................................O -5
2.3.5 AE/ACS control .............................................................................................................................................................O -6
2.3.6 Image processing ..........................................................................................................................................................O -6
3. WRITING SECTION..................................................................................................................................................O -7
3.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................O -7
3.2 Operation ................................................................................................................................................................................O -8
3.2.1 Exposure path ...............................................................................................................................................................O -8
3.2.2 Writing control ...............................................................................................................................................................O -8
3.2.3 Writing area ...................................................................................................................................................................O -9
3.2.4 Color registration control ...............................................................................................................................................O -9
3.2.5 Front/back sides skew correction in main scan direction ............................................................................................O -12
3.2.6 Back side magnification adjustment in sub scan direction ..........................................................................................O -12
3.2.7 Image stabilization control ..........................................................................................................................................O -12
4. PHOTO CONDUCTOR SECTION...........................................................................................................................O -13
4.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................O -13
4.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................O -13
4.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................O -13
4.3.1 Erase lamp (EL) control ..............................................................................................................................................O -13
5. CHARGING SECTION.............................................................................................................................................O -15
5.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................O -15
5.2 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................O -15
5.2.1 Charging control ..........................................................................................................................................................O -15
6. DEVELOPING SECTION.........................................................................................................................................O -16
xlii
6.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................O -16
6.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................O -16
6.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................O -16
6.3.1 Developer conveyance ...............................................................................................................................................O -16
6.3.2 Developing bias control ...............................................................................................................................................O -17
6.3.3 Developing suction control ..........................................................................................................................................O -17
6.3.4 Developing cooling control ..........................................................................................................................................O -17
6.3.5 Toner density detection control ...................................................................................................................................O -18
7. TONER SUPPLY SECTION....................................................................................................................................O -19
7.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................O -19
7.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................O -20
7.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................O -20
7.3.1 Toner conveyance control ...........................................................................................................................................O -20
7.3.2 Remaining toner amount detection control .................................................................................................................O -20
7.3.3 Stop control of printing without toner ..........................................................................................................................O -21
8. INTERMEDIATE TRANSFER SECTION.................................................................................................................O -22
8.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................O -22
8.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................O -23
8.2.1 Transfer belt conveyance /pressure drive ...................................................................................................................O -23
8.2.2 2nd transfer pressure/release mechanism ..................................................................................................................O -23
8.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................O -24
8.3.1 1st transfer roller pressure/release mechanism ..........................................................................................................O -24
8.3.2 1st transfer control ......................................................................................................................................................O -24
8.3.3 2nd transfer mechanism .............................................................................................................................................O -24
8.3.4 2nd transfer control .....................................................................................................................................................O -25
8.3.5 Image correction unit shutter mechanism ...................................................................................................................O -25
8.3.6 Belt cleaning blade curling-up prevention control .......................................................................................................O -25
8.3.7 Belt filming prevention control .....................................................................................................................................O -25
9. TONER COLLECTION SECTION...........................................................................................................................O -26
9.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................O -26
9.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................O -27
9.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................O -27
9.3.1 Toner collection control ...............................................................................................................................................O -27
9.3.2 Detection control of the toner collection box ...............................................................................................................O -27
9.3.3 Toner collection box full detection control ...................................................................................................................O -27
10. PAPER FEED SECTION.......................................................................................................................................O -28
10.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................O -28
10.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................O -28
10.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................O -29
10.3.1 Up/down control ........................................................................................................................................................O -29
10.3.2 Paper size detection control ......................................................................................................................................O -29
10.3.3 Paper feed control .....................................................................................................................................................O -30
10.3.4 Remaining paper detection control ...........................................................................................................................O -32
11. VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SECTION..................................................................................................................O -33
11.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................O -33
11.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................O -33
11.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................O -33
11.3.1 Vertical conveyance control ......................................................................................................................................O -33
12. REGISTRATION SECTION...................................................................................................................................O -34
12.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................O -34
12.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................O -34
12.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................O -34
12.3.1 Loop control ..............................................................................................................................................................O -34
12.3.2 Registration operation ...............................................................................................................................................O -35
12.3.3 Paper leading edge timing adjustment control ..........................................................................................................O -35
12.3.4 Registration speed control ........................................................................................................................................O -35
13. FUSING SECTION................................................................................................................................................O -36
13.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................O -36
13.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................O -36
13.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................O -36
13.3.1 Fusing roller drive control ..........................................................................................................................................O -36
13.3.2 Pressure/release control ...........................................................................................................................................O -37
13.3.3 Fusing temperature control .......................................................................................................................................O -38
13.3.4 Malfunction protection................................................................................................................................................O -38
13.3.5 Fusing roller /Lw cooling control ...............................................................................................................................O -39
13.3.6 Fusing recovery control..............................................................................................................................................O -39
xliii
13.3.7 Fusing air separation control......................................................................................................................................O -39
14. DUPLEX SECTION................................................................................................................................................O -41
14.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................O -41
14.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................O -41
14.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................O -41
14.3.1 Paper reverse control ................................................................................................................................................O -41
14.3.2 ADU conveyance control ..........................................................................................................................................O -43
14.3.3 Back side centering correction control ......................................................................................................................O -43
15. REVERSE/EXIT SECTION....................................................................................................................................O -44
15.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................O -44
15.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................O -44
15.2.1 Reverse/exit drive .....................................................................................................................................................O -44
15.2.2 Paper exit drive/OT-502 drive ...................................................................................................................................O -45
15.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................O -45
15.3.1 Conveyance control ..................................................................................................................................................O -45
15.3.2 Reverse/exit timing control ........................................................................................................................................O -46
15.3.3 Paper exit de-curler roller pressure control ...............................................................................................................O -47
15.3.4 Reverse de-curler roller rotation control ....................................................................................................................O -47
15.3.5 Paper exit full detection control .................................................................................................................................O -48
16. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL.....................................................................................................................O -49
16.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................................................O -49
16.1.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................O -49
16.1.2 Image stabilization control when the power switch (SW2) is ON ..............................................................................O -49
16.1.3 Image stabilization batch correction control ..............................................................................................................O -49
16.1.4 Stabilization control between images ........................................................................................................................O -49
16.1.5 Other image stabilization controls .............................................................................................................................O -50
16.2 Image stabilization control when the power switch (SW2) is ON ........................................................................................O -50
16.2.1 Image stabilization control flow with SW2 ON ..........................................................................................................O -50
16.2.2 Drum rotation control ................................................................................................................................................O -50
16.2.3 Environmental decision control .................................................................................................................................O -50
16.2.4 Color registration control ...........................................................................................................................................O -50
16.3 Image stabilization batch correction control.........................................................................................................................O -51
16.3.1 Image stabilization batch correction control operation flow ......................................................................................O -51
16.3.2 TCR sensor process speed adjustment ....................................................................................................................O -51
16.3.3 Base line correction ..................................................................................................................................................O -51
16.3.4 Maximum density correction .....................................................................................................................................O -52
16.3.5 V0 correction .............................................................................................................................................................O -52
16.3.6 Dot diameter correction .............................................................................................................................................O -52
16.3.7 Gamma correction ....................................................................................................................................................O -52
16.4 Stabilization control between images...................................................................................................................................O -52
16.4.1 Image stabilization control between images operation flow ......................................................................................O -52
16.4.2 Dot diameter correction between images .................................................................................................................O -52
16.4.3 Stabilization priority periodic adjustment ...................................................................................................................O -53
16.4.4 Short gamma correction ............................................................................................................................................O -53
16.5 Other image stabilization controls .......................................................................................................................................O -53
16.5.1 Pre-agitation when left unused .................................................................................................................................O -53
17. IMAGE PROCESSING SECTION ........................................................................................................................O -54
17.1 Image processing in the scanner section ............................................................................................................................O -54
17.1.1 Image processing flow in the scanner section ..........................................................................................................O -54
17.1.2 Photoelectric conversion ...........................................................................................................................................O -54
17.1.3 A/D conversion ..........................................................................................................................................................O -54
17.1.4 Shading correction ....................................................................................................................................................O -54
17.1.5 RGB gap correction ..................................................................................................................................................O -54
17.1.6 Chroma aberration correction ...................................................................................................................................O -54
17.1.7 Gradation adjustment ................................................................................................................................................O -54
17.1.8 Area discrimination ...................................................................................................................................................O -54
17.1.9 Image distinction .......................................................................................................................................................O -54
17.1.10 ACS processing ......................................................................................................................................................O -54
17.1.11 Magnification processing ........................................................................................................................................O -55
17.1.12 AE control ...............................................................................................................................................................O -55
17.1.13 Color conversion .....................................................................................................................................................O -55
17.2 Image processing in the write section .................................................................................................................................O -55
17.2.1 Image processing flow in the write section ...............................................................................................................O -55
17.2.2 Image compressing (Image controller) .....................................................................................................................O -55
17.2.3 Image compressing (Scanner) ..................................................................................................................................O -55
17.2.4 DRAM, HDD ..............................................................................................................................................................O -56
17.2.5 Image expansion (Scanner) ......................................................................................................................................O -56
17.2.6 Cell average (Scanner) .............................................................................................................................................O -56
17.2.7 Image expansion (Image controller) .........................................................................................................................O -56
xliv
17.2.8 Noise addition ...........................................................................................................................................................O -56
17.2.9 Skeletonization/Outline letter emphasis ....................................................................................................................O -56
17.2.10 Smoothing (Scanner) ..............................................................................................................................................O -56
17.2.11 Outline emphasis ....................................................................................................................................................O -56
17.2.12 Density balance ......................................................................................................................................................O -56
17.2.13 Gradation correction gamma ..................................................................................................................................O -56
17.2.14 Screen processing ..................................................................................................................................................O -56
17.2.15 Delay control between drums .................................................................................................................................O -56
17.2.16 PWM gamma ..........................................................................................................................................................O -56
17.2.17 PWN conversion .....................................................................................................................................................O -56
17.2.18 Write unit /Y, /M, /C, /K ...........................................................................................................................................O -56
18. POWER SOURCE SECTION................................................................................................................................O -57
18.1 Operating parts with the connection of the power cord .......................................................................................................O -57
18.1.1 Configuration .............................................................................................................................................................O -57
18.1.2 Operation ..................................................................................................................................................................O -57
18.2 Operating parts with the main power switch (SW1) ON ......................................................................................................O -57
18.2.1 Configuration .............................................................................................................................................................O -57
18.2.2 Operation ..................................................................................................................................................................O -57
18.3 Operating parts with the sub power switch (SW2) ON ........................................................................................................O -58
18.3.1 Configuration..............................................................................................................................................................O -58
18.3.2 Operation...................................................................................................................................................................O -58
18.4 Power cord ..........................................................................................................................................................................O -58
18.4.1 Configuration .............................................................................................................................................................O -58
18.5 Operating parts with the dehumidification heater switch (SW3) ON ...................................................................................O -59
18.5.1 Configuration .............................................................................................................................................................O -59
18.5.2 Operation ..................................................................................................................................................................O -59
19. FAN CONTROL.....................................................................................................................................................O -60
19.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................O -60
19.2 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................O -60
19.2.1 Power supply cooling fans /1 (FM1), /3 (FM3), and /4 (FM4) control.........................................................................O -60
19.2.2 Scanner cooling fan (FM2) control.............................................................................................................................O -60
19.2.3 IPB fans /1 (FM5) and /2 (FM6) control.....................................................................................................................O -60
19.2.4 Fusing separation fans /1 (FM7), /2 (FM8), and /3 (FM9) control..............................................................................O -61
19.2.5 Fusing belt ventilation fan (FM10) control .................................................................................................................O -61
19.2.6 Transfer belt fan (FM11) control ...............................................................................................................................O -61
19.2.7 Drum fans /1 (FM12) and /2 (FM13) control .............................................................................................................O -61
19.2.8 Tucking fans /1 (FM26), and /3 (FM28) control .........................................................................................................O -61
19.2.9 Deodorization fan (FM36) control .............................................................................................................................O -61
19.2.10 Fusing ventilation fan (FM37) control ......................................................................................................................O -62
19.2.11 Developing fans /1 (FM45) and /2 (FM46) control ..................................................................................................O -62
19.2.12 Main body fan (FM47) control .................................................................................................................................O -62
19.2.13 Charge intake fan (FM48) control ...........................................................................................................................O -62
19.2.14 Paper exit cooling fans /1 (FM61), /2 (FM62), and /3 (FM63) control .....................................................................O -62
19.2.15 Fusing cooling fan (FM65) control ..........................................................................................................................O -62
19.2.16 ADU cooling fan /1 (FM66) control ..........................................................................................................................O -63
19.2.17 ADU cooling fan /2 (FM67) control ..........................................................................................................................O -63
19.2.18 HDD unit cooling fans /1 (FM81) and /2 (FM82) control (option) ............................................................................O -63
20. COUNTER CONTROL...........................................................................................................................................O -64
20.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................O -64
20.2 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................O -64
21. ACS CONTROL.....................................................................................................................................................O -65
21.1 Switching from color mode to black and white mode ..........................................................................................................O -65
21.1.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................O -65
21.1.2 Sequence of switching from color mode to black and white mode ...........................................................................O -65
21.1.3 Sequence of switching from black and white mode to color mode ...........................................................................O -65
21.2 Count at ACS ......................................................................................................................................................................O -65
21.2.1 Black and white mode (1st transfer roller /Y, /M, /C released) ..................................................................................O -65
21.2.2 Color mode (1st transfer roller /Y, /M, /C, /K pressed) ..............................................................................................O -65
22. AUTHENTICATION UNIT......................................................................................................................................O -66
22.1 Authentication unit (IC card type: AU-201)...........................................................................................................................O -66
PA THEORY OF OPERATION DF-622 .......................................................................................PA -1

1. OUTLINE.................................................................................................................................................................PA -1
1.1 Unit configuration ..................................................................................................................................................................PA -1
1.2 Paper path .............................................................................................................................................................................PA -1
1.2.1 Simplex mode .............................................................................................................................................................PA -1
1.2.2 Duplex mode ...............................................................................................................................................................PA -1
2. PAPER FEED SECTION.........................................................................................................................................PA -3
2.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................PA -3
xlv
2.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................PA -3
2.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PA -3
2.3.1 Original feed control ....................................................................................................................................................PA -3
2.3.2 Original size detection .................................................................................................................................................PA -5
2.3.3 Original empty detection .............................................................................................................................................PA -5
3. CONVEYANCE SECTION.......................................................................................................................................PA -6
3.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................PA -6
3.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................PA -6
3.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PA -6
3.3.1 Original scan and conveyance control ........................................................................................................................PA -6
4. REVERSE/EXIT SECTION....................................................................................................................................PA -10
4.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................PA -10
4.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PA -10
4.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PA -10
4.3.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................PA -10
4.3.2 Paper exit control ......................................................................................................................................................PA -11
4.3.3 Reverse conveyance control .....................................................................................................................................PA -13
PB THEORY OF OPERATION PF-602/HT-504/505 ....................................................................PB -1

1. OUTLINE.................................................................................................................................................................PB -1
1.1 Unit configuration ..................................................................................................................................................................PB -1
1.2 Paper path .............................................................................................................................................................................PB -2
2. PAPER FEED SUCTION SECTION........................................................................................................................PB -3
2.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................PB -3
2.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................PB -4
2.2.1 Tray lift drive ...............................................................................................................................................................PB -4
2.2.2 Paper feed drive ..........................................................................................................................................................PB -4
2.2.3 Pick-up drive ...............................................................................................................................................................PB -5
2.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PB -5
2.3.1 Up/down control ..........................................................................................................................................................PB -5
2.3.2 Size detection control ..................................................................................................................................................PB -6
2.3.3 Pick-up mechanism .....................................................................................................................................................PB -7
2.3.4 Separation mechanism ...............................................................................................................................................PB -7
2.3.5 Air assist mechanism ..................................................................................................................................................PB -8
2.3.6 Paper empty detection control ....................................................................................................................................PB -8
2.3.7 Remaining paper detection control .............................................................................................................................PB -9
2.3.8 Tray lock control ..........................................................................................................................................................PB -9
3. CONVEYANCE SECTION.....................................................................................................................................PB -10
3.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................PB -10
3.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PB -11
3.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PB -11
3.3.1 Pre-registration control ..............................................................................................................................................PB -11
3.3.2 Conveyance control ..................................................................................................................................................PB -11
3.3.3 Multi feed detection control .......................................................................................................................................PB -12
3.3.4 Mis-centering detection control .................................................................................................................................PB -12
4. OTHERS................................................................................................................................................................PB -13
4.1 Dehumidification heater control ...........................................................................................................................................PB -13
4.2 Tray damper mechanism ....................................................................................................................................................PB -13
4.3 Main body assist mechanism ..............................................................................................................................................PB -13
4.3.1 Filter replacement assy retaining mechanism ...........................................................................................................PB -13
4.3.2 Filter replacement assy ventilation mechanism ........................................................................................................PB -13
4.3.3 Environment temperature detection assist mechanism ............................................................................................PB -14
5. HT-504/505 (OPTIONAL) .....................................................................................................................................PB -15
5.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................PB -15
5.2 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PB -15
5.2.1 Dehumidifier fan heater control .................................................................................................................................PB -15
PC THEORY OF OPERATION LU-202/HT-503 ..........................................................................PC -1

1. OUTLINE.................................................................................................................................................................PC -1
1.1 Unit configuration ..................................................................................................................................................................PC -1
1.2 Paper path ............................................................................................................................................................................PC -1
2. PAPER FEED SECTION ........................................................................................................................................PC -2
2.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................PC -2
2.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................PC -2
2.2.1 Paper feed drive .........................................................................................................................................................PC -2
2.2.2 Pick-up drive ...............................................................................................................................................................PC -3
2.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PC -3
2.3.1 Paper feed control ......................................................................................................................................................PC -3
xlvi
2.3.2 Paper empty detection control ....................................................................................................................................PC -6
2.3.3 Remaining paper detection control .............................................................................................................................PC -6
2.3.4 Size detection control .................................................................................................................................................PC -7
2.3.5 Mis-centering detection control ...................................................................................................................................PC -8
3. UP/DOWN SECTION ...........................................................................................................................................PC -10
3.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................PC -10
3.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PC -10
3.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PC -11
3.3.1 Up/down control ........................................................................................................................................................PC -11
4. OTHERS................................................................................................................................................................PC -12
4.1 Dehumidification heater control ..........................................................................................................................................PC -12
4.2 Interlock switch control ........................................................................................................................................................PC -12
5. HT-503 (OPTIONAL) ............................................................................................................................................PC -13
5.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................PC -13
5.2 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PC -13
5.2.1 Dehumidifier fan heater control .................................................................................................................................PC -13
PD THEORY OF OPERATION MB-504 ......................................................................................PD -1

1. OUTLINE.................................................................................................................................................................PD -1
1.1 Unit configuration ..................................................................................................................................................................PD -1
1.2 Paper path ............................................................................................................................................................................PD -1
2. PAPER FEED SECTION.........................................................................................................................................PD -2
2.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................PD -2
2.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................PD -2
2.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PD -2
2.3.1 Up/down control ..........................................................................................................................................................PD -2
2.3.2 Paper size detection control .......................................................................................................................................PD -3
2.3.3 Paper feed control ......................................................................................................................................................PD -3
2.3.4 Paper empty control ....................................................................................................................................................PD -4
2.3.5 Remaining paper detection control .............................................................................................................................PD -4
PE THEORY OF OPERATION RU-509/HM-102 .........................................................................PE -1

1. OUTLINE ................................................................................................................................................................PE -1
1.1 Unit configuration ..................................................................................................................................................................PE -1
1.2 Paper path .............................................................................................................................................................................PE -2
1.2.1 Straight conveyance/de-curler conveyance/humidification conveyance mode ...........................................................PE -2
2. ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION .................................................................................................................PE -3
2.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................PE -3
2.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................PE -3
2.2.1 Conveyance drive .......................................................................................................................................................PE -3
2.2.2 Humidification section gate drive ................................................................................................................................PE -4
2.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PE -4
2.3.1 Conveyance control ....................................................................................................................................................PE -4
2.3.2 Humidification section gate control .............................................................................................................................PE -5
3. DE-CURLER SECTION ..........................................................................................................................................PE -6
3.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................PE -6
3.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................PE -7
3.2.1 De-curler section conveyance drive ............................................................................................................................PE -7
3.2.2 De-curler gates /1 and /2 drive ....................................................................................................................................PE -8
3.2.3 De-curlers /3 and /4 pressure drive .............................................................................................................................PE -8
3.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PE -9
3.3.1 Outline of de-curler .....................................................................................................................................................PE -9
3.3.2 De-curler section conveyance control .......................................................................................................................PE -12
3.3.3 De-curlers /1 and /2 control .......................................................................................................................................PE -13
3.3.4 De-curlers /3 and /4 control .......................................................................................................................................PE -13
4. OUTPUT PAPER DENSITY DETECTION SECTION ...........................................................................................PE -14
4.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................PE -14
4.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PE -15
4.2.1 Conveyance drive .....................................................................................................................................................PE -15
4.2.2 Shutter drive ..............................................................................................................................................................PE -15
4.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PE -16
4.3.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................PE -16
4.3.2 Output paper density detection section .....................................................................................................................PE -17
5. PAPER EXIT SECTION ........................................................................................................................................PE -19
5.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PE -20
5.2.1 Paper exit conveyance drive .....................................................................................................................................PE -20
5.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PE -21
xlvii
5.3.1 Paper exit conveyance control ..................................................................................................................................PE -21
6. HUMIDIFICATION SECTION (HM-102) ...............................................................................................................PE -24
6.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PE -25
6.2.1 Humidification section entrance conveyance drive ...................................................................................................PE -25
6.2.2 Humidification section conveyance drive ..................................................................................................................PE -25
6.2.3 Humidification roller pressure drive (HM-101) ..........................................................................................................PE -26
6.2.4 Water feed pump drive ..............................................................................................................................................PE -26
6.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PE -26
6.3.1 Outline of humidification section ...............................................................................................................................PE -26
6.3.2 Humidification section conveyance control ...............................................................................................................PE -27
6.3.3 Humidification roller / water feed roller pressure control ...........................................................................................PE -28
6.3.4 Water feed control .....................................................................................................................................................PE -31
7. OTHER CONTROLS ............................................................................................................................................PE -33
7.1 Fan control ..........................................................................................................................................................................PE -33
7.1.1 Configuration .............................................................................................................................................................PE -33
7.1.2 Control ......................................................................................................................................................................PE -33
7.2 Door detection control .........................................................................................................................................................PE -34
PF THEORY OF OPERATION FS-521 ........................................................................................PF -1

1. OUTLINE .................................................................................................................................................................PF -1
1.1 Unit configuration ..................................................................................................................................................................PF -1
1.2 Paper path .............................................................................................................................................................................PF -2
2. PAPER CONVEYANCE SECTION .........................................................................................................................PF -3
2.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................PF -3
2.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................PF -3
2.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................PF -4
2.3.1 Conveyance path switching ........................................................................................................................................PF -4
2.3.2 Bypass roller /Lw pressure release control .................................................................................................................PF -4
3. SUB TRAY SECTION .............................................................................................................................................PF -6
3.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................PF -6
3.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................PF -6
(1) Sub tray paper full detection control ...............................................................................................................................PF -6
(2) Conveyance speed switching control .............................................................................................................................PF -6
4. STACKER SECTION ..............................................................................................................................................PF -8
4.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................PF -8
4.2.1 Stacker entrance roller/paddle drive ...........................................................................................................................PF -8
4.2.2 Stack assist plate/rear stopper drive ...........................................................................................................................PF -9
4.2.3 Intermediate roller/paper exit arm drive ......................................................................................................................PF -9
4.2.4 Alignment drive .........................................................................................................................................................PF -10
4.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PF -10
4.3.1 Stacker conveyance speed control ...........................................................................................................................PF -10
4.3.2 Stacker entrance roller control ..................................................................................................................................PF -10
4.3.3 Intermediate roller control .........................................................................................................................................PF -11
4.3.4 Stack assist control ...................................................................................................................................................PF -12
4.3.5 Rear stopper control ..................................................................................................................................................PF -13
4.3.6 Alignment control ......................................................................................................................................................PF -13
4.3.7 Stacker paper exit .....................................................................................................................................................PF -14
5. STAPLER SECTION .............................................................................................................................................PF -15
5.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................PF -15
5.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PF -15
5.2.1 Stapler movement/rotation ........................................................................................................................................PF -15
5.2.2 Stapler .......................................................................................................................................................................PF -16
5.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PF -16
5.3.1 Stapler movement control .........................................................................................................................................PF -16
5.3.2 Staple control ............................................................................................................................................................PF -16
6. MAIN TRAY SECTION ..........................................................................................................................................PF -20
6.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................PF -20
6.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PF -21
6.2.1 Tray up/down drive ....................................................................................................................................................PF -21
6.2.2 Main tray paper exit drive ..........................................................................................................................................PF -21
6.2.3 Paper exit opening drive ...........................................................................................................................................PF -22
6.2.4 Paper exit alignment plate drive ................................................................................................................................PF -22
6.2.5 Paper exit alignment plate retraction drive ................................................................................................................PF -23
6.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PF -23
6.3.1 Paper exit opening control ........................................................................................................................................PF -23
xlviii
6.3.2 Paper press arm control ............................................................................................................................................PF -24
6.3.3 Main tray up/down control .........................................................................................................................................PF -25
6.3.4 Paper exit alignment control ......................................................................................................................................PF -26
PG THEORY OF OPERATION FS-531 .......................................................................................PG -1

1. OUTLINE ................................................................................................................................................................PG -1
1.1 Unit configuration ..................................................................................................................................................................PG -1
1.2 Paper path ............................................................................................................................................................................PG -2
1.2.1 None sort/sort/group mode .........................................................................................................................................PG -2
1.2.2 Sub tray mode ............................................................................................................................................................PG -2
1.2.3 Staple mode ...............................................................................................................................................................PG -3
2. CONVEYANCE SECTION .....................................................................................................................................PG -4
2.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................PG -4
2.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PG -5
2.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PG -5
2.3.1 Punch registration control (Only when PK is installed) ...............................................................................................PG -5
2.3.2 FS conveyance control ...............................................................................................................................................PG -6
2.3.3 Gate drive control .......................................................................................................................................................PG -6
2.3.4 Bypass gate control ....................................................................................................................................................PG -7
2.3.5 Shift control .................................................................................................................................................................PG -8
2.3.6 Paper exit roller control ...............................................................................................................................................PG -9
2.3.7 Paper exit opening solenoid control ...........................................................................................................................PG -9
2.3.8 Paper exit opening control ........................................................................................................................................PG -10
2.3.9 Sub tray paper exit control ........................................................................................................................................PG -10
3. MAIN TRAY SECTION .........................................................................................................................................PG -12
3.1 Configuration ......................................................................................................................................................................PG -12
3.2 Drive ...................................................................................................................................................................................PG -12
3.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PG -13
3.3.1 Tray up down control ................................................................................................................................................PG -13
4. STACKER SECTION ............................................................................................................................................PG -15
4.2 Drive ...................................................................................................................................................................................PG -15
4.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PG -16
4.3.1 Alignment control ......................................................................................................................................................PG -16
4.3.2 Stopper control .........................................................................................................................................................PG -16
4.3.3 Stacker entrance conveyance control ......................................................................................................................PG -16
4.3.4 Stacker paper exit control .........................................................................................................................................PG -18
5. STAPLER SECTION ............................................................................................................................................PG -19
5.2 Drive ...................................................................................................................................................................................PG -19
5.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PG -19
5.3.1 Stapler movement control .........................................................................................................................................PG -19
5.3.2 Stapler control ..........................................................................................................................................................PG -20
PH THEORY OF OPERATION FS-612 .......................................................................................PH -1

1. OUTLINE ................................................................................................................................................................PH -1
1.1 Unit configuration ..................................................................................................................................................................PH -1
1.2 Paper path ............................................................................................................................................................................PH -2
1.2.1 None sort/sort/group mode .........................................................................................................................................PH -2
1.2.2 Sub tray mode ............................................................................................................................................................PH -2
1.2.3 Staple mode ................................................................................................................................................................PH -3
1.2.4 Center folding/saddle stitching mode ..........................................................................................................................PH -3
1.2.5 Tri-folding mode ..........................................................................................................................................................PH -4
2. CONVEYANCE SECTION ......................................................................................................................................PH -5
2.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................PH -5
2.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................PH -6
2.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PH -6
2.3.1 Punch registration control (Only when PK is installed) ...............................................................................................PH -6
2.3.2 FS conveyance control ...............................................................................................................................................PH -7
2.3.3 Gate drive control .......................................................................................................................................................PH -7
2.3.4 Bypass gate control ....................................................................................................................................................PH -8
2.3.5 Shift control .................................................................................................................................................................PH -9
2.3.6 Paper exit roller control .............................................................................................................................................PH -10
2.3.7 Paper exit opening solenoid control ..........................................................................................................................PH -10
2.3.8 Paper exit opening control ........................................................................................................................................PH -11
2.3.9 Sub tray paper exit control ........................................................................................................................................PH -12
3. MAIN TRAY SECTION .........................................................................................................................................PH -13
3.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................PH -13
3.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PH -13
xlix
3.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PH -14
3.3.1 Tray up down control ................................................................................................................................................PH -14
4. STACKER SECTION ............................................................................................................................................PH -16
4.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PH -17
4.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PH -17
4.3.1 Alignment /Up control ...............................................................................................................................................PH -17
4.3.2 Alignment /Lw control ...............................................................................................................................................PH -18
4.3.3 Stopper control .........................................................................................................................................................PH -18
4.3.4 Stacker entrance conveyance control .......................................................................................................................PH -20
4.3.5 Stacker paper exit control .........................................................................................................................................PH -22
5. STAPLER SECTION ............................................................................................................................................PH -24
5.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PH -24
5.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PH -25
5.3.1 Stapler movement control .........................................................................................................................................PH -25
5.3.2 Stapler control ...........................................................................................................................................................PH -26
6. HALF-FOLDING/SADDLE-STITCHING/TRI-FOLDING SECTION ......................................................................PH -28
6.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PH -28
6.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PH -29
6.3.1 Folding knife control ..................................................................................................................................................PH -29
6.3.2 Folding conveyance control ......................................................................................................................................PH -29
6.3.3 Tri-folding gate control ..............................................................................................................................................PH -30
PI THEORY OF OPERATION PK-512/513......................................................................................PI-1

1. OUTLINE....................................................................................................................................................................PI-1
1.1 Unit configuration......................................................................................................................................................................PI-1
1.2 Paper path................................................................................................................................................................................PI-1
2. PUNCH SECTION......................................................................................................................................................PI-2
2.1 Composition..............................................................................................................................................................................PI-2
2.2 Drive.........................................................................................................................................................................................PI-2
2.2.1 Punch shift drive.............................................................................................................................................................PI-2
2.2.2 Punch drive....................................................................................................................................................................PI-3
2.3 Operation..................................................................................................................................................................................PI-5
2.3.1 Punch standby position movement control.....................................................................................................................PI-5
2.3.2 Punch position correction control...................................................................................................................................PI-5
2.3.3 Punch control.................................................................................................................................................................PI-6
3. PUNCH SCRAPS BOX SECTION.............................................................................................................................PI-9
3.1 Composition..............................................................................................................................................................................PI-9
3.2 Drive.........................................................................................................................................................................................PI-9
3.3 Operation..................................................................................................................................................................................PI-9
3.3.1 Punch scraps box control...............................................................................................................................................PI-9
PJ THEORY OF OPERATION PI-502 ..........................................................................................PJ -1

1. OUTLINE .................................................................................................................................................................PJ -1
1.1 Unit configuration ...................................................................................................................................................................PJ -1
1.2 Paper path .............................................................................................................................................................................PJ -1
1.2.1 Automatic sheet feed (Online operation) .....................................................................................................................PJ -1
1.2.2 Manual sheet feed (Offline operation) .........................................................................................................................PJ -1
2. PAPER FEED SECTION .........................................................................................................................................PJ -2
2.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................PJ -2
2.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................PJ -2
2.2.1 Paper feed drive ..........................................................................................................................................................PJ -2
2.2.2 Tray lift drive ................................................................................................................................................................PJ -3
2.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................PJ -3
2.3.1 Tray lift mechanism .....................................................................................................................................................PJ -3
2.3.2 Pick-up mechanism .....................................................................................................................................................PJ -3
2.3.3 Separation mechanism ................................................................................................................................................PJ -4
2.3.4 Registration control ......................................................................................................................................................PJ -4
2.3.5 Paper size detection control ........................................................................................................................................PJ -4
PK THEORY OF OPERATION LS-505 ........................................................................................PK -1

1. OUTLINE ................................................................................................................................................................PK -1
1.1 Unit configuration ..................................................................................................................................................................PK -1
1.2 Paper path .............................................................................................................................................................................PK -2
2. COUPLING CONVEYANCE SECTION ..................................................................................................................PK -3
2.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................PK -3
l
2.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................PK -3
2.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PK -3
2.3.1 Door open/close mechanism ......................................................................................................................................PK -3
2.3.2 Jam release lever lock mechanism .............................................................................................................................PK -3
3. ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION .................................................................................................................PK -4
3.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................PK -4
3.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PK -4
3.3.1 Path switching .............................................................................................................................................................PK -4
3.3.2 Conveyance line speed control ...................................................................................................................................PK -6
3.3.3 Paper cooling mechanism ...........................................................................................................................................PK -6
4. CONVEYANCE SECTION ......................................................................................................................................PK -7
4.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................PK -8
4.2.1 Entrance conveyance drive .........................................................................................................................................PK -8
4.2.2 Stacker tray conveyance drive (M3 reverse) ..............................................................................................................PK -8
4.2.3 Sub tray conveyance drive (M3 forward) ....................................................................................................................PK -9
4.2.4 Coupling conveyance/grip belt/paper press arm drive ................................................................................................PK -9
4.2.5 Stacker tray up down drive .......................................................................................................................................PK -10
4.2.6 Shift unit/alignment plate drive ..................................................................................................................................PK -10
4.2.7 Rear stopper/job partition plate drive ........................................................................................................................PK -11
4.2.8 Front stopper/paper press arm drive .........................................................................................................................PK -11
4.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PK -11
4.3.1 Stacker tray conveyance ...........................................................................................................................................PK -11
4.3.2 Coupling conveyance ................................................................................................................................................PK -16
4.3.3 Sub tray conveyance ................................................................................................................................................PK -16
PL THEORY OF OPERATION FD-503 ........................................................................................PL -1

1. OUTLINE .................................................................................................................................................................PL -1
1.1 Unit configuration ...................................................................................................................................................................PL -1
1.2 Paper path .............................................................................................................................................................................PL -2
(1) Straight mode ..................................................................................................................................................................PL -2
(2) Sub tray mode .................................................................................................................................................................PL -3
(3) Punch mode (L and S sizes) ...........................................................................................................................................PL -4
(4) Z-Fold mode ....................................................................................................................................................................PL -5
(5) Letter fold-out mode ........................................................................................................................................................PL -6
(6) Tri-Fold-in/double parallel mode .....................................................................................................................................PL -7
(7) Gate fold mode ...............................................................................................................................................................PL -8
(8) Half-Fold mode ...............................................................................................................................................................PL -9
2. CONVEYANCE SECTION ....................................................................................................................................PL -10
2.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................PL -10
2.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PL -11
2.2.1 Conveyance drive ......................................................................................................................................................PL -11
2.2.2 Gate drive ..................................................................................................................................................................PL -12
2.2.3 Alignment drive ..........................................................................................................................................................PL -12
2.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PL -13
2.3.1 Conveyance path switching .......................................................................................................................................PL -13
2.3.2 Conveyance line speed control .................................................................................................................................PL -15
2.3.3 Alignment control .......................................................................................................................................................PL -15
2.3.4 Gap recovery control .................................................................................................................................................PL -16
3. PUNCH SECTION .................................................................................................................................................PL -18
3.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PL -18
3.2.1 Rear registration drive ...............................................................................................................................................PL -18
3.2.2 Punch drive ...............................................................................................................................................................PL -19
3.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PL -19
(1) Punch control ................................................................................................................................................................PL -19
(2) Punch hole switching control ........................................................................................................................................PL -19
(3) Punch-hole scraps box control ......................................................................................................................................PL -19
4. FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION ...................................................................................................................PL -20
4.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PL -20
4.2.1 Conveyance drive ......................................................................................................................................................PL -20
4.2.2 Folding drive ..............................................................................................................................................................PL -21
4.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PL -21
4.3.1 Registration control ...................................................................................................................................................PL -21
4.3.2 Conveyance path switching .......................................................................................................................................PL -22
4.3.3 1st folding control ......................................................................................................................................................PL -22
4.3.4 2nd folding control .....................................................................................................................................................PL -23
li
4.3.5 3rd folding control ......................................................................................................................................................PL -25
5. MAIN TRAY SECTION ..........................................................................................................................................PL -27
5.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PL -28
5.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PL -28
5.3.1 Main tray up/down control .........................................................................................................................................PL -28
6. SUB TRAY SECTION ...........................................................................................................................................PL -30
6.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PL -30
6.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PL -30
6.3.1 Sub tray full-status detection control .........................................................................................................................PL -30
6.3.2 Line speed switching .................................................................................................................................................PL -31
7. PI SECTION ..........................................................................................................................................................PL -32
7.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PL -32
7.2.1 Tray lift drive ..............................................................................................................................................................PL -32
7.2.2 Paper feed drive ........................................................................................................................................................PL -33
7.2.3 Pick-up drive ..............................................................................................................................................................PL -33
7.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PL -33
7.3.1 Size detection control ................................................................................................................................................PL -33
7.3.2 Up/down control ........................................................................................................................................................PL -34
7.3.3 Pick-up mechanism ...................................................................................................................................................PL -34
7.3.4 Separation mechanism ..............................................................................................................................................PL -35
7.3.5 Multi feed detection control .......................................................................................................................................PL -36
7.3.6 Paper empty detection control ...................................................................................................................................PL -36
PM THEORY OF OPERATION SD-506 ......................................................................................PM -1

1. OUTLINE ................................................................................................................................................................PM -1
1.1 Unit configuration ..................................................................................................................................................................PM -1
1.2 Paper path ............................................................................................................................................................................PM -2
(1) Coupling exit/subtray exit mode .....................................................................................................................................PM -2
(2) Overlap tri-folding mode .................................................................................................................................................PM -2
(3) Center folding/saddle stitching mode .............................................................................................................................PM -3
2. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION .............................................................................................................PM -5
2.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................PM -5
2.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PM -5
2.2.1 Entrance conveyance drive ........................................................................................................................................PM -5
2.2.2 Horizontal conveyance drive ......................................................................................................................................PM -5
2.2.3 Gate drive/sub tray pressure release drive ................................................................................................................PM -6
2.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PM -6
2.3.1 Conveyance path switching control ............................................................................................................................PM -6
2.3.2 Conveyance line speed switch control .......................................................................................................................PM -6
2.3.3 Sub tray paper exit control .........................................................................................................................................PM -7
2.3.4 Sub tray paper full detection control ...........................................................................................................................PM -7
3. RIGHT ANGLE CONVEYANCE SECTION ............................................................................................................PM -8
3.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................PM -8
3.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PM -8
3.2.1 Right angle conveyance drive/alignment drive ...........................................................................................................PM -8
3.2.2 Overlap drive ..............................................................................................................................................................PM -9
3.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PM -9
3.3.1 Paper overlap control .................................................................................................................................................PM -9
3.3.2 Alignment control ......................................................................................................................................................PM -11
3.3.3 Right angle conveyance control ...............................................................................................................................PM -12
4. FOLDING SECTION ............................................................................................................................................PM -14
4.1 Configuration ......................................................................................................................................................................PM -14
4.2 Drive ...................................................................................................................................................................................PM -14
4.2.1 Folding entrance drive ..............................................................................................................................................PM -14
4.2.2 Folding conveyance drive .........................................................................................................................................PM -15
4.2.3 Folding blade drive ...................................................................................................................................................PM -15
4.2.4 Folding main scan alignment drive ...........................................................................................................................PM -16
4.2.5 Folding sub scan alignment/center folding exit drive ................................................................................................PM -16
4.2.6 Guide shaft drive ......................................................................................................................................................PM -17
4.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PM -17
4.3.1 Folding entrance conveyance control .......................................................................................................................PM -17
4.3.2 Folding main scan alignment control ........................................................................................................................PM -18
4.3.3 Folding control ..........................................................................................................................................................PM -19
4.3.4 Folding sub scan alignment control ..........................................................................................................................PM -22
4.3.5 Guide shaft control ...................................................................................................................................................PM -23
lii
5. SADDLE STITCHING SECTION ..........................................................................................................................PM -25
5.2 Drive ...................................................................................................................................................................................PM -25
5.2.1 Saddle stitching alignment drive ...............................................................................................................................PM -25
5.2.2 Saddle stitching hold drive .......................................................................................................................................PM -26
5.2.3 Clincher up down drive .............................................................................................................................................PM -26
5.2.4 Stapler/clincher movement drive ..............................................................................................................................PM -27
5.2.5 Stapler/clincher drive ................................................................................................................................................PM -27
5.2.6 Bundle arm rotation drive .........................................................................................................................................PM -28
5.2.7 Bundle arm movement drive ....................................................................................................................................PM -28
5.2.8 Bundle arm assist drive ............................................................................................................................................PM -29
5.2.9 Bundle clip drive .......................................................................................................................................................PM -29
5.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PM -29
5.3.1 Saddle stitching alignment control ............................................................................................................................PM -29
5.3.2 Stapler/clincher movement control ...........................................................................................................................PM -30
5.3.3 Saddle stitching hold control ....................................................................................................................................PM -31
5.3.4 Clincher up down control ..........................................................................................................................................PM -32
5.3.5 Stapler control ..........................................................................................................................................................PM -34
5.3.6 Bundle arm control ...................................................................................................................................................PM -35
5.3.7 Bundle arm assist control .........................................................................................................................................PM -38
5.3.8 Bundle clip control ....................................................................................................................................................PM -39
6. BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION .....................................................................................................................PM -43
6.2 Drive ...................................................................................................................................................................................PM -43
6.2.1 Bundle press stage lift drive .....................................................................................................................................PM -43
6.2.2 Bundle press movement drive ..................................................................................................................................PM -44
6.2.3 Bundle registration drive ...........................................................................................................................................PM -44
6.2.4 Bundle press drive ....................................................................................................................................................PM -45
6.2.5 Bundle exit drive .......................................................................................................................................................PM -45
6.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PM -46
6.3.1 Bundle press stage up down control ........................................................................................................................PM -46
6.3.2 Bundle press movement control ...............................................................................................................................PM -48
6.3.3 Bundle press control .................................................................................................................................................PM -49
6.3.4 Bundle registration control ........................................................................................................................................PM -51
6.3.5 Bundle exit control ....................................................................................................................................................PM -52
7. TRIMMER SECTION ............................................................................................................................................PM -57
7.2 Drive ...................................................................................................................................................................................PM -57
7.2.1 Trimmer press drive .................................................................................................................................................PM -57
7.2.2 Trimmer blade drive .................................................................................................................................................PM -57
7.2.3 Trimmer board drive .................................................................................................................................................PM -59
7.2.4 Paddle drive .............................................................................................................................................................PM -59
7.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PM -59
7.3.1 Trimmer press control ..............................................................................................................................................PM -59
7.3.2 Trimmer blade control ..............................................................................................................................................PM -61
7.3.3 Trimmer board control ..............................................................................................................................................PM -63
7.3.4 Trimmer paddle control ............................................................................................................................................PM -63
PN THEORY OF OPERATION PB-503 .......................................................................................PN -1

1. OUTLINE ................................................................................................................................................................PN -1
1.1 Unit configuration ..................................................................................................................................................................PN -1
1.2 Paper path ............................................................................................................................................................................PN -2
1.2.1 Sub tray exit ................................................................................................................................................................PN -2
1.2.2 Perfect binding mode ..................................................................................................................................................PN -2
1.2.3 Relay conveyance mode ............................................................................................................................................PN -4
2. CONVEYANCE SECTION ......................................................................................................................................PN -5
2.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................PN -5
2.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................PN -6
2.2.1 Entrance conveyance drive/Intermediate conveyance drive/Cover paper conveyance drive .....................................PN -6
2.2.2 Entrance gate drive/Bypass gate drive/Sub tray gate drive/Sub tray exit and separation drive .................................PN -6
2.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PN -7
2.3.1 Gate control ................................................................................................................................................................PN -7
2.3.2 Entrance conveyance control .....................................................................................................................................PN -8
2.3.3 Intermediate conveyance control ................................................................................................................................PN -9
2.3.4 Cover paper conveyance control ................................................................................................................................PN -9
2.3.5 Sub tray paper exit release control .............................................................................................................................PN -9
2.3.6 Sub tray full-status detection control ...........................................................................................................................PN -9
2.3.7 Cover paper multi feed detection control ....................................................................................................................PN -9
3. SUB COMPILE (SC) SECTION ............................................................................................................................PN -11
liii
3.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................PN -11
3.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PN -12
3.2.1 SC entrance conveyance drive/Switchback conveyance drive/Paper bundle conveyance drive .............................PN -12
3.2.2 Switchback release drive ..........................................................................................................................................PN -12
3.2.3 SC roller release drive/Clamp entrance release drive ..............................................................................................PN -13
3.2.4 Clamp entrance movement drive ..............................................................................................................................PN -13
3.2.5 SC main scan alignment drive ..................................................................................................................................PN -14
3.2.6 Sub scan alignment drive .........................................................................................................................................PN -14
3.2.7 SC stopper drive/SC pressure arm drive/Straight gate drive ....................................................................................PN -14
3.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PN -15
3.3.1 SC section operation overview .................................................................................................................................PN -15
3.3.2 Gate control of the relay conveyance .......................................................................................................................PN -17
3.3.3 SC entrance conveyance control ..............................................................................................................................PN -17
3.3.4 SC switchback conveyance control ..........................................................................................................................PN -17
3.3.5 SC main scan alignment control ...............................................................................................................................PN -20
3.3.6 Sub scan alignment control ......................................................................................................................................PN -21
3.3.7 SC paper bundle conveyance control .......................................................................................................................PN -21
3.3.8 Clamp entrance movement control ...........................................................................................................................PN -22
3.3.9 SC stopper control ....................................................................................................................................................PN -23
3.3.10 SC pressure arm control .........................................................................................................................................PN -23
4. CLAMP SECTION ................................................................................................................................................PN -25
4.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PN -25
4.2.1 Clamp drive ...............................................................................................................................................................PN -25
4.2.2 Clamp rotation drive ..................................................................................................................................................PN -26
4.2.3 Clamp alignment drive ..............................................................................................................................................PN -26
4.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PN -26
4.3.1 Clamp alignment control ...........................................................................................................................................PN -26
4.3.2 Clamp control ............................................................................................................................................................PN -27
4.3.3 Clamp rotation control ...............................................................................................................................................PN -28
4.3.4 Book thickness detection control ..............................................................................................................................PN -31
5. PELLET SUPPLY SECTION ................................................................................................................................PN -33
5.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PN -33
5.2.1 Pellet supply drive .....................................................................................................................................................PN -33
5.2.2 Pellet supply arm drive .............................................................................................................................................PN -34
5.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PN -34
5.3.1 Pellet supply operation overview ..............................................................................................................................PN -34
5.3.2 Pellet supply arm control ..........................................................................................................................................PN -35
5.3.3 Pellet supply amount control .....................................................................................................................................PN -36
5.3.4 Pellet remaining amount detection control ................................................................................................................PN -38
5.3.5 Pellet supply door opening/closing detection control ................................................................................................PN -38
6. GLUE TANK SECTION ........................................................................................................................................PN -39
6.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PN -39
6.2.1 Drive .........................................................................................................................................................................PN -39
6.2.2 Glue apply roller drive ...............................................................................................................................................PN -40
6.2.3 Tank up drive ............................................................................................................................................................PN -40
6.2.4 Cover paper glue lifting drive ....................................................................................................................................PN -40
6.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PN -41
6.3.1 Glue tank unit movement control ..............................................................................................................................PN -41
6.3.2 Glue apply roller control ............................................................................................................................................PN -41
6.3.3 Glue tank lifting control .............................................................................................................................................PN -42
6.3.4 Cover paper glue control ..........................................................................................................................................PN -43
6.3.5 Glue temperature control ..........................................................................................................................................PN -44
7. COVER PAPER SUPPLY SECTION ....................................................................................................................PN -46
7.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PN -46
7.2.1 Cover paper tray lift drive ..........................................................................................................................................PN -46
7.2.2 Paper feed drive .......................................................................................................................................................PN -47
7.2.3 Pick-up drive .............................................................................................................................................................PN -47
7.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PN -48
7.3.1 Up/down control ........................................................................................................................................................PN -48
7.3.2 Pick-up mechanism ..................................................................................................................................................PN -49
7.3.3 Separation mechanism .............................................................................................................................................PN -49
7.3.4 Paper feed mechanism .............................................................................................................................................PN -50
7.3.5 Air assist mechanism ................................................................................................................................................PN -50
7.3.6 Cover paper empty detection control ........................................................................................................................PN -50
7.3.7 Paper feed assist plate .............................................................................................................................................PN -50
liv
8. COVER PAPER TABLE SECTION ......................................................................................................................PN -52
8.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PN -53
8.2.1 Cover paper table up down/Fr and /Rr drive .............................................................................................................PN -53
8.2.2 Cover paper alignment drive .....................................................................................................................................PN -53
8.2.3 Cover paper conveyance drive .................................................................................................................................PN -54
8.2.4 Book exit drive ..........................................................................................................................................................PN -54
8.2.5 Cover paper folding plate /Rt and /Lt drive ...............................................................................................................PN -54
8.2.6 Cover paper conveyance arm /Rr and /Lt drive ........................................................................................................PN -55
8.2.7 Cover paper lift drive .................................................................................................................................................PN -55
8.2.8 Cutter drive ...............................................................................................................................................................PN -55
8.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PN -55
8.3.1 Cover paper table section operation overview ..........................................................................................................PN -55
8.3.2 Cover paper conveyance control ..............................................................................................................................PN -59
8.3.3 Cover paper trimming control ...................................................................................................................................PN -60
8.3.4 Cover paper alignment drive .....................................................................................................................................PN -60
8.3.5 Cover paper table up down control ...........................................................................................................................PN -62
8.3.6 Cover paper folding plate control ..............................................................................................................................PN -63
8.3.7 Cover paper conveyance arm control .......................................................................................................................PN -65
8.3.8 Cover paper lifting (supporting) control .....................................................................................................................PN -67
8.3.9 Book paper exit control .............................................................................................................................................PN -67
8.3.10 Waste paper control ................................................................................................................................................PN -68
9. BOOK STOCK SECTION .....................................................................................................................................PN -69
9.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PN -69
9.2.1 Book conveyance drive .............................................................................................................................................PN -69
9.2.2 Book conveyance belt drive ......................................................................................................................................PN -70
9.2.3 Book conveyance up down drive ..............................................................................................................................PN -70
9.2.4 Book movement drive ...............................................................................................................................................PN -71
9.2.5 Book stopper drive ....................................................................................................................................................PN -71
9.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PN -71
9.3.1 Book stock section operation overview .....................................................................................................................PN -71
9.3.2 Book conveyance and movement control .................................................................................................................PN -72
9.3.3 Book conveyance belt control ...................................................................................................................................PN -74
9.3.4 Book conveyance up down control ...........................................................................................................................PN -74
9.3.5 Book movement control ............................................................................................................................................PN -75
9.3.6 Book stopper control .................................................................................................................................................PN -76
9.3.7 Book full status detection control ..............................................................................................................................PN -76
10. RELAY CONVEYANCE SECTION .....................................................................................................................PN -77
10.1 Configuration .....................................................................................................................................................................PN -77
10.2 Drive ..................................................................................................................................................................................PN -77
10.2.1 Relay conveyance roller drive / Relay paper exit roller drive ..................................................................................PN -77
10.3 Operation ..........................................................................................................................................................................PN -78
10.3.1 Relay conveyance control .......................................................................................................................................PN -78
11. OTHERS .............................................................................................................................................................PN -79
11.1 Fan control ........................................................................................................................................................................PN -79
11.1.1 .................................................................................................................................................................................PN -79
11.2 Door opening/closing control ............................................................................................................................................PN -79
PO THEORY OF OPERATION IC-601 ........................................................................................PO -1

1. OUTLINE ................................................................................................................................................................PO -1
1.1 Unit configuration ..................................................................................................................................................................PO -1
2. INTERFACE SECTION ..........................................................................................................................................PO -2
2.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................PO -2
2.2 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PO -2
2.2.1 Interface outline ..........................................................................................................................................................PO -2
3. SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION .............................................................................................................................PO -3
3.2 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PO -3
3.2.1 Outline of system control section ................................................................................................................................PO -3
4. VIDEO INTERFACE SECTION ..............................................................................................................................PO -4
4.2 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PO -4
4.2.1 Outline of video interface section ...............................................................................................................................PO -4
5. SSD/HDD SECTION ..............................................................................................................................................PO -5
5.2 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PO -5
5.2.1 SSD/HDD section overview ........................................................................................................................................PO -5
lv
6. POWER SOURCE SECTION .................................................................................................................................PO -6
6.2 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PO -6
6.2.1 Power source supply ..................................................................................................................................................PO -6
PP THEORY OF OPERATION RU-506..........................................................................................PP-1

1. OUTLINE..................................................................................................................................................................PP-1
1.1 Unit configuration....................................................................................................................................................................PP-1
1.2 Paper path...............................................................................................................................................................................PP-2
1.2.1 Straight conveyance.....................................................................................................................................................PP-2
1.2.2 Reverse/exit conveyance..............................................................................................................................................PP-3
2. CONVEYANCE SECTION........................................................................................................................................PP-4
2.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PP-4
2.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PP-4
2.2.1 Conveyance drive.........................................................................................................................................................PP-4
2.2.2 Straight gate drive.........................................................................................................................................................PP-5
2.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PP-5
2.3.1 Conveyance path switching operation..........................................................................................................................PP-5
2.3.2 Conveyance control......................................................................................................................................................PP-5
3. STACKER SECTION................................................................................................................................................PP-8
3.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PP-8
3.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PP-9
3.2.1 Stacker exit shutter drive..............................................................................................................................................PP-9
3.2.2 Stack switching drive..................................................................................................................................................PP-10
3.2.3 Stacker entrance guide plate drive.............................................................................................................................PP-10
3.2.4 Alignment drive...........................................................................................................................................................PP-11
3.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PP-11
3.3.1 Alignment control........................................................................................................................................................PP-11
3.3.2 Reverse/exit control....................................................................................................................................................PP-12
3.3.3 Stack assist fan control...............................................................................................................................................PP-14
PQ THEORY OF OPERATION GP-501.........................................................................................PQ-1

1. PREFACE.................................................................................................................................................................PQ-1
1.1 INTRODUCTION....................................................................................................................................................................PQ-1
1.1.1 Setting the Right Expectations.....................................................................................................................................PQ-1
1.2 PRODUCT POSITIONING.....................................................................................................................................................PQ-1
1.3 LONG EDGE FEED (LEF) ONLY...........................................................................................................................................PQ-1
2. OUTLINE..................................................................................................................................................................PQ-2
2.1 Unit configuration diagram......................................................................................................................................................PQ-2
2.2 Paper path..............................................................................................................................................................................PQ-3
3. CONVEYANCE SECTION.......................................................................................................................................PQ-4
3.1 Configuration..........................................................................................................................................................................PQ-4
4. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION..................................................................................................................................PQ-5
4.1 Punch conveyance control......................................................................................................................................................PQ-5
4.2 Punch operation......................................................................................................................................................................PQ-6
4.3 Chip tray control......................................................................................................................................................................PQ-7
4.4 Bypass conveyance control....................................................................................................................................................PQ-7
5. PUNCH MODULE....................................................................................................................................................PQ-9
5.1 Tools Required.......................................................................................................................................................................PQ-9
5.2 Procedure...............................................................................................................................................................................PQ-9
Q TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Ver2.0 (REPORTS FROM THE MARKET)..................................Q-1

1. ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE....................................................................................................................................Q-1
1.1 Colors........................................................................................................................................................................................Q-1
1.1.1 Color calibration procedure.............................................................................................................................................Q-1
1.1.2 Maximum density adjustment.........................................................................................................................................Q-3
1.1.3 Density balance adjustment..........................................................................................................................................Q-14
1.1.4 Register paper category................................................................................................................................................Q-15
1.1.5 Printer controller calibration (IC-601)............................................................................................................................Q-17
1.2 Paper.......................................................................................................................................................................................Q-22
1.2.1 Both sides position adjustment.....................................................................................................................................Q-22
2. IMAGE QUALITY......................................................................................................................................................Q-33
2.1 Spot.........................................................................................................................................................................................Q-33
2.1.1 Cyclic white spot/black spot..........................................................................................................................................Q-33
2.2 Line/Band................................................................................................................................................................................Q-33
2.2.1 Line and uneven density countermeasure flow.............................................................................................................Q-33
lvi
2.2.2 White lines (to sub-scan direction)................................................................................................................................Q-34
2.2.3 Drum humidity memory.................................................................................................................................................Q-36
2.2.4 Gloss line caused by fusing paper exit roller................................................................................................................Q-36
2.2.5 Banding in the main scan direction on halftone image printed on thick paper(Jitter problem)......................................Q-37
2.2.6 Line like ripple on image...............................................................................................................................................Q-39
2.2.7 Banding on Halftone.....................................................................................................................................................Q-39
2.2.8 Waste toner packing.....................................................................................................................................................Q-40
2.2.9 Transfer shifts with halftone on thick paper under high humidity..................................................................................Q-40
2.2.10 8mm pitch line on thick paper at low speed printing...................................................................................................Q-41
2.2.11 Darker image up to 53mm from leading edge or after 53mm from white area (Developing memory)........................Q-42
2.2.12 Image after white part becomes darker (Developing ghost).......................................................................................Q-43
2.2.13 Image soilage at machine rear side............................................................................................................................Q-44
2.3 Soilage....................................................................................................................................................................................Q-45
2.3.1 Toner spilling.................................................................................................................................................................Q-45
2.3.2 Smear on mat-coated paper with half-tone image........................................................................................................Q-46
2.4 Others.....................................................................................................................................................................................Q-47
2.4.1 Darker at the trailing edge of image..............................................................................................................................Q-47
2.4.2 Depletion of developer after continuous printing...........................................................................................................Q-47
2.4.3 Image skew (CD skew : bottom down direction)...........................................................................................................Q-48
2.4.4 How to maintain consistent color during continuous printing........................................................................................Q-57
3. PAPER......................................................................................................................................................................Q-59
3.1 Paper conveyance failure........................................................................................................................................................Q-59
3.1.1 PFU centering error (image suddenly shifts by 5mm)...................................................................................................Q-59
3.1.2 2nd side image position adjustment..............................................................................................................................Q-61
3.1.3 Scratch on thick paper (Except RU-509)......................................................................................................................Q-62
3.1.4 Scratch on thick paper (RU-508)..................................................................................................................................Q-71
3.2 Others.....................................................................................................................................................................................Q-78
3.2.1 Paper waving................................................................................................................................................................Q-78
3.2.2 Curl or buckling at fusing unit........................................................................................................................................Q-79
4. MACHINE TROUBLES.............................................................................................................................................Q-81
4.1 Control.....................................................................................................................................................................................Q-81
4.1.1 Printer gamma offset automatic adjustment does not complete normally after trying several times............................Q-81
4.1.2 Print job is not accepted while machine indicates dehumidifying.................................................................................Q-81
4.1.3 Developer spill..............................................................................................................................................................Q-81
4.1.4 Either error code 246 or 247 is indicated on the display with ISW................................................................................Q-82
4.1.5 ISW does not complete.................................................................................................................................................Q-82
4.2 Error code...............................................................................................................................................................................Q-82
4.2.1 C-2451, C-2452, C-2453 and C-2454 occur.................................................................................................................Q-82
4.2.2 C-2721, Intermediate transfer belt wrapping jam due to separation failure..................................................................Q-83
4.2.3 C-C101 occurs right after turning ON the power source...............................................................................................Q-84
4.2.4 C-3102 fusing motor abnormality..................................................................................................................................Q-86
4.2.5 C-0213 paper ejection abnormality...............................................................................................................................Q-87
4.3 Others.....................................................................................................................................................................................Q-88
4.3.1 Options cannot be recognized. System configuration display without options.............................................................Q-88
4.3.2 Caution for charging developer to developing unit........................................................................................................Q-88
4.3.3 Weekly timer setting - select time for power save does not work normally...................................................................Q-89
4.3.4 Intermediate transfer belt cleaning blade flipping.........................................................................................................Q-90
5. OPTIONS..................................................................................................................................................................Q-92
5.1 RU-508/RU-509/HM-102.........................................................................................................................................................Q-92
5.1.1 J-7551 or J-7552 occurs if the guide plate under the entrance of RU-508/509 is not fully locked................................Q-92
5.1.2 Correction to the RU-509 User's Guide: The curl adjustment reference table..............................................................Q-92
5.1.3 Water leakage of HM-101/102......................................................................................................................................Q-93
5.1.4 J-7550 occurs due to mis-detection of the entrance sensor.........................................................................................Q-93
5.2 FS-531/FS-612........................................................................................................................................................................Q-94
5.2.1 When using the FS-531/FS-612 and binding 2 sheets with 2 stapling positions, a shift in the stapling positions occurs in
the direction of the paper feed................................................................................................................................................Q-94
5.2.2 FS-612 board damage due to the wrong description of installation manual.................................................................Q-95
5.3 FS-521....................................................................................................................................................................................Q-96
5.3.1 Staple JAM procedure..................................................................................................................................................Q-96
5.3.2 FS-521 When stapling papers, mis-alignment occurs..................................................................................................Q-99
5.4 SD-506..................................................................................................................................................................................Q-100
5.4.1 SD-506 Tri-fold adjustment procedure........................................................................................................................Q-100
5.5 LS-505...................................................................................................................................................................................Q-101
5.5.1 LS-505 Mis-alignment in the LS stack........................................................................................................................Q-101
5.5.2 LS-505 The door opens with its rebound....................................................................................................................Q-102
5.5.3 LS-505 BELT 216L(15AV7653) Replacement procedure...........................................................................................Q-103
6. OTHERS.................................................................................................................................................................Q-109
6.1 Service tool...........................................................................................................................................................................Q-109
6.1.1 Developer ejection jig..................................................................................................................................................Q-109
lvii
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L Revision List > bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 Ver. 2.0
Revision List
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 Ver. 2.0
Issue data:2010/12
No. Title Descriptions of revision
1 - Addition of C70hc as a machine name
2 B.2. PRODUCT NAME Addition of Microsoft Windows 7
3 C.1.2 Functions Correction of the custom paper size due to a specification change
4 C.1.5 Materials Addition of information of C70hc
5 C.1.6 Maintenance Addition of information of C70hc, correction of error in writing
6 C.1.7 Machine data Correction of the power consumption and weight due to a specification
change
7 C.12.2 Functions Correction of error about the FS-521 paper size
8 C.18.2 Functions Correction of error about the FD-503 paper size
9 C.19.3 Type of paper Correction of error about the SD-506 paper size
10 C.23.12 Appendix B Addition of information of the DS-507/514
11 D.1.1 System configuration (C7000/C7000P/C70hc/ Addition of information of the IC-413, DS-507/514
C6000)
12 D.1.2 Configuration for optional device (C7000/C7000P/ Addition of information about the configuration for optional device
C70hc/C6000)
13 E.1.8.9 Various setting for the software Correction of error in writing
14 F.1.1.8 Periodic maintenance 4 (Every 340,000 prints Addition of information of C70hc
(C7000/C7000P/C70hc))/Periodic maintenance 5
(Every 300,000 prints (C6000/C6000L))
15 F.1.1.16 Periodic maintenance 10 (Every 900,000 prints Correction of error in writing
(C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C6000L))
16 F.1.6.1 Periodic maintenance 1 (Every 600,000 prints) Addition of lacked information
17 F.2.2.1 Periodically replaced parts list (C7000/C7000P/ Addition of information of C70hc / Correction of errors in writing
C70hc)
18 F.2.2.2 Periodically replaced parts list (C6000/C6000L) Correction of error in writing
19 F.3.4 Management of ORU-M parts counter Addition of information due to addition of "ORU-M Password Setting"
20 F.11.5.2 Replacing the paper exit opening solenoid Correction of error in writing
assy (SD9)
21 F.17.4.6 Replacing the trimmer blade motor (M31) Addition/correction of information due to the change of installation position of
the SD-506 trimmer blade motor (M31)
22 F.17.4.7 Lubrication to the trimmer unit Addition/correction of information due to the change of installation position of
23 F.18.1.2 Replacing the switchback roller Correction of error in writing
24 G.2.2.13 Writing unit Addition of information for installing the writing unit
25 G.2.2.21 Fusing large/small recognition connector Addition of the removal procedure for the fusing large/small recognition
connector of the fusing unit
26 G.14.1.3 Wire slack prevention sensor (PS66) Addition/correction of information due to the change of installation position of
27 I.3.1 List of utility menus Addition of items to the Utility list
28 I.5.1 Service Mode List Addition of items to the Service Mode list
29 I.5.3.9 Skew Initial Position Memory (Printer Adjustment Correction of the usage of Skew Initial Position Memory in Service Mode
- Writing Initial Pos. Memory)
30 I.5.3.10 Cross Direction Initial Pos. (Printer Adjustment Deletion of item
- Writing Initial Pos. Memory)
31 I.5.3.24 Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (RU) (Quality Addition of "Printer Gamma Offset Auto." to Service Mode
Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)
32 I.5.3.26 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj. (RU) (Quality Addition of "Printer Gamma Sensor Adj. (RU)" to Service Mode
Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)
33 I.5.5.2 Software DIPSW setting list Addition of the following DIPSW
DIPSW11-1, DIPSW14-4, DIPSW37-0/1/2/3
34 I.5.5.2 Software DIPSW setting list Addition/correction of the following software DIPSW
DIPSW3-0, DIPSW12-4, DIPSW13-7 , DIPSW14-2/3, DIPSW15-2,
DIPSW19-5, DIPSW27-1/2, DIPSW29-2
35 I.5.5.2 Software DIPSW setting list Deletion of the following software DIPSW
DIPSW35-2/3/4/5
36 I.5.5.5 Setup Date/Business Setting Correction of information in "Setup Date/Business Setting" in Service Mode
37 I.5.6.16 Special Parts Counter Correction of error in writing
38 I.5.7.4 IO check mode list Deletion of I/O check code 99-04
1
39 I.5.9.26 Cover Trimming Adj. (Perfect Binder Correction of error in writing

Adjustment)
40 I.5.9.27 Cover Lead Edge Adj. (Perfect Binder Correction of error in writing
Adjustment)
41 I.5.9.28 Spine Corner form Pos. (Perfect Binder Correction of error in writing
Adjustment)
42 I.5.9.29 Glue Start Position (Perfect Binder Adjustment) Correction of error in writing
43 I.5.9.30 Glue Finish Position (Perfect Binder Correction of error in writing
Adjustment)
44 GlueFormationFinishPos. (Perfect Binder Adjustment) Correction of error in writing
45 I.5.9.31 Temperature Adjustment (Perfect Binder Correction of error in writing
Adjustment)
46 I.5.9.32 Sub Compile CD Width Adj. (Perfect Binder Correction of error in writing
Adjustment)
47 I.5.9.33 Clamp CD Width Adjustment (Perfect Binder Correction of error in writing
Adjustment)
48 I.5.9.34 Cover Up/Down CD Width Adj. (Perfect Binder Correction of error in writing
Adjustment)
49 I.5.9.35 Clamp FD Position Adj. (Perfect Binder Correction of error in writing
Adjustment)
50 I.5.10 Firmware Version Addition of information about the function to enhance security
51 I.5.11.2 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care Addition of information of the IC-413
(When using E-mail)
52 I.5.11.4 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care Addition of information of the IC-413 / Addition of the procedure for setting
(When using WebDAV server) Heart Beat function
53 I.5.11.11 List of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care Addition of information to the DIPSW list of CSRC
54 I.5.13.5 Test Pattern No.40 Image skew check pattern Addition of Test Pattern No.40
(Full-bleed print of Test Pattern No.16)
55 I.5.15.2 Execute Log Storing Correction of error in writing
56 I.5.16.2 ORU-M Life Threshold Setting Addition of "ORU-M Life Threshold Setting" to Service Mode
57 I.5.16.3 ORU-M Password Setting Addition of "ORU-M Password Setting" to Service Mode
58 I.6.5.2 Caution before ISW Deletion of item
59 I.6.5.2 Method of the USB memory ISW Correction of the procedure for upgrading the IC-601 firmware version
60 I.6.5.3 Method of Internet ISW Correction of the procedure for upgrading the IC-601 firmware version
61 I.6.5.4 ISW error list Correction of errors in the IC-601 ISW error list
62 I.7.1 CE/Administrator Security Setting List Addition of information about the function to enhance security
63 I.15.2 Position adjustment of the shutter solenoid (SD5) Addition of the method for adjusting the shutter solenoid to RU-509
mechanical adjustment
64 I.18.5 Adjusting the mounting position of the alignment Correction of error in writing
plate /Up
65 K.1.1 Jam code list Addition of the RU-506 jam code
66 K.2.1 Trouble reset method Addition of information to the trouble reset method after the occurrence of
malfunction code
67 K.2.3 Malfunction code list Addition of information due to the change of trouble reset method after the
occurrence of malfunction code / Addition of the RU-509 shutter solenoid
(SD5) to the estimated abnormal parts of C-1297
68 L.1.1.8 Main body front side Correction of error in writing
69 L.1.1.13 Toner supply section Correction of error in writing
70 L.1.14.6 Trimmer section Addition/correction of information due to the change of installation position of
71 M.16.1 Timing chart of the duplex mode Deletion of the RU-506 time chart
72 N.13.1 SD-506 Addition/correction of information due to the change of installation position of
73 N.13.5 SD-506 (4/4) Addition/correction of information due to the change of installation position of
74 O.1.1.1 Main body right side Addition of information of the IC-413
75 O.7.1 Configuration Correction of error in writing
76 O.16.5.1 Charge potential automatic adjustment Deletion of item
77 PM.7.2.2 Trimmer blade drive Addition/correction of information due to the change of installation position of
78 PM.7.3.2 Trimmer blade control Addition/correction of information due to the change of installation position of
79 PN.9.3.7 Book full status detection control Correction of error in writing
2

Date of issue: December 2010
No. Title Descriptions of revision
1 C.1.2 Functions Correction of error in writing
2 C.11.3 Type of paper Addition of color paper to the unusable type of paper in humidifier ON mode
5 C.21. IC-601 Addition of C8000
6 E.1.8.1 Outline Addition of compliant OS for Management Tool
7 F.1.1.10 Periodic maintenance 6 (Every 400,000 prints Correction of the part number
(C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C6000L))
(C7000/C7000P/C70hc))
(C6000/C6000L))
(C7000/C7000P/C70hc))
11 F.1.1.23 Periodic maintenance 17 (Every 2,400,000 Correction of the part number
prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc))/Periodic maintenance
15 (Every 2,400,000 prints (C6000/C6000L))
12 F.2.2.1 Periodically replaced parts list (C7000/C7000P/ Correction of the part number
C70hc)
13 F.2.2.2 Periodically replaced parts list (C6000/C6000L) Correction of the part number
14 F.5.3.4 Replacing the drum cartridge Correction of Note for replacing the drum cartridge
15 F.5.4.1 Replace the charging corona. Addition/correction of Note for replacing the charging corona
16 F.5.6.2 Replacing the developing units /C, /M, /Y, and / Correction of Note for replacing the developing unit
K
17 F.5.8.1 Replacing the pick-up roller and the paper feed Correction of the maintenance cycle
roller rubber
18 F.5.8.2 Replacing the separation roller rubber Correction of the maintenance cycle
19 F.5.8.3 Replacing the paper feed clutch and the pre- Correction of the maintenance cycle
registration clutch Correction of error in writing
20 F.5.13.1 Removing/reinstalling the fusing unit Correction of error in writing
21 I.3.1 List of utility menus Deletion of GlueFormationFinishPos. (Perfect Binder Adjustment)
Correction of error in writing
22 I.4. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS Addition of the adjustment item required after replacing the board of DF
23 I.5.5.2 Software DIPSW setting list Addition/correction of the following software DIPSW
DIPSW12-6, DIPSW13-5, DIPSW13-6, DIPSW17-7, DIPSW33-6,
DIPSW37-5, DIPSW37-6, DIPSW37-7, DIPSW40-2, DIPSW40-3,
DIPSW40-4
24 I.5.7.4 IO check mode list Addition of the following I/O check code
99-92, 99-93
Correction of error in writing
25 I.5.8.1 ADF Original Size Adj. Addition of Note
26 I.5.9.31 GlueFormationFinishPos. (Perfect Binder Deletion of item
Adjustment)
27 I.6. IC-601 Service Mode Correction/addition of information related to C-601
28 I.15.2 Position adjustment of the shutter solenoid (SD5) Correction of error in writing
29 K.2.3 Malfunction code list Addition/correction of the following malfunction code
C-1355, C-D0E0, C-D0E1, C-D0E2, C-D0E3, C-D0E4, C-D0E5, C-D0E6, C-
D0E7, C- D0E8
30 L.1.1.4 Main body rear side 4 Correction of error in writing
31 L.3.1 bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, Addition of the relay connector layout drawing of the main body
bizhub PRO C6000L
3

No. ID Title Ver. Descriptions of revision Date
1 - - Addition of C6000L as a machine name 2011/08/26
D000025449 C.1.5 Materials Addition of information of the C6000L
2 3 2011/08/26
4
D000025449 C.1.6 Maintenance Addition of information of the C6000L
3 4 2011/08/26
5
D000061776 D.1.3 System configuration (C6000L) Addition of information of the C6000L
4 5 2011/08/26
1
D000061776 D.1.4 Configuration for optional device Addition of information of the C6000L
5 4 2011/08/26
2 (C6000L)
D000025467 E.1.8.1 Outline Addition of Note
6 4 2011/08/26
9
F.1.1.16 Periodic maintenance 10 (Every Addition of information of the fusing drive gear /M
D000025470
7 900,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc/ 3 2011/08/26
4
C6000/C6000L))
F.1.1.17 Periodic maintenance 11 (Every Addition of information of the paper exit drive gear
D000025470
8 1,000,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc/ 2 2011/08/26
5
C6000/C6000L))
D000025476 F.2.2.1 Periodically replaced parts list Addition of information of the fusing drive gear /M
9 4 2011/08/26
6 (C7000/C7000P/C70hc) Addition of information of the paper exit drive gear
D000025476 F.2.2.2 Periodically replaced parts list Addition of information of the fusing drive gear /M
10 4 2011/08/26
7 (C6000/C6000L) Addition of information of the paper exit drive gear
D000025480 F.5.12.2 Replacing the paper exit drive Addition of information of the paper exit drive gear
11 3 2011/08/26
7 gear, paper exit de-curler roller
D000025481 F.5.13.4 Replacing the fusing drive gear / Addition of information of the fusing drive gear /M
12 3 2011/08/26
0 M
D000025515 I.5.3.3 FD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Correction of error in writing
13 3 2011/06/29
9 Adjustment)
I.5.5.2 Software DIPSW setting list Correction of the following software DIPSW
D000025521
14 4 DIPSW8-7, DIPSW27-3, DIPSW33-2, DIPSW33-3, 2011/08/26
9
DIPSW33-6
D000026821 I.5.6.16 Special Parts Counter Correction of error in writing
15 3 2011/08/26
5
D000025711 J.1.1 Precautions on rewriting the Addition of precautions on executing ISW
16 3 2011/08/26
8 firmware
D000062215 J.1.2.1 Table of combination (Main body: Addition of precautions on executing ISW
17 1 2011/08/26
1 Printer control board)
D000062215 J.1.2.2 Table of combination (FS-521: Addition of precautions on executing ISW
18 1 2011/08/26
0 FNS control board)
D000025741 K.2.3 Malfunction code list Correction of error in writing
19 5 2011/08/26
4 Addition of items to the solution for C-0213, C-3102
K.5.1 IC malfunction code list Correction of error in writing
D000025801
20 2 Addition of items according to the subdivision of 2011/08/26
8
malfunction code
D000025803 L.1.1.2 Main body rear side 2 Correction of error in writing
21 3 2011/08/26
5
D000025846 O.19.1 Configuration Correction of error in writing
22 3 2011/08/26
1
4

1 - - - Addition of information on 1250/1250P/1052 2012/07/09
2 A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT Standardization of the content 2012/07/09
- -
WARNING ITEMS
3 D00002545 C.10.2 Functions Addition of Note in the output paper density adjustment 2012/07/09
2
44 mode
4 D00008386 C.11.3 Type of paper Correction of error in writing 2012/07/09
1
85
5 D00002545 C.12.3 Type of paper Correction of error in writing 2012/07/09
4
57
6 D00002545 C.18.2 Functions Addition of information on the punch hole accuracy 2012/07/09
4
92
7 D00002546 C.20.2 Functions Correction of error in writing 2012/07/09
2
04
8 D00002546 C.20.3 Type of paper Addition of information on the supported paper type 2012/07/09
3
05
9 D00002546 E.1.1.1 Service material list Correction of error in writing 2012/07/09
3
35
10 D00002546 E.1.2.1 Jig list 2012/07/09
3 Correction of error in writing
44
11 E.1.8 Management Tool Separation of the procedure for each machine 2012/07/09
- - Revision of the content including the addition of the
error code
12 D00002546 E.1.9.2 Preparation Correction of error in writing 2012/07/09
2
87
13 D00002546 E.1.9.3 Procedure for acquisition Correction of error in writing 2012/07/09
2
88
14 - F.1.14 RU-506 - Correction of error in writing 2012/07/09
15 F.6. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE Correction of error in writing 2012/07/09
- -
PROCEDURE DF-622
16 F.10. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE Correction of information on the special parts counter 2012/07/09
- -
PROCEDURE RU-509/HM-102
- -
PROCEDURE PI-502 Correction of information on the special parts counter
18 D00008387 F.14.2.5 Replacing the paper feed Addition of the replacing procedure 2012/07/09
1
35 clutch /Up (CL201) and /Lw (CL202)
19 F.15. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE Correction of information on the special parts counter 2012/07/09
- -
PROCEDURE LS-505
- -
PROCEDURE FD-503 Correction of information on the special parts counter
- -
PROCEDURE SD-506 Correction of information on the special parts counter
- -
PROCEDURE PB-503 Correction of information on the special parts counter
23 D00002549 G.2.2.8 CCD unit Correction of error in writing 2012/07/09
3
55
24 D00008387 G.11.2.5 PI unit Addition of the disassembling/reassembling procedure 2012/07/09
1
37 for PI unit
25 G.13.3.17 Way to distinguish between Addition of information on the new type of multi feed 2012/07/09
D00008387 new and old types of the multi feed detection board
1
41 detection board /1 (MFDB/1) and /2
(MFDB/2)
26 D00008387 G.13.3.18 Multi feed detection board /1 Addition of information on the new type of multi feed 2012/07/09
1
42 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2) (new type) detection board
27 D00002551 I.5.2.1 Start method Addition of Note 2012/07/09
2
55
28 I.5.3.25 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj. Addition of information on C7000P/C70hc (printer 2012/07/09
D00002551
(Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma 5 version)
81
Adjustment)
29 I.5.5.2 Software DIPSW setting list Addition/correction of the following software DIPSW 2012/07/09
D00002552 DIPSW10-0, DIPSW33-4, DIPSW34-6, DIPSW34-7,
5
19 DIPSW37-4, DIPSW38-0, DIPSW38-1, DIPSW38-2,
DIPSW38-3, DIPSW40-1, DIPSW40-7
30 D00008813 I.5.5.6 Restrictions on banner print Addition of Restrictions on the banner print 2012/07/09
1
84
5

31 D00002555 I.5.6.14 ORU-M Maintenance History Correction of error in writing
3
57
32 D00002682 I.5.6.16 Special Parts Counter Correction of error in writing
4
15
33 D00002555 I.5.7.4 IO check mode list Correction of error in writing 2012/07/09
4
65 Addition of information on the LS 2 nd tandem
34 D00008387 I.5.7.5 Adjustment when replacing the Addition of information on the new type of multi feed
1
45 multi feed detection board (PI) (new type) detection board
35 D00002565 I.5.9.22 Tri-Fold Position Adj. (Saddle Correction of error in writing
4
64 Stitcher Pos. Adj.)
36 D00002565 I.5.9.24 Trimming Adjustment (Saddle Addition of Note
3
66 Stitcher Pos. Adj.)
37 I.5.11.3 Setup procedure of the CS Correction of error in writing 2012/07/09
D00002565
Remote Care (When using phone line 2
94
modem)
38 D00005103 I.5.11.6 Mail initial setting (In the case of Correction of error in writing 2012/07/09
2
92 the main body NIC)
39 D00005103 I.5.11.8 http communication setting (In Correction of error in writing 2012/07/09
2
93 the case of the main body NIC)
40 D00002566 I.5.11.9 http Communication Setting (In Correction of error in writing 2012/07/09
2
00 the case of controller NIC)
41 I.5.11.11 List of software DIPSW for CS Addition/correction of the following software DIPSW 2012/07/09
Remote Care DIPSW1-4/5/6/7, DIPSW4-0/1, DIPSW5-0/1/2/3,
DIPSW6-0/1/2/3/4/5/6, DIPSW8-0/1/2/3,
D00002566 DIPSW9-0/1/2/3/4/5/6, DIPSW10-0/1/2/3/4/5/6/7,
3
02 DIPSW11-0/1/2/3/4/5/6/7, DIPSW12-0/1/2/3/4/5/6/7,
DIPSW14-0/1/2/3/4/5/6/7, DIPSW15-0/1/2/3/4/5/6/7,
DIPSW16-0/1/2/3/4/5/6/7, DIPSW21-0/1/2/3/4/5/6/7,
DIPSW22-0/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
42 D00002569 I.5.15.1 Log Store Setting Addition of Note 2012/07/09
2
83
43 D00002569 I.5.15.2 Execute Log Storing Addition of Note 2012/07/09
3
84
44 D00002570 I.7.4 CE Auth. Password Addition of information on the password 2012/07/09
2
10
45 D00002570 I.7.6 Administrator Password Addition of information on the password 2012/07/09
2
12
46 D00008387 I.20.2 PK punch position centering Addition of PK punch position centering adjustment 2012/07/09
1
48 adjustment
47 D00002571 K.1.1 Jam code list Correction of error in writing 2012/07/09
3
36
48 D00002574 K.2.3 Malfunction code list Correction of error in writing 2012/07/09
6
14
49 D00002582 M.11.1 Timing chart of the PI automatic Correction of the content 2012/07/09
3
34 paper feed mode
50 D00002587 PJ.2.3.4 Registration control Correction of the content 2012/07/09
3
30
6
Revision List > bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, bizhub
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L PRO C6000...
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, bizhub PRO C6000L Ver. 4.1

Q. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Ver2.0 Addition of information on the TROUBLESHOOTING
1 - 1 2012/12/17
(REPORTS FROM THE MARKET) GUIDE (REPORTS FROM THE MARKET)
7
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Read carefully the safety and important warning items described below to understand them
before doing service work.
A-1
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 1. IMPORTANT
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L NOTICE
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as
the risk of damage to the product, KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
(hereafter called KMBT) strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by
KMBT-trained service technicians.
Changes may have been made to this product to improve its performance after this Service
Manual was printed. Accordingly, KMBT does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that
the information contained in this service manual is complete and accurate.
The user of this service manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to
the product while servicing the product for which this service manual is intended. Therefore,
this service manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of
technical training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the product
properly.
Keep this service manual also for future service.
A-2
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 2. DESCRIPTION
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L ITEMS FOR DANGE...
2. DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING

AND CAUTION
2.1 Description items in this Service Manual
In this Service Manual, each of three expressions DANGER, WARNING, and
CAUTION are defined as follows.
When servicing the product, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment,
repair, maintenance, etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.
DANGER : Action having a high possibility of suffering

death or serious injury
WARNING : Action having a possibility of suffering death

or serious injury
CAUTION : Action having a possibility of suffering a slight

wound and property damage
2.2 Description items for safety and important warning items

Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
: Precaution when
servicing the product.
General
Electric hazard High temperature
precaution
: Prohibition when
General Do not touch with Do not
prohibition wet hand disassemble
: Direction when
General
Unplug Ground/Earth
instruction
Illustrations representing the power plug and wall outlet used in the following descriptions are
only typical. Their shapes differ depending on the country or region.
A-3
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 3. SAFETY
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L WARNINGS
3. SAFETY WARNINGS
3.1 MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA
BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
KONICA MINOLTA brand products are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is
achieved through high-quality design and a solid service network.
Product design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical,
physical, and electrical aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at
proper tolerances and safety factors. For this reason, unauthorized modifications involve a high
risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore strictly
prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reasoning behind
this policy.
3.1.1 Actions requiring special attention
WARNING
Do not make any modifications to the product
unless otherwise instructed by KMBT.
Do not use any part not specified by KMBT.
Do not use any power cord or power plug not

specified by KMBT.
Use only the protective fuses specified by

KMBT.
Use of any type of fuse or related part not
specified by KMBT makes safety devices
inoperative which may result in a fire from
high heat.
Do not disable fuse functions or use a wire,
metal clip, solder, or other conductor in place
of the fuse.
Fire may result from high heat.
Do not disable relay functions (for example,
inserting a piece of paper between relay
contacts to hamper circuit action.)
Fire may result from high heat.
A-4
WARNING
Do not disable safety functions (for example,
interlocks and safety circuits).
Safety devices become inoperative, resulting
in fire from high heat, electric shock, or
injury.
3.2 POWER PLUG SELECTION

In some countries or areas, the power plug provided with the product may not fit the wall outlet
used in the area. In that case, it is the obligation of the customer engineer (hereafter called the
CE) to attach the appropriate power plug or power cord set in order to connect the product to
the supply.
3.2.1 Power Cord Set or Power Plug
WARNING
Use a power supply cord set which meets the
following criteria:
- provided with a plug having configuration
intended for the connection to wall outlet
appropriate for the product's rated voltage and
current, and kw
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and
- provided with three-conductor cable having
enough current capacity, and
- the cord set meets regulatory requirements for
the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to fire or electric
shock.
A-5
WARNING
Attach power plug which meets the following criteria:
- having configuration intended for the connection
to wall outlet appropriate for the products rated
voltage and current, and
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and
- meets regulatory requirements for the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to the product
connecting to inadequate power supply (voltage,
current capacity, grounding), and may result in fire
or electric shock.
The wires in the power supply cord shall be
connected to the terminals of the plug in accordance
with the following:
Color of the wire Terminal of the plug
Marked with "L", "A" or "W"
Brown Black
or colored RED
Marked with "N"
Light Blue White
or colored BLACK
Marked with "E", "PE" or " "

Green-and-Yellow
or colored GREEN
or GREEN-AND-YELLOW
Wrong connection may cancel safeguards within the
product, and results in fire or electric shock.
3.3 CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

KONICA MINOLTA brand products are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all
applicable safety standards are met, in order to protect the customer and customer engineer
(hereafter called the CE) from the risk of injury. However, in daily use, any electrical
equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain safety and
reliability, the CE must perform regular safety checks.
A-6
3.3.1 Power Supply

(1) Connection to Power Supply
WARNING
The power outlet should have a capacity of at
least the maximum power consumption and
be dedicated only to the product.
The current that can be passed through the
outlet is limited and any current exceeding
the limit could result in fire.
If the wall outlet has two or more receptacles kw
and the product and another electrical

appliance are plugged into this wall outlet,
make sure that the total load does not exceed
the rating of the wall outlet. The current that
can be passed through the outlet is limited
and any current exceeding the limit could
result in a fire.
Do not use any conversion plug adapter even
if the power plug shape does not match your
wall outlet.
The shapes of the power plug and the wall
outlet are set according to the voltage and
allowable current. Use of a conversion plug
adapter could result in an abnormal voltage
or insufficient current capacity, leading to a
fire. It may also result in an electric shock
due to a grounding failure.
If the plug shape does not match the wall
outlet, request the user to perform power
source installation work.
A-7
WARNING
Make sure the power cord is plugged into the
wall outlet securely.
If the power plug is left loose in the wall
outlet, contact failure may occur, leading to
abnormal heating of the power plug and a
risk of fire.
(2) Ground Connection
WARNING
Check whether the product is grounded
properly.
If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded
product, you may suffer electric shock while
operating the product.
Connect power plug to grounded wall
outlet.
Make sure of correct ground connection.
If the grounding wire is connected to an
inappropriate part, there is a risk of
explosion or electric shock. Do not connect
the grounding wire to any of the following
parts:
a. Gas pipe: Gas explosion or fire may
result.
b. Lightning rod: Risk of electric shock or
fire during lightning.
c. Grounding wire for telephone line: Risk of
electric shock or fire during lightning.
d. Water pipe and faucet: These parts do
not serve as a ground connection
because of a plastic part that is very
often installed midway within the water
pipe.
A-8
(3) Power Plug and Cord
WARNING
When using the power cord set (inlet type)
that came with this product, make sure the
connector is securely inserted in the inlet of
the product.
When a securing measure is provided,
secure the cord with the fixture properly.
If the power cord (inlet type) is not
connected to the product securely, a
contact problem may lead to increased
resistance, overheating, and risk of fire.
Do not allow the power cord to be stepped on
or pinched.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a
risk of fire.
Check whether the power cord is damaged.
Check whether the sheath is damaged.
If the power plug, cord, or sheath is
damaged, replace with a new power cord
(with plug and connector on each end)
specified by KMBT. Using the damaged
power cord may result in fire or electric
shock.
Do not bundle or tie the power cord.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a
risk of fire.
Check whether dust is collected around the
power plug and wall outlet.
Using the power plug and wall outlet
without removing dust may result in fire.
Do not insert the power plug into the wall
outlet with a wet hand.
The risk of electric shock exists.
A-9
WARNING
When unplugging the power cord, grasp the
plug, not the cable.
The cable may be broken, leading to a risk
of fire and electric shock.
(4) Wiring
WARNING
Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple
power cords in the same outlet.
If used, the risk of fire exists.
When an extension cord is required, use one
that meets the rated current, rated voltage,
and the relevant safety standards of the
country.
Current that can be passed through the
extension cable is limited and fire may
result from the use of an inappropriate type
of an extension cable.
Do not use an extension cable reel with the
cable taken up. Fire may result.
A-10
3.3.2 Installation Requirements

(1) Prohibited Installation Places
WARNING
Do not place the product near flammable
materials or volatile materials that may catch
fire.
A risk of fire exists.
Do not place the product in a place exposed
to water such as rain.
A risk of fire and electric shock exists.
(2) When not Using the Product for a long time
WARNING
When the product is not to be used for an
extended period of time (for holidays, for
example), instruct the user to turn OFF the
power switch and unplug the power cord from
the power outlet.
Dust collected around the power plug and
outlet may cause fire.
A-11
(3) Ventilation
CAUTION
The product generates ozone gas during
operation.
If the smell of ozone is present in the
following cases, ventilate the room.
a. When the product is used in a poorly
ventilated room
b. When making a lot of copies
c. When using multiple products at the
same time
(4) Stability
CAUTION
Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.
In the case of an earthquake, the product
may slide, leading to an injury.
A-12
3.3.3 After Service

(1) Inspection before Servicing
WARNING
Before conducting an inspection, read all
relevant documentation (service manual,
technical notices, etc.) and proceed with the
inspection following the prescribed procedure
using the recommended personal safety
equipment and using only the prescribed
tools.
Do not make any adjustment not described
in the documentation.
If the prescribed procedure or tool is not
used, the product may break and a risk of
injury or fire exists.
Before conducting an inspection, be sure to
disconnect the power plugs from the Main
Body and Accessories (Options).
When the power plug is inserted into the
wall outlet, some units are still powered
even if the POWER switch is turned OFF.
A risk of electric shock exists.
CAUTION
The area around the fixing unit is hot.
You may get burned.
A-13
CAUTION
Do not leave the machine unattended during
transportation, installation, and/or inspection.
If the machine is left unattended, face
protrusions toward the wall or take other
necessary precautions to prevent a user or
other person in the area from stumbling
over a protrusion of the machine or being
caught by a cable, possibly causing a fall to
the floor or other personal injury.
(2) Work Performed with the Product Powered On
WARNING
Take every care when making adjustments or
performing an operation check with the
product powered.
If you make adjustments or perform an
operation check with the external cover
detached, you may touch live or high-
voltage parts or you may be caught in
moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a
risk of injury.
Take every care when servicing with the
external cover detached.
High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A
risk of electric shock exists.
If it is absolutely necessary to service the
machine with the door open or external
covers removed, always be attentive to the
motion of the internal parts.
A normally protected part may cause
unexpected hazards.
A-14
CAUTION
Do not keep gazing at a lamp light during the
service procedure with the product powered
ON.
Eyestrain may result.
(3) Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
When a product fault is reported from a user,
check parts and repair the fault appropriately
with safety in mind.
A damaged product, personal injury, or fire
may result.
Whenever mounting an option on the
machine, be attentive to the motion of the
other workers performing the task.
Another worker may be injured by a pinch
point between the machine and the option.
When mounting an option on the machine, be
careful about the clearance between the
machine and the option.
You may be injured with your finger or hand
pinched between the machine and the
option.
When removing a part that secures a motor,
gear, or other moving part, disassembling a
unit, or reinstalling any of such parts and
units, be careful about moving parts and use
care not to drop any part or unit. During the
service procedure, give sufficient support for
any heavy unit.
You may be injured by a falling part or unit.
A-15
WARNING
Check the external covers and frame for
possible sharp edges, burrs, and damage.
They can be a cause of injury during use or
servicing.
When accessing a hard-to-view or narrow
spot, be careful about sharp edges and burrs
on the frame and parts.
They may injure your hands or fingers.
Do not allow any metal parts such as clips,
staples, and screws to fall into the product.
They can short internal circuits and cause
electric shock or spark bursting into flame.
Check wiring for pinched and any other
damage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of
electric shock or fire.
Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for
any damage.
Damage may lead to product failure and/or
the risk of fire.
Do not disassemble or adjust the write unit
(PH unit) incorporating a laser.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading
to a risk of loss of eyesight.
Do not supply power with the write unit (PH
unit) shifted from the specified mounting
position.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading
to a risk of loss of eyesight.
After replacing a part to which AC voltage is
applied (e.g., optical lamp and fixing lamp), be
sure to check the installation state.
A risk of fire exists.
A-16
WARNING
Check the interlock switch and actuator for
loosening and check whether the interlock
functions properly.
If the interlock does not function, you may
receive an electric shock or be injured
when you insert your hand in the product
(e.g., for clearing paper jam).
Make sure the wiring cannot come into
contact with sharp edges, burrs, or other
pointed parts.
Damage may lead to the risk of electric
shock or fire.
Make sure that all screws, components,
wiring, connectors, etc. that were removed for
safety check and maintenance have been
reinstalled in the original location. (Pay
special attention to forgotten connectors,
pinched cables, forgotten screws, etc.)
A risk of product trouble, personal injury,
electric shock, and fire exists.
Never use any flammable or combustible
spray, fluid, gas, or similar substance in and
around the product.
Do not use any flammable or combustible
dust spray, in particular, to clean the interior
of the product.
Fire or explosion may result.
CAUTION
Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust
from electrical parts and electrode units such
as a charging corona unit.
Toner remnants and dust may lead to
product failure and/or the risk of fire.
A-17
CAUTION
Check electrode units such as a charging
corona unit for deterioration and signs of
leakage.
Damage may lead to product failure and/or
the risk of fire.
When replacing a battery, replace it with a
new one as specified.
Dispose of the used battery as instructed
on its packaging or by local ordinance.
There is a risk of explosion if the battery is
replaced with an incorrect type.
(4) Handling of Consumables
WARNING
For handling of consumables (toner,
developer, photoconductor, etc.) and their
storage precautions, see MSDS.
(5) Handling of Service Materials
CAUTION
Handle with care according to MSDS.
Use of solvent may involve explosion, fire,
or personal injury.
3.4 FUSE
CAUTION
Double pole / neutral fusing
ATTENTION
Double ple / fusible sur le neutre.
A-18
3.5 Used Batteries Precautions

3.5.1 ALL Areas
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions.
3.5.2 Germany
VORSICHT!
Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemem Austausch der Batterie.
Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen gleichwertigen Typ.
Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers.
3.5.3 France
ATTENTION
Il y a danger dexplosion sil y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie.
Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du mme type ou dun type quivalent recommand
par le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usages conformment aux instructions du fabricant.
3.5.4 Denmark
ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering.
Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type.
Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandren.
3.5.5 Finland, Sweden

VAROlTUS
Paristo voi rjht, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin.
Hvit kytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.
3.5.6 Norway
ADVARSEL
Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri.
Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten.
Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner.
A-19
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 4. WARNING
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L INDICATIONS ON THE ...
4. WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE

Caution labels shown are attached in some areas on/in the machine.
When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be
taken to avoid burns and electric shock.
4.1 Warning indications inside the machine

(Fusing unit)
A-20
(Duplex section Upper surface)
DO NOT put your hand between

the main body and duplex section;
otherwise you may be injured.
A-21
(Rear side)
(Toner supply section)
CAUTION
Do not open the cover
during energization
since the light source of
laser is inside.
A-22
(DF rear side)
(LU-202)
CAUTION
To avoid any unexpected
injury, DO NOT put your hand
into the holes (3 places) on
the bottom plate of the LU.
(PB-503)
CAUTION
The paste tank
unit is very hot.
To avoid getting
burned DO NOT
TOUCH.
A-23
(FS-531/612)
CAUTION
To avoid injury, DO NOT
put your hand on top of
the printed sheets.
Be sure to hold both
sides of the printed
sheets when removing
them, and DO NOT leave
your hand on the printed
sheets while the primary
(main) tray goes up.
(SD-506)
WARNING
Do not touch the edge of the
trimmer blade.
You get injured.
A-24
(GP-501) WARNING
This safety message you could
get an electrical shock because
disconnecting power from this
section does not cut off power
from adjacent sections of the
machine.
WARNING
This safety message means
that you might get seriously
hurt or killed if you open the
product and expose yourself to
hazardous voltage. NEVER
remove the screwed on covers.
ALWAYS refer service
requirements to qualified
service personnel.
CAUTION
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised not to touch
by any caution label. Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off
or soiled and therefore the caution cannot be read, contact our service office.
A-25
4.2 Warning indications on the boards
WARNING
Do not open the cover for 10 minutes after turning OFF
the power switch.
There is a possibility of electrical shock caused by
charging voltage.
Do not open the cover for

10 minutes after turning
OFF the power switch.
There is a possibility of
electrical shock caused by
charging voltage.
CAUTION
after shutting off the machine.
supply unit for 10min.
on Capacitors! Do not touch power
Electric Shock from Storged Charge
WARNING
Do not open the cover for 50 minutes after turning OFF
the power switch.
There is a possibility of electrical shock caused by
charging voltage.
A-26
(RU-509)
WARNING
Do not open the cover for

50 minutes after turning
OFF the power switch.
There is a possibility of
electrical shock caused by
charging voltage.
CAUTION
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised not to touch
by any caution label. Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off
or soiled and therefore the caution cannot be read, contact our service office.
A-27
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 5. MEASURES
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L TO TAKE IN CASE OF...
5. MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT

1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take
emergency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage.
2. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evaluation
must be carried out quickly and KMBT must be notified.
3. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded through
direct on-site checks, in accordance with instructions issued by KMBT.
4. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations specified by
every distributor.
A-28
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 1. PRECAUTION ON
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L HANDLING THIS MANUAL
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS

1. PRECAUTION ON HANDLING THIS MANUAL
Be sure to maintain the confidentiality of this manual.
Mishandling of this manual may make you face punishment according to the laws.
B -1
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 2. PRODUCT NAME
2. PRODUCT NAME
In this manual, each product is indicated as following names.
(1) bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000*1: Copier or Main body
bizhub PRO C6000L*1: Copier or Main body

(2) Microsoft Windows 95: Windows 95
Microsoft Windows 98: Windows 98
Microsoft Windows Me: Windows Me
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0: Windows NT 4.0 or Windows NT
Microsoft Windows XP: Windows XP
Microsoft Windows Vista: Windows Vista
The combination of above OS: Windows 95/98/Me
Windows NT 4.0/2000
Windows NT/2000/XP
Windows 95 /98/Me / NT /2000/XP
*1 This Service Manual is also applicable to bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C6000, bizhub PRO C6000L and ineo+ 7000/6000.
B -2
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 3. TRADEMARK
3. TRADEMARK
3.1 TRADEMARKS OF OTHER COMPANIES
The indicated company and product names are the trademarks or registered trademarks of each company.
3.2 OWN TRADEMARKS

KONICA MINOLTA and KONICA MINOLTA logo are the registered trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC..
bizhub and bizhub PRESS are the registered trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC..
2010 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
B -3
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 4. ELECTRICAL PARTS AND
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L SIGNALS
4. ELECTRICAL PARTS AND SIGNALS

Those listed by way of example below are not exhaustive, but only some instances among many.
Classification Load symbol Ex. of signal name Description
Sensor PS IN Sensor detection signal
PS
Door PS1
SIG
102 PS
Solenoid SD 24V Power to drive the solenoid
DRV Drive signal
SOL
Clutch CL 24V Power to drive the clutch
DRV Drive signal
SOL
Motor M 24V Power to drive the motor
CONT Drive signal
DRV1 Drive signals of two kinds
DRV2
D1
D2
_U Drive signals (control signals) of three kinds
_V
_W
DRV1
DRV2
DRV3
D1 Drive signals (control signals) of four kinds
D2 Motor, phases A and B control signals
D3
D4
DRV A
DRV
DRV B
DRV
A
/A
B
/B
AB
BB
CLK, PLL PLL control signal
LCK, Lock, LD PLL lock signal
FR Forward/reverse rotation signal
EM, Lock, LCK, LD Motor lock abnormality
BLK Drive brake signal
P/S Power/stop
S/S Operating load start/stop signal
SS
CW/CCW, F/R Rotational direction switching signal
ENB Effective signal
TEMP_ER Motor temperature abnormality detection signal
Fan FM 24V Power to drive the fan motor
CONT, DRIVE Drive signal
HL Speed control signal (2 speeds)
EM, Lock, LCK, FEM Detection signal
Others TH1.S, ANG Analog signal
Ground SG, S.GND, S_GND Signal ground
B -4
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 4. ELECTRICAL PARTS AND
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L SIGNALS
PG, P.GND Power ground

Serial DCD Data carrier detection
communication SIN Serial input
SOUT Serial output
DTR Data terminal operation available
GND Signal ground (earth)
DSR, DSET Data set ready
RTS Transmission request signal
CTS Consent transmission signal
RI Ring indicator
TXD Serial transmission data
RXD Serial reception data
B -5
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 5. PAPER FEED DIRECTION
5. PAPER FEED DIRECTION

When the direction in which paper is fed is in parallel with the longer side of paper, the paper feed direction like this is referred to as the
longitudinal feed.
And the paper feed direction that is perpendicular to the longitudinal feed is referred to as the transverse feed.
When specifying the longitudinal feed, "S (abbreviation for Short Edge Feeding)" is added to the paper size. For the transverse feed, no specific
notation is employed.
However, when only the longitudinal feed is specified for one and the same paper size with no specification made for the transverse feed, "S" is
not added even when being fed longitudinally.
<Example>
Paper size Feed direction Notation
A4 Transverse feed A4
Longitudinal feed A4S
A3 Longitudinal feed A3
B -6
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 1. bizhub PRESS C7000/
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L C7000P/C70hc/C6000...
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
1. bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, bizhub PRO C6000L
1.1 Type
Type Console type (floor-mounted type)
Copying method 4-coupled drum tandem laser electrostatic method
Original stand Fixed
Original alignment Left rear standard
Photo conductor type OPC
Writing type 8-beam laser scanning type
Tray capacity 3 trays (500 sheets x 3, 80g/m2)
MB-504 (Multi bypass, 250 sheets, 80g/m2)*1 *2
PF-602 (3000 sheets x 2, 80g/m2)*1
LU-202 (2500 sheets x 80g/m2)*1
*1 MB-504, PF-602, LU-202 is option.
*2 PF-602 is not available when MB-504 is installed.
1.2 Functions
Original Sheet, book, solid object
Max. original size A3 or 11 x 17 (Custom paper: Max. 303mm x 438mm)
Copy size Tray 1, 2, 3 SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, ISOB5S,
A5S
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14,
8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Tab paper (A4, 81/2 x 11)
Custom paper (Max. 330.2 x 487.7mm, Min. 139.7 x 182 mm)
Bypass (Option, MB-504) SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S,
ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S, ISOB6S, A6S, Postcard
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14,
8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Custom paper (Max. 330.2 x 487.7mm, Min. 100 x 148 mm)
ADU SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S,
ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S, ISOB6S, A6S, Postcard
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11,
8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Custom paper (Max. 330.2 x 487.7mm, Min. 100 x 148 mm)
Copy magnification Fixed magnification x 1.000, x 2.000, x 1.414, x 1.224, x 1.154,
x 0.866, x 0.816, x 0.707, x 0.500
Zoom magnification x 0.250 to x 4.000 (each 0.001 step)
Warm-up time 450 sec. or less
First copy out time Color 7.6 seconds or less (A4, 8 1/2 x 11)
(C7000/C7000P/C70hc)
Black and white 5.9 seconds or less (A4, 8 1/2 x 11)
First copy out time Color 7.8 seconds or less (A4, 8 1/2 x 11)
(C6000/C6000L)
Black and white 6.0 seconds or less (A4, 8 1/2 x 11)
Continuous copy speed Color 70 sheets/min. (8 1/2 x 11), 71 sheets/min. (A4)
(C7000/C7000P/C70hc)
Black and white 70 sheets/min. (8 1/2 x 11), 71 sheets/min. (A4)
Continuous copy speed Color 60 sheets/min. (A4, 8 1/2 x 11)
(C6000/C6000L)
Black and white 60 sheets/min. (A4, 8 1/2 x 11)
Continuous copy count Up to 9,999 sheets
Resolution Scan Main scan: 600dpi
Sub scan: 600dpi
C -1
Writing Main Scan: 1200dpi (equivalent to 3600dpi)

Sub scan: 1200dpi
Standard memory 384MB x 6
Extended memory (HD-514) 160GB or more (SATA) x 6
Number of originals to be stored: Full color 7 sheets (A3) HD-514 is not connected
Reference 4300 sheets (A3) HD-514 is connected
(C7000, C6000/C6000L)
Interface section RJ45 Ethernet, Serial port (RS232-C, USB-Type Ax3), Connector for printer controller
1.3 Paper
(1) Paper weight
Weight that can be fed Tray 1, 2, 3 64g/m2 to 256g/m2*1(plain paper, fine paper, color paper)
81g/m2 to 256g/m2*1 (coated paper)
MB-504 64g/m2 to 300g/m2 (plain paper, fine paper, color paper)
81g/m2 to 300g/m2 (coated paper)
Weight that can be exited Simplex straight paper exit 64g/m2 to 300g/m2
Simplex reverse/exit 64g/m2 to 300g/m2
ADU 64g/m2 to 300g/m2
*1 For paper size A4 or smaller than 8 1/2 x 11, it is 209 g/m2.
(2) Type of paper

Type of paper Tray 1, 2, 3 MB-504 LU-202 PF-602
Plain
Fine
Color
Coated GL, ML, GO, MO *3 *3
*1 *2
Postcard *4
Label
OHP sheet*5
Tab Paper *6
: Can be fed, : Can be fed only per 1 sheet, -: Cannot be fed

(Coated type) G: Gloss, M: Matte, L: Laser, O: Offset
*1 Paper less than 80g/m2 is not guaranteed.
*2 HT-503, 504/505 (option) is required for humidity 50% or more.
*3 It is supposed to feed single sheet from tray or MB-504.
*4 LU-202 is when the postcard kit is mounted.
*5 The quality is not guaranteed.
*6 Set direction is specified. Only for simplex.
1.4 Recommended paper

1.4.1 Inch
Paper type Product name*1
Plain Hammermill Tidal MP (75g/m2)
Fine
Color Hammermill Color Copy Photo White (105g/m2)
Hammermill Color Copy Cover (163g/ m2, 216g/m2)
Coated-GL
Coated-GO Hammermill Color Copy Glossy (120g/m2)
Kromekote Laser High Gloss C2S 90lb Book (133g/m2)
Coated-ML
Coated-MO
1.4.2 Metric
Paper type Product name*1
Plain Profi (80g/m2)
Original (80g/m2)
C -2
Fine
Color Mondi Color Copy (90g/m2, 100g/m2, 120g/m2, 160g/m2, 200g/m2, 220g/m2, 250g/m2, 280g/m2, 300g/
m2)
Coated-GL
Coated-GO Mondi Color Copy Coated Silk (135g/m2, 170g/m2, 200g/m2, 250g/m2)
Mondi Color Copy Coated Glossy (135g/m2, 170g/m2, 200g/m2, 250g/m2)
Coated-ML
Coated-MO
1.5 Materials
(1) C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
Parts name Useful life Name
Toner bottle /Y 31,000 prints*1 TN616Y*6
TN617Y*7
Toner bottle /M 31,000 prints*1 TN616M*6
TN617M*7
Toner bottle /C 31,000 prints*1 TN616C*6
TN617C*7
Toner bottle /K 41,500 prints*1 TN616K*6
TN617K*7
Drum cartridge 220,000 prints*2 DU-104
180,000 prints*3
(102 km of drum drive distance or
130 km of lubricant applying roller
drive distance)*4
Developer /Y 340,000 prints*2 DV610Y
300,000 prints*3
(Drive distance 200km)*4
Developer /M 340,000 prints*2 DV610M*6
300,000 prints*3 DV611M*7
Developer /C 340,000 prints*2 DV610C*6
300,000 prints*3 DV611C*7
Developer /K 340,000 prints*2 DV610K
300,000 prints*3
Toner collect box 50,000 prints*5 A03UR702##
*1 A4 original at each color 5% coverage.

*2 C7000/C7000P/C70hc
*3 C6000
*4 The actual life is decided by the useful life or drive distance whichever comes earlier.
*5 The actual life is detected automatically by the sensor.
*6 C7000/C7000P/C6000
*7 C70hc
(2) C6000L
Parts name Useful life Name
Toner bottle /Y 27,900 prints*1 TN616Y-L
Toner bottle /M 27,900 prints*1 TN616M-L
Toner bottle /C 27,900 prints*1 TN616C-L
Toner bottle /K 37,350 prints*1 TN616K-L
Drum cartridge 180,000 prints DU-104
(102 km of drum drive distance or
130 km of lubricant applying roller
drive distance)*4
Developer /Y 300,000 prints DV610Y
C -3
Developer /M 300,000 prints DV610M

Developer /C 300,000 prints DV610C
Developer /K 300,000 prints DV610K
Toner collect box 50,000 prints*5 A03UR702##
*1 A4 original at each color 5% coverage.

*2 The actual life is decided by the useful life or drive distance whichever comes earlier.
*3 The actual life is detected automatically by the sensor.
1.6 Maintenance
Maintenance cycle Every 50,000 prints
Ave. number of prints*4 Inch: 55,000 per month*1
Inch: 33,000 per month*2
Metric: 50,000 per month*1
Max. number of prints*4 Q zone*5 330,000 per month*1*3 11,000 per day*1*3
280,000 per month*2 *6 9,350 per day*2 *6
B, C zone*5 150,000 per month 8,500 per day
A zone*5 100,000 per month 5,000 per day
*1 C7000/C7000P
*2 C6000
*3 C70hc
*4 The print number is a total of black and white, single color, and full color.
*5 The zones mean the temp&humidity range indicated in the following graph.
*6 C6000L
80
70
A
Humidity (%RH)
60
B Q
40
30
20 C
10
10 18 20 23 30
Temperature (C)
1.7 Machine data

Power source Inch: AC208V to 240V 21A, 60Hz
Metric: AC220V to AC240V 19A, 50Hz/60Hz
Power consumption Inch: 5,100W or less (main body only)
Metric: 4,600W or less (main body only)
Dimensions Main body + OC-506 760 (W) x 992.7 (D) x 1,075.6 (H*1)mm
Main body + DF-622 + LU-202 + 2,150 (W) x 992.7 (D) x 1,478.2 (H*2)mm
FS-612
Weight Approx. 353kg (C7000/C6000/C6000L)
Approx. 333kg (C7000P/C70hc)
*1 The operation panel section is not included.
*2 The operation panel section is included.
1.8 Operating environment

Temperature 10C to 30C
Humidity 10% to 80%RH (with no condensation)
C -4
1.9 Note regarding the specifications

Note
The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.
C -5
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 2. DF-622
2. DF-622
2.1 Type
Type Belt conveyance type original auto feeder
2.2 Functions
Original size A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5, A5S, B6S
11 x 17, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Max. original size 297mm x 431.8mm
Min. original size 128mm x 139.7mm
Various sizes of paper can be accommodated
2.3 Type of paper

Type of paper Plain paper Simplex 35g/m2 to 210g/m2
Duplex 50g/m2 to 210g/m2
However, paper 49g/m2 or less is conveyed in the thin paper mode
and paper 129g/m2 is conveyed in the thick paper mode.
Special paper Same as plain paper. However, paper feed and conveyance
performance are not guaranteed.
The paper feed environment is Q-zone only.
Recycled paper, coarse paper, thermal paper, binding holed paper,
custom paper, paper with smooth surface (coated paper), paper
with rough surface (letter head), and paper with folds
Following types of special paper cannot be used.
OHP film, blueprint master, label paper, offset master, bonded
original, high-quality paper of less than 35g/m2 or 211g/m2 or more
Paper curl amount Up to 10mm with 5 originals overlapped one another
[1]
a
15sat1c001na
a Curing: 10 mm or less
[1] Original
Maximum tray capacity 100 sheets (80g/m2 paper)
Scan speed Color: 40sheets/min. or more
(A4, 81/2 x 11) Black-and-white : 40sheets/min. or more
Scanning system After the original that is conveyed on the belt stops, the scanner moves and scans the original.
2.4 Machine data

Power source DC24/5V (supplied from the main body via PF)
Power consumption Maximum 60W or less
Dimensions 588 (W) x 531 (D) x 135 (H) mm (excluding the paper feed tray)
Weight Approx. 14.5kg


Note
C -6
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 3. PF-602
3. PF-602
3.1 Type
Type Front loading type two-tray paper feeder
3.2 Functions
Number of trays Two trays (All trays universal)
Maximum tray capacity 6,000 sheets (80 g/m2 standard paper) = 3,000 sheets x 2 trays
3.3 Type of paper

Paper size SRA3, A3, B4,ISOB4,SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5,ISOB5*1,B5S,ISOB5S,A5*1,A5S, B6S,ISOB6S*1,A6S
*1,Postcard*1
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17,9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Tray /4: Custom paper (Max. 330 x 487mm, Min. 100 x 182 mm)
Tray /5: Custom paper (Max. 330 x 487mm, Min. 100 x 148 mm)
Applicable paper Plain paper, high quality paper, coated paper
Paper weight Tray /4 64g/m2 to 256g/m2
Tray /5 64g/m2 to 300g/m2
*1 Paper feed available only from tray /5
3.4 Maintenance
MAINTENANCE Same as the main body.
3.5 Machine data

Power source 24/12/5VDC, 200 to 240VAC (supplied both from the main body)
Maximum power consumption DC: 90W or less, AC: 100W or less
Dimensions 947 (W) x 750 (D) x 1045 (H) mm
Weight Approx. 170kg


Note
C -7
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 4. HT-504/505
4. HT-504/505
4.1 Type
Type Fan heater type dehumidifier
4.2 Machine data

Power source 24/5VDC, 200 to 240VAC (supplied from the main body)
Dimensions Dehumidifier fan heater unit: 197 (W) x 82 (D) x 293 (H) mm
Power source unit: 121 (W) x 80 (D) x 160 (H) mm
Weight Dehumidifier fan heater unit: 1.5kg (per 1unit)
Power supply unit: 0.9 kg


Note
C -8
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 5. LU-202
5. LU-202
5.1 Type
Type Side mount type large volume paper feed unit
5.2 Functions
Maximum tray capacity 2500 sheets (80 g/m 2)*1
*1 Stacked height 275 mm
5.3 Type of paper

Paper size SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, Postcard*1
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S
8K, 16K
Custom paper (Max. 330 x 487mm, Min. 210 x 182mm)*1
Applicable paper Plain paper, high quality paper, coated paper
64 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 *1
*1 Postcard is option kit support
*2 Available types of paper weighing 300 g/m2 are limited to specific types.
5.4 Maintenance
MAINTENANCE Same as the main body.
5.5 Machine data

Power source 24/12/5VDC, 200 to 240VAC (supplied both from the main body)
Maximum power consumption DC: 70W or less, AC: 50W or less (not including HT-503)
Weight Approx. 42kg


Note
C -9
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 6. HT-503
6. HT-503
6.1 Type
Type Fan heater type dehumidifier
6.2 Machine data

Power source 24/5VDC, 200 to 240VAC (supplied from the main body)
Dimensions Dehumidifier fan heater unit: 293 (W) x 82 (D) x 197 (H) mm
Power source unit: 121 (W) x 80 (D) x 160 (H) mm
Weight Dehumidifier fan heater unit : 1.5kg
Power supply unit: 0.9 kg


Note
C -10
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 7. MB-504
7. MB-504
7.1 Type
Type Bypass paper feed unit
7.2 Functions
Maximum tray capacity 250 sheets (80g/m 2for paper)
7.3 Type of paper

Original size SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S, ISOB6S, A6,
Postcard
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Custom paper (Max. 330 x 487mm, Min. 100 x 148mm)
Applicable paper Plain, Fine, Color, Coated
Paper weight 64g/m2 to 300g/m2
7.4 Machine data

Power source DC24/5V (supplied from the main body)
Power consumption Maximum 28W or less


Note
C -11
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 8. HD-514
8. HD-514
8.1 Type
Type External hard disk kit
8.2 Functions
Function Scanning image memory
Storage of image data
Storage of image data header file
Storage of thumbnail data for preview
Job edit*2
Storage of job history
Storage of log data
* The installation of PF-705 and PH-101 is necessary.*1
* The installation of PH-102 is necessary.*2
HDD specifications 3.5-inch, SATA 160GB (Raw: 150GB, file system (FAT32: 10 GB) x 6 (Y, M, C, K, A and P)
Raw (150GB) Y / M /C / K Storage of image data, scanning
Unformatted image memory
A Storage of image data header file
P Storage of thumbnail data for
preview, storage of job history
File system (10GB) Y / M /C / K Not used
FAT32 A Storage of log data
P Job history setting data
Number of originals recorded Full color 4,300 sheets
(RawHDD) Conditions Original: KM#101 chart /A3 (color)
Density: Standard
Mode: Text/Photo, Full Size
Black and white/Single Color 8,600 sheets
Conditions Original: The Institute of Image
Electronics Engineers of Japan
FAX#4 chart /A4
Density: Standard
Mode: Text/Photo, Full Size
*1 C8000 only
*2 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C6000L only
8.3 Machine data

Power source 24/5VDC (supplied from the main body)
Maximum power consumption 100W or less
Weight Approx. 15kg


Note
C -12
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 9. PH-102
9. PH-102
9.1 Type
Type Board kit for image preview
9.2 Functions
Functions Thumbnail data creation of HDD Store job
Preview of thumbnail data
Job edit
* The installation of HD-514 is necessary.
9.3 Machine data

Power source 3.3VDC (supplied from the main body)


Note
C -13
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 10. RU-509
10. RU-509
10.1 Type
Type Relay conveyance device with paper cooling/de-curler function
10.2 Functions
De-curler conveyance mode Reduces paper curl and conveys at an accelerating rate with post treatment linear velocity.
In the straight conveyance mode Feed without the de-curl process and conveys at an accelerating rate with post treatment linear velocity.
Humidifier conveyance mode Executes humidification of HM-102 (option) and conveys at an accelerating rate with post treatment linear
velocity.
Output paper density adjustment Measures the color density of the density patch printed on paper and feeds back to the image stabilization
mode *1 control of the main body.
*1 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only.
10.3 Type of paper

Paper size SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4*1, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S*1, A5, A5S*1, B6S*1,
ISOB6S*1, A6S*1, Postcard
13 x 19*1, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 *1, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Wide paper*2 (A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x
11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Tab paper*3 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2)
Custom size paper Minimum 100mm x 148mm, Maximum 330mm x 487mm *1
Minimum 100mm x 148mm, Maximum 330mm x 463mm *2
Type of paper Same as the main body.
Paper weight 64 g/m2 to 300 g/m2*1, 40 g/m2 to 350 g/m2*2
Allowed curl 60mm or less
*1 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only.
*2 1250/1250P/1052 only.
*3 For C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, A4, 81/2 x 11 only.
10.4 Machine data

Power source 100VAC (Japan), 120VAC (North America), 220VAC to 240VAC (Europe)/5VDC (supplied from the main
body)
Dimensions 410 (W) x 735 (D) x 1,020 (H) mm
Weight Approx. 60kg


Note
C -14
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 11. HM-102
11. HM-102
11.1 Type
Type Paper humidifier kit
11.2 Function
Functions Humidifies the both sides of paper to adjust curling.
Tank capacity 20L (equivalent to approx. 100,000 copies)
11.3 Type of paper

Paper size SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4*1, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5 *1, B5S, ISOB5S, A5, A5S*1, B6S*1,
ISOB6S*1, A6S*1, Postcard
13 x 19 *1, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S , 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 *1, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Tab paper*3 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2)
Type of paper Same as the main body.
Paper weight 64 to 300g/m2 *1*4, 40 to 350g/m2*2*4*5
*1 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
*2 1250/1250P/1052 only
*3 For C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, A4, 81/2 x 11 only
*4 For Humidifier ON mode, Envelope or Coated, PrePrinted, Blank Insert Sheet, Embossed, and Embossed2 with the weight under 135 g/m2
or less cannot be used.
*5 In the humidifier ON Mode, 50 to 350 g/m2
11.4 Machine data

Power source 24/5VDC (supplied from RU-509)
Dimensions Humidifier section: 194 (W) x 492 (D) x 83 (H) mm
Water feed tank section: 339 (W) x 646 (D) x 246 (H) mm
Weight Approx. 30kg


Note
C -15
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 12. FS-521
12. FS-521
12.1 Type
Type Staple-cut type multi-staple device
12.2 Functions
(1) Function
Straight mode Exited into the main tray with no processing made.
Shift mode Exited into the main tray after being shifted.
Sub tray mode Exits paper to the sub tray without any process.
Staple mode Exited into the main tray after being flat-stapled.
Subset staple mode Bundles of flat-stapled sheets of paper and single sheets of paper being exited at random into the main
tray.
(2) Number of staple sheets

The maximum number of staple sheets is decided according to either conditions which is met first, the combination condition of the paper
type/the paper length/the number of sheets for every range of paper weight, or the combination condition of the booklet length/the booklet
thickness.
Combination condition of the paper weight/the paper type/the paper length and the number of sheets for every range of paper weight
Number of staple sheets
Paper not coated Coated paper/color paper
Paper weight (g/m2) Less than 400mm 400mm or more Less than 400mm 400mm or more
50 to 71 100 50 35 35
72 to 81 100 50 35 35
82 to 91 100 50 35 35
92 to 130 50 50 30 30
131 to 161 40 40 25 25
162 to 216 25 25 20 20
217 to 244 25 25 15 15
Combination condition of the booklet length/the booklet thickness

Length (mm) Booklet thickness (mm)
219 or less 23 or less
220 or more 20 or less
(3) Staple position

Staple position 1 in the back (45 degrees), 1 in the front, 2 in center
(4) Maximum tray capacity of the main tray

Straight/Shift mode Capacity for Z-Fold 50 sheets (80g/m2), Half-Fold 50 sheets (80g/m2)
(Paper weight 40g/m2 to 350g/ folding:
m2 *1, Large size: A3, JISB4*4, ISOB4*1 *3 *5 *11, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, SRA3, SRA4, SRA4S,
64g/m2 to 300g/m2 *2*11, 13 x 19 *2*3*6*11, 81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13, 8K *2*3 *7 *11
64g/m2 to 350g/m2 *3) Wide paper *1 (Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Small size: A4, A4S, JISB5*4, ISOB5*1 *3 *5 *11, JISB5S*4, ISOB5S*3 *5 *11, 9 x 11*1*3*11,
81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 16K*2*3 *7 *11 16KS*2*3 *7 *11
Minimum size: A5, A5S*2*3*11, 51/2 x 81/2S*2*3*6*11
Others: Tab paper *8 *9 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x
81/2, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Custom size 1200/1200P/1051
paper*12 Minimum 148 (128)mm x 139mm, Maximum 324mm x 463mm
C6501/C6501P/C65hc
Minimum 148 (128)mm x 148mm, Maximum 324 (330)mm x 463 (483)mm
C8000
C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
Paper weight (g/m2) Tray capacity (sheets)
Large size Small size Minimum size
40 to 71 500 750 100
C -16
72 to 81 1500 3000 (1500) *10 750

82 to 91 1000 2000 (1500) *10 500
92 to 130 750 1500 400
131 to 161 350
162 to 216 500 1000 250
217 to 300 375 750 200
301 to 350 250 500 100
Staple mode Number of sets of staple sheet Number of sets
(Paper weight 50g/m2 to 244g/ 2 to 9 150 (paper length: 182mm to 364mm)
m2 *1, 75 (paper length: other than 182mm to 364mm)
64g/m2 to 244g/m2 *2 *3*11) 10 to 20 50
21 to 30 30
31 to 40 25
41 to 50 20
51 to 60 15
61 to 100 10
*1 1200/1200P/1051 only
*2 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*3 C8000 only
*4 Default for North America (C8000/1200/1200P/1051/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only)
*5 Default for Europe
*6 Straight mode only
*7 For China/Taiwan only (C6501/C6501P/C65hc/1200/1200P/1051/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only)
*8 Operation of paper exit with tab area at the trail edge side is not warranty.
*9 For C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, A4, 81/2 x 11 only
*10 ( ) when shifted
*11 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
*12 () when in straight mode
(5) Maximum tray capacity of the sub tray

Maximum tray capacity 200 sheets (20 sheets for Z-Folding/40 sheets for center folding)
(Paper weight 40g/m2 to 350g/
m2 *1*3, 64g/m2 to 300g/m2
*2*11,
64g/m2 to 350g/m2 *4)
SRA3, A3, JISB4 *5, ISOB4 *1 *4 *6 *11, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, JISB5 *5, ISOB5 *1 *4 *6 *11, JISB5S *5, ISOB5S*4 *6 *11, A5, A5S *2
*4*11, JISB6S *2 *4 *5 *11, ISOB6S*4 *6 *11, A6S *2*4*11, 13 x 19 *2*4*11, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11 *1*4*11, 81/ x 14, 81/ x 11, 81/ x
2 2 2
1 1
11S, 5 /2 x 8 /2 *1*4 1 1
, 5 /2 x 8 /2S *2*4*11 1 1 1 1
, 8 /2 x 13, 8 /4 x 13, 8 /8 x 13 /4, 8 x 13, 8K *2*4 *7 *11 , 16K *2*4 *7 *11 , 16KS *2*4 *7 *11 ,
Post card
Wide paper *1 (A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x 11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Max. 324mm x
463mm)
Tab paper *8 *9 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Custom size paper 1200/1200P/1051
Minimum 95mm x 139mm*10, Maximum 324mm x 463mm
C6501/C6501P/C65hc
Minimum 100mm x 148mm, Maximum 330mm x 487mm
C8000
C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
*1 1200/1200P/1051 only
*2 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*3 Loading paper weight 49g/m2 or less is not warranty
*4 C8000 only
*9 C8000 is A4, 81/2 x 11 only
*10 95mm x 133mm when post pocessing with FS only
*11 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
C -17
12.3 Type of paper

(1) Staple
Paper size SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2*3*5*9, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, JISB5*1, ISOB5 *2*3*5*9 ,A5, 8K
*4*5*6*9, 16K*4*5*6*9
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*3*5*9, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2*3*5, 81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13,
81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
Wide paper *3 (A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x
11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Tab paper *7*8 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2, Maximum 324mm x
463mm)
Custom size paper 1200/1200P/1051
C6501/C6501P/C65hc
C8000
C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
Applicable paper Same as the main body.
Paper weight Main tray 50g/m2 to 244g/m2 *3, 64g/m2 to 244g/m2 *4 *5*9
Paper curl amount
a [1]
15kjt1c001na
a Curl amount: 20mm or less (50g/m2 to 90g/m2), 10mm or less (91g/m2 to 300g/m2)
[1] 5 sheets
*3 1200/1200P/1051 only
*4 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*5 C8000 only
*9 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
12.4 Machine data

Maximum power consumption 110VA
Weight Approx. 80kg
Dimensions When the main tray is pulled out:
915 (W) x 723 (D) x 1020 (H) mm
When the main tray is set in:
798 (W) x 723 (D) x 1020 (H) mm
When the main tray is removed:
544 (W) x 723 (D) x 1020 (H) mm


Note
C -18
13. FS-531
13.1 Type
Type Staple device
13.2 Functions
(1) Functions
Non-sort mode Exited into the main tray with no processing made.
Sort/group mode Executes shifting operation for each copy and exits to the main tray
Staple mode Exits to the main tray after being flat-stapled
(2) Staple
Maximum flat stapling sheets 64g/m2 to 80g/m2: 50 sheets (Plain, Fine, Color), 40 sheets (Coated)
81g/m2 to 105g/m2: 40 sheets (Plain), 30 sheets (Fine, Color), 25 sheets (Coated)
106g/m2 to 135g/m2: 30 sheets (Plain, Fine), 25 sheets (Color), 20 sheets (Coated)
136g/m2 to 209g/m2: 20 sheets (Plain, Fine), 15 sheets (Color)
Within the range of the above number, up to 200g/m2: 2 sheets can be inserted.
Staple position Corner stapling Parallel or diagonal depending on
paper size
2 staplings Center spreading 162mm pitch
(3) Maximum tray capacity

Main tray Non-sort mode, 3000 sheets (A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x
(Paper weight 80g/m2) Sort/group mode
11S, 16K, 16KS)
1500 sheets (SRA3 *1, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4 *1, SRA4S, 12 x 18,
11 x 17, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13, 8K)
500 sheets (A5, A5S *1, B6S *1, ISOB6S*1, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 S *1)
Tab paper *2 (A4, 8 1/2 x 11)
Custom paper (Maximum 314 x 458mm, Minimum *3 182 x 148 mm)
Staple mode 1000 sheets
Staple sheet Length in the sub Other than left
scan direction:
150mm to 417mm
2 to 9 100 sets 50 sets
Sub tray 100 sheets (SRA3, A3, B4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5, A5S, B6S, A6S, Postcard, 13 x 19, 12
(Paper weight 80g/m2) x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 8 1/2S, 81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13,
8K, 16K, 16KS)
Tab paper *2 (A4, 81/2 x 11)
Custom paper (Maximum 330 x 487 mm, Minimum 100 x 148 mm)
*1 Non-sort mode only
*3 128mm x 148mm in non-sort mode
13.3 Type of paper

(1) Staple mode
Paper size A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, A5
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Tab paper *1 (A4, 81/2 x 11)
Custom paper (Maximum 314 x 458 mm, Minimum 182 x 148 mm)
C -19
Paper curl amount

a [1]
15kjt1c001na
a Curing: 10 mm or less (However, paper reverse set and curl adjustment may be applied for paper with
curl 5mm or more)
[1] 5 sheets
13.4 Machine data

790.5 (W) x 656 (D) x 990 (H) mm
674.5 (W) x 656 (D) x 990 (H) mm
Weight Approx. 60kg


Note
C -20
14. FS-612
14.1 Type
Type Multi-folding, multi-stapling device
14.2 Functions
(1) Function
Non-sort mode Exited into the main tray with no processing made.
Sort/group mode Executes shifting operation for each copy and exits to the main tray
Staple mode Exits to the main tray after being flat-stapled
Saddle stitching mode After folding and stapling on the center of paper, folds the paper in the middle and exits to the booklet
tray
Half-Fold mode Folds the paper in the middle and exits to the booklet tray
Tri-folding mode Folds the paper twice and exits to the booklet tray
Punch mode *1 Executes punching operation and exits paper to the main tray or the sub tray
PI mode *2 Feeds the sheet
*1 When PK (option) is mounted. The combination with the non-sort mode, sort/group mode, and staple mode is available.
*2 When PI (option) is mounted. Manual stapling and manual punching are available.
(2) Staple
Maximum flat stapling sheets Plain Fine Color Coat
64g/m2 to 80g/m2 50 sheets 50 sheets 30 sheets 30 sheets
Within the range of the above number, up to 200g/m2: 2 sheets can be inserted.
Staple position Parallel in front/45 degrees in back Slant:1 point Center:2 points
Maximum saddle stitching sheets Plain Fine Color Coat
Within the range of the above number, up to 200g/m2: 1 sheet can be inserted.
Staple position Changeable (128mm to 160mm)
(3) Folding
Maximum center fold 64g/m2 to 105g/m2: 3 sheets
Maximum tri-folding 64g/m2 to 105g/m2: 1 sheet
(4) Maximum tray capacity*1

Main tray Non-sort mode, 2,500 sheets
(Paper weight 64g/m2 to 300g/ Sort/group mode A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S,
m2) 16K, 16KS
1500 sheets
SRA3 *2, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2
x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13, 8K
500 sheets
A5, A5S *2, B6S *2, ISOB6S *2, 51/2 x 81/2 *2*5, 51/2 x 81/2 S *2
Tab paper *3 (A4, 81/ x 11)
2
Custom paper*4 C8000
Minimum 182 (128) mm x 148 (140) mm,
Maximum 314 mm x 458 mm
C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C6000L
Minimum 182 (128) mm x 148 mm,
Maximum 314 mm x 458 mm
Staple Staple sheet Length in the sub Length in the sub
Mode scan direction: scan direction:
418mm or more 417mm or less
C -21
Booklet tray Saddle stitching mode Length in the sub scan direction: 299 mm or less: 15 sets with 5
(Paper weight 64g/m2 to 105g/ sheets
Other than the above: 20 sets with 5 sheets
m2)
Folding mode Length in the sub scan direction: 299 mm or less: 25 sets with 3
sheets folding
Other than the above: 33 sets with 3 sheets folding
Tri-folding mode 50 sets with 1 sheet folding
Sub tray 100 sheets
(Paper weight 64g/m2 to 300g/ SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S, ISOB6S,
A6S
m2)
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 8 1/2*5,
51/2 x 8 1/2S, 81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Postcard
Tab paper *3 (A4, 81/2 x 11)
Custom paper (Maximum 330 x 487 mm, Minimum 100 x 140 mm*5, 100 x 148 mm*6)
*1 The capacity is counted with 80g/m2 paper.

*2 Non-sort mode only
*4 ( ) When in non-sort mode
*5 C8000 only
*6 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C6000L only
14.3 Type of paper

(1) Staple mode
Paper size A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, A5
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2*2
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Tab paper *1 (A4, 81/2 x 11)
Custom paper (Maximum 314 x 458 mm, Minimum 182 x 140 mm*2, Minimum 182 x 148 mm*3)
Paper curl amount
a [1]
15kjt1c001na
[1] 5 sheets
*2 C8000 only
*3 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C6000L only
(2) Saddle stitching mode

Paper size A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4S
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
8K
(3) Half-Fold mode

Paper size A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4S
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
8K
C -22
(4) Tri-folding mode

Paper size A4S
81/2 x 11S
16KS
14.4 Machine data

790.5 (W) x 656 (D) x 990 (H) mm
674.5 (W) x 656 (D) x 990 (H) mm
Weight 65kg


Note
C -23
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 15. PK-512/513
15. PK-512/513
15.1 Type
Type FS-integrated type punching operation device
15.2 Functions
Punching method Stops and punches every paper
No. of holes PK-512: 2 holes/3 holes (inch) or 2 holes/4 holes (metric)
PK-513: 4 holes
Hole diameter
6.5 mm (2 holes/4 holes), 8.0 mm (3 holes)
Hole pitch PK-512: 80 mm (2 holes/4 holes), 108 mm (3 holes)

PK-513: 21, 70, 21 mm
Supported mode Punch mode, straight mode
Applicable post processing mode Sort, group, staple
15.3 Type of paper

Type of paper PK-512 (2 holes) (A3, B4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5, A5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S,
51/2 x 81/2S, 81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13, 8K, 16K, 16KS)
PK-512 (3 holes/4 holes) (A3, B4, A4, B5, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 8K, 16K)
PK-513 (A3, B4, A4, B5)
Applicable paper Plain paper, high quality paper, color paper, coated paper (same as the main body)
Punch prohibited paper Label paper, tab paper, transparency film, 2nd base paper, holed paper, and the other paper that may
interfere with the operation of the punch unit or the punch blade.
Paper curling
a [1]
15kjt1c001na
a Curling (10 mm or less)

[1] 5 sheets
15.4 Machine data

Power source 24/5V DC (supply from the main body)
Maximum power consumption 40 W or less
Weight Approx. 3 kg


Note
C -24
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 16. PI-502
16. PI-502
16.1 Type
Type Torque limiter separation type sheet feeding device
16.2 Functions
Automatic sheet feeding Feeds the sheet to FS automatically under the instruction from the main body.
(Online operation)
Manual sheet feeding Feeds the sheet to FS under the instruction from the operation panel of PI.
(Offline operation) The following 5 types can be selected for the post processing mode.
1 staple/back mode
2 staples (flat-stapling) mode
Punch mode (when PK-512/513 is installed on FS)
Saddle stitching mode
Tri-folding mode
Note
The tray /Lw only supports the manual sheet feeding.
16.3 Type of paper

Paper size Tray /Up A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5*1, B5S, ISOB5S*1, and A5
9 x 11, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2
16K, 16KS
Custom paper (Max. 305mm x 297mm, Min. 182mm x 139mm)
Tray /Lw SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4*1 , SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5*1, B5S,
ISOB5S*1, and A5
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14,
81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Custom paper (Max. 331mm x 483mm, Min. 182mm x 139mm)
Type of paper Plain, Recycle, Color, Special, Coated, Fine
Capacity Tray /Up, /Lw 200 sheets (80 g/m2) or 30 mm or less in height
Paper curl amount
[1]
a
15jft1c001na
[1] 5 sheets
*1 (1250/1250P/1052 only)
16.4 Machine data



Note
C -25
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 17. LS-505
17. LS-505
17.1 Type
Type Grip conveyance type horizontal stacker
Conveyance method Entrance conveyance Roller conveyance method
Stacker tray conveyance Grip conveyance method
Sub tray conveyance Roller conveyance method
Coupling conveyance Roller conveyance
Alignment method Movable alignment lever (stacker tray only)
Method of stacking Horizontal stacking Mixed stacking is unavailable (stacker tray only)
Shifting method Conveyance direction shift Shift amount: 20mm (stacker tray only) *1
*1 The use of the shift is unavailable with tab paper.
17.2 Functions
(1) Function
Stacker tray non-sort mode Exited into the stacker tray with no processing made.
Stacker tray sort mode Executes shifting operation (20mm) and exits paper to the stacker tray *1
Coupling mode Conveys paper to the succeeding device without any process.
*1 The use of the shift is unavailable with tab paper.

Maximum tray capacity Stacker tray 5,000 sheets
(Paper weight 80g/m2) SRA3, A3, JISB4 *1, ISOB4 *2 *3 *4 *6, SRA4 *4 *5 *6, SRA4S,
A4, A4S
13 x 19*3 *4 *5, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11 *3 *4 *6, 81/2 x 14, 81/2
x 11, 81/2 x 11S
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K *4 *5 *6 *7, 16K *4 *5 *6 *7
3,000 sheets
Coated paper (Sub-scan direction is 380mm or longer)
2,000 sheets
JISB5 *1, ISOB5 *2 *3 *4 *6, A5, 51/2 x 81/2*3 *4 *5
Sub tray Straight paper exit: 200 sheets
Z-Folding paper: 20 sheets
Half-folding paper: 40 sheets
*3 1200/1200P/1051/1250/1250P/1052 only
*4 C8000 only
*5 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*6 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
17.3 Type of paper

Paper size Stacker tray SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *5 *11, SRA4 *4 *5 *11, SRA4S, A4,
A4S, JISB5*1, ISOB5*2 *3 *5 *11, JISB5S*1, ISOB5S*3 *5 *11, A5
13 x 19*4 *5 *11, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*3 *5 *11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x
11, 81/2x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2*3 *5, 81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8
x 13, 8K*4 *5 *11, 16K*4 *5 *11
Wide paper *3(A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 x
18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x 11SW, 51/2x 81/2W, Max.
324mm x 463mm)
Tab paper *7*8 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x
11S, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Custom size paper
Max. 324mm x 463mm, Min. 210mm x 148mm *3
Max. 483mm x 210mm, Min. 148mm x 2mm *4*5*11
C -26
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 17. LS-505
Sub tray SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *5 *11, SRA4 *4 *5 *11, SRA4S, A4,
A4S, JISB5*1, ISOB5*2 *3 *5 *11, JISB5S*1, ISOB5S *2 *3 *5 *11,
A5, A5S*4 *5 *11, JISB6S*1*4 *5 *11, ISOB6S*2 *5 *11, A6S*4 *5 *11
13 x 19*4 *5 *11, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*3 *5 *11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x
11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2*3 *5, 51/2 x 81/2S*4 *5 *11, 81/2 x 13,
81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13, 8K*4 *5 *6 *11, 16K*4 *5 *6 *11,
16KS*4 *5 *6 *11
18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x 11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Max.
324mm x 463mm)
Tab paper *8 *9 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x
11S, 51/2 x 81/2, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Postcard
Custom size paper
Max. 330mm x 487mm, Min. 100mm x 148mm *4*11
Paper weight Stacker tray 50g/m2 to 244g/m2 *3
64g/m2 to 256g/m2 *4 *5*11
Sub tray 40g/m2 to 350g/m2 *3*10
64g/m2 to 300g/m2 *4 *11
64g/m2 to 350g/m2 *5
*3 1200/1200P/1051/1250/1250P/1052 only
*4 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*5 C8000 only
*7 1 to 15 tab (4 tab and 10 tab are unavailable.) The use of the shift is unavailable with tab paper.
*8 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 is A4 and 81/2 x 11 only
*11 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
17.4 Machine data

Power source 100VAC to 240VAC, 5VDC (supplied from the main body) *1
Dimensions 785 (W) x 723 (D) x 1,020 (H) mm
*1 C8000/C6501/C6501P/C65hc/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000: Only 5VDC is supplied from the main body


Note
C -27
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 18. FD-503
18. FD-503
18.1 Type
Type Multi-folding device with punch and PI functions
18.2 Functions
(1) Function
Normal paper exit function Transfer paper exited from the main body is exited into the main tray/sub tray.
Punching function Transfer paper that is exited by the main body or fed to the PI is punched for each sheet of paper and
exited into the main tray.
Punch hole accuracy The accuracy is measured with 10 punched papers being overlapped.
a
a (a diameter of an inscribed circle of a punched hole): 5.0mm or more (2 punched holes), 6.5mm or
more (3 punched holes)
Folding functions Transfer paper that is exited from the main body or fed to the PI is handled for folding (either one of the
following: Z-Fold, Letter fold-out, Letter fold-in, Double parallel fold, Gate fold, and folding) for each
sheet of paper, and exited into the sub tray/main tray (The Z-Fold exit to the main tray while in the FS
connection is limited only to B4, A3, 8 1/2 x 14, 11 x 17, 12 x 18 and 8K.)
PI insertion function PI tray paper is inserted in the transfer paper exited from the main body.
Manual mode PI tray paper is punched, folded and stapled, and then exited into the sub tray/main tray. (The stapling
function is available only when the staple unit is connected to the downstream of the FD.)

Main tray 2500 sheets: A4, A4S, JISB5*4, ISOB5*1 *3 *5 *11, JISB5S*4, ISOB5S*3 *5 *11
(Paper weight 40g/m2 to 350g/m2 9 x 11*1 *3 *11, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S
*1,
16K*2 *3 *6 *11, 16KS*2 *3 *6 *11
64g/m2 to 300g/m2 *2 *11,
1500 sheets: SRA3, A3, JISB4*4, ISOB4*1 *3 *5 *11, SRA4 *2 *3 *11, SRA4S
64g/m2 to 350g/m2 *3)
13 x 19*2 *3 *11, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K*2*3 *6 *11
500 sheets: A5, A5S*2*3 *11, JISB6S*2 *3 *4 *11, ISOB6S*3 *5 *11, 51/2 x
81/2*1*3, 51/2 x 81/2S*2*3 *11
Others: Tab paper *7*8 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x
11S, 51/2 x 81/2, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x 11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Max.
324mm x 463mm)
Custom size paper Minimum 95mm x 139mm, Maximum 324mm x 463mm*1
Minimum 100mm x 148mm, Maximum 330mm x 483mm*2 *11
Minimum 100mm x 140mm, Maximum 330mm x 483mm*3
Sub tray Folding type: Tri-Fold-in, Tri-Fold-out, Double parallel, Gate
(with folder tray) Paper size: A3, B4, ISOB4*1 *3 *11, A4S, SRA4S,
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S, 8K*2 *3 *6 *11
Custom size paper (Maximum 305mm x 458mm, Minimum 210mm x
279mm)
Paper weight: Letter fold-in, Letter fold-out
50g/m2 to 130g/m2 *1,
64g/m2 to 130g/m2 *2 *3 *11
Double parallel, Gate
50g/m2 to 91g/m2 *1,
64g/m2 to 91g/m2 *2 *3 *11
Tray capacity of folding paper 30 sets or more
(for all types of folding with 80g/m2 paper)*9
Sub tray Tray capacity: 200 sheets
(without folder tray)
SRA3, A3, JISB4*4, ISOB4*1 *3 *5 *11, SRA4S, A4, A4S, JISB5*4, ISOB5*1*3 *5*11, JISB5S*4,
(Paper weight 40g/m2 to 350g/m2
ISOB5S *3 *5 *11, A5, A5S*2 *3 *11, JISB6S*2 *3 *4 *5 *11, ISOB6S *3 *11, A6S*2 *3 *11
*1*10,
C -28
64g/m2 to 300g/m2 *2 *11, 13 x 19*2 *3*11, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*1 *3*11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2*1 *3,
64g/m2 to 350g/m2 *3) 51/2 x 81/2S*2 *3*11
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
Tab paper *7 *8 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2)
Wide paper *1(A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x
11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Postcard
Custom size paper Minimum 95mm x 139mm, Maximum 324mm x 463mm*1
Minimum 100mm x 148mm, Maximum 330mm x 483mm*2 *11
Minimum 100mm x 140mm, Maximum 330mm x 487mm*3
*1 1200/1200P/1051/1250/1250P/1052 only
*2 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*3 C8000 only
*8 C8000 is A4, 81/2 x 11 only
*9 Paper is stacked in the exiting sequence.
*11 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
18.3 Type of paper

(1) Punching function
Paper size 2-hole: SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *4 *9, SRA4S, A4, A4S, JISB5*1,
ISOB5*2 *3 *4 *9, JISB5S*1, ISOB5S *2 *3 *4 *9, A5, A5S *4 *5 *9
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*3 *4 *9, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S,
51/2 x 81/2*3 *4
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K*4*5 *6 *9, 16K*4*5 *6 *9, 16KS*4*5 *6 *9
Tab paper *7(A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x
11S, 51/2 x 81/2, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
3/4-hole: SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *4 *9 *10, A4, JISB5*1, ISOB5*2 *3
*4 *9 *10,
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*3 *4 *9, 81/2 x 11,
8K*4 *5 *6 *9, 16K*4 *5 *6 *9
Tab paper *7(A3, A4, B4, B5, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11S, Max. 324mm x
463mm)
Applicable paper Plain paper, tab paper
Paper weight 50g/m2 to 216g/m2(2 sheets overlap mode: 50g/m2 to 91g/m2)*3,
64g/m2 to 216g/m2 *4 *5 *9
(2) Folding functions

Paper size A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *4 *9, SRA4S, A4S
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
8K*4*5 *6 *9
Custom size paper (Maximum 305mm x 458mm, Minimum 210mm x 279mm)
Applicable paper Plain paper
Paper weight Half-Fold, Tri-Fold-in, Tri-Fold- 50g/m2 to 130g/m2 *3,
out, Z-Fold
64g/m2 to 130g/m2*4 *5 *9
Double parallel, Gate 50g/m2 to 91g/m2 *3,
64g/m2 to 91g/m2*4 *5 *9
(3) PI functions
Paper size SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *4, SRA4*4*5*9, SRA4S, A4, A4S, JISB5*1, ISOB5S*2*3*4, JISB5S*1,
A5
13 x 19*4*5 *9, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*3*4 *9, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2 *3 *4,
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
C -29
8K*4*5 *6 *9, 16K*4*5 *6 *9, 16KS*4*5 *6 *9

Custom size paper *8
1200/1200P/1051/1250/1250P/1052
C6501/C6501P/C65hc/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
C8000
Applicable paper Plain, Recycle, Fine, Special
Maximum tray capacity 500 sheets (80g/m2) x 2 trays
*3 1200/1200P/1051/1250/1250P/1052 only
*4 C8000 only
*5 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*8 When using as the cover in perfect binding mode (Minimum 182mm x 279mm, Maximum 307mm x 483mm)
*9 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
*10 3 holes only
18.4 Machine data

Maximum power consumption 180VA or less
Dimensions 400 (W) x 723 (D) x 1231 (H)mm (The main tray is not included in the width)
*1 C8000 /C6501 /C6501P /C65hc /C7000 /C7000P/C70hc/C6000 : Only 5VDC is supplied from the main body


Note
C -30
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 19. SD-506
19. SD-506
19.1 Type
Type Saddle stitching unit with fore-edge trimming and multi-folding function
19.2 Functions
(1) Function
Sub tray paper exit mode Exit paper to the sub tray without any process.
Coupling paper exit mode Convey paper to the succeeding device without any process.
Saddle stitching mode Exit paper to the bundle exit tray after the center folding/saddle stitching operation.
Saddle stitching trimming mode Exit paper to the bundle exit tray after the center folding/saddle stitching/trimming operation.
Multi-center folding mode Exit paper to the bundle exit tray after the center folding on 1 or more sheets of paper.
Multi-center folding trimming Exit paper to the bundle exit tray after the center folding and the trimming operation on 1 or more sheets
mode of paper.
Overlap tri-folding mode Exit paper to the tri-folding tray after the letter folding operation on 1 or more sheets of paper.

Sub tray 200 sheets
(Paper weight 80g/m2) Z-Folding 20 sheets
Center folding 40 sheets
Bundle exit tray Folding & Stapling/trimming Stitching sheets Set
Mode 2 to 10 50 or more
11 to 20 30 or more
21 to 40 20 or more
41 to 50 15 or more
Multi-center folding mode 30 sets
Tri-folding paper exit tray Overlap tri-folding mode 20 sets
19.3 Type of paper

(1) Straight/sub tray mode
Paper size SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *4 *10, SRA4*4 *5 *10, SRA4S, A4, A4S, JISB5*1, ISOB5*2 *3 *4 *10,
JISB5S*1, ISOB5S*2 *4 *10, A5, A5S *4 *5 *10, B6S *4 *5 *10, ISOB56*4 *10, A6S *4 *5 *10
13 x 19 *4 *5 *10, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*3 *4 *10, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2*3 *4,
51/2 x 81/2S*4 *5 *10
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K*4 *5 *6 *10, 16K*4 *5 *6 *10, 16KS*4 *5 *6 *10
11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Tab paper *7 *8 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2, Max. 324mm x
463mm)
Postcard
Minimum 100mm x 148mm, Maximum.330mm x 483mm*5*10
Paper weight 40g/m2 to 350g/m2 *3*9
64g/m2 to 300g/m2 *5 *10
64g/m2 to 350g/m2 *4
*3 1200/1200P/1051/1250/1250P/1052 only
*4 C8000 only
*5 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*8 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 is A4, 81/2 x 11 only
*10 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
(2) Saddle stitching mode

Paper size SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *4*8, SRA4S, A4S, B5S
C -31
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S

81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K *4 *5 *6 *8, 16KS *4 *5 *6 *8
Wide paper *3(A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x
11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Paper weight 50g/m2 to 244g/m2 *3, 64g/m2 to 244g/m2 *4 *5 *8
Maximum saddle stitching sheets Plain, coated, color specific Paper weight Sheet
Plain paper Coated
Color specific *4 *5 *8
50g/m2 to 81g/ 50 *7 30 *7
m2
82g/m2 to 91g/ 30 *7 15 *7
m2
92g/m2 to 20 *7 10 *7
130g/m2
131g/m2 to 15 *7 5 *7
161g/m2
162g/m2 to 10 -
209g/m2
210g/m2 to 5 -
244g/m2
Fine Paper brand 55kg (64g/m2) 70kg (81.4g/m2)
KIMMARI V 50 sheets 50 sheets
RAICHO FINE
KANABISHI
OK PRINCE -
NEW NPi 50 sheets 30 sheets
POD PRINCE
FINE
SHIRAOI
Staple position Automatically adjusted according to the paper size (90mm to 165mm)
[1]
[2]
15ant1c006na
[1] = [Paper Size] /2 2mm

[2] = [Paper Size] /4 2mm
Folding height
[1]
15ant1c011na
Stitching sheets [1] Folding height

A3 B4 A4S B5S
12 x 18 81/2 x 14 81/2 x 11S (260mm or
11 x 17 less)
(301mm to (261mm to
(401mm or
400mm) 300mm)
more)
2 to 5 35mm or less 40mm or less 45mm or less Not defined
6 to 15 45mm or less 50mm or less Not defined
16 to 30 50mm or less 55mm or less
31 to 50 60mm or less 65mm or less
(The above information is applied when paper weight is 64g/m2 and no thick cover is not used.)
C -32

*3 1200/1200P/1051/1250/1250P/1052 only
*4 C8000 only
*5 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*7 1 sheet can be switched to thick paper (200g/m2)
*8 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
(3) Trimming mode

Paper size SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *4 *7, SRA4S, A4S, B5S
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K *4 *5 *6 *7, 16KS *4 *5 *6 *7
Wide paper *3 (A3W, B4W, A4SW, B5SW, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11SW, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Paper weight 50g/m2 to 244g/m2 *3
64g/m2 to 244g/m2 *4 *5 *7
Maximum trimming sheets 50 sheets (80g/m2) or 49 sheets (80g/m2) + 1 sheet (200g/m2)
(The above is the number of the printed paper before folding. The number of fore-edge (after folding) is
double.)
*3 1200/1200P/1051/1250/1250P/1052 only
*4 C8000 only
*5 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*7 C7000/C7000 /C70hc/C6000 only
(4) Multi-center folding mode

Paper size SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *4 *7, SRA4S, A4S, B5S
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K *4*5 *6 *7, 16KS *4*5 *6 *7
Wide paper *3 (A3W, B4W, A4SW, B5SW, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11SW, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Paper weight 50g/m2 to 244g/m2*3, 64g/m2 to 244g/m2 *4*5 *7
Maximum overlap folding sheets Paper weight Sheet
50g/m2 to 81g/m2 5 sheets

Folding precision (for 1 sheet)
[1]
15ant1c009na
[1] = [Paper Size] /2 1.5mm
[1] 15ant1c008na
[1] = 1.5mm or less

*3 1200/1200P/1051/1250/1250P/1052 only
*4 C8000 only
*5 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
C -33
*7 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
(5) Overlap tri-folding mode

Paper size A4S, 81/2 x 11S
Paper weight 50g/m2 to 91g/m2 *1, 64g/m2 to 91g/m2 *2 *3 *4
Maximum overlap folding sheets Paper weight Sheet

Folding precision (for 1 sheet) Paper size [1] [2] [3]
A4S 97.5 4mm 102.0 4mm 1.5mm or less
81/2 x 11S 91.6 4mm 96.1 4mm
[3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
15ant1c010na
*1 1200/1200P/1051/1250/1250P/1052 only
*2 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*3 C8000 only
*4 C7000/C7000 /C70hc/C6000 only
19.4 Machine data

Maximum power consumption 270W
Weight 280kg
Dimensions When the bundle output tray is stored:
1,170 (W) x 775 (D) x 1,020 (H) mm
When the bundle output tray is pulled out
1,170 (W) x 1,441 (D) x 1,020 (H) mm
*1 C8000/C6501/C6501P/C65hc/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000: Only 5VDC is supplied from the main body.


Note
C -34
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 20. PB-503
20. PB-503
20.1 Type
Type Simplified perfect binding machine (Consoled hot-melt type)
20.2 Functions
(1) Function
Perfect binding mode Automatically binds and stocks in a book stock section.
Sub tray mode Exits paper to the sub tray without any process
Relay conveyance mode Exits paper to the option (FS-521/FS-532) on the subsequent stage without any process
(2) Binding sheets

Binding sheets Min. thickness 10 sheets
Max. thickness Plain: 300 sheets or 30mm
Color/Coated: 150 sheets or 15mm
Binding sheets with Z-Fold Simplex printing Number of Z-Fold Max. number of Total
sheets*1 sheets unfold sheets
Number of Inserted Max. number of
Binding sheets*1
sheets sheets
1 sheet 200 sheets 201 sheets
2 sheets 150 sheets 152 sheets
Duplex printing Number of Z-Fold Max. number of Total
sheets unfold sheets
Number of Inserted Max. number of
sheets sheets
1 sheet 200 sheets 201 sheets
Simplex/duplex mixed printing When 1 or more unfold sheets is single-sided, the specification is the
(printer function) same as the simplex print.
When the z-folded sheet is single-sided, the specification is the same
as the duplex print.
*1 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000: The limit of the total number of sheets can be released by switching DIPSW30-5 from 0 (default) to
1.
1250/1250P/1052/1200/1200P/1051: The limit of the total number of sheets can be released by switching DIPSW37-2 from 0 (default) to 1.

Book stock section Maximum 11 books *1 x 2 rows *2 (book thickness: 30mm)
10 sheets to 30 sheets book 50 sets
31 sheets to 150 sheets book 35 books or until the upper limit is detected.
151 sheets to 300 sheets book Until the upper limit is detected
PB cover paper tray*3 1000 sheets (82g/m2)
500 sheets (216g/m2)
Sub tray 200 sheets (80g/m2)
*1 The available number of books may decrease due to curls of papers.
*2 When books have been stacked up to the limit at the first row, the first stack is automatically moved to the second row on the cart, and
piling books at the first row continues.
*3 Cover paper supply is selectable from PB cover paper tray, main body tray, PI or PI-PFU (1200/1200P/1051/1250/1250P/1052 only).
(4) Others
Warm-up time Approx. 20 minutes
Cover trimming Selectable from Trim/Not trim.
20.3 Type of paper

(1) Paper size
Perfect binding mode Inside paper: A4, JISB5*1, ISOB5*2*3*5*9, A5, A5S*3*9, 81/2 x 11, 51/2 x
81/2*3*9, 51/2 x 81/2S*3*9, 16K*3*4*9
Custom size paper (Maximum 307 (W) x 221 (L) mm,
Minimum 139 (W) x 210 (L) mm)
C -35
Z-fold size (A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2*3*5*9, A4S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11S,

8K*3*4*9)
Cover: Maximum 307mm x 472mm, Minimum 139mm x 279mm
Vertical (main scan direction) Same size as the inside paper.
Horizontal (sub scan direction) Wide size L mm
L= book size in the sub scan direction x 2 + book thickness (book
spine) + 5mm (for trimming)
Sub tray mode SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2*3*5*9, SRA4*3*9, SRA4S, A4, A4S, JISB5*1, ISOB5*2*3*5*9, JISB5S*1,
ISOB5S*2*3*9, A5, A5S*3*9, B6S*3*9, ISOB6S*3*9, A6S*3*9, 8K*3*4*9, 16K*3*4*9, 16KS*3*4*9
13 x 19*3*9, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S,
51/2 x 81/2*3*5, 51/2 x 81/2S*3*9
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Max. 324mm x 460mm)
Custom size: Maximum 330mm x 487mm*3*9, 324mm x 463mm*5
Minimum 100mm x 140mm*3, 100mm x 148mm*9, 95mm x 139mm *5
Finite tab paper *6*7 : A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2
Postcard
Relay conveyance mode *8 Paper which can be used by the subsequent option (FS-521/FS-532)
Large size: SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2*3*5*9, SRA4*3*9, SRA4S
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 13 x 19*3*9, 8K*3*4*9
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
Wide paper *5 (Max. 324mm x 460mm)
Small size: A4, A4S, JISB5*1, ISOB5*2*3*5*9, JISB5S*1, ISOB5S*2*3*9,
16K*3*4*9, 16KS*3*9
9 x 11, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S
Minimum size: A5, A5S*3*9, JISB6S*1*3*9, ISOB6S*2*3*9, 51/2 x 81/2*3*5, 51/2 x
81/2S*3*9
Others: Finite tab paper *6*7: A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11,
81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2
Custom size paper:
Maximum 330mm x 487mm*3*9, 324mm x 463mm*5
Minimum 100mm x 140mm*3, 100mm x 148mm*9, 95mm x 139mm
*5
(2) Paper weight

Perfect binding mode Inside paper: 64g/m2 to 91g/m2 *2
64g/m2 to 105g/m2*1*6
Cover: 82g/m2 to 216g/m2*2
81g/m2 to 209g/m2*1*6
Sub tray mode 40g/m2 to 350g/m2 *2
64g/m2 to 350g/m2*1
64g/m2 to 300g/m2*6
Relay conveyance mode 40g/m2 to 350g/m2*2
64g/m2 to 350g/m2*1
64g/m2 to 300g/m2*6
*3 C8000 only
*5 1200/1200P/1051/1250/1250P/1052 only
*8 Paper can be fed only when the FS-521/FS-532 is connected as the subsequent stage of the PB-503
*9 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
(3) Applicable paper in each mode

Body Cover -
C -36
Binding Binding PB tray Main tray Sub tray

mode mode
(1250/1250 (C8000/
P/ C7000/
1052/1200/ C7000P/
1200P/ C70hc/
1051) C6000)
Plain Japa J paper 64g/m2 - -
n
Nort Tidal MP 20lb (75g/m2) - -
h
Amer
ica
Euro Konica Minolta 80g/m2 - - -
pe Original
Konica Minolta 80g/m2 - - - -
Profi
Recycled Japa NR-A80 64g/m2 - - -
paper n
NR-A100 64g/m2
Nort Hammermill Great 20lb (75g/m2) - - -
h White
Amer Recycle Eclips
ica 20lb (75g/m2) - - - -
Euro Nautilus 80g/m2 - - -

pe
Classic White 80g/m2 - - -
Color Japa Konicaminolta CF 80g/m2 - - -
n paper
Nort Hammermill Color 28lb (105g/m2) - - -
h Copy Photo White
Amer Domtor Microprint
ica 28lb (105g/m2) - - -
Color Copy
Gilbert Neutech 28lb (105g/m2) - - -
Color Copy
Euro Color copy (mondi) 90g/m2 - - -
pe
100g/m2 - - -
Fine - - Body Cover - - - - -
Japa Kinmari V 64g/m2 to - -
n 91g/m2
NEW NPi FINE 64g/m2 to - -
91g/m2
105g/m2 - - -
POD prince high 64g/m2 to -
quality 91g/m2
82g/m2 to
OK PRINCE FINE 81.4g/m2 - -
216g/m2
105g/m2 - - -
shiraoi 64g/m2 to - -
91g/m2
High quality 64g/m2 to - -
91g/m2
KANABISHI 64g/m2 to - -
91g/m2
Coated *1 Japa JD 98g/m2 - - -
n
NEW AGE 81.4g/m2 - - -
NEW AGE BLANC 81.4g/m2 - - -
POD GLOSS 64g/m2 to 81g/m2 - - - -
COAT
Nort Kromekote Laser 82g/m2 to 130g/m2 - -
h
Amer HIGH GLOSS 131g/m2 to 161g/m2 - -
ica Futura Laser 162g/m2 to 216g/m2 - -
: Available for a paper curled less than 10mm
C -37
*1 Regarding Coated, the matt coated paper is only available for the body.
20.4 Machine data

Power source 100VAC 50/60Hz common
5VDC (supplied from the main body)
Power consumption 1000W or less
Dimensions 1,360 (W) x 1,223 (H) x 775 (D) mm
Binding section 740 (W) x 1,223 (H) x 775 (D) mm
Book stock section 620 (W) x 1,020 (H) x 753 (D) mm
Relay conveyance section


Note
C -38
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 21. IC-601
21. IC-601
21.1 Type
Type Built-in type to the engine (option) (The installation of HD-514 and PH-101 *1 or PH-102 *2 are
necessary.)
*1 In case of C8000
*2 In case of C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C6000L
21.2 Functions
Resolution: Print: 1200 x 1200dpi, 600 x 600dpi
Scan: 200 x 200dpi, 300 x 300dpi, 400 x 400dpi, 600 x 600dpi
Gradation: 8bit/256 Gradation, 1bit/2 Gradation
Printable Area: Same as the main body
Number of Print: 1 to 9999
Continuous Print Speed: A4: 71ppm (C7000/ C7000P/C70hc), 60ppm (C6000/C6000L), 80ppm (C8000)
8 1/2 x 11: 70ppm (C7000/ C7000P/C70hc), 60ppm (C6000/C6000L), 80ppm (C8000)
Page-description Language: Post Script3 (3019), PDF direct print (PDF Ver.1.7), TIFF direct print (TIFF Ver.6 compliance), PPML(Ver.
2.1), PCL5c compatible, PCL XL (PCL6 Ver.3) compatible, XPS (Ver.1 compliance)
Printer Driver: PS PPD
Windows 2000 /XP /Server2003 /Vista /Server2008 /7 *1
Linux CUPS
PS Plug-In
Windows2000 /XP /Server2003 /Vista /Server2008 /7 *1
MacOSX 10.4 /10.5 (PPC/Intel), 10.6 (Intel)
XPS
Windows Vista /Server2008 /7 *1
Printing Method: Pserver (IPX/SPX), LPD/LPR (TCP/IP), IPP (TCP/IP), Apple Talk (Ether Talk), Bonjour(TCP/IP), Web
service printing(TCP/IP), NPrinter /RPrinter (IPX/SPX), Raw Port (TCP/IP)
Compliant Web Browser: Microsoft Internet Explorer Ver. 6 or later is recommended*2 (Java Script ON)
Mozilla Firefox 1.0 or later (Java Script ON, cookie ON)
Netscape Navigator Ver. 7.02 or later (Java Script ON, cookie ON)
Flash Player Ver. 7.0 or later (when viewing in Flash)
*1 XP /Server2003 /Vista /Server2008 /7 includes 64bit.
*2 When using Internet Explorer Ver. 5.5, it is necessary to install Microsoft XML Parser (MSXML) 3.x.
21.3 Paper
Paper size Same as the main body.
Applicable paper Same as the main body.
Paper weight Same as the main body.
21.4 Machine data

CPU Intel Core2Duo E7400 2.8GHz
Memory 4GB (Standard)
SSD 2GB x 1 (SATA)
HDD 250GB x 2 (SATA)
Power source 100-240V, 50/60Hz
Host Interface: Ethernet, USB
Network Interface: RJ-45 Ethernet (1000BASE-T/100Base-TX/10Base-T)
Network status display LED 10BASE-T LED1: OFF
LED1: Yellow
100BASE-TX LED1: Green
LED1: Yellow
1000BASE-T LED1: Orange
LED1: Yellow


Note
C -39
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 22. RU-506
22. RU-506
22.1 Type
Type Paper conveyance unit with paper overlap and reverse functions
22.2 Functions
Double sheets reverse/exit Reverses 2 sheets of paper exited from the main body, PI-PFU *2 or GP-501 and conveys to finishing unit.
conveyance mode *1
Single sheet reverse/exit Reverses a single sheet of paper exited from the main body, PI-PFU *2 or GP-501 and conveys to
conveyance mode finishing unit.
Straight conveyance mode Conveys papers exited from the main body, PI-PFU *2 or GP-501 to finishing unit without any process.
*1 1200/1200P only
*2 1200/1200P/1051 only
22.3 Paper type

Paper size SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2*3*4*9, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, JISB5*1, ISOB5*2*3*4*9, JISB5S*1,
ISOB5S*2*3*4*9, A5, A5S *4*5*9, JISB6S *1 *4*5*9, ISOB6S*2 *4 *9, A6S *4*5*9, 13 x 19*4*5*9, 12 x 18,
11 x 17, 9 x 11*3*4*9, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2 *3*4, 51/2 x 81/2S *4*5*9, 81/2 x 13,
81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13, 8K *4*5*6*9, 16K *4*5*6*9, 16KS *4*5*6*9
11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Custom size paper (Max. 324mm x 463mm*3, Max. 324mm x 487mm*5, Max. 330mm x 487mm*4*9, Min.
95mm x 133mm)
Tab paper*7 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2, Max. 324mm x
463mm*3, Max. 324mm x 487mm*5)
Paper type Plain, Fine, Coat, recycled paper: same as the main body.
Paper weight 40g/ m2 to 350g/ m2 *3,64g/ m2 to 300g/ m2 *5*9
2 pages reverse/exit conveyance mode *8 40g/ m2 to 216g/ m2
*3 1200/1200P/1051 only
*4 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
*5 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*7 C8000 is A4, 81/2 x 11 only
*8 1200/1200P only
*9 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
22.4 Machine data

Power source 24/5V DC (supplied from the main body)
Maximum power consumption 63VA or less
Weight Approx. 45 kg


Note
C -40
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 23. GP-501
23. GP-501
23.1 Type
Type Multi-hole punch unit for ring binding
23.2 Modes of Operation

Bypass mode The paper moves straight from the printer to the finisher without passing through the punch module. In this
mode the paper in not punched.
Punch mode with Punch The paper moves from printer to the punch module where it gets punched and then is routed to the
finisher.
23.3 Machine data

Punch unit size 12 (305mm) W x 40 (1016mm) H x 30.5 (775mm) D
Weight 170 lbs (80kg) unpackaged,
270 lbs (123kg) packaged (Pallet, Carton, PKG Inserts)
Color Top Cover . Orca Black, Lower covers . Cuttle Gray
AC Power Supply to GP-501 External power cord according to market destination.
DC 5V Supply to GP-501 Supplied by system to PCB contained within GP-501
System Power Supply Lines GP-501 Internal Lead-Through
On upstream side: Wiring with connectors through cover-recess.
On downstream side: Lock-style connector panel on left side cover.
23.4 Software
Communication method i) Start-stop synchronization style, full duplex.
ii) 1 Start Bit, 8bit Data length, 1 Parity Bit, 1 Stop bit. Max Frame Length: 128 byte
iii) Hard flow control (CTS/RTS).
iv) Baud rate:
[Standard] 19200 bps
[ISW=Log file Transmissions] 78000 bps
Communication Content According Interface Specification (See also Appendix B)
23.5 Electronic
Required signals to UP & RXD, RTS, CTS, TXD
Downstream connected units
23.6 Inputs
(1) Media Input from Printer
Alignment/ skew variance at pick Center justified 4mm
up
Line speed 290 to 1250 mm/s (Fixed speeds within this range)
Speed variance at pick up 2%
Sheet frequency 120 ppm maximum
(a) For Punching

Paper weight 20lb bond - 80lb cover
Plain Paper: 75gsm - 216gsm
Other Paper: 120gsm - 216gsm
Exception ProClick: LTR & A4 Limited to 200gsm
Paper type See appendix C
Maximum Sheet size Letter configuration 279 x 216mm
A4 configuration 297 x 210mm
(b) For Bypass

Paper weight 16lb bond - 93lb cover
64gsm - 350gsm
Paper type Coated, Pre-printed, High Quality, Plain, Book, Color, Rough, Post Card, Label, OHP, Index
Transparency weight 5 -10 mil (0.127mm to 0.254mm)
Maximum bypass sheet size 13 x 24.8 (330 x 630mm)
Minimum bypass sheet size 3.74 x 5.47 (95 x 139mm)
C -41
(2) Power
Supply GP-501 individual power supply and power cord required.
Configurations by market See table below.
Machine Market Voltage (V) Current (A) Frequency (Hz) Paper size
1 US, Canada 115 +10/-15 % 3 60 81/2 x 11
2 Europe, Australia 220-240 +10/-15 % 1.8 50 A4
23.7 Outputs
Alignment/ skew at delivery 2mm or less for the pick up position
Speed variance at delivery 1% compared to speed variance at pick up
Chip tray capacity 2500 cycles (based on punched sheet count)
23.8 Performance
Punch accuracy Hole size 2%
Alignment 0.5mm
Back gauge depth 0.3mm
(1) Reliability
MCBJ: Punch 1 in 15,000 (20lb bond)
MCBJ: Bypass 1 in 65,000 (20lb bond)
23.9 Operation Environment, Storage, Transport

Normal Operation Temperature 10 deg C 30 deg C
Normal Operation Humidity 10% - 80%
Storage Temperature -10 deg C 40 deg C
Storage Humidity 10% - 80%
23.10 Safety /Regulatory

Noise emissions (measured to Punch Maximum of 78dBA (punching 216gsm cover)
ISO7779) Bypass Maximum of 70dBA
(1) Safety Compliance

UL & CSA standards CAN/USA-C22.2 No. 60950-01
UL60950-1 First Edition
TUV standards IEC 60950-1:2001
EN60950-1:2001
(2) Electromagnetic Compliance

EMC standards EN55024:1998 Amendments A1:2001 & A2:2003
EN61000-3-2:2000
EN61000-3-3:1995 Amendment A1:2001
EN55022:1998 Amendments A1:2000 & A2:2003
EN61000-4-2, EN61000-4-4, EN61000-4-5, EN61000-4-6, EN61000-4-11
FCC standards Class B
Part 15, Subpart B, Section A 15.107A &15.109a
C -42
23.11 Appendix A
Figure 1.1 Front
Figure 1.2 Entrance
23.12 Appendix B
No. Model Die set type # Pins Pinshape Hole size Paper size Label artwork
(WxH or D)
1 DS-501 Ring Binder 3 Round 8mm 81/2 x 11
3Hole (0.316")
2 DS-502 Plastic Bind 19 Rect. 8mm x 2.9mm 81/2 x 11

Cerlox (0.313" x
0.116")
3 DS-503 WireBind 3:1 32 Square 4mm x 4mm 81/2 x 11
Square (0.156" x
0.156")
4 DS-504 WireBind 2:1 21 Rect. 6.4mm x 5.4mm 81/ x 11
2
Rectangular (0.250" x
0.214")
5 DS-505 Color Coil 44 Round 4.4mm 81/2 x 11
(0.174")
C -43
6 DS-506 VeloBind 11 Round 3.2mm 81/2 x 11

(0.125")
7 DS-507 ProClick 32 Rect. 5mm x 5.5mm 81/2 x 11

(0.197" x
0.217")
8 DS-508 Ring Binder 4 4 Round 8mm A4
Hole (0.316")
9 DS-509 Plastic Bind 21 Rect. 8mm x 2.9mm A4

Cerlox (0.313" x
0.116")
10 DS-510 WireBind 3:1 34 Round 4.4mm A4
Round (0.174")
11 DS-511 WireBind 2:1 23 Round 6.38mm A4

Round (0.251")
12 DS-512 Color Coil 47 Round 4.4mm A4

(0.174")
13 DS-513 VeloBind 12 Round 3.2mm A4

(0.125")
14 DS-514 ProClick 34 Rect. 5mm x 5.5mm A4

(0.197" x
0.217")
15 DS-515 Ring Binder 2 2 Round 8mm A4
Hole (0.316")
16 DS-516 Plastic Bind 20 Rect. 8mm x 2.9mm A4

Cerlox (0.313" x
0.116")
17 DS-517 WireBind 2:1 23 Rect. 6.4mm x 5.4mm A4
Rectangular (0.250" x
(Australia) 0.214")
18 DS-518 WireBind 3:1 34 Square 4mm x 4mm A4
Square (0.156" x
(Australia) 0.156")
23.13 Appendix C
Paper Type for Punching
Destination Paper Name Weight (g/m2) Punch *2
(1) US Hammermill Color Copy Paper - 120 Q-Zone
Photo White
Hammermill Tidal MP 75 All
Hammermill Fore MP 75 All
Color Copy (Mondi) *1 120 Q-Zone
Wausau Exact Gloss Coated 215 Q-Zone
(C1S) *1
Hammermill Color Copy Cover *1 163 Q-Zone
216 Q-Zone
Color Copy (Mondi) *1 160 Q-Zone
(2) EU Konica Minolta Original 80 All
Konica Minolta Profi 80 All
Mondi BIO TOP 3 extra 80 All
Mondi Color Copy 200 Q-Zone
*1 For only C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 Q-Zone: Guaranteed only in Q-zone
All: Guaranteed in all environments
*Refer to the below graph
C -44
80
70
A
Humidity (%RH)
60
B Q
40
30
20 C
10
10 18 20 23 30
Temperature (C)
23.14 Glossary of Terms

These terms are common to the punch and bindery industry.
Cerlox The trade name GBC uses for its Plastic Binding
Color coil A plastic coil that looks like a spring which is threaded through round holes punched in the document then
the ends are cut off and crimped. The holes are either 4:1 or 5:1 (4 holes per inch or 5 holes per inch).
This type of bind lays flat and even folds around for easy handling of the document.
Flush-cut covers Covers stock that is the same size as the paper contents and has round corners.
Plastic binding The name used to describe GBC's most common binding method.
The 19 and 21 rectangular hole, Plastic Comb type.
ProClick A plastic element that snaps together. This style requires holes that appear to be the same as Twin Loop
but are actually slightly larger.
The larger holes enable correct operation of the ProClick Pronto finishing devise.
Tabbing (hanging chad) Tabbing or hanging chad is when a hole is not punched cleanly through the material leaving a piece of
paper hanging from the edge.
This condition occurs when a die set is worn and will usually result in miss-feeds.
Twin loop Looped wire element that is feed into square or round holes in the document in a similar fashion to Plastic
Binding. The holes are either 2:1 or 3:1 (2 holes per inch or 3 holes per inch). It is then squeezed together
or crimped to create an attractive bind that lays flat.
Velobind A heat seal plastic bind that is best known for it's security and it's attractive look. The one draw-back for
VeloBind is that it is not a layflat bind style. It is most often used in the Legal market for it's security
feature.
C -45
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
D OVERALL COMPOSITION
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
1.1 System configuration (C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000)
[26] [27]
[30] [2]
[29]
[25] [13] [31]

[3]
[28] [14] [4]

[32]
[24]
[1]
[23]
[5]
[22]
[15]
[6]
[18] [12]
[17] [11]
[7]
[10]
[8]
[21] [16]
[18]
[9]
[20]
[17]
[19]
[1] Main body [2] Dehumidifier heater (HT-503)

[3] Large capacity paper feed unit (LU-202) [4] Large capacity paper feed unit (PF-602)*4
[5] Dehumidifier heater (HT-504/505) [6] Multi bypass paper feed unit (MB-504)
[7] Preview kit (PH-102)*2 *3 [8] Hard disk (HD-514)*2 *3
[9] Image controller (IC-306) [10] Image controller (IC-307)
[11] Image controller (IC-601) *3 [12] Image controller (IC-413)*6
[13] Output tray (OT-502) [14] Relay conveyance unit (RU-509)
[15] Humidification unit (HM-102) [16] Finisher (Flat staple 50-sheet type) (FS-531)
[17] Punch kit (PK-512/513) [18] Post inserter (PI-502)
[19] Finisher (Saddle stitch type) (FS-612) [20] Perfect binder (PB-503)
[21] Saddle stitch unit (SD-506) [22] Large capacity stacker handcart (LC-501)
[23] Large capacity stacker (LS-505) [24] Folding unit (FD-503)
[25] Finisher (Flat staple 100-sheet type) (FS-521) [26] Relay unit (RU-506)
[27] Multi-hole punch unit (GP-501) [28] Die set (DS-***)*5
[29] Original cover (OC-506) *1 [30] Reverse automatic document feeder (DF-622) *1
[31] Authentication unit (AU-201), Key counter [32] Working table (WT-508)*4
*1 Select one of OC-506 or DF-622. However, it is not for C7000P/70hc since they dont have a scanner and DF function.
*2 PH-102 and HD-514 can be used by mounting as a set.
*3 PH-102 and HD-514 have to be mounted for connecting IC-601.
*4 WT-508 can not be installed when connecting PF-602.
*5 Selectable arbitrarily in accordance with the number and shape of pins.
*6 It is not for C70hc.
Model Paper size The number of pins Shape of pin
DS-501 81/2 x 11 3 Round
D -1
DS-502 81/2 x 11 19 Rectangle
DS-503 81/2 x 11 32 Square
DS-505 81/2 x 11 44 Round
DS-506 81/2 x 11 11 Round
DS-508 A4 4 Round
DS-509 A4 21 Rectangle
DS-510 A4 34 Round
DS-511 A4 23 Round
DS-512 A4 47 Round
DS-513 A4 12 Round
DS-515 A4 2 Round
DS-517 A4 23 Square
DS-518 A4 34 Square
1.2 Configuration for optional device (C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000)

Note
The combination except as mentioned in the following is prohibited.
IC-306/307/413/601 are available with all combinations.
The options can be connected each other. However, be sure to take note of the AC connection mode.
When using the C7000P/C70hc, the installation of the image controller (IC-XXX) is required.
1.2.1 Coupling combination of the main body and the paper feed option
Coupling combination of the main body and the paper feed option AC power to be connected to
1 MB-504 Main body -
2 LU-202*1 Main body -
3 PF-602*2 Main body -
4 LU-202*1 MB-504 Main body -
*1 HT-503 can be connected arbitrarily to LU-202.

*2 HT-504/505 can be connected arbitrarily to PF-602.
1.2.2 Coupling combination of the main body and the finisher option
Coupling combination of the main body and the finisher option AC power to be connected
to
1 Main body RU-509*1 FD-503 External (PF-509/FD-503)
2 Main body RU-509*1 FD-503 LS-505 External (RU-509/FD-503/
LS-505)
3 Main body RU-509*1 FD-503 SD-506 External (RU-509/FD-503/
SD-506)
4 Main body RU-509*1 FD-503 FS-521 External (PF-509/FD-503)
5 Main body RU-509*1 FD-503 PB-503 External (RU-509/FD-503/
PB-503)
6 Main body RU-509*1 FD-503 LS-505 SD-506 External (RU-509/FD-503/
LS-505/SD-506)
7 Main body RU-509*1 FD-503 LS-505 FS-521 External (RU-509/FD-503/
LS-505)
8 Main body RU-509*1 FD-503 LS-505 PB-503 External (RU-509/FD-503/
LS-505/PB-503)
9 Main body RU-509*1 FD-503 SD-506 FS-521 External (RU-509/FD-503/
SD-506)
10 Main body RU-509*1 FD-503 SD-506 PB-503 External (RU-509/FD-503/
SD-506/PB-503)
11 Main body RU-509*1 FD-503 SD-506 PB-503 FS-521 External (RU-509/FD-503/
SD-506/PB-503)
12 Main body RU-509*1 FD-503 PB-503 FS-521 External (RU-509/FD-503/
PB-503)
D -2
13 Main body RU-509*1 FD-503 LS-505 LS-505 External (RU-509/FD-503/

LS-505)
14 Main body RU-509*1 LS-505 External (RU-509/LS-505)
15 Main body RU-509*1 LS-505 SD-506 External (RU-509/LS-505/
SD-506)
16 Main body RU-509*1 LS-505 FS-521 External (RU-509/LS-505)
17 Main body RU-509*1 LS-505 PB-503 External (RU-509/LS-505/
PB-503)
18 Main body RU-509*1 LS-505 SD-506 FS-521 External (RU-509/LS-505/
SD-506)
19 Main body RU-509*1 LS-505 SD-506 PB-503 External (RU-509/LS-505/
SD-506/PB-503)
20 Main body RU-509*1 LS-505 PB-503 FS-521 External (RU-509/LS-505/
PB-503)
21 Main body RU-509*1 LS-505 LS-505 External (RU-509/LS-505)
22 Main body RU-509*1 LS-505 LS-505 SD-506 External (RU-509/LS-505/
SD-506)
23 Main body RU-509*1 LS-505 LS-505 FS-521 External (RU-509/LS-505)
24 Main body RU-509*1 LS-505 LS-505 PB-503 External (RU-509/LS-505/
PB-503)
25 Main body RU-509*1 SD-506 External (RU-509/SD-506)
26 Main body RU-509*1 SD-506 FS-521 External (RU-509/SD-506)
27 Main body RU-509*1 SD-506 PB-503 External (RU-509/SD-506/
PB-503)
28 Main body RU-509*1 SD-506 PB-503 FS-521 External (RU-509/SD-506/
PB-503)
29 Main body RU-509*1 FS-521 External (RU-509)
30 Main body RU-509*1 PB-503 External (RU-509/PB-503)
31 Main body RU-509*1 PB-503 FS-521 External (RU-509/PB-503)
32 Main body RU-509*1 GP-501 RU-506 FS-521 External (RU-509/GP-501)
33 Main body RU-509*1 GP-501 RU-506 FD-503 FS-521 External (RU-509/FD-503/
GP-501)
34 Main body RU-509*1 GP-501 RU-506 LS-505 FS-521 External (RU-509/LS-505/
GP-501)
35 Main body RU-509*1 GP-501 RU-506 SD-506 FS-521 External (RU-509/SD-506/
GP-501)
36 Main body RU-509*1 GP-501 RU-506 PB-503 FS-521 External (RU-509/PB-503/
GP-501)
37 Main body RU-509*1 GP-501 RU-506 LS-505 PB-503 External (RU-509/LS-505/
PB-503/GP-501)
38 Main body OT-502 -
39 Main body RU-509*1 *3 FS-531*2 *3 External (RU-509)
40 Main body RU-509*1 *3 FS-612*2 *3 External (RU-509)
*1 HM-102 can be connected arbitrarily to RU-509.

*2 PK-512/513 and PI-502 can be connected arbitrarily to FS-531/612.
*3 It is selectable to connect FS-531/612 to the main body directly or via RU-509.
1.3 System configuration (C6000L)
D -3
[14]
[13]
[12]
[15]
[10]
[2]
[9] [16]
[3]
[11]
[1] [4]
[10]
[9] [7]
[5]
[6]
[8]
[1] Main body [2] Multi bypass paper feed unit (MB-504)
[3] Dehumidifier heater (HT-503) [4] Large capacity paper feed unit (LU-202)
[5] Preview kit (PH-102)*1 *2 [6] Hard disk (HD-514)*1 *2
[7] Image controller (IC-601) *2 [8] Finisher (Saddle stitch type) (FS-612)
[9] Punch kit (PK-512/513) [10] Post inserter (PI-502)
[11] Finisher (Flat staple 50-sheet type) (FS-531) [12] Output tray (OT-502)
[13] Original cover (OC-506) [14] Reverse automatic document feeder (DF-622)
[15] Authentication unit (AU-201), Key counter [16] Working table (WT-508)
*1 PH-102 and HD-514 can be used by mounting as a set.
*2 PH-102 and HD-514 have to be mounted for connecting IC-601.
1.4 Configuration for optional device (C6000L)

Note
The combination except as mentioned in the following is prohibited.
IC-601 are available with all combinations.
1.4.1 Coupling combination of the main body and the paper feed option
Coupling combination of the main body and the paper feed option AC power to be connected to
1 MB-504 Main body -
2 LU-202*1 Main body -
3 LU-202*1 MB-504 Main body -
*1 HT-503 can be connected arbitrarily to LU-202.
1.4.2 Coupling combination of the main body and the finisher option
Coupling combination of the main body and the finisher option AC power to be connected
to
1 Main body OT-502 -
2 Main body FS-531*1 -
3 Main body FS-612*1 -
*1 PK-512/513 and PI-502 can be connected arbitrarily to FS-531/612.
D -4
D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 2. MAIN BODY UNIT
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L CONFIGURATION
2. MAIN BODY UNIT CONFIGURATION
[17]
[16]
[15]
[14]
[13]
[12]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[11]
[10]
[5]
[9]
[6]
[8] [7]
[1] Scanner section [2] Toner supply section

[3] Write section [4] Developing section
[5] Vertical conveyance section [6] Toner collection section
[7] Charging section [8] Registration section
[9] Paper feed section [10] Duplex section
[11] Reverse/exit section [12] OT-502 (option)
[13] Fusing section [14] Intermediate transfer section
[15] DF-622 (option) [16] Photo conductor section
[17] Operation panel section -
D -5
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 3. PAPER PATH
3. PAPER PATH
[12] [13]
[11]
[1]
[10]
[2]
[9]
[3]
[8]
[7] [4]
[6]
[5]
[1] Paper feed (common) [2] Bypass tray paper feed

[3] PF paper feed, LU paper feed [4] Vertical conveyance
[5] Tray 3 paper feed [6] Tray 2 paper feed
[7] Tray 1 paper feed [8] ADU conveyance
[9] Reversing conveyance [10] Reversing exit
[11] Paper exit (common) [12] Straight paper exit
[13] Transfer/fusing conveyance -
D -6
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 4. CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM
4. CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM
CCD HDD HDD USB Serial LAN

I/F I/F I/F
SCIPB MCB/H MCB/P MCB/H OB NRB RBU HDD
MCB OACB
FM
PRIPB IC FS FS FD LS SD PB PF LU DF
Write
RU
Section DCPS HV
M FM MC SD PS
PRCB
Fusing
ACDB CDB SCDB TSDB
Unit
M M FM MC SD PS M FM PS M FM MC PS
MB
[6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1]
[1] SATA [2] Individual signal line

[3] Other bus [4] UART bus
[5] Clock-synchronized serial bus [6] Image bus
Board name Purpose of board ISW target
Overall control board (OACB) Overall condition control Target
Memory control board /1 (MCB1) Image memory (DRAM+HDD option) control Non-target
Printer image processing board (PRIPB) Image processing control for writing Non-target
Printer control board (PRCB) Load control of such as motor, fan, clutch, solenoid and sensor Target
Scanner image processing board (SCIPB) Scanner image processing board Non-target
Memory control board /H (MCB/H) I/F control of HDD option (option) Non-target
Memory control board /P (MCB/P) Image memory for thumbnail (DRAM+HDD option) control (option) Non-target
D -7
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 5. IMAGE CREATION PROCESS
5. IMAGE CREATION PROCESS

5.1 Image creation flow and functions
Step Process Functions
Step 1 Charging process Forms a charge layer on the photo conductor drum.
Step 2 Laser exposure process Forms an electrostatic latent image on the photo
conductor drum.
Step 3 Developing process Makes the electrostatic latent image to the visible image.
Step 4 Intermediatetransfer process Forms an image by compositing the monochromatic
(YMCK) visible image on each photo conductor drum on
the transfer belt.
Step 5 2nd transfer process Transfers the image on the transfer belt to paper.
Step 6 Separation process Separates paper after the toner transfer from the
transfer belt.
Sub step 1 Drum cleaning Removes the toner on the photo conductor drum
afterthe intermediatetransfer.
Sub step 2 Exposure before charging Removes the potential remains on the photo conductor
drum after the drum cleaning.
Sub step 3 Transfer belt cleaning Removes the toner on the intermediate transfer belt
after the 2nd transfer.
Sub step 4 2nd transfer roller /Lw cleaning Removes the toner on the 2nd transfer roller /Lw after
the 2nd transfer.
Sub step 5 Toner collection Collect the toner removed by drum cleaning and transfer
belt cleaning. (Not displayed in the following picture.)
[11] [1]
Step 3
Sub step 3 [2]
[12] [4][3] Step 2
Step 4
Step 1
Sub step 1
[10]
Sub step 2
[9]
[8]
Step 6 [5]
[6]
[7] Step 5 / Sub step 4
[1] Developing unit [2] Writing unit

[3] Charging corona [4] Erase lamp (EL)
[5] Paper [6] 2nd transfer roller /Lw
[7] Discharge section [8] 2nd transfer roller /Up
[9] Transfer belt [10] Blade (drum cleaning)
[11] Blade (Transfer belt cleaning) [12] Drum
5.2 Charging process (Step 1)

Applies the high DC voltage (negative) to the charging corona with gold coated tungsten wire, and charges the negative charge to the drum by
discharging of wire. The charging corona has the charger control plate, and it makes the charge on the surface of the drum even. The
photoconductor is prepared for 4 colors (YMCK).
[1]
[2]
[4] [3]
[1] Drum [2] Charge (negative)
[3] Charging corona [4] Charger control plate
D -8
5.3 Laser exposure process (Step2)

The charge on the photo conductor drum has a characteristic that it is neutralized and disappears when the light is exposed. With this
characteristic, creates an image on the photo conductor drum by exposing the laser beam to the image area. This image is called an
electrostatic latent image. The laser beam which is exposed to each of YMCK drum corresponds to the color data disassembled into 4 at the
image processing section.
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1] Writing unit [2] Laser beam
[3] Neutralized section [4] Charge (negative)
5.4 Developing process (Step 3)

The non-image points of the electrostatic latent image on the drum is charged negatively while the image points are neutralized. As the toner is
negatively charged, it is attracted to the image points on the drum and as a result, a visible toner image is created on the drum. This operation is
referred to as "development."
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
a03ut2c005ca
[1] Drum [2] Charge (negative)

[3] Toner (negative) [4] Developing roller
5.5 Intermediate transfer process (Step 4)

The toner on each of the Y, M, C and K photoconductor drums are transferred to the intermediate transfer belt and composed on it. This toner
transfer from the drums to the intermediate belt is referred to as "intermediate transfer" and it is performed in order of Y, M, C, K.
At intermediate transfer, a positive high DC voltage bias is applied to the 1st transfer roller provided on the back surface of the intermediate
transfer belt. This makes the intermediate transfer belt surface have a positive potential higher than that of the each drum surface so that the
toner on the drums are attracted to the transfer belt.
D -9
[3] [4] [5]
[2]
[1]
[8] [5]
[7]
[6]
[1] Drum /Y [2] 1st transfer roller /Y

[3] Intermediate transfer belt [4] Toner /Y
[5] Charge (negative) [6] Drum /M
[7] 1st transfer roller /M [8] Toner /M
5.6 2nd transfer process (Step 5)

The operation to transfer the image composed of four colors on the transfer belt to the paper is referred to as 2nd transfer. At 2nd transfer, the
2nd transfer roller /Lw which is mounted on the bottom part of the transfer belt conveys the paper while pressing it against the transfer belt. At
this time, the 2nd transfer roller /Up on the back side of the transfer belt is applied a DC bias (negative) at high voltage, and the electric field is
produced between the 2nd transfer roller /Up and the 2nd transfer roller /Lw mounted inside the 2nd transfer belt. It moves the toner on the
transfer belt onto the paper.
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1] Transfer belt [2] Paper
[3] 2nd transfer roller /Lw [4] 2nd transfer roller /Up
5.7 Separation process (Step 6)

At 2nd transfer, the paper on which is being transfered is negatively charged by the 2nd transfer roller /Up. It causes the paper and the
intermediate transfer belt to attract each other and the paper sticks to the intermediate transfer belt. The operation to separate that sticked paper
is referred to as "separation."
Sepatration is performed by applying the AC and DC biases at high voltage to the discharge section. This operation neutralizes the charges of
the paper and the inetemediate transfer belt.
D -10
[1]
[2]
[4] [3]
[1] Transfer belt [2] Paper
[3] 2nd transfer roller /Lw [4] Discharge section
5.8 Drum cleaning (Sub step 1)

After the intermediate transfer, a small amount of toner remains on the drum. The process to remove that toner is referred to as "drum cleaning."
Drum cleaning is conducted by scraping the toner adhering to the drum with the edge of the urethane rubber plate which is called blade.
[3] [1]
[2]
[1] Drum [2] Cleaning blade
[3] Remaining toner -
5.9 Exposure before charging (Sub step 2)

After completion of drum cleaning, no toner remains but a subtle potential remains on the drum surface. With this condition, the charging for the
next print is not performed normally. Therefore, the exposure which is different from the laser exposure is perfomed to neutralize the potential on
the drum surface completely. This process is reffered to as "exposure before charging."
This machine uses the erase lamp (EL) for this process.
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1] Drum [2] Erase lamp (EL)
[3] Remained electric charge -
5.10 Transfer belt cleaning (Sub step 3)

After the 2nd transfer, a small amount of toner remains on the transfer belt. The process to remove that toner is referred to as transfer belt
cleaning.
Transfer belt cleaning is conducted by scraping the toner adhering to the intermediate transfer belt with the edge of the urethane rubber plate
which is called blade.
D -11
[3] [1]
[2]
[1] Transfer belt [2] Remaining toner

[3] Cleaning blade -
5.11 2nd transfer roller /Lw cleaning (Sub step 4)

The 2nd transfer roller /Lw gets dirty because the toner on the transfer belt contacts it directly.
For this reason, high voltage positive and negative DC biases are applied to the 2nd transfer roller /Up one after the other to move the toner on
the 2nd transfer roller /Lw to the transfer belt side. The toner which is moved to the transfer belt is cleaned by the transfer belt cleaning
described on the preceding paragraph.
[1]
[3]
[2]
[5] [4]
[1] Transfer belt [2] 2nd transfer roller /Lw
[3] 2nd transfer roller /Up [4] When DC bias (positive) is applied
[5] When DC bias (negative) is applied -
5.12 Toner collection (Sub step 5)

The toner removed at the drum cleaning section and the transfer belt cleaning section is collected to the toner collection box via the toner
collection screw.
[3]
[2]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
a03ut2c013ca
D -12
[1] Toner collection box [2] Transfer belt toner collection port
[3] Drum /Y toner collection port [4] Drum /M toner collection port
[5] Drum /C toner collection port [6] Drum /K toner collection port
D -13
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 6. IMAGE CREATION CONTROL
6. IMAGE CREATION CONTROL

The image creation is conducted in the order of yellow, magenta, cyan, and black, but the start of the image creation control is when the
drum motor /K (M17) turns ON [1].
After M17 turns ON, the drum motor /Y (M14) [2], /M (M15) [3], /C (M16) [4] turns ON in this order.
The timing to turn ON the erase lamp, charging corona, and developing bias (DC) of each color is when each motor turns ON.
The timing [5] to turn ON the developing motor depends on the time difference with the writing start timing [6] and has been registered in
advance.
The timing to turn ON [6]/OFF [8] the writing operation is based on the ON/OFF timing of the developing bias (AC) and the 1st transfer.
The timing to turn OFF [11] the last writing operation is based on the OFF timing of the developing motor and the toner supply motor.
The timing to turn OFF [12] the last 1st transfer is based on the OFF timing of the charging corona.
When the charging corona turns OFF [15], the developing bias (DC), eraser lamp, and drum motor turn OFF based on this and the image
creation process of yellow to the drum completed.
According to the image creation process of yellow, each image creation of magenta, cyan, and black to the drum is performed.
Along with the image creation to each drum, the 1st transfer pressure release motor (M19) and the 2nd transfer pressure release motor
(M34) turns ON.
When M19 presses the transfer belt to the full color position, the base signal for the 2nd transfer V_TOP is output [7].
By the transfer belt being pressed, the intermediate transfer from each drum to the transfer belt is performed in the order.
The separation (HV2) turns ON [9] after a specified time since the base signal V_TOP turns ON.
After another specified time, the 2nd transfer (HV2) turns ON [10] and the 2nd transfer from the transfer belt to the paper is performed. At
this point, the bias turns OFF [10] and the 2nd transfer cleaning is ended forcibly.
The 2nd transfer ends after a specified time since the last developing bias /K (AC) turns OFF [13].
Once M19 starts releasing the transfer belt [14], the bias turns ON [16] after a specified time to perform the 2nd transfer cleaning.
[1][2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [8] [11] [12] [15]
Drum motor/Y (M14)
Developing motor/Y (M20)
Toner supply motor/Y (M49)
Erase lamp/Y (EL/Y)
Charging corona/Y (HV1)

Writing unit/Y
Developing bias/Y (DC)(HV1)
Developing bias/Y (AC) (HV1)
1st transfer/Y (HV2)
Drum motor/M (M15)

Developing motor/M (M21)
Toner supply motor/M (M50)
Erase lamp/M (EL/M)
Charging corona/M (HV1)

Writing unit/M
Developing bias/M (DC) (HV1)
Developing bias/M (AC) (HV1)
1st transfer/M (HV2)
Drum motor/C (M16)

Developing motor/C (M22)
Toner supply motor/C (M51)
Erase lamp/C (EL/C)
Charging corona/C (HV1)

Writing unit/C
Developing bias/C (DC) (HV1)
Developing bias/C (AC) (HV1)
1st transfer/C (HV2)
Drum motor/K (M17)

Developing motor/K (M23)
Toner supply motor/K (M52)
Erase lamp/K (EL/K)
Charging corona/K (HV1)

Writing unit/K
Developing bias/K (DC) (HV1)
Developing bias/K (AC) (HV1)
1st transfer/K (HV/2)
Belt motor (M18)
1st transfer pressure release motor (M19)
2nd transfer pressure release motor (M34)
2nd transfer CONT

Bias (HV2)
2nd transfer (HV2)
Separation (HV2)
[7] [9] [10] [13] [14] [16]
[1] M17 ON [2] M14 ON

[3] M15 ON [4] M16 ON
[5] M20 ON [6] Writing started (1st sheet)
[7] V_TOP signal created [8] Writing ended (1st sheet)
[9] Separation ON [10] 2nd transfer started
[11] Writing ended (last) [12] 1st transfer /Y ended (last)
[13] Developing bias /K (AC) OFF (last) [14] Transfer belt release operation started
D -14
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 6. IMAGE CREATION CONTROL
[15] Charging corona /Y OFF [16] 2nd transfer cleaning started
D -15
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 7. PROCESS SPEED
7. PROCESS SPEED
7.1 bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc
Corresponding to the combination of the number of the stacked sheets and the coating of the output image, this machine has 5 types of the
process speed.
Each of the high speed and middle speed has 2 types of process speed. The types are switched automatically depending on the environment
temperature.
Plain No gloss Plain Glossed
Environment temperature 17 C or more Less than 17 C 17 C or more Less than 17 C
Paper weight
64g/m2 to 105g/m2 315mm/s (High1) 300mm/s (High2) 225mm/s (Middle1) 208mm/s (Middle2)
106g/m2 to 135g/m2 300mm/s (High2), 225mm/s (Middle1), or 208mm/s 150mm/s (Low)

(Middle2)
* Set by user speed setting
136g/m2 to 209g/m2 225mm/s (Middle1) 208mm/s (Middle2)
210g/m2 to 300g/m2 150mm/s (Low)
Coated No gloss Coated Glossed

Environment temperature 17 C or more Less than 17 C 17 C or more Less than 17 C
Paper weight
64g/m2 to 80g/m2 - -
81g/m2 to 105g/m2 315mm/s (High1) 300mm/s (High2) 225mm/s (Middle1) 208mm/s (Middle2)
106g/m2 to 135g/m2 300mm/s (High2), 225mm/s (Middle1), or 208mm/s 150mm/s (Low)

(Middle2)
136g/m2 to 209g/m2 225mm/s (Middle1) 208mm/s (Middle2)
210g/m2 to 300g/m2 150mm/s (Low)
7.2 bizhub PRESS C6000, bizhub PRO C6000L

Corresponding to the combination of the number of the stacked sheets and the coating of the output image, this machine has 3 types of the
process speed.
Paper weight Plain No gloss Plain Glossed
64g/m2 to 105g/m2 300mm/s (High2) 208mm/s (Middle2)
106g/m2 to 135g/m2 300mm/s (High2) or 208mm/s (Middle2) 150mm/s (Low)

136g/m2 to 209g/m2 208mm/s (Middle2)
210g/m2 to 300g/m2 150mm/s (Low)
Paper weight Coated No gloss Coated Glossed

64g/m2 to 80g/m2 - -
81g/m2 to 105g/m2 300mm/s (High2) 208mm/s (Middle2)
106g/m2 to 135g/m2 300mm/s (High2) or 208mm/s (Middle2) 150mm/s (Low)

136g/m2 to 209g/m2 208mm/s (Middle2)
210g/m2 to 300g/m2 150mm/s (Low)
D -16
E SERVICE TOOL > 1. bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc,
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L bizhub PRO C60...
E SERVICE TOOL
1. bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc, bizhub PRO C6000L
1.1 Service material list
1.1.1 Service material list
Parts Number Name Shape Remark
- Isopropyl alcohol
50gaf2c142na
- Acetone
50gaf2c142na
000V-19-## Setting powder 25g
50gaf2c143na
000V-18-## Cleaning pad 10pcs/1 pack
50gaf2c144na
65AA-992## Hydro-wipe 10pcs/1 pack
8050fs3005
00GR0026## Multemp FF-RM (Fluotribo MH) 25g
50gaf2c145na
00GR0002## Plas guard No.2 25g
50gaf2c145na
00GR0022## Molykote EM-30L 25g
50gaf2c145na
A0N9PP67## Magnalube-G Teflon Grease 0.75 oz
1.2 Jig list

1.2.1 Jig list
A03UPJG2## Thermostat jig /UF Quantity: 1
a03uf2c135na
A03UPJG3## Thermostat jig /L Quantity: 1
a03uf2c159na
A03UPJG1## Thermostat jig /UC Quantity: 1
a03uf2c160na
7050K002## Optics unit positioning jig Quantity: 2
8050fs3011
00M6-2-## Door switch jig Quantity: 1
8050fs3012
E -1

9J06PJP1## Color chart (A3) Quantity: 1
8050fs3005
9J06PJP2## Color chart (11 x 17) Quantity: 1
8050fs3005
4040PJP1## Test chart (A3) Quantity: 1

Black and white
8050fs3005
4040PJP2## Test chart (11 x 17) Quantity: 1

Black and white
8050fs3005
120A9711## Adjustment chart Quantity: 1

For DF
8050fs3005
65AA995## Fusing adjustment paper (16 sheets/A3) Quantity: 1

For multi feed detection
8050fs3005
00VC-2-0## Drum cover Quantity: 4
8050fs3017
00VD-100## Blower brush Quantity: 1
8050fs3018
56UAPJG0## Multimeter Quantity: 1
8050fs3019
13QEJG01## Stapler positioning jig Quantity: 1

For FS-612
8050fs3022
A1DURX01## Developer ejection jig Quantity: 1
- Management Tool Quantity: 1

Application for ORU-M Use for
managing the counter information
of the unit.
A0H2RX00## Trimmer unit support board Quantity: 1

For SD
1.3 Mail remote notification system

1.3.1 Outline
"Mail remote notification system" is a system that allows you to obtain a list print which can be output by the main body using the Internet mail
(E-mail).
Using this system dispenses not only with printing the list on paper but also visiting the users. Send an E-mail with a simple keyword to the main
body to receive the list prints from the main body by E-mail.
E -2
1.3.2 Operating environment

In order to use the functions of "Mail remote notification system", the following conditions must be met. The operation of the functions is
available while in jams, SC, and a low power mode. Under the condition that the main body is not operating, an E-mail sent to the main body
does not get lost but is handled when the main body is activated again.
1. The main body has a server that can receive an E-mail using POP3 or IMAP protocol.
2. The copier has a mail server that can send an E-mail using SMTP protocol.
3. In the following 4 cases, "Mail remote notification system" does not operate in the main body.
When the main power switch (SW1) is OFF
When the sub power switch (SW2) is ON
The copier is in the auto shut-off mode.
When the "Enhance Security Mode" is set to ON (the use of the main body NIC is not allowed.)
1.3.3 Major functions

Sending a mail with a simple keyword allows you to use the following functions.
1. The list print information of the main body you want to obtain can be received by E-mail.
List prints that can be obtained are the following 11 lists.
Mode Memory List
User Management List
Font Pattern List
Machine Management List
Adjustment Data List
Use Management List
Counter List
Coverage Data List
Parameter List
Communication Log List
Audit Log Report
2. The counter list can be checked by cell phone.
3. A password used for certification of mail can be changed.
4. Directions for use of "Mail remote notification system" can be received by e-mail.
To use the preceding functions, send a mail with a simple keyword (command).
For details of the command, refer to "E.1.3.5 Operating instructions of the mail remote notification system."
1.3.4 Initial setting

To use "Mail remote notification system", register the network parameter on the main body and the account on the mail server.
(1) Setting from the operation panel

Set the IP address of the copier from the operation panel to connect the copier to the network. When this setting has been already made,
proceed to "E.1.3.4.(2) Setting from the Web browser."
(a) Procedure
1. Press [Utility/Counter] on the operation panel.
2. Press [03 Machine Manager Setting].
3. Press [05 Network Setting].
4. Press [01 Machine NIC Setting].
5. Enter "IP Address," "Subnet Mask," and "Gateway Address."
6. Restart the main body.
Note
The system administrator normally assigns the IP address of the copier. For details, contact the system administrator.
(2) Setting from the Web browser

Enter the setting of the mail server from the Web browser. To use the Web browser, make preparations of a PC that can be connected to the
network.
Note
No space is available in all items to be set. The following characters cannot be used for setting an E-mail address.
()<>;:[]
When an improper entry or setting is made on the Web browser, be sure to make corrections following the error massage. When
not correcting the error, program download error occurs.
(a) Procedure
1. Start up the Web browser.
When the proxy is set on the Web browser, it becomes unavailable to access the main body Web.
For particulars, contact the network administrator. Be sure to avoid setting from 2 or more browsers at a time.
2. Specify the IP address of the copier main body that is entered thorough "(1) Setting from the operation panel".
When you access the Web Utilities of the copier main body, "Main page" is displayed.
E -3
3. "Main page screen"

Click [Extension for maintenance].
4. Enter the user name or the CE password in "Extension for maintenance" and press "OK."
User name: ce (small letter, cannot be changed)
Password: CE Enter the password. (Default:"9279272")
5. "Extension for maintenance screen"

Click [E-mail Initial Setting].
6. "E-mail Initial Setting screen"
Setting item Details

Enable E-mail notification When using the mail remote notification system, select "ON." Default is "OFF."
Time difference The time at which a mail was sent out is calculated based on this value. For time difference setting,
enter the difference from the standard time UTC in the range from -1200 (- 12 hour 00 minute) to
+1200 (-12 hour 00 minute). When no value is entered, +0000 (UTC) is set. (Example: In the case
of Japan, enter + 900.)
Sending mail Set the Host Name or IP address of the SMTP server.
(SMTP) server When using SSL, check in the "Enable SSL."
SMTP port number Set the port Number of the SMTP server. For default, 25 is set.
Sending mail (SMTP) server Set the time-out of the SMTP connection. Default is for 5 minutes.
time out
Interval between fetching mails The interval of the main body checking the receiving mail server to see if a mail is newly received.
(An interval can be specified in the range from 1 minute to 60 minutes.) Taking into consideration
the load on the network, this is set at the interval of 10 minutes.
Receiving mail server Set the Host Name or IP address of the receiving mail server.
When using SSL, check in the "Enable SSL."
Kind of mail spool Select either of POP3 and IMAP. For default, [POP3] is selected.
POP3 (IMAP) Select "Enable default" when using 110 for POP3, and 143 for IMAP. When using other than the
port number default, select "Custom" and enter a port number to use.
User name on the server Enter an account name assigned to the main body by the receiving mail server.
Password Enter a password to the account name above.
E-mail Address for Machine Enter the mail address of the main body its own. The address is normally "mail account
Address name@incoming mail server name."
Nickname Enter a nickname that is added to the title (subject) of a mail sent from the main body. No entry
causes no problem.
CE password Enter a password that is added to the title (subject) of a mail sent to the main body. The main body
uses this password for security check.
Also Notice to the administrator Not transfer: Default
only illegal mail: When a mail received by the main body does not match with the password
above, or when the mail size is in excess of a fixed size (10k bytes), transfer the mail.
all mails: Transfer all mails that use "Mail remote notification system."
E -4
Administrator E-mail address When "only illegal mail" or "all mails" is selected, enter an E-mail address for transfer.
Announce delay time in replay Choose whether to indicate in the mail the interval (the amount of time required) from the time when
mail a mail is sent to the main body to the time when the main body receives it. Default is "No."
Enable POP (IMAP) before After authentication is made by the mail receiving server, a selection is made to decide whether to
SMTP Authentication send out the mail or not. For default, "Send" is selected.
Retry polling when the machine POP poling option in machine busy state. For default, "Send" is selected.
is busy
Enable SMTP Authentication Input the User name and the password when using it. Default is "No."
7. After completion of entry, click [Apply].

8. Conduct the mail sending/receiving test.
Click "Test" and a sending test and a receiving test are conducted collectively to check to see if a test mail sent is correctly
received.
When a test failed, recheck the set items following the error message.
Sending test A mail sending test is made on the SMTP server. A test mail is sent to "E-mail Address for Machine"
set in Step6.
Receiving test A receiving test is made on the incoming mail server. A test mail is received from "E-mail Address
for Machine" set in Step6.
1.3.5 Operating instructions of the mail remote notification system

For commands for communications with the main body and the details of options, refer to the following table.
Command Option Description Minimum input
GETLOG Send back a mail with the information specified in the option. G
ModeMemory Send back [Mode Memory List] by mail. M
UserSetting Send back [User Management List] by mail. U
FontPattern Send back [Font Pattern List] by mail. F
Management Send back [Machine Management List] by mail. Ma
Adjustment Sent back [Adjustment Data List] by mail. A
UserManagement Send back [Use Management List] by mail. UseM
Counter Send back [Counter List] by mail. C
CoverageData Send back [Coverage Data List] by mail. Cov
CommunicationLog Send back [Communication Log List] by mail. Co
Audit Log Send back [Audit Log List] by mail. Au
ALL Send back all preceding items by mail. AL
Not specified Edit the [Counter List] to display it on cell phone and send
back.
CHPASS [OldPasswd] [NewPasswd] Change a password to be used for certification of a mail. C
[OldPasswd] Specify a password that is currently used.
[NewPasswd] Specify a new password.
HELP Not specified Send a help mail that describes the operating instructions of H
the not specified commands above.
1.3.6 Mail sending

A command (option) printed on the mail is not case sensitive and can be identified from the minimum input listed on the preceding table.
Note
Mail software can be used without discrimination by OS and a hand-held device or a free mail using browser.
Use the mail software in the text mode. The HTML mail is not available.
For the mail software, as a condition for reception, 128 characters or more are recommended as the maximum number of
characters displayed in a line.
One or more spaces or TAB are required between a command and an option that are written in the mail. The line break is not
available.
Enter all the commands that are written in the mail in one-byte alphanumeric characters (ASCII characters). When any other
characters are used, an error message "No command found" is sent back.
Start a command written in the mail from the line head with not space. When there is a space or TAB found at the line head, the
line is ignored.
The maximum number of commands available in a mail is 10. Commands exceeding 10 are ignored.
Avoid attaching a file to a mail to send to the main body. When the attached file size is large, the main body handles that mail as a
nuisance mail.
Avoid adding a signature to a mail to send to the main body. The copier handles a signature on a mail as a command and send
back an error mail.
In the case the power is shut off while the main body is sending a mail or the main body is printing the list print, the same mail can
be sent back twice.
The main body can receive up to 5 mails from the mail server at the same time. The main body can receive up to mails from the
mail server at the same time.
E -5
1.4 Job history list

1.4.1 Outline
"Job History List" is the function to refer to the output history of the copier by using Web browser. The job history displayed on the operation
panel is stored in the memory and deleted when the SW2 is turned OFF. However, with this function, the job history is stored in the optional
hard disk unit (HD-514) so that the users can refer it even after the SW2 is turned OFF.
1.4.2 Major functions

The job history list allows you to use the following functions.
Displaying and downloading of job history by 100 data.
Saving of the job history up to 1 million (The number of histories to save is selectable from 100,000, 500,000 or 1 million. Select 0 to turn
OFF the job history utility.)
Up to 10 types (A to J) of setting files can be imported from the CE page.
The contents displayed can be changed for each of the 10 setting files (A to J)
Note
The history data displayed on the output history list of the main body when the job is completed is stored in HD-514. Therefore the
data is not stored in case the job is stopped, proof is output or jam is caused.
Sending history of the scanned information (Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to SMB, for example) is not saved
The history data is stored only in /P of HD-514. Therefore, if the hard disk of /P is damaged, the data does not recover.
1.4.3 Setting method

When using the Job history list in the initialization, the 4 items of job history are displayed. However by importing the customized setting file,
other items can be displayed. For the information about getting this setting file and the editor commands, contact the Support section of the
authorized distributor.
The following are the display items of job history in the initialization
No
Job Number
Mode
Date
(1) Setting from the touch panel

Set the IP address of the copier from the touch panel to connect the copier to the network.
When this setting has been already made, proceed to "E.1.4.3.(2) Setting from the Web browser" .
(a) Procedure
1. Select [Utility/Counter] button on the touch panel.
2. Press [03 Administrator Setting].
Note

Input the setting on the web browser to import the setting file to the copier. In order to use the Web browser, make preparations of the PC that
can be introduced into the network.
(a) Procedure
When the proxy is set on the Web browser, it becomes unavailable to access the main body Web. For particulars, contact the
network administrator. Be sure to avoid setting from 2 or more browsers at a time.
2. Specify the IP address of the copier main body that is entered thorough "E.1.4.3.(1) Setting from the touch panel".
When you access the Web Utilities of the copier main body, "Main page" is displayed.

4. Enter the user name or the CE password in "Extension for maintenance" and press "OK."
Password: CE Enter the password. (Default:"9279272")
E -6
5. Enter the service mode.

Note
When the copier is not in service mode, the setting of [Machine setting data Import/Export] is unavailable.

Click [Machine setting data Import/Export]
7. "Machine setting data Import/Export screen"

Click each symbol (A to J) displayed on [Import datatype change] -[Web setting]
Note
The setting file imported to A is displayed on "Administrator Setting screen" in initial setting, therefore selecting A is
recommended.

When the preparation of the setting file is completed, the following message is displayed. Click [Browse] key, and specify the setting
file.
Note
The setting file does not need to be named [joblogA.html]. The settings are saved in the main body with names of
joblogA.html to joblogJ.html.

Click [OK].

When the import is completed correctly, the following message is displayed. Turn on and off the power switch (SW2) of the main body.
Note
To enable the setting data, turn the SW2 OFF and ON again and initialize the HDD-514.
Access the Web Utility after the initialization of main body/options is completed. The imported setting files may not take
effect when accessing the Web Utility soon after the OFF/ON of SW2.

Click [Administrator Setting].
12. Enter the user name and the administrator password on "Administrator Setting Log in" page, and click "OK".
User name: admin (small letter, cannot be changed)
E -7
Password: Enter the password of the administrator of the copier
Note
They differ from the login user name and the password for the Extension for maintenance
13. "Administrator Setting screen"

Click [Job History List].
14. "Job History List screen"
Change the URL in the address bar to the letter from A to J that has imported the customized file to update the page.
Example
Before: http://X.X.X.X/goform/joblog.cgi?viw=A
After: http://X.X.X.X/goform/joblog.cgi?viw=B
Note
In case the customized file is imported to "B".
15. "Job History List screen"

Click [JobHistory list].
Note
This operation sets the customized item number in order.
The address bar displays "http://X.X.X.X/goform/joblog.cgi" after the click.
(b) In case the writing of the setting file fails

When the writing of the setting file fails, the following message is displayed. In this case, conduct the following procedure to see if the hard
disk HD-514 has malfunction and requires the replacement or not.
1. Conduct the step 1 to step10 of the procedure (a) to see if the import of the setting file is normally completed. When the import of the
setting file fails after conducting these processes, conduct the step4 and the following steps.
"Service Mode menu screen"
Press [05 State Confirmation].
Press [01 I/O Check Mode].
3. [I/O Check Mode screen]
Enter "99" with the numeric keys. Confirm that "99-00" is displayed on the message display area.
4. Press the Access button.
5. Enter "03" with the numeric keys. Confirm that "99-03" is displayed on the message display area.
6. Press the start button.
Press the Start button to perform the HDD bad sectors check and recovery again when "NG" is displayed.
When OK appears, conduct the step1 to step10 of the procedure (1) to see if the import of the setting file is normally completed. If the
writing of the setting file fails after conducting these processes, the trouble of the HD-514 is considerable. Replace it with new one.
Note
When replacing the HD-514, execute "Utility" - "Administrator Setting" - "Security Setting" - "HDD Management Setting" -
"HDD Restore/Backup". (Only when the customer has backed up data)
The job history data is not restored by executing "HDD Restore/Backup."
1.5 Counter list acquisition using USB memory

1.5.1 Outline
By connecting the USB memory to the service port, the counter list information can be saved in the USB memory in the text file format.
1.5.2 List that can be acquired

1. Counter list
2. Mode Memory List
3. User setting list
4. User setting list
5. Audit log report
6. Machine Management List
7. Adjustment Data List
8. Coverage data list
9. Maintenance History
Note
When setting DIPSW30-1 to 1, the Parameter List and the Communication Log List are also stored.
When setting DIPSW15-0 to 1, the ORU-M Maintenance History is also stored.
E -8
1.5.3 Acquisition method

(1) Preparation:
1. Set the service port device setting to [ON].
2. Connect the USB memory to the service port.
(2) Procedure
2. Press [Details Counter].
3. "Details Counter List screen"
Press [HELP] - [Utility/Counter] -[Check Job Setting] on the operation panel.
4. After the following message appears, remove the USB memory.
Note
Do not remove the USB memory before the message disappears. The data is being output to the file while the message is
displayed. If the USB memory is removed while the message is displayed, the file cannot be saved properly.
ORU-M Maintenance History is output to the file only when DIPSW15-0 is ON.
(3) File storage location

The list print data file is saved to the root directory in the USB memory.
(4) File name

The file name is defined as follows. When the same file name exists, it is overwritten with new data.
listprint + Machine type + destination code + Serial No. Year_Date_Time.txt
Ex: listprintA1RF001123456_20100107_1010.txt
1.6 Panel log

1.6.1 Outline
The "Panel log" is a function to display the operation history of the main body operation panel and the hard key using Web browser. Because
the panel log is stored in the memory of the main body, it is deleted when the sub power switch (SW) is turned OFF. However when "I.5.15 Log
Store" in the service mode is set to "ON", the log is stored in the optional hard disk unit (HD-514) or the USB memory at the time SC occurs. At
this time the panel log is also stored, which helps troubleshooting.
Items recorded: Touch panel operation, hard key operation
Items not recorded: Mouse operation, external key board operation
Maximum storable number: 1024 (deleted by power OFF)
In security mode: The panel log reference is unavailable as the main body NIC network cannot be connected.
Note
The log data is stored only in /A of HD-514. Therefore, if the /A of the hard disk is damaged, the data does not recover.
1.6.2 Log acquisition method

There are 2 methods for storing and using the panel log data.
Download from Web Utilities to a computer (manual store)
HDD automatic log store function (auto store)
(1) Download from Web Utilities

1. Display the panel log from the Web Utilities.
2. "Panel log screen"
The following 7 panel log items are displayed.
E -9
No.: Recorded number (up to 1024)

scrcode: Screen code at the time it is operated
kind: Operation kind (hard key or panel pressed)
detail: Detailed information when it is pressed
mean: Key type pressed
time: Time it pressed
3. Click "download" to download it to the computer.
File type: Tab-delimited text file
(2) HDD automatic log store function

For details on the HDD automatic log store function, refer to I.5.15 Log Store.
Note
The panel log which can be acquired with the HDD automatic log store function is in the JSON format (JavaScript). For details
on analysis method of this panel log, contact the Support section of the authorized distributor.
1.7 ORU-M Counter Rewrite

1.7.1 Load from external memory
(1) Outline
Read the counter data written by Management Tool from the USB memory and write it to the main body. To reduce the down-time, it can be
executed even during printing.
The counter data for the spare unit (not in use) is written in the main body. The target unit is the fusing unit and the intermediate transfer unit.
Note
This function is available only when DIPSW 15-0 is set to ON.
(2) Preparation:
Connect the USB memory to the service port.
Note
When the counter data file is created in the folder combination mode of Management Tool, save the counter data file in the
following folder configuration of the USB memory.
C7000
ORU_DATA
This is the counter data file name.

[Main Body Serial Number]_ORU_DATA.bin
(3) Procedure
1. Be sure that the ordinary operation screen *1 is displayed.
Press [Utility/Counter] button.
2. "Utility screen"
On the Operation panel, press the following buttons.
10C69
3. "ORU-M Counter Rewrite menu screen"
Press [01 Read from external memory].
Note
If the USB memory is not connected to the connection port, the error message appears not to go on to the file selection
screen.
4. "ORU-M Counter Rewrite <From External> screen"

Press [Next] or [Back] to select the file to be read and press [OK].
Note
By pressing [Limit], only the file corresponded to the serial number of the machine appears.
E -10
5. "ORU-M Counter Rewrite <From External> (item selection) screen"

After selecting [Intermediate Trans.]/[Fusing] in "Load Item", check the counter value with []/[] and press [Store selected items].
Press [Store all items] to read the counter data of both of the intermediate transfer unit and the fusing unit.
6. "Pop-up screen"
Press [Yes] to start reading the counter data.
Note
Be sure not to turn OFF the main power switch (SW1) until the reading file completes.
7. "Pop-up screen"
Confirm the message "Completed data loading from external memory" and press [OK].
*1 Default is [MACHINE] screen.
1.7.2 Store to external memory

(1) Functions
Transfers the counter data of the fusing unit and the intermediate transfer unit from the main body to the USB memory. The saved data can
be used in Management Tool.
Note
This function is available only when DIPSW 15-0 is set to ON.
(2) Preparation:
Connect the USB memory to the service port.
Note
Be sure to create a folder as shown below beforehand.
C7000
ORU_DATA
E -11
(3) Procedure
2. "Utility screen"
10C69
3. "ORU-M Counter Rewrite menu screen"
Press [02 Store to external memory].
4. "ORU-M Counter Rewrite <To External> screen"
Press [Start Storing].
Note
When the USB memory is not connected to the connection port, an error message appears.
Be sure not to turn OFF the main power switch (SW1) until the storing file completes.
5. "Pop-up screen"
A pop-up screen appears after saving completes. Check the file name and press [OK].
6. "ORU-M Counter Rewrite <To External> screen"

Confirm that the screen returns to "ORU-M Counter Rewrite <To External> screen", disconnect the USB memory from the service port.
1.8 Management Tool

1.8.1 Outline
"Management Tool" is a software to read and reset the parts counter information of the unit.
(1) Operating environment

The following shows the hardware requirements of the Management Tool.
Applicable OS Windows 2000 Professional (Service Pack 4 or later versions)
Windows XP Professional (Service Pack 3 or later versions)
Windows Vista (32bit/64bit) Home Premium/Business/Enterprise/Ultimate (Service Pack
2 or later versions)
Windows 7 (32bit/64bit) Home Premium/Professional/Enterprise/Ultimate (Service Pack
1 or later versions)
CPU Conform to OS recommended environment
Hard disk space 100MB or more
Memory space Conform to OS recommended environment
Web browser Microsoft Internet Explorer Ver.6.0 (Service Pack 1 or later versions)
Library Windows 2000 & Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0
Windows XP & Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 (SP2)
Windows Vista & Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 (SP2)
Windows 7 & Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 (SP2)
Display At resolution of 800 x 600 (SVGA) or more
16 bits color or more
Applicable machine bizhub PRESS C8000
bizhub PRESS C7000
bizhub PRESS C6000
bizhub PRESS 1250
bizhub PRESS 1250P
bizhub PRESS 1052
Note
Compliant OS may be limited depending on the RFID tag reader/writer.
The applicable machines may be changed by the machine development in the future.
(2) RFID tag reader/writer

Management Tool uses the RFID tag reader/writer for reading and writing the PFID tag. The following shows the corresponding RFID tag
reader/writer.
"TMRF-1-U001" (Tamura Corporation)
"TWN3" (Elatec Vertriebs GmbH)
Applicable mode USB
: Transparent Virtual COM Port
V24: Transparent Operation
Note
The driver for the RFID tag reader-writer needs to be installed to the computer beforehand.
E -12
"TMRF-1-U001" (Tamura Corporation)
TmRfid USB driver (Windows 2000/XP)
Vista/7 dedicated USB driver(Windows Vista/7)
"TWN3" (Elatec Vertriebs GmbH)
TWN Serial Port driver (Windows XP)
The following shows the setting the port of the TWN Serial Port driver.
Item Value
bit/sec 9600
Data bit 8
Parity None
Stop bit 1
Flow control None
(3) Main functions

The following shows the main functions of the Management Tool.
Reading/writing RFID tag of unit (bizhub PRESS C8000)
The part information is read from the RFID tag of the unit and displayed on the screen. Select the part whose counter information is reset
and write the reset information on the IC tag.
Reading/writing data file of unit (bizhub PRESS C7000/6000, bizhub PRESS 1250/1250P/1052)
Reads out the part information from the data file of the unit output from the device and displays it on the screen. Select a part whose
counter information is reset on the screen, and write the reset information to the data file. (Support to read/write automatically from the
USB memory.)
Work log management
The counter information and the counter reset information caught from the replacement work are saved automatically as a log.
On the work log display, the information can be sorted by the read or reset date and searched by the term such as the customer or the
technician who executed the replacement. Therefore, the previous works can be checked.
Output of work information with CSV file
Outputs the work information and work log when replacing in the CSV format file.
Printing work information
Prints out the work information and work log when replacing.
Association of the user information and the device
The user information can be associated with the device.
Export/Import
The work log, user information, and technician information can be exported to the file. Also, the exported file can be imported.
Serial number setting (bizhub PRESS C8000)
When replacing the tag due to the breakage, new RFID tag can be recognized to the machine.
Intermediate transfer steering sensor information setting (bizhub PRESS C8000)
The initial value of the intermediate transfer steering sensor can be registered.
Option
Set each setting of Management Tool.
Log in mode
To use the Management Tool, login is required.
2 modes are provided for log in; "Administrator mode" and "Technician mode."
[Administrator mode]
Mode when log in as administrator.
[Technician mode]
Mode when log in as technician. The administrator registers the technician.
The operable function differs depending on the log in mode.
No. Function name Administrator mode Technician mode
1 Replacement work No Yes
2 Work log Yes Yes
3 Register user Yes Yes
4 Register technician Yes No
5 SetPersonal No Yes
6 Administrator Setting Yes No
7 Unit Serial Number Setting No Yes
E -13
8 Intermediate transfer steering sensor information No Yes

setting
9 Option No Yes
10 Version Yes Yes
Yes: operable, No: inoperable
1.8.2 Installation of Management Tool

(1) Installation method
Install the Management Tool in the following steps.
Note
Log on with the user name which has the Administrator authority to install.
If any application is running on the computer (including anti-virus program), close it.
Check that "Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 (SP2)" has been installed on the computer before the installation.
Installation steps
1. Double click the installation program "Setup.exe."
2. Select the language and click [OK].
3. Continue the installation following the instructions on screen.

Note
Product key input
The Management Tool installer displays the screen to input the product key during installation.
The installation continues when the input product key is proper.
(2) Items to be installed

Once the Management Tool is installed, the following items are registered on the Start menu and the desk top.
Items to be registered for start menu
Program
Readme
Manual
Items to be registered on desktop
Shortcut of program
Note
The "Readme" of the Start menu can be set not to be installed.
Select "Custom" on the set up type and check the items to be installed.
Whether to create the shortcut of the program registered on the desktop can be selected when installing.
(3) Uninstallation
There are following 2 ways to uninstall the Management Tool.
Use "Add or Remove Programs" ("Add or Remove Programs" for Windows2000, "Programs and Features" for Windows Vista/7).
Execute "Setup.exe" again.
Note
The user information and the data information (Work log, User information, and Technician information) are saved in the
following folder separately from Management Tool.
2000/XP:
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\KONICA MINOLTA\Management Tool\
Vista/7:
C:\Users\Public\Documents\KONICA MINOLTA\Management Tool\
Since those information cannot be deleted by uninstalling, delete them manually.
When reinstalling it without deleting those information, the Management Tool can be started with the information before
uninstallation.
When uninstalling the Management Tool, all Management Tool programs need to be closed.
1.8.3 Starting up of Management Tool

(1) Start
There are following 2 ways to start the Management Tool.
Start from the Start menu of Windows
E -14
Click Windows "Start" button - "All Programs" ("Programs" for Windows2000) - "KONICAMINOLTA" - "Management Tool" - "Management
Tool."
Start from the shortcut icon on the desktop
Double click "KONICA MINOLTA Management Tool" icon created on the desktop.
The login screen appears when it starts.
Note
Whether to create the "KONICA MINOLTA Management Tool" icon or not can be selected when installing.
(2) The login screen

The login screen appears when the Management Tool starts. Select the login mode and enter the required information to log in.
(a) At 1st time of startup
The administrator password has not been set right after the installation. Set the administrator password when the password setting screen
appears after clicking [OK] button.
(b) At normal startup
For the replacement work, log in in the technician mode. Select [Registered technician name] and enter the required information to log in.
Note
The image at the top of the screen can be customized. (Refer to E.1.8.9.(4) Image setting)
E -15
When no technician has been registered, the registered technician name cannot be selected.
For details of registering technician, E.1.8.8.(2) Register technician.
(3) Operation screen
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[1] Menu bar [2] Navigation

[3] Operation area [4] Login user
1. Menu bar
Specify each function of the Management Tool. (Refer to E.1.8.9 Various setting for the software)
2. Navigation
[1] [2]
[1] Path [2] Image

Path
The transition of screens from the top screen is displayed as the path.
Image
The image can be customized. (Refer to: E.1.8.9.(4) Image setting)
3. Login user
The current login user is displayed.
4. Operation area
The operation panel based on the purpose is displayed.
(4) End
There are following 2 ways to exit the Management Tool.
Click [Exit] button on the login screen or the top screen
Select [Exit] from [File] menu
Click [x] (close) button on the upper right corner of the screen
Shut down or log off the computer
1.8.4 Technician mode

The operation procedures when logging in as an registered technician is described below.
To execute this mode, register the technician information in the administrator mode. (Refer to E.1.8.8.(2) Register technician)
E -16
(1) Top screen
When logging in successfully, the top screen is displayed.

To perform unit parts replacement, click "Replacement work" button. (Refer to E.1.8.4.(2) Replacement work)
To check the work log, click "WorkLog" button. (Refer to E.1.8.4.(3) Work log)
To register the customer information, click "RegisterUser" button. (Refer to E.1.8.4.(4) Register user)
To change the password or edit the memo, click "Set personal info" button. (Refer to E.1.8.4.(5) SetPersonal)
Note
The image at the left of the screen can be customized. (Refer to E.1.8.9.(4) Image setting)
(2) Replacement work

Perform unit parts replacement.
(a) Type of replacement

Depending on the machine type, the form and media of data differ.
Management Tool is applied to the following machines.
bizhub PRESS C8000 (Refer to E.1.8.5 bizhub PRESS C8000 replacement procedure)
bizhub PRESS C7000/6000P(Refer to E.1.8.6 bizhub PRESS C7000/6000 replacement procedure)
bizhub PRESS 1250/1250P/1052 (Refer to E.1.8.7 bizhub PRESS 1250/1250P/1052 replacement procedure)
(b) Associating customers

When the device serial number and the user information are properly associated, the user information is displayed on the operation
information automatically.
When not set, " (No User Setting)" is displayed.
To modify the association between the unit read and the user, conduct the following procedures.
Click "Change" to display the user setting screen.
Select the desired user setting and click [OK].
The user setting of the work information is changed.

Note
For details on user registration, refer to E.1.8.4.(4) Register user.
(c) Export the csv format file

The detailed information of the unit currently displayed is exported in CSV format.
1. Specify the location to store the file.
E -17
2. Click [Save].
The CSV file is exported to the specified location.
For details on CSV format, refer to E.1.8.9.(6) Export CSV.
(d) Printing the report

The detailed information of the unit currently displayed can be printed as report.
1. The print dialog is displayed.
2. Click [OK].
The report is printed.
For details on print layout, refer to E.1.8.9.(7) Print Report.
(3) Work log

The work conditions of previous replacement work can be checked.
(a) Procedures to display the work log list

1. Click "Work log" on the top screen.
Or select "Work log" in "Tool" menu.
2. The work log referring method selection screen appears.
To display the work log by selecting the user, click "Select user."
Proceed to step 3.
To display the work log by selecting the technician, click "Select technician."
Proceed to step 4.
To display all the work log, click "All."
Proceed to step 5.
3. The "Select user" screen appears.
E -18
Select the user to check the work log, and click "OK."
Proceed to step 5.
4. The "Select technician" screen appears.
Select the technician to check the work log, and click "OK."
Proceed to step 5.
5. The work log list is displayed.
On the work log list, filtering by conditions or sorting displayed items is available.
Select the work log information to check its detail, export as CSV or print report.
For the display filter, the displayed contents differs depending on the display method selected on the work log reference method in step
2.
When selecting "Select user":
When selecting "Select technician":
Note
The items can be sorted in descending/ascending order by clicking the item name of the work log list. The mark
indicates that the current display is in ascending order. Click it to change in descending order.
E -19
On the work log list screen, the items to be displayed and their display width can be changed via "Set list view". (Refer to
E.1.8.9.(5) Set list view)
Click [Export CSV] to export the work log information currently selected in CSV format. (Refer to E.1.8.9.(6) Export CSV)
Click [Print] to print the report of the work log information currently selected. (Refer to E.1.8.9.(7) Print Report)
(b) Detailed information

The detailed information of the replacement work log selected on the work log list is displayed.
Change the user to be associated or edit the work information memo.
Note
Click [Back] or [Next] to switch the work log displayed.
Click [Export CSV] to export the work log information currently displayed in CSV format. (Refer to E.1.8.9.(6) Export CSV)
Click [Print] to print the report of the work log information currently displayed. (Refer to E.1.8.9.(7) Print Report)
For details on user association, refer to E.1.8.4.(2).(b) Associating customers.
(c) Import
Import the work log which is exported from Management Tool.
1. Specify the storage location of the work log file to import.
2. Click [Open].
3. The password input screen is displayed.
Enter the password set on the work log file when it was exported.
4. Click [OK].
The work log file is imported.
Note
Use one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols for password.
The work log information already exists is not imported.
The invalid work log information is skipped and the import process continues.
The work log exported by other computer also can be imported. However it happens that the work log information is
overlapped.
(d) Export
Export the work log collectively.
E -20
2. Click [Save].
3. The password input screen is displayed.
Set the password on the export file.
4. Click [OK].
The export of the work log starts.
Note
The password set on the export file is required when importing it.
The file format "Work log file" is a format to display the contents on the Management Tool. When the file is stored in other
format, the file is unable to open on the Management Tool.
(4) Register user

Register, edit or delete the user information.
(a) User list

Click [RegisterUser] on the top screen.
Or select "RegisterUser" in "Tool" menu.
Note
The items can be sorted in descending/ascending order by clicking the item name of the user information list. The mark
On the user information list screen, the items to be displayed and their display width can be changed via "Set list view".
(Refer to E.1.8.9.(5) Set list view)
(b) Initial registration

Register the user information.
E -21
1. Click [New] on the user list screen.

2. The registration screen is displayed.
3. Enter "User name."
Use 1 to 64 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
4. Select "Type of business."
5. Enter the following items if necessary.
Enter "User code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Enter "User ID." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Enter "User office location name." Use 0 to 256 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
Enter "User office location code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Enter "Contact person name." Use 0 to 64 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
Enter "Contact person ID no." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Enter "Contact telephone." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Register "Machine list".
Enter "Machine serial number to add." Use 1 to 13 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols. Click "Add" to add it to
"Machine list."
Select and click the serial number to delete from "Machine list".
Enter "Remark."
6. Click [Register].
The entered user information is registered and the next user information can be registered.
Note
Register the serial number of the machine of the user to "Machine list" so that the user information is automatically
associated when reading unit information while in the replacement work.
(c) Edit
Edit a registered user information.
1. Edit the items to be changed.
For entering each items, refer to E.1.8.4.(4).(b) Initial registration.
2. Click [OK].
The edited result is reflected to the user information.
(d) Import
Import the user information which is exported from Management Tool.
1. Specify the storage location of the user information file to import.
2. Click [Open].
The user information file is imported.
Note
The user information already exists is not imported.
(e) Export
Export the user information collectively.
E -22
2. Click [Save].
The export of the user information starts.
Note
The file format "User Information file" is a format to display the contents on the Management Tool. When the file is stored in
other format, the file is unable to open on the Management Tool.
(5) SetPersonal
Change the password of login technician or edit the comment.
(a) Password Change

1. Click "Password change."
The password change screen is displayed. The password can be changed at this time.
2. Click [OK].
The new Password is set.
Note
(6) Serial number setting (bizhub PRESS C8000)

The unit serial number is written in the RFID tag.
Note
When replacing the RFID tag because of such as physical damage, the new RFID tag can be recognized by the unit.
(a) Procedures of the unit serial number setting

1. Select "Unit Serial Number" from "Tool" menu.
When the RFID tag reader is not recognized, the process does not proceed to step 2. Check that the RFID tag reader is correctly
connected.
2. The wizard starts up and the unit serial number input screen is displayed.
Enter the unit serial number and click "Write."
E -23
Note
Serial number setting initializes the RFID tag data.
The initialized data cannot be restored.
3. When the RFID tag write in screen is displayed, touch the RFID tag with the RFID tag reader.
4. When writing is completed, the result screen is displayed.
(7) Intermediate transfer steering sensor information setting (bizhub PRESS C8000)
The initial value of the intermediate transfer steering sensor is written to the RFID tag.
(a) Procedures of the intermediate transfer steering sensor information setting

1. Select "Intermediate transfer steering sensor information setting" from "Tool" menu.
Note
When the RFID tag reader is not recognized, the process does not proceed to step 2. Check that the RFID tag reader is
correctly connected.
2. Wizard is activated and the intermediate transfer steering sensor information input screen appears.
E -24
Input the intermediate transfer steering sensor information and click "Write".
3. When the RFID tag write in screen is displayed, touch the RFID tag with the RFID tag reader.
Note
Touch the RFID tag in which the data of the intermediate transfer unit is saved.
4. When writing is completed, the result screen is displayed.
(8) Option
Set each setting of Management Tool.
E -25
(a) Display a confirmation message when selecting a part to be replaced of the bizhub PRESS C7000/6000,
1250/1250P/1052.
Select whether to display the message to confirm the target unit after selecting the part at the replacement of the bizhub PRESS
C7000/6000, 1250/1250P/1052.
(b) Locate the data file of the bizhub PRESS C7000/6000, 1250/1250P/1052 in the USB memory.
Set the activation mode of the replacement of the bizhub PRESS C7000/6000, 1250/1250P/1052.
When the box is checked, the replacement is activated in USB memory cooperation mode.
When the box is not checked, the replacement is activated in folder cooperation mode.
1.8.5 bizhub PRESS C8000 replacement procedure

1. Click "Replacement work" on the top screen.
Or select "Replacement work" in "Tool" menu.
connected.
2. A screen to select machine type appears.
Select "bizhub PRESS C8000" and click [OK] button.

Proceed to step 3.
connected.
3. When the unit read screen is displayed, touch the RFID tag with the RFID tag reader.
4. When read successfully, the unit information screen is displayed.

The units read are listed on the left of the screen as buttons.
E -26
5. Select the parts to reset the counted value from the unit information read.
Note
When selecting the intermediate transfer belt of the intermediate transfer unit, the intermediate transfer belt information
screen is displayed.
Be sure to input the reflectance value which is written on the belt.
6. Click "Reset count".

When the count reset screen is displayed, touch the RFID tag with the RFID tag reader.
E -27
7. When count reset is done successfully, the unit information screen is updated.
8. When canceling the count reset, Click "Undo reset count."

When the canceling count reset screen is displayed, touch the RFID tag with the RFID tag reader. The count information returns to the
condition when it was read.
9. To read information of another unit, click "Read another."

Return to step3.
Note
Information of up to 10 units can be read at a time of each replacement work.
When reading information of more than 10 units, exit the replacement work once and select "Replacement work " on the top
screen again.
While in replacement work, the Management Tool cannot be exited.
To exit the Management Tool, exit the replacement work.
1.8.6 bizhub PRESS C7000/6000 replacement procedure

Note
Depending on the saving destination of the cooperated counter data, there are 2 modes for the replacement on the bizhub PRESS
C7000/6000.
USB cooperation mode:
Execute the counter reset directly to the counter data that is read from the main body to the USB memory with the "Save to
External Memory" of ORU-M.
Folder cooperation mode:
Move the counter data read from the main body to the USB memory to the folder of the client PC once and execute the counter
reset to the counter data in the folder with the "Save to External Memory" of ORU-M.
It is activated in the mode of the previous replacement, but the mode can be selected with "Option" (Refer to E.1.8.4.(8) Option).
(Default is USB cooperation mode.)
E -28
Select "bizhub PRESS C7000/6000" and click [OK] button.

Proceed to step 3.
Note
When it is activated in the USB cooperation mode and the USB memory in which the data file is saved cannot be recognized,
the following warning appears. Select [Yes (Y)] to activate in the folder cooperation mode.
3. Once the reading the data file of the USB memory or the folder completes, the writing screen appears. The read files are shown in a list on
the center of the screen.
Note
When it is activated in the folder cooperation mode, it cooperates with the folder of the previous replacement.
4. Select the data file which includes the unit to be replaced from the read data files and click "Select parts".
E -29
Note
The unit with "blank" is the target unit of the replacement.
The display of the unit column shows the condition of the unit.
Blank:
Unit whose part information is exported from the device (target to replace)
Completed editing:
Unit whose part to be reset the count has been selected, or whose unit serial number has been set
Already written.:
Unit whose part to be reset the count has been written in the data file
Already imported the device.:
Unit whose part information has been imported to the device
For the unit with "Already imported the device." on the column, the part to be reset the count cannot be selected.
5. Once the reading of unit completes, the part selection screen appears.
6. Select the unit to replace, select the part to reset the count, and then click "Back to writing screen".
On the parts selecting screen, the unit serial number (alphanumeric characters in 16-digit) can be input.
Blank is also available when the serial number is not needed.
Conduct the same operation to all units to be replaced.

Note
Writing to data file is not executed by clicking the "Back to writing screen" on the parts selecting screen. Writing to the data
file is executed on the writing screen. For details, refer to the steps 7 and more.
E -30
The input unit serial number is reflected when you return to the writing screen and write the data file. The display is not
updated during inputting and editing the number. The serial number displayed on the button on the left of the screen and the
unit/machine information shows the old information before inputting the number.
7. Writing screen appears.

Confirm that the unit with part selected is "Completed editing".
8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 to all data files which include the unit to be replaced.
9. Click "Write" button.
Note
Click "Reference" button of the writing screen and select the folder to switch to the folder cooperate mode.
In the next replacement, it is activated in the mode of the previous replacement.
This mode can be switched with "Option" (Refer to E.1.8.4.(8) Option).
10. A writing confirmation message appears and "Completed editing" unit is written in the data file of the USB memory or the PC folder. Then,
the replacement completes.
In the USB cooperate mode, once the replacement completes, the USB memory can be removed safely.
* Pop-up screen in the USB cooperation mode
* Pop-up screen in the folder cooperation mode
E -31
Note
Be sure not to disconnect the USB memory until the writing completes since it takes time to complete writing to the USB
memory in the USB cooperation mode.
When the USB memory failed to be removed safely, writing to data file may not complete properly. Confirm that no other
program uses the USB memory and write to the data file again.
In the folder cooperate mode, be careful not to mistake the import data when cooperating with the C7000/6000 main body.
1.8.7 bizhub PRESS 1250/1250P/1052 replacement procedure

Note
Depending on the destination of the cooperated counter data, there are 2 modes for the replacement on the bizhub PRESS
1250/1250P/1052.
USB cooperation mode:
Execute the counter reset directly to the counter data read from the main body to the USB memory with the "Save to External
Memory" of ORU-M .
Folder cooperation mode:
Move the counter data read from the main body to the USB memory to the folder of the client PC once and execute the counter
reset to the counter data in the folder with the "Save to External Memory" of ORU-M .
It is activated in the mode of the previous replacement, but the mode can be selected with "Option" (Refer to E.1.8.4.(8) Option).
(Default is USB cooperation mode.)
Select "bizhub PRESS 1250/1250P/1052" and click [OK] button.

Proceed to step 3.
Note
When it is activated in the USB cooperation mode and the USB memory in which the data file is saved cannot be recognized,
the following warning appears. Select [Yes (Y)] to activate in the folder cooperation mode.
3. Once the reading the data file of the USB memory or the folder completes, the writing screen appears. The read files are shown in a list on
the upper in the center of the screen. Also the unit information of the data files selected in the data file list is shown in a list on the lower in
the center of the screen.
Note
When it is activated in the folder cooperation mode, it cooperates with the folder of the previous replacement.
4. Select the data file which includes the unit to be replaced from the read data files and click "Select parts".
E -32
Note
The data file with "Parts for replacement" on the unit column has the target unit of the replacement (the part whose count to
be reset).
The display of the unit column shows the condition of the all units which are stored in the data file.
Blank:
Data file which has the unit whose part information has been exported from the device, or the unit which has been written.
Although the target unit of the replacement does not exist, the part whose count to be reset can be selected, and the unit
serial number can be set.
Parts for replacement:
Data file which has the target unit of the replacement in the unit whose part information has been exported from the
device, or in the unit which has been written. The unit whose count to be reset can be selected, and the unit serial number
can be set.
Unit includes parts which was replaced:
Data file which has the unit whose part to be reset the count has been selected, or whose unit serial number has been set.
Data File which has the all units whose part information are imported to the device.
The unit with "blank" on the status column of the unit information list is the target unit of the replacement.
The display of the status column shows the condition of the unit.
Blank:
Unit whose part information is exported from the device (target to replace)
Completed editing:
Unit whose part to be reset the count has been selected, or whose unit serial number has been set
Already written.:
Unit whose part to be reset the count has been written in the data file
Unit whose part information has been imported to the device
For the unit with "Already imported the device." on the status column of the unit information list, the part whose count to be
reset cannot be selected.
5. Once the reading of unit completes, the part selection screen appears.
E -33
6. Select the unit to replace, select the part to reset the count, and then click "Back to writing screen".
On the parts selecting screen, the unit serial number (alphanumeric characters in 16-digit) can be input.
Blank is also available when the serial number is not needed.
Conduct the same operation to all units to be replaced.

Note
Writing to data file is not executed by clicking the "Back to writing screen" on the parts selecting screen. Writing to the data
file is executed on the writing screen. For details, refer to the steps 7 and more.
The input unit serial number is reflected when you return to the writing screen and write the data file. The display is not
updated during inputting and editing the number. The serial number displayed on the button on the left of the screen and the
unit/machine information shows the old information before inputting the number.
7. Writing screen appears.

Check " Unit includes parts which was replaced " on the unit column of the data file whose parts has been selected on the data file list.Also,
check "Completed editing" with the unit whose parts has been selected on the unit information list.
E -34
8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 to all data files which include the unit to be replaced.
9. Click "Write" button.
Note
Click "Reference" button of the writing screen and select the folder to switch to the folder cooperate mode.
In the next replacement, it is activated in the mode of the previous replacement.
This mode can be switched with "Option" (Refer to E.1.8.4.(8) Option).
10. A writing confirmation message appears and the unit with "Completed editing" on the unit information list is written in the data file of the USB
memory or the PC folder. Then, the replacement completes.
In the USB cooperate mode, once the replacement completes, the USB memory can be removed safely.
* Pop-up screen in the USB cooperation mode
* Pop-up screen in the folder cooperation mode
Note
Be sure not to disconnect the USB memory until the writing completes since it takes time to complete writing to the USB
memory in the USB cooperation mode.
When the USB memory failed to be removed safely, writing to data file may not complete properly. Confirm that no other
program uses the USB memory and write to the data file again.
In the folder cooperate mode, be careful not to mistake the import data when cooperating with the 1250/1250P/1052 main body.
E -35
1.8.8 Administrator mode

Set the required information of the Management Tool.
(1) Top screen
When logging in successfully, the top screen is displayed.

To check the work log, click "WorkLog" button. (Refer to E.1.8.8.(3) Administrator Setting)
To register the customer information, click "RegisterUser" button. (Refer to E.1.8.4.(4) Register user)
To register a technician, click "RegisterTech" button. (Refer to E.1.8.8.(2) Register technician)
To change the administrator password, click "Admin.setting" button. (Refer to E.1.8.8.(3) Administrator Setting)
(2) Register technician

Register, edit or delete the technician information.
(a) Technician list

Click [RegisterTech] on the top screen.
Or select "RegisterTech" in "Tool" menu.
Note
The items can be sorted in descending/ascending order by clicking the item name of the technician information list. The mark
On the technician information list screen, the items to be displayed and their display width can be changed via "Set View".
(Refer to E.1.8.9.(5) Set list view)
(b) Initial registration

Register a new technician information.
The items with "*" must be filled.
E -36
1. Enter "Technician name."

2. Enter "Password" and "Password (confirmation)."
3. Enter "Country."
4. Enter "Company name."
5. Enter the following items if necessary.
Enter "Technician code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Enter "Company code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Enter "Service office name." Use 0 to 256 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
Enter "Service office code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
"Generate a password"
By clicking "Generate a password", a password is generated automatically.
Click "Set password" to set the password automatically generated to the "Password" and "Password (confirmation)." Click "Copy" to
copy the password automatically generated to the clipboard.
6. Click [Register].
The entered technician information is registered and the next technician information can be registered.
Note
Registration No. is determined automatically.
(c) Edit
Edit a registered technician information.
1. Edit the items to be changed.

Edit "Technician name." Use 1 to 64 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
Edit "Technician code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Edit "Country." Use 1 to 128 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
Edit "Company." Use 1 to 256 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
Edit "Company code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Edit "Service office name." Use 0 to 256 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
Edit "Service office code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
2. Click [OK].
The edited result is reflected to the technician information.
(d) Import
Import the technician information which is exported from Management Tool.
1. Specify the storage location of the technician information file to import.
E -37
2. Click [Open].
The technician information file is imported.
Note
The technician information already exists is not imported.
(e) Export
Export the technician information collectively.
2. Click [Save].
The export of the technician information starts.
Note
The file format "Technician Information file" is a format to display the contents on the Management Tool. When the file is
stored in other format, the file is unable to open on the Management Tool.
(3) Administrator Setting

Change the administrator password.
1. Enter the current password and the new password.

2. Click [OK].
The new Password is set.
Note
1.8.9 Various setting for the software

(1) File menu
(a) Import
Work log
Select "Work log" from "Import" in the "File" menu to load the work log which has been exported with the Management Tool. (Refer to E.
1.8.4.(3).(c) Import)
Note
It is available only from the top screen or the Work log screen.
User information
Select "User information" from "Import" in the "File" menu to load the user information which has been exported with the Management
Tool. (Refer to E.1.8.4.(4).(d) Import)
E -38
Note
It is available only from the top screen or the Register user screen.
Technician information
Select "Technician information" from "Import" in the "File" menu to load the technician information which has been exported with the
Management Tool. (Refer to E.1.8.8.(2).(d) Import)
Note
This menu is displayed when logging in as an administrator.
It is available only from the top screen or the Technician information screen.
(b) Export
Work log
Select "Work log" from "Export" in the "File" menu to store the collective work log as a file. (Refer to E.1.8.4.(3).(d) Export)
Note
It is available only from the top screen or the Work log screen.
User information
Select "User information" from "Export" in the "File" menu to store the collective user information as a file. (Refer to E.1.8.4.(4).(e)
Export)
Note
It is available only from the top screen or the Register user screen.
Technician information
Select "Technician information" from "Export" in the "File" menu to store the collective user information as a file. (Refer to E.1.8.8.(2).(e)
Export)
Note
It is available only from the top screen or the Register technician screen.
(2) Tool menu

The functions in "Tool" are available only from the top screen.
(a) Replacement work

Select "Replacement work" in "Tool" menu to perform unit parts replacement. (Refer to E.1.8.4.(2) Replacement work)
Note
This menu is displayed when logging in to the technician mode.
(b) Work log

Select "Work log" from "Tool" to check the work log. (Refer to E.1.8.4.(3) Work log)
(c) Register user

Select "Register user" in "Tool" menu to check, register, edit, or delete user information. (Refer to E.1.8.4.(4) Register user)
(d) SetPersonal
Select "Set personal info" in "Tool" menu to change the password of login technician or edit comments. (Refer to E.1.8.4.(5) SetPersonal)
Note
(e) Unit Serial Number Setting

Select "Unit Serial Number" from "Tool" menu to write the unit serial number in the RFID tag. (Refer to E.1.8.4.(6) Serial number setting
(bizhub PRESS C8000))
Note
(f) Intermediate transfer steering sensor information setting

The default value of the intermediate transfer steering sensor can be written in the RFID tag by selecting "Intermediate transfer steering
sensor information setting" from "Tool" menu. (Refer to E.1.8.4.(7) Intermediate transfer steering sensor information setting (bizhub PRESS
C8000))
Note
(g) Option
Each item of Management Tool can be set by selecting "Option" from "Tool" menu. (Refer to E.1.8.4.(8) Option)
Note
(h) Register technician

Select "Register technician" in "Tool" menu to check, register, edit, or delete technician information. (Refer to E.1.8.8.(2) Register
technician)
Note
E -39
(i) Administrator Setting

Select "Administrator Setting" in "Tool" menu to change the password of administrator. (Refer to E.1.8.8.(3) Administrator Setting)
Note
(3) Help menu

(a) Version
Select "Version" in the "Help" menu to display version information of the Management Tool.
Note
The image at the top of the screen can be customized. (Refer to E.1.8.9.(4) Image setting)
(4) Image setting

(a) Navigation
"70 x 40 (pixels)" image display area of is provided in the navigation view area. An image to be displayed here can be customized by users.
Item Description
Supported file type GIF, JPG, JPEG, BMP, PNG
Image size Image size is arbitrary. *1
Display method Custom image to be displayed is enlarged or reduced to the area size (70 x 40).
File Name Navigation. (extension*2)
Stored location (Install directory)\Images
Remark When a file exists, a custom image is displayed. *3
*1 70 x 40 (pixels) size is recommended.
*2 For extension, refer to "Supported file type."
When a file does not exist, a default image shown above is displayed.
(b) Log in screen

"480 x 90 (pixels)" image display area of is provided on the login screen.
An image to be displayed here can be customized by users.
Item Description
File Name Login.(extension*2)
(c) Top screen

"350 x 365 (pixels)*1" image display area of is provided on the login screen (when the main window size is 800 x 600*2). An image to be
displayed here can be customized by users.
E -40
Item Description
File Name TopMenu.(extension*3)
*2 Image size (350 x 365) is default value. The image is displayed by enlarged or reduced in accordance with the window size.
(d) Version information screen

"460 x 150 (pixels)" image display area of is provided on the version information screen.
An image to be displayed here can be customized by users.
Item Description
File Name Version.(extension*2)
(5) Set list view

The items to be displayed and the display width can be changed.
1. Click [Set list view].
2. The set list view screen is displayed.
The items to be displayed differs among screens.
The figure below is the work log set list view screen.
E -41
3. Set show/hide of items by checking in the list.

Items with check are displayed.
The setting can be changed by clicking [Show]/[Hide] on the right of the screen.
4. Set other conditions if necessary.
Selected column width: Specify the display width by entering desired value. It can be specified by 0 to 999.
[Top] :Item display order is moved to top.
[Bottom] :Item display order is moved to bottom.
5. Click [OK].
The set list view is updated.
(6) Export CSV

The format of the CSV file exported by the Management Tool is as follows.
Output items
Common information (Replacement work information)
No Item Description
1 User name The user name associated to replacement work is exported.
2 Type of business (user) The type of business associated to replacement work is exported.
3 User code The user code associated to replacement work is exported.
4 User ID The user ID associated to replacement work is exported.
5 User office location name (user) The user office location name associated to replacement work is exported.
6 User office location code (user) The user office location code associated to replacement work is exported.
7 Contact person name (user) The contact person name associated to replacement work is exported.
8 Contact person ID no. (user) The contact person ID no. associated to replacement work is exported.
9 Contact telephone (user) The contact telephone associated to replacement work is exported.
10 Technician name The name of the technician who performed replacement work is exported.
11 Technician code The code of the technician who performed replacement work is exported.
12 Country (technician) The country of the technician who performed replacement work is exported.
The company name of the technician who performed replacement work is
13 Company name (technician)
exported.
The company code of the technician who performed replacement work is
14 Company code (technician)
exported.
The service office name of the technician who performed replacement work is
15 Service office name (technician)
exported.
The service office code of the technician who performed replacement work is
16 Service office code (technician)
exported.
17 Machine name Export the device name.
18 Main Body Serial Number The serial number of the main body is exported.
19 Unit type The unit type is exported.
20 Unit Serial Number The serial number of the unit is exported.
21 Replacement Count The number of times of unit replacement is exported.
22 Unit removal date The date of unit removal is exported.
23 Count read date The date when the unit RFID tag is read is exported.
24 Count reset date The date when the count is reset is exported.
25 The last undo reset date The last date when undoing reset is exported.
26 Number of parts The number of parts in the unit is exported.
Part Information (for each part)
27 No Assigned from 1 automatically.
28 Replace The replaced parts are outputted as "Changed."
E -42
29 Parts name The parts name is exported.

30 Parts No. The parts number is exported.
31 Quantity The quantity of parts is exported.
32 Count The count value of parts is exported.
33 Life cycle The life cycle value of parts is exported.
When the unit type is "intermediate transfer unit" and the parts is "intermediate
34 Supplement 1 transfer belt" with count reset, "intermediate transfer belt characteristic value
(front)" is exported.
When the unit type is "intermediate transfer unit" and the parts is "intermediate
35 Supplement 2 transfer belt" with count reset, "intermediate transfer belt characteristic value
(rear)" is exported.
Note
Break character is "," (comma).
Each item is enclosed in " " (double quotation marks).
When no data exist, only " " (double quotation marks) is outputted.
File format
The header (item name) is created on first row of the file.
For the subsequent rows, each parts information is outputted per one line.
For example, when the unit has 15 parts in it, 15 rows are outputted per replacement work.
1st row Header row (exports the item name)
2nd row Replacement work 1 - part (1)
3rd row Replacement work 2 - part (2)

4th row Replacement work 3 - part (3) N of replaced parts
per replacement work
5th row Replacement work 4 - part (4)
(7) Print Report

Details on the replacement work can be printed as replacement report.
Print layout
E -43
1.8.10 Error message list

An error message may appear while Management Tool is operating.
The description of error and its error code are displayed.
The error codes and countermeasures are shown below. Follow the countermeasures shown below.
Error code Measure taken
400-402, 500, 501, 600, 700, 2005-2008, Retry.
2030-2044, 2100-2109, 2130-2140, 2151-2160,
2170-2187, 2194-2196, 2200-2209, 2230-2240,
2251-2260, 2270-2280, 2290-2297, 2303-2329,
2331-2343, 2346-2358, 2362, 2363, 2367,
2405, 2409, 2411, 2500-2509, 2516, 2517,
2520-2523, 2762-2766, 2781-2813, 3000-3006,
3008-3014, 3100, 3101
2402, 2403, 2410, 2411, 5001-5010, 5200-5208 Check the RFID tag and retry.
Note
When the same error occurs even after retrying, remove the RFID tag reader/writer
from a computer once and insert it again, then reboot the Management Tool.
When the same error still occurs, contact an administrator.
2400, 2406-2408, 5100-5106 Check whether the RFID tag reader/writer is connected to a computer correctly.
E -44
102, 111-113, 800-802, 854, 855, 860-868, Reinstall the Management Tool.
880-884, 2090-2096, 2600-2611, 2622-2633,
2636-2644, 2710-2720, 3000-3006
2100-2121, 2151-2160, 2170-2180, 2200-2221, The file is not supported.
2251-2260, 2270-2280, 2303-2319, 2322-2329,
2331-2345, 2359, 2731, 2760, 2761
100 Non-compliant OS is used.
803-808, 914, 915, 950, 951, 2401, 2404, Reboot the Management Tool.
2721-2723, 2730, 2732-2759, 2767-2775, 5102,
5201
2510-2515 Check the printing environment.
1.9 Acquisition of the controller log

1.9.1 Outline
When there occurs an abnormal condition with respect to the image controller, acquisition of the controller log allows you to expect a location
where an error has occurred.
USB memory is used for this acquisition. There are the following two procedures for log acquisition: "Controller defective log" and "Controller
capture."
(1) Acquisition of the controller defective log

It is possible to collect log data in the USB memory just before a defective condition occurs.
Used when no defective condition recurs or it occurs less frequently.
Note
The acquisition of print data is restricted only to 10 jobs just before the USB memory is inserted with [Spool setting] set to
[Enable].
(2) Acquisition of the controller capture

Jobs can be collected after the USB memory is connected. This is used when a defective condition can be reproduced easily.
1.9.2 Preparation
(1) USB memory
USB memory with a form (thin) that can be connected to the service port (Serial TypeA) provided on the IC system control board (SCB).
USB memory that has been formatted in FAT or FAT 32 form.
USB memory with a capacity larger than 64 Mbyte, when used for the acquisition of defective log.
When used for capture acquisition, the larger the capacity of the USB memory, the greater the number of data that can be obtained.
(The number of data that can be obtained depends on the print size of the original and the capacity of the USB memory. )
(2) Key files for log acquisition

Key file for acquisition of the defective log of the controller: showalllog
Key file for acquisition of the controller capture: getcapture
Note
Obtain a key file from KMBT.
Be sure to store only one of "showalllog" or "getcapture" key file in the USB memory.
If both of the key files are stored in the USB memory, the defective log/capture is not acquired properly.
(3) Setting of the controller

Make settings of [MACHINE]-[Controller]-[05 Spool Print Jobs in HDD before RIP] --> "Enable" on the operation panel of the main body.
When the spool setting is changed, be sure to turn off and on the main power switch (SW1).
1.9.3 Procedure for acquisition

(1) Procedure of acquisition of the controller defective log
1. Store the key file for acquisition of the controller defective log (showalllog) in the USB memory with empty space.
Note
A key file cannot be created. So, be sure to obtain one from KMBT.
2. Connect the USB memory to the service USB port (Serial Type A).
3. Wait until the ''Machine condition'' key or ''Controller setting'' key of the panel display stops blinking.
Also, wait until the access lamp of the USB memory stops flashing.
The data acquisition normally completes in about 15 seconds after the lamp stops flashing.
Note
While the defective log is being collected, ''Machine condition'' key or ''Controller setting'' key normally keeps blinking, but it
does not blink when there is a communication error between the controller and the main body.
When there occurs a communication error, check the access lamp of the USB memory.
4. Check to see if the name of a log file obtained is shown in the upper left section of the screen when the following buttons are pressed
down on the operation panel: [Service Mode]-[Controller Setting]-[99 log file]. (IPLog_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.log)
Note
You cannot check when there occurs a communication error between the controller and the main body.
5. Disconnect the USB memory to the service port (Serial Type A) provided on the IC system control board (SCB).
E -45
6. Check to see if there is an IPLog_yyyymmddhhmmss.log file obtained on the day in the USB memory, and then copy all the files stored to
the PC.
Files to be obtained
IPLog_yyyymmddhhmmss.log: Controller log
XXXXX.spl: Print data
Note
Several files other than the above are stored depending on the condition.
Be sure to turn the main power switch (SW1) OFF and ON after removing the USB memory from the service port.
If it is not turned OFF and ON, there will be no guarantee for its proper operation after the log acquisition is completed.
7. Compress the files copied to the PC to send to KMBT.
(2) Procedure of acquisition of the controller capture

1. Obtain a key file for acquisition of controller capture from KMBT.
Create a key file in the other way. (A key file can be created from a Notepad.)
*Key file format: The <> section is edited.
HDDorUSB,<type> <type>=USB: Saved in the USB memory inserted.
MIO,<switch>,<count> <switch>=ON: Obtained
<switch>=OFF: Not obtained
<count>=1 to : Number of files obtained
(Overwritten with a number specified and deleted
in the order of the older files when out of
memory.)
NET,<switch>,<count> Same as above
PDL,<switch>,<count> Same as above
*MIO: Data received from the network
*NET: Data analyzed with PrintJobAnalyzer
*PDL: Data analyzed with PJLParser
Example)
HDDorUSB, USB
MIO, ON, 30 (In the case of collecting 30)
2. Copy a key file for acquisition of an edited controller capture (getcapture) in the USB memory with empty space.
3. Connect the USB memory to the service port (Serial Type A) provided on the IC system control board (SCB).
4. About after waiting for 20 seconds, check to see if the access lamp of the USB memory stops flashing.
5. Continue printing until there occurs any problems you want to obtain.
Note
Print speed gets slower than usual according to the contents of acquisition (or the contents of the key file).
6. Check to see if the access lamp of the USB memory stops flashing, and then remove the USB memory from the service port (Serial Type
A) provided on the IC system control board (SCB).
7. Check to see if there are files obtained on the day in the USB memory, and then copy all the files stored to the PC.
Files to be obtained with switch=ON
MIO_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.txt
NET_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.txt
PDL_ yyyymmdd_hhmmss.txt
8. Compress the files copied to the PC to send to KMBT.
E -46
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 1. MAINTENANCE ITEM
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE
1. MAINTENANCE ITEM
1.1 bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, bizhub PRO C6000L
1.1.1 Replacing procedure of the periodical replacement parts
Note
For the replacement procedure of the periodically replaced parts, refer to F.5 Periodical maintenance procedure bizhub PRESS
C7000/C7000P/C6000, bizhub PRO C6000L.
1.1.2 Periodic maintenance 1 (Every 50,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C6000L))

No. Unit classification Description Quan Implementation classification Materials
tity Cleani Check Lubric Repla Tools used
ng ation ce
1 Toner collection Toner collect box 1 The sensor detects its full
section A03UR702## automatically
1.1.3 Periodic maintenance 2 (Every 160,000 prints (C6000/C6000L))

ng ation ce
1 Photo conductor Charging corona /Y 1 Actual replacement cycle: 70
section A1DUR713## hours charging
Charging corona /M 1 Execute the cleaning when it is
A1DUR713## dirty.
Charging corona /C 1
A1DUR713##
Charging corona /K 1
A1DUR713##

ng ation ce
1 Photo conductor Drum cartridge /Y 1 Replace it once for every
section DU-104 180,000 prints, drum drive
Drum cartridge /M 1 distance 102km or the lubricant
DU-104 apply roller drive distance
130km, whichever is earlier
Drum cartridge /C 1
DU-104
Drum cartridge /K 1
DU-104
1.1.5 Periodic maintenance 2 (Every 200,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc))

ng ation ce
1 External section Dust proof glass /Y, /M, /C, /K Hydro-wipe
2 Photo conductor Charging corona /Y 1 Actual replacement cycle: 70
section A1DUR713## hours charging
Charging corona /M 1 Execute the cleaning when it is
A1DUR713## dirty.
Charging corona /C 1
A1DUR713##
Charging corona /K 1
A1DUR713##
3 Duplex section ADU conveyance rollers Cleaning pad/isopropyl alcohol
4 Photo conductor Charging dust proof filter
section
5 Registration section Registration cleaning sheet Cleaning pad/isopropyl alcohol
6 Paper feed section Paper feed roller rubber
Separation roller rubber
Pick-up roller
7 Vertical conveyance Intermediate conveyance roller /1
section
F -1
8 Scanner section Scanner unit (glass, mirror) (C7000 () Hydro-wipe

only)
9 Bypass paper feed Paper feed roller rubber Cleaning pad/isopropyl alcohol
section Separation roller rubber
MB-504
Pick-up roller
10 Output tray section Paper holding roller 2
OT-502 65AA4849##
Exit roller 1
A0438907##
Paper exit driven roller /2 4
65AA4818##

ng ation ce
1 Photo conductor Drum cartridge /Y 1 Replace it once for every
section DU-104 180,000 prints, drum drive
Drum cartridge /M 1 distance 102km or the lubricant
DU-104 apply roller drive distance
Drum cartridge /C 1
DU-104
Drum cartridge /K 1
DU-104

ng ation ce
1 External section Dust proof glass /Y, /M, /C, /K Hydro-wipe
2 Duplex section ADU conveyance rollers Cleaning pad/isopropyl alcohol
3 Photo conductor Charging dust proof filter
section
4 Registration section Registration Cleaning Sheet Cleaning pad/isopropyl alcohol
5 Paper feed section Paper feed roller rubber
Separation roller rubber
Pick-up roller
6 Vertical conveyance Intermediate conveyance roller /1
section
7 Scanner section Scanner unit (glass, mirror) () Hydro-wipe
8 Bypass paper feed Paper feed roller rubber Cleaning pad/isopropyl alcohol
section Separation roller rubber
MB-504
Pick-up roller
9 Output tray section Paper holding roller 2
OT-502 65AA4849##
Exit roller 1
A0438907##
Paper exit driven roller /2 4
65AA4818##
1.1.8 Periodic maintenance 4 (Every 340,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc))/Periodic maintenance 5 (Every 300,000
prints (C6000/C6000L))
ng ation ce
1 Developing section Developer /Y 340,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/
DV610Y C70hc)/300,000 prints (C6000/
Developer /M C6000L) or the developing roller
DV610M (C7000/C7000P/C6000/ drive distance 200km, whichever
C6000L) is earlier
DV611M (C70hc)
F -2
Developer /C
DV610C (C7000/C7000P/C6000/
C6000L)
DV611C (C70hc)
Developer /K
DV610K
Developing unit /Y Hydro-wipe/isopropyl alcohol
Developing unit /M
Developing unit /C
Developing unit /K
1.1.9 Periodic maintenance 5 (Every 350,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc))/Periodic maintenance 5 (Every 300,000
prints (C6000/C6000L))
ng ation ce
1 Fusing section Fusing separation plate assy 1
A1DUR74H##
2 Intermediate transfer Belt drive roller Hydro-wipe/isopropyl alcohol
section 1st transfer pressure roller /Y, /M, /
C, /K
Tension roller
Belt driven roller /Up (3 rollers)
Belt driven roller /Lw
Intermediate transfer belt 1
A03U5042##
Toner collection sheet 1
A1DUR71C##
Transfer belt cleaning blade 1 350,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/
A03U5530## C70hc)/300,000 prints (C6000/
C6000L) or the transfer belt
cleaning blade drive distance
1st transfer roller /Y 1
A03U5012##
1st transfer roller /M 1
A03U5012##
1st transfer roller /C 1
A03U5012##
1st transfer roller /K 1
A03U5004##
2nd transfer roller /Up 1
65AA2611##
2nd transfer roller /Lw 1
65AA4501##
Separation discharging plate assy 1
A1DUR738##

ng ation ce
Paper feed roller rubber /1, /2, /3 3 Actual replacement cycle:
25SA4096## 125,000 feeds
1 Paper feed section
Separation roller rubber /1, /2, /3 3
25SA4096##
Reverse de-curler roller 1
2 Reverse/exit section A03U8605##
Reverse gate Cleaning pad/isopropyl alcohol

ng ation ce
1 Fusing section Fusing paper exit roller /Lw Cleaning pad/isopropyl alcohol
F -3
Fusing paper exit roller /Up 2

A03U7225##
Fusing Belt 1
A03U7205##
Fusing roller /Lw 1 Multemp FF-RM
A03U7203##
Fusing bearing /Up
Fusing bearing /Lw 2
26NA5371##
Fusing bearing /2
Heat insulating sleeve /Up
Heat insulating sleeve /Lw 2
A03U7227##
Fusing drive gear /O 1
A03U8095##
Fusing drive gear /B
Fusing paper exit roller /1
Fusing paper exit roller /2

ng ation ce
1 External section Filter box 1
A1DUR703##
Dust proof filter on rear side 1 Replace the dust proof filter on
A1DUR707## rear side and the developing
Developing dust proof filter 1 dust proof filter at the same time
A1DUR709##
2 Photo conductor Charging dust proof filter 1
section A1DUR711##
3 Fusing section Fusing limiter 1
65AA5365##
Fusing regulating gear /A 1 Multemp FF-RM
65AA7747##
4 Registration section Registration cleaning sheet assy 1
A1DUR73B##

ng ation ce
1 External section Filter box 1
A1DUR703##
Dust proof filter on rear side 1 Replace the dust proof filter on
A1DUR707## rear side and the developing
Developing dust proof filter 1 dust proof filter at the same time
A1DUR709##
2 Photo conductor Charging dust proof filter 1
section A1DUR711##
3 Fusing section Fusing limiter 1
65AA5365##
Fusing regulating gear /A 1 Multemp FF-RM
65AA7747##
4 Intermediate transfer Transfer belt cleaning unit 1
section A1DUR71B##
Transfer belt separation claw 3
A1DUR719##
5 Registration section Registration cleaning sheet assy 1
A1DUR73B##

No. Unit Description Quantity Implementation classification Materials
classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replace Tools used
F -4
1 Intermediate Transfer belt cleaning unit 1

transfer A1DUR71B##
section Transfer belt separation claw 3
A1DUR719##

ng ation ce
1 Developing section Developing unit /Y 1 Replace it once for every
A1DUR70X## 900,000 prints or the developing
Developing unit /M 1 roller drive distance 600km,
A1DUR70X## whichever is earlier
Developing unit /C 1
A1DUR74K##
Developing unit /K 1
A1DUR72S##
2 Intermediate transfer 2nd transfer earth plate assy 1
section A1DUR737##

ng ation ce
1 Fusing section Fusing roller /1 1
A03U7201##
Fusing roller /2 1
A03U7202##
Fusing bearing /Up 2
A1UD7235##
Fusing bearing /2 2
56UA7507##
Belt regulating sleeve 2
A03U7250##
Heat insulating sleeve /Up 2
A03U7295##
Fusing drive gear /B 1 Multemp FF-RM
A03U8082##
Fusing drive gear /M 2 Multemp FF-RM
A03U8093##
1.1.17 Periodic maintenance 11 (Every 1,000,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C6000L))

ng ation ce
1 Reverse/exit section Paper exit de-curler roller 1
A03U8926##
Paper exit drive gear 1
A03U9095##
Guide plate /Up Cleaning pad/isopropyl alcohol
1.1.18 Periodic maintenance 12 (Every 1,020,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc))

ng ation ce
1 Developing section Developing unit /Y 1 Replace it once for every
A1DUR70X## 1,020,000 prints or the
Developing unit /M 1 developing roller drive distance
A1DUR70X## 600km, whichever is earlier
Developing unit /C 1
A1DUR74K##
Developing unit /K 1
A1DUR72S##
F -5
1.1.19 Periodic maintenance 13 (Every 1,050,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc))

ng ation ce
1 Intermediate transfer 2nd transfer earth plate assy 1
section A1DUR737##
1.1.20 Periodic maintenance 14 (Every 1,400,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc))/Periodic maintenance 12 (Every

1,400,000 prints (C6000/C6000L))
ng ation ce
1 Intermediate transfer Belt separation claw solenoid 1
section 26NA8251##
2 Registration section Registration roller 1
A1DUR73A##
3 Bypass paper feed Paper feed roller rubber /BP 1 Actual replacement cycle:
section 25SA4096## 125,000 feeds
MB-504 Separation roller rubber /BP 1
25SA4096##

1,800,000 prints (C6000/C6000L))
ng ation ce
1 Fusing section Fusing duct assy 1
A1DUR721##

2,000,000 prints (C6000/C6000L))
ng ation ce
1 Duplex section Intermediate conveyance clutch /2 1
56AA8201##
Intermediate conveyance clutch /3 1
56AA8201##
2 Vertical conveyance Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 1
section 56AA8201##

2,400,000 prints (C6000/C6000L))
ng ation ce
1 Fusing section Fusing lamp assy /Up 1
A1DUM31A## (Japan)
A1DUM31E## (North America)
A1DUM31F## (Europe)
Fusing temperature sensor assy /Up 1
(edge)
A1DUR720##
Fusing temperature sensor assy /Lw 1
(edge)
A1DUR71W##
2 Paper feed section Pick-up roller 3 Actual replacement cycle:
A1DUR71J## 800,000 feeds

2,700,000 prints (C6000/C6000L))
ng ation ce
F -6
1 Fusing section Fusing heater lamp /4 1

A03UM32A## (Japan)
A03UM32E## (North America)
A03UM32F## (Europe)

3,000,000 prints (C6000/C6000L))
ng ation ce
1 Intermediate transfer Transfer Roller Bearing 8
section 65AA2638##

4,000,000 prints (C6000/C6000L))
ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Paper feed clutch /1 1 Actual replacement cycle:
56AA8201## 2,000,000 feeds
Paper feed clutch /2 1
56AA8201##
Paper feed clutch /3 1
56AA8201##
Pre-registration clutch /1 1
56AA8201##
56AA8201##
56AA8201##
2 MB-504 Pick-up roller /BP 1 Actual replacement cycle:
A21ER703## 800,000 feeds
Paper feed clutch /BP 1 Actual replacement cycle:
56AA8201## 2,000,000 feeds
1.1.27 Spot replacement (Every 3,600,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C6000L))

ng ation ce
1 Duplex section ADU conveyance clutch /1 1
A03UM201##
ADU transport clutch /2 1
A03UM201##
ADU transport clutch /3 1
A03UM201##
ADU pre-registration clutch 1
A03UM201##
1.2 DF-622
1.2.1 Spotted replacement (Every 625,000 feeds)
ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Pick-up roller 2
13YH4064##
Paper feed roller 1
13YH4039##
Separation roller 1
20AJ4015##
1.3 PF-602
1.3.1 Periodic maintenance 1 (Every 200,000 prints)
tity Tools used
F -7
Cleani Check Lubric Repla

ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Pick-up rubber Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
Paper feed roller
Separation roller
PF separation gear section () Alcohol/cleaning pad/multemp
FF-RM
2 Conveyance section Vertical conveyance roller /1 Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
Horizontal conveyance roller /1

ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Pick-up rubber 2 Actual replacement cycle:
A03X5652## 300,000 feeds
Paper feed roller 2
A03X5653##
Separation roller 2
A03X5654##
1.3.3 Periodic maintenance 3 (Every 2,400,000 prints)

ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Paper feed clutch 2 Actual replacement cycle:
56AA8201## 2,000,000 feeds
Separation clutch 2
56AA8201##
2 Conveyance section Vertical conveyance clutch /1 1
56AA8201##
Vertical conveyance clutch /2 1
56AA8201##
Vertical conveyance clutch /3 1
56AA8201##
Horizontal conveyance clutch /1 1
56AA8201##
Horizontal conveyance clutch /2 1
56AA8201##
Pre-registration clutch 1
56AA8201##
1.4 LU-202
ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Pick-up roller Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
Paper feed roller
Separation roller
Pre-registration roller
Paper dust removing brush
LU separation gear () Alcohol/cleaning pad/multemp
FF-RM

ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Pick-up roller 1 Actual replacement cycle:
A03X5652## 300,000 feeds
Paper feed roller 1
A03X5653##
F -8
Separation roller 1
A03X5654##

ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Paper feed clutch 1 Actual replacement cycle:
56AA8201## 2,000,000 feeds
Pre-registration clutch 1
56AA8201##
1.5 RU-509/HM-102
ng ation ce
1 Entrance Entrance sensor Blower brush
conveyance section De-curler entrance sensor
2 Output paper density Color density detection timing sensor
detection section
3 Paper exit section Paper exit conveyance sensor
Paper exit sensor
4 HM-102 Humidification section entrance
sensor
Humidification section conveyance Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
roller
Water feed roller
Humidification roller /Rt 1
A1TU5001##
Humidification roller /Lt 1
A1TU5002##

ng ation ce
1 Output paper density Shutter Blower brush
detection section
1.5.3 Spotted replacement (Every 300,000 prints)

ng ation ce
1 HM-102 Water feed filter 1
A1TU5215##
1.5.4 Spotted replacement (Every 1,500,000 prints)

ng ation ce
1 HM-102 Water feed roller 2
A1TU5003##
1.6 FS-521
ng ation ce
1 Preparation Original through check
Removing from the main body
Removing the rear cover
F -9
2 Main tray section Cleaning of each sensor Blower brush

3 Stacker section Cleaning of each sensor Blower brush
4 Conveyance section Cleaning of the paper dust removing Vacuum cleaner/blower brush
brush
5 Stapler section Staple scraps box cleaning
6 Post-process Installing the rear cover
Installing to the main body
7 Final check Original through check
Cleaning of the cover Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad

ng ation ce
1 Conveyance section Bypass roller /Lw pressure release 2 Molykote EM-30L
cam
2 Stacker section Worm gear, cam 1 Molykote EM-30L
1.6.3 Spotted replacement (Every 500,000 operations)

ng ation ce
1 Stapler section Stapler unit /Fr 1
A0GYA735##
Stapler unit /Rr 1
A0GYA736##

ng ation ce
1 Main tray section Paper exit roller /A 8
122H4825##
1.7 FS-531
ng ation ce
1 Conveyance section Shift roller motor
Paper exit opening motor
Bypass gate solenoid
2 Stacker section Paper assist roller
(sponge roller)

ng ation ce
(sponge roller)
122H4825##
Paper exit roller /B 4
(sponge roller)
A04D8904##
Intermediate conveyance roller 4
(sponge roller)
13QE4531##

tity Tools used
F -10
Cleani Check Lubric Repla

ng ation ce
1 Stacker section Paper assist roller 1
(sponge roller)
20AK4210##
Cleaning plate assy 1
A07RA741##
1.7.4 Spot replacement (Every 500,000 staples)

ng ation ce
A07RA735##
Stapler unit /Rr 1
A07RA736##
1.8 FS-612
ng ation ce
1 Conveyance section Shift roller motor
Paper exit opening motor
Bypass gate solenoid
2 Stacker section Paper assist roller
(sponge roller)
3 Folding section Folding knife motor
Tri-folding gate solenoid

ng ation ce
(sponge roller)
122H4825##
Paper exit roller /B 4
(sponge roller)
A04D8904##
Intermediate conveyance roller 4
(sponge roller)
13QE4531##

ng ation ce
1 Stacker section Paper assist roller 1
(sponge roller)
20AK4210##
1.8.4 Spot replacement (Every 200,000 staples)

ng ation ce
15JM-501##
Stapler unit /Rr 1
15JM-501##
F -11
1.9 PI-502
ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Pick-up roller Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
Paper feed roller
Separation roller

ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Paper feed roller 2
13QNR705##
Separation roller 2
13QNR704##

ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Pick-up roller 2
50BAR701##

ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Torque limiter 2
13QN4073##
1.9.5 Spotted replacement (Every 1,000,000 feeds)

ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Paper feed clutch /Up 1
13QN8201##
Paper feed clutch /Lw 1
13QN8201##
1.10 LS-505
ng ation ce
2 Conveyance section Cleaning of each sensor Blower brush
1.11 FD-503
ng ation ce
Removing the punch unit
Removing from RU
2 Punch section Punch shaft and the punch support Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
board
F -12
Punch drive section Molykote EM-30L

3 Post-process Installing the punch unit
Installing to RU

ng ation ce
1 PI section Cleaning of each sensor
2 Tray up/down Cleaning of each sensor
section
3 Punch section Cleaning of each sensor
4 Conveyance section Cleaning of each sensor
5 Final check Cleaning of the cover Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad

ng ation ce
1 Final check Cleaning of the cover Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
1.11.4 Spotted replacement (100,000 feeds)

ng ation ce
1 PI section Paper feed rubber 2
50BAR702##
Separation rubber 2
13QNR704##

ng ation ce
1 PI section Pick-up rubber 6
50BAR701##
1.12 SD-506
ng ation ce
Removing the rear cover
Removing the unit
2 Right angle Right angle conveyance sensor /1 Blower brush
conveyance section Right angle conveyance sensor /2
Right angle conveyance roller /1 Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
Right angle conveyance roller /2
3 Folding section Folding main scan alignment home Blower brush
sensor /Fr1
Folding main scan alignment home
sensor /Fr2
Folding entrance roller /1 Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
Folding entrance roller /2
Folding entrance roller /3
4 Saddle stitching Saddle stitching paper sensor Blower brush
section
F -13
Bundle sensor /1
5 Bundle processing Bundle sensor /2
section
6 Trimmer section Trimmer scraps full sensor
Actuator
7 Post-process Installing the unit
Installing the rear cover Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad

ng ation ce
1 Trimmer section Paper holding screw 2 Molykote EM-30L
A0H26621## Actual lubrication cycle:37,500
cuts
1.12.3 Spotted replacement (Every 18,900 cuts)

ng ation ce
1 Trimmer section Trimmer board assy 1 Actual replacement cycle:
A0H2B622# 18,900 cuts

ng ation ce
1 Trimmer section Trimmer blade kit 1
A0H2R901##

ng ation ce
1 Trimmer section Trimmer press motor (M32) 1
A0H2M101##
1.12.6 Spotted replacement (Every 500,000 times)

ng ation ce
1 Bundle processing Bundle press stage gear 1
section 15AN7719##

ng ation ce
1 Trimmer section Trimmer blade motor (M31) 1
A0H2M102##
1.12.8 Spotted replacement (Every 1,000,000 sets)

ng ation ce
1 Saddle stitching Stapler assy 2
section 15AN-550##
F -14
1.13 PB-503
ng ation ce
2 Conveyance section Entrance sensor Blower brush
SC entrance sensor
Sub tray conveyance roller Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
Intermediate conveyance roller
Entrance conveyance roller
Cover paper conveyance roller
3 Glue tank section Glue tank *1 Tweezers, cleaning pad,
Multemp FF-RM
4 Up/down forming Cover paper folding plate *2 Tweezers, cleaning pad
section
Book spine backing plate *2
Book exit belt /Rr Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
Book exit belt /Fr
Cover paper conveyance roller /Rt
Cover paper conveyance roller /Ft
Cover paper table entrance roller
Paper dust removing brush Blower brush
Cover paper alignment plate shaft *3 Plas guard No.2
5 Glue supply section Pellet hopper Blower brush
6 Book stock section Booklet load limit sensor
Booklet upper limit LED
Booklet sensor /1, /2
Guide shaft /Rt, /Lt *4 Plas guard No.2
Book conveyance belt /Rr Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
Book conveyance belt /Fr
Book movement belt
7 Cover paper tray Paper dust removing brush Blower brush
section Paper dust removing roller
Conveyance roller Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
8 SC section Switchback assist roller /Rr
Switchback assist roller /Fr
Sub scan alignment plate slide shaft
9 Clamp section Paper reference plate
Clamp pressure plate shaft 1 *5 Plas guard No.2
10 Relay conveyance Relay conveyance roller /1, /2, /3, / Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
section 4, /5
Relay paper exit roller /1, /2
Relay conveyance entrance sensor Blower brush
Relay conveyance intermediate
sensor
Relay conveyance exit sensor
11 Book stock section Book movement belt /2 Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
*1 Lubricate to the glue apply roller motor drive connecting gear.
*2 Cleaning of the cover paper folding plate and the book spine backing plate is an abbreviated cleaning. Remove adhered glue as necessary.
*3 Lubricate to the cover paper alignment plate shaft.
*4 Lubricate to the guide shafts /Rt and /Lt.
*5 Lubricate to the clamp pressing board shaft.

ng ation ce
1 Cutter section Roller cutter blade assy 1
F -15
A0756230##
1.13.3 Spotted replacement (Every 3,000,000 operations)

ng ation ce
1 Sub tray section Sub tray paper exit solenoid (SD4) 1
15ANR714##

ng ation ce
1 SC section Switchback roller 1
13GQ4519##
1.13.5 Spotted replacement (Every 120 hours)

ng ation ce
1 Fan unit section Pellet supply cooling fan (FM4) 1
27LA8051##
2 Deodorant unit Exhaust filter /A 1
A15X3017##

ng ation ce
1 Deodorant unit Exhaust filter /B 1
A15X3018##

ng ation ce
1 Glue tank section Glue tank assy 1
A15XA36A## (100V)
A15XA36E## (120V)
A15XA36F## (240V)
1.14 RU-506
1.14.1 Maintenance 1 (Every 600,000 prints)
ng ation ce
2 Conveyance section Cleaning of each sensor Blower brush
1.14.2 Spotted replacement (Every 5,000,000 operations)

ng ation ce
1 Conveyance section Straight gate solenoid (SD1) 1
A0GER709##
Straight gate spring 1
15AG4587##
2 Stacker section Stacker exit shutter solenoid (SD2) 1
A0GER700##
F -16
Stack switching solenoid (SD3) 1

A0GER701##
Stacker entrance guide plate 1
solenoid (SD4)
A0GER702##
1.15 GP-501
ng ation ce
1 Punch section Die Set Pins 3-IN-ONE (WD-40Company)
Actual lubrication count: 50,000
punches
This maintenance to be done by
user.

ng ation ce
1 Punch section Die Set Shoulder Bolts Magnalube-G
TeflonGreaseActual lubrication
count:
200,000 punches
This maintenance to be done by
user.
1.15.3 Maintenance 3 (Every 3,000,000 prints)

ng ation ce
GP removement, Front door open
2 Bypass conveyance Paper Path, Bypass Alcohol
section
3 Punch conveyance Latching Mechanisms aligner
4 section Paper Path, Aligner panels Alcohol
5 Aligner Idler Rollers
6 Roller energy drive
7 Bypass/Punch Optical Sensors Blower brush
8 conveyance section Timing Belts Alcohol
9 Idler Rollers
10 Drive Rollers
11 Punch section Back Gauge mechanism Blower brush/
vacuum cleaner
12 Die Guide Vacuum cleaner
13 Paper Path, Punch Alcohol
14 External section Base Vacuum cleaner
15 Door Closing Latch
16 Post-process Front door close, GP connected
18 Cleaning of the cover Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning
pad
1.15.4 Maintenance 4 (Every 12,000,000 prints)

ng ation ce
1 Punch conveyance Aligner Idler Roller Assembly Alcohol
2 section Belt Aligner (Green) 1
F -17
3 Punch section Punch drive cams 1 Magnalube-G Teflon Grease

Actual lubrication count:
3,000,000 punches
1.15.5 Spotted replacement (Every 500,000 punches)

ng ation ce
1 Punch section Die Set 1 Replacement is recommended if
hanging chips are usually
generated.
1.15.6 Spotted replacement part (Every 4,000,000 cycle)

ng ation ce
1 Punch section Back Gauge Mechanism 1 Actual replacement count:
A0N9PP59## 4,000,000 punches
F -18
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 2. PERIODICALLY REPLACED
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L PARTS LIST
2. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS LIST

2.1 Periodical replacement parts
Note
For the replacement procedure of the periodically replaced parts, refer to F.5 Periodical maintenance procedure bizhub PRESS
C7000/C7000P/C6000/C6000L to F.18 Periodical maintenance procedure PB-503.
The parts count No. given in the following table represents the number of the special parts count in the service mode.
2.2 bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, bizhub PRO C6000L

2.2.1 Periodically replaced parts list (C7000/C7000P/C70hc)
(1) Main body
No. Classification Parts name Parts No. Quantity Actual Parts count No.
replacement
cycle
1 External section Filter box A1DUR703## 1 600,000 3
Note
The ozone filter is included in this
filter.
2 Dust proof filter on rear side A1DUR707## 1 600,000 4
3 Developing dust proof filter A1DUR709## 1 600,000 5
4 Photo conductor Drum cartridge /Y DU-104 1 F.4 Life value 21, 22
5 section Drum cartridge /M DU-104 1 F.4 Life value 23, 24
6 Drum cartridge /C DU-104 1 F.4 Life value 25, 26
7 Drum cartridge /K DU-104 1 F.4 Life value 27, 28
8 Charging corona /Y A1DUR713## 1 F.4 Life value 13, 14
9 Charging corona /M A1DUR713## 1 F.4 Life value 15, 16
10 Charging corona /C A1DUR713## 1 F.4 Life value 17, 18
11 Charging corona /K A1DUR713## 1 F.4 Life value 19, 20
12 Charging dust proof filter A1DUR711## 1 600,000 6
13 Intermediate transfer Transfer belt cleaning blade A03U5530## 1 F.4 Life value 61, 62
14 section 1st transfer roller /Y A03U5012## 1 350,000 63
15 1st transfer roller /M A03U5012## 1 350,000 64
16 1st transfer roller /C A03U5012## 1 350,000 65
17 1st transfer roller /K A03U5004## 1 350,000 66
18 2nd transfer roller /Up 65AA2611## 1 350,000 67
19 2nd transfer roller /Lw 65AA4501## 1 350,000 71
20 Intermediate transfer belt A03U5042## 1 350,000 58
21 Toner collection sheet A1DUR71C## 1 350,000 60
22 Separation discharging plate assy A1DUR738## 1 350,000 72
23 Transfer belt cleaning unit A1DUR71B## 1 700,000 59
24 Transfer Belt Separation Claw A1DUR719## 3 700,000 68
25 2nd transfer earth plate assy A1DUR737## 1 1,050,000 73
26 Belt separation claw solenoid 26NA8251## 1 1,400,000 70
27 Transfer Roller Bearing 65AA2638## 8 3,000,000 69
28 Developing section Developer /Y DV610Y 1 F.4 Life value 41, 42
29 Developer /M DV610M (C7000/ 1 F.4 Life value 43, 44
C7000P)
DV611M (C70hc)
30 Developer /C DV610C (C7000/ 1 F.4 Life value 45, 46
C7000P)
DV611C (C70hc)
31 Developer /K DV610K 1 F.4 Life value 47, 48
32 Developing unit /Y A1DUR70X## 1 1,020,000 49, 50
33 Developing unit /M A1DUR70X## 1 1,020,000 51, 52
34 Developing unit /C A1DUR74K## 1 1,020,000 53, 54
35 Developing unit /K A1DUR72S## 1 1,020,000 55, 56
36 Toner collection Toner collect box A03UR702## 1 F.4 Life value 1
section
37 Paper feed section Paper feed roller rubber /1 25SA4096## 1 125,000 105
38 Paper feed roller rubber /2 25SA4096## 1 125,000 106
40 Separation roller rubber /1 25SA4096## 1 125,000 105
F -19

43 Pick-up roller /1 A1DUR71J## 1 800,000 109
46 Paper feed clutch /1 56AA8201## 1 2,000,000 113
49 Pre-registration clutch /1 56AA8201## 1 2,000,000 117
52 Vertical conveyance Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 56AA8201## 1 2,000,000 120
section
53 Registration section Registration cleaning sheet assy A1DUR73B## 1 600,000 123
54 Registration roller A1DUR73A## 1 1,400,000 124
55 Duplex section Intermediate conveyance clutch /2 56AA8201## 1 2,000,000 121
56 Intermediate conveyance clutch /3 56AA8201## 1 2,000,000 122
57 Reverse/exit section Reverse de-curler roller A03U8605## 1 400,000 125
58 Paper exit de-curler roller A03U8926## 1 1,000,000 126
59 Paper exit drive gear A03U9095## 1 1,000,000 -
60 Fusing section Fusing separation plate assy A1DUR74H## 1 350,000 136
61 Fusing drive gear /O A03U8095## 1 450,000 94
62 Fusing paper exit roller /Up A03U7225## 2 450,000 86
63 Fusing Belt A03U7205## 1 450,000 84
64 Fusing roller /Lw A03U7203## 1 450,000 83
65 Heat insulating sleeve /Lw A03U7227## 2 450,000 90
66 Fusing bearing /Lw 26NA5371## 2 450,000 89
67 Fusing limiter 65AA5365## 1 600,000 87
68 Fusing regulating gear /A 65AA7747## 1 600,000 95
69 Fusing drive gear /B A03U8082## 1 900,000 92
70 Fusing roller /1 A03U7201## 1 900,000 91
71 Fusing roller /2 A03U7202## 1 900,000 82
72 Fusing bearing /Up A1UD7235## 2 900,000 93
73 Fusing bearing /2 56UA7507## 2 900,000 97
74 Belt regulating sleeve A03U7250## 2 900,000 85
75 Heat insulating sleeve /Up A03U7295## 2 900,000 88
76 Fusing drive gear /M A03U8093## 2 900,000 98
77 Fusing duct assy A1DUR721## 1 1,800,000 96
78 Fusing lamp assy /Up A1DUM31A## 1 2,400,000 99
(Japan)
A1DUM31E##
(North America)
A1DUM31F##
(Europe)
79 Fusing heater lamp /4 A03UM32A## 1 2,700,000 100
(Japan)
A03UM32E## (North
America)
A03UM32F##
(Europe)
80 Fusing temperature sensor assy /Up A1DUR720## 1 2,400,000 101
(edge)
81 Fusing temperature sensor assy /Lw A1DUR71W## 1 2,400,000 102
(edge)
82 MB-504 Paper feed roller rubber /BP 25SA4096## 1 125,000 108
83 Separation roller rubber /BP 25SA4096## 1 125,000
84 Pick-up roller /BP A21ER703## 1 800,000 112
85 Paper feed clutch /BP 56AA8201## 1 2,000,000 116
86 OT-502 Paper holding roller 65AA4849## 2 200,000 144
87 Exit roller A0438907## 1 200,000 142
88 Paper exit driven roller /2 65AA4818## 4 200,000 143
F -20
(2) Option
replacement
cycle
1 PF-602 Pick-up rubber A03X5652## 2 300,000 162, 166
2 Paper feed roller A03X5653## 2 300,000 163, 167
3 Separation roller A03X5654## 2 300,000
6 Separation clutch /1 56AA8201## 1 2,000,000 165
8 Vertical conveyance clutch /1 56AA8201## 1 2,000,000 170
11 Horizontal conveyance clutch /1 56AA8201## 1 2,000,000 174
13 Pre-registration clutch 56AA8201## 1 2,000,000 173
14 LU-202 Pick-up roller A03X5652## 1 300,000 149
15 Paper feed roller A03X5653## 1 300,000 150
17 Paper feed clutch 56AA8201## 1 2,000,000 151
19 HM-102 Humidification roller /Rt A1TU5001## 1 300,000 322
20 Humidification roller /Lt A1TU5002## 1 300,000 323
2.2.2 Periodically replaced parts list (C6000/C6000L)

(1) Main body
replacement
cycle
1 External section Filter box A1DUR703## 1 600,000 3
Note
The ozone filter is included in this
filter.
2 Dust proof filter on rear side A1DUR707## 1 600,000 4
3 Developing dust proof filter A1DUR709## 1 600,000 5
4 Photo conductor Drum cartridge /Y DU-104 1 F.4 Life value 21, 22
5 section Drum cartridge /M DU-104 1 F.4 Life value 23, 24
6 Drum cartridge /C DU-104 1 F.4 Life value 25, 26
7 Drum cartridge /K DU-104 1 F.4 Life value 27, 28
8 Charging corona /Y A1DUR713## 1 F.4 Life value 13, 14
9 Charging corona /M A1DUR713## 1 F.4 Life value 15, 16
10 Charging corona /C A1DUR713## 1 F.4 Life value 17, 18
11 Charging corona /K A1DUR713## 1 F.4 Life value 19, 20
12 Charging dust proof filter A1DUR711## 1 600,000 6
13 Intermediate transfer Transfer belt cleaning blade A03U5530## 1 F.4 Life value 61, 62
14 section 1st transfer roller /Y A03U5012## 1 300,000 63
15 1st transfer roller /M A03U5012## 1 300,000 64
16 1st transfer roller /C A03U5012## 1 300,000 65
17 1st transfer roller /K A03U5004## 1 300,000 66
18 2nd transfer roller /Up 65AA2611## 1 300,000 67
19 2nd transfer roller /Lw 65AA4501## 1 300,000 71
20 Intermediate transfer belt A03U5042## 1 300,000 58
21 Toner collection sheet A1DUR71C## 1 300,000 60
22 Separation discharging plate assy A1DUR738## 1 300,000 72
23 Transfer belt cleaning unit A1DUR71B## 1 600,000 59
24 Transfer Belt Separation Claw A1DUR719## 3 600,000 68
25 2nd transfer earth plate assy A1DUR737## 1 900,000 73
26 Belt separation claw solenoid 26NA8251## 1 1,400,000 70
27 Transfer Roller Bearing 65AA2638## 8 3,000,000 69
F -21
28 Developing section Developer /Y DV610Y 1 F.4 Life value 41, 42

29 Developer /M DV610M 1 F.4 Life value 43, 44
30 Developer /C DV610C 1 F.4 Life value 45, 46
31 Developer /K DV610K 1 F.4 Life value 47, 48
32 Developing unit /Y A1DUR70X## 1 900,000 49, 50
33 Developing unit /M A1DUR70X## 1 900,000 51, 52
34 Developing unit /C A1DUR74K## 1 900,000 53, 54
35 Developing unit /K A1DUR72S## 1 900,000 55, 56
36 Toner collection Toner collect box A03UR702## 1 F.4 Life value 1
section
37 Paper feed section Paper feed roller rubber /1 25SA4096## 1 125,000 105
52 Vertical conveyance Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 56AA8201## 1 2,000,000 120
section
53 Registration section Registration cleaning sheet assy A1DUR73B## 1 600,000 123
54 Registration roller A1DUR73A## 1 1,400,000 124
55 Duplex section Intermediate conveyance clutch /2 56AA8201## 1 2,000,000 121
56 Intermediate conveyance clutch /3 56AA8201## 1 2,000,000 122
57 Reverse/exit section Reverse de-curler roller A03U8605## 1 400,000 125
58 Paper exit de-curler roller A03U8926## 1 1,000,000 126
59 Paper exit drive gear A03U9095## 1 1,000,000 -
60 Fusing section Fusing separation plate assy A1DUR74H## 1 300,000 136
61 Fusing drive gear /O A03U8095## 1 450,000 94
62 Fusing paper exit roller /Up A03U7225## 2 450,000 86
63 Fusing Belt A03U7205## 1 450,000 84
64 Fusing roller /Lw A03U7203## 1 450,000 83
65 Heat insulating sleeve /Lw A03U7227## 2 450,000 90
66 Fusing bearing /Lw 26NA5371## 2 450,000 89
67 Fusing limiter 65AA5365## 1 600,000 87
68 Fusing regulating gear /A 65AA7747## 1 600,000 95
69 Fusing drive gear /B A03U8082## 1 900,000 92
70 Fusing roller /1 A03U7201## 1 900,000 91
71 Fusing roller /2 A03U7202## 1 900,000 82
72 Fusing bearing /Up A1UD7235## 2 900,000 93
73 Fusing bearing /2 56UA7507## 2 900,000 97
74 Belt regulating sleeve A03U7250## 2 900,000 85
75 Heat insulating sleeve /Up A03U7295## 2 900,000 88
76 Fusing drive gear /M A03U8093## 2 900,000 98
77 Fusing duct assy A1DUR721## 1 1,800,000 96
78 Fusing lamp assy /Up A1DUM31A## 1 2,400,000 99
(Japan)
A1DUM31E##
(North America)
A1DUM31F##
(Europe)
F -22
79 Fusing heater lamp /4 A03UM32A## 1 2,700,000 100

(Japan)
A03UM32E## (North
America)
A03UM32F##
(Europe)
80 Fusing temperature sensor assy /Up A1DUR720## 1 2,400,000 101
(edge)
81 Fusing temperature sensor assy /Lw A1DUR71W## 1 2,400,000 102
(edge)
82 MB-504 Paper feed roller rubber /BP 25SA4096## 1 125,000 108
83 Separation roller rubber /BP 25SA4096## 1 125,000
84 Pick-up roller /BP A21ER703## 1 800,000 112
85 Paper feed clutch /BP 56AA8201## 1 2,000,000 116
86 OT-502 Paper holding roller 65AA4849## 2 200,000 144
87 Exit roller A0438907## 1 200,000 142
88 Paper exit driven roller /2 65AA4818## 4 200,000 143
(2) Option
replacement
cycle
1 PF-602 Pick-up rubber A03X5652## 2 300,000 162, 166
2 Paper feed roller A03X5653## 2 300,000 163, 167
14 LU-202 Pick-up roller A03X5652## 1 300,000 149
15 Paper feed roller A03X5653## 1 300,000 150
17 Paper feed clutch 56AA8201## 1 2,000,000 151
19 HM-102 Humidification roller /Rt A1TU5001## 1 300,000 322
20 Humidification roller /Lt A1TU5002## 1 300,000 323
2.2.3 Spotted replacement parts list

(1) Main body
replacement
cycle
1 Duplex section ADU conveyance clutch /1 A03UM201## 1 3,600,000 127
2 ADU transport clutch /2 A03UM201## 1 3,600,000 128
3 ADU transport clutch /3 A03UM201## 1 3,600,000 129
4 ADU pre-registration clutch A03UM201## 1 3,600,000 130
(2) Option
replacement
cycle
1 DF-622 DF pick-up roller 13YH4064## 2 625,000 288
2 Paper feed roller 13YH4039## 1 625,000 289
3 Separation roller 20AJ4015## 1 625,000 290
4 HM-102 Water feed roller A1TU5003## 2 1,500,000 324
F -23
5 Water feed filter A1TU5215## 1 300,000 325

6 FS-521 Stapler unit /Fr A0GYA735## 1 500,000 193
7 Stapler unit /Rr A0GYA736## 1 500,000 194
8 Paper exit roller /A (sponge roller) 122H4825## 8 600,000 196
9 FS-531 Paper exit roller /A (sponge roller) 122H4825## 6 200,000 255
10 Paper exit roller /B (sponge roller) A04D8904## 4 200,000 256
11 Intermediate conveyance roller (sponge 13QE4531## 4 200,000 257
roller)
12 Paper assist roller (sponge roller) 20AK4210## 1 400,000 258
13 Cleaning plate assy A07RA741## 1 400,000 276
14 Stapler unit /Fr A07RA735## 1 500,000 274
15 Stapler unit /Rr A07RA736## 1 500,000 275
16 FS-612 Paper exit roller /A (sponge roller) 122H4825## 6 200,000 255
17 Paper exit roller /B (sponge roller) A04D8904## 4 200,000 256
18 Intermediate conveyance roller (sponge 13QE4531## 4 200,000 257
roller)
19 Paper assist roller (sponge roller) 20AK4210## 1 400,000 258
20 Stapler unit /Fr 15JM-501## 1 200,000 248
21 Stapler unit /Rr 15JM-501## 1 200,000 249
22 PI-502 Paper feed roller 13QNR705## 2 100,000 265,270
23 Separation roller 13QNR704## 2 100,000 266,271
24 Pick-up roller 50BAR701## 2 200,000 264,269
25 Torque limiter 13QN4073## 2 600,000 267,272
26 Paper feed clutch /Up 13QN8201## 1 1,000,000 263
27 Paper feed clutch /Lw 13QN8201## 1 1,000,000 268
28 FD-503 Separation rubber 13QNR704## 2 100,000 202, 205
29 Paper feed rubber 50BAR702## 2 100,000 203, 206
30 Pick-up rubber 50BAR701## 6 200,000 201, 204
31 SD-506 Trimmer board assy A0H2B622## 1 18,900 230
32 Trimmer blade kit A0H2R901## 1 37,500 229
33 Bundle press stage gear 15AN7719## 1 500,000 242
34 Trimmer press motor (M32) A0H2M101## 1 500,000 231
35 Trimmer blade motor (M31) A0H2M102## 1 850,000 232
36 Stapler assy 15AN-550## 2 1,000,000 234, 235
37 PB-503 Roller cutter blade assy A0756230## 1 100,000 304
38 Switchback roller 13GQ4519## 1 600,000 299
39 Pellet supply cooling fan (FM4) 27LA8051## 1 750,000 -
40 Sub tray paper exit solenoid (SD4) 15ANR714## 1 3,000,000 295
41 Exhaust filter /A A15X3017## 1 120 hours 305
42 Exhaust filter /B A15X3018## 1 240 hours 306
43 Glue tank assy A15XA36A## 1 2,000 hours 308
(100V) A15XA36E##
(120V) A15XA36F##
(240V)
44 RU-506 Straight gate solenoid (SD1) A0GER709## 1 5,000,000 -
45 Stacker exit shutter solenoid (SD2) A0GER700## 1 5,000,000 -
46 Stack switching solenoid (SD3) A0GER701## 1 5,000,000 -
47 Stacker entrance guide plate solenoid A0GER702## 1 5,000,000 -
(SD4)
48 Straight gate spring 15AG4587## 1 5,000,000 -
49 GP-501 Die Set DS-5## 500,000 -
50 Back Gauge mechanism A0N9PP59## 1 4,000,000 317
F -24
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 3. ORU-M PARTS
3. ORU-M PARTS
3.1 Life value of the ORU-M parts
(1) ORU-M corresponding parts
ORU-M stands for "Operator Replaceable Unit Management." This function displays the steps/adjustment setting methods and manages
data when the educated user replaces the parts.
This function is enabled by installing the prescribed option and setting DIPSW15-0 to 1. For ORU-M corresponding parts, some parts
provided as an assy of parts larger than those parts replaced normally by the CE so that the user can easily conduct the part replacement
operation.
3.2 ORU-M parts list

(1) ORU-M parts list
The Allow/Restrict of the ORU-M parts can be set on I.5.16.1 ORU-M object/Life setting individually.
Parts No. Target of ORU-M Detection of Detection of Required adjustment Life Life Life
connector RFID (Standard) (Lower limit) (Upper
disconnection connection limit)*1
57 Intermediate transfer Provided None Blade Setting Mode (for 300,000 66% 333%
unit intermediate transfer) prints (200,000 (1,000,000
Belt Line Speed prints) prints)
Adjustment
Color Registration
Auto.Adj.
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
49 Developing unit /Y Provided None Auto. Developer Charge 600km 50% 120%
Toner Density Sensor Init. (Standard x (Standard x
(Y) 0.5) 1.2)
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
Printer Gamma Offset
Auto.
51 Developing unit /M Provided None Auto. Developer Charge 600km 50% 120%
(M) 0.5) 1.2)
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
Auto.
53 Developing unit /C Provided None Auto. Developer Charge 600km 50% 120%
(C) 0.5) 1.2)
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
Auto.
55 Developing unit /K Provided None Auto. Developer Charge 600km 50% 120%
(K) 0.5) 1.2)
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
Auto.
41,42 Developer /Y None None Auto. Developer Charge 200km 50% 120%
Gamma Automatic 0.5) 1.2)
Adjustment
Auto.
43,44 Developer /M None None Auto. Developer Charge 200km 50% 120%
Adjustment
Auto.
45,46 Developer /C None None Auto. Developer Charge 200km 50% 120%
Adjustment
Auto.
47,48 Developer /K None None Auto. Developer Charge 200km 50% 120%
Toner Density Sensor Init.
F -25
Gamma Automatic (Standard x (Standard x

Adjustment 0.5) 1.2)
Auto.
81 Fusing unit Provided None None 450,000 50% 120%
prints (Standard x (Standard x
0.5) 1.2)
21,22 Drum unit /Y - - Color Registration 102 km of 80% 113%
Auto.Adj. drum drive (130km) (180km)
Gamma Automatic distance or
Adjustment 130 km of
lubricant
applying
roller drive
distance
reaches,
whichever
comes
earlier.
23,24 Drum unit /M - - Color Registration 102 km of 80% 113%
lubricant
applying
roller drive
distance
reaches,
whichever
comes
earlier.
25,26 Drum unit /C - - Color Registration 102 km of 80% 113%
lubricant
applying
roller drive
distance
reaches,
whichever
comes
earlier.
27,28 Drum unit /K - - Color Registration 102 km of 80% 113%
lubricant
applying
roller drive
distance
reaches,
whichever
comes
earlier.
13,14 Charging corona /Y - - Gamma Automatic 70h 57% 143%
Adjustment (40h) (100h)
15,16 Charging corona /M - - Gamma Automatic 70h 57% 143%
17,18 Charging corona /C - - Gamma Automatic 70h 57% 143%
19,20 Charging corona /K - - Gamma Automatic 70h 57% 143%
3 Dust proof filter /A - - None 600,000 50% 120%
0.5) 1.2)
4 Dust proof filter /B - - None 600,000 50% 120%
0.5) 1.2)
5 Dust proof filter /3 - - None 600,000 50% 120%
0.5) 1.2)
F -26
6 Charging dust proof - - None 600,000 50% 120%

filter prints (Standard x (Standard x
0.5) 1.2)
109 Paper feed roller (Tray - - None 800,000 50% 120%
1) prints (Standard x (Standard x
0.5) 1.2)
0.5) 1.2)
0.5) 1.2)
105 Feed/Separation - - None 125,000 50% 120%
rubber (Tray1) prints (Standard x (Standard x
0.5) 1.2)
0.5) 1.2)
0.5) 1.2)
* The performance of the life upper limit is not guaranteed. It is within the range that can be set by CE according to the demand of customer.
3.3 ORU-M parts replacement timing

(1) ORU-M target unit life setting
The life of the ORU-M target unit can be set individually on I.5.16.1 ORU-M object/Life setting of Service Mode. Set the life with percent.
(2) ORU-M warning icon display

When the life of the ORU-M target unit strays and the following conditions are met, the ORU-M warning icon appears on the Machine Screen.
ORU-M function is enabled
Allowed byI.5.16.1 ORU-M object/Life setting
3.4 Management of ORU-M parts counter

(1) Counter display
By pressing [ORU-M(Unit Replace)] on the Utility screen, the ORU-M target part counter appears.
Note
By setting DIPSW15-0 to 1, [ORU-M(Unit Replace)] appears on the Utility screen.
The content which appears on [ORU-M(Unit Replace)] reflects the setting of I.5.16.1 ORU-M object/Life setting.
By seting DIPSW37-0 to 1, a password can be set for [ORU-M(Unit Replace)].
(2) Counter clear

When the user replaces the ORU-M target parts in the ORU-M replacement work mode.
F -27
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 4. LIFE VALUE
4. LIFE VALUE
4.1 Life value of materials/parts
Parts name Replacement cycle Actual Life/Verification method
Drum cartridge Equivalent to 220,000 prints When one of 102 km of drum drive distance or 130 km of lubricant
(C7000/C7000P/C70hc) applying roller drive distance reaches.
Equivalent to 180,000 prints Shows whichever is closer the end of its parts life in percentage on
(C6000/C6000L) Details Counter of the user screen. (100% is the end of life)
Developer Equivalent to 340,000 prints Developing roller drive distance is 200km.
(C7000/C7000P/C70hc) On the user screen, the life counter shows the remaining life with
Equivalent to 300,000 prints percentage. (100% is the end of life)
(C6000/C6000L)
Toner collect box assy Equivalent to 50,000 prints When the waste toner full sensor (PS52) detects the waste toner full.
Charging corona Equivalent to 200,000 prints Energization time of the charging corona is 70 hours.
(C6000/C6000L)
Dust proof filter /A Equivalent to 600,000 prints Changes depending on the coverage, developing roller drive
distance, and temperature/humidity.
On the user screen, the life counter shows the remaining life with
percentage. (100% is the end of life)
Transfer belt cleaning blade Equivalent to 350,000 prints Transfer belt cleaning blade drive distance is 164 km.
(C6000/C6000L)
4.2 Life value determining condition

The replacement cycles (number of prints) are values calculated based on the actual life of parts when printing is made under the conditions
listed in the table below. Since the idle running time (when not creating an image) of each part can vary widely depending on the print mode, the
actual life cycle may become different between the parts whose replacement cycle (number of sheets) are the same.
Item Description
Printing method Full color 6 copies intermittently
Paper size A4
Coverage 5% coverage for each color
Environmental temp/humidity Q zone
F -28
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 5. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L PROCEDURE bizh...
5. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000,

bizhub PRO C6000L
5.1 External section
5.1.1 Replacing the filter box, developing dust proof filter
(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
Filter box: Every 600,000 prints
Developing dust proof filter: Every 600,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[3] [1] 1. Loosen the screw [1], and then remove the filter cover /Rt1 [2].
2. Release the lock [3], and then remove the filter cover /Rt2 [4].
[2]
[4]
[1] 3. Remove the filter box [1].
[3] [1] [2] 4. Remove the label [2] of the filter box [1], and then close the toner
suction inlet [3] with this label.
Note
Make sure to close the toner suction inlet with the label to
prevent the the toner in the filter box from scattering.
[4] 5. Release the stopper [4] from the notch [2] of the filter cover /Rt2 [1]
by pushing the frame [3], and then remove the developing dust
proof filter [5].
[2]
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[3]
7. After replacing the filter box, developing dust proof filter, conduct
the following steps.
- Counter reset of the parts counter No.3 for the filter box, counter
reset of the parts counter No.5 for the developing dust proof filter
[1] [5]
5.1.2 Replacing the dust proof filter on rear side

Dust proof filter on rear side: Every 600,000 prints
F -29
(2) Procedure
1. Loosen 2 screws [1], and then remove the filter cover /Rr [2].
[1]
[2]
2. Release 2 locks [1], and then remove the dust proof filter on rear
[1]
side [3] from the filter cover /Rr [2].
Note
When reinstalling the dust proof filter on rear side, be
careful for the direction so that the filter is not on the rib
[4] of the filter cover /Rr.

4. After replacing the dust proof filter on rear side, conduct the
following steps.
- Counter reset of the parts counter No.4
[4]
[2] [3]
5.2 Write section

5.2.1 - Cleaning the dust proof glass
(1) Periodically cleaned parts/cycle
Dust proof glasses /Y, /M, /C and /K: Every 200,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Open the toner supply unit. (Refer to F.5.3.2 Opening /closing the
toner supply door section.)
2. Remove the dust proof glasses /Y [1], /M [2], /C [3], and /K [4] by
[5] pulling them out.
Note
After the installation, be sure to check that the partial
horizontal magnification adjustment knobs /Y, /M, and /C
[5], 1 each, are securely fixed.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
F -30
[1] 3. Clean the glass [2] of each dust proof glass [1] with hydro-wipe.
[2]
5.3 Photo conductor section

5.3.1 Disassembling procedure of the process unit section
Open the toner supply section
Open the fan cover /Fr
Pull out the process unit Remove the charging corona
Remove the intermediate transfer unit
Remove the drum cartridge Remove the developing unit
Remove the process unit
Remove the image correction unit
F -31
5.3.2 Opening /closing the toner supply door section.

(1) Procedure
1. Open the front door [1].
2. Loosen the screws [2] and [3], and then release the lock lever [4]
in the direction of the arrow to open the toner supply section [5].
Note
Do not press the toner supply door section when it is
open. The shape of the hinge on the toner supply door
section may change.
When closing the toner supply door section, tighten the
screws for about 2 turns with hands and then use the
driver because the screw top may clinch.
3. When closing the toner supply door section, follow the opening
[2] [3] steps in reverse.
[1] [4]
a03uf2c037ca
5.3.3 Pulling out the process unit

Note
To prevent the main body from falling, the process unit and the duplex section cannot be pulled out at the same time.
Be sure to put the duplex section in the main body before pulling out the process unit.
When the process cannot be pulled out, check to see whether the lock levers /1 and /2 are distorted and replace them if necessary.
(Refer to G.2.2.18 Replacing the lock levers /1 and /2)
1. Open the toner supply door section. (Refer to F.5.3.2 Opening /
closing the toner supply door section.)
2. Loosen the screw [1], and then open the fan cover /Fr [2].
[1] [2] a03uf2c039ca
[3] 3. Push the mount handle /Lt [1] and the process mount handle /Rt [2]
inward together to unlock the process unit [3], and pull out the
process unit [3] by holding the handles.
[1] [2] a03uf2c040ca
5.3.4 Replacing the drum cartridge

Drum cartridge
: Every 220,000 prints (actual replacement cycle:102 km of drum drive distance, or 130 km of roller drive distance after lubrication,
whichever comes first)*1
: Every 180,000 prints (actual replacement cycle:102 km of drum drive distance, or 130 km of roller drive distance after lubrication,
whichever comes first)*2
*1 C7000/C7000P/C70hc
*2 C6000/C6000L
F -32
(2) Procedure
Note
The product installs 4 drum cartridges one each for yellow, magenta, cyan, and black. They are common parts.Do not use a
once-used drum cartridge for another cartridge even they are common parts, or the old remaining toner and the new toner mix
up and the print quality degrade.
1. Pull out the process unit. (Refer to F.5.3.3 Pulling out the process
unit)
2. Removethe intermediate transfer unit. (Refer to F.5.5.1 Removing/
reinstalling the intermediate transfer unit)
3. Lift up the both edges [2] of the drum stay /Up [1], grab the edges,
and remove the drum unit /Y [3].
4. Remove the drum cartridge /M [4], the drum cartridge /C [5] and
[2] the drum cartridge /K [6] in the same manner as step 3.
[8] [1] [7] Note
When reinstalling each drum cartridge, be sure to check
that the both edges of the cartridge are fitted in the groove
of the drum attachment blocks /Fr [7] and /Rr [8]. (Drum
attachment blocks /Fr [7] and /Rr [8] shown in the picture
are for the yellow drum cartridge. Install magenta, cyan,
and black drum cartridges in the same manner.)
When reinstalling the drum cartridge /K [6], be careful not
to entangle the sheet [9].
Be careful not to touch or damage the drum photo
conductor section with bare hands.
When leaving drum cartridge, be sure to spread a sheet
over the cartridge to protect from light, and put them in a
dark place.
[5] [6] [9] [4] [3]
a03uf2c005ca
[1] [2] 5. Apply setting powder uniformly to both sides of the drum, and turn
around both ends of the drum with fingers in the arrow-marked
direction until no more setting power is visible.
Note
Be sure to turn around the drum with the outer flanges [4]
of the edge [3]. Do not touch the image area.
Be sure to turn around in the allow direction [2]. Be
careful not to turn around in the reverse direction,
otherwise the blade gets damaged.

7. After replacing the drum cartridge, conduct the following items.
- Cleaning the dust-proof glass (Refer to F.5.2.1 - Cleaning the
dust proof glass)
- Counter reset of the parts counter No.21, No.22 for drum
cartridge /Y, No.23, No.24 for drum unit /M, No.25, No.26 for drum
unit /C, No.27, No.28 for drum unit /K
- Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Refer to I.5.3.10 Color Registration
Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment))
- Color Registration Manual (Refer to I.5.3.11 Color Registration
Manual (Printer Adjustment))
- Gamma Automatic Adjustment (Refer to I.5.4.7 Gamma
Automatic Adj. (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment))
[3] [4] a0u0t3c001ca
5.4 Charging section

5.4.1 Replace the charging corona.
Charging corona
: 200,000 prints or 70 hours drive, whichever is earlier*1
: 160,000 prints or 70 hours drive, whichever is earlier*2
*1 C7000/C7000P/C70hc
*2 C6000/C6000L
(2) Procedure
Note
The product installs 4 charging coronas one each for yellow, magenta, cyan, and black. They are common parts. Do not use a
once-used charging corona for another color even they are common parts, or the old remaining toner and the new toner mix up
and the print quality degrade.
F -33
2. Push down the lever [2] of the charging corona [1] to the right, and
then pull it out [3] to remove.
Note
[1] Push the charging corona [1] gently in the direction to the
upper left [4] after installing the charging corona. This
operation makes the distance appropriate between the
drum unit and the charging corona. Be careful not to push
hard, otherwise the charging corona becomes deformed.
[4] When reinstalling the charging corona [1], be sure to
[2]
insert it until the lock [5] can be seen. When the charging
corona is not inserted properly, the image troubles occur.
[3]
4. After replacing the charging corona, conduct the following items.
- Cleaning the dust proof glass (Refer to F.5.2.1 - Cleaning the
dust proof glass)
- Counter reset of the parts counter No.13, No.14 for charging
corona /Y, No.15, No.16 for charging corona /M, No.17, No.18 for
charging corona /C, No.19, No.20 for charging corona /K
[5] a0u0t3c002ca
5.4.2 Replacing the charging dust proof filter

Charging dust proof filter :Every 600,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[3] [1] 1. Open the toner supply door section. (Refer to F.5.3.2 Opening /
2. Remove the charging dust proof filter [3] from the charging suction
Assy [2] which is provided inside the toner supply door section [1].
4. After replacing the charging dust-proof filters, conduct the following
steps.
Counter reset of the parts counter No.6
[2] 8050ma3074
5.5 Intermediate transfer section

5.5.1 Removing/reinstalling the intermediate transfer unit
(1) Procedure
[3] [2] [1] [3] [2] [1] 1. Pull out the process unit. (Refer to F.5.3.3 Pulling out the process
unit)
2. Remove 1 each of the screw [1].
3. Loosen 2 each of the screws [2].
4. Turn the belt positioning shaft [3] counterclockwise, and remove
the shaft.
a03uf2c041ca
F -34
[3] [1]
5. Remove the supporting rod [3] from the charging suction Assy [2]
which is provided inside the toner supply unit [1].
Note
The supporting rod is the assist rod to stand the removed
intermediate transfer unit independently. Be sure to
prepare it in advance when removing the intermediate
transfer unit.
[2]
8050ma3044
[1] [2] 6. Lift up the handles [1] and remove the intermediate transfer unit
[2].
Note
Be careful not to touch or damage the transfer belt [3] with
bare hands.
The handle of the intermediate transfer unit should be
held by its ends with both hands.
[3] a03uf2c042ca
7. Set the supporting rod [2] to the intermediate transfer unit [1] and
let the unit stand independently.
Note
Do not turn the transfer belt when assisting the unit with
the supporting rod.
[2] [1] 8050ma3046
F -35
[1] Note
When installing the intermediate transfer unit [1], be sure
to rotate the cam [3] clockwise until it stops before the
operation.
When installing the intermediate transfer unit, install the
[2] guide pins [2] which is provided 2 each on the front and
[2] back sides in accordance with the transfer supporting
block /Fr [4] and the transfer supporting block /Rr [5].
Also, be careful not to contact the intermediate transfer
unit with the drum.
[3]
[5] [4] a03uf2c043ca
5.5.2 Replacing the transfer belt cleaning unit

Transfer belt cleaning unit
: every 700,000 prints*1
*1 C7000/C7000P/C70hc
*2 C6000/C6000L
(2) Procedure
[2] [2] 1. Removethe intermediate transfer unit. (Refer to F.5.5.1 Removing/
2. Holding the transfer belt cleaning unit [1], remove the 2 screws [2],
and remove the transfer belt cleaning unit.
Note
Handle the belt cleaner unit gently when removing the
unit. The toner accumulated in between the toner guide
roller of the transfer belt cleaning unit and the
intermediate transfer belt cleaning blade may spill. It is
[1] normal if the toner is accumulated because the toner is
used to grind the belt surface. If the toner is spilled over
the separation claw unit, remove and clean the unit.
The transfer belt cleaning unit consists of the belt
cleaning roller unit and the following components:
Transfer belt cleaning blade: 1
Spring: 2
[3]
C-clip: 2
Blade support shaft: 1
Toner collection sheet: 1
8050ma3048 Toner collection sheet /2: 1
Spring: 3
Before installing the transfer belt cleaning unit, apply
setting powder to the part [3] on the intermediate transfer
belt. After applying setting powder, rotate the intermediate
transfer belt to brush all setting powder off.
When installing the transfer belt cleaning unit, insert the
guides at the both bottom ends of the transfer belt
cleaning unit in the pins of the intermediate transfer unit
and tighten the screws.
F -36
4. After replacing the transfer belt cleaning unit, conduct the following
steps.
Counter reset of the parts counters No.59, 60, 61 and 62
5.5.3 Replacing the belt cleaning blade

Belt cleaning blade
: Every 350,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Drive distance 164km) *1
: Every 300,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Drive distance 164km) *2
*1 C7000/C7000P/C70hc
*2 C6000/C6000L
(2) Procedure
[4] [3] 1. Removethe transfer belt cleaning unit. (Refer to F.5.5.2 Replacing
the transfer belt cleaning unit)
2. Remove 2 springs [1].
3. Remove the C-clip [2], and then pull out the blade fulcrum shaft [3]
to remove the belt cleaning blade [4].
Note
When reinstalling the transfer belt cleaning unit, apply the
setting powder to entire surface of the transfer belt to
which the transfer belt cleaning unit is attached.
Take extra care not to touch or damage the blade of the
belt cleaning blade [4]. After applying setting powder,
[3] rotate the transfer belt to brush all setting powder off.
[1]
5. After replacing the belt cleaning blade, conduct the following items
in order.
Counter reset of the parts counters No.61 and 62
[2]
- Blade Setting Mode (Refer to I.5.4.6 Blade Setting Mode (Drum
8050ma3049 Peculiarity Adjustment))
5.5.4 Replacing the toner collection sheet

Toner collection sheet
: every 350,000 prints *1
*1 C7000/C7000P/C70hc
*2 C6000/C6000L
(2) Procedure
1. Removethe transfer belt cleaning unit. (Refer to F.5.5.2 Replacing
2. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the toner collection sheet /2 [2]
and then remove the toner collection sheet [3].
Note
Do not bend or damage the PET sheet of the toner
collection sheet.

4. After replacing the toner collection sheet, conduct the following
items.
[1]
[2] [3] 8050ma3159
F -37
5.5.5 Replacing the transfer belt separation claw

Transfer belt separation claw
*1 C7000/C7000P/C70hc
*2 C6000/C6000L
(2) Procedure
[3] 1. Removethe intermediate transfer unit. (Refer to F.5.5.1 Removing/
2. Remove the screw [1] and remove the separation claw unit [2].
Note
Be careful not to touch or damage the intermediate
[4] transfer belt [3] with bare hands.
When installing the separation claw unit, apply the setting
powder on half a round [4] of the intermediate transfer belt
[3]. After applying setting powder, rotate the intermediate
transfer belt to brush all setting powder off.
[2]
[2]
[1]
8050ma3050
3. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and remove 3 transfer belt

separation claws [2].
5. After replacing the transfer belt separation claw, conduct the
following items.
[1]
[2]
8050ma3051
5.5.6 Cleaning the intermediate transfer belt/rollers

Intermediate transfer belt
*1 C7000/C7000P/C70hc
*2 C6000/C6000L

Roller in the intermediate transfer unit
*1 C7000/C7000P/C70hc
*2 C6000/C6000L
F -38
(3) Procedure
[1] [1] 1. Removethe intermediate transfer unit. (Refer to F.5.5.1 Removing/
2. Removethe transfer belt cleaning unit. (Refer to F.5.5.2 Replacing
3. Removethe separation claw unit. (Refer to F.5.5.5 Replacing the
transfer belt separation claw)
8050ma3053
[2] [3] [6] 5. Have the intermediate transfer unit [1] stand with its front side
facing down.
6. Remove screw [2] to release the fixing of the handle [3].
7. Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the shaft stopper [5].
[7]
8. Remove the screw [6] and then remove the tension plate /Rr [7].
9. Remove two screws [8] and then remove the high voltage power
feed color /Rr [9].
[4] [5] 10. Remove the C clip [10] and then remove the bearing [11].
11. Remove the transfer belt [12] by pulling it straight up.
[12] [1]
[11] [8]
[10] [9] 8050ma3054
F -39
[5] 12. Clean the 1st transfer pressure rollers /Y [1], /M [2], /C [3], /K [4],
tension roller [5], belt driven roller /Lw [6], belt drive roller [7], and
[1]
belt driven roller /Up [8], [9], [10] with isopropyl alcohol.
[2]
[3]
[4]
[6] [7] [10]

[8]
[9]
Note
When installing the tension plate /Rr, be sure to convey
the projection of the plate as shown in the picture. Also,
when tightening the screw, be sure not to pinch the black
sheet.
8050ma3152
When installing the C clip, be sure to lift the shaft to fix
the clip to the groove on the shaft.
When installing the transfer belt, be sure that the side
noted as ''UP SIDE'' at the back side of the transfer belt
edge is placing upward.
Hold the transfer belt by its both ends within 10 mm from
the edge, and do not touch other areas.
Be careful not to touch or damage the transfer belt with
bare hands.
Before installing the transfer belt cleaning unit, apply the
setting powder to entire surface of the transfer belt to
which the transfer belt cleaning unit is attached. After
applying setting powder, rotate the transfer belt to brush
all setting powder off.
14. After replacing the intermediate transfer belt, conduct the following
items.
- Cleaning the dust-proof glass (Refer to F.5.2.1 - Cleaning the
dust proof glass)
- Blade Setting Mode (Refer to I.5.4.6 Blade Setting Mode (Drum
Peculiarity Adjustment))
- Belt Line Speed Adjustment (Refer to I.5.3.8 Belt Line Speed Adj.
(Printer Adjustment))
5.5.7 Replacing the first transfer roller and the transfer roller bearing.
F -40

1st transfer roller
Transfer roller bearing: Every 3,000,000 prints
*1 C7000/C7000P/C70hc
*2 C6000/C6000L
(2) Procedure
[5] 1. Remove the intermediate transfer belt. (Refer to F.5.5.6 Cleaning
the intermediate transfer belt/rollers)
2. Place the intermediate transfer unit as shown in the picture.
3. Remove the C-clip [1].
4. Remove the bearing [2] and slide the stopper /4 [3] to release the
tip of the transfer release arm [4].
5. Slide and remove the 1st transfer roller /K [6].
6. Remove the 1st transfer rollers /Y, /M and /C [5], 1 each.
Note
Never touch the roller of the 1st transfer roller. When
handling the 1st transfer roller, always grasp it by its
metal shaft.
[4] [3] [3] [4] When installing the first transfer roller, be sure that the
[6] shaft surface with groves faces toward you.
When installing the 1st transfer roller, confirm that the
cables are securely fastened and the plastic films on the
cables are not twisted. If the cables are not fastened,
correct by pressing the cables against the metal frame
side. If the plastic films are twisted, move the films to the
center of the cables.
[1] [2] a0u0t3c003ca
[8] 7. Remove 2 claws [7] each, and remove 8 transfer roller bearings.
Note
Be careful not to lose the springs when removing the
transfer roller bearings.
Be careful not to brake the claw [7].

9. When replacing the first transfer roller and the transfer roller
bearing, conduct the following steps
[7] - Cleaning the dust-proof glass (Refer to F.5.2.1 - Cleaning the
dust proof glass)
- Counter reset of the parts counter No.63 for the first transfer
[9] [8]
roller /Y, No.64 for /M, No.65 for /C, No.66 for /K and No.69 for
transfer roller bearing.
[8]
a0u0t3c004ca
5.5.8 Replacing the 2nd transfer roller /Up

2nd transfer roller /Up
*1 C7000/C7000P/C70hc
*2 C6000/C6000L
F -41
(2) Procedure
[2] 1. Remove the intermediate transfer belt. (Refer to F.5.5.6 Cleaning
the intermediate transfer belt/rollers)
2. Lift the 2nd transfer roller /Up [1] upward temporarily, and remove
the roller obliquely downward.
Note
Fixing of the 2nd transfer roller /Up is released after the
high voltage power feed color /Rr is removed when
removing the transfer belt.
Never touch the roller of the 2nd transfer roller /Up. When
[1] handling the 2nd transfer roller /Up, always grasp it by its
metal shaft.
When installing the 2nd roller /Up, place the surface with
the depression on the shaft edge down.
1
3. Remove 2 bearings [2] from the 2nd transfer roller /Up [1].
5. After replacing the 2nd transfer roller /Up, conduct the following
2 item.
[2] [1] 8050ma3056
5.5.9 Replacing the belt separation claw solenoid (SD1)

(1) Periodically replaced parts /cycle
Belt separation claw solenoid (SD1): Every 1,400,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the intermediate transfer unit. (Refer to F.5.5.1 Removing/
2. Disconnect the connector [1].
3. Remove the screw [2] and then release the cable [4] from the
cable clamp [3].
4. Remove 2 screws [5], and then remove the belt separation claw
solenoid (SD1) [6].
Note
After installing the solenoid lever, check if the shaft of
SD1 slides smoothly.
[6] [1] 5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
6. After replacing the belt separation claw solenoid (SD1), conduct
[5] the following items.
[4]
[3]
[2] [1]
5.5.10 Replacing the separate discharging plate Assy

Separate discharging plate Assy
*1 C7000/C7000P/C70hc
*2 C6000/C6000L
F -42
(2) Procedure
2. Pull out the duplex section. (Refer to F.5.11.1 Replacing the
intermediate conveyance clutches /2 (CL4) and /3 (CL5))
3. Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to F.5.13.1 Removing/reinstalling
the fusing unit)
4. Remove the screw [1] and remove the fixing cover [2].
Note
When reinstalling the fixing cover, be sure to align the
projection [3] with the positioning hole [4].
[2] [1]
[3] [4]
[2] [3] 5. Remove 2 separate attaching screws [1].

6. Lift up the separate discharging plate Assy [2] to remove the faston
[3] and then remove the separate discharging plate Assy.
Note
Pull out the faston cover part straightly to remove the
faston from the separate discharging plate Assy.
When connecting the faston to the separate discharging
plate Assy, be sure that the cables of the faston cover is
facing inside.
When installing the separate discharging plate Assy, fix
the separate attaching screw of the front side first, and
then slide the positioning.

[1] 8050ma3088
8. After replacing the separate discharging plate Assy, conduct the
following steps.
5.5.11 Replacing the 2nd transfer roller /Lw and the 2nd transfer earth plate Assy
2nd transfer roller /Lw
2nd transfer earth plate assy
: every 1,050,000 prints*1
*1 C7000/C7000P/C70hc
*2 C6000/C6000L
F -43
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the separate discharging plate Assy. (Refer to F.5.5.10
Replacing the separate discharging plate Assy)
2. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the 2nd transfer earth
[5] plate Assy [2].
3. Remove C-clips [3] 1 each.
4. Slide each bearing [4] to the outer side and remove the second
transfer roller /Lw.
Note
Be careful not to touch the parts other than shaft part of
the second transfer roller /Lw.
When installing the 2nd transfer roller /Lw, be sure to
[3] [4] [4] [3]
install it with the depression side on the roller shaft facing
towards the machine. (Be sure that no depression is on
the side contacting with the 2nd transfer earth Assy.)

6. When replacing the second transfer roller /Lw and the second
transfer earth Assy, conduct the following steps
- Counter clear the parts counter No.71 for the second transfer
[1] [2] roller /Lw and No.73 for the 2nd transfer earth plate Assy.
5.6 Developing section

5.6.1 Replacing the developers /Y, /M, /C and /K
Developer /Y, /M, /C, /K
:340,000 prints or 200km drive, whichever is earlier*1
*1 C7000/C7000P/C70hc
*2 C6000/C6000L
(2) Developer ejection procedures

[1] [2] [3] 1. Open the toner supply section. (Refer to F.5.3.2 Opening /closing
the toner supply door section.)
2. Loosen 2 screws [1], and then remove the developer charge plate
[2].
3. Loosen 2 screws [3], and then remove the developer charge
funnel /L [4].
4. Loosen 2 screws [5], and then remove the rotation jig [6].
Note
Use the developer charge plate and developer charge
funnel /L for charging new developer.
[4] [5] [6]
5. Remove the developing unit. (Refer to F.5.6.2 Replacing the

[1] [2] developing units /C, /M, /Y, and /K)
6. Repeat the following steps 7 and 8 to exit the developer of each
color.
Note
Do not remove the cover of the developer unit [1] and the
toner inlet [2] when ejecting the developer.
F -44
7. Install the rotation jig [1] to the coupling [2] on the agitator screw
[1] [2]
side and turn in the arrow-marked direction.
Note
Never turn the coupling in the direction other than the
specified herein.
8. Install the rotation jig to the coupling [1] on the developing roller
[1]
side and turn in the arrow-marked direction.
Note
Never turn the coupling in the direction other than the
specified herein.
When replacing the developer, be sure to conduct "Toner
Density Sensor Init." in Service Mode.
(Refer to I.5.4.9 Toner Density Sensor Init. (Drum
9. Install all of the developer units which have ejected the developer
to the process unit.
Note
Be sure to charge the developer while the process unit is
set to the main body.
(3) Developer charging procedures

1. Remove the upper cover /Fr. (Refer to G.2.2.5 Upper cover /Fr, /
Rt, /Lt, connector cover /Fr, /Rr, switch cover assy)
2. Insert the developer charge plate [1] into the shoulder screw [2]
and install it by sliding.
Note
The shoulder screws are on the top of each developing
unit.
3. Install the developer charge funnel /L [2] aligning with the groove
of the developer charge plate [1].
Note
Be sure to install the leading edge of the developer charge
funnel /L to the toner supply opening of the developing
unit.
4. Install the included developer charge funnel /U [1] to the developer

charge funnel /L [2].
Note
Be sure to use the developer charge funnel /U that is
included in each developer. Reuse is prohibited.
F -45
5. Charge new developer [1] into the developer charge funnel /U [2].
6. Remove the developer charge funnel /U [1] and the developer

charge funnel /L [2].
7. Pull out the developer charge plate [1] from the shoulder screw [2]
and then slide it to remove.
8. Repeat the steps 2 to 7 to charge the developer to the other
developer units.
9. Reinstall the parts after that following the removal steps in reverse.
Note
After replacing the developer, be sure to clean each dust
proof glass. (Refer to F.5.2.1 - Cleaning the dust proof
glass)
10. After replacing the developers /Y, /M, /C and /K, conduct the
following items.
- Counter reset of the parts counters No.41, 42 for the developer /
Y, No.43, 44 for /M, No.45, 46 for /C,and No.47, 48 for /K.
- Toner Density Sensor Init. (Refer to I.5.4.9 Toner Density Sensor
Init. (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment))
Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (Refer to I.5.3.23 Printer Gamma
Offset Auto. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment))
5.6.2 Replacing the developing units /C, /M, /Y, and /K

Developing units /C, /M, /Y, and /K
:1,020,000 prints or 600km drive, whichever is earlier*1
*1 C7000/C7000P/C70hc
*2 C6000/C6000L
(2) Procedure
Note
Be careful not to fold the teflon sheet applied on the top cover of the developing unit on the developing roller side.
When cleaning the developing unit, be sure to use a hydro wipe set as a CE tool. Using paper or cloth other than hydro wipe
causes a white line on the image because of the dust and lint stuck in the developing regulation plate of the developing unit.
4 developing units are provided; one each for yellow, magenta, cyan, and black. Each developing unit is common part. Yellow
and magenta are common parts. Do not use a once-used developing unit for another color even they are common parts, or the
old remaining toner and the new toner mix up and the print quality degrade.
F -46
2. Pull out the process unit. (Refer to F.5.3.3 Pulling out the process
unit)
3. Remove the screws [1], 3 each, and then remove the developing
pressure material [2] by sliding the upside of it.
[1] [2] [1] [2] a03uf2c050ca
4. Remove the connecter [1], 1 each, and then remove the

developing unit /C, /M, /Y [2] and /K [3] in a backward way.
Note
Attach individual label which is bundled in the unit, to the
developing unit other than black.
After the installation, be sure to check that the partial
horizontal magnification adjustment knobs /Y, /M, and /C,
1 each, are securely fixed. (Refer to F.5.2.1 - Cleaning the
dust proof glass)
[1] [3] [2] 6. After replacing the developing units /Y, /M. /C and /K, conduct the
following steps.
- Counter reset of the parts counters No.49 and 50 for the
developing unit /Y, No.51 and 52 for /M, No.53 and 54 for /C, and
No.55 and 56 for /K.
5.7 Toner collect box

5.7.1 Replacing the toner collect box
Toner collect box: Every 50,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Open the toner collection door [1] and then pull out the toner
collect box [2].
[2] a03uf2c051ca
F -47
2. Remove the label [1] from the toner collect box [2] and then cover
the entrance of the toner collect box [3].
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1] 8050ma3008
5.8 Paper feed section

5.8.1 Replacing the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller rubber
Pick-up roller: Every 2,400,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 800,000 feeds)
Paper feed roller rubber: Every 400,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 125,000 feeds)
* Be sure to replace the paper feed roller rubber together with the separation roller rubber at the same time.
(2) Procedure
Note
Since the configurations of the paper feed trays /1 to /3 are the same, the following shows the steps of the paper feed tray /1.
1. Pull out the paper feed tray /1.
2. Remove 2 C-clips [2] and slide outward the bearings [2] to remove
the paper feed roller assy /Up [3].
Note
When reinstalling the paper feed roller assy, check that
there is no foreign objects such as grease on each roller.
[3] [2] [6] [5] [1] 3. Remove the bearing [1].

4. Remove the C-clip [2] and remove the pick-up roller [3].
Note
When reinstalling the pick-up roller, be sure to set it with
its arrow-marked side [4] on the C-clip side [2].
5. Remove the C-clip [5] and remove the paper feed roller [6].
Note
When reinstalling the paper feed roller, be sure to set it
with its arrow-marked side [7] on the C-clip side [5].
6. Remove the paper feed roller rubber [8] from the paper feed roller.
Note
[4] [7]
When reinstalling the paper feed rubber, be sure to set it
with its paint-marked side [9] on the arrow-marked side
[7].

8. After replacing the pick-up roller and paper feed roller rubber,
conduct the following steps.
[9] [8] a03uf2c055ca Counter reset of the parts counter No.109 for the pick-up roller
paper feed tray /1, No.110 for the paper feed tray /2, No111 for the
paper feed tray /3.
F -48
Counter reset of the parts counter No.105 for the paper feed roller
rubber paper feed tray /1, No.106 for the paper feed tray /2, No107
for the paper feed tray /3.
5.8.2 Replacing the separation roller rubber

Separation roller rubber: Every 400,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: 125,000 feeds)
* Replace the separation roller rubber at the same timing as the paper feed roller rubber.
(2) Procedure
Note
[4] [8] [7] [3] [6]
1. Remove the paper feed roller assy. (Refer to F.5.8.1 Replacing the
pick-up roller and the paper feed roller rubber)
2. Set the paper size guide [1] to the minimum width.
3. Loosen the screw [2], and while holding up the paper lift plate [3],
remove the paper stopper plate [4] by putting up a part [5] of it and
pulling out to the Fr side [6].
4. Remove the C-clip [7] and remove the separation roller [8].
Note
When reinstalling the paper feed roller, check that there is
no foreign objects such as grease on each roller.
5. Remove the separation roller rubber [9] from the separation roller
[8].
[9] [10] [8] [1] [5] [2] Note
When reinstalling the separation roller rubber, be sure to
set it with its paint-marked side [10] on the C-clip side [7].

7. After replacing the separation roller rubber, conduct the following
item.
For the separation roller rubber: Counter reset of the parts counter
No.105 for tray /1, No.106 for tray /2, No.107 for tray /3.
5.8.3 Replacing the paper feed clutch and the pre-registration clutch
Paper feed clutches /1, /2, /3 : Every 4,000,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: 2,000,000 prints)
Pre-registration clutches /1, /2, /3 : Every 4,000,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: 2,000,000 prints)
(2) Procedure
Note
1. Pull out the paper feed tray /1 [1].
2. Remove 4 screws [2] and remove the paper feed unit cover [3].
[2] [3] [2] [3] [3]
[1] a03uf2c052ca
F -49
[5] [3] [2] [1] 3. Disconnect the connector [1].

4. Remove the screw [2] and loosen the fixing shaft screw [3].
5. Slide the paper feed unit [4] to the rear side and then bring it
upward Disconnect the connector [5] and remove the paper feed
unit [4].
[4]
[9] [10] [4] [3] [1] 6. Disconnect the connector [1].

7. Remove the C-clip [2] and remove the paper feed clutch [3].
Note
When reinstalling paper feed clutch, be sure to align each
stopper [5] to each guide [5].

9. Remove the C-clip [7] and remove the pre-registration clutch [8].
Note
When reinstalling pre-registration clutch, be sure to align
each stopper [9] to each guide [10].
[8] [7] [6] [5] [2] a03uf2c057ca
11. After replacing the paper feed clutch and the pre-registration
clutch, conduct the following item.
Counter reset of the parts counter No.113, 114, 115 for the paper
feed clutch /1, /2, /3
Counter reset of the parts counter No.117, 118, 119 for the pre-
registration clutch /1, /2, /3
5.9 Vertical conveyance section

5.9.1 Replacing the intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (CL13)
Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (CL13): Every 2,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the right covers /Lw1, /Lw2 and /Up4. (Refer to G.2.2.3
[5] [4]
Right cover /Up1, /Up2, /Up3, /Up4, /Lw1, /Lw2)
2. Pull out the paper feed tray /[1], /2 [2], and /1[3].
3. Remove 3 screws [4] and then remove the right cover /Lw3 [5].
Note
Remove the right cover /Lw1 to install LU and PF. Remove
the right cover /Lw1 and /Up4 to install MB. (Refer to G.
2.2.3 Right cover /Up1, /Up2, /Up3, /Up4, /Lw1, /Lw2)
[3] [2] [1]
F -50
4. Push up the hooks [1] on the right and left to separate the bypass
up down cover [2] from the vertical conveyance section [3].
Note
Conduct this steps only when MB is connected.
[1] [2] [2] [1]
[2] [3] a03uf2c064ca
[1] 5. Remove 7 screws [1].

6. Pull out the vertical conveyance section [2] and disconnect the
connecter [3] to remove the vertical conveyance section [2].
Note
When installing the vertical conveyance section, be sure
to close the vertical conveyance door first and fix the
screws.
[1] [2]
[3]

8. Remove the E-ring [2] and then remove the spacer [3] and the
gear [4].
9. Remove the C-clip [5] and then remove the intermediate
conveyance clutch /1 (CL13) [6].
Note
When reinstalling CL13, be sure to align each stopper [7]
to each guide [8].
11. After replacing the intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (CL13),
conduct the following items.
[8] [5] [1]
a03uf2c066ca
5.10 Registration section

5.10.1 Replacing the registration cleaning sheet
Registration cleaning sheet assy: Every 600,000 prints
F -51
(2) Procedure
3. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the cover [2].
4. Remove 3 screws [2] and remove the registration cleaning sheet
assy[4].
6. After replacing the registration cleaning sheet assy, conduct the
following steps.
[3] [4] [3] a03uf2c067ca
5.10.2 Replacing the registration roller

Registration roller: Every 1,400,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the registration cleaning sheet assy. (Refer to F.5.10.1
[5] Replacing the registration cleaning sheet)
2. Remove the duplex section cover /Rt, duplex section release lever,
and duplex section cover /Lt. (Refer to F.5.11.1 Replacing the
[4] intermediate conveyance clutches /2 (CL4) and /3 (CL5))
[7] [6] 3. Remove the fixing cover. (Refer to F.5.5.10 Replacing the
separate discharging plate Assy)
4. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the gear cover [2].
5. Disconnect the connector [3], and then release the wiring harness
from 2 clamps.
6. Remove the C-clips [4], 1 each, and remove the bearings [5] on
the front and the back, 1 each.
7. Remove 2 screws [6], and then remove the registration unit [7].
Note
When removing the registration unit [7], open the
conveyance guide plate /Up [8] and move the registration
unit to the back side of the duplex section, and then
remove it pulling out the shaft on the front from the panel
of the duplex section.
[6] [1] [2] [8] When reinstalling the registration unit, be careful not to
damage the paper feed side of the guide plate.
[3] [5] [4]

8050ma3208
F -52
[5] 8. Remove the E-ring [1] and remove the registration gear [2] and the
pin [3].
Note
When reinstalling the registration gear [2], be sure to
reinstall the pin [3].

10. Remove 2 E-rings [5] and 2 bearings [6].
[6] [4]
[1] [3] [2]
[5] [4] [6] 8050ma3209
11. Release the hook [2] of the spring [1], and then remove the
registration roller [3].
Note
When reinstalling the spring [1], be sure to set it at its
original position.
[3]
[1] [2] 8050ma3210
F -53
12. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the spacers /1 [3] and /2
[2] [4], registration regulation plate [5], spring [6], torque limiter [7],
and pin /A [8] from the registration roller [2].
Note
When reinstalling the registration regulation plate, be sure
to set the projection [10] of the torque limiter to the detent
hole [9].
14. After replacing the registration roller, conduct the following items.
[1] - Counter reset of the parts counter No.124
[10] [5] [4]

[3]
[7]
[6]
[9]
[8] 8050ma3211
5.11 Duplex section

5.11.1 Replacing the intermediate conveyance clutches /2 (CL4) and /3 (CL5)
F -54
(2) Procedure
2. While releasing the lock [2], push the lever [1] that pulls out the
duplex section down in the counterclockwise direction and remove
the duplex section [3].
Note
The process unit and the duplex section cannot be pulled
out at the same time to prevent the main body from falling.
When pulling out the duplex section, return the process
unit to the main body in advance.
When the duplex section cannot be pulled out, check to
[3] see whether the lock levers /1 and /2 are distorted and
replace them if necessary. (Refer to G.2.2.18 Replacing the
lock levers /1 and /2)
[1] [2]

[4] [1]
the fusing unit)
4. Remove 3 screws [3] and screw [2].
Note
Screw [2] is attached from underneath the duplex section
cover /Rt [3].
5. Pull out the duplex section cover /Rt [3] halfway and disconnect
two connectors [4] to remove the cover.
[1] [2] [3]
[4] [5] [2] 6. Open the jam release lever [1].

7. Remove the screw [2], and pull out the duplex section pull out
lever [3].
8. Remove 2 screws [4] and remove the duplex section cover /Lt [5].
[1] [3]

Note
(When reinstalling CL4, be sure to align each stopper [4]
to each guide [5].

Note
(When reinstalling CL5, be sure to align each stopper [9]
to each guide [10].
[8] [6] [1] [3] [2]
a03uf2c069ca
The picture shows the case when the MB is connected.
F -55
14. After replacing the intermediate conveyance clutch /2 (CL4)and /3
(CL5), conduct the following items.
Counter reset of the parts counter No.121 for the intermediate
conveyance clutch /2 (CL4) and No.122 for /3 (CL5)
5.11.2 Replacing the ADU conveyance clutches /1 (CL1), /2 (CL2), /3 (CL3), ADU pre-registration clutch (CL18)
(1) Spotted replaced parts/cycle
ADU conveyance clutch /1 (CL1): Every 3,600,000 prints
ADU pre-registration clutch (CL18): Every 3,600,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[4] [5] [2] [1] [7] [11] [6] [9] [8] closing the toner supply door section.)
the fusing unit)
4. Remove the duplex section covers /Rt and /Lt. (Refer to F.5.11.1
Replacing the intermediate conveyance clutches /2 (CL4) and /3
[3] [10] (CL5))
6. Remove the C-clip [2], and then remove the ADU conveyance
clutch /1 (CL1) [3].
Note
When reinstalling CL1, be sure to align each stopper [4] to
each guide [5].
7. Remove the screw [6], and then remove the stay [7].
clutch /2 (CL2) [10].
Note
When reinstalling the stay [7], be sure to set it at the
position to keep the stopper [11] of CL2.
[2] [1] 10. Disconnect the connector [1].
11. Remove 3 screws [2], and then remove the ADU lock solenoid unit
[3].
clutch /3 (CL3) [6].
Note
When reinstalling CL3, be sure to align each stopper [7] to
[3]
each guide [8].

15. Remove the C-clip [10], and then remove the ADU pre-registration
clutch (CL18) [11].
Note
When reinstalling CL18, be sure to align each stopper [12]
to each guide [13].
17. After replacing the ADU conveyance clutches /1 (CL1), /2 (CL2)
[4] [6] and /3 (CL3) and the ADU pre-registration clutch (CL18), conduct
the following item.
Counter reset of the parts counter No.127 for the ADU conveyance
clutch /1 (CL1), No.128 for the ADU conveyance clutch /2 (CL2),
No.129 for the ADU conveyance clutch /3 (CL3), and No.130 for
the ADU pre-registration clutch (CL18).
[13] [9]
[10]
[8] [7] [5] [12] [11]
5.12 Reverse/exit section

5.12.1 Replacing the reverse de-curler roller
Reverse de-curler roller :every 400,000 prints
F -56
(2) Procedure
the fusing unit)
3. Remove 2 screws [1].
4. Release the hooks [3] of the spring from the screw [2] to remove
the screws [2] and [4].
5. Remove the paper exit guide plate /4 Assy [5].
[5]
[1]
[2] [3] [4]

8050ma3096
6. Remove the screw [1], and remove the knob [2].

[11] [10] [9] [13] [12]
7. Remove the paper exit plate /Fr [3] and the spring [4].
8. Remove 2 screws [5] and remove the bearing [6].
9. Remove the E ring [7] and then remove the spacer [8], bearing [9],
and paper exit installation plate /Rr [10].
10. Remove the spring [11] and then remove the spacer [12].
11. Remove the bearing [13] and then remove the reverse de-curler
roller.
13. After replacing the reverse de-curler roller, conduct the following
[8] [7]
steps.
[6] [14]
[5]
[4] [3] [2] [1]

8050ma3097
5.12.2 Replacing the paper exit drive gear, paper exit de-curler roller
Paper exit drive gear: Every 1,000,000 prints
Paper exit de-curler roller:Every 1,000,000 prints
F -57
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the left cover. (Refer to G.2.2.2 Left cover)
[2]
3. Remove 2 connectors [1].
[1]
5. Lower the front side [2] of the paper exit unit [1], and then remove
the paper exit unit while paying attention not to hit the frame [4]
with the pin [3].
Note
When reinstalling the paper exit unit, be sure to insert the
pin [5] to the frame first.
[5] [2] [4]
[1]
[3]
[1] [1] 6. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the reinforcing plate /Lt [2].
[2]
F -58
7. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the paper exit drive gear
[8] [3]
[2].
Note
When reinstalling the gear [2], be sure to set it with its
arrow-marked side [3] on the E-ring side [1].
8. Remove the E-ring [4] and remove the gear [5].

Note
When reinstalling the gear [7], be sure to set it with its
arrow-marked side [8] on the E-ring side [6].
[7] [4] [5] [6] [2] [1]
10. Remove the E-ring [1] and remove the bearing [2].
[5] 11. Remove the E-ring [3] and remove the bearing [4].
12. Remove the paper exit de-curler roller [5].
[1] [2] [3] [4]
F -59
13. Remove the E-rings [1], 1 each, and remove 2 bearings [2].
15. After replacing the paper exit de-curler roller, conduct the following
items.
[1] [2] [2] [1]
a03uf2c075ca
5.13 Fusing section

5.13.1 Removing/reinstalling the fusing unit
Note
The fusing section is extremely hot immediately after turning OFF the main power switch (SW1) or the sub power switch (SW2) of
the main body. To prevent burn injuries, be sure to start operations when the temperature cools down sufficiently.
(1) Procedure
3. Open the paper reverse/exit section [1].
4. Loosen the screw [2].
5. Slide the fusing unit [3] to the front once, and then lift it to remove.
Note
[3] When reinstalling the fusing unit, align the projection [5]
of the fusing unit to the guide [4] of the duplex section.
[1] [2]
5.13.2 Replacing the fusing drive gear /B, fusing duct assy
Fusing drive gear /B: Every 900,000 prints
Fusing duct assy: Every 1,800,000 prints
F -60
(2) Procedure
[1] [2]
the fusing unit)
2. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the connector cover [2].
Note
When reinstalling the connector cover, be sure to set the
projection [3] to the hole [4] of the fusing unit.
[3]
[4]
[2] 3. Disconnect the connector [1].

4. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the knob [3].
[3] 5. Loosen the screw [4].
6. Remove 2 screws [5], and then remove the fusing cover /Fr [6].
[5]
[1]
[4]
[2] 7. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the fusing cover /Rr [2].
[1]
F -61

9. Remove 2 screws [2] to release the fixing of the connector
mounting bracket [3].
Note
Depending on the cables [4], keep the connection between
the connector mounting bracket and the fusing drive assy
[5].
[4] [5] [1]
10. Remove the screw [1], and then release the fixation of the fusing
duct /2 assy [2].
[6] [5]
11. Remove the screw [3], and then remove the sensor positioning
plate assy [4].
Note
When removing the fusing drive assy, be sure to check
that the fixing of the fusing duct /2 assy is already
released. Removing the fusing drive assy without
releasing the fixing of the fusing duct /2 assy may damage
the fusing heater lamp /4 (L5).
12. Remove 4 screws [5], and then remove the fusing drive assy [6].
[2] [1] [5]
[3] [4]
[1] 13. Remove the fusing drive gear /B [1].

Note
When installing new fusing drive gear /B, be sure to apply
multemp FF-RM inside and outside of the gear.
When reinstalling the fusing drive gear /B, be careful for
the direction of depression [2].
[2]
F -62
14. Pull and remove the fusing duct /2 assy [1] from the fusing duct /3
assy [2].
16. After replacing the fusing drive gear /B and the fusing duct assy,
conduct the following items.
- For fusing drive gear /B: Counter reset of the parts counter No.
92, for fusing duct assy: Counter reset of the parts counter No.96
[2] [1]
5.13.3 Replacing the fusing separation plate assy

Fusing separation plate assy
: Every 350,000 prints*1
*1 C7000/C7000P/C70hc
*2 C6000/C6000L
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to F.5.13.1 Removing/reinstalling
the fusing unit)
2. Remove the fusing cover /Rr. (Refer to F.5.13.2 Replacing the
fusing drive gear /B, fusing duct assy)
Note
When reinstalling the fusing cover /Rr, be sure to release
the pressure by rotating the knob [1] counterclockwise.
3. Open the fusing paper exit plate assy [2], and press the fusing
roller by rotating the knob [1] counterclockwise.
[2]
[1] 4. Loosen the screw [1].
F -63
[2] 5. Remove 2 springs [1], and remove the fusing separation plate assy
[2] in the direction of the arrow.
[1] [1]
6. Note to keep in mind when reinstalling the item

Note
When reinstalling the spring [1], be sure to use the spring
hook [2].
[2] [1]
[1] [2] 7. Note to keep in mind when reinstalling the item

Note
When reinstalling the fusing separation plate assy, be
sure to check that the fusing separation plate assy [1]
touches the metal frame [2].

9. After replacing the fusing separation plate assy, conduct the
following step.
5.13.4 Replacing the fusing drive gear /M

Fusing drive gear /M: Every 900,000 prints
F -64
(2) Procedure
[3] [2] [1] [4]
the fusing unit)
2. Remove the fusing drive assy. (Refer to F.5.13.2 Replacing the
3. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the spacer [2] and the
fusing drive gear /M (the first one) [3].
Note
When reinstalling the fusing drive gear /M (the first one),
be careful for the direction of the arrow-mark [4].
When reinstalling the fusing drive gear /M (the first one),
be sure to apply multemp FF-RM to the gear.
[2] 4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the lock screw assy [2].
[1]
[1] 5. Remove 4 screws [1], disconnect the connector [2] and then
remove the fusing motor [3].
[2] [3]
F -65
[3] [2] [1] 6. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the spacer [2] and the
bearing [3].
[3] [1] [2] [6] 7. Pull out the shaft [1] and the bearing [2] in the direction of the
arrow [3].
8. Remove the fusing drive gear /M (the second one) [4] in the
direction of the arrow [5].
Note
Be careful not to loose the pin [6] which is set in the shaft
[1].
When reinstalling the fusing drive gear /M (the second
one), be careful for the direction of the arrow-mark [7].
When reinstalling the fusing drive gear /M (the second
one), be sure to apply multemp FF-RM to the gear.
[4] [5]
10. - After replacing the fusing drive gear /M, conduct the following
items.
[7]
5.13.5 Replacing the fusing lamp assy /Up

Fusing lamp assy /Up: Every 2,400,000 prints
F -66
Note
The fusing lamp assy /Up consists of the fusing heater lamps /1 (L2), /2 (L3) and /3 (L4).
(2) Procedure
the fusing unit)
3. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the fusing duct /5 assy [2].
Note
When reinstalling the fusing duct /5 assy, be sure to set
the edge [3] of the duct to the hole [5] of the retaining
plate /2 [4].
Or, it may damage the fusing heater lamp.
[2] [1]
[3] [5] [4]

[3] [2] [1]
5. Remove 3 screws [2], and then remove the fusing power supply
plate /Up assy [3].
Note
The fusing power supply plate /Up assy is with the cables
[4].
[4] [2] a03uf2c014ca
[4] [3] [5] 6. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the heater support plate /
Rr [2].
Note
When reinstalling the heater support plate /Rr, be sure to
set the projection [5] of the fusing lamp /Up [4] to the slit
[3].
[2] [1]

8. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the heater support plate /
Fr [3].
[2] [3] [1]

a03uf2c016ca
F -67
9. Remove the fusing lamp assy /Up [1].
Note
Be careful for the direction to pull out the fusing lamp
assy /Up.
Never touch the lamp section of the fusing lamp assy /Up
with bare hands.
11. - After replacing the fusing lamp assy /Up, conduct the following
item.
[1]
5.13.6 Replacing the fusing roller /2, fusing bearing /2, fusing drive gear /O
Fusing roller /2: Every 900,000 prints
Fusing bearing /2: Every 900,000 prints
Fusing drive gear /O: Every 450,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[1] [1] 1. Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to F.5.13.1 Removing/reinstalling
the fusing unit)
3. Remove the fusing lamp assy /Up. (Refer to F.5.13.5 Replacing
the fusing lamp assy /Up)
4. Remove 5 screws [1], and then remove the fusing cover /Up assy
[2].
[2]
5. Prepare the removed fusing drive assy [1].

6. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove 2 fusing jigs [3].
[2] [1]
F -68
7. Insert the fusing jigs [2], 1 each, to 2 slits, and then release the
pressure of the fusing belt [3].
8. Remove 3 screws [4], and then remove the roller mounting plate
[5].
9. Remove the fusing bearing [6].
[1] [2] [2] [1]

[3]
[4]
[5] [6]
[2] [1] 10. Cover the fusing belt [1] with the hydro wipe [2].
Note
Never touch the fusing belt with bare hands.
11. Insert the screw driver [4] into the fusing roller /2 assy [3], and then
remove the fusing roller /2 assy while pressing the fusing belt.
Note
When pulling out the fusing roller /2 assy, be careful not
to contact it to the hole [5] of the frame.
[5]
[3] [4]
F -69
[3] 12. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the fusing drive gear /O
[2].
Note
When reinstalling the fusing drive gear /O, be sure to set it
with its arrow-marked side [3] on the fusing bearing side
[4].
When reinstalling the fusing drive gear /O, be sure to
apply multemp FF-RM to the gear.
[1] [2] [4]
13. Remove the fusing bearing /2 [4] from the fusing roller /2 assy [5].
15. After replacing the fusing roller /2, fusing bearing /2, fusing drive
gear /O, conduct the following item.
- For fusing roller /2: Counter reset of the parts counter No.82, for
fusing bearing /2: Counter reset of the parts counter No.97, for
fusing drive gear /O: Counter reset of the parts counter No.94
[5]
a03uf2c022ca
5.13.7 Replacing the fusing belt, fusing roller /1, insulating sleeve /Up, fusing bearing /Up, belt regulating sleeve
Fusing belt: Every 450,000 prints
Fusing roller /1: Every 900,000 prints
Insulating sleeve /Up: Every 900,000 prints
Fusing bearing /Up: Every 900,000 prints
Belt regulating sleeve: Every 900,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[3] [2] [1] 1. Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to F.5.13.1 Removing/reinstalling
the fusing unit)
3. Remove the fusing lamp assy /Up. (Refer to F.5.13.5 Replacing
the fusing lamp assy /Up)
4. Remove the fusing roller /2 assy. (Refer to F.5.13.6 Replacing the
fusing roller /2, fusing bearing /2, fusing drive gear /O)
5. Remove the O-ring [1], 1 each.
6. Remove the insulating sleeve /Up [2], 1 each, and then remove the
fusing bearing /Up [3], 1 each.
Note
When installing the insulating sleeve /Up, be sure to apply
[4] [5] multemp FF-RM to the contact area of the fusing bearing /
Up and the fusing roller /1 assy [4].
7. Remove the fusing roller /1 assy [4] and the fusing belt [5].
Note
Never touch the roller surface of the fusing roller /1 assy
and the area other than the edges of the fusing belt with
bare hands.
[3] [2] [1]
F -70
[3] 8. Remove the fusing belt [2] from the fusing roller /1 assy [1].
Note
Be sure to set the side with the lot number [3] on the rear
side.
Be careful not to adhere the developer to inside the fusing
belt and the surface of the fusing roller /1 assy. Adhered
[1] developer may cause the image trouble.
[2]
a03uf2c024ca
[1] [2] [2] [1] 9. Remove the O-rings [1], 1 each, and then remove 2 belt regulating
sleeves [2].
Note
Never touch the roller surface of the fusing roller /1 [3].
Be sure to spread the hydro wipe [4] when putting down
the fusing roller /1 to prevent the developer adhesion.
11. After replacing the fusing belt, fusing roller /1, insulating sleeve /
Up, fusing bearing /Up, and belt regulating sleeve, conduct the
following item.
- For fusing belt: Counter reset of the parts counter No.84, for
fusing roller/1: Counter reset of the parts counter No.91, for
insulating sleeve /Up: Counter reset of the parts counter No.88, for
fusing bearing /Up: Counter reset of the parts counter No.93, for
belt regulating sleeve: Counter reset of the parts counter No.85
[4] [3]
a03uf2c025ca
5.13.8 Replacing the fusing heater lamp /4 (L5)

Fusing heater lamp /4 (L5): Every 2,700,000 prints
(2) Procedure
the fusing unit)
3. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the fusing entrance guide
plate [2].
[1]
F -71
[1]
5. Prepare the packaging box [1] for the fusing roller /Lw.
6. Open the fusing main body /Up assy [2], and support it with the
packaging box [1] for the fusing roller /Lw.
Note
Be sure to support the fusing unit with the packaging box
for the fusing roller /Lw since the fusing main body /Up
assy is heavy.
[2] [1]

8. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the fusing duct /3 assy [3]
and the fusing duct /4 assy [4].
Note
When reinstalling the fusing duct /3 assy and the fusing
duct /4 assy, be sure to set the edge [5] of the fusing
duct /4 assy to the hole [6] of the fusing duct /3 assy.
Or, it may damage the fusing heater lamp.
[6]
[4]
[2] [3]
9. Remove the fusing duct /5 assy. (Refer to F.5.13.5 Replacing the

fusing lamp assy /Up)
10. Disconnect the connector [1], and then remove the fusing heater
lamp /4 (L5) [2].
Note
Be careful not to touch the lamp section of the fusing
heater lamp /4 (L5) with bare hands.
When reinstalling the fusing heater lamp /4 (L5), be sure to
put the wiring harness on rear side.
12. After replacing the fusing heater lamp /4 (L5), conduct the
[2] [1] a03uf2c029ca following item.
F -72
5.13.9 Replacing the fusing roller /Lw, fusing bearing /Lw, insulating sleeve /Lw
Fusing roller /Lw: Every 450,000 prints
Fusing bearing /Lw: Every 450,000 prints
Insulating sleeve /Lw: Every 450,000 prints
(2) Procedure
the fusing unit)
3. Remove the fusing heater lamp /4 (L5). (Refer to F.5.13.8
Replacing the fusing heater lamp /4 (L5))
4. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the assist block /Rr assy
[2].
[1]
[3] 5. Open the fusing paper exit plate assy [1].

6. Loosen the screw [2] once, and then retighten it to the position
where the fusing separation plate assy [3] is open to make it the
stopper.
7. Remove the C-ring [4], and then remove the insulating sleeve /Lw
[5] and the fusing bearing /Lw [6].
Note
When reinstalling the insulating sleeve, be sure to apply
[2] multemp FF-RM to the contact area with the fusing roller /
Lw.
8. Remove the screw [7], and then remove the support plate /1 [8].
9. Remove the fusing roller /Lw assy [9].
[1] [9]
[6] [5] [4] [7] [8]
10. Remove the C-ring [1] and the gear [2].
[1] [2]
a03uf2c032ca
F -73
11. Remove the C-ring [1], and then remove the insulating sleeve /Lw
[2] and the fusing bearing /Lw [3].
Note
When reinstalling the fusing roller /Lw [4] and the
insulating sleeve, be sure to apply multemp FF-RM to the
contact area.
13. After replacing the fusing roller /Lw, fusing bearing /Lw, and the
insulating sleeve /Lw, conduct the following item.
- For fusing roller /Lw: Counter reset of the parts counter No.83, for
fusing bearing /Lw: Counter reset of the parts counter No.89, for
[1] [2] [3]
a03uf2c033ca insulating sleeve /Lw: Counter reset of the parts counter No.90
5.13.10 Replacing the fusing temperature sensor assy /Lw (edge)

Fusing temperature sensor assy /Lw (edge): Every 2,400,000 prints
(2) Procedure
the fusing unit)
2. Remove the fusing entrance guide plate. (Refer to F.5.13.8
4. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the fusing temperature
sensor assy /Lw (edge) [3].
6. After replacing the fusing temperature sensor assy /Lw (edge),
conduct the following item.
[1] [3] [2]

a03uf2c034ca
5.13.11 Replacing the fusing temperature sensor assy /Up (edge)

Fusing temperature sensor assy /Up (edge): Every 2,400,000 prints
F -74
(2) Procedure
the fusing unit)
2. Remove the fusing covers /Fr and /Rr. (Refer to F.5.13.2
Replacing the fusing drive gear /B, fusing duct assy)
3. Remove the fusing cover /Up assy. (Refer to F.5.13.6 Replacing
the fusing roller /2, fusing bearing /2, fusing drive gear /O)
4. Remove the screw [1], and then loosen the screw [2] to remove
the cover [3].
Note
[3]
The screw [2] cannot be removed fully. Be sure to check
that the screw [2] is loosen enough to be separated from
the cover [3].
[4] [5] [2] [1]

5. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and then remove 3 cable clamps
[2].
7. Remove the screw [4], and then remove the fusing temperature
sensor assy /Up (edge) [5].
9. After replacing the fusing temperature sensor assy /Up (edge),
[1] [2] [3]
5.13.12 Replacing the fusing paper exit roller /Up

Fusing paper exit roller /Up: Every 450,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[3]
the fusing unit)
2. Open the fusing paper exit plate assy [1], and then lock it with the
screw driver [2].
3. Remove 2 screws [3], and then remove the duct assy [4].
[1] [4] [2]
F -75
[3] [2] 4. Remove 2 E-rings [1].

5. Slide the shaft [2] in the direction of the arrow [3], and then remove
2 fusing paper exit rollers /Up [4].
[4] [1] [1] [4]

a03uf2c048ca
[1] 6. Remove the bearings [2], 2 each, from the fusing paper exit roller /
Up [1].
8. After replacing the fusing paper exit roller /Up, conduct the
following item.
[2] a03uf2c049ca
5.13.13 Replacing the fusing regulating gear /A, fusing limiter

Fusing regulating gear /A: Every 600,000 prints
Fusing limiter: Every 600,000 prints
(2) Procedure
the fusing unit)
2. Put it on the flat table gently with the paper feed side down.
3. Remove the E-ring [1].
[1] 8050ma3144
[2] [1] 4. Slide the shaft [1] to the rear side, and then pull it out while sliding
the flat cut section [2] of the shaft in the notch of the panel.
8050ma3145
F -76
[1] 8050ma3146
6. Remove the fusing regulating gear /A [1] and the fusing limiter [2].
Note
Be careful not to loose the pin [4] which is set in the shaft
[3].

8. - After replacing the fusing regulating gear /A and the fusing limiter,
- For fusing regulating gear /A: Counter reset of the parts counter
No.95, for fusing limiter: Counter reset of the parts counter No.87
[4] [3] [2] [1] 8050ma3147
5.14 OT-502
5.14.1 Replacing the paper hold roller
Paper hold roller: Every 200,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove OT-502. (Refer to G.2.2.24 OT)
2. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and then remove 2 paper hold
roller assy [2].
[2]
a03uf2c076ca
3. After removing the E-ring [1], pull out the shaft [2], and then
remove the paper hold roller [3].
4. Remove the paper hold roller from the other paper hold roller assy
following Step 3.
6. After replacing the paper hold roller, conduct the following item.
[2] [3] [1]

a03uf2c077ca
5.14.2 Replacing the paper exit roller

Paper exit roller: Every 200,000 prints
F -77
(2) Procedure
1. Remove OT-502. (Refer to G.2.2.24 OT)
2. Remove the E-ring [1] and the gear [2].
Note
When reinstalling the gear, be sure to set it with its arrow-
marked side [3] on the E-ring side [1].
[3] [2] [1]
a03uf2c123ca
3. Remove 2 E-rings [1], and then remove the bearing [2].

4. Remove the E-ring [3] and the bearing [4].
5. Remove 3 screws [5], and then remove the paper exit roller
mounting plate /Rr [6] and the paper exit roller [7].
7. After replacing the paper exit roller, conduct the following item.
[2] [1] [6] [5]
[7] [6]
[3] [4]
a03uf2c124ca
5.14.3 Replacing the paper exit driven roller /2

Paper exit driven roller /2: Every 200,000 prints
F -78
(2) Procedure
1. Remove OT-502. (Refer to G.2.2.24 OT)
2. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and then remove the 4 roller
holders [2].
3. Remove 2 paper exit driven roller assy [4] from the springs [3], 2
each.
[4] [2] [3]
[3] [1]
a03uf2c078ca
4. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the bearing [2] and the
paper exit driven roller /1 [3].
[1] [2] [3]

a03uf2c079ca
5. Remove the bearing [1].

6. Remove 2 E-rings [2], and then remove the first paper exit driven
roller /2 [3].
[1] [2] [3]

a03uf2c080ca
7. Remove 2 E-rings [1], and then remove the second paper exit
driven roller /2 [2].
8. Remove 2 paper exit driven rollers /2 from the other paper exit
driven roller assy following Steps 4 to 7.
10. After replacing the paper exit driven roller /2, conduct the following
item.
[1] [2] a03uf2c081ca
F -79
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L PROCEDURE DF-6...
6. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE DF-622

6.1 Precautions on maintenance
CAUTION
Be sure to unplug the power plug from the power outlet.

6.2.1 Removing/reinstalling the paper feed unit
(1) Procedure
1. Open the paper feed cover [1].
[2] [2]
2. Release 2 locks [2].
3. While pushing the paper feed unit [3] to the paper feed cover side
[1], turn the paper feed guide [4] in the arrow-marked direction [5]
to remove it to the upper side.
Note
When reinstalling the paper feed guide, be sure to set 3
claws [6] of the paper feed guide to the mounting holes
[7].
When reinstalling the paper feed guide, be sure to reinstall
so that the no paper detection actuator [8] comes out from
[5] [1] [4] [3] [5] the paper feed guide [4].
[8] [6] [7]
a052f2c001ca
4. Remove the screw [1] and remove the bearing plate [2].
[1]
5. Remove 2 C-clips [3].
6. Move 2 bearings [4] inward to remove the paper feed unit [5].
[2]
[5]
[3] [4]
[4] [3]
a052f2c002ca
F -80
[4] [3] [2] [1]
Note
When removing the paper feed unit, be careful not to
damage the arm [2] with the shaft [1].
When reinstalling the unit, be sure to check that the arm
[2] is on the shaft [1].
When reinstalling the unit, be sure to set the claw [3]
under the cover plate section [4].
a052f2c003ca
6.2.2 Replacing the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller
Paper feed roller
: Spot replacement (actual replacement cycle: every 625,000 feeds)
Pick-up roller
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove the paper feed unit (Refer to F.6.2.1 Removing/
reinstalling the paper feed unit)
a052f2c004ca
4. Push the gear [1] in the arrow-marked direction [2] to remove the
[5] [4] [1] [3] [2]
pin [3]. Then, remove the gear [1] and the belt [4] in the arrow-
marked direction [5].
a052f2c005ca
[1] [2] [3]

5. Remove the C-clip [1], remove the gear [2] and then remove the
pin [3].
Note
Note that the pin [3] drops when the gear [2] is removed.
a052f2c006ca
6. Remove the arm [1] and remove the pin [2].

[1] [2]
Note
Note that the pin [2] drops when the arm [1] is removed.
a052f2c007ca
F -81
[2] [3] [1] 7. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the pick-up roller assy [3] from
the paper feed roller assy [2].
a052f2c008ca
[1] [2] [4] 8. Remove the C-clip [1] and then pull out the paper feed roller [2]
from the shaft to replace.
Note
When reinstalling the paper feed roller, be sure to reinstall
so that the side with arrow mark [3] faces to the gear [4].
[3]
a052f2c009ca

[2] Note
Note that the pin [2] drops when the C-clip [1] is removed.
10. Remove the pin [2] and remove the pick-up roller [3].
[3] 11. Remove the C-clip [4].
Note
Note that the pin [5] drops when the C-clip [4] is removed.
12. Remove the pin [5] and remove the pick-up roller [6].
14. After replacing the pick-up roller and paper feed roller, conduct the
following steps.
- For pick up roller: Counter reset of the parts counter No.288
- For the paper feed roller: Counter reset of the parts counter No.
289
[6]
[5]
a052f2c010ca
6.2.3 Replacing the separation roller

Separation roller
F -82
(2) Procedure
2. Release the claw lock [2] of the separation unit cover to the inside
[2]
to remove.
[1]
[2]
a052f2c011ca
[1] 3. Hold the edges of the roller shaft and pull up the separation roller
[1].
a052f2c012ca
[1] 4. Remove the separation unit [1] to replace.

6. After replacing the separation roller, conduct the following item.
a052f2c013ca
6.2.4 Cleaning the timing sensor (PS302)

Timing sensor (PS302)
: Every 300,000 prints
F -83
(2) Procedure
1. Fix the hinge adjustment brackets at 90 degrees. (Refer to I.11.2
[1] [2] [4] [5] [3] [2]
Hinge angle adjustment (90 degrees))
2. Open the DF [1] vertically.
3. Remove 2 screws [2] and then open the metal plate [3] in the
arrow-marked direction [4].
Note
Note that each of 2 screws is different type.
4. Clean the timing sensor (PS32) with a blower brush from the hole
[5].
a052f2c014ca
6.2.5 Removing/reinstalling the registration roller cover

[3] 2. Raise the paper feed tray [2] straight up.
3. Remove 4 screws [3] and then remove the registration roller cover
[4].
[4] [1]
[2]
[3]
a052f2c015ca
6.2.6 Cleaning the registration roller

Registration roller
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the registration roller cover. (Refer to F.6.2.5 Removing/
reinstalling the registration roller cover)
2. Wipe 3 registration rollers [1] with the cleaning pad soaked in the
isopropyl alcohol.
a052f2c016ca
F -84
6.2.7 Cleaning the registration sensor (PS301)

Registration sensor (PS301)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the registration roller cover. (Refer to F.6.2.5 Removing/
[1]
reinstalling the registration roller cover)
2. Clean the registration sensor (PS301) [2] with the blower brush.
a052f2c017ca
F -85
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L PROCEDURE PF-6...
7. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PF-602

CAUTION
7.2 Tray section

7.2.1 Precautions on maintenance of the tray section
Note
The replacement procedures for the pick-up roller, paper feed roller, and the separation roller in tray/4 are the same for those in
tray/5.
The explanation here is made by the example of tray/4.
After the installation is completed, rotate the pick-up roller in the paper feed direction (clockwise as seen from the front side) to
see if the paper feed roller rotates smoothly.
The rotation is restricted only in the paper feed direction (clockwise as seen from the front side) and be careful not to rotate the
roller counterclockwise.
The orientation of the pick-up roller assy and the separation roller assy in the main unit differs from that of the rollers in the PF.
7.2.2 Replacing the Pick-up rubber/paper feed roller

Pick-up rubber
: Every 600,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 300,000 feed)
Paper feed roller
(2) Procedure
Note
The appearance of the collars is the same for the paper feed roller and the separation roller. However, the collar of the paper
feed roller has a one-way mechanism inside, be sure not to mix up these two rollers.
[3] [4] 2. Open the vertical conveyance unit guide plate [2] (Tray/4 only).
3. Insert a screwdriver or a similar tool into the hole [3], lift up the tray
lock lever [4] slightly, and pull out the tray [5].
[2] [1] [5]
a03xf2c001ca
F -86
4. Check point when pulling out the tray
Note
Do not pull out tray [1] all the way. Hold tray [1] so that the
stopper [3] on the left side of the tray pushed in, and make
[3] the pick-up holder assy [2] placed horizontally (paper feed
position).
[2] [1]
a03xf2c002ca
[8] [7] [5] [6] 5. Rotate the pick-up roller [1] in the direction of the arrow (clockwise
as seen from the front side) and bring the coupling [2] to the
lengthwise direction.
Note
Be sure not to rotate the pick-up roller against the
direction of the arrow forcibly, as the roller is designed
not to rotate in that direction.

7. Remove the bearing/Fr [4].
8. Move the bearing/Rr [5] to the rear side.
Note
When installing the bearing, hold down the metal plate [6]
of the pick-up roller assy slightly, and insert the flat part
[3] [2] [1] [7] of the bearing /Rr [5] while keeping it horizontally into
the notch [8] of the metal plate. Then, insert the bearing /
Fr [4] in the same manner.
[4] [5]
a03xt3c001ca
F -87
9. Hold the pick-up roller assy [1] by hand and lift and tilt the paper
feed roller [3] so that it rotates on the shaft [2] of the pick-up roller
to remove it from the notch of the bearing [4] and the coupling [5].
Note
When removing the pick-up roller assy [1], be careful not
to damage the sensor [6] with the metal plate.
[6]
[4] [5] [1]
[3] [2] a03xt3c002ca
[3] 10. Remove the pick-up roller shaft [2] from the arm [1] of the paper
feed guide plate and then remove the pick-up roller assembly [3].
[2] [1]
a03xt3c003ca
[1] [3] [2] 11. Remove the C-clip [1], pull out the shaft [2], and remove the pick-
up roller [3].
12. Remove the pick-up rubber from the pick-up roller.
13. Replace the pick-up rubber.
a03xt3c004ca
F -88
14. Remove the C-clip [1] and remove the bearing [2].
[1] [2] [4] [3] [5]
15. Slide the bearing [3] and remove the paper feed roller [4] together
with the shaft [5].
a03xf2c007cb
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

16. Remove the actuator [2] from the shaft [1].
17. Remove the C-clip [3] and pull out the paper feed roller [4] from the
collar [5].
a03xf2c008cb
[2] [1] 18. Replace the paper feed roller.

Note
The appearance of the collars is the same for the paper
feed roller and the separation roller. However, the collar
[1] of the paper feed roller has a one-way mechanism
inside while the collar [2] of the separation roller has no
oneway mechanism, be sure not to mix up these two
rollers.
20. After replacing the pick-up rubber and paper feed roller, conduct
a03xf2c009ca the following steps.
- For the pick-up rubber of the tray /4: Counter reset of the parts
counter No.162, tray /5: No.166
- For the paper feed roller of the tray /4: Counter reset of the parts

Separation roller
(2) Procedure
Note
The appearance of the collars is the same for the paper feed roller and the separation roller. However, the collar of the paper
feed roller has a one-way mechanism inside, be sure not to mix up these two rollers.
F -89
[2] [1] [5]
a03xf2c010ca

[3] 5. Disengage the coupling pin [4] from the joint [5] while pressing
down the metal plate [3] of the separation roller assy [2], and
remove the separation roller assy [2].
Note
When installing the separation roller assy, press down the
metal plate [3] of the separation roller assy [2] and engage
the coupling pin [4] to the joint [5].
[5] [4] [2]
[1]
a03xf2c011ca
6. Remove the C-clip [1] of the separation roller assy and remove the
[2] [3] [1]
separation roller [3] together with the shaft [2].
a03xf2c012cb
F -90
[1] [4] [3] [2] 7. Pull out the gear [2], the collar [3] and the separation roller [4] from
the shaft [1] to the arrow-marked direction, and remove them.
8. Replace the separation roller [4].
Note
The appearance of the collars is the same for the paper
feed roller and the separation roller. However, the collar
[5] of the paper feed roller has a one-way mechanism
inside while the collar [6] of the separation roller has no
oneway mechanism, be sure not to mix up these two
rollers.
[6] [5] - For the separation roller of the tray /4: Counter reset of the parts
a03xf2c013cb
7.2.4 Replacing the paper feed clutch (CL1/CL4) and the separation clutch (CL2/CL5)
Note
The replacement procedures for the paper feed clutch and the separation clutch in tray/4 are the same for those in tray/5. The
explanation here is made by the example of tray/5.

Paper feed clutch/1 (CL1), /2 (CL4)
: Every 2,400,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 2,000,000 feed)
Separation clutch/1 (CL2), /2 (CL5)
: Every 2,400,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 2,000,000 feed)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the stopper and pull out the tray. (Refer to G.4.2.6 Tray)
[1] [3]
2. Remove two screws [1], bend the stopper [2] in the direction of the
arrow, and remove the paper feed cover [3].
Note
For easier operation, lift up the under part [4] of the cover
when installing the paper feed cover [3].
When installing the paper feed cover [3], be sure to insert
the tab [6] into the hole [5] of the metal plate.
[2] [3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
a03xf2c014ca
F -91
3. Remove 1 each of the connectors [1].
[3] [4]
4. Remove the two C-clips [2], and remove the paper feed clutch
(CL1/CL4) [3] and the separation clutch (CL2/CL5) [4].
Note
When installing the clutch, be sure to engage the stopper
[5] of the clutch with the projection [6] of the metal plate.

6. After replacing the paper feed clutches /1 (CL1) and /2 (CL4) and
the separation clutches /1 (CL2) and /2 (CL5), conduct the
following steps.
- For the paper feed clutches /1 (CL1) and /2 (CL4) of the tray /4:
Counter reset of the parts counter No.164, tray /5: No.168
[2] [5] [6] [1] - For the separation clutches /1 (CL2) and /2 (CL5) of the tray /4:
Counter reset of the parts counter No.165, tray /5: No.169
[5] [6] [2] [1]
a03xf2c015ca
7.3 Conveyance section

7.3.1 Replacing the vertical conveyance clutch/1 (CL7), /2 (CL8), and /3 (CL9)
Vertical conveyance clutch/1 (CL7), /2 (CL8), and /3 (CL9)
Every 2,400,000 prints (actual replacement cycle: every 2,000,000 feed)
(2) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove the following parts.
Rear cover /Rt (Refer to G.4.2.4 The rear cover/Lt1 and /Rt)
Rear cover /Lt (Refer to G.4.2.4 The rear cover/Lt1 and /Rt)
Rear cover /Lt (Refer to G.4.2.3 Rear cover /Lt2)
2. Remove the four screws [1] and remove the gear mounting plate
[2].
a03xf2c016ca
F -92
[6] [7] [8]
4. Remove the three screws [2] and the three wire binding covers [3].
Note
When installing the wire binding [4], pass the binding
through the hole in the wire binding cover [3].
5. Remove the three C-clips [5] and remove the vertical conveyance
clutch/1 (MC7) [6], /2 (MC8) [7], and /3 (MC9) [8].
[5] [2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
a03xf2c017ca
[1] 6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
Note
[1] of the clutch with the projection [2] of the metal plate.
7. After replacing the vertical conveyance clutch /1 (CL7), /2 (CL8)

and /3 (CL9), conduct the following items.
For the vertical conveyance clutch /1 (CL7): Counter reset of the
parts counter No.170
[2]
a03xf2c018ca
7.3.2 Replacing the horizontal conveyance clutch/1 (CL10), /2 (CL11), and pre-registration clutch (CL12)
Horizontal conveyance clutch/1 (CL10), /2 (CL11), and pre-registration clutch (CL12)
Every 2,400,000 prints (actual replacement cycle: every 2,000,000 feed)
(2) Procedure
Rear cover /Lt1 (Refer to G.4.2.4 The rear cover/Lt1 and /Rt)
Rear cover /Lt (Refer to G.4.2.3 Rear cover /Lt2)
[2].
a03xf2c019ca
F -93
[1]
[4] 4. Remove the three screws [2] and the three wire binding covers [3].
[3] [10] Note
When installing the wire binding [4], pass the binding
[9]
through the hole in the wire binding cover [3].
[2]
5. Remove the three C-clips [5] and remove the horizontal
conveyance clutch/1 (CL10) [6], /2 (CL11) [7], and the pre-
[5] registration clutch (CL12) [8].
Note
When installing the clutches, be sure to match the
[6] [8] [7] stoppers [9] with the cutout of the rear panel [10].
[9] of the clutch with the pin [11].

7. After replacing the horizontal conveyance clutches /1 (CL10), /2
(CL11) and the pre-registration clutch (CL12), conduct the
following item.
For the horizontal conveyance clutch /1 (CL10): Counter reset of
the parts counter No.174.
- For the horizontal conveyance clutch /2 (CL11): Counter reset of
the parts counter No.175.
For the pre-registration clutch (CL12): Counter reset of the parts
[1]
counter No.173.
[4] [11]
[2]
[3]
[9]
[5]
a03xf2c020ca
F -94
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L PROCEDURE LU-2...
8. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE LU-202

8.1.1 Precautions on maintenance
CAUTION
8.1.2 Cleaning/pre-registration roller

Paper dust removing brush
: Actual cleaning cycle : Every 200,000 prints *1
Pre-registration roller
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C6000L
*2 C5501
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] [3] 1. Remove the upper door. (Refer to G.5.2.2 Upper door)
2. Remove the paper feed cover. (Refer to G.5.2.4 The paper feed
cover)
3. Remove the 2 screws [1] and remove the paper dust cleaner brush
[2].
4. Clean the paper dust removing brush [2] and the pre-registration
roller [3].
a03wf2c001ca
8.1.3 Removing/installing paper feed roller Assy

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] [3] [5] [10] [9][4][2][1] [6] [8] 1. Remove the upper door. (Refer to G.5.2.2 Upper door)
cover)
3. Remove the 2 C-clips [1], and slide the 2 bearings [2] outward.
4. After rotating the paper feed roller assy [5] to the position free from
upper limit sensor (PS109) [3] and the paper empty sensor
(PS108) [4], remove the coupling [8] while avoiding notch [6] and
the arm [7] of paper feed guide plate, and remove the paper feed
roller assy [5].
Note
When removing/installing, be careful not to damage the
upper limit sensor (PS109) [3] and the paper empty sensor
(PS108) [4].
When installing, make sure that the arm [9] is underneath
[6] [7] a03wf2c002ca the lever [10].
8.1.4 Replacing the paper feed roller/pick-up roller

Paper feed roller
: Every 600,000 prints (actual replacement cycle: every 300,000 feed)
Pick-up roller
F -95
(2) Procedure
[2] [3] 1. Remove the paper feed roller assy. (Refer to F.8.1.3 Removing/
installing paper feed roller Assy)
2. Turn over the paper feed roller assy.
4. Remove the 2 C-clips [2], and remove the coupling bearing [3].
[1] [2] a03wf2c003cb
[2] [5] [1]

5. Slide the coupling bearing [1] and remove the mounting bracket
[2].
6. Remove the C-clip [3] and remove the paper feed roller [4].
Note
Be sure to reinstall in the same direction with the
removing direction.
7. Remove the pick-up roller [5].
[3] [4]
a03wf2c004cb
[2] [1] 8. Remove the collar [2] from the pick-up roller [1].
10. After replacing the paper feed roller and the pick-up roller, conduct
the following item.
- For paper feed roller: Counter reset of the parts counter No.150.
- For pick up roller: Counter reset of the parts counter No.149
a03wf2c005cb

Separation roller
(2) Procedure
1. Open the upper door.
[2] [1] a03wf2c006ca
F -96
3. Remove the 2 screws [1], pull out the front side while pressing
down the separation roller [2], remove the coupling [3], and
remove the separation roller assy [4].
[3]
[2]
[4] [1] a03wf2c007ca

5. Rotate the shaft to match its D-shape end with the D-cut of the
metal plate [2], and remove the separation roller [3].
Note
[1] [3] [4] When removing/installing, be careful not to damage the
protection sheet [4].
[2]
[1]
a03wf2c008cb
[1] [2] 6. Remove the separation roller [1] from the collar [2].
Note
Be sure to insert the claw [4] of the gear [3] to the hole[5]
of the separation roller [1] in securely.
Be careful not to let any grease spill or drip on the
separation roller.

For the separation roller: Counter reset of the parts counter No.150
[3]
[1]
[5]
[4]
a03wf2c009cb
8.1.6 Replacing paper feed clutch (CL101) /pre-registration clutch (CL102)

Paper feed clutch (CL101)
: Every 2,400,000 prints (actual replacement cycle: every 2,000,000 feed)
Pre-registration clutch (CL102)
: Every 2,400,000 prints (actual replacement cycle: every 2,000,000 feed)
F -97
(2) Procedure
[2] [3] [5] [6] [7] [5] [4] [2] 1. Remove the clutch cover. (Refer to G.5.2.3 The clutch cover)
2. Disconnect 2 connectors [1].
3. Remove the 2 C-clips [2] and remove the paper feed clutch
(MC101) [3], and remove the pre-registration clutch [4].
Note
When installing, be sure to insert the stoppers [5] of the
clutches over the screw [6] and the metal plate [7].

5. After replacing the paper feed clutch (CL101) and the pre-
registration clutch (CL102), conduct the following item.
For the paper feed clutch (CL101): Counter reset of the parts
counter No.151
For the paper feed clutch (CL102): Counter reset of the parts
counter No.152
[1] a03wf2c010ca
F -98
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L PROCEDURE MB-5...
9. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE MB-504

CAUTION

9.2.1 Replacing the pick-up roller /BP and the paper feed roller rubber /BP
Pick-up roller /BP: Every 4,000,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 800,000 feeds)
Paper feed roller rubber /BP: Every 1,400,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 125,000 feeds)
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Pull out the duplex section. (Refer to F.5.11.1 Replacing the
2. Remove 6 screws [1], and then remove the paper feed solenoid
cover [2].
[2] [1] a03uf2c058ca
[2] [1] 3. Remove the C-clip [1].

4. Remove the bearing [2], and then remove the paper feed roller unit
[3].
[3] 8050ma3076
[4] [3] [2] 5. Check point when reinstalling the paper feed roller unit
Note
When reinstalling the paper feed roller unit [1], be sure to
set the actuator section [2] to the detection section of the
paper empty sensor /BP (PS47) [3].
When reinstalling the paper feed roller unit [1], be sure to
contact the leading edge of the lift lever [4] on the paper
feed side to the inside the plate of the paper feed roller
unit [1].
[1] 8050ma3079
[2] [3] 6. Remove the C-clip [1], pull out the shaft [2], and remove the pick-
up roller assy [3].
7. Remove the pick-up roller /BP [4] from the pick-up roller assy [3].
[4] [1] 8050ma3077
F -99
[4] 8. Remove the paper feed roller assy [2] from the shaft [1].
9. Remove the paper feed roller rubber /BP [3] from the paper feed
roller assy [2].
Note
When reinstalling the paper feed roller rubber /BP, be sure
to set it with its paint-marked side [4] on the gear side [5].
11. After replacing the pick-up roller /BP and paper feed roller rubber /
BP, conduct the following items.
Counter reset of the parts counter No.112 for the pick-up roller /
BP, Counter reset of the parts counter No.108 for the paper feed
roller rubber /BP
[2] [3] [5] [1] a03uf2c059ca
9.2.2 Replacing the separation roller rubber /BP

Separation roller rubber /BP: Every 1,400,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: 125,000 feeds)
(2) Procedure
[6] 1. Remove the pick-up roller /BP and the paper feed roller assy.
(Refer to F.9.2.1 Replacing the pick-up roller /BP and the paper
feed roller rubber /BP)
3. Remove the C-clip [2], pull out the shaft [3], and remove the
separation roller assy [4].
4. Remove the separation roller rubber /BP [5] from the separation
[5] roller assy.
Note
When reinstalling the separation roller rubber /BP, be sure
to set it with its paint-marked side [6] on the gear side [7].

6. After replacing the separation roller rubber /BP, conduct the
following item.
[3] [2] [4] [1] [7] a03uf2c060ca
9.2.3 Replacing the paper feed clutch /BP (CL6)

Paper feed clutch /BP (CL6): Every 4,000,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 2,000,000 feeds)
(2) Procedure
3. Remove the duplex section covers /Rt and /Lt. (Refer to F.5.11.1
Replacing the intermediate conveyance clutches /2 (CL4) and /3
(CL5))
5. Remove the C-clip [2] and remove the paper feed clutch /BP (CL6)
[3].
[1] 8050ma3082
F -100
Note
When reinstalling CL6 [1], be sure to align each stopper
[2] to each guide [3].
7. After replacing the paper feed clutch /BP (CL6), conduct the
following items.
[2] a03uf2c062ca
F -101
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 10. PERIODICAL
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE RU-...
10. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE RU-509/HM-102

CAUTION
10.2 Output paper density detection section

10.2.1 Cleaning the shutter
Shutter: Every 600,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the shutter cover [2].
[2] [1]
2. Loosen 2 screws [1] and then remove the shutter stopper [2] in the
arrow-marked direction.
[1]
[2]
[1] [2] 3. Pull out the shutter [1] and clean the correction plate [2] with a
blower brush.
Note
Be careful that the shutter [3] falls down when it is pulled
out too much.
10.3 Humidification section (HM-102)

10.3.1 Replacing the humidification rollers /Rt and /Lt and the water feed roller
(1) Periodically replaced parts/Spotted replaced parts/cycle
Humidification roller /Rt
: every 300,000 prints
Humidification roller /Lt
: every 300,000 prints
Water feed roller
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 1,500,000 prints)
F -102
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the wire and then open the front door at the maximum.
(Refer to G.6.3.2 Front door)
[1] 2. Remove the screw [1] and remove the humidification unit cover [2].
3. Pull out the humidification unit [3].
[2] [3]
[5] [8] 4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the connector cover /Lt [2].
5. Remove the screw [3] and then disconnect the connector [4].
7. Open the open/close plate /Lt assy [6] and remove in the arrow-
Note
When reinstalling the open/close plate /Lt assy [6], be sure
to hit the open/close plate /Lt assy [6] to the E-ring [8].
[7] [6]
[1] [2] [3] [4]
F -103
[1] [2] [3] [4] 8. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the connector cover /Rt
[2].
9. Release the clamp [3] and then disconnect the connector [4].
12. Open the open/close plate /Rt assy [7] and remove in the arrow-
[5] [8] [7] Note
When reinstalling the open/close plate /Rt assy [7], be
sure to hit the open/close plate /Rt assy [7] to the E-ring
[9].
[6] [9]

14. Remove the humidification roller assy [2].
[2]
F -104
15. Check point when reinstalling the humidification roller assy
[1] Note
When reinstalling the humidification roller assy, be sure to
set the projections [1] of the pressure release cam so that
they hit the pressure rollers [2] beforehand. (Execute this
setting to all 4 places.)
When reinstalling the humidification roller assy, be sure to
turn the gear so that the projection [3] of the gear aligns
with the notch [4] beforehand.
When reinstalling the humidification roller assy, be sure
not to mis-align the positions of the projections of the
humidification pressure cam [1] and the gear [3].
[2] [2]
[3]
[4]
F -105
16. Put the humidification roller assy with bottom-up.
[8] [7] [12] [6] [5] [3] 17. Remove 2 C-clips [1], and remove 2 gears [2].
18. Remove the C-clip [3], and remove the gear [5] with 2 bearings [4].
19. Remove the spacer [6].
20. Remove the C-clip [7], and remove the gear [8]
21. Remove the C-clip [9], and remove the gear [10] and the spacer
[11].
22. Remove the gear [12].
[11] [10] [9] [4]
[2] [1] [2]
F -106
23. Remove 2 C-clips [1], and then remove the humidification pressure
[8] [7] cams /FrRt [2] and /FrLt [3] and 2 bearings [4].
24. Remove the C-clips [5], and then remove the humidification
pressure cam /RrLt [6].
25. Remove the humidification pressure cam /RrRt [7] and 2 bearings
[8].
26. Remove the humidification rollers /Rt [9] and /Lt [10] in the arrow-
Note
Remove the control roller [12] releasing to outside.
[6] [5]
[11] [10]
[12] [9]
[4] [3]
[2] [1]
27. Check point when reinstalling the humidification rollers/Rt [1] and /
[1] [3]
Lt [2]
Note
When reinstalling the humidification rollers /Rt [1] and /Lt
[2], be sure to note the following points.
The humidification roller /Rt is longer than the
humidification roller /Lt.
The side with the groove [3] on the roller shaft comes to
the front side.
Never touch the roller surface with bare hands.
[2]
F -107
28. Remove the C-clips [1], pressure rollers [2], and bearings [3], 4
[4] [5] [6] each.
29. Remove 2 water feed rollers [4] in the arrow-marked direction [5].
Note
When reinstalling the water feed roller, never touch the
roller surface with bare hands.
[2]
[3] [1]
[1] 30. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in
reverse.
Note
When reinstalling the pressure roller, be sure to set so
that the bearing [1] comes inside.
31. After replacing the humidification rollers /Rt and /Lt and the water
feed roller, conduct the following items.
The parts counter of the humidification roller /Rt
No.333 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.322 (C7000/C7000P/C70hc)
The parts counter of the humidification roller /Lt
No.334 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.323 (C7000/C7000P/C70hc)
The parts counter of the water feed roller
No.335 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.324 (C7000/C7000P/C70hc)
10.3.2 Replacing the water feed filter

Water feed filter: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 300,000 prints)
(2) Procedure
[2] 1. Open the front door.
2. Remove the screw [1] and then pull out the water feed tank [2].
[1]
F -108
[1] [2] 3. Remove 3 screws [1] and open the filter cap [2].
[1]
4. Remove the water feed filter [1].
5. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in
reverse.
6. After replacing the part, be sure to reset the parts counter.
No.339 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.325 (C7000/C7000P/C70hc)
F -109
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FS-...
11. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FS-521

CAUTION

11.2.1 Lubrication to bypass roller /Lw pressure release cam
(1) Periodic lubrication parts/Cycle
Bypass roller /Lw pressure release cam
: Every 3,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Lubricate to 2 bypass roller /Lw pressure release cams [1].
(Molykote EM-30L)
Note
Lubricate to the arc of the bypass roller /Lw pressure
release cam [1].
[1] a0gyt3c013ca
11.3 Stacker section

11.3.1 Replacing the intermediate roller release solenoid (SD7)
(1) Periodically replaced parts/Spotted replaced parts/Cycle
Intermediate roller release solenoid (SD7)
: Every 5,200,000 prints*1
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 5,400,000 operations) *3
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 C8000
(2) Procedure
[3] [1] 1. Open the front door and pull out the stacker unit.
2. Remove the screw [1] and 2 screws [2] and then remove the cover
[3].
[2] a0gyt3c001ca
F -110
[6] [5] [1] 3. Disconnect the connector [1] and 2 screws [2], and then remove
the intermediate roller release solenoid [3] to the allowed direction
[4].
Note
When installing it, insert the pin of the plunger [5] to the
groove [6] on the resin.
When installing it, install with the screw [2] so that the
stroke A of the plunger gets to the standard value.
Standard value: A = 5.0mm to 6.0mm
A
[2] [3] [4] a0gyt3c002ca
11.3.2 Lubrication to worm gear and cam

Warm gear and cam: Every 3,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Pull out the stacker unit [1] and lubricate to the cam [2] and all over
around the worm gear [3]. (Molykote EM-30L)
[3] [2] a0gyt3c014ca
11.4 Stapler section

11.4.1 Replacing the stapler assy
Stapler assy /Fr
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 500,000 staples)
Stapler assy /Rr
(2) Pre-arrangement for replacing the stapler assy

CAUTION
After moving the stapler, be sure to unplug the power plug from the power outlet.
Note
Be careful not to get your hand caught in the opening [1] of the stapler assy.
Pressing the staple side [2] and/or the clinch side [3] cause the opening [1] to close unexpectedly. It is very difficult to open the
opening by hand once it has closed. So, be careful not to close it.
When holding the stapler assy, be sure to hold it at both ends of the cam shaft [4].
F -111
[3] [4]
[1]
[2]
fs503fs2030c
[2] [1] 1. Select 2 sheets A4 originals with 1-staple at the upper right corner,
make a print and then move the stapler to the stapling position.
2. Turn OFF the power switch (SW2) and the main power switch
(SW1) of the main body and unplug the power plug from the power
outlet.
3. Open the front door and pull out the stacker unit.
4. Remove the screw [1] of the wire [2].
a0gyt3c015ca
[3] 5. Remove the stapler cartridges /Fr [1] and /Rr [2].
6. Remove the screws [3], 1 each, of the stoppers provided in front
and rear and pull further out the stacker unit.
[1] [2]
[3] fs503fs2005c
F -112
(3) Stapler assy /Fr

[2] [1] 1. Conduct "F.11.4.1.(2) Pre-arrangement for replacing the stapler
assy."
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the stacker entrance roller
mounting plate /Fr [2].
[1] fs503fs2031c
[2] [3] 3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the ground [2] and the
metal fitting [3].
[1]
fs503fs2032c
[7] [6] 4. Disconnect 2 connectors [1] and remove the wire binding band [2].
5. Remove 1 screw [3] and raise the lower section of the stapler assy
mounting plate [4] a little to remove it from the notch [5]. Slide the
upper notch [6] to the lower side to release it from the pin [7] and
then remove the stapler assy /Fr [8] together with the mounting
plate [4].
7. After replacing the stapler assy /Fr, conduct the following item.
For fusing roller assy: Counter reset of the parts counter No.193
[8]
[1]
[2]
[5] [4] [3] fs503fs2033c
(4) Stapler assy /Rr

[1] [2] 1. Conduct "F.11.4.1.(2) Pre-arrangement for replacing the stapler
assy."
Note
The following steps are the removal steps using a short
driver. When using a driver of a regular length, removal of
the stapler assy /Rr is available only when the stapler
assy /Fr has been already removed. When using a regular
length driver, be sure to remove the stapler assy /Fr in
advance by following the steps given in "F.11.4.1.(3)
Stapler assy /Fr."
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the stacker entrance roller
mounting plate /Rr [2].
[1] fs503fs2034c
F -113
[2] [3] 3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the ground [2] and the
metal fitting [3].
[1]
fs503fs2035c
[6]
4. Disconnect 2 connectors [1] and remove 2 wire binding bands [2].
5. In the same procedure as the step 5 of the stapler /Fr, remove the
screw [3] and raise the lower portion of the stapler mounting plate
[4] a little to remove it from the notch [5]. Slide it to the lower side
[2] and remove the stapler /Rr [6] together with the mounting plate [4].
[1]
7. After replacing the stapler assy /Rr, conduct the following item.
For stapler assy /Rr: Counter reset of the parts counter No.194
[4]
[3]
[5] 1050fs2036c
(5) Replacing the stapler assy

[1] 1. Conduct the following operations.
F.11.4.1.(2) Pre-arrangement for replacing the stapler assy
F.11.4.1.(3) Stapler assy /Fr
F.11.4.1.(4) Stapler assy /Rr
2. Remove 3 screws [1] together with the stapler assys /Fr and Rr,
and then remove the cut staple duct [2].
[2]
fs503fs2012c
[1] [3] 3. Remove 4 screws [1] together with the stapler assys /Fr and Rr,
and then remove the bracket [3] from the stapler [2].
Note
Take note that the brackets for the stapler assys /Fr and /
Rr are different in the position where the wire binding
band is attached.
[2]
fs503fs2013c
F -114
[2] 4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the stapler guide block [2].
[1] fs503fs2063c
(6) Checking of the stapler guide seal

Note
The pasting of the stapler guide seal is limited only to the stapler assy /Rr.
[1] 1. Conduct the following operations.
F.11.4.1.(2) Pre-arrangement for replacing the stapler assy
F.11.4.1.(4) Stapler assy /Rr
F.11.4.1.(5) Replacing the stapler assy
2. The stapler guide seal [2] must be pasted on the clincher side [1]
of the new stapler assy /Rr.
Note
Be sure to align the end line [3] on the clincher side [1]
with the bend line of the stapler guide seal [2] and paste it
with no slippage (tolerance: 0.5mm).
Be sure to check the guide seal to ensure it is not
damaged or soiled.
[3] [2] fs503fs2064c
11.4.2 Replacing the staples

Staple cartridge
: Every 5,000 staples
(2) Procedure
2. Pull the stapler cartridge knob [1] in the arrow-marked direction to
remove it.
[1] fs503fs2001c
F -115
[2] [1] 3. Hold the knob [2] of the cover [1] and open it.
4. Rotate and wind up carefully the remaining refill staples [3] to the
arrow-marked direction [4] and take it out.
Note
[3] Be careful when handling the refill staples since they are
apt to break away.
[4]
fs503fs2043c
[2] 5. With the refill staples [1] set as shown in the drawing, place them
gently in the pocket [2] of the stapler cartridge.
[1]
fs503fs2044c
[4] 6. Feed the refill staples [1] by hand to the arrow-marked direction [2]
and get the tip of the refill staples near to the stapling position [3].
New refill staples are attached with a lead sheet.
Note
The tip of the refill staples can be pulled up to the stapling
position by this lead sheet.
[2]
7. Close the cover [4].
[3] fs503fs2045c
11.4.3 Cleaning the cut staple box

(1) Procedure
1. Open the front door.
2. Remove the screw [1] and pull out the cut staple box [2].
[1]
[2]
fs503fs2037c
11.5 Main tray section

11.5.1 Replacing the paper exit roller
Paper exit roller /A (sponge roller)
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 600,000 feeds)*3
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
CAUTION
After having lowered the main tray, be sure to unplug the power plug from the power outlet.
Note
When replacing the paper exit rollers /A (sponge roller), be sure to replace all 4 pairs of rollers (8 rollers in all).
F -116
(2) Procedure
1. Turn ON the sub power switch (SW2), lower the main tray [1]
[2]
blocking the light of the tray upper limit sensor (PS16) [2] during up
and down operation of the main tray, and then turn OFF the main
power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch (SW2) of the main
body.
2. Unplug the power plug of the main body from the power outlet.
[1]
a0gyt3c003ca
3. Insert a driver into the groove of the sponge roller [1] and remove
[1] the sponge roller [1] by prizing it open.
fs503fs2003c
4. With each of the depressions [1] of a new sponge roller and the
shaft brought together, press the sponge roller until it clicks to fit it
in securely.
5. After replacing the paper exit roller /A (sponge roller), conduct the
[1]
following item.
[1]
fs503fs2004c
11.5.2 Replacing the paper exit opening solenoid assy (SD9)

Paper exit opening solenoid assy (SD9)
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 5,400,000 operations) *3
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 C8000
F -117
(2) Procedure
[1] [3] 1. Remove the upper cover /1. (Refer to G.7.2.4 Upper cover /1)
2. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.7.2.7 Rear cover)
4. Remove the wiring harness from 6 wiring harness guides [2] and
slide the board mounting plate [3] backward.
Note
Be sure not to break the wiring harness when moving the
board mounting plate [3].
[2]
a0gyt3c004ca

[1] [6] [7] [5]
6. Remove the G-ring [2] and then remove the arm [3] from the pin
[4].
Note
Be sure to install the G-ring [2] to the position about 2mm
away from the arm [3] so that the arm is free to move.
Since the pin [4] does not have a groove, be sure to check
that the G-ring is fixed securely so that it does not come
of from the pin.
7. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the paper exit opening
solenoid assy (SD9) [6] together with the mounting plate [7].
[4] [2] [3]

a0gyt3c005ca
[3] 8. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the paper exit opening
solenoid assy (SD9) [3] from the mounting plate [2].
A Note
Be sure to check that the stroke of the plunger is the
standard value A.
Standard value A = 5mm 0.5mm
[1] [2] a0gyt3c007ca
F -118
10. Standard value when reinstalling the paper exit opening solenoid
unit
Note
Hold the paper exit opening solenoid (SD9) temporally
with screws and lower the mounting plate of the paper exit
opening solenoid assy once, then slide it upward to
tighten it fully at the position where the paper press arm
[1] starts moving and protrudes for the standard value
from the paper stopper plate [2].
Standard value A = -0.5mm to +0.5mm
[2] [1] a0gyt3c006ca
F -119

CAUTION

12.2.1 Replacing the paper exit roller (sponge roller)
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 200,000 prints)
Paper exit roller /B (sponge roller)
Note
When replacing the paper exit roller (sponge roller), be sure to replace 3 sets of the paper exit rollers /A (6 all) and 2 sets of the
paper exit rollers /B (4 all) at a time.
(2) Procedure
1. Turn ON the main power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch
(SW2) of the main body.
2. Push up the actuator [1] of the main tray upper limit sensor (PS2)
with fingers and down the main tray [2].
3. Turn OFF SW1 and SW2 of the main body, and unplug the power
plug.
[1] [2]
15vlf2c001na
4. Insert a driver into the groove of the sponge roller and remove the
[1] sponge roller by prizing it open.
15jkf2c002na
F -120
in securely.
[1] - Counter reset of the parts counter No.255, No.256
[1]
15jkf2c003na
12.2.2 Replacing the intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller)

Intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller)
Note
When replacing the intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller), be sure to replace both of 2 sets (4 all) at a time.
(2) Procedure
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and the bearing [2] and then remove the
shaft [3] of the intermediate roller.
[2]
[1]
[3]
15jkf2c004na
[1] 3. Insert a driver into the groove of the sponge roller and remove the
sponge roller by prizing it open.
15jkf2c005na
in securely.
[1] Counter reset of the parts counter No.257
Note
When reinstalling, check that the pin on the rear side of
[1] the intermediate conveyance roller shaft is inserted into
the groove on the receiver side securely.
15jkf2c006na

12.3.1 Replacing the paper assist roller (sponge roller)
Paper assist roller (sponge roller)
F -121
(2) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Open the front door.
2. Pull out the stacker unit.
3. Remove the C-clip [2] and then remove the paper assist roller [1].
15jkf2c007na
12.3.2 Replacement of the cleaning plate Assy

Cleaning plate Assy
(2) Procedure
[1]
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the cleaning plate Assy [2].
[2]
a0drf2c001ca

12.4.1 Replacing the stapler unit
(1) Spotted replaced parts/Cycle
Stapler unit
Note
Be sure not to move the stapler unit in the horizontal direction by hand. Otherwise, it causes the timing belt tooth skipping.
(2) Procedure
[3] [4] [1] 1. Open the front door.
3. Remove the cartridge from the stapler.
4. Remove 2 screws [2] from the stapler stand /Fr [1], and then
remove the stapler stand /Fr [1].
Note
When the screw hole for the screw [2] is too loose, the
screw hole [3] can be used.
When reinstalling it, be careful not to damage the pet [4].
[2] 15jkf2c008na
F -122
5. Remove the connector cover [1], and then disconnect 2
connectors [2].
6. Remove the screw [3], and then remove the ground [4].
[4] [3] [2] [1] 15jkf2c009nb
[2] [1] 7. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the stapler stand /Fr [2]
from the stapler /Fr [3].
[3] 15jkf2c010na
[1] 8. Repeat the steps 4 to 7 to remove the stapler /Rr [1].

- Counter reset of the parts counter No.274, No.275
15jkf2c011na
F -123

CAUTION

13.2.1 Replacing the paper exit roller (sponge roller)
Paper exit roller /B (sponge roller)
Note
When replacing the paper exit roller (sponge roller), be sure to replace 3 sets of the paper exit rollers /A (6 all) and 2 sets of the
paper exit rollers /B (4 all) at a time.
(2) Procedure
(SW2) of the main body.
with fingers and down the main tray [2].
3. Turn OFF SW1 and SW2 of the main body, and unplug the power
plug.
[1] [2]
15vlf2c001na
4. Insert a driver into the groove of the sponge roller and remove the
[1] sponge roller by prizing it open.
15jkf2c002na
F -124
in securely.
[1] - Counter reset of the parts counter No.255, No.256
[1]
15jkf2c003na
13.2.2 Replacing the intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller)

Intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller)
Note
When replacing the intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller), be sure to replace both of 2 sets (4 all) at a time.
(2) Procedure
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and the bearing [2] and then remove the
shaft [3] of the intermediate roller.
[2]
[1]
[3]
15jkf2c004na
[1] 3. Insert a driver into the groove of the sponge roller and remove the
sponge roller by prizing it open.
15jkf2c005na
in securely.
[1] Counter reset of the parts counter No.257
Note
When reinstalling, check that the pin on the rear side of
[1] the intermediate conveyance roller shaft is inserted into
the groove on the receiver side securely.
15jkf2c006na

13.3.1 Replacing the paper assist roller (sponge roller)
Paper assist roller (sponge roller)
F -125
(2) Procedure
3. Open the paper assist section [1] and then lift the paper assist
roller [2].
4. Remove the C-clip [3] and then remove the paper assist roller [2].
[1]
[3] [2] 15jmf2c001na

13.4.1 Removing/reinstalling the stapler unit cover
CAUTION
Pulling out the stacker unit while removing the FS from the main body causes falling of the FS and is at risk of injury.
(1) Procedure
2. Pull out the stacker unit [1].
[1] 15jmf2c002na
3. Remove 2 screws [1] provided on the rail stopper, and then pull
[1]
out the stacker unit [2] further.
Note
To prevent the falling of the FS, put something [3] under
the pulled out stacker unit for balancing.
[1]
[2]
[3] 15jmf2c003na
4. Remove 5 screws [1] and then remove the stapler unit cover [2].
[1]
[2]
15jmf2c004na
13.4.2 Replacing the stapler unit

Note
The stapler unit consists of the clincher section and the stapler section.
Be sure not to move the clincher section and the stapler section in the horizontal direction by hand. Otherwise, it causes the
timing belt tooth skipping.
F -126
After installing, be sure to perform the staple up/down position adjustment. (Refer to I.18.9 Staple up/down position adjustment)

Stapler unit
(2) Procedure
[2] [1] [3] 1. Enter the service mode and select [State Confirmation]- [I/O Check
Mode]. Perform the output code 72-32 : Stapler movement motor
(M11) (A4,1-stapling position). Then turn OFF the main body.
3. Pull out the stacker unit and remove the stapler unit cover. (Refer
to F.13.4.1 Removing/reinstalling the stapler unit cover)
4. Disconnect the connector [1], remove the screw [2] and then
remove the flat stitching stopper release unit /Fr [3].
5. Enter the service mode and select [State Confirmation]- [I/O Check
Mode]. Perform the output code 72-31, and then turn OFF the
main body.
15jmf2c005na
[5] 6. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the ground [2] and the
clamp [3].
7. Remove 4 screws [4] to remove the clincher /Fr [5], and then
remove the connector [6].
[6] [4]
[1]
[3] [2]
15jmf2c006na
[2] [1] 8. Remove the screw [1] and remove the flat stitching stopper release
unit /Rr [2].
9. Disconnect the connector [3] at the rear side of the flat stitching
stopper release unit /Rr [2] and remove the wiring harness from
the clamp [4].
[3] [4]
15jmf2c007na
F -127
[2] 10. Remove 4 screws [4] of the clincher /Rr [1] and then remove the
ground [3].
[1] [3] 15jmf2c008na
[3] 11. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the ball bearing bracket [2].
Then rotate the clincher /Rr so that it comes to the position easily
removed and disconnect the connector [4].
Note
Be careful not to lose the ball bearing retaining spring [5]
and the ball.
[4]
[5] [1]
[2] 15jmf2c009na
[2] 12. Remove the cartridge from the stapler.

13. Remove 4 screws [2] of the stapler /Fr [1], and remove the screw
[1] [3] of the ground cable. Then put out the stapler /Fr [1] and
disconnect the connector [4].
[2]
[3] [4] 15jmf2c010na
14. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the mounting plate [3] from the
stapler /Fr [2].
[1] [3] [2] 15jmf2c011na
[1] 15. Remove 2 screws [3] of the sensor cover [2] of the stapler /Rr [1]
After that remove the screw [4] of the ground cable and then
Note
When reinstalling the sensor cover [2], be sure to set it so
that the wiring harness does not interfere the stapler
[2]
rotation home sensor (PS13) [7] or it is not nipped by the
gear.
[5]
[3] [4] [6]

15jmf2c012na
F -128
[1] 16. Remove 4 screws [1] to remove the stapler /Rr [2], and then
[2] Note
When removing the stapler /Rr [2], be careful not to
damage PS13 [4].
[1]
[4] [3]
15jmf2c013na
17. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the mounting plate [3] from the
stapler /Rr [2].
Counter reset of the parts counters No.248 and No.249
[3] [1] [2] 15jmf2c014na
F -129
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PI-...
14. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PI-502

CAUTION

14.2.1 Replacing the pick-up roller /Up and the paper feed roller /Up
Pick-up roller /Up
: Spotted replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 200,000 feeds)
Paper feed roller /Up
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the upper cover. (Refer to G.11.2.2 Upper cover)
[1]
[1] [2] 2. Remove 2 C-clips [1] and slide outward the bearings [2] at the left
and right to remove the paper feed roller assy /Up [3].
[2]
[3]
15jff2c001na
3. Remove the bearing [1] and remove the actuator [2].
[1]
[2]
a04hf2c001ca
4. Remove 2 C-clips [1] and then remove 2 bearings [2].
[2]
[1]
a04hf2c002ca

6. Slide 2 roller shafts [2] in the arrow-marked direction and remove
the pick-up roller /Up [3] and the paper feed roller /Up [4].
Note
When reinstalling, be sure to set them so that the blue
surfaces of the one-way clutches of the pick-up roller and
the paper feed roller come to the front side.
[4] [1] a04hf2c003ca
F -130
[2] [5] [1] 7. Remove the pick-up roller [1] and the paper feed roller [2] from the
one-way clutches [3] and [4].
Note
When reinstalling the pick-up roller [1], insert the one-way
clutch [3] from the notch [5] side with its projection [6]
fitted to the notch [5] of the pick-up roller.
When reinstalling the paper feed roller [2], insert the one-
[7] way clutch [4] with its projection [8] fitted to the notch [7]
of the paper feed roller.
[4] [3]
[8] [6] a04hf2c004ca reverse.
9. After replacing the pick-up roller /Up and paper feed roller /Up,
For the pick up roller /Up: Counter reset of the parts counter
No.264 (C8000)
No.264 (C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C6000L)
No.350 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.187 (951)
For the feed roller /Up: Counter reset of the parts counter
No.265 (C8000)
No.265 (C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C6000L)
No.351 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.188 (951)
14.2.2 Replacing the pick-up roller /Lw and the paper feed roller /Lw
Pick-up roller /Lw
Paper feed roller /Lw
(2) Procedure
[1] [2]
1. Pull the release lever [1] and open the upper door [2].
2. Perform steps 2 to 7 of "F.14.2.1 Replacing the pick-up roller /Up
and the paper feed roller /Up."
reverse.
4. After replacing the pick-up roller /Lw and paper feed roller /Lw,
For the pick up roller /Lw: Counter reset of the parts counter
15jff2c004na No.269 (C8000)
No.269 (C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C6000L)
No.355 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.192 (951)
For the feed roller /Lw: Counter reset of the parts counter
No.270 (C8000)
No.270 (C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C6000L)
No.356 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.193 (951)
14.2.3 Replacing the separation roller /Up and the torque limiter /Up
Separation roller /Up
Torque limiter /Up
F -131
(2) Procedure
[1]
[1] [2] 2. Remove 2 C-clips [2] and slide outward the bearings [2] at the left
and right to remove the paper feed roller assy /Up [3].
[2]
[3]
15jff2c005na
[2] 3. Release the hooks on the right and left, and then remove the
separation roller assy /Up [2] by lifting it up.
[1] 15jff2c006na
[1] [2] 4. Remove the C-clip [1] from the separation roller assy /Up and then
remove the separation roller /Up [2] and the torque limiter /Up [3].
reverse.
[3]
Note
Be sure to install the separation roller /Up with its 2
notches [4] on the front and fitted to the projections [5].
[4]
6. After replacing the separation roller /Up and the torque limiter /Up,
[5] 15jff2c007na conduct the followings.
For the feed roller /Up: Counter reset of the parts counter
No.266 (C8000)
No.266 (C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C6000L)
No.352 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.189 (951)
For the torque limiter /Up: Counter reset of the parts counter
No.267 (C8000)
No.267 (C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C6000L)
No.353 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.190 (951)
14.2.4 Replacing the separation roller /Lw and the torque limiter /Lw
Separation roller /Lw
Torque limiter /Lw
(2) Procedure
[1] [2]
2. Perform steps 2, 3 and 4 of "F.14.2.3 Replacing the separation
roller /Up and the torque limiter /Up."
reverse.
4. After replacing the separation roller /Lw and the torque limiter /Lw,
conduct the followings.
For the separation roller /Lw: Counter reset of the parts counter
15jff2c008na No.271 (C8000)
No.271 (C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C6000L)
F -132
No.357 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.194 (951)
For the torque limiter /Lw: Counter reset of the parts counter
No.272 (C8000)
No.272 (C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C6000L)
No.358 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.195 (951)
14.2.5 Replacing the paper feed clutch /Up (CL201) and /Lw (CL202)
Paper feed clutch /Up (CL201)
: Spotted replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 1,000,000 feeds)
Paper feed clutch /Lw (CL202)
: Spotted replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 1,000,000 feeds)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the PI Unit. (Refer to G.11.2.5 PI unit)
[2] [1] [3] [5] 2. Remove the upper cover. (Refer to G.11.2.2 Upper cover)
4. Remove the screw [1] and remove the clutch fixing cover [2].
Note
When installing the clutch fixing plate, be sure to install it
so that the spring [3] comes under the fixing plate.
When installing the clutch fixing plate, be sure to engage
the stopper [4] of the clutch with the fixing plate and
install it.
5. Remove the connector [5], remove the E-ring [6] and remove the
paper feed clutch /Up [7].
Note
[4] [7] When installing the paper feed clutch /Up [7], be sure to
engage the D-cut [8] of the shaft with the paper feed
clutch /Up and install it.
[6] [8]
F -133
[4] 7. Remove 5 screws [3] and disconnect 2 connectors [4].
8. Release the wiring from the suddle and pull out the PIDB mounting
plate [5] toward you.
[3]
[1] [2] [5]
[3]
Note
When installing the PIDB mounting plate, be sure to
engage the notch [1] of the mounting plate with the
projection [2] of the paper feed clutch /Lw.
[2] [1]
9. Remove the E-ring [1] and remove the conveyance clutch /Lw [2].
Note
When installing the paper feed clutch /Up [2], be sure to
engage the D-cut [3] of the shaft with the paper feed
clutch /Up and install it.

reverse.
11. After replacing the paper feed clutch /Up and /Lw, conduct the
following steps.
For the paper feed clutch /Up: Counter reset of the parts counter
No.263 (C8000)
[1] [3] [2] No.263 (C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C6000L)
No.349 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.186 (951)
For the paper feed clutch /Lw: Counter reset of the parts counter
No.268 (C8000)
No.268 (C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C6000L)
No.354 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.191 (951)
F -134
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE LS-...
15. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE LS-505

CAUTION

15.2.1 Replacing the stacker tray up down motor (M1)
Stacker tray up down motor (M1)
: Every 1,500,000 prints *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 5,000,000 feeds *2)
*1 The periodical replacement is only for 1200/1200P/1051.
*2 Actual replacement cycle of1250/1250P/1052/1200/1200P/1051/C8000
(2) Procedure
[3] [1] [4] 1. Remove the rear cover /Lw. (Refer to G.12.2.2 Cover)
3. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the sensor mounting plate [3].
4. Remove 4 screws [4] and remove the stacker tray up down motor
(M1) [5].
[2] [5] ls502fs2001c
5. Check point when reinstalling the stacker tray up down motor (M1)
[5] Note
When reinstalling the stacker tray up down motor (M1), be
sure to check that the belt [2] has been engaged with the
gear [1], and then engage it with the gear [3] before
[4] fastening the stacker tray up down motor (M1) [4].
When the belt [2] is not horizontally attached between the
gear [1] and the gear [3], make adjustments by rotating the
encoder [5] counterclockwise.
[1] [3]
[2] ls502fs2002c
6. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the motor mounting plate [3]
[2] from the stacker tray up down motor (M1) [2].
reverse.
[3] 8. After replacing the part, be sure to reset the parts counter.
No.250, No.255 or No.245 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.216 or No.221 (1200/1200P/1051)
No.219 or No.224 (C8000)
[1]
ls502fs2003c
15.2.2 Replacing the paper press solenoid /3 (SD8)

Paper press solenoid /3 (SD8)
F -135
(2) Procedure
Note
When conducting this operation, be sure to bring the stacker tray down to the bottom in advance.
2. Slide the guide rail [2] in the arrow-marked direction and release
[2] 2 the fixing.
Note
In this step, be careful not to release the fixing on the rear
1
guide rail [3].
[3]
[1]
ls502fs2004c
3. Slant the shift unit [1] to the front side so that you can see the
upper surface of it.
Note
Be sure to slide the shift unit about 10cm to the right in
[1] advance.
Be careful that the belt [2] does not get pushed down by
the bottom of the shift unit.
4. Release the cable stopper [3] and remove the ribbon cable [5] from
[2]
the connector [4].
[4]
[5]
[3] ls502fs2005c
5. How to handle the ribbon cable

Note
Slide the lock [2] of the connector [1] for the ribbon cable
[1] in the arrow-marked direction and remove the ribbon
cable [3].
[3] When reinstalling the ribbon cable, slide the lock in the
reverse direction after inserting the cable.
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
ls502fs2006c
F -136
7. Slide the guide rail [2] in the arrow-marked direction and release
the fixing.
8. Remove the belt [5] from the stopper section [4] of the shift unit [3].
[4] [5]
[3]
2
[2]
1
[1] ls502fs2007c
9. Check point when reinstalling the belt

Note
[2] When attaching the belt [2] to the stopper section [1], slide
the shift unit [3] in the arrow-marked direction and engage
[1] the stopper section with the belt.
[2]
[1]
[3]
ls502fs2008c
[1] [4] 10. Remove the shift unit [2] through the clearance between the belts
[1].
Note
When removing the conveyance unit [2], be careful that
the edge stoppers [3] and the paper pressure arms /3 [4]
do not contact the belt [1].
[2]
[4] [3] ls502fs2009c
F -137
13. Rotate the wire saddle [5] in the arrow-marked direction and
remove it.
14. Remove 3 screws [3] and remove the paper press solenoid /3 assy
[4].
[1] [3] [5] [4]
[3]
[3] [2] ls502fs2010c
15. Check point when reinstalling the paper press solenoid /3 assy
Note
When reinstalling the paper press solenoid /3 assy, be
[1]
sure to insert the pin [2] of the shaft into the slit section
[1] at the tip of the solenoid.
[2]
ls502fs2011c
[3] 16. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the solenoid mounting plate [3]
from the paper press solenoid /3 (SD8) [2].
reverse.
No.249, No.254 or No.259 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.215 or No.220 (1200/1200P/1051)
No.218 or No.223 (C8000)
[2] ls502fs2012c

F -138
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the front covers /Up and /Lw. (Refer to G.12.2.2 Cover)
[3] [4]
3. Remove the spring [2].
[2] 4. Remove 2 screws [3] and remove the paper press solenoid /1 assy
[4].
Note
When reinstalling the paper press solenoid /1 assy, be
[6] sure to insert the actuator [6] provided at the tip of the
shaft into the slit section [5] at the tip of the solenoid.
[5] [1] a0h1t3c001ca
[1] 5. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the solenoid mounting plate [3]
from the paper press solenoid /1 (SD6) [2].
reverse.
No.246, No.251 or No.256 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.218 or No.223 (1200/1200P/1051)
No.215 or No.220 (C8000)
[3] [2] a0h1t3c002ca

(2) Procedure
[2] [6] 1. Remove the front covers /Up and /Lw. (Refer to G.12.2.2 Cover)
4. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the paper press solenoid /2
(SD7) [4].
Note
[3]
When reinstalling the paper press solenoid /2 (SD7), be
sure to insert the actuator [6] provided at the tip of the
shaft into the slit section [5] at the tip of the solenoid.

reverse.
[1] [4] ls502fs2033c 6. After replacing the part, be sure to reset the parts counter.
No.248, No.253 or No.258 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.214 or No.219 (1200/1200P/1051)
No.217 or No.222 (C8000)
15.2.5 Replacing the rear stopper solenoid (SD3)

Rear stopper solenoid (SD3)
F -139
(2) Procedure
[5] [6] [2] 1. Remove the rear cover /Lw. (Refer to G.12.2.2 Cover)
4. Remove 2 screws [3] and remove the rear stopper solenoid (SD3)
[3] [4].
Note
When reinstalling the rear stopper solenoid (SD3), be sure
to insert the actuator [6] provided at the tip of the shaft
[4] into the slit section [5] at the tip of the solenoid.

reverse.
[1] ls502fs2016c 6. After replacing the part, be sure to reset the parts counter.
No.247, No.252 or No.257 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.213 or No.218 (1200/1200P/1051)
No.216 or No.221 (C8000)
F -140
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FD-...
16. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FD-503

CAUTION

16.2.1 Replacing roller solenoids /1 (SD5) to /4 (SD8)
Roller solenoid /1 (SD5) to /4 (SD8)
: Every 10,500,000 prints *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 5,000,000 punches *2)
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the cord support board /A
[2].
2. Remove the hook of the spring [3] from the shaft [4].
[2]
[4]
[3] fd501fs2001c

4. Remove each of 2 screws [2] and then remove the roller
solenoids /1 (SD5) to /4 (SD8) [3].
reverse.
[1]
[2] No.242 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.209 (1200/1200P/1051)
No.208 (C8000)
[3]
7. Make adjustments of the installation position. (Refer to I.22.1
[2] Roller solenoids /1 (SD5), /2 (SD6), /3 (SD7) and /4 (SD8) position
[1] adjustment)
fd501fs2002c
16.2.2 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18)

2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18)
F -141
(2) Procedure
2. Disconnect 3 connectors [1] and then remove the wiring harnesses
from the 7 wiring harness guides [3] of the coupling arm /Rr [2].
[2]
[1]
[3]
fd501fs2047c
[1] 3. Remove 2 C-clips [1].

4. Remove the shaft [2] and separate the coupling arm /Fr [3] and the
[3] coupling arm /Rr [4].
[4] [2]
fd501fs2048c
[1] [2] 5. Open the front door [1] and then remove the screw [2].
6. Pull out the folding unit [3].
[3] a0h0t3c004ca
F -142
[1] 7. Remove the stopper screws [1], 1 each, from the left and right rails
and pull further out the folding conveyance section.
[1] fd501fs2049c
[2] 8. Open the guide plate [1].

9. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the wiring mounting cover
[3].
[3] [1] a0h0t3c005ca

11. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the 2nd folding roller
solenoid (SD18) [3].
reverse.
No.243 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.210 (1200/1200P/1051)
No.209 (C8000)
14. Make adjustments of the installation position. (Refer to I.22.2 2nd
folding roller solenoid (SD18) position adjustment)
[3] a0h0t3c006ca
16.3 Punch section

16.3.1 Replacing the punch unit
Punch unit
F -143
(2) Procedure
[3] 3. Remove the punch unit [3].
reverse.
No.241 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.208 (1200/1200P/1051)
No.207 (C8000)
fd501fs2003c
16.3.2 Cleaning the punch shaft and the punch support board
Punch shaft
: Every 1,400,000 prints (Actual cleaning count: Every 1,000,000 punches) *1
: Every 1,500,000 prints *3
Punch support board
: Every 1,400,000 prints (Actual cleaning count: Every 1,000,000 punches) *1
: Every 750,000 prints *2
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 1250/1250P/1052/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
(2) Procedure
[2]
fd501fs2003c
4. Remove the plastic stopper [1], and remove the pin [2].
[2]
5. Remove the punch shaft [3], and clean the periphery. (Isopropyl
alcohol/Cleaning pad)
[1]
[3]
a0h0t3c001ca
6. Clean the inner periphery of the hole [2] of the punch support
[2]
board [1]. (Isopropyl alcohol/Cleaning pad)
[1]
a0h0t3c002ca
16.3.3 Lubricating the punch drive section

(1) Periodically lubricated parts/cycle
Punch drive section
: Every 1,400,000 prints (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 1,000,000 punches) *1
F -144

*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 1250/1250P/1052/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
(2) Procedure
[2]
fd501fs2003c
[1] 4. Lubricate 2 stopper cams [1] and 8 gears [2]. (Molykote EM-30L)
[2]
a0h0t3c003ca
16.4 Main tray section

16.4.1 Replacing the tray up down motor (M11)
Tray up down motor (M11)
: Every 5,200,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 5,000,000 prints) *1
: Every 10,500,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 5,000,000 prints) *2
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 5,000,000 prints) *3
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 1250/1250P/1052/C8000
(2) Procedure
Note
Be sure to remove the tray up down motor (M11) while supporting the up/down stay with your hands.
F -145
[2] 1. Remove the rear cover (refer to G.13.3.4 Rear cover)and the left
cover /Rr (refer to G.13.3.6 Left cover /Rr).
2. Open the front door and pull out the folding unit.
4. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the tray up down motor
(M11) [3].
reverse.
[3] No.244 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.211 (1200/1200P/1051)
[1] No.210 (C8000)
No.161 (C6501/C6501P/C65hc)
fd501fs2005c
16.5 PI section
16.5.1 Replacing the pick-up rubber (Upper stage)
Pick-up rubber
: Every 5,200,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 200,000 feeds)*1
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 1250/1250P/1052/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
(2) Procedure
[1] 2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the protective cover [2].
[2]
fd501fs2006c

[4] [1] 4. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the pick-up unit /Up [3].
Note
The rear side of the shaft is inserted into the coupling [4].
Be sure to remove the pick-up unit /Up [3] from the front
[3]
side.
Be careful not to damage 2 actuators [5] of the pick-up
[5] [2] unit /Up.
fd501fs2007c
[1] [2] [4] 5. Remove the hook of the spring [1] from the mounting plate [2].
6. Remove 2 C-clips [3] and then remove the shaft [4].
[3] fd501fs2008c
F -146
[4] [3] [2] 7. Remove 2 C-clips [1].

8. Remove the shaft fixing piece [2], and then remove the shaft [3]
from the mounting plate [4].
[1] fd501fs2009c
[1] fd501fs2010c
[1] [2] 10. Remove the spacer [1] and the belt restriction plate [2].
fd501fs2011c
[1] [2] [3] 11. Remove the belt [2] from the gears [2] and [4], and then remove
the gears [2] and [4] and the pin [5] from the pick-up roller shaft [4].
[4]
[5] fd501fs2012c
12. Pull out the pick-up roller shaft [1] to the front side, and remove the
pick-up roller assy [2].
[1]
[2] fd501fs2013c
13. Remove the pick-up roller [1] and replace the pick-up rubber [2].
Note
Be sure to install the pick-up roller so that the one-way
clutch [3] (blue) is on the front side.
[3]
[2] [1] fd501fs2014c
F -147

16. Remove the belt restriction plate [3].
17. Remove the belt [4] from the gear [5], and then remove the gear
[5] and the pin [6] from the pick-up roller shaft [7].
18. Pull out the pick-up roller shaft [7] to the rear side, and remove the
pick-up roller assy [8].
19. Remove the pick-up roller and replace the pick-up rubber.
Note
[2] [3] [5] [6] [8] [9] [1]
fd501fs2015c
[3] [4] [7] 20. Remove 2 C-clips [1].

21. Remove the belt restriction plate [2].
22. Remove the belt [3] from the gear [4], and then remove the gear
[2] [4] and the pin [5] from the pick-up roller shaft [6].
[6] 23. Pull out the pick-up roller shaft [6] from the rear side, and remove
the pick-up roller assy [7].
24. Remove the pick-up roller and replace the pick-up rubber.
Note
[1] [5] [8] [1]
No.235 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.202 (1200/1200P/1051)
No.201 (C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000)
No.152 (C6501/C6501P/C65hc)
fd501fs2016c
16.5.2 Replacing the paper feed rubber (Upper stage)

Paper feed rubber
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 1250/1250P/1052/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
F -148
(2) Procedure
1. Conduct the steps 1 to 8 in "F.16.5.1 Replacing the pick-up rubber
[8] (Upper stage)" and remove the pick-up roller unit.
[7] 3. Remove the belt restriction plate [2].
[3] 4. Remove the spacer [3].
5. Remove the belt [4].
6. Remove the gear [5] and the pin [6].
[4]
7. Remove the gear [7] and the pin [8].
[1]
[6] [5] [2]
fd501fs2017c
[2] [3] 8. Remove 2 C-clips [1] and then remove the entire paper feed arm
[2] from the paper feed shaft [3].
[1] fd501fs2018c
[4] [3] [2] [1] 9. Remove the spacer [1].

10. Remove the actuator [2].
fd501fs2019c
[3] [2] [1] 13. Remove the paper feed arm [1].
15. Remove the paper feed roller assy [3].
fd501fs2020c
[1] 16. Remove the paper feed roller [1] and replace the paper feed
[2] rubber[2].
reverse.
Note
fd501fs2021c
No.237 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.204 (1200/1200P/1051)
No.203 (C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000)
No.154 (C6501/C6501P/C65hc)
16.5.3 Replacing the separation rubber (upper stage)

Separation rubber
F -149

*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 1250/1250P/1052/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Conduct the steps 1 to 4 in "F.16.5.1 Replacing the pick-up rubber
(Upper stage)" and remove the pick-up unit /Up.
3. Remove 2 bearings [2].
[1] 4. Remove the C-clip [3] and then remove the entire roller shaft from
the mounting plate while pressing the separation roller assy [4]
against the front gear [5].
Note
Pins are employed on the inside of the separation roller
assy [4] and the gear [5] respectively. When removing
them, be careful that these pins do not get lost. With the
C-clip [6] on the front side of the gear left as it is, pressing
[3] [4] [5] [6] fd501fs2022c the roller onto the gear prevents the pins from dropping
off.
[1] [2] 5. Remove the separation roller rubber [1] from the separation roller
[2] and replace it.
reverse.
No.236 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.203 (1200/1200P/1051)
No.202 (C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000)
No.153 (C6501/C6501P/C65hc)
fd501fs2023c
16.5.4 Replacing the pick-up rubber (Lower stage)

Pick-up rubber
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 1250/1250P/1052/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
(2) Procedure
Note
A shaft fixing screw is inserted when removing the PI tray /Up. Be sure to remove this shaft fixing screw from the PI tray /Up
after completion of the replacement of the pick-up roller /Lw. Operating the machine with the shaft fixing screw inserted to the
PI tray /Up damage to the PI section.
[2] [3] 1. Make sure that the PI lift plate /Up [1] has come down fully. If it has
not come down completely, conduct the I/O check (output) (PI/Up:
70-11, PI/Lw: 70-13) in the service mode.
2. Conduct the steps 1 to 4 in "F.16.5.1 Replacing the pick-up rubber
(Upper stage)" and remove the pick-up unit /Up.
3. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the paper feed stopper
plate /Up [3].
[2]
[1] fd501fs2024c
F -150
4. Remove the shaft fixing screw [1] and insert it in the shaft fixing
[1] hole [2].
Note
Be sure to turn the shaft fixing screw [1] until its stem
section disappears completely.
After completion of the replacement of the pick-up rubber
(lower stage), be sure to remove the shaft fixing screw [1]
from the position [2] and get it back to the position [1].
Operating the machine with the shaft fixing screw inserted
to the position [2] damage to the PI section.
[2] fd501fs2025c
[5] [3] [1] [2] 5. Remove the spring [2] hooked between the separation roller unit
[1] and the PI tray /Up [3].
7. Remove 4 screws [4] and then remove the PI tray /Up [3].
Note
When removing the PI tray /Up [2], be sure to pull it
diagonally up to the left.
[4] [4] fd501fs2026c

9. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the pick-up unit /Lw [3].
10. For the subsequent operations, conduct the pick-up rubber (upper
[1] stage) (steps 4 to 25). (Refer to F.16.5.1 Replacing the pick-up
rubber (Upper stage))
11. Replace it with a new pick-up rubber.
[2] [2]
reverse.
Note
When installing the PI tray /Up, be sure to remove the
shaft fixing screw and get it back to the original position.
fd501fs2027c
No.238 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.205 (1200/1200P/1051)
No.204 (C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc)
No.155 (C6501/C6501P/C65hc)
16.5.5 Replacing the paper feed rubber (lower stage)

Paper feed rubber
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 1250/1250P/1052/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
(2) Procedure
1. Conduct the steps 1 to 9 in "F.16.5.4 Replacing the pick-up rubber (Lower stage)"
2. The subsequent operations are the same as the operations for the paper feed rubber (upper stage). (Refer to F.16.5.2 Replacing the
paper feed rubber (Upper stage))
3. Reinstall a new paper feed rubber following the removal steps in reverse.
F -151
No.240 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.207 (1200/1200P/1051)
No.206 (C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000)
No.157 (C6501/C6501P/C65hc)
16.5.6 Replacing the separation rubber (lower stage)

Separation rubber
: Every 2,250,000 prints (actual replacement cycle: every 100,000 feeds) *2
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 1250/1250P/1052/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Conduct the steps 1 to 9 in "F.16.5.4 Replacing the pick-up rubber
(Lower stage)"
2. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the paper feed stopper
plate /2 [2].
3. For the subsequent operations, conduct the separation rubber
(upper stage) (steps 2 to 6). (Refer to F.16.5.3 Replacing the
separation rubber (upper stage))
4. Replace it with a new separation rubber.
reverse.
[2] No.239 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.206 (1200/1200P/1051)
fd501fs2028c
No.205 (C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc)
No.156 (C6501/C6501P/C65hc)
F -152
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE SD-...
17. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE SD-506

CAUTION
17.2 Right angle conveyance section

17.2.1 Replacing the roller release solenoid /1 (SD5)
Roller release solenoid /1 (SD5)
: Every 20,250,000 prints *1 (actual replacement cycle: every 5,000,000 operations *2)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove SD from the main body.
[2] [1]
15anf2c028na

4. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the roller release solenoid /
1 (SD5) [3].
Note
When installing the solenoid, make sure that the pin [5] is
hitched to the plunger [4].
Install it with the wiring harness [6] located on the guide
plate side.
[2] [1]
15anf2c029na
5. With the plunger [1] pulled, temporarily hold the new roller release
[2] solenoid /1 and adjust the position so that the clearance "a"
between the roller [3] and the guide plate [2] is at a standard value,
and then fully tighten the screws.
a
Standard value "a": 0mm to 0.5mm
reverse.
No.264 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.226 (1200/1200P/1051)
[1] No.239 (C8000)
15anf2c030nb

: Every 20,250,000 prints *1 (Actual replacement cycle: every 5,000,000 operations *2)
F -153
*2 Actual replacement cycle of 1250/1250P/1052/1200/1200P/1051/C8000
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Open the front door /Rt.
15anf2c031na

2 (SD6) [3].
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to check that the pin [5] has
been inserted into the hole on the plunger [4].
plate side.
[1] [6] [2] [3] [4] [5]

15anf2c032na
5. With the plunger [1] pulled, temporarily hold the new roller release
[2]
solenoid /2 and adjust the position so that the clearance "a"
between the roller [3] and the guide plate [2] is at a standard value,
a and then fully tighten the screws.
Standard value "a": 0mm to 0.5mm
reverse.
[1]
15anf2c033nb
17.2.3 Replacing the right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2)

Right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2)
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Open the front door /Rt and then remove the screw [1].
2. Remove the rear cover /Rt. (Refer to G.14.3.3 Rear cover /Rt)
3. Remove the hex wrench (short, #2.5) from the trimmer section.
(Refer to F.17.4.2 Replacing the trimmer blade kit)
15anf2c057na
F -154
[3] [2] [1] 4. Remove the E-ring [1] and the pulley [2] and then remove the belt
[3].
[4]
15anf2c058na
6. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the stopper [2].
[2] [1]
15anf2c059nb
[4] [8] [3] 8. Pull the spring [3] in the arrow-marked direction [4] and release it,
and then open the right angle conveyance guide plate [5].
Note
When reinstalling the spring [3], hook the long arm [6] on
the position between the frame and the E-ring [7] of the
jam release handle shaft and insert the tip of the short arm
[3] into the hole [8].
[1] [2] [6] [7] [5]

15anf2c130ca
F -155
[1] [3] [3] [1]

9. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the entrance conveyance
unit [2].
Note
When reinstalling, press it against 2 positioning pins [3]
and then tighten the screw [1].
[1]
[2] 15anf2c060na
10. Check point when reinstalling the entrance conveyance unit

[1] [2]
Note
As the positioning pin [1] has anti-drop grooves, be sure
to insert it fully before tightening the screw.
a0h2t3c043ca

[3] [2] [1]
12. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the entrance gate solenoid
[3] and the plunger [4].
[4] a0h2t3c044ca
F -156
13. Standard value when reinstalling the entrance gate solenoid
[4]
Note
When reinstalling, be sure to set in the following
[2] [1]
conditions before tightening the screw [4]; with the
plunger of the entrance gate solenoid not pulled, the gap
between the entrance gate [1] and the guide plate [2] is at
a standard value "a", and with the plunger of the entrance
gate solenoid pulled, the gap between the entrance gate
a
[1] and the guide plate [3] is at a standard value "b".
Standard value
a: 2.0mm 0.3mm
b b: 5.0mm 0.5mm
[3]
a0h2t3c051ca
16. Remove 2 screws [3] and pull out the arm [4] from the shaft [5] in
the arrow-marked direction [6]. Then remove the right angle
conveyance gate solenoid assy [7].
Note
When reinstalling, press the arm [4] against the D-cut of
the shaft [5] and then tighten the screws [2].
[1] [7]
a0h2t3c045ca
17. Standard value when reinstalling the right angle conveyance gate
solenoid assy
[1] Note
With the plunger [1] pulled, adjust the position so that the
clearance "a" between the right angle conveyance gate [3]
and the guide plate [2] is at a standard value "a", and then
fully tighten the screws [4].
[4] Standard value a: 4.8mm 0.5mm
[3]
[2]
a0h2t3c052ca
F -157
18. Remove 2 screws [1], mounting plate [2], arm [3], plunger [4], and
[7] [2] [4] [3] the right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2) [5].
Note
When installing the right angle conveyance gate solenoid,
make sure that the wires [6] are located on the other side
of the hole [7] in the mounting plate [2].

reverse.
[1] [5] [6]

a0h2t3c046ca

(2) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Open the front doors /Rt and /Lt.
15anf2c157ca
[2] [6] [3] [1]

3 (SD7) [3].
Note
When installing the solenoid, make sure that the pin [5] is
hitched to the plunger [4].
plate side.
[4] [5]
15anf2c158ca
F -158
5. Slightly tighten the new roller release solenoid/3 with the plunger
[1] pulled, adjust the position so that the gap between the paper
feed surface [2] of the guide plate and the roller surface [3] falls
within the standard value, and secure the roller release solenoid/3.
Standard value "a": 1.3mm to 1.8mm
reverse.
[1]
No.264 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.226 (1200/1200P/1051)
[3] No.239 (C8000)
[2] a
15anf2c159ca
17.3 Saddle stitching section

17.3.1 Replacing the stapler assy
Stapler assy
: Every 20,250,000 prints *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 1,000,000 staples) *2
*2 Actual replacement cycle of 1250/1250P/1052/1200/1200P/1051/C6501/C6501P/C65hc/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the front door /Lt. (Refer to G.14.3.8 Front door /Lt)
[1]
2. Remove the rear cover /Lt. (Refer to G.14.3.2 Rear cover /Lt)
3. Disconnect 2 connectors [1] from the back side of the stapler, and
release the wires on the stapler side from the clamps.
15anf2c034na
[3] [2] 4. Pull out the saddle stitching unit. (Refer to F.17.3.3 Pulling out the
saddle stitching unit)
5. Tilt the bundle arm [1] to the front.
6. Remove the staple cartridges [2] to the front.
Note
When moving the stapler assy, be sure to move them by
rotating the rotating knob [3] to prevent the belt tooth from
skipping. Otherwise, it causes the belt tooth skipping.
[1] 15anf2c035na
7. Remove 2 screws [1] on each stapler.

[4]
8. Move the staplers /Lt [2] and /Rt [3] forward, and then remove the
pins [4], 2 for each, from each 2 holes [5] on each stapler. Then
[5] remove the staplers /Lt and /Rt downward.
[1] [1]
[2] [3]
a0h2t3c047ca
F -159
9. Check point when removing/reinstalling the stapler /Lt
Note
When removing/reinstalling the stapler /Lt, be sure not to
bend the guide sheet [6].
[6]
a0h2t3c048ca
[1] [2] 10. Remove the screw [1] and remove the sensor cover [2].
15anf2c038na

Note
When reinstalling the saddle stitching unit, be careful not
to let the connector [1] make contact with the main body.
12. Remove 3 screws [2], and then remove the saddle stitching guide
plate [3].
[1]
[2] 15anf2c039na
[3] [4] 13. Remove 2 screws [1] each and then remove 2 connector covers
[2].
Note
When removing the connector covers, while lifting up the
clinchers /Lt [3] and /Rt [4].
[1]
[1] [2] 15anf2c040na
F -160
[5] [4] [6] 14. Remove each 1 screws [1] and then remove the ground [2].
Note
When installing the grounds, fasten it with screws letting
the wiring harness on the lower side.
15. Remove each of 1 connectors [3].

16. Remove 2 screws [4] each, and then remove the clinchers /Lt [5]
and /Rt [6].
Note
When installing the clinchers, slide them down as far as
they go, and secure them with screws.
[3] [1]
[1] [3] [2] 15anf2c041na
17. Disconnect the connector [1] and then remove the wiring harness
[3] from the clincher [2].
[3] [1] [2] 15anf2c042na
[4] [5] 18. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in
reverse.
Note
When reinstalling the wiring harness [4], be sure to wire
the wiring harness to the guide (white) side [5] of the
clincher.
Do not route the wiring harness to the rear side as shown
in the figure [7]. or the wiring harness may break at the
clincher operation.
19. Adjust the mounting position of the staplers and the clinchers.
(Refer to F.17.3.1.(3) Procedure for adjusting the mounting
position)
[6]
No.260, 261 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.222, No.223 (1200/1200P/1051)
No.234, 235 (C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000)
[7] 15anf2c043na
F -161
(3) Procedure for adjusting the mounting position

[7] [7] 1. Rotate the screw [1] clockwise until clicked to make the clinchers
[2] contact with the staplers [3] and lock the clinchers [2], and then
check the step edges [4] of the staplers are aligned with the edges
[5] of the clincher in the sub scan direction [6].
Standard value: 0 0.5mm
2. When the value is not within the standard value, loosen 2 screws
[7] each and move the staplers in the sub scan direction for
adjustment while rotating the screw [1] counterclockwise to make
the clinchers [2] and the stapler [3] closer, and then tighten the
screws [7].
3. Tighten the screw [1] clockwise until it clicks to make the clinchers
[2] contact with the stapler [3] and lock it. Make sure that the
standard surface of the stapler [8] is located in rear side in main
[11] [11] scan direction [10] compared to the inside plate inner surface [9] of
the clincher.
[4] [6] [10]
Standard value "a": 0.2mm to 0.3mm
4. When the value is not within the standard value, loosen 2 screws
[8]
A [11] each and move the staplers in the main scan direction for
adjustment while rotating the screw [1] counterclockwise to make
the clinchers [2] and the stapler [3] closer, and then tighten the
screws [11].
[9]
Note
a
After the reinstallation, perform the saddle stitching and
check that the stapling is performed without problem.
After the adjustment, be sure to perform the adjustment
between the fold line position and the staple position, and
tilt/gap adjustment of the clincher.
(Refer to I.23.4 Staple position adjustment), (Refer to I.23.6
[5]
Tilt/gap adjustment of the clincher)
A
Section A
[3]
[2]
[1]
15anf2c063nc
17.3.2 Replacing the slope unit

Slope unit
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 2,500,000 copies) *1
*1 1250/1250P/1052/1200/1200P/1051/C8000
(2) Procedure
[2] 1. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the motor cover [2].
[1] 15anf2c018na
F -162
[1] 2. Disconnect 2 connectors [1].
15anf2c019na
[2] 3. Holding the bundle arms [1] on both sides in the vicinity of the
fulcrum shaft [2], push them to the rear simultaneously and move
the bundle arms [1] approximately 30mm.
Note
When rotating the bundle arm [1] manually, be sure to
rotate it gently with both hands because the bundle arm is
driven simultaneously by the belts on both sides.
Otherwise, it causes the belt tooth skipping.
Never rotate the bundle arm [1] by holding its tip. Be sure
to rotate it by holding the bundle arm [1] in the vicinity of
the fulcrum shaft [2]. It causes the deformation.
[1] 15anf2c020na
[2] [4] 4. Remove 2 screws [2] and 2 screws [3] of the slope unit [1] from the
bottom and top respectively, and then remove the slope unit [1].
Note
When reinstalling the slope, be sure to align 2 positioning
projections [4].

reverse.
[2] [1]
[3] 15anf2c022na
F -163
17.3.3 Pulling out the saddle stitching unit

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the front door /Lt. (Refer to G.14.3.8 Front door /Lt)
2. Remove the slope unit. (Refer to F.17.3.2 Replacing the slope unit)
3. Remove the wire [1] from the screw [2].
Note
When remove the 2nd wire [1], support the horizontal
conveyance guide plate /Lt [3] with your hand so that it
does not fall down.
[2] [1]
[3] 15anf2c014na
[1] [2] [1] 4. Slide 2 pins [1] to the arrow-marked direction and hook into the
notches [2] to release the horizontal conveyance guide plate /Lt
[3], and then remove the guide plate.
Note
When reinstalling the horizontal conveyance guide plate /
Lt [3], align the positions of the shafts [4], and then
displace the pins [1] from the notches.
[4] [3] [4] 15anf2c015na
5. Remove the screw [1], move the wiring harness cover [4] to the
rear, unplug the pin [2] from the hole [3], and then remove the
wiring harness cover [4].
[3]
[2]
[1] [4]
15anf2c016na
F -164
[1]
15anf2c017na
7. Remove the screw [1].
[1]
15anf2c069na
[1] [6] [1] 8. Holding the bundle arms [1] on both sides in the vicinity of the
fulcrum shaft [2], gently move them to the inside [3], and then
remove the guide shaft [4] from the hole of the shock absorbing
guide [5].
Note
When narrowing the space between the bundle arms [1],
be sure to move them gently and simultaneously.
When reinstalling them, be sure to check that the guide
shaft [4] has been inserted into the shock absorbing hole
[5].
9. Rotate the bundle arms [1] to the guide plate [6] on the stapler
side.
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4] [5]
[3]
[5] [4] [2] [1] 15anf2c021na
F -165
[1] [2] [1] 10. Remove the 6 screws (with 1 washer each) [1], and then hold the
shafts [2] to pull out the saddle stitching unit [3].
Note
When pull out the saddle stitching unit, be sure not to
snap the wiring harness of the removed connector contact
with SD.
[1]
[1] [2] [3] 15anf2c024nb
17.3.4 Replacing the saddle stitching unit

CAUTION
Be sure to perform this operation with 2 people because the saddle stitching unit is heavy.

Saddle stitch unit
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 2,500,000 copies) *1
*1 1250/1250P/1052/1200/1200P/1051/C8000
(2) Procedure
[3] [4] [5] 1. Pull out the saddle stitching unit. (Refer to F.17.3.3 Pulling out the
saddle stitching unit)
2. Remove 6 screws [1] and the screw [2], and remove the saddle
stitching unit [5] with 2 people by holding the shafts [3] and [4]
while lift up the shaft [3] slightly and shift the saddle stitching unit
to the front side.
Note
Be sure to hold the saddle stitching unit at the shafts [3]
and [4].
When reinstalling the saddle stitching unit, check that the
unit is surely placed on the rails [6] before releasing the
unit.

reverse.
[1] [2]
[6]
[1] 15anf2c025na
F -166
17.4 Trimmer section

17.4.1 Removing/installing the trimmer paddle assy
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the following parts.
[1] Rear cover /Lt (Refer to G.14.3.2 Rear cover /Lt)
2. Store the trimmer scraps box completely in the SD.
3. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the trimmer scraps guide [2].
Note
When installing the trimmer scraps guide, be sure that the
trimmer scraps box is stored completely in the SD, and
the trimmer scraps guide [2] is fully stretched. If you
stretch the trimmer scraps guide with the trimmer scraps
box has not stored completely, the trimmer scraps guide
gets broken during operation.
[2] a0h2t3c009ca
4. Remove 4 screws [1] and remove the trimmer paddle assy [2].
[2] a0h2t3c010ca
17.4.2 Replacing the trimmer blade kit

WARNING
Pay extra caution when holding the trimmer blade [1]. Never touch the edge [2] of the blade. You get injured.
Remove the blade cover only at the replacement. Otherwise, never remove the cover. You get injured.
Dispose the used trimmer blade as specified by the local authority.
[2]
[1] a0h2t3c011ca

Trimmer blade kit
: Every 1,400,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 37,500 cuts) *1
: Every 1,500,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 37,500 cuts) *2
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 37,500 cuts) *3
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 1250/1250P/1052/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
F -167
(2) Procedure
1. Move the trimmer board to the release position.
[3] [2] [1]
Note
Move the trimmer board to the trimmer press upper limit
sensor (PS52) by the output check code ""71-56" in the I/O
check mode in the service mode.
2. Turn OFF the sub power switch (SW2) and the main power switch
outlet.
4. Remove the trimmer paddle assy. (Refer to F.17.4.1 Removing/
installing the trimmer paddle assy)
6. Loosen the screws [2] and [3].
[6] WARNING
[7]
Do not loosen the screws [2] and [3] too much, or the
trimmer blade drops during the operation. Keep the
[4] loosening amount of the screws [2] and [3] to a minimum
requirement for removing the trimmer blade [4].
7. Hold the screws [2] and [3] and slightly lift the screw [3] side. Then
[5] move the trimmer blade [4] in the arrow-marked direction [6] to pull
a0h2t3c012ca
out from the hole [5], and remove it.
8. Put the trimmer blade [4] at a safe place with no fear of falling
down.
WARNING
Pay extra caution when handling the trimmer blade [4].
Never touch the edge [7] of the blade. You get injured.
9. Insert the #2.5 hex wrench [2] onto the mounting slit [1] of the
[1] [2]
trimmer blade, and then slide it from right [3] to left [4] (viewed
from the operator) to clean the trimmer scraps.
Note
Conduct the cleaning with the #2.5 hex wrench which is
one-step thinner than the hex wrench #3 used for the
installation screws of the trimmer blade. Using #3 causes
the deformation of the mounting slit.
To change the direction of the hex wrench, remove the
wrench once and reinsert it again.
[5] The bottom of the slit of the left side [4] (viewed from the
operator) is curved in the same manner as the blade [5].
Be sure to scrape the trimmer scraps.
10. Clean the mounting slit [1] of the trimmer blade with the blower
brush.
[4] [3]
a0h2t3c013ca
11. Put a new trimmer blade [1] on the floor and insert 2 new screws
[4]
about half and a bit length of them [3] into the marked side [2].
WARNING
Be sure to insert the screws [3] enough to hold the
trimmer blade, otherwise the trimmer blade falls down
during the operation.
Note
Install the brand-new screws [3] that are shipped with the
trimmer blade kit.
[3] [1] [2]
a0h2t3c014ca
12. Remove the blade cover [4] of the new trimmer blade kit and put
that cover on the old trimmer blade.
F -168
13. Insert the trimmer blade to the hole [3] by holding 2 screws [2].
Then insert 2 screws [2] to the screw grooves [4].
[3]
[2]
[1] [4]
[2]
[4]
a0h2t3c015ca
14. Tighten the new screw [1] temporarily. Then press 2 screws [1]
[1][2] [4] [6]
and [2] downward [3] until the trimmer blade [4] contacts the
bottom, and then press it to the right side [5] (viewed from the
operator).
15. Tighten 2 screws [1] and [2] with the #3 hex wrench [6].
WARNING
When tightening 2 screws [1] and [2], tighten them
[7] temporarily with the torque that bends the tip of the #3
hex wrench [6] approximately 5 [7], and then fully tighten
[8]
them with the strong torque that bends it approximately
15 [8].
Note
Be sure to check and clear the foreign object that
obstacles the operation of the trimmer blade.
[3] [5]
reverse.
Note
After replacing the trimmer blade, perform the saddle
stitch with trimming and check that the trimming is
performed without problem.
[2] [1]
a0h2t3c016ca No.262 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.224 (1200/1200P/1051)
No.229 (C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000)
No.178 (C6501/C6501P/C65hc)
17.4.3 Replacing the trimmer board assy

Trimmer board assy
: Every 600,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 18,900 cuts) *1
: Every 750,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 18,900 cuts) *2
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 18,900 cuts) *3
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 1250/1250P/1052/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
F -169
(2) Procedure
1. Move the trimmer board to the release position.
[7] [1]
Note
By the output check code "71-97" in the I/O check mode in
the service mode, move the trimmer press board to the
position where the trimmer board is released.
outlet.
4. Remove the trimmer paddle assy. (Refer to F.17.4.1 Removing/
installing the trimmer paddle assy)
5. Remove the trimmer board assy [1] by pulling it horizontally to the
back side.
[4] Note
[3] When reinstalling it, aligning the slit [2] of the trimmer
[5]
board assy [1] with the pin [3] and insert it between the
trimmer press plate [4] and the hold plate [5].
When inserting it, be careful not to bend the guide sheet
[6].
When pushing it into the machine, be sure to insert it
[6] horizontally by pushing the movement arm receiver [7].
[2]
a0h2t3c017ca
6. Clean the bottom surface of the actuator [1] and the top surface [2]
[1] of the trimmer blade retaining plate which contacts to the bottom
surface.
Note
When the trimmer scraps remain or the cleaning is not
conducted properly, the trimmer completion timing differs
and a trimming fault occurs.

reverse.
8. Reset the trimmer board solenoid operation counter.
Note
Reset the trimmer board solenoid operation counter by
the output check code "71-95" of the I/O check mode of
[2] a0h2t3c067ca the service mode.
If the counter is not reset, the trimmer board solenoid
operating timing after the trimmer board is replaced
becomes faster than specified timing (700/500/300 times
of trimming). (In the first operation only)
After replacing the trimmer board, perform the saddle
stitch with trimming and check that the trimming is
performed without problem.

No.263 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.225 (1200/1200P/1051)
No.230 (C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000)
No.179 (C6501/C6501P/C65hc)
17.4.4 Replacing the trimming unit

Note:
Be sure to perform this operation with 2 people because the trimmer unit is heavy.

Trimmer unit
: Spot replacement (actual replacement cycle: every 2,500,000 cuts) *1
*1 1250/1250P/1052/1200/1200P/1051/C6501/C6501P/C65hc/C8000
F -170
(2) Procedure for pulling out the trimmer unit

[2] [2]
Rear cover /Lt (Refer to G.14.3.2 Rear cover /Lt)
Rear cover /Rt (Refer to G.14.3.3 Rear cover /Rt)
Left cover (Refer to G.14.3.4 Left cover)
Trimmer paddle assy (Refer to F.17.4.1 Removing/installing
the trimmer paddle assy)
[1]
[1] 2. Remove each 4 of the screws [1] at 2 places, and then remove 2
fixing plates [2].
a0h2t3c018ca

[2] [1] [2]
Note
When reinstalling it, be careful not to nip the wiring
harness with the metal plate.

5. Pull out the trimmer unit to the back side until the stoppers [4] and
[5] touch to the anti-drop brackets [6] and [7] by holding the
configuration parts [3] of the trimmer unit.
reverse.
[5] [7] [6] [4]
[3]
a0h2t3c019ca
(3) Removing/reinstalling the trimmer unit

1. Conduct by the step 4 of the procedure for pulling out the trimmer
[1] unit (Refer to F.17.4.4.(2) Procedure for pulling out the trimmer
unit)
DANGER:
Be sure not to pull out the trimmer unit to the back side until
the stopper is removed. If the stopper is removed while the
trimmer unit is pulled out to the back side, the trimmer unit
drops.
2. Disconnect 5 connectors [1] and then remove the wiring harness

from the wiring harness clamp.
[1] a0h2t3c020ca
F -171
3. Remove each 2 of the screws [1] at 2 places, and then remove the
[1] [3] [2] [1]
stoppers /1 [2] and /2 [3].
4. Pull out the trimmer unit [4] to the back side by holding the
configuration parts [5].
Note
Remove or reinstall the trimmer unit [4] by lifting it slightly
to avoid the projection for preventing falling off [6] on the
trimmer unit plate.
Be sure not to hold the position that is easily damaged
like the electrical parts.
Note:
Be sure to perform this operation with 2 people because
the trimmer unit is heavy.

reverse.
No.270 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.234 (1200/1200P/1051)
[5] [4] [5] No.233 (C8000)
[6]
a0h2t3c021ca
17.4.5 Replacing the trimmer press motor (M32)

Trimmer press motor (M32)
: Every 20,250,000 prints *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 500,000 cuts *2)
*2 Actual replacement cycle of 1250/1250P/1052/1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
(2) Procedure
1. Pull out the trimmer unit. (Refer to F.17.4.4 Replacing the trimming
[2] [3] [6] [4] [2]
unit)
3. Loosen 4 screws [2].
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to tighten 4 screws [2] after
making the tension of the spring [3] over the mounting
plate [4].
4. Remove 4 screws [6] with keeping the trimmer press motor (M32)
[5], and then remove it from the belt [7].
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to put the trimmer press
motor (M32) [5] into the round hole [8].
[7] [8] [6]
[5] [1]
a0h2t3c022ca
F -172
5. Loosen the screw [1] and then remove the gear [2] from the
[1] [2] trimmer press motor (M32) [3].
reverse.
No.268 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.230 (1200/1200P/1051)
No.231 (C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000)
[3] a0h2t3c023ca
17.4.6 Replacing the trimmer blade motor (M31)

Trimmer blade motor (M31)
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 2,500,000 feeds)*3
*2 Actual replacement cycle of 1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
*3 Actual replacement cycle of 1250/1250P/1052
(2) Procedure (previous trimmer unit)

[2] [2]
Trimmer scraps guide (Refer to F.17.4.1 Removing/installing
the trimmer paddle assy)
[1]
[1] 2. Remove each 4 of the screws [1] at 2 places, and then remove 2
fixing plates [2].
a0h2t3c018ca
[2] [1] 3. Remove 2 screws [1] of the jig for supporting trimmer unit and then
remove the anti-drop bracket [2].
F -173
4. Align the edge of the jig for supporting trimmer unit [1] with the
[4] [2] [3] [1]
corner [4] of the trimmer unit based on the hole [2] of the jig for
supporting trimmer unit [1].
[2] [3] [1] 5. Disconnect the connector [1].

Note
harness with the metal plate.
6. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the stopper [3].

7. Reinstall the anti-drop bracket [5] with 2 screws [4] which have
been removed in step 3.
DANGER:
Be sure not to pull out the trimmer unit to the back side until
the stopper [3] is removed. If the stopper is removed while the
trimmer unit is pulled out to the back side, the trimmer unit
drops.
[4]
[6]
[5] [6]
F -174
9. Disconnect 5 connectors [1] and then remove the wiring harness
[1] from the wiring harness clamp.
[1] a0h2t3c020ca
[3] [4] 10. Pull out the trimmer unit to the back side until the stoppers [3]
touch to the anti-drop brackets [4] by holding the lower edges [2] of
the trimmer unit [1].
Note
Be sure not to hold the position that is easily damaged
[1] like the electrical parts.
[2]
11. Hold the lower right [2] of the trimmer unit [1], turn it around the
[1] [3]
engaging [3] of the stopper and the anti-drop bracket, and then put
the trimmer unit [1] on the jig for supporting trimmer unit [4].
[2] [4]
[1] a0h2t3c024ca
F -175
13. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the trimmer blade motor
[1] [2] [1] (M31) [2].
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to set so that the wiring
harness [3] comes in the position as shown in the picture.
[3] a0h2t3c025ca
14. Check point when reinstalling the trimmer blade motor (M31)
[2] [1]
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to insert the D-cut [1] of the
shaft on the trimmer blade motor (M31) into the D-cut hole
[2] of the planetary gear.
a0h2t3c026ca
15. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the mounting bracket [3]
[2] [4] [3] [5] [1] from the trimmer blade motor (M31) [2].
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure that the label [4] is in the
same direction as the slotted hole [5] on the mounting
bracket [3].

reverse.
No.269 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.231 (1200/1200P/1051)
No.232 (C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000)
[1] a0h2t3c027ca
(3) Procedure (new trimmer unit)

[1]
[1] 3. Loosen 3 screws [1] and then remove the trimmer blade motor
(M31) [2].
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to set so that the wiring
harness [3] comes in the position as shown in the picture.
[3] [2]
F -176
4. Check point when reinstalling the trimmer blade motor (M31)
[2] [1]
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to insert the D-cut [1] of the
shaft on the trimmer blade motor (M31) into the D-cut hole
[2] of the planetary gear.
a0h2t3c026ca
5. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the mounting bracket [3]
[2] [4] [3] [5] [1] from the trimmer blade motor (M31) [2].
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure that the label [4] is in the
same direction as the slotted hole [5] on the mounting
bracket [3].

reverse.
No.269 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.231 (1200/1200P/1051)
No.232 (C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000)
[1] a0h2t3c027ca
17.4.7 Lubrication to the trimmer unit

(1) Periodic lubrication parts/cycle
Paper holding screw
: Every 1,400,000 prints (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 37,500 cuts) *1
: Every 1,500,000 prints (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 37,500 cuts) *2*3
Drive gear /3, /4
: Every 20,250,000 prints (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 500,000 cuts) *2
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 1250/1250P/1052/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
(2) Procedure (previous trimmer unit)

[3] [2] 1. Remove the rear cover /Lt. (Refer to G.14.3.2 Rear cover /Lt)
2. Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to the paper holding screw [1].
3. Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to the drive gears /3 [2] and /4 [3].
reverse.
[1]
[3] [2]
[1]
a0h2t3c060ca
F -177
Note
When applying the grease, be careful not to spill the
grease to other parts.
(3) Procedure (new trimmer unit)

[3] 1. Pull out the trimmer unit. (Refer to F.17.4.4.(2) Procedure for
pulling out the trimmer unit)
2. Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to the paper holding screw [1].
3. Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to the drive gears /3 [2] and /4 [3].
reverse.
Note
When applying the grease, be careful not to spill the
grease to other parts.
[2]
[3] [1] [2]
[1]
17.5 Bundle processing section

17.5.1 Replacing the bundle press stage gear
Bundle press stage gear
: Every 20,250,000 prints *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 500,000 set (number of set of sheets exited to the bundle tray) *2)
*2 1250/1250P/1052/1200/1200P/1051/C6501/C6501P/C65hc/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 spotted replaced cycle
F -178
(2) Procedure
[2]
2. Rotate the jam cleaning knob [1] in the arrow-marked direction
until it stops.
Note
When the jam cleaning knob [1] stops, be sure to check
that the bundle registration plate [2] comes to the upper
position [3] after the bundle press stage goes down and
the tension of the wire [4] is released.
Be sure not to rotate the jam cleaning knob too much.
3. Remove the E-ring [5] and move the gear [8] to the back side after
moving the bearings [6] and [7].
[8] [7] [3]
[4] [1]
[6]
[5]
a0h2t3c028ca

[2] [3] [1]
5. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the bundle press stage up
down motor (M24).
Note
Be careful not to lose the pin [3] as it drops off when
removing the gear [2].
a0h2t3c029ca
6. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the bundle press stage
gear [2] and 2 bearings [3] on both sides of the gear.
Note
After replacing the bundle press stage gear [2], be sure to
apply plas guard No.2 to the gear.

reverse.
No.267 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.229 (1200/1200P/1051)
No.242 (C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000)
[1] [2] [3] a0h2t3c030ca
F -179
17.5.2 Replacing the bundle press stage unit

Bundle press stage unit
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 2,500,000 copies (number of set of sheets exited to the bundle tray)) *1
*1 1250/1250P/1052/1200/1200P/1051/C8000
(2) Procedure
[2]
Trimmer unit (Refer to F.17.4.4 Replacing the trimming unit)
2. Rotate the jam cleaning knob [1] in the arrow-marked direction
until it stops.
Note
When the jam cleaning knob [1] stops, be sure to check
that the bundle registration plate [2] comes to the upper
position [3] after the bundle press stage goes down and
the tension of the wire [4] is released.
Be sure not to rotate the jam cleaning knob too much.
[3]
[4] [1] a0h2t3c031ca

4. Remove the wiring harness [2] from the clamp [3], and then pull it
[1] out from the hole [4] by following the arrow.
Note
[2] When reinstalling it, be careful not to nip the wiring
[5] [4] [3] harness [2] with the trimmer unit plate [5].
a0h2t3c032ca
F -180
5. Remove 1 each of the screws at 2 places and remove 1 each of
[1] [2] [4]
the up-down wire [2], and then take it out to the front side of the
machine from the trimmer unit plate [3] by following the arrow.
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to lubricate Molykote EM-30L
to each 2 shafts [4].
6. Remove 8 screws [5] and then remove the trimmer unit plate [3].
Note
Be careful not to damage the trimmer scraps guide [6].
When reinstalling it, be sure to align the projection [7].
[7] [3]
[5][6][5]
a0h2t3c033ca
7. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the wiring harness [2]
[3] [1]
from clamp [3], and then take it out from the hole [4] of the metal
plate to the arrow-marked direction.
8. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the bracket [6].
9. Remove 2 screws [7] and then remove the guide plate [8].
[5] [6] [2] [4]
[7] [8]
a0h2t3c034ca
F -181
[1] [3] [2]
11. Remove 3 screws [2] and then remove the bundle registration
motor (M12) [3].
13. Remove 4 screws [5] and then remove the bundle press
movement motor (M17) [6].
[6] [5]
[4]
a0h2t3c035ca
14. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the gear [2] and the pin
[1] [2] [3] [3].
[6].
[4] [5] [6] a0h2t3c036ca
F -182
[2] [6] [3] [4]
17. Cut the wire binding bands [2] and [3] and remove the wiring
harness [4].
Note
Be sure to let the wire binding bands [2] and [3] into the
shaft hole [5] and install the wire retaining band [6] on the
[2] side between the bands [2] and [3].
[5]
[1]
a0h2t3c037ca
18. Pull out the bundle paper exit tray [1].

[7] [5][10] [6] [2] [3] [4] 19. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the wire mounting plate /Lt
[3].
Note
Since the wire /Lt [4] has the tension of the spring, be sure
to remove 2 screws [2] with keeping the wire mounting
plate /Lt [3] and lift it up until the tension is released, and
then take it off gently.
[8] 20. Loosen the screws [5] and pull the wire mounting plate /Rt [6]
downward to move it to the opposite side of the shaft [7], and then
remove it to the space between the side plate [8] and the timing
belt [9].
Note
Since the wire /Rt [10] has the tension of the spring, be
sure to lift up the wire mounting plate /Rt [6] until the
tension is released, and then take it off gently.
[9] [1]
a0h2t3c038ca
21. Check point when reinstalling the wire

Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to put the wire [1] on 2
pulleys [2].
[1] [2] a0h2t3c039ca
F -183
22. Push the bundle paper exit tray [1] fully to the back.
[6] 23. Remove 2 E-rings [2] and then remove 2 bearings [3] and the drive
shaft [4].
24. Remove 2 E-rings [5] and then remove the bearings [6].
[5]
[3]
[2]
[4] [1]
a0h2t3c040ca
25. While keep holding the bundle paper exit assist roller [1]
[3] [2] [1]
horizontally, push the bundle press stage unit [3] to the back with
holding the shaft [2] to release the roller pin [4] of the bundle paper
exit assist roller arm from the regulation bracket [5]. After the
release, put down the bundle paper exit assist roller [1] gently.
Note
Once the roller pin [4] of the bundle paper exit assist roller
arm is removed from the regulation bracket [5], the bundle
paper exit assist roller drops off. Therefore, be sure to
hold with hands.
When reinstalling, be sure to put the roller pin [4] under
the regulation bracket [5].
[5]
[4]
a0h2t3c041ca
26. Pull out the bundle paper exit tray [1] to about half.
[4]
Note
If the bundle paper exit tray [1] is pulled out too much, the
bundle press stage unit [2] drops off from the tray.
27. Pull out the bundle press stage unit [2] to the position in the picture
with holding the bundle press section [3]. Then, pull it out more to
the back with paying attention to the contacting places [5], [6], and
[7] on the right side, and remove the arm [8].
reverse.
Note
After the installation, be sure to check that the bundle
press stage unit goes up and down horizontally by
[2] [3] [8] [1] rotating the jam cleaning knob.
[5]
[6]
[7]
a0h2t3c042ca
F -184
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PB-...
18. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PB-503

18.1 Sub compile (SC) section
CAUTION
Be sure to unplug the power plug of the PB from the power outlet.
Make sure to unplug the power code of the main body from the power outlet when it is connected to the main body.
18.1.2 Replacing the switchback roller

Switchback roller
: Every 750,000 prints *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 600,000 cuts )
: Spotted replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 600,000 prints)*2
: Spotted replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 750,000 prints)*3
*1 1200/1200P/1051
*2 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
*3 1250/1250P/1052
(2) Procedure
[6] [7] [5] [4] [5] 1. Open the upper door [1] to open the SC door [2]. Then close the
upper door [1].
Note
To keep the SC door open, insert a screwdriver into the
hole [3]. Be sure to remove the screwdriver when closing
the sub clamp door, or the cover gets damaged.
2. Remove the 2 C-clips [4], and slide the 2 bearings [5] into the
inside.
Note
[3] [8] [2] [1] Before removing the C-clips, be sure to spread a sheet of
paper and so on under the switchback roller assy to
prevent the C-clips from dropping into inside of the
machine.
3. Release the pulley [7] from the belt [6] gently, and remove the
switchback roller assy [8].
a075f2c001ca
[2] [1] 4. Check point when reinstalling the switchback roller assy
Note
After reinstalling the switchback roller assy, use a mirror
to check that the belt [1] is properly looped over the pulley
[2] without any slackness. If the belt has comes off the
pulley, remove the SC cover /Up to correct that. (Refer to
G.15.2.12 SC cover /Up)
a075f2c002ca
F -185
[9] [4] [3] 5. Remove the E-ring [1], and remove the roller [2] and the pin [3].
[8] Note
Be sure to install the bearing [4] so that its collar faces
toward the switchback roller.
[6]
7. Remove the E-ring [5], slide the switchback roller [8] in the
direction of the arrow [6] (toward the pulley) and remove the pin
[7]. Then remove the switchback roller [8] in the direction of the
[5]
arrow [9].
reverse.
No.275 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.239 (1200/1200P/1051)
No.299 (C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000)
[7] [2] [1]

a075f2c003ca
18.1.3 Replacing the SC switchback release motor (M13) and the one-way clutches /A and /B
SC switchback release motor (M13)
: Every 6,000,000 prints *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 3,000,000 prints *2)
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 750,000 prints*2)
One-way clutch /B
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 6,000,000 prints*2)
One-way clutch /A
: Every 12,000,000 prints *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 6,000,000 cuts *2)
*1 Periodical replacement only for 1200/1200P/1051. C8000 is not supported.
(2) Procedure
[2] [3] [1] 1. Remove the SC cover /Up. (Refer to G.15.2.12 SC cover /Up)
2. Open the upper door [1] to open the SC door [2] and set the paper
[3].
3. Close the SC door [2].
Note
Before removing the C-clips, be sure to spread a sheet of
paper under the switchback roller assy to prevent the C-
clips from dropping into the machine inside.
a0v9t3c020ca
F -186
4. Remove the screw [1] and remove the switchback cam [2].
Note
The switchback cam [2] is tensioned by the spring [4] via
the switchback arm [3]. When removing the screw [1], the
[2]
switchback arm [3] is pulled by the spring [4] and the
switchback cam [2] moves. At this time, be careful not to
[3]
drop the screw [1].
[4]
[1]
a0v9t3c021ca
5. Check point when reinstalling the switchback cam

[2] [1] Note
When reinstalling the switchback cam [2], be sure to
install it following the positional relation with the actuator
[2] as shown in the picture.
a0v9t3c022ca
[1] [3] 6. Remove 2 E-rings [1] and remove 2 bearings [2].

[2] a0v9t3c023ca
[1] 8. Disconnect 3 connectors [1] and remove the wiring harness from 2
wiring harness clamps [2].
[2] a0v9t3c024ca
F -187
[1] 9. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the SC switchback release

motor assy [2].
[2] a0v9t3c025ca
[1] 10. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the SC switchback release
motor [2].
[2] a0v9t3c026ca
11. Remove the E-ring [1] and remove the one-way clutch /B [2].
[2]
[1] a0v9t3c027ca
[1] 12. Check point when reinstalling the one-way clutch /B

Note
When reinstalling the one-way clutch /B [1], be sure to
install it in the direction shown in the picture.
a0v9t3c028ca
[4] [3] [1] [2] 13. Remove the screw [1] and remove the pressure cam [2].
14. Remove the E-ring [3] and remove the one-way clutch /A [4].
reverse.
No.272 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.236 (1200/1200P/1051)
No.296 (C8000)
a0v9t3c029ca
F -188
17. Check point when reinstalling the pressure cam
[2] [1]
Note
When reinstalling the pressure cam [1], be sure to install it
following the positional relation with the actuator [2] as
shown in the picture.
a0v9t3c030ca
[1] 18. Check point when reinstalling the one-way clutch /A

Note
When reinstalling the one-way clutch /A [1], be sure to
install it in the direction shown in the picture.
a0v9t3c033ca
19. Standard value when reinstalling the SC switchback release motor

assy
Note
When reinstalling the SC switchback release motor assy,
a b be sure to set so that the distances "a" and "b" become
same value.
Standard value: The difference of distances "a" and "b" =
0.2mm or less
a0v9t3c004ca
18.1.4 Replacing the SC pressure arm solenoid (SD13)

SC pressure arm solenoid (SD13)
(2) Procedure
[1]
1. Remove the SC unit. (Refer to G.15.2.21 SC unit)
Note
When putting down the SC unit, be sure not to pin the
wiring harness under it.
Put the SC unit on a table so that the bottom surface of
the sub scan alignment unit [1] does not contact the floor.
2. Pull out the sub scan alignment unit [1] in the arrow-marked
direction.
a0v9t3c005ca
F -189
[1] 4. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the SC pressure arm solenoid
(SD13) [3].
reverse.
No.274 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.238 (1200/1200P/1051)
No.298 (C8000)
[2] a0v9t3c006ca
[1] 7. Standard value when reinstalling the SC pressure arm solenoid

(SD13)
Note
When reinstalling the SC pressure arm solenoid, adjust
the position so that the distance "a" obtains a standard
value with the plunger [1] pulled, and then fix with the
screw [2].
Standard value: a = 16.4 1mm
[2]
a a0v9t3c007ca
18.1.5 Replacing the FD alignment solenoid (SD11)

FD alignment solenoid (SD11)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the SC unit. (Refer to G.15.2.21 SC unit)
[1]
Note
When putting down the SC unit, be sure not to pin the
wiring harness under it.
Put the SC unit on a table so that the bottom surface of
the sub scan alignment unit [1] does not contact the floor.
2. Remove 4 screws [1] and remove the SC door [2].
[3] [2]
a0v9t3c008ca
F -190
3. Put the SC unit with the FD alignment solenoid assy [4] faced up.
[2] [3] [4]
Note
Put the SC unit on a table so that the SC switchback
release motor assy [3] does not contact the floor.

5. Remove 2 screws [3] and pull out 2 shafts, and then remove the
sub scan alignment plate [2].
[1] a0v9t3c009ca
[1] 6. Remove the E-ring [1] and remove the sub scan alignment arm [2].
7. Disconnect the connector [3] and remove the screw [4], and then
[5] remove the FD alignment solenoid assy [5].
Note
When removing the FD alignment solenoid assy, be
careful not to drop the pin.
[4] [3] [2]

a0v9t3c010ca
[1] [2] 8. Remove 2 screws [1] to remove the mounting plate [2], and then
remove the FD alignment solenoid (SD11) [3].
Note
When reinstalling the FD alignment solenoid, adjust the
position so that the distance "a" obtains a standard value
with the plunger [4] pulled.
Standard value: a = 17.5 0.5mm
[4] [3] a0v9t3c011ca
a 9. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in

reverse.
No.273 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.237 (1200/1200P/1051)
No.297 (C8000)
a0v9t3c012ca
18.1.6 Lubrication to the sub scan alignment plate shaft

Sub scan alignment plate shaft
*1 1250/1250P/1052/1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
F -191
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the PB left unit. (Refer to G.15.2.23 PB left unit)
2. Remove the upper cover /Md. (Refer to G.15.2.21 SC unit)
3. Pull out the clamp unit [1].
4. Apply plas guard No.2 to the 4 sub scan alignment plate shafts [2].
reverse.
[2]
[1]
a15xt3c001ca
18.2 Cover paper table section

CAUTION
The glue tank unit is extremely hot right after turning OFF the main power switch (SW1) or the sub power switch (SW2) of the main
body. To prevent burn injuries, leave the unit until it cools enough before performing the maintenance work.
Note
Before performing the maintenance work, be sure to carry out the initial operation so that each part/unit is at the home position.
18.2.2 Replacing the roller cutter blade assy

Roller cutter blade assy
F -192
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the PB from the main body.
2. Remove the conveyance unit /Lw. (Refer to G.15.2.26
Conveyance unit /Lw)
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and the roller cutter blade assy [2]. Then
[1] disconnect the connector [3].
Note
Pull out the cover paper waste box before removing the
roller cutter assy.
When reinstalling the roller cutter assy, be sure to route
the wire binding [4] under the cutter motor (M50) [5].
Push the roller cutter blade assy [2] against the metal
[2]
plate [6] to reinstall the assy.

reverse.
No.280 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.244 (1200/1200P/1051)
No.304 (C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000)
[6]
[1]
[4] [5] [3] a075f2c007ca
18.2.3 Cleaning the cover paper folding plate and the book spine backing plate
Cover paper folding plate and the book spine backing plate
*1 1250/1250P/1052/1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
F -193
(2) Simplified cleaning procedure

[1] 1. Carry out the I/O check in service mode in the order of following
output check code, and turn OFF the sub power switch (SW2) and
the main power switch (SW1) with the cover paper folding plate
opened.
"77-55", "77-45", "77-58", "77-61"
[2] 2. Clean the cover paper folding plate [1] and the book spine backing
plate [2].
a075f2c004cb
18.2.4 Lubrication to the cover paper alignment plate shaft

Cover paper alignment plate shaft
*1 1250/1250P/1052/1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
F -194
(2) Procedure
1. Turn the knob [1] to move the cover paper alignment plate inward.
2. Apply plas guard No.2 to the 4 cover paper alignment plate shafts
[2].
Note
Apply plas guard No.2 to the outside of the cover paper
alignment plate bearing on both sides [3].
[3] [2]
[2] [1]
[3]
a075f2c094ca
18.3 Cover paper supply section

18.3.1 Removing/reinstalling the pick-up roller assy and the separation roller assy
(1) Procedure
2. Unlock the cover paper tray [3] by slightly pushing up the cover
[2] paper tray lock lever [2] with a screwdriver or a similar tool, and
pull out the cover paper tray [3].
[1]
[3]
a15xt3c002ca
F -195
[2] [3] 3. Turn the pick-up roller [1] in the direction of the arrow
(counterclockwise as seen from the front side) to make the
coupling [2] upright.
Note
Be sure not to rotate the pick-up roller [1] against the
direction of the arrow (clockwise) forcibly, as the roller is
not designed to rotate in that direction.
[1]
a075f2c009ca
[2] [1]
5. Remove the bearing /Fr [1].
6. Move the bearing /Rr [2] to the rear side.
Note
When reinstalling them, insert the bearing /Rr [2] into the
notch [5] on the metal frame while keeping on the level the
flat face [4] of the bearing, and slightly pressing down the
metal frame [3] of the pick-up roller assy. Then insert the
bearing /Fr [1] in the same manner.
[2] [4]
[5] [3]
a075f2c010ca
F -196
[1] [5] [4] 7. Hold the pick-up roller assy [1] by hand and lift and tilt the paper
feed roller [3] so that it rotates on the shaft [2] of the pick-up roller
to remove it from the notch of the bearing [4] and the coupling [5].
Note
When removing the pick-up roller assy [1], be careful not
to damage the sensor [7] with the metal frame [6].
[3] [2] [6]
[7]
a075f2c011ca
[3]
8. Remove the pick-up roller shaft [2] from the arm [1] of the paper
feed guide plate and then remove the pick-up roller assembly [3].
Note
After installing the pick-up roller assy, rotate the pick-up
roller counterclockwise as seen from the front side.
Make sure the paper feed roller and the belt rotate
smoothly.
The pick-up roller rotates in counterclockwise direction
only. Be sure not to rotate it in the opposite direction.
[1]
[2]
[3]
a075f2c081ca
F -197
[1] 10. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the entrance guide plate
[2].
[2] a075f2c012ca
a075f2c013ca
[2]
12. Open the frame [1] of the separation roller assy in the direction of
the arrow, and remove the coupling pin [2] on the rear side from
the joint [3]. Then remove the separation roller assy [4].
Note
When reinstalling, make sure to engage the coupling pin
[2] with the joint [3].
When reinstalling the separation roller assy [4], fasten it
[3]
with the screws while pressing it down.
[1]
[4]
a075f2c014ca
18.3.2 Replacing the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller
Pick-up roller
Paper feed roller
F -198
*1 1250/1250P/1052/1200/1200P/1051/C8000
(2) Procedure
Note
The outward appearance of the collar is identical for the paper feed roller and the separation roller. However, the collar of the
paper feed roller has a one-way mechanism on the inside while the collar of the separation roller does not. Be careful not to
confuse one with the other.
1. Remove the pick-up roller assembly. (Refer to F.18.3.1 Removing/
[4] [2] [1]
reinstalling the pick-up roller assy and the separation roller assy)
2. Remove the C-clip [1] of the pick-up roller assy.
3. Slide 2 bearings [2] and remove the pick-up roller [3] together with
the shaft [4].
[3]
a075f2c015ca
4. Remove the bearing [1] and pull out the pick-up roller [2] from the
[2] [1] shaft [3].
5. Remove the pick-up roller [2] from the collar [4].
6. Replace the pick-up roller.
[4] [3]
a075f2c082ca
[1] 7. Remove the C-clip [1] and pull out the bearing /Fr [2] from the shaft
[3].
8. Move the bearing /Rr [4] and remove the paper feed roller [5]
together with the shaft [3].
[4] [5] [2] [3] a075f2c086ca

[2] [1] 10. Pull out the paper feed roller [3] from the collar [2].
11. Replace the pick-up roller [3].
[3]
a075f2c087ca
[2] [1] 12. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in
reverse.
Note
There is no big difference in appearance between the 2
collars (one for the paper feed roller, and the other one is
for the separation roller). However, they are different in
the inside. The collar [1] for the paper feed roller has a
one-way mechanism in it, and the other one [2] does not.
Make sure to attach them correctly.
No.276, No.277 (1250/1250P/1052)
a075f2c016ca
No.240, No.241 (1200/1200P/1051)
No.300, No.301 (C8000)
F -199

Separation roller
*1 1250/1250P/1052/1200/1200P/1051/C8000
(2) Procedure
[3] [2] 1. Remove the separation roller assy. (Refer to F.18.3.1 Removing/
reinstalling the pick-up roller assy and the separation roller assy)
2. Remove the C-clip [1] and remove the separation roller [3] together
with the shaft [2].
[1] a075f2c017ca
[2] [3] [4] [1] 3. Pull out the gear [2], the collar [3] and the separation roller [4] from
the shaft [1] in the direction of the arrow.
4. Replace the separation roller [4].
reverse.
Note
There is no big difference in appearance between the 2
collars (one for the paper feed roller, and the other one is
for the separation roller). However, they are different in
the inside. The collar [5] for the paper feed roller has a
one-way mechanism in it, and the other one [6] does not.
Make sure to attach them correctly.
[6] [5]
No.277 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.241 (1200/1200P/1051)
No.301 (C8000)
a075f2c018ca
18.3.4 Replacing the cover paper feed clutch (CL71) and the cover paper separation clutch (CL72)
Cover paper pick up clutch (CL71)
Cover paper separation clutch (CL72)
*1 1250/1250P/1052/1200/1200P/1051/C8000
F -200
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the stopper screws, 1 each, attached on the right and left
rails of the cover paper tray and pull out the tray. (Refer to G.
15.2.28 Cover paper tray)
2. Remove the 5 screws [1] and remove the clutch cover [2].
[1] [2]
a075f2c019ca
[4] [2] [3] [5] [6] 3. Disconnect 3 connectors [1].

4. Remove the C-clips [2], 1 each, and remove the cover paper feed
clutch (CL71) [3] and the cover paper separation clutch (CL72) [4].
Note
When reinstalling, be sure to insert the stopper [5] of the
clutch over the tab [6] of the metal frame.

reverse.
No.278, No.279 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.242, No.273 (1200/1200P/1051)
No.302, No.303 (C8000)
[5] [6] [1]
a075f2c020ca

18.4.1 Replacing the sub tray exit solenoid (SD4)
Sub tray paper exit solenoid (SD4)
: Every 10,500,000 prints *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 3,000,000 prints *2)
F -201
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the PB from the main body.
[7]
3. Remove the upper cover /FrRt. (Refer to G.15.2.13 Upper cover /
[4]
FrRt)
4. Remove the upper cover /RrRt. (Refer to G.15.2.15 Upper cover /
RrRt)
6. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the metal frame [2].
7. Remove 6 screws [3] and disconnect the connectors [4] and [5].
[6] [10] [11]
9. Remove the screws of 3 knobs [7] and remove the knobs.
[9]
11. Remove 6 screws [8] and remove the conveyance unit [11].
Note
Put the conveyance unit on a table so that the paper
entrance guide does not contact the floor.
[8]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[5] [3] a0v9t3c013ca
[1] [2] 12. Loosen the screws [1], 2 each, on the upper cover /Rt, and remove
the upper cover /Rt.
a0v9t3c014ca

14. Remove 3 screws [2] and remove the sub tray exit solenoid assy
[3].
[2]
[1] a0v9t3c015ca
F -202
15. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the sub tray exit solenoid assy
[1] [2] (SD4) [2].
reverse.
No.271 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.235 (1200/1200P/1051)
No.295 (C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000)
a0v9t3c016ca
[1]
18. Standard 1 value when reinstalling the sub tray exit solenoid assy
(SD4)
When reinstalling the sub tray exit solenoid [1], adjust the
[2] position so that the distance "a" obtains a standard value with
the plunger [2] pulled.
Standard value: a = 3.7 0.5mm
a a0v9t3c017ca
19. Standard 2 value when reinstalling the sub tray exit solenoid assy
(SD4)
While pulling the plunger of the sub tray exit solenoid, adjust
the position so that the distance "a" (the distance between the
paper exit roller and the paper exit driven roller) obtains a
standard value.
Standard value: a = 0 1.5mm
a a0v9t3c018ca
20. Check point when reinstalling the conveyance unit

a After reinstalling the conveyance unit, check the points "a"
shown in the picture, to see that the conveyance unit does not
contact the upper door. When they are in contact, loosen 4
fixing screws on the upper cover /Rt and adjust the position so
that the upper door and the upper cover /Rt does not come in
contact.
a0v9t3c019ca
18.5 Framework section

18.5.1 Replacing the exhaust filters /A and /B
Exhaust filter /A
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 120 hours of rotation of glue apply roller)*1
Exhaust filter /B
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 240 hours of rotation of glue apply roller)*1
*1 1250/1250P/1052/1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
F -203
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the exhaust filter assy [1].
a15xt3c003ca
[2] [1] 2. Pull the filter holding lever [1] in the arrow-marked direction, and
then remove 2 exhaust filters /A [2].
a15xt3c004ca
[1] 3. Reverse the exhaust filter assy and slide the exhaust filter /B [1] in
the arrow-marked direction to remove it.
reverse.
No.283, No.284 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.250, No.251 (1200/1200P/1051)
No.305, No.306 (C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000)
a15xt3c005ca
18.6 Glue tank section

18.6.1 Replacing the glue apply roller drive gear bearing
Glue apply roller drive gear bearing
: Every 30,000,000 prints *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 6,000 hours) *2
F -204
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the glue tank unit. (Refer to G.15.2.20 Glue tank unit)
2. Remove 6 screws [1] and remove the tank cover /Lt [2].
[2] [1] a15xt3c006ca
[2] [3] [1] 3. Loosen the screw [1] and remove the gear cover [3] from the notch
[2].
Note
When reinstalling, be sure to put the gear cover edge [3]
into the notch [2].
a15xt3c007ca
[1] 4. Remove the 4 screws [1].

Note
projections [2].
[2]
a15xt3c008ca
F -205
[1] [5] [4] [2] 5. Remove 2 E-ring [1].
6. Pull up the glue tank assy by holding the shaft [2], and remove the
glue apply roller drive gears /1 [3] and /2 [4] and the bearings [5], 2
for each.
reverse.
[5] [3] a15xt3c009ca
18.6.2 Lubrication to the glue apply roller drive gear

Glue apply roller drive gear
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Open the front door and move the glue tank unit [1] frontward.
Note
When moving the glue tank unit, be sure to hold it by the
metal frame [2] on the right side of the unit.
2. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the gear cover [4].
Note
When reinstalling, be sure to put the edge of the gear
cover [4] under the notch [5] of the glue tank side.
[5]
[4] [3]
a15xt3c010ca
F -206
3. Apply the multemp FF-RM to the Glue apply roller drive gear [2].
[2] [1]
a15xt3c011ca
18.6.3 Replacing the pellet supply cooling fan (FM4)

Pellet supply cooling fan (FM4)
: Every 750,000 prints *1
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 120 hours) *2
*1 1200/1200P/1051
*2 1250/1250P/1052/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
(2) Procedure
[1] [3] 1. Remove the rear cover /Rt. (Refer to G.15.2.5 Rear cover /Rt)
3. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the pellet supply cooling fan
(M4) [3].
reverse.
Note
When reinstalling the pellet supply cooling fan (FM4) [3],
be sure to reinstall it to the same direction as shown in
the picture.
Be sure not to nip the wiring harness.
[2] 8050ma3141
18.6.4 Replacing the glue tank assy

Glue tank assy
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 2,000 hours) *1
*1 1250/1250P/1052/1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
F -207
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the glue tank unit. (Refer to G.15.2.20 Glue tank unit)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the wiring mounting cover
[2].
[2] a15xt3c012ca
3. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the glue thread cut plate
[1]
[2].
4. Remove 6 screws [3] and remove the tank cover /Lt [4].
5. Remove 4 screws [5] and remove the tank cover /Rt [6].
Note
When reinstalling it, reinstall it so that the curved part
comes top.
[5] [2] [3]
[4] [6]
[3] [5] a15xt3c013ca
F -208
6. Disconnect 4 connectors [2] of the translucent wiring harnesses of
[1] [3] [2]
the temperature sensor.
Note
When reconnecting the connector, check the color of the
connector and the number label [3] on the wiring harness,
and connect each connector to the corresponding wiring
harness.
Numbe Color
r
1 White
2 Blue
3 Yellow
4 Black
7. Remove the connector [4] from the metal frame [5].

Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to set the metal wiring
harness [6] toward the metal plate side [7].
8. Remove the square saddle [8] from the metal frame [7] and put the
connector [4] to the inside of the glue tank unit.
[8] [7] [2] [6] [4] [5] a15xt3c014ca
[1] [2] 9. Remove the wiring harness [1] from the 4 wire saddles [2].
[2] a15xt3c015ca
[1] [2] 10. Remove 4 screws [2] and remove the glue tank assy [1].
Note
projections [3].
[3] [3]
a15xt3c016ca
F -209
[3] [1] [2] [3] 11. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in
reverse.
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to set it with 2 springs [1] put
on the pin [3] on the bottom of the glue tank assy and on
the projection [4] of the glue tank unit.
After replacing the parts, be sure to conduct the glue
apply roller gap adjustment. (Refer to I.24.4 Glue apply
roller gap adjustment)
No.282 (1250/1250P/1052)
No.249 (1200/1200P/1051)
No.308 (C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000)
[4] a15xt3c017ca
18.7 Clamp section

18.7.1 Lubrication to the clamp pressing board shaft
Clamp pressure plate shaft
*1 1250/1250P/1052/1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
(2) Procedure
1. Pull out the clamp unit [1].
2. Apply the plas guard No.2 to 2 positions on the clamp pressing
board shaft [2].
[2]
[1]
[2]
a075f2c122ca
18.8 Book stock section

18.8.1 Lubrication to the guide shafts /Rt and /Lt
Guide shaft /Rt, /Lt
*1 1250/1250P/1052/1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
F -210
(2) Procedure
1. Apply the plas guard No.2 to 4 positions on 4 positions [1] on the
guide shafts /Rt and /Lt.
[1]
a15xt3c067ca
F -211
19. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE RU-506

19.1 Caution for maintenance procedure
CAUTION
Be sure to unplug the power cord from the power outlet.

19.2.1 Replacing the entrance conveyance motor (M1), the paper exit motor (M2), the paper exit conveyance belt
Entrance conveyance motor (M1), Paper exit motor (M2)
Entrance conveyance belt, Paper exit conveyance belt
*1 1200/1200P/1051
(2) Procedure of removing the entrance conveyance motor assy, Procedure of replacing the entrance conveyance
belt
[3] [4] 1. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.17.2.3 Rear cover)
3. Remove 3 screws [2] and then remove the entrance conveyance
motor assy [3] and the entrance conveyance belt [4].
Note
When reinstalling, temporary tighten 3 screws [2] and
apply tension to the entrance conveyance belt [4] by own
weight of the entrance conveyance motor [3]. Then tighten
3 screws [2].
4. Reinstall the parts by following the removal steps in reverse.
[2] [1] [2]

a0get3c001ca
(3) Procedure of removing the paper exit conveyance motor assy and replacing the paper exit conveyance belt
[3] [5] [6] [4] 1. Remove the rear cover. G.17.2.3 Rear cover)
2. Disconnect the connector [1] and then remove the wiring harness
from the wiring harness clamp.
3. Remove the straight gate spring [3].
4. Remove 3 screws [4] and then remove the paper exit motor assy
[5] and the paper exit conveyance belt [6].
Note
When reinstalling, temporary tighten 3 screws [4] and
apply tension to the paper exit conveyance belt [6] by own
weight of the paper exit motor assy. Then tighten 3 screws
[4].
[4] [1] [2]

a0get3c002ca
F -212
(4) Replacing procedure of the entrance conveyance motor (M1), the paper exit motor (M2)
[2] [1] 1. Remove the entrance conveyance motor assy and the paper exit
motor assy.
2. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the mounting bracket [2].
Note
When reinstalling, be sure to put the connector [3], be
sure to install it in the direction shown in the picture.
[1] [3]
a0get3c003ca
[3] [4] [2] 3. Loosen 2 screws [1] to remove the pulley gear [2]. Then remove
the entrance conveyance motor (M1) and the paper exit motor
(M2) [3].
Note
When reinstalling, insert the pin [5] to the shallower
groove [4] until it comes in contact, and then tighten 2
screws [1].
[5] [1] a0get3c004ca
19.2.2 Replacing the conveyance pulley, the paper exit conveyance pulley
Conveyance pulley, Paper exit conveyance pulley
*1 1200/1200P/1051
F -213
(2) Procedure
Rear cover (Refer to G.17.2.3 Rear cover)
[2]
[3] Entrance conveyance motor, Entrance conveyance belt, Paper
exit motor, Paper exit conveyance belt (Refer to F.19.2.1
Replacing the entrance conveyance motor (M1), the paper exit
motor (M2), the paper exit conveyance belt)
[1]
2. Remove the screws [1], 2 for each of 4 places, 4 conveyance
pulleys [2], and 4 pulley guides [3].
3. Remove the E-ring [4], the paper exit conveyance pulley [5] and
the pulley guide [6].
Note
Reinstall the paper exit conveyance pulley [5] with the
gear inside.
[5]
[4]
[6]
a0get3c005ca
19.2.3 Replacing the entrance roller /1, the bearing /K

Entrance roller /1, Bearing /K
*1 1200/1200P/1051
F -214
(2) Procedure
[1] [3] [5] [4] Rear cover (Refer to G.17.2.3 Rear cover)
Entrance conveyance motor, Entrance conveyance belt (Refer
to F.19.2.1 Replacing the entrance conveyance motor (M1),
the paper exit motor (M2), the paper exit conveyance belt)
Conveyance pulley /1 of the entrance pulley. (Refer to F.19.2.2
Replacing the conveyance pulley, the paper exit conveyance
pulley)
3. Remove the screws [2], 2 for each position, and then remove the
E-rings [3], and the bearings /K [4], 1 for each.
Note
[2] When reinstalling the bearing /K [4], be sure to set so that
the notch of the bearing /K comes in the position [5] as
To prevent the notch from opening, when tighten the
screws [2], 2 for each, in counterclockwise order.
When reinstalling the bearing /K [4], be sure to apply the
Molykote EM-30L on all over around the spring pins [6] on
front and rear of the shaft.
4. Remove the pick-up roller /1 [7].

[3] [5] [4]

[7]
[2] [6]
a0get3c006ca
19.2.4 Replacing the entrance roller /2, the stacker entrance roller, the stacker entrance conveyance belt, the stacker
entrance roller pressure springs /Fr and /Rr, the bearing /K
Entrance roller /2, Stacker entrance roller
Stacker entrance conveyance belt
Stacker entrance roller pressure springs /Fr and /Rr, Bearing /K
*1 1200/1200P/1051
F -215
(2) Procedure
[3] [1] [2] [3] Rear cover(Refer to G.17.2.3 Rear cover)
Entrance conveyance motor/entrance conveyance belt (Refer
to F.19.2.1 Replacing the entrance conveyance motor (M1),
the paper exit motor (M2), the paper exit conveyance belt)
Conveyance pulley of the entrance roller /2 (Refer to F.19.2.2
Replacing the conveyance pulley, the paper exit conveyance
pulley)
2. Remove the stacker entrance roller pressure springs /Fr [1] and /
Rr [2].
3. Remove the screws [3], 2 for each position, and then remove 2
coupling brackets [4].
Note
When reinstalling, push the stacker entrance roller assy
[6] [4] [6] [5] a0get3c007ca [5] against the coupling receiver bracket [6] and then
install the coupling bracket [4].
[2] [1] [7]
6. Remove the screws [2], 2 for each front and rear sides, and then
[6] remove the E-rings [3] and the bearings /K [4], 1 for each.
[5] Note
When reinstalling the bearing /K [6], be sure to set so that
[4]
7. Remove the stacker entrance roller assy [9].
[9]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4] [3] [8]
a0get3c008ca
F -216
[1] [1]
E-rings [2] and the bearings /K [3], 1 for each.
Note
[2] the notch of the bearing /K comes in the position [4] as
[2] [3] shown in the picture.
[3] [4] screws [1], 2 for each, in counterclockwise order.
[4]
9. Remove the stacker entrance roller[5].
Note
When reinstalling, be sure to set so that the flange section
[6] of the pulley comes in the direction shown in the
picture.
[6] [5]
a0get3c009ca
[1]
[1] E-rings [2], 1 each. Then slide the bearings [3], 1 for each.
Note
When reinstalling the bearing [3], be sure to set so that
the notch of the bearing comes in the position [4] as
11. Remove the entrance roller /2 [5] and the stacker entrance
[4] [3] [2] [2] [3] [4]
conveyance belt [6] from the bracket [7].
Note
When reinstalling, be sure to set so that the flange section
[8] of the pulley comes in the direction shown in the
picture.
[6] [8] [5] [7]

a0get3c010ca
19.2.5 Replacing the paper refeed roller, the merging section roller, the paper exit roller, the bearing /K
Paper refeed roller, Merging section roller, Paper exit roller, Bearing /K
*1 1200/1200P/1051
F -217
(2) Procedure
[2] [4] [1] [6]
Front door(Refer to G.17.2.2 Front cover)
Rear cover(Refer to G.17.2.3 Rear cover)
Left cover(Refer to G.17.2.4 Left cover)
Paper exit motor, Paper exit conveyance belt (Refer to F.
19.2.1 Replacing the entrance conveyance motor (M1), the
paper exit motor (M2), the paper exit conveyance belt)
Conveyance pulleys of the paper refeed roller, the merging
section roller and the paper exit roller
2. Loosen the screw [1] and remove the screw [2]. Then remove the
FD alignment belt [3] from the pulley [4].
Note
[3] [7] [8] [7] When reinstalling the FD alignment belt [3], be sure to
insert it to the pulleys [4] and [5], and place it under the
tension of the spring [6] and then tighten the screw [1].
3. Remove 4 screws [7] and the pulley fixing plate [8].
[5]
a0get3c011ca
F -218
[6] [5] [4] 5. Remove the screws [3], 2 for each of 3 positions, and then remove
the E-rings [4] and the bearings /K [5], 1 for each.
Note
[3]
[2] [1]
[7]
a0get3c012ca
F -219
6. Remove 2 E-rings [1].
[5] [4] [3]
7. Remove the screws [2], 2 for each of 3 positions, and then remove
the E-rings [3], and the bearings /K [4], 1 for each.
Note
When reinstalling the bearing /K [4], be sure to apply
[2]
[1] [6]
a0get3c013ca
8. Remove the paper exit roller [1], the merging section roller [1] and
[2] [1] the paper refeed roller [3].
Note
When reinstalling, be sure to set each roller in the
following conditions; the paper exit roller [1] with the side
which has a step on the top of the shaft faced rear, the
merging section roller [2] with its screw hole faced rear
and the paper refeed roller [3] with its D-cut faced
front.
[3] a0get3c014ca
19.2.6 Replacing the straight gate

Straight gate
*1 1200/1200P/1051
F -220
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the Rear cover(Refer to G.17.2.3 Rear cover)
[7] [6] [4] [5] [3] 2. Remove the straight gate spring [1].
3. Remove the C-clip [2] and remove the straight gate solenoid arm
[3].
4. Remove the screw [4] and remove the straight gate solenoid arm
[5].
5. Remove the E-ring [6] and then remove the bearing [7].
[2] [1] a0get3c015ca
6. Open the straight conveyance guide plate [1].

[1] [4]
7. Remove the E-ring [2] and remove the bearing [3] and the straight
gate [4].
[3]
[2]
a0get3c016ca
19.2.7 Replacing the straight gate solenoid (SD1) and the straight gate spring
Replacing the straight gate solenoid (SD1) and the straight gate spring
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 5,000,000 operations)
F -221
(2) Procedure
[6] [4] [5] 2. Remove the straight gate spring [1].
3. Remove the C-clip [2] and remove the straight gate solenoid arm
[3].
4. Remove the connector [4].
5. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the straight gate solenoid
assy [6].
[3] [2] [1] a0get3c020ca
Note
[1] [2] When reinstalling the parts, be sure to fix the straight gate
solenoid assy so that the leading edge [1] of the straight
gate without pulling the plunger comes to upper than the
guide plate [2] and the leading edge [3] of the straight gate
with pulling the plunger comes to lower than the guide
plate [4] after installing the straight gate spring.
[3] [4] a0get3c021ca
6. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the mounting bracket [2] and the
[6] [1] [2] [3] plunger [3]. Then, remove the straight gate solenoid (SD2) [4].
Note
When reinstalling this part, be sure to install it so that the
wiring harness [5] is on the side of the screw hole [6] of
the mounting bracket [2].
[5] [4] a0get3c022ca
F -222

19.3.1 Replacing the stacker exit shutter solenoid (SD2)
Stacker exit shutter solenoid (SD2)
(2) Procedure
[4] [6] 2. Remove the C-clip [1] and remove the stacker exit shutter arm [2].
Then remove the plunger [3].
Note
Be careful that the plunger [3] falls down when removing
the C-clip [1].

4. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the stacker exit shutter
solenoid assy [6].
[5] [3] [2] [1] a0get3c023ca
Note
[2]
When reinstalling the parts, be sure to fix the stacker exit
shutter solenoid assy so that the leading edge [3] of the
stacker exit shutter [2] comes to the inner area [6] of the
folding part of the guide plate [5] on the refeed roller [4]
when pulling the plunger of the stacker exit shutter
solenoid (SD2) to which the stacker exit shutter arm [1] is
connected.
Check it from the opening [7].
[3] [6] [5] [4]
[1] [7] a0get3c024ca
F -223
[1] [2] [5] 5. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the stacker exit shutter
solenoid (SD2) [3] from the mounting bracket [2].
Note
[4] [3] a0get3c025ca
19.3.2 Replacing the stack switching solenoid (SD3)

Stack switching solenoid (SD3)
(2) Procedure
[4] [6] [5] [2] [1] 1. Remove the Rear cover(Refer to G.17.2.3 Rear cover)
2. Remove the C-clip [1] and remove the stack switching arm [2].
4. Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the plunger [5] and the
stack switching solenoid assy [6].
[3] a0get3c026ca
Note
[2] [3] When reinstalling the parts, be sure to fix the stack
switching solenoid assy so that the driven roller [2]
touches with the refeed roller [3] when not pulling the
plunger [1] of the stack switching solenoid (SD3), and
when pulling it, the gap between them is larger than the
standard value "a".
Standard value "a"
:The gap between the driven roller [2] and the re-feed
roller [3] is 2mm or more.
[1] [4] a0get3c027ca
F -224
[2] [1] 5. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the stack switching
solenoid (SD3) [3] from the mounting bracket [2].
Note
[3] [5] [4] a0get3c028ca
19.3.3 Replacing the stacker entrance guide plate solenoid (SD4)

Stacker entrance guide plate solenoid (SD4)
(2) Procedure
[4] [2] [1] 2. Remove the C-clip [1] and remove the stacker entrance guide
plate arm [2].
4. Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the stacker entrance guide
plate solenoid assy [5].
[3] [5] a0get3c029ca
F -225
Note
[5] [4] When reinstalling the parts, be sure to fix the stacker
entrance guide plate solenoid assy at the position where
the roller [4] installed to the drive shaft [3] of the solenoid
starts pushing the mounting bracket [6] of the stacker
entrance roller [5] with the plunger [1] touching with the
mounting bracket [2].
[6] [3]
[2] [1] [7] a0get3c030ca
[6] [2] 5. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the mounting bracket [2] and the
plunger [3]. Then, remove the stacker entrance guide plate
solenoid (SD4) [3].
Note
[5] [1] [4] [3] a0get3c031ca
F -226
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE GP-...
20. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE GP-501

20.1 Caution for maintenance procedure
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR SAFTY
These symbols are used in this documentation alert you to danger or important information.
WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious Injury.
WARNING: Risk of electrical shock. This warning statement indicates situations where there is a risk of death by electric
shock.
CAUTION: This notice indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate
injury.
It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices.
Certain components in this product are susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge.
Observe all ESD procedures to avoid component damage.
This section contains cleaning and maintenance procedures.
CAUTION
GP-501 uses screws of inch standard. Therefore, do not mix them with other products (metric standard screws). Otherwise, the
screw hole is damaged.
20.2 DIE SET SERVICE

20.2.1 Die Set Service
The Die Set assembly is not serviceable other than inspection and periodic lubrication. The one exception is the felt pad on the Twin Loop Die
Set can be replaced. If a Die Set is at its end of life, it will tend to cause mis-feeds due to hanging chips. This is a result of die plate wear, and
not pin wear, which cannot be corrected. When this occurs, the Die Set should be replaced with a new one.
20.2.2 Die Set Life Expectancy

The GP-501 Punch Die Sets have a minimum life expectancy of 500K cycles (sheets of paper punched). With periodic lubrication and optimum
paper types, life can exceed this number. Variables that affect life expectancy:
Failure to follow the lubrication schedule or using the incorrect lubricant.
Variety and types of paper being punched
Cover stocks being punched
Length of the average job
Other environmental conditions
20.2.3 Die Set Components

(1) Die Set Types
The GP-501 Punch uses two types of Die Sets.
Type Description Bindery Style
Felt Pad Retainer Assembly Felt oiler pad on one side (with magnet and retaining DS-501, 503, 504, 506, 508, 510, 511, 513, 515,
plate) 517, 518
Encircled Felt Oiler Pad Felt oiler pad surrounds the punch pins DS-502, 505, 507, 509, 512, 514, 516
(2) Serviceable Components

Shoulder bolt and spring [1]
Punch pins [2]
Felt pad [3]
Floating pressure bar spring (not shown).
(3) Felt Pad Retaining Assembly

The twin loop Die Set has a removable felt pad assembly. The felt pad [1] provides lubrication to the punch pins under normal usage and
helps keep them clean. The magnet [2] and retainer [3] keeps the felt pad in place during normal handling and operation.
F -227
Note
The felt pad assembly on the Twin Loop Die Set is the only assembly that can be replaced.
(4) Reassembling the Felt Pad Assembly

The felt pad assembly consists of the felt pad [1], magnet [2], and retainer [3].
(a) To assemble the felt pad retaining assembly:

1. Lay the die assembly on a table so that the open side of the top
bar is facing up.
2. Lay the felt pad [1] along the punch pins so that it spans all pins.
3. If the pad needs oil, apply it along the full length of the pad.
4. Insert the magnet [2] into the retainer [3].
5. Place the magnet and retainer [1] over the pad [2] and lightly
press them against the pad and the Die Set base. Make sure the
assembly is sitting on the base [3] and that the felt pad is against
the punch pins [4].
F -228
(5) Floating Pressure Bar Spring Replacement
Some Die Sets use springs to hold the top plate above the pressure bar [1]. Detentes in the top plate hold the springs in place [2]. Ensure all
springs are in place.
(a) To replace pressure bar springs:

1. Compress the spring and insert between the top bar and pressure bar.
2. Use a flat screwdriver to position the spring so that the detent holds it in place.
3. Compress the top bar to ensure it moves freely and that it returns.
20.2.4 Checking and Replacing the Die Set

(1) Periodically Checked and replaced parts/Spotted Checked and replaced parts/cycle
Dieset
: Every 2,000,000 prints*1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 500,000 punches*2) *3
*1 The periodical replacement is only for 1200/1200P/1051/C6501/C6501P/C65hc.
*2 Actual replacement cycle of 1200/1200P/1051/C6501/C6501P/C65hc/C8000.
*3 Replace as needed. Replacement is recommended if hanging chips are usually generated.
(2) Procedure
Set the Die Set on a table and press the top plate straight down at both ends [1] at the same time and look for a smooth operation. The top
plate and pins should retract fully when you release.
Reinstall the Die Set into the punch and run several sheets of the customers paper through the punch. Inspect the holes.
Holes should be clean and even with no tearing or frayed edges.
Holes should be punched completely, leaving no chip attached.
Holes should be straight (no skew) and evenly spaced from the edge of the paper and aligned.
20.2.5 Checking and lubricating the Die Set pins and Die Set shoulder bolts
(1) Periodically Checked and lubricated parts/cycle
Die Set pins
: Every 200,000 prints (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 50,000 punches) *1
: Every 210,000 prints (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 50,000 punches) *2
Die Set Shoulder bolts
: Every 800,000 prints (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 200,000 Punches) *1
: Every 750,000 prints (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 200,000 Punches) *2
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 C8000
(2) Procedure
Inspect the punch pins for signs of wear or mis-alignment. Periodic lubrication extends the life of the Die Sets.
The customer or operator can perform this maintenance between technician inspections.
F -229
(3) To lubricate Die Set pins:

Lubricate with 3-IN-ONE oil (high quality machine oil).
Apply oil lightly along the length of the pad [1], but do not over saturate.
Do not use spray lubricants because they tend to dry up quickly and leave a sticky residue.
For the felt pad retaining assembly instructions, refer to F.20.2.3 Die Set Components.
(4) To lubricate shoulder bolts:

Lubricate the shoulder bolts and springs [2] using a brush to apply Magnalube-G Teflon Grease.
Make sure the grease coats the bolts.
20.2.6 Hole Alignment inspection

Inspect the hole alignment on the customers punched paper. Fold the punched sheet of paper in half [1] and the punched holes should be
aligned evenly along the edge and centered between the ends [2]. If the punched holes are not aligned, then the Die Set cradle must be
adjusted. For adjustment procedures.
20.3 CHECK, CLEANING, AND LUBRICATION

20.3.1 CHECK, CLEANING, AND LUBRICATION
If operating properly, the GP-501 will punch the same types of copy paper and cover materials handled by the copier and run at the same
speed. Hole quality will vary between different grades of paper.
The following maintenance should be performed according to the schedule.
(1) Table 3.2 Maintenance Schedule

Description Qty. Part Number Period Check Clean Lubricate Replace Materials, Tools
Used
Aligner belt 12,000K X a soft cloth and
(green belt) prints alcohol
Aligner idler 12,000K X a soft cloth and
roller assembly prints alcohol
Aligner idler 3,000K X X a so ft cloth and
rollers prints alcohol
Aligner latching 3,000K X -
mechanisms prints
Back gauge 3,000K X X Blower brush/
solenoid prints vacuum cleaner
Back gauge 1 A0N9PP59## 4,000K X -
mechanism prints
F -230
Base 3,000K X Vacuum

prints cleaner
Die guide 3,000K X Vacuum
prints cleaner
Die set 500K Y -
prints
Punch die (pins) 50K X Oil 3-IN-ONE
prints (WD-40
Company)
Die set shoulder 200K X Grease Magnalube-G
bolts prints Teflon Grease
Door closing 3,000K X -
latch prints
Drive rollers 3,000K X X a so ft cloth and
prints alcohol
Idler rollers 3,000K X X a so ft cloth and
prints alcohol
Optical sensors 3,000K X Blower brush
prints
Paper path, 3,000K X X a so ft cloth and
Aligner Panels prints alcohol
bypass prints alcohol
punch prints alcohol
Punch drive 3,000K Grease Magnalube-G
cams prints Teflon Grease
Roller energy 3,000K X X a so ft cloth and
drive prints alcohol
Timing belts 3,000K X X a so ft cloth and
prints alcohol
20.3.2 External Cleaning

The cover may be cleaned with a soft cloth moistened with mild detergent and warm water.
Do not use chemical cleaners or solvents as these may have a harmful effect. Use detergent sparingly to avoid contact with electrical
components.
WARNING:
Make sure you disconnect the GP-501 Punch from its power source before cleaning. Failure to observe this warning could result
in death or serious Injury.
20.3.3 Internal Cleaning

Occasionally remove the covers and remove paper dust and chips. Paper dust can accumulate throughout the punch including around the
motors and other electrical components. Use a vacuum cleaner if possible. A small paintbrush can also be used but extreme care should be
used around electrical components.
Non-electrical components may be cleaned with alcohol, an approved cleaner, or a soft cloth moistened with mild detergent and warm water.
Rollers can be cleaned with alcohol.
WARNING:
Make sure you disconnect the GP-501 Punch from its power source before cleaning. Failure to observe this warning could result
in death or serious Injury.
20.3.4 Operational Inspection

Make sure the punch operates smoothly and produces the desired holes in the customers paper.
20.3.5 Internal Inspection

Whenever the cover has been removed for corrective maintenance, visually inspect for defects and problems such as damaged components,
loose screws or nuts, abraded wire insulation, loose terminals, etc. Correct any problems before returning the machine to service.
20.3.6 Cleaning the base

Base
(2) Procedure
Chips and paper dust falls to the bottom of the punch. Clean with a vacuum cleaner each time the machine is serviced. The customer can
also do this between the technicians visits.
F -231
(3) Chip Bin

Remove the Chip bin tray and empty. Vacuum out paper chips and dust from the Chip bin [1], especially at the back around the chip tray
switch.
20.3.7 Cleaning the Die guide

Die guide
(2) Procedure
Remove the Die Set and clean the guide [1] with a vacuum cleaner.
20.3.8 Checking the Door Latch

The door latch must hold the door closed and ensure that the switch activation tab is depressing the door switch [1]. The switch tab [2] should
press the switch button just so that it is close to bottoming.
(1) Periodically checked parts/cycle

Door latch
: Every 3,000,000 prints.
(2) Procedure
Ensure latch holds door closed.
Ensure switch is activated when the door is closed.
To adjust the door latch. (Refer to G.18.2.1 Door latch check)
F -232
20.3.9 Cleaning and Checking the aligner paper path and panels
(1) Periodically cleaned and checked parts/cycle
Aligner paper path and panels
(2) Procedure
Inspect for worn or damaged parts. Clean with alcohol, an approved cleaner, or a soft cloth moistened with mild detergent and warm water as
needed.
(3) To clean the Aligner Panels:

1. Lift the Aligner latches to open panels.
2. Clean surfaces [1].
3. Clean paper alignment channels [2].
20.3.10 Cleaning and Checking the Aligner Idler Roller

(1) Cleaning and Checking the Aligner Idler Roller
Aligner idler rollers press the paper against the green drive belts and align the paper for punching and exiting. To replace the idler rollers.
(Refer to F.20.3.25 Aligner Idler Roller Replacement)
(a) Periodically cleaned and checked parts/cycle

Aligner Idler Roller
(b) Procedure
Make sure the aligner rollers are clean.
Ensure that the idler rollers maintain pressure against the green drive belt.
Inspect for bent or damaged parts.
WARNING:
Disconnect the GP-501 Punch from power and retain the power cord in your possession for your safety. Failure to observe
this warning could result in death or serious Injury.
(c) To inspect the aligner idler rollers:

1. Press the top of each rollers bracket [1]. The roller should move
away from the green belt drive and then when released, they
spring back into place.
F -233
2. Ensure the torsion springs [1] are hooked over the bracket [2].
(d) To clean idler rollers:

1. Clean the idler rollers with a soft cloth and alcohol.
2. Inspect the idler rollers for wear patterns or groves. Surface should be evenly textured and clean.
20.3.11 Cleaning the Aligner (Green) Drive Belt

Aligner (Green) Drive Belt
: Every 12,000,000 prints. *1
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000
(2) Procedure
Ensure the Aligner Drive Belts are clean.
Inspect for frayed edges and wear.
(3) To clean the Aligner Drive Belts:

1. Clean Green Drive Belt [1] with a plastic scouring pad.
2. Use the drive knob [2] to turn the belt.
Figure 3.16 Cleaning Green Drive Belt.
To adjust or replace the Aligner Drive Belt. (Refer to F.20.3.26 Aligner Drive Belt Replacement)
20.3.12 Cleaning and Checking the Back Gauge Solenoid

Back Gauge Solenoid
(2) Procedure
1. Inspect and ensure the Back Gauge solenoid linkage moves freely. Press linkage down and release [1]. Linkage should return.
2. Clean out the solenoid and surrounding area with a vacuum cleaner and canned air [2]. Make sure the solenoid is clean and dry.
Note
Do not apply lubricants to the solenoid or linkage.
To remove and repair the back gauge. (Refer to F.20.3.28 Replacing the back gauge mechanism, F.20.3.29 Back Gauge Removal)
F -234
20.3.13 Cleaning and Checking the Idler Rollers

Idler rollers
(2) Procedure
Idler rollers press against the drive rollers and move the paper through the bypass [1] or the punch [2].
Inspect rollers for wear patterns or groves. The roller surface should be even and have a textured surface. Where practical, remove the roller
assembly to clean [3].
Please see the reference page about the mainteinence procedure of each roller.
Bypass Idler roller [3].
Punch Idler roller [4]. (Refer to F.20.3.14 Cleaning and Checking the punch idler rollers)
(3) Cleaning and Checking the Bypass Idler Rollers

Idler rollers press against the drive rollers and move the paper through the bypass. Rollers can usually be serviced without removing the
bypass panel.
1. Separate the punch from the printer.
2. Disconnect the power.
3. Lift the retaining spring over the end of the idler roller shaft. The illustration shows moving the spring [1] on the bypass plate, which has
been removed from the machine for clarity.
4. Pull the released shaft end out of the bushing fork [2], releasing the opposite end of the shaft from the other retaining spring.
5. Clean the idler rollers with a soft cloth and alcohol.
6. Ensure the rollers turn freely on the shaft.
7. To install idler roller assemblies reverse the steps.
F -235
Installation Note:
Make sure the flat surface of the bushing aligns in the fork.
Rollers are non-directional so it does not matter which end goes in each fork.
After the assembly is in place, gently pull the assembly outward and release to ensure it moves freely in the fork.
(4) Cleaning and Checking the punch idler rollers

Idler rollers press against the drive rollers and move the paper through the GP-501 Punch. Most can be serviced without disassembling punch
components. Unplug unit and separate from the printer. (Refer to G.18.3.2 Separating the Punch From the Printer).
Also remove two side panels as described in F.20.3.22 Bypass panel Removal and F.20.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal
(a) Procedure
Inspect rollers for wear patterns or groves [1],[2]. The roller surface should be even and have a textured surface.
Replace per the maintenance schedule.
Note
Pull out the chip bin to access the idler roller [2]
Use the drive knob [1] to turn the rollers to continue inspection and cleaning.
F -236
To remove the Punch Idler rollers:

1. Lift the retaining spring [1] over the end of the idler roller shaft.
2. Pull the released shaft end out of the bushing fork [2], releasing
the opposite end of the shaft from the other retaining spring.
Installation Note:
20.3.14 Cleaning and Checking the punch idler rollers

Idler rollers press against the drive rollers and move the paper through the GP-501 Punch. Most can be serviced without disassembling punch
components. Unplug unit and separate from the printer. (Refer to G.18.3.2 Separating the Punch From the Printer).
Also remove two side panels as described in F.20.3.22 Bypass panel Removal and F.20.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal
(1) Procedure
Inspect rollers for wear patterns or groves [1],[2]. The roller surface should be even and have a textured surface.
Replace per the maintenance schedule.
Note
Pull out the chip bin to access the idler roller [2]
F -237
Use the drive knob [1] to turn the rollers to continue inspection and cleaning.
(2) To remove the Punch Idler rollers:

1. Lift the retaining spring [1] over the end of the idler roller shaft.
2. Pull the released shaft end out of the bushing fork [2], releasing
the opposite end of the shaft from the other retaining spring.
Installation Note:
F -238
20.3.15 Cleaning and Checking the Drive Rollers

Drive rollers are located opposite the idler rollers.

Drive rollers
(2) Procedure
Inspect for wear patterns or groves. The roller surface should be even and not glazed.
Some drive rollers are not easily accessible. Those that are [1], should be inspected and cleaned when the idler rollers are removed. Where
practical, make sure the rollers are clean. Clean with a soft cloth and alcohol. Refer to also F.20.3.13 Cleaning and Checking the Idler Rollers.
20.3.16 Checking the Aligner Latch

Latches [1] on both sides of the punch hold the Aligner Panels in place, which in turn keeps even pressure on the idler rollers.

Aligner Latch
(2) Procedure
Inspect the latches for worn or damaged parts.
Open and close the latches and ensure they lock into place when closed.
Ensure the nylon wheel [2] turns freely on its bearing and that it aligns with its locking.
F -239
20.3.17 Cleaning the Optical Sensors

Optical Sensors
(2) Procedure
Inspect and clean Optical Sensors [1] per the maintenance schedule or as needed.
(3) Supplies Needed

Canned air or vacuum cleaner
F -240
Use canned air to blow the debris off each sensor. The illustration shows examples of three sensors [1].
20.3.18 Cleaning and Checking the Bypass Paper Path

Bypass paper path
(2) Procedure
Inspect the Bypass panel [1], rollers [2], and entrance guide [3] for wear, damage, and obstructions.
Inspect the rollers for wear patterns or groves. The surface should be rough and even. Make sure the rollers are clean. Clean rollers with
a soft cloth and alcohol. (Refer to F.20.3.13 Cleaning and Checking the Idler Rollers, F.20.3.15 Cleaning and Checking the Drive Rollers)
Raise the panel and ensure the magnet holds it in open [4]. Inspect the path for obstructions. Clean as needed.
Close the panel and check that it is flat and that paper will pass under it.
Ensure the bypass diverter moves freely and returns to the bypass position.
20.3.19 Cleaning and Checking the Punch Paper Path

Punch Paper path
(2) Procedure
Inspect the entire paper path through the punch. Look for wear, damage, and obstructions.
Inspect the rollers for wear patterns or groves.
Open the Aligner Panels [1] and U-channel [2] and make sure there are no obstructions.
Confirm that the latch [3] holds the U-channel tightly in place. Re-shape it if necessary.
Clean as needed.
F -241
20.3.20 Cleaning and Checking the Timing Belt

Timing Belt
(2) Procedure
Inspect all timing belts [1], [2] for wear, missing teeth, frayed edges, and cracks. For replacement, refer to F.20.3.43 Belt replacement.
Check for proper deflection of belts. The belts should be slightly loose with approximately 1/4 (6.35mm) deflection [1]. Belts that are too loose
will not drive properly and belts that are too tight can wear out prematurely or damage their driven components. Five belts [2] have tensioners,
it is these five belts that should be checked.
20.3.21 Bypass panel

(1) Tools Needed
Phillips screwdriver or 1/4" nut driver
Flat bladed screwdriver
Needle nose pliers
(2) Procedure
Separate the punch from the printer and remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.18.3.2 Separating the Punch From the Printer, G.18.3.3
Removing the Rear Cover)
F -242
20.3.22 Bypass panel Removal

(1) To remove the Bypass panel:
1. If removing the Bypass panel, remove the side panel cover by
removing the 4 screws [1].
2. Disconnect the grounding strap by removing the screw [1] on the

exit side of the bypass.
3. Unplug the exit side connector [2] at the rear frame.
4. Disconnect the connectors [1] of Enter sensor (S1) and Bypass

sensor (S8).
5. From the rear of the punch, remove one of the E-rings [1] from the
Bypass shaft.
F -243
6. From the side of the punch, slide the shaft towards the end of the
shaft [1] without the E-Ring [2] until the other end of the shaft
clears the nylon bushing and bracket.
7. Lift the opposite end of the shaft [3] and slide it out of the Bypass
panel in the opposite direction of the removed E-Ring [4].
Installation Note
Make sure the nylon bushing is installed so that it
protrudes through the mounting bracket of the rear frame
into the Bypass panel [5].
8. Rotate the rear of Bypass panel [1] so that it extends past the
entrance side of the punch [2].
9. Remove the Bypass panel.

10. To install the Bypass panel, reverse the steps.
Installation Note
Position the Bypass panel so that it is outside the shaft
mounting brackets. The nylon bushings go through the
mounting brackets [1], into the Bypass panel [2].
20.3.23 Aligner panels

The entrance side Aligner panel positions the paper in the Back Gauge for punching. The exit side Aligner panel positions the paper for the
finisher. Prior to servicing the Aligner Panels, separate the GP-501 Punch from the printer. (Refer to G.18.3.2 Separating the Punch From the
Printer).
20.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal

Removing the Aligner panels provides access to the paper path and the Aligner Green Drive Belt. The procedure is the same for the entrance
and exit Aligner panels except that the exit side has a docking plate which must be removed first.
F -244
(1) To remove the Aligner panel:

1. If removing the exit side Aligner panel, remove the side panel
cover by removing the 6 screws [1].
Note
The rest of the steps are the same for both Aligner panels.
2. Release the Aligner latch [1].

3. Remove the E-clips from both ends of the Aligner shaft [2].
4. Remove the shaft nylon bushings [3]
5. Slide the shaft out the front of the punch.

6. Remove aligner latch stop by removing screws [1].
7. Unhook the tension spring from the panel [1].

8. Remove the Aligner panel [2] out the front of the punch.
9. Reverse the steps to install the Aligner panel.
20.3.25 Aligner Idler Roller Replacement

(1) Tools Required
Flat head screw driver
Needle nose plyers
F -245
(2) Procedure
1. Pull off E-Clips [1]
2. Remove the pins [2]. During removal of pins hold on to spring with
fingers.
3. Completely remove the springs [3] and then slide roller assembly
[4] down and then out.
Note
Aligner rollers must be moved downwards. Hence all the
rollers need to be removed.
20.3.26 Aligner Drive Belt Replacement

(1) Procedure
Before replacing the green drive belts, remove the Aligner panels. (Refer to F.20.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal) Then follow the procedures
below for the entrance side or exit side green drive belt service.
(2) Tools Required

Phillips screw driver
Nut drivers, 1/4 and 5/16"
Hex wrenches, 5/64 and 9/64"
Snap ring pliers
E-Ring tool
Twelve inch metal ruler or similar straight edge
CAUTION
Disconnect the GP-501 Punch from power and retain the power cord in your possession for your safety. Failure to observe
this caution can result in injury.
Note
Empty the paper chip bin and replace it. This makes it easier to find small parts that you may drop into the bin.
(3) Paper Entrance Side Green Drive Belt Replacement

1. Disconnect the enter sensor (S1) wire from the side frame [1].
2. Remove the 4 screws that secure the front paper chute [1] to
remove the entrance guide [2].
F -246
3. To remove the GP2 aligner latch [1], do the following:
1. Unhook the spring of the GP2 aligner latch on the right end.
2. Remove only one (the one closest to the frame) of the E-rings
of the GP2 aligner latch on the left end (front Door side).
3. Push the GP2 aligner latch in toward the front door until it
clears the rear frame.
4. Pull the entire GP2 aligner latch, door latch out and set it
aside.
4. To remove Entrance Idler Aligner panel [2] assembly. (Refer to F.
20.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal)
5. Remove the fan [7] that prevents access to the flexible cable. To
remove it simply pull it off the shaft.
6. Remove the flexible cable using a hex wrench.
7. Remove the 2 screws [3]
8. Loosen screw from the solenoid link.
9. Remove the solenoid assembly [5] and link from the Diverter
Shaft[6], leave it hanging.
10. Remove the 2 E-Rings of the Entrance Diverter assembly, slide

the Diverter out and set it aside.
11. To remove the Entrance Drive Aligner assembly [7], which is the
large sheet metal assembly that actually contains the green drive
belt and Aligner.
1. Remove the 6 Screws that secure the face of this assembly.
2. Remove the 2 screws that secure this assembly from the side
frame.
3. Disconnect the sensor connector [8]
4. Pull and walk the entire sheet metal assembly of the Paper
Guide Aligner assembly up and outward. You can grab the
assembly at the roller cut out with your fingers.
CAUTION
As you pull the assembly out, disconnect the sensor
harness behind the assembly as soon as you are able
to reach it. Failure to observe this notice may damage
the wiring.
12. Remove the green drive belt Aligner Roller assembly by removing
the 4 screws [1].
CAUTION
Leave the Flex Shaft [2] attached.
(4) Green Drive Belt Assembly

1. Stretch the new Belt [3] onto the Aligner Roller assembly, green side out. Rotate the Flex Shaft [2] to confirm that the belt tracks properly.
2. Slide the Aligner into place, loosely attach the 4 Pan Head Screws with the 4 Lock Washers.
1. Check that the metal surface of the Aligner Roller assembly is flush with the Sheet Metal surface of the Paper Guide. A 12" metal ruler
works well to check this adjustment. Slip the ruler under the green drive belt and press it flat against the two surfaces.
2. Adjust the Aligner and snug the screws when perfectly flush.
Note
The green drive belt should look like the drawing shown in Figure 3.35.
3. As a double check, hold the entire Paper Guide assembly up so that you can visually inspect the alignment between the sheet metal
surface and the metal surface of the Aligner. The green drive belt should appear to be even or parallel, and just floating above the
surface of the sheet metal.
3. To install the Paper Guide assembly into the GP-501 Punch:
F -247
1. As you slide the Paper Guide assembly into place,
- Hook up the Sensor Harness to the Sensor on the back.
- Lift it up slightly to clear the lower Transition Paper Guide.
- Be sure to clear the Sensor Bracket at the top left.
- Be sure that the Flex Coupling Shaft is sticking out of the rear
of the GP-501 Punch properly.
2. Visually check all around the mounting area of the Paper
Guide assembly and that the Sensor Harness is properly
connected.
3. Loosely secure it in place with 3 screws on the left and 3 on
the right.
4. Loosely install the 2 top screws.
5. Once all 8 mounting screws have been properly started you
have good alignment. You may now go back and tighten the
screws until they are snug.
4. Install the Flexible Shaft.
5. Install the curved sheet metal Exit Paper Guide (item 7) with Idler
Roller 4 Screws. Start all 4 screws, (2 on front and 2 on back) then
tighten.
6. Connect the Sensor Wire Harness at the top rear of the Exit Paper
Guide.
7. Install the GP2 Shaft back into place by inserting it first into the
front, then the back.
8. Close the GP2 Flipper Latch.

Repeat the test of rotating the pulleys to ensure smooth rotation of the Idler Rollers.
9. Attach the GP2 Shaft Spring.
10. Install the front E-Ring to secure GP2.
(5) Entrance Aligner Panel Installation

To install the Idler Aligner panel, refer to F.20.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal. Then insert the punch into the printer and finisher and connect the
power cord.
1. Test the GP-501 Punch by doing the following:
1. Run10 copies in bypass mode.
2. Run 1 sheet in punch mode.
3. Run 10 sheets in punch mode.
(a) Test the GP-501 Punch by doing the following:

1. Run 10 copies in bypass mode.
(6) Paper Entrance and Exit Side Green Drive Belt Replacement
1. To remove the GP6 Flipper (C), Door Latch:
1. Remove only one (the one closest to the frame) of the E-Rings
of the GP6 Flipper on the right end (front door side).
2. Push the GP6 Flipper in toward the front door until it clears the
rear frame.
3. Pull the entire GP6 Flipper, door latch out and set it aside.
F -248
2. To remove the Rear Aligner, Idler Paper Guide assembly:
1. Remove 2 E-Rings from the Pivot Shaft.
2. Slide the Shaft all the way out through the front of the GP-501
Punch.
3. Remove the 2 nylon bearings.
4. Remove and set aside the Rear Aligner, Idler Paper Guide
assembly.
3. To remove the curved sheet metal Exit Paper Guide assembly:
1. Remove the 4 screws (2 rear and 2 front) of the curved sheet
metal Exit Paper Guide assembly.
2. Unplug the sensor.
3. Pull the entire sheet metal Exit Paper Guide assembly out, set
aside.
4. To remove the Rear, Drive Side, and Paper Guide Aligner
assembly. This is the large sheet metal assembly within the
GP-501 Punch that contains the green drive belt Aligner.
CAUTION
Walk the Belt off of the Aligner Pulley at the rear.
1. Remove the 2 screws that hold the block to the frame. The
Coupler is loose and the rear panel will come out.
2. Remove the 6 screws that secure the face of this assembly.
3. Remove the 2 screws that secure this assembly from the top.
4. Pull and walk the entire sheet metal assembly of the Paper
Guide Aligner up and outward. You can grab the assembly at
the roller cut out with your fingers.
CAUTION
Handle the helical coupling carefully. It is very
delicate.
Note
In order to access these screws, you must first remove
the Die Set storage shelf and the cable shield attached
to the Die storage shelf at the paper entrance side.
Moving the Die Storage shelf aside will enable better
access to the 2 screws with a short Phillips screw
driver.
CAUTION
As you do this, disconnect the sensor harness behind
the assembly as soon as you are able to reach it.
Failure to do this can damage the unit.
5. Remove the green drive belt Aligner Roller assembly by

removing the 4 screws (S).
CAUTION
Leave the Flex Shaft (FS) attached.
6. Remove the green drive belt Aligner Roller assembly by

removing the 4 screws.
CAUTION
Leave the Coupler attached.
(7) Green Drive Belt Assembly

1. Stretch the new green drive belt onto the Aligner Roller assembly,
green side out.
Take care when handling the Aligner Roller assembly so as
not to damage the Flex Coupling.
Rotate the shaft to confirm that the belt tracks properly.
2. Slide the Aligner into place, loosely attach the 4 pan head screws
with the 4 lock washers.
Check that the metal surface of the Aligner Roller assembly is
flush with the sheet metal surface of the Paper Guide. A 12" metal
ruler works well to check this adjustment. Slip the ruler under the
green drive belt and press it flat against the two surfaces. Adjust
the Aligner and snug the screws when perfectly flush.
The green drive belt should look like the drawing shown in Figure
3.41.
To ensure proper assembly, hold the entire Paper Guide assembly
up so that you can visually inspect the alignment between the
sheet metal surface and the metal surface of the Aligner. The
green drive belt should appear to be even and just floating above
the surface of the sheet metal.
F -249
3. To install the Paper Guide assembly into the GP-501 Punch:

1. As you slide the Paper Guide assembly into place:
- Hook up the Sensor Harness to the Sensor on the back.
- Lift it up slightly to clear the lower Transition Paper Guide.
- Be sure to clear the sensor bracket at the top left.
- Be sure that the Flex Coupling shaft is sticking out of the rear
of the GP-501 Punch properly.
2. Visually check all around the mounting area of the Paper
Guide assembly and that the sensor harness is properly
connected.
3. Loosely secure it in place with 3 screws on the left and 3 on
the right.
4. Loosely install the 2 top screws.
5. Once all 8 mounting screws have been properly started go
back and tighten the screws until they are snug.
CAUTION
Do not over tighten the 2 screws on top.
4. Install the 2 screws to secure the bearing block for the pulley
arrangement at the rear of the GP-501 Punch. Press the block to
the top of the punch before tightening.
5. Install the pulley and belt onto the pulley block. Once properly
aligned, check belt and pulley movement. Tighten the set screw.
6. Install the Die Set storage rack with 3 screws front and 3 screws
back. Remember to attach the ground strap at the middle screw on
the rear (belt side). Start each screw to achieve proper alignment,
then go back over each screw and tighten it.
7. Install the Cable Guard on top of the Die Set storage rack (2
Screws).
8. Install the curved sheet metal Exit Paper Guide with Idler Roller 4
screws.
9. Start all 4 screws, (2 on front and 2 on back) then tighten.
10. Connect the sensor wire harness at the top rear of the Exit Paper
Guide.
11. To install the Idler Aligner Paper Guide:
1. Hold it loosely in place.
2. Press the nylon flange bearings into place, through both
pieces of sheet metal, with the flange to the inside.
3. Slide the shaft through the front of the machine, while holding
the nylon flange bearing in place.
4. Secure with 2 E-rings on the inside of the bearing.
5. Inspect by pressing in on the bottom area of the sheet metal
for:
- A slight deflection of each Idler Roller as you press.
- As you press, you can turn the pulleys at the rear of the
GP-501 Punch and see the Idler Rollers rotate smoothly.
12. Bend the small metal tab back into place.
13. Install the GP6 shaft back into place by inserting it first into the
front, then the back.
14. Close the GP6 Flipper Latch.
Repeat the test of rotating the pulleys to ensure smooth rotation of
the Idler Rollers.
15. Attach the GP6 shaft spring.
16. Install the front E-Ring to secure GP6.
(8) Aligner Panel Installation

To install the Idler Aligner panel, refer to F.20.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal. Then insert the punch into the main body and finisher and connect
the power cord.
(a) Test the GP-501 Punch by doing the following:

1. Run 10 copies in bypass mode.
F -250
20.3.27 Cleaning and checking the energy drive roller

(1) Periodically cleaned and checked parts/ cycle
Energy drive rollers
: 3,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
Reference Figure 3.44 Energy Roller as you perform this procedure.
1. Without disconnecting either retaining spring [1], roll one of them
gently to one side to release the Energy Drive Roller shaft from its
mounting bracket.
2. Lift the shaft [2] from the mounting bracket.
3. Using a clean cloth and alcohol, clean the surfaces of the rollers
[3] to remove any paper dust or toner that may have accumulated
over time.
4. Reverse steps 2 & 1 above to replace the shaft into the holder.
5. Ensure the flats of the bearings are seated properly in the
mounting brackets.
6. Ensure the springs are straight on the bearing to apply sufficient
force for the rollers to turn when you rotate the knob at the front of
the machine.
20.3.28 Replacing the back gauge mechanism

The Back Gauge assembly pauses the paper just as the edge has entered the die set. Working properly, the sheet will pause only long enough
for the holes to be punched correctly. The Back Gauge assembly also controls the paper chad falling into the chad bin, significantly reducing the
amount of chad that could flow through the paper path. Some chad falls outside the chad bin and should be cleaned up with a vacuum cleaner
during each servicing.
WARNING
Disconnect the GP-501 Punch from its power source before removing the Back Gauge assembly.
Failure to observe this warning can result in severe injury or death and damage the punch.
(1) Periodically replaced parts/Spotted replaced parts/cycle

Back gauge mechanism
: Every 16,000,000 prints*1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 4,000,000 punches*2)
*2 Actual replacement cycle of 1200/1200P/1051/C8000.
(2) Procedure
Remove Back Gauge assembly to clean and service the solenoid or to replace the Back Gauge. Also allows the removal of the Punch
Module.
To repair or replace the Back Gauge, separate the GP-501 Punch from the printer and finisher and then remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.
18.3.1 Preparing the GP-501 punch for service)
(3) Tools Required

Phillips screw driver or 1/4" nut driver
Note
F -251
20.3.29 Back Gauge Removal

(1) To remove the Back Gauge assembly:
1. Turn the Punch Cycle knob [1] so that the punch drive indicator [2]
lines up the position indicator [3].
2. Remove the Die Set and Chip Bin.

3. Remove the two Die Set Chip Brush bracket screws [1].
4. On the rear of the punch, unplug the drive punch flag sensor
connector [1].
5. Remove the 2 Die Set Adjustment Bracket screws [2] and pull the
bracket aside [3].
6. Remove the 2 Back Gauge rear mounting screws [1].
F -252
7. Disconnect the Back Gauge connector from the Punch Controller
PCB [1].
8. Cut wire harness ties as needed to free the solenoid wires.

9. Cut the 2 harness ties on the entrance side of the punch.
10. Remove the grommet from the frame [1].

Note
If you are not replacing the Back Gauge or are removing it
for access to the Punch Module, it is not necessary to pull
the wire through the hole in the frame. The Back Gauge
can be set aside.
11. Feed the connector through the hole in the frame and the grommet
separately [2].
12. Remove one top screw [1] of chip tray full sensor bracket [2] and
pivot the bracket down.
13. Gently slide the Back Gauge assembly to the rear of the punch [1]
so that it extends through the slot [2] and clears the wiring harness
[3].
CAUTION
Do not damage the wires in the wiring harness. Failure to
observe this precaution may damage the wiring.
F -253
14. Make sure the left end of the Back Gauge clears the opening on
the front of the punch [1] and pull it out [2] while sliding it to
towards the front.
15. Remove the Back Gauge and rail as an assembly.

16. To install the Back Gauge, reverse these steps.
17. After replacing the Back gauge mechanism, conduct the following
item.
When connecting to C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
Counter reset of the parts counter number 317
When connecting to 1250/1250P/1052
When connecting to 951
(2) Testing
(a) To test the Back Gauge:
1. Install a Die Set.
2. Rotate the punch drive knob to ensure the drive and cams turn easily.
3. Test for proper hole alignment to the paper edge by doing the following.
a. Run 1 page at a time.
b. Run 2 pages at a time.
c. Run 5 pages at a time.
d. Run 10 pages at a time.
e. Run 50 pages at a time.
20.3.30 Solenoid Spring Replacement

(1) Procedure
Removal of spring [1] and [2] -
Grasp the loop of the spring with needle nose plyers and then pull them off the shaft.
Removal of spring [3] -
Grasp the loop of the spring with needle nose plyers and then pull them off the sheet metal part.
20.3.31 Back Gauge Paddle

(1) Procedure
First remove Back gauge assembly as described in "F.20.3.29 Back Gauge Removal".
Deep or angled deep punches may be caused by a broken weld on the Paddle shaft [1]. Inspect the Paddle and press down on it while
holding the linkage to keep the linkage from moving. If the paddle [2] moves, replace the Back Gauge assembly.
F -254
20.3.32 Back Gauge Assembly Adjustment

The Back Gauge can be adjusted up and down for optimum operation for specific Die Sets.
The Back Gauge should be at its highest position for VeloBind or PB Die Sets. If it is not, the Back Gauge Paddle may not completely close the
paper path gap. This can result in paper (especially with excessive curl) slipping through the gap created by the Paddle and the top plate of the
Die Set. This causes a deep punch.
Initially, move the assembly to its highest position and then adjust accordingly after testing each Die Set.
Ensure it is easy to insert and remove three hole Die Sets. If the Die Set is too tight, evenly lower the Back Gauge slightly to achieve the
tightness required, while still retaining the PB and VeloBind functionality mentioned above.
(1) To adjust the Back Gauge:

1. Loosen the 3 phillips head screws [1].
2. Move the entire assembly [2] upward or downward as needed
while keeping it even.
3. While holding the assembly up, tighten the 3 screws.
(2) Testing
(a) To test the Back Gauge adjustment:
1. Run a few sheets of paper and check for skew with each Die Set.
2. Adjust the Back Gauge as needed and re-test.
3. Run 200 to 500 sheets of paper and check for mis-feeding, deep
punching, and skew.
20.3.33 Punch module

(1) Tools Required
Hex wrench, 5/64"
NOTE
(2) Procedure
Remove the module to lubricate the cams, or to service or replace the following components.
Punch motor
Drive motor belt
Punch module brake
Cams
Flexible drive coupling
Punch Module drive rollers
The clutch can be replaced without removing the module. (Refer to F.20.3.36 Punch Clutch Replacement).
F -255
WARNING
Disconnect the GP-501 Punch from its power source before removing the Back Gauge assembly.
Failure to observe this warning can result in severe injury or death and damage the punch.
20.3.34 Punch Module Removal

The Back Gauge assembly must be removed before removing the Punch Module. (Refer to F.20.3.29 Back Gauge Removal).
(1) To remove the Punch Module:

1. Remove the Back Gauge assembly.
2. Use a 5/64 hex wrench to remove the Punch Cycle knob [1].
3. Remove the 4 Punch Module retaining screws [1] from the front
panel.
4. Release the cable ties on the left wiring harness [1] to free the
Punch Module wiring. Remove the connector from flag sensor [2].
Remove harness from brake and clutch as per image below.
5. Remove the belts in the following order.

1. Remove the bottom left and right vertical belts [1] by walking
the belts over the pulleys.
2. Remove the 4 power supply screws [5].
3. Loosen the belt idler rollers [2] and remove the upper vertical
belt [3].
4. Remove the bottom triangular belt [4] after loosening the
respective tensioner.
F -256
6. Remove the two rear Punch Module screws [1].
7. Cut wire harness ties as needed to release the punch wiring.

8. Unplug the punch connector [1] from the control board.
F -257
9. Carefully slide the Punch Module out the back of the punch.
Ensure that the wiring harness does not get caught or prevent
removal of the module.
20.3.35 Lubricating to the Punch Drive Cams

(1) Periodically lubricated parts/cycle
Punch drive cams
: Every 12,000,000 prints (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 3,000,000 punches)*1
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000
(2) Procedure
Back gauge and rail needs to be removed for accessing punch module cams. refer to F.20.3.29 Back Gauge Removal for removing back
gauge. Use brush for reach to cams for further cleaning operation.
Installation Note
Make sure the wires on the rear of the punch are not obstructing the Die Set or Chip Bin.
20.3.36 Punch Clutch Replacement

(1) Procedure
Replace if Punch clutch is malfunctioning.
Note
The Punch clutch can be removed without removing the Punch Module.
(2) Tools Required

Phillips screwdriver or 1/4" nut driver
Hex wrench, 5/64"
F -258
(3) To remove the clutch:

1. Unplug the punch flag sensor (S9) connector [1].
2. Slide the fan [1] off the shaft.
3. Remove the lower drive belt [1].
4. Loosen the 2 pulley socket head set screws [1].

5. Remove the pulley and its shaft key [2].
F -259
6. Remove the 2 clutch bracket screws [1].
Installation Note
When installing the clutch bracket, ensure that the fork of
the clutch engages the tab on the bracket [2].
7. Loosen the 2 clutch socket head set screws [1], slide the Punch
clutch [2] off the shaft, and remove the shaft key [3].
Installation Note
When installing the Punch clutch, be sure to install the
shaft key. Press the Punch clutch against the drive gear
plate. While pressing the clutch against the plate, tighten
the 2 set screws. The assembly does not require a gap
between the Punch clutch and clutch plate.
8. Cut wire ties as needed and unplug the clutch connector [1] from
the Punch Controller PCB.
9. Slide the back portion of the clutch [1] off the shaft.
The motor drive belt [2] can be removed at the same time.
10. To install the clutch, reverse these steps.
20.3.37 Punch Module Brake Replacement and Adjustment

(1) Procedure
To replace the Punch module brake, first remove the clutch and related drives. (Refer to F.20.3.36 Punch Clutch Replacement). The Punch
module brake must be adjusted while on drive shaft. To adjust the Punch module brake. (Refer to F.20.3.39 Punch Module Brake Adjustment)
(2) Tools Needed

Feeler gauge, 0.0001" (0.00254 mm)
Hex wrenches, 0.05" and 3/32"
Flat blade screwdriver
Pliers
F -260
20.3.38 Punch Module Brake Replacement

(1) To replace the Punch module brake
1. Remove the 4 socket head set screws [1].
2. Loosen the 2 set screws [2] until the brake pad [3] slides freely on
the shaft.
Installation Note
When installing the Punch module brake, ensure that the 2
set screws engage the flats on the shaft. To adjust the
Punch module brake. (Refer to F.20.3.39 Punch Module
Brake Adjustment)
3. Remove the E-Ring at the opposite end of the shaft [1].

4. Slide the shaft [2] out of the bearing bracket, away from the clutch
end.
5. Slide the Punch module brake assembly off the shaft.
6. To install the Punch module brake assembly, reverse these steps.
20.3.39 Punch Module Brake Adjustment

(1) Procedure
The Punch module brake can be adjusted without removing the Punch module brake from the shaft. The gap between the brake and the pad
is 0.0001" (0.00254 mm) .
(2) To adjust the Punch module brake

1. Loosen the 2 set screws [1] until the brake pad slides freely on the
shaft.
2. Use a 0.0001" (0.00254 mm) feeler gauge to set the gap between the brake and the brake pad.
3. Tighten the 2 set screws and check the gap.
20.3.40 Punch Module Motor Replacement

(1) Procedure
Replace motor when it malfunctions.
F -261
(2) To replace the Punch Module motor:

1. Cut any wire ties as necessary to release the motor wires.
2. Unplug motor wire connections from the capacitor [1].
3. Remove the metal spring clip [1] from the fan and slide the fan [2]
off the shaft.
Installation Note
When installing the fan, be sure to align the flat of the fan
hub with the flat on the shaft. Also, make sure the hub and
spring clip are facing away from the motor.
4. Loosen the 2 socket head set screws[1] on the pulley and slide the
pulley and belt off the shaft.
5. Remove the motor mounting 4 nuts [2].
6. To install the motor, reverse these steps.
20.3.41 Punch Module Motor Drive Belt Replacement

(1) Procedure
Replace the belt when it is frayed, missing teeth, or worn out.
(2) To replace the Punch Module drive belts:

1. With the fan removed from the shaft, work the belt [1] off the clutch
gear [2].
2. Install a new belt by looping it over the motor pulley and then work
it onto the clutch gear.
The belt requires no adjustment. It should have slight deflection
when pressed.
20.3.42 Punch Module Drive Roller Replacement

(1) Procedure
Inspect for wear patterns or groves. The roller surface should be even and not glazed.Clean with a soft cloth and alcohol.
(2) Tools Required

Flat bladed screwdriver
F -262
Needle nose pliers
With the Punch Module out of the machine, the punch entrance side [1] and exit [2] drive rollers can be cleaned or replaced.
(3) To clean the punch entrance drive rollers:

1. Remove the idler roller assembly [1].
2. Rotate and clean the drive rollers [2].
(4) To replace the punch entrance drive rollers:

1. Unplug the sensor [1].
2. Remove the 2 screws at the ends of the idler roller assembly [2].
3. Remove the 2 screws at the ends of the drive roller assembly [3].
4. Remove the E-Ring at the end of the drive roller shaft [1].
5. Slide the drive roller shaft and bracket towards the opposite end of
the Punch Module so that the end of the shaft clears the bearing at
the end where you removed the E- Ring [1].
6. Lift the drive roller and bracket out of the Punch Module.
(5) To clean the punch exit drive rollers:

1. Move one retaining spring [1] to the side and then remove the idler
roller assembly [2].
2. Rotate and clean the drive rollers [2].
F -263
(6) To replace the punch exit drive rollers:

1. Move one retaining spring [1] to the side and then remove the idler
roller assembly [2].
2. Remove the 2 screws at each end of the idler roller assembly [3].
3. Remove the E-Ring [4] at the end of the drive roller shaft.
4. Slide the drive roller shaft and bracket towards the opposite end of
the Punch Module so that the end of the shaft clears the bearing at
the end where you removed the E-Ring [4].
5. Lift the drive roller and bracket out of the Punch Module [5].
6. Remove the sensor [6].
7. To install the drive roller, reverse these steps.
20.3.43 Belt replacement

(1) To replace belts:
1. Loosen the screws of the 3 belt idlers [1].
Installation Note
When setting the belt tension, adjust the belt idlers so that
the belt has approximately 1/4" (6.35mm) of deflection.
2. Remove the belts in order as follows
3. To install and adjust the tension of the belts, reverse these steps.
20.3.44 Tools
Tools (needs to be reviewed by Engineering for current design accuracy)
Tools recommended for service of the GP-501 Punch:
(1) Standard Measure Tools (English as opposed to metric)

Open end ignition wrench - 1/4" (required only for chad kit installation)
Phillips screwdriver or 1/4 and 5/16" nut drivers
Hex wrenches, 3/32", 5/64", and 9/64"
(2) Other Recommended Tools and Supplies

Needle nose pliers
Wire cutters
F -264
Screw driver, flat head, small
Supply of wire tie wraps
F -265
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 1. ITEMS NOT ALLOWED
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L TO BE DISASSEMB...
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING
1. ITEMS NOT ALLOWED TO BE DISASSEMBLED
1.1 Screw-lock applied screw
Note
The screw-lock is applied as a prevention of screw looseness.
The screw-lock is applied to the screws which have a risk of loosening with the oscillation and load during using and shipment.
When loosening or removing the screw which has been applied the screw-lock, be sure to apply the screw-lock again after
tightening the screw.
1.2 Prohibition of adjusting the volume of boards

Note
Do not change the volume of the boards whose adjustment procedures are not indicated.
1.3 Precaution on removing the boards

CAUTION
When removing the boards, check the safety and important warning items and then remove the boards following the removal
procedure.
The removal procedures from the connector and the board support are omitted.
Be sure to use the body earth when touching the element on the board by necessity.
For the prevention of electric shock, do not touch the DC power supply /1 of the main body for 50 minutes after turning OFF the
power switch.
There is a possibility of electrical shock caused by charging voltage.
power switch.
power switch.
power switch.
For the prevention of electric shock, do not touch the DC power supply of the RU for 50 minutes after turning OFF the power
switch.
1.4 CCD unit

1.4.1 Positions from which removing the screws is prohibited
8 screws for assembling CCD unit
4 attaching screws of the lens reference plate assembly
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3] [4] a03uf2c125ca
[1] Screws not allowed to be removed [2] Screws not allowed to be removed
[3] CCD unit [4] Lens reference plate assembly
1.4.2 Reason of prohibition

The accuracy of the CCD unit is guaranteed as a unit, and if disassembled, its accuracy is not guaranteed. Accordingly, removing screws that
lead up to the disassembly of the CCD unit is not allowed.
The lens reference plate assembly acts as the basis for the installation position of the CCD unit. Removing this assembly causes the
displacement of the optical axis of the CCD unit. So, be sure not to remove the attaching screws of the lens reference plate assembly.
1.5 Mirror unit/exposure unit

Installation positions of the mirror unit and the exposure unit
G -1
[1]
[2]
a03uf2c126ca
[1] Exposure unit [2] Mirror unit

The distance between the mirror unit and the exposure unit affects the magnifications of the original to be read in the sub scan direction.
Therefore, adjusting the installation positions of the mirror unit and the exposure unit arbitrarily is not allowed. However, when the exposure unit
and the scanner wire have been removed, these parts must be reinstalled using the optics unit positioning jig.
1.6 Writing unit cover

1.6.1 Positions from which removing is prohibited
4 mounting screws of the writing unit cover
[1]
[2]
[1] Screws not allowed to be removed [2] Writing unit cover

The inside of the writing unit is the laser path. Once dust comes into the inside by opening the cover, it prevents the laser path. Therefore, do
not remove the screw of the writing unit cover.
1.7 Photo conductor section

1 screw of the stopper plate /Fr on the drum cartridge
1 screw of the stopper plate /Rr on the drum cartridge
G -2
[4] [3]
[1] [2]
[5]
a03uf2c129ca
[1] Screws not allowed to be removed [2] Stopper plate /Fr

[3] Screws not allowed to be removed [4] Stopper plate /Rr
[5] Drum cartridge

The distance between the drum and developing roller is adjusted by the installation positions of the guides /Fr and /Rr. Therefore, do not remove
the screws of the guides /Fr and /Rr.
1.8 Intermediate transfer section

1 fixing screw of the tension adjusting plate
[2]
[1]
[3] a03uf2c130ca
[1] Screws not allowed to be removed [2] Belt

[3] Tension adjusting plate

Strength of the belt stretch is adjusted by tension adjusting plate. Therefore, do not remove the screws of the tension adjusting plate.
1.9 Fusing unit

2 screws of the pressure roller arm /Fr
2 screws of the pressure roller arm /Rr
G -3
[4] [3] [2] [1]
a03uf2c131ca
[1] Screws not allowed to be removed [2] Pressure roller arm /Fr
[3] Screws not allowed to be removed [4] Pressure roller arm /Rr

The pressure roller arms /Fr and /Rr adjust the mounting position of the fusing belt. Therefore, do not remove the screws of the pressure roller
arms /Fr and /Rr.
G -4
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 2. bizhub PRESS C7000/
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L C7000P/C70hc/C...
2. bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, bizhub PRO C6000L

2.1 List of disassembling and assembling parts
Note
This list shows the explanation of the disassembly and reassembly of the parts which are considered necessary to replace (other
than periodically replaced parts). However, these parts except for the covers do not require to be disassembled while in normal
service operations.
For the method of replacing the periodically replaced parts, refer to "G.2.2.1 Rear cover /Up1, /Up2, /Lw" to "G.2.2.24 OT."
No. Section Parts name
1 Cover Rear cover /Up1
2 Rear cover /Up2
3 Rear cover /Lw
4 Left cover
5 Right cover /Up1
6 Right cover /Up2
7 Right cover /Up3
8 Right cover /Up4
9 Right cover /Lw1
10 Right cover /Lw2
11 Original glass assy
12 Upper cover /Fr
13 Upper cover /Rt
14 Upper cover / Lt
15 Connector cover /Fr
16 Connector cover /Rr
17 Switch cover assy
18 Upper cover /Rr1
19 Upper cover /Rr2
20 Main board unit
21 Scanner section CCD unit
22 Exposure unit
23 Exposure lamp
24 Scanner wire (remove)
25 Scanner wire (install)
26 Write section Writing unit
27 Process section Process unit
28 Image correction unit
29 Toner collection section Belt collection pipe
30 Vertical conveyance pipe
31 Horizontal conveyance pipe
32 Duplex section Duplex section
33 Lock lever /1
34 Lock lever /2
35 Paper feed section Original feed tray
36 Tray up/down wire
37 Fusing section Temperature sensor /1 (TH1)
38 Thermostat /1 (TS1)
40 Temperature sensor /2 (TH2)
42 OT OT
G -5
2.2 Disassembling and assembling procedures

2.2.1 Rear cover /Up1, /Up2, /Lw
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the filter cover /Rr. (Refer to F.5.1.2 Replacing the dust
[1] [1] [2] [3] proof filter on rear side)
2. Remove 12 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover /Up1 [2].
3. Remove 5 screws [3], and then remove the rear cover /Up2 [4].
4. Remove 9 screws [5] and then remove the rear cover /Lw [6].
[1]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[6] [5]
2.2.2 Left cover

(1) Procedure
[3] [2] 2. Remove 9 screws [2] and then remove the left cover [3].
[2] [1] [2]
2.2.3 Right cover /Up1, /Up2, /Up3, /Up4, /Lw1, /Lw2

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the right cover /Lw1 [2].
[2] [5] 2. Open the toner collection door [3].
[1] [4] [3]
G -6
[1] [5] [7] [3] [4] 4. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the right cover /Up4 [2].
5. Remove 2 screws [3], and then remove the right cover /Up3 [4].
6. Remove the filter cover /Rt1. (Refer to F.5.1.1 Replacing the filter
box, developing dust proof filter)
8. Remove 3 screws [6], and then remove the right cover /Up2 [7].
[2] [6]
[1] [2] 9. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the right cover /Up1 [2].
2.2.4 Original glass assy

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] [4] [3] 1. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the original positioning
plate /Rr [2].
2. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the scanner cover /Rt [4].
3. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the original glass assy [6].
[5] [6]
a03uf2c086ca
Note
As the original glass assy consists of the original glass [7]
with the original positioning plate /Lt [8] attached, be sure
to remove it by holding the specified positions [9] and
[10].
Lifting up of the original positioning plate /Lt causes the
double-stick tape to come off.
[8] [9]
a03uf2c087ca
G -7
2.2.5 Upper cover /Fr, /Rt, /Lt, connector cover /Fr, /Rr, switch cover assy
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the original glass assy. (Refer to G.2.2.4 Original glass
assy)
2. Open the toner supply section. (Refer to F.5.3.2 Opening /closing
the toner supply door section.)
3. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the scanner cover /Fr2 [2].
4. Remove the screw [3] and then remove the scanner cover /Fr1 [4].
[4] [3] [2] [1]
5. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the upper cover /Fr [2].
[2] [1]
6. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the connector cover /Rr
[2]
[2].
7. Loosen 3 screws [3], and then remove the connector cover /Fr [4].
[1]
[4] [3] [3]
G -8
8. Remove 2 screw caps [1].
[1] [2]
9. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the upper cover /Rt [3].
[3]

11. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the upper cover /Lt [3].
[1] [2] [3]

[1] [3]
13. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the switch cover assy [3].
[2]
G -9
2.2.6 Upper cover /Rr1, /Rr2

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the filter cover /Rr. (Refer to F.5.1.2 Replacing the dust
[6] [2] [3]
proof filter on rear side)
3. Remove 3 screws [2], and then remove the upper cover /Rr1 [3].
4. Remove the connector cover /Rr. (Refer to G.2.2.5 Upper cover /
Fr, /Rt, /Lt, connector cover /Fr, /Rr, switch cover assy)
6. Remove 2 screws [5], and then remove the upper cover /Rr2 [6].
[4] [5] [1] [2]
2.2.7 Main board unit

(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove the rear covers /Up1, /Up2, and /Lw. (Refer to G.2.2.1
Rear cover /Up1, /Up2, /Lw)
2. Remove the right cover /Up3. (Refer to G.2.2.3 Right cover /Up1, /
Up2, /Up3, /Up4, /Lw1, /Lw2)
3. Remove the upper covers /Rr1 and /Rr2. (Refer to G.2.2.6 Upper
cover /Rr1, /Rr2)
[1] [1] [2] [1] 5. Remove 23 screws [1], and then remove the shield cover /Up [2].
[1] [1]
G -10

7. Remove 25 screws [2], and then remove the shield cover /Lw [3].
[2] [2]
[1] 8. Remove 7 screws [1], and then remove the cable stay /Up [2].
[2] [1]
[4] [5] [3] [4]

9. Turn the lock lever [1] downward to release the lock and then pull
out the ribbon cable [2].
Note
When reinstalling the ribbon cable, push down the lock
lever and insert the ribbon cable fully to the connector so
that its conductor side comes opposite side of the lock
lever.
After that, return the lock lever to its original position and
lock the ribbon cable.
10. Remove 2 cable clamps [3].

11. Remove 4 screws [4], and then remove the cable stay /Lw [5].
[1] [2]
G -11
[1] [2] 12. Remove 7 screws [1], and then remove the shield plate [2].
[1] [1]
[1] [2] [3] [2] 13. Disconnect 9 connectors [2] and the relay connector [3] which are
connected to the over all control board (OACB) [1].
14. Disconnect the connector [5] which is connected to the memory
control board /1 (MCB1) [4].
[2] [5] [4]
[2] [1] 15. Disconnect 10 connectors [2] which are connected to the printer
image processing board (PRIPB) [1].
[2]
G -12
[3] 16. Pull out all cables of disconnected connectors to the outside of the
main board unit.
Note
Pull out the cable of CN215 [1] from the opening [3] after
removing the core [2].
[1] [2]
17. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the corner guard [2].
18. Remove 2 screws [3], and then remove the cover mounting
bracket [4].
[2] [4]
[1] [3]
19. Remove 5 screws [1], and then remove the cable clamp mounting
bracket [2].
[2] [1]
[1]
G -13
[1] [2] [1] 20. Remove 9 screws [1], and then disconnect 3 connectors [2] to
remove the printer image processing board (PRIPB) [3].
[1] [3]
[2] [1] 21. Remove 11 screws [1] and remove the main board cover /Lw [2].
[1]
22. Remove 15 screws [1] and remove the main board unit [2] in the
[1]
[1] [2] [1]
G -14
[1] [2] 23. Check point when removing the main board unit
Note
Release the clamp, turn to the arrow direction and pout
the main board unit [1] because it is connected with the
shield [2].
[1] [1] 24. Remove 26 screws [1], and then remove the shield cover /Rr [2].
Note
The main board unit can be removed from the main body
by removing the shield cover /Rr.
Be sure to put the removed shield cover /Rr against the
side of the main body with the cable connected.
[1] [2] [1]
2.2.8 CCD unit

(1)
1. Remove the original glass assy. (Refer to G.2.2.4 Original glass
assy)
3. Remove 9 screws [2] and then remove the CCD cover [3].
4. Remove the screws [4] and then remove the ribbon cable cover
[5].
[4] [5] [3]
[1] [2]
8050ma3141
5. Turn the lock lever [1] downward to release the lock and then pull
out the ribbon cable [2].
Note
When reinstalling the ribbon cable, push down the lock
lever and insert the ribbon cable fully to the connector so
that its conductor side comes opposite side of the lock
lever.
After that, return the lock lever to its original position and
lock the ribbon cable.
[1] [2]
a03uf2c098ca
G -15
6. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the CCD unit [2].
[1] [2] Note
Never remove any screw other than it. When removed,
various optical adjustments which are not available in the
field are required.
Never touch the lens or it causes the faulty image
[2]
2.2.9 Exposure unit

(1) Procedure for removal
[3] [4] 1. Remove the original glass assy. (Refer to G.2.2.4 Original glass
assy)
2. Remove the upper covers /Fr, /Rt, /Lt. (Refer to G.2.2.5 Upper
cover /Fr, /Rt, /Lt, connector cover /Fr, /Rr, switch cover assy)
3. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the front cover /Up [2].
Note
When reinstalling the front cover /Up, be sure to set the
projection [3] to the hole [4] of the main body frame.
[2]
[1]
[1] [1] [2] 4. Remove the screws [1], 4 each, and then remove 2 upper cover
mounting brackets [2].
[1]
G -16
[2] [1] [1] [2]

5. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and then remove 2 wire holders
[2].
6. Rotate the exposure unit [3] while keeping it horizontally and then
pull it out upward to put on the scanner frame [4].
[4] [3]
a03uf2c101ca

8. Remove the screw [2] and then release the cable [4] from the cord
holder [3].
9. Remove the exposure unit [5].
[2] [3] [5]
a03uf2c102ca
(2) Procedure for reinstallation

[5] [4] [4] [5] 1. Set the exposure unit [1] to the main body.
2. Move the V-mirror unit [2] to the paper exit side and then insert the
optics unit positioning jigs [3] from the front side and pass each of
them through the exposure unit [1] and the V-mirror unit [2].
Note
When reinstalling the exposure unit, use the optics unit
positioning jig.
3. Fix the exposure unit with the screw [4] and the wire holder [5], 1
each.
4. Remove 2 optics unit positioning jigs [3].
5. Be sure that the following reinstallation of the parts follows the
removal steps in reverse.
[2] [1] [3]

a03uf2c103ca
G -17
2.2.10 Exposure lamp

(1) Procedure
[3] [4] 1. Remove the exposure unit. (Refer to G.2.2.9 Exposure unit)
2. Cut the wiring harness band [1] to release the fixation of the cable
[2].
3. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the HP detection plate [4].
4. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the exposure lamp (L1) [6].
[2] [1] [5]
[6] [5]
a03uf2c104ca
2.2.11 Removing the scanner wire

(1) Procedure
[2] 1. Remove the exposure unit. (Refer to G.2.2.9 Exposure unit)
2. Loosen the screws [1], 1 each, and release the fixing of 2 spring
fixing plates [2].
[1]
a03uf2c105ca
G -18
3. Remove the wire terminal [3] of the scanner wire /Rr [2] from the
spring fixing plate [1] and then remove the scanner wire /Rr [2]
from the pulley /3 [4], outside of the V-mirror pulley [5] and the
pulley /2 [6] in order.
4. Remove the metal ball [8] of the scanner wire /Rr [2] from the wire
stopper [7] and then remove the scanner wire /Rr [2] from the
[5] inside of the V-mirror pulley [5] and the pulley /1 [9] in order.
5. Remove the scanner wire /Rr [2] from the drive pulley [10].
6. Following the steps 3 to 5, remove the scanner wire /Fr [11].
[4] [6] [3] Note
Be sure to install the scanner wires /Fr and the /Rr
[9] symmetrically.
[10]
[2]
[2] [7] [8]

[2]
[3]
[1]
[11]
2.2.12 Reinstalling the scanner wire

(1) Procedure
1. Move the V-mirror unit [1] to the paper exit side and then insert the
optics unit positioning jig [2] from the front side and pass it through
the V-mirror unit [1].
Note
Be careful not to damage the mirror with the jig.
When reinstalling the scanner wire, be sure to fix the V-
mirror unit with the optics unit positioning jig.
[1] [2]
G -19
2. Drop the metal ball [3] in between the scanner wire /Fr [1] and /Rr
[6] [5] [1] [2] into the installation hole of the drive pulley [4]. With this hole as
[4] a starting point, wind the wire 3.5 turns [5] outwards and 3.5 turns
[6] inwards.
Note
[7] [3] [8] The same wire is used for the scanner wires /Fr and /Rr.
Be sure to wind each scanner wire with its wire terminal
outside, and its metal ball [7] inside.
Be sure to wind each scanner wire so that its both ends
[8] comes out from the bottom of the drive pulley.
Wind each scanner wire on the drive pulley thickly and be
[4] careful not to overlap each wire.
3. After winding the scanner wires /Fr [1] and /Rr [2], fix each wire
[5] [6]
with the tape [8] so that they do not come off.
[2]
[4]
[3] [7]
8050ma3026
4. Pass the metal ball [3] side (inside) of the scanner wire /Rr [2]
[9] which is winded on the drive pulley [1] through the pulley /1 [4] and
inside of the V-mirror pulley [5] in order, and then hook the metal
ball [3] on the wire stopper [6].
[10] 5. Pass the wire terminal side [7] (outside) of the scanner wire /Rr [2]
which is winded on the drive pulley [1] through the pulley /2 [8],
[2] outside of the V-mirror pulley [5] and the pulley /3 [9] in order, and
then hook the wire terminal [7] on the spring fixing plate [10].
6. Following the steps 4 to 5, install the scanner wire /Fr [11].
[5]
[4] [6] [3]
FRONT
[2] [7] [8]

[2]
[3]
[1]
[11]
8050ma3027
G -20
[2] 7. Tighten the screws [1], 1 each, and fix 2 spring fixing plates [2].
[1]
a03uf2c105ca
2.2.13 Writing unit

WARNING
Do not execute energization while the writing unit is misaligned from the regular installation position.
Never remove the cover of the writing unit while in energization. The laser beam threatens vision.
Note
Never remove the cover of the writing unit. Also, never loosen the screw.
When removing the writing unit, be sure not to touch the dust-proof glass. (Not to contaminate the glass)
Never remove the writing unit for 2 minutes after the main power switch (SW1) turns OFF.
(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the right covers /Up1, /Up2, /Up3, /Lw1, and /Lw2. (Refer
to G.2.2.3 Right cover /Up1, /Up2, /Up3, /Up4, /Lw1, /Lw2)
3. Remove 10 screws [2], and then remove the fan mounting plate /
Rt [3].
[3] [2]
[2]
G -21
[4] [5]
4. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the writing pressure plate
[2].
Note
When removing the writing pressure plate, be sure to put
your thumbs on the edge of the arrow-marked slit [3] and
support the writing pressure plate with the other fingers to
lift. Not to get injured, be sure to hold the specified
positions.
When reinstalling the writing pressure plate, be sure to
check that the screw section [5] of each writing unit is on
the arm [4] before pressing.
When the writing pressure plate cannot be inserted to the
[1] [2] [3] proper position at reinstalling it, be sure to check that the
writing unit is inserted straight.
After inserting each writing unit, be sure to press its rear
edges to check if it is fully inserted.
5. Remove the connectors [1], 4 each, and then remove the writing
[1]
units /Y [2], /M [3], /C [4], and /K [5].
Note
When reinstalling the writing units, be sure to check that
each of them is inserted straight.

7. After replacing the writing unit /K, conduct the following item.
[2] [3] - Cleaning the dust proof glass (Refer to F.5.2.1 - Cleaning the
dust proof glass)
- Writing initial position memory (Skew initial position memory)
(Refer to I.5.3.9 Skew Initial Position Memory (Printer Adjustment -
Writing Initial Pos. Memory))
- I/O Check Mode (LD1 to LD8 alarm data clear, LD alarm
measurement) (Refer to I.5.7.1 I/O Check Mode)
- CD-Mag. Skew Adj. (Refer to I.5.3.13 CD-Mag. Skew Adj.
- Restart Timing Adjustment (Refer to I.5.3.1 Restart Timing
Adjustment (Printer Adjustment))
[5] [4] - Color Registration Manual (Refer to I.5.3.11 Color Registration
- Beam Pitch Adjustment (Refer to I.5.3.14 Beam Pitch Adjustment
- Moire Adjustment (Refer to I.5.3.15 Moire Adjustment (Printer
Adjustment))
8. After replacing the writing units /Y, /M, /C, conduct the following
item.
- Cleaning the dust proof glass (Refer to F.5.2.1 - Cleaning the
dust proof glass)
- Writing initial position memory (Skew initial position memory)
(Refer to I.5.3.9 Skew Initial Position Memory (Printer Adjustment -
Writing Initial Pos. Memory))
- I/O Check Mode (LD1 to LD8 alarm data clear, LD alarm
measurement) (Refer to I.5.7.1 I/O Check Mode)
G -22
- Beam Pitch Adjustment (Refer to I.5.3.14 Beam Pitch Adjustment
- Moire Adjustment (Refer to I.5.3.15 Moire Adjustment (Printer
Adjustment))
2.2.14 Process unit

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the intermediate transfer unit. (Refer to F.5.5.1 Removing/
Remove all drum cartridges. (Refer to F.5.3.4 Replacing the drum
cartridge)
2. Remove all developing units. (Refer to F.5.6.2 Replacing the
developing units /C, /M, /Y, and /K)
3. Remove 2 screws [1] on each stapler.
[4] [5] [2] [8] [1] [6]
Note
Be sure to remove the intermediate transfer unit, drum
cartridge, and developing unit before removing the
process unit.
Do not remove the black screw.
4. Push back the process unit [6] until the screw [5] can be seen from
each hole [4] of the guide rails /Lt [2] and /Rt [3].
5. Remove the screw [5], 1 each.
Note
6. Pull out the process unit [6] again, and then remove it from the
guide rails /Lt [2] and /Rt [3] as shown below.
The projection [7] on the guide rail /Lt is set in the notch [8] of the
process unit. The notch of the process unit is on the projection [9]
of the guide rail /Rt. Therefore, remove the process unit from the
guide rail /Lt first by displacing a little. Then, remove the process
[6] unit from the guide rail /Rt by lifting it up.
[7]
[1] [9] [3] [5] [4]
[10] a03uf2c110ca
G -23
2.2.15 Image correction unit

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the process unit. (Refer to G.2.2.14 Process unit)
3. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the image correction unit
[4] assy [3].
Note
When removing the image correction unit, be sure to
[2] remove the process unit in advance.
When removing the image correction unit, be careful not
to touch and stress the drum drive shaft [4] of each color.

[3] [1] [4] 8050ma3071
2.2.16 Belt collection pipe, Vertical conveyance pipe, Horizontal conveyance pipe
(1) Procedure
Note
Clean the inside of the pipe following the steps when SC code C-0101 (paper feed motor abnormality) or C-2220 (transfer belt
motor abnormality) occurs.
1. Remove the process unit. (Refer to G.2.2.14 Process unit)
2. Turn the duplex section release lever [2] counterclockwise while
unlocking the lock [1].
3. Hold the duplex section release lever, pull out the duplex section
while unlocking the lock [3].
Note
In order to prevent rollover accidents, safety feature of the
product does not allow to pull out the duplex section
without unlocking the lock [3].
[2] [1] [3] [4]
a03uf2c111ca
4. In order to prevent waste toner dropping, put a piece of paper [2]

right under the horizontal conveyance pipe /1 [1].
[2] [1] 8050ma3192
G -24
[1] 5. Remove 7 screws [1], and then loosen the screw [2].
[1]
[1] [2] 8050ma3193
G -25
[1] 6. Hold the belt waste toner inlet [1] and the drum /K waste toner inlet
[2] with both hands, and then remove the belt collection pipe [3]
and the vertical conveyance pipes /1 [4], /2 [5], /3 [6], and /4 [7]
being connected.
Note
When removing the belt collection pipe and the vertical
conveyance pipe, be sure to tilt the belt waste toner inlet
side frontward.
When reinstalling them, be sure to align the projections
on the rear side of each inlet to the main body.
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[2] 8050ma3194
7. Remove the toner collection pipe [2] from the vertical conveyance
[3] [2]
pipe /1 [1], and then pull out the toner oscillating plate [3].
[1]
8050ma3195
G -26
[2] 8. Check point when reinstalling the toner collection pipe

Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to check that the toner
oscillating plate moves up and down by rotating the gear
[5] after inserting the pin [2] of the toner collection pipe [1]
into the drive hole [4] of the toner oscillating plate [3].
[4] [3] [1] [1]
[5] 8050ma3196
[2] [5] [1] 9. Remove the toner collection pipe /2 [2] from the toner collection
pipe /1 [1]
11. Remove the toner collection screw [5] from the toner collection
pipe /1.
12. Clean the waste toner in the toner collection pipes /1 and /2.
Note
Be careful not to loose the sponges [6] and [7] when
cleaning the toner collection pipe /2.
[6] [7]
[4] [3] 8050ma3197
G -27
[4] [6] [3] [6] [2] [6] [1] 13. Separate the vertical conveyance pipes /1 [1], /2 [2], /3 [3] and /4
[4], remove each inlet cap [5], and then clean the waste toner in
each vertical conveyance pipe.
Note
Be careful not to loose 4 sponges [6] when cleaning the
vertical conveyance pipes.
When reinstalling each inlet cap, be sure to set the
depression [7] to the salient [8] of the vertical conveyance
pipe.
[6] [8] [7]
[5] 8050ma3198
[2] [1] 14. Remove the rear covers /Up1, /Up2, and /Lw. (Refer to G.2.2.1
Rear cover /Up1, /Up2, /Lw)
15. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the flywheel /C [2].
16. Remove the screw [3], and then remove the flywheel /K [4].
[3] [4]
17. Remove the toner collection box. (Refer to F.5.7.1 Replacing the
toner collect box)
18. Remove the main board unit. (Refer to G.2.2.7 Main board unit)
19. Put a piece of paper [3] under the connecting section of the
horizontal conveyance pipe /1 [1] and the horizontal conveyance
pipe assembly [2].
Note
Waste toner may spill out when removing the horizontal
conveyance pipe /2 from the horizontal conveyance pipe /
1. In order to prevent waste toner dropping in the
machine, be sure to put a piece of paper.
[1]
[2] [3] 8050ma3200
G -28
[1] 20. Remove 2 screws [1], and then pull out the horizontal conveyance
pipe assembly [3] from the horizontal conveyance pipe /1 [2].
[3]
[3] [2] 8050ma3201
[2] [1]
21. Remove the E-ring [1] and the gear [2].
Note
When reinstalling the gear, be sure to align the D-cut [4] of
the screw [3] with the D-cut [5] of the gear.
[4][5] [3] 8050ma3202
G -29
[3] 22. Remove the bearing [1].

Note
When reinstalling the bearing, be sure to align it with the
detent [3] of the horizontal conveyance pipe assembly [2].
[2] [1] 8050ma3203
[2] [1] 23. Pull out the screw [2] from the horizontal conveyance pipe
assembly [1].
Note
A spacer [3] is inserted on the gear mounting side of the
screw. When reinstalling it, be sure to insert the spacer.
[2] [3] 8050ma3204
G -30
[1] 24. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the horizontal conveyance
pipe /4 [2].
25. Remove 2 screws [3], and then remove the horizontal conveyance
pipe /3 [4].
26. Clean the waste toner in the horizontal conveyance pipes /2 [5], /3
[4] and /4 [2].
[2] [2] [4] [5]
[4] [5]
[3] 8050ma3205
27. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the horizontal conveyance
pipe /1 [2].
28. Clean the waste toner in the horizontal conveyance pipe /1.
[1] [2] 8050ma3206
2.2.17 Duplex section

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Open the toner supply door section. (Refer to F.5.3.2 Opening /
the fusing unit)
4. Remove the duplex section cover /Rt, duplex section release lever,
and duplex section cover /Lt. (Refer to F.5.11.1 Replacing the
5. Remove 6 screws [1], and then remove the paper feed solenoid
cover [2].
Note
Conduct this step when the MB is mounted.
[2] [1] a03uf2c058ca
G -31
[1]
7. Remove the screw [2], and then release the fixation of the wiring
harness assy of the duplex section [3].
[2]
[3]
8050ma3085
[1] [9] [1] [9] 8. Remove 4 screws [1].

9. Remove the screws [2].
10. Push back the duplex section [6] so that each screw [5] can be
seen from the hole [4] of the guide rail /Lt [3], and then remove the
screws [5], 1 each.
Note
11. Pull out the duplex section [6] again, and then move the guide pin
[8] of the guide rail /Rt [7] to the avoidance position of the slotted
hole [9].
12. Remove the duplex section [6] from the guide rails /Rt [7] and /Lt
[3].
Note
[7] [8] [10] When removing the duplex section, be sure to remove
with 2 people; one on the paper feed side and the other on
the paper exit side.
When removing the duplex section, the person on the
paper exit side holds the handle /Rt [10] of the duplex
section.
When removing the duplex section, the person on the
paper exit side holds the stay [11].
[4] [5] [11] [2] [3] [6]

a03uf2c112ca
2.2.18 Replacing the lock levers /1 and /2

Note
The main body has a risk of falling down when the process unit and the duplex section are pulled out at the same time. The lock
levers /1 and /2 are provided to prevent the main body from falling down. The process unit and the duplex section cannot be
pulled out at the same time with the levers.
When the process unit or the duplex section cannot be pulled out independently, it has a possibility that the lock levers /1 and /2
are deformed by a wrong operation. In that case, the levers need to be replaced.
Since the lock levers /1 and /2 are not the target parts of the routine maintenance, they are installed not to be replaced. Therefore,
the replacement has to be conducted under the indirect vision. Replace the parts following the installation positions of each part
on the pictures.
G -32
(1) Procedure
2. While unlocking the release lever of the duplex section, turn the
duplex section release lever counterclockwise and pull out ADU
until the screw [1] can be reached. (Refer to F.5.11.1 Replacing
the intermediate conveyance clutches /2 (CL4) and /3 (CL5))
Note
Depending on the deformed condition of the lock levers /1
[2] and /2 [3], ADU cannot be pulled out smoothly.
However, keep enough space to access the screw [1] by
pressing the levers.
[3] [5] [1] [2] Note
When reinstalling the stopper [4], be sure to align the
projection [5] with the positioning hole [6].
[4]
4. Once the stopper [4] is removed, the lock levers /1 [2] and /2 [3]
are deactivated. Then, pull out only ADU [7] furthermore.
WARNING
Do not pull out the process unit since it has a risk of
[2]
[3] falling down the main body.
5. Remove the ring [8] and then remove the lock lever /2 [3].
[7] 6. Remove the spring [9] from the lock lever /2 [3].
[1] [3] [8] Note
When replacing, be careful about the installation direction
of the spring [9] and the installation position of the hook.
7. Remove 3 screws [10] and then remove the lever enforcing plate
[11].
8. Remove the E-ring [12] and then remove the lock lever /1 [2].
[9]
9. Remove the spring [13] from the lock lever /1 [2].
Note
When replacing, be careful about the installation direction
[12] [10] [11] of the spring [13] and the installation position of the hook.
[13]
[2] 8050ma3220
2.2.19 Paper feed trays /1 to /3

(1) Procedure
Note
G -33
[1] 1. Pull out the paper feed tray /1.

2. Remove the paper feed unit. (Refer to F.5.8.1 Replacing the pick-
up roller and the paper feed roller rubber)
3. Remove 4 screws [1] and then lift the paper feed tray /1 [2] to
remove.
[1] [2]
8050ma3162
2.2.20 Tray up/down wire

Wire length
Up/down wire /A, /C: 531mm
Up/down wire /B, /D: 160mm
(1) How to unfasten a wire

Note
[8] [7] [5] [6] [1] 1. Pull out the paper feed tray /1.
2. Remove the paper feed unit.
3. Remove the paper feed tray /1.
4. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the wire cover /FR [2].
5. Remove 2 screws [3], and then remove the wire cover /FL [4].
6. Remove 3 screws [5], and then remove the wire cover /RR [6].
7. Remove 2 screws [7], and then remove the wire cover /RL [8].
[4] [3] [2] a03uf2c119ca
G -34
8. Remove 1 E-ring [1].
[7]
9. Move the drive pulley [2] inward and then remove the wires /C [3]
[6]
[3] and /D [4].
[5] 10. After removing the E-ring [5], remove the pulley [6], and then
release the wires /C [3] and /D [4] from the wire regulation cover
[8] [7].
[4]
11. Remove the screw [8] from the bottom of the paper feed tray /1,
[1] and then remove the wire /D [4].
[2] 12. After removing the E-ring [9], remove the pulley [10], and then
[15] [19] [18] release the wire /C [3] from the wire regulation cover [11].
13. Remove 1 screw [12] from the bottom of the paper feed tray /1,
and then remove the wire /C [3].
[17] 14. Remove 1 E-ring [13].
15. Move the drive pulley [14] inward and then remove the wires /A
[20]
[15] and /B [16].
16. After removing the E-ring [17], remove the pulley [18], and then
[16] release the wires /A [15] and /B [16] from the wire regulation cover
[19].
17. Remove the screw [20] from the bottom of the paper feed tray /1,
[14] [13]
and then remove the wire /B [16].
18. After removing the E-ring [21], remove the pulley [22], and then
release the wire /A [15] from the wire regulation cover [23].
19. Remove 1 screw [24] from the bottom of the paper feed tray /1,
and then remove the wire /A [15].
[23] [22]
[21]
[15] [24]
[11]
[10]
[3]
[9] [12] 8050ma3168
(2) How to string a wire

Note
G -35
1. From the bottom of the paper feed tray, install the wire /C [3] to the
[12] wire fixing shaft [2] with 1 screw [1].
[11] 2. Wind the wire /C [3] around the pulley [4], insert it into the shaft [6]
[4] [3] with the wire regulation cover [5], and then fix them with 1 E-ring
[13]
[7].
[8] 3. From the bottom of the paper feed tray, install the wire /D [10] to
[9]
[10] the wire fixing shaft [9] with 1 screw [8].
4. Wind the wires /C [3] and /D [10] around the pulley [11], insert it
[16] into the shaft [13] with the wire regulation cover [12], and then fix
them with 1 E-ring [14].
[14] [15]
Note
Wind the wires around the pulley [11] so that the wire /C
[3] comes to the outside and the wire /D [10] comes to the
inside.
[17]
5. Insert the wires /C [3] and /D [10] into the up/down drive shaft [14],
[18] move the drive pulley [15] outward, and then fix them with 1 E-ring
[16].
Note
Insert the wires into the up/down drive shaft [14] so that
the wire /C [3] comes to the outside and the wire /D [10]
comes to the inside.
6. Install the wires /A [17] and /B [18] following the steps 1 to 5.

Note
After re-stretching the wire, turn the up/down drive shaft
manually to check that the up/down plate moves
smoothly.

[17]
[7] [5]
[4]
[3]
[6]
[2] [1] 8050ma3169
2.2.21 Fusing large/small recognition connector

2 fusing units can be used depending on condition to reduce faulty images (fusing lines) that occur when performing large size print after small
size print.
The fusing unit is recognized by the Fusing large/small recognition connector. The fusing unit that is connected to that connector is recognized
as for the large size print.
Note
When using 2 fusing units, DIPSW5-0 is required to be set to 1.
When using 2 fusing units, ORU-M function cannot be used.
G -36
(1) Procedure
the fusing unit)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then open the joint section [2] in the
3. Remove the connector cover [3] and then remove the Fusing
large/small recognition connector [4].
[4]
[3]
2.2.22 Temperature sensor /1 (TH1), thermostat /1 (TS1), /2 (TS2)

the fusing unit)
2. Remove the fusing covers /Fr and /Rr. (Refer to F.5.13.2
Replacing the fusing drive gear /B, fusing duct assy)
3. Remove the fusing cover /Up assy. (Refer to F.5.13.6 Replacing
the fusing roller /2, fusing bearing /2, fusing drive gear /O)
4. Remove the cover. (Refer to F.5.13.11 Replacing the fusing
temperature sensor assy /Up (edge))
5. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and then remove 5 cable clamps
[2].
7. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the temperature sensor /1
(TH1) [5].
[2] [2] [3]
[4] [5] [1]
[4] [2] [4] 8. Remove the screws [2], 1 each, and then remove 3 cable clamps
[2].
9. Remove the fastons [3], 2 each.
Note
Be sure to remove the faston by holding its base. Never
pull out it by holding the wiring harness.
10. Remove the screws [4], 2 each, and remove the thermostats /1
(TS1) [5] and /2 (TS2) [6].
[1] [3] [6] [1] [3] [5] [1]

a03uf2c114ca

Note
Be sure to adjust the position of the thermostats /1 (TS1) and /2 (TS2) with the thermostat jigs /UC and /UF before securing
them. Be sure to apply Screw-lock to the screw that has been fixed.
Be sure to make the position adjustments when the fusing roller is cold.
G -37
[6] [1] [5] [7] [2] [3] 1. Fasten tentatively TS1 [1] and TS2 [2] with the screws [3], 2 each.
2. Reinstall the fastons [1], 2 each, to the TS1 and TS2.
3. Insert the thermostat jigs /UC [7] and /UF [6] between TS1 and the
fusing belt [5].
4. Adjust the position of TS1 so that the gap amount between TS1
and the fusing belt becomes equal to the thickness of the
thermostat jigs /UC and /UF, and then secure it with the screw [3].
5. Secure TS2 by following steps 3 to 4.
Note
Be sure to make the distance between TS1/TS2 and the
fusing belt (distance "a") equal to the thickness of the
thermostat jigs /UC and /UF.
Standard value (UC): a = 1.2 0.2mm
[3] [4] [3] [4] a03uf2c120ca Standard value (UF): a = 1.8 0.2mm
6. Apply Screw-lock to 4 screws [3].

7. How to handle the thermostat jigs /UC and /UF
[1] Adjustment part
[1] [2] The part must not be inserted between the thermostat and the
fusing belt.
[3] The part must be inserted between the thermostat and the
[2] fusing belt.
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
a03uf2c136ca
2.2.23 Temperature sensor /2 (TH2), thermostat /3 (TS3)

the fusing unit)
2. Remove the fusing entrance guide plate. (Refer to F.5.13.8
4. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the temperature sensor /2
(TH2) [3].
Note
When reinstalling TH2, be sure to check that the wiring
harness does not touch the fusing roller /Lw [4].
[2] [1]
a03uf2c115ca
G -38
[4] [3] [5] [7] 5. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the sensor mounting
bracket [2].
6. Remove the screw [3], and then remove the cable clamp [4].
7. Remove 2 fastons [5].
Note
Be sure to remove the faston by holding its base. Never
pull out it by holding the wiring harness.
8. Remove 2 screws [6] and remove the thermostat /3 (TS3) [7].
[2] [1] [6]

Note
Be sure to adjust the position of the thermostat /3 (TS3) with the thermostat jig /L before securing them. Be sure to apply Screw-
lock to the screw that has been fixed.
Be sure to make the position adjustments when the fusing roller /Lw is cold.
[4] [5] [1] 1. Fasten tentatively TS3 [1] with 2 screws [2].
2. Reinstall 2 fastons [3] to TS3.
3. Insert the thermostat jig /L [5] between TS3 and the fusing roller /
Lw [4].
4. Adjust the position of TS3 so that the gap amount between TS3
and the fusing roller /Lw becomes equal to the thickness of the
thermostat jig /L, and then secure it with the screw [2].
Note
Be sure to make the distance between TS3 and the fusing
roller /Lw (distance "a") equal to the thickness of the
thermostat jig /L.
Standard value: a = 3 0.2mm
5. Apply screw-lock to 2 screws [2].

[3] [2] [3] Note
When reinstalling TS3, be sure to check that the wiring
harness does not touch the fusing roller /Lw.
6. How to handle the thermostat jig /L

[1] Adjustment part
[1] [2] The part must not be inserted between the thermostat and the
fusing roller /Lw
[3] The part must be inserted between the thermostat and the
[2] fusing roller /Lw
[3]
a03uf2c137ca
G -39
2.2.24 OT
(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the left cover. (Refer to G.2.2.2 Left cover)
2. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the OT cover.
[2]
[1]
a03uf2c117ca

4. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the OT cover [3].
[2] [2]
[1] [3]
a03uf2c118ca
G -40
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 3. DF-622
3. DF-622
1 Main body DF main body
2 Cover section Front cover
3 Rear cover
4 Conveyance section Conveyance belt unit

3.2.1 Precautions on disassembling and assembling
CAUTION
3.2.2 DF
Note
Before the removal operation, be sure to secure the DF hinge adjustment brackets at 90 degrees. When removing any parts from
the scanner section with the DF opened, be sure to secure the hinge adjustment brackets at 90 degrees. Without this operation, it
deforms the metal frame in the DF installation section.
(1) Procedure
2. Secure 2 hinge adjustment brackets [2] at 90 degrees. There are 2
[2] types of the bracket installed in the DF; one for 70 degrees and the
other for 40 degrees, and they can be distinguished by the
scratched number on each surface.
For 70 degrees: Loosen 4 screws [3] and move 2 brackets [2]
downward, and then secure them with 4 screws [3] again.
For 40 degrees: Remove 4 screws [3] and move 2 brackets [2]
upside down, and then secure them with 4 screws [3] again.
[3] [1] [3]
[1] 3. Open the DF [1] vertically.

5. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the metal frame [4].
[2] [3]
[4]
a052f2c019ca
G -41
[1] 6. While supporting the DF [1], release 2 stoppers [2] from the holes
[3] and lift to remove.
Note
The DF has a risk of falling backward when 2 stoppers [2]
are released. Therefore, be sure to support them.

Note
After reinstalling the DF, conduct "ADF Orig. Stop
Position" in the Service Mode.
[2] [3] [2]

[3]
a052f2c020ca
3.2.3 Front cover

(1) Procedure
[6] [7] 1. Fix the hinge adjustment brackets at 90 degrees. (Refer to I.11.2
2. Open the DF [1] and then remove 2 screws [2].
3. Close the DF [1] and then open the paper feed cover [3] and the
paper exit cover [4].
Note
Be careful for closing the DF [1] since the front cover [5] is
not fixed.
Since the paper exit cover gets damaged, do not open the
[5] [3] [1] [4]
DF [1] while opening the paper exit cover.
4. Remove the front cover [5] while lifting it up a little so that the claw
[6] comes out from the hole [7].
[2]
a052f2c021ca
3.2.4 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
1. Open the paper feed cover [1] and the paper exit cover [2].
[3] [1] [5] [4] [3] [2]
3. Tilt the rear cover [4] in the arrow-marked direction [5] and remove
it upward.
a052f2c022ca
3.2.5 Conveyance belt

Note
Do not touch, scratch, and crease the belt roller. When touching, sure to hold the positions within 20mm from the edges in the sub
scan direction.
G -42
(1) Procedure
[3] [3] 1. Fix the hinge adjustment brackets at 90 degrees. (Refer to I.11.2
2. Open the DF [1] vertically.
3. Slide 2 stoppers [3] inside of the conveyance belt unit [2] upper
section to the right to remove.
4. Pull out the upper section of the conveyance belt unit in the arrow-
marked direction [4], and then remove it upward.
[1] [2] [4]
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to insert the drive coupling
belt [5] in the conveyance belt unit.
[5]
a052f2c023ca
[1] 6. Remove 2 screws [1] and then pull up the roller section.
7. Remove the conveyance belt.
[1] a052f2c024ca
G -43
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 4. PF-602
4. PF-602
1 Cover Right cover
2 Rear cover /Lt2
3 Rear cover /Lt21, /Rt
4 Front door
5 Tray section Tray
6 Lift wire
7 Paper lift motor /1 (M2) and /2 (M3)
8 Conveyance section Vertical conveyance unit
9 Horizontal conveyance unit
10 Multi feed detection board /S (MFDBS and /S)

Note
4.2.2 Right cover

(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove the four screws [1] and remove the right cover fixing plate
[2].
a03xf2c021ca
2. Remove the 13 screws [1] and then remove the right cover [2].
[1] [1]
[2] [1]
a03xf2c022ca
Note
When installing the right cover, be sure to match the metal
plate [2] on the lower part of the PF main unit with the
groove [1] on the right cover.
a03xf2c023ca
G -44
4.2.3 Rear cover /Lt2

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the nine screws [1] and remove the rear cover/Lt2 [2].
[2] [1]
[1]
a03xf2c024ca
Note
When installing the rear cover/Lt2, be sure to match the
metal plate [2] of the lower part of the PF main unit with
the groove [1] of the rear cover.
a03xf2c025ca
4.2.4 The rear cover/Lt1 and /Rt

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover /Lt2. (Refer to G.4.2.3 Rear cover /Lt2)
[3] [4] [3] [1]
2. Remove the six screws [1] and remove the rear cover/Lt1 [2].
3. Remove the eleven screws [3] and remove the rear cover/Rt1 [4].
[3] [2]
a03xf2c026ca
Note
When installing the rear cover/Rt, be sure to match the
metal plate [2] on the lower part of the PF main unit with
the groove [1] on the rear cover.
a03xf2c028ca
G -45
4.2.5 Front door

(1) Procedure
[2] 3. Remove the two screws [3] and the mounting plate [4], and
remove the front door [1] releasing it from the pin [5].
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
a03xf2c030ca
4.2.6 Tray
Note
Be sure to perform this operation with 2 people because the try unit is heavy.
Be sure to pull out the trays one at a time. Do not pull out the two trays at a time or the PF may topple over.
Note
The removal and installation procedures of tray/4 is the same for those of tray/5. The explanation here is made by the example of
tray/4.
When raising up the tray, be sure to hold it at the specified positions. Holding it at positions other than those positions specified
damage the tray, thus resulting in a paper feed jam.
G -46
(1) Procedure
[2] [1] [5]
a03xf2c031ca
4. Remove the cushion/3 [1].

[3] [1]
5. Remove the three screws [2] and remove the upper cover/1 [3].
Note
When replacing the cushion/3, also replace the double-
sided tape that secure the cushion/ 3 with a new one.
[2] a03xf2c060ca
6. Remove the three screws [1] on the right side of the tray and
[3]
remove the rail stopper [2].
7. Pull the tray [3] further out.
[2]
[1]
a03xf2c032ca
G -47
8. Remove the six screws [1], three each on the left and right rails,
[1] [2]
hold the tray [2] by the specified positions [5], and remove it
straight up.
Note
When reinstalling the tray, make sure that the four knobs
[3] on the rails are properly fitted in the notches [4] of the
tray.
When raising up the tray, be sure to hold it at the specified
positions [5] and raise it up with 2 persons. Do not hold
the part indicated with [6] as the part can easily become
deformed, which adversely affects paper feed resulting in
a paper jam.
a03xf2c034ca

[1] [2]
Note
When installing tray/4, make sure not to let the lower part
[1] of the tray cover contact the rail [2].
a03xf2c034ca
4.2.7 Lift wire

Note
The removing/installing procedure of the lift wire is the same for tray/4 and tray/5.
(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Press the down button [1] to let the lift plate [2] go down to the
bottom of the tray.
a03xf2c035ca
G -48
2. Remove the tray. (Refer to G.4.2.6 Tray)

3. Loosen the three screws [1], and remove the three screws [2].
[3] 4. Disconnect the connector [3] and remove the front cover [4] of the
tray.
[4]
[1]
[2]
a03xf2c036cb
[1] 5. Check point when reinstalling the tray

Note
The front cover of tray/4 has the ancillary cover [1],
whereas that of tray/5 does not. When installing the front
covers of each tray, make sure not to mix them up.
a03xf2c037ca
[1] [2] 6. Remove the nine screws [1] and remove the cover [2].
[1] [1]
a03xf2c061ca
G -49
7. Check point when reinstalling the cover

Note
When installing the cover [1], make sure to fasten the gear
[3] and the spring [4] with the plate [2] of the tray-down
stopper.
[2] [3] [4]
[1] a03xf2c062ca

9. Slide the bearing [2].
[1]
[2]
a03xf2c063ca
10. Slide the pulley/Fr1 [1] and /Fr2 [2], and pull out the wire ends of
[4] [2] [1] the lift wire/Fr1 [3] and /Fr2 [4] from each hole of the shaft [5].
Note
The wire end of the shorter wire, lift wire /Fr2 [3], must be
inserted into the shaft hole near the frame of the cover
paper tray. The shaft hole near the center of the tray is
used for the shorter wire/Fr2 [3].
When installing the pulley, raise the lift plate slightly to
give slack to the wire, insert the wire ends one at a time
into the shaft hole, and secure them with the pulley/Fr1 [1]
and / Fr2 [2]. The wires can be inserted easily in this way.
When installing the pulley, be sure to fasten the pulley/Fr1
[1] in advance, and then install the pulley/Fr2 [2].
[3] [5]
a03xf2c064ca
G -50
11. Remove the E-rings [1], 1 each, and then remove the wire cover
[1] [2] [3] [5] [4]
[2].
12. Remove the wires /Fr1 [4] and /Fr2 [5] from the pulley [3].
Note
When installing the wires, make sure that the wires are
properly routed inside the wire covers [2] and are not
crossed each other.
[5] [4]
a03xf2c040ca
13. Pull out the wire ends [4] of the wire/Fr1 [2] and / Fr2 [3] through
[3] [2]
the lift plate arm [1].
Note
When pulling out the wire, pull it out carefully so as not to
damage it with sharp metal edges.
[1]
[4]
a03xf2c041ca
G -51
[1]
a03xf2c065ca
[1] [2] 15. Remove the lift wire/Rr1 [1] and /Rr2 [2] in the same manner as
step 10 to 13.
Note
After completion of installation, check the lift plate to see
if it is horizontal.
a03xf2c042ca
G -52
4.2.8 Paper lift motor/1 (M2) and /2 (M3)

(1) Procedure
[1] [2]
Rear cover /Lt1 (Refer to G.4.2.4 The rear cover/Lt1 and /Rt)
Rear cover /Lt2 (Refer to G.4.2.3 Rear cover /Lt2)
[2].
3. Remove each of 1 connectors [3].
4. Remove the six screws [4], and remove the paper lift motor assy/1
[5] and /2 [6] toward the rear of the main unit.
[5] [1] [6]
[4]
[3]
a03xf2c043ca

[3] [1] [2]
a03xf2c044ca
[2] [1] 7. Remove the three screws [1] and remove the paper lift motor cover
[2].
a03xf2c045ca
G -53
[2] [1] 8. Remove the two screws [1] and remove the paper lift motor/1 (M2)
[2] and /2 (M3) [2].
a03xf2c046ca
4.2.9 Vertical conveyance unit

(1) Procedure
1. Remove PF from the main body.
[1] [2] [3]
2. Remove the vertical conveyance clutch/1 (CL7), / 2 (CL8), and /3
(CL9) (Refer to F.7.3.1 Replacing the vertical conveyance clutch/1
(CL7), /2 (CL8), and /3 (CL9))
3. Remove the front door. (Refer to G.4.2.5 Front door)
4. Remove the two screws [1] and remove the vent duct [2].
5. Remove the two screws [3] and remove the cover [4].
[4]
a03xf2c047ca
6. Loosen the screw [1], and release the filter replacement assy
[1] [8]
retaining mechanism stopper [2].
7. Remove the E-ring [3], pull the shaft [4] toward you, and pull out
the shaft [4] through the hole [6] in the connector cover [5].
8. Release the lock [7] of the wire clamp and press it in toward the
rear panel.
9. Remove the two screws [8] and remove the connector cover [5].
[7] [5]
[1] [2] [4] [5]
[3] [6]
a03xf3c048ca
G -54

[1] 11. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the vertical conveyance
unit [2].
Note
When installing the vertical conveyance unit [2], be sure
that the two tabs [3] on the vertical conveyance unit are
fitted in the holes [4] in the PF main unit.
[4] [1]
[2]
[3]
a03xf2c050ca
4.2.10 Horizontal conveyance unit

(1) Procedure
[1]
1. Remove the vertical conveyance unit. (Refer to G.4.2.9 Vertical
conveyance unit)
2. Remove the horizontal conveyance clutch/1 (CL10), /2 (CL11), and
the pre-registration clutch (CL12). (Refer to F.7.3.2 Replacing the
horizontal conveyance clutch/1 (CL10), /2 (CL11), and pre-
registration clutch (CL12))
3. Disconnect the two connectors [1] and release the wires from the
clamps.
a03xf2c051ca
G -55
[1]
a03xf2c052ca

6. Loosen the two screws [2] and remove the horizontal conveyance
unit [3].
[1]
[2]
a03xf2c053ca

[2] [1] Note
When installing the horizontal conveyance unit, make sure
that the pin [2] is fitted in the notch [1] of the unit.
a03xf2c054ca
4.2.11 The multi feed detection board (MFDBR and S)

Note
When replacing the multi feed detection board /S (MFDBS), be sure to replace the multi feed detection board /R (MFDBR) at the
same time.
When the multi feed detection board is replaced, be sure to conduct the adjustment when replacing multi feed detection board
(MFDBR, MFDBS). (Refer to I.5.3.12 Adjustment when replacing the multi feed detection board (PF))
G -56
(1) Procedure
1. Loosen the screw [1], and release the filter replacement assy
[1] [8]
retaining mechanism stopper [2].
2. Remove the E-ring [3], pull the shaft [4] toward you, and pull out
the shaft [4] through the hole [6] in the connector cover [5].
3. Release the lock [7] of the wire clamp and press it in toward the
rear panel.
4. Remove the two screws [8] and remove the connector cover [5].
[7] [5]
[1] [2] [4] [5]
[3] [6]
a03xf3c048ca

[1]
6. Open the jam precessing lever PF5 [2], and remove the cover [3].
[2] [3]
a03xf2c056ca
[1] [3]
[2]
8. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the multi feed detection
board /R (MFDBR) [3].
a03xf2c057ca
G -57
9. Remove the screw [1], slide the cover [2] in the direction of the
[2]
arrow, and remove the cover downward.
Note
When installing the cover, be sure to insert the tab [3] on
the cover into the hole of the horizontal conveyance unit
[4].
[1] [3] [4] [2]
a03xf3c058ca

[1] [2] [3]
11. Remove 2 screws [2], then remove the multi feed detection board /
S (MFDBS) [3].
a03xf2c059ca
G -58
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 5. LU-202
5. LU-202
1 Cover section Upper door
Clutch cover
Paper feed cover
Right cover
Front cover
Rear cover
2 Up/down section Replacing the lift wire
3 Paper feed section The paper size VR (VR1)

Note
5.2.2 Upper door

(1) Procedure
[1] [7] [2] 1. Open the upper door [1].
2. Remove the hook [3] of spring [2] from the paper feed guide plate
[4].
Note
When attaching the spring, be sure to put its hook through
the hole on the plate from the outside.
3. Remove the 2 screws [5], slide the door [1] in the direction of the
arrow [6], and remove it while tilting it in the direction of the arrow
[7].
[5] [4] [3] [5] [6] a03wf2c011ca
5.2.3 The clutch cover

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Open the upper door [1].
2. Remove the 4 screws [2] and then remove the clutch cover [3].
[3] [2] a03wf2c012ca
5.2.4 The paper feed cover

(1) Procedure
[3] [1] 1. Remove the upper door. (Refer to G.5.2.2 Upper door)
2. Remove the 2 screws [1] and the 2 screws [2], and remove the
paper feed cover [3].
[2] a03wf2c013ca
G -59
5.2.5 Right cover

(1) Procedure
2. Remove the 4 screws [2] and remove the right cover [3].
[2] a03wf2c014ca
5.2.6 Front cover

(1) Procedure
2. Remove the right cover. (Refer to G.5.2.5 Right cover)
3. Open the front door [1] and remove the 5 screws [2].
[1] 4. Close the front door [1], and remove the front cover [3].
[2]
[3] [2]
a03wf2c015ca
G -60
5.2.7 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
[2] [1] [1] [3]
3. Remove the 18 screws [1] and remove the rear cover [2] with the
clutch cover [3].
Note
When the HT (option) is installed, remove the 4 screws [4].

[1]
[1] [1] [4]
a03wf2c016ca
5.2.8 Replacing the lift wire

Note
When HT-503 (option) is installed, remove it before operation.
Be sure to press the tray down switch (SW100) while charging to lower the paper lift plate to the bottom before operation.
Remove the lift wire in the order of "G.5.2.8.(1) Removing/installing the paper feed motor assy" "G.5.2.8.(2) Removing/installing
the paper lift drive section" "G.5.2.8.(3) Removing/reinstalling the lift wire". Reinstall the lift wire following the removal steps in
reverse. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
After replacing the lift wire, carry out the paper lift plate horizontal adjustment. (Refer to I.13.2 Paper lift plate horizontal
adjustment)
There are 6 lift wires; /Fr1 [2], /Fr2 [3], /Fr3 [4], /Rr1 [5], /Rr2 [6], and /Rr3 [7]. All of them are wound on the pulleys attached to the
drive shaft [1] as shown. The 4 lift wires; Fr2, Fr3, Rr2, Rr3 are the same in length, and are referred to as drive wire/A which lifts
the paper lift plate [8]. The other 2 lift wires; /Fr1 and /Rr1 are different in length and attached to the spring/Fr [9] and the spring/Rr
[10] as shown. The /Fr1 and /Rr1, referred to as assist wire/C and /D respectively, pull the paper lift plate downward to stabilize the
plate.
Drive wire/A (1450 mm) :lift wire/Fr2 [3], /Fr3 [4], Rr2 [6], /Rr3 [7]
Assist wire/C (1240 mm) :lift wire/Fr1 [2]
Assist wire/D (820mm) :lift wire/Rr1 [5]
Attach the cylindrical-shaped end [11] of the wire to the drive shaft, and attach the other ball shaped end [12] to the metal plate or
the spring.
[8] [10]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[11]
[4] [1]
[12]
FRONT [9] [3]
[2] a03wf2c017ca
[1] Drive shaft [2] Lift wire/Fr1

[3] Lift wire/Fr2 [4] Lift wire/Fr3
[5] Lift wire/Rr1 [6] Lift wire/Rr2
[7] Lift wire/Rr3 [8] Paper lift plate
[9] Spring/Fr [10] Spring/Rr
G -61
(1) Removing/installing the paper feed motor assy

[1] [2] 1. Remove the LU from the main body.
3. Remove the front cover. (Refer to G.5.2.6 Front cover)
5. Remove the paper feed clutch (CL101) [1] and pre-registration
clutch (CL102) [2]. (Refer to F.8.1.6 Replacing paper feed clutch
(CL101) /pre-registration clutch (CL102)
6. Remove the 2 screws [3] and remove the duct [4].
[4] [3]
a03wf2c018ca
[1] [2] [12] [11] [6] [3] [4] 7. Remove the wire binding [1] from the saddle [2].
8. Remove the 8 screws [3].
9. Loosen the screw [4] 1 or 2 turns.
Note
Do not loosen the screw [4] too much. Loosening the
screw too much may damage the clearance sponge [5].
10. Push the lower part of the bulkhead plate [6] a few millimeters in
the direction of the arrow [7], then while avoiding actuator [8], push
the tab [9] to remove the lower limit sensor (PS101) [10].
Note
When removing/installing PS101, be careful not to damage
it.
When installing, make sure that the tab [9] is securely
inserted.
[3] [5] [7] [3]
11. Slide the upper part of the bulkhead plate [5] in the direction of the
arrow [11], and tilt it until it comes off from the metal plate [12].
[8] [10] [9]

a03wf2c019ca
[6] [3] [4] [6] [8]

12. Remove the 3 connectors [1] and remove the wire binding [2] from
the saddle.
15. Remove the 2 screws [6] and remove the paper feed motor assy
[7] in the direction of the arrow [8].
Note
The screws [6] are shoulder screws. Make sure to properly
attach the screws so that the metal plate is fitted securely.
[5] [1] [2] [7] [5]

a03wf2c020ca
G -62
(2) Removing/installing the paper lift drive section

[2] [1] [4] 1. Remove the right cover. (Refer to G.5.2.5 Right cover)
3. Remove the screw [1], and remove the sensor cover [2].
4. Remove the 5 connectors [3] and remove the wire binding [4].
[3] a03wf2c021ca
[3] 5. Remove the E-ring [1] and the bearing [2].

6. Remove the 3 screws [3] and the 2 screws [4].
Note
7. Remove the metal plate [5] and the bearing [6].

Note
When installing the bearing [6], install it from the inner
side of the metal plate [5].
[2] [1] [6] [5] [4]
a03wf2c022ca
[1] [2] 8. Remove the positioning gear [1].

Note
When installing the gear [1] with the paper lift plate
located at its lowest position, align the edge surface of the
actuator [3] of the remaining paper detection gear [2] with
the surface [5] of the remaining paper sensor/4 (PS105)
[4].
Make sure to attach the gear [1] in the correct direction.
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3] a03wf2c023ca
G -63
[3].
10. Remove the E-ring [4], then remove the gear [5] and the outer/
inner bearings [6].
[2] [3] [1] [6] [4] [5]

a03wf2c024ca
[3].
[5] [4] [3] [2] [1]

a03wf2c025ca
[3] [2] 13. Remove the 4 screws [1] and the 2 screws [2], and remove the
paper lift drive section [3].
Note
Be careful not to damage the clearance sponge [4].
[1] [4]
a03wf2c026ca
G -64
(3) Removing/reinstalling the lift wire

[4] [3] [1] [2]
1. Remove the paper feed motor assy. (Refer to G.5.2.8.(1)
Removing/installing the paper feed motor assy)
2. Remove the paper lift drive section. (Refer to G.5.2.8.(2)
Removing/installing the paper lift drive section)
3. Release the hook [2] of the spring/Rr [1] provided at the back, and
remove the ball shaped wire end [3].
4. Remove the lift wire/Rr1 [7] from the pulley [4], [5] and [6].
5. Remove the E-ring [8] and the pulley [9], and then remove the lift
wire/Rr1 [7].
[5]
[6] [7]
[8] [9] [6]

a03wf2c027ca
[2] [5] [4] [3] [9] [10] [1] 6. Check point when reinstalling the lift wire/Rr1
Note
When installing the lift wire/Rr1 [1], insert the cylindrical-
shaped end of the wire [3] into the hole of the drive shaft
[2], and insert the pulley [5] letting the wire through the
cutout [4], and then wind the wire 7 turns clockwise [6]
(from the panel [7] side to outward [8]) in a single layer.
When installing the lift wire/Rr1, be sure that the lift wire/
Rr2 [9] and /Rr3 [10] are not on either side edge of the
pulley, and the lift wire/Rr1 [1] is wound 1 turn at the panel
side [7].
[8] [7]
[6] a03wf2c028ca
G -65
[4] [6] [7] [8] 7. Release the hook [2] of the spring/Fr [1] provided at the front, and
remove the ball shaped wire end [3].
8. Remove the lift wire/Fr1 [6] from the pulley [4] and [5].
9. Remove the E-ring [7] and the pulley [8], and then remove the lift
wire/Fr1 [6].
[1] [2] [3] [5]
a03wf2c029ca
[5] [4] [2] [3] [1] 10. Check point when reinstalling the lift wire/Fr1
Note
When installing the lift wire/Fr1 [1], insert the cylindrical-
shaped end of the wire [3] into the hole of the drive shaft
[2], and insert the pulley [5] letting the wire through the
cutout [4], and then wind the wire 7 turns
counterclockwise [6] (from the panel [7] side to outward
[8]) in a single layer.
Before Installing the lift wire/Fr1, rotate the shaft
counterclockwise to prevent the lift wire/Fr2 [9] and Fr3
[10] from getting loose.
[7] [10] [9] [8] [6]
Be sure to check that the wires are not loosened and are
not on either side edges of the pulleys.
a03wf2c030ca
G -66
[11] [10] [12] 11. Remove the E-ring [1] and the pulley [2], and then pull out the wire
end [3].
12. Remove the lift wire/Fr2 [4] from the pulley [5], [6] and [7].
Note
When removing the wire from the pulley [5], [6] and [7],
pull the wire out from the convex portion [8] of the wire
cover [9], then slide the wire cover.
[9] 13. Remove the screw [10], and remove the wire protective cover [11].
[5] 14. Remove the ball shaped wire end [12] by pulling it straight up, and
remove the lift wire/Fr2 [4].
[8] Note
When removing/installing the lift wire, be careful not to
damage it with the metal plate.
[4] [6]
[5] [7]
[1]
[2] [3]
a03wf2c031ca
[8] [7] 15. Remove the 2 E-rings [1] and pulley [2], and remove the lift wire/
Fr3 [3].
16. In the same manner as Step 12, remove the lift wire/Fr3 [3] from
the pulley [4], [5] and [6].
17. In the same manner as Steps 13 and 14, remove the screw [7] and
the wire cover [8], and remove the lift wire/Fr3 [3].
[5]
[6] [4] [3]
[2] [1] a03wf2c032ca
G -67
[7] [8] 18. Remove the E-ring [1] provided at the back and the pulley [2], and
remove the lift wire/Rr2 [3].
19. In the same manner as Step 12, remove the lift wire/Rr2 [3] from
the wire protective cover [8], and remove the lift wire/Rr2 [3].
Note
After installing the lift wire, make sure that the lift wire
[5] does not contact with the metal plates or some other
parts.
[4] [3] [6]
[1] [2] a03wf2c033ca
[7] [8] 21. Remove the 2 E-rings [1] and pulley [2], and remove the lift wire/
Rr3 [3].
22. In the same manner as Step 12, remove the lift wire/Fr3 [3] from
the wire protective cover [8], and remove the lift wire/Rr3 [3].
Note
After installing the lift wire, make sure that the lift wire
[5] does not contact with the metal plates or some other
parts.
Note
After installing, carry out the paper lift plate horizontal
adjustment. (Refer to I.13.2 Paper lift plate horizontal
adjustment)
[6] [3] [4]
[1] [2] a03wf2c034ca
G -68
5.2.9 Paper size VR (VR1)

1. Remove the paper from LU and close the upper door.
[2] [1] [3] [4] 2. Turn on the main power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch
(SW2) of the main body. After the paper lift plate stops at its
uppermost position (listen to the sound of the paper lift motor to
figure out the stop status), turn off the both switches.
4. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the guide plate /Fr [1] and 2 screws [4] of
the guide plate /Rr [3], and widen the guide plates /Fr, /Rr to the
max. width.
5. Remove 3 screws [5] of the paper size VR (VR1) and remove the
VR1.
[5]
a03wf2c035ca

[1] [2] 1. Widen the guide plates /Fr [1], /Rr [2] to the max. width.
2. Adjust the engagement of the gears of paper size VR (VR1) and
detection plate /Rr so that the holes [3] and [4] are aligned. Then
tighten the screw [5].
3. After installing, set the paper in LU and check that the paper size is
properly detected.
[5]
[3] [4]
a03wf2c036ca
G -69
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 6. RU-509/HM-102
6. RU-509/HM-102
6.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled/reassembled
6.1.1 Color density sensor unit
(1) Positions from which removing the screws is prohibited
Mounting screws of the color density detection boards /Y, /M, /C, /K, 2 each
[2]
[1]
[1] Screws not allowed to be removed [2] Color density sensor unit
(2) Reason of prohibition

The color density detection board detects the color density by the light reflected off the paper. When its position is moved, the density read
value changes.
Do not change the mounting position of the color density detection board. Misaligning the position has a risk of detecting the color density
improperly.

1 Cover Front door
2 Rear cover
3 Upper cover
4 Humidification section (HM-102) Humidification unit
5 Water feed tank
6 Pump motor (P1)
7 Conveyance section Color density sensor unit
8 Shutter
9 Others RU control board (RUCB)

CAUTION
G -70
6.3.2 Front door

(1) Procedure
1. Open the front door [1], remove the screw [2] and then remove the
wire [3].
Note
When reinstalling, be sure to set so that the wire [3]
becomes level.
2. Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the door support bracket [5]
and the front door [1] in the arrow-marked direction.
Note
The front door [1] is heavy. Support it securely when
[3] [2] removing it.

Note
When reinstalling, check that the front door [1] closes
securely.
[1] [4]
[5]
6.3.3 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the 8 screws [1] and then remove the rear cover [2].
[1] [2]
[1] [1] [1]
G -71
6.3.4 Upper cover

(1) Procedure
3. Remove the upper cover [3].
[2] [3]
6.3.5 Humidification unit

(1) Procedure
3. Pull out the humidification unit [2].
[1] [2]
G -72
4. Release 4 clamps [1].
[1]
[1] [1]
[3] [1] 5. Cut off the connection of the pipes [3] and [4] while pressing the
brackets [1] and [2].
Note
Discharge water inside the cut pipe [4] to proper
container, otherwise water leaks when cutting off the
connection of the pipe [4].
[2] [4]
G -73
6. Remove 2 connectors [1] from the board.

[1] 7. Remove the relay connector [2].
8. Remove the screw [3] and then remove the ground.
9. Remove the screw [4] and then cut off the connecting arm.
[2]
[3]
[4]
[2] 10. Remove 4 screws [1] from the right and left rails.
11. Remove the humidification unit [2].
Note
When removing the humidification unit [2], never hold the
parts easily deformed such as Jam clearing lever.
When reinstalling the humidification unit [2], be sure to fit
the groove on the left side of the unit [3] to the rail [4]
before putting the entire unit on the rail.
[1] [3]
[4]
G -74
Note
[2] When putting down the humidification unit, put a support
board or something under it not to damage the clamp [1]
or the pipe [2].
[1]
6.3.6 Water feed tank

(1) Procedure
1. Open the front door. (Refer to G.6.3.2 Front door)
4. Release the wiring harness from all clamps [2].
Note
Be sure to put the removed connector in the water feed
tank tray [3].
5. Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the stopper [5].
[4] [1] [2] [3]
[1] [3] 6. Pull out the humidification unit and remove 2 pipes. (Refer to G.
6.3.5 Humidification unit)
7. Pull out the water feed tank. (Refer to F.10.3.2 Replacing the water
feed filter)
Note
Be sure to put the pipe to the left [1] beforehand so that it
does not get stuck inside.
8. Put the humidification unit to the original position.

Note
Be sure to pull out the water feed tank before putting back
the humidification unit so that the pipe does not get stuck
inside.
9. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the water feed tank [3].
[2]
Note
When reinstalling the water feed tank, be sure to set the
positioning [1] hole to the projection of the water feed tank
tray.
[1]
G -75
6.3.7 Pump motor (P1)

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the wire and then open the front door at the maximum.
(Refer to G.6.3.2 Front door)
3. Pull out the humidification unit.
4. Remove the pipe [2] in the arrow-marked direction while pressing
the bracket [1].
5. Release the pipe from the clamp [3].
[3] [2] [1]
6. Pull out the water feed tank.

7. Remove 7 screws [1] to release the clamp.
[2] Note
Adjust the positions of the water feed tank and
humidification unit so that the connecting arm [2] does
not bother when removing the screw [1].
[1]
8. Remove the screw [1] to release the clamp.

9. Remove the clamp to release the wiring harness and then
[6] [1] [3] disconnect the connector [2].
10. Push the bracket [3] to remove the pipe [4].
11. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the pump motor (P1) [6].
[2] [5] [4]
6.3.8 Color density sensor unit

Note
When replacing the color density sensor unit, replace the shutter at the same time.
G -76
(1) Procedure
2. Disconnect the 3 connectors [1].
3. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the color density sensor
unit [3].
[1]
[2] [3]
Note
When reinstalling the unit, be sure to set the projection of
the mounting plate in the hole [3] of the unit by pressing
the color sensor unit while pulling the shutter [1] in the
arrow-marked direction [2].
[2] [1]
6.3.9 Shutter
(1) Procedure
[3] 1. Remove the upper cover. (Refer to G.6.3.4 Upper cover)
2. Loosen 2 screws [1] and then remove the stopper [2].
3. Pull out the shutter [3] in the arrow-marked direction to remove.
[1] [2]
G -77
6.3.10 Note for replacing the board

(1) Procedure
CAUTION
When the RU control board (RUCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC33).
1. Install EEPROM (IC33) of the old control board [1] to the new
control board [2].
Note
Be sure to install the "A" sections of the EEPROM (IC33)
in the same direction.
After replacing the RU control board (RUCB), conduct
rewriting of the firmware.
(Refer to J. Rewriting of firmware)
[1]
[2]
G -78
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 7. FS-521
7. FS-521
1 Cover Front door
2 Sub tray
3 Upper cover /1
4 Upper cover /2
5 Left cover /Fr
6 Rear cover
7 Stacker section Stacker unit
8 Main tray section Main tray
9 Lift wire
10 Tray up down motor
11 Stapler section Handling of the clogged stapler 1
12 Handling of the clogged stapler 2

CAUTION
7.2.2 Front door

(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Open the front door, remove the screw [1] and then remove the
wire [2] of the door.
a0gyt3c015ca
and the front door [3].
Note
The front door is heavy. Support it securely when
removing it.
[1]
[3] [2] fs503fs2046c
G -79
7.2.3 Sub tray

(1) Procedure
[7] 1. Rotate the sub tray [1] in the arrowed direction [2] and remove the
ball catch [3] from the ball [4].
2. Press the front and rear sections of the sub tray [1] in the arrowed
direction [5] to make it curve a little, and detach the attaching hole
[6] from the pin [7] to remove the sub tray [1].
[6]
[5]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
fs503fs2047c
7.2.4 Upper cover /1

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the sub tray.
2. Remove 6 screws [1] and the connector [2] and then remove the
upper cover /1 [3].
[2]
Note
When the front door support section [4] is hard to remove,
slide the upper cover /1 [3] a little to the front side and
[3] remove it while lifting it up.
[1]
[4] [1] a0gyt3c008ca
G -80

(1) Procedure
[2]
body.
[1]
a0gyt3c003ca
[1] 3. Remove the screws [1], 2 each, and then remove the paper exit
alignment plates /Fr [2] and /Rr [3].
[3] [2] a0gyt3c009ca
[1] 4. Hold the installation section [1] of the paper exit alignment plate
and move inward.
Note
Do not hold the rack [2] to move.
5. Remove each 1 screw [3] and then remove each 1 cover [4].
[3] [4] [2] [4] [3] a0gyt3c010ca
6. Hold the installation section [1] of the paper exit alignment plate
[2] [1] [1] [2] and move outward to fit it to the notch holes [2].
Note
Do not hold the rack [3] to move.
7. Remove 4 screws [4] and then remove upper cover /2 [5].

[4] [3] [5] [4]

a0gyt3c011ca
G -81
7.2.6 Left cover /Fr

(1) Procedure
1. Loosen 1 screw [1].
2. Remove 1 screw [2], slant the upper section of the left cover /Fr [3]
and remove it while lifting it up.
[2]
[3]
[1]
fs503fs2050c
7.2.7 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 5 screws [1] and remove the rear cover [2].
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to hook the rear cover to 2
catches [3] provided at the lower section.
[1]
[2]
[3] [1]
fs503fs2051c
7.2.8 Stacker unit

CAUTION
Be sure to conduct this operation with 2 people.
(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.7.2.7 Rear cover)
2. Open the front door, remove the screw [1] and then remove the
wire [2] of the door.
a0gyt3c015ca
G -82

4. Remove each cables from 4 wiring harness guides [2].
5. Remove the E-ring [3] and the shaft [4], and cut off the coupling
arm [5].
[1]
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4] [3] a0gyt3c012ca
[1] 6. Remove the stopper screws [1], 1 each, provided on the rails in
front and rear, pull the stacker unit further out.
[1] fs503fs2061c
G -83
7. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, provided on the rails in front and
rear.
8. Lift up the stacker section [2] at the specified positions [3], release
the hook of the rail [4] from the hole [6] and remove the stacker
section [2].
[3] CAUTION
Be careful of your posture when removing it. Be sure to
conduct this operation with 2 people so that you do not
suffer backache.
Note
[1] When lifting up the stacker section, be sure to hold it at
the specified positions [3]. Holding other positions such
as the roller shaft may damage to these positions.

Note
[6] When reinstalling the stacker section to the rail [4], be
sure to check that the hooks [5] provided at 2 locations in
[5] front and rear, 4 locations in all, get into the attaching
holes [6] securely.
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[6]
[5]
[4]
fs503fs2041c
10. Check point when reinstalling the stacker section

Note
[3] When reinstalling it, be sure to pull out the rail [1] fully
and fasten it with the stopper screw [2] tentatively. Fix the
rail in the rear with tape [3] so that the rail does not move
and contract. It allows you to conduct the operation
smoothly.
[1] [2] fs503fs2042c
G -84
7.2.9 Main tray

CAUTION
(1) Procedure
[2]
body.
[1]
a0gyt3c003ca

4. Lift up the main tray [2] to unhook the up/down stay [3], and
remove the main tray [2].
[3] [1] fs503fs2017c
7.2.10 Lift wire

Note
The following replacement procedure of the lift wire shows the steps taken on the rear side. The figuration and the winding of
wires on the front side are symmetrical to those on the rear side.
The brackets of the lift wire are stamped with "F" on the front side and "R" on the rear side. Be careful not to confuse one with the
other.
(1) Procedure
1. Bring the main tray down to the bottom. (Refer to G.7.2.9 Main
tray)
[1] 2. Remove the following parts.
Main tray (Refer to G.7.2.9 Main tray)
[1] Left cover /Fr (Refer to G.7.2.6 Left cover /Fr)
Front door (Refer to G.7.2.2 Front door)
3. Remove the screws [1], 2 each, and then remove the tray stay
covers /Fr [2] and /Rr [3].
[3] [2] fs503fs2038c
G -85
4. Disconnect the connector [1], remove 6 screws [2], and then

[1] remove the gear box [4] together with the tray up down motor [3].
Remove the gear box [4] together with the motor [3].
CAUTION
[3]
When the gear box is removed, the main tray falls down.
So, be sure to support the tray by hand when removing
the gear box.
[4]
[2] fs503fs2018c
5. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the wire mounting plate [3]
of the lift wire /Rr [2] from the lift stay [4].
[4]
[2]
[1]
[3]
fs503fs2019c
6. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the belt tensioner [1].
[1]
[2]
fs503fs2020c
G -86
7. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the gear [2] and the lift
[5] pulley /Lw [3] to remove the lift wire /Rr [4].
Note
When removing the gear [2] and the lift pulley /Lw [3], be
careful not to drop the pin [5].
[3]
[1] [2] [5]
[4]
fs503fs2021c
[3]
8. Tentatively fasten the wire mounting plate [2] of the new lift wire /
Rr [1] to the lift stay [3] with the 2 screws [4].
Note
[4] Be sure to install the lift wires placing the shorter one
below the longer one.
9. Fasten the new lift wire /Rr [1] with the wire end [6] of the lift
[2]
pulley /Lw [5] and insert it into the shaft. Rotate the lift pulley /Lw
[5] and wind it 6 turns clockwise from inside to outside around the
lift pulley /Lw [5] with no slack, and then insert the lift pulley /Lw [5]
fully deep into the shaft so that it coincides with the pin [7].
[5] [1]
[7]
[6] fs503fs2022c
10. With the lift wire /Rr [1] hooked to the lift pulley /Up [2], wind it 2
turns counterclockwise from inside to outside around the lift
pulley /Lw [3] with no slack and then fasten it with the wire end [4].
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
fs503fs2023c
G -87
11. Insert the pin [1] and the gear [2] into the shaft, and fasten them
with the E-ring [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
fs503fs2024c
12. Use a tension gauge or a spring balance to pull the belt tensioner
[1] with a specified force A and tighten it up 2 screws [2].
[1]
Specified value: A = 2.5kg 0.1kg
[2]
fs503fs2025c
[4] [5] [3] [2] [1] 13. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the wire mounting plate [1] on the front
side, press down the lift stay [3] to bring it to a horizontal position,
and tighten up 2 screws [5] of the wire mounting plate [4] on the
rear side and 2 screws [2] on the front side, that is, 4 screws in all.
Note
Check to see if the lift stay [3] is kept in a horizontal
position. If it is on the slant, an unnecessary load may be
applied onto the gear, thus damaging it.
Note
When reinstalling the covers, be sure to rotate the tray up/
[2]
down motor counterclockwise as seen from above to raise
[5] fs503fs2026c
the lift stay about 12cm before installing each cover. Since
the lift stay comes down lower than the normal operating
range due to the lift gear box being removed, it is
inevitably necessary to raise the lift stay to install it
without the left cover /Fr and the rear cover hitting against
the up/down stay.
G -88
7.2.11 Tray up down motor

(1) Procedure
[1] [3] 1. Remove the rear cover.
2. Disconnect the connector [1], remove 4 screws [2] and then
remove the tray up down motor [3].
Note
When reinstalling it, make sure that the belt [4] is set
correctly to the gears [5] and [6].
[2]
[4]
[6] [5]
fs503fs2027c
7.2.12 Handling of the clogged stapler 1

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the stapler cartridge.
Note
When the stapler cartridge cannot be removed, conduct
[1] the initial operation by turning ON and OFF the sub power
switch (SW2) of the main body.
When the stapler cartridge cannot be removed by the
[3]
initial operation, conduct "G.7.2.13 Handling of the
clogged stapler 2 ".
[2]
2. Press the release button [1] and open the staple cover [2].
fs503fs2052c 3. Remove the unnecessary staples [3].
4. Close the staple cover [2].
7.2.13 Handling of the clogged stapler 2

(1) Procedure
CAUTION
Be careful not to get your hand caught in the opening [1] of the stapler assy. Pressing the staple side [2] and/or the clinch side
[3] cause the opening [1] to close unexpectedly. It is very difficult to open the opening by hand once it has closed. So, be careful
not to close it. When holding the stapler assy, be sure to hold it at both ends of the cam shaft [4].
When conducting the operation, be sure to wear protective gloves.
When conducting the operation, be careful not to get the glove or your hand caught in the gear.
G -89
[3] [4]
[1]
[2]
fs503fs2053c
[3] [2] 1. Remove the stapler assy. (Refer to F.11.4.1 Replacing the stapler
assy)
2. Remove 2 nuts [1] and then remove the clinch protective plates /1
[2] and /2 [3].
[1]
fs503fs2054c
3. Remove the clogged staples.

[3] Note
When reinstalling it, place the holes [2] of 2 clinch metal
fittings [1] one upon the other so that the tip [3] of the
clinch presser is engaged to the depression [4] of the
[2] clinch metal fitting.
[4]
[1]
fs503fs2055c
4. When the clogged staples cannot be removed, rotate the gear [1]
of the stapler motor shaft and the gear [2] that comes into contact
the motor gear to open the opening [5] until the pin [3] at the tip of
the stapling arm comes to the bottom of the slit [4].
CAUTION
[5]
[6] Considerable force is required to rotate the gear. Be sure
to wear gloves not to get injured.
[4] Note
The gear can be rotated in the easier direction.
[3]
5. Remove the stapler cartridge [6] Remove the unnecessary staples
[2] [1] fs503fs2056c from the stapler cartridge. (Refer to G.7.2.12 Handling of the
clogged stapler 1)

CAUTION
When the FNS control board (FNSCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC68).
G -90
control board [2].
Note
Setting of the SW3 [3] has to be the same as the setting of
the old FNSCB. (Refer to L.2.6.1 FNS control board
(FNSCB))
After replacing the FNS control board (FNSCB), conduct
[1]
[2] [3]
fd501fs2077c
A 2. Check point when reinstalling the EEPROM (IC68)

Note
Be sure to install the "A" sections of the EEPROM (IC68) in
A the same direction.
fd501fs2078c
G -91
8. FS-531
1 Cover Upper cover /1
2 Upper cover /2
3 Front door
4 Rear cover
5 Left cover
7 Up/down wire
8 Stacker section Stacker unit
9 Conveyance section Paper exit opening unit

CAUTION

(1) Procedure
[1]
1. Remove 2 caps [1].
2. Open the front door [2], remove 5 screws [3] and then remove the
[3] upper cover /1 [4].
[2]
[3] 15jkf2c012na

Note
When the PI (option) is installed, remove it.
(1) Procedure
[3]
1. Remove the upper cover /1. (Refer to G.8.2.2 Upper cover /1)
[4] 2. Open the front door [1].
3. Remove 2 screws [2], pull out the sub tray [3], and then remove
the upper cover /2 [4].
[1]
[2] 15jkf2c013na
G -92
8.2.4 Front door

(1) Procedure
[3] 2. Remove 2 screws [3] of the lower hinge plate [2] and then remove
[1] the front door [1].
[2]
15jkf2c034na
8.2.5 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to set the notch [3] of the rear
[1] cover to the projection [4] of the frame.
[1]
[3] [4]
[2]
15jkf2c035nb
8.2.6 Left cover

(1) Procedure
2. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the left cover [2].
[2] 15jkf2c036na
8.2.7 Main tray

CAUTION
G -93
(1) Procedure
[1] with fingers and down the main tray [2].
2. Turn OFF the main power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch
outlet.
[2]
15jkf2c014na
[2] 3. Remove 2 screws [1] from the main tray.

[1]
[3]
15jkf2c015na
8.2.8 Replacing the up/down wire

CAUTION
When the tray up down motor is removed, the main tray falls. Therefore, remove the motor while holding the tray with hand.
Note
The following procedure for replacing the wire shows the examples on the rear side. The figuration and the winding of wires on
the front side are symmetrical to those on the rear side.
When installing the up/down wire, be sure to check the engraved marks "F" on the front side and "R" on the rear side of the wire
bracket.
(1) Procedure
2. Remove 5 screws [1] and remove the reinforcing bracket [2]. Then,
remove the wiring harness from 3 clamps [3] and disconnect the
connector [4].
[2] [1] 15jmf2c015na
G -94
[2] [1] 3. Remove 5 screws [1] and remove the up down motor assy [2].
CAUTION
When the up down motor assy is removed, the main tray
falls. Therefore, remove the up down motor assy while
holding the tray with hand.
15jkf2c017na
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the wire bracket [3] of the
up/down wire [2] on the rear from the up/down stay [4].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
15jkf2c018na
[2]
[1]
15jkf2c019na
G -95
6. Remove the E-ring [1], gear [2], and up/down pulley /Lw [3], and
then remove the up/down wire [4].
[5] Note
[3]
When removing the up/down pulley /Lw, be careful not to
drop 2 pins [5].
[4]
[1] [2]
15jkf2c020na
7. Temporarily tighten the wire bracket [1] of a new up/down wire [4]
to the up/down stay [2] with 2 screws [3].
Note
When installing the up/down wire [4], the shorter one [5]
faces down and the longer one [6] faces up.
[6]
[2]
[4]
[1]
[5] [3]
15jkf2c021na
8. Fasten the up/down wire end with the wire end hole inside of the
up/down pulley /Lw [1]. Through the notch [2] and wind 5 turns
from inside to outside with no slack. Then, insert the up/down
pulley /L [1] in the shaft aligning with pin [3].
[3]
[1]
[2]
15jkf2c022na
[2] [1] [4] [3] 9. Insert the wire winded up/down pulley [1] in the shaft so that the
pin [3] in which the shaft [2] has been inserted fits in the groove of
the pulley.
15vlf2c009na
G -96
10. Hook the up/down wire on the up/down pulley /Up [1] and wind the
wire 2 turns around the up/down pulley /Lw [2] from inside to
[1]
outside with no slack. Then, through the notch of outside and
fasten with the wire end hole [3].
Note
Be sure not to overlap the short up/down wire (first
winded) and the longer up/down wire (latter winded) on
[3]
the up/down pulley /Up.
[2]
15jkf2c023na
[1]
[2]
[3] 15jkf2c024na
[1] with a specified force A [3] and tighten 2 screws [2].
Specified value [3]: A = 2.5kg 0.25kg
[3]
[2]
[1]
15jkf2c025na
[2]
13. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the wire bracket [1] on the front to push
down the up/down stay [3]. Then, tighten 4 screws [5] and [2] on
the rear and front in a horizontal position.
Note
Be sure to check that the up/down stay [3] is in a
horizontal position. When the stay is aslant, the main tray
up down motor (M3) or gear is overloaded and has a risk
[1] of damage.
[3]
[4] [5] 15jkf2c026na
8.2.9 Stacker unit

CAUTION
Be sure to conduct this operation with more than 2 people.
Be sure to unplug the power plug of the main body from the power outlet.
G -97
(1) Procedure
[2] Booklet tray
2. Separate the FS from the main body.
4. Remove 2 connectors (CN22, CN23) [2] from the relay board (RB)
[1] on the rear of the stacker unit.
5. Remove the wiring harness from 3 clamps [3].
[3] [1] a0drf2c002ca
6. Remove the C-clip [1] and the shaft [2], and then separate the
[2] [1] coupling arm [3].
[3] a0drf2c003ca
[1] 7. Remove 2 screws [1] provided on the rail stopper, and then pull
Note
the pulled out stacker unit for balancing.
[2] [3] [1] 15vlf2c012na
G -98
8. Remove 2 screws [1] and then lift the stacker unit [2] to remove it
[4] from the guide rail [3].
[3] Note
Be careful of your posture when removing it so that you
do not suffer backache.
[5]
[1]
Note
When reinstalling the stacker unit [2] to the guide rail [3],
check that the hook [4] is securely fit in the installation
hole [5].
[2] [1]
[3] [5]
[4]
15vlf2c013na
8.2.10 Paper exit opening unit

(1) Procedure
[2]
Upper cover /1 or PI (option) (Refer to G.8.2.2 Upper cover /1)
Upper cover /2 (Refer to G.8.2.3 Upper cover /2)
2. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the main paper exit
opening cover [2].
[1]
15vlf2c014na
3. Remove the screw [3] of the paper exit opening open/close link [2]
on the paper exit opening unit [1].
[2]
[3]
[1]
15jkf2c031na
G -99
[4] [1] [2] 4. Remove 1 camp [1], fixing screw [2] of the earth cord. 2
connectors [3], and 3 screws [4] of the clamp.
[3] 15jkf2c032na
[1] [2] 5. Remove the E-ring [1] and the bearing [2], 1 each on back and
front, and then remove the paper exit opening unit [3].
[2] [1]
[3]
15jkf2c033na

CAUTION
When the FS control board (FNSCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC10).
control board [2].
[1]
[2]
a04df2e001ca

Note
After replacing the FS control board (FSCB), conduct rewriting
of the firmware.
fd501fs2078c
G -100
9. FS-612
9.1.1 Screw not allowed to be removed on the folding stopper
(1) Positions from which removing is prohibited
1 screw not allowed to be removed on the folding stopper
[1]
15jmf2c017na
[1] Screw not allowed to be removed on the folding stopper -

Note
For ease of understand, the position of the folding stopper is shown lower than the actual position in the illustration.

Adjust the tilt of the holding stopper on the slide shaft side of the holding stopper. (Refer to I.18.10 Half-fold stopper tilt adjustment) Do not
loosen the screws not allowed to be removed on the holding stopper. Loosening those screws changes the tilt of the holding stopper and
misaligns the adjusting standard of the slide shaft.

1 Cover Upper cover /1
2 Upper cover /2
3 Front door
4 Rear cover
5 Left cover
7 Up/down wire
8 Stacker section Stacker unit cover
9 Stacker unit
10 Conveyance section Paper exit opening unit

CAUTION
G -101

(1) Procedure
[1]
1. Remove 2 caps [1].
2. Open the front door [2], remove 5 screws [3] and then remove the
[3] upper cover /1 [4].
[2]
[3] 15jkf2c012na

Note
When the PI (option) is installed, remove it.
(1) Procedure
[3]
1. Remove the upper cover /1. (Refer to G.9.3.2 Upper cover /1)
[4] 2. Open the front door [1].
3. Remove 2 screws [2], pull out the sub tray [3], and then remove
the upper cover /2 [4].
[1]
[2] 15jkf2c013na
9.3.4 Front door

(1) Procedure
[3] 2. Remove 2 screws [3] of the lower hinge plate [2] and then remove
[1] the front door [1].
[2]
15jkf2c034na
G -102
9.3.5 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to set the notch [3] of the rear
[1] cover to the projection [4] of the frame.
[1]
[3] [4]
[2]
15jkf2c035nb
9.3.6 Left cover

(1) Procedure
[2] 15jkf2c036na
9.3.7 Main tray

CAUTION
(1) Procedure
[1] with fingers and down the main tray [2].
2. Turn OFF the main power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch
outlet.
[2]
15jkf2c014na
G -103
[2] 3. Remove 2 screws [1] from the main tray.

[1]
[3]
15jkf2c015na
9.3.8 Replacing the up/down wire

CAUTION
When the tray up down motor is removed, the main tray falls. Therefore, remove the motor while holding the tray with hand.
Note
The following procedure for replacing the wire shows the examples on the rear side. The figuration and the winding of wires on
the front side are symmetrical to those on the rear side.
When installing the up/down wire, be sure to check the engraved marks "F" on the front side and "R" on the rear side of the wire
bracket.
(1) Procedure
2. Remove 5 screws [1] and remove the reinforcing bracket [2]. Then,
remove the wiring harness from 3 clamps [3] and disconnect the
connector [4].
[2] [1] 15jmf2c015na
[2] [1] 3. Remove 5 screws [1] and remove the up down motor assy [2].
CAUTION
When the up down motor assy is removed, the main tray
falls. Therefore, remove the up down motor assy while
holding the tray with hand.
15jkf2c017na
G -104
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the wire bracket [3] of the
up/down wire [2] on the rear from the up/down stay [4].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
15jkf2c018na
[2]
[1]
15jkf2c019na
6. Remove the E-ring [1], gear [2], and up/down pulley /Lw [3], and
then remove the up/down wire [4].
[5] Note
[3]
When removing the up/down pulley /Lw, be careful not to
drop 2 pins [5].
[4]
[1] [2]
15jkf2c020na
G -105
7. Temporarily tighten the wire bracket [1] of a new up/down wire [4]
to the up/down stay [2] with 2 screws [3].
Note
When installing the up/down wire [4], the shorter one [5]
faces down and the longer one [6] faces up.
[6]
[2]
[4]
[1]
[5] [3]
15jkf2c021na
8. Fasten the up/down wire end with the wire end hole inside of the
up/down pulley /Lw [1]. Through the notch [2] and wind 5 turns
from inside to outside with no slack. Then, insert the up/down
pulley /L [1] in the shaft aligning with pin [3].
[3]
[1]
[2]
15jkf2c022na
[2] [1] [4] [3] 9. Insert the wire winded up/down pulley [1] in the shaft so that the
pin [3] in which the shaft [2] has been inserted fits in the groove of
the pulley.
15vlf2c009na
10. Hook the up/down wire on the up/down pulley /Up [1] and wind the
wire 2 turns around the up/down pulley /Lw [2] from inside to
[1]
outside with no slack. Then, through the notch of outside and
fasten with the wire end hole [3].
Note
Be sure not to overlap the short up/down wire (first
winded) and the longer up/down wire (latter winded) on
[3]
the up/down pulley /Up.
[2]
15jkf2c023na
G -106
[1]
[2]
[3] 15jkf2c024na
[1] with a specified force A [3] and tighten 2 screws [2].
Specified value [3]: A = 2.5kg 0.25kg
[3]
[2]
[1]
15jkf2c025na
[2]
13. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the wire bracket [1] on the front to push
down the up/down stay [3]. Then, tighten 4 screws [5] and [2] on
the rear and front in a horizontal position.
Note
Be sure to check that the up/down stay [3] is in a
horizontal position. When the stay is aslant, the main tray
up down motor (M3) or gear is overloaded and has a risk
[1] of damage.
[3]
[4] [5] 15jkf2c026na
9.3.9 Stacker unit cover

(1) Procedure
2. Remove 5 screws [1] and remove the stacker unit cover [2].
[1] 15jmf2c016na
9.3.10 Stacker unit

CAUTION
Be sure to conduct this operation with more than 2 people.
G -107
Be sure to unplug the power plug of the main body from the power outlet.
(1) Procedure
Booklet tray
2. Separate the FS from the main body.
4. Remove 3 connectors (CN22, CN23, CN24) [1] from the relay
board (RB) [2] on the rear of the stacker unit.
5. Remove the wiring harness from 4 clamps [3].
[3]
a04df2c001ca
[2] [1] 6. Remove the C-clip [1] and the shaft [2], and then separate the
coupling arm [3].
[3] 15jkf2c028na
7. Remove 2 screws [1] provided on the rail stopper, and then pull
Note
[1] the pulled out stacker unit for balancing.
[2]
[1]
[3] 15jkf2c029na
8. Remove 2 screws [1] and then lift the stacker unit [2] to remove it
[4] from the guide rail [3].
[3] Note
Be careful of your posture when removing it so that you
do not suffer backache.
[5]
Note
When reinstalling the stacker unit [2] to the guide rail [3],
check that the hook [4] is securely fit in the installation
hole [5].
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4] [1]
15jkf2c030na
G -108
9.3.11 Paper exit opening unit

(1) Procedure
[2]
Upper cover /1 or PI (option) (Refer to G.9.3.2 Upper cover /1)
Upper cover /2 (Refer to G.9.3.3 Upper cover /2)
2. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the main paper exit
opening cover [2].
[1]
15vlf2c014na
3. Remove the screw [3] of the paper exit opening open/close link [2]
on the paper exit opening unit [1].
[2]
[3]
[1]
15jkf2c031na
[4] [1] [2] 4. Remove 1 camp [1], fixing screw [2] of the earth cord. 2
connectors [3], and 3 screws [4] of the clamp.
[3] 15jkf2c032na
[1] [2] 5. Remove the E-ring [1] and the bearing [2], 1 each on back and
front, and then remove the paper exit opening unit [3].
[2] [1]
[3]
15jkf2c033na

CAUTION
When the FS control board (FNSCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC10).
G -109
control board [2].
[1]
[2]
a04df2e001ca

Note
After replacing the FS control board (FSCB), conduct rewriting
of the firmware.
fd501fs2078c
G -110
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 10. PK-512/513
10. PK-512/513
10.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled and adjusted
10.1.1 Punch unit
(1) Parts not allowed to be removed
Never loosen the following screws.
[1]
[2]
15kjf2c001na
[1] Punch unit [2] Screw not allowed to be removed
(2) Reason
The specified performance cannot be retained if the screw is loosened.
10.2 Disassembly/reassembly parts list

No. Section Part name
1 Punch unit Punch unit
10.3 Disassembly/reassembly procedure

CAUTION
10.3.2 Punch unit

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the punch scraps box [1].
[1]
15kjf2c002na
2. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the punch drive board
[1]
cover [1].
[2]
15kjf2c003na
G -111
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 10. PK-512/513
[3] [4] 3. Remove the 2 clamps [1].

4. Disconnect 2 connectors [3] and the relay connector [4] from the
punch drive board (PDB) [2].
[1]
[2]
15kjf2c004nb
[1]
5. Remove 3 screws [2], and then remove the punch unit cover [1].
[2]
15kjf2c005na

[3] [2]
7. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the punch unit [3] from FS.
[1]
[1] [2]
15kjf2c006na
8. Reinstall the above parts by following the removal steps in reverse.

Note
[1] When reinstalling the punch drive board (PDB), attach the
board supports of the punch drive board (PDB) at 4
positions [1] in the figure.
15kjf2c007na
G -112
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 11. PI-502
11. PI-502
1 Cover Upper cover
2 Rear cover
3 Operation panel cover

CAUTION
11.2.2 Upper cover

(1) Procedure
[3] 1. Remove the cap [2] of the upper cover [1].
[2] 2. Remove 4 screws [3] and then remove upper cover [1].
[1]
15jff2c009na
11.2.3 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
[3] 1. Remove the upper cover. (Refer to G.11.2.2 Upper cover)
2. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the connector cover [2].
[4] 3. Remove 3 screws [3] and then remove the rear cover [4].
[1]
[2]
[3]
15jff2c010na
11.2.4 Operation panel cover

(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove the upper cover. (Refer to G.11.2.2 Upper cover)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and the relay connector [2], and then remove
the operation panel assy [3].
[3] 15jff2c011na
G -113
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 11. PI-502
11.2.5 PI unit
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the screw [1] and remove the connector cover [2].
[2] [1]
2. Remove the connector [1] and remove the spring [2].

[1] [2]
3. Open the front door of FS and remove the 2 screws [1].

[1]
4. Move the PI unit [1] in the arrow-marked direction, release 2 locks

[2] [2] of the positioning screw, and remove the PI unit [1].
reverse.
[1]
G -114
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 12. LS-505
12. LS-505
1 Cover Cover
2 Conveyance section Stacker tray up/down wire

CAUTION
12.2.2 Cover
(1) Procedure
[1] [1] 1. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the rear cover /Up [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[3]
[6]
[5]
[5]
ls502fs2034c
G -115
[1] [1] 4. Remove 5 screws [1] and move the front cover /Up [2] to the upper
side.
5. Disconnect the connector [3] and remove the front cover /Up [2].
[2]
[1] [1]
[3]
ls502fs2035c
[3] 6. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and then remove 3 knobs [2].
8. Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the front cover /Lw [5].
[5]
[4]
[4]
[1]
[2]
ls502fs2036c
[2] 9. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove upper cover [2].
[1]
[1]
ls502fs2037c
G -116

11. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the front door [1].
[1]
[2]
ls502fs2038c
12.2.3 Replacing the stacker tray up/down wire

Note
When conducting this operation, be sure to set the stacker tray at the home position (the upper most position) in advance.
(1) Procedure
[3] [1] [4] 1. Remove the rear covers /Up and /Lw. (Refer to G.12.2.2 Cover)
3. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the sensor mounting plate [3].
4. Remove 4 screws [4] and remove the stacker tray up down motor
(M1) [5].
[2] [5] ls502fs2001c
5. Check point when reinstalling the stacker tray up down motor (M1)
[5] Note
When reinstalling the stacker tray up down motor (M1), be
sure to check that the belt [2] has been engaged with the
gear [1], and then engage it with the gear [3] before
[4] fastening the stacker tray up down motor (M1) [4].
When the belt [2] is not horizontally attached between the
gear [1] and the gear [3], make adjustments by rotating the
encoder [5] counterclockwise.
[1] [3]
[2] ls502fs2002c
G -117
6. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the motor mounting plate [3]
[2] from the stacker tray up down motor (M1) [2].
[3]
[1]
ls502fs2003c
[2] [1] [1] [2] 7. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and remove the pulley covers [2],
1 each.
ls501f2c001a
8. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and remove the pulley covers [2],
1 each.
[2] [1] [1] [2] ls501f2c002a
G -118
[4] [3] 9. Remove the screw [1] and remove the wire retaining bracket [2].
10. Remove 4 screws [3] and remove the pulley assy [4].
11. Remove the hexagon socket screw [6] and remove the tip [7] of
the wire /1 [5].
[1] Note
On the paper exit side, loosen 4 screws [3], bring down
the pulley assy [4] and release the tension of the wire /2
[5] before starting the operation.
When reinstalling it, the positions of the pulley assy on
[2] the paper feed side and the paper exit side become
important. Be sure to check the marked position in
[5] advance of the pulley assy on the paper exit side.
[7]
[6]
ls501f2c003a
[1] [2] [4] 12. Release the winding of the wire /1 [2] from the pulley [1].
13. Remove the E-ring [3] and then remove the pulley [1] from the
shaft [4].
[3] ls502fs2027c
14. Remove the wire retaining bracket [2] from the wire /1 [1].
[1] Note
When installing the wire retaining bracket [2], install it to
the wire /1 [1] so that the bracket comes to the rear side.
[2]
ls501f2c004a
[1] [2] 15. Remove the wire /1 [2] from the pulley [1].
16. Reinstall a new wire /1 following the preceding steps 6 to 12 in
reverse.
ls502fs2028c
G -119
[2] 17. Check point 1 when reinstalling the wire

Note
When 2 wires at both sides are removed at the same time,
the stacker tray comes down. So, be sure to replace the
wires one at a time (The remaining wire holds the stacker
tray in place.)
When attaching the pulley to the shaft, be sure to align the
groove [1] of the pulley with the pin [2] that has been
inserted into the shaft.
Be sure to set up it with the bead set portion [3].
[1] [3] ls502fs2029c
[1] [2] 18. Check point 2 when reinstalling the wire

Note
When winding the wire around the pulley, be sure to wind
it 8 turns [3] so that the direction of drawing-out [1] comes
to the rear panel side [2].
The direction of drawing-out of the wire /1 is symmetrical
to that of the wire /2.
[3] ls502fs2030c
19. Check point 3 when reinstalling the wire

Note
When fixing the pulley assy [1] on the paper exit side, be
sure to fix it at the same position as it was removed from.
20. Replace the wire /2 with a new one following the preceding steps 6
to 13.
21. Reinstall other parts following the steps 1 to 6 in reverse.
[1] ls501f2c005a
12.2.4 Caution when setting models using toggle SW

CAUTION
When using C6501/C6501P/C65hc/1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, be sure to set the toggle switch on the
connector connection of the left side of the LS to SYS2 [1].
[1]
G -120
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 13. FD-503
13. FD-503
CAUTION
13.1.2 Folding/conveyance switching position adjustment section

Note
Be sure to avoid removing or loosening the screws [1], [2], and [3] of the folding/conveyance switching position adjustment
section provided on the front of the folding conveyance unit. The adjustment scale marked on the folding conveyance frame are
used in the factory.
[1] [3]
[2]
fd501fs2079c

1 Cover section Upper cover /Fr + PI cover /Fr
2 Upper cover /Rr + PI cover /Rr
3 Upper door
4 Rear cover
5 Left cover /Fr
6 Left cover /Rr
7 Paper exit stopper cover
8 Right cover
9 Left cover /Up
10 Mount cover
11 Front door
12 Folding conveyance section 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53)
13 3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54)
14 3rd folding roller
15 Folding conveyance section
16 Main tray section Main tray up/down wire
17 PI section Way to distinguish between new and old types of the multi feed detection board /1, /
2
18 Multi feed detection board /1, /2 (new type)
19 Multi feed detection board /1, /2 (old type)
G -121

13.3.1 Upper cover /Fr + PI cover /Fr
(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Open the upper door [1] and the front door [2].
2. Remove 3 screws [3], pull out the PI cover /Fr [5] to the front side
while raising it together with the upper cover /Fr [4].
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3] fd501fs2029c
[1] 3. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the PI cover /Fr [3]
together with the upper cover /Fr [2].
[3]
[2]
fd501fs2030c
13.3.2 Upper cover /Rr + PI cover /Rr

(1) Procedure
1. Open the upper door [1].
[1]
2. Remove 3 screws [2] and pull out the PI cover /Rr [4] to the rear
side while raising it together with the upper cover /Rr [3].
[4]
[3]
[2]
fd501fs2031c
G -122
13.3.3 Upper door

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the upper cover /Fr, the PI cover /Fr, the upper cover /Rr
and the PI cover /Rr.
[5] 2. Close the upper door [1].
3. Remove the E-ring [2] and then remove the bearing [4] of the
upper door open/close shaft [3].
4. With the bearing [5] shifted to the front side, remove the upper
door [1].
[4]
[2]
[3]
fd501fs2032c
13.3.4 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
[1]
[2]
fd501fs2033c
13.3.5 Left cover /Fr

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the left cover /Fr [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2034c
G -123
13.3.6 Left cover /Rr

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 5 screws [1] and then remove the left cover /Rr [2].
[1]
[2]
[1] fd501fs2035c
13.3.7 Paper exit stopper cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the paper exit stopper
[2]
cover [2].
[1]
fd501fs2036c
13.3.8 Right cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the right cover [2].
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2037c
G -124
13.3.9 Left cover /Up

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the upper cover /Fr, the PI cover /Fr, the upper cover /Rr
and the PI cover /Rr.
2. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the left cover /Up [2].
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2038c
13.3.10 Mount cover

(1) Procedure
2. Remove 3 screws [2] of the handle and then remove the handle.
3. Remove 4 screws [3] and then remove the mount cover [4].
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
fd501fs2039c
13.3.11 Front door

Note
When removing the front door, be sure to support it so that it does not fall down.
G -125
(1) Procedure
3. Remove the mount cover [3].
[2] 4. Remove 3 screws [4] while pushing up the front door so that it
does not fall down, and then remove the support plate [5].
5. Remove the front door [1].
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
fd501fs2040c
13.3.12 Cleaning the 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53)

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the front door and pull out the folding unit. (Refer to G.
13.3.11 Front door)
[1]
2. Open the guide plates [1] and [2].
3. Clean the 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53) [3].
[2]
[3]
fd501fs2041c
G -126
13.3.13 Cleaning the 3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54)

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the front door and pull out the folding unit. (Refer to G.
[1] 13.3.11 Front door)
2. Remove the screw [1] and turn over the sensor mounting plate [2].
[2]
fd501fs2042c
3. Clean the 3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54) [1].
[1]
fd501fs2043c
13.3.14 Cleaning the 3rd folding roller

(1) Procedure
1. Open the front door and pull out the folding unit. (Refer to G.
[2] [1]
13.3.11 Front door)
2. Remove the stand cover. (Refer to G.13.3.10 Mount cover)
3. The 2 springs [2] are hooked to the shaft [1]. Remove them from
the shaft [1].
4. Remove the screw [3] and then remove 2 springs [2], the support
[5] plate [4] and the guide plate [5].
[4]
[3]
fd501fs2044c
G -127
[1] 5. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the guide plate [2].
[2]
fd501fs2045c
6. Clean the 3rd folding roller [1].
[1]
fd501fs2046c
13.3.15 Folding conveyance section

CAUTION
The folding conveyance section is heavy. Be sure to conduct this operation with 2 people.
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the front door and the rear cover.
2. Disconnect 3 connectors [1] and then remove the wiring harnesses
from the 7 wiring harness guides [3] of the coupling arm /Rr [2].
[2]
[1]
[3]
fd501fs2047c
[1] 3. Remove 2 C-clips [1].

4. Remove the shaft [2] and separate the coupling arm /Fr [3] and the
[3] coupling arm /Rr [4].
[4] [2]
fd501fs2048c
G -128
[1] 5. Remove the stopper screws [1], 1 each, from the left and right rails
and pull further out the folding conveyance section.
[1] fd501fs2049c
[1] 6. Remove screws [1], 3 each, from the left and right rails.
[1]
fd501fs2050c
G -129
7. Hold the folding conveyance section [3] at the specified places [1]
and [2] and remove it while lifting it up.
[3] CAUTION
Be careful of your posture when removing it. Be sure to
conduct this operation with 2 people so that you do not
suffer backache.
Note
[1] When lifting up the folding conveyance section, be sure to
hold the shaft at the places [1] and [2]. Holding it at other
places such as the roller shaft or the guide plate may
cause deformation to these places.
[2]
fd501fs2051c
8. Stand the folding conveyance section [1] upright when it has been
[1] removed, or lay it down on the right-side [2].
Note
Be careful not to lay it with the left side [3] down. The
[2] guide plate may get deformed.
[3]
fd501fs2052c
[2] 9. Check point when reinstalling the folding conveyance section

Note
When installing the folding conveyance section, make
sure that all 4 hooks [1] of the rails have engaged the
attaching holes [2] of the folding conveyance section.
The top should be attached by pushing it to the right to
[1] engage the upper rail and the bottom pushed to the left to
engage the lower rail.
[1]
[2] fd501fs2053c
G -130
Note
When installing the folding conveyance section, pull out
the rail further than the length of the stopper [1]. Use the
[2]
stopper screw [2] to fasten it tentatively at its fully pulled-
out position and fix the rail on the opposite side with tape
[1] [3]. It prevents the rail from moving to inside for an easy
and smooth operation.
[3] fd501fs2054c
13.3.16 Main tray up/down wire

(1) Procedure
1. Check point when removing/reinstalling the main tray up/down
wire.
[1] Note
The following procedure for replacing the up/down wire
shows the examples on the rear side. The figuration and
the winding of wires on the front side are symmetrical to
those on the rear side.
There are 2 types of up/down wires provided, one [1] on
the front side and the other [3] on the rear side. Be sure to
[2] use the wire with the correct wire mounting plate direction
when installing it. The direction of the wire mounting plate
distinguished between these 2 wires when the shorter
wire [2] is placed under the longer wire.

Left cover /Fr (Refer to G.13.3.5 Left cover /Fr)
Left cover /Rr (Refer to G.13.3.6 Left cover /Rr)
[3]
[2]
fd501fs2056c
G -131
3. Remove 2 connectors [1] and 5 screws [2], and then remove the
gear box [4] together with the up down motor (M11) [3].
[3] CAUTION
When the gear box is removed, the up/down stay may fall
down. So, when removing the gear box, be sure to
[1] support the stay with your hands.
[4]
[2]
fd501fs2057c
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the wire mounting plate [3]
[2] of the up/down wire /Rr [2] from the up/down stay [4].
[4]
[3]
[1]
fd501fs2058c
G -132
[5] 5. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the gear [3] together with
[5] the 2 bearings [2].
6. Remove the E-ring [4] and then remove the gear [6] together with
[4] the 2 bearings [5].
[9].
Note
[6] When removing the gear [8], be careful not to drop the pin
[9].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[7] [9]
[8]
fd501fs2059c
[1]
[2]
fd501fs2060c
G -133
9. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the up/down pulley /RrLw
[2] and the pin [3].
Note
When removing the up/down pulley /RrLw [2], be careful
not to drop the pin [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2061c
10. Temporarily tighten the wire mounting plate [2] of a new up/down
wire /Rr [1] to the up/down stay [3] with 2 screws [4].
Note
Install the up/down wires placing the shorter wire below
the longer one with the wire supporting part of the
mounting plate outside.
[1]
There are 2 types of up/down wires, one for the front side
[4]
and the other for the rear side, but these 2 wires are
[2] different in the direction of the wire mounting plates. Be
sure to use a wire that fits in with the direction of a wire
[3] mounting plate.
fd501fs2062c
11. Fasten the new up/down wire /Rr [1] with the wire end [3] provided
on the inside of the up/down pulley /RrLw [2] and insert it into the
shaft [6]. Rotate the up/down pulley /RrLw [2] and wind it 5.5 turns
clockwise from inside to outside around the up/down pulley with no
slack, and then insert the up/down pulley /RrLw [2] fully onto the
[1] shaft so that it coincides with the pin [4] and fasten it with the E-
[2]
ring [5]. If the angle does not coincide with the pin [4], move up
and down the front side of the up/down tray to change the angle of
the shaft [6].
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
fd501fs2063c
G -134
12. Hook up the up/down wire /Rr [1] onto the up/down pulley /RrUp
[3] through the relay pulley /Rr [2].
[3] [1]
[2]
fd501fs2064c
13. Wind the up/down wire /Rr [1] 2 turns counterclockwise from inside
to outside around the up/down pulley /RrLw [2] with no slack and
fasten it with the wire end [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
fd501fs2065c
14. The route along which the up/down wire /Rr passes
The route along which the up/down wire /Rr passes is, on the
whole, as shown in the drawing left.
fd501fs2066c
G -135
15. Use a tension gauge or spring balance to pull up the wire tensioner
[1] upward with a designated force "A," and fasten it with the 3
screws [2].
Specified value: A = 2.5kg 0.25kg
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2067c
16. Reinstall the 3 gears [1] following the removal steps in reverse.
[1]
fd501fs2068c
17. With the up/down stay [1] held in a horizontal position, tighten the
[4]
2 screws [3] of the wire mounting plate [2].
[1] Note
Move the up/down stay up and down and check to see if it
moves smoothly. If it does not move smoothly, adjust it
[5] again so that it becomes horizontal.
Check the up/down wire [4] if it gets behind the actuator
plate [5]. If it gets behind the douser, an unnecessary load
[3] [2] is applied to the up/down wire [4] when the up/down stay
[1] goes up.
fd501fs2069c
13.3.17 Way to distinguish between new and old types of the multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2)
Note
Both of the multi feed detection boards /1 (MFDB/2) and /2 (MFDB/2) have new type [1] and old type [2].
Each of the new and old types of the multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2) has different mounting metal frames
and PI drive boards (PIDB) that correspond to each detection board, and are incompatible.
G -136
[1]
[2]
13.3.18 Multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2) (new type)
Note
When the multi feed detection board is replaced, be sure to conduct the adjustment in replacing multi feed detection board (PI).
(Refer to I.5.7.5 Adjustment when replacing the multi feed detection board (PI) (new type) )
(1) Procedure
1. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the multi feed detection
board /1 (MFDB/1) cover [2].
[2] [1] fd501fs2070c

board /1 (MFDB/1) [3].
[3] [2] [1]
G -137
4. Open the front door and then open the conveyance guide plate /2
[1] in the upper right direction.
[1] fd501fs2072c

6. Remove the wiring harness of the multi feed detection board /1
(MFDB/1) from the wiring harness guide [2].
[2]
[2] 7. Turn around the conveyance guide plate /2 assy [1] inside the
machine and pull it to the outside.
board /2 cover [3].
Note
When turning it around, or when disassembling or
reassembling it, be careful not to damage the wiring
harness.
[1] [3] fd501fs2074c

[3] [2] [1]
G -138
(2) Note for installing the multi feed detection boards /1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2)
Multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB/1) [1] and /2 (MFDB/2) [2] are
[2] different in shape. When reinstalling them, be sure to set at the
proper positions.
[1]
13.3.19 Multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2) (old type)
Note
When replacing the multi-feed detection board /1 (MFDB/1), be sure to replace the multi-feed detection board /2 (MFDB/2) at the
same time.
When the multi-feed detection board is replaced, be sure to conduct the adjustment in replacing multi-feed detection board (PI).
(Refer to I.5.7.6 Adjustment when replacing the multi feed detection board (PI) (old type) )
(1) Procedure
1. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the multi-feed detection
board /1 (MFDB/1) cover [2].
[2] [1] fd501fs2070c

[1]
[3] [2] fd501fs2071c
4. Open the front door and then open the conveyance guide plate /2
[1] in the upper right direction.
[1] fd501fs2072c
G -139

6. Remove the wiring harness of the multi-feed detection board /1
(MFDB/1) from the wiring harness guide [2].
[2] fd501fs2073c
[2] 7. Turn around the conveyance guide plate /2 assy [1] inside the
machine and pull it to the outside.
board /2 cover [3].
Note
When turning it around, or when disassembling or
reassembling it, be careful not to damage the wiring
harness.
[1] [3] fd501fs2074c

[3] [2] [1] a0h0t3c007ca
(2) Note for installing the multi-feed detection boards /1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2)
[2] The multi-feed detection boards /1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2) are
installed on the same type board. Be careful not to confuse one
with the other when installing them.
Be sure to confirm the marking on the board when installing it.
Multi-feed detection board /1 (MFDB/1) [1]: 15AG
Multi-feed detection board /2 (MFDB/2) [2]: 56UA
The connector shape is different for the multi-feed detection
boards /1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2). So, even if it is installed, the
connector cannot be connected.
[1] fd501fs2076c

Note
When the FD control board (FDCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC68).
G -140
control board [2].
Note
Be sure to set the SW3 [3] same as the old FDCB. (Refer to
L.2.12.1 FD control board (FDCB) )
[1]
[2] [3]
fd501fs2077c

Note
After replacing the FD control board (FDCB), conduct rewriting
of the firmware.
(Refer to J. Rewriting of firmware )
fd501fs2078c
G -141
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 14. SD-506
14. SD-506
14.1.1 Trimmer blade home sensor (PS50), Trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51)
1 fixing screw of the mounting plate on each trimmer blade home sensor (PS50) and trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51)
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
a0h2t3c061ca
[1] Screw not allowed to be adjusted/removed [2] Mounting plate

[3] Trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51) [4] Screw not allowed to be adjusted/removed
[5] Mounting plate [6] Trimmer blade home sensor (PS50)

The trimmer blade home sensor (PS50) detects the home position of the trimmer blade. Once the home position is out of alignment, the
trimmer blade gets out from the trimmer press plate. It prevents paper from entering to the trimmer section and causes the trimming error
or damages the trimmer blade retaining plate. Therefore, be sure not to change the installation position of PS50.
The trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51) detects the upper limit of the trimmer blade after the completion of the trimming. Once the
upper limit detection is out of alignment, the paper fails to be trimmed because the trimmer blade stops before the completion or the
trimmer blade and the trimmer board get damaged because the trimmer blade cuts in the trimmer board deeply. Therefore, be sure not to
change the installation position of PS51.
14.1.2 Trimmer completion sensor (PS62)

1 fixing screw of the trimmer completion sensor (PS62) mounting plate
[3] [2] [1]
a0h2t3c062ca
[1] Mounting plate [2] Screw not allowed to be adjusted/removed

[3] Trimmer completion sensor (PS62) -

The trimmer completion sensor (PS62) detects the completion of the trimming. Once the trimmer completion timing is out of alignment, the
paper fails to be trimmed or the trimmer blade and the trimmer board get damaged because the trimmer blade cuts in the trimmer board
deeply. Therefore, be sure not to change the installation position of PS50.
14.1.3 Wire slack prevention sensor (PS66)

1 fixing screw of the wire slack prevention sensor (PS66) mounting plate
G -142
(a) Previous trimmer unit
[3] [2] [1]

a0h2t3c063ca
[1] Mounting plate [2] Screw not allowed to be adjusted/removed

[3] Wire slack prevention sensor (PS66) -
(b) New trimmer unit
[3] [2] [1]
[1] Wire slack prevention sensor (PS66) [2] Mounting plate

[3] Screw not allowed to be adjusted/removed -

The wire slack prevention sensor (PS66) detects the slack of the winding wire on the trimmer blade. Once the detection position is out of
alignment, the wire is removed from the winding pulley and damages the trimmer unit. Therefore, be sure not to change the installation
position of PS66.
14.1.4 Trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52), Trimmer press home sensor (PS53)
1 fixing screw of the trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52) mounting plate
1 fixing screw of the trimmer press home sensor (PS53) actuator
[4] [5] [6]
[3] [2] [1] a0h2t3c064ca
[1] Screw not allowed to be adjusted/removed [2] Actuator

[3] Trimmer press home sensor (PS53) [4] Trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52)
G -143
[5] Screw not allowed to be adjusted/removed [6] Mounting plate

The trimmer press home sensor (PS53) detects the home position of the trimmer press plate. Once the home position is out of alignment,
the opening is not opened enough for the paper. It causes the trimming error by preventing paper from entering to the trimming section.
Therefore, be sure not to change the position of the actuator of PS53.
The trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52) detects the upper limit of the trimmer press. Once the upper limit position is out of alignment,
the opening is not opened enough for the paper. It causes the trimming error by preventing paper from entering to the trimming section, or
the opening is not enough for replacing the trimmer blade. Therefore, be sure not to change the installation position of PS52.
14.1.5 Trimmer press brake

1 gap adjusting screw of the trimmer press brake
[2] [1] a0h2t3c065ca
[1] Trimmer press brake [2] Screw not allowed to be adjusted/removed

The trimmer press brake pushes the timing belt and prevents the trimmer press motor (M32) from rotating too much which caused by the
inertia of the trimmer press board. Once the gap between the trimmer press brake and the timing belt changes, it damages the timing belt
or disables the brake. Therefore, be sure not to adjust the gap adjusting screw of the trimmer press brake.
14.1.6 Fixing screw of the trimmer press timing belt

All screws which fix the driving system of the trimmer press
[1] [2]
a0h2t3c066ca
[1] Screws not allowed to be adjusted/removed (all screws [2] Screws allowed to be removed
shown in the picture)

The paper holding screw on right and left drives the trimmer press plate through the timing belt. Once the part such as gear of the driving
system is removed, the parallelism of the trimmer press plate is not guaranteed because of the belt tooth skipping. Therefore, be sure not
to remove the attaching screw of the cover which fixes the driving system and the bearing fixing screw.

1 Cover Rear cover /Lt
2 Rear cover /Rt
3 Left cover
4 Upper cover /Fr
G -144
5 Upper cover /Rr3

6 Sub tray cover
7 Front door /Lt
8 Front door /Rt
9 Folding section Folding unit

CAUTION
14.3.2 Rear cover /Lt

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove 8 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover /Lt [2].
[1] [2] 15anf2c002na
14.3.3 Rear cover /Rt

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove 8 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover /Rt [2].
[2] [1] 15anf2c003na
G -145
14.3.4 Left cover

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove 7 screws [1], slide the bottom of the left cover [2] to the
outside, and remove it to the bottom.
[2] [1] 15anf2c004na
14.3.5 Upper cover /Fr

(1) Procedure
[3] [2] 1. Open the front doors /Rt and /Lt.
2. Remove the 5 screws [1] on the front, 2 screws [2], 1 screw [3] on
the left, and 3 screws [4] under the cover.
3. Loosen a screw [5].
4. Lift up and remove the upper cover /Fr [6].
Note
[1] When removing the upper cover /Fr [6], pull the screw [5]
to the front to so that the tip of the screw does not catch
the upper cover /Fr [6].
[6]
[4] [5] 15anf2c005nb
G -146
14.3.6 Upper cover /Rr3

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove the rear cover /Lt. (Refer to G.14.3.2 Rear cover /Lt)
2. Remove 2 screw caps [1] and then remove 2 screws [2].
4. Loosen the screw [4] and then remove the upper cover /Rr3 [5].
Note
When removing the upper cover /Rr3 [5], pull the screw [4]
to the front so that the tip of the screw does not catch the
upper cover /Rr3 [5].
[5]
[3] [3] [3]
[4] 15anf2c006na
14.3.7 Sub tray cover

(1) Procedure
[2] [3] [2] 1. Remove the upper cover /Fr. (Refer to G.14.3.5 Upper cover /Fr)
2. Remove the upper cover /Rr3. (Refer to G.14.3.6 Upper cover /
Rr3)
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and 4 screws [2], and then remove the sub
tray cover [3].
Note
When reinstalling the sub tray cover [3], pull the screw [4]
to the outside.
[3] [1] [4] [1]
15anf2c007na
G -147
14.3.8 Front door /Lt

(1) Procedure
1. Open the front door /Lt [1].
[6] [5] [4]
2. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the front door stopper /Lt
[3].
3. Remove 2 screws [4] and remove the fulcrum [6] by sliding the
hinge [5] upward, and then remove the front door /Lt [1].
Note
Support the front door /Lt [1] with your hand so that it
does not fall down when removing the screw [4].
[3] [2]
[1]
15anf2c008na
14.3.9 Front door /Rt

(1) Procedure
[5] [4] [6] 1. Open the front door /Rt [1].
2. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the front door stopper /Rt
[3].
3. Remove 2 screws [4], remove the fulcrum [6] by sliding the hinge
[5] upward, and then remove the front door /Rt [1].
Note
Support the front door /Rt [1] with your hand so that it
does not fall down when removing the screw [4].
[2] [3]
[1] 15anf2c009na
G -148
14.3.10 Folding unit

CAUTION
Be sure to perform this operation with 2 people because the folding unit is heavy.
(1) Procedure
[5] [4] [2] 1. Remove the front door /Rt. (Refer to G.14.3.9 Front door /Rt)
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and 2 clamps [2] from the rear of the folding
unit.
Note
Be sure not to let the clamps [2] fall down.
4. Remove the screw [3] and the ground [4].

6. Remove the clamp and fall drop the wiring harness [7] from the
hole [6] on the wiring harness guide.
[3] [1] [6] [7] [1]
15anf2c010na
7. Pull out the folding unit.

8. Pull out the folding unit. Remove 2 screws [1], separate the notch
[2] from the hole [3] and remove the lower cover /2 [4].
9. Loosen the screw [5], remove the 2 screws [6] and remove the
lower cover /1 [7].
10. Remove 2 screws [8], separate the notch [10] from the shaft [9]
and remove the lower cover /3 [11].
[8] [11] [1] [4] [6] [7]
[2] [9] [10] [3] [5]
15anf2c011na
G -149
11. Check point when reinstalling the lower cover /3.

Note
Install the lower cover /3 [11] between 2 pins [2] of the
shaft [1]. If it is installed at an improper position, other
parts are damaged in storing the folding unit.
[1] [2] 15anf2c071na
[1] 12. Remove 4 screws [1], and then lift up and remove the folding unit
[2] with 2 people.
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to align the positioning pin [3]
with the hole.
[3] [2]
[3]
[1] 15anf2c012na
[7] [6]
[5]
Note
When holding the folding unit, be sure to hold the shafts
[4] at front and rear or the upper top of the side plate [5].
Never hold the jam release lever [6] or the handle [7]. They
get damaged.
When placing the folding unit, place it on the table to
avoid the guide plate [8] on the front being contacted with
the floor because it is projected from the bottom of the
unit.
[8] [4]
15anf2c013na
G -150

Note
When the SD control board (SDCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC68).
1. Remove the EEPROM (IC68) from the old SD control board (SDCB)
[1] and install it into the new SD control board (SDCB) [2].
Note
the same direction.
Be sure to set the SW3 [3] as the same as the settings of
the old SDCB. (Refer to L.2.13.1 SD control board (SDCB) )
After replacing the SD control board (SDCB), conduct
[1]
[2]
A
[3]
a0g6f3c053ca
G -151
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 15. PB-503
15. PB-503
1 Cover Front door
2 Front cover
3 Booklet door
4 Rear cover /Rt
5 Rear cover /Lt
6 Left cover
7 Relay conveyance gear cover /Fr
8 Relay conveyance gear cover /Rr
9 Pellet supply cover
10 SC cover /Fr
11 SC cover /Up
12 Upper cover /FrRt
13 Upper cover /FrLt
14 Upper cover /RrRt
15 Upper cover /RrLt
16 Upper cover /Md
17 Others Deodorant unit
18 Pellet supply section Pellet supply unit
19 Glue tank section Glue tank unit
20 SC section SC unit
21 Clamp section Clamp unit
22 Others PB left unit
23 Book stock section Book lift wire
24 Cart wire
25 Conveyance section Conveyance unit /Lw
26 Relay conveyance section Relay conveyance unit
27 Cover paper supply section Cover paper tray
28 Cover paper lift wire

CAUTION
G -152
15.2.2 Front door

(1) Procedure
[5] [4] [3] [2] 1. Open the front door [1].
2. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the wire [3].
3. Remove 2 screws [4], and then remove the front door [1] from the
lower pin [6] with the mounting bracket [5] attaching to the front
door [1].
Note
When reinstalling the wire [3], tighten the screw at the
position in the picture. (In order to prevent the wire from
contacting with the tab.)
[1]
[6]
a15xt3c018ca
G -153
15.2.3 Front cover

(1) Procedure
2. Lift the lever [1] and pull out the cover paper tray.
4. Release the notches [3] at 2 positions from the screws [4] and pull
out the projection [5] from the hole [6], and then remove the front
cover [7].
[5]
[2] [7]
[3] [4] [1] a15xt3c019ca
G -154
15.2.4 Booklet door

(1) Procedure
[1] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] 1. Open the booklet door [1].
2. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the wire [3].
3. Remove 2 screws [4], and then remove the booklet door [1] from
the lower pin [6] with the mounting bracket [5] attaching to the
booklet door [1].
4. Remove the mounting bracket [5] from the booklet door [1].
[6] a15xt3c020ca
15.2.5 Rear cover /Rt

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove the deodorant unit. (Refer to G.15.2.18 Deodorant unit)
2. Remove 9 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover /Rt [2].
Note
When installing the rear cover, make sure to attach the
metal plates [3] to the bottom of the rear cover.
[3] a15xt3c021ca
G -155
15.2.6 Rear cover /Lt

(1) Procedure
[3] [4] 1. Remove the deodorant unit. (Refer to G.15.2.18 Deodorant unit)
2. Remove 8 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover /Lt [2].
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to set it with the projection [3]
put into the notch of the upper cover /RrLt [4], and with its
bottom [5] put on the metal frame [6].
[1] [2] [1]
[5] [6] a15xt3c022ca
15.2.7 Left cover

(1) Procedure
[2] [3] 1. Loosen 2 screws [1].
[1] a15xt3c023ca
G -156
15.2.8 Relay conveyance gear cover /Fr

(1) Procedure
[2] 1. Open the relay conveyance door.
2. Remove 2 screws[1] and remove the relay conveyance gear
cover /Fr [2].
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to put the claw of the plate in
the hole of the relay conveyance gear cover /Fr.
[1] a15xt3c024ca
15.2.9 Relay conveyance gear cover /Rr

(1) Procedure
[2] 1. Open the relay conveyance door.
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the relay conveyance gear
cover /Rr [2].
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to put it in the hole of the
relay conveyance gear cover /Rr.
[1] a15xt3c025ca
15.2.10 Pellet supply cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the deodorant unit. (Refer to G.15.2.18 Deodorant unit)
RrRt)
3. Remove the relay conveyance gear cover /Rr. (Refer to G.15.2.9
Relay conveyance gear cover /Rr)
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the magnet catch /Rr [2].
[1] [2] a15xt3c026ca
G -157

[4]
7. Open the pellet supply door [3]. Remove the pellet supply cover [5]
in the arrow-marked direction [6] carefully so as not to damage the
wire harness [4].
Note
When removing/installing the glue supply cover, be
careful not to cut or damage the wire binding [4].
[5] [6] [3]
[2]
[1] a15xt3c027ca
15.2.11 SC cover /Fr

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the relay conveyance gear cover /Fr. (Refer to G.15.2.8
[2]
Relay conveyance gear cover /Fr)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the magnet catch /Fr [2].
[1]
a15xt3c028ca
G -158
3. Remove the screw [1] and remove the SC cover /Fr [2] to the
[4] [3]
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to put 2 claws on the upper
side [3] into the holes [4], and put the claw on the lower
side [5] to the inside of the metal frame.
[2]
[1]
[6] [5] a15xt3c029ca
15.2.12 SC cover /Up

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the pellet supply cover. (Refer to G.15.2.19 Pellet supply
[1]
unit)
2. Remove the SC cover /Fr. (Refer to G.15.2.11 SC cover /Fr)
3. Remove 4 screws [1] and remove the SC cover /Up [3] in the
arrow-marked direction [4] while slightly lifting up the circled part
[2].
[3] [4]
[1] [2] a15xt3c030ca
G -159
15.2.13 Upper cover /FrRt

(1) Procedure
[4] [2] [1] 1. Remove the PB left unit. (Refer to G.15.2.23 PB left unit)
2. Open the upper door [1].
4. Pull the left part of the upper cover /FrRt [3] in the arrow-marked
direction [4]. Then release the cover from the projection [5] and
disconnect it from the connector [6].
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to put the connector [6] under
the upper cover /FrRt [3] properly so as not to let the
cables get caught between the cover and the frame.
[3]
[6] [5] a15xt3c031ca
15.2.14 Upper cover /FrLt

(1) Procedure
2. Remove the relay conveyance gear cover /Fr. (Refer to G.15.2.8
Relay conveyance gear cover /Fr)
4. Open the relay conveyance door.
5. Remove the screw [2] and release the wire [3].
6. Remove 7 screws [4] and then remove the upper cover /FrLt [5].
Note
[5] [4] harness [6].
[3] [2] [1] [6] a15xt3c032ca
15.2.15 Upper cover /RrRt

(1) Procedure
2. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the upper cover /RrRt [3].
[2] a15xt3c033ca
G -160
15.2.16 Upper cover /RrLt

(1) Procedure
2. Remove the relay conveyance gear cover /Rr. (Refer to G.15.2.9
[1]
Relay conveyance gear cover /Rr)
4. Remove 7 screws [1] and then remove the upper cover /RrLt [2].
[2]
[1] a15xt3c034ca
15.2.17 Upper cover /Md

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove the PB left unit. (Refer to G.15.2.23 PB left unit)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the upper cover /Md [2].
a15xt3c035ca
15.2.18 Deodorant unit

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the exhaust filter assy [1].
a15xt3c003ca
G -161
[1] [2] 2. Remove 3 screws [1] and lean the deodorant unit [2]. Disconnect
the connector [3] and then remove the deodorant unit [2].
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to put 2 claws [2] in the holes
[5].
[4] [5]
[3] a15xt3c036ca

[3] Note
Connecting the loop connector [1] to the connector [2]
[2] enables the operational check with no error indication
without connecting the deodorant unit. After the
operation, be sure to remove the loop connector [1] and
put it inside [4] of the rear cover /Lt [3].
After installing it, be sure to check that the deodorant
[4] fans /1 (FM97) and /2 (FM98) of the deodorant unit are
rotating.
[1]
a15xt3c037ca
G -162
15.2.19 Pellet supply unit

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the rear cover /Rt. (Refer to G.15.2.5 Rear cover /Rt)
2. Remove the pellet supply cover. (Refer to G.15.2.10 Pellet supply
cover)
[2] a15xt3c045ca
G -163
[2] [3] [1] 5. Loosen 2 screws [1].

6. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the pellet supply unit [3] upward.
Note
When removing the unit, be careful not to spill the pellet.
[2] a15xt3c046ca
15.2.20 Glue tank unit

CAUTION
The glue tank unit is extremely hot right after turning OFF the main power switch (SW1) or the sub power switch (SW2) of the main
body. To prevent burn injuries, leave the unit until it cools enough before performing the maintenance work.
G -164
(1) Procedure
[2]
RrRt)
3. Remove the screw [1], disconnect 2 connectors [2], and then
remove the suction unit [3].
5. Remove the C-clip [5] and pull out the pin [6] straight up to release
the coupling arm [7].
[3]
[1]
[4] [5] [6] [7]

a15xt3c047ca
[2] [1] 6. Remove 2 screws [1] and then uncouple the belt coupling bracket
[2].
a075f2c119ca
G -165
7. Pull out the glue tank unit [1] and remove 4 screws [2].
[2] [2]
Note
When moving the glue tank unit, be sure to hold it by the
metal frame [3] on the right side of the unit.
When removing the screw [2], be careful to avoid injury
from sharp metal edges around the screw.
8. Further pull out the glue tank unit [1].

9. Remove the roller [5] from the rail [4] and remove the glue tank
unit.
Note
After installing the glue tank unit, make a test print and
binding to check that no glue is squeezed out of the top
and bottom edges of the created book and no pages come
off the cover when opening the book.
[4] [5] [1] [3] a15xt3c048ca
[1] Note
Never loosen or tighten the 2 screws because they are
keeping the levelness and vertical position of the glue
tank unit.
a15xt3c049ca
15.2.21 SC unit
(1) Procedure
[2] [3] 1. Remove the PB left unit. (Refer to G.15.2.23 PB left unit)
2. Remove the upper cover /Md. (Refer to G.15.2.17 Upper cover /
Md)
3. Remove the pellet supply unit. (Refer to G.15.2.19 Pellet supply
unit)
4. Remove the SC cover /Up. (Refer to G.15.2.12 SC cover /Up)
5. Remove the upper cover /FrRt. (Refer to G.15.2.13 Upper cover /
FrRt)
6. Disconnect 5 relay connectors [1].
7. Remove the wire binding [3] from the SC unit [2] by releasing the
wire binding from the saddles.
[1] a15xt3c050ca
G -166
[1]
8. Remove 6 screws[1].
9. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the wire [3] and the knob [4].
Then remove the belt [5].
Note
After installing the belt [5], check that the lug belt is
properly engaging with the pulleys with no slack and
turns smoothly when the knob is turned.
10. Hold the metal frames [6] on the rear and front side of the unit, and
remove the SC unit [7] to the arrowed direction.
[6] [7] [6]
[1]
[4]
[5] [3] [2]

a15xt3c051ca
Note
When the SC unit [1] is removed, the lock arm [2] is
released from the stopper [3]. Therefore, when installing
the SC unit, be sure to put the lock arm [2] under the
stopper [3] while lifting and tilting the unit in the direction
of the arrow [4].
[2] [4] [3]
[1]
a075f2c042ca
G -167
15.2.22 Clamp unit

(1) Procedure
[1]
2. Remove the pellet supply unit. (Refer to G.15.2.19 Pellet supply
unit)
4. Remove the E-ring [2] and pull out the pin [3] downward to release
the coupling arm [4].
5. Release the wiring harness [5] between the connector [1] and the
coupling arm [4] from the saddles.
[3] [2]
[4] [5] a15xt3c052ca
G -168
[2] [3] 6. Pull out the clamp unit [1] carefully watching the wire binding and
the coupling arm on the rear of the unit.
7. Remove the 2 screws [2] and then remove the lock bracket [3].
9. While lifting the clamp unit [1] by holding its left and right metal
frames [5], release the 4 notches [6] from the hooks [7] and
remove the clamp unit.
Note
When reinstalling the clamp unit, make sure that the 4
hooks [7] are properly fitted in the notches [6] of the unit.
Note
After installing the clamp unit, make a test print and
[5] [4]
binding to check that the cover and inside papers are
neatly aligned without skewing.
[1]
[6] [7]
a15xt3c053ca
15.2.23 PB left unit

(1) Procedure
[1] 2. Remove the rear cover /Lt. (Refer to G.15.2.6 Rear cover /Lt)
5. Remove 2 screws (with washer) [1].
[1]
a15xt3c054ca
G -169
a15xt3c055ca
a15xt3c056ca
[1] 8. Loosen 4 screws [1].
a15xt3c057ca
G -170
9. Remove the screws [1] at 2 positions, 2 each.

Note
As the screw [1] is longer than other screws, be careful
when reinstalling.
[1]
a15xt3c058ca
[1] 10. Remove the clamps [1] at 4 positions.
[1] a15xt3c059ca
G -171
[2] [7] [1] [6] [3] 11. Rotate the PB left unit [2] around the wiring harness section [1] on
the rear side to remove it from the PB right unit [3].
Note
The PB left unit [2] is rotated up to about 90 degrees.
When rotating the PB left unit [2], be sure to rotate it
around the wiring harness section [1] and be careful not
to damage the wiring harness.
When reinstalling it, put the bottom of the PB left unit [5]
on the brackets [4] on the lower side and then put the pins
[6] on the upper side into the holes [7].
[5] [4] a15xt3c060ca
15.2.24 Book lift wire

(1) Procedure
[3] [1] 1. Carry out the I/O check in service mode in the following order of
output check code, and turn OFF the sub power switch (SW2) and
the main power switch (SW1) after moving the carriage section to
its lowest position.
"77-55", "77-45", "77-58", "77-61"
4. Release the wiring harness [1] from the saddles and remove 2
screws [2] and then remove the wiring harness bracket [3].
[2] a15xt3c066ca
G -172
[3] [2] [3] 5. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the 4 mounting brackets [2] on
the front and rear of the book stock unit.
Note
When reinstalling, route the book lift wires /Fr [3] and /Rr
[1] [1] [4] between 2 screws and 1 screw [1], and secure them
with the mounting brackets [2].
6. Loosen the 2 screws [6] of the tension bracket /Fr [5].

Note
When installing the tension bracket /Fr [5], be sure to
[5] [6]
tighten the screws [6] while pulling the bracket downward
by the specified tension.
Standard value: 5kgf
7. Loosen the 2 screws [8] of the tension bracket /Rr [7].

Note
When installing the tension bracket /Rr [7], be sure to
tighten the screws [8] while pulling the bracket downward
by the specified tension.
Standard value: 5kgf
[4]
[1]
[1]
[8] [7] [2]

a15xt3c038ca
G -173
[11] 8. Remove the E-ring [1], pulley [2], pin [3], and the wire end [4].
Then remove the book lift wire/Fr [5].
[4]
Note
[2] Install the book lift wire/Fr [5] as following. Route the wire
so that it comes out of the lower right [6] of the pulley [2].
Loop the wire over the pulley [7], then loop it over the [8],
[1] [9], [10] pulleys in that order. Then wind the wire 6 times
[5]
counterclockwise [11] over the pulley [2], and put the wire
end [4] into the pulley.
[3]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[5]
[9]
[2]
[8]
[10]
a15xt3c039ca
[5] 9. Remove the E-ring [1], then remove the washers [2] and [3], spring
[4], and gear [5].
[3] 10. Remove the coupling [6] and the pin [7].
[2]
[4]
[1]
[6]
[7]
a15xt3c040ca
G -174
11. Remove the E-ring [1], pulley [2], pin [3], and the wire end [4].
[4] [2] [1] [3] Then remove the book lift wire/Rr [5].
Note
Install the book lift wire/Rr [5] as following. Route the wire
so that it comes out of the lower left [6] of the pulley [2].
[5] Loop the wire over the pulley [7], then loop it over the [8],
[9], [10] pulleys in that order. Then wind the wire 6 times
counterclockwise [11] over the pulley [2], and put the wire
[11] end [4] into the pulley.
[5]
[6]
[9]
[8]
[10]
a15xt3c041ca
15.2.25 Cart wire

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the mounting plate /Rr [2].
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to open the registration
plates /Fr [3] and /Rr [4] fully and then install the mounting
plate /Rr [2].
2. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the mounting plate /Fr [6].
Note
When reinstalling it, temporarily hold the mounting plate /
Fr [6] and hook the tension gauge on the hole [7]. Then
pull it in the arrow-marked direction [8] with the standard
[3] [4] value and then fully tighten it.
Standard value: 1 to 1.5kgf
Check that the wires are not crossed or they do not
contact metal frame.
[8] [7] [5] [6]

a15xt3c061ca
G -175
[1] [2] [4] [3] [6] [5] 3. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the mounting metal fitting /
Rr [2].
4. Remove the wire [3] from the pulley [4] and release it from the
saddles [5].
Note
When installing the wire [3] on the pulley [4], be sure to
hook it on the pulley [6] with the mounting plate /Rr on the
upper side.
5. Remove the screw [7] and remove the mounting metal fitting /Fr
[8].
6. Remove the wire [9] from the pulley [10] and release it from the
saddles [11].
Note
When installing the wire [9] on the pulley [10], be sure to
hook it on the pulley [12] with the mounting plate /Rr on
the upper side.
[10] [7]
[8]
[11] [9]
[12]
a15xt3c062ca
[2] [4] [3] [1] 7. Remove the screw [1] and release the wire.
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to put the edge part [3]
between the projections [4].
a15xt3c063ca
15.2.26 Conveyance unit /Lw

(1) Procedure
[7] [5] [7] 1. Disconnect 3 connectors [1] and release the wire binding from 6
saddles.
2. Remove the screw [2] and slide the coupling [3] into the arrow-
marked direction.
4. Release the conveyance unit /Lw [6] from the hooks [5] and
[4] [4]
remove the unit.
Note
When reinstalling, be sure to align it to the projection [7].

[6] [1]
[2]
[3]
a075f2c063ca
G -176
15.2.27 Relay conveyance unit

(1) Procedure
[3] [1] [2]
2. Remove the upper cover /FrLt. (Refer to G.15.2.14 Upper cover /
FrLt)
3. Remove the upper cover /RrLt. (Refer to G.15.2.16 Upper cover /
RrLt)
5. Remove the E-rings [1] at 2 positions and remove the spacer [2],
and then release the arm [3].
Note
When releasing the arm [3], the conveyance guide plate
[4] falls. Hold it by hand during operation.
[4]
6. Put down the conveyance guide plate [4].

[5] a15xt3c064ca
9. Remove the relay conveyance unit [3] by holding 2 shafts [2].
Note
When removing the relay conveyance unit [3], insert a thin
driver into the hole [5] so that the relay conveyance door
[6] [4] does not close. When moving down the relay
conveyance door [4] lower than the horizontal position,
the gear [6] comes off from the dumper gear [7] and the
[7] dumper adjustment is misaligned.
[5] [4] [2] [1]
[1] [3]
[2] a15xt3c065ca
G -177
15.2.28 Cover paper tray

CAUTION
As the cover paper tray is heavy, be sure to perform the following work with 2 people.
Note
When lifting the cover paper tray, be sure to hold it by the specified positions. Holding it at positions other than those positions
specified damage the tray, thus resulting in a paper feed jam.
(1) Procedure
2. Unlock the cover paper tray [3] by slightly pushing up the cover
paper tray lock lever [2] with a screwdriver or a similar tool, and
pull out the cover paper tray [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
a15xt3c042ca
3. Remove the 2 stopper screws [2], 1 for each right and left rail [1]
and further pull out the cover paper tray.
[2] [1]
a075f2c065ca
G -178
4. Remove 4 screws [1], 2 for each left and right rail, hold the cover
paper tray [2] by the specified positions [5], and remove it straight
up.
Note
When installing the cover paper tray, make sure that the 4
knobs [3] on the rails are properly fitted in the notches [4]
of the cover paper tray.
When lifting the cover paper tray, be sure to hold the
specified positions [5] by 2 people. Do not hold the part
indicated with [6] as the part can easily become deformed,
which adversely affects paper feed resulting in a paper
jam.
[5] [1] [6] [2]
[2] [1] [5]

[3] [4]
a075f2c066ca
G -179
15.2.29 Cover paper lift wire

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the cover paper tray. (Refer to G.15.2.28 Cover paper
[2] tray)
3. Disconnect the connector [2], and remove the cover paper tray
front cover [3].
[1] [1] [3]
a075f2c067ca
[5] [3] [2] [1] 4. Remove the E-ring [1], and remove the knob [2] and the belt [3].
5. Remove 6 screws[4] and remove the gear cover [5].
[4]
a075f2c068ca
[1] 6. Remove the E-ring [1].
a075f2c069ca
G -180
[3] [2] 7. Slide the pulley [1], and pull out the wire ends of the lift wire /Fr1
[2] and /Fr2 [3] from each hole of the shaft [4].
Note
The wire end of the shorter wire, lift wire /Fr2 [3], must be
inserted into the shaft hole near the frame of the cover
paper tray. The wire end of the shorter wire, lift wire/Fr2
[1]
[3], must be inserted into the shaft hole near the frame of
the cover paper tray.
When installing the pulley, lift the cover paper lift plate
slightly to give slack to the wires and insert the wire ends
one by one into the shaft holes. Then secure them with
the pulley [1].
[4]
a075f2c070ca
8. Remove the E-rings [1], 1 each, and then remove the wire cover
[2] [2].
9. Remove the cover paper lift wires/Fr1 [4] and /Fr2 [5] from each
pulley [3].
[4] Note
When installing the wires, make sure that the wires are
[1]
properly routed inside the wire covers [2] and are not
[5]
[3] crossed each other.
[4] [5]
a075f2c071ca
10. Pull out each wire end [2] through each hole of the cover paper lift
plate arm [1].
Note
When pulling out the wire, pull it out carefully so as not to
damage it with sharp metal edges.
[2]
[1]
a075f2c072ca
G -181
11. Remove 6 screws[1] and remove the gear cover [2].
[1]
[1] [2]
[1]
[2]
a075f2c073ca
[3] [2] 12. Remove the E-ring [1] and the gear [2].
Note
When removing the gear [2], be careful not to drop and
lose the bearing [3].
[1] a075f2c074ca
[3] [4] 13. Remove the bearing [1] and the E-ring [2], and then remove the
gear [3].
Note
When removing the gear [3], be careful not to drop the
pin[4].
[1] [2] a075f2c075ca
[1] 14. Remove the E-ring [1] and the gear [2].
Note
When removing the gear [2], be careful not to drop the
bearing [3].
[3] [2] a075f2c076ca
G -182
[1] [3] 15. Remove the E-ring [1] and the gear [2].
Note
When removing the gear [2], be careful not to drop and
lose the pin [3].
[2] a075f2c077ca
[1] [2] [3] 16. Remove the E-ring [1].

17. Pull out the cover paper lift wire/Rr1 [2] and /Rr2 [3] from the shaft
holes in the same manner as step7.
a075f2c078ca
[2] [1] 18. Remove the cover paper lift wire/Rr1 [1] and /Rr2 [2] in the same
manner as step8 to step10.
Note
When pulling out the wire end [3] of the cover paper lift
wire /Rr2 [2], lift the cover paper lift plate until the cover
paper lift plate arm [4] appears.
The wire /Fr is gray in color and the wire /Rr is black.
When the installation is completed, make sure that the lift
plate is horizontal.
[3] [4]
a075f2c079ca
15.2.30 Binding mode procedure with manual operating function

When a problem occurs at the clamp section or the cover paper table section, the binding can be checked with the manual operation.
Note
Disconnect the connector (CN5) on the PB control board (PBCB) after the check. (Manual operation forbidden state)
G -183
(1) Procedure
2. Connect the connector [2] to the connector (CN5) [1] on the PB
control board (PBCB).
[2] [1] a15xt3c043ca
3. Press the button /1 [1].

[1] [2] [3] 4. Open the front door and pull out the clamp unit.
5. Set the inside paper to the clamp unit.
6. Adjust the clamp alignment plates /Fr and /Rr to the inside paper
edge on the shorter side by hand.
8. Set the clamp unit.
Note
Set the clamp unit gently. Setting it roundly causes the
misalignment of inside papers widening the clamp
alignment plate.
9. Close the front door.

Note
Disconnect the connector (CN5) on the PB control board
(PBCB) after the check.
a15xt3c044ca
15.2.31 Multi feed detection boards /S (MFDBS) and /R (MFDBR)

Note
When replacing the multi-feed detection board /S (MFDBS), be sure to replace the multi-feed detection board /R (MFDBR) at the
same time.
When the multi-feed detection board is replaced, be sure to conduct the adjustment in replacing multi-feed detection board. (Refer
to I.5.7.7 Adjustment when replacing the cover paper multi feed detection board (PB) )
G -184
(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the conveyance unit /Lw [1]. (Refer to G.15.2.26
Conveyance unit /Lw)
2. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the cover of the multi-feed
detection board /S (MFDBS) [3].
[2]
[3] a075f2c095ca

[1] [2]
4. Remove 2 screws [2], then remove the multi-feed detection board /
S (MFDBS) [3].
[3]
a075f2c096ca
5. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the cover of the multi-feed
detection board /R (MFDBR) [2].
[1]
[2] a075f2c097ca
G -185

[1] [2]
board /R (MFDBR) [3].
[3]
a075f2c098ca
(2) Note for installing the multi-feed detection boards /S (MFDBS) and /R (MFDBR)
The multi-feed detection boards /S (MFDBS) and /R (MFDBR) are
[2]
installed on the same type board. Be careful not to confuse one
with the other when installing them.
Be sure to confirm the marking on the board when installing it.
Multi-feed detection board /S (MFDBS) [1]: 56UA
Multi-feed detection board /R (MFDBR) [2]: 15AG
The connector shape is different for the multi-feed detection
boards /S (MFDBS) and /R (MFDBR). So, even if it is installed, the
connector cannot be connected.
[1] a075f2c099ca
G -186
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 16. IC-601
16. IC-601
No. Parts name
1 Box cover
2 SSD/HDD unit
3 HDD cooling fan (FM3)
4 DIMM (DIMM)
5 Video interface board (VIB)
6 System control board (SCB)
7 BOX ventilation fan (FM1)
8 DC power supply (DCPS)

Note
16.2.2 Flow of disassembling the IC unit
Box cover
SSD/HDD DIMM Video interface board BOX ventilation fan DC power supply
unit (DIMM) (VIB) (FM1) (DCPS)
HDD cooling System control board

fan (FM3) (SCB)
16.2.3 Box cover

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove 11 screws [1], release 2 claws [2] from the holes [3], and
[1] [1]
then remove the box cover [4].
[4] [2]
[3]
G -187
16.2.4 SSD/HDD unit

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the box cover. (Refer to G.16.2.3 Box cover)
2. Disconnect the connectors [1] and [2], 3 each.
[2]
3. Check point 1 when reinstalling the connectors.

[4] [1]
Note
When reconnecting 3 connectors [1], [2], and [3], be sure
to connect the connector [1] that of the wire which has 1
connector to the SSD (SSD) [4], and connect the
[2] connectors that of the wire which has 2 connectors; the
connector on the midpoint [2] to the HDD/1 (HDD1) [5] and
connector on the leading edge [3] to the HDD/2 (HDD2) [6].
[3]
[5] [6]
4. Check point 2 when reinstalling the connectors.

[6] [4] [2] [1]
Note
When reconnecting the signal connectors, be sure to
connect the connector [1] of the grey wiring harness to
SSD [2]. In the case of 2 red wiring harness of the system
control board, connect the connector of CN2104 [3] to
HDD1 [4], and connector of CN2105 [5] to HDD2 [6].
In the case of the grey wiring harness, be sure to connect
the side without latch to SSD.
[3] [5]
[1] 5. Remove 2 wiring harness clamps [1].
G -188
6. Remove 6 screws [1], slide the unit in the direction of the arrow to
[2] [3] [5] [1] [5]
release the projection [2] from the hole [3], and then remove the
SSD/HDD unit [4].
Note
When reinstalling the unit, be sure to align each position
of the projection [5].
[5] [1] [5] [4]
[2] [1] 7. Remove 6 screws [1], and then remove the SSD assy [3] from the
HDD assy [2].
[1] [3]
[1] [1] 8. Remove 4 screws [1], remove the mounting plates /Rt [2] and /Lt
[3], and then remove the SSD [4].
Note
When reinstalling the SSD, be sure to set the mounting
plates /Rt [2] and /Lt [3] in correct direction.
[3] [4] [2]
G -189
16.2.5 HDD cooling fan (FM3)

(1) Procedure
[3] 1. Remove the SSD/HDD unit. (Refer to G.16.2.4 SSD/HDD unit)
[1] [2] 2. Disconnect the connector [1], and then remove 2 wiring harness
clamps [2].
3. Remove 4 screws [3], and then remove the HDD cooling fan (FM3)
[4].
Note
When reinstalling the fan, be sure to set it so that the label
[5] faces inside the machine.
[5] [4]
16.2.6 DIMM (DIMM)

(1) Procedure
[3] [4] 1. Remove the box cover. (Refer to G.16.2.3 Box cover)
2. Push down 2 stoppers [2] on both edges of the memory slot A [1]
to release the lock, and then remove the DIMM [3] in the direction
of the arrow.
3. Remove the DIMM [4] of the memory slot B in the same manner.
[2] [1]
[4] [3] [5] Note

When removing/reinstalling the DIMM, be sure not to
touch the parts on the memory board.
When reinstalling the DIMM, be sure to push down the
DIMM into the slot groove [3] so that the groove [1] of the
DIMM fits to the projection [2] of the slot until it clicks.
Then, check that the leading edge [4] of the stopper is set
in the groove [5] of the DIMM.
[3] [4]
[1]
[2]
G -190
16.2.7 Video interface board (VIB)

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the box cover. (Refer to G.16.2.3 Box cover)
2. Remove 6 wiring harness clamps [1].
[2] [3] [4] 4. Remove 8 screws [1].

5. Lift the power supply side [3] of the fan mounting plate [2] in the
direction of arrow and remove it while paying attention not to catch
the wiring harness [4].
Note
When reinstalling the board, be sure not to damage the
wiring harness [4] with the fan mounting plate [2].
If it is hard to remove the fan mounting plate [2], remove
the SSD/HDD unit. (Refer to G.16.2.4 SSD/HDD unit)
[1]
[1] 6. Remove 2 screws [1] and 4 screws [2], and then remove the
connector cover [3].
[2] [3] [2]
G -191
7. Remove 3 screws [1] and 5 screws [2], and then remove the video
interface board (VIB) [3].
Note
[4] When reinstalling the board, be sure to push the circled
area [4] marked "PUSH" to connect VIB and the system
[1]
control board (SCB) securely before securing with screws.
[3] [1]
[2]
16.2.8 System control board (SCB)

(1) Procedure
[1] [3] [4] [2] 1. Remove the video interface board (VIB). (Refer to G.16.2.7 Video
interface board (VIB))
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and 1 screw [2].
3. Remove the screw [3], and then remove the connector cover [4].
Note
When reinstalling the connector cover, be sure to set the
claw [5] into the hole [6].
[6]
[5]
[7] [6] [1] 4. Disconnect the 3 connectors [1].

5. Disconnect the connectors [2], [3], and [4].
Note
Be sure to reconnect the connectors [2], [3], and [4]
correctly. Reconnect the connector [2] to the SSD (SSD)
[1] on the top, connector [3] to the HDD/1 (HDD1) on the
middle, and connector [4] to the HDD/2 (HDD2) on the
bottom of the SSD/HDD unit.
[8]
6. Remove 5 screws [5] and 6 screws [6].
[2] 7. Pull the edge [8] of the system control board (SCD) [7] which is the
other side of the interface connector slightly, slide the board in the
[3]
direction of the arrow to release the connector section from the L-
[4]
shape metal frame [9], and then remove the board.
Note
When removing/reinstalling the board, be careful not to
damage the bottom of SCB.
[9] Be sure to hold the edge of SCB and not to touch the
[5] electronic parts on the board.
G -192
[3] [6] [4] Note

When reinstalling the board, set the connector [2] under
the L-shape metal frame [1].
When the screw hole positions do not fit, push the box
side plate [3] outward and push SCB [4] against the plate
to align the screw hole positions. Then, tighten 2 screws
[5] and [6] temporarily to tighten the other screws.
[5]
[1]
[2]
16.2.9 BOX ventilation fan (FM1)

(1) Procedure
[2] [1] [5] 1. Remove the box cover. (Refer to G.16.2.3 Box cover)
2. Disconnect the connector [1], and then remove 3 wiring harness
clamps [2].
3. Remove 4 screws [3], and then remove the BOX ventilation fan [4].
[4] [3]
16.2.10 DC power supply (DCPS)

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the box cover. (Refer to G.16.2.3 Box cover)
[1]
G -193
[2] 3. Remove the 8 screws [1], and then remove the DC power supply
(DCPS) [2].
[1] [1]
G -194
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 17. RU-506
17. RU-506
No. Section Part name
1 Cover Front cover
2 Rear cover
3 Left cover

CAUTION
17.2.2 Front cover

(1) Procedure
1. Open the front door [1] and remove the screw [2] and release the
[1] [3] [2]
wire [3].
and the front door [1].
Note
The front door [1] is heavy. Support it securely when
removing it.
[4]
[5] [4]
a0get3c017ca
G -195
17.2.3 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the rear cover.
[1] [2] 2. Reinstall the parts by following the removal steps in reverse.
[1] a0get3c018ca
17.2.4 Left cover

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] a0get3c032ca
17.2.5 Note to keep in mind when replacing the board

CAUTION
When the RU control board (RUCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC19).
1. Remove the EEPROM (IC19) from the old RU control board [1] and install it into the new RU control board [2].
G -196
Note
When the RU control board (RUCB) is replaced, be sure to
replace the EEPROM (IC19). Install EEPROM (IC19) of the
old control board [1] to the new control board [2].
[1]
[2]
a0get2c033ca
Note
A Be sure to install the "A" sections of EEPROM (IC19) in the
same direction.
a04jf2c017ca
G -197
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 18. GP-501
18. GP-501
18.1 Centering punched holes
Die Set Position Cradle Adjustment, The die set position cradle is set in the factory; however, because of the punched-hole spacing on the PB
die sets, there is a minimal amount of paper on each edge of the punched paper. The die set position cradle may have to be fine adjusted to
center the punched-hole pattern in the paper. Listed below are the step-by-step instructions to adjust the die set to the proper position.
1. The punched-hole alignment must be checked on a piece of
punched paper. Fold the punched sheet of paper in half [1] and the
[1] punched-holes should be aligned evenly along the edge and
[2]
centered between the ends [2]. If the punched-holes are not
aligned, then the die set cradle must be adjusted to align the
punched holes.
Note
The paper path is always constant, if the holes are not
centered, you must adjust the die set cradle.
2. The two back covers on the GP-501 Punch must be removed to
access the die set position cradle [1]. (Refer to G.18.3.3 Removing
the Rear Cover.)
3. Before adjusting the die set position cradle, you must first note what
direction the die set cradle [1] must move.
G -198
4. Loosen the lock-down screw [1].

5. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, turn the adjustment screw [2]
clockwise or counter-clockwise to move the die set position cradle.
6. Observe the punched paper. If the punched-holes are too close to

the rear of the machine, then you must turn the adjustment screw
counter-clockwise [1].
7. If the punched-holes are too close to the front of the machine, then
you must turn the adjustment screw clockwise [1].
Note
Seven full turns of the adjustment screw result in a 1/4"
(6.35 mm) change in the punched hole position.
8. Before tightening the lock-down screw [1], tilt or bias the assembly
towards the bottom of the machine [2] and tighten the lock-down
screw. This will ensure positive engagement between the locking
lever and the die set.
9. Run a test sample of punched paper and recheck paper alignment.
Re-adjust if necessary.
G -199
18.2 Door latch

18.2.1 Door latch check
(1) Procedure
1. Ensure the door latch holds the door closed and that the activating
bracket tab [1] depresses the door switch [2]. The tab should press
the switch button just so that it is close to bottoming out.
18.2.2 Door Latch Adjustment

(1) To adjust the door latch:
2. Loosen the two adjustment screws [1] on the door latch.
3. Do one of the following.
To move the door in, move the latch towards the front of the
door.
To move the door out, move the latch away from the front of
the door.
4. Tighten the 2 screws [1] and close the door.
5. Test its operation.
18.2.3 Door Latch and Switch Replacement

(1) To replace the door latch:
G -200
(2) To replace the door switch:

3. Unplug connectors from switch [2].
18.3 Preparing the GP-501 punch for service

18.3.1 Preparing the GP-501 punch for service
Most service requires that the GP-501 Punch be separated from the printer and finisher and the rear cover be removed.
WARNING
Disconnect the unit from power and maintain the cord in your possession. Failure to observe this warning can result in injury or
electrical shock.
(1) Procedure
Unplug the unit from power.
Disconnect the communication cable
Empty Chip Bin
18.3.2 Separating the Punch From the Printer

Follow the instructions as described in Installation Manual.
18.3.3 Removing the Rear Cover

Separate the punch from the printer and finisher first. (Refer to G.18.3.2 Separating the Punch From the Printer.)
Note
It is not necessary nor recommended that you remove the top cover.
(1) Procedure
(2) Tool Required

Phillips screwdriver or 1/4" hex head nut driver
(3) To remove the rear cover:

1. Remove the 5 screws on the entrance side [1] and remove the 6
rear cover screws [2].
2. Slide the cover out from under the top cover. Do not remove the
top cover.
18.4 Leveling and aligning to the printer

The punch must be level and in line with the printer and finisher. If the printer and GP-501 Punch are moved or relocated, the system must be
re-leveled.
Note
It is important that the punch is not twisted or skewed. It must be level front to back and side to side.
G -201
(1) Procedure
Raise or lower the GP-501 Punchs castors to level it.
(2) Tool Required

2 3/8" open ended wrenches
Level
(3) To level the punch:

1. Remove the rear cover and put the punch back in line with the
printer and finisher.
2. Place the level on a flat surface of the top [1] and determine which
castor needs adjustment.
3. Loosen the locking nut [1] of the castor.

4. From below the frame and at the top of the castor [2], adjust the
height of the castor as needed.
5. Check the level and adjust as necessary.
6. Tighten the locking nut [1].
7. Ensure punch is level and in line with main body and finisher.
8. Install rear cover.
G -202
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 19. COMMERCIALLY
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L AVAILABLE PARTS
19. COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE PARTS

19.1 Reinstalling the status indicator light
19.1.1 Configuration
[2] [1]
[1] Screws (2) [2] Status indicator light
19.1.2 Connector
(1) Connector position
[1]
[1] CN495 -
(2) Connector specifications

Connector Pin Signal name Description Output timing Type of signal
Number
495 1 PAT1_DR Light ON signal L signal output when Open collector
the printing available
2 PAT2_DR L signal output while
in the scanning or
printing operation
3 PAT3_DR L signal output when
an abnormal stop
occurs due to jams,
error codes, no paper,
or no toner
4 PAT4_DR L signal output when
the toner supply
message is displayed
5 24V 24V DC source At all times 24V, 500mA
6 GND Ground - -
G -203
19.1.3 Procedure
1. Remove the upper cover /Rr2. (Refer to G.2.2.6 Upper cover /Rr1, /
Rr2)
2. Remove the cable pull out cover [2] of the upper cover /Rr2 [1].
[1] [2] a03uf2c147ca
3. Remove the right cover /Up3. (Refer to G.2.2.3 Right cover /Up1, /
Up2, /Up3, /Up4, /Lw1, /Lw2)
4. Insert the cable [2] of the status indicator light from the upper side of
the main board unit [1].
[1] [2] a03uf2c148ca
[1] [4] [5] 5. Connect the connector [2] of the status indicator light to CN495 [1].
Note
Pull out the cable [3] to the position where it does not
contact with the flywheel [5] of the scanner motor (M1) [4].
[2] [3]
a03uf2c149ca
[2] [6] 6. Install the right cover /Up3 [1] and the upper cover /Rr2 [2].
Note
Pull out the cable [3] of the status indicator light from the
cable pull out cover [4] of the upper cover /Rr2.
7. Install the status indicator light [6] with 2 screws [5].

[4] [1] [6]
[5]
[3] a03uf2c150ca
G -204
19.2 Key counter (KCT)

19.2.1 Connector
[2]
[1]
[1] CN493 [2] Jumper connector (CN494)
19.2.2 Procedure
1. Remove the key counter cover [2] of the upper cover /Rr2 [1], and connect to the inside connector.
[1] [2]
G -205
H CLEANING/LUBRICATION > 1. CLEANING/LUBRICATION
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L PROCEDURES
H CLEANING/LUBRICATION
1. CLEANING/LUBRICATION PROCEDURES
The descriptions of the cleaning and the lubrication are mentioned in the maintenance section of each device.
H -1
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 1. CHECKING BEFORE STARTING
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L WORK
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING
1. CHECKING BEFORE STARTING WORK
When conducting claims in the field, it is necessary to check first the following:
1. Are the power supply and voltage secured in accordance with the specifications?
2. Is the power supply properly grounded?
3. Is any equipment that repeatedly consumes a lot of electricity connected to the same power supply? (for example: Electric noise sources
such as elevator and air conditioner)
4. Are environmental conditions suitable for the machine?
High temperature and high humidity, direct sunlight, air ventilation, and so on.
Levelness of the location on which the machine is installed.
5. Does the cause of poor images lie in the original itself?
6. Is density selected properly?
7. Is the original glass stained?
8. Is proper paper used for copy?
9. Are copy consumables replaced with new ones at their life? (for example: Developer, drum, cleaning blade, and so on)
10. Is toner filled?
I -1
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 2. CHECKPOINTS WHEN
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L CONDUCTING ON-SITE SERVI...
2. CHECKPOINTS WHEN CONDUCTING ON-SITE SERVICE

When repairing the machine, be sure to pay due attention to the following items.
1. Be sure to unplug the power plug from the power outlet. Also, when operating the machine with the power supplied, be careful of the scan of
the exposure unit and be sure not to get caught by the gear.
2. The fusing section is hot. Be careful not to get burned for handling it.
3. The developing unit is magnetized strongly. Be careful not to bring a watch and instrument near to the unit.
4. Be careful not to damage the drum with a tool.
5. Be careful not to touch IC directly with bare hands.
I -2
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 3. UTILITY
3. UTILITY
3.1 List of utility menus
This machine is provided with setting menu for various adjustments/settings. Data adjusted/set with this mode is stored in NVRAM board (NRB).
Note
For details on the utility, refer to "User's guide."
01 Scan Address Register
01 Address Edit
02 E-mail Title Setting
03 E-mail Text Setting
02 User Setting
01 System Setting
01 Language Setting
02 Unit Setting
03 Feed Tray Setting
01 Paper Setting
02 Auto Tray Selection Setting
03 Type Selection for Auto Paper
04 Dehumidify Fan Heater Setting
04 Reset Setting
01 Auto Reset Setting
02 Job Reset Setting
05 Default Screen Setting
07 Set Zoom Ratio Setting
07 Power Save Setting
08 Date/Time Setting
09 Operation/Info.Sound Setting
01 Volume Setting
02 Info. Sound Item Setting
10 Key Response Time
11 Shortcut Key Register
01 Application Setting
02 Quality Adjustment (copy)
03 Quality Adjustment (scan)
04 Quality Adjustment Area Setting
05 Output Setting
12 Service Port Device Setting
02 Initial Setting
01 Copy Initial Setting
02 Scan Initial Setting
03 Common Setting
04 Copy Setting
05 Scan Setting
06 Printer Setting
01 Gray Text Outline
07 Image Quality Setting
01 Screen
02 Screen Initial Setting
03 Original Density Shift
04 ACS Adjustment
08 Password Change
03 Administrator Setting
01 System Setting
01 Power Save Setting
02 Date/Time Setting
03 Weekly Timer Setting
01 Weekly Timer ON/OFF Setting
02 Time Setting
03 Date Setting
04 Select Time for Power Save
05 Password Non-Business Hours
04 Restrict User Access
01 Lock/Delete Mode Memory
01 Copy Mode Memory
02 Scan Mode Memory
02 Change Restrict Setting
03 Scan Restrict Setting
04 Sample Print Restrict
05 Expert Adjustment
01 AES Level Adjustment
02 Erase Correction
01 Non-Image Area Erase
02 ADF Frame Erase
03 Printer Adjustment
01 Restart Timing Adjustment
02 Centering Adjustment
03 FD-Mag. Adjustment
I -3
04 CD-Mag. Adjustment
05 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment
06 Registration Loop Adj.
07 Pre-registration Adjustment
04 Finisher Adjustment*1
01 Staple Finisher Adjustment
01 Staple Center Position
02 Paper Width Adj.(Staple)
03 Paper Width Adj.(Straight)
04 Exit Guide Center pos. Adj
05 Exit Guide Paper Width Adj.
02 Multi Folder(Punch) Adj.
01 Paper Width Adjustment
02 Punch Vertical Position Adj.
03 Multi Folder(Fold) Adj.
01 Half-Fold Position Adj.
02 Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj.
03 Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj.
04 Double Parallel Pos. Adj.
05 Z-Fold Position Adj.
06 Gate Position Adj.
04 Multi Folder(PI) Adjustment*2
05 Stacker Adjustment
02 Paper Length Adjustment
06 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.
02 Staple Paper Width Adj.
03 Staple Pitch Adjustment
05 Tri-Fold Position Adj.
06 Fold Paper Width Adj.
07 Trimming Adjustment
07 Perfect Binder Adjustment
01 Cover Trimming Adj.
02 Cover Lead Edge Adj.
03 Spine Corner Forming Pos.
04 Glue Start Position
05 Glue Finish Position
06 Temperature Adjustment
07 Sub Compile CD Width Adj.
08 Clamp CD Width Adjustment
09 Cover Up/Down CD Width Adj.
10 Clamp FD Position Adj.
Relay Stacker Adjustment*2
01 Fold & Staple Stopper Adjustment
02 Half-Fold Stopper Adjustment
03 Punch Adjustment
01 Vertical Position Adj.
02 Horizontal Position Adj.
03 Registration Adjustment
04 Paper Edge Detect Sensor Adjustment
04 Tri-Fold Adjustment
05 2 Pos. Staple Pitch Adj.
06 Post Inserter Tray Size
07 Output Quantity Limit
08 Curl Adjustment*4
05 Scan Adjustment
06 Process Adjustment
01 Front & Back Density
02 Toner Density Sensor Speed
03 Maximum Density Adjustment
04 FD Line Reduction Mode
07 Quality Adjustment
01 Printer Gamma Offset Adj.
02 Printer Gamma Offset Auto.
03 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj.
04 Stabilization Adj. Setting
05 Custom Screen
06 Controller Image Comp. Set
07 Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (RU)
08 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj (RU)
I -4
08 Execute Adjust Operation

06 List/Counter
07 Size Setting
01 Original Glass Original Size Search
02 ADF Original Size Search
03 Original Glass Small Size
04 K Size
05 ADF/Original Glass Priority Setting
08 Perfect Binder Setting
01 Usable Paper Weight Select
02 Paper Count Limit for PB
03 Unfitting Cover Stop Setting
09 Operation Screen Customize
01 Font Weight Setting
02 Copy Screen Customize Set
03 Scan Screen Customize Set
02 Administrator Registration
03 Scan Address Register
01 Address Edit
02 E-mail Title Setting
03 E-mail Text Setting
04 User Auth./Account Track
01 Authentication Method
02 User Authentication Set
01 Management Setting
02 User Registration
03 User Counter
03 Account Track
01 Account Track Registration
02 Account Track Counter
04 Print without Authentication
05 Network Setting
01 Machine NIC Setting
02 E-mail Initial Setting
03 http Communication Setting
04 Web LCD Setting
06 Common Setting
07 Copy Setting
08 Scan Setting
09 System Connection
01 Administrator Call
10 Security Setting
01 Administrator Password
02 HDD Management Setting
01 HDD Lock Password
02 Delete Temporary Data Setting
03 Delete All Data Setting
04 Delete hold Job
05 Delete HDD Job
06 HDD Restore/Backup
01 HDD Backup
02 HDD Restore
03 Enhanced Security Mode
04 Touch Panel Adjustment
*1 Adjustment for the connected option (FS-521, FD-503, LS-505, SD-506, RU-509 PB-503 or RU-506) is available.
*2 Unable to select any time.
*3 Adjustment for the connected option (FS-531, FS-612, PK-512/513 or PI-502) is available.
*4 Cannot be selected when RU-509 is connected
3.2 Start/exit
3.2.1 Start method
2. "Utility screen"
Utility screen is displayed.
*1 Default is [Machine Screen].
3.2.2 Exit method

1. "Utility screen"
Press [Exit] to go back to the ordinary operation screen.
2. The new settings become effective.
I -5
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 4. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS
4. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

4.1 Priority for Adjustment/Setting after replacing parts
Conduct the following adjustment on the items list in this order when replacing the parts on the list. Proper operation/image quality is not
guaranteed without conducting those adjustment after the parts replacement.
Note
When replacing the overall control board (OACB) due to the OACB being damaged, be sure to use the NVRAM board (NRB) that
was installed on the damaged OACB on the new OACB. Contact the service manager of the authorized distributor if it is
considered that NRB is also damaged.
The NVRAM board (NRB) stores various adjustment data, setting data and counter data. Therefore, when replacing the NRB,
perform all adjustments and settings, and be sure to replace the parts for control correction (Drum, developer, cleaning blade).
For details, contact the service manager of the authorized distributor.
When replacing a board due to PB control board (PBCB), SD control board (SDCB), FD control board (FDCB), RU control board
(RUCB) or FNS control board (FNSCB) being damaged, be sure to use the non-volatile memory (EEPROM) that was installed on
the damaged control board on the new control board. Install the new EEPROM and perform all adjustments for the PB, SD, FD, RU
or FS if it is considered that the EEPROM is also damaged.
Classification Replacement parts/Others Description
After PM Implementation PM cycle setting counter reset
Drum Drum cartridge /Y, M, C, K Setting powder application
(Refer to F.5.3.4 Replacing (Refer to F.5.3.4 Replacing the drum Dust proof glass cleaning (write unit)
the drum cartridge) cartridge)
Initial Drum Rotation
Special Parts Counter (Reset)
Color Registration Auto.Adj.
Color Registration Manual
Gamma Automatic Adjustment
Development Developers /Y, /M, /C and /K Dust-proof glass cleaning (write unit)
(Refer to F.5.6.1 Replacing (Refer to F.5.6.1 Replacing the developers / Auto. Developer Charge
the developers /Y, /M, /C Y, /M, /C and /K)
and /K) TonerDenditySensorInit.Auto
Printer Gamma Offset Auto.
Intermediate transfer Intermediate transfer belt Transfer unit installation direction (with UPSIDE mark in rear)
(Refer to F.5.5 (Refer to F.5.5.6 Cleaning the intermediate Setting powder application
Intermediate transfer transfer belt/rollers)
section Dust-proof glass cleaning (write unit)
Blade setting mode
Belt Line Speed Adj.
Color Registration Auto.
Transfer belt cleaning blade Setting powder application
(Refer to F.5.5.3 Replacing the belt cleaning Blade setting mode
blade)
1st transfer rollers /Y, /M, /C and /K 1st transfer roller installation direction (groove on the shaft is on
(Refer to F.5.5.7 Replacing the first transfer the front side)
roller and the transfer roller bearing.) Dust-proof glass cleaning (write unit)
2nd transfer roller /Up 2nd transfer roller installation direction (depression on the shaft
(Refer to F.5.5.8 Replacing the 2nd transfer edge surface is on the front side)
roller /Up)
2nd transfer roller /Lw 2nd transfer roller /Lw installation direction (depression on the
(Refer to F.5.5.11 Replacing the 2nd transfer shaft edge surface is in the rear)
roller /Lw and the 2nd transfer earth plate
Assy)
Image correction unit Dust-proof glass cleaning (write unit)
Printer Gamma Sensor Adj.
Color registration sensors /Fr (PS8) and /Rr Gamma Automatic Adjustment
(PS9) Printer Gamma Offset Auto.
Printer Gamma Sensor Adj.
Belt Line Speed Adjustment
Color Registration Auto.Adj.
I -6

Total process mount Drum cartridge, developer, intermediate Dust proof glass cleaning (write unit)
transfer belt, transfer belt cleaning blade Setting powder application (to drum and intermediate transfer
belt)
Initial Drum Rotation
Auto. Developer Charge
TonerDenditySensorInit.Auto
Blade Setting Mode (Intermediate transfer)
Belt Line Speed Adj.
Scanner CCD unit CD-Mag. Adjustment
(Refer to G.2.2.8 CCD unit) Scan Gradation/Color Adj.
Scan exposure/V-mirror unit Mirror unit positioning (require the jigs)
(Refer to G.2.2.9 Exposure unit) Color Registration Auto.
Exposure lamp (L1) Scan Gradation/Color Adj.
(Refer to G.2.2.10 Exposure lamp)
Original glass Scan Gradation/Color Adj.
(Refer to G.2.2.4 Original glass assy)
Write Writing unit /K Dust-proof glass cleaning (write unit)
(Refer to G.2.2.13 Writing (Refer to G.2.2.13 Writing unit) Writing initial position memory (Skew initial position memory)
unit)
I/O Check Mode (LD1 to LD8 alarm data clear, LD alarm
measurement)
CD-Mag. Skew Adj.
Restart Timing Adjustment
Beam Pitch Adjustment
Moire Adjustment
Writing unit /Y, /M, /C Dust-proof glass cleaning (write unit)
(Refer to G.2.2.13 Writing unit) Writing initial position memory (Skew initial position memory)
I/O Check Mode (LD1 to LD8 alarm data clear, LD alarm
measurement)
Beam Pitch Adjustment
Moire Adjustment
Dust-proof glass /Y, /M, /C, /K Gamma Automatic Adjustment
(Refer to G.2.2.13 Writing unit)
Charging Developers /Y, /M, /C and /K Dust proof glass cleaning (write unit)
(Refer to F.5.4.1 Replace (Refer to F.5.4.1 Replace the charging Special Parts Counter (Reset)
the charging corona.) corona.)
Fusing Fusing belt Fusing belt installation position (with lot number on the rear side)
(Refer to F.5.13 Fusing (Refer to F.5.13.7 Replacing the fusing belt,
section) fusing roller /1, insulating sleeve /Up, fusing
bearing /Up, belt regulating sleeve)
Fusing heater lamp /4 (L5) Installation direction of the fusing heater lamp (colored wiring
(Refer to F.5.13.8 Replacing the fusing heater harness comes to the front)
lamp /4 (L5))
Thermostat /1 (TS1) Adjust the position by the thermostat positioning jig /UF (require
(Refer to G.2.2.22 Temperature sensor /1 the jig)
(TH1), thermostat /1 (TS1), /2 (TS2))
Thermostat /2 (TS2) Adjust the position by the thermostat positioning jig /UC (require
(TH1), thermostat /1 (TS1), /2 (TS2))
I -7
Thermostat /3 (TS3) Adjust the position by the thermostat positioning jig /L (require
(TH2), thermostat /3 (TS3))
Boards Overall control board (OACB) NVRAM board (NRB) replacement
Rewriting of firmware
Machine NIC setting
Printer control board (PRCB) Rewriting of firmware
Software DIPSW setting
Printer image processing board (PRIPB) Printer Screen Gradation
Hard disk /Y, M, C, K, A, P (HDD/Y, /M, /C, / I/O Check Mode (Replacing procedure of the hard disk)
K, /A, /P)
PF-602 Multi feed detection board (MFDBS, MFDBR) Multi feed detection board adjustment
(Refer to G.4.2.11 The multi feed detection
board (MFDBR and S))
DF-622 DF control board (DFCB) ADF Sensor Adjustment
ADF Original Size Adj.
ADF Orig. Stop Position
Original registration sensor (PS301) ADF Sensor Adjustment
Timing sensor (PS302) ADF Sensor Adjustment
Original reverse sensor (PS305) ADF Sensor Adjustment
Original exit sensor (PS306) ADF Sensor Adjustment
RU-509 RU control board (RUCB) Rewriting of firmware
EEPROM replacement
FS-521 FNS control board (FNSCB) DIPSW setting of the boards
EEPROM replacement
FS-531/612 FNS control board (FNSCB) Rewriting of firmware
EEPROM replacement
Stapler unit Stapler positioning (require the jigs)
* FS-531 does not require the adjustment.
PK-512/513 Punch drive board (PDB) Paper Edge Detect Sensor
Paper size sensor (PS305) Paper Edge Detect Sensor
LS-505 LS control board (LSCB) Toggle switch setting
Grip conveyance home sensor adjustment
Paper width adjustment
Paper length adjustment
FD-503 FD control board (FDCB) DIPSW setting of the boards
EEPROM replacement
Multi feed detection board (MFDB) Multi feed detection board adjustment
PI drive board (PIDB) Multi feed detection board adjustment
SD-506 SD control board (SDCB) DIPSW setting of the boards
EEPROM replacement
Trimmer board assy I/O Check Mode (trimmer board solenoid operation counter
(Refer to F.17.4.3 Replacing the trimmer reset)
board assy)
PB-503 PB control board (PBCB) DIPSW setting of the boards
EEPROM replacement
Multi feed detection board adjustment
Multi feed detection board (MFDBS, MFDBR) Multi feed detection board adjustment
I -8
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 5. SERVICE MODE
5. SERVICE MODE
5.1 Service Mode List
This machine is provided with a service mode for various adjustments/settings. Data adjusted/set with this mode is stored in NVRAM board
(NRB).
01 Machine Adjustment
01 Printer Adjustment
04 CD-Mag. Adjustment
05 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment
06 Registration Loop Adj.
07 Pre-registration Adjustment
08 Belt Line Speed Adj.
09 Writing Initial Pos. Memory
01 Skew Initial Position Memory
10 Color Registration Auto.Adj.
11 Color Registration Manual
12 PFU Dfeed Detect Adj.
13 CD-Mag. Skew Adj.
14 Beam Pitch Adjustment
15 Moire Adjustment
16 Recall Standard Data
02 Scan Adjustment
04 Scan Gradation/Color Adj.
03 Quality Adjustment
01 Printer Gamma Adjustment
01 Printer Gamma Offset Adj.
02 Printer Gamma Offset Auto.
03 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj.
04 Printer Screen Gradation
05 Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (RU)
06 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj (RU)
02 Sharpness Adjustment
03 Contrast Adjustment
04 Image Distinction Level
01 Dot Detect Adjustment
02 Color Text Adjustment
03 Dot/Text Area Adjustment
05 ACS Adjustment
06 Density Adjustment
01 AE(AES) Adjustment
02 Copy Density Adjustment
03 BackgroundRemoval
04 Bleed Prevention
07 Tone Adjustment
01 Red
02 Green
03 Blue
02 Process adjustment
01 High Voltage Adjustment
01 1st Transfer Manual Adj.
02 2nd Transfer Manual Adj.
03 HV Adj.(Separation AC)
04 HV Adj. (Separation DC)
05 Pre-transfer Guide Confirm
02 Drum Peculiarity Adjustment
01 Blade setting mode
02 Gamma Automatic Adjustment
03 Auto. Developer Charge
04 Toner Density Sensor Init.
05 Initial Drum Rotation
06 Toner Density Revert
07 Toner Density Sensor Speed
03 Sensor Output Confirm
01 IDC Sensor Output
02 Toner Density Sensor Output
03 Humidity/Temperature Output
04 Process Fine Adjustment
01 Background Margin Fine Adj.
02 Develop AC Bias Fine Adj.
I -9
03 Develop AC Frequency
04 Toner Density Fine Adj.
05 Interval/Quantity Adj.
01 Drum Small Rotation Interval
02 Automatic Refresh Interval
03 Toner Density Sensor Interval
03 System Setting
01 Software DIPSW Setting
02 Service Center TEL/FAX
03 Serial Number Setting
04 Setup Date/Business Setting
04 Counter/Data
01 Maintenance Counter
02 Data collection
01 Total Counter/Each Paper Size
02 Paper Size Counter(Copy)
03 Paper Size Counter(Printer)
04 ADF Counter
05 Coverage Data History
06 Time series jam data
07 JAM Counter
08 Counter of Each Copy Mode(1)
08 Counter of Each Copy Mode(2)
10 SC Counter
11 JAM Counter Individual Sec.
12 SC Count Individual Sec.
13 SC data of time series
14 Maintenance History
01 Maintenance Counter Reset
02 Parts History in Time Series
15 ORU-M Maintenance History
03 Parts Counter
01 Special Parts Counter
02 Voluntary Part Counter
05 State Confirmation
01 I/O Check Mode
06 ADF Adjustment
01 ADF Original Size Adj.
02 ADF Orig. Stop Position
03 ADF Sensor Adjustment
04 ADF Registration Loop Adj.
01 Staple Finisher Adjustment
01 Stapling center position adjustment
02 Paper Width Adj.(Staple)
03 Paper Width Adj.(Straight)
04 Exit Guide Center pos. Adj
05 Exit Guide Paper Width Adj.
02 Multi Folder(Punch) Adj.
01 Paper width adjustment
02 Punch Vertical Position Adj.
01 2-Hole Punch
02 3-Hole Punch
03 Multi Folder(Fold) Adj.
02 Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj.
03 Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj.
04 Double Parallel Pos. Adj.
05 Z-Fold Position Adj.
06 Gate Position Adj.
07 Fold Registration Loop Adj.
04 Multi Folder(PI) Adjustment*2
05 Stacker Adjustment
02 Paper Length Adjustment
06 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.
02 Staple Paper Width Adj.
03 Staple Pitch Adjustment
05 Tri-Fold Position Adj.
06 Fold Paper Width Adj.
07 Trimming Adjustment
08 Trimmer Receiver Adj.
07 Perfect Binder Adjustment
01 Cover Trimming Adj.
I -10
02 Cover Lead Edge Adj.

03 Spine Corner Forming Pos.
04 Glue Start Position
05 Glue Finish Position
06 Temperature Adjustment
07 Sub Compile CD Width Adj.
08 Clamp CD Width Adjustment
09 Cover Up/Down CD Width Adj.
10 Clamp FD Position Adj.
08 Relay Stacker Adjustment*2
01 Fold & Staple Stopper Adjustment
02 Half-Fold Stopper Adjustment
03 Punch Adjustment
01 Vertical Position Adj.
02 Horizontal Position Adj.
03 Registration Adjustment
04 Paper Edge Detect Sensor Adjustment
04 Tri-Fold Adjustment
05 2 Pos. Staple Pitch Adj.
06 Post Inserter Tray Size
07 Output Quantity Limit
08 Curl Adjustment
08 Firmware Version
01 Firmware Version
09 CS Remote Care
01 CS Remote Care
01 E-mail
02 Modem
10 List Output
Coverage data list
Parameter List
Font Pattern
Communication log list
Maintenance History
ORU-M Maintenance History
Memory Dump List
11 Test Mode
01 Running Test Mode
02 Test Pattern Output Mode
12 ISW
01 ISW
13 Setting Data
01 Load from External Memory
02 Store to External Memory
14 Log Store
01 Log Store Setting
02 Execute Log Storing
15 ORU-M Setting
01 ORU-M object/Life setting
02 ORU-M Life Threshold Setting screen
03 ORU-M Password Setting
*1 Adjustment for the connected option (FS-521, FD-503, LS-505, SD-506, RU-509 PB-503 or RU-506) is available.
*2 Unable to select any time.
*3 Adjustment for the connected option (FS-531, FS-612, PK-512/513 or PI-502) is available.
5.2 Start/exit
5.2.1 Start method
You can access the service mode while the power is both turned ON and OFF.
In either way, the started service mode is the same, but how to exit differs.
NOTE
Ensure appropriate security for Service Mode function setting procedures. They should NEVER be shown to any unauthorized
person not involved with service jobs.
If you leave the site with the Service Mode setting screen being displayed, unauthorized changes could occur for any set values.
When you finish the setting of Service Mode, or if you have to leave the site by necessity when the Service Mode has been set, be
sure to press [Exit] to the basic screen.
(1) Start-up from power ON

2. "Utility screen"
I -11

Stop 0 0 Stop 0 1
When the CE password has been set, entering the password is required to enter the service mode.
3. "Service Mode Menu screen"
The service mode appears.
(2) Start-up from power OFF

1. While pressing [Utility/Counter] button, turn ON the sub power switch (SW2).
The service mode appears.
5.2.2 Exit method

Exit methods differ according to the condition of power switch, ON or OFF.
(1) When the power is ON

1. "Service Mode menu screen"
Press [Exit] to back to "Utility screen".
(2) When the power is OFF

Turn OFF the SW2.
2. After the reboot, the new settings become effective.
5.3 Machine Adjustment

5.3.1 Restart Timing Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the image position on the paper in the sub scan direction by changing the restart timing of the registration roller.
(2) Usage
Adjust the image leading edge timing of the printer.
Note
Be sure the Scanner FD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.5.3.3 FD-Mag.
(3) Procedure
Press [01 Machine Adjustment].
2. "Machine Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Printer Adjustment].
3. "Printer Adjustment menu screen"
Press [01 Restart Timing Adjustment].
4. "Restart Timing Adjustment screen"
Press [] or [] to select the item to be adjusted and press [Print Mode].
This adjustment is available for each paper tray (each tray or ADU), paper size (large or small) and paper type (plain paper or thick paper)
respectively.
Note
Large size: Paper size 300mm or more in the sub scan direction
Small size: Paper size less than 300mm in the sub scan direction
Paper thickness: Paper weight 106g/m2 or more
5. "PRINT MODE screen"

Set the print setting according to the selected item and press the start button to output the test pattern (No.16).
6. Check the image leading edge timing.
20
57gaf3c007na
7. When the value is not within the standard value, press [Exit PrintMode].
Enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [Set].
Setting Range
I -12
: -60 (short) to +60 (long)

1 step = 0.1mm
9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the standard value can be obtained.
5.3.2 Centering Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the image writing position by changing the laser writing timing.
(2) Usage
Adjust the image centering in the printer main scan direction.
Note
Be sure the Printer CD-Mag. (Printer Adjustment) has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.5.3.4 CD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer
Adjustment))
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Centering Adjustment].
4. "Centering Adjustment screen"
This adjustment is available for each paper feed tray (each tray or ADU), paper size (common, large size, small size or 8 1/2 x 5 1/2 (tray
1 to 3)) and paper size (plain paper or thick paper) respectively.
Note

6. Fold the printed paper into 2 along the center in the main scan direction, and measure how much the left and right lines misalign from
each other.
Standard value: within 1.5mm
Setting range: -40 (image in front) to +40 (image in back)
1 step = 0.1mm
5.3.3 FD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the image magnification by changing the speed of the polygon motor.
(2) Usage
This adjustment changes the speed of the polygon motor and adjusts the image magnification.
Note
Note that there are 2 following types of method for the printer magnification adjustment in the sub scan direction.
1. FD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)
Perform this adjustment when the magnification in sub-scanning direction has changed because of the worn registration
roller or paper shrinkage by heat.
2. Belt Line Speed Adj. (Printer Adjustment)
Perform this adjustment under the conditions not mentioned above.
Magnification adjustment on back side in sub-scanning direction is not reflected to the image in default. When adjusting the
magnification on back side, enter "User Setting - Common Setting" in "Utility" and turn the "Back Side Magnification Adj." to
[ON]. However, since the polygon motor speed is switched for back side, the print speed is reduced up to 3/4.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 FD-Mag. Adjustment].
4. "FD-Mag. Adjustment screen"
Select the item to be adjusted and press [Print Mode].
This adjustment can be performed for both sides at a time (all trays) or for back side (each tray).
Select A3 paper and press Start key to output the test pattern (No. 16).
6. Check the magnification in the sub scan direction.
I -13
Standard value
: 0.5% or less (when in life-size)
: 205.7 1mm or less
205.7 1
57gaf3c003na
Select the item to be adjusted.
Setting Range
Printer FD-Mag. (both sides at a time): -100 (short) to +100 (long)
Other than the above: -80 (short) to +20 (long)
1 step = 0.01%
9. Enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [Set].
5.3.4 CD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
This adjustment changes the magnification in image processing prior to the laser exposure.
(2) Usage
Adjust the magnification in main scanning direction.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 CD-Mag. Adjustment].
4. "CD-Mag. Adjustment screen"
This adjustment can be performed for both sides at a time (all trays) or for back side (each tray).
6. Check the magnification in the main scan direction.
Standard value
: 190 1mm or less
190
57gaf3c004na
Select the item to be adjusted.
Setting range: -100 (short) to +100 (long)
1 step = 0.01%
5.3.5 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Adjust the image erasure amount of the leading edge.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the image erasure (deleted) amount of the leading edge is not within the standard value.
I -14
Note
This adjustment method is for C7000/C6000/C6000L (copier version). C7000P/C70hc (printer version) does not have the
adjustment method.
(3) Preparation
Be sure the printer FD-Mag. Adjustment has been adjusted.
(4) Procedure
Press [05 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment].
4. "Lead Edge Erase Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Set the test chart to the original glass, choose a paper A3 or 11x17, and press Start key.
6. Check the leading edge erasure amount.
Standard value "a": 4 mm or less
a
57gaf3c029nb
7. When the value is not within the standard value, press [Exit Print Mode].
8. "Lead Edge Erase Adjustment screen"
Setting Range
: -20 (narrower) to +40 (wider)
1 step = 0.1mm
5.3.6 Registration Loop Adj. (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the paper loop amount in the registration roller section.
(2) Usage
Adjust to remove paper skew and wrinkle, or paper jamming in the registration section.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Registration Loop Adj.].
4. "Registration Loop Adj. screen"
This adjustment can be performed for feed tray (trays, ADU), paper size (large, small, 150 mm or less of width), and paper type (plain
paper, thick paper).
Note

6. If the problem is not solved, press [Exit PrintMode].
7. "Registration Loop Adj. screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
8. Repeat the steps 4 to 7 until an appropriate value is obtained.
I -15
5.3.7 Pre-registration Adj. (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Adjust the paper loop amount in the pre-registration roller section.
(2) Usage
Adjust to remove paper skew and wrinkle, or paper jamming in the pre-registration section.
(3) Procedure
Press [07 Pre-registration Adj.].
4. "Pre-registration Adj. screen"
This adjustment can be performed for feed tray (trays, ADU), paper size (large, small) and papaer weight (thick paper).
Note

7. "Pre-registration Adj. screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
5.3.8 Belt Line Speed Adj. (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
This adjustment changes line speed of the transfer belt.
(2) Usage
Adjust the magnification in sub-scanning direction.
Note
Note that there are 2 following types of method for the printer magnification adjustment in the sub scan direction.
1. FD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)
Perform this adjustment when the magnification in sub-scanning direction has changed because of the worn registration
roller or paper shrinkage by heat.
2. Belt Line Speed Adj. (Printer Adjustment)
Perform this adjustment under the conditions not mentioned above.
(3) Procedure
Press [08 Belt Line Speed Adj.].
4. "Belt Line Speed Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Standard value
: 205.7 1mm or less
205.7 1
57gaf3c003na
8. "Belt Line Speed Adj. screen"
I -16
1 step = 0.01%
Note
Setting range is available from -100 to +100, but the optimum value is from -5 to -35. An error code may occur by entering
the value that is not within the optimum value.
5.3.9 Skew Initial Position Memory (Printer Adjustment - Writing Initial Pos. Memory)
(1) Functions
Store the initial position of the skew adjustment mechanism of the write unit in the NVRAM board (NRB).
(2) Usage
Execute only when the write unit is replaced to the new one.
(3) Procedure
Press [09 Writing Initial Pos. Memory].
4. "Writing Initial Pos. Memory screen"
Press [01 Skew Initial Position Memory].
5. "Skew Initial Position Memory screen"
Select the color of the replaced write unit and press [Start].
5.3.10 Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Functions
The color registration misalignment of Y, M, and C of the main scan, sub scan, horizontal (main scanning direction magnification), skew and
partial horizontal (main scanning direction partial magnification) are automatically adjusted referring to K as standard.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when there is a color registration error.
Note
Perform this adjustment when the malfunction code C-4520 occurs.
(3) Procedure
Press [10 Color Registration Auto.Adj.].
4. "Color Registration Auto.Adj. screen"
Press [Start].
5. The color registration adjustment starts and a message "Completed" is shown in about 2 minutes. If the error message appears, perform
an error correction referring to the below.
Error 1: It does not converge within the standard value.
The patch density may be too light. Check around the drum unit and perform the Gamma Automatic Adjustment. Then conduct this
adjustment again.
Error 2: The difference of the color registration is too much.
Check the installation position of the write unit.
Output the test pattern to check the image density. When the image density is abnormal, perform the gamma automatic adjustment.
Error 3: Other
The other malfunction other than the auto color registration adjustment may occur. Restart the main body in the normal mode to check
for malfunction code.
6. "Color Registration Auto.Adj. screen"
Misalignment amounts of Y, M, and C of "Main Scan", "Sub Scan", "Horizontal", and "Skew" relative to K are displayed on the panel.
(unit: pixel)
Intermediate transfer belt speed and the drum speed (new set value, old set value, result) are displayed.
5.3.11 Color Registration Manual (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Measure the misalignment amount of Y, M, and C relative to K of "Main Scan", Mag.(ALL) (whole magnification in main scanning), "Mag.
(PART)" (partial magnification in main scanning), "Sub Scan", "Incline" (skew), and "Scan Bend" (main scanning), and adjust Mag.(PART)
manually.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when there is a color registration error.
Note
This adjustment is for C7000/C6000/C6000L (copier version). It does not work for C7000P/C70hc (printer version). Perform
''Color registration automatic adjustment (Printer adjustment)'' for C7000P/C70hc (printer version).
I -17
Be sure the Printer CD-Mag. (Printer Adjustment) has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.5.3.4 CD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer
Adjustment))
Be sure the Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment) has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.5.3.10 Color Registration
(3) Procedure
Press [11 Color Registration Manual].
4. "Color Registration Manual screen"
Press [Print Mode].
5. "Print Mode screen"
Set the A3 or 11 x 17 paper. Press the Start key to output the test pattern.
Place the outputted test pattern [1] on the original glass securely against the original positioning plate /Lt [2] and the original positioning
plate /Rr [3], and close the DF or platen cover.
Note
When placing the test pattern onto the original glass, be sure to take care of the setting direction (with printing face down)
and position.
Check that the settings for all colors (Y, M, C, K) in the [Test Pattern Output Mode] is set to 255. If not, it will cause an error.
[3]
[2]
[1]
8050fs1011
6. Press [Print Mode].

Press [Start] to scan the test pattern using the scanner.
7. Shows the misalignment amount of Y, M, and C relative to K of "Main Scan", "Mag.(ALL)" (whole magnification in main scanning), "Mag.
(PART)" (partial magnification in main scanning), Sub Scan, "Incline" (skew), and "Scan Bend" (main scanning) at "Rest" section on the
touch panel. (unit: pixel)
8. Make sure that "OK" is displayed for all the items. If the value is out of standard, "NG" and an error code will appear.
If "NG" appears for "Main Scan", "Mag.(ALL)", "Sub Scan", or "Incline", perform the Color Registration Auto.Adj. again.
Error code Description Cause
Error 1 Cannot detect the chart pattern Chart misplacement
Error 2 The chart is placed upside down Chart misplacement
Error 3 Cannot detect the chart pattern Different chart is placed
Error 4 Adjustment impossible Software bug
Error 5 Value is out of standard Readjust
Error 6 Non-volatile data abnormality Check the installation position of the
NVRAM board
Error 7 Accessing to unassigned memory Software bug
Error 8 Memory-related error Software bug
Error 9 Program error Software bug
Error 10 Chart is skewed Chart misplacement
Error 11 Image header information read error Software bug
Error 12 Parameter setting error Software bug
Error 13 Measurement error Chart misplacement or chart failure
I -18
9. If "NG" appears for "Main Scan", "Mag.(ALL)", or "Mag.(PART)", open the toner supply section and loosen 2 screws [1] located beside the
developing unit of a color from which an "NG" is displayed, and slide the adjusting plate [2] up and down to adjust the "Mag.(PART)"
(partial magnification in main scanning).
Moving the adjusting plate [2] upward increases the "Rest" of the "Mag.(PART)" (positive) and moving the plate downward reduces the
"Rest" (negative).
Adjustment guideline
Move the adjusting plate [2] by referring to the "Rest" of "Mag (PART)" (unit: pixel) displayed at the touch panel. The scale of the
adjusting plate [2] changes the "Rest" approx. 0.5 pixel per notch.
[2]
[1]
10. Press [Return] to return to [Printer Adjustment Menu] screen.

11. Perform the Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment) (Refer to I.5.3.10 Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment))
5.3.12 Adjustment when replacing the multi feed detection board (PF)
(1) Function
Adjust the ultrasonic sensor sensitivity of the multi feed detection boards (MFDBR, MFDBS).
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when replacing the PF multi feed detection board (MFDTB) or the PF drive board (PFDB). Adjust it when multi feed is
not detected properly due to specific types of paper (such as thin paper, coated paper with less stiffness, and thick paper).
Note
The multi feed detection board /S and /R are adjusted in the manufacturing process as a pair of upper and lower. Be sure to
replace them as a pair.
Adjustment error occurs because of the temperature of the sensor surface. Make the adjustment at a temperature close to the
environment in which the copier is actually used (20C to 30C). (In case you brought a new part from outdoors, make the
adjustment after the temperature of the sensor surface and the room temperature become the same)
(3) Procedure
3. "Printer Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [12 PFU Dfeed Detect Adj.].
4. Open the front door [1] of the PF, and open the jam processing guides PF2 [2] and PF5 [3] in the horizontal conveyance section.
[1]
[3] [2]
a03uf3c025ca
I -19
5. Insert a sheet of paper [1] (part No. 65AA-991#, fusing adjustment paper, 16 sheets/A3) while turning the knob PF4 [2], and close the jam
processing guides PF2 [3] and PF5 [4]. (When there isnt paper [1], use 200g/m2 to 300g/m2 paper.)
[4] [1]
[3] [2]
a03uf3c026ca
6. "PFU Dfeed Detect Adj. screen"

Press [Start].
7. If the multi feed detection adjustment is normally completed, "Completed" is displayed. If abnormally completed, "Error" is displayed.
When the error message is displayed, repeat steps 4 to 6.
Note
When an error occurs, the adjustment data is not written but the data before the adjustment still remains.
8. Pull out the paper inserted in step 5.

9. Turn ON the sub power switch and enter the I/O check mode.
13. Insert a sheet of paper that customer mainly uses (paper weight 50g/m2 to 300g/m2), and confirm that "0" is displayed on the input check
display.
14. Insert another sheet of paper (2 sheets in all) that customer mainly uses, and confirm that "1" is displayed on the input check display.
15. Pull out the inserted papers, and install the parts removed.
5.3.13 CD-Mag. Skew Adj. (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the CY2 lens in the write unit /K and corrects the image distortion of K in main scanning direction.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when there is a skew in the main scan direction.
Note
Image distortion of K in main scanning direction cannot be corrected by the Color registration adjustment. (Adjusts YMC only.)
Image distortion of K in main scanning direction can also be changed by conducting [Chart Adjustment] of [Both Side Adj.] in
the User Mode.
(3) Procedure
Press [13 CD-Mag. Skew Adj.].
4. "CD-Mag. Skew Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Note
When the Start key is pressed, CY2 lenses of YMCK are adjusted and the Color registration adjustment (for approx. 2
minutes) is automatically started. When the adjustment is completed, test pattern (No.16) will be printed.
6. Check the skew in main scanning direction.

Standard value: 0.3% or less (difference between 280mm diagonal lines "a. b" is 0.84 mm or less)
a03uf3c001ca
8. "CD-Mag. Skew Adj. screen"
I -20

Setting range: -30 to +30
1 step = 0.01mm
5.3.14 Beam Pitch Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Adjust the beam pitches of LD1 to LD8 by changing the write clock.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment after replacing the write unit.
Note
Be sure that the "I.5.3.9 Skew Initial Position Memory (Printer Adjustment - Writing Initial Pos. Memory)" and "I.5.3.10 Color
Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment)" have been adjusted in advance.
Be sure to set the current value of the "I.5.3.15 Moire Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)" to 0 before conducting this adjustment.
(3) Procedure
Press [14 Beam Pitch Adjustment].
4. "Beam Pitch Adjustment screen"
Confirm that the current value of [Y] is "0".
When it is other than 0, enter "0" through the numeric buttons and press [SET].
Set all the current values for each color to "0" in the same way and press [Print Mode].
Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper (105g/m2 or less) and press the Start key.
6. Check the beam pitch misalignment on the 3rd column of the test chart.
The outputted charts shows in descending order the conditions with the values +10, +5, 0, -5 and -10 to/from the current value of each
colors.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1] Current +10 [2] Current +5

[3] Current [4] Current -5
[5] Current -10 -
7. When the moires on the top and bottom are even or there is no moire [1], or the white thin line and the black thin line on the left and right
are even or there is no thin line [4]: No need to adjust.
When the moire on the bottom is strong [2] or when the white thin line appears on the left side and the black one on the right side [5]:
Adjust in "+" direction.
When the moire on the top is strong [3] or when the black thin line appears on the left side and the white one on the right side [6]: Adjust
in "-" direction.
I -21
[2] [3]
[1]
[4] [5] [6]
[1] The moires on the top and bottom are even or there is [2] The moires on the bottom is strong
no moire
[3] The moires on the top is strong [4] The white thin line and the black thin line on the left and
right are even or there is no thin line
[5] The white thin line appears on the left side and the [6] The black thin line appears on the left side and the
black one on the right side white one on the right side
8. If there are any abnormalities, press [Exit PrintMode].

9. "Beam Pitch Adjustment screen"
5.3.15 Moire Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Prevent moire by lowering the laser powers of LD1 and LD8 to absorb the changes of the beam pitch interval in the sub scan direction.
(2) Usage
Note
Be sure to complete I.5.3.9 Skew Initial Position Memory (Printer Adjustment - Writing Initial Pos. Memory), I.5.3.10 Color
Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment), and I.5.3.14 Beam Pitch Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) before this adjustment.
(3) Procedure
Press [15 Moire Adjustment].
4. "Moire Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper (105g/m2 or less) and press the Start key.
6. Check the moire.
Check the moire of each color on the 3rd column of the chart.
I -22
[1]
7. If there are any moires, press [Exit PrintMode].

8. "Moire Adjustment screen"
Setting range: 0 to 5
5.3.16 Recall Standard Data (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Reset the adjustment values of the printer adjustment to the factory initial data or the installation initial data.
(2) Usage
The same adjustment table is changed since some parts of the printer adjustment can be changed by the user. Therefore, conduct this
adjustment when the adjustment values cannot be initialized because of the erroneous operation by the user.
Note
Adjustment data of "Color Registration Auto.", "Color Registration Manual", "PFU Dfeed detect Adj.", and "CD-Mag. Skew Adj."
are not restored.
(3) Procedure
Press [16 Recall Standard Data].
4. "Recall Standard Data screen"
Press [Factory Initial Data] or [Installation Initial Data].
Note
Selecting [Factory Initial Data] recalls the factory initial data.
Selecting [Installation initial data] recalls the adjustment values stored when code "91-00" of the I/O check mode was
conducted.
5. Press [Yes] to restore standard data.

Press [No] to cancel the operation.
5.3.17 Restart Timing Adjustment (Scanner Adjustment)

(1) Functions
This adjustment changes read start timing when scanning original in sub-scanning direction.
(2) Usage
Adjust the image leading edge timing when scanning in platen mode.
Note
Be sure the "Restart Timing Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)" has been adjusted before performing this adjustment. (Refer to I.
5.3.1 Restart Timing Adjustment (Printer Adjustment))
adjustment method.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Scan Adjustment].
I -23
3. "Scan Adjustment Menu screen"

Press [01 Restart Timing Adjustment].
4. [Restart Timing Adjustment screen]
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the scan image leading edge timing.
Setting range: -10 (Image Fast) to +20 (Image Slow)
1 step = 0.1mm
5.3.18 Centering Adjustment (Scanner Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Adjust the image miss-centering in the main scan direction when scanning from the original glass and DF.
(2) Usage
Adjust to remove an image miss-centering in the main scan direction when scanning from the original glass and DF.
Note
Be sure the Centering Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.5.3.2 Centering Adjustment
adjustment method.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Centering Adjustment].
5. "Copy screen"
When you select [ADF Centering-Front] or [ADF Centering-Back], set the "Adjustment chart" on the DF, select A3 or 11 X 17 paper and
press Start key.
When you select [Orig. Glass Centering], set the "Test chart" on the original glass, select A3 or 11 X 17 paper and press Start key.
6. Fold the printed paper into 2 along the center in the main scan direction, and measure how much the left and right lines misalign from
each other.
Standard value
: within 0mm 1.5mm (Original Glass mode)
: within 0mm 2.0mm (DF mode)
Setting range: -30 (image in front) to +30 (image in back)
1 step = 0.1mm
5.3.19 FD-Mag. Adjustment (Scanner Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Adjust the magnification in sub-scanning direction in original grass mode and DF mode. This adjustment changes scan speed.
(2) Usage
Adjust the magnification in sub-scanning direction in original grass mode and DF mode.
Note
This adjustment is for C7000/C6000/C6000L (copier version). C7000P/C70hc (printer version) does not has the adjustment
method.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 FD-Mag. Adjustment].
Press [Print Mode].
I -24

Standard value
: 200 1mm or less
200
57gaf3c005na
1 step = 0.05%
5.3.20 Scan Gradation/Color Adj. (Scanner Adjustment)

Note
In this adjustment, use the special chart and gradation data. Contact the service manager of the authorized distributor for acquiring these items.
(1) Functions
Conduct the gradation correction of the scanner.
(2) Usage
When color reproduction is in a poor condition, usually conduct the "Gamma Automatic Adj." of the "Process Adjustment".
Conduct this adjustment if color reproduction is in a poor condition (especially in a high light area) after replacing the CCD unit, exposure lamp
(L1), original glass or each scanner mirror.
CAUTION
Scanner gradation (gamma) has been adjusted for each machine at factory. Please note that the scanner gradation data is
overwritten to the average value if the [Reset Adj. Data] in the "Scan Gradation screen" is pressed.
Once [Adj. data reset] is pressed, previous data cannot be restored.
Note
method.
(3) Procedure
1. After replacing the part(s), set a "Color chart" on the original glass, A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press Start key.
Note
Press the hard key on the operation panel, not the soft key on the touch panel.
2. Check if there is no image background or problem in color balance.

3. If there is abnormality, enter Service mode.
Press [04 Scan Gradation/Color Adj.].
7. "Scan Gradation/Color Adj. screen"
Press [Reset Adj. Data].
CAUTION
Scanner gradation (gamma) has been adjusted for each machine at factory. Please note that the scanner gradation data is
overwritten to the average value if the [Reset Adj. Data] in the "Scan Gradation screen" is pressed.
Once [Adj. data reset] is pressed, previous data cannot be restored.
8. Press the [YES] key to overwrite the scanner gradation data to average value.
Press [No] to cancel the operation and return to the previous screen.
5.3.21 Recall Standard Data (Scanner Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Restore the scan adjustment set values to factory initial data or installation initial data.
(2) Usage
Therefore, conduct this adjustment when the adjustment values cannot be initialized because of the erroneous operation by the user or CE.
Note
method.
I -25
Performing Recall Standard Data in Scanner Adjustment also restores the settings of "Image Distinction Level -Dot Detect
Adjustment", "ACS Adjustment" and "Density Adjustment -AE(AES) Adjustment" in Quality Adj.
(3) Procedure
Note
conducted.

5.3.22 Printer Gamma Offset Adj. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)
(1) Functions
Adjust the gradation and the background density in a high light area by changing the printer gamma curve.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the color reproduction varies depending on the screen selected in the copy mode.
Note
Be sure the Gamma Automatic Adjustment has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.5.4.7 Gamma Automatic Adj. (Drum
Normally, adjust the printer gamma on C7000/C6000/C6000L (copier version) with "I.5.3.23 Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (Quality
Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)"
Only perform this adjustment when you want to make fine adjustments of the printer gamma or for C7000P/C70hc (printer
version).
This adjustment is not need to be conducted when conducting "Output Paper Density Adj."
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Quality Adjustment].
3. "Quality Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Printer Gamma Adjustment].
4. "Printer Gamma Adjustment screen"
Press [01 Printer Gamma Offset Adj].
5. "Printer Gamma Offset Adj. screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous] to select the screen you want to adjust.
Note
Line1, Line2, Dot1, Dot2, and Stochastic correspond to the screen names in user mode.
Contone is a screen used in the character section of Line1, Line2, Dot1, and Dot2.
Contone does not require the adjustment.

7. Set the A4 or 8 1/ x 11 paper. Press the Start key to output the test pattern.
2
8. Check the printed test pattern.
Make sure that the high light density starting section of C and K is uniform, and even between the gray reference lines [1].
[1]
Y
M
C
K
8050fs1015
9. If they are not even, press [Exit PrintMode].

10. "Printer Gamma Offset Adj. screen"
Press the button of a color (C or K) to adjust, enter a value through the numeric button and press [SET].
Setting range: -128 (light) to +127 (dark)
I -26
12. Take notice of the gray gradation pattern [1] created in C, M and Y, make sure that the gray balance at the square marks line [2] and [3] is
the same.
Y
M
C
K
[1]
[6] [5] [4] [2] [3] 8050fs1016
13. If the gray balance is not the same, press the color (Y or M) to adjust, enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [SET].
Setting range: -128 (light) to +127 (dark)
How to match the gray balance
Take notice of the gray block [4] made up of 49 patches created in C, M and Y.
In the 49 patches, M gets darker toward right, and Y gets darker downward. C remains unchanged.
The patch [5] at the center is the same color as the gray [2]. The patches [6] positioned at the 4 corners of the patch [5] is the same
color as the gray [3].
Out of the 49 patches, select a gray of the same gray balance as the gray [6].
Example:
When a patch on the lower right side is more suitable than the patch [5] at the center: Adjust M and Y in the darker direction.
When a patch on the upper left side is more suitable than the patch [5] at the center: Adjust M and Y in the lighter direction.
15. Set the A4 or 8 1/ x 11 paper. Press the Start key to output the test pattern.
2
5.3.23 Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)
(1) Functions
Adjust the gradation and the background density in a high light area automatically by changing the printer gamma curve.
(2) Usage
Note
When conducting this adjustment, be sure to use plain paper or color copy paper. Otherwise, the adjustment is not conducted
properly because the color of the test pattern varies depending on the paper color.
To adjust the printer gamma, perform this adjustment. When a fine adjustment of the printer gamma is required, perform "I.
5.3.22 Printer Gamma Offset Adj. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)."
This adjutsment is for C7000/C6000/C6000L (copier version). For C7000P/C70hc (printer version), adjust with "I.5.3.22 Printer
Gamma Offset Adj. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)".
(3) Procedure
Press [01 Printer Gamma Adjustment]
Press [02 Printer Gamma Offset Auto.].
5. "Printer Gamma Offset Auto. screen"
Note
The adjustable screens are the same as the ones in Printer Gamma Offset Adj.
The printer gamma offset value of each YMCK displayed are the current values, and they are linked with the "Printer Gamma
Offset Adj." values.
6. Press [Readjust]. To readjust, press [Yes], and press [No] to cancel the operation.
Note
When the gradation in high light area is way off, press [Reset Adj. Data] to reset the printer gamma offset value to 0, then
press [Readjust].

Set A4 or 8 1/2 x 11 paper and press Start key to print a test pattern.
Returns to the adjustment screen automatically when test pattern is printed.
Place the outputted test pattern [1] on the original glass securely against the original positioning plate/Lt [3] and the original positioning
plate/Rr [4].
I -27
Note
Set the test pattern so that the green triangular mark [2] comes to the left side. (printed side face down)
[3] [4]
[2]
[1]
a03uf3c030ca
10. Place 10 sheets of copy paper (white) on top of the test pattern and close the DF or the platen cover.
Note
Be sure to use white copy paper. Otherwise, the printer gamma cannot be corrected properly.
11. Press [Start].

12. The test pattern is scanned and the current YMCK values are updated.
Note
Since the scanned result at the first scan is not examined, a "Completed" message does not appear after the first scan.
The quality examination of the value is made from the second scan. Make sure to repeat steps 8 to 11 several times until the
message "Completed normally" appears.

Press [Print Mode].
14. Perform the steps 8 to 11.
15. Confirm that the message "Completed normally" appears.
If message other than "Completed normally" is displayed, repeat steps 13 to 14.
5.3.24 Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (RU) (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the gradation and the background density in a high light area automatically by changing the printer gamma curve.
(2) Usage
Note
Be sure to confirm that each set value of Y, M, C and K from [11 Test Mode] - [02 Test Pattern Output Mode] is not "0" in
advance. If any of the set value Y, M, C or K is "0", proper adjustment is not available.
Do not use colored paper or embossed paper for this adjustment. When using colored paper or embossed paper, this
adjustment is not performed properly.
To adjust the printer gamma, perform this adjustment. When a fine adjustment of the printer gamma is required, perform "I.
5.3.22 Printer Gamma Offset Adj. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)."
This adjustment is available when RU-508 or RU-509 is connected.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (RU)].
Note
The printer gamma offset value of each YMCK displayed are the current values, and they are linked with the "Printer Gamma
Offset Adj." values.
6. Press [Readjust]. To readjust, press [Yes], and press [No] to cancel the operation.
Note
When the gradation in high light area is way off, press [Reset Adj. Data] to reset the printer gamma offset value to 0, then
press [Readjust].
I -28

Select the paper tray. Press the Start key to output the test pattern.
Note
Each set of test patterns to measure the color and to check result is outputted in twice.

The color of the test pattern is measured and the current YMCK values are updated.
Confirm that the message "Completed normally" appears.
10. When a message other than "Completed normally", an error code is displayed for every cause. Correct the error referring to the following
and repeat steps 7 to 9.
Error code Error Countermeasures
Error 5 Standard value cannot be obtained. Readjust
(Readjust)
Error 14 Startup is out of the adjustment standard Readjust
Error 18 Output paper sensor value abnormality Readjust or replace the output paper
density sensor
5.3.25 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)
(1) Functions
The printer gamma correction that is performed automatically on regular basis uses IDC sensor to read the pattern on the transfer belt.
Therefore the correction may be inaccurate depending on the characteristic changes of IDC sensor. This adjustment uses the scanner to
correct the IDC sensor, enabling precise printer gamma correction.
(2) Usage
When a poor color reproduction results even after the "Gamma Automatic Adjustment" of the "Process Adjustment", conduct this adjustment
to correct gradation.
Note
When conducting this adjustment, be sure to use plain paper or color copy paper. Otherwise, the adjustment is not conducted
properly because the color of the test pattern varies depending on the paper color.
To reset the data to factory default, press [Reset Adj. Data]. Press [Yes] to reset the printer gamma sensor adjustment to the
factory default data, and [No] to keep the current data.
method.
When RU-509 is not connected to C7000P/C70hc (printer version), execute the calibration of the controller.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj].
5. "Printer Gamma Sensor Adj. screen"
Select the screen to be adjusted.
Note

7. Set the A4 or 8 1/2 x 11 paper. Press the Start key to output the test pattern.
8. "Place output image on original glass...screen"
Place the outputted test pattern [1] on the original glass securely against the original positioning plate/Lt [3] and the original positioning
plate/Rr [4].
Note
Set the test pattern so that the green triangular mark [2] comes to the left side. (printed side face down)
I -29
[3] [4]
[2]
[1]
8050fs1017
9. Place 10 sheets of copy paper (white) on top of the test pattern and close the DF or the platen cover.
Note
Be sure to use white copy paper. Otherwise, the printer gamma cannot be corrected properly.
10. Press [Start].

11. If the chart is scanned and it is normal, the gamma sensor adjustment will be carried out, printer gamma correction is executed and
"Completed" message will be displayed.
12. When an abnormality occurs, an error code is displayed for every cause. Correct the error referring to the following and repeat steps 6 to
11.
Error code Error Descriptions
Error 1 A crossmark cannot be detected Chart misplacement
Error 2 The chart is placed upside down Chart misplacement
Error 3 Cannot detect the chart pattern Different chart is placed
Error 4 Adjustment impossible Software bug
Error 5 Value is out of standard Readjust
Error 6 Non-volatile data abnormality Check the installation position of the
NVRAM board
Error 7 Accessing to unassigned memory Software bug
Error 8 Memory-related error Software bug
Error 9 Program error Software bug
Error 10 Chart is skewed Chart misplacement
Error 11 Image header information read error Software bug
Error 12 RGB data abnormalities Chart is different, or software bug
Error 13 Parameter setting error Software bug
Error 31 Sensor value error Readjust
Error 51 Regression calculation error Readjust
Error 52 Sequential number overflow Software bug
Error 53 Regression order error Software bug
Error 54 Select screen information error Software bug
Error 55 Color information error Software bug
5.3.26 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj. (RU) (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)
(1) Function
The printer gamma correction that is performed automatically on regular basis uses IDC sensor to read the pattern on the transfer belt.
Therefore the correction may be inaccurate depending on the characteristic changes of IDC sensor. This adjustment corrects the IDC sensor
using the color value measured by the output paper color density sensor of RU-508 or RU-509 to perform precise printer gamma correction.
(2) Usage
When a poor color reproduction results even after the "Gamma Automatic Adjustment" of the "Process Adjustment", conduct this adjustment
to correct gradation.
Note
Be sure to confirm that each set value of Y, M, C and K from [11 Test Mode] - [02 Test Pattern Output Mode] is not "0" in
advance. If any of the set value Y, M, C or K is "0", proper adjustment is not available.
Do not use colored paper or embossed paper for this adjustment. When using colored paper or embossed paper, this
adjustment is not performed properly.
To reset the data to factory default, press [Reset Adj. Data]. Press [Yes] to reset the printer gamma sensor adjustment to the
factory default data, and [No] to keep the current data.
This adjustment is available when RU-508 or RU-509 is connected.
I -30
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj (RU)].
5. "Printer Gamma Sensor Adj. screen"
Select the screen to be adjusted.
Note

7. Select the paper tray. Press the Start key to output the test pattern.
8. If the test pattern is measured and it is normal, the gamma sensor adjustment will be carried out, printer gamma correction is executed
and "Completed" message will be displayed.
9. When an abnormality occurs, an error code is displayed for every cause. Correct the error referring to the following and repeat steps 6 to
8.
Error code Error Countermeasures
Error 4 Input sensor value abnormality Check the size of the test pattern, check the
output paper density sensor
Error 31 Acquired sensor value abnormality Readjust
(gradation reverse)
Error 51 Regression calculation error Readjust
5.3.27 Printer Screen Gradation (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust tone jump (in which gradation is not continuous).
(2) Usage
This adjustment is not necessary in the field.
5.3.28 Sharpness Adjustment (Quality Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Conduct the sharpness adjustment or, this is carried out when moire reproduced.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment to change the center value of the sharpness adjustment in user mode.
Note
This adjustment reflects only to the scanned image.
method.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Sharpness Adjustment].
4. "Sharpness Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Place a "Color chart" on the original glass, select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and press Start key.
6. Press [Exit PrintMode].
7. Enter a value through the numeric buttons if necessary, and press [SET].
Setting range: -5 (soft/less moire) to +5 (sharp/more moire)
5.3.29 Contrast Adjustment (Quality Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Adjust the contrast.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment to change the center value of the contrast adjustment in user mode.
Note
I -31
This adjustment is for C7000/C6000/C6000L (copier version). C7000P/C70hc (printer version) does not have the adjustment
method.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Contrast Adjustment].
4. "Contrast Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Place a "Color chart" on the original glass, select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and press Start key.
Setting range: -5 (contrast increase) to +5 (contrast decrease)
5.3.30 Dot Detect Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Image Distinction Level)

(1) Functions
Adjust the threshold value of original image distinction.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the the dot distinction result differs from the original.
Note
The scanned original is judged to text, picture, dot, or colored text by the image processing. The screen to be used is decided
according to the result.
Use this adjustment for raising the judgment precision of the original on which the area is misjudged.
To widen the judgment area of the picture, adjust it in the user mode.
method.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Image Distinction Level].
4. "Image Distinction Level screen"
Press [01 Dot Detect Adjustment].
5. "Dot Detect Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Select A3 paper, set the original to be adjusted on the original glass, and press the start button.
7. Dot detection pattern is outputted.
This output pattern shows how the original image is judged.
Cyan section: Distinguished as dot
White part: Judged as picture
Black section: Distinguished as black text
Magenta section: Distinguished as colored text
9. "Dot Detect Adjustment screen"
Select the color to adjust, enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [SET].
Setting range: -5 (dot area decrease) to +5 (dot area increase)
5.3.31 Color Text Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Image Distinction Level)

(1) Functions
Adjust the color text distinction threshold value of the original image.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment to change the center value of the color text distinction function in user mode.
Note
method.
I -32
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Color Text Adjustment].
5. "Color Text Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
7. Color text detect pattern will be printed.
9. "Color Text Adjustment screen"
Enter a value through the numeric buttons if necessary, and press [SET].
Setting range: -5 (color text area decrease) to +5 (color text area increase)
5.3.32 Dot Detect Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Image Distinction Level)

(1) Functions
Adjust the dot distinction and text distinction threshold values of the original image.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment to change the center value of the text photo distinction function in user mode.
Note
method.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Dot/Text area adjustment].
5. "Dot/Text Area Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
7. Dot/Text detection pattern is outputted.
Cyan section: Distinguished as dot
White part: Judged as picture
9. "Dot/Text Area Adjustment screen"
Setting range: -5 (dot area increase/text area decrease) to +5 (dot area decrease/text area increase)
5.3.33 ACS Adjustment (Quality Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Adjust the color/black and white distinction threshold value.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when ACS (Automatic color selection) function does not work properly.
Note
method.
I -33
(3) Procedure
Press [05 ACS Adjustment].
4. "Place original and touch [Scan] screen"
Place an original that the ACS does not work properly on the original glass and press [Scan].
5. Next to the "Judge:", the result "Color" or "Black" will be displayed.
Setting range: -5 (black) to +5 (color)
5.3.34 AE(AES) Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment)

(1) Functions
This adjustment moves the printer gamma curve in parallel with shade direction without changing form to adjust the copy density.
(2) Usage
Adjust to change the center value selected in automatic copy density function in user mode.
Note
method.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Density Adjustment].
4. "Density Adjustment screen"
Press [01 AE(AES) Adjustment].
5. "AE(AES) Adjustment screen"
Place an original to change the AES density on the original glass and press [Scan].
6. Next to the "Result:", the numeric value will be displayed.
7. If the "RESULT" is other than 0, enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [SET].
(e.g.: If the "Result" is 2, input -2). )
8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 until the result becomes 0.
5.3.35 Copy Density Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment)

(1) Functions
(2) Usage
Adjust the density for copying.
Perform this adjustment to change the center value of the "Density Shift" in user mode.
Note
method.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Copy Density Adjustment].
5. "Copy Density Adjustment screen"
Press [] or [] to select the item to adjust.
Select the mode to adjust, select A3 or 11 X 17 paper, place a "Color chart" on the original glass, and press Start key.
9. "Copy Density Adjustment screen"
Setting range: -5 (light) to 5 +(dark)
I -34
5.3.36 Back. Removal (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment)

(1) Functions
(2) Usage
Adjust the background density (density of highlighted area) for copying.
In user mode only a batch adjustment is enabled. Therefore, it is impossible to perform adjustment respectively for original settings or color
modes.
Note
method.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Background Removal].
5. "Background Removal screen"
Select the mode to adjust, select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, place a "Test chart" on the original glass, and press Start key.
9. "Background Removal screen"
5.3.37 Bleed Prevention (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment)

(1) Functions
(2) Usage
Adjust the density of see-through image on back side of paper (density for shadow area) for copying.
In user mode only a batch adjustment is enabled. Therefore, it is impossible to perform adjustment respectively for original settings or color
modes.
Note
method.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Bleed Prevention].
5. "Bleed Prevention screen"
Select the mode to adjust, select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, place a "Test chart" on the original glass, and press Start key.
9. "Bleed Prevention screen"
Setting range: -5 (light) to 0
5.3.38 Tone Adjustment (Quality Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Conduct the tone adjustment of red, green or blue.
I -35
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment to change the center value for the "Tone Adjustment" in the user mode.
Note
method.
(3) Procedure
Adjust the density of each color; red, green and blue.
(a) Red
Press [07 Tone Adjustment].
4. "Tone Adjustment screen"
Press [01 Red].
5. "Red screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, place a "Color chart" on the original glass, and press Start key.
(b) Green
Press [02 Green].
5. "Green screen"
Press [Print Mode].
(c) Blue
Press [03 Blue].
5. "Blue screen"
Press [Print Mode].
5.3.39 Recall Standard Data (Quality Adjustment)

(1) Function
Restore the quality adjustment set values to factory initial data or installation initial data.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the initialization cannot be done because of the various change by CE.
Note
Adjustment data of "Scan Gradation/Color Adj." is not restored.
The settings of "Image Distinction Level -Dot Detect Adjustment", "ACS Adjustment" and "Density Adjustment -AE(AES)
Adjustment" are not restored by performing Recall Standard Data in Quality Adj.
I -36
(3) Procedure
Note
conducted.

5.4 Process Adjustment

5.4.1 1st Transfer Manual Adj. (High Voltage Adjustment)
Do not conduct this adjustment in the field.
5.4.2 2nd Transfer Manual Adj. (High Voltage Adjustment)

5.4.3 HV Adj.(Separation AC) (High Voltage Adjustment)

5.4.4 HV Adj. (Separation DC) (High Voltage Adjustment)

5.4.5 Pre-transfer Guide Confirm (High Voltage Adjustment)

5.4.6 Blade Setting Mode (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Cleaning after attaching toner on the transfer belt prevents damage to the transfer belt and the cleaning blade.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when replacing the intermediate transfer belt and the cleaning blade.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Process Adjustment].
2. "Process Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [02 Drum Peculiarity Adj.].
3. "Drum Peculiarity Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Blade Setting Mode].
4. "Blade Setting Mode screen"
Press [Intermediate Transfer Belt]. It completes in about 15 seconds then the message of completion appears on the screen.
5.4.7 Gamma Automatic Adj. (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment)

(1) Functions
The maximum density correction, V0 correction, Vm correction, and gamma correction are executed all at once for each line speed and
quality mode.
Note
The gamma automatic adjustment has 8 adjustments (0 to 7) but be sure to execute only "0" in the field.
"1 to 7" is the adjustment for each quality mode and "0" includes all of them.
(2) Usage
Executes the image stabilization control that is executed automatically and periodically on arbitrary timing.
Executes before color calibration of the controller.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Gamma Automatic Adj.].
4. "Gamma Automatic Adj. screen"
I -37
Press [Start]. It completes in about 3.5 minutes then the charger DC bias value for each process speed (line speed 1, 2, 3, 4, 5) and each
color (Y, M, C, K) appears, and then the message of completion appears on the screen.
Note
The gamma automatic adjustment has 8 adjustments but be sure to execute only "0" in the field.
"Gamma Automatic Adj. 0": Executes Dmax adjustment, dot diameter adjustment, and gamma adjustment to all screens.
"Gamma Automatic Adj. 1 to 7": Executes the image stabilization control adjustment to each screen.
An error code is displayed when there is any trouble. Correct the error following the list below.
Error 1: Unable to execute gamma correction because of the gamma sensor output abnormality. When the error occurs, it is
controlled by using the previous correction value.
5.4.8 Auto. Developer Charge (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Puts the developer automatically into the developing unit.
(2) Usage
Use when putting in new developer automatically.
Note
After replacing developer, do not execute printing without carrying out this adjustment.
Otherwise, a proper image density cannot be obtained, and the developers need to be replaced.
Be sure not to open the cover of the developing unit. Dust in the unit causes the image trouble.
(3) Procedure
1. Open the toner supply door section. (Refer to F.5.3.2 Opening /closing the toner supply door section.)
2. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the upper cover /Fr [2].
[2] [1]
3. Pull out the support stick [1].

4. Loosen 2 screws [2], and then remove the developer charge plate [3].
5. Loosen 2 screws [4], and then remove the developer charge funnel /Lw [5].
[2] [5] [1] [4]
[3] a03uf3c013ca
6. Install the developer charge plate [2] to the shoulder screw [1] on top of the developing unit to which the developer is charged.
I -38
[1] [2]
[1] [2]
a03uf3c014ca
7. Install the developer charge funnel /Lw [2] to the developer charge plate [1].
Note
Be sure to install the leading edge of the developer charge funnel /Lw [2] to the toner supply opening [3] of the developing
unit.
[3] [2] [1]
a03uf3c015ca
8. Install the developer charge funnel /Up [2] that is included in the developer to the developer charge funnel /Lw [1].
Note
The developer charge funnel /Up [2] is included in the developer, so be sure not to reuse it.
I -39
[2] [1]
a03uf3c016ca

Press [03 Auto. Developer Charge].
13. "Auto. Developer Charge screen"
Select the color of developer.
14. Press [Start] and then put new developer to the developer charge funnel /Up.
15. Confirm that the charge of developer is completed and then press [Cancel].
16. When charging another developer, repeat the steps 3 to 12.
17. Press [Return] to back to "Drum Peculiarity Adj. screen."
18. Replace the parts that have been installed.
19. Execute "TonerDensitySensorInit.Auto screen." (Refer to I.5.4.9 Toner Density Sensor Init. (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment))
5.4.9 Toner Density Sensor Init. (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Measure developer permeability in the developing unit with TCR sensor, memorize the input voltage obtained when the TCR sensor output
voltage became the standard value to the NVRAM board (NRB).
(2) Usage
Carry out this adjustment after new developer is charged, and adjust the standard toner concentration of the developer.
Note
After replacing developer, do not execute printing without carrying out this adjustment. Otherwise, a proper image density
cannot be obtained, and the developers need to be replaced.
The value displayed after the adjustment is a TCR sensor control voltage (input voltage) expressed in 8 bit.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Toner Density Sensor Init.].
4. "TonerDensitySensorInit.Auto screen"
Select the color of a developer that has been newly charged and then press the [Start].
5. A message "Completed" is displayed.
5.4.10 Initial Drum Rotation (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment)

(1) Functions
This operation rotates the drum at low speed to lubricate by the Lubricant applying roller it to protect the drum and the cleaning blade.
(2) Usage
Conduct this operation after replacing the drum cartridge.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Initial Drum Rotation].
4. "Initial Drum Rotation screen"
Press [Start]. It completes in about 10 seconds then the message of completion appears on the screen.
I -40
5.4.11 Toner Density Revert (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Supply toner automatically up to the standard value for the developing unit, whose output value of the TCR sensor is more than the standard
value (low toner density).
Note
When the toner density is high, set the test pattern density of the target color to 128 (set the density of other colors to 0), output
10 sheets of test pattern No.1, and check the toner density again.
(2) Usage
Recover to the normal toner density when the toner density of each color is low.
When SC that alerts low toner density occurs, recover the toner density with this recovery mode (start up the service mode).
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Toner Density Revert].
4. "Toner Density Revert screen"
Select the color(s) whose density needs to be recovered.
5. Press [Start] to supply toner to the developing unit with lower than the standard density value. When the toner concentration reaches to
the standard value, the main body stops.
Note
The output value and the state (ON/OFF) on the touch panel are corresponding to the TCR sensor output value (0V to 5V
analog display) and the state (ON/OFF) of toner supply operation.
5.4.12 Toner Density Sensor Speed (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Readjust the toner density control voltage in line speed 1 (315mm/s), line speed 3 (225mm/s), line speed 4 (207.7mm/s) and line speed 5
(150mm/s).
Note
Adjust the line speed 1, 3, 4 and 5 in C7000/C7000P/C70hc.
Adjust the line speed 4 and 5 in C6000/C6000L.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when an error (image background, toner scatter) is caused by the unstable toner density at line speed 1 (315mm/s),
line speed 3 (225mm/s, line speed 4(207.7mm/s) and line speed 5 (150mm/s).
(3) Procedure
Press [07 Toner Density Sensor Speed].
4. "Toner Density Sensor Speed screen"
Press [Start].
It stops automatically after completion of the adjustment.
Note
The output value on the touch panel is corresponding to the TCR sensor output value (8bits).
5.4.13 IDC Sensor Output (Sensor Output Confirm)

Measure uncharged potential of the transfer belt by the IDC sensors (IDCS), and check the baseline controlled voltage for the maximum density
correction. (8 bit display)
5.4.14 Toner Density Sensor Output (Sensor Output Confirm)

(1) Functions
Displays the output voltage of the TCR sensor with the analog value (v).
(2) Usage
Check the toner density level in the developer for troubleshooting.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Sensor Output Confirm].
3. "Sensor Output Confirm screen"
Press [02 Toner Density Sensor Output].
I -41
4. "Toner Density Sensor Output screen"

Press [Next] or [Previous] to select the process speed (line speed 1: 315mm/s, line speed 2: 300mm/s, line speed 3: 225mm/s, line speed
4: 207.7mm/s, line speed 5: 150mm/s) to be checked.
Note
In C7000/C7000P/C70hc, line speed 1, line speed 2, line speed 3, line speed 4, and line speed 5 can be checked.
In C6000/C6000L, line speed 2, line speed 4, and line speed 5 can be checked.
5. Select the color to be checked.

6. Press [Start] to display the output value of the selected items.
7. Press [STOP] to end the check.
8. When checking another line speed, repeat steps 4 to 7.
5.4.15 Humidity/Temperature Output (Sensor Output Confirm)

(1) Functions
Check the output of the temperature/humidity sensor on the main body/option.
(2) Usage
Check the temperature/humidity inside the machine.
Check the detecting condition of each sensor for troubleshooting.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Sensor Output Confirm].
3. "Sensor Output Confirm screen"
Press [03 Humidity/Temperature Output].
4. "Humidity/Temperature Output screen"
Press [Start] to display the humidity and temperature value of the items below.
Humidity/Temperature sensor 1: Temp/humidity sensor /1 (TEM/HUM1)
Humidity/Temperature sensor 2: Temp/humidity sensor /2 (TEM/HUM2)
Fus. Roller Center Temp.Sensor: Fusing temperature sensor /1 (TH1)
Fus. Roller Edge Temp. Sensor: Fusing temperature sensor /3 (TH3)
Fus.UnderBeltCenterTemp.Sensor: Fusing temperature sensor /2 (TH2)
5. Press [STOP] to end the check.
5.4.16 Background Margin Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment)

(1) Function
Change potential difference between the charging potential and the developing bias.
Image background: Increase the covered margin.
White spot image/carrier damages to the drum and blade: Decrease the covered margin.
Note
Do not perform this adjustment when there is no problem. Unnecessary adjustment may cause image failure (image
background, white spot image) or damages to the drum and the cleaning blade.
There are several adjustment to reduce the image background. As a priority of adjustment, adjust in the following order.
1) Develop AC Frequency
2) Covered Margin Fine Adj.
3) Toner Density Fine Adj.
The covered margin is changed by the gamma automatic adjustment after changing the setting. (Refer to I.5.4.7 Gamma
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when image background, white spots image, or carrier scattering occurs.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Process Fine Adjustment].
3. "Process Fine Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Covered Margin Fine Adj.].
4. "Covered Margin Fine Adj. screen"
Select the color(s) to be adjusted and enter the adjustment value with the numeric buttons, and press [SET].
Adjustment range: -5 (carrier scattering /white spot image caused by carrier prevention) to +5 (image background prevention)
1 step = 6V
Note
Take care that carrier scattering/white spot image caused by carrier prevention and image background prevention are trade
off. When either of them is improved, the other is worsened.
5. Press [Default] to restore the default settings.
I -42
5.4.17 Develop AC Bias Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment)

(1) Function
Change the developing AC bias.
Up the developing AC bias: Improve the developing ability.
Down the developing AC bias: Reduce the carrier scattering.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when noisy image, white spots image, or low developing ability occurs.
Note
After changing the set value, conduct the auto gamma adjustment. (Refer to I.5.4.7 Gamma Automatic Adj. (Drum Peculiarity
Adjustment))
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Develop AC Bias Fine Adj.].
4. "Develop AC Bias Fine Adj. screen"
Adjustment range: -5 (noisy image prevention) to +5 (improve developing ability)
1 step = 0.1kV
5.4.18 Develop AC Frequency (Process Fine Adjustment)

(1) Function
Change frequency of the developing AC bias to inhibit the image background, graininess, or the darker at trailing edge of the paper.
(2) Usage
Increasing the frequency of the developing AC bias improves the image background and graininess.
Lowering the frequency of the developing AC bias improves the darker at trailing edge of the paper.
Note
Take care that "image background/graininess" and "the darker at trailing edge of the paper" are trade off. When either of them is
improved, the other is worsened.
After changing the set value, conduct the auto gamma adjustment. (Refer to I.5.4.7 Gamma Automatic Adj. (Drum Peculiarity
Adjustment))
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Develop AC Frequency].
4. "Develop AC Frequency screen"
Adjustment range: -5 (improve reproducibility of outline characters on a colored background) to +5 (image background prevention)
1 step = 0.3kHz
5.4.19 Toner Density Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Change the TCR sensor control voltage.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when image background, toner scattering, carrier scattering, or white spot caused by carrier occurs.
Note
To reflect the change immediately, conduct the toner refresh mode (Machine Screen - Adjustment - Execute Adjust Operation)
and the gamma automatic adjustment. (Refer to I.5.4.7 Gamma Automatic Adj. (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment))
(3) Procedure
I -43

Press [04 Toner Density Fine Adj.].
4. "Toner Density Fine Adj. screen"
Adjustment range: -5 (image background, toner scattering prevention) to +5 (carrier scattering, white spot caused by carrier prevention)
1 step = 0.1%
5.4.20 Drum Small Rotation Interval (Interval/Quantity Adj.)

(1) Function
Change interval of low humidity environment correction control (rotates drums periodically).
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when image failures caused by a uneven drum charging potential (that occurs easily with low humidity) occurs.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Interval/Quantity Adj.].
3. "Interval/Quantity Adj. Menu screen"
Press [01 Drum Small Rotation Interval].
4. "Drum Small Rotation Interval screen"
Enter the adjustment value with the numeric buttons and press [SET].
Adjustment range: +1 to +5
1 step = 1 minute
5.4.21 Automatic Refresh Interval (Interval/Quantity Adj.)

(1) Function
Set the execution intervals and the toner consumption amount of the toner refresh mode*.
* Checks the average of print coverage for each color with each specific drive distance of the developing roller /K and consumes a certain
amount of toner for the color that the density is lower than 5% converted in A4 size after completion of printing.
(Toner refresh required time: About 2.5 minutes)
(2) Usage
Change the setting when rough image, overflow toner, or white spot occurs on the low coverage printing (5% or lower for each color in A4
size).
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Automatic Refresh Interval].
4. "Automatic Refresh Interval screen"
Specify the settings of each adjustment item, "Execution existence", "Execution frequency" and "Refresh quantity", and press [OK]
to enable the new settings.
"Execution existence": [OFF], [ON]
"Execution frequency":
[small] - Equivalent to A4 continuous 1,000 prints
[middle] - Equivalent to A4 continuous 500 prints
[large] - Equivalent to A4 continuous 330 prints
"Refresh quantity":
[small] - Equivalent to A3 solid 3 sheets
[middle] - Equivalent to A3 solid 5 sheets
[large] - Equivalent to A3 solid 8 sheets
Note
The execution frequency varies depending on the environmental temperature and print mode.
5. Press [Cancel] to cancel the operation.
5.4.22 Toner Density Sensor Interval (Interval/Quantity Adj.)

(1) Functions
Change the correction interval of the TCR sensor control voltage at line speed 1 (315mm/s), line speed 3 (225mm/s), line speed 4 (207.7mm/
s), line speed 5 (150mm/s).
Execute automatically for every specified drive distance of the developing roller /K.
Note
In C7000/C7000P/C70hc, change the correction interval of the line speed 1, line speed 3, line speed 4, line speed 5.
I -44
In C6000/C6000L, change the correction interval of the line speed 4 and line speed 5.
(2) Usage
This adjustment does not affect the productivity. Therefore, do not set it to the direction to widen the interval.
When there is a claim that the stabilization control between jobs is too much, set it to the direction to widen the interval. However, since the
interval of the toner density correction control gets extended at line speed 1 (315mm/s), line speed 3 (225mm/s), line speed 4 (207.7mm/s),
line speed 5 (150mm/s), the density variation tends to occur.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Toner Dens. Sensor Interval].
4. "Toner Dens. Sensor Interval screen"
Select an interval and press [OK].
5. Press [Cancel] to cancel the operation.
5.4.23 Recall Standard Data

(1) Functions
Reset the adjustment values of the process adjustment to the factory initial data or the installation initial data.
Note
Items that can be recalled
1st Transfer Manual Adj.
2nd Transfer Manual Adj.
HV Adj.(Separation AC)
HV Adj.(Separation DC)
Charge potential automatic adjustment
LD Bias Adjustment
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the initialization cannot be done because of the change by CE.
(3) Procedure
Note
conducted.

5.5 System Setting

5.5.1 Software DIPSW setting procedures
(1) OUTLINE
Set the software DIPSW.
Note
Do not change any switch not described in the service manual.
(2) Procedure
Press [03 System Setting].
2. "System Setting Menu screen"
Press [01 Software DIPSW Setting].
3. "Software switch setting mode screen"
Press [] / [] or numeric buttons after pressing the "DIPSW number" and "Bit number" buttons.
4. Press [On (1)] or [Off (0)] to set the selected bit number ON/OFF.
I -45
(3) Software DIPSW setting screen
[1]
[2] [3] [4] [5]
[1] DIPSW data (indicates the 8bit values of the selected [2] DIPSW number
DIPSW numbers in hexadecimals from 00 to FF.)
[3] Bit number (0 to 7) [4] Bit data: 1:ON, 0:OFF
[5] Numeric buttons [6]
5.5.2 Software DIPSW setting list

Default setting
DIPSW Bit Function Set value
Japan Inch Metric
1 0 Display of process adjustment on user screen 0: Disabled 0 0 0
1 Note display when fusing JAM occurs 1: Enabled 0 0 0
Displays the handling for the fusing JAM on
"Paper Setting" screen - [Change IndividualSet].
To enable this setting, enable DIPSW1-0
Process adjustment user screen display.
2 Print stop method after displaying toner supply Stops after ejecting paper in the 1 1 1
3 or waste toner full display machine: 1-3=0, 1-2=0 0 0 0
(Decide the copier operation when detecting no Stops at a break between copy
toner or waste toner full.) set: 1-3=0, 1-2=1
Stops at the end of the current
job: 1-3=1, 1-2=0
Does not stop: 1-3=1, 1-2=1
4 Printing prohibition when the maintenance count 0: Disabled 0 0 0
is reached 1: Enabled
5 Number of allowed print quantity after reaching 1,000Print: 1-7=0, 1-6=0, 1-5=0 0 0 0
6 the maintenance count 2,000Print: 1-7=0, 1-6=0, 1-5=1 0 0 0
3,000Print: 1-7=0, 1-6=1, 1-5=0
7 4,000Print: 1-7=0, 1-6=1, 1-5=1 0 0 0
5,000Print: 1-7=1, 1-6=0, 1-5=0
1,000Print: 1-7=1, 1-6=0, 1-5=1
1,000Print: 1-7=1, 1-6=1, 1-5=0
1,000Print: 1-7=1, 1-6=1, 1-5=1
2 0 Hard disk drive connection recognition 0: Disabled 0 0 0
1: Enabled
1 - 0: - 0 0 0
2 1: - 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 Adjustment value combination ratio in the 5:5 = new:old adjustment value: 0 0 0
density balance adjustment 2-6=0, 2-5=0
Set the combination (merging) ratio of 7:3 = new:old adjustment value:
adjustment value when registering the profile 2-6=0, 2-5=1
that has been registered on "Machine Screen" - 3:7 = new:old adjustment value:
"Adjustment" - "Density Balance Adjustment". 2-6=1, 2-5=0
This setting changes the color/gradation 6:4 = new:old adjustment value:
drastically because of the change of engine 2-6=1, 2-5=1
process element. Use this setting to change the
ratio for merging the profile.
Note
I -46
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
6 Merging the profile is available between the 0 0 0
data whose conditions; "Screen", "Paper
Type", and "Weight" are matched.
7 Polygon motor rotation speed switchover 0: Speed when printing 0 0 0
Polygon motor rotation speed switchover is completes
available to reduce the operation sound during 1: 2/3 speed
idling.
The default setting keeps the speed of previous
print.
3 0 - 0: - 0 0 0
1: -
1 Malfunction code latch (C1540 to 1562, 3501 to 0: Unlatched 0 0 0
3916) 1: Latched
2 Reverse de-curler roller preliminary rotation 0: Disabled 0 0 0
1: Enabled
3 - 0: - 0 0 0
4 1: - 0 0 0
5 The maximum stacking capacity selection in 0: Stops at the tray middle 0 0 0
small-size (longer side 250mm to 319mm) of position sensor (PS6) (loading
FS-521 in shift mode 1500 sheets)
The maximum stacking capacity of the main tray 1: Stops at the tray lower limit
can be changed from 1500 to 3000 in FS-521 sensor (PS3) (loading 3000
shift mode. sheets)
6 I/O check mode output15 memory clear 0: Disabled 0 0 0
1: Enabled
7 Carrying over the job for next day 0: Enabled 0 0 0
Switches the function of carrying over the job for 1: Disabled
next day
4 0 Air assist shutter control (PF) 0: Enabled 0 0 0
1:Disabled
1 Paper exit de-curler roller pressure setting /1 0: Normal 0 0 0
1: For moisturized paper
2 - 0: - 0 1 0
3 1: - 0 0 1
4 Paper exit de-curler roller pressure setting /2 0: Normal 0 0 0
1: For crease at leading edge in
duplex printing
5 APS when change magnification 0: Enabled 0 1 0
1:Disabled
6 - 0: - 0 0 0
7 1: - 0 0 0
5 0 For fusing unit per size 0: Disabled 0 0 0
Set this setting for using the fusing unit per size 1: Enabled
when paper edge scratches occur on the image.
The fusing unit A/B is recognized with the short
connector on the fusing side and can be counted
per fusing unit.
Note
When this setting is enabled, ORU-M
cannot be used.
1 - 0: - 0 0 0
2 1: - 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 Fusing jam blank paper cleaning 0: Enabled 0 0 0
To clean the toner on the fusing belt, a screen to 1:Disabled
select whether to feed blank paper or not
appears on the touch panel at printing after the
fusing related jam process.
The blank paper is output to the tray other than
during printing.
5 - 0: - 0 0 0
1: -
6 Life message display timing of the dust proof 0: 180,000 prints: near life 0 0 0
filter /1 (200,000 prints: life)
1: 200,000 prints: near life
(220,000 prints: life)
I -47
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
7 Print at reaching life of the dust proof filter /1 0: Allow 0 0 0
1:Restrict
6 0 Faulty part isolation: FD-fold, punch function 0: Normal 0 0 0
1 Faulty part isolation: FD main tray paper exit 1: Unusable 0 0 0
2 Faulty part isolation: FD post insert function 0 0 0
3 Faulty part isolation: FS staple function 0 0 0
4 Faulty part isolation: FS main tray paper exit 0 0 0
5 Faulty part isolation: FS 0 0 0
6 Faulty part isolation: LS main tray paper exit 0 0 0
(1st)
7 Faulty part isolation: LS main tray paper exit 0 0 0
(2nd)
7 0 Faulty part isolation: SD saddle stitch 0 0 0
1 Faulty part isolation: SD multi-center fold 0 0 0
2 Faulty part isolation: SD multi-tri-fold 0 0 0
3 Faulty part isolation: SD trimming 0 0 0
4 Faulty part isolation: SD-tandem conveyance, 0 0 0
sub tray paper exit
5 Faulty part isolation: PB cover paper insertion 0 0 0
6 Faulty part isolation: PB binder function 0 0 0
7 Faulty part isolation: PB 0 0 0
8 0 - 0: - 0 0 0
1 1: - 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 For JAM in the reverse paper exit section 0: Disabled 0 0 0
Prevents paper from overlapping when JAM 1: Enabled (jam prevention)
occurs on the thin paper, 81/2 x 11 size paper in
the reverse paper exit section by increasing the
reversing speed.
6 - 0: - 0 0 0
1: -
7 Custom size counter threshold setting 0: Not display 0 0 0
When setting the DIPSW to 1, the custom size 1: Display
threshold of the counter per size can be set. Set
the threshold from "Service Mode" - "04
Counter/Data" - "Custom Counter Threshold
Set."
Note
In the case of the custom size paper, it may
be counted as 2 even when the paper length
in the sub scan direction is shorter than the
value set in DIPSW33-2, 3 TC double count
size setting.
This case occurs when this set value is
included in the threshold set range of
DIPSW8-7.
9 0 - 0: - 0 0 0
1 1: - 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 Copy quantity limit No limit: 9-7=0, 9-6=0, 9-5=0, 0 0 0
5 9-4=0 0 0 0
1 sheet: 9-7=0, 9-6=0, 9-5=0,
6 9-4=1 0 0 0
3 sheets: 9-7=0, 9-6=0, 9-5=1,
9-4=0
5 sheets: 9-7=0, 9-6=0, 9-5=1,
9-4=1
9 sheets: 9-7=0, 9-6=1, 9-5=0,
9-4=0
10 sheets: 9-7=0, 9-6=1, 9-5=0,
9-4=1
I -48
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
7 20 sheets: 9-7=0, 9-6=1, 9-5=1, 0 0 0
9-4=0
30 sheets: 9-7=0, 9-6=1, 9-5=1,
9-4=1
50 sheets: 9-7=1, 9-6=0, 9-5=0,
9-4=0
99 sheets: 9-7=1, 9-6=0, 9-5=0,
9-4=1
No limit: 9-7=1, 9-6=0, 9-5=1,
9-4=0
No limit: 9-7=1, 9-6=0, 9-5=1,
9-4=1
No limit: 9-7=1, 9-6=1, 9-5=0,
9-4=0
No limit: 9-7=1, 9-6=1, 9-5=0,
9-4=1
No limit: 9-7=1, 9-6=1, 9-5=1,
9-4=0
No limit: 9-7=1, 9-6=1, 9-5=1,
9-4=1
10 0 Banner setting 0: The normal operation mode 0 0 0
Switches to the banner operation mode. 1: The banner operation mode
Note
The banner print is out of specification.
1 Hard disk image memory 0: Disabled 1 1 1
1: Enabled
2 - 0: - 0 0 0
3 1: - 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 Custom size tolerance setting 0: 2mm 0 0 0
1: 10mm
6 Image rotation for the custom size paper and 0: Rotate 0 0 0
large size paper 1: Not rotate
7 - 0: - 0 0 0
11 0 1: - 0 0 0
1 Productivity down during toner supplying 0: Normal toner supplying 0 0 0
operation operation (productivity not
Toner empty may be indicated right after reduced during toner supplying
replacing the toner bottle.It occurs when the operation
toner is not supplied to the toner hopper due to 1: Extended toner supplying
the low fluidity of the toner in the toner bottle. operation (productivity reduced
When this problem occurs, set the setting to 1 to during toner supplying
prevent the toner empty indication with the toner operation
bottle not empty.
Note
When this setting is set to 1, it performs the
toner bottle rotation operation (toner
supplying operation to the toner hopper)
longer time than usual control. At this time,
the paper interval is widened to reduce the
productivity.
2 SD multi-center folding number limit 0: Enabled 0 0 0
1:Disabled (up to 50 sheets)
3 Automatic restart of the job under suspension 0: Disabled 0 0 0
1: Enabled
4 - 0: - 0 0 0
1: -
I -49
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
5 Thick BK Mode setting 0: Disabled 0 0 0
Reduces the banding which occurs on 230mm 1: Enabled
away from the paper leading edge at printing the
B/W half tone image on thick paper.
Set this setting to "1" to display "Thick BK Mode"
on the User Setting/Administrator Setting so that
the user can turn ON/OFF the banding reduce
mode.
When the mode is set to ON, the 1st transfer
roller of each YMC color is pressed at printing in
B/W mode and operates in color mode.
Note
Use only thick paper on which the banding
occurs.
Since it operates in color mode even for the
print in B/W mode, the total counter is
counted as B/W and the maintenance
counter is counted as color. (Developing of
YMC is not executed but the agitation of the
developing unit is executed. Therefore, the
life of the developer is shorten.)
Toner scattering or color image trouble may
occur when a color print is executed after
using this mode for the continuous print with
1000 sheets of paper or more.
6 Automatic paper supply 0 0 0
7 Jam code display 0 0 0
12 0 Counter per mode (2) 0: No.1 to No.9 Not display the 0 0 0
count per color mode
1: No.1 to No.9 Display the
count per color mode
1 OFF setting of auto low power and auto shut off 0: One is possible 0 0 0
1: Both are possible
2 - 0: - 0 0 0
3 1: - 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 Erratic pagination detection 0: Disabled 0 0 0
Setting this setting to 1 detects the erratic 1: Enabled
pagination during job and the print operation is
stopped. The following patterns can be detected;
page missing, page switching, page disordering,
page overlapping, and mis-inserted number of
blank page.
7 Konica Minolta logo when power switch is turned 0: Enabled 0 0 0
ON 1:Disabled
13 0 Faulty part isolation: Multi-punch function (GP) 0: Normal 0 0 0
1 Faulty part isolation: PB-503 subsequent stage 1: Unusable 0 0 0
FNS
2 Faulty part isolation: RU-509 humidifier function 0 0 0
3 Faulty part isolation: RU-509 color sensor unit 0 0 0
4 - 0: - 0 0 0
1: -
I -50
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
5 Output paper density adjustment exit tray 0: Disabled 0 0 0
switchover for the test pattern 1: Enabled
This switch is for switching the sub tray on which
the test pattern of the output paper density
adjustment is ejected. When the output paper
density adjustment is performed while the sub
tray is set as the tray for the normal paper, the
normal paper and the test pattern are mixed on
the sub tray. When this setting is set to "1", the
test pattern is ejected on the sub tray other than
that for the normal paper. This setting is also
applied to the sample print and the needless tab
exit.
Note
When this setting is set to "1", the
productivity is reduced.
Both of the normal paper and needless
paper are ejected on the same sub tray even
after setting this setting to "1", when there is
no other way but to eject on the same sub
tray.
6 Black-and-white quality adjustment of Network 0 0 0
scanner
The purpose of this setting is to improve the
gradation of black-and-white 2-value scan.
When this setting is set to "1", the error diffusion
operation is performed in the black-and-white
mode of the Network scanner. "Quality Adj." in
"Scan Settings" can be adjusted.
Note
The setting to "1" is valid only when IC-601
is connected. When the other controller is
connected, do not set this setting to "1".
When this setting is set to "1", the
recognition rate of OCR is decreased.
7 Flat-staple jam recovery operation setting 0: Page recovery 0 0 0
When the staple jam in FS-521 occurs and the 1: Copy recovery
paper remaining inside the stacker is removed
by the operator, the missing pages or uneven
stapling occurs. To prevent the missing pages or
uneven stapling, set this setting to 1 to display
an additional message for jam cleaning.
14 0 Recall previous job when reserving next job 0: Disabled 0 0 0
The setting condition for copy can be kept for 1: Enabled
the next job by "Pre-Job Recall."
1 Utility counter display switchover 0: Normal display 0 0 0
1: Counter display per size
2 Printer 1200dpi compression mode Standard compression (image 0 0 0
Use this mode when image deterioration occurs area resolution priority): 14-3=0,
on the border of the image area or jaggy occurs 14-2=0 (Controller image
on the outlines of the letters or lines of the image compression setting:
area. [Standard], [Resolution Priority])
By setting to the standard compression (image Antialiasing compression
area resolution priority): 14-3=0, 14-2=0, the (image area resolution priority):
image area is also processed in 1200dpi. 14-3=0, 14-2=1 (not used)
Note (Controller image compression
This setting is associated with "Utility" - setting: "Anti-aliasing",
"Administrator Setting" - "System Setting" - "Resolution Priority")
"Expert Adjustment"- "Image Quality Setting Standard compression (image
"- "06 Controller Image Comp. Set" area resolution priority): 14-3=1,
14-2=0 (Controller image
compression setting:
"Standard", "Gradation Priority")
Antialiasing compression
(image area gradation priority):
14-3=1, 14-2=1 (Controller
image compression setting:
"Anti-aliasing", "Gradation
Priority")
I -51
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
3 Standard compression (image 1 1 1
area resolution priority): 14-3=0,
[Standard], [Resolution Priority])
(image area resolution priority):
14-3=0, 14-2=1 (Controller
"Anti-aliasing", "Resolution
Priority")
Standard compression (image
area resolution priority): 14-3=1,
"Standard", "Gradation Priority")
(image area gradation priority):
14-3=1, 14-2=1 (Controller
"Anti-aliasing", "Gradation
Priority")
4 For copitrak 0: Disabled 0 0 0
Set to 1 when connecting the billing 1: Enabled
management device from copitrak. The interface
specification is as follows.
RS232C
Baud rate 9600
Bits 8
No parity
No flow control
5 ISO Metric mode 0: JIS 0 0 1
1:ISO
6 HDD Encryption button display 0: Disabled 0 0 0
Displays [Encrypt] button with [HDD Store] 1: Enabled
button on [JOB LIST] - [Hold Job] screen.
Set this setting enabled to encrypt the hold job
stored in HDD.
7 CSRC used NIC 0:Controller NIC 0 0 0
1:Main body NIC
15 0 ORU-M operator release setting 0: ORU-M unavailable 0 0 0
1: ORU-M available
1 - 0: - 0 0 0
1: -
2 PM life display 0: Enabled 0 0 0
1:Disabled
3 Finishing option alarm stop Stops immediately after 0 0 0
4 Select the alarm stop condition. Alarm stop detection: 15-4=0, 15-3=0 0 0 0
means to detect the next function. Stops at a break between print
FD/FS/LS tray lower limit, FD/FS/LS/SD tray set after detection: 15-4=0,
paper full, FD/PK punch scraps full, FS staple 15-3=1
scraps full, SD trimming scraps full Does not stop while printing:
15-4=1, 15-3=0
Does not stop while printing:
15-4=1, 15-3=1
5 CS Remote Care recognition 0: Disabled 0 0 0
6 Address reset after scanning 1: Enabled 0 0 0
7 LDAP function 0 0 0
Use this function to search E-mail address using
LDAP server.
When setting to 1 (enabled), "LDAP Search"
button is displayed from "Scanner" - "E-mail" -
"Search" and enables the E-mail address
search.
(Need to turn ON/OFF the main body after
changing the setting.)
16 0 Scanner magnification setting 0 0 0
1 Box name input in Japanese 0 0 0
2 - 0: - 0 0 0
3 1: - 0 0 0
I -52
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
4 Utility menu mode installation date display 0: Enabled 0 0 0
1:Disabled
5 Dehumidification heater temperature control Environment temperature + 6 0 0 0
6 (LU/PF) C: 16-6=0, 16-5=0 0 0 0
With LU/PF option dehumidifier heater is Environment temperature + 8
connected, this switch is used to set control C: 16-6=0, 16-5=1
temperature when dehumidifier fan heater Environment temperature +10
control is set to [Compulsive ON] in the Utility C: 16-6=1, 16-5=0
mode. Environment temperature + 6
C: 16-6=1, 16-5=1
7 ORU-M developing unit counter setting 0: Disabled 0 0 0
User can enter the life counter (distance and 1: Enabled
quantity) of the developing unit.
17 0 - 0: - 0 0 0
1 1: - 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 Density selection at scanning tab paper Brightness level 80: 17-6=0, 0 0 0
5 (Set the background optical density at scanning 17-5=0, 17-4=0 0 0 0
tab paper.) Brightness level 40 (weakest):
6 17-6=0, 17-5=0, 17-4=1 0 0 0
Brightness level 60: 17-6=0,
17-5=1, 17-4=0
17-5=1, 17-4=1
17-5=0, 17-4=0
17-5=0, 17-4=1
17-5=1, 17-4=0
Brightness level 255
(strongest): 17-6=1, 17-5=1,
17-4=1
7 Default change for the tray humidifier setting 0: ON 0 0 0
Switch the default of humidifier ON and OFF 1: OFF
(which is set automatically based on the paper
type) for the plain or fine paper through the
paper setting of the tray.
18 0 Faulty part isolation: Tray /1 0: Normal 0 0 0
1 Faulty part isolation: Tray /2 1: Unusable 0 0 0
2 Faulty part isolation: Tray /3 0 0 0
3 Faulty part isolation: Tray /4 (LU) 0 0 0
4 Print during dehumidification heater temperature 0: Restrict 0 0 0
control (LU/PF) 1: Allow
5 Faulty part isolation: FS center folding, saddle 0: Normal 0 0 0
stitch 1: Unusable
6 Faulty part isolation: PI 0 0 0
7 Faulty part isolation: HDD 0 0 0
19 0 - 0: - 0 0 0
1: -
1 Fusing upper and lower roller temperature -30 C: 19-3=0, 19-2=0, 19-1=0 1 1 1
2 selection -20 C: 19-3=0, 19-2=0, 19-1=1 1 1 1
Change the standard control temperature of -10 C: 19-3=0, 19-2=1, 19-1=0
3 fusing. Decrease temperature against paper Standard: 19-3=0, 19-2=1, 0 0 0
curling or waving and increase temperature 19-1=1
against insufficient fusing or fusing winding jam. Upper roller standard, lower
roller +10 C: 19-3=1, 19-2=0,
19-1=0
Standard: 19-3=1, 19-2=0,
19-1=1
Standard: 19-3=1, 19-2=1,
19-1=0
Standard: 19-3=1, 19-2=1,
19-1=1
4 Multi-feed detection (PF) 0: Enabled 0 0 0
1: Disabled
I -53
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
5 Faulty part isolation: PK 0: Normal 0 0 0
1: Unusable
6 Developing motor stop control during printing Normal (automatic switchover): 0 0 0
7 19-7=0, 19-6=0 0 0 0
Rotation at 1/4 speed when
image is not developed:
19-7=0, 19-6=1
OFF when image is not
developed: 19-7=1, 19-6=0
Normal (automatic switchover):
19-7=1, 19-6=1
20 0 Group staple 0: Disabled 0 0 0
1: Enabled
1 Image scanning area with image shift 0: Normal 0 0 0
1: Original priority
2 Total page number standard in stamp mode 0: Based on original 0 0 0
1: Based on transfer paper
3 - 0: - 0 0 0
4 1: - 0 0 0
5 Curl adjustment setting after auto reset 0: Not reset 0 0 0
Reset the value of "Paper Setting" - "Curl 1: Reset
Adjustment" to 0 at auto reset and set whether
to reset the humidifier setting to default or not.
Note
The default (ON/OFF) of the humidifier
setting differs depending on the paper type
and weight.
6 - 0: - 0 0 0
7 1: - 0 0 0
21 0 PB perfect binding limit number switchover 0: Fine/Color/Coated table 0 0 0
1: Plain table
1 PB warm-up control switchover (effective by 0: Warm-up during power ON 1 1 1
power OFF/ON after the setting change) 1: No warm-up during power
ON
2 PB heater control switchover (effective by power 0: Heater turns OFF 0 0 0
OFF/ON after the setting change) automatically in 1 minute after
finishing perfect binding.
1: Heater does not turn OFF
automatically in 1 minute after
finishing perfect binding.
3 257 to 300g/m2 paper exit with its face up 0: Restrict 0 0 0
1: Allow
4 - 0: - 0 0 0
5 1: - 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
22 0 Machine NIC setting 0: Disabled 1 1 1
1: Enabled
1 Number of punch holes (effective by power OFF/ 2-Hole: 22-2=0, 22-1=0 1 1 0
2 ON after the setting change) 2/3-hole switchover: 22-2=0, 0 0 1
Change the prohibition control by paper size, 22-1=1
which differs depending on the number of punch 2/4-hole switchover Swedish 4-
holes. Also change the number of holes on the holes: 22-2=1, 22-1=0
punch hole select screen of user mode. -: 22-2=1, 22-1=1
3 Image position for the custom size original 0: Based on user selection 0 0 0
(when using DF) 1: Based on APS at DF
4 Power save key function 0: Enabled 0 0 0
1:Disabled
5 SD trimming board adjustment display 0: Disabled 0 0 0
1: Enabled
6 Operation when staple empty of FS 0:Staple supply request 0 0 0
1: Selecting between staple
supply or staple release
7 - 0: - 0 0 0
23 0 1: - 0 0 0
I -54
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
1 Operation when stores the maximum hold job 0: Not delete automatically 0 0 0
100 hold jobs can be stored at maximum. This (restrict to receive copier/printer
function sets the operation when 100 jobs are hold job)
stored. 1: Delete the oldest hold job
and receive new job
2 Precision of the color registration automatic 0: Normal 0 0 0
correction (during printing) 1: Fine
Change the accuracy of color registration
correction that is performed periodically during
printing. If fine is selected, the registration
accuracy improves by approx. 0.5 pixels, but the
correction time takes 2 minutes longer.
3 Control of the color registration automatic 0: Enabled 0 0 0
correction (periodical correction) 1:Disabled
Down time while in the continuous printing is
reduced by disable the color registration
correction that is performed periodically. (Color
registration correction when the fusing
temperature is lower than the specified
temperature at power ON is not omitted.)
4 Color registration automatic correction in main 0 0 0
scan direction (periodical correction)
The color registration correction that is
performed periodically can be disabled in the
main scan direction only. This is used
temporarily when there is a registration error
along the main scan as a result of a trouble
around the transfer belt unit, or when isolating
faulty part.
5 Gamma correction (IC) 1 1 1
6 FS-521 rear side staple angle (effective by 0: 45 degrees diagonal 0 0 0
power OFF/ON after the setting change) 1:Parallel
7 Punch auto switching (PK/FD) (effective by 0: Disabled 1 1 1
power OFF/ON after the setting change) 1: Enabled
24 0 Simple-gamma correction counter reset 0: Reset when print job is 0 0 0
started
1: Not reset when print job is
started
1 Image stabilization control during idling 0: Disabled 0 0 0
Switches the image stabilization control during 1: Enabled
idling.
When the environmental humidity during idling
reaches the specified level while this setting is
disabled, the image stabilization control is
executed before starting next job.
Since the image stabilization control is executed
at starting job after idling, there is a waiting time
at this point.
While this setting is enabled, the image
stabilization control is executed when the
environmental humidity during idling reaches the
specified level.
Since the image stabilization control is executed
when the environmental humidity during idling
reaches the specified level, there is fewer
waiting time at starting printing. However, since
the number of executing the image stabilization
control increases under the environment with
large humidity gap, the lives of the developer
and drum are shorten.
2 Image stabilization control 0: Enabled 0 0 0
1:Disabled
I -55
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
3 Image stabilization priority periodic adjustment 0: Enabled 0 0 0
When [Stability] is selected from "Utility" - 1: Disabled
"Quality Adjustment" - [04 Stabilization Adj.
Setting] and the color and image density are
largely changed before and after the image
stabilization control between jobs, change the
setting to disabled.
When this setting is set to disabled and
[Stability] is selected, the job is stopped and the
image stabilization control is not executed on the
continuous printing.
4 Developing preparatory rotation after long time Not execute: 24-5=0, 24-4=0 0 0 0
5 idling Every 1 hour during idling: 0 0 0
Enable this setting when the image density is 24-5=0, 24-4=1
not stable after long time idling. At starting printing after idling
Select one of the developing preparatory for more than 1 hour: 24-5=1,
rotation after long time idling from 3 patterns to 24-4=0
set. However, the more the number of the -: 24-5=1, 24-4=1
preparatory rotation is, the shorter the lives of
the developer and drum are.
6 - 0: - 0 0 0
7 1: - 0 0 0
25 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 Color registration automatic correction control Enabled: 25-4=0, 25-3=0 0 0 0
4 Change the timing of periodical color registration Disabled: 25-4=0, 25-3=1 0 0 0
correction control or disable the correction. No performed during printing:
Enabled: Correction is performed by suspending 25-4=1, 25-3=0
print at specified print. -: 25-4=1, 25-3=1
Disable: Correction is omitted temporarily to
reduce down time when the machine cannot be
used with malfunction code related to the IDC
sensor.
No performed during printing: Correction that is
performed by suspending print at every specified
print is performed after the print job to reduce
down time.
5 Precision of the color registration automatic 0: Normal 0 0 0
correction 1: Speed priority
Change the accuracy of color registration
correction that is performed automatically. If
speed preference is selected, the correction time
can be shorten. Correction time of "speed
preference" is approx. 30 seconds.
6 - 0: - 0 0 0
1: -
7 Dehumidification heater 0: Enabled 0 0 0
1:Disabled
26 0 Trigger judgment of the color registration 0: Process mount temperature 0 0 0
automatic correction (Execute the color registration
Set the standard to judge the timing to execute correction when the process
the color registration correction. mount temperature changes
more than the specified level
from the previous correction.)

1: Number of print pages
(Execute the color registration
correction after printing
specified pages from the
previous correction.)
I -56
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
1 Drum speed automatic adjustment 0: Disabled 1 1 1
Execute "Color Registration Auto.Adj." from 1: Enabled
"Service Mode" - "Machine Adjustment" -
"Printer Adjustment" to adjust the drum speed to
the proper speed for the intermediate transfer
belt speed automatically before the color
registration automatic adjustment.
Set this setting disabled when a trouble occurs
in the drum speed automatic adjustment or the
color registration automatic adjustment.
Note
Do not disable this setting normally.
2 - 0: - 0 0 0
1: -
3 Multi-feed detection (PI/FD) (effective by power 0: Enabled 0 0 0
OFF/ON after the setting change) 1:Disabled
4 Printer auto centering correction (LU/PF) 0 0 0
5 Printer auto centering correction (ADU) 0 0 0
6 - 0: - 0 0 0
7 1: - 0 0 0
27 0 0 0 0
1 Band creation control for drum cleaning Create under high temperature 0 0 0
As the default setting, the toner band is created environment: 27-2=0, 27-1=0
on specified paper intervals to prevent lines in Create under high temperature
the sub scan direction under a high temperature environment and normal
environment. temperature environment:
NOTE 27-2=0, 27-1=1
When the lines in the sub scan direction Create under any environment:
occur on the half tone image to factors other 27-2=1, 27-1=0
than the high temperature environments, set Not create: 27-2=1, 27-1=1
this setting to "Create under any
environment" to prevent the lines in the sub
scan direction. However, the productivity is
reduced.
The productivity is improved by setting this
setting to "Not create" when the image
quality does not matter.
When setting to "Create under any
environment", cleaning fault may occur
under the low humidity environment.
The effect is not seen right after changing
the setting. Therefore, print around 500
sheets (A4) after changing the setting.
This setting is associated with "Utility" -
"Administrator Setting" - "System Setting" -
"Expert Adjustment"- "Process Setting "- "04
FD Line Reduction Mode"
I -57
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
2 Band creation control for drum cleaning 0 0 0
As the default setting, the toner band is created
on specified paper intervals to prevent lines in
the sub scan direction under a high temperature
environment.
NOTE
When the lines in the sub scan direction
occur on the half tone image to factors other
than the high temperature environments, set
this setting to "Create under any
environment" to prevent the lines in the sub
scan direction. However, the productivity is
reduced.
The productivity is improved by setting this
setting to "Not create" when the image
quality does not matter.
When setting to "Create under any
environment", cleaning fault may occur
under the low humidity environment.
The effect is not seen right after changing
the setting. Therefore, print around 500
sheets (A4) after changing the setting.
This setting is associated with "Utility" -
"Administrator Setting" - "System Setting" -
"Expert Adjustment"- "Process Setting "- "04
FD Line Reduction Mode"
3 Fusing separation fan abnormality detection 0: Enabled 0 0 0
Enables the main body temporarily when a fan 1:Disabled
abnormality of the fusing separation fans /1
(FM7), /2 (FM8) and /3 (FM9) occurs.
Note
Set this setting disabled to activate the
machine without rotating the fan when an
error code related to FM7, FM8, FM9 occurs.
Therefore, a wrapping jam in the fusing
section may occur.
4 - 0: - 0 0 0
5 1: - 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
28 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
29 0 Default switch on the ticket edit screen 0: Current Sheet 0 0 0
Set the default to be reflected from "Paper 1: All Sheet
Setting" - "Paper Type" on the job ticket edit
screen.
1 LS main tray paper exit limit switchover 0: Limit by weight 0 0 0
1: 5000 sheets uniformly
2 - 0: - 0 0 0
1: -
3 Inclusion of proof copy to the set copy quantity 0: Disabled 0 0 0
1: Enabled
4 - 0: - 0 0 0
5 1: - 0 0 0
6 PB perfect binding minimum number of the 0: Follow the setting of the 0 0 0
inside paper Utility menu
1: 6 sheets (81g/m2 or more)
7 - 0: - 0 0 0
30 0 1: - 0 0 0
1 Restriction of the display of the service mode 0: Disabled 0 0 0
"List output" 1: Enabled
I -58
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
2 - 0: - 0 0 0
3 1: - 1 1 1
4 0 0 0
5 PB perfect binding limit (includes Z-Fold) 0: Enabled 0 0 0
1:Disabled
6 - 0: - 0 0 0
7 1: - 0 0 0
31 0 1 1 1
1 SRA4, SRA3 main tray paper exit of FS-612 0: Disabled 0 0 0
1: Enabled
2 Z-fold max. paper exit capacity: FS-521 main 50 sheets: 31-3=0, 31-2=0 0 0 0
3 tray 40 sheets: 31-3=0, 31-2=1 0 0 0
Z-fold, center-fold max paper exit capacity: FD 30 sheets: 31-3=1, 31-2=0
main tray 20 sheets: 31-3=1, 31-2=1
Set the max stacking capacity of paper which is
Z-folded or center-folded by FD on the FS or FD
main tray during continuous printing. If folding
performance is poor and causing paper jam or
dropping from tray, reduce the max. stacking
capacity of folded paper using this switch.
(effective by power OFF/ON after the setting
change)
4 FS-521 Z-fold + Staple number limit 5 sheets: 31-5=0, 31-4=0 0 0 0
5 Set the max number of FS-521 Staple Z-folded 8 sheets: 31-5=0, 31-4=1 0 0 0
paper included in 50 sheets (A3 size). 10 sheets: 31-5=1, 31-4=0
3 sheets: 31-5=1, 31-4=1
6 - 0: - 0 0 0
7 1: - 0 0 0
32 0 0 0 0
1 Contone output of solid text (IC) 0: Disabled 1 1 1
2 Inner trapping (IC) 1: Enabled 1 1 1
3 - 0: - 0 0 0
4 1: - 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
33 0 TC black and white large size count method 0: 1 count 0 1 0
Set the count number to the double count size 1: 2 count
paper which is set with DIPSW33-2/3 in black
and white printing.
1 TC color large size count method 0 1 0
Set the count number to the double count size
paper which is set with DIPSW33-2/3 in color
printing.
2 TC double count size setting 330mm or more in the sub scan 1 0 1
3 Set the threshold of the double count size in the direction: 33-3=0, 33-2=0 0 1 0
sub scan direction. 355mm or more in the sub scan
Paper whose length in the sub scan direction is direction (except for the U.S):
more than the specified length is counted as the 33-3=0, 33-2=1
double count size with the combination of 420mm or more in the sub scan
DIPSW33-2 and DIPSW33-3. direction (the U.S): 33-3=1,
Note 33-2=0
In the case of the custom size paper, it may All size is counted as small
be counted as 2 even when the paper length size: 33-3=1, 33-2=1
is shorter than this set value.
This case occurs when this set value is
included in the threshold set range of
DIPSW8-7.
4 Custom counter switchover in the banner setting 0: Banner priority 0 0 0
Switches whether to count papers by the banner 1: Custom size priority
size or count papers by the custom size.
Note
5 - 0: - 0 0 0
1: -
I -59
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
6 Counter display when charge counter setting is 0: Display items other than 0 0 0
set Billing Total Counter
When this setting is set to "1", the counter items 1: Display Billing Total Counter
other than "Billing Total Counter" are not only
displayed on the "Utility" screen.
Note
This setting is valid when the DIPSW33-7=1.
7 Charge count setting 0:Disabled 0 0 0
When setting this setting to 1, "Total Counter" in 1: Enabled (displays "Billing
the utility mode is changed to "Billing Total Total Counter")
Counter."
34 0 - 0: - 0 0 0
1 1: - 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 Banner count setting 1 count: 34-7=0, 34-6=0 0 0 0
7 Specifies the counting condition when printing 2 counts: 34-7=0, 34-6=1 0 0 0
the banner paper that is 488mm or longer in the 3 counts: 34-7=1, 34-6=0
sub scan direction. The setting range is 1 count 4 counts: 34-7=1, 34-6=1
to 4 counts.
Note
35 0 Faulty part isolation: Tray /4 (PF) 0: Normal 0 0 0
1 Faulty part isolation: Tray /5 (PF) 1: Unusable 0 0 0
2 - 0: - 0 0 0
3 1: - 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
36 0 MB-504 Connection recognition 0: Disabled 0 0 0
1: Enabled
1 - 0: - 0 0 0
2 1: - 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
37 0 ORU-M password authentication setting 0: password authentication 0 0 0
Activate the password authentication to enter invalid
the ORU-M mode. 1: password authentication
valid
1 ORU-M print mode display setting 0: Display 0 0 0
Set whether to display the sample output button 1: Not display
on the ORU-M mode.
2 ORU-M replace reason input setting 0: Enabled 0 0 0
Set whether to input the reason when replacing 1: Disabled
the parts in the ORU-M mode.
I -60
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
3 ORU-M printer gamma offset adjustment priority 0: Scanner automatic 0 0 0
setting adjustment priority
Perform the printer gamma offset adjustment 1: RU automatic adjustment
after completion of the replacement of the priority
developing unit or developer in the ORU-M
mode. This setting set the printer gamma offset
automatic adjustment method with both RU and
the scanner connected.
NOTE
The priority of the adjustments varies
depending on whether the Scanner and RU
are connected.
When the RU is connected while the
scanner is not, RU automatic adjustment is
performed.
When RU is not connected while the
scanner is connected, the scanner automatic
adjustment is performed.
When neither RU nor Scanner is connected,
manual adjustment is selected.
4 Density unevenness (like a tiger mark) 0: The current Dot1 default 0 0 0
countermeasure screen screen (the current Dot190)
The screen setting can be changed for 1: The new Dot1 default screen
preventing the density unevenness like a tiger (the yellow screen of Dot190 is
mark that occurs when Yellow and Black are only changed)
mixed in density of 10% to 60% gradation.
Note
When the DIPSW is changed, be sure to
perform the adjustment in the following
procedure.
Perform the gamma automatic adjustment by
selecting [Service] - [Process Adjustment] -
[Drum Peculiarity Adjustment] - [Gamma
Automatic Adjustment].
Perform the printer gamma sensor
adjustment of [Dot1] by selecting [Service] -
[Machine Adjustment] - [Quality Adjustment]
- [Printer Gamma Adjustment] - [Printer
Gamma Sensor Adj.].
Dot190 must be set for Dot1 on the custom
screen. (default)
Execute the calibration of the controller.
5 Output the hold job for specified number 0: OFF 0 0 0
This setting displays the pop-up screen to input 1: ON
the number of set when outputting the hold job.
With this setting, the number of sets to be output
can be changed.
6 Output paper density adjustment Dmax display 0 0 0
When this setting is set to "1", "Adj. data History"
button is displayed on the "Output Paper Density
Manual Adj. screen". The history of Dmax value
for each color measured in the output paper
density manual adjustment is displayed by
selecting paper from the list and pressing the
"Adj. data History" button. Up to the last 10
Dmax values are displayed in order from the
newest.
7 Output paper density adjustment plain paper 1 1 1
compliant on the default paper category table
This setting improves the accuracy for the
gradation correction when the default correction
value is selected in the output paper density
adjustment with plain paper. When this setting is
set to "1", the sensitivity for Cyan and Magenta
is corrected.
38 0 YMC development and output settings (duty) 30%: 38-1=0, 38-0=0 0 0 0
For the development memory, the YMC 50%: 38-1=0, 38-0=1
development and output settings (duty) can be 60%: 38-1=1, 38-0=0
changed from 30% fixed to 30%, 50%, 60%, or 70%: 38-1=1, 38-0=1
70%.
1) Symptom
a) when the image is darker in the area from the
paper leading edge to the line 53mm below in
I -61
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
1 the combination of 2 or more colors like Red, 0 0 0
Green and Blue.
b) when the darker image in the same shape as
the outline letter appears 53mm below from the
outline letter in the combination of 2 or more
colors like Red, Green and Blue.
Note
Noticeable even in a single color
2) Recommended set value
YMC duty: 70%
K duty: 30%
2 Black development and output settings (duty) 30%: 38-3=0, 38-2=0 0 0 0
3 For the development memory, the Black 50%: 38-3=0, 38-2=1 0 0 0
development and output settings (duty) can be 60%: 38-3=1, 38-2=0
changed from 30% fixed to 30%, 50%, 60%, or 70%: 38-3=1, 38-2=1
70%.
1) Symptom
a) when the image is darker in the area from the
paper leading edge to the line 53mm below in
the combination of 2 or more colors like Red,
Green and Blue.
b) when the darker image in the same shape as
the outline letter appears 53mm below from the
outline letter in the combination of 2 or more
colors like Red, Green and Blue.
Note
Noticeable even in a single color
2) Recommended set value
YMC duty: 70%
K duty: 30%
4 - 0: - 0 0 0
5 1: - 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
39 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
40 0 0 0 0
1 Mode to throw the main body away 0: Enabled 0 0 0
SW to allow all HDD data and part of data on 1:Disabled
NVRAM board (NRVB) to be deleted when
throwing the machine away.
Note
Setting this mode to "1" and executing the
following step disable the machine. The
restoring procedure is not available and the
machine cannot be used again. Therefore, do
not execute the steps except when throwing
the machine away.
"Utility" - "03 Administrator Setting" - "10
Security Setting" - "02 HDD Management
Setting" - "03 Delete All Data Setting" -
"Execute Deletion" on "Mode 1" to "Mode 8"
2 IP scanner allow setting without key counter 0: Restrict 0 0 0
This setting allows to use the scanning function 1: Allow
without key counter inserted.
3 Alert send setting without key counter 0: Send 0 0 0
This setting does not allow Alert to be sent to the 1: Send only when Printer
client machine even when the vendor machine is setting is set
not Ready.
I -62
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
4 IC-601 custom size name sending 0: Send 0 0 0
Set the method to send the profile from the 1: Not send
engine to IC-601, when the custom size paper
profile name is registered in ColorCentro.
When this setting is set to "0", "Paper Profile
Name + Custom Size Name" is sent to IC-601.
In case the other Custom Size Name has been
registered, the Paper Profile Name is not applied
even when the paper profile matches.
When this setting is set to "1", the Custom Size
Name is not given and only "Paper Profile
Name" is sent to IC-601.
Therefore, even when the custom size that has
been registered differs, if the Paper Profile
Name matches, the paper profile is applied.
5 - 0: - 0 0 0
6 1: - 0 0 0
7 FS-521 main tray output limit settings 0: Paper 483mm long in the sub 0 0 0
Specifies the upper limit of the paper length in scan direction can be output
the sub scan direction for the paper that is 1: Paper 487mm long in the sub
output to the FS-521 main tray. By setting to "1", scan direction can be output
the paper 487mm long in the sub scan direction
becomes enabled to be output.
5.5.3 Service Center TEL/FAX

(1) Usage
Register telephone and fax numbers of a service center that will be displayed in help information or when a malfunction occurs.
(2) Procedure
Press [02 Service Center TEL/FAX].
3. "Service Center TEL/FAX setting screen"
Press either [Service Center TEL (16)] or [Service Center FAX (16)] to be set.
4. Enter the telephone number or fax number you register through the numeric buttons.
Note
When a number is less than 16 digits, be sure to use hyphen (-) to fill up the blanks.
5. Press [OK] to register the data.

Press [Cancel] to cancel updating.
5.5.4 M/C Serial Number Setting

(1) Usage
Set and display the serial number of the main body and options.
Note
The serial number of the main body cannot be changed.
(2) Procedure
Press [03 M/C Serial Number Setting].
3. "Serial Number Setting screen"
Select the option, then a keyboard screen appears. Enter a serial number using the alphanumeric buttons.
4. Press [OK] to register the data.
5.5.5 Setup Date/Business Setting

(1) Usage
Set the starting date of the total counter that is displayed on the utility mode and the type of business of the client that is notified by the CSRC.
When setting the DIPSW 16-4 to 1, the starting date of the total counter is not displayed.
(2) Procedure
Press [04 Setup Date/Business Setting].
3. "Setup Date/Type of Business Setting screen"
I -63
Select the type of business. Not to specify the type of business, select [Unknown].
4. "Setup Date/Type of Business Setting screen"
Enter an installation date with the numeric buttons. Press [Set] to highlight the Year/Month/Date to be entered.
5. Press [OK] to update data.
5.5.6 Restrictions on banner print

(1) Restrictions
The banner print is not supported so that the same quality and conveyance performance as for the normal size are not guaranteed. That is
why the following restrictions are placed on the banner print.
The banner print is available only for the following option configuration.
Main body (C7000/C7000P/C6000) + MB-504 (Multi bypass unit) + OT-502 (Paper exit tray)
Continuous feeding is unavailable. (available for FM ver. 3.0 or later)
More differences appear in the printing accuracy compared to the normal size.
Simplex and face-up paper output is only available.
Note
Errors could occur depending on the size of the image data.
Employing the banner print too many times shortens the lives of materials and parts.
(2) How to use

(a) Older than the FW ver. 3.2
Set the following DIPSWs before the banner print.
DIPSW10-0: 0 (OFF) 1 (ON)
Note
After changing the DIPSW, be sure to turn OFF or ON the sub power switch (SW2). If the SW2 is not turned OFF or ON, the
DIPSW setting does not become enabled.
(b) FW ver. 3.2 or later

Set the following DIPSWs before the banner print.
Note
After changing the DIPSW, be sure to turn OFF or ON the sub power switch (SW2). If the SW2 is not turned OFF or ON, the
DIPSW setting does not become enabled.
After turning OFF or ON the SW2, move to [Utility] - [User Setting] - [Common Setting] - [Banner ON/OFF] and select [Banner
ON]
5.6 Counter/Data
5.6.1 Maintenance Counter
(1) Outline
Set or reset the maintenance counter cycle.
Note
The maintenance cycle can be set either paper count (quantity) or travel distance (m) of the developing roller /K (distance).
"Quantity" is selected by default.
The count condition of the maintenance counter is as follows.
Note
The count condition cannot be changed.
Standard size
Small size (1 count)
SRA4S : 320mm
8.25 x 13 : 330mm
8 x 13 : 330mm
8.5 x 13 : 330mm
8.125 x 13.25 : 336mm
Custom size
Counted as large size with the threshold of 338mm (13.307 inches) or more
(2) Counter reset

After the maintenance is completed, reset the maintenance count using this mode.
Note
Be sure to reset the maintenance counter after the periodic maintenance (every 340,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc)/every
300,000 prints (C6000/C6000L)).
Otherwise, the periodic check alert message and icon do not disappear.
(a) Procedure
Press [04 Counter /Data]
2. "Counter/Data Menu screen"
Press [01 Maintenance Counter].
3. "Maintenance Counter screen"
Press [Counter Clear] to reset the maintenance counter.
4. "Reset confirm screen"
I -64
Press [Yes] to reset the counter.

The counter is reset, and the start date is automatically inputted.
Press [No] to cancel.
(3) Maintenance cycle setting

Set the maintenance counter.
Note
The maintenance counter is predetermined. Be sure not to change the count value normally. Default is 340,000 sheets (C7000/
C7000P/C70hc), 300,000 sheets (C6000/C6000L).
(a) Procedure
Press [01 Maintenance Counter].
Enter high digits of the cycle with the numeric buttons.
Press [OK] to register the data.
Press [Cancel] to cancel the operation.
5.6.2 Data collection procedures

Display the counter/data of the main body shown below on the touch panel.
The counter/data also can be checked through the CS Remote Care, list output and the mail remote notification system.
Paper Size Counter(Total)
Paper Size Counter(Copy)
Paper Size Counter(Printer)
ADF Counter
Coverage Data History
Time series jam data
JAM Counter
Counter of Each Copy Mode(1)
Counter of Each Copy Mode(2)
SC Counter
JAM Counter Individual Sec.
SC Count Individual Sec.
SC data of time series
Maintenance History
Maintenance Counter Reset
Parts History in Time Series
(1) Procedure
Press [02 Collecting Data].
3. "Collecting Data Menu screen"
Press the counter/data item to check.
4. "Counter/Data screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous] to scroll the pages.
Note
[Counter Clear] is displayed on each screen of [Jam Counter Individual Sec.] and [SC Counter Individual Sec.]
"Count Reset screen" appears when [Counter Clear] is pressed. Press [Yes] to reset the sectional count. Press [No] to
cancel the count reset.
Resetting these data when visiting customers for maintenance enables to check the number of jam and malfunction counted
after the last visit.
On the individual confirmation screens of [ORU-M Maintenance History] select the item to check and press [Information
View] to check the information of the selected item.
5.6.3 Paper Size Counter (Total/copy/print)

Confirm the number of printings of each paper size.
Note
Maximum count: 99,999,999
1 count is made for paper of all types regardless of the paper size.
No. CSRC parameter Paper Size Remark
01 P1 00 Others
02 P1 01 A3
03 P1 02 A4
04 P1 03 A5
05 P1 04 A6
06 P1 05 B4
I -65
No. CSRC parameter Paper Size Remark

07 P1 06 B5
08 P1 07 B6
09 P1 08 12 x 18
10 P1 09 11 x 17
11 P1 0A 8.5 x 14
12 P1 0B 8.5 x 11
13 P1 0C 7.25 x 10.5
14 P1 0D 5.5 x 8.5
15 P1 0E F4
16 P1 0F Post card
17 P1 10 46
18 P1 11 8K
19 P1 12 16K
20 P1 13 Long paper
21 P1 14 A2
22 P1 15 SRA3
23 P1 16 SRA4
24 P1 17 13 x 19
25 P1 18 Inf. 1 (***mm) *** changes depending on the setting value.
Custom size, paper length in sub scan direction: 196 mm or less*
26 P1 19 Inf. 2 (***mm) *** changes depending on the setting value.
27 P1 1A Inf. 3 (***mm) *** changes depending on the setting value.
28 P1 1B Inf. 4 (***mm) *** changes depending on the setting value.
29 P1 1C Inf. 5 Custom size, paper length in sub scan direction: 391mm to 487mm
* When DIPSW 8-7 is 0. When DIPSW8-7 is 1, it depends on the setting of I.5.6.18 Custom size counter threshold setting.
5.6.4 ADF Counter

Confirm the number of originals fed in each DF mode.
Note
No.01 and No.02 counter do not double count with other counters.
1 count for single-sided, 2 counts for double-sided.
No. CSRC parameter Item Remark
01 F0 00 N of originals fed in ADF mode (single side)
02 F0 01 N of originals fed in ADF mode (double side)
03 F0 02 N of originals fed in RDH mode Not used
04 F0 03 N of originals fed in RRDH mode Not used
05 F0 04 N of originals fed in LDF mode Not used
06 F0 05 N of originals fed in CFF mode Not used
07 F0 06 N of single-sided SDF original fed Not used
08 F0 07 N of mix originals fed in ADF mode (single side)
09 F0 08 N of mix originals fed in ADF mode (double side)
10 F0 09 N of originals fed in 2in1 mode Not used
11 F0 0A N of 1-sided Z-folded original fed
12 F0 0B N of 2-sided Z-folded original fed
13 F0 0C N of 2-sided SDF original fed Not used
5.6.5 Coverage Data History

Confirm the average coverage of 5,000 print sheets of the latest 30 data for each of Y, M, C and K.
Note
This coverage is a calculated value based on the colored area and the transfer paper area, and is different from the toner
consumption when actually printed.
Up to 30 most recent coverage data are stored and deleted in chronological order.
No. CSRC parameter Printer counter Coverage (%)
01 V0 00 B/W accumulated coverage rate (00.0 to 99.9)
02 V0 01 B/W section 1 coverage rate
I -66

11 V0 0A B/W section 10 coverage rate
12 V0 0B B/W section 11 coverage rate
13 V0 0C B/W section 12 coverage rate
14 V0 0D B/W section 13 coverage rate
15 V0 0E B/W section 14 coverage rate
16 V0 0F B/W section 15 coverage rate
27 V0 1A B/W section 26 coverage rate
28 V0 1B B/W section 27 coverage rate
29 V0 1C B/W section 28 coverage rate
30 V0 1D B/W section 29 coverage rate
31 V0 1E B/W section 30 coverage rate
32 V0 1F
33 V0 20 Yellow accumulated coverage rate
34 V0 21 Yellow section 1 coverage rate
43 V0 2A Yellow section 10 coverage rate
44 V0 2B Yellow section 11 coverage rate
45 V0 2C Yellow section 12 coverage rate
46 V0 2D Yellow section 13 coverage rate
47 V0 2E Yellow section 14 coverage rate
48 V0 2F Yellow section 15 coverage rate
59 V0 3A Yellow section 26 coverage rate
60 V0 3B Yellow section 27 coverage rate
61 V0 3C Yellow section 28 coverage rate
I -67

62 V0 3D Yellow section 29 coverage rate
63 V0 3E Yellow section 30 coverage rate
64 V0 3F
65 V0 40 Magenta accumulated coverage rate
66 V0 41 Magenta section 1 coverage rate
75 V0 4A Magenta section 10 coverage rate
76 V0 4B Magenta section 11 coverage rate
77 V0 4C Magenta section 12 coverage rate
78 V0 4D Magenta section 13 coverage rate
79 V0 4E Magenta section 14 coverage rate
80 V0 4F Magenta section 15 coverage rate
91 V0 5A Magenta section 26 coverage rate
92 V0 5B Magenta section 27 coverage rate
93 V0 5C Magenta section 28 coverage rate
94 V0 5D Magenta section 29 coverage rate
95 V0 5E Magenta section 30 coverage rate
96 V0 5F
97 V0 60 Cyan accumulated coverage rate
98 V0 61 Cyan section 1 coverage rate
107 V0 6A Cyan section 10 coverage rate
108 V0 6B Cyan section 11 coverage rate
109 V0 6C Cyan section 12 coverage rate
110 V0 6D Cyan section 13 coverage rate
111 V0 6E Cyan section 14 coverage rate
112 V0 6F Cyan section 15 coverage rate
I -68

123 V0 7A Cyan section 26 coverage rate
124 V0 7B Cyan section 27 coverage rate
125 V0 7C Cyan section 28 coverage rate
126 V0 7D Cyan section 29 coverage rate
127 V0 7E Cyan section 30 coverage rate
128 V0 7F
5.6.6 Paper JAM History

With respect to the latest 100 jam data, it is possible to confirm jam code, total count, date of occurrence, time of occurrence, tray, paper size,
and magnification.
5.6.7 JAM/JAM Counter for Individual Section

Confirm the number of jam occurrences for each jam code. (Except idling JAM)
Note
Maximum count: 999,999
(The stationary jam is not included in the count.)
Jam code is displayed on the user mode screen when changing the DIPSW11-7 to 1.
No. CSRC Item
Parameter Jam code
001 J0 00 J-1001
002 J0 01 J-1002
003 J0 02 J-1003
004 J0 03 J-1051
005 J0 04 J-1101
006 J0 05 J-1151
007 J0 06 J-1201
008 J0 07 J-1251
009 J0 08 J-1301
010 J0 09 J-1351
011 J0 0A J-1501
012 J0 0B J-1502
013 J0 0C J-1551
014 J0 0D J-1552
015 J0 0E J-1601
016 J0 0F J-1602
017 J0 10 J-1603
018 J0 11 J-1604
019 J0 12 J-1605
020 J0 13 J-1606
021 J0 14 J-1607
022 J0 15 J-1608
023 J0 16 J-1609
024 J0 17 J-1610
025 J0 18 J-1651
026 J0 19 J-1652
027 J0 1A J-1653
028 J0 1B J-1654
029 J0 1C J-1655
030 J0 1D J-1656
031 J0 1E J-1657
032 J0 1F J-1658
033 J0 20 J-1701
034 J0 21 J-1702
035 J0 22 J-1703
036 J0 23 J-1704
037 J0 24 J-1705
038 J0 25 J-1706
I -69
No. CSRC Item

Parameter Jam code
039 J0 26 J-1707
040 J0 27 J-1708
041 J0 28 J-1709
042 J0 29 J-1710
043 J0 2A J-1751
044 J0 2B J-1752
045 J0 2C J-1753
046 J0 2D J-1754
047 J0 2E J-1901
048 J0 2F J-1902
049 J0 30 J-1903
050 J0 31 J-3201
051 J0 32 J-3202
052 J0 33 J-3203
053 J0 34 J-3204
054 J0 35 J-3252
055 J0 36 J-3206
056 J0 37 J-3207
057 J0 38 J-3209
058 J0 39 J-3251
059 J0 3A J-3252
060 J0 3B J-3253
061 J0 3C J-3254
062 J0 3D J-5101
063 J0 3E J-9201
064 J0 3F J-9202
065 J0 40 J-9251
066 J0 41 J-9252
067 J0 42 J-9301
068 J0 43 J-9351
069 J0 44 J-9401
070 J0 45 J-9451
071 J0 46 J-6101
072 J0 47 J-6102
073 J0 48 J-6103
074 J0 49 J-6201
075 J0 4A J-6203
076 J0 4B J-6206
077 J0 4C J-6209
078 J0 4D J-6301
079 J0 4E J-6304
080 J0 4F J-6305
081 J0 50 J-6501
082 J0 51 J-6502
083 J0 52 J-6504
084 J0 53 J-6508
085 J0 54 J-7101
086 J0 55 J-7103
087 J0 56 J-7105
088 J0 57 J-7106
089 J0 58 J-7107
090 J0 59 -
091 J0 5A J-7217
092 J0 5B J-7218
093 J0 5C J-7219
094 J0 5D J-7220
095 J0 5E J-7221
I -70
No. CSRC Item

Parameter Jam code
096 J0 5F J-7222
097 J0 60 J-7223
098 J0 61 J-7224
099 J0 62 J-7225
100 J0 63 J-7226
101 J0 64 J-7228
102 J0 65 J-7229
103 J0 66 J-7230
104 J0 67 J-7235
105 J0 68 J-7243
106 J0 69 J-7248
107 J0 6A J-7249
108 J0 6B J-7250
109 J0 6C J-7251
110 J0 6D J-7281
111 J0 6E J-7282
112 J0 6F J-7283
113 J0 70 J-7290
114 J0 71 J-7401
115 J0 72 J-7402
116 J0 73 J-7403
117 J0 74 J-7404
118 J0 75 J-7405
119 J0 76 J-7406
120 J0 77 J-7407
121 J0 78 J-7408
122 J0 79 J-7409
123 J0 7A J-7410
124 J0 7B J-7411
125 J0 7C J-7412
126 J0 7D J-7660
127 J0 7E J-7661
128 J0 7F J-7662
129 J0 80 J-7663
130 J0 81 J-7664
131 J0 82 J-7665
132 J0 83 J-7666
133 J0 84 J-7667
134 J0 85 J-7668
135 J0 86 J-7669
136 J0 87 J-7670
137 J0 88 J-7671
138 J0 89 J-7672
139 J0 8A J-7673
140 J0 8B J-7674
141 J0 8C -
142 J0 8D J-7676
143 J0 8E J-7677
144 J0 8F J-7678
145 J0 90 J-7679
146 J0 91 J-7680
147 J0 92 -
148 J0 93 J-7682
149 J0 94 J-7683
150 J0 95 J-7684
151 J0 96 J-7685
152 J0 97 J-7686
I -71
No. CSRC Item

Parameter Jam code
153 J0 98 J-7687
154 J0 99 J-7688
155 J0 9A J-7689
156 J0 9B J-7690
157 J0 9C J-7691
158 J0 9D J-7692
159 J0 9E J-7693
160 J0 9F J-7696
161 J0 A0 J-7697
162 J0 A1 J-7698
163 J0 A2 J-7108
164 J0 A3 J-7501
165 J0 A4 J-7502
166 J0 A5 J-7503
167 J0 A6 J-7504
168 J0 A7 J-7505
169 J0 A8 J-7506
170 J0 A9 J-7507
171 J0 AA J-7508
172 J0 AB J-7509
173 J0 AC J-7510
174 J0 AD J-7511
175 J0 AE J-7512
176 J0 AF J-7513
177 J0 B0 J-7514
178 J0 B1 J-7515
179 J0 B2 J-7516
180 J0 B3 J-7517
181 J0 B4 J-7518
182 J0 B5 J-7519
183 J0 B6 J-7520
184 J0 B7 J-7521
185 J0 B8 J-7522
186 J0 B9 J-7523
187 J0 BA J-7524
188 J0 BB J-7540
189 J0 BC J-7541
190 J0 BD J-7542
191 J0 BE J-7543
192 J0 BF J-7561
193 J0 C0 J-7562
194 J0 C1 J-7563
195 J0 C2 J-7564
196 J0 C3 J-7565
197 J0 C4 J-7566
198 J0 C5 J-7567
199 J0 C6 J-7568
200 J0 C7 J-7569
201 J0 C8 J-7570
202 J0 C9 J-7571
203 J0 CA J-7572
204 J0 CB J-7573
205 J0 CC J-7574
206 J0 CD J-7575
207 J0 CE J-7576
208 J0 CF J-7577
209 J0 D0 J-7578
I -72
No. CSRC Item

Parameter Jam code
210 J0 D1 J-7579
211 J0 D2 J-7580
212 J0 D3 J-7581
213 J0 D4 J-7582
214 J0 D5 J-7583
215 J0 D6 J-7584
216 J0 D7 J-7585
217 J0 D8 J-3101
218 J0 D9 J-3102
219 J0 DA J-3151
220 J0 DB J-3152
221 J0 DC J-7590
222 J0 DD J-7591
223 J0 DE J-7592
224 J0 DF J-7593
225 J0 E0 J-7594
226 J0 E1 J-7595
227 J0 E2 J-7596
228 J0 E3 J-7597
229 J0 E4 J-7109
230 J0 E5 J-7530
231 J0 E6 J-7531
232 J0 E7 J-7532
233 J0 E8 J-7533
234 J0 E9 J-7535
235 J0 EA J-7102
236 J0 EB J-7675
237 J0 EC J-7681
238 J0 ED J-7694
239 J0 EE J-7695
240 J0 EF J-1611
241 J0 F0 J-7550
242 J0 F1 J-7551
243 J0 F2 J-7552
244 J0 F3 J-7553
245 J0 F4 J-7554
246 J0 F5 J-7555
247 J0 F6 J-7556
248 J0 F7 J-7110
249 J0 F8 J-7557
250 J0 F9 J-7558
251 J0 FA -
252 J0 FB -
253 J0 FC -
254 J0 FD -
255 J0 FE -
256 J0 FF -
257 J1 00 -
258 J1 01 -
259 J1 02 -
260 J1 03 -
261 J1 04 -
262 J1 05 -
263 J1 06 -
264 J1 07 -
265 J1 08 -
266 J1 09 -
I -73
No. CSRC Item

Parameter Jam code
267 J1 0A -
268 J1 0B -
269 J1 0C -
270 J1 0D -
271 J1 0E -
272 J1 0F -
273 J1 10 -
274 J1 11 -
275 J1 12 -
276 J1 13 -
277 J1 14 -
278 J1 15 -
279 J1 16 -
280 J1 17 -
281 J1 18 -
282 J1 19 -
283 J1 1A -
284 J1 1B -
285 J1 1C -
286 J1 1D -
287 J1 1E -
288 J1 1F -
289 J1 20 -
290 J1 21 -
291 J1 22 -
292 J1 23 -
293 J1 24 -
294 J1 25 -
295 J1 26 -
296 J1 27 -
297 J1 28 -
298 J1 29 -
299 J1 2A -
300 J1 2B -
301 J1 2C -
302 J1 2D -
303 J1 2E -
304 J1 2F -
305 J1 30 -
306 J1 31 -
307 J1 32 -
308 J1 33 -
309 J1 34 -
310 J1 35 -
311 J1 36 -
312 J1 37 -
313 J1 38 -
314 J1 39 -
315 J1 3A -
316 J1 3B -
317 J1 3C -
318 J1 3D -
319 J1 3E -
320 J1 3F -
321 J1 40 -
322 J1 41 -
323 J1 42 -
I -74
No. CSRC Item

Parameter Jam code
324 J1 43 -
325 J1 44 -
326 J1 45 -
327 J1 46 -
328 J1 47 -
329 J1 48 -
330 J1 49 -
331 J1 4A -
332 J1 4B -
333 J1 4C -
334 J1 4D -
335 J1 4E -
336 J1 4F -
337 J1 50 -
338 J1 51 -
339 J1 52 -
340 J1 53 -
341 J1 54 -
342 J1 55 -
343 J1 56 -
344 J1 57 -
345 J1 58 -
346 J1 59 -
347 J1 5A -
348 J1 5B -
349 J1 5C -
350 J1 5D -
351 J1 5E -
352 J1 5F -
353 J1 60 -
354 J1 61 -
355 J1 62 -
356 J1 63 -
357 J1 64 -
358 J1 65 -
359 J1 66 -
360 J1 67 -
361 J1 68 -
362 J1 69 -
363 J1 6A -
364 J1 6B -
365 J1 6C -
366 J1 6D -
367 J1 6E -
368 J1 6F -
369 J1 70 -
370 J1 71 -
371 J1 72 -
372 J1 73 -
373 J1 74 -
374 J1 75 -
375 J1 76 -
376 J1 77 -
377 J1 78 -
378 J1 79 -
379 J1 7A -
380 J1 7B -
I -75
No. CSRC Item

Parameter Jam code
381 J1 7C -
382 J1 7D -
383 J1 7E -
384 J1 7F -
385 J1 80 -
386 J1 81 -
387 J1 82 -
388 J1 83 -
389 J1 84 -
390 J1 85 -
391 J1 86 -
392 J1 87 -
393 J1 88 -
394 J1 89 -
395 J1 8A -
396 J1 8B -
397 J1 8C -
398 J1 8D -
399 J1 8E -
400 J1 8F -
401 J1 90 -
402 J1 91 -
403 J1 92 -
404 J1 93 -
405 J1 94 -
406 J1 95 -
407 J1 96 -
408 J1 97 -
409 J1 98 -
410 J1 99 -
411 J1 9A -
412 J1 9B -
413 J1 9C -
414 J1 9D -
415 J1 9E -
416 J1 9F -
417 J1 A0 -
418 J1 A1 -
419 J1 A2 -
420 J1 A3 -
421 J1 A4 -
422 J1 A5 -
423 J1 A6 -
424 J1 A7 -
425 J1 A8 -
426 J1 A9 -
427 J1 AA -
428 J1 AB -
429 J1 AC -
430 J1 AD -
431 J1 AE -
432 J1 AF -
433 J1 B0 -
434 J1 B1 -
435 J1 B2 -
436 J1 B3 -
437 J1 B4 -
I -76
No. CSRC Item

Parameter Jam code
438 J1 B5 -
439 J1 B6 -
440 J1 B7 -
441 J1 B8 -
442 J1 B9 -
443 J1 BA -
444 J1 BB -
445 J1 BC -
446 J1 BD -
447 J1 BE -
448 J1 BF -
449 J1 C0 -
450 J1 C1 -
451 J1 C2 -
452 J1 C3 -
453 J1 C4 -
454 J1 C5 -
455 J1 C6 -
456 J1 C7 -
457 J1 C8 -
458 J1 C9 -
459 J1 CA -
460 J1 CB -
461 J1 CC -
462 J1 CD -
463 J1 CE -
464 J1 CF -
465 J1 D0 -
466 J1 D1 -
467 J1 D2 -
468 J1 D3 -
469 J1 D4 -
470 J1 D5 -
471 J1 D6 -
472 J1 D7 -
473 J1 D8 -
474 J1 D9 -
475 J1 DA -
476 J1 DB -
477 J1 DC -
478 J1 DD -
479 J1 DE -
480 J1 DF -
481 J1 E0 -
482 J1 E1 -
483 J1 E2 -
484 J1 E3 -
485 J1 E4 -
486 J1 E5 -
487 J1 E6 -
488 J1 E7 -
489 J1 E8 -
490 J1 E9 -
491 J1 EA -
492 J1 EB -
493 J1 EC -
494 J1 ED -
I -77
No. CSRC Item

Parameter Jam code
495 J1 EE -
496 J1 EF -
497 J1 F0 -
498 J1 F1 -
499 J1 F2 -
500 J1 F3 -
501 J1 F4 -
502 J1 F5 -
503 J1 F6 -
504 J1 F7 -
505 J1 F8 -
506 J1 F9 -
507 J1 FA -
508 J1 FB -
509 J1 FC -
510 J1 FD -
511 J1 FE -
512 J1 FF -
5.6.8 Counter of Each Copy Mode(1)

Confirm the status of use of each copy mode.
Note
No. CSRC Item Count conditions
Parameter
001 F1 00 1 1 Mode Scans 1-side and outputs 1-side (Counts by number
of output side)
002 F1 01 1 2 Mode Scans 1-side and outputs 2-sides (Counts by
number of output side)
003 F1 02 2 1 Mode Scans 2-sides and outputs 1-side (Counts by
004 F1 03 2 2 Mode Scans 2-sides and outputs 2-sides (Counts by
005 F1 04 ADF1>1 mode ADF scans 1-side and outputs 1-side (Counts by
006 F1 05 ADF1>2 mode ADF scans 2-sides and outputs 2-sides (Counts by
007 F1 06 Mixed original mode Counts by number of output side
008 F1 07 Tab original mode Counts by number of output side
009 F1 08 Z-Folded original mode Counts by number of output side
010 F1 09 LEF:Portrait/SEF:Landscape(Reg.) Counts by number of output side
011 F1 0A LEF:Landscape/SEF:Portrait(Reg.) Counts by number of output side
012 F1 0B LEF:Portrait/SEF:Landscape(Rev.) Counts by number of output side
013 F1 0C LEF:Landscape/SEF:Portrait(Rev.) Counts by number of output side
014 F1 0D Original Type: Text/Photo Counts by number of output side
015 F1 0E Original Type: Text Counts by number of output side
016 F1 0F Original Type: Photo Counts by number of output side
017 F1 10 Original Type: Map Counts by number of output side
018 F1 11 Custom Size Original Counts by number of output side
019 F1 12 Corner Staple(Left) Specifies 1 stapling position (upper left) (Counts by
number of stapling)
020 F1 13 Corner Staple(Right) Specifies 1 stapling position (upper right) (Counts by
number of stapling)
021 F1 14 2 Position Staple(Left) Specifies 2 stapling positions (left bind) (Counts by
number of stapling)
022 F1 15 2 Position Staple(Top) Specifies 2 stapling positions (top bind) (Counts by
number of stapling)
023 F1 16 Right & Left Bind Folding direction is left or right (Counts by number of
output side)
024 F1 17 2 Position Staple(Right) Specifies 2 stapling positions (right bind) (Counts by
number of stapling)
I -78

Parameter
025 F1 18 Top Bind Folding direction is upper (Counts by number of
output side)
026 F1 19 Tri-Fold Counts by number of folding
027 F1 1A Folding & Stapling Counts by number of folding
028 F1 1B Stacker5000 sheets full alarm LS 1st tandem or 2nd tandem 5000 sheets full alarm
is ON
029 F1 1C Group Group and offset no output (Counts by number of
output side)
030 F1 1D Offset Group Group and offset output (Counts by number of
output side)
031 F1 1E Sort Sort and no offset (Counts by number of output side)
032 F1 1F Offset Sort Sort and offset (Counts by number of output side)
033 F1 20 Face down Counts by number of output side
034 F1 21 Face up Counts by number of output side
035 F1 22 1 to N Counts by number of output side
036 F1 23 N to 1 Counts by number of output side
037 F1 24 -
038 F1 25 Post inserter Cover Sheet Specify
039 F1 26 Trim Counts by number of trimming
040 F1 27 Real Size Copy Axial magnification 1.000, lateral magnification 1.000
(Counts by number of output side)
041 F1 28 Preset magnification E4 Specifies preset magnification (A5 A3) (Counts by
042 F1 29 Preset magnification E3 Specifies preset magnification (A3 A3/B5 B4)
043 F1 2A Preset magnification E2 Specifies preset magnification (A4 B4) (Counts by
044 F1 2B Preset magnification E1 Specifies preset magnification (B4 A3/B5 A4)
045 F1 2C Preset magnification R4 Specifies preset magnification (A4 B5/A3 B4)
046 F1 2D Preset magnification R3 Specifies preset magnification (B4 A4) (Counts by
047 F1 2E Preset magnification R2 Specifies preset magnification (A3 A4/B4 B5)
048 F1 2F Preset magnification R1 Specifies preset magnification (A3 A5) (Counts by
049 F1 30 Preset Zoom 1 Counts by number of output side
052 F1 33 Zoom Counts by number of output side
053 F1 34 Vertical/Horizontal Zoom Counts by number of output side
054 F1 35 Maximum ZOOM Counts by number of output side
055 F1 36 Minimum ZOOM Counts by number of output side
056 F1 37 APS Counts by number of output side
057 F1 38 AMS Counts by number of output side
058 F1 39 AES Counts by number of output side
059 F1 3A Preset Density 1 Counts by number of output side
060 F1 3B Preset Density 2 Counts by number of output side
061 F1 3C Interrupt Copy Counts by number of output side
062 F1 3D Cancel Automatic Image Rotation Counts by number of output side
063 F1 3E -
064 F1 3F -
065 F1 40 Combine Counts by number of output side
066 F1 41 Booklet Counts by number of output copy
067 F1 42 Adhesive Binding Counts by number of output copy
068 F1 43 -
069 F1 44 -
070 F1 45 -
071 F1 46 -
I -79

Parameter
072 F1 47 -
073 F1 48 -
074 F1 49 -
075 F1 4A -
076 F1 4B Image Repeat Counts by number of output side
077 F1 4C Frame erasure Counts by number of output side
078 F1 4D Center Erase Counts by number of output side
079 F1 4E Centering Counts by number of output side
080 F1 4F All-image area Counts by number of output side
081 F1 50 Image shift Counts by number of output side
082 F1 51 -
083 F1 52 -
084 F1 53 -
085 F1 54 -
086 F1 55 Date/Time Stamp-Date/Time (Counts by number of output side)
087 F1 56 Page Stamp/Page No. (Counts by number of output side)
088 F1 57 Numbering Stamp Numbering (Counts by number of output
side)
089 F1 58 Set quantity 1
090 F1 59 Set Quantity 2 - 5
091 F1 5A Set Quantity 6 - 10
092 F1 5B Set quantity 11 or more
093 F1 5C Time while power remote 1 is On Count up by periodic timer
094 F1 5D Time while power remote 2 is On Count up by periodic timer
095 F1 5E Time while power remote 3 is On Count up by periodic timer
096 F1 5F Time while power remote 4 is On Count up by periodic timer
097 F1 60 Time During Low Power Mode Time in the LOW-POWER mode. (unit: min.)
098 F1 61 Time During Warm Up Time during which the fusing heater is ON with
UNREADY status. (unit: min.)
099 F1 62 Time during which the front door is open Time during which the front door is open. (unit: min.)
100 F1 63 Ope.Time in 1side Straight Exit Accumulation of time from the start of print to the
101 F1 64 Ope.Time in 1side Reverse Exit end of print. 1 count per second. (unit: sec.) (Down
time due to jam omitted)
102 F1 65 Operation Time in 2side Print
103 F1 66 Operation time in ADF mode Accumulation of time during which DF is operating.
(unit: min.)
104 F1 67 Morning Correction Counter Counts 1 per image stabilization control.
105 F1 68 Time during APS sensor On Time during which the APS sensor is ON. (unit: min.)
106 F1 69 -
107 F1 6A -
108 F1 6B N of Fold & Staple Used Jobs 1 count when Folding & Stapling job starts
109 F1 6C Fold & Staple Tri-Fold Full 1 count for each ON of fold & staple tri-fold full alarm
110 F1 6D N of ADF NF occurred Number of DF no feed detection
111 F1 6E N of ADF special error 1 occurred Number of wrong detections of original size
112 F1 6F N of ADF special error 2 occurred Number of wrong detections of next original
information
113 F1 70 N of ADF special error 3 occurred Number of errors in size for which mixed size mode
is not allowed
114 F1 71 N of Scanner Scanned Counts 1 for pressing start button in the platen mode
115 F1 72 N of Electrode Cleaned When conducting the electrode cleaning
116 F1 73 N of Memory Overflow Total count of No.124, 125, 126 and the number of
occurrences of HDD reading over flow.
117 F1 74 N of Fusing Alarm Occurred Fusing alarm is ON
118 F1 75 N of No Toner Stop Occurred All 4 colors
119 F1 76 N of AGC retry When AGC retry occurs
120 F1 77 N of Sub Scan Beam Correct Error When the sub scan beam correct error occurs
121 F1 78 N of Mis-Centering Correct Error When the centering correction time out error occurs
122 F1 79 N of ADF distortion adjust error When the ADF skew correction time out occurs
123 F1 7A N of ADF distortion data error When the ADF skew correction error occurs
124 F1 7B Compression Memory Overflow Compression Memory Overflow
I -80

Parameter
125 F1 7C Page Memory Overflow(Scan) When the scan memory overflow occurs
126 F1 7D Page Memory Overflow (print) When the print memory overflow occurs
127 F1 7E FNS Alarm(Main Tray) Counts for each ON of finisher main tray alarm
128 F1 7F FNS Alarm(Staple) Counts for each ON of finisher staple alarm
129 F1 80 Saddle Stitcher Scrap Box Full Counts for each ON of saddle stitcher scrap box full
alarm
130 F1 81 N of ADF special error4 occurred Ready timeout error
131 F1 82 -
132 F1 83 -
133 F1 84 -
134 F1 85 -
135 F1 86 -
136 F1 87 -
137 F1 88 Saddle Stitcher Staple Alarm Counts for each ON of saddle stitcher staple alarm
138 F1 89 -
139 F1 8A -
140 F1 8B -
141 F1 8C -
142 F1 8D -
143 F1 8E Hole-Punch
144 F1 8F Z-Folding Counts by number of paper exit (except for GP-501)
145 F1 90 Multi-Folder trash full alarm Counts by number of folding
146 F1 91 Hold Job Number(Copy) Counts by number of each job
147 F1 92 Hold + Output Job Number(Copy)
148 F1 93 Hold Job Number(Print)
149 F1 94 Hold + Output Job Number(Print)
150 F1 95 Hold Output Job Number
151 F1 96 Hold Output Job Number(Delete)
152 F1 97 HDD Store JOB (Hold HDD Store)
153 F1 98 HDD Store JOB read Print JOB
154 F1 99 HDD Store JOB read Hold JOB
155 F1 9A HDD Store JOB read Print + Hold JOB
156 F1 9B -
157 F1 9C -
158 F1 9D -
159 F1 9E -
160 F1 9F -
161 F1 A0 -
162 F1 A1 -
163 F1 A2 -
164 F1 A3 -
165 F1 A4 -
166 F1 A5 -
167 F1 A6 -
168 F1 A7 -
169 F1 A8 -
170 F1 A9 -
171 F1 AA -
172 F1 AB -
173 F1 AC -
174 F1 AD -
175 F1 AE -
176 F1 AF -
177 F1 B0 -
178 F1 B1 -
179 F1 B2 -
180 F1 B3 -
I -81

Parameter
181 F1 B4 -
182 F1 B5 -
183 F1 B6 -
184 F1 B7 -
185 F1 B8 -
186 F1 B9 -
187 F1 BA -
188 F1 BB -
189 F1 BC Perfect Bind(Cover Blank) Counts on each mode
190 F1 BD Perfect Bind(Cover Print 1-in-1)
191 F1 BE Perfect Bind(Cover Print 2-in-1)
192 F1 BF Perfect Bind(Cover Print 3-in-1)
193 F1 C0 Perfect Binder Cover Tray mode
194 F1 C1 Perfect Bind Set Number Counts by number of copy
195 F1 C2 Perfect Bind Set(Cover Trim)
196 F1 C3 Perfect Bind Set(Cover Non-Trim)
197 F1 C4 Perfect Binder Sub Tray output Counts by number of exit paper
198 F1 C5 Perfect Binder SubCompile output
199 F1 C6 Perfect Binder Cover Tray pull-out Counts by number of time
200 F1 C7 Perfect Binder Front Door open
201 F1 C8 Stacker Cover of Perfect Binder open
202 F1 C9 -
203 F1 CA -
204 F1 CB -
205 F1 CC -
206 F1 CD -
207 F1 CE -
208 F1 CF -
209 F1 D0 -
210 F1 D1 -
211 F1 D2 -
212 F1 D3 -
213 F1 D4 -
214 F1 D5 -
215 F1 D6 -
216 F1 D7 -
217 F1 D8 Sample Paper Counter Same count as total counter
218 F1 D9 Printer Sample Print Sheets
219 F1 DA Printer Sample Print Sheets (Large)
220 F1 DB -
221 F1 DC -
222 F1 DD Job Unit Offset Job Number Counts by number of each job
223 F1 DE Set Offset Job Number
224 F1 DF Page Offset Job Number
225 F1 E0 1Set+Page Offset Job Number
226 F1 E1 Continued Job for Next Day Counts by number of execution time
227 F1 E2 Corner Crop Mark setting Counts by number of output side
228 F1 E3 Center Crop Mark setting Counts by number of output side
229 F1 E4 Tab Paper Used Job Number Number of tab paper exiting is 1 or more
230 F1 E5 Needless Tab Paper Exit Job Number of needless tab paper exiting is 1 or more
231 F1 E6 Ticket Edit Counter Ticket Edit start
232 F1 E7 Sample Output Number Sample output in ticket edit
233 F1 E8 600dpi Print Counter Counts by number of output side
234 F1 E9 Multi-Punch GP punch number (Counts by number of output
side) (not used)
235 F1 EA -
236 F1 EB -
I -82

Parameter
237 F1 EC -
238 F1 ED -
239 F1 EE -
240 F1 EF -
241 F1 F0 -
242 F1 F1 -
243 F1 F2 -
244 F1 F3 -
245 F1 F4 -
246 F1 F5 -
247 F1 F6 -
248 F1 F7 -
249 F1 F8 -
250 F1 F9 -
251 F1 FA -
252 F1 FB -
253 F1 FC -
254 F1 FD -
255 F1 FE -
256 F1 FF -
5.6.9 Counter of Each Copy Mode(2)

Confirm the status of use of each copy mode.
Note
parameter
001 F2 00 Auto color specification, DIPSW12-0=1 (Counts by
ACS
002 F2 01 Full color DIPSW12-0=1 (Counts by number of output side)
003 F2 02 Black DIPSW12-0=1 (Counts by number of output side)
004 F2 03 Single Color(Y) DIPSW12-0=1 (Counts by number of output side)
005 F2 04 Single Color(M) DIPSW12-0=1 (Counts by number of output side)
006 F2 05 Single Color(C) DIPSW12-0=1 (Counts by number of output side)
007 F2 06 Single Color(R) DIPSW12-0=1 (Counts by number of output side)
008 F2 07 Single Color(G) DIPSW12-0=1 (Counts by number of output side)
009 F2 08 Single Color(B) DIPSW12-0=1 (Counts by number of output side)
010 F2 09 ADF Thick Counts by number of output side
011 F2 0A ADF Thin Counts by number of output side
012 F2 0B Image Type: Printed Counts by number of output side
013 F2 0C Image Type: Photo Paper Counts by number of output side
014 F2 0D Image Type: Copied Counts by number of output side
015 F2 0E Image Type: Inkjet Counts by number of output side
016 F2 0F Bleed Prevention Counts by number of output side
017 F2 10 Screen: Auto Counts by number of output side
018 F2 11 Screen: Line1 Counts by number of output side
019 F2 12 Screen: Line2 Counts by number of output side
020 F2 13 Screen: Dot1 Counts by number of output side
021 F2 14 Screen: Dot2 Counts by number of output side
022 F2 15 Screen: Stochastic Counts by number of output side
023 F2 16 Glossy Counts by number of output side
024 F2 17 Density Shift Not used
025 F2 18 BackgroundRemoval Quality AdjustmentBackground Removal other than
0 specification (Counts by number of output side)
026 F2 19 Red Quality Adjustment Red other than 0 specification
027 F2 1A Green Quality Adjustment Green other than 0 specification
I -83

parameter
028 F2 1B Blue Quality Adjustment Blue other than 0 specification
029 F2 1C Hue Adjustment Quality Adjustment Hue other than 0 specification
030 F2 1D Saturation Adjustment Quality Adjustment Saturation other than 0
specification (Counts by number of output side)
031 F2 1E Brightness Adjustment Quality Adjustment Brightness other than 0
032 F2 1F Color Balance Adjustment Quality AdjustmentColor Balance Adjustment other
than 0 specification to any of YMCK adjustment
value (Counts by number of output side)
033 F2 20 Sharpness Adjustment Quality Adjustment Sharpness other than 0
034 F2 21 Contrast Adjustment Quality Adjustment Contrast other than 0
035 F2 22 Image Distinction Level Quality Adjustment Image Distinction other than 0
specification to one of Text Photo or Color (Counts
by number of output side)
036 F2 23 Paper Type: Plain Counts by number of output side
037 F2 24 Paper Type: Coated-ML Counts by number of output side
038 F2 25 Paper Type: Colored Paper Not used
039 F2 26 Paper Type: Fine Counts by number of output side
040 F2 27 Paper Type: Coated-GL Counts by number of output side
041 F2 28 Paper Type: Tab Paper Counts by number of output side
042 F2 29 Paper Type: Color Specific Counts by number of output side
043 F2 2A Paper Type: Coated-GO Counts by number of output side
044 F2 2B Paper Type: Coated-MO Counts by number of output side
045 F2 2C Paper Weight: 1 Weight Setting 64g/m2 to 74g/m2 (Counts by
046 F2 2D Paper Weight: 2 Weight Setting 75g/m2 to 80g/m2 (Counts by
047 F2 2E Paper Weight: 3 Weight Setting 81g/m2 to 105g/m2 (Counts by
048 F2 2F Paper Weight: 4 Weight Setting 106g/m2 to 135g/m2 (Counts by
049 F2 30 Paper Weight: 5 Weight Setting 136g/m2 to 162g/m2 (Counts by
054 F2 35 Main Tray: Face Up Output to FS/FD main tray and face is face up
055 F2 36 N of No Toner Stop Occurred(Y) Stop by no toner
056 F2 37 N of No Toner Stop Occurred(M) Stop by no toner
057 F2 38 N of No Toner Stop Occurred(C) Stop by no toner
058 F2 39 N of No Toner Stop Occurred(K) Stop by no toner
059 F2 3A N of Toner Recovery Box Full Detect toner recovery box full
060 F2 3B N of Color Registration Adj. Time up of 60 seconds timer
061 F2 3C N of Auto Stability Control Time up of 60 seconds timer
062 F2 3D -
063 F2 3E -
064 F2 3F -
065 F2 40 OFF Mode Time Not used
066 F2 41 -
067 F2 42 -
I -84

parameter
068 F2 43 Polygon Motor Operation Time Time up of 60 seconds timer
069 F2 44 Develop Motor Ope. Time(Color) Time up of 60 seconds timer
070 F2 45 Develop Motor Ope. Time(Black) Time up of 60 seconds timer
071 F2 46 ON Time of PCL(Color) Time up of 60 seconds timer
072 F2 47 ON Time of PCL(Black) Time up of 60 seconds timer
073 F2 48 Operation Time in Scanner Mode Time up of 60 seconds timer
074 F2 49 Time While Power(ADF) Time up of 60 seconds timer
075 F2 4A -
076 F2 4B -
077 F2 4C -
078 F2 4D Auto Y Toner Refresh Mode Count Time up of 60 seconds timer
079 F2 4E Auto M Toner Refresh Mode Count Time up of 60 seconds timer
080 F2 4F Auto C Toner Refresh Mode Count Time up of 60 seconds timer
081 F2 50 Auto K Toner Refresh Mode Count Time up of 60 seconds timer
082 F2 51 N of 4 Toner Refresh Performed Time up of 60 seconds timer
083 F2 52 N of MC Toner Refresh Performed Time up of 60 seconds timer
084 F2 53 -
085 F2 54 -
086 F2 55 -
087 F2 56 -
088 F2 57 Right/Left binding originals Counts by number of output side
089 F2 58 Upper binding originals Counts by number of output side
090 F2 59 Inside print multi tri-fold Counts by number of tri-folding
091 F2 5A Outside Print Multi Tri-Fold Counts by number of tri-folding
092 F2 5B Inside Print Tri-Fold-in Counts by number of tri-folding
093 F2 5C Outside Print Tri-Fold-in Counts by number of tri-folding
094 F2 5D Inside Print Tri-Fold-out Counts by number of tri-folding
095 F2 5E Outside Print Tri-Fold-out Counts by number of tri-folding
096 F2 5F Inside Print Double Parallel Counts by number of double parallel folding
097 F2 60 Outside Print Double Parallel Counts by number of double parallel folding
098 F2 61 Inside Print Gate Fold Counts by number of gate folding
099 F2 62 Outside Print Gate Fold Counts by number of gate folding
100 F2 63 Multi Half Fold Counts by number of multi half folding
101 F2 64 Inside Print Half-Fold Counts by number of half folding
102 F2 65 Outside Print Half-Fold Counts by number of half folding
103 F2 66 Main Tray Output Counts by number of output side
104 F2 67 Stacker Tray Output Counts by number of output side
105 F2 68 Stacker Pile Allow Counts by number of output side
106 F2 69 Fold & Staple Tray Output Counts by number of output side
107 F2 6A Tri-Fold Tray Output Counts by number of output side
108 F2 6B Folding Sub Tray Output Counts by number of output side
109 F2 6C Stacker Sub Tray Output Counts by number of output side
110 F2 6D Fold & Staple Sub Tray Output Counts by number of output side
111 F2 6E Staple Finisher Sub Tray Output Counts by number of output side
112 F2 6F Main Tray Output Job Count for each output setting
113 F2 70 Stacker Tray Output Job
114 F2 71 Fold & Staple Output Job No.
115 F2 72 Tri-Fold Tray Output Job No.
116 F2 73 Fold Sub Tray Job
117 F2 74 Stacker Sub Tray Job
118 F2 75 Fold & Staple Sub Tray Job
119 F2 76 Staple Finisher Sub Tray Job
120 F2 77 Multi Half Fold Job
121 F2 78 Inside Print Half-Fold Job
122 F2 79 Outside Print Half-Fold Job
123 F2 7A -
124 F2 7B -
I -85

parameter
125 F2 7C -
126 F2 7D -
127 F2 7E -
128 F2 7F -
129 F2 80 -
130 F2 81 -
131 F2 82 -
132 F2 83 -
133 F2 84 -
134 F2 85 -
135 F2 86 Post Inserter Count Count by the number of insert of post inserter
136 F2 87 Number of Perfect Bind (Copy) job Perfect Bind and Copy job
137 F2 88 Number of Perfect Bind (Printer) job Perfect Bind and Printer JOB
138 F2 89 Color Density Control Count by paper exit of Output Paper Density Adj.
139 F2 8A Color Density Control (L Size) Count by large size paper exit of Output Paper
Density Adj.
140 F2 8B -
141 F2 8C S.M.A.R.T(Y) Start/Stop Count Number of times the spindle motor of HDD/Y rotates/
stops.
142 F2 8D S.M.A.R.T(Y) Load Cycle Count Number of times the magnetic head of HDD/Y
retracts.
143 F2 8E S.M.A.R.T(Y) Reallocated Count
144 F2 8F S.M.A.R.T(Y) Power On Hours
145 F2 90 S.M.A.R.T(M) Start/Stop Count Number of times the spindle motor of HDD/M
rotates/stops.
146 F2 91 S.M.A.R.T(M) Load Cycle Count Number of times the magnetic head of HDD/M
retracts.
147 F2 92 S.M.A.R.T(M) Reallocated Count
148 F2 93 S.M.A.R.T(M) Power On Hours
149 F2 94 S.M.A.R.T(C) Start/Stop Count Number of times the spindle motor of HDD/C
rotates/stops.
150 F2 95 S.M.A.R.T(C) Load Cycle Count Number of times the magnetic head of HDD/C
retracts.
151 F2 96 S.M.A.R.T(C) Reallocated Count
152 F2 97 S.M.A.R.T(C) Power On Hours
153 F2 98 S.M.A.R.T(K) Start/Stop Count Number of times the spindle motor of HDD/K rotates/
stops.
154 F2 99 S.M.A.R.T(K) Load Cycle Count Number of times the magnetic head of HDD/K
retracts.
155 F2 9A S.M.A.R.T(K) Reallocated Count
156 F2 9B S.M.A.R.T(K) Power On Hours
157 F2 9C S.M.A.R.T(A) Start/Stop Count Number of times the spindle motor of HDD/A rotates/
stops.
158 F2 9D S.M.A.R.T(A) Load Cycle Count Number of times the magnetic head of HDD/A
retracts.
159 F2 9E S.M.A.R.T(A) Reallocated Count
160 F2 9F S.M.A.R.T(A) Power On Hours
161 F2 A0 S.M.A.R.T(P) Start/Stop Count Number of times the spindle motor of HDD/P rotates/
stops.
162 F2 A1 S.M.A.R.T(P) Load Cycle Count Number of times the magnetic head of HDD/P
retracts.
163 F2 A2 S.M.A.R.T(P) Reallocated Count
164 F2 A3 S.M.A.R.T(P) Power On Hours
165 F2 A4 -
166 F2 A5 -
167 F2 A6 -
168 F2 A7 -
169 F2 A8 -
170 F2 A9 -
171 F2 AA -
I -86

parameter
172 F2 AB -
173 F2 AC -
174 F2 AD -
175 F2 AE -
176 F2 AF -
177 F2 B0 -
178 F2 B1 -
179 F2 B2 -
180 F2 B3 -
181 F2 B4 -
182 F2 B5 -
183 F2 B6 -
184 F2 B7 -
185 F2 B8 -
186 F2 B9 -
187 F2 BA -
188 F2 BB -
189 F2 BC -
190 F2 BD -
191 F2 BE -
192 F2 BF -
193 F2 C0 -
194 F2 C1 -
195 F2 C2 -
196 F2 C3 -
197 F2 C4 -
198 F2 C5 -
199 F2 C6 -
200 F2 C7 -
201 F2 C8 -
202 F2 C9 -
203 F2 CA -
204 F2 CB -
205 F2 CC -
206 F2 CD -
207 F2 CE -
208 F2 CF -
209 F2 D0 -
210 F2 D1 -
211 F2 D2 -
212 F2 D3 -
213 F2 D4 -
214 F2 D5 -
215 F2 D6 -
216 F2 D7 -
217 F2 D8 -
218 F2 D9 -
219 F2 DA -
220 F2 DB -
221 F2 DC -
222 F2 DD -
223 F2 DE -
224 F2 DF -
225 F2 E0 -
226 F2 E1 -
227 F2 E2 -
228 F2 E3 -
I -87

parameter
229 F2 E4 -
230 F2 E5 -
231 F2 E6 -
232 F2 E7 -
233 F2 E8 -
234 F2 E9 -
235 F2 EA -
236 F2 EB -
237 F2 EC -
238 F2 ED -
239 F2 EE -
240 F2 EF -
241 F2 F0 -
242 F2 F1 -
243 F2 F2 -
244 F2 F3 -
245 F2 F4 -
256 F2 F5 -
247 F2 F6 -
248 F2 F7 -
249 F2 F8 -
250 F2 F9 -
251 F2 FA -
252 F2 FB -
253 F2 FC -
254 F2 FD -
255 F2 FE -
256 F2 FF -
5.6.10 SC Counter/SC Counter Individual Sec.

SC Counter/SC Counter Individual Sec.
Note
When the service mode DIPSW 3-1 is 1 (Latched), C35## to C39## are not counted.
No. CSRC Item
Parameter (SC Code)
001 E0 00 C-0001
002 E0 01 C-0002
003 E0 02 C-0003
004 E0 03 C-0101
005 E0 04 C-0102
006 E0 05 C-0103
007 E0 06 C-0201
008 E0 07 C-0202
009 E0 08 C-0203
010 E0 09 C-0204
011 E0 0A C-0205
012 E0 0B C-0208
013 E0 0C C-0209
014 E0 0D C-0211
015 E0 0E C-0212
016 E0 0F C-0213
017 E0 10 C-0301
018 E0 11 C-0302
019 E0 12 C-0303
020 E0 13 C-0304
021 E0 14 C-0305
022 E0 15 C-0306
I -88
No. CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
023 E0 16 C-0307
024 E0 17 C-0308
025 E0 18 C-0309
026 E0 19 C-0310
027 E0 1A C-0311
028 E0 1B C-0312
029 E0 1C C-0313
030 E0 1D C-0314
031 E0 1E C-0315
032 E0 1F C-0316
033 E0 20 C-0317
034 E0 21 C-0318
035 E0 22 C-0319
036 E0 23 C-0320
037 E0 24 C-0321
038 E0 25 C-0401
039 E0 26 C-0402
040 E0 27 C-0403
041 E0 28 C-0404
042 E0 29 C-0405
043 E0 2A C-0406
044 E0 2B C-0407
045 E0 2C C-0408
046 E0 2D C-0409
047 E0 2E C-0410
048 E0 2F C-0411
049 E0 30 C-0412
050 E0 31 C-0413
051 E0 32 C-0414
052 E0 33 C-0415
053 E0 34 C-0416
054 E0 35 C-0417
055 E0 36 C-0418
056 E0 37 C-1005
057 E0 38 C-1006
058 E0 39 C-1007
059 E0 3A C-1008
060 E0 3B C-1101
061 E0 3C C-1102
062 E0 3D C-1103
063 E0 3E C-1104
064 E0 3F C-1105
065 E0 40 C-1106
066 E0 41 C-1107
067 E0 42 C-1108
068 E0 43 C-1109
069 E0 44 C-1110
070 E0 45 C-1111
071 E0 46 C-1112
072 E0 47 C-1113
073 E0 48 C-1114
074 E0 49 C-1115
075 E0 4A C-1116
076 E0 4B C-1124
077 E0 4C C-1125
078 E0 4D C-1126
079 E0 4E C-1127
I -89
No. CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
080 E0 4F C-1132
081 E0 50 C-1137
082 E0 51 C-1138
083 E0 52 -
084 E0 53 C-1140
085 E0 54 C-1141
086 E0 55 C-1142
087 E0 56 C-1143
088 E0 57 C-1201
089 E0 58 C-1202
090 E0 59 C-1203
091 E0 5A C-1204
092 E0 5B C-1205
093 E0 5C C-1206
094 E0 5D C-1211
095 E0 5E C-1212
096 E0 5F C-1213
097 E0 60 C-1214
098 E0 61 C-1215
099 E0 62 C-1216
100 E0 63 C-1221
101 E0 64 C-1222
102 E0 65 C-1223
103 E0 66 C-1224
104 E0 67 C-1225
105 E0 68 C-1226
106 E0 69 C-1227
107 E0 6A C-1228
108 E0 6B C-1229
109 E0 6C C-1230
110 E0 6D C-1231
111 E0 6E C-1232
112 E0 6F C-1233
113 E0 70 C-1234
114 E0 71 C-1235
115 E0 72 C-1241
116 E0 73 C-1242
117 E0 74 C-1243
118 E0 75 C-1244
119 E0 76 C-1245
120 E0 77 C-1246
121 E0 78 C-1247
122 E0 79 C-1248
123 E0 7A C-1249
124 E0 7B C-1250
125 E0 7C C-1251
126 E0 7D C-1252
127 E0 7E C-1253
128 E0 7F C-1254
129 E0 80 C-1255
130 E0 81 C-1256
131 E0 82 C-1257
132 E0 83 C-1258
133 E0 84 C-1259
134 E0 85 C-1260
135 E0 86 C-1261
136 E0 87 C-1262
I -90
No. CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
137 E0 88 C-1263
138 E0 89 C-1264
139 E0 8A C-1265
140 E0 8B C-1266
141 E0 8C C-1267
142 E0 8D C-1268
143 E0 8E C-1269
144 E0 8F C-1270
145 E0 90 C-1271
146 E0 91 C-1301
147 E0 92 C-1302
148 E0 93 C-1303
149 E0 94 C-1304
150 E0 95 C-1305
151 E0 96 C-1306
152 E0 97 C-1307
153 E0 98 C-1308
154 E0 99 C-1309
155 E0 9A C-1310
156 E0 9B C-1311
157 E0 9C C-1321
158 E0 9D C-1322
159 E0 9E C-1323
160 E0 9F C-1324
161 E0 A0 C-1325
162 E0 A1 C-1402
163 E0 A2 C-1403
164 E0 A3 C-1404
165 E0 A4 C-1405
166 E0 A5 C-1411
167 E0 A6 C-1431
168 E0 A7 C-1432
169 E0 A8 C-1433
170 E0 A9 C-1434
171 E0 AA C-1451
172 E0 AB C-1452
173 E0 AC C-1453
174 E0 AD C-2001
175 E0 AE C-2002
176 E0 AF C-2003
177 E0 B0 C-2004
178 E0 B1 C-2005
179 E0 B2 C-2006
180 E0 B3 C-2201
181 E0 B4 C-2202
182 E0 B5 C-2203
183 E0 B6 C-2204
184 E0 B7 C-2211
185 E0 B8 C-2212
186 E0 B9 C-2213
187 E0 BA C-2214
188 E0 BB C-2220
189 E0 BC C-2221
190 E0 BD C-2222
191 E0 BE C-2301
192 E0 BF C-2302
193 E0 C0 C-2303
I -91
No. CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
194 E0 C1 C-2304
195 E0 C2 C-2401
196 E0 C3 C-2402
197 E0 C4 C-2403
198 E0 C5 C-2404
199 E0 C6 C-2411
200 E0 C7 C-2412
201 E0 C8 C-2413
202 E0 C9 C-2414
203 E0 CA C-2421
204 E0 CB C-2422
205 E0 CC C-2423
206 E0 CD C-2424
207 E0 CE C-2431
208 E0 CF C-2432
209 E0 D0 C-2433
210 E0 D1 C-2434
211 E0 D2 C-2441
212 E0 D3 C-2442
213 E0 D4 C-2443
214 E0 D5 C-2444
215 E0 D6 C-2451
216 E0 D7 C-2452
217 E0 D8 C-2453
218 E0 D9 C-2454
219 E0 DA C-2461
220 E0 DB C-2462
221 E0 DC C-2463
222 E0 DD C-2464
223 E0 DE C-2470
224 E0 DF C-2701
225 E0 E0 C-2702
226 E0 E1 C-2703
227 E0 E2 C-2704
228 E0 E3 C-2711
229 E0 E4 C-2712
230 E0 E5 C-2713
231 E0 E6 C-2714
232 E0 E7 C-2720
233 E0 E8 C-2721
234 E0 E9 C-2801
235 E0 EA C-2802
236 E0 EB C-2803
237 E0 EC C-2804
238 E0 ED C-2811
239 E0 EE C-2812
240 E0 EF C-2813
241 E0 F0 C-2814
242 E0 F1 C-2821
243 E0 F2 C-2822
244 E0 F3 C-2823
245 E0 F4 C-2824
246 E0 F5 C-2831
247 E0 F6 C-2832
248 E0 F7 C-2833
249 E0 F8 C-2834
250 E0 F9 C-2840
I -92
No. CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
251 E0 FA C-2841
252 E0 FB C-3101
253 E0 FC C-3102
254 E0 FD C-3103
255 E0 FE C-3104
256 E0 FF C-3301
257 E1 00 C-3302
258 E1 01 C-3303
259 E1 02 C-3501
260 E1 03 C-3502
261 E1 04 C-3503
262 E1 05 C-3504
263 E1 06 C-3505
264 E1 07 C-3506
265 E1 08 -
266 E1 09 C-3508
267 E1 0A C-3801
268 E1 0B C-3802
269 E1 0C C-3803
270 E1 0D C-3804
271 E1 0E C-3805
272 E1 0F C-3806
273 E1 10 C-3901
274 E1 11 C-3902
275 E1 12 C-3903
276 E1 13 C-3904
277 E1 14 C-3905
278 E1 15 C-3906
279 E1 16 C-3907
280 E1 17 C-3908
281 E1 18 C-3909
282 E1 19 C-3910
283 E1 1A C-3911
284 E1 1B C-3912
285 E1 1C C-3913
286 E1 1D C-3914
287 E1 1E C-3915
288 E1 1F C-3916
289 E1 20 C-4101
290 E1 21 C-4102
291 E1 22 C-4103
292 E1 23 C-4104
293 E1 24 C-4111
294 E1 25 C-4112
295 E1 26 C-4113
296 E1 27 C-4114
297 E1 28 C-4120
298 E1 29 C-4301
299 E1 2A C-4501
300 E1 2B C-4502
301 E1 2C C-4503
302 E1 2D C-4504
303 E1 2E C-4511
304 E1 2F C-4512
305 E1 30 C-4513
306 E1 31 C-4514
307 E1 32 C-4520
I -93
No. CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
308 E1 33 C-4521
309 E1 34 C-4522
310 E1 35 C-4701
311 E1 36 C-4702
312 E1 37 C-4703
313 E1 38 C-4705
314 E1 39 C-4706
315 E1 3A C-4708
316 E1 3B C-4709
317 E1 3C -
318 E1 3D -
319 E1 3E C-4713
320 E1 3F C-4714
321 E1 40 C-4715
322 E1 41 C-4716
323 E1 42 C-4717
324 E1 43 C-4718
325 E1 44 C-4719
326 E1 45 C-4720
327 E1 46 C-4721
328 E1 47 C-4722
329 E1 48 C-4723
330 E1 49 C-4724
331 E1 4A C-4725
332 E1 4B C-4840
333 E1 4C C-4850
334 E1 4D C-5001
335 E1 4E C-5002
336 E1 4F C-5003
337 E1 50 C-5004
338 E1 51 C-5005
339 E1 52 C-5010
340 E1 53 -
341 E1 54 C-5301
342 E1 55 C-5302
343 E1 56 C-5303
344 E1 57 C-6101
345 E1 58 C-6102
346 E1 59 C-6301
347 E1 5A C-6701
348 E1 5B C-6702
349 E1 5C C-6703
350 E1 5D C-6704
351 E1 5E C-6705
352 E1 5F C-6706
353 E1 60 C-6707
354 E1 61 C-6708
355 E1 62 C-6709
356 E1 63 C-6710
357 E1 64 C-6711
358 E1 65 C-6712
359 E1 66 C-6713
360 E1 67 C-6714
361 E1 68 C-6715
362 E1 69 C-6716
363 E1 6A C-6717
364 E1 6B C-6718
I -94
No. CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
365 E1 6C C-6719
366 E1 6D C-6720
367 E1 6E C-6721
368 E1 6F C-6722
369 E1 70 C-6723
370 E1 71 C-6724
371 E1 72 C-6725
372 E1 73 C-6801
373 E1 74 C-7001
374 E1 75 C-8001
375 E1 76 C-8101
376 E1 77 C-8102
377 E1 78 C-8103
378 E1 79 C-8401
379 E1 7A C-8402
380 E1 7B C-8403
381 E1 7C C-8404
382 E1 7D C-8405
383 E1 7E C-8406
384 E1 7F C-8407
385 E1 80 C-C101
386 E1 81 C-C102
387 E1 82 C-C103
388 E1 83 C-C104
389 E1 84 C-C106
390 E1 85 C-C107
391 E1 86 C-C108
392 E1 87 C-C109
393 E1 88 C-C111
394 E1 89 C-C112
395 E1 8A C-C113
396 E1 8B C-C114
397 E1 8C C-C115
398 E1 8D C-C120
399 E1 8E C-D0E0
400 E1 8F C-D0E1
401 E1 90 C-D0E2
402 E1 91 C-D0E3
403 E1 92 C-D0E4
404 E1 93 C-D0E5
405 E1 94 C-D0E6
406 E1 95 C-D0E7
407 E1 96 C-D0E8
408 E1 97 -
409 E1 98 -
410 E1 99 -
411 E1 9A -
412 E1 9B -
413 E1 9C -
414 E1 9D -
415 E1 9E C-D0F0
416 E1 9F C-E001
417 E1 A0 C-E002
418 E1 A1 C-E003
419 E1 A2 C-E004
420 E1 A3 C-E005
421 E1 A4 C-E006
I -95
No. CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
422 E1 A5 C-E007
423 E1 A6 C-0322
424 E1 A7 C-2851
425 E1 A8 C-2852
426 E1 A9 C-2853
427 E1 AA C-2861
428 E1 AB C-2862
429 E1 AC C-2863
430 E1 AD C-2871
431 E1 AE C-2872
432 E1 AF C-2873
433 E1 B0 C-1009
434 E1 B1 C-1010
435 E1 B2 C-1011
436 E1 B3 C-1330
437 E1 B4 C-1331
438 E1 B5 C-1332
439 E1 B6 C-1333
440 E1 B7 C-1334
441 E1 B8 C-1406
442 E1 B9 C-1435
443 E1 BA C-1436
444 E1 BB C-1437
445 E1 BC C-1454
446 E1 BD C-1501
447 E1 BE C-1502
448 E1 BF C-1504
449 E1 C0 C-1505
450 E1 C1 C-1506
451 E1 C2 C-1507
452 E1 C3 C-1508
453 E1 C4 C-1509
454 E1 C5 C-1510
455 E1 C6 C-1511
456 E1 C7 C-1512
457 E1 C8 C-1513
458 E1 C9 C-1514
459 E1 CA C-1515
460 E1 CB C-1516
461 E1 CC C-1517
462 E1 CD C-1518
463 E1 CE C-1519
464 E1 CF C-1520
465 E1 D0 C-1521
466 E1 D1 C-1522
467 E1 D2 C-1523
468 E1 D3 C-1524
469 E1 D4 C-1525
470 E1 D5 C-1526
471 E1 D6 C-1527
472 E1 D7 C-1528
473 E1 D8 C-1530
474 E1 D9 C-1531
475 E1 DA C-1532
476 E1 DB C-1534
477 E1 DC C-1537
478 E1 DD C-1538
I -96
No. CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
479 E1 DE C-1540
480 E1 DF C-1541
481 E1 E0 C-1542
482 E1 E1 C-1543
483 E1 E2 C-1544
484 E1 E3 C-1545
485 E1 E4 C-1546
486 E1 E5 C-1547
487 E1 E6 C-1548
488 E1 E7 C-1549
489 E1 E8 C-1550
490 E1 E9 C-1551
491 E1 EA C-1552
492 E1 EB C-1553
493 E1 EC C-1554
494 E1 ED C-1555
495 E1 EE C-1556
496 E1 EF C-1557
497 E1 F0 C-1558
498 E1 F1 C-1559
499 E1 F2 C-1560
500 E1 F3 C-1561
501 E1 F4 C-1562
502 E1 F5 C-C116
503 E1 F6 -
504 E1 F7 C-1144
505 E1 F8 C-1145
506 E1 F9 C-1146
507 E1 FA C-1147
508 E1 FB C-1148
509 E1 FC C-1272
510 E1 FD C-1273
511 E1 FE C-1274
512 E1 FF C-1275
513 E2 00 C-1012
514 E2 01 C-C117
515 E2 02 C-1014
516 E2 03 C-1281
517 E2 04 C-1282
518 E2 05 C-1341
519 E2 06 C-1342
520 E2 07 C-1408
521 E2 08 C-1439
522 E2 09 C-1456
523 E2 0A C-1499
524 E2 0B -
525 E2 0C C-1565
526 E2 0D C-1566
527 E2 0E C-C118
528 E2 0F C-1013
529 E2 10 C-1290
530 E2 11 C-1291
531 E2 12 C-1292
532 E2 13 C-1293
533 E2 14 C-1294
534 E2 15 C-1295
535 E2 16 C-1351
I -97
No. CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
536 E2 17 C-1352
537 E2 18 C-1353
538 E2 19 C-1354
539 E2 1A C-1355
540 E2 1B C-1356
541 E2 1C C-1357
542 E2 1D C-1358
543 E2 1E C-1359
544 E2 1F C-1360
545 E2 20 C-1361
546 E2 21 C-1362
547 E2 22 C-1407
548 E2 23 C-1438
549 E2 24 C-1455
550 E2 25 C-C119
551 E2 26 C-5304
552 E2 27 C-E008
553 E2 28 -
554 E2 29 -
555 E2 2A -
556 E2 2B -
557 E2 2C -
558 E2 2D -
559 E2 2E -
560 E2 2F -
561 E2 30 -
562 E2 31 -
563 E2 32 -
564 E2 33 -
565 E2 34 -
566 E2 35 -
567 E2 36 -
568 E2 37 -
569 E2 38 -
570 E2 39 -
571 E2 3A -
572 E2 3B -
573 E2 3C -
574 E2 3D -
575 E2 3E -
576 E2 3F -
577 E2 40 -
578 E2 41 -
579 E2 42 -
580 E2 43 -
581 E2 44 -
582 E2 45 -
583 E2 46 -
584 E2 47 -
585 E2 48 -
586 E2 49 -
587 E2 4A -
588 E2 4B -
589 E2 4C -
590 E2 4D -
591 E2 4E -
592 E2 4F -
I -98
No. CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
593 E2 50 -
594 E2 51 -
595 E2 52 -
596 E2 53 -
597 E2 54 -
598 E2 55 -
599 E2 56 -
600 E2 57 -
601 E2 58 -
602 E2 59 -
603 E2 5A -
604 E2 5B -
605 E2 5C -
606 E2 5D -
607 E2 5E -
608 E2 5F -
609 E2 60 -
610 E2 61 -
611 E2 62 -
612 E2 63 -
613 E2 64 -
614 E2 65 -
615 E2 66 -
616 E2 67 -
617 E2 68 -
618 E2 69 -
619 E2 6A -
620 E2 6B -
621 E2 6C -
622 E2 6D -
623 E2 6E -
624 E2 6F -
625 E2 70 -
626 E2 71 -
627 E2 72 -
628 E2 73 -
629 E2 74 -
630 E2 75 -
631 E2 76 -
632 E2 77 -
633 E2 78 -
634 E2 79 -
635 E2 7A -
636 E2 7B -
637 E2 7C -
638 E2 7D -
639 E2 7E -
640 E2 7F -
5.6.11 SC data of time series

For the latest 20 items of error codes, check the SC Code, Total Counter, Date, Time, Machine (00: Idling, 01: Scan, 02: Print, 03: Scan/Print).
5.6.12 Maintenance Counter Reset (Maintenance History)

(1) Usage
Check the maintenance frequency.
(2) Specifications
The latest 10 items of the maintenance counter reset history is displayed.
I -99
Item
Reset Date
Maintenance Counter
Maintenance Limit Data
Counter Average
Counter Reset Count
(3) Confirmation steps of Maintenance Counter Reset

Press [14 Maintenance History].
2. "Maintenance History screen"
Press [01 Maintenance Counter Reset].
3. "Maintenance Counter Reset screen"
Check the maintenance counter reset history.
5.6.13 Parts History in Time Series (Maintenance History)

(1) Usage
Check the maintenance frequency for respective parts.
(2) Specifications
The latest 50 items of the maintenance counter reset history is displayed.
Item
No.
(Number of the special parts counter)
Parts Name
P/N
Counter/Limit
Replacement Count
ORU
(The mark "*" means that the part is replaced in the ORU-M mode. )
(3) Confirmation steps of Parts History in Time Series

Press [14 Maintenance History].
2. "Maintenance History screen"
Press [02 Parts History in Time Series].
3. "Parts History in Time Series screen"
Check the special parts counter reset history.
I -100
5.6.14 ORU-M Maintenance History

(1) Usage
Check the frequency of unit replacement, then predict the timing of replacing the ORU-M target part and collect each type of information.
(2) Specifications
Item
Information of ORU-M maintenance history:
Unit replacing Start/End date and time, Downtime (m), Total Counter, End Status (Normal, error)
Information of each ORU-M maintenance unit:
Parts Name, P/N, Serial Number, Life Cycle, Replacement Count, Replace Reason (Periodical Replacement, Image Trouble, Transport
Trouble/JAM)
Information of total ORU-M maintenance:
Maintenance Count, Replace Unit Number, Downtime Average
Maximum storable number
The data of the latest 125 replacements of the ORU-M corresponding unit are stored.
When one of the ORU-M counters is reset, up to 125 data including the latest replacement date and the replaced unit information are
stored.
Example
When replacing 4 units at a maintenance, the data of latest 25 maintenances can be stored.
(Maintenance date (1 item to be stored) + 4 units replaced (4 items to be stored) = 5 items to be stored
With this function, the following items can be checked.
Name of replaced unit
Part No. (P/N)
Life cycle
Replacement Count
Replace Reason (PM, CM (image quality), CM (machine broken))
The down time of the latest 50 units are stored.
Measures the length of time from when entering the ORU-M replacement screen to when exiting it.
Up to 50 data (time taken for replacement and replacement date) of each ORU-M corresponding unit are stored. The data older than that
are stored as averaged value.
(3) ORU-M maintenance history check procedures

1. "ORU-M Maintenance History screen"
Check the ORU maintenance history.
I -101
[1] [2]
[1] Information of ORU-M total maintenance history: [2] ORU-M maintenance history information
2. To check the object unit of each maintenance, select the maintenance to display and then press [Information View].
3. "Information View screen"
Check the maintenance of each unit.
5.6.15 Checking, setting and resetting procedure of the Special Parts Counter
Displays the counter of the target part.
When the target part is replaced, reset the counter of that part to manage the service history.
(1) Checking, setting and resetting procedure

Press [03 Parts Counter].
3. "Parts Counter Menu screen"
Press [01 Special Parts Counter].
4. "Special Parts Counter screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous] to scroll the pages and check the counter.
5. To reset the counter, press [] or [] to select the target item.
6. Press [Counter Clear].
Press [No] to cancel and return to "Special Parts Counter screen"
5.6.16 Special Parts Counter

Note
Be sure to reset the parts counter after replacing any parts listed below. Otherwise, image failure or jam may occur.
1. Dust proof filter /1 assy: No.003 Dust proof filter /A (right)
2. Charging coronas /Y, /M, /C, and /K: No.013 to 020 Charging coronas /Y, /M, /C and /K
3. Drum cartridges /Y, /M, /C and /K: No.021 to 028 Drum cartridges /Y, /M, /C and /K
4. Developers /Y, /M, /C and /K: No.041 to 048 Developers /Y, /M, /C and /K
I -102
5. Belt cleaner blade: No.061, 062 Belt cleaning blade

6. 1st transfer rollers /Y, /M, /C and /K: No.063 to 066 1st transfer rollers /Y, /M, /C and /K
When the counter exceeds the limit, the color of the character changes into red.
No. CSRC Parts name Parts No. Count conditions
parameter
001 Z1 00 Toner Recovery Box A1DUA365 *1
The waste toner full sensor (PS52) detects the
limit automatically.
002 Z1 01 - -
003 Z1 02 Dust-proof Filter/A(Right)(%) A1DUA112 Counted for each color with the combination of
004 Z1 03 Dust-proof Filter/B(Rear)(%) A1DUA168 print coverage, drive distance of the developing
roller, humidity, and so on. Shows the count in
005 Z1 04 Dust-proof Filter/3(Right)(%) A1DU1230 percentage with respect to the end of its parts
life.
The counters No.003 and 004 are reset
simultaneously.
006 Z1 05 Charging Dust-proof Filter A1DUA444 *1
007 Z1 06 - -
008 Z1 07 - -
009 Z1 08 - -
010 Z1 09 - -
011 Z1 0A - -
012 Z1 0B - -
013 Z1 0C Charging Corona/Y(Page) A1DUA460 *2
When counting by number of pages
Resetting this counter also resets No.014.
014 Z1 0D Charging Corona/Y(Time %) A1DUA460 Counts the charging time and shows the count in
percentage with respect to the end of its parts
life.
015 Z1 0E Charging Corona/M(Page) A1DUA460 *2
016 Z1 0F Charging Corona/M(Time %) A1DUA460 Counts the charging time and shows the count in
life.
017 Z1 10 Charging Corona/C(Page) A1DUA460 *2
018 Z1 11 Charging Corona/C(Time %) A1DUA460 Counts the charging time and shows the count in
life.
019 Z1 12 Charging Corona/K(Page) A1DUA460 *1
020 Z1 13 Charging Corona/K(Time %) A1DUA460 Counts the charging time and shows the count in
life.
021 Z1 14 Drum Cartridge/Y(Page) A1DUA330 *2
022 Z1 15 Drum Cartridge/Y(Distance %) A1DUA330 Compares the drive distance of the drum with
that of the Lubricant applying roller and shows
the larger count number in percentage with
respect to the end of its parts life.
023 Z1 16 Drum Cartridge/M(Page) A1DUA330 *2
024 Z1 17 Drum Cartridge/M(Distance %) A1DUA330 Compares the drive distance of the drum with
025 Z1 18 Drum Cartridge/C(Page) A1DUA330 *2
I -103

parameter
026 Z1 19 Drum Cartridge/C(Distance %) A1DUA330 Compares the drive distance of the drum with
027 Z1 1A Drum Cartridge/K(Page) A1DUA330 *1
028 Z1 1B Drum Cartridge/K(Distance %) A1DUA330 Compares the drive distance of the drum with
029 Z1 1C - -
030 Z1 1D - -
031 Z1 1E - -
032 Z1 1F - -
033 Z1 20 - -
034 Z1 21 - -
035 Z1 22 - -
036 Z1 23 - -
037 Z1 24 - -
038 Z1 25 - -
039 Z1 26 - -
040 Z1 27 - -
041 Z1 28 Developer/Y (Page) A1U9T700 *2
042 Z1 29 Developer/Y(Distance %) A1U9T700 Counts the drive distance of the developing roller
and shows the count in percentage with respect
to the end of its parts life.
043 Z1 2A Developer/M (Page) A1U9T800 *2
044 Z1 2B Developer/M(Distance %) A1U9T800 Counts the drive distance of the developing roller
045 Z1 2C Developer/C (Page) A1U9T900 *2
046 Z1 2D Developer/C(Distance %) A1U9T900 Counts the drive distance of the developing roller
047 Z1 2E Developer/K (Page) A1U9T600 *1
048 Z1 2F Developer/K(Distance %) A1U9T600 Counts the drive distance of the developing roller
049 Z1 30 Developing Unit/Y(Page) A1DUA370 *2
When counting by number of pages.
050 Z1 31 Developing Unit/Y(Distance %) A1DUA370 Counts the travel distance and shows the count
in percentage with respect to the end of its parts
life.
051 Z1 32 Developing Unit/M(Page) A1DUA370 *2
052 Z1 33 Developing Unit/M(Distance %) A1DUA370 Counts the travel distance and shows the count
life.
I -104

parameter
053 Z1 34 Developing Unit/C(Page) A1DUB380 *2
054 Z1 35 Developing Unit/C(Distance %) A1DUB380 Counts the travel distance and shows the count
life.
055 Z1 36 Developing Unit/K(Page) A1DUB390 *1
056 Z1 37 Developing Unit/K(Distance %) A1DUB390 Counts the travel distance and shows the count
life.
057 Z1 38 Intermediate Transfer Unit A1DUA500 *1
058 Z1 39 Intermediate Transfer Belt A03U5042 *1
059 Z1 3A Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit A1DUA530 *1
Resetting this counter also resets No.060 to 062
and No.69.
060 Z1 3B Toner Recovery Sheet A1DUA532 *1
061 Z1 3C Belt Cleaning Blade(Page) A03U5530 *1
062 Z1 3D Belt Cleaning Blade(Distance %) A03U5530 Counts the drive distance of the transfer belt and
shows the count in percentage with respect to
the end of its parts life.
063 Z1 3E 1st Transfer Roller/Y A03U5012 *2
064 Z1 3F 1st Transfer Roller/M A03U5012
065 Z1 40 1st Transfer Roller/C A03U5012
066 Z1 41 1st Transfer Roller/K A03U5004 *1
067 Z1 42 2nd Transfer Roller/U 65AA2611 *1
The nonvolatile powered time and the slide
distance are reset simultaneously.
068 Z1 43 Transfer Belt Separation Claw A1DUA518 *1
069 Z1 44 Transfer Roller Bearing 65AA2638 *1
070 Z1 45 Separation Claw Solenoid 26NA8251 1 count for each paper exit in the single side
mode, 2 counts in the double side mode.
071 Z1 46 2nd Transfer Roller/L 65AA4501 *1
072 Z1 47 Separation Discharging Unit A1DUB527 *1
073 Z1 48 Transfer Earth Plate Unit A1DUB526 1 count for each paper exit in the single side
074 Z1 49 - -
075 Z1 4A - -
076 Z1 4B - -
077 Z1 4C - -
078 Z1 4D - -
079 Z1 4E - -
080 Z1 4F - -
081 Z1 50 Fusing Unit Japan A1DUA72A *1
North America A1DUA72E
Europe A1DUA72F
082 Z1 51 Fusing Roller/2 A03U7202 *1
083 Z1 52 Fusing Roller/L A03U7203 *1
084 Z1 53 Fusing Belt A03U7205 *1
085 Z1 54 Belt Regulating Sleeve A03U7250 *1
086 Z1 55 Paper Exit Roller/Up A03U7225 1 count for each paper exit in the single side
087 Z1 56 Fusing Limiter 65AA5365 *1
088 Z1 57 Insulating Sleeve/U A03U7295 *1
089 Z1 58 Fusing Bearing/L 26NA5371 *1
090 Z1 59 Insulating Sleeve/L A03U7227 *1
I -105

parameter
091 Z1 5A Fusing Roller/1 A03U7201 *1
092 Z1 5B Fusing Drive Gear/B A03U8082 *1
093 Z1 5C Fusing Bearing/1 A03U8078 *1
094 Z1 5D Fusing Drive Gear/O A03U8095 *1
095 Z1 5E Fusing Regulating Gear 65AA7747 *1
096 Z1 5F Fusing Duct Assy A1DUA782 *1
097 Z1 60 Fusing Bearing/2 56UA7507 *1
098 Z1 61 Fusing Drive Gear/M A03U8093 *1
099 Z1 62 Fusing Lamp/U A1DUM31A (Japan) *1
A1DUM31E (North
America)
A1DUM31F (Europe)
100 Z1 63 Fusing Lamp/L A03UM32A (Japan) *1
A03UM32E (North
America)
A03UM32F (Europe)
101 Z1 64 Fusing Temp. Sensor/U A1DUA767 *1
102 Z1 65 Fusing Temp. Sensor/L A1DUA737 *1
103 Z1 66 Center Fusing Temp. Sensor/U 65AA8801 *1
104 Z1 67 Center Fusing Temp. Sensor/L 65AA8802 *1
105 Z1 68 Feed/Separation Rubber(Tray1) 25SA4096 1 count for each paper exit from Tray1
106 Z1 69 Feed/Separation Rubber(Tray2) 25SA4096 1 count for each paper exit from Tray2
107 Z1 6A Feed/Separation Rubber(Tray3) 25SA4096 1 count for each paper exit from Tray3
108 Z1 6B Feed/Separation Rubber(By-pass) 25SA4096 1 count for each paper exit from bypass
109 Z1 6C Paper Feed Roller(Tray1) A1DUA567 1 count for each paper exit from Tray1
110 Z1 6D Paper Feed Roller(Tray2) A1DUA567 1 count for each paper exit from Tray2
111 Z1 6E Paper Feed Roller(Tray3) A1DUA567 1 count for each paper exit from Tray3
112 Z1 6F Paper Feed Roller(By-pass) A21EB614 1 count for each paper exit from bypass
113 Z1 70 Paper Feed Clutch(Tray1) 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from Tray1
116 Z1 73 Paper Feed Clutch(By-pass) 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from bypass
117 Z1 74 Pre-regist. Clutch(Tray1) 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from Tray1
120 Z1 77 Intermediate Transport Clutch/1 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from Tray2 or Tray3
121 Z1 78 Intermediate Transport Clutch/2 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit in the single side
mode, 1 count in the double side mode.
122 Z1 79 Intermediate Transport Clutch/3 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit in the single side
mode, 1 count in the double side mode.
123 Z1 7A Registration Cleaning Sheet A1DUB711 1 count for each paper exit in the single side
124 Z1 7B Registration Roller A1DUB710 1 count for each paper exit in the single side
125 Z1 7C Decurler Roller A03U8605 1 count for each paper exit in the single side
126 Z1 7D Paper Exit Decurler Roller A03U8926 1 count for each paper exit.
127 Z1 7E ADU Transport Clutch/1 A03UM201 1 count for each paper exit in the duplex mode
(Not counted in the simplex mode)
128 Z1 7F ADU Transport Clutch/2 A03UM201 1 count for each paper exit in the duplex mode
129 Z1 80 ADU Transport Clutch/3 A03UM201 1 count for each paper exit in the duplex mode
130 Z1 81 ADU Pre-regist. Clutch A03UM201 1 count for each paper exit in the duplex mode
131 Z1 82 Exposure ON Time A03UM301 Accumulation of time lamp is on. 1 count per
second. (unit: min.)
132 Z1 83 Main Power Switch 55GA8601 1 count each time the main power switch turns
ON the power.
133 Z1 84 Sub Power Switch A03UM601 1 count each time the sub power switch turns
OFF the power.
134 Z1 85 Door Switch 40AA8501 1 count each time the front door is opened.
I -106

parameter
135 Z1 86 Toner Supply Door Switch 13GG-802 1 count each time the front door is opened.
136 Z1 87 Fusing Separation Plate Assy A1DUA741 *1
137 Z1 88 - -
138 Z1 89 - -
139 Z1 8A - -
140 Z1 8B - -
141 Z1 8C - -
142 Z1 8D Paper Exit Roller A0438907 1 count for each paper exit (when OT-502 is
installed)
143 Z1 8E Paper Exit Guide Roller/2 65AA4818 1 count for each paper exit (when OT-502 is
installed)
144 Z1 8F Paper Holding Roller 65AA4849 1 count for each paper exit (when OT-502 is
installed)
145 Z1 90 - -
146 Z1 91 - -
147 Z1 92 - -
148 Z1 93 - -
149 Z1 94 LCT Paper Feed Roller A03X5652 1 count for each paper exit from LU
150 Z1 95 LCT Feed/Rev Roller A03X5653/5654 1 count for each paper exit from LU
151 Z1 96 LCT Feed Clutch 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from LU
152 Z1 97 LCT Pre-regist. Clutch 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from LU
153 Z1 98 - -
154 Z1 99 - -
155 Z1 9A - -
156 Z1 9B - -
157 Z1 9C - -
158 Z1 9D - -
159 Z1 9E - -
160 Z1 9F - -
161 Z1 A0 - -
162 Z1 A1 PFU Paper Feed Roller(Tray4) A03X5652 1 count for each paper exit from PF Tray4.
163 Z1 A2 PFU Feed/Rev Roller(Tray4) A03X5653/5654 1 count for each paper exit from PF Tray4.
164 Z1 A3 PFU Feed Clutch(Tray4) 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from PF Tray4.
165 Z1 A4 PFU Reverse Clutch(Tray4) 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from PF Tray4.
166 Z1 A5 PFU Paper Feed Roller(Tray5) A03X5652 1 count for each paper exit from PF Tray5.
167 Z1 A6 PFU Feed/Rev Roller(Tray5) A03X5653/5654 1 count for each paper exit from PF Tray5.
168 Z1 A7 PFU Feed Clutch(Tray5) 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from PF Tray5.
169 Z1 A8 PFU Reverse Clutch(Tray5) 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from PF Tray5.
170 Z1 A9 PFU Vert. Trans. Clutch/1 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from PF Tray4.
171 Z1 AA PFU Vert. Trans. Clutch/2 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from PF Tray4.
172 Z1 AB PFU Vert. Trans. Clutch/3 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from PF Tray4.
173 Z1 AC PFU Pre-regist. Clutch 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from PF Tray4 or
Tray5
174 Z1 AD PFU Horiz. Transport Clutch/1 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from PF Tray4 or
Tray5
175 Z1 AE PFU Horiz. Transport Clutch/2 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from PF Tray4 or
Tray5
176 Z1 AF - -
177 Z1 B0 - -
178 Z1 B1 - -
179 Z1 B2 - -
180 Z1 B3 - -
181 Z1 B4 - -
182 Z1 B5 - -
183 Z1 B6 - -
184 Z1 B7 - -
185 Z1 B8 - -
186 Z1 B9 - -
187 Z1 BA - -
I -107

parameter
188 Z1 BB - -
189 Z1 BC - -
190 Z1 BD - -
191 Z1 BE - -
192 Z1 BF - -
193 Z1 C0 FS Staple/Front 15AA4222 1 count for each paper exit in either of the 1-
staple at front or the 2-staple mode.
194 Z1 C1 FS Staple/Back 15AA-450 1 count for each paper exit in either of the 1-
staple at rear or the 2-staple mode.
195 Z1 C2 FS Solenoid/A 56QA8251 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort mode
and the sort mode.
196 Z1 C3 FS Paper Exit Roller/A 122H4825 1 count for each paper exit in the sort, non-sort
or staple mode.
197 Z1 C4 - -
198 Z1 C5 - -
199 Z1 C6 - -
200 Z1 C7 - -
201 Z1 C8 FD Feed Roller/A Top 50BA-574 Counts the paper feed from PI tray /Up.
202 Z1 C9 FD Reverse Rubber/Top 13QN-443
203 Z1 CA FD Feed Roller/B Top 50BA-575
204 Z1 CB FD Feed Roller/A Low 50BA-574 Counts the paper feed from PI tray /Lw.
205 Z1 CC FD Reverse Rubber/Low 13QN-443
206 Z1 CD FD Feed Roller/B Low 56BA-575
207 Z1 CE FD Punch Motor Assy 15AG-573 1 count for each paper exit in the punch mode.
208 Z1 CF FD Solenoid/A(Release1) 56QA8251 1 count for each paper exit in the punch or
folding mode (all size).
209 Z1 D0 FD Solenoid/A(Release2) 56QA8251 1) 1 count for each paper exit in the folding mode
(all size)
2) 1 count for each paper exit in the punch mode
(paper length 220mm or larger).
210 Z1 D1 FD Motor Assy(Up/Down Motor) 129U-108 1 count for each paper exit to the main tray.
211 Z1 D2 - -
212 Z1 D3 - -
213 Z1 D4 - -
214 Z1 D5 - -
215 Z1 D6 LS1 Solenoid (Lead) 15AV8252 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort and
sort mode (all size).
216 Z1 D7 LS1 Solenoid (Resr) 15AV8253 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort and
217 Z1 D8 LS1 Solenoid (Center) 15AV8251 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort and
sort mode (Length 295mm or more and Width
226mm or more).
218 Z1 D9 LS1 Solenoid (Curl) 15AV8255 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort mode
and the sort mode.
219 Z1 DA LS1 UP/Down Motor 15AV8003 Counts operation number of times of the stacker
tray up down motor.
220 Z1 DB LS2 Solenoid (Lead) 15AV8252 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort and
221 Z1 DC LS2 Solenoid (Resr) 15AV8253 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort and
222 Z1 DD LS2 Solenoid (Center) 15AV8251 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort and
sort mode (Length 295mm or more and Width
226mm or more).
223 Z1 DE LS2 Solenoid (Curl) 15AV8255 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort mode
and the sort mode.
224 Z1 DF LS2 UP/Down Motor 15AV8003 Counts operation number of times of the stacker
tray up down motor.
225 Z1 E0 - -
226 Z1 E1 - -
227 Z1 E2 - -
228 Z1 E3 - -
I -108

parameter
229 Z1 E4 SD Trimmer Edge A0H2R901 1 count for each booklet exit completion in the
trimming mode.
Counts when new trimming unit is mounted.
230 Z1 E5 SD Trimmer Receiver A0H2B622 1 count for each booklet exit completion in the
trimming mode.
231 Z1 E6 SD Trimmer Press Drive Motor A0H2M101 1 count for each booklet exit completion in the
trimming mode.
232 Z1 E7 SD Trimmer Edge Drive Motor A0H2M102 1 count for each booklet exit completion in the
trimming mode.
233 Z1 E8 SD Paper Cutter Unit A0H2A620 1 count for each booklet exit completion in the
trimming mode.
234 Z1 E9 SD Staple/Right 15AN-550 1 count for each paper exit in the saddle stitch
235 Z1 EA SD Staple/Left 15AN-550 mode.
Counts when either new trimming unit or
previous trimming unit is mounted.
236 Z1 EB SD Trimmer Edge 15AN-570 1 count for each booklet exit completion in the
237 Z1 EC SD Trimmer Receiver 15AN5282 trimming mode.
Counts when previous trimming unit is mounted.
238 Z1 ED SD Trimmer Edge Drive Motor 15AN8002
239 Z1 EE SD Transport Solenoid 15AN8251 1 count for each paper exit to the folding section.
240 Z1 EF SD Solenoid 13QE8251 Counts when either new trimming unit or
previous trimming unit is mounted.
241 Z1 F0 SD FNS Solenoid/2 12QR8252 1 count for each paper exit to the stacker.
Counts when new or previous trimming unit is
mounted.
242 Z1 F1 SD Gear/B 15AN7719 1 count for each time the bundle up/down section
goes up (PS45/ON).
Counts when new or previous trimming unit is
mounted.
243 Z1 F2 SD Paper Adjusting Unit 15AN5092 1 count for each trimming.
Counts when previous trimming unit is mounted.
244 Z1 F3 - -
245 Z1 F4 - -
246 Z1 F5 - -
247 Z1 F6 - -
248 Z1 F7 FNS Stapler/F 15JM-501 1 count for each exit in the 1-staple at front/2-
249 Z1 F8 FNS Stapler/R 15JM-501 staples/saddle stitching mode.
250 Z1 F9 FNS Shift Motor 12QR-361 1 count each time an even number of print is
exited in the sort mode.
251 Z1 FA FNS Exit Opening Motor 12QR-361 1 count for each starting job for the size A4S and
81/2 x 11S, and 1count at exiting these size in
staple mode.
252 Z1 FB FNS Folding Knife Motor 13QJ-502 1 count for each paper exit in the saddle stitch/
half-fold/tri-fold mode.
253 Z1 FC Bypass Gate Solenoid 12QR-263 1 count for each paper exit for the A4, B5, 81/2 x
11 and 16K sizes in the staple mode.
254 Z1 FD Tri-Folding Gate SD 12QR-263 1 count for each paper exit in the tri-folding
mode.
255 Z1 FE FNS Paper Exit Roller/A 122H4825 1 count for each paper exit to the FNS main tray.
256 Z1 FF FNS Paper Exit Roller/B A04D8904 1 count for each paper exit in the staple mode.
257 Z7 00 FNS Transport Roller/4 13QE4531 1 count for each paper exit in the staple/saddle
stitch/half-fold/tri-fold mode.
258 Z7 01 FNS Paper Transport Roller/A 20AK4210 1 count for each paper exit in the staple/saddle
stitch/half-fold/tri-fold mode.
259 Z7 02 - -
260 Z7 03 - -
261 Z7 04 - -
262 Z7 05 - -
263 Z7 06 PI Conveyance Clutch/U 13QN8201 1 count for each PI upper paper feed.
264 Z7 07 PI Feed Roller/A/U 50BA-574
I -109

parameter
265 Z7 08 PI Feed Roller/B/U 13QN-446
266 Z7 09 PI Reverse Roller/U 13QN-443
267 Z7 0A PI Torque Limiter/U 13QN4073
268 Z7 0B PI Conveyance Clutch/L 13QN8201 1 count for each PI lower paper feed.
269 Z7 0C PI Feed Roller/A/L 50BA-574
270 Z7 0D PI Feed Roller/B/L 50BA-575
271 Z7 0E PI Reverse Roller/L 13QN-443
272 Z7 0F PI Torque Limiter/L 13QN4073
273 Z7 10 - -
274 Z7 11 STAPLE ASSY/FRONT A07RA735 1 count for each paper exit in the 1-staple at
front/2-staples mode (FS-531)
275 Z7 12 STAPLE ASSY/REAR A07RA736 1 count for each paper exit in the 1-staple in rear/
2-staples mode (FS-531)
276 Z7 13 FNS Cleaning Plate Assy A07RA741 1 count for each paper exit in the staple mode
(FS-531)
277 Z7 14 - -
278 Z7 15 - -
279 Z7 16 - -
280 Z7 17 - -
281 Z7 18 PK Punch Unit(2-Hole) A04E0Y0 Number of punching by PK
282 Z7 19 PK Punch Unit(2/3,2/4-Hole) A04F0Y1 Number of punching by PK
A04F0Y0 Only A04F0Y0 is displayed.
283 Z7 1A PK Punch Unit(4-Hole) A04G0G0 Number of punching by PK
284 Z7 1B - -
285 Z7 1C - -
286 Z7 1D - -
287 Z7 1E - -
288 Z7 1F ADF Paper Feed Roller 13YH4064
289 Z7 20 ADF Feed Roller 13YH4039
290 Z7 21 ADF Separation Roller 20AJ4015
291 Z7 22 - -
292 Z7 23 - -
293 Z7 24 - -
294 Z7 25 - -
295 Z7 26 PB Sub Tray Exit SD 56QA8251 1 count for each paper exit to the PB sub tray.
296 Z7 27 PB SB Separate Motor 13GQ8005 1 count for each paper stack on the PB stacking
297 Z7 28 PB Sub Compile FD SD 15AA8251 section.
298 Z7 29 PB Clump Press(Top) SD 15AA8251
299 Z7 2A PB Exit Roller/A 13GQ4519 1 count for each paper exit from PB
300 Z7 2B PB Tray Feed Roller 55VA-464 1 count for each book exit in PB tray cover
301 Z7 2C PB Tray Trans./Rev Roller 55VA-463 mode.
302 Z7 2D PB Tray Feed Clutch 56AA8201
303 Z7 2E PB Tray Handle Clutch 56AA8201
304 Z7 2F PB Cutter/Assy A0756230 1 count for each book exit when cover paper
trimming is set.
305 Z7 30 PB Filter/1 A0753724 1 count for each paper exit from PB
306 Z7 31 PB Filter/2 A0753724
307 Z7 32 PB Path SW Solenoid 56QA8251 1 count for each book exit in other than PB tray
cover mode.
308 Z7 33 PB Melt Tank Assy A075A39A/39E/39F Time during which tank applying roller rotates. 1
count per an hour.
309 Z7 34 - -
310 Z7 35 - -
311 Z7 36 - -
312 Z7 37 - -
313 Z7 38 GP Aligner Idler Roller Assembly A0N9PA01 1 count for each paper exit in multi-punch mode.
314 Z7 39 GP Bypass Assembly A0N9PA02 1 count for each paper exit.
315 Z7 3A GP Roller Energy Drive A0N9PA03 1 count for each paper exit in multi-punch mode.
316 Z7 3B GP Belt Aligner (Green) A0N9PA04 1 count for each paper exit in multi-punch mode.
I -110

parameter
317 Z7 3C GP Back Gauge Mechanism A0N9PA05 1 count for each paper exit in multi-punch mode.
318 Z7 3D - -
319 Z7 3E - -
320 Z7 3F - -
321 Z7 40 - -
322 Z7 41 HM Supply Roller/1 A1TU5001 1 count per page.
323 Z7 42 HM Supply Roller/2 A1TU5002 1 count per page.
324 Z7 43 HM Supply Roller/3 A1TU5003 1 count for each sheet with the humidification
ON.
325 Z7 44 HM Filter A1TU5215 1 count for each sheet with the humidification
ON.
326 Z7 45 HM Motor/P A1TUM201 1 count for each sheet with the humidification
ON.
*1 Count in all color modes
Small size: 1 count for each paper exit in the simplex mode, 2 counts in the duplex mode.
Large size: 2 counts for each paper exit in the simplex mode, 4 counts in the duplex mode.
*2 Count only in the full color mode.
Small size: 1 count for each paper exit in the simplex mode, 2 counts in the duplex mode.
Large size: 2 counts for each paper exit in the simplex mode, 4 counts in the duplex mode.
Note
For details on the paper size to be counted or setting of the count condition, refer to "I.5.6.1 Maintenance Counter"
5.6.17 Voluntary Part Counter (Parts Counter)

Used to control the service history of each part not registered as a special part.
For 30 data from No. 01 up to 30, confirm and reset of the name, P/N (parts number), limit value and print count.
Take 1 count for each print page of all paper exits with no discrimination made by paper size.
When the counter exceeds the limit, the color of the character changes into red.
(1) Set/Check procedure

Press [02 Voluntary Part Counter].
4. "Voluntary Part Counter screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous] to scroll the pages, and press [] or [] to select the data number.
5. Select either [Parts Name Setting], [P/N Setting], or [Limit Setting].
6. Enter the data to set or change.
[Parts Name]: Enter the part name. (8 digits)
[P/N]: Enter the part number. (9 digits)
[Limit]: Enter the limit value. (8 digits)
7. Press [OK] to update data.
(2) Reset procedure

Press [04 Counter/Data]
2. "Counter/Data screen"
Press [02 Voluntary Part Counter].
4. "Voluntary Part Counter screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous] to scroll the pages, and press [] or [] to select the item to set or check.
5. Press [Counter Clear].
Press [No] to cancel and return to "Voluntary Part Counter screen."
(3) Relationship between data number and CSRC parameter

No. Parts Name P/N Counter LIMIT Installation date
CSRC parameter CSRC parameter CSRC parameter CSRC parameter CSRC parameter
(Z4) (Z3) (G0) (H0) (H3)
001 00 00 00 00 00
002 01 01 01 01 01
003 02 02 02 02 02
004 03 03 03 03 03
I -111
005 04 04 04 04 04
006 05 05 05 05 05
007 06 06 06 06 06
008 07 07 07 07 07
009 08 08 08 08 08
010 09 09 09 09 09
011 0A 0A 0A 0A 0A
012 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B
013 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C
014 0D 0D 0D 0D 0D
015 0E 0E 0E 0E 0E
016 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F
017 10 10 10 10 10
018 11 11 11 11 11
019 12 12 12 12 12
020 13 13 13 13 13
021 14 14 14 14 14
022 15 15 15 15 15
023 16 16 16 16 16
024 17 17 17 17 17
025 18 18 18 18 18
026 19 19 19 19 19
027 1A 1A 1A 1A 1A
028 1B 1B 1B 1B 1B
029 1C 1C 1C 1C 1C
030 1D 1D 1D 1D 1D
5.6.18 Custom size counter threshold setting

(1) OUTLINE
Set the custom size paper length threshold in the sub scan direction for "I.5.6.3 Paper Size Counter (Total/copy/print)"
Note
(2) Procedure
Press [04 Custom Counter Threshold Set].
3. "Custom Size Counter Threshold Setting screen"
Select the custom size to be set.
[Infinite1]: "Inf. 1" on the Paper Size Counter.
Note
The value larger than that of [Infinite4] by 1mm up to 487mm is assigned to "Inf. 5".
Be sure to set the values as followings.
Infinite1<Infinite2<Infinite3<Infinite4
Setting range: 0 to 487
1 step = 1mm
5. Press [Cancel] to reset the setting to default.
5.7 State Confirmation

5.7.1 I/O Check Mode
(1) OUTLINE
This mode provide self-diagnostic functions (input/output check function) to check the condition of input (checking the each signal to sensors)
and output (checking and adjustment of the load operation).
I -112
(2) "I/O Check Mode screen"
[1]
[2] [3] [4]
[1] Input check [2] Output check

[3] I/O check code [4] Multi-code
5.7.2 Input check procedures

(1) Usage
Check input condition of each signal to the sensors.
(2) Procedure
2. "State Confirmation menu screen"
3. "I/O Check Mode screen"
Enter an input check code with the numeric buttons.
4. To use multi-mode, press [High/Low]. *
5. Enter the multi-code with the numeric keys.
6. The condition of the sensor (000/001 etc.) is displayed in the message box "IN".
7. When executing another input check, repeat steps 3 to 6.
* The Access button of the hard key can be used.
5.7.3 Output check procedures

(1) Usage
Load operations can be checked and adjusted (output check) using this output check.
(2) Procedure
2. "State Confirmation menu screen"
3. "I/O Check Mode screen"
Enter an input check code with the numeric buttons.
4. To use multi-mode, press [High/Low]. *1
5. Enter the multi-code with the numeric keys.
6. Press [Start]. *2
The load specified operates.
7. Press [Stop]. *2
The load specified completes.
8. Repeat steps 3 to 7 to perform the other load or signal output check.
*1 The Access button of the hard key can be used.
*2 The start key and the stop key of the hard key can be used.
5.7.4 IO check mode list

Input check Output check
Co Mul
de ti Classific Symb
Name
Display and Classific Symb
Name
Restrictive
ation ol signal source ation ol conditions
0 0 High TEM/ Temp/humidity sensor Display of High L1 Exposure lamp
voltage, HUMS (Internal humidity) humidity (%) voltage,
I -113

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
analog (Humidity in the PF when analog
signal the PF is connected) signal
1 TEM/ Temp/humidity sensor Display of
HUMS (Internal temperature) temperature (C)
(Temperature in the PF
when the PF is connected)
5 TEM/ Temp/humidity sensor /2 Humidity
HUMS (Process mount humidity) indication (%)
2
6 TEM/ Temp/humidity sensor /2 Display of
HUMS (Process mount temperature (C)
2 temperature)
7 TEMS Registration temperature Display of
1 sensor temperature (C)
1 0 High M53, Toner bottle motor, toner
voltage, CL14 bottle clutch /Y
3 analog M53, Toner bottle motor, toner
signal CL15 bottle clutch /M
6 M53, Toner bottle motor, toner
CL16 bottle clutch /C
9 M53, Toner bottle motor, toner
CL17 bottle clutch /K
12 High PZS/Y Remaining toner sensor /Y 000: No toner
voltage, 001: Toner
13 analog PZS/M Remaining toner sensor /M 000: No toner
signal 001: Toner
14 PZS/C Remaining toner sensor /C 000: No toner
001: Toner
15 PZS/K Remaining toner sensor /K 000: No toner
001: Toner
16 PS60 Waste toner door sensor 000: No box
001: Box
17 PS52 Waste toner full sensor 000: Empty
001: Full
2 0 High HV1 High voltage unit /1 Do not use in
voltage, (Charger /Y) the field.
1 analog HV1 High voltage unit /1 Do not use in
signal (Charger /M) the field.
2 HV1 High voltage unit /1 Do not use in
(Charger /C) the field.
(Charger /K) the field.
3 0 HV2 High voltage unit /2 (1st Do not use in
transfer /Y) the field.
1 HV2 High voltage unit /2 (1st Do not use in
transfer /M) the field.
transfer /C) the field.
transfer /K) the field.
transfer /Y, /M, /C, /K) the field.
transfer /K) the field.
4 0 HV2 High voltage unit /2 Do not use in
(Separation) the field.
(Separation: for the field.
measuring)
5 0 IDCS IDC sensor output voltage 0-255 is
displayed on
"Input check"
2 PS8, Color registration sensor 0-255 is
PS9 output voltage displayed on
"Input check"
I -114

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
5 IDCS IDC sensor output voltage 0-255 is
displayed on
"Input check"
6 PS8, Color registration sensor 0-255 is
PS9 displayed on
"Input check"
11 0 Paper PS31 Paper empty sensor /1 000: No paper
feed, 001: Paper
1 conveya PS37 Paper empty sensor /2 000: No paper
nce 001: Paper
2 PS43 Paper empty sensor /3 000: No paper
001: Paper
3 PS47 Paper empty sensor /BP 000: No paper
001: Paper
4 PS108 Paper empty sensor (LU) 000: No paper
001: Paper
(PF) 001: Paper
(PF) 001: Paper
12 0 PS32 Paper near empty sensor / 000: No paper
1 001: Paper
1 PS38 Paper near empty sensor / 000: No paper
2 001: Paper
2 PS44 Paper near empty sensor / 000: No paper
3 001: Paper
3 PS102 Remaining paper sensor /1 Remaining
/ to /4 (LU) display (0 to
PS103 100%)
/
PS104
/
PS105
4 VR2 Remaining paper VR /1 Remaining
(PF) display (0 to
100%)

5 VR4 Remaining paper VR /2 Remaining
(PF) display (0 to
100%)

13 0 PS33 Paper size sensor /Fr1 000: ON
001: OFF
1 PS34 Paper size sensor /Rr1 000: ON
001: OFF
2 PS39 Paper size sensor /Fr2 000: ON
001: OFF
001: OFF
4 PS45 Paper size sensor /Fr3 000: ON
001: OFF
001: OFF
6 PS48 Paper size sensor /BP1 000: ON
001: OFF
7 PS49 Paper size sensor /BP2 000: ON
001: OFF
8 PS5 Paper size sensor /Rt1 000: ON
(PF) 001: OFF
9 PS6 Paper size sensor /Lt1 000: ON
(PF) 001: OFF
10 PS13 Paper size sensor /Rt2 000: ON
(PF) 001: OFF
11 PS14 Paper size sensor /Lt2 000: ON
(PF) 001: OFF
I -115

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
12 PS110 Paper size sensor /Rr (LU) 000: ON
001: OFF
13 PS111 Paper size sensor /Fr (LU) 000: ON
001: OFF
14 0 VR1 Paper size VR/1 Display of AD
1 VR2 Paper size VR/2 Display of AD
2 VR3 Paper size VR/3 Display of AD
3 VR4 Paper size VR/BP Display of AD
4 VR1 Paper size VR /1 (PF) Display of AD
5 VR3 Paper size VR /2 (PF) Display of AD
6 VR1 Paper size VR (LU) Display of AD
15 1 High - CSRC/collecting data Not reset when
voltage, counter clear DIPSW3-6 is
analog OFF
2 signal - Mode memory clear Not reset when
DIPSW3-6 is
OFF
98 - CSRC memory Use when
initialization setting CSRC
Not reset when
DIPSW3-6 is
OFF
16 0 Paper PS30 Upper limit sensor /1 000: Other
feed, than upper
conveya limit
nce 001: Upper
limit
1 PS36 Upper limit sensor /2 000: Other
than upper
limit
001: Upper
limit
2 PS42 Upper limit sensor /3 000: Other
than upper
limit
001: Upper
limit
3 PS25 Upper limit sensor/BP 000: Other
than upper
limit
001: Upper
limit
4 PS109 Upper limit sensor/lower 000: Other
/ limit sensor (LU) than upper
PS101 limit
001: Upper
limit
5 PS1 Upper limit sensor /1 (PF) 000: Other
than upper
limit
001: Upper
limit
6 PS9 Upper limit sensor /2 (PF) 000: Other
than upper
limit
001: Upper
limit
18 1 PS65 ADU centering sensor Display top 8 bit High PS65 ADU centering sensor
out of 16bit voltage,
2 PS1 Centering sensor (LU) Display top 8 bit analog PS1 Centering sensor (LU) 0-255 is
out of 16bit signal displayed on
"Input check"
3 PS25 Centering sensor (PF) 000: Normal PS25 Centering sensor (PF) 0-255 is
001: Multi displayed on
feed "Input check"
I -116

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
4 MFDB Multi feed detection
S, board /S, /R (PF)
MFDB
R
19 0 Paper PS29 Paper feed sensor /1 000: No paper
feed, 001: Paper
1 conveya PS35 Paper feed sensor /2 000: No paper
nce 001: Paper
2 PS41 Paper feed sensor /3 000: No paper
001: Paper
3 PS26 Paper feed sensor/BP 000: No paper
001: Paper
4 PS106 Paper feed sensor (LU) 000: No paper
001: Paper
5 PS2 Paper feed sensor /1(PF) 000: No paper
001: Paper
6 PS10 Paper feed sensor /2(PF) 000: No paper
001: Paper
20 0 PS107 Pre-registration sensor 000: No paper Paper SD7 Pick-up solenoid /1
(LU) 001: Paper feed,
1 PS23 ADU pre-registration 000: No paper conveya SD8 Pick-up solenoid /2
sensor 001: Paper nce
2 PS61 ADU conveyance sensor 000: No paper SD9 Pick-up solenoid /3
001: Paper
3 PS27 Intermediate conveyance 000: No paper
sensor /1 001: Paper
4 PS28 Intermediate conveyance 000: No paper Paper SD5 Pick-up solenoid/BP
sensor /2 001: Paper feed,
5 conveya SD100 Pick-up solenoid (LU)
nce
6 Paper PS22 Registration sensor 000: No paper SD1 Pick-up solenoid /1 (PF)
feed, 001: Paper
7 conveya PS50 vertical conveyance 000: No paper SD5 Pick-up solenoid /2 (PF)
nce sensor 001: Paper
8 PS13 Paper exit sensor 000: No paper
001: Paper
9 PS19 Reverse/exit sensor 000: No paper
001: Paper
10 PS21 ADU reverse sensor 000: No paper
001: Paper
11 PS12 Paper exit full sensor 000: Other
than full
001: Full
12 PS20 ADU stop sensor 000: No paper
001: Paper
13 PS62 Decurler sensor 000: No paper
001: Paper
21 0 Paper CL7 Paper feed clutch /1
1 feed, CL9 Paper feed clutch /2
conveya
2 nce CL11 Paper feed clutch /3
4 CL6 Paper feed clutch/BP
5 CL101 Paper feed clutch (LU)
6 CL1 Paper feed clutch /1 (PF)
7 CL4 Paper feed clutch /2 (PF)
22 0 CL8 Pre-registration clutch /1
1 CL10 Pre-registration clutch /2
2 CL12 Pre-registration clutch /3
5 CL102 Pre-registration clutch (LU)
23 0 M38 Paper lift motor /1
1 M39 Paper lift motor /2
2 M40 Paper lift motor /3
3 M35 Paper lift motor /BP (down)
4 M35 Paper lift motor /BP (up)
I -117

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
5 Paper PS109 Upper limit sensor/lower 000: Other M100 Paper lift motor (LU: down)
feed, / limit sensor (LU) than upper
conveya PS101 limit/lower limit
nce 001: Upper
limit
002: Lower
limit
6 PS109 Upper limit sensor/lower 000: Other M100 Paper lift motor (LU: up)
/ limit sensor (LU) than upper
PS101 limit/lower limit
001: Upper
limit
002: Lower
limit
7 PS1 Upper limit sensor /1 (PF) 000: Other M2 Paper lift motor /1 (PF)
than upper
limit
001: Upper
limit
8 PS9 Upper limit sensor /2 (PF) 000: Other M3 Paper lift motor /2 (PF)
than upper
limit
001: Upper
limit
24 0 PS24 2nd transfer HP sensor 000: Other M34 2nd transfer pressure
than home release motor
position
001: Home
position
1 M34 2nd transfer pressure
release motor (Pressure
position 1)
release motor (Pressure
position 2)
release motor
25 0 Paper PS18 Front door sensor 000: Close M30 Registration motor
feed, 001: Open (315mm/s)
1 conveya PS51 Vertical conveyance door 000: Close M30 Registration motor
nce sensor 001: Open (300mm/s)
2 PS54 Toner supply door open/ 000: Close M30 Registration motor
close sensor 001: Open (225mm/s)
3 PS14 Toner supply unit open/ 000: Close M30 Registration motor
close sensor 001: Open (207.7mm/s)
4 - M30 Registration motor
(150mm/s)
5 Paper MS2 Interlock switch /2 (LU) 000: OFF M30 Registration motor (Paper
feed, 001: ON feed line speed)
6 conveya MS1 Interlock switch /1 (LU) 000: OFF M30 Registration motor (Hard
nce 001: ON timer ON: 1/1 speed)
7 SW10 Tray down switch (LU) 000: OFF
0 001: ON
8 PS22 Registration sensor 000: No paper
001: Paper
9 PS23 Front door open/close 000: Close
sensor (PF) 001: Open
10 PS21 Horizontal conveyance 000: Close
door sensor /1 (PF) 001: Open
11 PS24 Vertical conveyance door 000: Close
sensor (PF) 001: Open
12 PS22 Horizontal conveyance 000: Close
door sensor /2 (PF) 001: Open
26 0 M31 Loop motor (315mm/s)
1 M31 Loop motor (300mm/s)
I -118

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
3 M31 Loop motor (207.7mm/s)
5 M31 Loop motor (ADU line
speed)
6 M31 Loop motor (Paper feed
line speed/LU)
27 0 M33 Reverse/exit motor (F
rotation: 1000mm/s)
1 M33 Reverse/exit motor (R
rotation: 315mm/s)
rotation: 300mm/s)
rotation: 225mm/s)
rotation: 207.7mm/s)
rotation: 150mm/s)
rotation: 1050mm/s)
10 M55 Decurler motor (F rotation:
1000mm/s)
11 M55 Decurler motor (R rotation:
315mm/s)
300mm/s)
225mm/s)
207.7mm/s)
150mm/s)
1050mm/s)
20 M54 Paper exit motor (F
rotation: 1000mm/s)
rotation: 315mm/s)
rotation: 300mm/s)
rotation: 225mm/s)
rotation: 207.7mm/s)
rotation: 150mm/s)
31 Paper PS10 Paper exit pressure sensor 000: Other M54 Paper exit motor (R
feed, than home rotation: continuous)
conveya position
nce 001: Home
position
32 M54 Paper exit motor (R
rotation: home position)
rotation: weak pressure)
rotation: middle pressure)
rotation: strong pressure)
28 0 M41 Paper feed motor
1 M1 Paper feed motor (LU)
2 M1 Paper feed motor (PF)
29 0 CL13 Intermediate conveyance
clutch /1
I -119

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
1 CL4 Intermediate conveyance
clutch /2
2 CL5 Intermediate conveyance
clutch /3
3 Paper SD1 Belt separation claw 000: Not set SD1 Belt separation claw
feed, solenoid 001: Set solenoid
conveya
nce
5 FM1, Paper feed assist fan /Fr, /
FM2 Rr (LU)
6 SD4 Tray lock solenoid /1 (PF)
7 FM3, Paper feed assist fan /
FM4 Fr12, /Rr12 (Tray4) (PF)
11 Paper PS20 Pre-registration sensor 000: No paper CL12 Pre-registration clutch (PF)
feed, (PF) 001: Paper
12 conveya PS18 Horizontal conveyance 000: No paper CL7 Vertical conveyance
nce sensor /1 (PF) 001: Paper clutch /1 (PF)
13 PS17 Vertical conveyance 000: No paper CL8 Vertical conveyance
sensor /1 (PF) 001: Paper clutch /2 (PF)
14 PS27 Vertical conveyance 000: No paper CL9 Vertical conveyance
15 PS26 Vertical conveyance 000: No paper CL10 Horizontal conveyance
16 PS19 Horizontal conveyance 000: No paper CL11 Horizontal conveyance
17 SD2, Shutter solenoid /Fr1,
SD3 shutter solenoid /Rr1 (PF)
19 SD6, Shutter solenoid /Fr2,
SD7 shutter solenoid /Rr2 (PF)
23 CL2 Separation clutch /1 (PF)
24 CL5 Separation clutch /2 (PF)
25 FM9, Ventilation fan /1,
FM10 ventilation fan /2 (PF)
26 Paper TEMS Temperature sensor /1 (In Display of DH3, Fan heater /Up,
feed, /1 the tray) (PF) temperature (C) FM11, dehumidifier fan /1, /2 (HT)
conveya FM12
28 nce TEMS Temperature sensor /2 (In Display of DH4, Fan heater /Lw,
/2 the tray) (PF) temperature (C) FM13, dehumidifier fan /3, /4 (HT)
FM14
30 TEMS Temperature sensor /1 (In Display of HTR1 Dehumidifier heater /1,
1 the tray) (LU) temperature (C) temperature control tray
33C, heating pipe 70C
(Tray4) (LU)
30 0 Optics PS1 Scanner home sensor 000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
1 PS3 APS sensor /1 000: No paper
001: Paper
2 PS4 APS sensor /2 000: No paper
001: Paper
3 PS2 APS timing sensor 000: Close
001: Open
32 0 Paper M70 Polygon motor /Y (1/1
feed, rotation)
I -120

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
1 conveya M71 Polygon motor /M (1/1
nce rotation)
2 M72 Polygon motor /C (1/1
rotation)
3 M73 Polygon motor /K (1/1
rotation)
4 M70, Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /
M71, K (1/1 rotation)
M72,
M73
5 M70 Polygon motor /Y (Rotate
at adjustment value)
6 M71 Polygon motor /M (Rotate
7 M72 Polygon motor /C (Rotate
8 M73 Polygon motor /K (Rotate
9 M70, Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /
M71, K (Rotate at adjustment
M72, value)
M73
33 0 Optics INDEX Index board /C 000: Normal INDEX Index board /Y
B/C 001: Abnormal B/Y
1 INDEX Index board /M 000: Normal INDEX Index board /M
B/M 001: Abnormal B/M
2 INDEX Index board /Y 000: Normal INDEX Index board /C
B/Y 001: Abnormal B/C
3 INDEX Index board /K 000: Normal INDEX Index board /K
B/K 001: Abnormal B/K
4 INDEX Index board /C, /M, /Y, /K 000: Normal INDEX Index board /Y, /M, /C, /K
B/C, / 001: Abnormal B/Y, /
M, / if any of the M, /
Y, /K color is found C, /K
34 0 - Shading correction
operation
36 3 PS8 Color registration sensor / 0-255 is
Fr displayed on
"Input check"
4 PS9 Color registration sensor / 0-255 is
Rr displayed on
"Input check"
37 0 - LD alarm measurement LD alarm value
can be checked
on the
adjustment list of
list output.
91 - LD1/2 alarm data clear /Y LD alarm value
can be checked
on the
adjustment list of
list output.
92 - LD1/2 alarm data clear /M LD alarm value
can be checked
on the
adjustment list of
list output.
93 - LD1/2 alarm data clear /C LD alarm value
can be checked
on the
adjustment list of
list output.
94 - LD1/2 alarm data clear /K LD alarm value
can be checked
on the
adjustment list of
list output.
I -121

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
99 - LD1/2 alarm data clear / LD alarm value
Y, /M, /C, /K can be checked
on the
adjustment list of
list output.
38 0 M1 Scanner motor 11 x 17,
(Reciprocating driver 1) Magnification
100%, 1
scanning
1 M1 Scanner motor 11 x 17,
100%,
Continuous
scanning
400%,
Continuous
scanning
50%,
Continuous
scanning
4 M1 Scanner motor 81/2 x 11,
(Reciprocating driver 5)
Magnification
100%,
Continuous
scanning
5 Optics PS1 Scanner home sensor 000: Other M1 Scanner motor (Home
than home position search)
position
001: Home
position
6 M1 Scanner motor (Back scan
position move)
7 M1 Scanner motor (Back scan
ACS operation + scan
operation)
41 0 Main M14 Drum motor /Y (315mm/s)
1 body M14 Drum motor /Y (300mm/s)
2 M14 Drum motor /Y (225mm/s)
3 M14 Drum motor /Y (207.7mm/
s)
4 M14 Drum motor /Y (150mm/s)
5 M15 Drum motor /M (315mm/s)
8 M15 Drum motor /M (207.7mm/
s)
10 M16 Drum motor /C (315mm/s)
13 M16 Drum motor /C (207.7mm/
s)
15 M17 Drum motor /K (315mm/s)
18 M17 Drum motor /K (207.7mm/
s)
20 M18 Belt motor (315mm/s)
I -122

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
21 M18 Transfer belt motor
(300mm/s)
22 M18 Transfer belt motor
(225mm/s)
23 M18 Belt motor (207.7mm/s)
24 M18 Belt motor (150mm/s)
42 0 FM2 Scanner cooling fan
1 FM1 Power supply cooling fan /
1
3 FM37 Fusing ventilation fan
5 FM48 Charge intake fan
6 FM47 Main body fan
8 FM45, Developing fan /1, /2
FM46
10 FM26, Tucking fan /1, /3
FM28
12 FM12, Drum fan /1, /2
FM13
14 FM11 Transfer belt fan
15 FM61, Paper exit fan /1, /2, /3
62, 63
17 FM66 ADU cooling fan /1
19 FM36 Deodorization fan (High
speed rotation)
20 FM36 Deodorization fan (Low
speed rotation)
21 FM10 Fusing belt ventilation
fan(High speed rotation)
22 FM10 Fusing belt ventilation
fan(Low speed rotation)
23 FM65 Fusing cooling fan
25 LU FM3, Dehumidifier fan /1, /2
FM4 (High speed rotation) (LU)
26 FM3, Dehumidifier fan /1, /2
FM4 (Low speed rotation) (LU)
27 PF FM11, Dehumidifier fan /1, /2 (PF)
FM12
28 FM13, Dehumidifier fan /3, /4 (PF)
FM14
29 Main FM67 ADU cooling fan /2
31 body FM7, Fusing separation fan /1, /
FM8, 2, /3
FM9
32 FM5, IPB fan /1, /2
FM6
33 FM81, HDD unit cooling fan /1, /2
FM82
43 1 TCT1 Total counter /1
2 TCT2 Total counter /2
6 KCT Key counter
45 0 Main TH1 Temperature sensor /1 Display of L2, L3, Turn ON fusing heater Temperature
body (Center of fusing upper temperature (C) L4, L5 lamp /1, /2, /3, /4 detection of the
heat roller) simultaneously center of fusing
upper heat roller
1 TH3 Temperature sensor /3 Display of L2, L3, Turn ON fusing heater Temperature
(Edge of fusing upper heat temperature (C) L4, L5 lamp /1, /2, /3, /4 detection of the
roller) simultaneously edge of fusing
upper heat roller
(Center of fusing lower temperature (C) L4, L5 lamp /1, /2, /3, /4 detection of the
pressure roller) simultaneously center of fusing
lower pressure
roller
I -123

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
(Edge of fusing lower temperature (C) L4, L5 lamp /1, /2, /3, /4 detection of the
pressure roller) simultaneously edge of fusing
lower pressure
roller
4 TH1 Temperature sensor /1 Display of L2, L3, Turn ON fusing heater Non-contact
(Non-contact sensor temperature (C) L4, L5 lamp /1, /2, /3, /4 sensor of the
correction of the fusing simultaneously fusing upper
upper roller) roller
5 TH2 Temperature sensor /2 Display of L2, L3, Turn ON fusing heater Non-contact
(Non-contact sensor temperature (C) L4, L5 lamp /1, /2, /3, /4 sensor of the
correction of the fusing simultaneously fusing lower
upper roller) roller
8 TH1 Detected temperature at Display of L2, L3, Turn ON fusing heater Proper
center of fusing upper heat temperature (C) L4, L5 lamp /1, /2, /3, /4 temperature at
roller (While idling) simultaneously idle (at warming
up)
11 TH1 Detected temperature at Display of L2, Temperature control of the 0-255 is
center of fusing upper heat temperature (C) TH1 fusing heater lamp /1 displayed on
roller (While ON under the "Input check"
prescribed temperature) Turn ON with
temperature
lower than a
prescribed level
12 TH3 Detected temperature at Display of L3, Temperature control of the 0-255 is
edge of fusing upper heat temperature (C) TH3 fusing heater lamp /2 displayed on
roller (While ON under the "Input check"
prescribed temperature) Turn ON with
temperature
lower than a
prescribed level
13 L4, Temperature control of the 0-255 is
TH1 fusing heater lamp /3 displayed on
"Input check"
Turn ON with
temperature
lower than a
prescribed level
14 Main TH2 Detected temperature at Display of L5, Temperature control of the 0-255 is
body center of fusing lower temperature (C) TH2 fusing heater lamp /4 displayed on
pressure roller (While ON "Input check"
under the prescribed Turn ON with
temperature) temperature
lower than a
prescribed level
46 0 - LD1/2 Laser emission
timing adjustment (main
scanning)
47 0 M29 Fusing motor (F rotation:
315mm/s)
1 M29 Fusing motor (F rotation:
300mm/s)
225mm/s)
207.7mm/s)
150mm/s)
5 Main PS16 Fusing release home 000: Other M29 Fusing motor (R rotation:
body sensor (Pressure release than home pressure release operation
operation ON) position ON, rotate constantly)
001: Home
position
6 PS16 Fusing release home 000: Other M29 Fusing motor (R rotation:
sensor (Pressure position than home pressure position move)
move) position
001: Home
position
I -124

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
7 PS16 Fusing release home 000: Other M29 Fusing motor (R rotation:
sensor (Release position than home release position move)
move) position
001: Home
position
8 M29 Fusing motor (Pressure
continuous rotation:
315mm/s)
300mm/s)
225mm/s)
207.7mm/s)
150mm/s)
14 M29, Fusing roller press (ON all
L2, L3, heaters at the same time)
L4, L5
48 0 Main PS15 1st transfer HP sensor 000: Other M19 1st transfer pressure
body than home release motor (Rotate
position constantly)
001: Home
position
1 M19 1st transfer pressure
release motor (Stop at
release position)
black and white mode
pressure position)
color mode pressure
position)
50 0 Peculiar M20 Developing motor /Y
function (315mm/s)
1 s M20 Developing motor /Y
(300mm/s)
2 M20 Developing motor /Y
(225mm/s)
(207.7mm/s)
(150mm/s)
5 M21 Developing motor /M
(315mm/s)
(300mm/s)
(225mm/s)
(207.7mm/s)
(150mm/s)
10 M22 Developing motor /C
(315mm/s)
(300mm/s)
(225mm/s)
I -125

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
(207.7mm/s)
(150mm/s)
15 M23 Developing motor /K
(315mm/s)
(300mm/s)
(225mm/s)
(207.7mm/s)
(150mm/s)
20 Peculiar TCRS TCR sensor /Y output 0 to 255 M20 Developing unit rotation of
function /Y value Y
21 s TCRS TCR sensor /M output 0 to 255 M21 Developing unit rotation of
/M value M
22 TCRS TCR sensor /C output 0 to 255 M22 Developing unit rotation of
/C value C
23 TCRS TCR sensor /K output 0 to 255 M23 Developing unit rotation of
/K value BK
24 M20, Developing unit rotation of
M21, YMC
M22
25 M20, Developing unit rotation of
M21, all colors
M22,
M23
51 0 EL /Y Erase lamp /Y
1 EL /M Erase lamp /M
2 EL /C Erase lamp /C
3 EL /K Erase lamp /K
54 0 M49 Toner supply motor /Y
3 M50 Toner supply motor /M
6 M51 Toner supply motor /C
9 M52 Toner supply motor /K
12 CL14 Toner bottle clutch /Y
13 CL15 Toner bottle clutch /M
14 CL16 Toner bottle clutch /C
15 CL17 Toner bottle clutch /K
55 0 SD2 Color registration shutter
solenoid
1 SD3 IDC shutter solenoid
56 0 - Status indicator lamp (PAT
1 ON)
1 - Status indicator lamp (PAT
2 ON)
3 ON)
4 ON)
58 0 Peculiar TCRS TCR sensor /Y control 0 to 255 TCRS TCR sensor /Y
function /Y voltage /Y
1 s TCRS TCR sensor /M control 0 to 255 TCRS TCR sensor /M
/M voltage /M
2 TCRS TCR sensor /C control 0 to 255 TCRS TCR sensor /C
/C voltage /C
3 TCRS TCR sensor /K control 0 to 255 TCRS TCR sensor /K
/K voltage /K
I -126

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
59 0 - Fusing unit identification 001: Normal
signal unit (CN131B
unconnected)
002: User unit
(CN131B
connected)
2 Main PS64 Fusing loop sensor 000: No paper
body 001: Paper
3 Peculiar PS17 Fusing paper exit sensor 000: No paper
function 001: Paper
s
60 1 DF PS304 No paper sensor 000: No paper DF M301 Paper feed motor
001: Paper (Forward: 300mm/sec)
2 PS301 Registration sensor 000: No paper M301 Paper feed motor
3 PS302 Timing sensor 000: No paper M301 Paper feed motor
4 PS305 Reverse sensor 000: No paper M301 Paper feed motor
001: Paper (Reverse: 300mm/sec)
5 PS306 Paper exit sensor 000: No paper M301 Paper feed motor
001: Paper (Reverse: 400mm/sec)
6 PS303 Paper feed cover sensor 000: Close M301 Paper feed motor
001: Open (Reverse: 900mm/sec)
7 PS308 Tray open/close sensor 000: Open M302 Paper feed motor
001: Close (Forward: 300mm/sec)
8 PS307 Paper exit cover sensor 000: Close M302 Paper feed motor
001: Open (Forward: 400mm/sec)
9 RS ADF open/close switch 000: Close M302 Paper feed motor
001: Open (Forward: 900mm/sec)
10 M302 Paper feed motor
(Reverse: 300mm/sec)
13 M303 Reverse/paper exit motor
(Forward: 300mm/sec)
19 SD302 Reverse solenoid
20 SD301 Exit solenoid
21 CL301 Registration clutch
69 1 RU-509 SD1 Humidification section gate
solenoid
2 SD2 De-curler gate solenoid /1
3 SD3 De-curler gate solenoid /2
6 RU-509 - Humidifier unit set signal 000: ON
(DIPSW 4) 001: OFF
7 - Subsequent stage 000:
connection detection Connected
001: Not
connected
8 - HM-102 connection 000: Not
detection connected
001:
Connected
I -127

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
9 - RU-509 connection 000: Not
detection connected
001:
Connected
10 - Water tank full sensor 000: Other
than full
001: Full
15 RU-509 M10 Humidification section
roller pressure motor /Lt
(home position search)
16 M10 Humidification roller Enabled after
pressure home sensor /Lt conducting
(Press) home position
search (69-15)
17 RU-509 PS1 Entrance sensor 000: Paper M1 Entrance conveyance
001: No paper motor (400mm/s)
18 PS2 De-curler entrance sensor 000: Paper M2 Intermediate conveyance
001: No paper motor (400mm/s)
19 PS3 Color density detection 000: Paper M4 Paper exit motor
timing sensor 001: No paper (1000mm/s)
20 PS4 Paper exit conveyance 000: Paper M5 De-curler pressure motor
sensor 001: No paper (home position search)
21 PS5 De-curler pressure home 000: Home M5 De-curler pressure motor / Enabled after
sensor /Lw position Lw conducting
001: Other home position
than home search (69-20)
position
22 PS6 De-curler pressure home 000: Other M6 De-curler pressure motor /
sensor /Up than home Up (home position search)
position
001: Home
position
23 M6 De-curler pressure motor / Enabled after
Up conducting
home position
search (69-22)
25 FM1, Entrance paper fan /1, /2, /
FM2, 3
FM3
26 FM4, Ventilation assist fan /1, /2
FM5
FM16, 6
FM17
FM19, 9
FM20
29 FM21 Ventilation assist fan /3
30 RU-509 SW1 Door switch 000: Open JAMIB Jam indication board
001: Close
31 M3 De-curler conveyance
motor (400mm/s)
33 RU-509 PS7 Humidification section 000: Paper M7 Humidification section
entrance sensor 001: No paper entrance conveyance
motor (400mm/s)
34 PS8 Water tank empty sensor 000: No water P1 Pump motor
001: Water
35 PS9 Humidification section 000: Other M9 Humidification section
roller pressure home than home roller pressure motor /Rt
sensor /Rt position (home position search)
001: Home
position
36 PS10 Humidification section 000: Other M9 Humidification section Enabled after
roller pressure home than home roller pressure motor/Rt conducting
sensor /Lt position (Press) home position
001: Home search (69-35)
position
I -128

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
37 M8 Humidification section
conveyance motor
(400mm/s)
40 PS12 Paper exit sensor 000: Paper
001: No paper
41 RU-509 FM6, Humidification section
FM7, paper fan /1, /2, /3
FM8
44 FM9, Humidification section
FM10, paper fan /4, /5, /6
FM11
49 CDDB Color density detection Display top 8 bit CDLE Color density LED/Y, Color
Y board /Y (LED OFF) out of 16bit DY, density LED/M, Color
CDLE density LED/C, Color
DM, density LED/K
CDLE
DC,
CDLE
DK
50 CDDB Color density detection Display top 8 bit SD5 Shutter solenoid
M board /M (LED OFF) out of 16bit
51 CDDB Color density detection Display top 8 bit
C board /M (LED OFF) out of 16bit
K board /K (LED OFF) out of 16bit
Y board /Y (LED ON) out of 16bit
M board /M (LED ON) out of 16bit
C board /C (CDDBC) out of 16bit
K board /K (LED ON) out of 16bit
70 1 FD PS1 FD entrance sensor 000: Paper FD M1 Entrance conveyance
001: No paper motor
2 PS4 PI exit sensor 000: No paper M2 Punch conveyance motor
001: Paper
3 PS5 Punch conveyance sensor 000: Paper M3 Intermediate conveyance
001: No paper motor
4 PS7 Main tray folding paper full 000: Full M4 1st folding motor (F
sensor 001: Other rotation)
than full
5 PS8 2 holes punch home 000: Other M4 1st folding motor (R
sensor than home rotation)
position
001: Home
position
6 PS9 3 holes/4 holes home 000: Other M5 2nd folding motor (F
position
001: Home
position
7 PS10 Alignment plate home 000: Other M5 2nd folding motor (R
position
001: Home
position
8 PS11 Punch registration home 000: Other M6 3rd folding motor (F
position
001: Home
position
9 PS12 Punch scraps box set 000: Not set M6 3rd folding motor (R
sensor 001: Set rotation)
10 PS13 Intermediate conveyance 000: No paper M7 PI conveyance motor
sensor 001: Paper
I -129

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
11 PS16 Sub tray exit sensor 000: No paper M8 Paper lift motor /Up (down)
001: Paper
12 PS17 Sub tray paper full sensor 000: Full M8 Paper lift motor /Up (up)
001: Other
than full
13 PS18 Main tray paper exit 000: No paper M9 Paper lift motor /Lw (down)
sensor 001: Paper
14 PS20 Main tray upper limit 000: Other M9 Paper lift motor /Lw (up)
sensor than upper
limit
001: Upper
limit
15 PS22 Main tray lower limit 000: Other M17 Main tray exit motor
sensor than lower
limit
001: Lower
limit
16 PS23 Main tray empty sensor 000: Paper
001: No paper
17 PS26 Punch scraps full sensor 000: Full
001: Other
than full
21 FD M10 Punch motor (3 holes)
22 FD PS2 Folding exit sensor 000: No paper M10 Punch motor (2 holes)
001: Paper
23 CN90 Main tray connection 000: M11 Tray up down motor (home
recognition (CN90 Connected position search)
connection) 001:
Unconnected
24 PS51 1st folding conveyance 000: Paper M12 Alignment motor (home
sensor 001: No paper position search)
25 PS52 Folding entrance sensor 000: Paper
001: No paper
26 PS53 2nd folding conveyance 000: Paper FD M13 Punch registration motor
sensor 001: No paper
27 PS54 3rd folding conveyance 000: Paper M14 1st folding release motor
sensor 001: No paper (conveyance position
move)
28 PS55 1st folding cam home 000: Pressure M14 1st folding release motor ON: Folding
sensor 001: Release (folding position move) position OFF:
Conveyance
position
29 PS56 2nd folding cam home 000: Pressure M15 2nd folding release motor
sensor 001: Release (conveyance position
move)
30 PS57 3rd folding cam home 000: Pressure M15 2nd folding release motor ON: Folding
sensor 001: Release (folding position move) position OFF:
Conveyance
position
31 PS58 S size conveyance sensor 000: No paper M16 3rd folding release motor
001: Paper (conveyance position
move)
32 PS6 Punch registration sensor 000: No paper M16 3rd folding release motor ON: Folding
001: Paper (folding position move) position OFF:
Conveyance
position
33 FDOB Staple selection switch 000: ON
001: OFF
34 FDOB Punch selection switch 000: ON
001: OFF
35 FDOB Folding selection switch 000: ON
001: OFF
36 FDOB Start/Stop switch 000: ON
001: OFF
37 FDOB Multi-feed function select 000: ON
switch 001: OFF
I -130

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
39 PS46 Sub tray folding paper full 000: Other
sensor than full
001: Full
40 PS31 PI conveyance sensor /Up 000: No paper
001: Paper
41 PS37 PI conveyance sensor /Lw 000: No paper
001: Paper
42 PS32 PI upper limit sensor /Up 000: Other
than upper
limit
001: Upper
limit
43 PS33 PI paper empty sensor /Up 000: Other
than full
001: Full
44 PS34 PI lift plate home sensor / 000: Other
Up than home
position
001: Home
position
45 PS35 L size sensor /Up 000: Paper
001: No paper
46 PS36 S size sensor /Up 000: Paper
001: No paper
48 PS38 PI upper limit sensor /Lw 000: Other
than upper
limit
001: Upper
limit
49 PS39 PI paper empty sensor /Lw 000: Other
than full
001: Full
50 PS40 PI lift plate home sensor / 000: Other
Lw than home
position
001: Home
position
51 PS41 L size sensor /Lw 000: Paper
001: No paper
52 PS42 S size sensor /Lw 000: Paper
001: No paper
53 PS43 PI cover open/close 000: Open
sensor 001: Close
54 PS44 PI paper set sensor /Up 000: Paper
001: No paper
55 PS45 PI paper set sensor /Lw 000: Paper
001: No paper
61 PS47 PI max paper size sensor / 000: Paper FD SD1 Entrance gate solenoid
Up 001: No paper
62 PS48 PI max paper size sensor / 000: Paper SD3 S size gate solenoid
Lw 001: No paper
63 SD4 L size gate solenoid
64 FD - FD connection detection 000: Not SD5 Roller solenoid /1
signal connected
001:
Connected
65 SD6 Roller solenoid /2
68 SD9 Sub tray gate solenoid
69 SD12 Paper exit solenoid
70 SD13 PI pick-up solenoid /Up
71 SD14 PI pick-up solenoid /Lw
72 SD15 Folding gate solenoid
74 SD18 2nd folding roller solenoid
I -131

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
75 CL1 PI registration clutch /Up
76 CL2 PI registration clutch /Lw
82 MFDB Multi-feed detection
1 board /1 (CLK output)
89 FDOB FD operation board (lit all
LEDs)
90 JAMIB Jam indication board (lit all
LEDs)
71 1 SD-506 PS1 Entrance sensor 000: No paper SD-506 M1 Entrance conveyance
001: Paper motor
2 PS2 Horizontal conveyance 000: No paper M2 Horizontal conveyance
sensor /1 001: Paper motor
3 PS3 Horizontal conveyance 000: No paper M3 Folding entrance motor
sensor /2 001: Paper
4 PS4 Horizontal conveyance exit 000: No paper M4 Folding transfer motor (F
sensor 001: Paper rotation)
5 PS5 Right angle conveyance 000: Paper M4 Folding transfer motor (R
sensor /1 001: No paper rotation)
6 PS6 Right angle conveyance 000: Paper M6 Right angle conveyance
sensor /2 001: No paper motor
7 PS7 Folding sensor /1 000: Paper M29 Stapler motor /Rt (1 staple)
001: No paper
8 PS8 Folding passage sensor 000: No paper M30 Stapler motor /Lt (1 staple)
001: Paper
9 PS17 Overlap home sensor 000: Other M5 Bundle exit motor
than home
position
001: Home
position
10 PS18 Folding main scan 000: Home M8 Folding sub scan
alignment home sensor / position alignment exit motor
Fr1 001: Other
than home
position
11 PS49 Folding main scan 000: Home
alignment home sensor / position
Fr2 001: Other
than home
position
12 PS20 1st folding blade home 000: Home
sensor /1 position
001: Other
than home
position
13 PS21 1st folding blade home 000: Other
sensor /2 than home
position
001: Home
position
14 PS22 2nd folding blade home 000: Home
sensor /1 position
001: Other
than home
position
15 PS23 2nd folding blade home 000: Other
sensor /2 than home
position
001: Home
position
16 PS24 Folding exit home sensor 000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
17 PS9 Tri-folding exit sensor 000: No paper
001: Paper
I -132

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
18 PS10 Tri-folding paper full 000: Full
sensor 001: Other
than full
19 PS11 Sub tray exit sensor 000: No paper
001: Paper
20 PS12 Sub tray paper full sensor 000: Full
001: Other
than full
21 PS44 Folding sensor /2 000: Paper SD-506 M5 Bundle exit motor (home
001: No paper position search)
22 PS19 Folding main scan 000: Other
alignment home sensor /Rr than home
position
001: Home
position
23 PS46 Guide shaft home sensor 000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
24 HS2/ Clincher start sensors /Rt 000: Clinch SD-506 M7 Folding main scan
HS4 and /Lt 001: No clinch alignment motor /Fr (home
position search)
25 M7 Folding main scan Enabled after
alignment motor /Fr conducting
(alignment) home position
search (71-24)
27 M8 Folding sub scan
alignment motor (home
position search)
29 M9 Saddle stitching alignment
motor /Rt (home position
search)
30 M9 Saddle stitching alignment Enabled after
motor /Rt (inward conducting
movement) home position
search (71-29)
31 M10 Bundle exit motor (home
position search)
32 M10 Bundle arm motor (inward Enabled after
movement) conducting
home position
search (71-31)
33 SD-506 PS13 Saddle stitching paper 000: Paper M11 Bundle clip motor (home
sensor 001: No paper position search)
34 PS14 Bundle sensor /1 000: Paper M12 Bundle registration motor
001: No paper (home position search)
35 PS15 Bundle sensor /2 000: Paper M13 Overlap motor (home
001: No paper position search)
36 PS16 Bundle registration plate 000: Home M14 Folding main scan
home sensor position alignment motor /Rr (home
001: Other position search)
than home
position
37 PS25 Stapler movement home 000: Other M14 Folding main scan After conducting
sensor than home alignment motor /Rr home position
position (forward movement) search (71-36)
001: Home
position
38 PS26 Clincher up down home 000: Home
sensor position
001: Other
than home
position
I -133

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
39 PS27 Saddle stitching press 000: Other SD-506 M15 Stapler movement motor
home sensor than home (home position search)
position
001: Home
position
40 PS28 Saddle stitching alignment 000: Other M15 Stapler movement motor
home sensor /Rt than home (staple position movement)
position
001: Home
position
41 PS29 Saddle stitching alignment 000: Other M16 Saddle stitching alignment
home sensor /Lt than home motor /Lt (home position
position search)
001: Home
position
42 PS33 Bundle clip upper limit 000: Other M16 Saddle stitching alignment
sensor than upper motor /Lt (inward
limit movement)
001: Upper
limit
43 PS30 Bundle clip lower limit 000: Other M17 Bundle press movement
sensor than lower motor (home position
limit search)
001: Lower
limit
44 PS32 Bundle arm home sensor 000: Other M18 1st folding blade motor
than home (home position search)
position
001: Home
position
45 PS31 Bundle arm rotation home 000: Other M19 2nd folding blade motor
sensor than home (home position search)
position
001: Home
position
46 PS34 Bundle registration home 000: Other M20 Clincher up down motor
position
001: Home
position
47 PS35 Bundle press stage up 000: Other M20 Clincher up down motor
down home sensor than home (stapling)
position
001: Home
position
48 PS45 Bundle press stage up 000: Other M21 Saddle stitching press
down limit sensor than upper motor (home position
limit search)
001: Upper
limit
49 PS37 Bundle press home sensor 000: Home M22 Bundle arm rotation motor
position (home position search)
001: Other
than home
position
50 PS47 Bundle press lower limit 000: Lower M23 Bundle press motor (home
sensor limit position search)
001: Other
than lower
limit
51 PS48 Scraps press home sensor 000: Home M24 Bundle press stage up
position down motor (home
001: Other position search)
than home
position
52 PS40 Scraps box set sensor 000: Not set M25 Guide shaft motor (home
001: Set position search)
I -134

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
53 PS41 Trimmer scraps full sensor 000: Full M31 Trimmer blade motor
001: Other (home position search)
than full
54 PS36 Bundle press movement 000: Other M31 Trimmer blade motor
home sensor than home (trimming position)
position
001: Home
position
55 PS38 Bundle arm assist home 000: Other M32 Trimmer press motor
position
001: Home
position
56 PS39 Bundle arm assist upper 000: Upper M32 Trimmer press motor
limit sensor limit (upper limit search)
001: Other
than upper
limit
57 SW1 Staple empty switch /Rt 000: Staple M32 Trimmer press motor Enabled after
001: No staple (pressing) conducting
home position
search (71-55)
58 SW2 Staple empty switch /Lt 000: Staple M32 Trimmer press motor Enabled after
001: No staple (movement to trimmer conducting
board release position) home position
search (71-55)
59 HS1 Stapler home sensor /Rt 000: Home M10 Bundle arm motor (inward
position movement)
001: Other
than home
position
60 HS3 Stapler home sensor /Lt 000: Home M23 Bundle press motor
position (pressing)
001: Other
than home
position
61 PS50 Trimmer blade home 000: Other M24 Bundle press stage up
sensor than home down motor (up)
position
001: Home
position
62 PS51 Trimmer blade upper limit 000: Upper M24 Bundle press stage up
sensor limit down motor (home
001: Other position search for the
than upper bundle registration plate)
limit
63 PS52 Trimmer press upper limit 000: Other M26 Bundle arm assist motor
sensor than upper (home position search)
limit
001: Upper
limit
64 PS53 Trimmer press home 000: Other
sensor than lower
limit
001: Lower
limit
65 PS42 Front door sensor /Rt 000: Close SD-506 M33 Trimmer paddle motor
001: Open (forward rotation)
66 PS43 Front door sensor /Lt 000: Close M33 Trimmer paddle motor
001: Open (reverse rotation)
67 PS54 Bundle sensor /4 000: No paper
001: Paper
68 PS55 Trimmer registration 000: Other
sensor than
registration
position
001:
Registration
position
I -135

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
69 PS56 Folding sub scan 000: Other
alignment home sensor than home
position
001: Home
position
70 PS57 Bundle exit sensor /2 000: Paper
001: No paper
71 PS58 Bundle tray set sensor 000: Set SD-506 SD1 Entrance gate solenoid
001: Not set
72 PS59 Trimmer board 000: Not SD2 Right angle conveyance
replacement sensor replace gate solenoid
001: replace
73 SD3 Horizontal conveyance
gate solenoid
74 SD4 Roller release solenoid /4
75 SD-506 PS61 Bundle tray paper full 000: Other SD5 Roller release solenoid /1
sensor than full (roller press)
001: Full
(roller release)
77 SD-506 PS60 Folding entrance sensor 000: Paper SD6 Roller release solenoid /2
001: No paper
(roller press)
(roller release)
80 SD8 Folding unit lock solenoid
(lock)
81 SD-506 PS62 Trimmer completion 000: Other SD8 Folding unit lock solenoid
sensor than complete (release)
001: Complete
82 SD11 Trimmer board solenoid
(ON once)
83 SD-506 PS66 Wire slack prevention 000: Without SD11 Trimmer board solenoid
sensor slack (ON twice)
001: With
slack
84 - New trimming unit 000: SD12 Brake solenoid
connection detection Connected
001: Not
connected
86 CL1 Tri-folding exit clutch
87 FM1 Scraps removal fan motor
88 SD-506 - FNS connection detection 000: Not
signal connected
001:
Connected
90 SD-506 JAMIB Jam indication board (LED
/2 ON)
95 - Trimmer board solenoid Reset after
operation counter reset replace the
trimmer board
96 - Set of trimming operation
97 M32 Trimmer press motor
(Move the trimmer board
replace position after
home position search)
98 M32, Trimmer board forced
SD11 movement (Turn ON SD11
after the trimmer press
motor moves to the
trimmer board replacement
position)
72 1 FS-521 PS35 Rear stopper home sensor 000: Other FS-521 M1 Conveyance motor
than home (1000mm/sec)
position
I -136

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
001: Home
position
2 PS33 Intermediate roller home 000: Other
sensor than home
position
001: Home
position
3 PS32 Stack assist home sensor 000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
4 PS14 Stapler rotation home 000: Home
sensor position
001: Other
than home
position
5 PS11 Stapler movement home 000: Other
sensor than home
position
001: Home
position
6 PS34 Staple scraps box set 000: Not set FS-521 M3 Tray up down motor (home
sensor 001: Set position search)
7 PS30 Sub tray paper full sensor 000: Full M3 Tray up down motor (lower
001: Other limit move)
than full
8 PS1 Sub tray exit sensor 000: No paper
001: Paper
9 PS5 Stacker entrance sensor 000: No paper
001: Paper
10 PS4 FNS entrance sensor 000: Paper
001: No paper
11 PS15 Counter reset sensor 000: Other FS-521 M22 Alignment motor /Fr (home
than reset position search)
001: Reset
12 PS12 Paper exit home sensor 000: Home M22 Alignment motor /Fr (A4S Available only
position standby position move) from the home
001: Other position
than home
position
13 PS10 Main tray paper exit 000: Paper M22 Alignment motor /Fr (A4S Available only
sensor 001: No paper position move) from A4S
position
14 PS3 Tray lower limit sensor 000: Other M22 Alignment motor /Fr (A4S Available only
than lower standby position move) after the
limit alignment
001: Lower operation
limit
15 PS39 Paper empty sensor 000: Paper
001: No paper
16 FS-521 M7 Main tray exit motor
(800mm/sec)
17 M7 Main tray exit motor
(205mm/sec)
21 FS-521 PS47 Staple ready sensor/Fr 000: Ready M8 Paper exit opening motor
than ready
22 PS43 Cartridge set sensor /Fr 000: Cartridge M8 Paper exit opening motor Available only
001: No (full opening: approx. 55) from the home
cartridge position
23 PS45 Staple empty sensor /Fr 000: Staple M8 Paper exit opening motor Available only
001: No staple (half opening: approx. 44) from the home
position
I -137

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
24 PS41 Stapler home sensor /Fr 000: Home M8 Paper exit opening motor Available only
position (small opening: approx. from the home
001: Other 27) position
than home
position
25 PS46 Staple ready sensor/Rr 000: Ready
001: Other
than ready
26 PS42 Cartridge set sensor /Rr 000: Cartridge FS-521 M31 Stapler motor /Fr (needles
001: No out, empty staple)
cartridge
27 PS44 Staple empty sensor /Rr 000: Staple M31 Stapler motor /Fr (staple) Available after
001: No staple initialization
28 PS40 Stapler home sensor /Rr 000: Home M30 Stapler motor /Rr (needles
position out, empty staple)
001: Other
than home
position
29 M30 Stapler motor /Rr (staple) Available after
initialization
30 FS-521 PS20 Stacker empty sensor 000: Paper
001: No paper
31 PS9 Paper exit arm home 000: Home FS-521 M4, Stapler rotation motor,
sensor position M11 Stapler movement motor
than home
position
32 MS1 Door switch 000: Close M4, Stapler rotation motor,
001: Open M11 Stapler movement motor
(1 stapling position
movement in A4 size)
33 PS31 Alignment home sensor /Fr 000: Other M16 Stacker entrance roller
than home release motor (home
position position search)
001: Home
position
34 PS8 Alignment home sensor / 000: Other M16 Stacker entrance roller
Rr than home release motor (pressing
position release position move)
001: Home
position
35 PS6 Tray middle position 000: No tray
sensor 001: Tray
36 PS13 Bypass roller release 000: Home FS-521 M13 Stacker entrance motor
home sensor position (1000mm/sec)
001: Other
than home
position
37 PS16 Tray upper limit sensor 000: Tray
001: No tray
38 PS19 Paper exit alignment plate 000: Other
home sensor /Rr than home
position
001: Home
position
39 PS18 Paper exit alignment plate 000: Other
home sensor /Fr than home
position
001: Home
position
40 - FNS connection detection 000: Not
signal connected
001:
Connected
41 OB Operation board (Pause 000: ON FS-521 M26 Rear stopper motor (home
button) 001: OFF position search)
I -138

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
42 PS24 Paper exit alignment plate 000: Other M26 Rear stopper motor Available only
retraction home sensor than home (stopper release) from the home
position position
001: Home
position
43 PS17 Tray quarter position 000: No tray
sensor 001: Tray
44 PS23 Stacker entrance roller 000: Other
release home sensor than home
position
001: Home
position
46 FS-521 SD5 Bypass solenoid
47 SD2 Gate solenoid
48 SD9 Paper exit opening
solenoid (ON/OFF)
49 SD7 Intermediate roller release
solenoid
51 M24 Stack assist guide motor
52 M24 Stack assist guide motor Available only
(assist position move) from the home
position
56 M25 Intermediate roller open
close motor (home position
search)
57 M25 Intermediate roller open Available only
close motor (reserve from the home
position move) position
61 M23 Paper exit arm motor Available after
(home position search) conducting
intermediate
roller open/close
motor shelter
position (72-57)
(800mm/sec) conducting
intermediate
roller open/close
motor shelter
position (72-57)
(400mm/sec) conducting
intermediate
roller open/close
motor shelter
position (72-57)
66 M6 Sub tray exit motor
(1000mm/sec)
67 M18 Paper exit alignment plate
retraction motor (home
position search)
retraction motor
(Alignment position move)
71 M5 Alignment motor /Rr (home
position search)
72 M5 Alignment motor /Rr (A4S Available only
standby position move) from the home
position
position move) from A4S
position
standby position move) after the
alignment
operation
I -139

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
75 OB Operation board (LED ON)
76 M2 Paddle motor (ON/OFF)
77 JAMIB Jam indication board
(illuminate all LEDs)
78 M5, Alignment motor /Rr, /Fr
M22 (home position search)
79 M5, Alignment motor /Rr, /Fr Available only
M22 (A4S standby position from the home
move) position
80 M5, Alignment motor /Rr, /Fr Available only
M22 (A4S position move) from A4S
position
81 M12 Bypass roller release
motor (home position
search)
82 M12 Bypass roller release Available only
motor (strong pressing from the home
motor (home position from strong
move) pressing position
motor (pressing release from the home
motor (home position from pressing
move) release position
86 M14 Paper exit alignment
motor /Rr (home position
search)
motor /Rr (A4S standby
position move)
88 M14 Paper exit alignment Available only
motor /Rr (Move from A4S from A4S
standby position to standby position
alignment position)
motor /Rr (Move from A4S from A4S
alignment position to alignment
standby position) position
motor /Fr (home position
search)
motor /Fr (A4S standby
position move)
motor /Fr (Move from A4S from A4S
standby position to standby position
alignment position)
motor /Fr (Move from A4S from A4S
alignment position to alignment
standby position) position
94 M8 Paper exit opening motor
(home position move
(close))
94 M5 Alignment motor /Rr (home
position move)
94 M22 Alignment motor /Fr (home
position move)
motor /Rr (home position
move)
I -140

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
motor /Fr (home position
move)
retraction motor (home
position move)
95 M8 Paper exit opening motor
(opening big)
95 M5 Alignment motor /Rr (A4
straight standby position
move)
95 M22 Alignment motor /Fr (A4
straight standby position
move)
motor /Rr (A4 straight
standby position move)
motor /Fr (A4 straight
standby position move)
retraction motor (Move
from home position to
alignment position)
95 M3 Tray up down motor
(paper exit alignment plate
avoiding operation (from
down to up))
95 SD9 Paper exit opening
solenoid ON
96 M5 Alignment motor /Rr (A4
straight alignment position
move)
96 M22 Alignment motor /Fr (A4
straight alignment position
move)
motor /Rr (A4 straight
alignment position move)
motor /Fr (A4 straight
alignment position move)
98 FS-521 - FS connection detection 000: Not
connected
001:
Connected
1 FS-531/ PS1 Sub tray exit sensor 000: No paper FS-531/ M1 FNS Conveyance motor
612 001: Paper 612 (667mm/sec)
2 PS4 FNS entrance sensor 000: Paper
001: No paper
3 PS19 Sub tray paper full sensor 000: Other FS-531/ M2 Shift roller motor (home
than full 612 position search)
001: Full
4 PS12 Paper exit home sensor 000: Close
position
001: Other
than close
position
5 PS16 Gate home sensor 000: Home
position
001: Other
than home
position
6 PS6 Main tray paper exit 000: No paper FS-531/ M3 Main tray up down motor
sensor 001: Paper 612 (home position search)
I -141

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
7 PS18 Shift roller home sensor 000: Home M3 Main tray up down motor
position (lower limit move)
001: Other
than home
position
8 M3 Main tray up down motor
(a few sheet up down
movement in staple mode)
10 FS-531/ PS3 Main tray lower limit 000: Other FS-612 M4 Clincher rotation motor
612 sensor than lower (home position search)
limit
001: Lower
limit
11 FS-531/ M5 Alignment motor /Up
612 (home position search)
12 FS-531/ PS2 Main tray upper limit 000: Other M5 Alignment motor /Up (A4S Available only
612 sensor than upper standby position move) from the home
limit position
001: Upper
limit
13 PS7 Stapler paper exit upper 000: Upper M5 Alignment motor /Up Available only
limit sensor limit (alignment operation) from the A4
001: Other position
than upper
limit
14 PS15 Counter reset sensor 000: No paper M5 Alignment motor /Up Available only
001: Paper (standby position move) after the
alignment
operation
16 M7 Stapler roller motor (staple
mode)
17 FS-531/ PS5 Stacker entrance sensor 000: No paper M7 Paper exit roller motor
612 001: Paper (folding mode)
18 PS8 Alignment home sensor / 000: Other
Up than home
position
001: Home
position
19 PS9 Paper exit belt home 000: Other
sensor than home
position
001: Home
position
20 PS11 Stapler movement home 000: Other
sensor than home
position
001: Home
position
21 FS-612 PS13 Stapler rotation home 000: Other FS-531/ M8 Paper exit opening motor
sensor than home 612 (home position search)
position
001: Home
position
22 PS14 Clincher rotation home 000: Other M8 Paper exit opening motor Available only
sensor than home (opening moved: in A4S from the home
position stapling mode) position
001: Home
position
23 FS-531/ PS20 Stacker empty sensor 000: No paper
612 001: Paper
24 MS1 Door switch 000: Close
001: Open
25 PS31 Stapler motor home 000: Home
sensor /Fr position
001: Other
than home
position
I -142

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
26 PS30 Stapler motor home 000: Home FS-531/ M14 Stapler motor /Fr (initial
sensor /Rr position 612 operation performed)
001: Other
than home
position
27 SW4 Staple empty switch /Fr 000: Staple M14 Stapler motor /Fr (stapling
001: No staple operation performed)
28 SW2 Staple empty switch /Rr 000: Staple M9 Stapler motor /Rr (initial
001: No staple operation performed)
29 SW4 Staple empty switch /Fr 000: Staple M9 Stapler motor /Rr (stapling
(U-shaped staple) 001: No staple operation performed)
30 SW2 Staple empty switch /Rr 000: Staple
(U-shaped staple) 001: No staple
31 SW3 Cartridge set switch /Fr 000: Cartridge FS-531/ M11, Stapler rotation motor,
001: No 612 M4 Clincher rotation motor
cartridge (FS-61 (home position search)
2 only)
32 SW1 Cartridge set switch /Rr 000: Cartridge M11, Stapler movement motor,
001: No M4 Clincher rotation motor
cartridge (FS-61 (A4, 1 staple position)
2 only)
35 FS-612 PS33 Clincher motor home 000: Home
sensor /Fr position
001: Other
than home
position
36 PS32 Clincher motor home 000: Home FS-531/ M13 Stacker entrance motor
sensor /Rr position 612 (670mm/sec)
001: Other
than home
position
38 FS-612 M6 Stapler rotation motor
39 M16 Alignment motor /Lw
41 FS-612 PS22 Folding knife home sensor 000: Home M18 Saddle stitching stopper
position motor (home position
001: Other search)
than home
position
42 PS23 Saddle stitching stopper 000: Other M18 Saddle stitching stopper Available only
home sensor than home motor (A4S stopper from the home
position release) position
001: Home
position
43 PS24 Alignment home sensor / 000: Other M19 Folding knife motor (1
Lw than home cycle performed)
position
001: Home
position
44 PS25 Folding paper exit sensor 000: No paper M20 Folding transfer motor
001: Paper (high speed forward
rotation)
45 PS26 Folding pass-through 000: No paper FS-531/ SD4 Paper exit opening
sensor 001: Paper 612 solenoid
46 PS29 Folding full sensor 000: Other SD5 Bypass gate solenoid
than full
001: Full
47 FS-612 SD6 Tri-folding gate solenoid
48 FS-531/ SD51 Paper assist solenoid
612
49 FS-531/ PS201 Paper pass-through 000: No paper FS-612 SD7, Flat stitching stopper
612 sensor /Up (PI) 001: Paper SD8 release solenoid /Fr, /Rr
50 PS206 Paper pass-through 000: No paper
sensor /Lw (PI) 001: Paper
53 FS-531/ M21 Sub tray exit motor
612 (667mm/sec)
I -143

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
55 M12 Gate motor (position
search)
57 FS-531/ PS301 Punch home sensor (PK) 000: Home
612 position
001: Other
than home
position
58 PS306 Punch encoder sensor 000: FS-531/ M51 Paper assist motor (F
(PK) Transparent 612 rotation)
001: Light
blocked
59 PS302 Punch scraps box full 000: Full
sensor (PK) 001: Other
than full
60 PS304 Punch scraps box set 000: Not set
sensor (PK) 001: Set
61 PS303 Punch shift home sensor 000: Other
(PK) than home
position
001: Home
position
62 PS305 Paper size sensor swing 000: No paper
(edge detection 5) (PK) 001: Paper
65 PS305 Paper size sensor swing 000: No paper FS-531/ M302 Punch shift motor (home
(edge detection 2) (PK) 001: Paper 612 position search) (PK)
66 PS305 Paper size sensor swing 000: No paper M302 Punch shift motor (PK)
69 M301 Punch motor (home
position search) (PK)
70 M301 Punch motor (2-hole PK
punch execute)
73 FS-531/ PS202 Paper empty sensor /Up 000: Paper
612 (PI) 001: No paper
74 PS203 Paper set sensor /Up (PI) 000: Paper
001: No paper
75 PS205 Tray upper limit sensor /Up 000: Upper
(Upper tray) (PI) limit
001: Other
than upper
limit
76 PS204 Tray lower limit sensor /Up 000: Lower
(Upper tray) (PI) limit
001: Other
than lower
limit
77 PIOB Sheet feeder manual start/ 000: ON
clear switch 001: OFF
78 PIOB Sheet feeder manual 000: ON
punch button switch (PI) 001: OFF
79 PIOB Sheet feeder manual 000: ON
function selection button 001: OFF
switch (PI)
80 MS20 Upper door open/close 000: Close
1 switch (PI) 001: Open
81 PS207 Paper empty sensor /Lw 000: Paper
(PI) 001: No paper
82 PS212 Paper set sensor /Lw (PI) 000: Paper
001: No paper
83 PS209 Tray upper limit sensor /Lw 000: Other FS-531/ M203 Conveyance motor
(Lower tray) (PI) than upper 612 (667mm/sec) (PI)
limit
001: Upper
limit
I -144

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
84 PS210 Tray lower limit sensor /Lw 000: Other CL201 Conveyance clutch /Up
(Lower tray) (PI) than lower (PI)
limit
001: Lower
limit
85 CL202 Conveyance clutch /Lw
(PI)
86 FS-531/ PS208 L size sensor /Lw (PI) 000: Paper M201 Tray lift motor /Up (move
612 001: No paper down: home position
search)
87 M201 Tray lift motor /Up (move
up) (PI)
88 M202 Tray lift motor /Lw (move
down: home position
search) (PI)
89 M202 Tray lift motor /Lw (move
up) (PI)
90 SD201 Pick-up solenoid /Up (PI)
91 SD202 Pick-up solenoid /Lw (PI)
92 CL203 Registration clutch (PI)
96 FS-531/ - FNS connection detection 000: Not
612 signal connected
001:
Connected
99 FS-531/ - Paperless running mode
612
73 1 LS (1st PS4 Entrance sensor 000: No paper LS (1st M2 Conveyance motor
tandem) 001: Paper tandem)
2 PS10 Sub tray exit sensor 000: No paper M2 Conveyance motor
001: Paper
3 PS7 Conveyance sensor /1 000: No paper M3 Sub tray exit motor
001: Paper
4 PS16 Conveyance sensor /2 000: No paper M3 Sub tray exit motor
001: Paper
5 PS17 Conveyance sensor /3 000: No paper M6 Coupling conveyance
001: Paper motor
6 PS18 Coupling exit sensor 000: No paper M6 Coupling conveyance
001: Paper motor
7 PS3 Stacker tray upper limit 000: Other M4 Grip conveyance motor
sensor than upper
limit
001: Upper
limit
8 PS6 Paper empty sensor 000: Full M4 Grip conveyance motor
001: Other
than full
9 PS13 2,000 sheets stacked 000: OFF M7 Alignment motor (initial
sensor 001: ON operation)
10 PS19 Paper detection sensor 000: OFF M7 Alignment motor
001: ON
11 PS14 5,000 sheets stacked 000: OFF M5 Shift unit motor (home
sensor 001: ON position search)
12 PS9 Sub tray full sensor 000: Other M5 Shift unit motor
than full
001: Full
13 PS1 Stacker tray set sensor 000: Not set M1 Stacker tray up down
001: Set motor (down)
14 RS1 Hand cart reset switch 000: Not set M1 Stacker tray up down
001: Set motor (up)
15 PS15 Stacker tray arm release 000: OFF SD1 1st gate solenoid
sensor 001: ON
16 TOB Paper exit switch 000: OFF SD10 2nd gate solenoid
001: ON
17 MS1 Front door switch 000: Close SD9 Front stopper solenoid
001: Open
I -145

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
18 RS2 JAM door switch 000: Close SD3 Rear stopper solenoid
001: Open
19 PS8 Sub tray door sensor 000: Close SD8 Paper press arm solenoid /
001: Open 3
20 MS2 Stacker tray upper limit 000: Other SD6 Paper press arm solenoid /
switch than upper 1
limit
001: Upper
limit
21 MS3 Stacker tray lower limit 000: Other SD4 Front door lock solenoid
switch than lower
limit
001: Lower
limit
22 PS12 Alignment home sensor 000: Other SD11 Tandem conveyance lock
than home solenoid
position
001: Home
position
23 PS11 Shift unit home sensor 000: Other SD2 Job partition solenoid
than home
position
001: Home
position
24 PS5 Grip conveyance home 000: Other SD7 Paper press solenoid /2
sensor than home
position
001: Home
position
25 FM1, Paper cooling fan motor /
FM2, Fr, Paper cooling fan
FM3, motor /Mi, Paper cooling
FM6 fan motor /1, /2
26 FM5 Paper cooling fan motor /
Rr
32 LS (1st - FNS connection detection 000: Not
tandem) signal connected
001:
Connected
74 1 LS (2nd M2 Conveyance motor
2 tandem) M2 Conveyance motor
5 M6 Coupling conveyance
motor
6 M6 Coupling conveyance
motor
7 M4 Grip conveyance motor
8 M4 Grip conveyance motor
9 LS (2nd PS13 2,000 sheets stacked 000: OFF M7 Alignment motor (initial
tandem) sensor 001: ON operation)
10 PS19 Paper detection sensor 000: OFF M7 Alignment motor
001: ON
11 PS14 5,000 sheets stacked 000: OFF M5 Shift unit motor (home
sensor 001: ON position search)
12 PS9 Sub tray full sensor 000: Other M5 Shift unit motor
than full
001: Full
13 PS1 Stacker tray set sensor 000: Not set M1 Stacker tray up down
001: Set motor (down)
14 RS1 Hand cart reset switch 000: Not set M1 Stacker tray up down
001: Set motor (up)
15 PS15 Stacker tray arm release 000: OFF SD1 1st gate solenoid
sensor 001: ON
16 TOB Paper exit switch 000: OFF SD10 2nd gate solenoid
001: ON
I -146

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
17 MS1 Front door switch 000: Close SD9 Front stopper solenoid
001: Open
18 RS2 JAM door switch 000: Close SD3 Rear stopper solenoid
001: Open
19 PS8 Sub tray door sensor 000: Close SD8 Paper press arm solenoid /
001: Open 3
20 MS2 Stacker tray upper limit 000: Other SD6 Paper press arm solenoid /
switch than upper 1
limit
001: Upper
limit
21 MS3 Stacker tray lower limit 000: Other SD4 Front door lock solenoid
switch than lower
limit
001: Lower
limit
22 PS12 Alignment home sensor 000: Other SD11 Tandem conveyance lock
than home solenoid
position
001: Home
position
23 PS11 Shift unit home sensor 000: Other SD2 Job partition solenoid
than home
position
001: Home
position
24 PS5 Grip conveyance home 000: Other SD7 Paper press solenoid /2
sensor than home
position
001: Home
position
25 FM1, Paper cooling fan motor /
FM2, Fr, Paper cooling fan
FM3, motor /Mi, Paper cooling
FM6 fan motor /1, /2
26 FM5 Paper cooling fan motor /
Rr
32 LS (2nd - FNS connection detection 000: Not
tandem) signal connected
001:
Connected
75 07 RU -506 PS5 Stacker jam sensor 000: Paper
001: No paper
21 RU-506 SD1 Straight gate solenoid
22 SD2 Stacker exit shutter
solenoid
23 SD3 Stack switching solenoid
24 SD4 Stacker entrance guide
plate solenoid
29 RU -506 PS1 Entrance sensor 000: Paper M1 Entrance conveyance
001: No paper motor
40 - FNS connection detection 000: Not
connected
001:
Connected
42 PS4 CD alignment plate home 000: Other RU-506 M4 CD alignment motor (home
sensor than home position move)
position
001: Home
position
43 PS2 Paper exit sensor 000: Paper M2 Paper exit motor
001: No paper
44 PS6 Entrance jam sensor 000: Paper
001: No paper
I -147

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
46 PS3 FD alignment plate home 000: Other RU-506 M3 FD alignment motor (home
sensor than home position move)
position
001: Home
position
47 FM2 Stack assist fan /Rr
49 RU -506 MS1 Interlock switch 000: ON
001: OFF
52 RU-506 FM1 Stack assist fan /Fr
90 JAMIB JAM indicator board (lit all
LEDs)
77 1 PB PS1 Entrance sensor 000: Paper PB M1 Entrance conveyance
001: No paper motor
2 PS2 SC entrance sensor 000: Paper M2 Intermediate conveyance
001: No paper motor
3 PS3 Cover paper entrance 000: No paper SD1 Entrance gate solenoid
sensor 001: Paper
4 PS4 Sub tray exit sensor 000: No paper SD2 Bypass gate solenoid
001: Paper
5 PS5 Sub tray full sensor 000: Full SD3 Sub tray gate solenoid
001: Other
than full
6 SD4 Sub tray exit solenoid
7 M11 SC entrance conveyance
motor
8 PB PS12 SC switchback arm 000: Press M12 SC switchback
pressure detection sensor 001: Release conveyance motor (F
rotation)
9 PS13 SC switchback spring 000: Release M12 SC switchback
pressure detection sensor 001: Press conveyance motor (R
rotation)
10 PS14 SC alignment HP sensor 000: Other M13 SC switchback release
than home motor (home position
position search)
001: Home
position
11 PS16 SC paper detection sensor 000: Paper M13 SC switchback release
001: No paper motor (High pressing
position move)
12 PS17 SC roller release sensor 000: Release M13 SC switchback release
001: Press motor (Low pressing
position move)
13 PS18 Clamp entrance movement 000: Other M15 SC alignment motor (home
HP sensor than home position search)
position
001: Home
position
14 PS19 Clamp entrance roller 000: Release M15 SC alignment motor (A4 77-13 must have
release sensor 001: Press standby position move) been performed
in advance.
15 PS21 Clamp alignment HP 000: Other M15 SC alignment motor
sensor than home (alignment)
position
001: Home
position
16 PS22 Clamp HP sensor 000: Other M17 SC bundle conveyance
than home motor
position
001: Home
position
17 PS23 Clamp pressure sensor 000: Release M18 SC roller release motor
001: Press (home position search)
18 PS24 Clamp rotation HP sensor 000: Other M18 SC roller release motor
than home (movement to the pressing
position position)
001: Home
position
I -148

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
19 PS25 Clamp rotation pressure 000: Release M19 Clamp entrance movement
sensor 001: Press motor (home position
search)
20 PS26 Cover paper table upper 000: Other M19 Clamp entrance movement The following
limit sensor /Fr than upper motor (movement to the adjustments
limit entrance position) must have been
001: Upper made in
limit advance.
1. 77-19
2. 77-29
3. 77-31
4. 77-32
21 PS27 Cover paper table upper 000: Other M20 Clamp entrance roller
limit sensor /Rr than upper release motor (home
limit position search)
001: Upper
limit
22 PS28 Clamp paper sensor 000: Paper M20 Clamp entrance roller
001: No paper release motor (pressing
position move)
23 PS29 Booklet thickness sensor 000: Not SD11 FD alignment solenoid
detected
001: Detected
24 SD12 SC stopper solenoid
25 SD13 SC pressure arm solenoid
26 PB PS33 Glue tank HP sensor 000: Other M21 Clamp alignment motor
than home (home position search)
position
001: Home
position
27 PS36 Pellet supply remaining 000: Pellet M21 Clamp alignment motor
sensor 001: No pellet (A4 standby position
move)
28 PS37 Pellet supply passage 000: Detected M21 Clamp alignment motor
sensor 001: Not (alignment)
detected
29 PS38 Pellet supply arm upper 000: Other M22 Clamp motor (home
limit sensor than upper position search)
limit
001: Upper
limit
30 PS39 Pellet supply arm home 000: Other M22 Clamp motor (movement
sensor than lower to the clamp position)
limit
001: Lower
limit
31 M32 Glue apply roller motor 000: Abnormal M23 Clamp rotation motor 77-19 must have
001: Normal (home position search) been performed
in advance.
32 PS3 Paper exit sensor 000: Paper M23 Clamp rotation motor 77-19 must have
001: No paper (movement to the compile been performed
position) in advance.
33 PS41 Cover paper alignment HP 000: Other SD91 Straight gate solenoid
sensor than home
position
001: Home
position
34 PS42 Cover paper conveyance 000: Other M31 Glue tank movement The following
arm HP sensor /Rt than home motor (home position adjustments
position search) must have been
001: Home made in
position advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
I -149

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
35 PS43 Cover paper conveyance 000: Other M31 Glue tank movement The following
arm HP sensor /Lt than home motor (tank forward adjustments
position movement) must have been
001: Home made in
position advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
4. 77-49
5. 77-51
36 PS44 Cover paper switchback 000: Paper M31 Glue tank movement The following
sensor 001: No paper motor (tank backward adjustments
movement) must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-35
2. 77-55
3. 77-29
4. 77-34
5. 77-49
6. 77-51
37 PS45 Cover paper sensor /Rt 000: Paper M32 Glue apply roller motor Be sure that the
001: No paper warm-up
completes.
38 PS46 Cover paper sensor /Lt 000: Paper SD31 Glue tank up solenoid /1
001: No paper
39 PS47 Cover paper table HP 000: Home SD32 Cover paper glue up
sensor /Fr position solenoid
001: Other
than home
position
40 PS53 Cover paper table HP 000: Home H1 Glue tank heater
sensor /Rr position
001: Other
than home
position
41 PS48 Cover paper folding plate 000: Other H2 Glue apply roller heater
HP sensor /Rt than home
position
001: Home
position
42 PS49 Cover paper folding plate 000: Other
HP sensor /Lt than home
position
001: Home
position
43 PS50 Cover paper folding plate 000: Not PB M34 Pellet supply arm motor
encoder sensor detected (home position search)
001: Detected
44 PS51 Cover paper folding plate 000: Not at M34 Pellet supply arm motor The following
position sensor the reference (movement to the supply adjustments
position position) must have been
001: At the made in
reference advance.
position 1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
45 PS52 Cover paper folding 000: Release M41 Cover paper alignment 77-55 must have
pressure sensor 001: Press motor (home position been performed
search) in advance.
46 SW41 Cutter home sensor 000: Home M41 Cover paper alignment The following
position motor (A3 standby position adjustments
001: Other move) must have been
than home made in
position advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-45
3. 77-57
4. 77-60
I -150

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
47 SW42 Cutter home sensor 000: Home M41 Cover paper alignment The following
position motor (alignment) adjustments
001: Other must have been
than home made in
position advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-45
3. 77-57
4. 77-60
5. 77-46
48 MS2 Front door switch 000: Open M42 Booklet exit motor 77-55 must have
001: Close been performed
in advance.
49 PS57 Booklet door sensor 000: Open M43 Cover paper conveyance The following
001: Close arm motor /Rt (home adjustments
position search) must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
50 PS61 Booklet end sensor 000: Not M43 Cover paper conveyance The following
detected arm motor /Rt (roller adjustments
001: Detected pressure) must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
4. 77-49
51 PS62 Cover paper conveyance 000: Other M44 Cover paper conveyance The following
belt movement HP sensor than home arm motor /Lt (home adjustments
position position search) must have been
001: Home made in
position advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
52 PS63 Cover paper belt home 000: Other M44 Cover paper conveyance The following
sensor than home arm motor /Lt (roller adjustments
position pressure) must have been
001: Home made in
position advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
4. 77-51
53 PS64 Cover paper belt lower 000: Other M45 Cover paper conveyance 77-55 must have
limit sensor than lower motor (F rotation) been performed
limit in advance.
001: Lower
limit
54 PS65 Booklet load limit sensor 000: Upper M45 Cover paper conveyance 77-55 must have
limit motor (R rotation) been performed
001: Other in advance.
than upper
limit
55 PS66 Booklet sensor /1 000: Paper M46, Cover paper table up down
001: No paper M47 motor /Fr, /Rr (home
position search)
I -151

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
56 PS67 Booklet sensor /2 000: Paper M46, Cover paper table up down The following
001: No paper M47 motor /Fr, /Rr (book spine adjustments
corner creation) must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
4. 77-49
5. 77-50
6. 77-51
7. 77-52
8. 77-19
9. 77-31
10. 77-30
11. 77-32
12. 77-45
13. 77-58
14. 77-61
57 PS68 Booklet stopper HP sensor 000: Other M48 Cover paper folding 77-55 must have
than home motor /Rt (home position been performed
position search) in advance.
001: Home
position
58 PS69 Cart set sensor 000: Not set M48 Cover paper folding The following
001: Set motor /Rt (movement to adjustments
the open position) must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-45
59 OB/2 Booklet stock operation 000: SW ON M48 Cover paper folding The following
board 001: SW OFF motor /Rt (movement to adjustments
the close position) must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-45
3. 77-58
60 - - M49 Cover paper folding 77-55 must have
motor /Lt (home position been performed
search) in advance.
61 SW1 Upper door switch /1 000: Close M49 Cover paper folding The following
001: Open motor /Lt (movement to the adjustments
open position) must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-45
62 M50 Cutter motor (home 77-55 must have
position search) been performed
in advance.
63 M50 Cutter motor (cut position 77-55 must have
movement) been performed
in advance.
64 PBCB PB connection detection 000: Not SD41 Cover paper lift solenoid The following
signal connected adjustments
001: must have been
Connected made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
4. 77-49
5. 77-57
65 - Cover paper tray set 000: Set
detection signal 001: Not set
66 PB PS71 Cover paper empty sensor 000: Paper PB
001: No paper
I -152

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
67 - power plug connection 000: Power M61 Cover paper belt motor
detection signal detected
001:
68 PS74 Cover paper tray upper 000: Other M62 Cover paper belt
limit sensor than upper movement motor (home
limit position search)
001: Upper
limit
69 PS75 Cover paper conveyance 000: Paper M62 Cover paper belt 77-68 must have
sensor /1 001: No paper movement motor (A4 been performed
standby position move) in advance.
70 PS76 Cover paper conveyance 000: Paper M62 Cover paper belt
sensor /2 001: No paper movement motor (book
stock alignment)
71 PS77 Cover paper conveyance 000: Paper M63 Cover paper belt up down
sensor /3 001: No paper motor (home position
search: upper limit)
72 PS78 Cover paper conveyance 000: Paper M63 Cover paper belt up down The following
sensor /4 001: No paper motor (movement to the adjustments
lower position) must have been
made in
advance.
1.77-68
2.77-69
73 PS79 Cover paper conveyance 000: Paper M64 Booklet movement motor
sensor /5 001: No paper
74 PS80 Waste box full sensor 000: Full M65 Booklet stopper motor
than full
75 PS81 Waste box set sensor 000: Not set M65 Booklet stopper motor (A4 77-74 must have
001: Set standby position move) been performed
in advance.
76 M73 Cover paper tray lift motor
77 M74 Cover paper feed motor
78 SD71 Cover paper pick up
solenoid
79 SD72 Cover paper tray solenoid
80 PS82 Cover paper tray knob 000: Release M71 Cover paper tray fan /1
sensor 001: Lock
81 TH2 Glue tank temperature 0 to 255 M72 Cover paper tray fan /2
sensor /Up
82 TH3 Glue tank temperature 0 to 255 MC71 Cover paper feed clutch
sensor /Md
83 TH4 Glue tank temperature 0 to 255 MC72 Cover paper separation
sensor /Lw clutch
84 TH1 Glue apply roller 0 to 255 SD80 Front door lock solenoid
temperature sensor (locked)
85 OB1 Manual operation board 000: Glue SD80 Front door lock solenoid
apply SW ON (released)
001: Glue
apply SW OFF
86 OB1 Manual operation board 000: M80 Exhaust fan /1
Alignment SW
ON
001:
Alignment SW
OFF
87 OB1 Manual operation board 000: Start SW - Multi-feed clock output
ON signal
001: Start SW
OFF
88 MS1 Pellet supply door switch 000: Open JAMIB Jam indication board /1, /2
001: Close /1 (all the lights on)
JAMIB
/2
I -153

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
89 TH1 Glue apply roller 000: Normal OB/1 Manual operation board
temperature sensor (high 001: Abnormal (all the lights on)
temperature abnormality)
90 TH1 Glue apply roller 000: Normal M4, Exhaust fan /2
temperature sensor (low- 001: Abnormal M81 Pellet supply cooling fan
91 TH2 Glue tank temperature 000: Normal SD61 Booklet door lock solenoid
sensor /Up (high 001: Abnormal (lock)
92 TH2 Glue tank temperature 000: Normal SD61 Booklet door lock solenoid
sensor /Up (low- 001: Abnormal (release)
93 TH3 Glue tank temperature 000: Normal
sensor /Md (high 001: Abnormal
94 TH3 Glue tank temperature 000: Normal
sensor /Md (low- 001: Abnormal
95 TH Glue tank temperature 000: Normal M71, Cover paper feed 77-96 must have
sensor /Lw (high 001: Abnormal M72, operation for the been performed
temperature abnormality) M73, adjustment of the multi- in advance.
M74, feed detection board
SD71,
SD72,
MC71,
MC72
96 TH Glue tank temperature 000: Normal - All initial operation
sensor /Lw (low- 001: Abnormal
78 01 GP-501 S1 Enter sensor 000 : No GP - Entrance stepper motor
Paper
001 : Paper
02 S2 Stepper 1 speed sensor 000 : No - Exit stepper motor
Paper
001 : Paper
03 S3 Punch module sensor 000 : No - Transport motor
Paper
001 : Paper
04 S5 Back Gauge sensor 000 : No - Punch motor
Paper
001 : Paper
05 S6 Stepper 2 speed sensor 000 : No - Divert solenoid
Paper
001 : Paper
06 S7 Exit sensor 000 : No - Backstop solenoid
Paper
001 : Paper
07 S8 Bypass sensor 000 : No - Punch brake
Paper
001 : Paper
08 S9 Punch flag sensor 000 : Home - Punch clutch
position
001 : Punch
operation
09 - Chip tray switch 000 : Set - Punch stepper motor
001 : Not set punch operation
10 - Die set swtich 000 : Set
001 : Not set
11 - Door switch 000 : Close
001 : Open
13 S4 U-channel sensor 000 : No
paper
001 : Paper
16 - GP connection detected 000 : Not
connected
001 :
Connected
I -154

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
79 1 PB PS91 Relay conveyance 000: Paper PB M92 Relay conveyance motor
intermediate sensor 001: No paper (1000mm/s)
2 PS92 Relay conveyance door 000: Open M91 Relay conveyance exit
sensor 001: Close motor (1000mm/s)
3 PS93 Relay conveyance 000: Paper OB2 Booklet stock operation
entrance sensor 001: No paper board (JAM display LED
ON)
4 PS94 Relay conveyance exit 000: Paper M33 Pellet supply pipe motor
sensor 001: No paper (home position search)
5 M33 Pellet supply pipe motor The following
(upper limit position move) adjustments
must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
4. 77-44
5. 79-05
6 PS96 Pellet supply pipe home 000: Other
sensor than home
position
001: Home
position
7 PS95 Pellet supply pipe upper 000: Not
limit sensor detected
001: Detected
80 0 ADU SD4 Paper exit solenoid
81 0 CL1 ADU conveyance clutch /1
1 CL2 ADU conveyance clutch /2
2 CL18 ADU pre-registration clutch
3 CL3 ADU conveyance clutch /3
82 0 SD10 ADU gate solenoid
84 0 M32 ADU reverse motor
(315mm/s) (F rotation)
1 M32 ADU reverse motor
(207.7mm/s) (F rotation)
(688.54mm/s) (R rotation)
(1000mm/s) (R rotation)
85 0 M57 ADU loop motor (315mm/
s) (F rotation)
1 M57 ADU loop motor (300mm/
s) (F rotation)
s) (F rotation)
s) (F rotation)
s) (F rotation)
s) (F rotation)
6 M57 ADU loop motor
(688.54mm/s) (R rotation)
s) (R rotation)
I -155

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
90 0 Adjustm - Finishing option Perform after
ent/ adjustment data EEPROM adjustment FD,
special storage SD, FS (FS-521)
4 mode Billing
count
clear
91 0 - Main body adjustment data Perform after
NVRAM board storage installation
92 0 - NVRAM board data reset Cannot adjust in
the field
93 0 - Finishing option Cannot be
adjustment data EEPROM operated in the
storage (factory initial field. FD, SD, FS
data) (FS-521)
94 0 - Adjustment value list
display
1 - Operation panel all lit
96 0 - Main body adjustment data Cannot adjust in
NVRAM board storage the field
(initial data)
97 0 - Image memory (DRAM)
capacity check (1 color)
98 0 - Image memory (DRAM) /Y
check
1 - Image memory (DRAM) /M
check
2 - Image memory (DRAM) /C
check
3 - Image memory (DRAM) /K
check
4 - Image memory (DRAM) /A
check
5 - Image memory (DRAM) /P
check
6 - Image processing board
line memory (SDRAM) /Y
check
line memory (SDRAM) /M
check
line memory (SDRAM) /C
check
line memory (SDRAM) /K
check
99 1 HDD/ Hard disk capacity (1
Y, / color)
M, /
C, /K
2 HDD/ Hard disk remaining
Y, / capacity
M, /
C, /K
3 HDD/ Hard disk bad sectors
Y, / check
M, /
C, /K
5.7.5 Adjustment when replacing the multi feed detection board (PI) (new type)
(1) Usage
When the multi feed detection board (MFDB) of PI or PI drive board (PIDB) is replaced, conduct this adjustment.
Also, perform this adjustment when multi feed of special paper (thin paper, coated paper with less stiffness, thick paper) cannot be detected
properly.
I -156
Note
environment in which the copier is actually used (20 C to 30 C).
(In the case you brought a new part from outdoors, make the adjustment after the temperature of the sensor surface and the
room temperature become the same)
(2) Procedure
1. Replace the multi feed detection board /1, /2. (Refer to chapter II "Maintenance4.3.5 Registration section") (Refer to G.13.3.18 Multi feed
detection board /1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2) (new type))
2. Enter the I/O check mode.
6. Open the FD upper door and front door to turn the jam clearing knob [1]. Insert 1 sheet of paper [2] (P/N 65AA-991#, fusing adjustment
paper, 16 sheets/A3) between the multi feed detection boards /1 and /2 [3] (200g/m/2 to 300g/m2 paper can also be used).
Note
Turn the jam clearing knob until the paper hits the roller [4], thus confirming that the paper is between the multi feed
detection board /1 and /2.
[2]
[3]
[1] [4] a03uf3c028ca
7. Press the Start key to activate the output check mode. Connect the tester (voltmeter) to the following positions of the PIDB.
+ terminal: test pin Number TP51 (GAIN) [1]
- terminal: test pin Number TP11 (SGND) [2]
Range: DC 20V
Note
Because the FD is powered, do not drop any metal material on the board, or do not connect the tester pin to an irrelevant
terminal.
It causes the board to short circuit and be damaged.
VR2 [1]
[2] LED1
8. In the PIDB volume (VR2), set power voltage to the standard value.
Standard value: 9.0 0.1V
9. Press the Stop key and pull out the paper inserted in step 6.
10. Insert 1 sheet of paper that customer mainly uses (paper weight 50g/m2 to 300g/m2), and confirm that the LED of PIDB (LED1) turns ON.
LED ON: No multi feed (0 or 1 sheet of paper)
LED OFF: Multi feed (2 sheets of paper)
11. Insert another sheet of paper (2 sheets in all), that customer mainly uses, and check that the LED turns OFF.
12. If there is a detection error, return to step 6 to conduct the adjustment again. In step8, set power voltage to the value 1.0V lower than the
previous adjustment.
13. Repeat the steps 9 to 12 until detection error is resolved.
14. Pull out the inserted papers, and install the parts you removed.
I -157
5.7.6 Adjustment when replacing the multi feed detection board (PI) (old type)
(1) Usage
When the multi-feed detection board (MFDB) of PI or PI drive board is replaced, conduct this adjustment.
Also, perform this adjustment when multi feed of special paper (thin paper, coated paper with less stiffness, thick paper) cannot be detected
properly.
Note
The multi-feed detection board /1 and /2 are adjusted in the manufacturing process as a pair of upper and lower. Be sure to
replace them as a pair.
(2) Procedure
1. Replace the multi-feed detection board /1, /2. (Refer to G.13.3.19 Multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2) (old type))
2. Check the stamp letter [1] placed on the multi-feed detection boards /1 and /2, and rotate the rotary switch [2] on the PI drive board
(PIDB) as shown in the following table.
Stamp letter Rotary switch
A 1
B 2
C 3
D 4
E 6
F 7
Note
The rotary switch5 is not used.
[1]
[2] a03uf3c027ca

7. Open the FD upper door and front door to turn the jam clearing knob [1]. Insert 1 sheet of paper [2] (P/N 65AA-991#, fusing adjustment
paper, 16 sheets/A3) between the multi-feed detection boards /1 and /2 [3] (200g/m/2 to 300g/m2 paper can also be used).
Note
Turn the jam clearing knob until the paper hits the roller [4], thus confirming that the paper is between the multi-feed
detection board /1 and /2.
I -158
[2]
[3]
[1] [4] a03uf3c028ca
8. Press the Start key to activate the output check mode. Connect the tester (voltmeter) to the following positions of the PIDB.
- terminal: test pin Number TP11 (SGND) [2]
Range: DC 20V
Note
Because the FD is powered, do not drop any metal material on the board, or do not connect the tester pin to an irrelevant
terminal.
VR2
LED1
[1] [2] a03uf3c029ca
9. In the PIDB volume (VR2), set power voltage to the standard value.
10. Press the Stop key and pull out the paper inserted in step 4.
11. Insert 1 sheet of paper that customer mainly uses (paper weight 50g/m2 to 300g/m2), and confirm that the LED of PIDB (LED1) turns ON.
LED ON: No multi-feed (0 or 1 sheet of paper)
LED OFF: Multi-feed (2 sheets of paper)
13. If there is a detection error, return to step7 to conduct the adjustment again. In step9, set power voltage to the value1.0V lower than the
14. Repeat the steps 10 to 13 until detection error is resolved.
5.7.7 Adjustment when replacing the cover paper multi feed detection board (PB)
(1) Usage
When the cover paper multi feed detection board of PB or the PB control board (PBCB) is replaced, conduct this adjustment.
Also, perform this adjustment when multi-feed of special paper (thin paper, coated paper with less stiffness, thick paper) cannot be detected
properly.
Note
The multi-feed detection board /S and /R are adjusted in the manufacturing process as a pair. Be sure to replace them as a pair.
(2) Procedure
1. Replace the multi-feed detection boards /S and /R. (Refer to G.15.2.31 Multi feed detection boards /S (MFDBS) and /R (MFDBR))
2. Check the stamp letter [1] placed on the cover paper multi-feed detection boards /S and /R, and rotate the rotary switch [2] on the PBCB
as shown in the following table.
Stamp letter Rotary switch
A 1
I -159
B 2
C 3
D 4
E 5
[1]
[2]
564Af3c001cb
3. Insert 1 sheet of paper (P/N 65AA-9910, fusing adjustment paper, 16 sheets/A3) in the cover paper tray of the PB.
(200 to 300g/m2 paper can also be used.)
4. Select the output check code "77-96" of the I/O check mode in the service mode.
5. Press the Start key.
Perform the all initializing operation.
6. After the operations, press the Stop key.
7. Select the output check code "77-95" of the I/O check mode in the service mode.
The paper is fed from the cover paper tray and stops at the conveyance section.
Note
Confirm that the paper is between the multi-feed detection boards /1 and /2.
9. After the operations, press the Stop key.

10. Connect the tester (voltmeter) to the following positions of the PBCB.
- terminal: test pin Number TP24 (AGND) [2]
Range: DC 20V
Note
Because the PB is powered, do not drop any metal material on the board, or do not connect the tester pin to an irrelevant
terminal.
[1]
VR4 [2] 564Af3c002cd
11. In the PBCB volume (VR4), set power voltage to the standard value.
12. Pull out the paper inserted in step 8.
13. Insert 1 sheet of paper that customer mainly uses (paper weight 50g/m2 to 300g/m2), and confirm that the LED of PBCB (LED1) turns
ON.
LED ON: No multi-feed (0 or 1 sheet of paper)
LED OFF: Multi-feed (2 sheets of paper)
I -160
15. If there is a detection error, return to step 3 to conduct the adjustment again. In step11, set power voltage to the value 1.0V lower than the
16. Repeat steps 3 to 14 until detection error is resolved.
5.7.8 FD, SD, FS and PB data EEPROM storage

(1) Usage
Adjustment data of FD, SD, FS and PB which are adjusted in the field are backed up to the nonvolatile memory (EEPROM) of FD control
board (FDCB), SD control board (SDCB), FNSCB (FNS control board) and PB control board (PBCB). When necessary, it can be recalled by
selecting [Installation Initial Data] in Recall Standard Data (Finisher adjustment data) in the Service Mode.
Note
Only 1 type of data can be backed up. When backed up again, data is overwritten.
When several units of FS, SD, FD and PB are connected, the data is backed up to all EEPROMs.
To back up the data of 1 option respectively, connect only the target option to the main body.
(2) Procedure
2. Enter "90" with the numeric keys.
Confirm that "90-00" is displayed on the message display area.
4. "NOW" is displayed while in the back-up. When completed, "FIN" is displayed and the current finisher adjustment data is backed up in the
EEPROM.
5.7.9 Main body adjustment data NVRAM board storage

(1) Usage
Adjustment data of the main body which are adjusted in the field are backed up to the NVRAM board (NRB). When necessary, it can be
recalled by selecting [Installation Initial Data] in Recall Standard Data (Machine Adjustment data), (Process Adjustment data).
Note
Only 1 type of data can be backed up. When backed up again, data is overwritten.
(2) Procedure
4. "NOW" is displayed while in the back-up. Then when it completes, "FIN" is displayed and the current machine adjustment data and the
process adjustment data are backed up in the NRB.
5.7.10 Printer image processing board line memory check

(1) Usage
When the image of a particular color is misaligned in the sub scan direction and a notable image trouble occurs, check whether there is any
abnormality on the line memory of the printer image processing board (PRIPB).
(2) Procedure
3. Press the Access key.
4. Enter one of the followings with the numeric keys.
Check that "98-##" (## represent multi-code number) is displayed in the message display area.
Multi-Code 06: Printer image processing board line memory (SDRAM) check /Y
Multi-Code 07: Printer image processing board line memory (SDRAM) check /M
Multi-Code 08: Printer image processing board line memory (SDRAM) check /C
Multi-Code 09: Printer image processing board line memory (SDRAM) check /K
During the operation-"NOW" is displayed
The operation succeeded - "OK" is displayed
The operation failed - "NG" is displayed
When "NG" is displayed, replace PRIPB.
5.7.11 Hard disk check

(1) Usage
Check the total capacity and remaining capacity of image memory area of the copier hard disk (HDD).
(2) Procedure
3. Press the Access key.
4. Enter one of the followings with the numeric keys.
Check that "99-##" (## represent multi-code number) is displayed in the message display area.
I -161
Multi-Code01: HDD image memory area capacity check

Multi-Code02: HDD image memory area remaining capacity check
Capacity check: Capacity of HDD image memory area is displayed.
Remaining capacity check: Remaining capacity of HDD image memory area is displayed.
The remaining capacity of the channel which shows the smallest value among C, M, Y, K, A and P is displayed.
5.7.12 Hard disk replacing procedure

(1) Usage
When an error code related to the copier hard disk (C-D0E0 to D0F0) occurs, perform this adjustment.
(2) Procedure
3. Press [High/Low].
The bad sectors check and recovery are performed on the hard disks /C, /M, Y, /K, /A and /P (HDD/C, /M, /Y, /K, /A, /P).
During the operation-"NOW" is displayed. when the check and recovery are completed, the result is displayed.
The operation succeeded - "OK" is displayed
The operation failed - "NG" is displayed
When "NG" is displayed, press the Start key to perform the bad sectors check and recovery again.
6. When "NG is displayed again, remove the HDD with abnormality and replace with the new one.
Note
The abnormal HDD can be determined according to the malfunction code. (C-D0E3 Y, C-D0E4 M, C-D0E5 C, C-D0E6 K, C-D0E7 A,
C-D0E8 P)
7. Note
When the customer has backed up the HDD data, restore it by conducting the following procedure.
"Utility menu" - Administrator Setting" - Security Setting" - HDD Management Setting" - "HDD Restore/Backup" - "HDD Restore"
The message "All data on HDD will be cleared Start restore Yes/No ?" is displayed.
Press [Yes].
Note
Be sure not to turn OFF the main power switch (SW1).
Be sure not to turn OFF the main power switch (SW2).
When the password is set in the enhanced security mode and 1 to 5 HDDs have any trouble, all 6 HDDs must be replaced.
Procedure: Remove the HDD turn OFF the enhanced security mode replace 6 HDDs
9. Turn OFF and ON the sub power switch (SW2).

Note
Otherwise, C-D0E0 is displayed.
Turning OFF and ON the main power switch (SW1) at this time causes HDD breakdown. Be sure to turn OFF and ON the sub
power switch (SW2) to start up the user mode.
5.7.13 Replacing procedure of the write unit

(1) Usage
(2) Procedure
Press [05 State Confirmation] and then press [01 I/O Check Mode].
3. Perform the LD1 to LD8 alarm data clear corresponding to the color of the replaced write unit.
"Output check"
37-91: LD1 to LD-8 alarm data clear /Y
37-92: LD1 to LD-8 alarm data clear /M
37-93: LD1 to LD-8 alarm data clear /C
37-94: LD1 to LD-8 alarm data clear /K
4. Perform the LD alarm measurement by 37-00 of "Output check"
37-00: LD alarm measurement
Note
The LD alarm data (laser power of the laser diode) can be checked by the "Adjustment Data List" in the "List output."
The value displayed for "Default" on the adjustment data list is a value of when 37-00 is performed after LD alarm clear by
37-9*.
"000" is normally displayed on the "Setting" on the adjustment data list. When performing 37-00 in the field, the LD alarm
data measured result is displayed, and is overwritten each time 37-00 is performed.
The value of the LD alarm level decreases with the deterioration of the laser diode.
Steps 1 to 3 are the procedures for history management at replacing the write unit.
I -162
5.8 ADF Adjustment

5.8.1 ADF Original Size Adj.
(1) Functions
Adjust the output value of the variable resistance type sensor which detects the original size.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the original size detection of DF does not work properly.
Note
method.
The size of paper used for the adjustment differs depending on the destination. For the adjustment, be sure to use the paper of
proper size shown on the touch panel.
(3) Procedure
1. "Service Mode screen"
Press [06 ADF Adjustment].
2. "ADF adjustment mode menu screen"
Press [01 ADF Original Size Adj.].
3. "ADF Original Size Adj. screen"
Press [A4].
4. Load A4 (for metric destination) paper on the DF and press [Start].
Press [B6S].
7. Load B6S (for metric destination) paper on the DF and press [Start].
Press [A4S].
10. Load A4S (for metric destination) paper on the DF and press [Start].
11. After a message "Completed" is displayed, press [COPY].
12. Make sure the original size is properly detected.
5.8.2 ADF Orig. Stop Position

(1) Functions
This adjustment changes read start timing when scanning original in sub scanning direction of DF.
(2) Usage
Adjust the read start timing when scanning original in sub scanning direction of DF.
Note
Be sure the "Restart Timing Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)" has been adjusted before performing this adjustment. (Refer to I.
5.3.1 Restart Timing Adjustment (Printer Adjustment))
Be sure the "Restart Timing Adjustment (Scanner Adjustment)" has been adjusted before performing this adjustment. (Refer to
I.5.3.17 Restart Timing Adjustment (Scanner Adjustment))
method.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 ADF Orig. Stop Position].
3. "ADF Orig. Stop Position screen"
Set the copy settings (original setting and mode) according to the item to be adjusted, load an "Adjustment chart" on the DF, select A3
paper, and press the Start key.
5. Check the image leading edge timing.
Standard value: within 1.5mm
7. "ADF Orig. Stop Position screen"
Enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [<<SET].
Setting range: -14 (image faster) to +14 (image slower)
1 step = 0.5mm
5.8.3 ADF Sensor Adjustment

(1) Functions
Adjust the sensitivity of the reflective type sensor.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when a malfunction (JAM display does not disappear despite no paper JAM) occurs in the reflective type sensors.
I -163
Note
method.
(3) Preparation
Clean each of the reflective sensors of DF.
(4) Procedure
Press [03 ADF Sensor Adjustment].
3. "ADF Sensor Adjustment screen"
Close the DF cover and press [Start].
The DF sensor sensitivity is automatically adjusted, and the message of completion appears.
4. Press [Copy] and check that the sensor is operating properly.
5. If the sensor still malfunctions, press [Service Mode] and repeat steps 3 to 5.
5.8.4 ADF Registration Loop Adj

(1) Functions
Adjust the original loop amount at the DF registration roller section.
(2) Usage
Adjust to remove paper skew and wrinkle, or paper jamming in the registration section.
Note
method.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 ADF Registration Loop Adj.].
3. "ADF Registration Loop Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
4. "Copy screen"
Set an "Adjustment chart" in the DF, select A3 paper, and press the Start key.
6. "ADF Registration Loop Adj. screen"
Setting range: -7 (smaller) to +7 (larger)
1 step = 0.5mm
5.9 Finisher Adjustment

5.9.1 Staple Center Position (Staple Finisher Position Adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the center position of the staple while in stapling by FS.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the center position of the staple is not within the standard value by FS.
(3) Procedure
Press [07 Finisher Adjustment].
2. "Finisher Adjustment menu screen"
Press [01 Staple Finisher Position Adjustment].
3. "Staple Finisher Adjustment menu screen"
Press [01 Staple Center Position].
4. "Stapling Center Position Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
5. Set the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the Start key to output the test pattern (No.16).
6. Fold the output page in half in main-scanning direction, and measure the gap "a" between the center line of the print and the staple
center.
Standard value: a = 3mm
I -164
[1]
[2]
a03uf3c018ca
[1] Paper center [2] Staple center
Enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [SET].
Setting range: -20 (in front) to +20 (in back)
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.2 Paper Width Adj.(Staple) (Staple Finisher Position Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the position of the stacker plate while in alignment.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there is an uneven binding in a bundle of paper in staple mode by the FS-521.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Paper Width Adj.(Staple)].
4. "Paper Width Adj.(Staple) screen"
Press [] or [] to select the paper size to be adjusted.
6. Set paper in size to be adjusted on the tray and press the Start key to output test pattern (No.16).
7. Open the front door of the FS and pull out the stacker.
Note
If the length of the paper is longer than 239mm in sub-scanning direction, the paper edge comes out from the stacker. In that
case, remove the paper through the paper opening section before pulling out the stacker, and reload the paper in the
stacker.
8. Measure the gap between the paper in the stacker and the alignment plate.
9. When the value is not within the standard value, close the front door and press [Exit PrintMode].
10. "Paper Width Adj.(Staple) screen"
Setting range: -20 (wider) to +20 (narrower)
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.3 Paper Width Adj.(Straight) (Staple Finisher Position Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the interval between the stacker plates while in alignment.
(2) Usage
Adjust an uneven paper stack (main scanning direction) on the main tray in non-staple mode by the FS-521.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Paper Width Adj.(Straight)].
4. "Paper Width adjustment (Straight) screen"
7. Open the front door of the FS and pull out the stacker.
I -165
Note
If the length of the paper is longer than 239mm in sub-scanning direction, the paper edge comes out from the stacker. In that
case, remove the paper through the paper opening section before pulling out the stacker, and reload the paper in the
stacker.
8. Measure the gap between the paper in the stacker and the alignment plate.
Standard value: 0.1mm to 1mm
9. When the value is not within the standard value, close the front door and press [Exit PrintMode].
10. "Paper Width adjustment (Straight) screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.4 Exit Guide Center Pos. Adj. (Staple Finisher Position Adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the center position of the paper exit alignment plate while in paper exit alignment.
(2) Usage
Note
This adjustment is effective only for paper more than 182mm width (B5S) in the main scan direction in straight exit, or paper
more than 210mm width (A4) in shift exit. This adjustment is invalid for paper of minimum size (A5S, B6S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S) since it
does not operate the paper exit alignment.
"Paper Width Adjustment (Straight) (Staple Finisher Position Adj.)" must have been done in advance.
Adjust in conjunction with "Exit Guide Paper Width Adj. (Staple Finisher Position Adj.)" since the misalignment of the paper
width causes uneven paper stack.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Exit Guide Center Pos. Adj.].
4. "Exit Guide Unit Center Position Adj. screen"
Select the item to be adjusted of small-size or large-size.
The following items are selectable for each small-size and large-size.
Straight: Adjust the center position of the paper exit alignment plate in straight mode.
Shift in front: Adjust the center position of the paper exit alignment plate in shifting in front
Shift in back: Adjust the center position of the paper exit alignment plate in shifting in back
Note
Large size: Sub scan direction of paper is more than 298mm
Small size: Sub scan direction of paper is less than 297mm

6. Select the paper size according to the item to be adjusted and press the Start key to output some test pattern (No.16).
7. Check the misalignment "a" of the stacked paper.
a0u0f3c003ca
Note
Check the misalignment between exit paper and the exit alignment plate under the operation as a reference for the
adjustment.
With too much adjustment, paper gets touch with the exit alignment plate in exiting paper, so be sure to check the alignment
operation.
Be sure to adjust in the position where the fixed side of alignment plate has no improper gap and no stress in the case of
the shift adjustment.
8. To adjust the center position of the exit adjustment plate, press [Exit PrintMode].
9. "Exit Guide Unit Center Position Adj. screen"
Setting range: -50 (to front) to +50 (to back)
1 step = 0.1mm
I -166
Note
Enter the same value to both large size and small size for straight adjustment.
The input value of the straight does not reflect the value of the shift.
5.9.5 Exit Guide Paper Width Adj. (Staple Finisher Position Adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the interval between the exit alignment plates (front and back) while in paper exit alignment.
(2) Usage
Note
This adjustment is effective only for paper more than 182mm width (B5S) in the main scan direction in straight exit, or paper
more than 210mm width (A4) in shift exit. This adjustment is invalid for paper of minimum size (A5S, B6S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S) since it
does not operate the paper exit alignment.
"Paper Width Adjustment (Straight) (Staple Finisher Position Adj.)" must have been done in advance.
Adjust in conjunction with "Exit Guide Paper Width (Stapler Position Adj.)" since the center misalignment of the exit alignment
plate causes uneven paper stack.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Exit Guide Paper Width Adj.].
4. "Exit Guide Unit Paper Width Adjustment screen"
6. Select the paper size according to the item to be adjusted and press the Start key to output some test pattern (No.16).
7. Check the misalignment "a" of the stacked paper.
a0u0f3c003ca
Note
Check the misalignment between exit paper and the exit alignment plate under the operation as a reference for the
adjustment.
Too narrow adjustment causes uneven paper exit in the sub scan direction.
8. To adjust the position of the exit adjustment plate, press [Exit PrintMode].
9. "Exit Guide Unit Paper Width Adjustment screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
Adjustment standard value (at the alignment operation): Paper width 0mm to +1mm
5.9.6 Paper Width Adjustment (Multi Folder(Punch) Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjusts the position of the alignment plate while in alignment.
(2) Usage
Adjust the misalignment of punch holes for punching by FD.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Multi Folder(Punch) Adj.].
3. "Multi Folder(Punch) Adj. menu screen"
Press [01 Paper Width Adjustment].
4. "Paper Width Adjustment screen"
I -167
Press [Print Mode].

Note
Large size: Sub scan direction of paper is more than 298mm
Small size: Sub scan direction of paper is less than 297mm
5. Set paper you want to adjust in the tray, the number of copies is set to 10 and press the Start key.
6. Check the diameter of the through-hole when the ejected paper is stacked.
Holes Standard value (mm)
2-Holes 5.0 or larger
3-Holes 6.5 or larger
9. Enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [<<SET].
Setting range: -20 (narrower) to +20 (wider)
1 step = 0.1mm
Note
When the alignment plate is wider than an appropriate position, the punch centering is displaced, and when too narrow, the
punch holes are apt to disperse.
5.9.7 Punch Vertical Position Adj. (Multi Folder(Punch) Adj.)

(1) Function
(2) Usage
Adjust the position of the punch holes made by the FD in sub scanning direction.
2-hole or 3-hole is selectable.
Adjust in conjunction with "Center Adjustment (Staple Finisher Position Adj.)".
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Multi Folder(Punch) Adj.].
Press [02 Punch Vertical Position Adj.].
4. "Punch hole select menu screen"
Select [01 2-Hole Punch] or [02 3-Hole Punch].
5. "Punch Vertical Position Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
7. Check the distance "a" from the outputted paper leading edge to the punch holes center position.
Holes Standard value "a"
(mm)
2-Holes 10.5 4.0
3-Holes 9.5 4
fs503fs3013c
9. "Punch Vertical Position Adj. screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
12. To configure other punch hole/paper size, repeat steps 4 to 11.
I -168
5.9.8 Half Fold Position Adjustment (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the paper stop position when folding paper.
(2) Usage
Adjust the fold position on the half fold mode by the FD.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Multi Folder(Fold) Adj.].
3. "Multi Folder (Fold) adj. menu screen"
Press [01 Half-Fold Position Adj.].
4. "Half-Fold Position Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the misalignment "a" on the edge of the outputted paper.
Standard value "a": = 1.5mm
a
1 step = 0.1mm
If there is the misalignment given in the step 6, enter a set value on the positive side.
5.9.9 Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.)

(1) Function
(2) Usage
Adjust the fold positions on the tri-fold-in mode by the FD.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj.].
4. "Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check "a" and "b" on the outputted paper.
Paper size Standard value (mm)
a 1.5 b 1.5
A3 139.0 142.0
B4 120.3 123.3
A4S 98.0 101.0
SRA4S 105.7 108.7
12 x 18 151.4 154.4
11 x 17 142.9 145.9
81/2 x 14 117.5 120.5
81/2 x 11S 92.1 95.1
8K 129.0 132.0
I -169
[1]
a
[2]
a03uf3c019ca
[1] First fold [2] Double fold
8. "Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj. screen"
9. Press [Single Fold].
Setting range: -50 (shorter) to +50 (longer)
1 step = 0.1mm
The dimension "a" in the step 6 gets larger when the set value is moved to the positive side and gets smaller when moved to the
negative side.
11. Press [Double Fold].
1 step = 0.1mm
The dimension "b" in the step 6 gets larger when the set value is moved to the positive side and gets smaller when moved to the
negative side.
5.9.10 Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.)

(1) Function
(2) Usage
Adjust the fold positions on the tri-fold-out mode by the FD.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj.].
4. "Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
a 1.5 b 1.5
A3 282.0 144.0
B4 243.7 123.3
A4S 199.0 101.0
SRA4S 214.3 108.7
12 x 18 306.8 156.4
11 x 17 289.9 147.9
81/2 x 14 238.1 120.5
81/2 x 11S 187.3 95.1
8K 262.0 134.0
a [1]
[2]
a03uf3c020ca
8. "Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj. screen"
I -170
1 step = 0.1mm
negative side.
1 step = 0.1mm
negative side.
14. To configure other paper size, repeat steps 4 to 13.
5.9.11 Double Parallel Pos. Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.)

(1) Function
(2) Usage
Adjust the fold positions on the double parallel mode by the FD.
Note
When adjusting both the single fold and the double fold, be sure to start with the single fold.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Double Parallel Pos. Adj.].
4. "Double Parallel Pos. Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
a 1.5 b 1.5
A3 208.5 103.8
B4 180.5 89.8
A4S 147.0 73.0
SRA4S 158.5 78.8
12 x 18 227.1 113.1
11 x 17 214.4 106.7
81/2 x 14 176.3 87.7
81/2 x 11S 138.2 68.6
8K 193.5 96.3
b
[1]
[2]
a03uf3c021ca
8. "Double Parallel Pos. Adj. screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
negative side.
1 step = 0.1mm
negative side.
I -171
5.9.12 Z-Fold Position Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.)

(1) Function
(2) Usage
Adjust the fold positions on the z-fold mode by the FD.
Note
When adjusting both the single fold and the double fold, be sure to start with the single fold.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Z-Fold Position Adj.].
4. "Z-Fold Position Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
a 1.5 b 1.5
A3 105.5 108.5
B4 91.5 94.5
A4S 74.8 77.8
SRA4S 80.5 83.5
12 x 18 114.8 117.8
11 x 17 108.5 111.5
81/2 x 14 94.0 -
81/2 x 11S 70.4 73.4
8K 98.0 101.0
[2] a [1]
a03uf3c022ca
8 1214
[1] a
a03uf3c031ca
8. "Z-Fold Position Adjustment screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
negative side.
1 step = 0.1mm
negative side.
5.9.13 Gate Position Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.)

(1) Function
I -172
(2) Usage
Adjusts the fold position on the gate fold mode by the FD.
Note
When adjusting the single fold, the double fold and the triple fold, be sure to conduct the single fold, the double fold and the
triple fold in this order.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Gate Position Adj.].
4. "Gate Position Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the length of 2 places indicated with "a", "b" and "c".
a 1.5 b 1.5 c 1.5
A3 103.5 213.0 106.5
B4 89.5 185.0 92.5
A4S 72.8 151.5 75.8
SRA4S 78.5 163.0 81.5
12 x 18 112.8 231.6 115.8
11 x 17 106.5 218.9 109.5
81/2 x 14 87.4 180.8 90.4
81/2 x 11S 68.4 142.7 71.4
8K 96.0 198.0 99.0
b
a
[1]
c [2]
[3]
a03uf3c023ca
[1] First fold [3] Triple Fold

[2] Double fold
8. "Gate Position Adj. screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
negative side.
1 step = 0.1mm
negative side.
13. Press [Triple Fold].
1 step = 0.1mm
The dimension "c" in the step 6 gets larger when the set value is moved to the positive side and gets smaller when moved to the
negative side.
5.9.14 Fold Registration Loop Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the fold registration loop amount.
I -173
(2) Usage
Adjust paper loop amount at the FD registration roller to correct paper skew, wrinkle, or paper jam at the roller.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Fold Registration Loop Adj.].
4. "Fold Registration Loop Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
5. Set the A3 or 11 x 17 paper. Press the Start key to output the test pattern (No.16).
7. "Fold Registration Loop Adj. screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.15 Multi Folder(PI) Adjustment

5.9.16 Paper Width Adjustment (Stacker Adjustment)

(1) Function
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when a paper exit mis-alignment occurs in the main scan direction of the LS stacker tray.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Stacker Adjustment].
3. "Stacker Adjustment menu screen"
Press [01 Paper Width Adjustment].
Press [Print Mode].
6. If there are any uneven paper stack, press [Exit PrintMode].
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.17 Paper Length Adjustment (Stacker Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the lead edge stopper position.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when a paper exit mis-alignment occurs in the sub scan direction of the LS stacker tray.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Stacker Adjustment].
3. "Stacker Adjustment menu screen"
Press [02 Paper Length Adjustment].
4. "Paper Length Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. If there are any uneven paper stack, press [Exit PrintMode].
1 step = 0.1mm
I -174
5.9.18 Staple Center Position (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the position of the alignment plate while in alignment.
(2) Usage
Adjust the staple center position for the saddle stitch mode by the SD.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.].
3. "Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj. menu screen"
Press [01 Staple Center Position].
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the misalignment between the staplecenter and the paper center.
Standard value "a": = 2mm
a
fs503fs3300c
Setting range: -20 (right) to +20 (left)
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.19 Staple Paper Width Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the position of the saddle stitching alignment plate while in alignment.
(2) Usage
Adjust an uneven binding in a bundle of paper in saddle stitch mode by the SD.
Note
Make sure that the folding skew adjustment of the mechanical adjustment has been completed.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Staple Paper Width Adj.].
4. "Staple Paper Width Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check to see if the bundle of papers is misaligned (a: a misalignment occurs when the paper width setting is larger than the paper width)
and if the bundle is curved (b: the curve occurs when the paper width setting is smaller than the paper width).
Standard value "a": 1.0mm or less
a
fs503fs3012c
8. "Staple Paper Width Adj. screen"
I -175

1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.20 Staple Pitch Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the staple intervals for the saddle stitch mode by the SD.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the staple intervals of the saddle stitching by SD are not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Staple Pitch Adjustment].
4. "Staple Pitch Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the interval "a" between the staples against the paper size "b."
Standard value: a = b/2 2mm
a
b
fs503fs3011c
1 step = 1.0mm
There are restrictions of setting range for each size of paper. Minimum value is determined based on the stapler movable range and
the maximum value is determined so that the saddle stitching alignment plate and stapler do not interfere with each other.
B5S: Setting is not possible (fixed to 91 mm)
B4: -20 to +20 mm (108.5 to 148.5 mm)
A4S: -14 to +14 mm (91 to 119 mm)
A3: -20 to +16.5 mm (128.5 to 165 mm)
5.9.21 Half-Fold Position Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the fold position on the multi-half fold mode by the SD.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the folding position of half folding by SD is not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Half-Fold Position Adj.].
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the misalignment "a" on the edge of the outputted paper.
Standard value "a": 1.5mm or less
I -176
1 step = 0.1mm
If there is the misalignment given in the step 6, enter a set value on the positive side.
5.9.22 Tri-Fold Position Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the fold positions on the multi-tri-fold-in mode by the SD.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the folding position of multi-tri-folding by SD is not within the standard value.
Note
When adjusting both the single fold and the double fold, be sure to start with the double fold.
The position of the single fold is based on the leading edge of paper and the position of the double fold is based on the position
of the single fold. So, the dimension "b" in the step 7 varies when either position of the single fold and the double fold is
changed.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Tri-Fold Position Adj.].
4. "Tri-Fold Position Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
a b
A4S 97.5 1.5 102.0 3.0
81/2 x 11S 91.6 1.5 96.1 3.0
[2] b [1]
fs503fs3015c
8. "Tri-Fold Position Adjustment screen"
Select the size of paper to be adjusted.
1 step = 0.1mm
negative side.
1 step = 0.1mm
The dimension "a" in the step 6 gets smaller when the set value is moved to the positive side and gets larger when moved to the
negative side.
I -177
5.9.23 Fold Paper Width Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the alignment width while in alignment (sub scan direction).
(2) Usage
When there is an uneven edge found with the bundle paper at the folding or multi-tri-folding mode by SD, conduct this adjustment.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Fold Paper Width Adj.].
4. "Fold Paper Width Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
5. Set the paper of the paper size to be adjusted. Press the Start key to output the test pattern (No.16).
6. Check the printed pages for misalignment.
a: When the paper width setting is set to wider than the actual paper width, misalignment occurs randomly.
b: When the paper width setting is set to narrower than the actual paper width, misalignment occurs in 1 direction.
fs503fs3302c
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.24 Trimming Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.)

(1) Function
Change the registration position of the book for trimming.
(2) Usage
Adjust the misalignment in the trimmed fore-edge or the excess trimming by the SD.
(3) Procedure
Press [07 Trimming Adjustment].
4. "Trimming Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the trimming distance "a" on the cover paper.
Standard value "a": 2mm or more
Note
Trimming distance less than 2mm causes trimming fault.
a
fs503fs3301c
I -178

1 step = 0.1mm
Note
Since the minimum dimension (from the spine to the fore edge) after the trimming is limited to 122mm, the set value up to
+400 fails to be reflected depending on the size of the paper.
5.9.25 Trimmer Receiver Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the shift interval and the move pitch of the trimmer board.
(2) Usage
Adjust the poor trimming (for example, fluff on the cut end) in the trimming by the SD.
(3) Procedure
Press [08 Trimmer Receiver Adj.].
4. "Trimmer Receiver Adjustment Menu screen"
Select the options for "Trimmer Count" (number of cuts counted until the trimmer board moves) and "Move Pitch" (travel distance of the
trimmer board when it moves).
5. Press [Execute Compulsive Movement] to move the trimmer board manually.
5.9.26 Cover Trimming Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the trimming position of the right-side edge of the cover paper.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the trimming position on the leading edge of the right cover does not fit to the leading edge of the left cover.
Note
In order to align the leading edges on the left and right covers, perform I.5.9.27 Cover Lead Edge Adj. (Perfect Binder
Adjustment) first.
(3) Procedure
2. [Finisher Adjustment menu screen]
Press [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment].
3. "Perfect Binder Adjustment menu screen"
Press [01 Cover Trimming Adj.].
4. "Cover Trimming Adjustment screen"
Press [Perfect Binder Tray] or [Except PB Tray] to select the tray to be adjusted.
6. Select the paper type and press the start button to make test prints and carry out perfect binding.
7. Check the cover of the created book if its right-side edge and left-side edge align with each other.
[3]
[2] [1] 1050fs3357c
[1] Trimming position [3] Left cover paper

[2] Right cover paper
8. To adjust the position of the trimming position of the right cover paper, press [Exit PrintMode].
9. "Cover Trimming Adjustment screen"
Setting range: -128 (reduces the trimming amount) to +127 (enlarges the trimming amount)
1 step = 0.1mm
I -179
5.9.27 Cover Lead Edge Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Sets the length that the left side of cover paper exceeds the length (width) of inside pages.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the length that the left side of cover paper exceeds the length (width) of inside pages is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Cover Lead Edge Adj.].
4. "Cover Lead Edge Adj. screen"
Press [PB Tray] or [Except PB Tray] to select the tray to be adjusted.
5. Press [] or [] to select the paper size of cover paper.
Select the size of paper from the following options.
Total
A4
B5
A5
81/2 x 11
16K
A5S
51/2 x 81/2S
Custom (220mm to 379mm)
Note
Above paper sizes are book (the inside pages) finished sizes.

8. Check that the width of the left cover paper is longer than the width of the inside pages by specified amount.
[3] [4]
[5]
[1]
[2] 1050fs3358c
[1] Body [4] Length differential

[2] Right cover paper [5] Edge of the left cover paper
[3] Left cover paper
9. To change the width of the left cover paper, press [Exit PrintMode].
10. "Cover Lead Edge Adj. screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.28 Spine Corner form Pos. (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the corner folding position of the cover paper.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the spine corner form position is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Spine Corner Forming Pos.].
4. "Spine Corner Forming Pos. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check that the corner edges of the cover paper are created uniformly in the main scan direction.
I -180
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
1050fs3359c
[1] Right cover paper [3] Cover paper

[2] Main scan direction [4] Left cover paper
7. When the corner edges of the cover paper are not created uniformly, press [Exit PrintMode].
8. "Spine Corner Forming Pos. screen"
Select one of [Up/Down Forward Adj.] or [Up/Down Rear Adj.].
Setting range: -128 (down) to +127 (up)
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.29 Glue Start Position (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the start position for applying glue to inside pages.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the start position for applying glue to inside pages is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Glue Start Position].
4. "Glue Start Position screen"
Press [Ahead] and select "Glue Start Position."
Total
A4
B5
A5
81/2 x 11
16K
A5S
51/2 x 81/2S
Note
[Back] does not require the adjustment.

8. Check that the glue applying start position to the inside pages is appropriate.
[3]
[1]
[2] 1050fs3360c
[1] Start position for frontward applying [3] Body

[2] Start position for backward applying [4]
9. To adjust the start position, press [Exit PrintMode].

10. "Glue Start Position screen"
I -181
Setting range: -128 (earlier) to +127 (later)

1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.30 Glue Finish Position (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the position to finish applying glue.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the completion position for applying glue to inside pages is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Glue Finish Position].
4. "Glue Finish Position screen"
Press [Ahead] or [Back] to select which finish position, for applying during forward movement or backward movement, to be adjusted.
Total
A4
B5
A5
81/2 x 11
16K
A5S
51/2 x 81/2S
Note

8. Check that the glue applying start position to the inside pages is appropriate.
[3]
[1]
[2] 1050fs3361c
[1] Finish position for backward applying [3] Body

[2] Finish position for frontward applying [4]
9. To adjust the finish position, press [Exit PrintMode].

10. "Glue Finish Position screen"
Setting range: -128 (earlier) to +127 (later)
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.31 Temperature Adjustment (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Sets the temperatures to be detected by the glue apply roller temperature sensor (TH1), the glue tank temperature sensor/Up (TH2), the glue
tank temperature sensor/Md (TH3), and the glue tank temperature sensor/Lw (TH4) provided in the glue tank.
(2) Usage
Adjust it when the applied glue does not harden or when the cover paper easily comes unglued.
(3) Procedure
I -182

Press [06 Temperature Adjustment].
4. "Temperature Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check that the glue applied has dried appropriately.
7. To adjust the dryness of the glue, press [Exit PrintMode].
8. "Temperature Adjustment screen"
Select the option of which the temperature is set.
The following options are provided.
Metal tank - Top
Metal tank - Mid
Metal tank - Low
Glue apply roller
Metal tank - Top
Setting range: 128 C to 136 C
Default: 132 C
Metal tank - Mid
Setting range: 140 C to +145 C
Default: 145 C
Metal tank - Low
Default: 185 C
Glue apply roller
Default: 165 C
5.9.32 Sub Compile CD Width Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the alignment width of the inside pages when aligning in the main scan direction.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the alignment width of the inside pages in the main scan direction is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [07 Sub Compile CD Width Adj.].
4. "Sub Compile CD Width Adj. screen"
Press [] or [] to select the paper size.
Total
A4
B5
A5
81/2 x 11
16K
A5S
5 1/2 x 8 1/2S
Note
5. "Sub Compile CD Width Adj. screen"

1 step = 0.1mm
6. Create multiple books in normal copy mode, and check the alignment of the second and later book.
Change set value set in Step5 until a properly aligned book is created.
5.9.33 Clamp CD Width Adjustment (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the alignment width of the inside pages when aligning in the main scan direction.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the alignment width of the inside pages in the main scan direction is not adequate.
I -183
(3) Procedure
Press [08 Clamp CD Width Adjustment].
4. "Clamp CD Width Adjustment screen"
Total
A4
B5
A5
81/2 x 11
16K
A5S
5 1/2 x 8 1/2S
Note
5. "Clamp CD Width Adjustment screen"

1 step = 0.1mm
6. Create multiple books in normal copy mode, and check the alignment of the second and later book.
Change set value set in Step5 until a properly aligned book is created.
5.9.34 Cover Up/Down CD Width Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the positional relation in the main scan direction between the cover paper and the inside pages.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the positional relation in the main scan direction between the cover paper and the inside pages is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [09 Cover Up/Down CD Width Adj.].
4. "Cover Up/Down CD Width Adjustment screen"
Press [Perfect Binder Tray] or [Except PB Tray] to select the tray to be adjusted.
7. Check if the relation between the main scan position of the cover and that of the inside pages are appropriate.
8. To adjust the relation of their main-scanning positions, press [Exit PrintMode].
9. "Cover Up/Down CD Width Adjustment screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.35 Clamp FD Position Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the alignment width of the inside pages when aligning in the sub scan direction.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the alignment width of the inside pages in the sub scan direction is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [10 Clamp FD Position Adj.].
4. "Clamp FD Position Adjustment screen"
I -184

Total
A4
B5
A5
81/2 x 11
16K
A5S
51/2 x 81/2S
Note

7. Check if the sub scan direction of all the inside pages are properly aligned.
8. To adjust the alignment width in sub-scanning direction of the inside pages, press [Exit PrintMode].
9. "Clamp FD Position Adjustment screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
Note
If the setting is too wide, pages are misplaced in sub scan direction.
If the setting is too narrow, mark of the FD alignment plate appears.
5.9.36 Fold & Staple Stopper Adjustment

(1) Function
Adjust the staple position in the sub scan direction while in the saddle stitching.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the staple position of the saddle stitching by FS-612 is not within the standard value.
Note
Be sure the " Half Fold Stopper Adj." (refer to I.5.9.37 Half-Fold Stopper Adj.) have been adjusted before performing this
adjustment.
(3) Procedure
Press [01 Saddle Stitcher Stopper].
3. "Saddle Stitcher Stopper screen"
6. Check the saddle stitching staple position of the output paper.
15sjf3c100na
8. "Saddle Stitcher Stopper screen"
Setting range: -128 (down) to +127 (up)
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.37 Half-Fold Stopper Adj.

(1) Function
Adjust the folding position while in the half folding and saddle stitching.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the folding position of half folding and saddle stitching by FS-612 is not within the standard value.
I -185
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Half-Fold Stopper Adj.].
3. "Half-Fold Stopper Adj. screen"
6. Check the misalignment "a" on the edge of the output paper.
a
15sjf3c101na
8. "Half-Fold Stopper Adj. screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
If there is the misalignment given in the step 6, enter a set value on the negative side.
5.9.38 Vertical Position Adj. (Punch Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the punch position of the punch kit (PK) in the main scan direction.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the punch position of the punch kit (PK) in the main scan direction is not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Punch Adjustment].
3. "Punch Adjustment menu screen"
Press [01 Vertical Position Adj.].
4. "Punch Adjustment <Vertical Position Adjustment> screen"
7. Fold the output paper in half in the main scan direction, and measure the gap "a" between the center line of the print and the center of the
punch hole.
[1]
[2]
15knf3c002nb
[1] Center of the paper [2] Center of the punch hole
8. "Punch Adjustment <Vertical Position Adjustment> screen"

Setting range: -50 (to front) to +50 (to back)
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.39 Horizontal Position Adj. (Punch Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the punch position of the punch kit (PK) in the sub scan direction.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the punch position of the punch kit (PK) in the sub scan direction is not within the standard value.
I -186
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Horizontal Position Adj.].
4. "Punch Adjustment <Horizontal Position Adjustment> screen"
Select [PI Tray] or [Main Body Tray], and press [Print Mode].
5. Set paper in the tray or PI, and press Start to print the test pattern (No. 16).
6. Check the punch position "a" of the output paper in the sub scan direction.
Standard value a: 10.5mm 5.0mm
a
15knf3c001nb
7. "Punch Adjustment <Horizontal Position Adjustment> screen"

1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.40 Registration Adjustment (Punch Adjustment)

(1) Function
Change the registration loop amount of punching to adjust the paper skew.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the punch hole of the punch kit (PK) is not straight.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Registration Adjustment].
4. "Punch Adjustment <Registration Adjustment> screen"
5. Set paper in the tray or PI, and press Start to print the test pattern (No. 16).
7. "Punch Adjustment <Registration Adjustment> screen"
Setting range: -20 (larger) to +20 (smaller)
1 step = 0.8mm
5.9.41 Paper Edge Detect Sensor (Punch Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the sensitivity of the paper size sensor automatically to detect the paper edge as the standard of the punch hole properly.
(2) Usage
Adjust the sensitivity of the sensor after replacing the punch drive board (PDB) or the paper size sensor (PS305).
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Paper Edge Detect Sensor Adjustment].
4. "Paper Edge Detect Sensor Adjustment screen"
Press [Start].
I -187
5. A message "Completed" is displayed when the adjustment is finished successfully.
5.9.42 Tri-Fold Adjustment

(1) Function
Adjust the 1st folding position of the multi tri-folding mode.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the 1st folding position of the multi-tri-folding by FS-612 is not within the standard value.
Note
The 2nd folding position (dimension "b") is mechanically adjusted. (Refer to I.18.12 Tri-folding position adjustment )
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Tri-Fold Adjustment].
3. "Tri-Fold Adjustment screen"
Select the paper size to be adjusted and press [Print Mode].
5. Check "a" on the outputted paper.
a b c
A4S 95 2 101 2 101 2
81/2 x 11S 89 2 95 2 95 2
c
a
[1]
b 15sjf3c102na
[1] First fold
7. "Tri-Fold Adjustment screen"
Setting range: -128 (larger) to +127 (smaller)
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.43 2 Position Staple Pitch

(1) Function
Change the stop position of the stapler unit to adjust the staple interval.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the staple intervals of the saddle stitching and flat stapling by FS-612 are not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 2 Pos. Staple Pitch Adj.].
3. "2 Position Staple Pitch Adjustment screen"
Press [Fold&Staple] or [Staple].
5. Press the Start key to output the test pattern (No.16).
6. Check the staple pitch of the output paper.
Standard value a: 128mm 6mm
[1] Staple
[2] Folding & Stapling
I -188
a 15sjf3c103na
[1]
a
15sjf3c104na
[2]
8. "2 Position Staple Pitch Adjustment screen"
Setting range: +128 (narrower) to +160 (wider)
1 step = 1mm
5.9.44 Post Inserter Tray Size

(1) Function
Adjust the detection size of the PI tray.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the paper size is not correctly detected at the cover sheet tray of the PI.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Post Inserter Tray Size].
3. "Post Inserter Tray Size screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous], select the upper or lower tray, and press [A4S] or [81/2 x 11S].
4. Load A4S paper in the selected tray of PI and press [Start]. (When you selected [81/ x 11S] in step 3, load 81/ x 11S paper in the tray.)
2 2
6. When adjusting another tray, repeat the steps 3 to 5.
7. Exit the service mode, and check if paper size set in the PI is correctly detected.
5.9.45 Output Quantity Limit

(1) Functions
Set the maximum number of sheets for stapling, saddle stitching, multi half fold, and multi tri-fold of the FS-531 and FS-612.
(2) Usage
Change the max. setting when the staples are buckled or paper folded is not enough.
(3) Procedure
Press [07 Output Quantity Limit].
3. "Output Quantity Limit screen"
Enter the maximum number of sheets for each item with the numeric buttons and press [<<SET].
5.9.46 Curl Adjustment

(1) Function
Changes the pressure of the paper exit de-curler roller of the main body to adjust the paper curl amount.
(2) Usage
To set the setting to adjust the paper curl amount of the FS-612 and FS-531.
I -189
Conduct this adjustment when the paper leading edge buckling of the 1st folding or the misalignment of ejected paper because of the paper
curl occurs depending on the paper type while the tri-folding is selected.
(3) Procedure
Press [08 Curl Adjustment].
3. "Curl Adjustment setting screen"
With the setting button of each item, select the pressure of the paper exit de-curler roller of the main body from "+2, +1, 0".
Note
The curling direction changes depending on the paper type, weight, humidification, and set direction in the tray. Therefore, be
sure to check the condition of ejected paper and adjust the setting.
See the following as the guide.
1. Face up paper exit
"Simplex (Tri-Fold 64-80 g/m2: Inside Print)":
When the leading edge of the 1st fold paper is buckled with the default "+2", set it to "+1" or "0".
"Simplex (Tri-Fold 81-105 g/m2: Inside Print)":
When the leading edge of the 1st fold paper is buckled with the default "0", set it to "+1" or "+2".
2. Face down paper exit
"Simplex (Except Tri-Fold Print Side=Front)":
Paper tends to be curled convexly When the convexly curled amount is too much on the main tray with the default "0",
set it to "+1" or "+2".
"Simplex (Print Side=Back)":
With the default "+2", paper tends to be curled concavely. When the concavely curled amount is too much on the main
tray, set it to "+1" or "0".
"Duplex":
When the concavely curled amount is too much on the main tray with the default "+1", set it "0". When the convexly
curled amount is too much, set it "+2".
5.9.47 Recall Standard Data

(1) Functions
Reset various setting values of the finisher adjustment to the factory initial data or the installation initial data.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the initialization cannot be done because of the various change in the finisher adjustment items by CE.
Note
Adjustment data of "Stacker Adjustment (LS)", "Trimmer Receiver Adj. (SD)", "Paper Edge Detect Sensor Adj. (PK)", "Post
Inserter Tray Size (PI)", and "Output Quantity Limit (FS-531/FS-612)" are not restored.
(3) Procedure
Press [09/08 Recall Standard Data].
Note
conducted.
5.10 Firmware Version

(1) Usage
Display the firmware version of the main body and options.
Note
Confirm the need to enhance or not to enhance the security function with the administrator of this machine. If administrator
wants to enhance, check the firmware version number and the checksum value. Refer to J.3.1 Usage of the USB memory ISW
for the method of how to re-write the firmware. Refer to J.2.3.1 Firmware checksum check for the method of checking the
checksum value.
When the administrator wants to enhance the security, check that the firmware version of the image control I1 is the version
(A1DU0Y0-00I1-G00-10) which is certificated by ISO/IEC15408. If not, rewrite the firmware version to the certificated one.
When installing the machine or upgrading the firmware, confirm that the current firmware version of the machine is the same as
that identification number of the User Guide. If the identification number of the User's Guide is not the same, provide the
machine administrator with the User's Guide having the firmware version that corresponds to that of the machine.
[Image control] that is displayed on the touch panel represents the firmware version of the overall control board (OACB).
(2) Procedure
Press [08 Firmware Version].
2. "Firmware Version menu screen"
3. "Indication of Firmware Version screen"
I -190
Each firmware version is displayed.
5.11 CS Remote Care

5.11.1 Outline
The CS Remote Care is a system that manages the main body by sending and receiving various kinds of the management data of the main
body between the main body and the CS Remote Care center computer through the phone line, E-mail, or WebDAV server.
It enables the main body to call the center computer, and the center computer to inquire regularly the main body for various data.
The data handled by the CS Remote Care can be classified into the 3 following groups.
a. Data that allow you to grasp the use conditions of the main body, such as the total count and the PM count.
b. Data that give us the general information of when and how often an abnormality occurred with the main body.
c. All sorts of adjustment data
Note
When the security enhanced mode is set to ON, the use of the main body NIC is not allowed.
5.11.2 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care (When using E-mail)

Note
Select one of main body NIC or IC-601 controller NIC to use. CSRC cannot be used for the IC-306/IC-307/413 controller NIC.
Pay attention to the mail account and the DIPSW setting when selecting NIC to be used or using E-mail CS Remote Care and the
mail remote notification system at the same time. For the detail, refer to "I.5.11.5 List of combinations of E-mail CS Remote Care
and Mail remote notification system."
Conduct the settings of the mail address and the mail server to be used for E-mail system of CS Remote Care beforehand. The
setting methods differ depending on the used NIC as follows.
Controller NIC: [Utility Menu] [Administrator Setting] [Network Setting] [E-mail Initial Setting]. Or set from [E-mail Initial
Setting] on [Extension for maintenance] of Web Utilities. (Refer to I.5.11.6 Mail initial setting (In the case of the main body NIC))
Controller NIC: Set [Utility Menu] [Administrator Setting] [Controller] [Controller NIC Setting] [CSRC Setting].
[CSRC Send]/[CSRC Receive]. (Refer to I.5.11.7 E-mail Initial Setting (In the case of controller NIC))
Conduct RAM clear for CS Remote Care first and then setup again when conducting the setup again for the main body that has
been done CS Remote Care setup once. (Refer to I.5.11.16 Initialization of RAM for CS Remote Care)
(1) When using E-mail (Duplex)

1. Device registration on CS Remote Care center
Pre-register the device with the application on the center side. (This step can be skipped when sending the initial connection mail from the
machine to the center.) After the initial connection, in this case, register the device at the center side.)
For the device registration method at the center side, refer to the user's guide on CS Remote Care center application.
2. I/O check mode, data collection clear valid
Set [03-6] to "On (1)" from [Service Mode] [System Setting] [Software DIPSW Setting].
3. CS Remote Care memory initialization
1. Press [Service Mode] [Machine Condition] [I/O Check Mode].
2. Enter "15" with numeric keys and confirm that "015-00" appears on the screen.
3. Press the [Access] button.
5. Press [Start] button and confirm that the output check display switches to "FIN".
4. CS Remote Care function ON
5. Select the NIC that is used for CSRC
1. Press [Service Mode] [System Setting] [Software DIPSW Setting] and enter [14-7].
2. Specify the NIC that is used.
On (1): Main body NIC
Off (0): Controller NIC
6. CS Remote Care system selection
Press [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care] [CS Remote Care] and then [E-mail].
7. Communication method selection
Press [Duplex] on [CS Remote Care setting] screen.
8. ID code entry
1. Press [ID code].
2. Enter the 7-digit serviceman ID with numeric keys and press [ID code] again.
9. Press [Detail Setting] to display [E-mail (Duplex) Setting Menu] screen.
10. Basic setting
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [E-mail (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Press [Center ID] and enter the center ID (5 digits).
The serial number that is input from [Service Mode] [System Setting] [Serial Number Setting] appears on [Device ID].
3. Press [Encrypt] to make a selection to decide whether it is encrypted or not. (Default: Use Encryptogram).
4. Press [OK].
11. Date and time setting for the CS Remote Care
1. Press [Date and Time Setting] on the [E-mail (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Press [Setting Time] to enter the year, month, day, and time.
Press [Set] to move the cursor among the year/month/day/hour/minute fields.
3. Press [Time Zone] to enter the time zone.
Press [ +/- ] to switch plus/minus of the time zone.
4. Press [OK].
12. Response Timeout Setting
1. Press [Response Timeout Setting] on the [E-mail (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Enter the response timeout (10 minute to 1440 minutes, default: 30 minutes).
3. Press [OK].
13. Turn on and off the power switch (SW2) of the main body.
I -191
14. Initial connection

Conduct the initial connection in one of the following steps.
Initial connection from the center side
Send the initial connection mail from the center side to the mail address of the machine. The initial connection completes when the
machine receives the initial connection mail.
Initial connection from the machine
Send the initial connection mail from the machine to the center. In this case, set the E-mail address of the center on the [E-mail
(Duplex) Setting Menu] [Basic Setting] [E-mail] and press [First Call]. In case the device pre-registration at the center side is
skipped, it turns to be the temporary registered status by center receiving the initial connection mail. The initial connection is
completed when the device is registered at the center side.
Note
When the CS Remote Care related window is opened while receiving the initial connection mail from the center, the
information being created is destroyed and the CS Remote Care setting screen is displayed.
For the method of sending the initial connection mail from the center side, refer to the user's guide on CS Remote Care
center application.
Mail transmission is possible only between the center and the main body that the initial connection has been established.
After when the initial registration is done, the center mail address is displayed on [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care]
[CS Remote Care] [Detail Setting] [Basic Setting] [E-mail].
When the transmission error occurs against the center, check the error code that appears. (Refer to I.5.11.17 CS Remote
Care error code list)
(2) When using E-mail (Simplex (from machine to center))

Pre-register the device with the application on the center side. The pre-registration of the device at the center side can be skipped. After
the initial connection, in this case, register the device at the center side.)
Press [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care] [CS Remote Care] and then [E-mail].
Press [Simplex] on [CS Remote Care setting] screen.
8. ID code entry
1. Press [ID code].
9. Press [Detail Setting] to display [E-mail (Simplex) Setting Menu] screen.
10. Basic setting
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [E-mail (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
3. Press [E-mail] and enter the mail address of the center.
4. Press [Encrypt] to make a selection to decide whether it is encrypted or not. (Default: Use Encryptogram).
5. Press [OK].
1. Press [Date and Time Setting] on the [E-mail (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
4. Press [OK].
12. Regular send setting
1. Press [Periodical Transmission Setting] on the [E-mail (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Set the regular send schedule to the center.
Every month: Send it regularly to the center on the same date. Sent date is set at the end of the month by [End of Month].
Every week: Send it regularly to the center on the same time and the same day of the week.
Every day: Send it regularly to the center on the same time everyday.
Reference:
To distribute the access to the center, the default time of the periodical transmission setting after the RAM clear is calculated from
the serial number.
3. Press [OK].
13. Fixed Date/Time Setting
1. Press [Fixed Date/Time Setting] on the [E-mail (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Enter the fixed date/time.
I -192

3. Press [OK].
14. Collecting Data Setting
1. Press [Collecting Data Setting] on the [E-mail (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Select data to be collected.
Basic data
Account track data
Machine adjustment data
Coverage data
3. Press [OK].
16. Initial connection
1. Press [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care] [CS Remote Care] [Detail Setting] [Basic Setting].
2. Press [First Call] to send the initial connection mail to the center.
3. Once the mail sending completes normally, CS Remote Care setting screen appears. (Once the mail sending to the SMTP server
normally, the registration on the machine completes.)
4. The initial connection completes when the center receives the initial connection mail. In case the device pre-registration at the center
side is skipped, it turns to be the temporary registered status by center receiving the initial connection mail. The initial connection is
completed when the device is registered at the center side.
Note
5.11.3 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care (When using phone line modem)
Conduct the following procedure to set up when using phone line modem as CR Remote Care system.
Note
Use the Data modem of ITU-T V.34/V.32 bis/V.32 compliance, AT command compliance.
(1) When using the phone line modem

2. Modem connection
Turn off the power of the modem, connect the main body and the modem with a modem cable, and the modem and the wall outlet with a
modular cable.
For the connection of a modular cable, refer to the instructions of the modem to be used.
1. Press [Service Mode] [State Confirmation] [I/O Check Mode].
Press [Modem] on [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care] [CS Remote Care].
7. ID code entry
1. Press [ID code].
8. Press [Detail Setting] to display the [Modem Setting Menu] screen.
9. Basic setting
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [Modem Setting Menu] screen.
3. Press [Center Telephone Number] to enter the center phone number.
Use [P], [T], [W], [-], and so on as needed.
4. Press [Machine Phone Number] to enter the machine phone number.
Use [P], [T], [W], [-], and so on as needed.
5. Press [OK].
1. Press [Date/Time Setting] on the [Modem Setting Menu] screen.
4. Press [OK].
11. Modem initialization AT command entry
Note
Change the initialization AT command of the modem as needed. (Normally no need to change.)
For the detail of AT command, refer to the instruction of the modem used.
1. Press [AT command] on the [Modem Setting Menu] screen.
2. Press [Initial command] to enter AT command.
I -193
3. Press [OK].
12. DIPSW setting for the CS Remote Care
Note
Normally no need to change the setting, but conduct the setting as needed according to the connection environment.
1. Press [Software DIPSW Setting] on the [Modem Setting Menu] screen.
2. Specify DIP-SW as needed. (Refer to I.5.11.10 Input procedure of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care.)
14. First call execution
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [Modem Setting Menu] screen.
2. Press [First Call] to start the initial transmission.
When the connection to the center completes successfully, the CS Remote Care setting screen appears.
When the transmission error occurs against the center, check the error code that appears. (Refer to I.5.11.17 CS Remote Care
error code list)
In case the device pre-registration at the center side is skipped, it turns to be the temporary registered status by center receiving
the initial call. The initial connection is completed when the device is registered at the center side.
5.11.4 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care (When using WebDAV server)
Conduct the following procedure to set up when using http communication as CR Remote Care system.
Note
Select one of main body NIC or IC-601 controller NIC to use. CSRC cannot be used for the IC-306/IC-307/413 controller NIC.
Set the proxy beforehand when using http proxy server. The setting methods differ depending on the used NIC as follows.
Controller NIC: [Utility Menu] [Administrator Setting] [Network Setting] [http Communication Setting]. Or set from
[CSRC http Communication Setting] on [Extension for maintenance] of Web Utilities. (Refer to I.5.11.8 http communication
setting (In the case of the main body NIC))
Controller NIC: Set [Utility Menu] [Administrator Setting] [Controller] [Controller NIC Setting] [CSRC Setting]. [http
Communication Setting]. (Refer to I.5.11.9 http Communication Setting (In the case of controller NIC))
(1) When using http (Duplex)

Press [http] on [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care] [CS Remote Care].
Press [Duplex] on [CS Remote Care setting] screen.
8. ID code entry
1. Press [ID code].
9. Press [Detail Setting] to display [http (Duplex) Setting Menu] screen.
10. Basic setting
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [http (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
3. Press [Web Server] and enter the URL of the Web server (Less than 255 one-byte characters)
4. Press [Cryptogram] to make a selection to decide whether it is encrypted or not. (Default: Use Encryptogram).
5. Press [OK].
11. Heart Beat setting *1
1. Press [Heart Beat Setting] on the [http (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Press [Heart Beat Setting] to make a selection to decide whether the Heart Beat function is made valid or invalid. (Default: Enable)
3. Press [Heart Beat Interval] to enter the transmission interval of the Heart Beats (1 minute to 256 minutes, default: 30 minutes).
4. Press [Heart Beat Send] to make a selection to decide whether the fixed time transmission of the Heart Beat is made valid or invalid.
(Default: Enable)
5. Press [Heart Beat Fix Send Time] to enter the time for the Heart Beat transmission at the fixed time.
6. Press [OK].
1. Press [Date/Time Setting] on the [http (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
I -194

4. Press [OK].
13. Turn on and off the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body.
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [http (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
3. Once the initial call completes normally, CS Remote Care setting screen appears. (Once the initial connection file is stored in the Web
server normally, the registration on the machine completes.)
The initial connection completes when the center receives the initial connection file. In case the device pre-registration at the
center side is skipped, it turns to be the temporary registered status. The initial connection is completed when the device is
registered at the center side.
Note
15. Turn OFF/ON the sub power switch of the main body (SW2).*2
*1 Heart Beat function is a function to notify that the machine being active by uploading the Heart Beat file to the registered Web server
periodically. Heart Beat file contains the information of the total counter and the status.
*2 The Heart Beart function does not work when SW2 of the main body is not turned OFF/ON after the First Call finishes.
(2) When using http (Simplex (from machine to center))

Press [http] on [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care] [CS Remote Care].
Press [Simplex] on [CS Remote Care setting] screen.
8. ID code entry
1. Press [ID code].
9. Press [Detail Setting] to display [http (Simplex) Setting Menu] screen.
10. Basic setting
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [http (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
3. Press [Web Server] and enter the URL of the Web server (Less than 255 one-byte characters)
4. Press [Cryptogram] to make a selection to decide whether it is encrypted or not. (Default: Use Encryptogram).
5. Press [OK].
11. Heart Beat setting *1
1. Press [Heart Beat Setting] on the [http (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Press [Heart Beat Setting] to make a selection to decide whether the Heart Beat function is made valid or invalid. (Default: Enable)
3. Press [Heart Beat Interval] to enter the transmission interval of the Heart Beats (1 minute to 256 minutes, default: 30 minutes).
4. Press [Heart Beat Send] to make a selection to decide whether the fixed time transmission of the Heart Beat is made valid or invalid.
(Default: Enable)
5. Press [Heart Beat Fix Send Time] to enter the time for the Heart Beat transmission at the fixed time.
6. Press [OK].
1. Press [Date/Time Setting] on the [http (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
4. Press [OK].
13. Regular send setting
1. Press [Periodical Transmission Setting] on the [http (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Set the regular send schedule to the center.
Every month: Send it regularly to the center on the same date. Sent date is set at the end of the month by [End of Month].
Every week: Send it regularly to the center on the same time and the same day of the week.
I -195
Every day: Send it regularly to the center on the same time everyday.
Reference:
To distribute the access to the center, the default time of the periodical transmission setting after the RAM clear is calculated from
the serial number.
3. Press [OK].
14. Fixed Date/Time Setting
1. Press [Fixed Date/Time Setting] on the [http (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Enter the fixed date/time.
3. Press [OK].
15. Collecting Data Setting
1. Press [Collecting Data Setting] on the [http (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Select data to be collected.
Basic data
Account track data
Machine adjustment data
Coverage data
3. Press [OK].
16. Turn on and off the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body.
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [http (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
3. Once the initial call completes normally, CS Remote Care setting screen appears. (Once the initial connection file is stored in the Web
server normally, the registration on the machine completes.)
The initial connection completes when the center receives the initial connection file. In case the device pre-registration at the
center side is skipped, it turns to be the temporary registered status. The initial connection is completed when the device is
registered at the center side.
Note
18. Turn OFF/ON the sub power switch of the main body (SW2).*2
*1 Heart Beat function is a function to notify that the machine being active by uploading the Heart Beat file to the registered Web server
periodically. Heart Beat file contains the information of the total counter and the status.
*2 The Heart Beart function does not work when SW2 of the main body is not turned OFF/ON after the First Call finishes.
5.11.5 List of combinations of E-mail CS Remote Care and Mail remote notification system
To change a combination of E-mail CS Remote Care and Mail remote notification system, refer to this table to configure the DIPSW setting or
the mail account setting.
Mail remote E-mail CS Remote
E-mail CS Remote
notification Care using the
Care using the
Case system machine NIC Setting item Set value Remark
controller NIC
Notification E-mail used
E-mail used
system CS Remote Care
"Use the mail remote notification
system" of the main body NIC Web ON
utility
"Service Mode - Software DIPSW": 15-5
1 - 1 (*3)
(*1)
1
(*2)
utility
2 - 1 (*4)
(*1)
0
(*2)
utility
3 - - "Service Mode - Software DIPSW": 15-5 -
0
(*1)
0
(*2)
system" of the main body NIC Web ON (*5)
4 - - utility -
1
(*1)
I -196

1
(*2)
system" of the main body NIC Web OFF
utility
5 - - "Service Mode - Software DIPSW": 15-5 -
1
(*1)
0
(*2)
*1 Service Mode - Software DIPSW: 15-5 (CS Remote Care function ON, 0=OFF, 1=ON)
*2 Service Mode - Software DIPSW: 14-7 (NIC selection of E-mail CS Remote Care, 0=controller NIC, 1=main body NIC)
*3 Mail remote notification system and CS Remote Care using the main body NIC share the same mail account.
*4 Mail remote notification system and CS Remote Care using the controller NIC use separate mail accounts.
*5 Even when the mail remote notification system is not used, set it to "Yes" and conduct the mail initial setting.
5.11.6 Mail initial setting (In the case of the main body NIC)
Set the mail address and the mail server for the machine NIC.
Note
E-mail initial setting can be set in the [Extension for maintenance] of Web Utilities. For the detail of Web Utilities, refer to E.1.3.4
Initial setting.
1. Press the [Utility/Counter].
2. Press [Administrator Setting] [Network Setting] [E-mail Initial Setting].
3. Conduct the following settings.
[Use E-mail System]: Select [ON].
[Time Zone]: Set the time zone.
[Trans(SMTP) Mail Server]: Set the host name of the AMTP server or IP address. When inputting the host name, set the DNS server on
[Machine NIC Setting].
[SMTP port number]: Set the port number of the SMTP server.
[Trans Mail Server Timeout]: Set the timeout period (sec).
[New-arrival Check Interval]: Set the interval (min) for checking the new-arrivals.
[Receive mail server]: Set the IP address of the receiving mail server. When inputting the host name, set the DNS server on [Machine
NIC Setting].
[Receive Mail Server Type]: Set the type of the receive mail server (POP3/IMAP).
4. Press [Next] to conduct the following settings.
[POP3/IMAP Port Number]: Set the port number of the receive mail server.
[Receive Mail Account]: Set the account name.
[Receive Mail Password]: Set the account password.
[E-mail Address for Machine]: Set the E-mail address for machine NIC.
[POP (IMAP) before SMTP Authentication]: Make a setting to decide whether the POP (IMAP) before SMTP Authentication is used.
[SSL Encryption of SMTP]: Set whether to encrypt the SMTP communication.
[SSL Encryption of POP (IMAP)]: Set whether to encrypt the POP (IMAP) communication.
[SMTP Authentication]: Set whether to use SMTP Authentication or not.
[SMTP Authentication User ID]: Set the User ID for the SMTP Authentication.
[SMTP Authentication Password]: Set the Password for the SMTP Authentication.
6. Press [Test] and press [Yes] on the confirmation screen to conduct the sending and receiving test.
7. Press [OK].
5.11.7 E-mail Initial Setting (In the case of controller NIC)

Set the mail address and the mail server for the controller NIC.
2. Press [Administrator Setting] [Controller] [Controller NIC Setting] [CSRC Setting] [CSRC Send].
[CSRC Send]: Select [Enable].
[SMTP Server Address]: Select the address specifying method (IPv4/IPv6/host name) and press [SMTP Server Address] to set the
server address. When inputting the host name, set the DNS server on [TCP/IP Setting] in [Controller NIC Setting].
[Port Number]: Set the port number of the SMTP server.
[Administrator From Address]: Set the E-mail address for the controller NIC used for CSRC.
[Connection Timeout]: Set the time-out period (sec).
[Authentication Setting]: Set the enable/disable of POP before SMTP or SMTP Authentication.
[POP before SMTP Time]: Set the time period from connecting to the POP server with the POP before SMTP Authentication to
connecting to the SMTP server.
[SMTP Authentication Setting]: Set the User ID, Password, and realm for the SMTP Authentication.
5. Press [CSRC Receive Setting] on [CSRC Setting] screen to conduct the following settings.
[CSRC Receive Setting]: When using E-mail duplex, select [Enable].
[POP Server Address]: Select the address specifying method (IPv4/IPv6/host name) and press [POP Server Address] to set the server
address. When inputting the host name, set the DNS server on [TCP/IP Setting] in [Controller NIC Setting].
[Login Name]: Set the account name.
[Password]: Set the account password.
[APOP Authentication]: Set the enable/disable of APOP Authentication.
[Port Number]: Set the port number of the POP server.
[Connection Timeout]: Set the time-out period (sec).
I -197
[Auto Receive Check]: Select [Enable] normally. Select [Disable] to stop the auto receive check temporally when the POP server is
down and so on. When [Disable] is selected, the mail cannot be received manually.
[Polling Interval]: Set the polling interval (min).
6. Press [CSRC Communication Test] on [CSRC Setting] screen to conduct the test.
7. Press [OK].
5.11.8 http communication setting (In the case of the main body NIC)
Set the following settings when a http proxy server is used or when a web server authentication is required.
Note
http communication setting can be set in the [Extension for maintenance] of Web Utilities. For the detail of Web Utilities, refer to E.
1.3.4 Initial setting.
2. Press [Administrator Setting] [Network Setting] [http Communication Setting].
[Enable Proxy Server]: Set whether to use a http proxy server or not.
[Proxy Server Address]: Set the host name of the proxy server or IP address. When inputting the host name, set the DNS server on
[Machine NIC Setting].
When the proxy server authentication is required, follow the procedures below.
(Ex.) When the proxy server name: www.example.com, user name: user and password: password, enter
"user:password@www.example.com."
Proxy Server Port: Set the port number of the proxy server.
[Enable SSL]: Set whether to use SLL or not.
[Enable Authentication]: Set whether to use the Web server authentication or not.
[Authentication User Name]: Set the user name of the Web Server authentication.
[Authentication Password]: Set the password of the Web Server authentication.
4. Press [OK].
5.11.9 http Communication Setting (In the case of controller NIC)

Set the following settings when a http proxy server is used or when a web server authentication is required.
2. Press [Administrator Setting] [Controller] [ControllerSetSet] [http Communication Setting].
[Proxy Server Setting]: Set whether to use a http proxy server or not.
[Proxy Server Address]: Select the address specifying method (IPv4/IPv6/host name) and press [Proxy Server Address] to set the
server address. When inputting the host name, set the DNS server on [TCP/IP Setting] in [Controller NIC Setting].
When the proxy server authentication is needed, set as following.
(Example) In the case of Proxy Server Name: www.example.com, User Name: user, Password: password, enter
"user:password@www.example.com".
[Proxy Server Port Number]: Set the port number of the proxy server.
[SSL Setting]: Set the enable/disable of SSL Encryption.
[Enable Authentication]: Set whether to use Web Server authentication or not.
[Authentication User Name]: Set the user name of the Web Server authentication.
[Authentication Password]: Set the password of the Web Server authentication.
4. Press [OK].
5.11.10 Input procedure of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care

Note
DIPSW bits data are written into the NVRAM board (NRB) every time a change is made. In case you changed bit data by accident,
be sure to restore the previous state.
Input procedure
2. Press [CS Remote Care] [CS Remote Care] on [Service Mode menu] screen.
3. Press [ID Code] on [CS Remote Care setting] screen.
5. Press [Detail setting].
6. Press [Software DIPSW Setting] on the Utility menu screen.
7. Select the DIPSW number on "Software DIPSW Setting."
Use the left arrow key or the numeric keys.
8. Select the DIPSW bit number.
Use the left arrow key or the numeric keys.
9. Select [ON (1)] or [OFF (0)].
10. Press [Return] to return to the "Setting menu screen."
Note
About functions of each switch, refer to I.5.11.11 List of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care.
5.11.11 List of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care

Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
1 0 Dial mode 0: Pulse dial 1 1 1
1: Tone dial
1 Modem reception 0: Receive (Issue ATA by RING 0 0 0
delivery)
1: Not receive (Not issue ATA
by RING delivery)
I -198
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
2 Reservation 0: - 0 0 0
3 1: - 0 0 0
4 Baud rate 1200bps: 1-7=0, 1-6=0, 1-5=1, 0 0 0
5 1-4=1 0 0 0
2400bps: 1-7=0, 1-6=1, 1-5=0,
6 1-4=0 0 0 0
7 4800bps: 1-7=0, 1-6=1, 1-5=0, 1 1 1
1-4=1
9600bps: 1-7=0, 1-6=1, 1-5=1,
1-4=0
19200bps: 1-7=0, 1-6=1, 1-5=1,
1-4=1
38400bps: 1-7=1, 1-6=0, 1-5=0,
1-4=0
57600bps: 1-7=1, 1-6=0, 1-5=0,
1-4=1
2 0 Auto call on SC occurrence 0: OFF 1 1 1
1 Auto call on date specification 1: ON 1 1 1
2 Auto call on the part replacement 1 1 1
3 Auto call on the drum replacement 1 1 1
4 Auto call on the periodic maintenance (PM) 1 1 1
5 ORU-M start/finish notification 0: Not notify 1 1 1
1: Notify
1: -
7 Automatic calling when reset fixed replacement 0: OFF 0 0 0
parts 1: ON
3 0 Reservation 0: - 0 0 0
1: -
1 Auto call on the toner supply 0: OFF 1 1 1
2 Auto call on frequent JAM occurrence 1: ON 1 1 1
3 Notification of waste toner box full 1 1 1
4 Call on fusing cleaning web count over 1 1 1
5 Call on Toner collection filter count over 1 1 1
6 Call on fusing external heating count over 1 1 1
1: -
4 0 CS Remote Care communication mode Data modem: 4-1=0, 4-0=0 0 0 0
1 FAX (not used): 4-1=0, 4-0=1 1 1 1
E-mail: 4-1=1, 4-0=0
http: 4-1=1, 4-0=1
3 1: - 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
5 0 Modem redial interval 1 minute: 5-3=0, 5-2=0, 5-1=0, 1 1 1
1 5-0=1 1 1 1
2 minutes: 5-3=0, 5-2=0, 5-1=1,
2 5-0=0 0 0 0
3 3 minutes: 5-3=0, 5-2=0, 5-1=1, 0 0 0
5-0=1
4 minutes: 5-3=0, 5-2=1, 5-1=0,
5-0=0
5 minutes: 5-3=0, 5-2=1, 5-1=0,
5-0=1
6 minutes: 5-3=0, 5-2=1, 5-1=1,
5-0=0
7 minutes: 5-3=0, 5-2=1, 5-1=1,
5-0=1
8 minutes: 5-3=1, 5-2=0, 5-1=0,
5-0=0
9 minutes: 5-3=1, 5-2=0, 5-1=0,
5-0=1
10 minutes: 5-3=1, 5-2=0,
5-1=1, 5-0=0
I -199
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
5 1: - 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
6 0 Modem redial times 0 to 9: 000 0000 to 000 1001 0 0 0
1 10: 000 1010 1 1 1
11 to 99: 000 1011 to 110 0011
2 (6 to 0 bit) 0 0 0
3 1 1 1
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
1: -
7 0 Redial for response time out 0: Not redial 1 1 1
1: Redial
2 1: - 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
8 0 Retransmission interval on E-mail delivery error 0 minute: 8-3=0, 8-2=0, 8-1=0, 0 0 0
1 8-0=0 1 1 1
10 minutes: 8-3=0, 8-2=0,
2 8-1=0, 8-0=1 1 1 1
3 20 minutes: 8-3=0, 8-2=0, 0 0 0
8-1=1, 8-0=0
30 minutes: 8-3=0, 8-2=0,
8-1=1, 8-0=1
40 minutes: 8-3=0, 8-2=1,
8-1=0, 8-0=0
50 minutes: 8-3=0, 8-2=1,
8-1=0, 8-0=1
60 minutes: 8-3=0, 8-2=1,
8-1=1, 8-0=0
70 minutes: 8-3=0, 8-2=1,
8-1=1, 8-0=1
80 minutes: 8-3=1, 8-2=0,
8-1=0, 8-0=0
90 minutes: 8-3=1, 8-2=0,
8-1=0, 8-0=1
100 minutes: 8-3=1, 8-2=0,
8-1=1, 8-0=0
110 minutes: 8-3=1, 8-2=0,
8-1=1, 8-0=1
120 minutes: 8-3=1, 8-2=1,
8-1=0, 8-0=0
6 1: - 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
9 0 Retransmission times on E-mail delivery error 0 to 9: 000 0000 to 000 1001 0 0 0
1 10: 000 1010 1 1 1
11 to 99: 000 1011 to 110 0011
2 (6 to 0 bit) 0 0 0
3 1 1 1
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
1: -
10 0 Time zone setting -12 to -1: 1111 0100 to 1111 0 0 0
1 1111 0 0 0
0: 0000 0000
2 1 to 12: 0000 0001 to 0001100 0 0 0
3 (7 to 0 bit) 0 0 0
I -200
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
4 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
11 0 Timer 1 0 to 31sec: 0000 0000 to 0001 0 0 0
1 RING receive CONNECT receive 1111 0 0 0
32sec: 0010 0000
2 33 to 255sec: 0010 0001 to 0 0 0
3 1111 1111 0 0 0
4 (7 to 0 bit) 0 0 0
5 1 1 1
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
12 0 Timer 2 0 to 63sec: 0000 0000 to 0011 0 0 0
1 Dial calling complete CONNECT receive 1111 0 0 0
64sec: 0100 0000
2 65 to 255sec: 0100 0001 to 0 0 0
3 1111 1111 0 0 0
4 (7 to 0 bit) 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 1 1 1
7 0 0 0
13 0 Timer 3 0: - 0 0 0
1 Not used 1: - 1 1 1
2 0 0 0
3 1 1 1
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
14 0 Timer 4 0 to 31 (x 100msec): 0000 0000 0 0 0
1 Connection Start request telegram delivery to 0001 1111 0 0 0
32 (x 100msec): 0010 0000
2 33 to 255 (x 100msec): 0010 0 0 0
3 0001 to 1111 1111 0 0 0
4 (7 to 0 bit) 0 0 0
5 1 1 1
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
15 0 Timer 5 0 to 29sec: 0000 0000 to 0001 0 0 0
1 Wait time for the response from other side 1101 1 1 1
30sec: 0001 1110
2 31 to 255sec: 0001 1111 to 1 1 1
3 1111 1111 1 1 1
4 (7 to 0 bit) 1 1 1
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
16 0 Retry data, timer 6 0 to 254 (x 5msec): 0000 0000 1 1 1
1 Initialization OK Dial request to 1111 1110 1 1 1
255 (x 5msec): 1111 1111
2 (7 to 0 bit) 1 1 1
3 1 1 1
4 1 1 1
5 1 1 1
6 1 1 1
7 1 1 1
17 0 Call on frequent JAM occurrence (main body) 3000 copies: 17-1=0, 17-0=0 1 1 1
1 Number of enabled copy 6000 copies: 17-1=0, 17-0=1 0 0 0
9000 copies: 17-1=1, 17-0=0
12000 copies: 17-1=1, 17-0=1
2 Call on frequent JAM occurrence (ADF) 600 copies : 17-3=0, 17-2=0 1 1 1
Number of enabled original feed 1200 copies : 17-3=0, 17-2=1
I -201
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
3 1800 copies : 17-3=1, 17-2=0 0 0 0
2400 copies : 17-3=1, 17-2=1
4 Call on frequent JAM occurrence (main body) 500: 17-5=0, 17-4=0 1 1 1
5 MCBJ setting 1000: 17-5=0, 17-4=1 0 0 0
2000: 17-5=1, 17-4=0
3000: 17-5=1, 17-4=1
6 Call on frequent JAM occurrence (ADF) 100: 17-7=0, 17-6=0 1 1 1
7 MOBJ setting 200: 17-7=0, 17-6=1 0 0 0
400: 17-7=1, 17-6=0
600: 17-7=1, 17-6=1
18 0 Attention display 0: OFF 1 1 1
1: ON
2 1: - 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
19 0 E-mail/http communication mode 0: Duplex 0 0 0
1: Simplex
2 1: - 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
20 0 http Heart Beat function 0: ON 0 0 0
1: OFF
1 http Heart Beat Fix send 0: Off 1 1 1
1: ON
3 1: - 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 Auto sending of the JAM history when call on 0: OFF 1 1 1
frequent JAM occurrence occurs 1: ON
6 Sending frequent paper JAM alert 1 1 1
7 Sending frequent original JAM alert 1 1 1
21 0 Threshold of sending frequent paper JAM alert Once: 00000001 1 1 1
1 Twice: 00000010 0 0 0
3 times: 00000011
2 4 times: 00000100 1 1 1
3 5 times: 00000101 0 0 0
4 6 times: 00000110 0 0 0
7 times: 00000111
5 1 1 1
8 times: 00001000
6 9 times: 00001001 0 0 0
7 10 times: 00001010 1 1 1
11 times: 00001011
22 0 Threshold of sending frequent original JAM alert 0 0 0
12 times: 00001100
1 13 times: 00001101 0 0 0
2 14 times: 00001110 0 0 0
15 times: 00001111
3 0 0 0
Other: Invalid (regarded as 5
4 times) 0 0 0
5 (7 to 0 bit) 1 1 1
6 0 0 0
7 1 1 1
23 0 Reservation 0: - 0 0 0
1 1: - 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
I -202
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
24 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
25 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
26 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
27 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
28 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
29 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
30 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
I -203
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
31 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
32 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
33 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
34 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
35 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
36 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
37 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
I -204
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
7 0 0 0
38 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
39 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
40 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
5.11.12 Setup confirmation

3. Make sure that only selected item "E-Mail", "Modem", or "http" is displayed on the "CS Remote Care setting screen".
5.11.13 Maintenance call

As the CE starts the maintenance, enter the ID code of CE (7-digit number with which each CE is identified, managed by a distributor.) to notify
the center the start of maintenance. After the maintenance, pressing [Maintenance Comp] notifies the center the completion of maintenance.
At the start of maintenance

* During the maintenance, [Start] button blinks until the completion of the maintenance.
At the end of maintenance

3. Press [Maintenance Comp] on the "CS Remote Care setting screen."
5.11.14 Center call from administrator

If the setup of CS Remote Care is completed, the manager can call the center of CS Remote Care.
1. Press [Utility/Counter] button.
2. Press [Administrator Setting] [System Connection] [Administrator Call] on [Utility] screen.
3. Press [Start] on [Administrator Call] screen.
If the setup is not completed, or if other call is made, [Start] is grayed out, disabling to make a call.
About how to call the center and send various data of the main body on the specified date and time, refer to the manual of CS Remote Care
center.
5.11.15 Confirm communication log

You can output and confirm the communication log.
2. Press [List Output] on the "Service Mode menu" screen.
3. Press [Communication Log List] on the "List Output screen."
5. Press start button to output the selected list.
I -205
For details of the log, refer to "I.5.12 List Output."
5.11.16 Initialization of RAM for CS Remote Care

Initializing the RAM for CS Remote Care enables you to perform the setup again.
5. Press [Detail setting].
6. Press [RAM Clear] button on Utility screen.
7. Press [Execute] on "RAM Clear Setting" screen.
8. Press [Yes] on the confirmation screen.
9. The RAM is cleared, and the "CS Remote Care setting screen" is displayed.
10. Perform the setup again if necessary.
5.11.17 CS Remote Care error code list

Classificatio
Error Code Description Troubleshooting procedure
n
Connection K-0000 Connection NG (Cannot connect from the Redial.
via modem modem, timed out).
K-0001 Error code that may occur when a Redial and wait for re-reception.
transmission is made from the main body
to the center.
No response (After connection, no start
telegram from the center detected).
K-0002 Copying. Could not be written in non-
volatile memory, and line disconnected.
K-0003 Error code that may occur when a Confirm the center ID.
to the center.
Center ID mismatch.
K-0004 Serial number mismatch. Confirm the serial number.
K-0005 Error code that may occur when a Redial.
to the center.
Syntax error (when receiving undefined
commands or parameters)
K-0006 Received a write order for an unwritable
item.
K-0007 Unread item error.
to the center.
Signal reception time out after a
response detection (after the start
telegram shuttled).
K-0009 Error code that may occur when a
to the center.
Already registered serial number.
to the center.
Communication error occurred because
of the carrier OFF (NO CARRIER
detected in the modem).
to the center.
Dial tone (NO DIALTONE) detected in
the modem.
to the center.
Busy signal (BUSY) detected in the
modem.
to the center.
NO ANSWER detected in the modem.
I -206
Classificatio
Error Code Description Troubleshooting procedure
n
K-0014 Error code that may occur when a Retry standard times, and redial.
to the center.
Telegram error (irregular telegram
received in response to the telegram you
sent).
K-0015 Serial number not registered in the center
(4 x 40 telegrams received).
to the center.
Errors not defined in K-0000 to 0015.
to the center.
Telephone number you must call was not
registered.
to the center.
DSR turned OFF or remains turned OFF.
K-0101 Error on creating a message queue.
K-0102 Error on generating a task.
to the center.
Error on sending a message.
to the center.
Error on receiving a message.
to the center.
Received an error (NG) from the timer
task.
to the center.
Modem initialization NG.
to the center.
Center call evacuation buffer is full.
Cannot evacuate any more.
Connection K-0590 Because of (E-mail/http) memory
via E-mail/ shortage, unable to secure enough area
http for sending a mail.
K-0592 (E-mail/http) Controller in operation: In the manual transmission, retry when the controller is idling. In the
unable to send a mail because the auto transmission, an automatic retry is performed after 1minute.
controller is in operation.
K-0593 Sending error: In the auto transmission, an automatic retry is performed after the
(E-mail) Error comes back from the mail specified time. Check if there is no fault in the network environment
server. and the network settings.
(http) Storing mail to Web server fails.
K-0594 (E-mail/http) Machine in operation: In the manual transmission, retry when the machine is idling. In the
unable to send a mail because the auto transmission, an automatic retry is performed after 1minute.
machine is in operation.
K-0595 (E-mail/http) Controller not connected: Check the connection between the controller and the main body.
unable to send a mail because the
controller is not connected.
K-0596 (E-mail/http) Controller-driven SC: unable If there is the controller-driven SC, a mail cannot be sent through the
to send a mail because of a controller- controller. Use a telephone. This error does not occur with the main
driven SC (49-xx). body NIC.
K-0597 (E-mail/http) No reply from controller
K-0600 (http) Fails to make the directory on Web
server
I -207
5.11.18 TROUBLESHOOTING
Check the followings when the main body does not receive the initial connection mail or does not return a response.
1. The center ID or the machine ID are not set in the main body.
2. The center ID or the machine ID are different (A machine ID error is not returned at the initial connection).
3. CS Remote Care function is disabled, or the phone line is selected in the CS Remote Care function selection.
4. Communication between the main body and the mail server is not proper (Check it with a transmission test).
5.12 List Output

(1) Usage
Output various lists.
(2) Procedure
Press [10 List Output].
2. "List Output screen"
The list output mode menu includes the following items.
Coverage data list
Parameter List
Font Pattern
Communication Log List *1
Maintenance History
Memory Dump List
Note
When setting DIPSW30-1 to 1, the Font Pattern, Communication Log List and Memory Dump List are displayed.
When setting DIPSW15-0 to 1, the Maintenance History and ORU-M Maintenance History are displayed.
Do not use the parameter list and the memory dump list in the field because they are for development.

When outputting to the USB memory, press [Output All to USB].
4. [USB Memory Connection screen]
Connect the USB memory to the service port and press [OK].
Note
The following data are stored; Counter List, Mode Memory List, User Management List, Use Management List, Audit Log
Report, Machine Management List, Adjustment Data List, Coverage Data List and Maintenance History.
When setting DIPSW30-1 to 1, the Parameter List and the Communication Log List are also stored.
When setting DIPSW15-0 to 1, the ORU-M Maintenance History is also stored.
File Type
tab-delimited text file
Save directory
Root directory
File naming convention
listprint<Machine code> + <Destination code> + <Serial No.>_<YMD>_<Time>.txt
Example:
listprint505A000123456_20100107_1010.txt

To print on paper, press [Print Mode].
Press [Print Mode].
7. Press the Start key to output the selected list.
To output other lists, repeat steps 2 to 8.
*1 Prints out the latest 30 items of the sending and receiving history of the CS Remote Care. The start time of communications, the time
period of communications (modem only), the communication modes, the results of communications, and the senders (mail only) are printed.
The communication modes and the results of communications are displayed in the numbers of 4 digit number. For the meaning of them, refer
to the following table.
Communication mode Results of communication
0000 - Transmitted successfully
0001 Initial transmission Connection time out when
transmitting
0002 Emergency transmission -
0004 Emergency recovery transmission Received successfully
0005 - Reception failed
0008 Transmission for warning -
0010 Warning recovery transmission -
0020 Maintenance start transmission -
0040 Maintenance completion -
transmission
I -208
0080 Administrator transmission -

0100 Fixed date transmission -
0200 Response transmission -
0*** - Transmission failed
1000 Enquiry -
2000 Data rewrite -
4000 Response reception -
8000 Test mail -
The SMTP reply codes (200 to 554) prescribed in the RFC1846, 2554 and 2821 are displayed in this place of ***.
5.13 Test Mode

5.13.1 Running Test Mode
(1) Usage
Conduct a test while in the continuous print operation.
In this mode, the following items can be selected:
Intermittent copy
After completion of the printing operation for the set print count, the machine changes into the ready state and waits for 0.5sec. before
resuming the same operation.
Paperless running mode
Without feeding paper and detecting paper or jam, the printing operation is made nearly at the same timing as the normal operation.
In the same manner as the intermittent copy, after completion of the printing operation for the set print count, the machine changes into
the ready state and waits for 0.5sec. before resuming the same operation.
Paperless Mode
In the same manner as the paperless mode, without detecting paper or jam, the printing operation is made nearly at the same timing as
the normal operation.
Paperless endless mode
The machine operates with the print count infinitely set automatically. In the same manner as the paperless mode, without feeding paper
and detecting paper or jam, the printing operation is made nearly at the same timing as the normal operation.
Running Mode
The printing operation is made in the paperless endless mode plus the scanning operation and the auto paper feed tray switching.
(2) Procedure
Press [11 Test Mode].
2. "Test Mode menu screen"
Select the mode to be adjusted and press [Print Mode].
3. Press the Start button to start the running test.
4. Press the STOP button to stop the running test.
5.13.2 Test Pattern Output Mode

(1) Usage
Output various test patterns to use them for troubleshooting.
Note
Do not use any test pattern number not described in the service manual.
(2) Procedure
Press [11 Test Mode].
2. "Test Mode menu screen"
Press [02 Test Pattern Output Mode ].
3. "Test Pattern screen"
Press any of the keys [Test Pattern], [Gradation-Y], [Gradation-M], [Gradation-C] or [Gradation-K]. Enter the test pattern number to output
through the numeric buttons and then press [SET].
When selecting the screen, press any of the keys [Line1], [Line2], [Dot1], [Dot2], [Stochastic] or [Contone].
When specifying arbitrary density, press [SET] and proceed to step 4. In other cases, proceed to step 6.
4. "Density Setting Display screen"
Specify the coverage or the background density.
Enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [SET].
Setting Range
Coverage-Y/M/C/K: 0% (low) to 100% (high)
Background-Y/M/C/K: 0 (light) to 255 (dark)
5. Press [Return].
7. Set the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the Start key to output the test pattern.
8. To output another test pattern, press [Exit PrintMode] and repeat steps 3 to 7.
5.13.3 Test Pattern No.11 Beam check

(1) [Check item 1]
Check the solid black pattern to see if there is uneven density found in the main scan and sub scan directions.
I -209
[Recommended checkpoints]: Charging corona, developing unit, intermediate transfer unit, 2nd transfer unit, and dust-proof glass
(2) [Check item 2]

Check to see if there is any image repelling in the gradation pattern at the leading/trailing edge of the test pattern in the sub scan
direction.
[Recommended checkpoints]: 2nd transfer unit
(3) Test pattern
[1]
[2]
8050fs1020
[1] Solid black pattern [2] Gradation pattern
5.13.4 Test Pattern No.16 Linearity evaluation pattern

(1) [Check item]
Judge from this test pattern whether the scanner system or the printer system is abnormal.
Items that can be checked include main scan magnification, sub scan magnification, image skew, and leading edge timing of the printer
system. If the copy image is defective despite no abnormality being visible on the test pattern, the scanner system is defective.
(2) Test pattern

[1]
31mm 237mm
20mm
[1]
190mm
m
0m
28
205.7mm
28
0m
m
190mm
190mm 8050fs1021
[1] Storage of image data
5.13.5 Test Pattern No.40 Image skew check pattern (Full-bleed print of Test Pattern No.16)
(1) [Purpose]
The pattern is printed 1mm over of the rear edge in the sub scan direction and the both side edges in the main scan direction. It is
effective to check the image skew.
I -210
Note
The printable range in the main scan direction is 299mm, therefore the 297mm or shorter paper in the main scan direction can
be used for this Test Pattern.
(2) Test pattern
5.13.6 Test Pattern No.49 RU color sensor gamma correction (Output paper density adjustment chart i1-iSis/i1-Pro)
(1) [Purpose]
Used by "Output Paper Density Adj." in the user's mode.
A test pattern used for registering the paper category in "Output Paper Density Adj.."
Note
This test pattern has 3 sizes.
(2) Test pattern
5.13.7 Test Pattern No.51 Gradation evaluation pattern (Main scan)

(1) [Check item]
If there are image stripes or the uneven density, check if the write system or the process system operates normally.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Developing unit, cleaning unit, charging corona, 2nd transfer unit, and dust-proof glass
I -211
(2) Test pattern
a03uf3c002ca
5.13.8 Test Pattern No.52 Gradation evaluation pattern (Sub scan)

(1) [Check item]
If there are image stripes or the uneven density, check if the write system or the process system operates normally.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Developing unit, cleaning unit, charging corona, 2nd transfer unit, and dust-proof glass
(2) Test pattern
a03uf3c003ca
5.13.9 Test Pattern No.53 Overall halftone

(1) [Check item]
Check the image quality of each screen. (No.1 can print only with Contone)
When density is set to 70 (halftone)
If there are image stripes, determine whether the fault is with the write system or the process system.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Developing unit, cleaning unit, intermediate transfer unit, charging corona, 2nd transfer unit, and dust-proof
glass
When the density is set to 0 (white)
If image fogging occurs,check whether the printer system operates normally.
Recommended checkpoints]: Charging corona and high voltage contact.
When the density is set to 255 (Y, M, C, K)
If the density is light check whether the printer system operates normally.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Write unit
*Refer to "I.5.13.2 Test Pattern Output Mode" for adjusting density.
I -212
(2) Test pattern
8050fs1019
[1] When the density is set to 70 [3] When the density is set to 255
[2] When the density is set to 0 -
5.13.10 Test Pattern No.54 Gradation evaluation pattern

(1) [Purpose]
Check gradation reproducibility of each screen.
For details on procedures to select screens, refer to "I.5.13.2 Test Pattern Output Mode"
Screen Purpose Check item
Line1 Check the gradation reproducibility of each screen used Make sure that the gradation of each color is smooth and
Line2 by the copier from primary color to secondary color. even with no tone jump.
[Recommended checkpoint]: Conduct Printer Gamma
Dot1 Sensor Adj. and Printer Gamma Offset Adj.
Dot2
Stochastic
Contone Check the gradation reproducibility of the screen used in Make sure that the density increases in incremental step
the character area when the screen mentioned above is from the high light side, and the density in the shadow
selected by the copier. section of each color is dark enough.
Sensor Adj.
(2) Test pattern

[2] [1]
a03uf3c004ca
[1] Primary color [2] Secondary color
I -213
5.13.11 Test Pattern No.55 5% coverage

(1) [Purpose]
When making test prints continuously in order to check the paper feed performance or etc., use this 5% coverage test pattern to protect
developer, drums, cleaners etc. from burden.
(2) Test pattern
a03uf3c005ca
5.13.12 Test Pattern No.58 Stripe check pattern

(1) [Usage]
Use to locate the causes of sub-scan direction stripes which occur on the image.
(2) [Checking procedure]

1. Select [Test Pattern] and set the density of each color M, C and K to "120".
2. Select [Dot1] for screen.
3. Press [Print Mode] and set a sheet of A3 or 11 x 17 paper.
4. Check whether the sub-scan direction stripes occur on area [1] or [2].
(3) [Recommended checkpoints]

In the case of [1] : Intermediate transfer unit, 2nd transfer roller /Lw
In the case of [2] : Drum cartridge
(4) Test pattern
[2] [1]
a03uf3c034ca
5.13.13 Test Pattern No.62 Uneven density check pattern

(1) [Usage]
After the periodic maintenance, check uneven density and density difference between right and left side by each gradation of YMCK, RBG
and process Bk.
Check uneven density with both edges [1] and [2] of Y, M, C and process Bk.
(2) [Checking procedure]

1. Select [Test Pattern] and set the density of each color M, C and K to "255".
2. Select [Dot1] (default of controller) and [Line1] (default of copier) for screen.
3. Press [Print Mode] and set 8 sheets of A4 or 8 1/ x 11 paper.
2
I -214
(3) [Recommended checkpoints]

Charging corona, write unit
(4) Test pattern
[1]
[2]
a03uf3c035ca
5.13.14 Test Pattern No.75 Density correction pattern i1-iSis XL

(1) [Purpose]
A test pattern output by the density balance adjustment chart of the user's mode.
(2) Test pattern
5.13.15 Test Pattern No.76 Density correction pattern i1-Pro (Type1/Type2)

(1) [Purpose]
A test pattern output by the density balance adjustment chart of the user's mode.
(2) Test pattern

Type1
I -215
Type2
5.13.16 Test Pattern No.77 Density correction pattern Manual

(1) [Purpose]
A test pattern output by "Output Paper Density Manual Adj." in the user's mode.
I -216
(2) Test pattern
5.13.17 Test Pattern No.80 Print peculiarity evaluation pattern

(1) [Purpose]
Check gradation reproducibility of each screen.
For details on procedures to select screens, refer to "I.5.13.2 Test Pattern Output Mode".
Screen Purpose Check item
Line1 Check the gradation reproducibility of each screen used Make sure that the gradation of each color is smooth and
Line2 by the copier from primary color to tertiary color. even with no tone jump.
Dot1 Sensor Adj. and Printer Gamma Offset Adj.
Dot2
Stochastic
Contone Check the gradation reproducibility of the screen used in Make sure that the density increases in incremental step
the character area when the screen mentioned above is from the high light side, and the density in the shadow
selected by the copier. section of each color is dark enough.
Sensor Adj.
(2) Test pattern
b
c
a
b
c
a03uf3c024ca
A: Primary color
B: Secondary color
C: Tertiary color
5.13.18 Test Pattern No.88 Chart file output

(1) Usage
Prints a chart (TIFF image) stored in the USB media.
Note
USB media stands for USB memory or USB HDD.
Only USB media in FAT32 format is supported.
The service port is designed for low-power devices. When using a high-power device such as HDD, connect the external power
source to the device.
I -217
(2) Preparation:
1. Set the service port device setting to [ON].
(3) How to use

When using this function, contact the service manager of the authorized distributor to confirm its handling.
5.14 Setting Data

5.14.1 Load from external memory
(1) Outline
Stores each setting information stored in NVRAM board (NRB) from the machine to the USB memory and writes it from the USB memory to
the machine. However, the setting data cannot be edited since it is encrypted.
(a) Setting information which is able to store/write

Data items Data content
Paper setting data Tray setting
Paper Setting Register/
Delete
Register/Delete custom
size
Utility data Utility
Software DIPSW setting data Software DIPSW
CSRC setting data CSRC setting
(2) Preparation:
Connect the USB memory to the main body connection port.
(3) Procedure
Press [13 Setting Data].
2. "Setting Data menu screen"
Press [01 Read from external memory].
Note
If the USB memory is not connected to the connection port, the error message appears not to go on to the file selection
screen.
3. "Setting Data Scan File Selection screen"

Press [Next] or [Back] to select the file to be read and press [OK].
Note
By pressing [Limit], only the file corresponded to the serial number of the machine appears.
4. "Setting Data Scan Item Selection screen"

Select the data to be read from [Paper Setting Data]/[Utility data]/[Software DIPSW Setting Data]/[CSRC Setting Data] and press [Start
Reading].
5. "Pop-up screen"
Press [Yes] to start reading the setting data.
Note
Be sure not to turn OFF the main power switch (SW1) until the reading file completes.
6. "Setting Data Scan Complete screen"

To read another setting data, press [Continue]. To finish the procedure, press [Exit].
Note
By pressing [Exit], the machine restarts automatically.
5.14.2 Store to external memory

(1) Functions
Store the setting data from NRB to the USB memory.
(2) Preparation:
Connect the USB memory to the main body connection port.
I -218
(3) Procedure
Press [13 Setting Data].
2. "Setting Data menu screen"
Press [02 Store to external memory].
3. "Setting Data Start to Store screen"
Press [Start Storing].
Note
Be sure not to turn OFF the main power switch (SW1) until the storing file completes.
4. "Setting Data Store Complete screen"

Press [OK], to go back to "Setting Data <Store to external memory> screen".
(4) Folder structure of USB memory

When storing data to the USB memory and the folder is not created, it creates the next folder automatically.
C7000
NOVRAM
(5) Error list

If the error occurs for reading from the external memory or for storing to the external memory, the error message appears. Confirm the
following contents and the causes when the error message appears.
Message Cause of occurrence
Connection of an external memory device 1) The initialization of the USB device is not completed.
cannot be recognized. 2) The USB memory is not connected to the connection port.
It cannot store to the external memory device. 3) Prohibit to write to the USB memory
4) Capacity shortage of the USB memory
5) Unable to execute the compression from the binary data to
the ZLIB compressed data.
6) Unable to encrypt AES.
It cannot read from the external memory 7) Data error on the header (2nd line)
device. 8) Checksum abnormality
9) Unable to execute the replacement from the BASE64 data
to the AES encrypt data.
10) Unable to execute the compounding of AES.
11) Unable to execute the extension from the ZLIB
compressed data to the binary data.
5.15 Log Store

5.15.1 Log Store Setting
(1) Usage
Set the log storing method for troubleshooting.
(2) Procedure
Press [14 Log Store].
2. "Log Store menu screen"
Press [01 Log Store Setting].
3. "Log Store Setting screen"
Set each item.
"Store To"
Press [USB Memory] or [HDD].
Note
The "Service Port Device" must be set to [ON] in the utility mode of the "User Setting-System Setting-Service Port
Device Setting", or the USB memory cannot be used.
When DIPSW2-0: 0 or DIPSW18-7: 1, the storage to HDD is not available.
"Encryption Password" setting

Note
When [USB Memory] is selected on "Store To", only [ON] can be selected for "Encryption Password".
1. Press [ON].
2. "Encryption Password Input screen"
Input the password and press [OK].
Note
The default password is "0000".
Input the password within 16-digit.
"Auto Log Store"
When "Auto Log Store" is set to "ON", the log is automatically stored when SC (except for HDD related SC) occurs.
I -219
Note
File name rule
With the file name created from the date, time, and SC number, the log is stored (encrypt zip) in the Log directory.
Example:
/Log/201001070925SC_48_50.zip
100 logs can be stored at the maximum. Be sure to clear the log file when the number exceeds 100. (Refer to I.5.15.2
Execute Log Storing)
When "USB Memory" is selected on "Store To" and the USB memory is not connected to the service port, the log is not
stored automatically.
"Manual Log Store"

When "Manual Log Store" is set to "ON", the log can be stored manually by I.5.15.2 Execute Log Storing.
Note
When "Manual Log Store" is set to [ON], [Log Store] button is displayed on "System Information" screen of Utility. User can collect
the log with this button.
When the user collects the log, explain that the sub power switch (SW2) must be turned OFF or ON after collecting the log.
5.15.2 Execute Log Storing

(1) Usage
Store the log for trouble shooting manually.
Note
The "Service Port Device" must be set to [ON] in the utility mode of the "User Setting-System Setting-Service Port Device
Setting", or the USB memory cannot be used.
When DIPSW2-0: 0 or DIPSW18-7: 1, the storage to HDD is not available.
100 logs can be stored at the maximum. Be sure to clear the log file when the number exceeds 100.
With the file name created from the date and time, the log is stored (encrypt zip) in the Log directory.
Be sure to turn OFF or ON the sub power switch (SW2) after the execution of [Manual Log Store].
(2) Procedure
Press [14 Log Store].
2. "Log Store menu screen"
Press [02 Execute Log Storing].
3. "Execute Log Storing screen"
The operation differs depending on the "Store To" setting in I.5.15.1 Log Store Setting.
When USB memory is set as destination to which log is stored
[Manual Log Store]: Stores the log in the USB memory.
1. Press [Manual Log Store].
[Transfer to USB Memory]: Cannot be selected.
[Clear Log File]: Clears the log in the USB memory.
1. Press [Clear Log File].
When HDD is set as destination to which log is stored
[Manual Log Store]: Stores the log in HDD.
1. Press [Manual Log Store].
[Transfer to USB Memory]:
Transfers the log stored in the HDD to the route directory of the USB memory.
1. Press [Transfer to USB Memory].
[Clear Log File]: Clears the log in the HDD.
1. Press [Clear Log File].
2. "Clear Log File screen"
Press [OK].
5.16 ORU-M Setting

5.16.1 ORU-M object/Life setting
(1) OUTLINE
Set the ORU-M target unit and the life.
Note
ORU-M has to be enabled to select this setting. (The default is disabled.) To enable ORU-M, set DIPSW15-0: 1.
(2) Procedure
Press [15 ORU-M Setting].
2. "ORU-M Setting screen"
Press [01 ORU-M object/Life setting].
3. "ORU-M object/Life Setting screen"
Press "" or "" to select the unit to be set.
To set to the ORU-M target, press the button on the left of the unit to be registered and set it to "Enable".
4. To change the setting, select the replacement unit.
I -220

Setting Range
Replacement Unit Standard Life Setting Range
Intermediate transfer unit 300,000 prints 66 to 333%
Developing Unit (Yellow) 600km 50 to 120%
Developing Unit (Magenta) 600km 50 to 120%
Developing Unit (Cyan) 600km 50 to 120%
Developing Unit (Black) 600km 50 to 120%
Developer Unit (Yellow) 200km 50 to 120%
Developer Unit (Magenta) 200km 50 to 120%
Developer Unit (Cyan) 200km 50 to 120%
Developer Unit (Black) 200km 50 to 120%
Fusing unit 450,000 prints 50 to 120%
Drum Unit (Yellow) 102km 80 to 113%
Drum Unit (Magenta) 102km 80 to 113%
Drum Unit (Cyan) 102km 80 to 113%
Drum Unit (Black) 102km 80 to 113%
Charging Corona (Yellow) 70 hours 57 to 143%
Charging Corona (Magenta) 70 hours 57 to 143%
Charging Corona (Cyan) 70 hours 57 to 143%
Charging Corona (Black) 70 hours 57 to 143%
Dust proof filter (A, B) 600,000 prints 50 to 120%
Dust-proof filter(3) Right 600,000 prints 50 to 120%
Charging dust proof filter 600,000 prints 50 to 120%
Separation Rubber (Tray1) 400,000 prints 50 to 120%
Feed Roller (Tray1) 2,400,000 prints 50 to 120%
5.16.2 ORU-M Life Threshold Setting

(1) Usage
Set whether to display the ORU-M object unit in the ORU-M modeby the life value. When the ORU-M object unit is set to "Enable", the units
whose life value reaches the display threshold setting are displayed in the ORU-M mode.
Note
(2) Procedure
Press [02 ORU-M Life Threshold Setting].
3. "ORU-M Life Threshold Setting screen"
1 step = 1%
Note
Default is 0%.
5.16.3 ORU-M Password Setting

(1) Usage
Set the password to enter the ORU-M mode.
Note
(2) Procedure
Press [03 ORU-M Password Setting].
3. "ORU-M Password Setting screen"
Press [New Password], then a keyboard screen appears. Enter new password (4 digits) using the alphanumeric keys and then press
[OK].
I -221
4. Press [Input Confirmation], then a keyboard screen appears. Enter new password (4 digits) using the alphanumeric keys again and then
press [OK].
I -222
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. IC-601 SERVICE MODE
6. IC-601 SERVICE MODE

6.1 IC Service Mode List
This machine is provided with a service mode for various adjustments/settings. Data adjusted/set with this mode is stored in HDD.
01 System Setting
01 Software DIPSW Setting
02 Firmware Version
03 ISW
01 Internet ISW
02 USB Memory ISW
04 IC HDD format
05 CSV File Import/Export
06 Font Backup
99 Log File Check
6.2 Start/exit of Service Mode

6.2.1 Method to activate IC service mode
To access to the IC service mode, activate from the main body service mode.
You can access the main body service mode while the power is both turned ON and OFF.
In either way, the started main body service mode is the same, but how to exit differs.
(1) Start-up from power ON

2. "Utility screen"
Stop 0 0 Stop 0 1
3. Main body "Service Mode menu screen"
Press [Controller].
4. IC "Service Mode menu screen"
IC service Mode menu screen appears.
(2) Start-up from power OFF

1. While pressing [Utility/Counter] button, turn ON the sub power switch (SW2).
When the CE password has been set, entering the password is required to enter the main body service mode.
Press [Controller].
IC service Mode menu screen appears.
6.2.2 Method to exit IC service mode

Exit methods differ according to the condition of power switch, ON or OFF.
(1) When the power is ON

Press [Close] to return to the main body "Utility screen".
Press [Exit] to back to "Utility screen".
(2) When the power is OFF

Press [Close] to return to the main body "Utility screen".
Turn OFF the SW2.
3. After the reboot, the new settings become effective.
6.3 System Setting

6.3.1 IC software DIPSW setting procedures
(1) Outline
Set the software DIPSW.
Note
Do not change any switch not described in the service manual.
(2) Procedure
Press [01 Software DIPSW Setting].
I -223

Press [<] / [>] or numeric buttons after pressing the "DIPSW number" and "Bit number" buttons.
4. Press [On] (1) or [Off] (0) to set the selected bit number ON/OFF.
Press [OK] to fix the change.
Note
When [OK] is not pressed but [Cancel] or [Close] is pressed, the change is not fixed.
(3) Software DIPSW setting screen
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[1] DIPSW number [2] Bit number (0 to 7)

[3] Bit data: 1:ON, 0:OFF [4] Numeric buttons
6.3.2 IC software DIPSW list

Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
3 0 Change of the scanner compression method 0: MMR 0 0 0
1: MH
6 0 Updating interval of the count information 10 minutes: 6-1=0, 6-0=0 0 0 0
1 1 minute: 6-1=0, 6-0=1 0 0 0
0 minute: 6-1=1, 6-0=0
60 minutes: 6-1=1, 6-0=1
6.4 Firmware Version

(1) Functions
Check the version of each setting information in the IC firmware and HDD.
(2) Usage
To compare the DB versions of the IC firmware and HDD and check the mismatch.
(3) Procedure
1. Enter the IC service mode.
3. "Firmware Version screen"
The following versions are displayed.
ROM Version:
DB version of IC firmware
HDD Version:
DB version such as setting information in HDD
PS Version:
Version of PS module itself
TIFF Version:
Version of TIFF module itself
PPML Version:
Version of PPML module itself
PCL-5e Version:
Version of PCL-5e module itself
PCL-XL Version:
Version of PCL-XL module itself
XPS Version:
I -224
Version of XPS module itself
6.5 Firmware Version Up

6.5.1 ISW outline
Execute the firmware version up with ISW. ISW has 2 types; USB Memory ISW and Internet ISW.
(1) USB Memory ISW

Connect the USB memory in which the firmware file is saved to the Serial port (TypeA) of IC, specify the firmware in the USB memory using
the operation panel, and rewrite the IC firmware program.
(2) Internet ISW

Download the firmware file from the program server on the internet using FTP or HTTP protocol and rewrite the IC firmware program. Operate
the Internet ISW on the operation panel of the main body.
6.5.2 Method of the USB memory ISW

(1) Procedure
Note
Since the font information is taken over after executing ISW of the IC, there is no need to back up the font information.
1. Save the firmware to the USB memory in the following folder structure.
C7000 C8000
P P
xxxxxx.BIN xxxxxx.BIN
xxxxxx.sum xxxxxx.sum
In case of bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, bizhub PRO C6000L In case of bizhub PRESS C8000
Note
Create the C7000/8000 folder directly under the USB memory route.
Several firmware can be saved to a folder. However, 30 files is the maximum it can display on the touch panel. Also, 2 byte
font cannot be displayed.
Maximum 25 letters for a file name.
[2] [1]
3. Connect the USB memory to the IC Serial port [1].
I -225
[1]

Press [03 ISW].
6. "ISW screen"
Press [02 USB Memory ISW].
7. "USB Memory ISW screen"
The file in the USB memory applicable folder is displayed. (Maximum 30 files)
Select the version of the file to be rewritten, and press [OK].
8. Press [Yes] on the confirmation screen.
9. After the message "ISW Mode Now downloading program", the message "ISW Mode Ready to update." appears. Then, press [OK].
I -226
Note
When the preparation for updating failed, the message "Download error occurred" is displayed. Check the details of the
error. (Refer to I.6.5.4 ISW error list)
Press [Close] to return to "USB Memory ISW screen".
10. IC is updated by pressing [OK], and "Service Mode menu screen" is displayed. [Controller] cannot be selected during updating IC.
11. When updating IC completes, [Controller] in "Service Mode menu screen" can be selected.
12. Check the firmware version in the IC service mode to see if the ISW is completed successfully. (Refer to I.6.4 Firmware Version)
Note
When updating IC failed, "Service Call screen" which shows the SC code is displayed by pressing [Controller].
Press [Continue] to enter the IC service mode.
(When updating IC failed, "SC 30-003" which means the failure of updating is displayed. (Refer to I.6.5.4 ISW error list))
6.5.3 Method of Internet ISW

After setting the program server, download the firmware from the program server by executing ISW and rewrite the firmware program.
(1) Check the operation environment

(a) Condition to use the Internet ISW function
To use the Internet ISW function, the following conditions must to be met.
The main body must be connected to the network environment that allows the download of firmware from the Internet by using ftp or
http protocol.
(b) When the Internet ISW does not operate

In the following cases, the "Internet ISW" does not operate on the IC.
When the main power switch (SW1) is off
When the IC power switch is OFF.
During print operation, or various JOB (including reserve JOB) exists, or suspended JOB exists during main body idling.
Using modes other than normal mode.
Paper JAM has occurred.
Image file exists in the image memory.
Program and board do not match.
(2) Proxy Server setting

Proxy server which is provided on the inside of the fire wall is the generic name of a mail server that serves the proxy of a client who
receives an access demand (HTTP and FTP) from the client.
When using the proxy server, conduct the following procedure to set up.
I -227
(a) Procedure
Press [02 ISW].
3. "ISW screen"
Press [01 Internet ISW].
4. "Internet ISW screen"
Press "01 Proxy Server Setting".
5. "Proxy Server Setting screen"
Press [IPv4 Change]/[IPv6 Change]/[Host Name] for Proxy Server Address, and press [Change]for Proxy Server Port, Authentication
Use Name, and Authentication Password to input with the screen keyboard.
Enable Proxy Server Select an incoming server (FTP, HTTP) to be used.

Proxy Server Address Input the IP address of the proxy server or Host Name.
(Maximum 256 single-byte characters for Host Name)
Proxy Server Port Input the port number of the proxy server.
(1 to 65565)
Enable Authentication When using the HTTP proxy, select whether to authenticate or
not.
Authentication User Name Input Authentication User Name. (Maximum 31 single-byte
characters)
Authentication Password Input Authentication Password. (Maximum 31 single-byte
characters)

Press [OK] to display "Internet ISW screen".
(3) Program server setting

(a) Procedure
Press [03 ISW].
3. "ISW screen"
Press [01 Internet ISW].
Press [02 Program server set].
5. "Program Server Setting screen"
Set the program server.
Press [Change] to input the server URL, server account, and server account with the screen keyboard.
I -228
Receiving protocol Select the protocol that receives the firmware file.
Server URL Set the URL of the server into which the program to download is
stored. (File name is not included.)
Server account Enter the account name of the program server.
Server password Enter the password of the program server.
PASV mode Set enable/disable the PASV mode.
Select "Enable" when the access is limited by firewall.
FTP receiving time out Set the FTP receiving time out from 1 to 60 minutes. When the
time is out, the download of the firmware file forcibly comes to an
end, and the system returns to the normal mode without
conducting the ISW.
HTTP/HTTPS receiving time out Set the HTTP/HTTPS receiving time out from 30 to 600 seconds.
When the time is out, the download of the firmware file forcibly
comes to an end, and the system returns to the normal mode
without conducting the ISW.

Press "OK" to display "Internet ISW screen".
(4) Execute Internet ISW

(a) Procedure
Note
Since the font information is taken over after executing ISW of the IC, there is no need to back up the font information.
1. Display IC "Internet ISW screen".
Press [03 Internet ISW Mode].
3. "Internet ISW mode screen"
Press [Direct Setting] and then press [Change] of [File Name].
Note
When [Auto Setting] is pressed, the file name is set to "bootP1.bin" automatically. Therefore, be sure to set the file name
by pressing [Direct Setting].
4. "File Name screen"

Input the file name of the firmware and press [OK].
5. "Internet ISW mode screen"

Confirm the file name and press [Start].
I -229
6. After the message "ISW Mode Now downloading program", the message "ISW Mode Ready to update." appears. Then, press [OK].
Note
When the preparation for updating failed, the message "Download error occurred" is displayed. Check the details of the
error. (Refer to I.6.5.4 ISW error list)
Press [Close] to return to "USB Memory ISW screen".
7. IC is updated by pressing [OK], and "Service Mode menu screen" is displayed. [Controller] cannot be selected during updating IC.
8. When updating IC completes, [Controller] in "Service Mode menu screen" can be selected.
9. Check the firmware version in the IC service mode to see if the ISW is completed successfully. (Refer to I.6.4 Firmware Version)
Note
When updating IC failed, "Service Call screen" which shows the SC code is displayed by pressing [Controller].
Press [Continue] to enter the IC service mode.
(When updating IC failed, "SC 30-003" which means the failure of updating is displayed. (Refer to I.6.5.4 ISW error list))
6.5.4 ISW error list

When an error occurs during ISW operation, the malfunction code is displayed on the operation panel.
Error message Description Recovery method
Data error (Invalid file) Program of another board is under ISW. Acquire the correct program file and execute ISW
Or program data is broken. again.
I -230
Data error (Program) Program data is broken. Acquire the correct program file and execute ISW
again.
I/O error Error occurs during rewriting program. Execute ISW again.
HDD I/O error Error occurs during rewriting program. Execute ISW again.
HDD is full Since HDD full occurs, rewriting program is Reboot the IC-601 and execute ISW again.
unavailable.
System is busy. Since print JOB or scan JOB is during operation, Wait until the process in progress completes and
ISW cannot be executed. execute ISW again.
ISW is executed from the panel during CSRC
Internet ISW operation.
CSRC Internet ISW is executed during ISW
operation from the panel.
System error Internal error or unexpected error occurs. Execute ISW again.
Download error occurred. Failed to download program file. In case of Internet ISW, check the connection of the
program server.
In case of USB ISW, acquire the program file and
execute ISW again.
SC Code 30-003 Error occurs during rewriting program. On the SC screen of [Controller] in the service mode,
The power of the IC-601 is turned OFF during press the [Continue] button to enter the service mode
rewriting program. menu
and execute ISW again.
6.6 IC HDD Format

(1) Functions
Format the HDD/2 (HDD2) of IC.
(2) Usage
To maintain the HDD area, delete the internal data.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 IC HDD Format].
3. "IC HDD Format screen"
Press the item you want to format.
[All]
Formats all areas of the hard disk.
This operation is equal to performing the following 4 operations at once. Conduct this operation on such occasions as replacing the
hard disk /2 (HDD2).
[Document]
Formats the document storage area. Conduct this operation when deleting the Scan to HDD job.
[Parameter]
Formats the storage area for the controller setting information.
Conduct this operation when deleting the whole setting information on the print controller (the network setting and default settings of
each port, and so on).
[Font]
Formats the font data storage area.
Conduct this operation when deleting downloaded external font data.
[Spool]
Formats the spool area.
Normally, there is no need to format this area alone.
Note
Be sure to output the settings information list before formatting parameters.
By formatting font, all downloaded external fonts are deleted.
4. "Format confirmation screen"

"Execute Format Yes/No?" is displayed. Then, press [Yes].
"executing", and "Completed" is displayed once it completes.
I -231
6.7 CSV File Import/Export

6.7.1 Outline
To use the language other than the 9 originally set languages, the language can be switched by inputting/outputting the CSV file.
6.7.2 Procedure
Perform the import/export using the USB memory in the same way as the USB memory ISW.
Note
Before connecting the USB memory, be sure to check that the USB memory does not have a Key file for controller log acquisition.
When the Key file is in the memory, the log acquisition is executed first.
(1) Import
Import the csv file stored in the USB memory to SSD.
1. Save the csv file into the USB memory in the following folder structure.
lang
ic601_MachineSetting_***.csv (For displaying Machine Settings)
ic601_AdminSetting_***.csv (For displaying Administrator Setting)
ic601_CeSetting_***.csv (For Service Mode)
ic601_SMBBrowsing_***.csv (For displaying SMB browsing)
Note) "***" represents the abbreviated form of the language with three letters.
Note
Only the 4 types of csv file shown above can be imported.
[2] [1]
I -232
[1]

Press [05 CSV File Import/Export].
6. "CSV File Import/Export screen"
Press [Import].
7. A confirmation screen asking "Execute Import Yes/No?" appears. Press [Yes].
8. After completion of the import, disconnect the USB memory from the Serial port once the message "Completed" is displayed.
(2) Export
Export the csv file from SSD to the USB memory.
[2] [1]
I -233
[1]

Press [05 CSV File Import/Export].
5. "CSV File Import/Export screen"
Press [Export].
6. A confirmation screen asking "Execute Export Yes/No?" appears. Press [Yes].
7. After completion of the export, disconnect the USB memory from the Serial port once the message "Completed" is displayed.
The csv file is saved in the [lang] folder that is created automatically.
The saved file will be the 9 languages that have been registered in the factory or the other languages that have been imported
beforehand.
6.8 Font Backup

6.8.1 Outline
Back up the PS font/form data saved in IC to the PC which is connected to the network.
6.8.2 Preparation of backup/restore

Since the ftp protocol of network is used for backup/restore, confirm that the ftp setting of IC is set to "Enable".
(1) Procedure
3. Press [Controller].
4. Press [01 Controller NIC Setting Menu].
5. Press [04 FTP Setting].
6. Confirm that "FTP Server Setting" is set to "Enable".
6.8.3 Backup method

Create the backup file in the HDD/1 (HDD/2) of IC once, and then download the created backup file to the PC via ftp.
(1) Procedure to create backup file in HDD

Press [06 Font Backup].
3. "Font Backup screen"
Press [Backup].
4. "Pop-up screen"
Press [Yes] to start the backup.
5. When the backup file (file name: fontbackup) is created in the HDD/1 (HDD/2) of IC, the message is changed from "backup is being
executed" to "Complete".
Note
Do not turn OFF the main body main power switch (SW1), sub power switch (SW2), and IC power switch until the backup
completes.
(2) Backup procedure to PC via ftp

Example: Download the backup file to the folder "TEMP" of PC.
1. Display the command input screen with the PC that can connect to ftp.
2. Specify the directory [1] to download to.
3. Input the IP address [2] of IC.
4. Input the user name "fontbackup" [3].
I -234
Note
The user name "fontbackup" is fixed
5. Input the password "sysadm" [4].

Note
The password "sysadm" is fixed.
6. Input "get fontbackup" [5] to start downloading the backup file.

When the downloading completes, "Transfer complete" [6] is displayed.
7. Input "bye" [7] to disconnect from ftp.
Command Prompt
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[1] Directory to save [2] IP address of IC

[3] User name [4] Password
[5] Downloading start [6] Downloading complete
[7] Disconnect from ftp -
6.8.4 Method to restore

Restore the backup file of the PS font/form data downloaded in PC into IC.
(1) Procedure
Example: Restore the backup file which is saved in the "TEMP" folder right under the route directory of C drive from PC to IC.
Press [06 Font Backup].
3. "Font Backup screen"
Press [Restore].
A message "Font restoration data wait" appears.
4. Display the command input screen with the PC in which the backup file is saved.
5. Input "cd c:\temp" [1] to specify the directory in which the backup file is saved.
6. Input the addres [3] with restore command option "-s" of "lpr" command [2], and the printer name "printer" [4] and the restore file name
[5]with printer name specify command option "-p".
The message on the operation panel is changed from "Font restoration data wait" to "Font restoration is being executed".
7. When the restoring completes normally, "Completed normally" appears.
Note
Do not turn OFF the main body main power switch (SW1), sub power switch (SW2), and IC power switch until the restore
completes.
I -235
Command Prompt
[1]
[2] [3] [4] [5]
6.9 Log File Check

(1) Function
Check the file name of the controller log.
(2) Usage
To prevent sending the wrong file, check the file name of the controller log when sending the controller log file to KMBT.
(3) Procedure
1. Collect the controller log. (Refer to E.1.9 Controller log collection)
Press [99 Log File Check].
The file name of the collected controller log file is displayed on the upper left of the screen. Check the file name.
I -236
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 7. CE/ADMINISTRATOR SECURITY
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L SETTING
7. CE/ADMINISTRATOR SECURITY SETTING

7.1 CE/Administrator Security Setting List
Adjustment/setting item
CE/Administrator Security Setting 01 CE Authentication
02 Authentication Password
03 Admin. Authentication
04 Machine Manager Password
Important
The setting [03 Enhanced Security Mode] in [10 Security Setting] in [03 Administrator Setting] is available only when HD-514 and
PH-102 are connected.
The setting [03 Enhanced Security Mode] in [10 Security Setting] in [03 Administrator Setting] is available only when the CE
Authentication and Admin. Authentication are set to [ON].
7.2 Start/exit
(1) Usage
The CE/Administrator Security Setting can be set on the "CE/Administrator Security Setting Menu screen" in the CE/Administrator security
mode.
(2) Procedure
Before selecting any item in the service mode, press the hard keys in the order shown below.
Stop 0 C
2. "CE/Administrator Security Setting Menu screen"
The CE/Administrator security mode starts up and the CE/Administrator Security Setting becomes available.
Select the item to be set to display the setting screen of each item.
Press [Close] to return to the "Service Mode screen."
Important
The setting [03 Enhanced Security Mode] in [10 Security Setting] in [03 Administrator Setting] is available only when the CE
Authentication and Admin. Authentication are set to [ON].
7.3 CE Authentication
(1) Usage
To strengthen security of the service mode, configure the setting so that a password is required to enter the service mode.
Note
To set the security enhance mode ON, this setting has to be "ON".
(2) Procedure
Press [01 CE Authentication].
2. "CE Authentication ON/OFF screen"
Press [ON] or [OFF].
3. When [OK] is pressed, the setting becomes valid and "CE/Administrator Security Setting Menu screen" is displayed.
4. Press [Cancel] to cancel updating.
7.4 CE Auth. Password

(1) Usage
Configure a password to enter the service mode.
Note
Do not use anything easily guessed by others such as your name, birthday.
CE should not inform other people of the password.
The selection of the [CE Authentication Password] key is limited to only when the CE authentication setting is set to [ON].
If the wrong CE password is entered, re-entering cannot be accepted for about 5 seconds.
The current password is not available as a new password.
All characters being entered are displayed as "*" on the screen.
If 8 characters or more are entered as a CE password or administrator password, the last character is recognized as an 8th
character.
(2) Procedure
Press [02 CE Authentication Password].
2. "CE Authentication Password screen"
Press [Current Password], then a keyboard screen appears. Enter the current password (8 digits) using the alphanumeric keys and then
press [OK].
Default is "92729272."
When entering wrong password, the message "Password is incorrect" is displayed.
3. Press [New Password], then a keyboard screen appears. Enter new password (8 digits) using the alphanumeric keys and then press
[OK].
I -237
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 7. CE/ADMINISTRATOR SECURITY
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L SETTING
4. Press [Input Confirmation], then a keyboard screen appears. Enter new password (8 digits) using the alphanumeric keys again and then
press [OK].
5. "CE Authentication Password screen"
When [OK] is pressed, the setting becomes valid and "CE/Administrator Security Setting Menu screen" is displayed.
7.5 Admin. Authentication

(1) Usage
To strengthen security of the machine manager setting of the setting menu mode, configure the setting so that a password is required to enter
the machine manager setting.
Note
To set the security enhance mode ON, this setting has to be "ON".
(2) Procedure
Press [03 Admin. Authentication].
2. "Admin. Authentication ON/OFF Setting screen"
Press [ON] or [OFF].
3. When [OK] is pressed, the setting becomes valid and "CE/Administrator Security Setting Menu screen" is displayed.
7.6 Administrator Password

(1) Usage
Configure a password to enter the Administrator Setting of the Utility.
The administrator password can also be set in the Administrator Setting of the Utility.
Note
When setting or changing the administrator password, CE must ask the administrator of the customer to change the
administrator password promptly.
Do not use anything easily guessed by others such as your name, birthday.
The selection of the [Administrator Password] key is limited only when the Admin. Authentication setting is set to [ON].
The current password is not available as a new password.
All characters being entered are displayed as "*" on the screen.
If 8 characters or more are entered as a CE password or administrator password, the last character is recognized as an 8th
character.
(2) Procedure
Press [04 Administrator Password].
2. "Administrator Password screen"
3. Press [New Password], then a keyboard screen appears. Enter a new password (8 characters) and then press [OK].
For the administrator password, one-byte alphanumeric 8 characters (Case sensitive in the alphabet), and the following symbols (33
characters) are usable.
-^\@[]:;,./ \!"#$%&'()=~|`{+*}<>?_
4. Press [Input Confirmation], then a keyboard screen appears. Enter a new password (8 characters) again and then press [OK].
5. "Administrator Password screen"
When [OK] is pressed, the setting becomes valid and "CE/Administrator Security Setting Menu screen" is displayed.
I -238
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 8. FEE COLLECTION SETTING
8. FEE COLLECTION SETTING

8.1 Fee Collection Setting List
Adjustment/Setting Item
Fee Collection Setting 01 Management Function
02 Billing Counter Coefficient Setting*
* DIPSW33-7 needs to be set to 1 to display the setting.
8.2 Start/exit
(1) Usage
Set up the various settings concerning the fee collection setting from the "Fee Collection Setting" screen.
(2) Procedure
Before selecting any item in the service mode, press the hard keys in the order shown below.
Stop 9
2. "Fee Collection Setting screen"
Fee collection setting mode is activated. Set the various settings concerning fee collection setting.
3. "Fee Collection Setting menu screen"
Select the item to be set to display the setting screen of each item.
Press [Close] to return to the "Service Mode screen."
8.3 Management Function

(1) Usage
Set the various settings concerning management equipment of the main body.
(2) Procedure
Press [01 Management Function].
2. "Fee Collection < Management Setting > screen"
Select the options for each item of the management setting.
3. Press [OK] to activate the setting, and the "Fee Collection Setting menu screen" is displayed.
8.4 Billing Coefficient Setting

(1) Usage
Set the count coefficient for each coverage and size of the billing counter.
The counting method differs depending on the customer. In order to cope with this situation, change the coefficient.
(2) Functions
Set the calculation of the billing counter that is displayed on Web Utilities and the coefficient to display the counter.
Note
Set DIPSW33-7=1 to display this screen.
When the coefficient setting value is changed, the total value of the Web Utilities and the billing total counter value differ because of
the following approach.
For the display on the Web Utilities, since the main body sends each counter and calculates on Web Utilities, new coefficient is
used for the counter before changing the coefficient to calculate.
Since the display on the main body panel is calculated and accumulated for each output page, the coefficient after the change is
used only for the output after the change when the coefficient is changed. (The counter before changing the coefficient is not
changed.)
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Billing Counter Coefficient Setting].
2. "Billing Counter Coefficient Setting screen"
Press the number of the printing coefficient or size coefficient to select.
3. Enter a value with the numeric buttons.
Setting Range
: 0.1 to 4.0
4. To set other coefficient, repeat steps 2 to 3.
5. Press [OK] to activate the setting, and the "Fee Collection Setting menu screen" is displayed.
I -239
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 9. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD
9. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD

9.1 Process Adjustment
9.1.1 Outline
This adjustment shows the directions of each adjustment of [Process Adjustment] in the [Paper Setting] which are displayed when the
DIPSW1-0 "Process adjustment user screen display" is set to "1." When adjusting each item, check the problem, the paper on which it tends to
occur, the paper weight and the environment in which it tends to occur to make a proper adjustment.
Separate setting can be set for each tray by setting offset to the adjustment value set in this setting. However be careful not to make excessive
adjustment. Otherwise image trouble may occur.
9.1.2 2nd Transfer Output Adj. (Front)

(1) Measure taken according to cause
1. poor transfer
Poor transfer is an uneven color problem which occurs on the area with multiple colors put. It is caused when the transfer electric field is
insufficient.
1. Paper on which it tends to occur
Plain paper (rough surface, with high resistance)
2. Paper weight
Unidentified
3. Environment in which it tends to occur
Unidentified
After continuous low coverage printing
4. Adjustment method
1. Adjust to the negative side
2. Adjust negatively by 10steps until the proper condition can be obtained.
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
5. Precaution related to other adjustments
When too much steps are moved, the noise of white dots or rough image on the half-tone area may occur.
9.1.3 2nd Transfer Output Adj. (Back)

1. poor transfer
insufficient.
Plain
Fine (rough surface, with high resistance)
2. Paper weight
Unidentified
Low humidity environment
After continuous low coverage printing
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
When too much steps are moved, the noise of white dots or rough image on the half-tone area may occur.
2. noise of white spot
Plain
Fine (rough surface, with high resistance)
2. Paper weight
Unidentified
1. Adjust to the positive side
2. Adjust positively by 10steps until the proper condition can be obtained.
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
When too much steps are moved, the poor transfer may occur. In this case, adjust it by 5 steps.
9.1.4 2nd Transfer-Lead Edge(Front)

1. Poor transfer on lead edge area
Poor transfer stands for color unevenness phenomenon on the color overlay portion in image, due to the insufficient transfer electric field.
Unidentified
2. Paper weight
Unidentified
I -240

Unidentified
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
Conduct this adjustment when the poor transfer occurs especially on the paper lead edge area. To entirely adjust, conduct I.9.1.2
2nd Transfer Output Adj. (Front).
9.1.5 2nd Transfer-Lead Edge(Back)

1. Poor transfer on lead edge area
Poor transfer stands for color unevenness phenomenon on the color overlay portion in image, due to the insufficient transfer electric field.
Coated
2. Paper weight
Unidentified
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
Conduct this adjustment when the poor transfer occurs especially on the paper lead edge area. To entirely adjust, conduct I.9.1.3
2nd Transfer Output Adj. (Back).
9.1.6 2nd Transfer-Rear Edge(Front)

1. Paper rear edge poor transfer, transfer jitter
insufficient.
Unidentified
2. Paper weight
Unidentified
Unidentified
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
None
2. Paper rear edge transfer repelling
Transfer repelling is a problem which the toner is repelled due to the discharge of the paper when the electric field is too strong.
Unidentified
2. Paper weight
257g/m2 to300 g/m2
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
None
9.1.7 2nd Transfer-Rear Edge(Back)

1. Paper rear edge poor transfer, transfer jitter
Unidentified
2. Paper weight
Unidentified
Unidentified
I -241

Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
None
2. Paper rear edge transfer repelling
Transfer repelling is a problem which the toner is repelled due to the discharge of the paper when the electric field is too strong.
Unidentified
2. Paper weight
257g/m2 to 300g/m2
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
None
9.1.8 Separation AC
1. Paper wrapping to the intermediate transfer belt
Coated
Fine
2. Paper weight
81g/m2 to 105g/m2
64g/m2 to 74g/m2
Unidentified
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
Conduct this adjustment when the problem still occurs even after conducting the Separation DC adjustment.
2. Transfer charge leak trails, blurred
Blurred is a problem which the toner scatters around the text area or line cross point to blurred the image.
Plain
Fine
2. Paper weight
64g/m2 to 74g/m2
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
9.1.9 Separation AC
Coated
Fine
2. Paper weight
81g/m2 to 105g/m2
64g/m2 to 74g/m2
Unidentified
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
I -242
Conduct this adjustment when the problem still occurs even after conducting the de-curler adjustment. Conduct this adjustment
when the problem still occurs even after conducting the de-curler adjustment + Separation DC adjustment.
Plain
Fine
2. Paper weight
64g/m2 to 74g/m2
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
9.1.10 Separation DC(Front)

Coated
Fine
2. Paper weight
81g/m2 to 105g/m2
64g/m2 to 74g/m2
Unidentified
Setting Range
: - 30 to + 30
None
Plain
Fine
2. Paper weight
64g/m2 to 74g/m2
2. Adjust positively by 5 steps until the proper condition can be obtained.
Setting Range
: - 30 to + 30
None
9.1.11 Separation DC(Back)

Coated
Fine
2. Paper weight
81g/m2 to 105g/m2
64g/m2 to 74g/m2
Unidentified
Setting Range
: - 30 to + 30
None
I -243

Plain
Fine
2. Paper weight
64g/m2 to 74g/m2
Setting Range
: - 30 to + 30
None
9.1.12 Temperature of fusing upper roller (Idling)

1. Rough gloss
Rough gloss is a problem which the entire image looks white depending on the brightness condition.
Coated
2. Paper weight
81g/m2 to 105g/m2
High temperature and high humidity environment
2. Adjust negatively by 5 steps until the proper condition can be obtained.
Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
It is better to change this adjustment and I.9.1.13 Temperature of fusing upper roller (Printing) at the same time.
2. Insufficient fusing
Unidentified
2. Paper weight
106g/m2 to 135g/m2
257g/m2 to 300g/m2
Around temperature 20C
Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
It is better to change the this adjustment and I.9.1.13 Temperature of fusing upper roller (Printing) at the same time.
9.1.13 Temperature of fusing upper roller (Printing)

1. Rough gloss
Coated
2. Paper weight
81g/m2 to 105g/m2
Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
It is better to change this adjustment and I.9.1.14 Temperature of fusing lower roller (Idling) at the same time.
Unidentified
2. Paper weight
106g/m2 to 135g/m2
257g/m2 to 300g/m2
I -244

Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
It is better to change the I.9.1.12 Temperature of fusing upper roller (Idling) and I.9.1.13 Temperature of fusing upper roller
(Printing) at the same time.
9.1.14 Temperature of fusing lower roller (Idling)

1. Rough gloss
Coated
2. Paper weight
81g/m2 to 105g/m2
2. Set to -10 step.
Setting Range
: - 20 to + 20
It is better to change the I.9.1.14 Temperature of fusing lower roller (Idling) and I.9.1.15 Temperature of fusing lower roller
Unidentified
2. Paper weight
106g/m2 to 135g/m2
257g/m2 to 300g/m2
2. Set to +10 step.
Setting range
: - 20 to + 20
9.1.15 Temperature of fusing lower roller (Printing)

1. Rough gloss
Coated
2. Paper weight
81g/m2 to 105g/m2
2. Set to -10 step.
Setting Range
: - 20 to + 20
Unidentified
2. Paper weight
106g/m2 to 135g/m2
257g/m2 to 300g/m2
I -245

2. Set to +10 step.
Setting range
: - 20 to + 20
9.1.16 Temperature to turn OFF the upper edge heater forcibly / Paper width: less than 261mm
1. Rough gloss
Coated
2. Paper weight
81g/m2 to 105g/m2
When different size of paper is fed
Setting Range
: - 20 to + 20
None
Unidentified
2. Paper weight
106g/m2 to 135g/m2
257g/m2 to 300g/m2
Setting Range
: - 20 to + 20
None
9.1.17 Temperature to turn OFF the upper edge heater forcibly / Paper width: 261mm or more
1. Rough gloss
Coated
2. Paper weight
81g/m2 to 105g/m2
Setting Range
: - 20 to + 20
None
Unidentified
2. Paper weight
106g/m2 to 135g/m2
257g/m2 to 300g/m2
Setting Range
: - 20 to + 20
None
I -246
9.1.18 Speed Down

Unidentified
2. Paper weight
106g/m2 to 135g/m2
257g/m2 to 300g/m2
1. Set to [ON] from [OFF] (default).
When this setting is set to [ON], the productivity is reduced. Change this setting when the fusing is not enough after changing I.
9.1.12 Temperature of fusing upper roller (Idling), I.9.1.13 Temperature of fusing upper roller (Printing), I.9.1.14 Temperature of
fusing lower roller (Idling), I.9.1.15 Temperature of fusing lower roller (Printing), I.9.1.16 Temperature to turn OFF the upper edge
heater forcibly / Paper width: less than 261mm, I.9.1.17 Temperature to turn OFF the upper edge heater forcibly / Paper width:
261mm or more.
9.1.19 2nd transfer pressure

1. Transfer jitter on Bk thick paper
Thick
2. Paper weight
257g/m2 to 300g/m2
Unidentified
1. Change from [Auto] (default) to [Low].
Change this setting only when the transfer jitter occurs on feeding thick paper.
9.1.20 CPM Down

1. The brightness change during continuous print is large
Coated
2. Paper weight
106g/m2 to 135g/m2
257g/m2 to 300g/m2
Low temperature environment
1. Set to [Down] from [Normal] (default)
When this setting is set to [Down], the productivity is reduced.
9.1.21 Fusing Air Separation Air Level Setting

1. Fusing jam
Unidentified
2. Paper weight
64g/m2 to 105g/m2
High humidity environment
1. Lower side wrapping jam in the fusing paper exit section: Change to [Weak] side.
Upper side wrapping jam in the fusing paper exit section: Change to [Strong] side.
Fusing alarm tends to occur depending on the paper type and environment.
I -247
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L bizhub PRESS C7000...
10. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, bizhub PRO

C6000L
10.1 Centering adjustment of the paper feed trays /1 to /3
(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when a miscentering that cannot be adjusted in the service mode occurs.
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Pull out the paper feed tray.
2. Loosen 3 screws [2] under the up/down plate [1].
3. Move the guide plate [3] to adjust the center position.
4. Tighten 3 screws [2].
5. Output the test pattern (No.16).
[3] a052f3c004ca
6. Hold the output paper at the center of the sub scan direction and
check that the miscentering amount [3] between the centers of
[2]
paper [1] and the image [2] is within the standard value.
[3] Standard value: within 3mm
7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 until the miscentering amount turns to be
[1] within the standard value.
8050fs1056
10.2 Separation pressure adjustment of the paper feed trays /1 to /3

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when no feed or double feed occurs. Affected by the paper type and the operating environment (the no feed is likely
in the low temperature environment and the double feed is likely in the high temperature environment). Excess adjustment may reverse the
symptom.
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Pull out the paper feed tray.
2. Remove the paper feed unit. (Refer to F.5.8.3 Replacing the paper
feed clutch and the pre-registration clutch)
3. Change the position to hook the spring [1] on the bottom of the
paper feed unit.
Weak [2]: A double feed is improved.
Strong [3]: A no feed jam is improved.
4. Install the paper feed unit and then set the paper feed tray.
[3] [2] a03uf3c006ca
I -248
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L DF-622
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT DF-622

11.1 Hinge angle adjustment (70 degrees and 40 degrees)
(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment to change the maximum opening angle of DF.
(2) Procedure
1. Remove 4 screws [1] and 2 hinge adjustment brackets [2].
There are 2 types of the bracket installed in the DF; one for 70
[1] degrees and the other for 40 degrees, and they can be
distinguished by the scratched number on each surface.
2. Install 2 new hinge adjustment brackets [2] and tighten them with 4
screws [1] securely.
[2]
11.2 Hinge angle adjustment (90 degrees)

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when removing DF or scanner part.
Note
When removing the DF or removing any parts from the scanner section with the DF opened, be sure to secure the hinge
adjustment brackets at 90 degrees. Without this operation, it deforms the metal frame in the DF installation section.
(2) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. To secure the hinge adjustment brackets at 90 degrees, follow
either of the steps below. There are 2 types of the bracket installed
in the DF; one for 70 degrees and the other for 40 degrees, and
they can be distinguished by the scratched number on each
surface.
Brackets for 70 degrees:
Loosen 4 screws [1] and slide 2 brackets [2] downward, and then
secure them with 4 screws [1] again.
Brackets for 40 degrees:
Remove 4 screws [1]. Turn 2 brackets [2] upside down and
reinstall them to DF and secure 4 screw [1] again.
2. When completed, be sure to put the brackets back to the original
state.
[2] [1]
a052f3c002ca
I -249
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L PF-602
12. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PF-602

12.1 Paper feed pick-up amount adjustment
(1) Usage
When a no feed condition occurs repeatedly while feeding paper, conduct the paper feed pick-up amount adjustment.
(2) Procedure
1. Pull out the tray.
2. If any paper remaining, remove it.
3. Turn to loosen the knob [1], slide the projection [2] toward the rear
side of the tray, and fasten the knob [1] to secure the projection [2].
Note
After the completion of the adjustment, loosen the knob
[1], put the projection [2] back to the original position, and
fasten the knob [1] to secure the projection [2].
4. Set the tray. After confirm that the paper lift finished its elevation to
the top by hearing the sound of the paper lift motor, pull out the
tray again.
5. Remove the rail stopper, and pull out the tray further. (Refer to G.
[2]
4.2.6 Tray)
[1]
a03xf3c001ca
6. Remove the 2 screws [1], bend the stopper [2] in the direction of
[1] [3]
the arrow, and remove the paper feed cover [3].
Note
To easily remove the paper feed cover [3], expand the
metal plate [4] of the paper feed cover in the direction of
the arrow, and lift the cover straight up.
7. Put the tray back to the position where the stopper [2] is pushed in
the paper feed cover [3], and make the pick-up roller assy [7]
placed horizontally (paper feed position).
[7]
[2] [3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
a03xf3c002ca
I -250
8. Pull the plunger [2] of the pick-up solenoid [1] and measure the
[5] [1] [6] [2]
clearance between the pick-up roller [3] and the lift plate [4] with a
feeler gauge.
Measured value A = 0.5 to 1.0 mm
If it is not within the standard value, follow step 9 and after.
Note
Before loosening the screw, be sure to mark off the
position of the pick-up solenoid by drawing a line [6].
10. With the plunger [2] pulled, adjust the position of the pick-up
solenoid [1] so that the gap between the pick-up roller [3] and the
lift plate [4] becomes to the specified value.
11. Tighten the screw [5] to fix the pick-up solenoid [1].
12. Insert a paper, and set the tray.
13. Perform copying/printing to confirm that the no feed does not
occur.
[3]
A
[4]
a03xf3c003ca
12.2 Pick-up roller height adjustment

(1) Usage
Perform the adjustment under the following conditions: no feed occurs frequently; printed page is often folded; paper jam occurs at short
intervals; feeding paper with a large amount of curl.
According to the pick-up roller height adjustment, the height of the upper most paper and the paper through height of the paper feed roller are
decided.
Note
Pick-up roller height adjustment changes paper feed pick-up amount accordingly. When the adjustment is completed, perform
the paper feed pick-up amount adjustment to check the pickup amount.
(2) Procedure
Note
tray again.
5. Remove the rail stopper, and pull out the tray further. (Refer to G.
[2]
4.2.6 Tray)
[1]
a03xf3c004ca
I -251
6. Remove the 2 screws [1], and remove the paper feed cover [3].
[1] [3]
Note
To easily remove the paper feed cover [3], expand the
metal plate [4] of the paper feed cover in the direction of
the arrow, and lift the cover straight up.
7. Put the tray back to the position where the stopper [2] is pushed in
the paper feed cover [3], and make the pick-up roller assy [7]
placed horizontally(paper feed position).
[7]
[2] [3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
a03xf3c005ca
8. Check if the actuator [1] of the pick-up roller assy meets the center
[2] [1]
[3] of the upper limit sensor/1 (PS1) and /2 (PS9) [2].
[1]
[2]
[3] a03xf3c006ca
[4] [3] [2] [1] 9. Mark off the position of the upper limit sensor mounting plate [1] by
drawing a line [2].
10. Loosen the screw [3] to release the upper limit mounting plate [1].
11. Loosen or tighten the screw [4] to adjust the height of the upper
limit sensor mounting plate [1].
Note
The upper limit sensor mounting plate [1] goes up by
tightening the screw [4], and it goes down by loosening
the screw.
Reference:
Raising the position of the upper limit sensor brings down
[6] [5] the pick-up roller [5] (resulting in the increased difference
[7] of elevation between the paper feed roller [6] and the
pick-up roller [5]).
Lowering the position of the upper limit sensor brings up
the pick-up roller [5] (resulting in the reduced difference
[7] of elevation between the paper feed roller [6] and the
[7] pick-up roller [5]).
When the printed page is folded, when paper jam occurs
frequently, or when feeding paper with a large amount of
curl, raise the upper limit sensor mounting plate.
a03xf3c007ca When feeding convexly curled paper, lower the upper limit
sensor mounting plate.
12. After the completion of the adjustment, fasten the screw [3] to
secure the upper limit mounting plate [1].
13. Insert a paper, and set the tray.
I -252
14. Make a copy/print to confirm that papers are fed properly. If the
problem is not solved, repeat steps 9 to 14.
15. Check the paper feed pick-up amount. (Refer to I.12.1 Paper feed
pick-up amount adjustment)
12.3 Separation pressure adjustment

(1) Usage
When a no feed or double feed condition occurs repeatedly, conduct the separation pressure adjustments.
Note
The no-feed or multi-feed error is most likely to occur due to paper type or operating environment. No feed tends to occur in low
temperature environment, whereas high temperature environment results in a higher rate of multi-feed.
Do not make an excessive adjustment. Doing so may reverse the respective symptoms.
(2) Procedure
2. Change the position of the spring adjustment lever [1]. The
separation pressure is strengthened when the lever moves to the
direction [2] and is weakened when the lever moves to the
direction [3].
Weak: A double feed jam is improved.
Strong: A no feed jam is improved.
Reference:
The pressure applied to the spring increases/decreases
by about 10% increment.
3. Make a copy/print with the tray set, and check to see if a no feed
[1]
or double feed condition occurs.
4. In case either of no feed or double feed occurs, repeat steps 2 to
3.
[2] [3]
a03xf3c008ca
12.4 Lift plate horizontal adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct the paper lift plate horizontal adjustment when a paper feed jam occurs repeatedly or when the lift wire has been changed.
(2) Procedure
Note
tray again.
[2]
[1]
a03xf3c009ca
I -253
5. Check if the lift plate [3] is placed horizontally using the engraved
[1] [3]
lines on the near side [1] and the far side [2] of the tray. If the plate
is not horizontal, perform step 6 and the steps that follow.
6. Loosen the 2 screws [4] on the far side, and align the lift plate [3]
with the engraved lines on the front side [1] and the far side [2] so
that the lift plate is placed horizontally.
Note
Do not loosen the screws on the near side of the tray.
7. After the completion of the adjustment, tighten the 2 screws [4].
[4]
[2]
a03xf3c010ca
12.5 Horizontal adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the device cannot be placed in a horizontal position or when any discrepancy in height and/or tilt is found
between the device and the main body.
Note
Horizontal adjustment may displace the unit position relative to the main body. When the adjustment is completed, be sure to
make a test copy/print to see if papers are properly fed from the PF.
(2) Procedure
outlet.
2. Turn the 4 nuts [2] of the adjusters [1] with a wrench to adjust the
levelness of the unit.
Note
Be sure to take the height against the main body into
account when making the adjustment.
Note
If there are adjuster(s) that are off the ground, turn the nut
[2] with a wrench to extend the adjuster(s) until you feed
the adjuster(s) are securely grounded.
[1] [2]
a03xf3c011ca
I -254
3. Pull out the tray/4, and make sure that the gap Abetween the PF
plate [1] and the tray guide plate [2] is 3 1 mm. Adjust it with the
adjuster on the right rear side of PF to move up when the
clearance is too tight, adjust it with the adjuster on the right front
side of PF to move up when the clearance is too wide.
[1] A [2]
a03xf3c012ca
I -255
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L LU-202
13. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT LU-202

13.1 Separation pressure adjustment
(1) Usage
Conduct the separation pressure adjustment when there occurs a no feed or double feed condition repeatedly.
Note
Do not make an excessive adjustment. Doing so may reverse the symptoms.
Paper type and ambient temperature/humidity can be a major cause of the no-feed or multi-feed jam. For example, no-feed jam
tends to occur in low temperature, and multi-feed jam does in high temperature. Make sure to carry out this adjustment with that
in mind.
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the LU from the main body.
2. Disconnect the hooked end [1] of the spring from the tab, and
attach it to another tab on the left [2] or right [3] side of the center
tab to raise or reduce the separation pressure.
Note
The 5 tabs correspond to 5 pressure levels. Attach the
hooked end of the spring to a tab on the [2] side to raise
the pressure, or attach it to a tab on the [3] side to reduce
the pressure.
Reducing pressure: lowers multi-feed jam rate.
Raising pressure: lowers no-feed jam rate.
[1] The spring force changes in increments of about 10%.
3. Reinstall the LU to the main body.

Note
Make some test prints to check to see that no-feed or
[2] [3] multi-feed jam does not occur.
a03wf3c001ca
13.2 Paper lift plate horizontal adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct the paper lift plate horizontal adjustment when a paper feed jam occurs repeatedly or when the lift wire has been changed.
I -256
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the paper from the LU and close the upper door.
[2] [3] 2. Turn on the main power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch
6. Loosen the 2 screws on the front side [1].
7. Adjust the levelness of the paper lift plate [4] with the adjustment
screw [5] aligning its both end surfaces with the marking-off line [2]
and [3].
Note
Before adjusting with the screw [5], push down the lift
plate lightly to take up any slack in the wires.
8. Tighten the 2 screws [1].

Note
multi-feed jam does not occur.
[5] [4]
[1]
a03wf3c002ca
13.3 Paper centering adjustment

(1) Usage
Perform this adjustment when images are not printed on the center of paper, which fed from LU, even after performing the "Printer centering
adjustment (tray4)" (adjustment range: 4 mm) in service mode.
I -257
(2) Procedure
1. Load about 100 sheets of paper in the LU. (less than 100 may
[2] [1] [3] [4] cause the paper becoming warped when the guide plate is
pressed against it.)
2. Feed paper from the tray4 (LU) and print the test pattern No. 16.
3. Fold the printed sheet in half in main scan direction to see how
much the printed pattern is offcentered.
4. Close the upper door. And turn off the main power switch (SW1)
and the sub power switch (SW2) after the paper lift plate stops at
its uppermost position (listen to the sound of the paper lift motor to
figure out the stop status).
5. Open the upper door and remove paper.
6. Loosen the 2 screws [2] of the guide plate /Fr [1] and the 2 screws
[4] of the guide plate /Rr [3].
7. Loosen the 2 screws [6] of the centering bracket [5].
8. Slide the centering bracket [5] aligning the line on the both ends of
the bracket with the marking-off line [7], and tighten the 2 screws
[6].
Note
When sliding the centering bracket, make sure to slide its
both ends simultaneously (not tilt it) so that the line on the
both ends align with one of the marking off lines at the
[7]
same position.
9. Load paper and press the guide plate /Fr [1] and /Rr [3] against the
paper, and tighten the 2 screws [2] and the 2 screws [4].
Note
When pressing the guide plates against paper, make sure
not to press them too much, or a paper jam may occur.
Note
Make some test prints to check to see that the off-
centered amount falls within the allowable range.
[6] [7] [5]

a03wf3c003ca
13.4 Paper skew adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there is a difference in the inclination found with the main body tray and the paper skew. However, this method
has a limited effect since all of the paper supplied is adjusted at the registration section.
An adjustment is made at a different place according to the case in which there occurs a skew of the same inclination in all of the paper
supplied from the LU or in which there occurs a skew at random for each sheet of paper.
(2) Preparation
1. Make the continuous print of the test pattern (No. 16) to check the skew.
2. Depending on the inclination of a skew, conduct either of the following adjustment B and C.
Skew in the same inclination for the entire LU: Adjustment procedure B
Skew at random: Adjustment procedure C
I -258
(3) Adjustment procedure of all the paper skew regularly

3. Slide the positioning bracket [3] referring to the marking-off line [2].
Note
When sliding the positioning bracket [3], move its both
edges by the same amount so that they align with the
making-off line [2] at the same position.
4. Print the test pattern (No. 16) continuously to check to see that no
skew of paper occur.
[1] [3]
[2] a03wf3c004ca
(4) Adjustment procedure of each paper skew irregularly

[2] [1] [3] [4] 1. Load about 100 sheets of paper in the LU. (less than 100 may
cause the paper becoming warped when the guide plate is
pressed against it.)
Note
When pressing the guide plates against paper, make sure
2. Turn on the main power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch
3. Open the upper door and loosen the 2 screws [2] of the guide
plate /Fr [1], the 2 screws [4] of the guide plate /Rr [3] and the 2
screws [6] of the guide plate /Rt [5].
4. Press the guide plate /Fr [2], /Rr [4] and /Rt [6] against the paper
and tighten a total of 6 screws [2], [4], and [6].
Note
The paper size indications on the guide plates are marked
2 mm larger than the actual size. The 2 mm gap may cause
the paper skew depending on the paper type.
[5] [6] When pressing the guide plates against paper, make sure
a03wf3c005ca
5. Print the test pattern (No. 16) continuously to check to see that no
skew of paper occur.
13.5 (Maximum) Paper feed height adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the following conditions occur.
No feed
Leading edge of printed page is folded
No-feed jam of thick paper; it gets stuck with the entrance guide plate (the guide plate of the separation roller section).
Double feed
When feeding tightly curled papers
Note
Be sure to carry out the pick-up roller separation adjustment after performing this adjustment, since this adjustment changes
the distance between the pick-up roller surface and paper when the roller moved away from the paper. (Refer to I.13.6 Pick-up
roller separation adjustment )
I -259
(2) Procedure
[1] [3] [4] 1. Remove the paper from the LU and close the upper door.
2. Turn on the main power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch
3. Remove the upper door. (Refer to G.5.2.2 Upper door)
cover)
5. Loosen the screw [1] and adjust the position of the mounting plate
[3] of the upper limit sensor (PS109) [2] while holding it horizontally
referring to the marking-off line [4], and tighten the screw [1].
Note
Be sure to install the sensor mounting plate [3]
[2] horizontally.
a03wf3c006ca
Move the sensor mounting plate [3] downward to raise the
paper feed level, or move the plate upward to lower the
paper feed level.
When no-feed occurs or convexly curled paper needs to
be fed, move sensor mounting plate [3] downward to raise
the paper feed level.
When multi-feed occurs or the paper edge is folded, or
when convexly curled paper needs to be fed, move sensor
mounting plate [3] upward to lower the paper feed height
level.
13.6 Pick-up roller separation adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there occurs a no feed jam repeatedly and when the paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment is made.
I -260
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the paper from the LU and close the upper door.
[2] [1] [6] 2. Turn on the main power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch
3. Remove the upper door. (Refer to G.5.2.2 Upper door)
cover)
5. With the moving part [2] of the pick-up solenoid (SD100) [1] pulled
in the direction of the arrow, measure the gap [5] between the pick-
up roller [3] and the paper lift plate [4].
Standard value: 0.5mm or more (0.5 to 2.5 mm)
6. Loosen a screw [6] and move the SD100 [1] back and forth
reffering to the marking-off line [7] to adjust its position, and tighten
the screw [6].
[7] Note
multi-feed jam does not occur.
[3] [4] [5]
a03wf3c006ca
I -261
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L MB-504
14. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT MB-504

14.1 Paper feed roller /BP load adjustment
(1) Usage
Executes when no feed occurs at the bypass paper feed.
(2) Procedure
[1] [3] [2] intermediate conveyance clutches /2 (CL4) and /3 (CL5))
2. Install the weight plate [3] on the top of the paper feed roller /BP [2]
with 2 screws [1].
3. Move back the duplex section.
4. Execute printing to check the feedability.
5. Increase the number of the weight plate and repeat steps 1 to 4
when no feed is not solved.
Note
Weight plate (P/N: 13FG4062*) is a supplied part. Purchase
separately for using the plate.
Use the weight plate up to 4.
When the weight plate is installed, be sure to execute "I.
14.3 Pick-up shift amount adjustment (bypass)".
a052f3c003ca
14.2 (Maximum) Paper feed height adjustment (bypass)

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when no feed or edge folding occurs or for feeding tightly curled paper.
Note
Since this adjustment infects on the Pick-up shift amount, be sure to conduct "I.14.3 Pick-up shift amount adjustment (bypass)"
after the adjustment.
(2) Procedure
2. Remove the paper feed solenoid cover. (Refer to F.9.2.1
Replacing the pick-up roller /BP and the paper feed roller rubber /
BP)
3. Loosen the screw [1], and then adjust the installation position of
the upper limit sensor /BP (PS25) [2].
Note
Be sure to mark off the initial mark.
1. When the value is not within the standard value
Adjust the position of the sensor mounting plate up and
down so that the heights of the entrance guide and the up/
down plate are balanced out to be within the standard
[2] value.
To raise the height of the up/down plate: Lower the
To lower the height of the up/down plate: Raise the
2. When any trouble occurs
[1] When the paper edge is folded: Raise the sensor
mounting plate.
When concavely curled paper is being fed: Raise the
8050fs1052 sensor mounting plate.
When convexly curled paper is being fed: Lower the
4. Install the paper feed solenoid cover.

7. When the trouble is not solved, repeat the steps 1 to 6 to readjust
the installation position of PS25.
14.3 Pick-up shift amount adjustment (bypass)

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when no feed jam occurs frequently.
I -262
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L MB-504
(2) Procedure
2. Remove the paper feed solenoid cover. (Refer to F.9.2.1
Replacing the pick-up roller /BP and the paper feed roller rubber /
BP)
3. Loosen the screw [1], and then adjust the installation position of
the pick-up solenoid /BP (SD5) [2].
Note
Be sure to mark off the initial mark.
4. Install the paper feed solenoid cover.

[2]
7. When the no feed jam is not solved, repeat the steps 1 to 6 to
readjust the installation position of SD5.
[1]
8050fs1054
I -263
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L RU-509
15. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT RU-509

15.1 Height adjustment
(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there is any discrepancy in height and slant found between the main body and other optional devices.
(2) Procedure
1. Conduct the height adjustment by rotating the screw [1] at each of
4 positions. It goes up when rotating the screw [1] to the right, and
goes down when rotating to the left.
Note
Be sure to make adjustments while considerate the height
between other optional devices.
[1]
15.2 Position adjustment of the shutter solenoid (SD5)

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when replacing the shutter solenoid (SD5) or C-1297 occurs.
I -264
(2) Procedure
[3] [5] [4] 2. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the shutter solenoid (SD5) [1].
3. Measure the gap A [5] between the solenoid installation plate [3]
A
and the framework [4]. Adjust it so that it obtains the standard
value, and then tighten the screw [2].
Standard value: A = 0mm to 0.5mm
4. After adjusting, Turn ON the main body to enter the service mode
and select [State Confirmation]- [I/O Check Mode]. Conduct the
output code 69-50 to check that there is no gap between the
shutter [6] and the stopper [7].
[2]
[1]
[6]
[7]
I -265
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L FS-521
16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT FS-521

16.1 Adjusting the flat-stapling stopper position
(1) Usage
In the flat-stapling mode, adjustments are made when the distance from the edge of paper to the stapling position is not within the standard
value, or when it is on a slant.
Note
When making adjustments, be sure not to move the stapler by hand. (It causes the teeth of the belt and the gear to jump.)
(2) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Conduct the following in the output check of the I/O check mode in
the service mode.
72-31 (Stapler movement motor home position search)
72-78 (Alignment motors /Fr and /Rr home position search)
72-42 (Rear stopper motor stopper release)
2. Turn OFF the power switch (SW2) and the main power switch
outlet.
3. Open the front door and remove the screw [1] of the wire [2].
a0gyt3c015ca
[1] 4. Pull out the stacker unit, remove the rail stopper screws [1], 1
each, in front and rear and pull the stacker unit further out.
[1] fs503fs3002c
I -266
5. Loosen the screws [2], 1 each, of 4 flat-stapling stopper [1] and
make adjustments of the positions of the 4 flat-stapling stoppers.
Note
With the paper [3] inserted, be sure to check to see if the
paper is on a slant and that all of 4 flat-stapling stoppers
are in contact with the edge [4] of paper.
[4] When the stopper is not seen clearly, be sure to adjust it
after removing the guide plate assembly [5].
[3]
[1]
[5] [1] [3]
[2] fs503fs3009c
6. Conduct flat-stapling to check to see if it is within the standard

value.
Standard value: a = 9.5 2mm
The line [1] connecting 2 staples is parallel to the edge of
paper.
When the value is not within the standard value or the line is
[1] not parallel to the edge of paper, repeat the above steps 1 to
A 6.
fs503fs3004c 7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
16.2 Adjusting the alignment plate position

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment operation when the slippage in the bundle of paper while in stapling and the uneven paper exit while in non-stapling
cannot be adjusted by conducting "Staple Center Position", "Paper Width Adj.(Staple)" and "Paper Width Adj.(Straight)" in the service mode.
Note
After conducting this adjustment, be sure to conduct " I.5.9.1 Staple Center Position (Staple Finisher Position Adjustment) ", " I.
5.9.2 Paper Width Adj.(Staple) (Staple Finisher Position Adjustment) " and " I.5.9.3 Paper Width Adj.(Straight) (Staple Finisher
Position Adjustment) " again.
I -267
(2) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Reset the setting values of "Staple Center Position", "Paper Width
Adj.(Staple)" and "Paper Width Adj.(Straight)" to "0".
2. Conduct the alignment motors /Fr and /Rr home position
movement in the output check 72-78 of the I/O check mode in the
service mode.
3. Turn OFF the main power switch (SW1) of the main body, and
unplug the power plug of the main body from the power outlet.
4. Open the front door and remove the screw [1] of the wire [2].
a0gyt3c015ca
[1] 5. Pull out the stacker unit, remove the rail stopper screws [1], 1
each, in front and rear and pull the stacker unit further out.
[1] fs503fs3005c
B A [2] 6. Loosen 2 screws [1] and check to see if the distance from the front
side of the side plate [2] in the rear to the paper side of the
alignment plate /Rr [3] is within the standard value A, and then
tighten the screws [1].
Standard value A = 17.9 + 1.0/ - 0.0mm
7. Check the alignment plate /Rr to see if it is on a slant. Loosen 2
screws [4] and check to see if the distance between the alignment
plate /Rr [3] and the inner face on the paper side of the alignment
plate /Fr [5] is within the standard value B, and then tighten the
screws [4].
Standard value: B = 376mm + 0/- 0.5mm
8. Move the staple home position using I/O check mode 72-31 in
[3]
service mode, insert a thick paper or similar sheet, and check the
[5] [4] [1] fs503fs3006c
angle of the rear end stopper and the alignment plate.
Note
Move the alignment plates with your hand until the paper
width space is created between them, and make sure
I -268
there is no improper gap at the upper and lower side of
the alignment plates.

(1) Usage
Adjustments are made when there is any discrepancy in height and slant found between the main body and other optional devices.
(2) Procedure
1. Conduct the horizontal adjustment by inserting the driver to the
holes [2] and [3] on each of 4 ratchet material [1] and moving it
back and forth. It goes up with the hole [2] and goes down with the
hole [3].
Note
between the main body and other optional devices.
Be sure not to go it up too much, otherwise the bolt
comes off. (max. 5mm)
Be sure that the caster is contacting installation surface,
otherwise the ratchet does not work. In this case, adjust
the casters which are on the ground first to get the
casters spinning to be on the ground.
[1] [2] [3]
a0gyf3c001ca
I -269

17.1 Adjustment the bypass gate
(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when a JAM occurs in the bypass gate.
(2) Procedure
3. Remove 2 screws [2] of the rail stopper and pull the stacker unit
frontward further.
[2] Note
To prevent FS from falling, put something to hold [3]
under the stacker unit pulled out.
[1]
[2]
[3] 15jkf3c001na
[2] 4. Open the bypass conveyance guide plate [1].

5. Check that the distance between the bypass gate [2] and the
bypass conveyance plate [3] is within the standard value when the
[1] bypass gate solenoid (SD5) is OFF.
Standard value: A = 3.2mm 0.5mm
When the value is not within the standard value, perform the
following procedure.
mm [3]
0.5
3.2
A=
[2]
15jkf3c002na
[3] [2] [1] 6. Remove the rear cover.

(Refer to G.8.2.5 Rear cover)
7. Disconnect all connectors [2] connected to the FNS control board
(FNSCB) [1] and then remove the wiring harness from the clamp
[3].
8. Release 8 board supports [4] and remove FNSCB [1] from the
[4] [4] [5]

a04df2c002ca
[2] 9. Remove 6 screws [1] and remove the board mounting plate [2].
[1]
a04df2c003ca
I -270
10. Loosen [2 screws [2] of the bypass gate solenoid (SD5) [1] and
[4] A= adjust the position of SD5 while checking the engraved line [5] so
3.2
0.5 that the distance between the bypass gate [3] and the bypass
mm conveyance plate [4] is within the standard value when SD5 is
[3] OFF.
[2]
[5]
[1] 15jkf3c005na
17.2 Adjusting the shift position

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the shift amount of the paper exited to the main tray is not within a standard value (30 mm).
(2) Procedure
Upper cover /1
(Refer to G.8.2.2 Upper cover /1)
Upper cover /2
2. Turn ON the main body to enter the service mode and select
[State Confirmation]- [I/O Check Mode]. Perform the output code
72-03 : Shift roller motor (M2).
[4] [3] [5] [4]
3. Turn OFF the main body.
4. Both in the home position and the shift position, check to see if the
edge of the actuator [5] of the slide gear [4] is in the notch [3] of
the slide stay [2] of the shift unit [1].
When the edge of the actuator is in the notch of the slide stay,
perform the following adjustment.
[1] [2] 15jkf3c006na
[3] [2] [4] [1] 5. Loosen the screw [2] on the mounting plate [4] of the shift roller
home sensor (PS18) [1], and then adjust the position of the
mounting plate [4] by referring to the engraved line [3].
6. After completing the adjustment, tighten the screw [2].
15jkf3c007na
17.3 Adjusting the paper exit opening solenoid

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the paper exited to the main tray is misaligned.
I -271
(2) Procedure
[1]
Upper cover /1 (Refer to G.8.2.2 Upper cover /1) or the option
PI (when PI is connected)
Upper cover /2
A=6.5 0.5mm Rear cover
[2] [State Confirmation]- [I/O Check Mode]. Turn the output code
72-45 : Paper exit opening solenoid (SD4) to ON.
4. Check to see if the gap between the plunger [2] of the solenoid
and the stopper [3] of the mounting plate is within a standard value
[3] 15jkf3c008na
when SD4 [1] is OFF.
following adjustment.
5. Remove 2 screws [1] from the solenoid mounting plate [3], and
then remove the solenoid [2] together with the mounting plate [3].
[1]
[2]
[3] 15jkf3c009na
[2] 6. Loosen 2 screws [1] on the solenoid, and then adjust the position
of the solenoid [2] and tighten the screws.
A=6.5 0.5mm
[1] 15jkf3c010na
I -272
[1] [5] 7. Reinstall the solenoid and the mounting plate [1], and then install
the solenoid mounting plate at the position where the paper exit
guide [2] contacts with the stopper (rubber) [4] of the paper exit
[4] guide stay [3] with 2 screws [5].
Note
[3] Check that there is 1 mm or larger gap between the paper
exit guide [2] and the paper guide stay [3].
[2]
[4] [2]
[2] [3] 15jkf3c011na
17.4 Adjusting the mounting position of the paper exit arm

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there is problem with the paper exit during the stapling operation.
(2) Procedure
[3] 2. Rotate the belt detection gear to align the edge of the actuator [2]
of the belt detection gear [1] with the notch [3] of the panel /Rr.
[2]
[1]
15jkf3c012na
I -273
3. Check to see if the paper exit arm [1] is within the extent shown in
45 the illustration [2].
When the position is not within the extent, perform the following
adjustment.
4. Remove screws [2] provided on the rail stopper, and then pull out
the stacker unit [2] further. (Refer toI.17.1 Adjustment the bypass
gate)
Note
To prevent FS from falling, put something to hold under
the stacker unit pulled out.
[2]
[1]
15jkf3c013nc
[1]
5. Remove the screw [2] from the belt detection gear [1] and adjust
the position of the paper exit arm to the standard position, and
then adjust the position of the belt detection gear [1] to the position
in step 2 and secure it.
[2]
15jkf3c014na
17.5 Adjusting the mounting position of the alignment plate /Up

(1) Usage
To adjust the misalignment of the stapled paper.
(2) Procedure
1. Turn ON the main body, and then turn OFF the main body after the
FS initial operation.
3. Remove screws provided on the rail stopper, and then pull out the
stacker unit further. (Refer to I.17.1 Adjustment the bypass gate)
Note
4. Check that the actuator [2] of the alignment home sensor /Up
(PS8) [1] is on its home position.
[2] [1] 15jkf3c015na
I -274
5. Check that the gap A between the adjustment plate /Up [1] and the
A 41.2 0.5mm panel /Rr [2] is within the specified value.
Standard value: A = 41.2 0.5mm (within)
[1] [2] 15jkf3c016nb
[3] 6. Loosen the screw [1], fix the gap between the adjustment plate /
UpRr [2] and the panel /Rr [3], and then secure the screw.
7. Loosen the screw [4], fix the gap between the adjustment plate /
1.5 UpRr [2] and the adjustment plate /UpFr [5].
A=335.5 0.5 mm
Standard value: A=335mm to 337mm (within)
[5] [4] [1] [2] 15jkf3c017nb
17.6 Staple position adjustment

(1) Usage
When the stapling position is not at the standard, conduct this adjustment.
Note
Be sure not to move the stapler unit in the horizontal direction by hand. Otherwise, it may cause the belt and gear tooth
skipping.
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Perform stapling to check that the stapling position is within the
A=8.5 3mm standard.
Standard value for 1-corner staple at rear [1]: A = 8.5mm
3mm
Standard value for 1-staple at front [2]: B = 8.5mm 3mm
Standard value for flat-staple [3]: C = 8.5mm 3mm
(In the case of flat-staple, make sure that the line [4]
connecting 2 staples is parallel to the edge of paper.)
When the value is not within the standard value or the line is not
B=8.5 3mm
parallel to the edge of paper, conduct the following procedure.
[3]
C=8.5 3mm
[4] 15jkf3c018na
[2] 2. Open the front door and pull out the stacker unit.
3. Remove 2 screws provided on the rail stopper, and then pull out
the stacker unit further. (Refer to I.17.1 Adjustment the bypass
gate)
Note
4. Loosen the adjustment screws [1], 2 each, of the flat-stapling

stoppers /Fr and /Rr and the adjustment screw [2], 1 each, of the
assist stoppers /Fr and /Rr to adjust the positions of the flat-
stapling stoppers /Fr and /Rr and the assist stoppers /Fr and /Rr.
[1] [3] [1] 15jkf3c019na Note
Be sure to make the heights of 4 stoppers same.
I -275
5. Loosen the adjustment screw [3] of the fixing stopper and adjust
the position of the fixing stopper within 0 to -0.5mm against the
heights of the other stoppers.
6. Perform stapling to check that the stapling position is within the
standard.
I -276

18.1 Adjustment the bypass gate
(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when a JAM occurs in the bypass gate.
(2) Procedure
3. Remove 2 screws [2] of the rail stopper and pull the stacker unit
frontward further.
[2] Note
To prevent FS from falling, put something to hold [3]
under the stacker unit pulled out.
[1]
[2]
[3] 15jkf3c001na
[2] 4. Open the bypass conveyance guide plate [1].

5. Check that the distance between the bypass gate [2] and the
bypass conveyance plate [3] is within the standard value when the
[1] bypass gate solenoid (SD5) is OFF.
mm [3]
0.5
3.2
A=
[2]
15jkf3c002na
[3] [2] [1] 6. Remove the rear cover.

7. Disconnect all connectors [2] connected to the FNS control board
(FNSCB) [1] and then remove the wiring harness from the clamp
[3].
8. Release 8 board supports [4] and remove FNSCB [1] from the
[4] [4] [5]

a04df2c002ca
[2] 9. Remove 6 screws [1] and remove the board mounting plate [2].
[1]
a04df2c003ca
I -277
10. Loosen [2 screws [2] of the bypass gate solenoid (SD5) [1] and
[4] A= adjust the position of SD5 while checking the engraved line [5] so
3.2
0.5 that the distance between the bypass gate [3] and the bypass
mm conveyance plate [4] is within the standard value when SD5 is
[3] OFF.
[2]
[5]
[1] 15jkf3c005na
18.2 Adjusting the shift position

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the shift amount of the paper exited to the main tray is not within a standard value (30 mm).
(2) Procedure
Upper cover /1
Upper cover /2
72-03 : Shift roller motor (M2).
[4] [3] [5] [4]
4. Both in the home position and the shift position, check to see if the
edge of the actuator [5] of the slide gear [4] is in the notch [3] of
the slide stay [2] of the shift unit [1].
When the edge of the actuator is in the notch of the slide stay,
[1] [2] 15jkf3c006na
[3] [2] [4] [1] 5. Loosen the screw [2] on the mounting plate [4] of the shift roller
home sensor (PS18) [1], and then adjust the position of the
mounting plate [4] by referring to the engraved line [3].
6. After completing the adjustment, tighten the screw [2].
15jkf3c007na
18.3 Adjusting the paper exit opening solenoid

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the paper exited to the main tray is misaligned.
I -278
(2) Procedure
[1]
Upper cover /1 (Refer to G.8.2.2 Upper cover /1) or the option
PI (when PI is connected)
Upper cover /2
A=6.5 0.5mm Rear cover
[2] [State Confirmation]- [I/O Check Mode]. Turn the output code
72-45 : Paper exit opening solenoid (SD4) to ON.
4. Check to see if the gap between the plunger [2] of the solenoid
and the stopper [3] of the mounting plate is within a standard value
[3] 15jkf3c008na
when SD4 [1] is OFF.
following adjustment.
5. Remove 2 screws [1] from the solenoid mounting plate [3], and
then remove the solenoid [2] together with the mounting plate [3].
[1]
[2]
[3] 15jkf3c009na
[2] 6. Loosen 2 screws [1] on the solenoid, and then adjust the position
of the solenoid [2] and tighten the screws.
A=6.5 0.5mm
[1] 15jkf3c010na
I -279
[1] [5] 7. Reinstall the solenoid and the mounting plate [1], and then install
the solenoid mounting plate at the position where the paper exit
guide [2] contacts with the stopper (rubber) [4] of the paper exit
[4] guide stay [3] with 2 screws [5].
Note
[3] Check that there is 1 mm or larger gap between the paper
exit guide [2] and the paper guide stay [3].
[2]
[4] [2]
[2] [3] 15jkf3c011na
18.4 Adjusting the mounting position of the paper exit arm

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there is problem with the paper exit during the stapling operation.
(2) Procedure
[3] 2. Rotate the belt detection gear to align the edge of the actuator [2]
of the belt detection gear [1] with the notch [3] of the panel /Rr.
[2]
[1]
15jkf3c012na
I -280
[2] [1] 3. Check to see if the paper exit arm [1] is within the extent shown in
the illustration [2].
When the position is not within the extent, perform the following
adjustment.
the stacker unit [2] further. (Refer to I.18.1 Adjustment the bypass
gate)
Note
15jmf3c001na
[1]
5. Remove the screw [2] from the belt detection gear [1] and adjust
the position of the paper exit arm to the standard position, and
then adjust the position of the belt detection gear [1] to the position
in step 2 and secure it.
[2]
15jkf3c014na
18.5 Adjusting the mounting position of the alignment plate /Up

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there is misalignment in the flat-stapled paper bundle.
(2) Procedure
[1]
1. Turn ON the main body, and then turn OFF the main body after the
FS initial operation.
the stacker unit [2] further. (I.18.1 Adjustment the bypass gate)
Note
4. Check that the actuator of the alignment home sensor /Up (PS2) is
on its home position.
15jmf3c002na
A=49.75 0.5mm 5. Check that the distance between the front surface of the rear plate
1.5 [1] and the paper side surface of the alignment plate /UpRr [2] is
B=335.5 mm
0.5
within a standard value A, and also check that the gap between
[1]
the alignment plate /UpRr [2] and the alignment plate /UpFr [3] is
within a standard value B.
Standard value: B = 335.5mm + 1.5/- 0.5mm
[3] [2]
I -281
[4] [1] [2]

6. Loosen 2 screws [1] and adjust the position of the alignment plate /
UpRr [2] referring to the marking line [3] so that the misalignment
amount is within the a standard value A, and then fix it. Then
adjust the position of the alignment plate /UpFr [4] with reference
to the alignment plate /UpRr so that the standard value B is
obtained.
[2]
[1] [3]
15jmf3c004na
18.6 Adjusting the mounting position of the alignment plate /Lw

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there is an uneven edge found with the bundle of paper in the saddle stitching mode.
(2) Procedure
1. Check that "I.18.5 Adjusting the mounting position of the alignment
plate /Up" has been conducted.
72-41: Saddle stitching stopper motor (M18).
[1] gate)
Note
[2] To prevent FS from falling, put something to hold under
[3]
15jmf3c005na
6. Remove the stapler unit cover.
(Refer to F.13.4.1 Removing/reinstalling the stapler unit cover)
7. Check that the actuator of the alignment home sensor /Up (PS8) is
on its home position.
8. Check that the actuator [3] of the alignment home sensor /Lw
(PS24) [2] of the alignment plate /Lw [1] is on its home position.
9. Put the paper larger than A4S on the stacker section and check
that the paper [3] is vertical by putting it against the alignment
plates /UpRr [1] and /LwRr [2]. Check that the distance between
[3]
[1] the front surface of the rear plate [4] and the paper side surface of
the alignment plate /LwRr [2] is within a standard value A, and also
check that the gap between the alignment plate /LwRr [2] and the
[4] alignment plate /LwFr [5] is within a standard value B.
Standard value: B = 335.5mm + 1.5/- 0.5mm (within)
[5] [2]
B=335.5 1.5
0.5 mm A=49.75 0.5mm
I -282
10. Check point for the adjustment
Note
When putting the paper in the stacker, press the flat-
stapling stopper release lever [2] with fingers so that the
paper does not cover the flat-stapling stopper [1].
[1] [2] 15jmf3c007na
11. Loosen the screws [1] and [2] to adjust the alignment plate /LwRr
[4] [3] [3] so that the standard value A is obtained, and then tighten the
screw [1].
Note
When it is hard to check the standard value A, press the
paper against the alignment plates /UpRr and /LwRr and
fix the alignment plate /LwRr at the position at which the
paper is vertical.
12. Adjust the alignment plate /LwFr [4] with reference to the alignment
plate /LwRr [3] so that the standard value B is obtained, and then
[4]
[2] [1] tighten the screw [2].
[2]

(1) Usage
When the stapling position is not at the standard, conduct this adjustment.
Note
skipping.
(2) Procedure
[1] [2]
A=8.5 1.5mm
standard.
Standard value for 1-coner staple at rear [1]: A = 8.5mm
1.5m
Standard value for 1-staple at front [2]: B = 8.5mm 1.5m
Standard value for flat-staple [3]: C = 8.5mm 1.5mm
(In the case of flat-staple, make sure that the line [4]
connecting 2 staples is parallel to the edge of paper.)
When the value is not within the standard value or the line is not
B=8.5 1.5mm parallel to the edge of paper, conduct the following procedure.
[3]
C=8.5 1.5mm
[4]
I -283
72-32 : Stapler movement motor (M11) (A4,1-stapling position).
Then turn OFF the main body.
gate)
Note

6. Loosen 2 adjustment screws [1] of the flat-stapling stopper /Fr and
2 adjustment screws [2] of the flat-stapling stopper /Rr, and adjust
the position of the flat-stapling stoppers referring to the engraved
[1] lines [3] and [4].
standard.
[3]
[2]
[4] 15jmf3c010na
18.8 Staple position adjustment (Saddle stitching)

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the center-stapling positions are not parallel to the paper edge.
Note
skipping.
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Perform stapling to check that the line [2] connecting 2 staples [1]
is parallel to the edge of paper and also check that the gap amount
L is within a standard value.
[2] Standard value: Gap amount L = 1mm or less
[3]
L
15jmf3c011na
I -284
2. Confirm that the "I.18.5 Adjusting the mounting position of the
alignment plate /Up" and "I.18.6 Adjusting the mounting position of
the alignment plate /Lw" are already completed.
gate)
Note

(Refer to F.13.4.1 Removing/reinstalling the stapler unit cover)
6. Loosen 3 screws [2] of the alignment plate/Lw [1].
7. When the staple position is skewed [4] against [6], adjust the
[2] position of the adjustment plate/Lw to the front referring to the
marked position [3].When the staple position is skewed [5] against
[6], adjust the position of the adjustment plate/Lw to the back
[3]
[6] referring to the marked position [3].
8. After the adjustment, tighten 3 screws and perform the stapling to
check that the center-stapling position is at the standard.
[4]
[6] [3]
[5]
15jmf3c012na
18.9 Staple up/down position adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there is a problem in clinching of the stapler.
Note
skipping.
(2) Procedure
1. Perform the stapling operation and check to see if there is one of
the following clinching problems.
There is the buckling [1] of the staple.
[1]
The floating of the staple [2] is more than the standard value (L
= 1 mm).
The bending height of the staple [3] is more than the standard
[2] value (L = 0.5 mm).
L=1mm
When there is any trouble, perform the following procedure.
[3] L=0.5mm
[1] [2] 2. Turn ON the main body and enter the service mode to select
72-32 to move the stapler unit to the position for A4 and 1 staple,
and then turn OFF the main body.
gate)
Note
[3] [3] 15jmf3c015na 5. Remove the stapler unit cover.

6. Remove the cartridge.
7. Remove the flat-stapling stopper release units /Fr and /Rr.
(Refer to F.13.4.2 Replacing the stapler unit)
8. Loosen the screws [3], 4 each, of the clinchers /Fr [1] and /Rr [2].
I -285
9. Install the stapler positioning jig [1] to the cartridge set section.
[1]
15jmf3c016na
10. Rotate the gears [1] of the staplers downward and adjust the
clinchers to the positions where 2 pins [2] of the stapler positioning
jigs are inserted into the positioning holes [4] of the clinchers [3],
and then rotate the gears [1] downward further to fully insert the
pins into the positioning holes.
Note
Be sure to rotate the gears of the staplers carefully
because the pins of the stapler positioning jigs may be
clogged if they are inserted forcibly.
11. Tighten 4 screws on each clincher. (Refer to step 8.)

12. Rotate the gears of the staplers upward to pull out the pins of the
[1] [3] jig from the positioning holes of the clinchers, and then lift up and
remove the jig.
13. Reinstall the cartridge.
14. Check the stapling operation.
[4]
[2] 15jmf3c017na
18.10 Half-fold stopper tilt adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there is misalignment in the edges of the fold paper.
Note
skipping.
Never loosen the screw [1] of the folding stopper. It is prohibited to be removed.
For ease of understand, the position of the folding stopper is shown lower than the actual position in the illustration.
I -286
[1]
15jmf3c018na
(2) Procedure
1. Perform the folding operation on A3 paper and check to see if the
misalignment amount is within the standard value.
Standard value: A = 1mm or less
A
15jmf3c019na
gate)
Note

5. Loosen 5 screws [2] on the folding stopper [1], and then adjust the
tilt of the folding stopper by referring to the engraved line [3].
Note
[4] Never loosen the screw [4] of the folding stopper. It is
[2] prohibited to be removed.
For ease of understand, the position of the folding stopper
[1] is shown lower than the actual position in the illustration.
[3]
6. Tighten 5 screws [2], and then perform the folding operation and
15jmf3c020na
check to see if the misalignment amount is within the standard
value.
18.11 Folding pressure adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment to change the power of the pressure of the folding roller.
I -287
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the rear cover.
A (Refer to G.8.2.5 Rear cover)
[3] B 2. Open the front door.
C 3. Remove the stacker unit cover.
(Refer to G.9.3.9 Stacker unit cover)
4. Change the mounting position of each 2 of pressure springs [3] at
the front [1] and the rear [2].
The folding pressure is:
A: Weak B: Normal C: Strong
Note
C Hook each 4 of pressure springs [3] on the hook holes
B with the same mark.
A
C C
B B
A A
[3] [2] 15jmf3c021na
18.12 Tri-folding position adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the 1st folding position or the 2nd folding position is not within the standard value.
(2) Procedure
1. Check that "I.18.10 Half-fold stopper tilt adjustment" has been
conducted.
2. Perform the tri-folding operation and check to see if the tri-folding
positions are within the standard values.
When the tri-folding positions are not within the standard values,
Folding Standard value Standard
position A4S
c 81/2 x 11S
a
a 95mm 89mm 2mm
b 101mm 95mm 2mm
b 15jmf3c022na c 101mm 95mm 2mm
3. Turn ON the main body, adjust the 1st folding position (standard
"a") with the "Tri-Fold Position Adj." in "Finisher Adjustment" in the
service mode, and then perform the tri-folding operation.
4. If the 1st folding position "a" is within the standard, open the front
door and then pull out the stacker unit.
5. Open the tri-folding guide plate [1] and loosen 2 screws [2] of the
[3] tri-folding stopper, and then adjust the positions of the tri-folding
stoppers [4] by referring to the engraved line [3].
6. Tighten 2 screws [2], and then perform the tri-folding operation and
check to see if the 2nd folding position "b" is within the standard.
[2]
[4]
[2] [1]
15jmf3c023na
I -288
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L PK-512/513
19. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PK-512/513

19.1 Punch hole position skew adjustment
(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment if the edge of the paper and the punch hole position of the paper fed from PI is not in parallel.
(2) Procedure
1. Check the tilt by using the platen copy or Service Mode after
A
aligning paper in the main body paper feed tray with the side guide
plate and the rear guide plate.
2. Conduct the paper skew adjustment when too much tilt is checked.
3. As a sample for checking the tilt of the punch hole position,
conduct 3 sheets of punch mode printing for each simplex mode
C and duplex mode.
4. Measure the punch hole positions on 3 sheets of printed paper to
check the tilt.
Tilt of the punch hole position (%) = (A-B)/C
B 15kjf3c001na
5. Open the front door of FS.

[1]
6. Remove 3 screws [2] and then remove the punch unit cover [1].
[2]
15kjf3c002na
[1] 7. Loosen the 4 adjustment screws [1] of PK.

[3] 8. Based on the division [2] of the mark, move the punch unit [3] to
the right and left only for the tilt amount of the punch hole position.
1 division : 0.5%
9. Tighten the 4 adjustment screws [1].
10. Install the punch unit cover.
11. Repeat step 3 to 10 until the tilt of the punch holes is corrected.
[1] [2] 15kjf3c003na
I -289
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L PI-502
20. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PI-502

20.1 PI tilt adjustment (When PK is connected)
(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment if the edge of the paper and the punch hole position of the paper fed from PI is not in parallel.
(2) Procedure
1. Set 3 sheets of paper in the tray of the PI, and then feed them in
[1] [2]
the punch mode as samples.
2. Fold the sheets in half and check the tilt of the punch holes.
[1]: The front is wider
[2]: The back is wider
15jff3c004na
3. Open the front door of FS, and then loosen the screw [2] of the
guide plate [1].
4. Adjust the guide plate [1] in accordance with the misalignment of
the punch holes by referring to the markings [3].
The back is wider: Move to [4]
The front is wider: Move to [5]
5. Tighten the screw [2].
6. Repeat step 1 to 5 until the tilt of the punch holes is corrected.
[1]
[3]
[2]
[5] [4]
15jff3c005na
20.2 PK punch position centering adjustment

20.2.1 Usage
This adjustment is conducted when the punch position of the paper from the PI is misaligned in the vertical direction.
20.2.2 Adjustment procedure for the cover sheet tray /Up

1. Output the test pattern No.16, and set the paper on the cover sheet
tray /Up of the PI.
2. Process the paper in the punch mode, and check the misalignment
[1] "a" between the center of the paper [1] and the center of the punch
holes [2].
a
[2]
15knf3c002nb
3. Release the hook [1] and remove the cover of the side guide /Fr or /
[1] [2] Rr [2].
I -290
4. Loosen 2 screws [1] of the side guide /Fr or /Rr, and slide the side
[2] [1] guide in the opposite direction to the shift direction twice as far as
the misalignment "a".
Example: If the punch position is shifted 1.5mm backward, the side
guide /Fr or /Rr must be slid 3mm forward.
[2]: 1 division = 2mm
5. Tighten 2 screws [1], and fix the side guide /Fr or /Rr.
Note
Be sure not to tighten 2 screws [2] too much.
6. Set the paper on the cover sheet tray /Up, and make sure that the
side guide /Fr or /Rr is mounted parallel to the paper.
7. Process the paper in the punch mode, and repeat the steps 1 to 6
until the misalignment of the punch hole position is improved.
8. Set the A4S paper on the cover sheet tray /Up, and conduct the
"Tray Size Adjustment" ("Stapler (PI) Adjustment") in the service
mode. (Refer to I.5.9.44 Post Inserter Tray Size)
9. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in reverse.
20.2.3 Adjustment procedure for the cover sheet tray /Lw

1. Output the test pattern (No.16), and set the paper on the cover
sheet tray /Lw of the PI.
2. Process the paper in the punch mode, and check the misalignment
[1] "a" between the center of the paper [1] and the center of the punch
holes [2].
a
[2]
15knf3c002nb
3. Release the hook [1] and remove the cover of the side guide /Fr or /
[1] [2] Rr [2].
4. Remove 2 screws [1], and dismount the side guide /Fr or /Rr [2].
[1] [2] [1]
5. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the side guide /Fr or /Rr [1], and slide the
[1] [2] side guide in the opposite direction to the shift direction twice as far
as the misalignment "a".
Example: If the punch position is shifted 1.5mm backward, the side
guide /Fr or /Rr [1] must be slid 3mm forward.
6. Tighten 2 screws [2], and fix the side guide /Fr or /Rr.
Note
I -291
7. Mount the side guide /Fr or /Rr with 2 screws [1].
[1] [2] [1] Note
8. Set the paper on the cover sheet tray /Up, and make sure that the
side guide /Fr or /Rr is mounted parallel to the paper.
9. Process the paper in the punch mode, and repeat the steps 1 to 6
until the misalignment of the punch hole position is improved.
10. Set the A4S paper on the cover sheet tray /Lw, and conduct the
"Tray Size Adjustment" ("Stapler (PI) Adjustment") in the service
mode. (Refer to I.5.9.44 Post Inserter Tray Size)
11. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in reverse.
I -292
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L LS-505
21. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT LS-505

21.1 Adjusting the paper press solenoid /1 (SD6)
(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when uneven stack occurs.
Note
Before starting this operation, be sure to bring the stacker tray down to the bottom in advance.
(2) Procedure
1. With the paper press solenoid /1 (SD6) turned on by hand, check
to see if the A section in the drawing left is 1.5mm to 3mm.
Rear end retaining

part motor (M2)
Paper exit guide plate
2. When not in the range of adjustment, remove the spring, loosen

the fixing screw of the paper press solenoid /1 (SD6), and make
adjustment by moving it from side to side so that the range of the
SD stroke becomes 6 0.5mm.
rOO

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when uneven stack occurs with the B4 or larger paper.
(2) Procedure
1. With the paper press solenoid /2 (SD7) turned OFF by hand, check
to see if the A section in the drawing left is 66 2mm.
ls502to3004c
2. When not in the range of adjustment, loosen the fixing screw of the
paper press solenoid /2 (SD7) and make adjustments by sliding it
up and down.
ls502to3005c

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when uneven stack occurs.
I -293
(2) Procedure
1. With the paper press solenoid /3 (SD8) turned OFF by hand, check
to see if the A section in the drawing left is 50.1 1mm.
ls502fs3006c
paper press solenoid /3 (SD8) and make adjustments by sliding it
from side to side.
ls502fs3007c
21.4 Adjusting the job partition solenoid (SD2)

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when uneven stack occurs with the shift paper and non-shift paper in the sort mode.
(2) Procedure
1. With the job partition solenoid (SD2) turned ON by hand, check to
NG OK see if the job partition blade [1] in the drawing left does not
protrude from the metal frame [2].
[1]
[2]
ls502to3009c
job partition solenoid (SD2) and make adjustments by sliding it
from side to side.
ls502fs3008c

(1) Usage
Adjustments are made when there is any discrepancy in height and slant found between the main body and other optional devices.
I -294
(2) Procedure
hole [3].
Note
[1] [2] [3]
a0h1f3c001ca
21.6 Grip conveyance home sensor adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the grip standby position on the grip belt is improper to receive the paper or when the shift unit drive
abnormality occurs.
Note
When the shift unit drive abnormality (C-1204: 1st tandem, C-1214: 2nd tandem) occurs after replacing the LS control board
(LSCB), conduct the following adjustment.
(2) Procedure
1. Turn ON the power of the main body.
2. Move the grip belt by hand and stop it at the position in which the
leading edge of the grip [1] is about 4mm from the stack exit guide
plate [2].
a: approx. 4mm
[2]
[1] ls502fs3010c
3. Rotate VR1 [1] on the LS control board (LSCB) fully to the left.
[1] ls502fs3011c
I -295
4. Rotate VR1 [1] to the right and stop it at the position in which LED2
[2] turns ON from flashing.
Note
When LED2 is rotated too much from the turn-on position
to the flashing position, repeat the procedure starting at
Step2.
5. After completion of adjustment, turn off and on the power of the

main body and check if the interval "a" between the edge of the
grip and the stack exit guide plate is 8 2mm.
[2] [1] ls502fs3012c
6. When the interval is not within the standard value, change the
position of the sensor mounting plate [1]. Loosen 2 screws [2] and
slide the sensor mounting plate to the right [3] to widen the interval
"a". Slide the plate to the left [4] to narrow the interval.
[1]
[4] [3]
[2]
I -296
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L FD-503
22. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT FD-503

22.1 Roller solenoids /1 (SD5), /2 (SD6), /3 (SD7) and /4 (SD8) position adjustment
(1) Usage
When the roller solenoids /1 (SD5), /2 (SD6), /3 (SD7), /4 (SD8) are changed, be sure to conduct this adjustment.
Note
The following adjustment steps show the steps for the roller solenoid /2 (SD6). The steps for the roller solenoids /1 (SD5), /3
(SD7) and /4 (SD8), are the same as the steps for the roller solenoid /2.
(2) Procedure
1. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the roller solenoid /2 (SD6) [1].
2. Measure the distance A [5] between the end face of the vertical
conveyance roller /Lt [3] and the right side (the opposite of the
paper through side) of the guide plate [4] when the roller solenoid /
[1] 2 (SD6) [1] is turned ON, and then tighten the screw [2] after
adjusting the distance so that it becomes the standard value.
[4] Standard value: A = 0mm to 1.5mm
[2]
[3]
[1]
[3]
A
[5]
[4] fd501fs3001c
22.2 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18) position adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when replacing the 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18).
I -297
(2) Procedure
1. Loosen 3 screws [2] on the 2nd folding roller solenoid mounting
[1] plate [1].
2. Measure the gap A which the vertical conveyance roller /Lt [4] is
out from the guide plate [5] when the 2nd folding roller solenoid
(SD18) [3] is ON.
[2] 3. Adjust the mounting position so that the gap A is within the
standard value shown in the following table, and then loosen 3
screws [2].
Standard value: A = 4mm to 5mm
[3]
[4]
[4]
A
[5]
[4] a0h0f3c002ca
22.3 Punch Centering Adjustment

(1) Usage
When the front to rear position of the punch holes cannot be adjusted up to the specification in the paper width adjustment, be sure to conduct
this adjustment. (Refer to I.5.9.6 Paper Width Adjustment (Multi Folder(Punch) Adj.))
(2) Procedure
[3] 1. Disconnect the connector [1] and 4 screws [2], and then remove
the cord support board /A [3].
[1]
[2] fd501fs3002c
A [1] [2] B 2. With the alignment plate /Fr [1] and the alignment plate /Rr [2]
moved to the center, loosen the 2 screws [3].
3. Measure the distances A and B using a ruler and adjust the
positions of the alignment plate /Fr [1] and the alignment plate /Rr
[2] so that the distances A and B become equal, and then tighten 2
screws [3].
[3] fd501fs3003c
I -298

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there is any discrepancy in height and slant found between the main body and other optional devices.
(2) Procedure
hole [3].
Note
[1] [2] [3]
a0h0f3c001ca
22.5 Paper feed control gear position adjustment (PI tray)

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the paper size detection of PI does not work properly.
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Install the regulation plate rack A [1] and the regulation rack B [2]
so that they are aligned with the reference hole of the detection
gear [3].
[3] [2] fd501fs3008c
I -299
[3] [1] 2. Check the paper size VR [2] to ensure it is held by the 2 bosses on
the paper size VR mounting plate [1].
3. Install the paper size VR [2] so that the notch of its center hole is
set to the notch of the detection gear [3].
[2] fd501fs3009c
[1] [2] 4. Check to see if the regulation plate rack A [1], the regulation plate
rack B [2], the hole position of the detection gear [3] and the notch
position of the paper size VR [4] are in the correct position
respectively.
[3]
[4] fd501fs3010c
22.6 Paper feed pick-up volume adjustment (PI tray)

(1) Usage
Perform this adjustment when multi-feed or paper jam occurs when feeding paper from the PI.
(2) Procedure
1. Slide 2 papers feed arm fixing levers [1] to inside, and insert the
[4] shafts [2] into the holes [3] in the paper feed arm to secure the
paper feed arm [4].
[3] [2]
[4]
[1]
fd501fs3011c
I -300
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L SD-506
23. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT SD-506

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when SD is not in a horizontal position.
(2) Procedure
hole [3].
Note
[1] [2] [3]
a0h2f3c001ca
23.2 Folding skew adjustment

(1) Usage
Adjust the skew in the center folding.
(2) Procedure
1. Perform the center folding operation for 5 sheets of A3 or 11 x 17
paper and check their skew "a".
Standard value a = 1.5mm
a 15anf3c002na
I -301
[3] [6] [2] [1] [8] 2. Open the front door /Rt and pull out the folding unit.
3. Loosen the screw [1], adjust the alignment stopper /Rr2 [3] back
and forth by sliding the adjusting bracket [2] to right and left, and
tighten the screw [1].
Note
If the folding pattern on paper exited to the direction of
bundle exit tray front side [4] is [5], slide the adjusting
bracket [2] in the arrowed direction [6].
If the folding pattern is [7], slide the adjusting bracket [2]
in the arrowed direction [8].
By sliding the adjusting bracket [2] to 1mm right and left,
the alignment stopper /Rr2 [3] moves 1/3mm back and
forth.
4. Return the folding unit to the original position and repeat the steps
1 through 3 until the standard value can be obtained.
[5] [7]
[4] a0h2f3c002ca
23.3 Second folding position stabilization adjustment

(1) Usage
This adjustment is for adjusting the misalignment of the second folding position in tri-folding.
Note
This adjustment is to adjust the variation per each folding. Adjust the second folding position by following "I.5.9.21 Half-Fold
Position Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.)"
Be sure that the adjusting position is vary from the number of folding sheets.
(2) Procedure
1. Conduct the tri-folding with A4S or 8 1/ x 11S, and check if the
2
interval "A" between the first folding and the second folding is
within the standard value.
Standard value A = 102.0mm 3mm (A4S)
Standard value A = 96.1mm 3mm (81/2 x 11S)
a0h2f3c003ca
I -302
[2] [1] 2. Open the front door /Rt and pull out the folding unit.
3. Loosen 2 screws [1] and move the stopper [2] in parallel back and
forth referring to the mark [3].
Note
Moving to the front side [4] makes the length between the
foldings longer.
Moving to the back side [5] makes the length between the
foldings shorter.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 until the standard value is obtained.
[4] [3] [5] a0h2f3c004ca

(1) Usage
Adjust the misalignment between the staple position and the folding position.
(2) Procedure
1. Perform the saddle stitching operation for 25 to 30 sheets of A3 or
11 x 17 paper and check the misalignment "a" between the staple
position and the folding position.
Standard value a = 1mm
When the value is not within the standard value, conduct "(2).
Adjustment Procedure /1" then "(3). Adjustment Procedure /2" in
this order.
a
15anf3c005na
(3) Adjustment Procedure /1

Note
Be sure not to adjust over the allowable value since only the saddle stitching hold /Up is adjusted but the saddle stitching hold /
Lw is not.
When it cannot be adjusted by this simple adjustment (fine adjustment), be sure to conduct "(3). Adjustment Procedure /2".
1. Open the front door /Lt.
2. Install the M4 screw [1] obtained from the exterior and so on into
[2]
[1] the adjustment screw hole [3] of the saddle stitching hold /Up [2]
with your fingers and tighten it slightly until it is contacted.
Note
Do not tighten the screw [1] too tight. Stop tightening
when it is contacted.
[4]
[5]
3. Loosen the screw [4].
4. Rotate the screw [1] to move the position of the saddle stitching
hold /Up [2] on both of the stapler /Rt and /Lt for the length of the
misalignment "a".
Note
Rotating the screw [1] 1 revolution moves the saddle
stitching hold /Up 0.7mm (same width with staple).
When the screw [1] is tightened, the staple position moves
forward. When the screw [1] is loosened, the staple
position moves backward.
5. While pushing the saddle stitching hold /Up [2] to the allowed
[3] a0h2f3c005ca
direction [5] and contacting it to the screw [1], tighten the screw [4].
6. Remove the screw [1] and return it to the original position.
7. Conduct a test print in procedure A, and repeat steps 2 to 6 until
the standard value is obtained.
I -303
(4) Adjustment Procedure /2

1. Pull out the saddle stitching unit.
(Refer to F.17.3.3 Pulling out the saddle stitching unit)
2. Rotate the screw [1] clockwise until clicked to make the clinchers
[2] contact with the staplers and lock the clinchers [2].
[1] [2] 15anf3c006na
[10] [4] [2] [3] [1] 3. Install the M4 screw [1] obtained from the exterior and so on into
the adjustment screw hole [3] of the saddle stitching hold /Up [2]
with your fingers and tighten it slightly until it is contacted.
Note
4. Loosen the screws [4], [5] and [6].

5. Rotate the screw [1] to move the position of the saddle stitching
hold /Up [2] for the length of the misalignment "a".
Note
Rotating the screw [1] 1 revolution moves the saddle
stitching hold /Up 0.7mm (same width with staple).
6. While pushing the mounting plate [7] to the arrow-marked direction

[9] and contacting the saddle stitching hold /Up [2] to the screw [1],
[9] [8] [7] [6] [5] a0h2f3c006ca
tighten the screws [5].
7. While pushing the saddle stitching hold /Up [2] to the arrow-
marked direction [10] and contacting the saddle stitching hold /Up
to the screw [1], tighten the screw [4], and then tighten the screw
[6].
8. Remove the screw [1] and return it to the original position.
9. Return the saddle stitching unit, and then repeat steps 2 to 8 until
the standard value can be obtained.
23.5 Stapler position adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when a broken staple, a bent staple, or a defective staple occurs in stapling.
This adjustment adjusts the phase lag with the clincher at front and rear.
(2) Procedure
[4] [6] [3] [1] [2] 1. Carry out stapling operation to check that the broken staple, the
bent staple, or the defective staple does not occur. If the defective
occurs, conduct the following procedure.
2. Open the front door /Lt.
3. Install the M3 screw about 20mm long [3] into the adjustment
screw hole [2] of the stapler mounting bracket [1] with fingers and
tighten it slightly until it is contacted to the supporting bracket [4].
Note

5. Rotate the screw [3] and move the anteroposterior position of the
stapler to adjust the phase lag with the clincher.
[5] Note
a0h2f3c007ca
Rotating the screw [3] 1 revolution moves the stapler
0.5mm.
6. While pushing the stapler mounting bracket [1] to the back side [6]
and contacting the screw [3] to the supporting bracket [4], tighten
the screw [5].
I -304
8. Repeat steps 1 to 7 until the defective staple does not occur.
23.6 Tilt/gap adjustment of the clincher

(1) Usage
Perform this adjustment when the staple break through the paper by stapling a few pages of booklet.
(2) Procedure
[3] [2] 1. Carry out stapling operation with 2 sheets of papers, and check if
the staple break through the paper. If the paper is broken through,
perform the following steps.
2. Pull out the saddle stitching unit.
(Refer to F.17.3.3 Pulling out the saddle stitching unit)
3. Tilt the bundle arm [1] to the front.
4. Remove the staple cartridges [2] to the front.
5. Rotate the stapler move gear [3] to move the stapler assy inward,
then move them outward by approx. 30mm (the interval between
the stapler becomes approx. 60mm).
Note
Rotate the stapler move gear [3] to move the stapler assy
inward, then move them outward by approx. 30mm (the
interval between the stapler becomes approx. 60mm).
[1] 15anf3c009na
[1] [2] 6. Remove the screw [1] and remove the sensor cover [2].
15anf3c010na

Note
When reinstalling the saddle stitching unit, be careful not
to let the connector [1] make contact with the main body.
8. Remove 3 screws [2], and then remove the saddle stitching guide
plate [3].
[1]
[2] 15anf3c011na
I -305
[3] 9. Rotate the screw [1] clockwise until clicked to make the clinchers
[2] contact with the staplers [3] and lock the clinchers [2]. At the
moment the clinchers are locked, check if the clinchers do not roll
from side to side and the gap between the staplers and the
clinchers equals to the standard value.
a
Standard value "a": 0.3 0.1mm (2 sheets of 64g/m2 papers can
pass through the gap while 3 sheets cannot.)
10. When the gap is out of the standard value, loosen the screw [1]
counterclockwise and lower the clinchers once. Then perform the
adjustment the following procedure.
[2]
[1]
15anf3c012ca
11. Loose the 4 screws [1].

[3] [2]
12. Adjust the gap between the staplers and the clinchers so that the
gap equals the standard value while loosening (gap becomes
narrower) /tightening (gap becomes wider) the adjusting screw/Rt
[2] and /Lt [3] in the same manner.
Note
Be sure to perform the adjustment for both left and right
side of each clincher/Rt [4] and /Lt [5] so that the stapler
and the clinchers are parallel to each other.
When the adjustment is completed, be sure to tighten the
fixing screws [1].
[5] [4] 13. Put the saddle stitching unit back. Then carry out stapling
operation with 2 sheets of papers, and check if the staple does not
break through the paper.
[1] [2] [3]

15anf3c013ca
23.7 Roller cutter skew adjustment

(1) Usage
Adjust the skew when it occurs at trimming.
I -306
(2) Procedure
1. Check the trimming parallelism by trimmng center folded or senter
a stitched paper if it is within the standard value.
Standard value:
"a" = 1.0mm or less (2 to 15 sheets)
"a" = 1.5mm or less (16 to 50 sheets)
Note
Remove the staple to check it for 2 sheets to 15 sheets.
a0h2f3c008ca
[1] [2] 2. Open the front door /Lt.

3. Loosen the screw [2] of the registration claw.
4. Turn the gear flange [4] with holding the shaft [3], adjust the
registration claw /Rt [1] back and forth, and then tighten the screw
[2].
[4]
[3]
a0h2f3c009ca
5. Check point for the adjustment

Note
Move the registration claw /Rt to the front side in case the
skew is [2] to the paper exit direction [1], or move the claw
to the rear side in case the skew is [3].
[2]
6. Repeat steps 1 to 5 until the standard value is obtained.
[1]
[3]
a0h2f3c010ca
23.8 Trimming adjustment

(1) Usage
Adjust the gap when a large gap occurs at trimming thick books.
Note
This adjustment is effective for the thick book more than 30 pages.
I -307
(2) Procedure
1. Check the trimming gap a by trimming the center folded or senter
stitched book which has 31 pages or more.
a Conduct the following steps if the gap is large.
Note
There is no standard value of trimming gap for 31 pages
or more. Refer to the standard value for 16 pages to 30
pages, which is 1.5mm.
a0h2f3c011ca
[3] [1] [2] 2. Open the front door /Lt.

3. Remove the slope unit. (Refer to F.17.3.2 Replacing the slope unit)
4. Loosen the 2 screws [2] each of the registration claw /Rt and /Lt
[1], move the fold retaining bracket [3] down to the bottom, and
then tighten the screws [2].
5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 until the allowable value can be obtained.
a0h2f3c012ca
I -308
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L PB-503
24. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PB-503

24.1 Clamp sub scan direction alignment adjustment
(1) Usage
Carry out the adjustment when the following conditions occur.
The fore edges near the top or the bottom of the book do not line up perfectly.
The pages come off from the cover paper near the top or the bottom of the book due to insufficient gluing to the spine of inside papers.
An improper gap between the reference plate and the sub scan alignment plate causes misalignment of the pages in the sub scan direction.
To correct the misalignment, perform "Clamp FD Position Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment)" in Service Mode Finisher Adjustment
Perfect Binding Machine Adjustment.
(2) Procedure
[2] [3] [1] 1. Remove the SC cover/Fr. (Refer to G.15.2.11 SC cover /Fr)
3. Adjust the position of the sub scan alignment plate by moving the
clamp entrance assy [2] in the direction of the arrow [4] or [5] to
change the installation position of the clamp entrance assy against
the coupling bracket [3].
Note
Be sure to hold down the coupling bracket [3] when
moving the clamp entrance assy, as the assy is heavy and
hard to move.
[6] shows the book exit direction;
a. A misalignment occurs near the bottom side (front side
when inside paper alignment is performed)
[7]: Move the clamp entrance assy [2] in the direction of
the arrow [4] to make the gap at the front side narrower.
b. A misalignment occurs near the top side (back side
[5] [4] when inside paper alignment is performed)
[8]: Move the clamp entrance assy [2] in the direction of
the arrow [5] to make the gap at the front side wider.
When moving the clamp entrance assy [2] in the direction
of the arrow [5], the misalignment of the inside papers
occurs at both the top and bottom sides. To correct the
misalignment, perform " Clamp FD Position Adj. (Perfect
Binder Adjustment) in Service Mode Finisher
Adjustment Perfect Binding Machine Adjustment after
performing this adjustment.
4. After performing the adjustment, make a test print and binding to

[7] [8] check that the inside papers are perfectly lined up in the sub scan
direction.
Top 5. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in
[6] reverse.
Bottom
a075f3e014ca
24.2 Clamp main scan direction alignment adjustment

(1) Usage
The top and bottom edges of inside papers do not line up and it cannot be corrected even after performing "Clamp section CD alignment
width adjustment" and "SC section CD alignment width adjustment" in the service mode.
The cover and the inside papers are not aligned.
Note
The misalignment of cover and inside papers can also be adjusted in " I.24.10 Cover paper alignment plate adjustment " and " I.
24.12 Cover paper table positioning "
I -309
(2) Procedure
[2] [4] [1] 1. Pull out the clamp unit.
2. Move the clamp alignment plates /Fr [1] and /Rr [2] inward as far
as they go [3].
Note
Be sure to hold both clamp alignment plates/Fr [1] and /Rr
[2], and move them slowly to maintain the proper
engagement of the belt and the pulleys.
3. Loosen 2 screws [4] and adjust the position of the clamp alignment
plates/Fr [1] and /Rr [2] by moving them back and forth.
Note
a. When top edge of cover paper runs off that of inside
papers [6]: Move the clamp alignment plates/Fr [1] and /Rr
[3]
[2] backward by the same distance.
[6] [7] b. When bottom edge of cover paper runs off that of inside
papers [7]: Move the clamp alignment plates/Fr [1] and /Rr
[2] forward by the same distance.
[5] When moving 2 clamp alignment plates in the same
direction, always move them by the same distance.

check that the top and bottom edges of inside papers are perfectly
lined up and the cover edges neatly align with edges of inside
a075f3c015ca
papers.
24.3 Pellet supply arm angle adjustment

(1) Usage
The pellet is supplied to the tank improperly and it spills out of the tank.
The pellet supply arm contacts with the other parts when the arm is in its home position.
Note
Be sure to turn Off the power switch (SW2) and the main power switch (SW1) of the main body in advance.
(2) Procedure
[4] [8] [5] [12] [13] [14] 1. Remove the rear cover /Rt.
(Refer to G.15.2.5 Rear cover /Rt)
3. Adjust the home position of the pellet supply arm by moving the
mounting plate [3] of the pellet supply arm home sensor (PS39) [2]
referring to the engraved lines [4] on the mounting plate [3].
a. Move the mounting plate in the direction of the arrow [5] to make
the pellet supply arm [6] home position become closer to the glue
tank [7].
b. Move the mounting plate in the direction of the arrow [8] to make
the pellet supply arm [6] home position become further from the
glue tank [7].
Note
Adjust the position of the pellet supply arm so that the
[1] [3] [2] [10] [11] [9]
distance between the arm and the edge of the metal frame
is 0mm to 3mm: A when the arm comes to the home
position.
Do not move the mounting plate excessively or it contacts
[6] with the other parts.
[15]
5. Adjust the pellet supply position by moving the mounting plate [11]
[7] of the pellet supply arm upper limit sensor (PS38) [10] referring to
the engraved lines [12] on the mounting plate.
a. Move the mounting plate in the direction of the arrow [13] to
make the angle range of the pellet supply arm [6] become
a15xf3c001ca narrower.
b. Move the mounting plate in the direction of the arrow [14] to
make the angle range of the pellet supply arm [6] become wider.
Note
Adjust the position of the pellet supply arm so that the
distance between the arm and the edge of the metal frame
is +2mm to -4mm: B when the arm comes to the home
position.
Do not move the mounting plate excessively or it contacts
with the other parts.
6. Turn on the main power switch (SW1) and the power switch
(SW2).
I -310
7. Carry out the output check "77-43" of I/O check in the service
mode to detect the home position of the pellet supply arm and
check if the home position is appropriate.
8. Move the pellet supply arm to the pellet supply position using the
output check "77-44" of I/O check in the service mode and check if
the pellet supply position is appropriate.
Note
For restrictions or cautions of the output check "77-44",
refer to the I/O check mode.
When it is hard to check the supply position, turn OFF the
sub power switch (SW) and the main power switch (SW1)
and remove the suction unit [15].
A a15xf3c002ca (Refer to G.15.2.20 Glue tank unit)
B 9. When the test result is not good, turn off the sub power switch
(SW2) and the main power switch (SW1) and repeat steps 2 to 8.
a15xf3c003ca
24.4 Glue apply roller gap adjustment

(1) Usage
This adjusts the gap between the metal surface of the glue apply roller and the spine of inside papers.
Changing the gap allows you to adjust the amount of glue applied to the spine.
Note
Reference values: The thickness of glue layer formed on the roller is about 2mm with the gap of 1.8mm.
CAUTION
The glue tank unit is extremely hot immediately after turning off the main power switch (SW1) or the power switch (SW2) of the
main body.
To prevent burn injuries, make sure to leave the unit until it cools enough before performing the adjustment.
(2) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove the rear cover /Rt. (Refer to G.15.2.5 Rear cover /Rt)
3. Adjust the stopper [4] position by moving it up and down with 2
screws [3] referring to the engraved lines [2], then tighten the
screws [1].
Note
The stopper [4] moves down 0.5mm by tightening the
screws [3] for 1 rotation and it moves up by loosening the
screws.
Raising the stopper brings the glue apply roller upward
[4] [3] making the gap become smaller, which decreases the
amount of glue applied.
Lowering the stopper brings the glue apply roller down
making the gap become larger, which increases the
amount of glue applied.
Do not lower the stopper excessively. Too much gap
causes the glue application to fail.
When raising or lowering the stopper, be sure to adjust 2
screws [3] for the same amount and maintain the
horizontal state of the stopper.

a15xf3c004ca check that the amount of glue applied to the book spine is
appropriate.
24.5 Cover paper glue gap adjustment

(1) Usage
This adjustment is to adjust the gap between the surface of the cover paper glue material (scraper /Fr) and the spine of inside paper.
Adjust the glue amount applied to the book spine by changing the gap.
There are 2 types of gap, one is for the thick coat mode and the other is for the thin coat mode. *1
Note
The gap between the scraper /Fr and the spine is 2.5mm in the thin coat mode and 2.5mm in the thick coat mode. *1
I -311
When the gap in the thick coat mode is adjusted, the gap in the thin coat mode is changed. Therefore, be sure to adjust the gap
in the thin coat mode also after adjusting the gap in the thick coat mode.
*1 The thick coat mode is not used for 1200/1200P/1051/1250/1250P/1052.
CAUTION
The glue tank unit is extremely hot immediately after turning off the main power switch (SW1) or the power switch (SW2) of the
main body.
To prevent burn injuries, make sure to leave the unit until it cools enough before performing the adjustment.
(2) Gap adjustment procedure in thin coat mode

[6] [3] [5] [4]
1. Open the front door and move the glue tank unit [1] frontward.
Note
Be sure to hold the right arm [2] of the glue tank unit to
move it.
2. Loosen 1 screw [3].

3. Adjust the thin coat stopper [6] position by moving it up and down
with the screw [5] referring to the engraved line [4], then tighten the
screw [3] hitting it against the screw [5].
Note
The thin coat stopper has a scale marked at 1mm interval.
The thin coat stopper [6] moves down 0.5mm by
tightening the screw [5] for 1 rotation and it moves up by
loosening the screw.
Raising the thin coat stopper brings the cover paper glue
part closer to the book spine and it makes the scraped-off
glue amount larger, which reduces the glue amount
applied to the book spine.
If the applied glue is thin and the cover does not stick to
the book body, lowering the thin coat stopper (increasing
the gap between the cover paper glue part and the book
spine) increases the amount of glue applied to the book
spine.
If the applied glue is thick and the glue comes out too
much, lifting the thin coat stopper (decreasing the gap
between the cover paper glue part and the book spine)
reduces the amount of glue applied to the book spine.

check that the glue amount applied to the book spine is
[1] [2]
a15xf3c005ca appropriate.
(3) Gap adjustment procedure in thick coat mode

1. Open the front door and move the glue tank unit [1] frontward.
Note
Be sure to hold the right arm [2] of the glue tank unit to
move it.

3. Adjust the thick coat stopper [6] position by moving it up and down
with the screw [5] referring to the engraved line [4], then tighten the
screw [3] hitting it against the screw [5].
Note
The thick coat stopper [6] moves down 0.5mm by
tightening the screws [5] for 1 rotation and it moves up by
loosening the screws.
[4] [5] [6] [3] The thick coat stopper has a scale marked at 1mm
interval. The right and left scales shift 0.5mm vertically.
When adjusting it, be sure to move it by 1mm and check
the position.
When raising or lowering the thick coat stopper, be sure
to maintain its horizontal state.
Raising the thick coat stopper brings the cover paper glue
part closer to the book spine and it makes the scraped-off
glue amount larger, which reduces the glue amount
applied to the book spine.
If the applied glue is thin and the cover does not stick to
the book body, lowering the thick coat stopper (increasing
the gap between the cover paper glue part and the book
spine) increases the amount of glue applied to the book
spine.
If the applied glue is thick and the glue comes out too
[1] [2] much, lifting the thick coat stopper (decreasing the gap
a15xf3c006ca between the cover paper glue part and the book spine)
reduces the amount of glue applied to the book spine.
I -312
check that the glue amount applied to the book spine is
appropriate.
5. Conduct the gap adjustment in the thin coat mode.
24.6 Glue tank movement rail tilt adjustment

(1) Usage
This adjusts the parallelism between the glue tank movement rail and the spine of inside papers.
Perform this when glue is not applied uniformly on the spine, especially when amount of glue applied is different between the top and bottom
side of the book.
(2) Procedure
1. Loosen 3 screws [2] of the bracket /Rt [1].
[1] 2. Loosen 2 screws [4] of the bracket /Lt [3].
3. Move the brackets /Rt [1] and /Lt [3] up and down by turning the
[5] screws [7] and [8] to adjust the height of the glue tank movement
rails/Rt [9] and /Lt [10] referring to the engraved lines [5] and [6] on
the brackets /Rt and /Lt.
Note
[2]
Be sure to turn the screws [7] and [8] by the same amount
so that the brackets/Rt [1] and /Lt [2] move the same
amount.
[9] When the glue applied to the spine gets lower toward the
bottom side, lower the brackets/Rt [1] and /Lt [2].

check that the glue is applied to the book spine uniformly.
[7]
[3]
[10]
[4]
[6] [8]
a075f3c020ca
24.7 Cover paper folding plate nipping adjustment

(1) Usage
This adjusts the position of the cover paper folding plate/Lt to apply pressure to the cover paper.
Perform this adjustment when the cover paper is not folded at the right angle (when the book spine inclines).
I -313
(2) Procedure
[3] [6] [4]
1. Turn the knob [1] to move the cover paper alignment plate/Fr [2]
backward.
2. Loosen the screw [3] and adjust the actuator [6] position of the
cover paper folding plate HP sensor /Lt (PS49) [5] by moving the
actuator right and left referring to the engraved lines [4].
Note
a. When the book spine inclines as [8]: Move the actuator
[6] to the left.
b. When the book spine inclines as [9]: Move the actuator
[6] to the right.
[1] [2] [5] 3. After performing the adjustment, make a test print and binding to
check that the book spine ends form right angle and no inside
papers come off from the cover paper.
Note
At the test print, print more than 50 sheets, or you cannot
check the book spine.
[8]
[7]
[9]
a075f3c021ca
24.8 Cover paper folding plate parallel adjustment

(1) Usage
This adjusts the parallelism between the cover paper folding plate/Rt and /Lt.
Perform the adjustment when the book spine corners are not uniformly formed from the top and the bottom.
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the cover paper tray. (Refer to G.15.2.28 Cover paper
[1] [2]
tray)
2. Remove 4 screws [1] and remove the cover /Rt [2].
[1]
a075f3c022ca
I -314
[9] [8] [1] 3. Loosen 4 screws [1].

4. Put a hand from under the cover paper tray section and turn the
knob [2] to move the cover paper folding plate /Rt [3] and /Lt [4] so
that the gap between them becomes a few millimeters [5].
5. Slowly turn the knob [2] in reverse until the cover paper folding
plate/Rt [3] and /Lt [4] contact each other without any gap at both
front side [6] and rear side [7].
Note
Make sure that the pressure drive plate/Rt [8] does not run
[7] on the pressure assist plate [9].
Do not turn the knob [2] too much. Doing so brings the
plates into pressure-applying state making the position
adjustment impossible.

check that the book spine ends are forming right angle from the
top and the bottom.
[6]
[2]
[3] [5] [4]
a075f3c023ca
24.9 Cover paper table up down belt adjustment

(1) Usage
Perform the adjustment when the following conditions occur.
The cover paper table up down drive system does not synchronize successfully.
The front and rear cover paper table belts do not synchronize smoothly.
(2) Check point

Check that the pin [1] is placed on the center of the central sector of the gear [2].
When the pin is out of the center, perform the following adjustment.
[2]
[1]
a075f3c030ca
I -315
(3) Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.15.2.5 Rear cover /Rt)
3. Move the gear [2] to the right [3] and remove the pin [4].
5. Move the gear [2] to the left [6] and install the E-ring [1].
(SW2) to let the system perform the initial operation.
7. Insert the pin [4], adjust the gear [2] so that it aligns with the gear
inside, and slide the gear [2] to the right.
8. Install the E-ring [5] Install the rear cover
9. Install the rear cover.
[5] [4] [2] [1] [3]
[6] [2] [1]
a075f3c024cb
24.10 Cover paper alignment plate adjustment

(1) Usage
This adjusts the position of the cover paper alignment plate/Fr in the main scan direction and its perpendicularity against the main scan
direction.
Perform the adjustment when the cover paper and the inside papers are vertically or relatively misaligned.
Note
The misalignment of cover and inside paper can also be adjusted in " I.24.2 Clamp main scan direction alignment adjustment "
and " I.24.12 Cover paper table positioning ".
I -316
(2) Procedure
[8] [7] 1. Loosen the screw [1] and [2].
2. Adjust the position and angle of the cover paper alignment plate /
[1] Fr [9] by moving the mounting brackets /Rt [5] and /Lt [6] to the
front [7] and to the back [8] referring to the engraved lines [3] and
[4].
[5]
Note
Do not move the mounting bracket /Lt [6] excessively, or
[3]
the plate contacts with the gear [10].
[2] [6] a. When the cover paper runs off the top edge of inside
paper [12]: Move the mounting brackets /Rt [5] and /Lt [6]
[4] forward [7] by the same distance.
b. When the cover paper runs off the bottom edge of
inside paper [13]: Move the mounting brackets /Rt [5] and /
Lt [6] backward [8] by the same distance.
c. When 3 edges of cover paper misalign with the edges of
inside paper [14]: Move the mounting bracket /Rt [5]
[8] backward [8] and move the mounting bracket /Lt [6]
[7] forward [7].
d. When 3 edges of cover paper misalign with the edges of
inside paper [15]: Move the mounting bracket /Rt [5]
forward [7] and move the mounting bracket /Lt [6]
backward [8].

check that the cover paper is neatly aligned with the inside papers.
[10] [9]
[12] [13]
[11]
[14] [15]
a075f3c025ca
24.11 Cover paper cutting skew adjustment

(1) Usage
Perform the adjustment when the roller cutter trims the cover paper askew.
(2) Procedure
[2] 1. Remove the scraps box.
[1]
a075f3c026ca
I -317
[5] [4] 3. Loosen the screw [1] and adjust the position of the roller cutter
assy [3] by moving it to the right [4] and the left [5] referring to the
engraved lines [2].
Note
When the length of the back cover is shorter than the
length of the front cover at the bottom side:
Move the roller cutter assy [3] to the right side [4].
When the length of the back cover is longer than the
length of the front cover at the bottom side:
Move the roller cutter assy [3] to the left side [5].

check that the cover paper is trimmed correctly.
[2] [1] [3] 5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
a075f3c027ca
24.12 Cover paper table positioning

(1) Usage
This adjusts the relative position between the clamp unit and the cover table unit in the main scan direction.
Perform the adjustment when the cover paper is vertically misaligned with the inside papers.
Note
The misalignment of cover and inside paper can also be adjusted in " I.24.2 Clamp main scan direction alignment adjustment "
and " I.24.10 Cover paper alignment plate adjustment ."
(2) Procedure
[3] [2] [5] [4] 1. Loosen 3 screws [1].
2. Adjust the position of the positioning pin/Fr [3] by moving it forward
[4] and backward [5] referring to the engraved lines [2].
Note
a. When the cover paper runs off the top edge of inside
paper [7]: Move the positioning pin /Fr [3] to the back [5].
b. When the cover paper runs off the bottom edge of
inside paper [8]: Move the positioning pin /Fr [3] to the
front [4].

check that the cover paper is neatly aligned with the inside paper.
[1]
[7] [8]
[6]
a075f3c028ca
24.13 Cover paper tray pick-up adjustment

(1) Usage
Perform the adjustment when no feed from the cover paper tray occurs frequently.
I -318
(2) Procedure
1. Pull out the cover paper tray.
2. Remove all remaining cover papers from the cover paper tray.
4. Push the stopper [3] in the direction of the arrow with the release
lever [2] retracted, and secure the stopper [3] with the screw [1].
Note
After performing the adjustment, loosen the screw [1] and
retighten it after releasing the stopper [3].
5. Install the cover paper tray, and pull out the tray again after the
cover paper lift plate has lifted to the upper limit, which can be
judged by the operating sound of the cover paper lift motor.
rails and pull the cover paper tray further out. (Refer to G.15.2.28
Cover paper tray)
[2] [1] [3]

a075f3c001ca
7. Remove 2 screws [1] to remove the paper feed cover [2].

[1]
[2] a075f3c002ca
I -319
[1] [2] 8. Pull the plunger [2] of the pick-up solenoid [1] and measure the
gap between the pick-up roller [3] and the cover paper lift plate [4]
with a thickness gauge.
Measured value A = 0.1mm to 1.5mm
If it is not within the standard value, follow step 9 and after.
Note
Before loosening the screw, be sure to mark off the
position of the pick-up solenoid [1] by drawing a line [6].
10. With the plunger [2] pulled, adjust the position of the pick-up
solenoid [1] so that the gap between the pick-up roller [3] and the
cover paper lift plate [4] falls into the specified range.
[5] [6] 11. Tighten the screw [5] to fix the pick-up solenoid [1].
12. Load cover paper on the cover paper tray and close the tray.
13. Make a test print and binding selecting the perfect binding as the
binding method and the PB cover paper tray as the cover feeder.
Check that the no feed error does not occur.
[3]
A
[4]
a075f3c003ca
24.14 Cover paper tray pick-up roller height adjustment

(1) Usage
Perform this adjustment when no-feed, crimp of leading edge, or paper jam occurs frequently when feeding the cover papers from the cover
paper tray, or when curled cover papers need to be used.
This adjusts the vertical position of the cover paper pick-up roller. Changing the roller position changes the vertical gap between the top paper
surface on the tray and the bottom surface of the cover paper feed roller.
Note
With this adjustment, cover paper pick-up ability changes accordingly. When the adjustment is completed, make sure to
perform the cover paper feed pick-up amount adjustment to check the pick-up amount.
I -320
(2) Procedure
Note
[2] [1] [3]

a075f3c004ca
[1] cover paper lift plate has lifted to the upper limit, which can be
rails and pull the cover paper tray further out. (Refer to G.15.2.28
Cover paper tray)
7. Pull out the tray again. Remove 2 screws [1] to remove the paper
feed cover [2].
[2] a075f3c005ca
[1] [2] 8. Check that the actuator [1] of the pick-up roller assy is aligned with
the center [3] of the cover paper tray upper limit sensor (PS74) [2].
9. Remove the pick-up roller section [4]. (Refer to F.18.3.1
Removing/reinstalling the pick-up roller assy and the separation
roller assy)
[3]
[4]
a075f3c006ca
I -321
[2] [3] [1] 10. Mark off the position of the cover paper tray upper limit sensor
mounting plate [1] by drawing a line [2].
11. Remove 2 screws [3] and temporarily install the cover paper upper
limit sensor mounting plate [1] with the screws through the
elongated screw holes [4].
12. Make vertical adjustments of the cover paper upper limit sensor
mounting plate [1] and fasten it with the screws [3].
Note
Be sure to install the cover paper tray upper limit sensor
mounting plate [1] so that it keeps in a horizontal position.
Reference:
Raising the position of the cover paper tray upper limit
sensor brings the pick-up roller [5] down (It increases the
[4] [1] vertical gap [7] between the paper feed roller [6] and the
pick-up roller [5].)
Lowering the position of the cover paper tray upper limit
sensor brings up the pick-up roller [5] (reduces the
vertical gap [7] between the cover paper feed roller [6] and
the pick-up roller [5]).
When crimp of leading edge or paper jam occurs, or when
curled cover paper (concave curl) need to be used, raise
the cover paper tray upper limit sensor mounting plate.
When feeding warped cover paper (convex curl), lower the
cover paper tray upper limit sensor mounting plate.
13. Reinstall the pick-up roller assembly.

[3]
Note
[6]
Be sure to install the cover paper tray upper limit sensor
[5] mounting plate [1] so that it keeps in a horizontal position.
binding method and PB cover paper tray as the cover feeder.
[7]
Check that the errors do not occur. If the errors still occur, repeat
steps 9 to 15.
16. Check the cover paper tray paper feed pick-up adjustment. (Refer
a075f3c007ca to I.24.13 Cover paper tray pick-up adjustment)
24.15 Cover paper tray separation pressure adjustment

(1) Usage
Perform this adjustment when no-feed or multi-feed from the cover paper tray occurs frequently.
Note
A no-feed error tends to occur in low temperature environment, while a multi-feed error does in high temperature environment.
Perform this adjustment with this in mind.
Do not make an excessive adjustment. Doing so may reverse the respective symptoms.
I -322
(2) Procedure
2. Change the position of the spring adjustment lever [1]. The
separation pressure is strengthened when the lever moves to the
direction [2] and is weakened when the lever moves to the
direction [3].
Weak: A double feed jam is improved.
Strong: A no feed jam is improved.
Reference:
The spring load changes in increments of about 10%.
3. Set the cover paper tray.

[1] Check that no-feed errors or multi-feed errors do not occur.
5. If the errors still occur, repeat steps 1 to 4.
[2] [3]
a075f3c008ca
24.16 Cover paper tray Centering Adjustment

(1) Usage
Perform this adjustment when the deviation between the cover paper and the inside papers is out of spec.
Standard value: 0 1mm or less (aligned edges), 0 1.5mm or less (trimmed edges)
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Make a test print and binding selecting the perfect binding as the
Check how much the cover paper misaligns with the inside papers.
4. When the cover paper guides [1] are set at the small-size position,
extend them.
6. Move the cover paper guides [1] and adjust the center position
based on the misalignment amount checked at step1, referring to
the marking-off line [3].
[2]
Check that the misalignment amount falls into the specified range.
Standard value:
0 1mm or less (aligned edges)
0 1.5mm or less (trimmed edges)
10. If the value falls outside the range, repeat the steps 2 to 9.
[3]
a075f3c009ca
24.17 Cover paper tray lift plate horizontal adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the jam, no feed, or the folded paper occurs in the cover paper tray.
I -323
(2) Procedure
Note
cover paper lift plate has lifted to the upper limit, which can be
[2] [1] [3]

a075f3c010ca
[2] [1] 6. Check if the cover paper lift plate [3] is placed horizontally using
the engraved lines on the near side [1] and the far side [2] of the
tray. If the plate is not horizontal, perform step7 and the steps that
follow.
[3]
a075f3c011ca
I -324
[2] 7. Remove 6 screws [1] of the cover paper tray front cover [3].
8. Disconnect the connector [2], and remove the cover paper tray
front cover [3].
[3]
[1] [1]
a075f3c012ca
I -325
9. Lift up the pick-up roller [1].
10. Move the cover paper guides [2] to the positions for the smallest
paper size.
11. Remove the screw [3] and tighten it through the elongated screw
hole [4] temporarily.
12. Loosen the screw [5] while supporting the pulley mounting plate [6]
[9] by hand, and correct the tilt of the cover paper lift plate [8] referring
to the engraved lines [7].
13. Check that the cover paper lift plate [8] is placed horizontally, and
secure the plate with the screw [5] and [9].
[5] [3] Note
When tightening the screws [5] and [9], check that the
wire [10] has not come off the pulley or not crossed.
14. Pull down the pick-up roller [1].

16. Make a test and binding selecting the perfect binding as the
Check that cover papers are fed normally without any jam.
[4] [7]
[1]
[8] [2]
[10]
[6]
a075f3c013ca
24.18 Height adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the PB is not in a horizontal position or when the height of PB is not equal to the main body and the other
options.
I -326
(2) Procedure
1. Loosen the nut [2] of the caster /B [1] at 2 places.
[2] [3] [1]
2. Rotate the screw [3] at 2 places for adjusting the height of the PB
left side.
3. Conduct the height adjustment by inserting the driver to the holes
[6] and [7] on each of 4 ratchet section [5] of the casters /A [4] and
moving it back and forth. It goes up with the hole [6] and goes
down with the hole [7].
Note
comes off.
When the caster /A [4] is not on the ground, fix the caster
so that the ratchet does not spin out.
Be sure to adjust so that every casters /A and /B are on
the ground.
4. Secure the screw [3] of the caster /B [1] at 2 places and tighten the
nut [2].
[6] [7] [5] [4]

a15xf3c007ca
I -327
25. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT RU-506

25.1 Straight gate solenoid (SD1) position adjustment
(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when replacing the straight gate solenoid (SD1).
(2) Procedure
1. Turn OFF the straight gate solenoid (SD1) manually and check
[1] [2] that its edge [1] is above the guide plate [2]. At the same time turn
ON the plunger and check the edge [3] of the straight is below the
guide plate [4].
[3] [4] a0get3c021ca
2. When it is not within the adjustment range, loosen 2 fixing screws

[1] [2] [2] and slide upward/downward the SD1 [1] to adjust the position.
a0gef3c001ca
25.2 Position adjustment of the stacker exit shutter solenoid (SD2)

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when replacing the stacker exit shutter solenoid (SD2).
I -328
(2) Procedure
1. Turn ON the stacker exit shutter solenoid (SD2) [2] manually and
[2]
check that its edge [3] is inside the folded area [6] of the guide
plate [5] of the paper re-feed roller[4].
Note
[3] [6] [5] [4]
[1] [7] a0get3c024ca

[1] [2] and slide SD2 [1] to left/right to adjust the position.
[2] a0gef3c002ca
25.3 Position adjustment of the stack switching solenoid (SD3)

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when replacing the stack switching solenoid (SD3).
I -329
(2) Procedure
1. Turn OFF the plunger [1] of the stack switching solenoid (SD3)
[2] [3] manually and check that the driven roller [2] is in contact with the
paper re-feed roller [3]. Then turn ON to check that the gap
between them is same as or lager than the standard value "a".
Standard value "a": The gap between the driven roller [2] and the
re-feed roller [3] is 2mm or more.
Note
[1] [4] a0get3c027ca
[2] [1] 2. When it is not within the adjustment range, loosen 2 fixing screws
[2] and slide SD3 [1] to left/right to adjust the position.
a0gef3c003ca
25.4 Position adjustment of the stacker entrance guide plate solenoid (SD4)
(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when replacing the stacker entrance guide plate solenoid.
I -330
(2) Procedure
1. Be sure to fix the stacker entrance guide plate solenoid assy at the
[5] [4] position where the roller [4] installed to the drive shaft [3] of the
solenoid starts pushing the mounting bracket [6] of the stacker
entrance roller [5] with the plunger [1] touching with the mounting
bracket [2].
Note
[6] [3]
[2] [1] [7] a0get3c030ca

[2] [2] and slide upward/downward the SD4 [1] to adjust the position.
[1] a0gef3c004ca
I -331
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE > 1. OUTLINE
J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE
1. OUTLINE
1.1 Precautions on rewriting the firmware
(1) Check items
When rewriting the firmware, be sure to check the type (G00, G80, G81) of current firmware and execute ISW with the same type of firmware.
Since the type of firmware differs depending on the board, an error code or malfunction code is displayed by executing ISW with wrong
firmware.
Note
Depending on the board, there are 3 types of firmware; G00-xxxx, G80-xxxx, G81-xxxx.
When the rewrite is executed with the type that does not match the current firmware type, the rewrite does not complete
normally and an error code or malfunction code occurs.
Contact the service manager of the authorized distributor for the method to identify the board.
(2) Target board

Control board that has different types
Main body: Printer control board (PRCB)
FS-521: FNS control board (FNSCB)
(3) ISW execution procedures

When executing the ISW over the entire system, be sure to execute it in the order given below. (To minimize the occurrence of malfunction
resulting from the mismatch of the firmware version)
Step Type of programs
1 FD(H), FS-521(N1), FS-531(N2), FS-612(N2), SD(B), LS 1st tandem (S1), LS 2nd tandem (S2), RU-509(R1), RU-506(R2),
PB(J), DF(F) ,GP (G)
2 Printer control (C)
3 Overall control (I)
Note
After replacing the OACB, be sure to conduct the ISW of the image control (Collective (I0)) first. The main body turns ON
abnormally if the overall control firmware is not in the OACB.
Rewriting firmware of IC should be conducted by I.6.4 Firmware version of IC
(4) DIPSW and toggle SW setting on the boards

Note
When the FNSCB (FS-521), the FDCB, the SDCB, the LSCB or the PBCB is replaced, be sure to conduct the machine setting of
the main body by the DIPSW (FD, FS, SD or PB) control board on theL.2.12.1 FD control board (FDCB) L.2.6.1 FNS control board
(FNSCB) L.2.13.1 SD control board (SDCB) L.2.14.1 PB control board (PBCB)or by the LS toggle SW (refer to G.12.2.4 Caution
when setting models using toggle SW). After that, conduct the ISW.
(5) Connecting short connector when rewriting firmware

Be sure to connect the jumper connector to the post-processing option by following the table below.
Machine GP-501 RU-506 RU-509 LS-505 FD-503 SD-506 PB-503 FS-521 FS-531 /
type FS-612
Short Not required When using Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not
connector GP-501 + required*1
connection RU-506,
Required *2
remove the
connector B
(CN6) and
connect the
blue
connector to
the board.
*1 Not required when RU-509 is connected.
*2 Required when FS-531, FS-612 is directly connected to the main body.
(6) Checksum check

The firmware data is supplied in sets with the execution program and the sum check file.
When rewriting the firmware, the error detection can be performed by calculating the file checksum using the dedicated tool ISWTrans_G.
When conducting the ISW regarding the image process (Collective(I0)), be sure to perform the checksum check in advance.
1.2 Combination of firmware and board

1.2.1 Table of combination (Main body: Printer control board)
Types of board
Regular board Substitute board 1 Substitute board 2
A1DUH030 A1DUH830 A1DUH831
Types of G00-xxxx OK NG-A NG-A
FW
J -1
ISW did not complete normally ISW did not complete normally
and "Now rewriting program" is and "Now rewriting program" is
displayed. displayed.
G80-xxxx NG-A OK NG-B
and "Now rewriting program" is and ISW error is displayed.
displayed. "Download error occurred <246>"
G81-xxxx NG-B NG-B OK
and ISW error is displayed. and ISW error is displayed.
"Download error occurred <246>" "Download error occurred <246>"
(1) NG-A screen display

"Now rewriting program"
(2) Recovery procedure

1. ISW did not complete normally while "USB Memory ISW Mode Now rewriting program" is displayed.
2. Turn OFF the sub power switch (SW2).
3. Turn OFF the main power switch (SW1).
4. Enter the service mode and execute ISW with a proper firmware.
Note
Execute the procedure mentioned above when the message "USB Memory ISW Mode Now rewriting program" is displayed
for more than 5 minutes.
The sub power switch (SW2) cannot be turned OFF when the message "USB Memory ISW Mode Now rewriting program" is
displayed. Therefore, be sure to turn OFF the main power switch (SW1) before entering the service mode.
When ISW is executed with a wrong firmware, it is started with a firmware before the rewrite by turning OFF/ON the main
power switch (SW1).
(3) NG-B screen display

"Download error occurred <246>"

ISW did not complete normally and ISW error is displayed. "Download error occurred <246>"
Turn OFF the sub power switch (SW2).
While pressing the "Utility/Counter" button, turn ON the SW2 to enter the service mode.
Enter the service mode and execute ISW with a proper firmware.
Note
The connection of USB memory cannot be recognized if the USB memory was connected when entering the service mode
after the error <246> occurred.
Be sure to remove and insert the USB memory after the error <246> occurs.
When ISW is executed with a wrong firmware, it is started with a firmware before the rewrite by turning OFF/ON the main
power switch (SW1).
1.2.2 Table of combination (FS-521: FNS control board)

Types of board
Regular board Substitute board
A0GYH010 A0GYH810
Types of FW G00-xxxx OK NG-A
ISW did not complete normally and ISW
error is displayed.
G80-xxxx NG-B OK
After ISW completed normally, a
malfunction code (C-C109) occurs at the
reboot
(1) NG-A screen display


1. ISW did not complete normally and ISW error is displayed. "Download error occurred <246>"
3. While pressing the "Utility/Counter" button, turn ON the SW2 to enter the service mode.
4. Execute ISW with a proper firmware.
Note
Be sure to turn OFF the sub power switch (SW2) once, and then turn ON the SW2 again while pressing the "Utility/Counter"
button to enter the service mode.
J -2
(3) NG-B screen display

After ISW completed normally, a malfunction code (C-C109) occurs at the reboot

1. After ISW completed normally, a malfunction code (C-C109) occurs at the reboot
3. While pressing the "Utility/Counter" button, turn ON the SW2 to enter the service mode.
4. Execute ISW with a proper firmware.
Note
Be sure to turn OFF the sub power switch (SW2) once, and then turn ON the SW2 again while pressing the "Utility/Counter"
button to enter the service mode.
1.3 Firmware data flow

The following shows the flow of the ISW data.
USB memory Overall control board (OACB) Printer control board (PRCB) FNS control board (FNSCB)
FD control board (FDCB)
SD control board (SDCB)
LS control board (LSCB)
RU control board (RUCB)
PB control board (PBCB)
GP controller PCB
DF control board (DFCB)
1.4 Main body setting for ISW

There are the following 2 ways for settings on the main body side.
(1) Type of setting

Power ON mode
This mode is used when the firmware is not installed to the overall control board (OACB) or when it is damaged. In this condition, ISW of
the OACB is possible when sub power switch (SW2) is turned ON.
Service Mode
This mode is used when the firmware of the OACB is installed properly.
(2) When in the version up of the program

Target board Display when the power is turned ON Mode
Overall control board Normal Service mode
Other boards Normal Service mode
(3) When writing new firmware (When replacing board and rewriting firmware failed)
Target board Display when the power is turned ON Mode
Overall control board Power save LED blinks in orange Power ON mode
No display on touch panel
Other boards Error code display Service Mode
(1) For the overall control board (OACB), when something is wrong with the firmware or no firmware is written, the normal start-up cannot be
made. In this condition, the power save LED blinks in orange when power switch is turned ON and placed in the ISW stand-by mode.
Note
Firmware can only be written in Boot USB memory ISW.
(2) For other boards, when the firmware of the overall controller is normal and something is wrong with other firmware, a malfunction code is
shown on the touch panel when the power is turned ON. In that case, enter the service mode and perform ISW normally.
1.5 Type
(1) USB MEMORY ISW
Directly connect the USB memory to the service port of the main body, and use the program stored in the USB memory to rewrite the
firmware. For the USB memory ISW, the following methods are available depending on the start up method.
USB memory ISW from service mode
Rewrite the firmware using the operation panel.
Boot USB memory ISW when turning ON the power
Conduct when replacing the overall control board (OACB) or failed in rewriting a firmware.
(2) Internet ISW

Use the main body NIC to connect the main body to network environment, and use the FTP or the HTTP protocol to rewrite firmware via the
program server on the Internet. For the internet ISW, the following methods are available.
J -3
Internet ISW using the Web Utilities

Rewrite the firmware by accessing the Web Utilities of the main body from the Web browser of the PC.
However, a network connected PC with the main body is required.
Internet ISW using the operation panel
Rewrite the firmware using the operation panel.
Internet ISW using the CS Remote Care
J -4
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE > 2. ISWTRNS_G
2. ISWTRNS_G
2.1 Specifications
2.1.1 ISWTrns_G (PC software)
(1) Operating environment of the software
OS: Windows95/98/98SE/Me/NT4.0/2000/XP/Vista Home Basic/Home Premium/Business/Enterprise
CPU: Pentium 75MHz or above
Memory: 32MB or above
Free space in hard disk: 100MB or more
Others: PC provided with USB interface (TypeA)
The operation environment of the hardware is pursuant to the specification of each OS.
(2) Requirements for checking the check sum

Personal computer (PC): 1
PC provided with USB interface
ISWTrns_G program
Firmware
2.2 Installation of the ISWTrns_G

Install the ISWTrns_G program to the PC.
(1) Procedure
1. Start the PC.
2. Copy the setup files to the PC and double click the [Setup.exe] icon to start the install program.
Note
When there remains the ISWTrns_G.exe of the old version, uninstall the old version first, and then install the new version.
3. "ISWTrns setup screen"

Following the instructions on the screen, check the folder to which an installation is made, and then click [Next].
Note
"C:\Program Files\KONICA MINOLTA\ISWTrns_G" has been set as a folder to be installed in default.
When changing the folder to which an installation is made, click [Reference] and specify one as you please.
4. Following the instructions on the screen, check the folder to which the ISWTrns program is stored and then click [Next].
Note
For default, "ISWTrns" is set as a folder to which an installation is made.
When changing the folder to which an installation is made, enter a folder name directly, or select one from the existing
folder displayed.
J -5
5. Following the instructions on the screen, click [Completed].

6. The installation of the ISWTrns_G program is automatically completed.
7. Select "ISWTrns_G" from the start menu or double click the "ISWTrns_G" icon on the desk top to start up the "ISWTrns program_G."
8. "ISWTrns dialog screen"
Click [OK] to set the storage folder of the firmware.
Note
This screen is shown only when the program is started for the first time after installing the ISWTrns_G.
9. "Option screen"
Click [Make Folder].
Note
A folder (C:\Program Files\KONICA MINOLTA\ISWTrns_G) on which the ISWTrns_G program is installed has been set as a
storage folder in default.
When changing a storage folder, click [Browse] and specify the folder, or make an entry directly in the editor box in full path.
Clicking [Make Folder] creates hierarchical folders with the storage folder set above as a route.
10. "Option screen"

Click [OK].
Note
This operation stores the data folder created in the step9 into the INI file of the ISWTrns program.
2.3 Usage of the ISWTrns_G

2.3.1 Firmware checksum check
(1) Details on the operation panel display
When the ISWTrns_G program starts up, the main screen of the ISWTrns_G is displayed. On the main screen, perform selecting of the file
(firmware), information display and checksum. For detailed information of the functions, refer to the following.
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
[1]: Select Folder (File storage folder edit box)

A folder name is displayed in full path from the information of the data folder set and the INI file. When the firmware is in a folder other than
the specified data folder, click [Browse] [2] to specify the file location or entering directly the file location.
[2]: [Browse]
This key is used when the firmware is in a folder other than the specified data folder. Display the folder selection screen to select the folder of
[1].
[3]: File Status (File detail information)
View detailed information about the version file when select firmware.
[4]: Checksum Information frame
Display the firmware to be used based on the information selected in the frames [1], and click [File Check] [6] to display the checksum of the
file and the consistency (OK, NG, ??) of the checksum.
[5]: File information display frame
Display the file version selected.
J -6
Click [File Check] at [6] to calculate the checksum of the entire displayed files. Compare the obtained value with the checksum value stored in
the checksum file (*.sum) attached to the firmware to display the result.
[6]: [File Check]
With a file used in "Checksum Information" of [4] displayed, press this key to calculate the file checksum (checksum of the entire file) of the
displayed file and show a result beside the file. Also, compare the result of the checksum with the checksum file attached to the firmware and
display the obtained result in the following form.
"OK": accord
"NG": Not accord
"??": Checksum file (*.sum) not found
2.4 Error list

(1) ISWTrns_G error list
The ISWTrns_G displays messages when an error is shown or the operation is completed. The following table shows the contents of the
message and the status of the ISWTrns_G.
Message Status of the ISWTrns_G
The opening of the file the checksum The opening of the checksum file failed. The file is in use or damaged.
of which is to be taken is not
available.
The opening of the file the checksum The reading of the checksum file failed. The memory is insufficient or the OS is in trouble.
of which is to be taken cannot be
read.
The folder name is illegal. The name of the input folder is illegal. Be sure to enter the whole path from the drive name such as
"C:."
The default folder has not been set. The data folder setting has not been set to the ISWtrns.INI.
Set the folder correctly. Displays at the first startup only.
Some files cannot be copied. 1. The folder to be stored in does not exist.
2.When a file is copied into the folder in which a file of the same name is contained with "O/W
(overwrite check box)" not checked.
3.When overwriting is made on an overwrite prohibited file.
4.Another application is using the file. OS trouble.
The transferred file is not found, or a The number of divisions of the transferred file written in the checksum file does not correspond with
file with an illegal name is found in the number of files that actually exist.
the folder. Make sure of it. 1.When a file with an illegal name is in the data folder, or a file name that seems to be illegal is
displayed in the folder list.
2.The number of divided files is insufficient. Check the insufficient number of files in the folder list
and copy them again.
3.When the checksum file is damaged, copy it again to the folder.
(2) ISWTrns_G troubleshooting

When an error occurs while in the execution of the ISWTrns_G program, take the measures shown in the following table.
Condition Cause Countermeasures
1 The ISWTrns_G does not start The IswTrns_G.EXE file is Set it up again.
up. damaged
The setup file itself is damaged. Check the setup file and set it up again.
2 When an item in the combo box The file is not stored in the Check to see if the relevant file is stored in the folder
is selected, the file is not relevant folder. displayed in the "Select Folder" text box. When a folder into
displayed. which a file is stored is not found, use the "File copy" function.
The Data Folder in the Option Check the setting of the Data Folder.
screen is set incorrectly. When a folder into which a file is stored is not found, use the
"File copy" function.
The file name is illegal (or has The file name must be used with no change made. When the
been changed.) file name is changed, the display or selection of the file
becomes unavailable. When the file name is changed, return
it to former state.
The folder name is illegal (or has When the folder name created by the [Make Folder] button in
been changed.) the Option screen has been changed, it cannot be found.
Return it to former state and check it again.
3 "NG" is displayed in the File The firmware using is damaged. Copy the firmware and check it again. When "NG" still recurs,
Check. contact the supplier of the firmware.
4 "??" is displayed while in the File When the firmware was copied to Copy the checksum file to the folder same as the firmware at
Check. the PC, the copying of the the same time. (When using the data copying function, a copy
checksum file (*.sum) was is made automatically.)
forgotten.
J -7
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE > 3. USB MEMORY ISW
3. USB MEMORY ISW

3.1 Usage of the USB memory ISW
Note
The "Service Port Device" must be set to [ON] in the settings menu mode of the "User Setting-System Setting-Service Port Device
Setting", or the USB memory ISW cannot be used.
(1) Board to be rewritten and firmware

Item Specifications
Board to be rewritten Overall control board (OACB), Printer control board (PRCB), DF control board (DFCB), FNS
control board (FNSCB), FD control board (FDCB), SD control board (SDCB), LS control
board (LSCB), RU control board (RUCB), PB control board (PBCB), GP controller PCB
Rewritable firmware Image control Collective (I0), I1 to I5, T
Printer system C1
ADF F
Stapler (FS-521) N1
Stapler FS-531 /FS-612) N2
Multi folder (FD-503) H
Saddle stitcher (SD-506) B
Stacker (LS-505) S1 (1st tandem), S2 (2nd tandem)
RU (RU-509) R1
RU (RU-506) R2
Perfect binder (PB-503) J
Multi puncher (GP-501) G
(2) Procedure
C7000
I0
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
N1
N2
Note
Create the C7000 folder directly under the USB memory route.
Several firmware can be saved to a folder. However 24 files is the maximum it can display on the touch panel. Also, 2 byte
font cannot be displayed.
Maximum 40 letters for a file name.
The file name is the same for S1 and S2. When S1 is selected on the rewriting screen, the file is written in the 1st tandem.
When S2 is selected, the file is written in the 2nd tandem of LS.
2. Connect the USB memory [1] to the main body service port [2].
J -8
[1] [2]

4. "Service mode menu screen"
Press [12 ISW].
5. "ISW Menu screen"
Press [01 ISW].
6. "Board Type Selection screen"
Press [USB Memory ISW] and confirm that the message "Connection of a USB memory has been recognized." is displayed, then press
the button that corresponds to the firmware to be rewritten.
7. Example) <Image Control> Collective (I0)

The file in the USB memory applicable folder is displayed. (Maximum 24 files)
Select the version of the file to be rewritten, and press [OK].
Note
From the file name, the file availability is judged and the result is shown by text color.
White: File effective as ISW.
Yellow: Special ROM file.
Red: File other than ISW or file for different destination.
Press [Limit] to display only the effective files. Press [File Name], [Date]or [Size (byte)] to sort the files by that order.
8. "External Memory Device ISW Mode" screen

Check the type and name of file to conduct ISW, and press [Start].
Note
Press [File Select] to return to the file name selection screen.
J -9
Press [ROM Selection] to return to the board type selection screen.
9. The following screen is displayed when ISW is completed.
10. Press [Continue] when conducting the ISW successively.

To end the ISW, pull out the USB memory from the service port, then press [End].
The main body automatically restarts when [End] is pressed.
11. Check the firmware version in the service mode to see if the ISW is completed successfully.
3.2 Boot USB memory ISW

(1) Board to be rewritten and firmware
Item Specifications
Board to be rewritten Overall control board (OACB)
Rewritable firmware Image control Batch rewrite (I0)
(2) Procedure
C7000
I0
Note
Create the C7000 folder directly under the USB memory route.
The file name is recover.bin.
2. Start the main body.

3. "Start screen"
The power save LED blinks in orange displaying "PLEASE WAIT STARTING SYSTEM" on the touch panel.
4. Connect the USB memory [1] to the main body service port [2] and ISW starts automatically.
The condition of the process can be checked according to the status of the power save LED.
Lighting in green: Reading file from USB memory/Deleting flash
Blinks in green: Writing
Note
When the power save LED starts blinking in green, the USB memory can be pulled out from the service port.
J -10
[1] [2]
5. The main body automatically restarts when ISW finishes.

3.3 Error list

When an error occurs during USB memory ISW operation, the malfunction code is displayed on the touch panel.
(1) Overall control board firmware abnormality

When the main body detects an overall control board firmware abnormality after turning ON the power switch, the power save LED turns ON
with nothing displayed on the LCD of the operation panel (ISW stand-by condition). For details of the power save LED display, refer to the
table below.
No. Operation Power save LED status
1 CPU in initialization when the power is turned on OFF
2 Flush memory in checking OFF
3 When an error is detected while in memory check (ISW standby Blinks in orange
status)
4 Reading file from USB memory Lighting in green
5 ISW processing (deleting flash memory and writing firmware) Lighting in green (deleting flash memory)
Blinks in green (writing)
6 When abnormality is detected while in data transmission Flashing alternately in red and green
7 The type name of transferred data is abnormal Blinks in red
8 When an error is detected while in writing firmware Blinks in red
9 Memory check successfully completed: while in rebooting OFF
(2) Error list

The following table shows error codes.
Error code Description Applicable program
41 Input data format abnormality Common
42 Input data model name abnormality
43 Input data board name abnormality
64 Rewritten address error F (DFCB)
81 Input device abnormality, such as input time-out Common
C1 Flash ROM deletion failure I (OACB)
C2 Flash ROM writing error
C3 Checksum abnormality
C4 Output device abnormality, such as output time-out Common
E0 No completion of writing the Flush ROM F (DFCB)
E1 Program SUM check error
Flash ROM deletion failure C (PRCB) /H (FDCB) /B (SDCB) /N
E2 Flash ROM writing error (FNSCB) /S (LSCB)
E3 Blanc check error F (DFCB)
Communication error C (PRCB) /H (FDCB) /B (SDCB) /N
(FNSCB) /S (LSCB)
F6 Output device abnormality, such as output time-out Common
100 Network/USB memory connection error
101 Network/USB memory file error
102 Communication error with the USB memory
J -11
4xx HTTP error (protocol regulations error, was able to connect to network, but
an error was returned from the server)
5xx FTP error (protocol regulations error, was able to connect to network, but
an error was returned from the server)
J -12
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE > 4. INTERNET ISW
4. INTERNET ISW
4.1 Outline
"Internet ISW" is a system to operate the ISW by the main body automatically receiving firmware from the program server, using Web browser,
main body operation panel, or Internet mail (E-mail) to direct the ISW. ISW can be operated at the customer facility without carrying the program
by using the Internet ISW from the main body operation panel or Web browser.

To use the Internet ISW function, the following conditions must to be met.
The main body must be connected to the network environment that allows the download of firmware from the Internet by using ftp or http
protocol.
In the following 9 cases, the "Internet ISW" does not operate on the main body.
When the main power switch (SW1) is off
When the sub power switch (SW2) is off
When the "Security Strengthen Set" is set to ON (The main body NIC other than the CS Remote Care cannot be used)
During print operation, or various JOB (including reserve JOB) exists, or suspended JOB exists during main body idling.
Using modes other than normal mode.
Paper JAM has occurred.
Image file exists in the image memory.
Program type, board do not match.
4.3 Initial setting

To make use of the Internet ISW, it is necessary to set in advance the network parameter, program server address, the fire wall address and so
on, of the main body.
(1) Setting from the operation panel

To introduce the copier main body into the network, set the IP address of the copier from the operation panel.
When this setting has been already made, proceed to "J.4.3.(2) Setting from the Web browser."
(a) Procedure
6. Turn OFF and ON the sub power switch (SW2) to restart the main body.
Note

Enter the setting of the program server from the Web browser. At this time, in order to use the Web browser, make preparations of the PC that
can be introduced into the network.
Note
No "space" is allowed in all set items.
When an incorrect setting is made on the Web browser, be sure to correct it following the error message. When no correction of
input error is made, program download error occurs.
(a) Procedure
When the proxy is set on the Web browser, it becomes unavailable to access the main body Web.
For particulars, contact the network administrator. Be sure to avoid setting from 2 or more browsers at a time.
2. Specify the IP address of the copier main body that is entered thorough "J.4.3.(1) Setting from the operation panel".
Access the Web Utilities of the main body to display the "Main page screen".

4. Enter the user name and the CE password in the "Extension for maintenance" and then press [OK].
Password: Enter the CE password. (Default: "92729272")
J -13

Click [Internet ISW].

Click [Initial Setting].

Set the proxy server.
When using no proxy server (fire wall), proceed to the step 9.
Enable Proxy When using no proxy: "Connect to the program server."

When using ftp proxy: "Use ftp proxy."
When using ftp proxy: "Use ftp proxy."
Select one of the above.
Proxy Server Type When selecting "Use ftp proxy" in "Enable Proxy", select the
Proxy Server Type from the followings.
Type1: "User user@host name"
Type2: "OPEN host name"
Type 3: FW user => FW password => SITE host name
Type 4: "FW user name => FW password => User user@host"
Note
Types 2, 3 and 4 are unsupported.
For authentication of proxy server, J.4.7 Authentication of the
proxy server in Internet ISW ".
Proxy Server IP Address When using the proxy server, set the IP address of the proxy
server.
Port Number When using the proxy server, set the number of the port that uses
the proxy server.
User name on the proxy server When selecting the type1 or type2 in "Type of proxy server"
shown above, set the account of the proxy server.
Password for the proxy server When selecting the type 1 or type 2 in "Type of proxy server"
above set the password of the proxy server.
8. After completion of entry, click [Next] and then after checking the set items in the setting check screen, click [Next]. However, if there is
an input error, follow the message shown in red and click [Back] to re-set the item.
Set the program server. (When using the proxy)
J -14
Program Server Address Set the address of the server into which the program to download is stored. Select
the protocol to be used from the pull-down menu on the left and enter the following
address in the text box on the right. In the case of ftp, it is a relative path from the
home directory.
User name on the program server Enter the account name of the program server.
Password for the program server Enter the password of the program server.
Receiving time out Set the receiving time-out of the program. When the time is out, the download of the
program forcibly comes to an end, and the system returns to the normal mode
10. After completion of entry, click [Next]. Then after checking the set items in the setting check screen, click [Complete].
However, if there is an input error, follow the message shown in red and click [Back] to re-set the item.
11. Set the program server. (When not using the proxy)
Protocol Select the protocol that receives the program.
Program Server IP Address Set the IP address of the server into which the program to be down loaded is
stored.
Target directory In the case of http, set the path after the host domain. In the case of ftp, set the
relative path from the home directory.
User name on the program server Enter the account name of the program server.
Password for the program server Enter the password of the program server.
Receiving time out Set the receiving time-out of the program. When the time is out, the download of the
firmware forcibly comes to an end, and the system returns to the normal mode
12. After completion of entry, click [Next]. Then after checking the set items in the setting check screen, click [Complete]. However, if there
is an input error, follow the message shown in red and click [Back] to re-set the item.
13. Conduct the Download test.
In the down load test, "test.dat" is down loaded from the program server set in the initialization to check the settings. When the
download test failed, recheck the set items following the error message.
When the download test is successfully completed, the communication speed and the expected download time are displayed as
following. Refer to this information to set the "Receiving time out".
When the download test failed, the response error code from the server is display as following. Since it may be because of a setting
error, recheck the initialization.
4.4 Internet ISW using the Web Utilities

Using the Web Utilities of the main body allows, by just making a click from the browser, to download the programs from the program server
automatically for rewriting.
(1) Procedure
1. Proceed to "Internet ISW" on the Web Utilities.
"Internet ISW screen"
The firmware version of the present board is displayed beside each of the board types.
J -15
2. Select one ISW intended board at the item of "ISW". When specifying a firmware file name to be download, enter it in the [File name] text
box.
When specifying no firmware name, the following files stored in the program server are rewritten.
I0 bootI0.bin
I1 bootI1.bin
I2 bootI2.bin
I3 bootI3.bin
I4 bootI4.bin
I5 bootI5.bin
T bootT1.bin
C1 bootC1.bin
F1 bootF1.bin
H1 bootH1.bin
N1 bootN1.bin
N2 bootN2.bin
B1 bootB1.bin
S1 bootS1.bin
S2 bootS2.bin
R1 bootR1.bin
R2 (Not used)
J1 bootJ1.bin
G1 (Not used)
Note
bootN1.bin is for FS-521 and bootN2.bin is for FS-612.
bootS1.bin is for LS (1st tandem) and bootS2.bin is for LS (2nd tandem).
3. After completion of entry, click the [ISW].

If there is an input error, follow the message shown in red and click [Back] to enter the item again.
4. Checking of the ISW conditions.
The power save LED lights in green during downloading the program. From the Web screen, check the current processing condition to
see if there is any error.
"ISW in communication"
"ISW in rewriting" "Completed successfully":
"Completed normally": Be sure to avoid pressing the "Read again" key of the browser to reboot after successful completion.
"Aborted due to a communication error."
"Aborted due to a communication time error."
"Aborted due to a writing error."
5. When ISW is completed normally, the main body automatically restarts and completes ISW.
6. After restart of the main body, check the firmware version in "Internet ISW main screen" to see if it is being updated successfully.
4.5 Usage precautions

4.5.1 Notice to administrator
When conducting the Internet ISW, be sure to notify the administrator of it and get approval from administrator in advance.
Be sure to execute ISW with the main body not used. However, when the main body is in use (jobs present), the Internet ISW does not operate.
J -16
4.5.2 Power cut during writing

While in the ISW rewrite, the operation panel and the power switch (SW2) are locked. However, when the main power source is turned off due
to power cut etc., the main body cannot start up.
However, this is a problem encountered while in the overall control board (OACB) rewrite. As for other errors while in the ISW, they can be
rewritten by the Internet ISW again.
Should the main body be not able to start due to the reason above, go to the actual place and use Boot USB memory ISW to conduct the rewrite
of the program.
4.6 Internet ISW using the operation panel

When using the Internet ISW from the operation panel, with no PC brought with, the main body can download the program from the program
server to conduct the rewrite automatically.
(1) Procedure
Example: When rewrite the overall control board (OACB) firmware (ALL).
1. Display "ISW mode screen".
2. Press the [Internet ISW] on the screen and then press the [Collective(I0)] of <Image Control>.
3. Press the [Start] and download the latest firmware to start the rewrite.
In a case in which the download of an old version firmware is required, press the [File Name Input] and enter the file name manually.
J -17
4. The following screen is displayed when ISW is completed.
5. Press [Continue] when conducting the ISW successively.

To end the ISW, press [End].
The main body automatically restarts when [End] is pressed.
(2) Main body error list

When an error occurs while in the execution of the Internet ISW, an error code is displayed on the operation panel. (Refer to J.2.4 Error list)
4.7 Authentication of the proxy server in Internet ISW

(1) Proxy server
Proxy server which is provided on the inside of the fire wall is the generic name of a mail server that serves the proxy of a client who receives
an access demand (HTTP and FTP) from the client.
(2) Authentication of the proxy server

There are 4 types of authentication methods for the proxy server.
The Internet ISW is corresponding to these 4 types.
(3) Authentication type of the proxy server and the command list
(a) Type1: User user name@host name
When accessing the outside through the proxy, authentication to the proxy server is not required.
When accessing the outside through the proxy server, or when the entry of the user name and password of the proxy server is not required,
this proxy authentication is likely to be used.
Command
Command Parameter Reply Code Description
USER User name@host 331 Transmit the user name of the program server and the program server
name address
PASS Password 230 Transmit the password for the user name above
(b) Type2: OPEN host name

This process is almost the same as the type1, except for the exchange of commands while in authentication.
When all the settings are made correctly and no communication is available with type 1 authentication, apply this type.
Command
OPEN Host name ftp expanded function, Transmit the user name of the program server
defined for each server
USER User name 331 Transmit the user name of the program server
(c) Type 3: FW user => FW password => SITE host name

This is a type that requires the authentication to the proxy server itself when accessing the outside.
J -18
The information of the server you want to access, the user name and password of the proxy server (F/W) are necessary. In the case of the
user name and the password of the proxy server are required when accessing the outside through the proxy server, this proxy
authentication is likely to be used.
Command
USER FW user 331 Transmit the user name of the proxy server
PASS FW password 230 Transmit the password for the user name above
SITE Host name ftp expanded function, Transmit the user name of the program server
defined for each server
USER User name 331 Transmit the user name of the program server
(d) Type 4: FW user => FW password => USER user@host

This process is almost the same as the type3, except for the exchange of commands while in authentication.
When all the settings are made correctly and no communication is available with type 3 authentication, apply this type.
Command
USER FW user name 331 Transmit the user name of the proxy server
PASS FW password 230 Transmit the password for the user name above
USER User name@host 331 Transmit the user name of the program server and the program server
name address
(4) Remark
For fwtk2.1 (for Unix) and Black Jumbo Dog (for Windows), the type1 authentication is used. For most of the proxy servers, the type 1
authentication is used. When the authentication type of the proxy server is not known, you are recommended to make settings in type1
authentication as a temporary measure.
J -19
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM INDICATION
K TROUBLESHOOTING
1. JAM INDICATION
1.1 Jam code list
Classificatio
JAM Code Cause Resulting operation Correction
n
Bypass J-1001 During operation: The paper feed sensor/BP If paper jam occurs during Take out paper from the bypass
(PS26) does not turn ON within a specified printing process, main tray once and remove the jammed
period of time after the pick-up solenoid/BP body stops after paper paper if any.
(SD5) turns ON. exit.
J-1002 During operation: The paper lift motor /BP (M35) Take out paper from the bypass
does not turn ON within a specified period of tray once, reduce the number of
time after the paper empty sensor /BP (PS47) loaded paper, and then set it
turns ON. again.
J-1003 During operation: The upper limit sensor/BP Take out paper from the bypass
(PS25) does not turn ON within a specified tray once, reduce the number of
period of time after the paper lift motor/BP (M35) loaded paper, and then set it
turns ON. again.
J-1051 When idling: The paper feed sensor/BP (PS26) - Take out paper from the bypass
turns ON while in idling. tray once and remove the jammed
paper if any.
Paper feed J-1101 During operation: The paper feed sensor /1 If paper jam occurs during Pull out tray 1 and remove
tray/1 (PS29) does not turn ON within a specified printing process, main jammed paper if any.
period of time after the pick-up solenoid /1 (SD7) body stops after paper
turns ON. exit.
J-1151 When idling: The paper feed sensor /1 (PS29) - Pull out tray 1 and remove
turns ON while in idling. jammed paper if any.
turns ON. exit.
J-1251 When idling: The paper feed sensor/2 (PS35) - Pull out tray 2 and remove
turns ON. exit.
LU J-1501 During operation: The paper feed sensor If paper jam occurs during Open the LU upper door and
(PS106) does not turn ON within a specified printing process, main remove jammed paper if any.
period of time after the pick-up solenoid (SD100) body stops after paper
turns ON. exit.
J-1502 During operation: The pre-registration sensor Open the LU upper door and
(PS107) does not turn ON within a specified remove jammed paper if any.
period of time after the pre-registration clutch
(CL102) turns ON.
J-1551 When idling: The paper feed sensor (PS106) - Open the LU upper door and
turns ON while in idling. remove jammed paper if any.
J-1552 When idling: The pre-registration sensor Open the LU upper door and
(PS107) turns ON while in idling. remove jammed paper if any.
PF J-1601 During operation: The paper feed sensor /1 If paper jam occurs during Pull out tray 4 and remove
(PS2) does not turn ON within a specified period printing process, main jammed paper if any.
of time after the pick-up solenoid /1 (SD1) turns body stops after paper
ON. exit.
J-1602 During operation: The paper feed sensor /2 Pull out tray 5 and remove
(PS10) does not turn ON within a specified jammed paper if any.
period of time after the pick-up solenoid /2 (SD5)
turns ON.
J-1603 During operation: The vertical conveyance Open the PF front door and the
sensor /1 (PS17) does not turn ON within a PF vertical conveyance door, and
specified period of time after the paper feed remove jammed paper if any.
sensor /1 (PS2) turns ON.
specified period of time after the vertical remove jammed paper if any.
conveyance sensor /1 (PS17) turns ON.
K -1
Classificatio
n
J-1606 During operation: The horizontal conveyance Open the PF front door and the
sensor/1 (PS18) does not turn ON within a PF vertical conveyance door, and
conveyance sensor/3 (PS26) turns ON.
J-1607 During operation: The horizontal conveyance Pull out tray 5 and remove
sensor/1 (PS18) does not turn ON within a jammed paper if any.
specified period of time after the paper feed
sensor/2 (PS10) turns ON.
J-1608 During operation: The pre-registration sensor Open the PF front door, PF
(PS20) does not turn ON within a specified vertical conveyance door,
period of time after the horizontal conveyance horizontal conveyance door /Rt,
sensor/1 (PS18) turns ON. and horizontal conveyance door /
Lt and remove jammed paper if
any.
J-1609 During operation: The horizontal conveyance Open the PF front door, PF
sensor/2 (PS19) does not turn ON within a vertical conveyance door,
specified period of time after the pre-registration horizontal conveyance door /Rt,
sensor (PS20) turns ON. and horizontal conveyance door /
any.
J-1610 During operation: The multi feed detection Stops immediately. Open the PF front door, PF
board /R (MFDTBR) detects the multi feed. vertical conveyance door,
horizontal conveyance door /Rt,
and horizontal conveyance door /
any.
J-1611 During operation: Double fed paper is separated Open the PF front door, PF
during conveyance and the latter conveyed vertical conveyance door,
paper turns ON the horizontal conveyance horizontal conveyance door /Rt,
sensor /2 (PS19). and horizontal conveyance door /
any.
J-1652 When idling: The paper feed sensor/2 (PS10) Pull out tray 5 and remove
J-1653 When idling : The vertical conveyance sensor /1 Open the PF front door and the
(PS17) turns ON while in idling. PF vertical conveyance door, and
remove jammed paper if any.
J-1656 When idling: The horizontal conveyance sensor / Open the PF front door, PF
1 (PS18) turns ON while in idling. vertical conveyance door,
any.
J-1657 When idling: The horizontal conveyance sensor / Open the PF front door, PF
2 (PS19) turns ON while in idling. vertical conveyance door,
any.
J-1658 When idling: The pre-registration sensor (PS20) Open the PF front door, PF
turns ON while in idling. vertical conveyance door,
any.
Paper feed J-1701 During operation: The registration sensors If paper jam occurs during Pull out the ADU and remove
(PS22) do not turn ON within a specified period printing process, main jammed paper if any.
body stops after paper
exit.
K -2
Classificatio
n
of time after writing starts during front side
printing.
J-1702 During operation: The registration sensors Stops immediately. Pull out the ADU and remove
(PS22) do not turn ON within a specified period jammed paper if any.
of time after writing starts during back side
printing.
J-1703 During operation: The vertical conveyance If paper jam occurs during Open the vertical conveyance
sensor (PS50) does not turn ON within a printing process, main door and remove jammed paper if
specified period of time after the pre-registration body stops after paper any.
clutch /3 (CL12) turns ON. exit.
J-1704 During operation: The vertical conveyance Pull out tray 2 and remove
sensor (PS50) does not turn ON within a jammed paper if any.
specified period of time after the pre-registration
clutch /2 (CL10) turns ON.
J-1705 During operation: The vertical conveyance Open the vertical conveyance
sensor /1 (PS27) does not turn ON within a door and remove jammed paper if
specified period of time after the vertical any.
conveyance sensor (PS50) turns ON.
J-1706 During operation: The intermediate conveyance Open the vertical conveyance
sensor /1 (PS27) does not turn ON within a door and remove jammed paper if
specified period of time after the pre-registration any.
clutch /1 (CL8) turns ON.
J-1707 During operation: The intermediate conveyance Open the LU front door and
sensor /1 (PS27) does not turn ON within a remove jammed paper if any.
specified period of time after the LU pre-
registration clutch (CL102) turns ON.
J-1708 During operation: The intermediate conveyance Pull out the ADU and remove
sensor /2 (PS28) does not turn ON within a jammed paper if any.
specified period of time after the intermediate
J-1709 The intermediate conveyance sensor /2 (PS28) - Take out paper from the bypass
does not turn ON within a specified period of tray once and remove the jammed
time after the paper feed sensor /BP (PS26) paper if any.
turns ON.
J-1710 During operation: The intermediate conveyance If paper jam occurs during Open the PF front door, PF
sensor/1 (PS27) does not turn ON within a printing process, main vertical conveyance door,
specified period of time after the horizontal body stops after paper horizontal conveyance door /Rt,
conveyance sensor/2 (PS19) turns ON. exit. and horizontal conveyance door /
any.
J-1751 When idling : The vertical conveyance sensor - Open the vertical conveyance
(PS50) turns ON while in idling. door and remove jammed paper if
any.
J-1752 When idling: The intermediate conveyance Pull out the ADU and remove
sensor/1 (PS27) turns ON while in idling. jammed paper if any.
J-1753 When idling: The intermediate conveyance Pull out the ADU and remove
sensor/2 (PS28) turns ON while in idling. jammed paper if any.
J-1754 When idling: The registration sensor (PS22) Pull out the ADU and remove
Others J-1901 During operation: The vertical conveyance door If paper jam occurs during Close the vertical conveyance
open jam. Vertical conveyance door sensor printing process, main door.
(PS51) turns OFF during printing. body stops after paper
exit.
LU J-1902 During operation: The LU upper door open jam During feeding paper of Close the LU upper door or the
or the LU front door open jam. The upper door LU, the main body stops LU front door.
sensor (PS100) or the front door sensor (PS115) after exiting paper. The
turns OFF during printing. main body does not stop in
the case other than LU
paper feeding.
PF J-1903 During operation: One of PF front door open During feeding paper of Close one of the PF front door,
jam, PF vertical conveyance door open jam, PF, the main body stops PF vertical conveyance door,
horizontal conveyance door /Rt open jam, or after exiting paper. The horizontal conveyance door /Rt or
horizontal conveyance door /Lt open jam. One of main body does not stop in horizontal conveyance door /Lt.
the front door open/close sensor (PS23), vertical the case other than PF
conveyance door sensor (PS24), horizontal paper feeding.
conveyance door sensor/1 (PS21), or horizontal
conveyance door sensor/2 (PS22) turns OFF.
Registration J-3101 During operation: The paper leading edge Stops immediately. Pull out the ADU and remove
K -3
Classificatio
n
specified period of time after the registration
motor (M30) turns ON.
J-3102 During operation: The fusing paper exit sensor Pull out the ADU and remove
period of time after the registration motor (M30)
turns ON.
J-3151 When idling: The leading edge sensor (PS63) - Pull out the ADU and remove
J-3152 When idling: The fusing loop sensor (PS64) Pull out the ADU and remove
Paper exit J-3201 During operation: The paper exit sensor (PS13) Stops immediately. Pull out the ADU and remove
does not turn ON within a specified period of jammed paper if any.
time after the fusing paper exit sensor (PS17)
turns ON.
J-3202 During operation: The reverse/exit sensor Pull out the ADU and remove
period of time after the fusing paper exit sensor
(PS17) turns ON.
J-3203 During operation: The paper exit sensor (PS13) Pull out the ADU and remove
does not turn ON within a specified period of jammed paper if any.
time after the reverse/exit sensor (PS19) turns
ON.
J-3204 During operation: The fusing paper exit sensor Pull out the ADU and remove
(PS17) does not turn OFF within a specified jammed paper if any.
period of time after it turns ON.
does not turn OFF within a specified period of jammed paper if any.
time after it turns ON.
J-3206 During operation: The reverse/exit sensor Pull out the ADU and remove
period of time after the fusing paper exit sensor
(PS17) turns ON.
J-3209 During operation: The decurler sensor (PS62) Pull out the ADU and remove
J-3251 When idling: The fusing paper exit sensor - Pull out the ADU and remove
(PS17) turns ON while in idling. jammed paper if any.
J-3252 When idling: The paper exit sensor (PS13) turns Pull out the ADU and remove
ON while in idling. jammed paper if any.
J-3253 When idling: The de-curler sensor (PS19) turns Pull out the ADU and remove
J-3254 When idling: The de-curler sensor (PS62) turns Pull out the ADU and remove
Others J-5101 During operation: The front door open jam. Stops immediately. Close the front door.
When the front door sensor (PS18) turns OFF
during printing.
DF J-6101 During operation: The paper feed section cover The DF stops immediately. Close the paper feed section
open jam. The paper feed cover sensor (PS303) If paper jam occurs during cover.
turns OFF during printing. printing process, main
J-6102 During operation: The paper feed tray open jam. body stops after paper Close the paper feed tray.
The tray open/close sensor (PS308) turns OFF exit.
during printing.
J-6103 During operation: The paper exit section cover Close the paper exit section
open jam. The paper exit cover sensor (PS307) cover.
turns OFF during printing.
J-6201 During operation: The registration sensor Open the paper feed section
(PS301) does not turn OFF within a specified cover and remove jammed paper
period of time after the paper feeding starts. if any.
Remove jammed paper if any in
the main body conveyance
section.
K -4
Classificatio
n
J-6203 During operation: The timing sensor (PS302) Open the paper feed section
does not turn ON within a specified period of cover and remove jammed paper
time after the paper feed motor (M301) turns if any.
reverse rotation ON. Remove jammed paper if any in
section.
J-6206 During operation: The timing sensor (PS302) Open the paper feed section
does not turn OFF within a specified period of cover and remove jammed paper
time after it turns ON. if any.
Remove jammed paper if any in
section.
J-6209 During operation: The reverse sensor (PS305) Open the paper exit section cover
does not turn ON within a specified period of and remove jammed paper if any.
time after the reverse/paper exit motor (M303) Remove jammed paper if any in
turns ON. the main body conveyance
section.
J-6301 During operation: The reverse sensor (PS305) Open the paper exit section cover
does not turn OFF within a specified period of and remove jammed paper if any.
time after it turns ON. Remove jammed paper if any in
section.
J-6304 During operation: The paper exit sensor (PS306) Open the paper exit section cover
does not turn ON within a specified period of and remove jammed paper if any.
time after the simplex original exiting starts. Remove jammed paper if any in
The paper exit sensor (PS306) does not turn ON the main body conveyance
within a specified period of time after the reverse section.
sensor (PS305) turns ON during exiting duplex
original.
J-6305 During operation: The paper exit sensor (PS306) Open the paper exit section cover
does not turn OFF within a specified period of and remove jammed paper if any.
time after it turns ON. Remove jammed paper if any in
section.
J-6501 When idling: The registration sensor (PS301) - Open the paper feed section
turns ON while in idling. cover and remove jammed paper
if any.
J-6502 When idling: The reverse sensor (PS305) turns Open the paper exit section cover
ON while in idling. and remove jammed paper if any.
J-6504 When idling: The paper exit sensor (PS306) Open the paper exit section cover
turns ON while in idling. and remove jammed paper if any.
J-6508 When idling: The timing sensor (PS302) turns Open the paper feed section
ON while in idling. cover and remove jammed paper
if any.
FS J-7101 During operation: The FS and the main body Remove jammed paper if any
(FS-521) stop immediately. from the FS/main body.
The FS front door open jam. The door switch
(MS1) turns OFF while in printing.
(FS-531/612)
The front door and the PI upper door are opened
while in printing.
RU J-7102 During operation: RU/main body stop Remove jammed paper in the RU/
(RU-506) immediately. main body, if any.
RU front door open jam. Interlock switch (MS1)
was turned OFF when printing.
LS (1st J-7103 During operation: The LS front door open jam. The LS and the main body Remove jammed paper if any
tandem) The door switch (MS1) turns OFF while in stop immediately. from the LS/main body.
printing.
LS (2nd J-7104 During operation: The LS front door open jam. Remove jammed paper if any
tandem) The door switch (MS1) turns OFF while in from the LS/main body.
printing.
FD J-7105 During operation: The FD front door open jam. The FD and the main body Remove jammed paper if any
The front door switch (MS1) turns OFF while in stop immediately. from the FD/main body.
the print.
SD-506 J-7107 During operation: The SD front door/Rt open jam The SD and the main body Remove jammed paper if any
or the SD front door/Lt open jam. During stop immediately. from the SD/main body.
printing, either the SD front door switch /Rt
(MS1) or /Lt (MS2) turns OFF.
PB J-7108 During operation: The PB front door open jam. The PB and the main body Remove jammed paper if any
During printing, the front door switch (SW2), stop immediately. from the PB/main body.
K -5
Classificatio
n
booklet door switch (SW3), upper door switch
(SW1), and relay conveyance section door
switch (MS3) turn OFF.
GP-501 J-7109 During operation: The GP front door open jam. The GP and the main body Remove jammed paper if any
The door switch turns OFF while in the print. stop immediately. from the GP/main body.
RU J-7110 During operation: The RU and the main body Remove jammed paper if any
(RU-509) stop immediately. from the RU/main body.
The RU front door open jam. The door switch
(SW1) turns OFF while in printing.
FS J-7216 During operation: The FS and the main body Remove jammed paper if any
(FS-531/612) stop immediately. from the FS/main body.
The FNS entrance sensor (PS4) does not turn
ON within a specified period of time after the
main body paper exit sensor (PS13) turns ON.
J-7217 During operation: Remove jammed paper if any
(FS-521) from the FS/main body.
The main tray exit sensor (PS10) does not turn
OFF within a specified period of time after the
stacker entrance sensor (PS5) turns OFF.
(FS-531/612)
The main tray paper exit sensor (PS6) does not
turn ON within a specified period of time after
the FNS entrance sensor (PS4) turns ON.
J-7218 During operation: (FS-521) Remove jammed paper if any
The stacker entrance sensor (PS5) does not from the FS/main body.
the paper exit sensor turns ON.
(FS-531/612)
(Staple) The stacker conveyance passage
sensor (PS5) does not turn OFF within a
specified period of time after the FNS entrance
sensor (PS4) turns ON.
J-7219 During operation: While in stapling, the stacker Remove jammed paper if any
entrance sensor (PS5) does not turn OFF within from the FS/main body.
a specified period of time after the stacker
entrance motor (M13) turns ON.
While in any other operations than stapling, the
PS5 does not turn OFF within a specified period
of time after it turns ON.
While in stapling a small-size paper, the main
tray exit sensor (PS10) does not turn ON within
a specified period of time after the paper exit
arm motor (M23) turns ON. Or the stacker empty
sensor (PS20) turns OFF.
(FS-531/612)
tray exit sensor (PS6) does not turn ON within a
specified period of time after the paper exit
operation starts.
While in stapling a large-size paper, the main In case of a paper jam at the
tray exit sensor (PS10) does not turn OFF within stacker entrance, set the
a specified period of time after the paper exit "Simplex" of "Curl Adjustment" to
belt motor (M23) turns ON. +2.
(FS-531/612)
While in stapling a large size paper, the main
tray paper exit sensor (PS6) does not turn OFF
within a specified period of time after the start of
exiting paper.
(FS-531/612) from the FS/main body.
The sub tray exit sensor (PS1) does not turn ON
within a specified period of time after the FNS
entrance sensor (PS4) turns ON.
(FS-521)
While in exiting paper in the sub tray, the sub
tray paper exit sensor (PS1) does not turn ON
within a specified period of time after the paper
exit sensor of the previous option turns ON.
K -6
Classificatio
n
J-7223 During operation: While in exiting paper in the Remove jammed paper if any
sub tray, the sub tray paper exit sensor (PS1) from the FS/main body.
does not turn OFF within a specified period of
time after the PS1 turns ON.
The folding pass-through sensor (PS26) does
not turn ON within a specified period of time
after stapling completes.
The folding paper exit sensor (PS25) does not
the folding knife motor (M19) turns ON.
The Folding paper exit sensor (PS25) does not
turn OFF within a specified period of time after
PS25 turns ON.
While in the straight/shift of the small-size paper,
the main tray paper exit sensor (PS10) does not
the PS10 turns ON.
(FS-531/612)
The stacker entrance sensor (PS5) does not
turn OFF after a specified period of time after it
turns ON at stapling/center folding/saddle
stitching/tri-folding the small size paper.
The main tray exit sensor (PS6) does not turn
OFF within a specified period of time after it
turns ON. (Straight/Shift mode)
The sub tray paper exit sensor (PS1) does not
the PS1 turns ON. (Straight mode)
within a specified period of time after the PS10
turns ON.
(FS-531/612)
within a specified period of time after the PS6
turns ON.
PI J-7235 During operation: The paper passage sensor / Remove jammed paper if any
Lw (PS206) does not turn ON within a specified from the FS/main body.
period of time after the conveyance clutch /Lw
(CL202) turns ON.
PK J-7243 During operation: The punch shift home sensor Remove jammed paper if any
(PS303) does not turn ON within a specified from the FS/main body.
period of time after the punch shift motor (M302)
turns ON.
FS J-7248 During operation: Remove jammed paper if any
The folding pass-through sensor (PS26) does
after the PS26 turns ON.
PI J-7249 During operation: The paper passage sensor / Open the PI upper door and
Up (PS201) does not turn ON within a specified remove jammed paper if any.
period of time after the conveyance clutch /Up
(CL201) turns ON.
J-7250 During operation: The FNS entrance sensor Open the PI upper door and
(PS4) does not turn ON within a specified period remove jammed paper if any.
of time after the paper passage sensor /Up
(PS201) turns ON.
K -7
Classificatio
n
J-7251 During operation: The FNS entrance sensor Open the PI upper door and
(PS4) does not turn ON within a specified period remove jammed paper if any.
of time after the paper passage sensor /Lw
(PS206) turns ON.
FS J-7281 During operation: Remove jammed paper if any
The stapler motor home sensor /Fr (PS31) and
the clincher motor home sensor /Fr (PS33) do
after the stapler motor /Fr (M14) and the clincher
motor /Fr (M15) turn ON.
The stapler motor home sensor /Rr (PS30) and
the clincher motor home sensor /Rr (PS32) do
after the stapler motor /Rr (M9) and the clincher
motor /Rr (M10) turn ON.
The stapler motor home sensors /Rr, /Fr
(PS30/31) and the clincher motor home
sensors /Rr, /Fr (PS32/33) do not turn ON within
a specified period of time after the stapler
motors /Rr, /Fr (M9/14) and the clincher motors /
Rr, /Fr (M10/15) turn ON.
FS does not stop within a specified period of
time after the operation stop signal is transmitted
from the main body to the FS.
J-7301 When idling: - Open the FS front door and the
(FS-521) jam release lever, and remove
The main tray paper exit sensor (PS10) turns jammed paper if any.
ON while in idling.
(FS-531/612)
The main tray paper exit sensor (PS6) turns ON
while in idling.
J-7302 When idling: The stacker entrance sensor (PS5) Open the FS front door and the
turns ON while in idling. jam release lever, and remove
jammed paper if any.
J-7305 When idling : The FNS entrance sensor (PS4) Open the FS front door and the
turns ON while in idling. jam release lever, and remove
J-7307 When idling: The sub tray paper exit sensor Open the FS front door and the
(PS1) turns ON while in idling. jam release lever, and remove
J-7308 When idling: The FS and the main body Open the FS front door and the
(FS-531/612) stop immediately. jam release lever, and remove
The stacker empty sensor (PS20) turns ON jammed paper if any.
during exiting jam.
J-7309 When idling: Open the FS front door and the
The folding pass-through sensor (PS26) turns jammed paper if any.
ON while in idling.
J-7310 When idling: Open the FS front door and the
The folding paper exit sensor (PS25) turns ON jammed paper if any.
while in idling.
PI J-7314 When idling: The paper passage sensor /Lw - Open the FS front door and the
J-7317 When idling: The paper passage sensor /Up Open the FS front door and the
RU J-7340 When idling: Open the front door and remove
(RU-506) jammed paper, if any.
The entrance jam sensor (PS6) turns ON while
in idling.
K -8
Classificatio
n
J-7341 When idling: Open the front door and remove
The stacker jam sensor (PS5) turns ON while in
idling.
J-7342 When idling: Open the front door and remove
The paper exit sensor (PS2) turns ON while in
idling.
LS (1st J-7350 During operation: The entrance sensor (PS4) Open the LS front door, open then
tandem) turns ON while in idling. entrance conveyance jam release
lever and remove jammed paper,
if any.
J-7351 When idling: The sub tray paper exit sensor Open the LS sub tray cover, and
(PS10) turns ON while in idling. remove jammed paper, if any.
J-7352 When idling: Either of the conveyance sensor /1 Open the LS jam door, and
(PS7), /2 (PS16), or /3 (PS17) turns ON while in remove jammed paper, if any
idling.
J-7353 When idling: The coupling exit sensor (PS18) Open the LS front door, open then
turns ON while in idling. the coupling exit jam release lever
and remove jammed paper, if any.
LS (2nd J-7354 During operation: The entrance sensor (PS4) Open the LS front door, open then
tandem) turns ON while in idling. entrance conveyance jam release
lever and remove jammed paper,
if any.
J-7355 When idling: The sub tray paper exit sensor Open the LS sub tray cover, and
J-7356 When idling: Either of the conveyance sensor /1 Open the LS jam door, and
(PS7), /2 (PS16), or /3 (PS17) turns ON while in remove jammed paper, if any
idling.
J-7357 When idling: The coupling exit sensor (PS18) Open the LS front door, open then
turns ON while in idling. the coupling exit jam release lever
and remove jammed paper, if any.
FD J-7358 When idling: Either of the FD entrance sensor Open the FD front door, open
(PS1), the punch conveyance sensor (PS5), or then the entrance conveyance
the punch registration sensor (PS6) turns ON jam release levers /1 and /2 and
while in idling. the punch conveyance jam
release levers /1 and /2, and then
remove jammed paper, if any.
J-7359 When idling: Either of the intermediate Open the FD front door and the
conveyance sensor (PS13), the sub tray paper intermediate conveyance jam
exit sensor (PS16), or the main tray paper exit lever, and remove the jammed
sensor (PS18) turns ON while in idling. paper, if any.
J-7360 When idling: Either of the 1st folding Open the FD front door, pull out
conveyance sensor (PS51), the 2nd folding the folding conveyance section,
conveyance sensor (PS53), the 3rd folding open the folding conveyance jam
conveyance sensor (PS54), the S size release levers /1 to /5, and
conveyance sensor (PS58), the folding entrance remove jammed paper, if any.
sensor (PS52), or the folding exit sensor (PS2)
turns ON while in idling.
J-7361 When idling: Either of the PI conveyance Open the FD upper door and
sensor /Up (PS31), the PI conveyance sensor / remove jammed paper, if any.
Lw (PS37), or the PI exit sensor (PS4) turns ON When jammed paper gets in the
while in idling. PI exit, open the entrance
conveyance jam release lever /1
and remove the jammed paper.
RU J-7365 When idling: Open the front door, and remove
(RU-509) jammed paper, if any
The entrance sensor (PS1) turns ON while in
idling.
J-7366 When idling: Open the front door, and remove
Either of the de-curler entrance sensor (PS2) or
the humidification section entrance sensor (PS7)
turns ON while in idling.
J-7367 When idling: Open the front door, and remove
Either of the color density detection timing
sensor (PS3), paper exit conveyance sensor
(PS4) or paper exit sensor (PS12) turns ON
while in idling.
K -9
Classificatio
n
SD-506 J-7368 When idling: The entrance sensor (PS1) turns Open the SD front door /Rt and
ON while in idling. remove jammed paper, if any.
J-7369 When idling: Either of the horizontal conveyance Open the SD front door /Rt and
sensor /1 (PS2), the horizontal conveyance remove jammed paper, if any.
sensor /2 (PS3), or the sub tray exit sensor
(PS11) turns ON while in idling.
J-7370 When idling: The horizontal conveyance exit Open the SD front door /Lt and
sensor (PS4) turns ON while in idling. remove jammed paper, if any.
J-7371 When idling: Either of the right angle Open the SD front door /Rt and
conveyance sensor /1 (PS5) or the right angle remove jammed paper, if any.
conveyance sensor /2 (PS6) turns ON while in
idling.
J-7372 When idling: Either of the folding sensor /1 Open the SD front door /Lt and
(PS7), the folding passage sensor (PS8), the tri- remove jammed paper, if any.
folding exit sensor (PS9), or the folding sensor /
2 (PS44) turns ON while in idling.
J-7373 When idling: The saddle stitching paper sensor Open the SD front door /Lt and
J-7374 When idling: Either of the bundle sensor /1 Open the SD front door /Lt and
(PS14), /2 (PS15), /4 (PS54), or the bundle exit remove jammed paper, if any.
sensor /2 (PS57) turns ON while in idling.
PB J-7380 When idling: Either of the entrance sensor Open the PB front door or the
(PS1), the SC entrance sensor (PS2), the cover upper door, and remove jammed
paper entrance sensor (PS3), or the sub tray paper, if any.
paper exit sensor (PS4) turns ON while in idling.
J-7381 When idling: The SC paper detection sensor Open the PB upper door, and
J-7382 When idling: The clamp paper sensor (PS28) Open the PB front door, pull out
turns ON while in idling. the clamp section, and remove
jammed paper, if any.
J-7383 When idling: Either of the cover paper Open the PB front door, and
switchback sensor (PS44), the cover paper remove jammed paper, if any
sensor /Rt (PS45), or the cover paper sensor /Lt
(PS46) turns ON while in idling.
J-7384 When idling: The book end fence sensor (PS61) Open the PB stacker door, and
turns ON while in idling. remove jammed paper, if any.
J-7385 When idling: The cover paper conveyance Pull out the paper feed tray, and
sensors /1 (PS75), /2 (PS76), /3 (PS77), / remove jammed paper, if any.
4(PS78), and /5 (PS79) turn ON while in idling.
J-7386 When idling: The relay conveyance entrance Open the PB relay conveyance
sensor (PS93), the relay conveyance door and remove jammed paper if
intermediate sensor (PS91) and the relay any.
conveyance exit sensor (PS94) turn ON during
idling.
GP-501 J-7390 When idling: The enter sensor (S1) turns ON Open the GP front door, the
while in idling. bypass panel cover, and remove
the jammed paper, if any.
J-7391 When idling: The stepper 1 speed sensor (S2) Open the GP front door, the
turns ON while in idling. entrance aligner panel, and
remove the jammed paper, if any.
J-7392 When idling: The bypass sensor (S8) turns ON Open the GP front door, the
J-7393 When idling: The exit sensor (S7) turns ON Open the GP front door, the
J-7394 When idling: The punch flag sensor (S9) turns Open the GP front door, the
ON while in idling. entrance aligner panel, the bottom
U-channel, and remove the
J-7395 When idling: The u-channel sensor (S4) turns Open the GP front door, the
ON while in idling. bottom U-channel, and remove
J-7396 When idling: The backstop sensor (S5) turns ON Open the GP front door, the
while in idling. bottom U-channel, and remove
K -10
Classificatio
n
J-7397 When idling: The stepper 2 speed sensor (S6) Open the GP front door, the exit
turns ON while in idling. aligner panel, and remove the
LS (1st J-7401 During operation: The entrance sensor (PS4) The LS and the main body Remove jammed paper if any
tandem) does not turn ON within a specified period of stop immediately. from the LS/main body.
time after the main body paper exit sensor (PS3)
turns ON.
J-7402 During operation: The entrance sensor (PS4) Remove jammed paper if any
does not turn OFF within a specified period of from the LS/main body.
J-7403 During operation: The sub tray exit sensor Remove jammed paper if any
(PS10) does not turn ON within a specified from the LS/main body.
period of time after the entrance sensor (PS4)
turns ON.
J-7404 During operation: The sub tray paper exit sensor Remove jammed paper if any
(PS10) does not turn OFF within a specified from the LS/main body.
J-7405 During operation: The conveyance sensor /1 Remove jammed paper if any
(PS7) does not turn ON within a specified period from the LS/main body.
of time after the entrance sensor (PS4) turns
ON.
period of time after the conveyance sensor /1
(PS7) turns ON.
(PS16) turns ON.
J-7411 During operation: The coupling exit sensor Remove jammed paper if any
(PS17) turns ON.
LS (2nd J-7431 During operation: The entrance sensor (PS4) Remove jammed paper if any
tandem) does not turn ON within a specified period of from the LS/main body.
turns ON.
does not turn OFF within a specified period of from the LS/main body.
J-7433 During operation: The sub tray exit sensor Remove jammed paper if any
period of time after the entrance sensor (PS4)
turns ON.
(PS7) does not turn ON within a specified period from the LS/main body.
ON.
K -11
Classificatio
n
(PS7) turns ON.
(PS16) turns ON.
(PS17) turns ON.
FD J-7501 During operation: The FD entrance sensor (PS1) The FD and the main body Remove jammed paper if any
does not turn ON within a specified period of stop immediately. from the FD/main body.
turns ON.
J-7502 During operation: The intermediate conveyance Remove jammed paper if any
sensor (PS13) does not turn ON within a from the FD/main body.
specified period of time after the FD entrance
J-7503 During operation: The main tray exit sensor Remove jammed paper if any
(PS18) does not turn ON within a specified from the FD/main body.
period of time after the intermediate conveyance
J-7504 During operation: The main tray exit sensor Remove jammed paper if any
(PS18) does not turn OFF within a specified from the FD/main body.
(PS16) does not turn ON within a specified from the FD/main body.
period of time after the intermediate conveyance
(PS16) does not turn OFF within a specified from the FD/main body.
J-7507 During operation: The punch conveyance sensor Remove jammed paper if any
(PS5) does not turn ON within a specified period from the FD/main body.
of time after the FD entrance sensor (PS1) turns
ON.
J-7508 During operation: The 3rd folding conveyance Remove jammed paper if any
specified period of time after the punch
J-7509 During operation: The punch registration sensor Remove jammed paper if any
(PS6) does not turn ON within a specified period from the FD/main body.
of time after the punch conveyance sensor
(PS5) turns ON.
J-7510 During operation: The 1st folding conveyance Remove jammed paper if any
specified period of time after the punch
registration sensor (PS6) turns ON.
J-7511 During operation: The 3rd folding conveyance Remove jammed paper if any
specified period of time after the 1st folding
J-7512 During operation: The intermediate conveyance Remove jammed paper if any
specified period of time after the 3rd folding
K -12
Classificatio
n
J-7513 During operation: While in the folding operation, Remove jammed paper if any
the 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53) does from the FD/main body.
after the 1st folding motor (M4) starts to
accelerate.
the 3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54) does from the FD/main body.
after the 1st folding motor (M4) starts to
accelerate.
after the 2nd folding motor (M5) starts to
accelerate.
the intermediate conveyance sensor (PS13) from the FD/main body.
does not turn ON within a specified period of
time after the 3rd folding motor (M6) starts to
accelerate.
after the 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53)
turns ON.
the intermediate conveyance sensor (PS13) from the FD/main body.
time after the 3rd folding conveyance sensor
(PS54) turns ON.
J-7519 During operation: The PI conveyance sensor / Remove jammed paper if any
Up (PS31) does not turn ON within a specified from the FD/main body.
period of time after the PI pick-up solenoid /Up
(SD13) turns ON.
J-7520 During operation: The PI exit sensor (PS4) does Remove jammed paper if any
not turn ON within a specified period of time from the FD/main body.
after the PI conveyance sensor /Up (PS31) turns
ON.
J-7521 During operation: The PI conveyance sensor / Remove jammed paper if any
Lw (PS37) does not turn ON within a specified from the FD/main body.
period of time after the PI pick-up solenoid /Lw
(SD14) turns ON.
J-7522 During operation: The PI exit sensor (PS4) does Remove jammed paper if any
not turn ON within a specified period of time from the FD/main body.
after the PI conveyance sensor /Lw (PS37) turns
ON.
J-7523 During operation: The FD entrance sensor (PS1) Remove jammed paper if any
does not turn ON within a specified period of from the FD/main body.
time after the PI exit sensor (PS4) turns ON.
J-7524 During operation: The PI multi feed is detected. Remove jammed paper if any
from the FD/main body.
RU J-7530 During operation: The RU and the main body Remove jammed paper if any
(RU-506) stop immediately. from the RU/main body.
The entrance sensor (PS1) does not turn ON
within a specified period of time after the exit
sensor of the previous device turns ON.
(RU-506) from the RU/main body.
While in the straight pass, the paper exit sensor
(PS2) does not turn ON within a specified period
ON.
The entrance sensor (PS1) does not turn OFF
within a specified period of time after it turns ON.
K -13
Classificatio
n
While in the reverse pass, the paper exit sensor
ON.
The paper exit sensor (PS2) does not turn OFF
The entrance sensor (PS1) does not turn ON
within a specified period of time.
The humidification section entrance sensor
of time.
The de-curler entrance sensor (PS2) does not
turn ON within a specified period of time in the
bypass path conveyance.
The de-curler entrance sensor (PS2) does not
turn ON within a specified period of time in the
lower path conveyance.
The color density detection timing sensor (PS3)
time.
The paper exit sensor (PS12) does not turn ON
The paper exit sensor (PS12) does not turn OFF
SD-506 J-7561 During operation: The entrance sensor (PS1) The SD and the main body Remove jammed paper if any
does not turn ON within a specified period of stop immediately. from the SD/main body.
turns ON.
J-7562 During operation: The horizontal conveyance Remove jammed paper if any
sensor /1 (PS2) does not turn ON within a from the SD/main body.
specified period of time after the entrance
specified period of time after the horizontal
exit sensor (PS4) does not turn ON within a from the SD/main body.
specified period of time after the horizontal
exit sensor (PS4) does not turn OFF within a from the SD/main body.
specified period of time after it turns ON.
(PS11) does not turn ON within a specified from the SD/main body.
period of time after the horizontal conveyance
sensor /1 (PS2) turns ON.
(PS11) does not turn OFF within a specified from the SD/main body.
K -14
Classificatio
n
J-7568 During operation: The right angle conveyance Remove jammed paper if any
specified period of time after the right angle
conveyance motor (M6) turns ON.
J-7569 During operation: The folding sensor /1 (PS7) Remove jammed paper if any
does not turn ON within a specified period of from the SD/main body.
time after the folding entrance motor (M3) turns
ON.
J-7570 During operation: The saddle stitching paper Remove jammed paper if any
sensor (PS13) does not turn ON within a from the SD/main body.
specified period of time after the folding sub
scan alignment exit motor (M8) turns ON.
J-7571 During operation: The bundle sensor /1 (PS14) Remove jammed paper if any
time after the bundle arm rotation motor (M22)
turns ON.
time after the bundle clip motor (M11) turns ON.
time after the bundle sensor /2 (PS15) turns ON.
does not turn OFF within a specified period of from the SD/main body.
J-7575 During operation: The right angle conveyance Remove jammed paper if any
sensor /2 (PS6) does not turn OFF within a from the SD/main body.
specified period of time after it turns ON. Or the
folding entrance sensor (PS60) does not turn
OFF within a specified period of time after it
turns ON.
J-7576 During operation: The folding sensor /2 (PS44) Remove jammed paper if any
J-7579 During operation: The folding passage sensor Remove jammed paper if any
(PS8) does not turn ON within a specified period from the SD/main body.
of time after the folding transfer motor (M4) turns
ON.
J-7580 During operation: The tri-folding exit sensor Remove jammed paper if any
(PS9) does not turn ON within a specified period from the SD/main body.
of time after the folding transfer motor (M4) turns
ON.
J-7581 During operation: The folding sub scan Remove jammed paper if any
alignment exit motor (M8) does not turn OFF from the SD/main body.
J-7582 During operation: The folding passage sensor Remove jammed paper if any
(PS8) does not turn OFF within a specified from the SD/main body.
J-7583 During operation: The tri-folding paper exit Remove jammed paper if any
sensor (PS9) does not turn OFF within a from the SD/main body.
J-7584 During operation: The trimming registration Remove jammed paper if any
sensor (PS55) does not turn ON within a from the SD/main body.
specified period of time after the bundle press
movement motor (M17) turns ON.
J-7585 During operation: The trimming registration Remove jammed paper if any
sensor (PS55) does not turn OFF within a from the SD/main body.
specified period of time after the bundle
registration motor (M12) turns ON.
GP-501 J-7590 During operation: The enter sensor (S1) does The GP/main body stop Remove jammed paper if any
not turn OFF within a specified period of time immediately. from the GP/main body.
after it turns ON.
K -15
Classificatio
n
J-7591 During operation: The stepper 1 speed sensor Remove jammed paper if any
(S2) does not turn OFF within a specified period from the GP/main body.
J-7592 During operation: The bypass sensor (S8) does Remove jammed paper if any
not turn OFF within a specified period of time from the GP/main body.
after it turns ON.
J-7593 During operation: The exit sensor (S7) does not Remove jammed paper if any
turn OFF within a specified period of time after it from the GP/main body.
turns ON.
J-7594 During operation: The punch flag sensor (S9) Remove jammed paper if any
does not turn OFF within a specified period of from the GP/main body.
J-7595 During operation: The u-channel sensor (S4) Remove jammed paper if any
J-7596 During operation: The backstop sensor (S5) Remove jammed paper if any
J-7597 During operation: The stepper 2 speed sensor Remove jammed paper if any
(S6) does not turn OFF within a specified period from the GP/main body.
PB J-7660 During operation: The entrance sensor (PS1) The PB and the main body Remove jammed paper if any
does not turn ON within a specified period of stop immediately. from the PB/main body.
time after the main body paper exit sensor turns
ON.
J-7661 During operation: The SC entrance sensor Remove jammed paper if any
(PS2) does not turn ON within a specified period from the PB/main body.
ON.
J-7662 During operation: The SC entrance sensor Remove jammed paper if any
(PS2) does not turn OFF within a specified from the PB/main body.
J-7663 During operation: The cover paper entrance Remove jammed paper if any
sensor (PS3) does not turn ON within a from the PB/main body.
specified period of time after the main body
paper exit sensor turns ON.
(PS4) does not turn ON within a specified period from the PB/main body.
ON.
J-7666 During operation: The SC paper detection Remove jammed paper if any
specified period of time after the SC entrance
sensor (PS16) does not turn OFF within a from the PB/main body.
J-7668 During operation: When conveying 2 sheets at a Remove jammed paper if any
time, the SC paper detection sensor (PS16) from the PB/main body.
time after the operation starts.
J-7669 During operation: When conveying 2 sheets at a Remove jammed paper if any
time, the SC paper detection sensor (PS16) from the PB/main body.
does not turn OFF within a specified period of
specified period of time after the SC bundle
conveyance motor (M17) turns ON.
J-7671 During operation: The clamp paper sensor Remove jammed paper if any
period of time after the clamp motor (M22) turns
OFF.
K -16
Classificatio
n
J-7674 During operation: The cover paper sensor /Rt Remove jammed paper if any
(PS45) does not turn ON within a specified from the PB/main body.
period of time after the cover paper feed clutch
(CL71) turns ON.
J-7675 During operation: The relay conveyance Remove jammed paper if any
entrance sensor (PS93) does not turn ON within from the PB/main body.
a specified period of time after the SC entrance
J-7676 During operation: When starting trimming of the Remove jammed paper if any
cover paper fed from the PB, the cover paper from the PB/main body.
switchback sensor (PS44) does not turn ON
within a specified time period after the cover
paper conveyance motor (M45) turns ON.
J-7677 During operation: When finishing trimming of the Remove jammed paper if any
cover paper fed from the PB, the cover paper from the PB/main body.
switchback sensor (PS44) does not turn OFF
J-7678 During operation: When positioning the leading Remove jammed paper if any
edge of the cover paper fed from the PB, the from the PB/main body.
cover paper sensor/Lt (PS46) does not turn OFF
edge of the cover paper fed from the PB, the from the PB/main body.
cover paper sensor/Lt (PS46) does not turn ON
paper conveyance motor (M45) turns forward
rotation ON.
J-7680 During operation: When cover paper is fed from Remove jammed paper if any
the main body, the cover paper sensor/Rt from the PB/main body.
(PS45) does not turn ON within a specified time
period after the cover paper entrance sensor
(PS3) turns ON.
J-7681 During operation: The relay conveyance Remove jammed paper if any
intermediate sensor (PS91) does not turn ON from the PB/main body.
within a specified period of time after the relay
conveyance entrance sensor (PS93) turns ON.
J-7682 During operation: When starting trimming of the Remove jammed paper if any
cover paper fed from the main body, the cover from the PB/main body.
paper switchback sensor (PS44) does not turn
ON within a specified time period after the cover
J-7683 During operation: When finishing trimming of the Remove jammed paper if any
cover paper fed from the main body, the cover from the PB/main body.
paper switchback sensor (PS44) does not turn
OFF within a specified time period after the
cover paper conveyance motor (M45) turns ON.
edge of the cover paper fed from the main body, from the PB/main body.
the cover paper sensor/Lt (PS46) does not turn
OFF within a specified time period after the
cover paper conveyance motor (M45) turns ON.
edge of the cover paper fed from the main body, from the PB/main body.
the cover paper sensor/Lt (PS46) does not turn
ON within a specified time period after the cover
paper conveyance motor (M45) turns forward
rotation ON.
J-7686 During operation: The booklet end sensor Remove jammed paper if any
(PS61) does not turn ON within a specified from the PB/main body.
period of time after the booklet conveyance belt
J-7687 During operation: When loading first book, the Remove jammed paper if any
booklet sensor /1 (PS66) does not turn ON from the PB/main body.
within a specified period of time after the booklet
conveyance belt up down motor (M63) turns ON.
J-7688 During operation: When first row of book moves, Remove jammed paper if any
the booklet sensor /2 (PS67) does not turn ON from the PB/main body.
within a specified period of time after the booklet
movement motor (M64) turns ON.
K -17
Classificatio
n
J-7689 During operation: When feeding paper, the Remove jammed paper if any
cover paper conveyance sensor /1 (PS75) does from the PB/main body.
after the cover paper feed clutch (CL71) turns
ON.
J-7690 During operation: The cover paper conveyance Remove jammed paper if any
sensor /2 (PS76) does not turn ON within a from the PB/main body.
specified period of time after the cover paper
J-7691 During operation: When refeeding paper, the Remove jammed paper if any
cover paper conveyance sensor /3 (PS77) does from the PB/main body.
after the cover paper feed clutch (CL71) turns
ON.
J-7692 During operation: The cover paper conveyance Remove jammed paper if any
sensor /4 (PS78) does not turn ON within a from the PB/main body.
J-7693 During operation: The multi feed detection Remove jammed paper if any
board /2 (MFDBR) turns OFF. from the PB/main body.
J-7694 During operation: The relay conveyance exit Remove jammed paper if any
specified period of time after the relay
conveyance intermediate sensor (PS91) turns
ON.
J-7695 During operation: The relay conveyance exit Remove jammed paper if any
J-7696 During operation: The cover paper switchback Remove jammed paper if any
feed motor (M74) turns ON.
J-7697 During operation: No paper is detected (paper Remove jammed paper if any
has been removed) when restarting the job after from the PB/main body.
recovery.
J-7698 During operation: A cover paper has not been Remove jammed paper if any
conveyed to the cover paper table section when from the PB/main body.
clamping of inside pages is finished.
ADU J-9201 During operation: The ADU reverse sensor Stops immediately. Pull out the ADU and remove
period of time after the reverse/exit sensor
(PS19) turns ON.
J-9202 During operation: The ADU stop sensor (PS20) Pull out the ADU and remove
J-9251 When idling : The ADU reverse sensor (PS21) - Pull out the ADU and remove
J-9252 When idling : The ADU stop sensor (PS20) turns Pull out the ADU and remove
J-9301 During operation: The ADU conveyance sensor Stops immediately. Pull out the ADU and remove
period of time after the ADU reverse motor
(M32) turns ON.
J-9351 When idling : The ADU conveyance sensor - Pull out the ADU and remove
(PS61) turns ON while in idling. jammed paper if any.
J-9401 During operation: The ADU pre-registration Stops immediately. Pull out the ADU and remove
specified period of time after the ADU
J-9451 When idling: The ADU pre-registration sensor - Pull out thePull out tray and
(PS23) turns ON while in idling. remove jammed paper if any.
ADU and remove jammed paper if
any.
K -18
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/PRO C6000L K TROUBLESHOOTING > 2. MALFUNCTION CODE
2. MALFUNCTION CODE
2.1 Trouble reset method
Turn OFF/ON the power switch (SW2) of the main body when releasing an abnormal condition.
Note
To prevent problems such as toner adhesion due to the temperature rise in the machine, cooling by fan is performed for 5 minutes
after the malfunction code occurs.
When SW2 is turned OFF within 5 minutes after the malfunction code occurs, a message "Cooling in progress. Power will be off
when completed." appears. Do not turn ON SW2 before the message disappears.
Machine cooling is not performed when the malfunction code which has "*" on the malfunction code column occurs. In that case,
the message does not appear even when turning SW2 OFF within 5 minutes after it occurs.
2.2 Function to detach defective sections

When the abnormality occurs on the part for which the faulty part isolation function is available, the defective units can be detached temporarily
to use other control unit manually.
While detached, an error detection is not carried out on these detached units.
There are 2 methods of setting for limited use.
(1) User operation

When a malfunction code occurs, press the HELP key following the message on the operation panel and then turn the sub power switch
(SW2) OFF and ON. This operation allows you to use it temporarily until the SW2 is OFF and ON (including an OFF/ON operation by the
weekly timer) next time.
(2) DIPSW setting

Turning the sub power switch (SW2) OFF and ON after setting the specified software DIPSW bit allows you to make a limited use of it until
the bit setting is released next time (it requires the OFF/ON operation of the SW2).
2.3 Malfunction code list

WARNING
When any malfunction of C1540 to 1562; PB glue tank temperature abnormality or C3501 to 3912, 3914, 3915; fusing temperature
abnormality occurs, be sure to repair defective parts then set the software DIPSW3-1 of service mode to 0. If DIPSW3-1 is set to 0
before defective parts are fixed, it may cause fire.
Malfunction Resulting Faulty part Control
Classification Cause Estimated abnormal parts
code operation isolation DIPSW when
Main body: C-0001 Communication error The main body Printer control board
Communication between the printer control stops (PRCB)
error board (PRCB) and the PF immediately to PF drive board (PFDB)
drive board (PFDB) or LU turn OFF the LU drive board (LUDB)
drive board (LUDB). power relay
C-0002 Communication error (RL1). Printer control board
between the printer control (PRCB)
board (PRCB) and the Conveyance drive board
conveyance drive board (CDB)
(CDB).
C-0003 Communication error Printer control board
board (PRCB) and the Conveyance drive board
conveyance drive board (CDB)
(CDB).
Main body: C-0101 An error detection signal of Printer control board
Paper feed M41 is detected (PRCB)
motor continuously for a Paper feed motor (M41)
abnormality specified period of time
while the paper feed motor
(M41) is ON.
LU: LU paper C-0102 An error detection signal of LU drive board (LUDB) DIPSW18-3 LU paper
feed motor M1 is detected Paper feed motor (M1) feed is not
abnormality continuously for a Interlock switch /1 available
specified period of time (MS1), /2 (MS2)
while the paper feed motor Upper door sensor
(M1) is ON. (PS100), front door
sensor (PS115)
PF: PF paper C-0103 An error detection signal of PF drive board (PFDB) DIPSW35-0 PF paper
feed motor M1 is detected Paper feed motor (M1) DIPSW35-1 feed is not
abnormality continuously for a Front door open/close DIPSW35-2 available
specified period of time switch (SW1) DIPSW35-3
while the paper feed motor Front door open/close DIPSW35-4
(M1) is ON. sensor (PS23) DIPSW35-5
K -19

Main body: C-0201 The upper limit sensor /1 Printer control board DIPSW18-0 Paper feed
Paper feed tray (PS30) does not turn ON (PRCB) in tray 1 is
abnormality within a specified period of Paper lift motor /1 (M38) unavailable
time after the paper lift Upper limit sensor /1
motor /1 (M38) turns ON. (PS30)
Pick-up solenoid /1
(SD7)
C-0202 The upper limit sensor /2 Printer control board DIPSW18-1 Paper feed
(PS36) does not turn ON (PRCB) in tray 2 is
within a specified period of Paper lift motor /2 (M39) unavailable
Pick-up solenoid /2
(SD8)
C-0203 The upper limit sensor /3 Printer control board DIPSW18-2 Paper feed
(PS42) does not turn ON (PRCB) in tray 3 is
within a specified period of Paper lift motor /3 (M40) unavailable
Pick-up solenoid /3
(SD9)
LU: LU lift motor C-0204 A lock signal of M100 is LU drive board (LUDB) DIPSW18-3 LU paper
abnormality detected while the paper Upper limit sensor feed is not
lift motor (M100) is ON. (PS109) available
Paper lift motor (M100)
C-0205 A lock signal of M100 is LU drive board (LUDB)
detected while the paper Paper lift motor (M100)
lift motor (M100) is ON. Upper limit sensor
(PS109)
PF: Paper lift C-0208 The upper limit sensor /1 PF drive board (PFDB) DIPSW21-4 Paper feed
motor (PS1) does not turn ON Paper lift motor /1 (M2) in PF upper
abnormality within a specified period of Upper limit sensor /1 tray is
time after the paper lift (PS1) unavailable
motor /1 (M2) turns ON.
C-0209 Power supply line fuse for PF drive board (PFDB) DIPSW21-4 Paper feed
the paper lift motor /1 (M2) Paper lift motor /1 (M2) in PF upper
blows out. tray is
unavailable
C-0211 The upper limit sensor /2 PF drive board (PFDB) DIPSW21-5 Paper feed
(PS9) does not turn ON Paper lift motor /2 (M3) in PF lower
within a specified period of Upper limit sensor /2 tray is
time after the paper lift (PS9) unavailable
motor /2 (M3) turns ON.
C-0212 Power supply line fuse for PF drive board (PFDB) DIPSW21-5 Paper feed
the paper lift motor /2 (M3) Paper lift motor /2 (M3) in PF lower
blows out. tray is
unavailable
Main body: C-0213 The paper exit pressure AC drive board (ACDB)
Paper exit home sensor (PS10) does Printer control board
abnormality not turn ON within a (PRCB)
specified period of time Paper exit motor (M54)
after it turns OFF. Paper exit pressure
sensor (PS10)
Main body: Fan C-0301* An error detection signal of Printer control board
abnormality FM47 is detected (PRCB)
continuously for a Main body fan (FM47)
specified period of time
while the main body fan
(FM47) is ON.
C-0302* An error detection signal of Printer control board
any of FM26 or FM28 is (PRCB)
detected continuously for a Tucking fan /1 (FM26)
specified period of time Tucking fan /3 (FM28)
while the tucking fan /1
(FM26) and /3 (FM28) are
ON.
K -20

C-0303 An error detection signal of Conveyance drive board
FM66 is detected (CDB)
continuously for a ADU cooling fan /1
specified period of time (FM66)
while ADU cooling fan /1
(FM66) is ON.
any of FM61, FM62 or (PRCB)
FM63 is detected Paper exit fan /1 (FM61)
continuously for a Paper exit fan /2 (FM62)
specified period of time Paper exit fan /3 (FM63)
while the paper exit
cooling fans /1 (FM61), /2
ON.
FM36 is detected (PRCB)
continuously for a Deodorization fan
while the deodorization fan
(FM36) is ON.
LU: LU fan C-0306 An error detection signal of LU drive board (LUDB)
abnormality FM1 is detected Paper feed assist fan /Fr
continuously for a (FM1)
while the paper feed assist
fan /Fr (FM1) is ON.
C-0307 An error detection signal of LU drive board (LUDB)
FM2 is detected Paper feed assist fan /Rr
fan /Rr (FM2) is ON.
PF: PF fan C-0308 An error detection signal of PF drive board (PFDB)
abnormality FM1 is detected Paper feed assist fan /
continuously for a Fr11 (FM1)
fan /Fr11 (FM1) is ON.
C-0309 An error detection signal of PF drive board (PFDB)
FM3 is detected Paper feed assist fan /
continuously for a Rr11 (FM2)
fan /Rr11 (FM2) is ON.
K -21

any of FM11 or FM12 is Dehumidifier fan /1
detected continuously for a (FM11)
specified period of time Dehumidifier fan /2
while the dehumidifier (FM12)
fans /1 (FM11) and /2
(FM12) are ON.
any of FM13 or FM14 is Dehumidifier fan /3
detected continuously for a (FM13)
specified period of time Dehumidifier fan /4
while the dehumidifier (FM14)
fans /3 (FM13) and /4
(FM14) are ON.
any of FM10 or FM9 is Ventilation fan /1 (FM10)
detected continuously for a Ventilation fan /2 (FM9)
while the ventilation fan /1
ON.
LU: LU fan C-0320 An error detection signal of LU drive board (LUDB)
abnormality FM3 is detected Dehumidifier fan /1
while the dehumidifier fan /
1 (FM3) is ON.
C-0321 An error detection signal of LU drive board (LUDB)
FM4 is detected Dehumidifier fan /2
while the dehumidifier fan /
2 (FM4) is ON.
Main body: Fan C-0322 An error detection signal of Conveyance drive board
abnormality FM67 is detected (CDB)
continuously for a ADU cooling fan /2
while ADU cooling fan /2
(FM67) is ON.
C-0323* An error detection signal of Paper exit fan /2 (FM62)
FM62 is detected Printer control board
continuously for a (PRCB)
while the paper exit fan /2
(FM62) is ON.
C-0324* An error detection signal of Paper exit fan /3 (FM63)
FM63 is detected Printer control board
continuously for a (PRCB)
while the paper exit fan /3
(FM63) is ON.
LU: LU power C-0401 24VDC is not supplied to LU drive board (LUDB)
source LU. DC power supply /2
abnormality (DCPS/2)
C-0402 12VDC is not supplied to LU drive board (LUDB)
LU. DC power supply /1
(DCPS1)
K -22

PF: PF power C-0403 24VDC is not supplied to PF drive board (PFDB)
source PF. DC power supply /2
abnormality (DCPS2)
C-0404 24VDC is not supplied to PF drive board (PFDB)
PF. DC power supply /2
(DCPS2)
(DCPS1)
(DCPS2)
PF: PF Tray 1 C-0407 24V power source PF drive board (PFDB)
Heater high abnormal signal is Temperature sensor /3
temperature detected. (TEMS/3)
hardware AC drive board (ACDB)
detection in PF
abnormality
PF: PF Tray 2 C-0408 24V power source PF drive board (PFDB)
Heater high abnormal signal is Temperature sensor /4
temperature detected. (TEMS/4)
hardware AC drive board (ACDB)
detection in PF
abnormality
PF: PF fan C-0409 Fan heater /Up (DH3) high PF drive board (PFDB)
heater temperature abnormality AC drive board in PF
abnormality The temperature sensor /3 (ACDB)
(TEMS/3) detects the Fan heater /Up (DH3)
prescribed or higher value Temperature sensor /3
continuously for a (TEMS/3)
specified period of time. Dehumidifier fans /1
(FM11) and /2 (FM12)
C-0410 Fan heater /Lw (DH4) high PF drive board (PFDB)
temperature abnormality AC drive board in PF
The temperature sensor /4 (ACDB)
(TEMS/4) detects the Fan heater /Lw (DH4)
prescribed or higher value Temperature sensor /4
specified period of time. Dehumidifier fans /3
(FM13) and /4 (FM14)
C-0411 Fan heater /Up (DH3) low PF drive board (PFDB)
(TEMS/3) detects the Fan heater /Up (DH3)
prescribed or lower value Temperature sensor /3
specified period of time.
C-0412 Fan heater /Lw (DH4) low PF drive board (PFDB)
(TEMS/4) detects the Fan heater /Lw (DH4)
prescribed or lower value Temperature sensor /4
C-0413 Fan heater /Up (DH3) PF drive board (PFDB)
temperature rise AC drive board in PF
abnormality (ACDB)
The temperature detected Fan heater /Up (DH3)
by the temperature Temperature sensor /3
sensor /3 (TEMS/3) has (TEMS/3)
not risen to a prescribed
level within a specified
period of time.
C-0414 Fan heater /Lw (DH4) PF drive board (PFDB)
temperature rise AC drive board in PF
abnormality (ACDB)
The temperature detected Fan heater /Lw (DH4)
by the temperature Temperature sensor /4
sensor /4 (TEMS/4) has (TEMS/4)
not risen to a prescribed
level within a specified
period of time.
K -23

LU: LU C-0415 The temperature sensor /2 LU drive board (LUDB) LU paper
temperature (TEMS2) detects an error Dehumidification feed is not
sensor detection signal heater /3 (DH2) available
abnormality continuously for a Temperature sensor /2
specified period of time. (TEMS2)
(Hardware detection) AC Drive Assy
Main body AC drive
board (ACDB)
LU: LU C-0416 Dehumidifier heater /3 LU drive board (LUDB)
dehumidifier (DH2) high temperature Dehumidification
heater abnormality heater /3 (DH2)
abnormality The temperature sensor /2 Temperature sensor /2
(TEMS2) detects the (TEMS2)
prescribed or higher value AC drive assy
continuously for a Main body AC drive
specified period of time. board (ACDB)
(Software detection)
C-0417 Dehumidifier heater /3 LU drive board (LUDB)
(DH2) low temperature AC Drive Assy
abnormality Main body AC drive
The temperature sensor board (ACDB)
(TEMS) detects the Dehumidification
prescribed or lower value heater /3 (DH2)
continuously for a Temperature sensor /2
specified period of time. (TEMS2)
C-0418 Dehumidifier heater /3 LU drive board (LUDB)
(DH2) temperature rise Main body AC drive
abnormality board (ACDB)
The temperature detected Dehumidification
by the temperature sensor heater /3 (DH2)
(TEMS) has not risen to a Temperature sensor /2
prescribed level within a (TEMS2)
specified period of time. AC drive assy
FS: FS C-1005 Communication error. The main body Printer control board
abnormality and the FS stop (PRCB)
immediately to FNS control board
turn OFF the (FNSCB)
main relay
(RL1).
FD: FD C-1006 Communication error. The main body Printer control board
abnormality and the FD stop (PRCB)
immediately to FD control board
turn OFF the (FDCB)
main relay
(RL1).
SD: SD-506 C-1007 Communication error. The main body Printer control board
abnormality and the SD stop (PRCB)
immediately to SD control board
turn OFF the (SDCB)
main relay
(RL1).
PB: PB C-1009 Communication error The main body PB control board
abnormality between Main CPU in the and the PB stop (PBCB)
PB control board (PBCB) immediately to Control program
and Sub CPU1. turn OFF the
C-1010 Communication error main relay PB control board
between Main CPU in the (RL1). (PBCB)
PB control board (PBCB) Control program
and Sub CPU2.
PB control board C-1011 Paper feed error between PB control board
(PBCB) the main body and PB. (PBCB)
Control program
GP : GP-501 C-1012 Communication The main body Printer control board
abnormality abnormality. and the GP stop (PRCB)
immediately to Punch Controller PCB
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
RU: RU-509 C-1013 Communication error. The main body Printer control board
abnormality and the RU stop (PRCB)
immediately to RU control board
turn OFF the (RUCB)
K -24

RU : RU-506 C-1014 Communication main relay Printer control board
abnormality abnormality. (RL1). (PRCB)
RU control board
(RUCB)
FS: FS-531/612 C-1101 The shift unit does not get The main body FNS control board
abnormality (FS-531/612 to the shift position or the and the FS stop (FNSCB)
) home position within a immediately to Shift roller motor (M2)
specified period of time. turn OFF the Shift roller home sensor
main relay (PS18)
FS: FS-521 C-1102 The tray up down motor (RL1). FNS control board DIPSW6-4 FS main
abnormality (FS-521) (M3) does not turn OFF (FNSCB) tray and
even when a specified FNS drive board stapling are
period of time elapses (FNSDB) not available
after it starts operations. Main tray up down motor
Or, it operates for more (M3)
than the allowed time at a Main tray upper limit
speed out of the specified sensor (PS2)
one. Main tray lower limit
sensor (PS3)
FS: FS-531/612 C-1102 The main tray upper limit FNS control board
abnormality (FS-531/612 sensor (PS2) does not turn (FNSCB)
) ON within a specified Main tray up down motor
period of time after the (M3)
main tray up down motor Main tray upper limit
(M3) turns ON. sensor (PS2)
FS: FS-521 C-1103 The alignment home FNS control board DIPSW6-4 FS main
abnormality (FS-521) sensors /Rr (PS8) and /Fr (FNSCB) tray and
(PS31) do not turn ON FNS drive board stapling are
within a specified period of (FNSDB) not available
time after the home Alignment motor /Rr
position search operation (M5)
of the alignment motors / Alignment motor /Fr
Rr (M5) and /Fr (M22) (M22)
starts. Alignment home
sensor /Rr (PS8)
Alignment home
sensor /Fr (PS31)
FS: FS-531/612 C-1103 The alignment home Relay board (RB)
abnormality (FS-531/612 sensor /Up (PS8) does not Alignment motor /Up
) turn ON or OFF within a (M5)
specified period of time Alignment home
after the alignment motor sensor /Up (PS8)
(M5) turns ON.
FS: FS-521 C-1104 The main tray paper exit FNS control board DIPSW6-4 FS main
abnormality (FS-521) motor (M7) operates for (FNSCB) tray and
more than the allowed time FNS drive board stapling are
at a speed out of the (FNSDB) not available
specified one. Main tray exit motor
(M7)
FS: FS-531/612 C-1104 A prescribed speed is not FNS control board
abnormality (FS-531/612 obtained within a specified (FNSCB)
) period of time after the Paper exit roller motor
paper exit roller motor (M7)
(M7) turns ON.
FS: FS-521 C-1105 The paper exit opening FNS control board DIPSW6-4 FS main
abnormality (FS-521) unit does not get to the (FNSCB) tray and
specified opening position Paper exit opening stapling are
within a specified period of motor (M8) not available
time after the paper exit Paper exit opening
opening motor (M8) starts home sensor (PS12)
operations.
FS: FS-531/612 C-1105 The paper exit home FNS control board
abnormality (FS-531/612 sensor (PS12) does not (FNSCB)
) turn ON or OFF within a Paper exit opening
specified period of time motor (M8)
after the paper exit Paper exit home sensor
opening motor (M8) turns (PS12)
ON.
K -25

FS: FS-521 C-1106 The stapler movement FNS control board DIPSW6-3 The use of
abnormality (FS-521) home sensor (PS11) does (FNSCB) staple is
not turn ON within a FNS drive board unavailable
specified period of time (FNSDB)
after the home position Stapler movement motor
search operation of the (M11)
stapler movement motor Stapler movement home
(M11) starts. sensor (PS11)
FS: FS-531/612 C-1106 The Stapler movement Relay board (RB)
abnormality (FS-531/612 home sensor (PS11) does Stapler movement motor
) not turn ON within a (M11)
specified period of time Stapler movement home
after the stapler movement sensor (PS11)
FS: FS-521 C-1107 The stapler rotation home FNS control board DIPSW6-3 The use of
abnormality (FS-521) sensor (PS14) does not (FNSCB) staple is
(skew rotation) turn ON within a specified FNS drive board unavailable
period of time after the (FNSDB)
home position search Stapler rotation motor
operation of the stapler (M4)
rotation motor (M4) starts. Stapler rotation home
sensor (PS14)
FS: FS-612 C-1107 The clincher rotation home Relay board (RB)
abnormality (FS-612) sensor (PS14) does not Clincher rotation motor
turn ON or OFF within a (M4)
specified period of time Clincher rotation home
after the clincher rotation sensor (PS14)
FS: FS-521 C-1108 The stapler rotation home FNS control board DIPSW6-3 The use of
abnormality (FS-521) sensor (PS14) does not (FNSCB) staple is
(vertical rotation) turn ON within a specified FNS drive board unavailable
period of time after the (FNSDB)
home position search Stapler rotation motor
operation of the stapler (M4)
rotation motor (M4) starts. Stapler rotation home
sensor (PS14)
FS: FS-612 C-1108 The stapler rotation home Relay board (RB)
abnormality (FS-612) sensor (PS13) does not Stapler rotation motor
turn ON within a specified (M6)
period of time after the Stapler rotation home
stapler rotation motor (M6) sensor (PS13)
turns ON.
FS: FS-521 C-1109 After the stapler motor /Fr FNS control board DIPSW6-3 The use of
abnormality (FS-521) (M31) starts operations, it (FNSCB) staple is
does not complete FNS drive board unavailable
operations within a (FNSDB)
specified period of time, Stapler board (SB)
and the stapler home Stapler motor /Fr (M31)
sensor /Fr (PS41) does not Stapler home sensor /Fr
turn ON. (PS41)
FS: FS-531/612 C-1109 The stapler motor home Relay board (RB)
abnormality (FS-531/612 sensor /Fr (PS31) does not Stapler motor /Fr (M14)
) turn ON within a specified Stapler motor home
period of time after the sensor /Fr (PS31)
stapler motor /Fr (M14)
turns ON.
FS: FS-521 C-1110 After the stapler motor /Rr FNS control board DIPSW6-3 The use of
abnormality (FS-521) (M30) starts operations, it (FNSCB) staple is
does not complete FNS drive board unavailable
operations within a (FNSDB)
specified period of time, Stapler board (SB)
and the stapler home Stapler motor /Rr (M30)
sensor /Rr (PS40) does Stapler home sensor /Rr
not turn ON. (PS40)
FS: FS-531/612 C-1110 The stapler motor home Relay board (RB)
abnormality (FS-531/612 sensor /Rr (PS30) does Stapler motor /Rr (M9)
) not turn ON within a Stapler motor home
specified period of time sensor /Rr (PS30)
after the stapler motor /Rr
(M9) turns ON.
K -26

FS: FS-612 C-1111 The clincher motor home Relay board (RB)
abnormality (FS-612) sensor /Fr (PS33) does not Clincher motor /Fr (M15)
turn ON within a specified Clincher motor home
period of time after the sensor /Fr (PS33)
clincher motor /Fr (M15)
turns ON.
C-1112 The clincher motor home Relay board (RB)
(FS-612) sensor /Rr (PS32) does Clincher motor /Rr (M10)
not turn ON within a Clincher motor home
specified period of time sensor /Rr (PS32)
after the clincher motor /Rr
(M10) turns ON.
FS: FS-521 C-1113 After the home position FNS control board DIPSW6-4 FS main
abnormality (FS-521) search operation of the (FNSCB) tray and
rear stopper motor (M26) FNS drive board stapling are
starts, the rear stopper (FNSDB) not available
home sensor (PS35) does Rear stopper motor
not turn ON within a (M26)
specified period of time. Rear stopper home
sensor (PS35)
FS: FS-612 C-1113 After the home position Relay board (RB) DIPSW18-5 The use of
abnormality (FS-612) search operation of saddle Saddle stitching stopper multi-half
stitching stopper motor motor (M18) folding,
(M18) starts, the saddle Saddle stitching stopper saddle
stitching stopper home home sensor (PS23) stitching and
sensor (PS23) does not multi-tri-
turn ON within a specified folding
period of time. unavailable
C-1114 The alignment home Relay board (RB) DIPSW18-5 The use of
(FS-612) sensor /Lw (PS24) does Alignment motor /Lw multi-half
not turn ON within a (M16) folding,
specified period of time Alignment home saddle
after the alignment motor / sensor /Lw (PS24) stitching and
Lw (M16) turns ON. multi-tri-
folding
unavailable
C-1115 The folding knife home Relay board (RB) DIPSW18-5 The use of
(FS-612) sensor (PS22) does not Folding knife motor multi-half
turn ON within a specified (M19) folding,
period of time after the Folding knife home saddle
folding knife motor (M19) sensor (PS22) stitching and
turns ON. multi-tri-
folding
unavailable
(FS not
connected)
C-1116 A prescribed speed is not Relay board (RB) DIPSW18-5 The use of
(FS-612) obtained within a specified Folding transfer motor multi-half
period of time after the (M20) folding,
folding transfer motor saddle
(M20) turns ON. stitching and
multi-tri-
folding
unavailable
(FS not
connected)
PI: PI C-1124 The tray upper limit FNS control board DIPSW18-6 PI unusable
abnormality sensor /Lw (PS209) or the (FNSCB) (PI not
tray lower limit sensor /Lw PI drive board (PIDB) connected)
(PS210) does not turn ON Tray lift motor /Lw
within a specified period of (M202)
time after the Tray lift Tray upper limit sensor /
motor /Lw (M202) turns Lw (PS209)
ON. Tray lower limit sensor /
Lw (PS210)
K -27

C-1125 The tray upper limit FNS control board DIPSW18-6 PI unusable
sensor /Up (PS205) or the (FNSCB) (PI not
tray lower limit sensor /Up PI drive board (PIDB) connected)
(PS204) does not turn ON Tray lift motor /Up
within a specified period of (M201)
time after the tray lift Tray upper limit sensor /
motor /Up (M201) turns Up (PS205)
ON. Tray lower limit sensor /
Up (PS204)
C-1126 A prescribed speed is not FNS control board DIPSW18-6 PI unusable
obtained within a specified (FNSCB) (PI not
period of time after the PI drive board (PIDB) connected)
conveyance motor (M203) Conveyance motor
turns ON. (M203)
PK: PK C-1127 The punch shift home FNS control board DIPSW19-5 PK
abnormality sensor (PS303) does not (FNSCB) unusable
turn ON within a specified Punch drive board (PK not
period of time after the (PDB) connected)
punch shift motor (M302) Punch shift motor
turns ON. (M302)
Punch shift home sensor
(PS303)
C-1132 The punch home sensor FNS control board DIPSW19-5 PK
(PS301) does not turn ON (FNSCB) unusable
within a specified period of Punch drive board (PK not
time after the punch motor (PDB) connected)
(M301) turns ON. Punch motor (M301)
Punch home sensor
(PS301)
FS: FS-531/612 C-1137 The gate home sensor FNS control board
abnormality (FS-531/612 (PS16) does not turn ON (FNSCB)
) within a specified period of Gate motor (M12)
time after the gate motor Gate home sensor
(M12) turns ON. (PS16)
FS: FS-521 C-1140 After the paper exit arm FNS control board DIPSW6-4 FS main
abnormality (FS-521) motor /Fr (M23) starts (FNSCB) tray and
operations, it does not FNS drive board stapling are
complete operations within (FNSDB) not available
a specified period of time, Paper exit arm motor
and the paper exit arm (M23)
home sensor /Fr (PS9) Paper exit arm home
does not turn ON. Or, it sensor (PS9)
operates for more than the
allowed time at a speed
out of the specified one.
C-1141 The stack assist home FNS control board DIPSW6-4 FS main
(FS-521) sensor (PS32) does not (FNSCB) tray and
turn ON within a specified FNS drive board stapling are
period of time after the (FNSDB) not available
home position search Stack assist guide motor
operation of the stack (M24)
assist motor (M24) starts. Stack assist home
sensor (PS32)
C-1142 The intermediate roller FNS control board DIPSW6-4 FS main
(FS-521) home sensor (PS33) does (FNSCB) tray and
not turn ON even after a FNS drive board stapling are
specified period of time (FNSDB) not available
after the intermediate roller Alignment motor /Fr
open/close motor (M25) (M22)
starts the home position Alignment motor /Rr
search operation. (M5)
Intermediate roller
release solenoid (SD7)
C-1143 The conveyance motor FNS control board DIPSW6-5 FS unusable
(FS-521) (M1) does not turn ON (FNSCB) (FS not
when the start button is Conveyance motor (M1) connected)
turned ON. Or the Paper exit sensor
conveyance motor (M1) (PS37)
does not shift the speed FNS entrance sensor
for each processing. (PS4)
K -28

C-1144 The paper exit alignment FNS control board DIPSW6-4 FS main
(FS-521) plate home sensor /Fr (FNSCB) tray and
(PS18) does not turn ON FNS drive board stapling are
time after the paper exit Paper exit alignment
alignment motor /Fr (M15) motor /Fr (M15)
starts the home position Paper exit alignment
search operation. Or, even plate home sensor /Fr
after a specified period of (PS18)
time after M15 starts the
operation, it does not stop.
(FS-521) plate home sensor /Rr (FNSCB) tray and
time after the paper exit Paper exit alignment
alignment motor /Rr (M14) motor /Rr (M14)
starts the home position Paper exit alignment
search operation. Or, even plate home sensor /Rr
after a specified period of (PS19)
C-1146 The bypass roller release FNS control board DIPSW6-4 FS main
(FS-521) home sensor (PS13) does (FNSCB) tray and
not turn ON within a FNS drive board stapling are
specified period of time (FNSDB) not available
after the bypass roller Bypass roller release
release motor (M12) starts motor (M12)
the home position search Bypass roller release
operation. Or, even after a home sensor (PS13)
after M12 starts the
(FS-521) plate retraction home (FNSCB) tray and
sensor (PS24) does not FNS drive board stapling are
turn ON within a specified (FNSDB) not available
period of time after the Paper exit alignment
paper exit alignment plate plate retraction motor
retraction home motor (M18)
(M18) starts the home Paper exit alignment
position search operation. plate retraction home
Or, even after a specified sensor (PS24)
period of time after M18
starts the operation, it
does not stop.
C-1148 The stacker entrance roller FNS control board DIPSW6-4 FS main
(FS-521) release home sensor (FNSCB) tray and
time after the stacker Stacker entrance roller
entrance roller release release motor (M16)
motor (M16) starts the Stacker entrance roller
home position search release home sensor
operation. Or, even after a (PS23)
LS (1st tandem): C-1201 The stacker tray encoder The main body Stacker tray up down DIPSW6-6 LS (1st
LS abnormality sensor (PS2) does not turn and the LS stop motor (M1) tandem)
ON within a specified immediately to LS control board (LSCB) unusable
period of time after the turn OFF the
stacker tray up down main relay
motor (M1) turns ON. Or, (RL1).
the initial operation or the
stacker tray down
operation is not completed
within a specified period of
time.
K -29

C-1202 The shift unit home sensor Shift unit motor (M5) DIPSW6-6 LS (1st
(PS11) does not turn ON LS control board (LSCB) tandem)
within a specified period of unusable
time after the shift unit
motor (M5) turns ON. Or,
PS11 does not turn ON
time.
C-1203 The alignment plate home Alignment motor (M7) DIPSW6-6 LS (1st
sensor (PS12) does not LS control board (LSCB) tandem)
turn ON within a specified unusable
period of time after the
alignment motor (M7) turns
ON. Or, PS12 does not
turn ON within a specified
period of time.
C-1204 The grip conveyance Grip conveyance motor DIPSW6-6 LS (1st
home sensor (PS5) does (M4) tandem)
not turn ON within a unusable
after the grip conveyance
C-1205 The stacker tray upper Stacker tray up down DIPSW6-6 LS (1st
limit switch (MS2) is ON motor (M1) tandem)
when the stacker tray up Stacker tray upper limit unusable
down motor (M1) is in the switch (MS2)
up operation.
C-1206 The stacker tray lower limit Stacker tray up down DIPSW6-6 LS (1st
switch (MS3) is ON when motor (M1) tandem)
the stacker tray up down Stacker tray lower limit unusable
motor (M1) is in the down switch (MS3)
operation.
LS (2nd C-1211 The stacker tray encoder Stacker tray up down DIPSW6-6 LS (1st
tandem): LS sensor (PS2) does not turn motor (M1) tandem)
abnormality ON within a specified LS control board (LSCB) unusable
stacker tray up down
the initial operation or the
stacker tray down
operation is not completed
time.
C-1212 The shift unit home sensor Shift unit motor (M5) DIPSW6-6 LS (1st
(PS11) does not turn ON LS control board (LSCB) tandem)
within a specified period of unusable
time after the shift unit
time.
C-1213 The alignment plate home Alignment motor (M7) DIPSW6-6 LS (1st
sensor (PS12) does not LS control board (LSCB) tandem)
turn ON within a specified unusable
alignment motor (M7) turns
ON. Or, PS12 does not
turn ON within a specified
period of time.
C-1214 The grip conveyance Grip conveyance motor DIPSW6-6 LS (1st
home sensor (PS5) does (M4) tandem)
not turn ON within a unusable
after the grip conveyance
C-1215 The stacker tray upper Stacker tray up down DIPSW6-6 LS (1st
limit switch (MS2) is ON motor (M1) tandem)
when the stacker tray up Stacker tray upper limit unusable
down motor (M1) is in the switch (MS2)
up operation.
K -30

C-1216 The stacker tray lower limit Stacker tray up down DIPSW6-6 LS (1st
switch (MS3) is ON when motor (M1) tandem)
the stacker tray up down Stacker tray lower limit unusable
motor (M1) is in the down switch (MS3)
operation.
FD: FD C-1221 The 1st folding cam home The main body 1st folding release motor DIPSW6-0 The use of
abnormality sensor (PS55) does not and the FD stop (M14) the folding
turn ON within a specified immediately to Folding drive board function and
period of time after the 1st turn OFF the (FDB) the punch
folding release motor main relay 1st folding cam home section is
(M14) turns ON. (RL1). sensor (PS55) unavailable
C-1222 The 2nd folding cam home 2nd folding release DIPSW6-0 The use of
sensor (PS56) does not motor (M15) the folding
turn ON within a specified Folding drive board function and
period of time after the 2nd (FDB) the punch
folding release motor 2nd folding cam home section is
(M15) turns ON. sensor (PS56) unavailable
C-1223 The 3rd folding cam home 3rd folding release DIPSW6-0 The use of
sensor (PS57) does not motor (M16) the folding
turn ON within a specified Folding drive board function and
period of time after the 3rd (FDB) the punch
folding release motor 3rd folding cam home section is
(M16) turns ON. sensor (PS57) unavailable
C-1224 The 2 holes punch home Punch motor (M10) DIPSW6-0 The use of
sensor (PS8) does not turn Punch drive board the folding
OFF within a specified (PDB) function and
period of time after the 2- 2 holes punch home the punch
holes punch home position sensor (PS8) section is
return operation starts. Or, unavailable
after the punch motor
(M10) turns ON, the 2
holes punch home sensor
(PS8) does not turn OFF.
C-1225 The 3 holes/4 holes punch Punch motor (M10) DIPSW6-0 The use of
home sensor (PS9) does Punch drive board the folding
not turn OFF within a (PDB) function and
specified period of time 3 holes/4 holes home the punch
after the 3 holes/4 holes sensor (PS9) section is
punch home position unavailable
return operation starts. Or,
after the punch motor
(M10) turns ON, the 3
holes/4 holes punch home
sensor (PS9) does not turn
OFF.
C-1226 The alignment plate home Alignment motor (M12) DIPSW6-0 The use of
sensor (PS10) does not Punch drive board the folding
turn ON within a specified (PDB) function and
period of time after the Alignment plate home the punch
alignment plate home sensor (PS10) section is
position return operation unavailable
starts. Or, after the
alignment motor (M12)
turns ON, the alignment
plate home sensor (PS10)
does not turn OFF.
C-1227 The punch registration Punch registration motor DIPSW6-0 The use of
home sensor (PS11) does (M13) the folding
not turn ON within a Punch drive board function and
specified period of time (PDB) the punch
after the punch registration Punch registration home section is
claw home position return sensor (PS11) unavailable
operation starts. Or, after
the punch registration
motor (M13) turns ON, the
punch registration home
sensor (PS11) does not
turn OFF.
K -31

C-1228 The main tray upper limit Tray up down motor DIPSW6-1 Main tray
sensor (PS20) does not (M11) unusable
turn ON within a specified Main tray upper limit
period of time after the sensor (PS20)
main tray home position Punch drive board
search starts. Or, after the (PDB)
tray up down motor (M11)
turns ON, the main tray
upper limit sensor (PS20)
does not turn OFF.
C-1229 The main tray lower limit Tray up down motor DIPSW6-1 Main tray
sensor (PS22) does not (M11) unusable
turn ON within a specified Punch drive board
period of time after the tray (PDB)
up down motor (M11) is in Main tray lower limit
the down operation. sensor (PS22)
C-1230 After the FD paper lift Paper lift motor /Up (M8) DIPSW6-2 The use of
motor /Up (M8) is in the PI drive board (PIDB) the PI
down operation, the PI lift PI lift plate home section
plate home sensor /Up sensor /Up (PS34) unavailable
(PS34) does not turn ON PI upper limit sensor /Up
within a specified period of (PS32)
time. Or, after the paper lift
motor /Up (M8) is in the up
operation, the PI tray
upper limit sensor /Up
(PS32) does not turn ON.
C-1231 After the FD paper lift Paper lift motor /Lw (M9) DIPSW6-2 The use of
motor /Lw (M9) is in the PI drive board (PIDB) the PI
down operation, the PI lift PI lift plate home section
plate home sensor /Lw sensor /Lw (PS40) unavailable
(PS40) does not turn ON PI upper limit sensor /Lw
within a specified period of (PS38)
time. Or, after the paper lift
motor /Lw (M9) is in the up
operation, the PI upper
limit sensor /Lw (PS38)
does not turn ON.
C-1232 An error detection signal is Paper lift motor /Lw (M9)
detected continuously for a PI drive board (PIDB)
specified period of time PI lift plate home
while the entrance sensor /Lw (PS40)
conveyance motor (M1) is PI upper limit sensor /Lw
ON. (PS38)
C-1233 An error detection signal of Intermediate
M3 is detected conveyance motor (M3)
continuously for a Punch drive board
specified period of time (PDB)
while the intermediate
conveyance motor (M3) is
ON.
C-1234 An error detection signal of PI conveyance motor DIPSW6-2 The use of
M7 is detected (M7) the PI
continuously for a PI drive board (PIDB) section
specified period of time unavailable
while the PI conveyance
motor (M7) is ON.
C-1235 An error detection signal of Main tray exit motor
M17 is detected (M17)
continuously for a Punch drive board
specified period of time (PDB)
while the main tray exit
motor (M17) is ON.
SD: SD-506 C-1241 The scraps press home The main body Bundle exit motor (M5) DIPSW7-0 The use of
abnormality sensor (PS48) does not and the SD stop Scraps press home the saddle
turn ON within a specified immediately to sensor (PS48) stitching,
period of time after the turn OFF the SD control board multi-center
bundle exit motor (M5) main relay (SDCB) folding and
starts the home position (RL1). SD drive board (SDDB) trimmer
search operation. unavailable
K -32

C-1242 The folding main scan Folding main scan DIPSW7-0 The use of
alignment home sensor / alignment motor /Fr (M7) the saddle
Fr1 (PS18) does not turn Folding main scan stitching,
ON within a specified alignment home sensor / multi-center
period of time after the Fr1 (PS18) folding, multi
folding main scan SD control board tri-folding
alignment motor /Fr (M7) (SDCB) and trimmer
starts the home position SD drive board (SDDB) unavailable
search operation. Or, even
after a specified period of
C-1243 The folding exit home Folding sub scan DIPSW7-0 The use of
sensor (PS24) does not alignment exit motor the saddle
turn ON within a specified (M8) stitching,
period of time after the Folding exit home multi-center
folding sub scan alignment sensor (PS24) folding,
exit motor (M8) starts the SD control board multi-tri-
home position search (SDCB) folding and
operation. Or, even after a SD drive board (SDDB) trimmer
after M8 starts to
decelerate, it does not
stop.
C-1244 The saddle stitching Saddle stitching DIPSW7-0 The use of
alignment home sensor /Rt alignment motor /Rt the saddle
(PS28) does not turn ON (M9) stitching,
within a specified period of Saddle stitching multi-center
time after the saddle alignment home sensor / folding and
stitching alignment motor / Rt (PS28) trimmer
Rt (M9) starts the home SD control board unavailable
position search operation. (SDCB)
Or, even after a specified SD drive board (SDDB)
does not stop.
C-1245 The bundle arm home Bundle arm motor (M10) DIPSW7-0 The use of
sensor (PS32) does not Bundle arm home the saddle
turn ON within a specified sensor (PS32) stitching,
period of time after the SD control board multi-center
bundle arm motor (M10) (SDCB) folding and
starts the home position SD drive board (SDDB) trimmer
search operation. Or, even unavailable
C-1246 The bundle clip upper limit Bundle clip motor (M11) DIPSW7-0 The use of
sensor (PS33) does not Bundle clip upper limit the saddle
turn ON within a specified sensor (PS33) stitching,
period of time after the Bundle clip lower limit multi-center
bundle clip motor (M11) sensor (PS30) folding and
starts the home position SD control board trimmer
search operation. Or, even (SDCB) unavailable
after a specified period of SD drive board (SDDB)
C-1247 The bundle registration Bundle registration DIPSW7-0 The use of
home sensor (PS34) does motor (M12) the saddle
not turn ON within a Bundle registration stitching,
specified period of time home sensor (PS34) multi-center
after the bundle SD control board folding and
registration motor (M12) (SDCB) trimmer
K -33

C-1248 The overlap home sensor Overlap motor (M13) DIPSW7-0 The use of
(PS17) does not turn ON Overlap home sensor the saddle
within a specified period of (PS17) stitching,
time after the overlap SD control board multi-center
motor (M13) starts the (SDCB) folding,
home position search SD drive board (SDDB) multi-tri-
operation. Or, even after a folding and
specified period of time trimmer
after M13 starts the unavailable
C-1249 The folding main scan Folding main scan DIPSW7-0 The use of
alignment home sensor /Rr alignment motor /Rr the saddle
within a specified period of Folding main scan multi-center
time after the folding main alignment home sensor / folding,
scan alignment motor /Rr Rr (PS19) multi-tri-
(M14) starts the home SD control board folding and
position search operation. (SDCB) trimmer
Or, even after a specified SD drive board (SDDB) unavailable
does not stop.
C-1250 The stapler movement Stapler movement motor DIPSW7-0 The use of
home sensor (PS25) does (M15) the saddle
not turn ON within a Stapler movement home stitching,
specified period of time sensor (PS25) multi-center
after the home position SD control board folding and
search operation of the (SDCB) trimmer
stapler movement motor SD drive board (SDDB) unavailable
(M15) starts. Or, even after
a specified period of time
C-1251 The saddle stitching Saddle stitching DIPSW7-0 The use of
alignment home sensor /Lt alignment motor /Lt the saddle
within a specified period of Saddle stitching multi-center
time after the saddle alignment home sensor / folding and
stitching alignment motor / Lt (PS29) trimmer
Lt (M16) starts the home SD control board unavailable
position search operation. (SDCB)
Or, even after a specified SD drive board (SDDB)
does not stop.
C-1252 The bundle press Bundle press movement DIPSW7-0 The use of
movement home sensor motor (M17) the saddle
(PS36) does not turn ON Bundle press movement stitching,
within a specified period of home sensor (PS36) multi-center
time after the bundle press SD control board folding and
movement motor (M17) (SDCB) trimmer
C-1253 The 1st folding blade 1st folding blade motor DIPSW7-0 The use of
not turn ON within a 1st folding blade home stitching,
specified period of time sensor /1 (PS20), /2 multi-center
after the 1st folding blade (PS21) folding,
motor (M18) starts the SD control board multi-tri-
home position search (SDCB) folding and
operation. Or 1st folding SD drive board (SDDB) trimmer
blade home sensor /1 unavailable
(PS20) does not turned
ON within a specified
starts the operation.
K -34

C-1254 The 2nd folding blade 2nd folding blade motor DIPSW7-2 The use of
home sensor /2 (PS23) (M19) the multi-tri-
does not turn ON within a 2nd folding blade home folding
specified period of time sensor /1 (PS22), /2 unavailable
after the 2nd folding blade (PS23)
motor (M19) starts the SD control board
home position search (SDCB)
operation. Or the 2nd SD drive board (SDDB)
folding blade home
sensor /1 (PS22) does not
turned ON within a
operation.
C-1255 The clincher up down Clincher up down motor DIPSW7-0 The use of
not turn ON even after a Clincher up down home stitching,
specified period of time sensor (PS26) multi-center
after the clincher up down SD control board folding and
motor (M20) starts the (SDCB) trimmer
home position search. Or, SD drive board (SDDB) unavailable
even after a specified
does not stop.
C-1256 The saddle stitching press Saddle stitching press DIPSW7-0 The use of
not turn ON within a Saddle stitching press stitching,
after the saddle stitching SD control board folding and
press motor (M21) starts (SDCB) trimmer
the home position search SD drive board (SDDB) unavailable
operation. Or, even after a
C-1257 The bundle arm rotation Bundle arm rotation DIPSW7-0 The use of
not turn ON within a Bundle arm rotation stitching,
after the bundle arm SD control board folding and
rotation motor (M22) starts (SDCB) trimmer
the home position search SD drive board (SDDB) unavailable
operation. Or, even after a
C-1258 The bundle press home Bundle press motor DIPSW7-0 The use of
sensor (PS37) does not (M23) the saddle
turn ON within a specified Bundle press home stitching,
period of time after the sensor (PS37) multi-center
bundle press motor (M23) Bundle press lower limit folding and
starts the home position sensor (PS47) trimmer
search operation. Or, even SD control board unavailable
after a specified period of (SDCB)
time after M23 starts the SD drive board (SDDB)
C-1259 The bundle press home Bundle press stage up DIPSW7-0 The use of
sensor (PS35) does not down motor (M24) the saddle
turn ON within a specified Bundle press stage up stitching,
period of time after the down home sensor multi-center
bundle press stage up (PS35) folding and
down motor (M24) starts Bundle press stage up trimmer
the home position search down limit sensor unavailable
operation. Or PS35 or the (PS45)
bundle press stage up SD control board
down upper limit sensor (SDCB)
(PS45) does not turned SD drive board (SDDB)
ON after a specified period
of time M24 starts the
operation.
K -35

C-1260 The guide shaft home Guide shaft motor (M25) DIPSW7-0, The use of
sensor (PS46) does not Guide shaft home DIPSW7-1, the saddle
turn ON even after a sensor (PS46) DIPSW7-3 stitching,
specified period of time SD control board multi-center
after the guide shaft motor (SDCB) folding and
(M25) starts the home SD drive board (SDDB) trimmer
position search operation. unavailable
Or, even after a specified
does not stop.
C-1261 The stapler home sensor / Stapler assembly /Rt DIPSW7-0, The use of
Rt (HS1) or the clincher SD control board DIPSW7-3 the saddle
start sensor /Rt (HS2) (SDCB) stitching and
does not turn ON even SD drive board (SDDB) trimmer
after a specified period of unavailable
time after the stapler
motor /Rt (M29) starts the
operation.
C-1262 The stapler home sensor / Stapler assembly /Lt DIPSW7-0, The use of
Lt (HS3) or the clincher SD control board DIPSW7-3 the saddle
start sensor /Lt (HS4) does (SDCB) stitching and
not turn ON even after a SD drive board (SDDB) trimmer
after the stapler motor /Lt
(M30) starts the operation.
C-1263 It does not stop even after Trimmer blade motor DIPSW7-3 The use of
a specified period of time (M31) the trimmer
after the trimmer blade Trimmer blade home unavailable
motor (M31) starts the sensor (PS50)
operation. Trimmer blade upper
limit sensor (PS51)
SD control board
(SDCB)
SD drive board (SDDB)
C-1264 It does not stop even after Trimmer press motor DIPSW7-0, The use of
a specified period of time (M32) DIPSW7-1, the saddle
after the trimmer press Trimmer press home DIPSW7-3 stitching,
motor (M32) starts the sensor (PS53) multi-center
operation. Trimmer press upper folding and
limit sensor (PS52) trimmer
SD control board unavailable
(SDCB)
C-1265 It does not stop even after Bundle arm assist motor DIPSW7-0, The use of
a specified period of time (M26) DIPSW7-1, the saddle
after the bundle arm assist Bundle arm assist home DIPSW7-3 stitching,
motor (M26) starts the sensor (PS38) multi-center
operation. Bundle arm assist upper folding and
limit sensor (PS39) trimmer
SD control board unavailable
(SDCB)
C-1266 Rotation abnormality is Entrance conveyance
detected for a specified motor (M1)
period of time in SD control board
succession while the (SDCB)
entrance conveyance SD drive board (SDDB)
motor (M1) is driving.
C-1267 Rotation abnormality is Horizontal conveyance DIPSW7-4 Sub tray,
detected for a specified motor (M2) paper exit to
period of time in SD control board subsequent
succession while the (SDCB) stage and
horizontal conveyance SD drive board (SDDB) FS
motor (M2) is driving. unavailable
K -36

C-1268 Rotation abnormality is Folding entrance motor DIPSW7-0, The use of
detected for a specified (M3) DIPSW7-1, the saddle
period of time in SD control board DIPSW7-2, stitching,
succession while the (SDCB) DIPSW7-3 multi-center
folding entrance motor SD drive board (SDDB) folding,
(M3) is driving. multi-tri-
folding and
trimmer
unavailable
C-1269 Rotation abnormality is Folding transfer motor DIPSW7-0, The use of
detected for a specified (M4) DIPSW7-1, the saddle
period of time in SD control board DIPSW7-2, stitching,
succession while the (SDCB) DIPSW7-3 multi-center
folding transfer motor (M4) SD drive board (SDDB) folding,
is driving. multi-tri-
folding and
trimmer
unavailable
C-1270 Rotation abnormality is Bundle exit motor (M5) DIPSW7-0, The use of
detected for a specified SD control board DIPSW7-1, the saddle
period of time in (SDCB) DIPSW7-3 stitching,
succession while the SD drive board (SDDB) multi-center
bundle exit motor (M5) is folding and
driving. trimmer
unavailable
C-1271 Rotation abnormality is Folding sub scan DIPSW7-0, The use of
detected for a specified alignment exit motor DIPSW7-1, the saddle
period of time in (M8) DIPSW7-2, stitching,
succession while the SD control board DIPSW7-3 multi-center
folding sub scan alignment (SDCB) folding,
exit motor (M8) is driving. SD drive board (SDDB) multi-tri-
folding and
trimmer
unavailable
C-1272 Rotation abnormality is Trimmer paddle motor DIPSW7-3 The use of
detected for a specified (M33) the trimmer
period of time in SD control board unavailable
succession while the (SDCB)
trimmer paddle motor SD drive board (SDDB)
(M33) is driving.
C-1273 The trimmer completion Trimmer blade motor DIPSW7-3 The use of
sensor (PS62) does not (M31) the trimmer
turn ON even after a Trimmer completion unavailable
specified period of time sensor (PS62)
after the trimmer blade SD control board
motor (M31) is in the up (SDCB)
operation. SD drive board (SDDB)
C-1275 The wire slack sensor Wire slack prevention
(PS66) detected the slack sensor (PS66)
of the trimmer edge drive SD control board
wire. (SDCB)
RU : RU-506 C-1281 FD alignment motor (M3) Main body and RU control board
abnormality drive abnormality. The FD RU stop (RUCB)
alignment home sensor immediately and FD alignment motor
(PS3) does not turn ON main relay (RY1) (M3)
even after a specified is turned OFF. FD alignment home
period of time after M3 sensor (PS3)
starts the home position
K -37

C-1282 CD alignment motor (M4) RU control board
drive abnormality. The CD (RUCB)
alignment home sensor CD alignment motor
(PS4) does not turn ON (M4)
even after a specified CD alignment home
period of time after M4 sensor (PS4)
starts the home position
RU: RU-509 C-1290 Rotation abnormality is The main body De-curler conveyance
abnormality detected for a specified and the RU stop motor (M3)
period of time in immediately to RU control board
succession while the de- turn OFF the (RUCB)
curler conveyance motor main relay
(M3) is driving. (RL1).
C-1291 The home position search De-curler pressure
operation of the de-curler motor /Lw (M5)
pressure motor /Lw (M5) RU control board
does not complete within a (RUCB)
C-1292 The home position search De-curler pressure
operation of the de-curler motor /Up (M6)
pressure motor /Up (M6) RU control board
does not complete within a (RUCB)
C-1293 Rotation abnormality is Humidification section DIPSW13-2 Humidificati
detected for a specified conveyance motor (M8) on unusable
period of time in RU control board
succession while the (RUCB)
humidification section RU control board
conveyance motor (M8) is (RUCB)
driving.
C-1294 The home position search Humidification section DIPSW13-2 Humidificati
operation of the roller pressure motor /Rt on unusable
humidification section (M9)
roller pressure motor /Rt RU control board
(M9) does not complete (RUCB)
within a specified period of RU control board
time. (RUCB)
C-1295 The home position search Humidification roller DIPSW13-2 Humidificati
operation of the pressure motor /Lt (M10) on unusable
humidification section RU control board
roller pressure motor /Lt (RUCB)
(M10) does not complete RU control board
within a specified period of (RUCB)
time.
C-1296 Color density sensor Color density sensor unit DIPSW13-3 Color
detection preparation Color density control density
adjustment value board (CDCB) sensor
abnormality RU control board cannot be
(RUCB) used
C-1297 Color density sensor Shutter solenoid (SD5) DIPSW13-3 Color
detection start abnormality Color density sensor unit density
Color density control sensor
board (CDCB) cannot be
RU control board used
(RUCB)
C-1298 EPPROM read out Color density control DIPSW13-3 Color
abnormality in the color board (CDCB) density
density relay board RU control board sensor
(CDRLB) (RUCB) cannot be
used
C-1299 The water tank full sensor Drain path DIPSW13-2 Humidificati
(PS13) detects ON Water tank full sensor on unusable
continuously for more than (PS13)
a specified period of time. RU control board
(RUCB)
LS (1st tandem): C-1301 An error detection signal is The main body Paper cooling fan
LS abnormality detected continuously for a and the LS stop motor /Fr (FM1)
immediately to LS control board (LSCB)
K -38

specified period of time turn OFF the
while the paper cooling fan main relay
motor /Fr (FM1) is ON. (RL1).
C-1302 An error detection signal is Paper cooling fan
detected continuously for a motor /1 (FM2)
specified period of time LS control board (LSCB)
while the paper cooling fan
motor /1 (FM2) is ON.
detected continuously for a motor /Mi (FM3)
motor/Mi (FM3) is ON.
C-1304 An error detection signal of Motor cooling fan motor
FM4 is detected (FM4)
continuously for a LS control board (LSCB)
while the motor cooling fan
motor (FM4) is ON.
C-1305 An error detection signal of Paper cooling fan
FM5 is detected motor /Rr (FM5)
motor /Rr (FM5) is ON.
LS (2nd C-1306 An error detection signal is Paper cooling fan
tandem): LS detected continuously for a motor /Fr (FM1)
abnormality specified period of time LS control board (LSCB)
motor /Fr (FM1) is ON.
detected continuously for a motor /1 (FM2)
motor/1 (FM2) is ON.
detected continuously for a motor /Mi (FM3)
motor /Mi (FM3) is ON.
C-1309 An error detection signal of Motor cooling fan motor
FM4 is detected LS control board (LSCB)
continuously for a
while the motor cooling fan
motor (FM4) is ON.
C-1310 An error detection signal of Paper cooling fan
FM5 is detected motor /Rr (FM5)
motor /Rr (FM5) is ON.
SD: SD-506 C-1311 A rotation error detection The main body Scraps removal fan DIPSW7-3 The use of
abnormality signal is detected and the SD stop motor (FM1) the trimmer
continuously for specified immediately to SD control board unavailable
period of time while the turn OFF the (SDCB)
scraps removal fan motor main relay SD drive board (SDDB)
(FM1) is started or driving. (RL1).
PB: PB C-1330 A rotation error detection The main body PB control board DIPSW7-5 Paper feed
abnormality signal is detected and the PB stop (PBCB) from the PB
continuously for specified immediately to PB drive board (PBDB) is
time period while the cover turn OFF the Cover paper tray fan /1 unavailable.
paper tray fan /1 (FM71) is main relay (FM71)
started or driving. (RL1).
C-1331 A rotation error detection PB control board DIPSW7-5 Paper feed
signal is detected (PBCB) from the PB
continuously for specified PB drive board (PBDB) is
time period while the cover Cover paper tray fan /2 unavailable.
paper tray fan /2 (FM72) is (FM72)
started or driving.
K -39

C-1332 A rotation error detection PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
signal is detected (PBCB) onto the sub
continuously for a PB drive board (PBDB) tray is
specified time period while Exhaust fan /1 (FM80) possible.
the exhaust fan /1 (FM80)
is started or driving.
C-1333 A rotation error detection AC drive board (ACDB) DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
signal is detected PB control board onto the sub
continuously for a (PBCB) tray is
specified time period while PB drive board (PBDB) possible.
the exhaust fan /2 (FM81) Exhaust fan /2 (FM81)
is started or driving.
C-1334 A rotation error detection AC drive board (ACDB) DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
signal is detected PB control board onto the sub
continuously for specified (PBCB) tray is
period of time while the PB drive board (PBDB) possible.
pellet supply cooling fan Pellet supply cooling fan
(FM4) is started or driving. (FM4)
RU : RU-506 C-1341 Stack assist fan /Fr (FM1) The main body RU control board
abnormality rotation abnormality. and the RU stop (RUCB)
Rotation abnormality immediately to Stack assist fan /Fr
detected continuously for turn OFF the (FM1)
the specified time during main relay
FM1 operation. (RL1).
C-1342 Stack assist fan /Rr (FM2) RU control board
rotation abnormality. (RUCB)
Rotation abnormality Stack assist fan /Rr
detected continuously for (FM2)
the specified time during
FM2 operation.
RU: RU-509 C-1351 Error detection signals of Entrance paper fan /1
abnormality FM1, FM2 and FM3 are (FM1)
detected continuously for a Entrance paper fan /2
while the entrance paper Entrance paper fan /3
fans /1 (FM1), /2 (FM2) (FM3)
and /3 (FM3) are ON. RU control board
(RUCB)
C-1352 Error detection signals of Ventilation assist fan /1
FM4 and FM5 are (FM4)
detected continuously for a Ventilation assist fan /2
while the ventilation assist RU control board
fans /1 (FM4) and /2 (FM5) (RUCB)
are ON.
C-1353 Error detection signals of Entrance paper fan /4
FM15, FM16 and FM17 (FM15)
are detected continuously Entrance paper fan /5
for a specified period of (FM16)
time while the entrance Entrance paper fan /6
paper fans /4 (FM15), /5 (FM17)
(FM16) and /6 (FM17) are RU control board
ON. (RUCB)
RU: RU-9 C-1354 Error detection signals of Entrance paper fan /7
abnormality FM18, FM19 and FM20 (FM18)
are detected continuously Entrance paper fan /8
for a specified period of (FM19)
time while the entrance Entrance paper fan /9
paper fans /7 (FM18), /8 (FM20)
(FM19) and /9 (FM20) are RU control board
ON. (RUCB)
RU: RU-509 C-1355 Error detection signals of Jumper connector
abnormality FM21 is detected CN108
continuously for a Ventilation assist fan /3
while the ventilation assist RU control board
fan /3 (FM21) is ON. (RUCB)
K -40

C-1356 An error detection signal of Humidification section DIPSW13-2 Humidificati
FM6 is detected paper fan /1 (FM6) on unusable
continuously for a RU control board
specified period of time (RUCB)
while the humidification RU control board
section paper fan /1 (FM6) (RUCB)
is ON.
is ON.
is ON.
is ON.
section paper fan /5 (RUCB)
(FM10) is ON.
section paper fan /6 (RUCB)
(FM11) is ON.
C-1364 An error detection signal of Power supply fan
FM14 is detected (FM14)
continuously for a DC power supply
specified period of time (DCPS)
while the humidification
section paper fan (FM14)
is ON.
FS: FS C-1402 Non-volatile memory The main body FS control board (LSCB)
abnormality abnormality. and the FS stop FNS control board
immediately to (FNSCB)
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
FD: FD C-1403 Non-volatile memory The main body FD control board (FDCB)
abnormality abnormality. and the FD stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
SD: SD-506 C-1404 Non-volatile memory The main body SD control board (SDCB)
abnormality abnormality. and the SD stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
PB: PB C-1406 Non-volatile memory The main body PB control board
abnormality abnormality in the PB and the PB stop (PBCB)
control board (PBCB) immediately to Control program
turn OFF the
K -41

main relay
(RL1).
RU: RU-509 C-1407 Non-volatile memory The main body RU control board (RUCB)
abnormality abnormality. and the RU stop
RU : RU-506 C-1408 Non-volatile memory error. immediately to RU control board (RUCB)
abnormality turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
SD: SD-506 C-1411 5V power abnormality in The main body SD drive board (SDDB)
abnormality the SD drive board and the SD stop
(SDDB) immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
FS: FS C-1431 Communication error in FS The main body Software bug
abnormality and the FS stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
FD: FD C-1432 Communication error in FD The main body Software bug
abnormality and the FD stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
SD: SD-506 C-1433 Communication error in The main body Software bug
abnormality SD and the SD stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
PB: PB C-1435 Message queue full or the The main body PB control board
abnormality control abnormality of Sub and the PB stop (PBCB)
CPU1 in the PB control immediately to Control program
board (PBCB) turn OFF the
C-1436 Message queue full or the main relay PB control board
control abnormality of Sub (RL1). (PBCB)
CPU2 in the PB control Control program
board (PBCB)
C-1437 Message queue of the Control program
communication among
tasks in the PB is full.
RU: RU-509 C-1438 Communication error in The main body Software bug
abnormality RU and the RU stop
RU : RU-506 C-1439 RU received operation immediately to Software bug
abnormality start from the main body turn OFF the
when unready. main relay
(RL1).
RU: RU-509 C-1440 RU SubCPU RU control board DIPSW13-3 Color
abnormality communication error (Main (RUCB) density
side) RU program sensor
cannot be
used
C-1441 RU SubCPU RU control board DIPSW13-3 Color
communication error (Sub (RUCB) density
side) RU program sensor
cannot be
used
FD: FD C-1451 When the FD is unready, a The main body Software bug
abnormality signal to start operations is and the FD stop
received from the main immediately to
body. turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
SD: SD-506 C-1452 When the SD is unready, a The main body Software bug
abnormality signal to start operations is and the SD stop
body. turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
K -42

PB: PB C-1454 PB operation prohibition The main body Control program
abnormality abnormality. and the PB stop
PB received operation immediately to
start signal from the main turn OFF the
body when the PB is main relay
unready. (RL1).
RU: RU-509 C-1455 When RU is unready, a The main body Software bug
abnormality signal to start operations is and the RU stop
body. turn OFF the
RU : RU-506 C-1456 RU received operation main relay Software bug
abnormality start signal from the main (RL1).
body when the RU is
unready.
PB: PB C-1501 The entrance conveyance The main body PB control board DIPSW7-7 The use of
abnormality has not been completed and the PB stop (PBCB) the PB is
within a specified period of immediately to PB drive board (PBDB) unavailable
time after the entrance turn OFF the Entrance conveyance
conveyance motor (M1) main relay motor (M1)
turns ON. (RL1).
signal is detected for a (PBCB) onto the sub
specified period of time in PB drive board (PBDB) tray is
succession while the Intermediate possible.
intermediate conveyance conveyance motor (M2)
motor (M2) is driving.
C-1504 The SC entrance PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
conveyance has not been (PBCB) onto the sub
completed within a PB drive board (PBDB) tray is
specified period of time SC entrance possible.
after the SC entrance conveyance motor
conveyance motor (M11) (M11)
turns ON.
C-1505 The switchback PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
specified period of time SC switchback possible.
after the SC switchback conveyance motor
turns ON.
C-1506 The switchback roller PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
release operation has not (PBCB) onto the sub
been completed within a PB drive board (PBDB) tray is
specified period of time SC switchback release possible.
after the SC switchback motor (M13)
release motor (M13) turns
ON.
C-1507 The SC alignment has not PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
been completed within a (PBCB) onto the sub
specified period of time PB drive board (PBDB) tray is
after SC alignment motor SC alignment motor possible.
(M15) turns ON. (M15)
C-1508 The SC paper bundle PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
specified period of time SC bundle conveyance possible.
after the SC bundle motor (M17)
conveyance motor (M17)
turns ON.
C-1509 The SC roller release PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
operation has not been (PBCB) onto the sub
specified period of time SC roller release motor possible.
after the SC roller release (M18)
C-1510 The SC entrance PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
movement operation has (PBCB) onto the sub
not been completed within PB drive board (PBDB) tray is
a specified period of time Clamp entrance possible.
after the clamp entrance movement motor (M19)
movement motor (M19)
turns ON.
K -43

C-1511 The clamp entrance roller PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
release operation has not (PBCB) onto the sub
specified period of time Clamp entrance roller possible.
after the clamp entrance release motor (M20)
roller release motor (M20)
turns ON.
C-1512 The clamp alignment has PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
not been completed within (PBCB) onto the sub
a specified period of time PB drive board (PBDB) tray is
after clamp alignment Clamp alignment motor possible.
motor (M21) turns ON. (M21)
C-1513 The clamp section open/ PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
close operation has not (PBCB) onto the sub
specified period of time Clamp motor (M22) possible.
after the clamp motor
(M22) turns ON.
C-1514 The clamp rotation PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
specified period of time Clamp rotation motor possible.
after the clamp rotation (M23)
C-1515 The glue tank movement PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
specified period of time Glue tank movement possible.
after the glue tank motor (M31)
turns ON.
signal is detected for a (PBCB) onto the sub
specified period of time in PB drive board (PBDB) tray is
succession while the glue Glue apply roller motor possible.
apply roller motor (M32) is (M32)
driving.
C-1517 The count of a specified PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
number of pellets, which is (PBCB) onto the sub
counted by the pellet PB drive board (PBDB) tray is
supply passage sensor Pellet supply pipe motor possible.
(PS37), has not been (M33)
reached after the pellet
supply pipe motor (M33)
turns ON.
C-1518 The operation of the pellet PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
supply arm has not been (PBCB) onto the sub
specified period of time Pellet supply arm motor possible.
after the pellet supply arm (M34)
C-1519 The alignment in the cover PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
paper table up/down (PBCB) onto the sub
section has not been PB drive board (PBDB) tray is
completed within a Cover paper alignment possible.
after the cover paper
alignment motor (M41)
turns ON.
C-1520 The booklet exit has not PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
been completed within a (PBCB) onto the sub
specified period of time PB drive board (PBDB) tray is
after the booklet exit motor Booklet exit motor (M42) possible.
(M42) turns ON.
C-1521 The driven arm /Rt swing PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
operation start has not (PBCB) onto the sub
specified period of time Cover paper possible.
after the cover paper conveyance arm motor /
conveyance arm motor /Rt Rt (M43)
(M43) turns ON
K -44

C-1522 The driven arm /Lt swing PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
operation start has not (PBCB) onto the sub
after the cover paper conveyance arm motor /
conveyance arm motor /Lt Lt (M44)
(M44) turns ON
C-1523 The cover paper PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
conveyance start has not (PBCB) onto the sub
after cover paper conveyance motor
turns ON.
C-1524 The cover paper table up PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
or down movement has (PBCB) onto the sub
a specified period of time Cover paper table up possible.
after the cover paper table down motor /Fr (M46)
up down motor /Fr (M46)
turns ON.
C-1525 The cover paper table up PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
or down movement has (PBCB) onto the sub
a specified period of time Cover paper table up possible.
after the cover paper table down motor /Rr (M47)
up down motor /Rr (M47)
turns ON.
C-1526 The movement of the PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
cover paper folding plate / (PBCB) onto the sub
Rt has not been completed PB drive board (PBDB) tray is
within a specified period of Cover paper folding possible.
time after the cover paper motor /Rt (M48)
folding motor /Rt (M48)
turns ON.
C-1527 The movement of the PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
cover paper folding plate / (PBCB) onto the sub
Lt has not been completed PB drive board (PBDB) tray is
within a specified period of Cover paper folding possible.
time after the cover paper motor /Lt (M49)
folding motor /Lt (M49)
turns ON.
C-1528 The trimming of the cover PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
paper has not been (PBCB) onto the sub
specified period of time Cutter motor (M50) possible.
after the cutter motor
(M50) turns ON.
C-1530 The booklet movement of PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
the booklet conveyance (PBCB) onto the sub
completed within a Booklet conveyance belt possible.
after the booklet
conveyance belt motor
(M61) turns ON.
C-1531 The size changing PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
operation of the carriage (PBCB) onto the sub
specified period of time movement motor (M62)
after the booklet
conveyance belt
turns ON.
K -45

C-1532 The up/down movement PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
operation of the carriage (PBCB) onto the sub
specified period of time up down motor (M63)
after the booklet
conveyance belt up down
C-1534 The booklet rear edge PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
pressing process has not (PBCB) onto the sub
specified period of time Booklet stopper motor possible.
after the booklet stopper (M65)
C-1537 The tray moving up PB control board DIPSW7-5 Paper feed
process has not been (PBCB) from the PB
completed within a PB drive board (PBDB) is
specified period of time Cover paper tray lift unavailable.
after the cover paper tray motor (M73)
lift motor (M73) turns ON.
C-1538 The cover paper feed has PB control board DIPSW7-5 Paper feed
not been completed within (PBCB) from the PB
a specified period of time PB drive board (PBDB) is
after the cover paper feed Cover paper feed motor unavailable.
motor (M74) turns ON. (M74)
C-1540 After the warm-up is AC drive board (ACDB) DIPSW7-7 The use of
started, temperature Glue tank heater (H1) the PB is
detected by the glue tank Glue apply roller heater unavailable
temperature sensor /Md (H2)
(TH3) has not risen to a PB control board
prescribed level within a (PBCB)
specified time period. PB drive board (PBDB)
Glue apply roller motor
(M32)
Glue tank temperature
sensor /Md (TH3)
detected by the glue tank Glue apply roller heater unavailable
temperature sensor /Lw (H2)
(M32)
sensor /Lw (TH4)
detected by the glue apply Glue apply roller heater unavailable
roller temperature sensor (H2)
(M32)
Glue apply roller
temperature sensor
(TH1)
C-1543 After the pellet supply, AC drive board (ACDB) DIPSW7-7 The use of
temperature detected by Glue tank heater (H1) the PB is
the glue tank temperature Glue apply roller heater unavailable
sensor /Up (TH2) has not (H2)
risen to a prescribed level PB control board
within a specified period of (PBCB)
time. PB drive board (PBDB)
(M32)
sensor /Up (TH2)
K -46

C-1544 During standby, after the AC drive board (ACDB) DIPSW7-7 The use of
glue tank heater (H1) is Glue tank heater (H1) the PB is
turned ON, temperature Glue apply roller heater unavailable
detected by the glue tank (H2)
temperature sensor /Md PB control board
(TH3) has not risen to a (PBCB)
prescribed level within a PB drive board (PBDB)
specified time period. Glue apply roller motor
(M32)
sensor /Md (TH3)
C-1545 When the prescribed AC drive board (ACDB) DIPSW7-7 The use of
temperature is obtained Glue tank heater (H1) the PB is
and after the glue tank Glue apply roller heater unavailable
heater (H1) is turned ON, (H2)
temperature detected by PB control board
the glue tank temperature (PBCB)
sensor /Lw (TH4) has not PB drive board (PBDB)
risen to a prescribed level Glue apply roller motor
within a specified time (M32)
period. Glue tank temperature
sensor /Lw (TH4)
C-1546 When the prescribed AC drive board (ACDB) DIPSW7-7 The use of
temperature is obtained Glue tank heater (H1) the PB is
and after the glue tank Glue apply roller heater unavailable
heater (H1) is turned ON, (H2)
temperature detected by PB control board
the glue apply roller (PBCB)
temperature sensor (TH1) PB drive board (PBDB)
has not risen to a Glue apply roller motor
prescribed level within a (M32)
specified time period. Glue apply roller
temperature sensor
(TH1)
C-1547 The glue apply roller AC drive board (ACDB) DIPSW7-7 The use of
temperature sensor (TH1) Glue tank heater (H1) the PB is
detects an abnormal high Glue apply roller heater unavailable
temperature. (H2)
PB control board
(PBCB)
PB drive board (PBDB)
(M32)
Glue apply roller
temperature sensor
(TH1)
C-1548 The glue tank temperature AC drive board (ACDB) DIPSW7-7 The use of
sensor /Up (TH2) detects Glue tank heater (H1) the PB is
an abnormal high Glue apply roller heater unavailable
temperature. (H2)
PB control board
(PBCB)
(M32)
sensor /Up (TH2)
sensor /Md (TH3) detects Glue tank heater (H1) the PB is
temperature. (H2)
PB control board
(PBCB)
(M32)
sensor /Md (TH3)
K -47

sensor /Lw (TH4) detects Glue tank heater (H1) the PB is
temperature. (H2)
PB control board
(PBCB)
(M32)
sensor /Lw (TH4)
C-1551 The glue apply roller AC drive board (ACDB) DIPSW7-7 The use of
temperature sensor (TH1) Glue tank heater (H1) the PB is
detects an abnormal high Glue apply roller heater unavailable
temperature (hardware) (H2)
TH1 detects an abnormal PB control board
high temperature of the (PBCB)
glue apply roller. PB drive board (PBDB)
(M32)
Glue apply roller
temperature sensor
(TH1)
sensor /Up (TH2) detects Glue tank heater (H1) the PB is
temperature (hardware). (H2)
glue tank. PB drive board (PBDB)
(M32)
sensor /Up (TH2)
(M32)
sensor /Md (TH3)
(M32)
sensor /Lw (TH4)
C-1555 After warming-up is AC drive board (ACDB) DIPSW7-7 The use of
completed, the glue apply Glue tank heater (H1) the PB is
roller temperature sensor Glue apply roller heater unavailable
(TH1) detects an abnormal (H2)
low temperature. PB control board
(PBCB)
(M32)
Glue apply roller
temperature sensor
(TH1)
K -48

C-1556 When glue supply control AC drive board (ACDB) DIPSW7-7 The use of
temperature is reached, Glue tank heater (H1) the PB is
the glue tank temperature Glue apply roller heater unavailable
sensor /Up (TH2) detects (H2)
an abnormal low PB control board
temperature. (PBCB)
(M32)
sensor /Up (TH2)
completed, the glue tank Glue tank heater (H1) the PB is
temperature sensor /Md Glue apply roller heater unavailable
(PBCB)
(M32)
sensor /Md (TH3)
completed, the glue tank Glue tank heater (H1) the PB is
temperature sensor /Lw Glue apply roller heater unavailable
(PBCB)
(M32)
sensor /Lw (TH4)
C-1559 The glue apply roller The main body AC drive board (ACDB) DIPSW7-7 The use of
temperature sensor (TH1) stops Glue tank heater (H1) the PB is
detects an abnormal low immediately to Glue apply roller heater unavailable
temperature (hardware). turn OFF the (H2)
After warming-up is main relay PB control board
completed, TH1 detects (RL1). (PBCB)
the glue apply roller error PB drive board (PBDB)
signal of abnormal low Glue apply roller motor
temperature. (M32)
Glue apply roller
temperature sensor
(TH1)
C-1560 The glue tank temperature The main body AC drive board (ACDB) DIPSW7-7 The use of
sensor /Up (TH2) detects and the PB stop Glue tank heater (H1) the PB is
an abnormal low immediately to Glue apply roller heater unavailable
temperature (hardware). turn OFF the (H2)
After glue supply control main relay PB control board
temperature is reached, (RL1). (PBCB)
TH2 detects the glue tank PB drive board (PBDB)
error signal of abnormal Glue apply roller motor
low temperature. (M32)
sensor /Up (TH2)
an abnormal low Glue apply roller heater unavailable
After warming-up is PB control board
completed, TH3 detects (PBCB)
the glue tank error signal PB drive board (PBDB)
of abnormal low Glue apply roller motor
temperature. (M32)
sensor /Md (TH3)
K -49

an abnormal low Glue apply roller heater unavailable
After warming-up is PB control board
completed, TH4 detects (PBCB)
the glue tank error signal PB drive board (PBDB)
of abnormal low Glue apply roller motor
temperature. (M32)
sensor /Lw (TH4)
C-1565 Relay conveyance motor The main body Relay conveyance motor
drive abnormality and the PB stop (M92)
immediately to PB control board
turn OFF the (PBCB)
main relay PB drive board (PBDB)
(RL1).
The relay
conveyance
does not start
within the
specified period
of time after M92
turns ON.
C-1566 Relay conveyance exit The main body Relay conveyance exit
motor drive abnormality and the PB stop motor (M91)
A rotation error detection immediately to PB control board
signal is detected for a turn OFF the (PBCB)
specified period of time in main relay PB drive board (PBDB)
succession while the relay (RL1).
conveyance exit motor
(M91) is driving.
C-1567 Pellet supply pipe motor Pellet supply pipe motor
drive abnormality (M33)
The pellet supply pipe has PB control board
not completed the (PBCB)
operations within a PB drive board (PBDB)
after the pellet supply pipe
Main body: C-2001 Communication error The main body Printer control board
Communication between the printer control stops (PRCB)
error board (PRCB) and the immediately to Drum motor /Y (M14)
drum motor /Y (M14). turn OFF the Drum motor /M (M15)
C-2003 Communication error power relay Printer control board
between the printer control (RL1). (PRCB)
board (PRCB) and the belt Belt motor (M18)
motor (M18).
board (PRCB) and the Drum motor /Y (M14)
drum motors /Y (M14) or / Drum motor /M (M15)
M (M15).
board (PRCB) and the belt Belt motor (M18)
motor (M18).
Main body: C-2201* An error detection signal of Printer control board
Developing M20 is detected (PRCB)
motor continuously for a Developing motor /Y
abnormality specified period of time (M20)
while the developing
motor /Y (M20) is ON.
M21 is detected (PRCB)
continuously for a Developing motor /M
specified period of time (M21)
motor /M (M21) is ON.
K -50

continuously for a Developing motor /C
motor /C (M22) is ON.An
error detection signal of
M22 is detected
continuously for a
motor /C (M22) is ON.
continuously for a Developing motor /K
motor /K (M23) is ON.
Main body: C-2220 An error detection signal of Printer control board
Transfer belt unit M18 is detected (PRCB)
abnormality continuously for a Belt motor (M18)
specified period of time Encoder sensor belt /1
while the belt motor (M18) (PS89), /2 (PS90)
is ON. DC power supply /2
(DCPS2)
Intermediate transfer
unit
Main body: 1st C-2221 While the 1st transfer HP AC drive board (ACDB)
transfer motor sensor (PS15) is ON, Printer control board
abnormality PS15 does not turn OFF (PRCB)
within a specified period of 1st transfer pressure
time after the 1st transfer release motor (M19)
pressure release motor 1st transfer HP sensor
(M19) turns ON. (PS15)
While PS15 is OFF, PS15
does not turn ON within a
after M19 turns ON.
Main body: C-2222 While one of the toner Printer control board
Toner supply supply motors /Y (M49), /M (PRCB)
abnormality (M50), /C (M51), /K (M52), Toner supply drive
toner bottle motor (M53), board (TSDB)
and toner bottle clutches / Toner supply motor /Y
Y (CL14), /M (CL15), /C (M49)
(CL16) and /K (CL17) are Toner supply motor /M
ON, an error detection (M50)
signal of one of them is Toner supply motor /C
detected for a specified (M51)
period of time. Toner supply motor /K
(M52)
Toner bottle motor
(M53)
Toner bottle clutch /Y
(CL14)
Toner bottle clutch /M
(CL15)
Toner bottle clutch /C
(CL16)
Toner bottle clutch /K
(CL17)
Main body: Low C-2223 One of the torque is not Drum motor /Y (M14)
drum load recovered within a Drum motor /M (M15)
torque specified period of time Drum motor /C (M16)
abnormality after the low load torque Drum motor /K (M17)
recovery control of the Printer control board
drum motors /Y (M14), /M (PRCB)
(M15), /C (M16), /K (M17)
starts.
K -51

Main body: C-2231* An error detection signal of Printer control board
Drum motor M14 is detected (PRCB)
abnormality continuously for a Drum motor /Y (M14)
specified period of time Encoder sensor /Y1
while the drum motor /Y (PS81), /Y2 (PS82)
(M14) is ON. DC power supply /2
(DCPS2)
Drum Unit /Y
continuously for a Drum motor /M (M15)
specified period of time Encoder sensor /M1
while the drum motor /M (PS83), /M2 (PS84)
(DCPS2)
Drum Unit /M
continuously for a Drum motor /C (M16)
specified period of time Encoder sensor /C1
while the drum motor /C (PS85), /C2 (PS86)
(DCPS2)
Drum Unit /C
continuously for a Drum motor /K (M17)
specified period of time Encoder sensor /K1
while the drum motor /K (PS87), /K2 (PS88)
(DCPS2)
Drum Unit /K
continuously for a Drum motor /Y (M14)
specified period of time Encoder sensor /Y1
while the drum motor /Y (PS81), /Y2 (PS82)
(DCPS2)
Drum unit /Y
continuously for a Drum motor /M (M15)
specified period of time Encoder sensor /M1
while the drum motor /M (PS83) and /M2 (PS84)
(DCPS2)
Drum unit /M
continuously for a Drum motor /C (M16)
specified period of time Encoder sensors /C1
while the drum motor /C (PS85) and /C2 (PS86)
(DCPS2)
Drum unit /C
continuously for a Drum motor /K (M17)
specified period of time Encoder sensors /K1
while the drum motor /K (PS87) and /K2 (PS88)
(DCPS2)
Drum unit /K
Main body: Fan C-2301 An error detection signal of Printer control board
abnormality M48 is detected (PRCB)
continuously for a Toner supply drive
specified period of time board (TSDB)
while the charge intake fan Charge intake fan
(FM48) is ON. (FM48)
K -52

continuously for a Motor cooling fan /1
while the motor cooling
fan /1 (FM12) is ON.
continuously for a Transfer belt fan (FM11)
while the transfer belt fan
(FM11) is ON.
continuously for a Developing fan /1
while the developing fan /1
(FM45) is ON.
continuously for a Developing fan /2
while the developing fan /2
(FM46) is ON.
continuously for a Drum fan /2 (FM13)
while the motor cooling
fan /2 (FM13) is ON.
Main body: C-2401 The erase lamp /Y (EL/Y) Printer control board
Erase lamp set status cannot be (PRCB)
abnormality detected. Erase lamp /Y (EL/Y)
C-2402 The erase lamp /M (EL/M) Printer control board
set status cannot be (PRCB)
detected. Erase lamp /M (EL/M)
C-2403 The erase lamp /C (EL/C) Printer control board
detected. Erase lamp /C (EL/C)
C-2404 The erase lamp /K (EL/K) Printer control board
detected. Erase lamp /K (EL/K)
Main body: TCR C-2411 The output of the TCR Printer control board
sensor sensor /Y (TCRS/Y) (PRCB)
abnormality cannot be controlled. TCR sensor /Y (TCRS/
Y)
C-2412 The output of the TCR Printer control board
sensor /M (TCRS/M) (PRCB)
cannot be controlled. TCR sensor /M (TCRS /
M)
sensor /C (TCRS/C) (PRCB)
cannot be controlled. TCR sensor /C (TCRS /
C)
sensor /K (TCRS/K) (PRCB)
cannot be controlled. TCR sensor /K (TCRS /
K)
Main body: C-2421 While the developing Printer control board
Developing drive motor /Y (M20) is ON or (PRCB)
abnormality after a specified period of Developing motor /Y
time from the TCR sensor / (M20)
Y (TCRS/Y) initial TCR sensor /Y (TCRS/
adjustment starts, TCRS/Y Y)
detects a value lower than
the prescribed one.
K -53

C-2422 While the developing Printer control board
motor /M (M21) is ON or (PRCB)
after a specified period of Developing motor /M
M (TCRS/M) initial TCR sensor /M (TCRS/
adjustment starts, TCRS/M M)
the prescribed one.
motor /C (M22) is ON or (PRCB)
after a specified period of Developing motor /C
C (TCRS/C) initial TCR sensor /C (TCRS/
adjustment starts, TCRS/C C)
the prescribed one.
motor /K (M23) is ON or (PRCB)
after a specified period of Developing motor /K
K (TCRS/K) initial TCR sensor /K (TCRS/
adjustment starts, TCRS/K K)
the prescribed one.
Main body: TCR C-2431 While in the initial Printer control board
sensor initial adjustment of the TCR (PRCB)
adjustment sensor /Y (TCRS/Y), Developing motor /Y
abnormality (low TCRS/Y detects a value (M20)
density) higher than the prescribed TCR sensor /Y (TCRS/
one with the minimum Y)
control voltage.
C-2432 While in the initial Printer control board
adjustment of the TCR (PRCB)
sensor /M (TCRS/M), Developing motor /M
TCRS/M detects a value (M21)
higher than the prescribed TCR sensor /M (TCRS/
one with the minimum M)
control voltage.
sensor /C (TCRS/C), Developing motor /C
TCRS/C detects a value (M22)
higher than the prescribed TCR sensor /C (TCRS/
one with the minimum C)
control voltage.
sensor /K (TCRS/K), Developing motor /K
TCRS/K detects a value (M23)
higher than the prescribed TCR sensor /K (TCRS/
one with the minimum K)
control voltage.
Main body: TCR C-2441 While in the initial Printer control board
sensor initial adjustment of the TCR (PRCB)
adjustment sensor /Y (TCRS/Y), Developing motor /Y
abnormality TCRS/Y detects a value (M20)
(high density) lower than the prescribed TCR sensor /Y (TCRS/
one with the maximum Y)
control voltage.
sensor /M (TCRS/M), Developing motor /M
TCRS/M detects a value (M21)
lower than the prescribed TCR sensor /M (TCRS/
one with the maximum M)
control voltage.
K -54

sensor /C (TCRS/C), Developing motor /C
TCRS/C detects a value (M22)
lower than the prescribed TCR sensor /C (TCRS/
one with the maximum C)
control voltage.
sensor /K (TCRS/K), Developing motor /K
TCRS/K detects a value (M23)
lower than the prescribed TCR sensor /K (TCRS/
one with the maximum K)
control voltage.
Main body: C-2451 When the developing Printer control board
Toner low motor /Y (M20) is ON, the (PRCB)
density maximum detection value Developing motor /Y
abnormality of TCR sensor /Y (TCRS/ (M20)
Y) is the specified value TCR sensor /Y (TCRS/
and the difference Y)
between the maximum
detection value and the
minimum detection value
is over the specified value.
C-2452 When the developing Printer control board
motor /M (M21) is ON, the (PRCB)
maximum detection value Developing motor /M
of TCR sensor /M (TCRS/ (M21)
M) is the specified value TCR sensor /M (TCRS/
and the difference M)
between the maximum
motor /C (M22) is ON, the (PRCB)
maximum detection value Developing motor /C
of TCR sensor /C (TCRS/ (M22)
C) is the specified value TCR sensor /C (TCRS/
and the difference C)
between the maximum
motor /K (M23) is ON, the (PRCB)
maximum detection value Developing motor /K
of TCR sensor /K (TCRS/ (M23)
K) is the specified value TCR sensor /K (TCRS/
and the difference K)
between the maximum
Main body: C-2470 Process unit mount is not Printer control board
Process unit connected. (PRCB)
mount Process mount
connection
abnormality
Main body: High C-2701 An error detection signal of High voltage unit /1
voltage unit /1 the charging corona /Y is (HV1)
abnormality detected while the Charging corona /Y
charging corona /Y is ON. Printer control board
The signal is detected (PRCB)
even after turning OFF/ON
for a prescribed time.
C-2702 An error detection signal of High voltage unit /1
the charging corona /M is (HV1)
detected while the Charging corona /M
charging corona /M is ON. Printer control board
K -55

the charging corona /C is (HV1)
detected while the Charging corona /C
charging corona /C is ON. Printer control board
the charging corona /K is (HV1)
detected while the Charging corona /K
charging corona /K is ON. Printer control board
Main body: High C-2711 An error detection signal of High voltage unit /2
voltage unit /2 the 1st transfer /Y is (HV2)
abnormality detected while the 1st 1st transfer roller /Y
transfer /Y is ON. The Printer control board
signal is detected even (PRCB)
after turning OFF/ON for a
prescribed time.
the 1st transfer /M is (HV2)
detected while the 1st 1st transfer roller /M
transfer /M is ON. The Printer control board
prescribed time.
the 1st transfer /C is (HV2)
detected while the 1st 1st transfer roller /C
transfer /C is ON. The Printer control board
prescribed time.
the 1st transfer /K is (HV2)
detected while the 1st 1st transfer roller /K
transfer /K is ON. The Printer control board
prescribed time.
the 2nd transfer is (HV2)
detected while the 2nd 2nd transfer roller
transfer is ON. The signal Printer control board
is detected even after (PRCB)
turning OFF/ON for a
prescribed time.
the separation charger is (HV2)
detected while the Separation charger
separation charger is ON. Printer control board
Main body: C-2801 The output voltage of the Printer control board
Gamma IDC sensor (IDCS) is (PRCB)
correction detected more that the Developing unit /Y
abnormality specified value on the IDC sensor (IDCS)
patch /Y of the developing IDC shutter solenoid
DC maximum output. (SD3)
C-2802 The output voltage of the Printer control board
IDC sensor (IDCS) is (PRCB)
detected more that the Developing unit /M
specified value on the IDC sensor (IDCS)
patch /M of the developing IDC shutter solenoid
K -56

detected more that the Developing unit /C
patch /C of the developing IDC shutter solenoid
detected more that the Developing unit /K
patch /K of the developing IDC shutter solenoid
C-2811 The proper value cannot Printer control board
be figured out within the (PRCB)
specified time by the Developing unit /Y
correction of the patch IDC sensor (IDCS)
density correction /Y. Or, IDC shutter solenoid
the proper value of the (SD3)
developing DC output is 0
or lower.
specified time by the Developing unit /M
density correction /M. Or, IDC shutter solenoid
or lower.
specified time by the Developing unit /C
density correction /C. Or, IDC shutter solenoid
or lower.
specified time by the Developing unit /K
density correction /K. Or, IDC shutter solenoid
or lower.
Main body: Dot C-2821 The output voltage of the Printer control board
diameter IDC sensor (IDCS) is (PRCB)
correction detected more that the Developing unit /Y
abnormality specified value on the IDC sensor (IDCS)
patch /Y of the MPC IDC shutter solenoid
maximum output. (SD3)
detected more that the Developing unit /M
patch /M of the MPC IDC shutter solenoid
detected more that the Developing unit /C
patch /C of the MPC IDC shutter solenoid
detected more that the Developing unit /K
patch /K of the MPC IDC shutter solenoid
K -57

specified time by the Developing unit /Y
correction of the dot IDC sensor (IDCS)
diameter correction /Y. Or, IDC shutter solenoid
the MPC proper value is 0 (SD3)
or lower. Writing unit /Y
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
specified time by the Developing unit /M
diameter correction /M. Or, IDC shutter solenoid
or lower. Writing unit /M
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
specified time by the Developing unit /C
diameter correction /C. Or, IDC shutter solenoid
or lower. Writing unit /C
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
specified time by the Developing unit /K
diameter correction /K. Or, IDC shutter solenoid
or lower. Writing unit /K
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
Main body: C-2840 The IDC sensor (IDCS) Printer control board
Gamma output value is detected (PRCB)
correction not within the specified IDC sensor (IDCS)
abnormality range on the IDC sensor IDC shutter solenoid
(IDCS) base correction (SD3)
when the rough
adjustment ends.
C-2841 The LED applied voltage is Printer control board
detected not within the (PRCB)
specified range on the IDC IDC sensor (IDCS)
sensor (IDCS) base
correction.
Main body: C-3101 An error detection signal of Conveyance drive board
Motor M29 is detected (CDB)
abnormality continuously for a Printer control board
specified period of time (PRCB)
while the fusing motor Fusing motor (M29)
(M29) is ON.
C-3102 While the fusing release Conveyance drive board
home sensor (PS16) is (CDB)
ON, PS16 does not turn Printer control board
OFF within a specified (PRCB)
period of time after the Fusing motor (M29)
fusing motor (M29) turns Fusing release home
ON. While PS16 is OFF, sensor (PS16)
time after M29 turns ON.
K -58

C-3103 The 2nd transfer pressure Conveyance drive board
release motor (M34) does (CDB)
not turn OFF within a 2nd transfer pressure
specified period of time release motor (M34)
after it turns ON. 2nd transfer HP sensor
(PS24)
Main body: Fan C-3301* An error detection signal of Printer control board
continuously for a Fusing ventilation fan
while the fusing ventilation
fan (FM37) is ON.
continuously for a Fusing belt ventilation
specified period of time fan (FM10)
while the fusing belt
ventilation fan (FM10) is
ON.
C-3303 An error detection signal of Conveyance drive board
FM65 is detected (CDB)
continuously for a Fusing cooling fan
while the fusing cooling fan
(FM65) is ON.
C-3304 An error detection signal of Printer control board
any of FM7, FM8 or FM9 is (PRCB)
detected continuously for a Fusing separation fan /1
while the fusing separation Fusing separation fan /2
fans /1 (FM7), /2 (FM8) (FM8)
and /3 (FM9) are ON. Fusing separation fan /3
(FM9)
Main body: C-3501* Fusing high temperature Fusing unit
Fusing high abnormality Printer control board
temperature The temperature sensor /1 (PRCB)
abnormality (TH1) detects 250 C or AC drive board (ACDB)
higher value continuously Fusing heater lamp /1
for a specified period of (L2)
time. Fusing heater lamp /2
(L3)
Fusing heater lamp /3
(L4)
Temperature sensor /1
(TH1)
C-3502* Fusing high temperature Fusing unit
abnormality Printer control board
The temperature sensor /3 (PRCB)
(TH3) detects 250 C or AC drive board (ACDB)
(L3)
(L4)
(TH3)
time. Temperature sensor /2
(TH2)
(TH4)
K -59

(L3)
(L4)
(TH1)
(TH2)
C-3508* Paper is wound around the Fusing unit
fusing roller. Printer control board
J31-02 occurs 4 times in a (PRCB)
row. Conveyance drive board
(CDB)
Registration motor
(M30)
High voltage unit /1
(HV1)
High voltage unit /2
(HV2)
Fusing paper exit sensor
(PS17)
C-3509* Fusing roller /Up Fusing unit
temperature gap Printer control board
abnormality (PRCB)
When the fusing roller /Up AC drive board (ACDB)
is higher than the specified Fusing heater lamp /1
temperature, the gap (L2)
detected by the Fusing heater lamp /2
temperature sensors /1 (L3)
(TH1) and /3 (TH3)are Fusing heater lamp /3
larger than the specified (L4)
value. Temperature sensor /1
(TH1)
(TH3)
Main body: C-3801* Fusing low temperature Fusing unit
Fusing low abnormality. Printer control board
temperature While fusing idling or (PRCB)
abnormality printing, the temperature AC drive board (ACDB)
sensor /1 (TH1) detects Fusing heater lamp /1
lower than the specified (L2)
temperature for a specified Fusing heater lamp /2
period of time. (L3)
(L4)
(TH1)
Thermostat /1 (TS1)
Thermostat /2 (TS2)
K -60

C-3802* Fusing low temperature Fusing unit
abnormality. Printer control board
While fusing idling or (PRCB)
printing, the temperature AC drive board (ACDB)
(L4)
(TH3)
Thermostat /1 (TS1)
Thermostat /2 (TS2)
temperature for a specified Temperature sensor /2
period of time. (TH2)
Thermostat /3 (TS3)
Thermostat /3 (TS3)
(L4)
(TH1)
Thermostat /1 (TS1)
Thermostat /2 (TS2)
Thermostat /3 (TS3)
Main body: C-3901* Fusing high temperature Fusing unit
Fusing sensor abnormality (hardware Printer control board
abnormality detection). (PRCB)
The temperature sensor /3 AC drive board (ACDB)
(TH3) detects an error Fusing heater lamp /1
detection signal (L2)
continuously for a Fusing heater lamp /2
specified period of time. (L3)
(L4)
(TH3)
K -61

abnormality (hardware Printer control board
detection). (PRCB)
specified period of time. (TH4)
detection) (PRCB)
(L4)
(TH1)
Thermostat /1 (TS1)
Thermostat /2 (TS2)
detection) (PRCB)
(L4)
(TH3)
Thermostat /1 (TS1)
Thermostat /2 (TS2)
detection). (PRCB)
Thermostat /3 (TS3)
detection). (PRCB)
Thermostat /3 (TS3)
detection). (PRCB)
(L4)
(TH1)
K -62

detection). (PRCB)
(L4)
(TH1)
Thermostat /1 (TS1)
Thermostat /2 (TS2)
detection). (PRCB)
detection). (PRCB)
Thermostat /3 (TS3)
C-3911* The detected temperature Fusing unit
of the temperature sensor / Printer control board
1 (TH1) has not reached to (PRCB)
100C within the specified AC drive board (ACDB)
period of time after the sub Fusing heater lamp /1
power switch (SW2) turned (L2)
ON. Fusing heater lamp /2
(L3)
(L4)
(TH1)
Thermostat /1 (TS1)
Thermostat /2 (TS2)
C-3912* The detected temperature Fusing unit
of the temperature sensor / Printer control board
2 (TH2) has not reached to (PRCB)
100C within the specified AC drive board (ACDB)
period of time after the sub Fusing heater lamp /4
power switch (SW2) turned (L5)
ON. Temperature sensor /2
(TH2)
Thermostat /3 (TS3)
C-3913* The fusing unit is not set. Fusing unit
Printer control board
(PRCB)
detection). (PRCB)
(L4)
(TH1)
K -63

detection). (PRCB)
Main body: C-4101 When the polygon motor / Printer control board
Polygon motor Y (M70) in the writing unit (PRCB)
abnormality starts up or its speed Writing unit
changes, the lock signal of
M70 is not detected within
a specified period of time.
C-4102 When the polygon motor / Printer control board
M (M71) in the writing unit (PRCB)
starts up or its speed Writing unit
C (M72) in the writing unit (PRCB)
K (M73) in the writing unit (PRCB)
C-4111 A temperature abnormality Printer control board
of the polygon motor /Y (PRCB)
(M70) in the writing unit is Writing unit
detected.
of the polygon motor /M (PRCB)
detected.
of the polygon motor /C (PRCB)
detected.
of the polygon motor /K (PRCB)
detected.
C-4120 The temperature sensor in Printer control board
the writing unit /K detects (PRCB)
the temperature Writing unit
abnormality.
abnormality any of M45 or M46 is (PRCB)
detected continuously for a Developing fan /1
while the developing fans Developing fan /2
(FM45) and /2 (FM46) are (FM46)
ON.
Main body: C-4501 The tilt correction home Printer control board
Writing sensor /Y (PS70) turns (PRCB)
correction drive OFF while the tilt Writing unit
abnormality correction motor /Y (M74)
in the writing unit is ON.
C-4502 The tilt correction home Printer control board
sensor /M (PS71) turns (PRCB)
OFF while the tilt Writing unit
correction motor /M (M75)
K -64

sensor /C (PS72) turns (PRCB)
correction motor /C (M76)
sensor /K (PS73) turns (PRCB)
correction motor /K (M77)
C-4511 The tilt correction motor /Y Printer control board
(M74) does not turn OFF (PRCB)
within a specified period of Tilt correction motor /Y
time after it turns ON. Or, (M74)
the installation position of Skew correction home
the tilt correction home sensor /Y (PS70)
sensor /Y (PS70) is
improper.
C-4512 The tilt correction motor /Y Printer control board
within a specified period of Tilt correction motor /M
the installation position of Skew correction home
the tilt correction home sensor /M (PS71)
sensor /M (PS71) is
improper.
C-4513 The tilt correction motor /C Printer control board
within a specified period of Tilt correction motor /C
the installation position of Tilt correction home
the tilt correction home sensor /C (PS72)
sensor /C (PS72) is
improper.
C-4514 The tilt correction motor /K Printer control board
within a specified period of Tilt correction motor /K
the installation position of Tilt correction home
the tilt correction home sensor /K (PS73)
sensor /K (PS73) is
improper.
Main body: C-4520 The color registration Printer control board
Color correction has terminated (PRCB)
registration abnormally. Color registration
abnormality sensor /Fr (PS8)
Color registration
sensor /Rr (PS9)
C-4521 The color registration base Printer control board
line correction /Fr has (PRCB)
terminated abnormally. Color registration
sensor /Fr (PS8)
Color registration shutter
solenoid (SD2)
C-4522 The color registration base Printer control board
line correction /Rr has (PRCB)
terminated abnormally. Color registration
sensor /Rr (PS9)
solenoid (SD2)
Main body: C-4545 The beam interval Writing unit
Beam interval correction (Y) has
correction terminated abnormally.
abnormality C-4546 The beam interval Writing unit
correction (M) has
terminated abnormally.
C-4547 The beam interval Writing unit
correction (C) has
K -65

C-4548 The beam interval Writing unit
correction (K) has
Color board /Fr (CRB/Fr) has not Color registration
registration detected any data of Y sensor /Fr (PS8)
board /Fr (Y) toner. Color registration board /
data undetected Fr (CRB/Fr)
abnormality Color registration shutter
solenoid (SD2)
registration detected any data of M sensor /Fr (PS8)
board /Fr (M) toner. Color registration board /
solenoid (SD2)
registration detected any data of C sensor /Fr (PS8)
board /Fr (C) toner. Color registration board /
solenoid (SD2)
registration detected any data of K sensor /Fr (PS8)
board /Fr (K) toner. Color registration board /
solenoid (SD2)
Main body: C-4621 The color registration The main body Printer control board
Color board /Rr (CRB/Rr) has stops Color registration
registration not detected any data of Y immediately to sensor /Rr (PS9)
board /Rr (Y) toner. turn OFF the Color registration board /
data undetected main relay Rr (CRB/Rr)
abnormality (RL1). Color registration shutter
solenoid (SD2)
Main body: C-4622 The color registration The main body Printer control board
Color board /Rr (CRB/Rr) has stops Color registration
registration not detected any data of M immediately to sensor /Rr (PS9)
board /Rr (M) toner. turn OFF the Color registration board /
data undetected power relay Rr (CRB/Rr)
abnormality (RL1). Color registration shutter
solenoid (SD2)
Color board /Rr (CRB/Rr) has Color registration
registration not detected any data of C sensor /Rr (PS9)
board /Rr (C) toner. Color registration board /
data undetected Rr (CRB/Rr)
solenoid (SD2)
Color board /Rr (CRB/Rr) has Color registration
registration not detected any data of K sensor /Rr (PS9)
board /Rr (K) toner. Color registration board /
data undetected Rr (CRB/Rr)
solenoid (SD2)
Main body: C-4631 The histogram processing Printer control board
Color of Y toner has terminated Color registration
registration abnormally on the color sensor /Fr (PS8)
board /Fr (Y) registration board /Fr Color registration board /
abnormality (CRB/Fr). Fr (CRB/Fr)
solenoid (SD2)
K -66

Color of M toner has terminated Color registration
board /Fr (M) registration board /Fr Color registration board /
solenoid (SD2)
Color of C toner has terminated Color registration
board /Fr (C) registration board /Fr Color registration board /
solenoid (SD2)
Color of K toner has terminated Color registration
board /Fr (K) registration board /Fr Color registration board /
solenoid (SD2)
Color of Y toner has terminated Color registration
registration abnormally on the color sensor /Rr (PS9)
board /Rr (Y) registration board /Rr Color registration board /
abnormality (CRB/Rr). Rr (CRB/Rr)
solenoid (SD2)
Color of M toner has terminated Color registration
board /Rr (M) registration board /Rr Color registration board /
solenoid (SD2)
Color of C toner has terminated Color registration
board /Rr (C) registration board /Rr Color registration board /
solenoid (SD2)
Color of K toner has terminated Color registration
board /Rr (K) registration board /Rr Color registration board /
solenoid (SD2)
Color correction /Y has Color registration
registration terminated abnormally. sensor /Fr (PS8), /Rr
correction (PS9)
abnormality (Y) Color registration board /
Fr (CRB/Fr), /Rr (CRB/
Rr)
solenoid (SD2)
Color correction /M has Color registration
correction (PS9)
abnormality (M) Color registration board /
Rr)
solenoid (SD2)
K -67

Color correction /C has Color registration
correction (PS9)
abnormality (C) Color registration board /
Rr)
solenoid (SD2)
Main body: C-4701 FIFO address abnormality Printer control board
Image for the printer. While in the (PRCB)
processing image write, the expansion Overall control board
abnormality processing of image data (OACB)
that is read in does not Memory control board /1
terminate correctly. (MCB1)
C-4702 An error interrupt occurs Overall control board
with the compression/ (OACB)
expansion chip FIFO. Memory control board /1
(MCB1)
C-4703 Image data expansion Overall control board
abnormality. (OACB)
Memory control board /1
(MCB1)
C-4705 While in the image write, Printer control board
the expansion processing (PRCB)
from the memory to the Printer image
printer does not terminate processing board
within a specified period of (PRIPB)
time. The output from the Memory control board /1
page memory to the printer (MCB1)
does not terminate within a Overall control board
specified period of time. (OACB)
The PVV is not detected
time.
C-4706 While in the image write, Overall control board
despite of no resource (OACB)
provided, an inappropriate Memory control board /1
processing such as (MCB1)
accessing to the Program of overall
elongation device is made. control board (OACB)
C-4708 When accessing to the Overall control board
memory device, a (OACB)
defective software is Memory control board /1
detected. (MCB1)
Program of overall
control board (OACB)
C-4709 The expansion processing Overall control board
from the memory to the (OACB)
page memory does not Memory control board /1
terminate within a (MCB1)
specified period of time. Program of overall
The compression control board (OACB)
processing from the page
memory to the memory
does not terminate within a
The development from the
memory to the page
memory does not
terminate within a
The transmission of the
compressed data from
memory to memory does
not terminated within a
K -68

C-4713 A page memory for Printer image
printing cannot be processing board
secured. (PRIPB)
(MCB1)
Overall control board
(OACB)
Main body: C-4714 When executing APC, the Printer image
Image Index sensor output does processing board
processing not change. The index (PRIPB)
abnormality /Y sensor failed to detect the Writing unit /Y
laser because the polygon
mirror does not rotate, the
position of the index
sensor is improper, or the
index sensor is defective.
abnormality /M sensor failed to detect the Writing unit /M
abnormality /C sensor failed to detect the Writing unit /C
abnormality /K sensor failed to detect the Writing unit/K
Main body: C-4718 APC abnormality. Printer image
Image The laser does not turn processing board
processing ON because 12V DC (PRIPB)
abnormality /Y power source for driving Writing unit /Y
laser is not fed, MPC is
wrong, or the laser is
defective.
abnormality /M power source for driving Writing unit /M
defective.
abnormality /C power source for driving Writing unit /C
defective.
abnormality /K power source for driving Writing unit/K
defective.
K -69

Main body: C-4722 Connection abnormality Printer image
Image between the index board / processing board
processing Y (IDB/Y) or the laser drive (PRIPB)
abnormality /Y board /Y (LDB/Y) and the Writing unit /Y
printer image processing
board (PRIPB).
processing M (IDB/M) or the laser (PRIPB)
abnormality /M drive board /M (LDB/M) Writing unit /M
and the printer image
processing board (PRIPB).
processing C (IDB/C) or the laser (PRIPB)
abnormality /C drive board /C (LDB/C) Writing unit /C
and the printer image
processing board (PRIPB).
processing K (IDB/K) or the laser drive (PRIPB)
abnormality /K board /K (LDB/K) and the Writing unit/K
printer image processing
board (PRIPB).
Main body: C-4840 The engine section has Printer control board
Image kept driving continuously (PRCB)
processing for a specified period of Printer control program
abnormality time without producing
image or process patch.
C-4850* The overall control Overall control board
software accesses an (OACB)
illegal address.
Main body: C-5001 12V DC abnormality. DC power supply /1
Communication An error signal is detected (DCPS1)
error continuously for a Printer control board
specified period of time. (PRCB)
C-5002 24V DC abnormality. Printer control board
An error signal is detected (PRCB)
continuously for a DC power supply /2
specified period of time (DCPS2)
after REN/2 turns ON. Each loading of PRCB
connection (motor,
solenoid and clutch)
C-5003 Conveyance drive board DC power supply /2
(CDB) 24VDC abnormality. (DCPS2)
An error signal of 24VDC Conveyance drive board
for CDB is detected. (CDB)
C-5004 Laser correction motor DC power supply /1
5VDC abnormality (DCPS1)
An abnormality of 5VDC
for the tilt correction
motors /Y (M74), /M
(M75), /C (M76), /K (M77)
C-5005 Conveyance drive board Printer control board
(CDB) 12VDC abnormality. (PRCB)
Conveyance drive board
(CDB)
C-5010 A line status error or a Printer control board
checksum error occured (PRCB)
between the overall control Overall control board
board (OACB) and the (OACB)
printer control board
(PRIPB) is detected and it
cannot be recovered by
sending a retransmission
request. Recovery failed
even after the requested
retransmission is
performed. A sufficient
space cannot be obtained
in the circular buffer within
K -70

Main body: Fan C-5301 An error detection signal of Overall control board
abnormality FM1 or FM3 is detected (OACB)
continuously for a Power supply cooling
specified period of time fan /1 (FM1)
while the power supply Power supply cooling
cooling fan /1 (FM1) and /3 fan /3 (FM3)
(FM3) are ON.
C-5302 An error detection signal of Overall control board
FM5 is detected (OACB)
continuously for a Image processing
specified period of time cooling fan /1 (FM5)
while the image
processing cooling fan /1
(FM5) is ON.
C-5303 An error detection signal of Overall control board
FM6 is detected (OACB)
continuously for a Image processing
specified period of time cooling fan /2 (FM6)
while the image
processing cooling fan /2
(FM6) is ON.
Main body: HDD C-5304 An error detection signal of The main body HDD unit cooling fan /1
unit cooling fan FM81 or FM82 is detected stops (FM81)
abnormality continuously for a immediately to HDD unit cooling fan /2
specified period of time turn OFF the (FM82)
while the HDD unit cooling main relay
fans /1 (FM81) and /2 (RL1).
(FM82) are ON.
An error detection signal is
detected continuously
while retrying power feed
several times.
Main body: Fan C-5305 An error detection signal of The main body Printer control board
abnormality FM4 is detected stops (PRCB)
continuously for a immediately to Power supply cooling
specified period of time turn OFF the fan /4 (FM4)
while the power supply power relay
cooling fan /4 (FM4) is ON. (RL1).
Main body: C-6101 While in the home position Printer control board
Scanner search operation, the (PRCB)
abnormality scanner home sensor Scanner drive board
(PS1) does not turn ON (SCDB)
within a specified period of Scanner motor (M1)
time after the scanner Scanner home sensor
motor (M1) turns ON. (PS1)
C-6102 When in optics scan Printer control board
returning operation, the (PRCB)
scanner home sensor Scanner drive board
(PS1) does not turn ON (SCDB)
within a specified period of Scanner motor (M1)
time after the scanner Scanner home sensor
motor (M1) turns ON. (PS1)
continuously for a Scanner drive board
specified period of time (SCDB)
while the scanner cooling Scanner cooling fan
fan (FM2) is ON. (FM2)
Main body: C-6701 When processing images, Scanner image processing
Image a filter coefficient cannot board (SCIPB)
processing be created normally.
C-6702 Address error of the Overall control board
scanner FIFO. While in the (OACB)
image read, the Memory control board /1
compression processing of (MCB1)
image data that is read in
does not terminate
correctly.
K -71

C-6703 After negation of SW, the Scanner image
compression of images processing board
that are read in and their (SCIPB)
development into the page Memory control board /1
memory are not terminated (MCB1)
within a specified period of Overall control board
time. (OACB)
(PRCB)
C-6704 While in the image read, Scanner image
the compression processing board
processing from the (SCIPB)
scanner into the memory Memory control board /1
does not terminate within a (MCB1)
specified period of time. Overall control board
The development from the (OACB)
scanner into the page Printer control board
memory does not (PRCB)
terminate within a
The SVV is not detected
time.
despite of no resource processing board
provided, an inappropriate (SCIPB)
processing such as Memory control board /1
accessing to the (MCB1)
compression device is
made.
SVV does not turn OFF processing board
within a specified period of (SCIPB)
time and the preparation Memory control board /1
for scanning the next page (MCB1)
cannot be started. Overall control board
(OACB)
(PRCB)
C-6707 Shading correction Scanner image processing
abnormality (GA board (SCIPB)
abnormality).
C-6708 AOC/AGC adjustment CCD board (CCDB)
abnormality Scanner image
The light blocking cover processing board
and the lens cover of the (SCIPB)
scanner section are CCD lens unit
removed. Scanner drive board
The connector of the CCD (SCDB)
board (CCDB) is not Exposure lamp (L1)
disconnected. Scanner inverter board
The power cable of CCDB (S_INVB)
is disconnected.
The IC protector of the
CCD board (CCDB) is
removed.
Overexposure of the
exposure lamp (L1).
L1 does not light.
C-6709 The adjustment data Scanner image
evacuated by resolutions processing board
is not available. (SCIPB)
(MCB1)
Program of overall
C-6710 A density conversion Scanner image
gamma curve cannot be processing board
created normally. (SCIPB)
(MCB1)
Program of overall
K -72

C-6711 Pulse width modulation IC Scanner image
calibration cannot be processing board
started normally. (SCIPB)
(MCB1)
Program of overall
C-6712 Pulse width modulation IC Scanner image
calibration cannot be processing board
completed normally. (SCIPB)
(MCB1)
Program of overall
C-6713 APC initial sampling is Printer image
started before MPC is processing board
completed. (PRIPB)
Writing unit
C-6714 MPC is started before APC Printer image
is in progress. processing board
(PRIPB)
Writing unit
C-6715 Sub scan beam correction Printer image
is started before APC or processing board
MPC is completed. (PRIPB)
Program of printer
control board (PRCB)
C-6716 Sub scan beam interval Printer image
correction is started with processing board
write clock abnormality (PRIPB)
occurred due to Program of printer
noncompletion of AD9561 control board (PRCB)
initialization.
C-6717 N-in-1 page area Printer image
abnormality. Due to an processing board
image area abnormality of (PRIPB)
the memory, images Program of printer
cannot be expanded on control board (PRCB)
the memory.
C-6720 The scan operation starts Software bug
before the centering
adjustment is terminated.
C-6721 The AGC is retried due to CCD board (CCDB)
the decreased light volume Scanner image
of the exposure lamp (L1). processing board
However, no error occurs. (SCIPB)
CCD lens unit
Scanner drive board
(SCDB)
Exposure lamp (L1)
C-6722 A PWM gamma curve is Printer image
not created properly. processing board
(PRIPB)
Writing unit
C-6723 Connection abnormality Scanner image
between the CCD board processing board
(CCDB) and the image (SCIPB)
processing board (IPB). CCD board (CCDB)
CCD lens unit
Exposure lamp (L1)
Scanner drive board
(SCDB)
C-6724 When the sub power Scanner image
switch (SW2) turns ON, processing board
connection check of (SCIPB)
reading system board CCD board (CCDB)
failed. CCD lens unit
Exposure lamp (L1)
Scanner drive board
(SCDB)
K -73

C-6725 The parameter setting Scanner image processing
cannot be performed while board (SCIPB)
preparing for scanning.
Main body: C-6801 After the sub power switch Overall control board
Communication (SW2) turns ON, the (OACB)
error communication between Operation board /1
the overall control board (OB1)
(OACB) and the operation
board /1 (OB1) is not
started within a specified
period of time.
C-7001 Communication error. The main body Printer control board
and the post (PRCB)
processing
machine stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
power relay
(RL1).
DF: DF C-8001 Communication error The main body Printer control board
communication between the main body stops (PRCB)
error and DF. immediately to DF control board
turn OFF the (DFCB)
DF: Paper feed C-8101 Paper feed motor (M301) main relay Paper feed motor
motor error error (RL1). (M301)
DF control board
(DFCB)
DF: Conveyance C-8102 Conveyance motor (M302) Conveyance motor
motor error error (M302)
DF control board
(DFCB)
DF: Reverse/ C-8103 Reverse/paper exit motor Reverse/paper exit
paper exit motor (M303) error. motor (M303)
error DF control board
(DFCB)
DF: Registration C-8401 Registration sensor Original registration
sensor error (PS301) error sensor (PS301)
DF control board
(DFCB)
DF: Timing C-8402 Timing sensor (PS302) Timing sensor (PS302)
sensor error error DF control board
(DFCB)
DF: Reverse C-8403 Reverse sensor (PS305) Reverse sensor (PS305)
sensor error error DF control board
(DFCB)
DF: Paper exit C-8404 Paper exit sensor (PS306) Paper exit sensor
sensor error error (PS306)
DF control board
(DFCB)
DF: Size VR C-8405 Size VR (VR301) error. Size VR (VR301)
error DF control board
(DFCB)
DF: Non-volatile C-8406 Non-volatile memory error DF control board (DFCB)
memory error
DF: DF C-8407 When the sub power DF control board (DFCB)
abnormality switch (SW2) is ON, it is
detected that the control
program of the DF control
board (DFCB) is unwritten.
Main body: C-C101 When the sub power The main body Printer control board
Communication switch (SW2) turns ON, a stops (PRCB)
error response from the printer immediately to Overall control board
control board (PRCB) has turn OFF the (OACB)
not received within a power relay
specified period of time. (RL1).
C-C102 Communication error of Printer control board
the printer control board (PRCB)
(PRCB)
K -74

C-C103 Communication error of Operation board /1
the control panel (OB1)
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
Scanner image
processing board
(SCIPB)
(MCB)
(PRCB)
(OACB)
Sub power switch (SW2)
Main body: ISW C-C104 When the sub power Printer control firmware
abnormality switch (SW2) turns ON,
ISW unwritten area is
detected in the printer
control program.
C-C106 No normal header is Relay board /U (RBU)
transmitted within a USB memory
after ISW is started.
C-C107 While in data transmission Relay board /U (RBU)
by ISW, a checksum error USB memory
or a header error is Program file abnormality
detected in the
downloaded error.
C-C108 While in data transmission Relay board /U (RBU)
by ISW, data cannot be UBS cables
written in the flash ROM Board to which the
properly. program is transferred
FS: FS ISW C-C109 When the sub power The main body FNSCB firmware
unwritten switch (SW2) turns ON, stops FNS control board
ISW unwritten area is immediately to (FNSCB)
detected in the FS turn OFF the
firmware. main relay
LS: LS ISW C-C111 When the sub power (RL1). LSCB firmware
unwritten switch (SW2) turns ON, LS control board (LSCB)
detected in the LS
firmware (1st tandem).
C-C112 When the sub power LSCB firmware
switch (SW2) turns ON, LS control board (LSCB)
detected in the LS
firmware (2nd tandem).
FD: FD ISW C-C113 When the sub power FDCB firmware
unwritten switch (SW2) turns ON, FD control board
ISW unwritten area is (FDCB)
detected in the FD
firmware.
SD: SD-506 ISW C-C114 When the sub power SDCB firmware
unwritten switch (SW2) turns ON, SD control board
ISW unwritten area is (SDCB)
detected in the SD
firmware.
PB: PB ISW C-C116 When the sub power PB firmware
unwritten switch (SW2) turns ON, PB control board
ISW unwritten area is (PBCB)
detected in the PB
firmware.
GP: GP-501 C-C117 When the sub power GP firmware
ISW unwritten switch (SW2) turns ON, Punch Controller PCB
detected in the GP
firmware.
K -75

RU: RU-506 C-C118 When the sub power RU-506 firmware
ISW unwritten switch (SW2) turns ON, RU control board
ISW unwritten area is (RUCB)
detected in the RU
firmware.
RU: RU-509 C-C119 When the sub power RU firmware
ISW unwritten switch (SW2) turns ON, RU control board
ISW unwritten area is (RUCB)
detected in the RU
program.
Main body: ISW C-C120 Printer control board The main body Printer control firmware
abnormality (PRCB) firmware stops
abnormality immediately to
turn OFF the
power relay
(RL1).
Main body: HDD C-D0E0 There is HDD to be The main body HDD/Y (HDD/Y) DIPSW18-7 HDD
initialization initialized. stops HDD/M (HDD/M) unusable
abnormality immediately to HDD/C (HDD/C) (HDD not
turn OFF the HDD/K (HDD/K) connected)
main relay HDD/A (HDD/A) However, it
(RL1). HDD/P (HDD/P) cannot be
detached
when
IC-601 is
connected.
Main body: HDD C-D0E1 HDD (Y/M/C/K/A) is not HDD/Y (HDD/Y) DIPSW18-7 HDD
abnormality (any connected. Or damaged, HDD/M (HDD/M) unusable
of Y, M, C, K or or while in initialization. HDD/C (HDD/C) (HDD not
A) HDD/K (HDD/K) connected)
HDD/A (HDD/A) However, it
Memory control board /1 cannot be
(MCB1) detached
when
IC-601 is
connected.
Main body: C-D0E2 HDD/P unconnected Or HDD/P (HDD/P) DIPSW18-7 HDD
HDD/P damaged, or while in Memory control board /P unusable
abnormality initialization. (MCB/P) (HDD not
connected)
However, it
cannot be
detached
when
IC-601 is
connected.
Main body: C-D0E3 Writing/reading to the HDD/Y (HDD/Y) DIPSW18-7 HDD
HDD/Y read/ HDD/Y failed. unusable
write (HDD not
abnormality connected)
However, it
cannot be
detached
when
IC-601 is
connected.
Main body: C-D0E4 Writing/reading to the HDD/M (HDD/M) DIPSW18-7 HDD
HDD/M read/ HDD/M failed. unusable
write (HDD not
However, it
cannot be
detached
when
IC-601 is
connected.
K -76

Main body: C-D0E5 Writing/reading to the HDD/C (HDD/C) DIPSW18-7 HDD
HDD/C read/ HDD/C failed. unusable
write (HDD not
However, it
cannot be
detached
when
IC-601 is
connected.
Main body: C-D0E6 Writing/reading to the HDD/K (HDD/K) DIPSW18-7 HDD
HDD/K read/ HDD/K (HDD/K) failed. unusable
write (HDD not
However, it
cannot be
detached
when
IC-601 is
connected.
Main body: C-D0E7 Writing/reading to the HDD/A (HDD/A) DIPSW18-7 HDD
HDD/A read/ HDD/A (HDD/A) failed. unusable
write (HDD not
However, it
cannot be
detached
when
IC-601 is
connected.
Main body: C-D0E8 Writing/reading to the HDD/P (HDD/P) DIPSW18-7 HDD
HDD/P read/ HDD/P (HDD/P) failed. Memory control board /P unusable
write (MCB/P) (HDD not
However, it
cannot be
detached
when
IC-601 is
connected.
Main body: HDD C-D0EF An error is detected while HDD/Y (HDD/Y)
verify in HDD verify check. HDD/M (HDD/M)
abnormality * SC is not counted. HDD/C (HDD/C)
HDD/K (HDD/K)
HDD/A (HDD/A)
HDD/P (HDD/P)
(MCB1)
Memory control board /P
(MCB/P)
(OACB)
Main body: HDD C-D0F0 HDD Lock abnormality HDD/Y (HDD/Y)
Lock while in enhanced security. HDD/M (HDD/M)
abnormality HDD is locked due to HDD/C (HDD/C)
incorrect password, HDD/K (HDD/K)
password unset or security HDD/A (HDD/A)
OFF. HDD/P (HDD/P)
Main body: C-DC## Security abnormality - Contact to Konica Minolta
Security before carrying on the
abnormality action.
Main body: C-E001 The message queue is The main body Scanner image
Image insufficient or destroyed. stops processing board
processing immediately to (SCIPB)
abnormality turn OFF the Printer image
power relay processing board
(RL1). (PRIPB)
(MCB1)
Program of overall
K -77

C-E002 The parameter value is in Scanner image
excess of the permissible processing board
limits. (SCIPB)
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
(MCB1)
Program of overall
C-E003 The ID of the task that Scanner image
sends the message queue processing board
is undefined. (SCIPB)
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
(MCB1)
Program of overall
C-E004 The receiving event of the Scanner image
message is undefined. processing board
(SCIPB)
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
(MCB1)
Program of overall
C-E005 Memory access Scanner image
abnormality. processing board
(SCIPB)
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
(MCB1)
(OACB)
C-E006 Header address read out Scanner image
(SCIPB)
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
(MCB1)
(OACB)
C-E007 Header address read out Printer image
(PRIPB)
(MCB1)
(OACB)
Main body: C-E008 An error is detected while The main body Color density sensor unit
Output paper in the output paper density stops
density adjustment. immediately to
automatic turn OFF the
adjustment main relay
abnormality (RL1).
Main body: C-E009 Wrong initial value is PRCB firmware
Printer control detected in the printer Printer control board
non-volatile control area. (PRCB)
initial value
abnormality
K -78
2.4 Malfunction code caused by connector disconnection

2.4.1 bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, bizhub PRO C6000L
Board name Connector Connected to Malfunction Remark
number code
Printer control "Please insert key counter" is displayed
CN35 Key counter (KCT) -
board (PRCB) on the operation panel
CN36 Coin vendor /2 -
Temperature sensor /1 (TH1), /2 (TH2), /3 (TH3), /4
CN150 C-3913 It occurs when turning power ON.
(TH4), Fusing unit set
Finisher cannot be recognized. System
CN151 Finisher -
configuration display without finisher
Overall control board (OACB) (connector between
CN300 C-C101 It occurs when turning power ON.
boards)
DC power supply /1 (DCPS1) (connector between
CN301 C-C101 It occurs when turning power ON.
boards)
boards)
CN303
boards)
Drum motor /Y (M14), /M (M15), /C (M16), /K (M17),
encoder sensor /Y1(PS81), /Y2(PS82), /M1(PS83), /
CN309 C-2244 Occurs at feeding paper
M2(PS84), /C1(PS85), /C2(PS86), /K1(PS87), /
K2(PS88)
LU/PF cannot be recognized. System
CN323 LU/PFU -
configuration display without LU/PF.
Total counter /1 (TCT1), /2 (TCT2), fusing belt The message "Please set replenish toner
CN330 ventilation fan (FM10), transfer belt fan (M11), toner C-3302 unit correctly" is displayed on the
supply unit open/close sensor (PS14) operation panel.
Power supply cooling fan /3 (FM3), /4(FM4), paper Opening/closing waste toner cannot be
CN339 lift motor /1 (M38), /2 (M39), /3(M40), waste toner C-0201 recognized. Malfunction code occurs
door sensor (PS60) when feeding paper
Developing motor /Y (M20), /M (M21), /C (M22), /K
CN340 - Image abnormality (no image)
(M23)
Belt motor (M18), encoder sensor / belt1 (PS89), /2
(PS90), 1st transfer HP sensor (PS15)
CN357 AC drive board (ACDB) (connector between boards) C-2221 It occurs when turning power ON.
TCR sensor /Y (TCRS/Y), /M (TCRS/M), /C (TCRS/
C), /K (TCRS/K), erase lamp /Y (EL/Y), /M (EL/M), /
C (EL/C), /K (EL/K), belt separation claw solenoid
(SD1), temp/humidity sensor/2 (TEM/HUMS2)
IDC sensor (IDCS), color registration sensor/Fr
Not occur in normal operation. SC occurs
CN376 (PS8), /Rr (PS9), color registration shutter solenoid C-4521
at adjustment.
(SD2), IDC shutter solenoid (SD3)
CN384 Paper exit fan/1 (FM61), /2 (FM62), /3 (FM63) C-0304 Occurs at feeding paper
Developing fan/1 (FM45), /2 (FM46), main body fan
(FM47), deodorization fan (FM36), fusing ventilation
fan (FM37), drum fan/1 (FM12), /2 (FM13), temp/
humidity sensor/1 (TEM/HUMS1)
"Please set tray" is displayed on the
CN400 Tray 1 -
operation panel.
CN414 Tray 2 -
operation panel.
CN428 Tray 3 -
operation panel.
Paper feed motor (M41), intermediate conveyance
clutch/1 (CL13), waste toner full sensor (PS52),
vertical conveyance door sensor (PS51), vertical
conveyance sensor (PS50)
CN464 PF - System configuration display without PF.
Tucking fan/1 (FM26), /3 (FM27), paper exit
pressure sensor (PS10), paper exit sensor (PS13),
paper exit full sensor (PS12), AC drive board
(ACDB) (connector between boards)
CN492 Fusing separation fans/1(FM7), /2 (FM8), /3 (FM9) C-3304 Occurs at feeding paper
Conveyance drive board (CDB) (connector between
boards)
Scanner drive board (SCDB) (connector between
boards)
K -79
DF, printer image processing board (PRIPB)

CN620 - ADF does not function.
(connector between boards)
Tilt correction motor/Y (M74), /M (M75), /C (M76), /
Not occur in normal operation. Color
CN650 K(M77), tilt correction home sensor/Y (PS70), /M -
registration correction error
(PS71), /C (PS72), /K (PS73)
Polygon motor /Y (M70), /M (M71), /C (M72), /K
(M73)
Toner drive board (TSDB) (connector between Closing toner replacement door is not
CN700 C-2301
boards) detected. Occurs at feeding paper.
High voltage unit /1 (HV1) (connector between
boards)
High voltage unit /2 (HV2) (connector between
CN736 - Image abnormality (no image)
boards)
CN908 Status indicator light -
Conveyance Printer control board (PRCB) (connector between
drive board boards)
(CDB) Front door switch (SW1), DC power supply/1
(DCPS1) (connector between boards)
Fusing motor (M29), fusing cooling fan (FM65), ADU
cooling fan/2 (FM67), fusing release home sensor
(PS16), fusing paper exit sensor (PS17), fusing loop
sensor (PS64)
Jam (J-3202, J-3203, J-3209, J-9201)
CN524 Reverse/exit motor (M33)
occurs at feeding paper
ADU conveyance clutch/1(CL1), /2 (CL2), /3 (CL3),
ADU pre-registration clutch (CL18), paper exit
solenoid (SD4), ADU pre-registration sensor (PS23),
CN527 reverse/exit sensor (PS19), decurler sensor (PS62), C-3103 It occurs when turning power ON.
registration sensor (PS22), leading edge sensor
(PS63), registration temperature sensor (TEMS1),
2nd transfer HP sensor (PS24)
ADU centering sensor (PS65), ADU stop sensor
CN530 - Nothing occurs
(PS20), ADU conveyance sensor (PS61)
Jam (J-9202) occurs at feeding paper of
CN534 ADU loop motor (M57), ADU reverse motor (M32)
duplex
CN536 Registration motor (M30) Jam (J-3101) occurs at feeding paper
Upper limit sensor/BP (PS25), paper feed sensor/BP
(PS26), intermediate conveyance clutch/3 (CL5),
CN539 Jam (J-1708) occurs at feeding paper
intermediate conveyance sensor/2 (PS28), pick-up
solenoid/BP (SD5), paper feed clutch/BP (CL6)
CN556 Intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) Jam (J-1706) occurs at feeding paper
CN579 Loop motor (M31) Jam (J-1701) occurs at feeding paper
CN580 2nd transfer pressure release motor (M34) C-3103 It occurs when turning power ON.
Paper lift motor/BP (M35), intermediate conveyance
CN639 clutch/2 (CL4), ADU gate solenoid (SD10), ADU C-0303 Jam (J-1706) occurs at feeding paper
reverse sensor (PS21), ADU cooling fan/1 (FM66)
Toner supply Printer control board (PRCB) (connector between Closing toner replacement door is not
CN702 C-2301
drive board boards) detected. Occurs at feeding paper.
(TSDB) DC power supply /1 (DCPS1), /2 (DCPS2)
CN704 C-2301
(connector between boards)
Normal operation is available.
CN705 Toner supply motor /M (M50) - Image getting lighter as it lasts and
damages the drum
CN706 Toner supply motor /K (M49) - Image getting lighter as it lasts and
damages the drum
"No toner/Please add toner" is displayed
CN708 Toner bottle motor (M53) - on the operation panel and copy is not
available.
"No toner/Please add toner" is displayed
Toner bottle clutch/Y (CL14), /M (CL15), /C (CL16), /
CN711 - on the operation panel and copy is not
K (CL17), toner bottle door switch (SW4)
available.
Remaining toner sensor /Y (PZS/Y), /M (PZS/M), /C
CN724 (PZS/C), /K (PZS/K), toner supply door open/close C-2301
sensor (PS54), charge intake fan (FM48)
CN726 Toner supply motor /C (M51), /K (M52) - Image getting lighter as it lasts and
damages the drum
K -80
Scanner drive Printer control board (PRCB) (connector between

CN601
board (SCDB) boards) C-6101
DC power supply /1 (DCPS1), /2 (DCPS2)
CN602 (connector between boards) C-6101
CN603 Scanner motor (M1) C-6101
Exposure lamp (L1), scanner inverter board
CN605 (S_INVB) C-6708
CN607 Scanner cooling fan (FM2) C-6301
Scanner home sensor (PS1), APS sensor/1 (PS3), /
2 (PS4), APS timing sensor (PS2), ADF open/close C-6101
CN609 switch (PS1)
AC drive CN120 Noise filter (NF), CN121 loop back C-3911
board (ACDB) Dehumidifier heater (DH), noise filter (NF), CN120
- Nothing occurs
CN121 loop back
Printer control board (PRCB) (connector between
C-3911
CN152 boards)
C-2221
CN153 boards)
Fusing control board/1 (FUSCB1), /2 (FUSCB2: only
C-3911
CN157 for Europe)
CN569 Paper exit motor (M54), decurler motor (M55) C-0213 Occurs at feeding paper
C-2221
CN642 boards)
CN643 1st transfer pressure release motor (M19) C-2221
Overall control CN13 Relay board /U (RBU) - Normal start
board (OACB) DC power supply /1 (DCPS1) (connector between
-
CN204 boards) Operation panel does not turn ON
C-C101
CN215 boards)
Operation board /1 (OB1) (connector between Operation panel does not turn ON (Power
-
CN216 boards) lamp is OFF)
CN217 Power supply cooling fan /1 (FM1) C-DC20
CN218 Sub power switch (SW2) - Operation panel does not turn ON
IPB fan/1 (FM5), /2 (FM6), HDD unit cooling fan/1
C-5304
CN248 (FM81), /2 (FM82)
No image on the operation panel (blank
-
CN249 LCD board (LCDB) screen)
CN1501 Memory control board /H3 (MCB/H3) C-D0E2
CN1502 Hard disk /C (HDD /C) C-D0E1(C)
CN1503 Hard disk /M (HDD /M) C-D0E1(M)
-
CN1507 boards) Power is not turned ON
Memory CN11 Memory control board /H1 (MCB/H1) C-D0E2
control board / CN12 Memory control board /H2 (MCB/H2) C-D0E2
1 (MCB1)
CN242 Hard disk /Y (HDD /Y) C-D0E1(Y)
CN246 Hard disk /K (HDD /K) C-D0E1(K)
CN247 Hard disk /A (HDD /A) AC-D0E1 (A)
Memory Hard disk /P (HDD /P)
control board / P(HDD) C-D0E2
P (MCB/P)
Printer image DC power supply /1 (DCPS1) (connector between
CN202 C-4725
processing boards)
board (PRIPB) CN225 Writing unit /Y C-4718
CN226 Writing unit /Y C-4722
CN229 Writing unit /M C-4719
CN230 Writing unit /M C-4723
CN233 Writing unit /C C-4720
CN234 Writing unit /C C-4724
CN237 Writing unit /K C-4721
CN238 Writing unit /K C-4725
CN240 -
boards) Normal start
K -81
Scanner CCD board (CCDB)

image
CN242 C-6708
processing
board (SCIPB)
2.5 Solution 1 (C-0001_0300)

2.5.1 C-0001
Code
C-0001
Classification
Main body: Communication error
Cause
Communication error between the printer control board (PRCB) and the PF drive board (PFDB) or LU drive board (LUDB).
Measures to take when alert occurs
The main body stops immediately to turn OFF the power relay (RL1).
Estimated abnormal parts
Printer control board (PRCB)
PF drive board (PFDB)
LU drive board (LUDB)
Correction
Turn OFF/ON the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body.
Note
The message "Please turn on power again" is displayed on the touch panel.
Solution
1. Turn OFF the sub power switch and unplug the power plug. Restart the main body after 10 seconds.
2. Check the connection status of PRCB connector, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection status of PFDB or LUDB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace PRCB
5. Replace PFDB or LUDB
Faulty part isolation DIPSW
Control while detached
2.5.2 C-0002
Code
C-0002
Classification
Cause
Communication error between the printer control board (PRCB) and the conveyance drive board (CDB).
Conveyance drive board (CDB)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the connection status of CDB connector, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace PRCB.
5. Replace CDB.
2.5.3 C-0003
Code
C-0003
Classification
Cause
Communication error between the printer control board (PRCB) and the conveyance drive board (CDB).
Correction
Note
K -82
Solution
3. Check the connection status of CDB connector, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace PRCB.
5. Replace CDB.
2.5.4 C-0101
Code
C-0101
Classification
Main body: Paper feed motor abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of M41 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper feed motor (M41) is ON.
Paper feed motor (M41)
Correction
Note
"Please call service" is displayed.
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body
(1/3):16-E)
3. Replace M41.
4. Replace PRCB
2.5.5 C-0102
Code
C-0102
Classification
LU: LU paper feed motor abnormality
Cause
Interlock switch /1 (MS1), /2 (MS2)
Upper door sensor (PS100), front door sensor (PS115)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between LUDB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the I/O of the interlock switch and sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality (Wiring diagram: LU: 6-C, 8-B)
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: LU: 5-B)
4. Replace M1.
5. Replace LUDB.
DIPSW18-3
LU paper feed is not available
2.5.6 C-0103
Code
C-0103
Classification
PF: PF paper feed motor abnormality
Cause
K -83

Front door open/close switch (SW1)
Front door open/close sensor (PS23)
Correction
Note
The message "Please call service" is displayed on the panel.
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PFDB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the I/O of the interlock switch and sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality (Wiring diagram: PF: 9-U, 10-U)
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF: 19-U)
4. Replace M1.
5. Replace PFDB
DIPSW35-0
DIPSW35-1
DIPSW35-2
DIPSW35-3
DIPSW35-4
DIPSW35-5
PF paper feed is not available
2.5.7 C-0201
Code
C-0201
Classification
Main body: Paper feed tray abnormality
Cause
The upper limit sensor /1 (PS30) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the paper lift motor /1 (M38) turns ON.
Paper lift motor /1 (M38)
Upper limit sensor /1 (PS30)
Pick-up solenoid /1 (SD7)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the paper loaded condition and the rear end restriction plate condition of the tray 1, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the solenoid and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring
diagram: Main body (1/3):14-E, 15-M)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (1/3): 14-M)
5. Replace PS30.
6. Replace SD7.
7. Replace M38 and PRCB at a time.
DIPSW18-0
Paper feed in tray 1 is unavailable
2.5.8 C-0202
Code
C-0202
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
K -84
Solution
diagram: Main body (1/3): 13-E, 18-M)
5. Replace PS36.
6. Replace SD8.
7. Replace M39, SD8 and PRCB at a time.
DIPSW18-1
2.5.9 C-0203
Code
C-0203
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
diagram: Main body (1/3): 13-E, 21-M)
5. Replace PS42.
6. Replace SD9.
7. Replace M40 and PRCB at a time.
DIPSW18-2
2.5.10 C-0204
Code
C-0204
Classification
LU: LU lift motor abnormality
Cause
A lock signal of M100 is detected while the paper lift motor (M100) is ON.
Upper limit sensor (PS109)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between LUDB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: LU: 5-H)
3. Replace PS109.
4. Replace M100.
5. Replace LUDB.
DIPSW18-3
K -85
2.5.11 C-0205
Code
C-0205
Classification
LU: LU lift motor abnormality
Cause
A lock signal of M100 is detected while the paper lift motor (M100) is ON.
Upper limit sensor (PS109)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the paper loaded condition and the rear end restriction plate condition of the LU tray, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between LUDB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: LU: 5-H)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: LU: 7-B)
5. Replace PS109.
6. Replace M100.
7. Replace LUDB.
2.5.12 C-0208
Code
C-0208
Classification
PF: Paper lift motor abnormality
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the paper loaded condition and the rear end restriction plate condition of the PF tray, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PFDB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF: 6-K)
5. Replace PS1.
6. Replace M2.
7. Replace PFDB.
DIPSW21-4
Paper feed in PF upper tray is unavailable
2.5.13 C-0209
Code
C-0209
Classification
Cause
Power supply line fuse for the paper lift motor /1 (M2) blows out.
Correction
Note
K -86
Solution
3. Replace M2 and PFDB at a time
DIPSW21-4
Paper feed in PF upper tray is unavailable
2.5.14 C-0211
Code
C-0211
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the paper loaded condition and the rear end restriction plate condition of the PF tray, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PFDB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF: 14-K)
5. Replace PS9.
6. Replace M3.
7. Replace PFDB.
DIPSW21-5
Paper feed in PF lower tray is unavailable
2.5.15 C-0212
Code
C-0212
Classification
Cause
Power supply line fuse for the paper lift motor /2 (M3) blows out.
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace M3 and PFDB at a time
DIPSW21-5
Paper feed in PF lower tray is unavailable
2.5.16 C-0213
Code
C-0213
Classification
Main body: Paper exit abnormality
Cause
The paper exit pressure home sensor (PS10) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after it turns OFF.
K -87

AC drive board (ACDB)
Paper exit motor (M54)
Paper exit pressure sensor (PS10)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the de-curler unit, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the paper exit drive gear system, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and the sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the connector connection and the wiring between ACDB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Check the connector connection and the wiring between ACDB and PRCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
6. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/3): 22-E)
(1/3): 11-B)
8. Replace PS10.
9. Replace M54.
10. Replace ACDB.
11. Replace PRCB
12. Replace M54 and ACDB at a time.
2.6 Solution 2 (C-0301_0400)

2.6.1 C-0301*
Code
C-0301*
Classification
Main body: Fan abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of FM47 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the main body fan (FM47) is ON.
Main body fan (FM47)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and the fun, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/3): 13-D)
3. Replace FM47 and PRCB at a time.
2.6.2 C-0302*
Code
C-0302*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of any of FM26 or FM28 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the tucking fan /1 (FM26)
and /3 (FM28) are ON.
Tucking fan /1 (FM26)
Tucking fan /3 (FM28)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/3): 22-E)
3. Replace FM26 or FM28 and PRCB at a time
K -88
2.6.3 C-0303
Code
C-0303
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM66 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while ADU cooling fan /1 (FM66) is ON.
ADU cooling fan /1 (FM66)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between CDB and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (1/3): 2-P)
3. Replace FM66 and CDB at a time.
2.6.4 C-0304*
Code
C-0304*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of any of FM61, FM62 or FM63 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper exit cooling
fans /1 (FM61), /2 (FM62) and /3 (FM63) are ON.
Paper exit fan /1 (FM61)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan by I/O or by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/3): 8-D)
3. Replace FM61, FM62 or FM63 and PRCB at a time
2.6.5 C-0305*
Code
C-0305*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM36 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the deodorization fan (FM36) is ON.
Deodorization fan (FM36)
Correction
Note
Solution
K -89
2.6.6 C-0306
Code
C-0306
Classification
LU: LU fan abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of FM1 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper feed assist fan /Fr (FM1) is ON.
Paper feed assist fan /Fr (FM1)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between LUDB and the fun, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Rotate the fan by I/O or by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: LU: 6-H)
3. Replace FM1and LUDB at a time.
2.6.7 C-0307
Code
C-0307
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM2 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper feed assist fan /Rr (FM2) is ON.
Paper feed assist fan /Rr (FM2)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan by I/O or by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: LU: 7-H)
3. Replace FM2 and LUDB at a time
2.6.8 C-0308
Code
C-0308
Classification
PF: PF fan abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of FM1 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper feed assist fan /Fr11 (FM1) is ON.
Paper feed assist fan /Fr11 (FM1)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PFDB and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF: 11-K)
3. Replace FM1 and PFDB at a time.
2.6.9 C-0309
Code
K -90
C-0309
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
2.6.10 C-0310
Code
C-0310
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM2 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper feed assist fan /Rr11 (FM2) is ON.
Paper feed assist fan /Rr11 (FM2)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.6.11 C-0311
Code
C-0311
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
2.6.12 C-0312
Code
C-0312
Classification
Cause
K -91
Correction
Note
Solution
2.6.13 C-0313
Code
C-0313
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
2.6.14 C-0314
Code
C-0314
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
2.6.15 C-0315
Code
C-0315
Classification
Cause
K -92

Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF : 7-H)
2.6.16 C-0316
Code
C-0316
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of any of FM11 or FM12 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the dehumidifier fans /1
(FM11) and /2 (FM12) are ON.
Dehumidifier fan /1 (FM11)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF: 24-D, 25-D)
3. Replace FM11 or FM12 and PFDB at a time
2.6.17 C-0317
Code
C-0317
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of any of FM13 or FM14 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the dehumidifier fans /3
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF: 23-F)
2.6.18 C-0318
Code
C-0318
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of any of FM10 or FM9 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the ventilation fan /1 (FM10)
K -93

Ventilation fan /1 (FM10)
Ventilation fan /2 (FM9)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF: 26-U)
2.6.19 C-0320
Code
C-0320
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM3 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the dehumidifier fan /1 (FM3) is ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between LUDB and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: LU: 4-C)
3. Replace FM3 and LUDB at a time.
2.6.20 C-0321
Code
C-0321
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM4 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the dehumidifier fan /2 (FM4) is ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan by I/O or by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: LU: 4-C)
3. Replace FM4and LUDB at a time
2.6.21 C-0322
Code
C-0322
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM67 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while ADU cooling fan /2 (FM67) is ON.
ADU cooling fan /2 (FM67)
K -94
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (1/3): 2-I)
2.6.22 C-0323*
Code
C-0323*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM62 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper exit fan /2 (FM62) is ON.
Correction
Note

Solution
3. Replace FM62.
4. Replace PRCB.
2.6.23 C-0324*
Code
C-0324*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM63 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper exit fan /3 (FM63) is ON.
Correction
Note

Solution
3. Replace FM63.
4. Replace PRCB.
2.7 Solution 3 (C-0401_0500)

2.7.1 C-0401
Code
C-0401
Classification
LU: LU power source abnormality
Cause
24VDC is not supplied to LU.
DC power supply /2 (DCPS/2)
Correction
K -95
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between LUDB and DCPS /2, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Replace LUDB.
3. Replace DCPS /2.
4. Replace LUDB and DCPS/2 at a time.
2.7.2 C-0402
Code
C-0402
Classification
LU: LU power source abnormality
Cause
12VDC is not supplied to LU.
DC power supply /1 (DCPS1)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between LUDB and DCPS1, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Replace LUDB.
3. Replace DCPS1.
4. Replace LUDB and DCPS1 at a time.
2.7.3 C-0403
Code
C-0403
Classification
PF: PF power source abnormality
Cause
24VDC is not supplied to PF.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PFDB and DCPS2, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Replace PFDB
3. Replace DCPS2.
4. Replace PFDB and DCPS2 at a time.
2.7.4 C-0404
Code
C-0404
Classification
Cause
Correction
K -96
Note
Solution
2. Replace PFDB.
3. Replace DCPS2.
2.7.5 C-0405
Code
C-0405
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PBDB and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Replace PFDB
3. Replace DCPS1.
2.7.6 C-0406
Code
C-0406
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Replace PFDB.
3. Replace DCPS2.
2.7.7 C-0407
Code
C-0407
Classification
PF: PF Tray 1 Heater high temperature hardware detection abnormality
Cause
24V power source abnormal signal is detected.
Temperature sensor /3 (TEMS/3)
AC drive board (ACDB) in PF
Correction
K -97
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PFDB and TEMS/3, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the installation condition of TEMS/3, and adjust/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF: 25-D)
3. Replace TEMS/3.
4. Replace PFDB.
5. Replace ACDB.
2.7.8 C-0408
Code
C-0408
Classification
PF: PF Tray 2 Heater high temperature hardware detection abnormality
Cause
24V power source abnormal signal is detected.
AC drive board (ACDB) in PF
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PFDB and TEMS/4, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the installation condition of TEMS/4, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF: 24-F)
3. Replace TEMS/4.
4. Replace PFDB
5. Replace ACDB.
2.7.9 C-0409
Code
C-0409
Classification
PF: PF fan heater abnormality
Cause
Fan heater /Up (DH3) high temperature abnormality
The temperature sensor /3 (TEMS/3) detects the prescribed or higher value continuously for a specified period of time.
AC drive board in PF (ACDB)
Fan heater /Up (DH3)
Dehumidifier fans /1 (FM11) and /2 (FM12)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connection between ACDB and the noise filter of PF.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PFDB, the temperature sensor, and the fan and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between ACDB and the heater, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PFDB and ACDB, and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Rotate the fan by I/O or hand, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF: 24-D, 25-D)
6. Check the temperature and the installation condition of the fan heater and the installation condition of the temperature sensor, and
repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF: 22-D, 25-D)
7. Replace TEMS/3.
8. Replace DH3.
9. Replace FM11 and FM12.
10. Replace ACDB.
11. Replace PFDB
K -98
2.7.10 C-0410
Code
C-0410
Classification
Cause
Fan heater /Lw (DH4) high temperature abnormality
The temperature sensor /4 (TEMS/4) detects the prescribed or higher value continuously for a specified period of time.
Fan heater /Lw (DH4)
Dehumidifier fans /3 (FM13) and /4 (FM14)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PFDB, the temperature sensor, and the fan and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Rotate the fan by I/O or hand, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF: 23-F)
repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF: 21-F, 24-F)
7. Replace TEMS/4.
8. Replace DH4.
10. Replace ACDB.
11. Replace PFDB
2.7.11 C-0411
Code
C-0411
Classification
Cause
Fan heater /Up (DH3) low temperature abnormality
The temperature sensor /3 (TEMS/3) detects the prescribed or lower value continuously for a specified period of time.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PFDB and the temperature sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace TEMS3.
7. Replace DH3.
8. Replace ACDB.
9. Replace PFDB
2.7.12 C-0412
Code
C-0412
Classification
K -99
Cause
Fan heater /Lw (DH4) low temperature abnormality
The temperature sensor /4 (TEMS/4) detects the prescribed or lower value continuously for a specified period of time.
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Check the temperature and the installation status of the fan heater and of the temperature sensor, and then repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace TEMS /4
7. Replace DH4
8. Replace ACDB.
9. Replace PFDB
2.7.13 C-0413
Code
C-0413
Classification
Cause
Fan heater /Up (DH3) temperature rise abnormality
The temperature detected by the temperature sensor /3 (TEMS/3) has not risen to a prescribed level within a specified period of time.
Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace TEMS/3.
7. Replace DH3.
8. Replace ACDB.
9. Replace PFDB
10. Replace ACDB and DH3 at a time.
2.7.14 C-0414
Code
C-0414
Classification
Cause
Fan heater /Lw (DH4) temperature rise abnormality
The temperature detected by the temperature sensor /4 (TEMS/4) has not risen to a prescribed level within a specified period of time.
K -100

Correction
Note
Solution
repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF: 21-F, 24-F)
6. Replace TEMS/4.
7. Replace DH4.
8. Replace ACDB.
9. Replace PFDB
10. Replace ACDB and DH4 at a time.
2.7.15 C-0415
Code
C-0415
Classification
LU: LU temperature sensor abnormality
Cause
The temperature sensor /2 (TEMS2) detects an error detection signal continuously for a specified period of time. (Hardware detection)
Dehumidification heater /3 (DH2)
Temperature sensor /2 (TEMS2)
AC Drive Assy
Main body AC drive board (ACDB)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between LUDB, the temperature sensor, and AC Drive Assy and repair it if any
abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between the main body ACDB and the heater, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the installation position of the temperature sensor and repair/replace it if any abnormality (Wiring diagram: LU: 8-H, 4-C)
4. Replace TEMS2.
5. Replace DH2.
6. Replace AC Drive Assy.
7. Replace LUDB.
8. Replace main body ACDB.
2.7.16 C-0416
Code
C-0416
Classification
LU: LU dehumidifier heater abnormality
Cause
Dehumidifier heater /3 (DH2) high temperature abnormality
The temperature sensor /2 (TEMS2) detects the prescribed or higher value continuously for a specified period of time. (Software detection)
AC drive assy
Correction
Note
Solution
K -101
abnormality.
3. Check the temperature and the installation condition of the dehumidifier heater and the installation condition of the temperature
sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: LU: 4-B, 8-H, 4-C)
4. Replace TEMS2.
5. Replace DH2.
7. Replace LUDB.
8. Replacing ACDB of the main body.
2.7.17 C-0417
Code
C-0417
Classification
Cause
Dehumidifier heater /3 (DH2) low temperature abnormality
The temperature sensor (TEMS) detects the prescribed or lower value continuously for a specified period of time.
AC Drive Assy
Correction
Note
Solution
abnormality.
4. Replace TEMS2.
5. Replace DH2.
7. Replace LUDB.
8. Replace main body ACDB.
2.7.18 C-0418
Code
C-0418
Classification
Cause
Dehumidifier heater /3 (DH2) temperature rise abnormality
The temperature detected by the temperature sensor (TEMS) has not risen to a prescribed level within a specified period of time.
AC drive assy
Correction
Note
Solution
abnormality.
4. Replace TEMS2.
5. Replace DH2.
K -102

7. Replace LUDB.
8. Replacing ACDB of the main body
2.8 Solution 4 (C-1001_1126)

2.8.1 C-1005
Code
C-1005
Classification
FS: FS abnormality
Cause
Communication error.
The main body and the FS stop immediately to turn OFF the main relay (RL1).
FNS control board (FNSCB)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Turn OFF the sub power switch, and then turn OFF the main power switch. Then unplug all the power plug. Restart the main body
after 10 seconds.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between the main body and each option, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection of the control board and the drive board in each option, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Rewrite the firmware of the option.
5. Replace the control board of the option corresponds to the malfunction code.
2.8.2 C-1006
Code
C-1006
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
The main body and the FD stop immediately to turn OFF the main relay (RL1).
Correction
Note
Solution
after 10 seconds.
2.8.3 C-1007
Code
C-1007
Classification
SD: SD-506 abnormality
Cause
The main body and the SD stop immediately to turn OFF the main relay (RL1).
Correction
K -103
Note
Solution
after 10 seconds.
2.8.4 C-1009
Code
C-1009
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
Communication error between Main CPU in the PB control board (PBCB) and Sub CPU1.
The main body and the PB stop immediately to turn OFF the main relay (RL1).
Control program
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Turn OFF the sub power switch and then turn OFF the main power switch. Then unplug all the power plug. Restart the main body after
10 seconds.
2. Check the connector connection of the control board and the drive board in PB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Rewrite the firmware of PB.
4. Replace PBCB.
2.8.5 C-1010
Code
C-1010
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
Communication error between Main CPU in the PB control board (PBCB) and Sub CPU2.
Control program
Correction
Note
Solution
1. After turning OFF the sub power switch, turn OFF the main power switch and unplug the power plug. Restart the main body after 10
seconds.
2. Check the connector connection of the control board and the drive board in PB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Rewrite the firmware of PB.
4. Replace PBCB.
2.8.6 C-1011
Code
C-1011
Classification
Cause
Paper feed error between the main body and PB.
K -104
Control program
Correction
Note
Solution
seconds.
2.8.7 C-1012
Code
C-1012
Classification
GP : GP-501 abnormality
Causes
Communication abnormality.
Resulting operation
The main body and the GP stop immediately to turn OFF the main relay (RL1).
Punch Controller PCB
Correction
Error conditions are cleared by turning OFF/ON the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body.
Note
"Please call service" is displayed on the touch panel.
Procedure
1. After turning OFF the sub power switch, turn OFF the main power switch and unplug the all the power plugs. Restart the main body
after 10 seconds.
DipSW
Control during separation
2.8.8 C-1013
Code
C-1013
Classification
RU: RU-509 abnormality
Cause
The main body and the RU stop immediately to turn OFF the main relay (RL1).
Correction
Note
Solution
2.8.9 C-1014
Code
C-1014
Classification
RU : RU-506 abnormality
Causes
Communication abnormality.
K -105
Resulting operation
Correction
Note
Procedure
1. After turning OFF the sub power switch, turn OFF the main power switch and unplug the all the power plugs. Restart the main body
after 10 seconds.
DipSW
2.8.10 C-1101 (FS-531/612)

Code
C-1101 (FS-531/612)
Classification
FS: FS-531/612 abnormality
Cause
The shift unit does not get to the shift position or the home position within a specified period of time.
Shift roller motor (M2)
Shift roller home sensor (PS18)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the shift unit, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between FNSCB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FS-612: 2-B)
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FS-612: 3-B)
5. Replace PS18.
6. Replace M2.
7. Replace FNSCB.
2.8.11 C-1102 (FS-521)

Code
C-1102 (FS-521)
Classification
FS: FS-521 abnormality
Cause
The tray up down motor (M3) does not turn OFF even when a specified period of time elapses after it starts operations. Or, it operates for
more than the allowed time at a speed out of the specified one.
FNS drive board (FNSDB)
Main tray up down motor (M3)
Main tray upper limit sensor (PS2)
Main tray lower limit sensor (PS3)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the tray up/down section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between FNSDB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between FNSDB and FNSCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the sensor operation, LED emission and light-receiving path, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FS-521:
2-B, 4-B)
K -106
6. Replace PS3.
7. Replace LED1 and PS16.
8. Replace M3.
9. Replace FNSDB.
10. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
FS main tray and stapling are not available
2.8.12 C-1102 (FS-531/612)

Code
C-1102 (FS-531/612)
Classification
Cause
The main tray upper limit sensor (PS2) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the main tray up down motor (M3) turns
ON.
Main tray up down motor (M3)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the tray up/down section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FS-612: 5-B)
5. Replace PS2.
6. Replace M3.
7. Replace FNSCB.
2.8.13 C-1103 (FS-521)

Code
C-1103 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
The alignment home sensors /Rr (PS8) and /Fr (PS31) do not turn ON within a specified period of time after the home position search
operation of the alignment motors /Rr (M5) and /Fr (M22) starts.
Alignment motor /Rr (M5)
Alignment motor /Fr (M22)
Alignment home sensor /Rr (PS8)
Alignment home sensor /Fr (PS31)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FS-521:4-G)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FS-521:3-G, 4-G)
6. Replace PS8 or PS31.
7. Replace M5.
8. Replace M22.
9. Replace FNSDB.
10. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
K -107
2.8.14 C-1103 (FS-531/612)

Code
C-1103 (FS-531/612)
Classification
Cause
The alignment home sensor /Up (PS8) does not turn ON or OFF within a specified period of time after the alignment motor (M5) turns ON.
Relay board (RB)
Alignment motor /Up (M5)
Alignment home sensor /Up (PS8)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between RB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FS-612: 7-I)
5. Replace PS8.
6. Replace M5.
7. Replace RB.
2.8.15 C-1104 (FS-521)

Code
C-1104 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
The main tray paper exit motor (M7) operates for more than the allowed time at a speed out of the specified one.
Main tray exit motor (M7)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between FNSDB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace M7.
5. Replace FNSDB.
6. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
2.8.16 C-1104 (FS-531/612)

Code
C-1104 (FS-531/612)
Classification
Cause
A prescribed speed is not obtained within a specified period of time after the paper exit roller motor (M7) turns ON.
Paper exit roller motor (M7)
Correction
K -108
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between FNSCB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Replace M7.
4. Replace FNSCB.
2.8.17 C-1105 (FS-521)

Code
C-1105 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
The paper exit opening unit does not get to the specified opening position within a specified period of time after the paper exit opening
motor (M8) starts operations.
Paper exit opening motor (M8)
Paper exit opening home sensor (PS12)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the paper exit opening section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FS-521:2-C)
5. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FS-521:3-B)
6. Replace PS12.
7. Replace M8.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
2.8.18 C-1105 (FS-531/612)

Code
C-1105 (FS-531/612)
Classification
Cause
The paper exit home sensor (PS12) does not turn ON or OFF within a specified period of time after the paper exit opening motor (M8)
turns ON.
Paper exit opening motor (M8)
Paper exit home sensor (PS12)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the paper exit opening section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace PS12.
6. Replace M8.
7. Replace FNSCB.
K -109
2.8.19 C-1106 (FS-521)

Code
C-1106 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
The stapler movement home sensor (PS11) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the home position search operation of
the stapler movement motor (M11) starts.
Stapler movement motor (M11)
Stapler movement home sensor (PS11)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the stapler movement section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FS-521: 5-G)
5. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FS-521: 2-G)
6. Replace PS11.
7. Replace M11.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-3
The use of staple is unavailable
2.8.20 C-1106 (FS-531/612)

Code
C-1106 (FS-531/612)
Classification
Cause
The Stapler movement home sensor (PS11) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the stapler movement motor (M11)
turns ON.
Relay board (RB)
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FS-612: 7-I)
5. Replace PS11.
6. Replace M11.
7. Replace RB.
2.8.21 C-1107 (FS-521)

Code
C-1107 (FS-521)
Classification
FS: FS-521 abnormality (skew rotation)
Cause
The stapler rotation home sensor (PS14) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the home position search operation of the
stapler rotation motor (M4) starts.
K -110

Stapler rotation motor (M4)
Stapler rotation home sensor (PS14)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the stapler rotation section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS14.
7. Replace M4.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-3
2.8.22 C-1107 (FS-612)

Code
C-1107 (FS-612)
Classification
Cause
The clincher rotation home sensor (PS14) does not turn ON or OFF within a specified period of time after the clincher rotation motor (M4)
turns ON.
Relay board (RB)
Clincher rotation motor (M4)
Clincher rotation home sensor (PS14)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring betweenRB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace PS14.
6. Replace M4.
7. Replace RB.
2.8.23 C-1108 (FS-521)

Code
C-1108 (FS-521)
Classification
FS: FS-521 abnormality (vertical rotation)
Cause
The stapler rotation home sensor (PS14) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the home position search operation of the
stapler rotation motor (M4) starts.
Correction
Note
Solution
K -111
6. Replace PS14.
7. Replace M4.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-3
2.8.24 C-1108 (FS-612)

Code
C-1108 (FS-612)
Classification
Cause
The stapler rotation home sensor (PS13) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the stapler rotation motor (M6) turns ON.
Relay board (RB)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring betweenRB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace PS13.
6. Replace M6.
7. Replace RB.
2.8.25 C-1109 (FS-521)

Code
C-1109 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
After the stapler motor /Fr (M31) starts operations, it does not complete operations within a specified period of time, and the stapler home
sensor /Fr (PS41) does not turn ON.
Stapler board (SB)
Stapler motor /Fr (M31)
Stapler home sensor /Fr (PS41)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between FNSDB and the stapler, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Replacing the stapler assy
4. Replace FNSDB.
5. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-3
2.8.26 C-1109 (FS-531/612)

Code
C-1109 (FS-531/612)
K -112
Classification
Cause
The stapler motor home sensor /Fr (PS31) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the stapler motor /Fr (M14) turns ON.
Relay board (RB)
Stapler motor /Fr (M14)
Stapler motor home sensor /Fr (PS31)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between RB and the stapler, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Replace RB.
2.8.27 C-1110 (FS-521)

Code
C-1110 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
After the stapler motor /Rr (M30) starts operations, it does not complete operations within a specified period of time, and the stapler home
sensor /Rr (PS40) does not turn ON.
Stapler board (SB)
Stapler motor /Rr (M30)
Stapler home sensor /Rr (PS40)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between FNSDB and the stapler, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace FNSDB.
5. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-3
2.8.28 C-1110 (FS-531/612)

Code
C-1110 (FS-531/612)
Classification
Cause
The stapler motor home sensor /Rr (PS30) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the stapler motor /Rr (M9) turns ON.
Relay board (RB)
Stapler motor /Rr (M9)
Stapler motor home sensor /Rr (PS30)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace RB.
K -113
2.8.29 C-1111 (FS-612)

Code
C-1111 (FS-612)
Classification
Cause
The clincher motor home sensor /Fr (PS33) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the clincher motor /Fr (M15) turns ON.
Relay board (RB)
Clincher motor /Fr (M15)
Clincher motor home sensor /Fr (PS33)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace RB.
2.8.30 C-1112 (FS-612)

Code
C-1112 (FS-612)
Classification
Cause
The clincher motor home sensor /Rr (PS32) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the clincher motor /Rr (M10) turns ON.
Relay board (RB)
Clincher motor /Rr (M10)
Clincher motor home sensor /Rr (PS32)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace RB.
2.8.31 C-1113 (FS-521)

Code
C-1113 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
After the home position search operation of the rear stopper motor (M26) starts, the rear stopper home sensor (PS35) does not turn ON
Rear stopper motor (M26)
Rear stopper home sensor (PS35)
Correction
Note
Solution
K -114
6. Replace PS14.
7. Replace M26.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
2.8.32 C-1113 (FS-612)

Code
C-1113 (FS-612)
Classification
Cause
After the home position search operation of saddle stitching stopper motor (M18) starts, the saddle stitching stopper home sensor (PS23)
does not turn ON within a specified period of time.
Relay board (RB)
Saddle stitching stopper motor (M18)
Saddle stitching stopper home sensor (PS23)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the saddle stitching section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace PS23.
6. Replace M18.
7. Replace RB.
DIPSW18-5
The use of multi-half folding, saddle stitching and multi-tri-folding unavailable
2.8.33 C-1114 (FS-612)

Code
C-1114 (FS-612)
Classification
Cause
The alignment home sensor /Lw (PS24) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the alignment motor /Lw (M16) turns ON.
Relay board (RB)
Alignment motor /Lw (M16)
Alignment home sensor /Lw (PS24)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the stacker section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace PS24.
6. Replace M16.
7. Replace RB.
DIPSW18-5
2.8.34 C-1115 (FS-612)

Code
K -115
C-1115 (FS-612)
Classification
Cause
The folding knife home sensor (PS22) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the folding knife motor (M19) turns ON.
Relay board (RB)
Folding knife motor (M19)
Folding knife home sensor (PS22)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the folding section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace PS22.
6. Replace M19.
7. Replace RB.
DIPSW18-5
(FS not connected)
2.8.35 C-1116 (FS-612)

Code
C-1116 (FS-612)
Classification
Cause
A prescribed speed is not obtained within a specified period of time after the folding transfer motor (M20) turns ON.
Relay board (RB)
Folding transfer motor (M20)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the folding section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between RB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace M20.
5. Replace RB.
DIPSW18-5
(FS not connected)
2.8.36 C-1124
Code
C-1124
Classification
PI: PI abnormality
Cause
The tray upper limit sensor /Lw (PS209) or the tray lower limit sensor /Lw (PS210) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after
the Tray lift motor /Lw (M202) turns ON.
PI drive board (PIDB)
Tray lift motor /Lw (M202)
Tray upper limit sensor /Lw (PS209)
Tray lower limit sensor /Lw (PS210)
Correction
K -116
Note
Solution
1. Check the PI lower tray section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PIDB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:PI: 5-B)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PI: 6-B)
5. Replace M202.
6. Replace PS209.
7. Replace PS210.
8. Replace PIDB.
DIPSW18-6
PI unusable
(PI not connected)
2.8.37 C-1125
Code
C-1125
Classification
PI: PI abnormality
Cause
The tray upper limit sensor /Up (PS205) or the tray lower limit sensor /Up (PS204) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after
the tray lift motor /Up (M201) turns ON.
Tray lift motor /Up (M201)
Tray upper limit sensor /Up (PS205)
Tray lower limit sensor /Up (PS204)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PI: 4-B)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PI: 4-B)
5. Replace M201.
6. Replace PS204.
7. Replace PS205.
8. Replace PIDB.
DIPSW18-6
PI unusable
(PI not connected)
2.8.38 C-1126
Code
C-1126
Classification
PI: PI abnormality
Cause
A prescribed speed is not obtained within a specified period of time after the conveyance motor (M203) turns ON.
Conveyance motor (M203)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PIDB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace M203.
K -117
5. Replace PIDB.
DIPSW18-6
PI unusable
(PI not connected)
2.9 Solution 5 (C-1127_1230)

2.9.1 C-1127
Code
C-1127
Classification
PK: PK abnormality
Cause
The punch shift home sensor (PS303) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the punch shift motor (M302) turns ON.
Punch drive board (PDB)
Punch shift motor (M302)
Punch shift home sensor (PS303)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the punch kit, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PDB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:PK:7-C)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M302.
6. Replace PS303.
7. Replace PDB.
DIPSW19-5
PK unusable
(PK not connected)
2.9.2 C-1132
Code
C-1132
Classification
PK: PK abnormality
Cause
The punch home sensor (PS301) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the punch motor (M301) turns ON.
Punch motor (M301)
Punch home sensor (PS301)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the punch kit, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PDB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PK: 4-C)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M301.
6. Replace PS301.
7. Replace PDB.
DIPSW19-5
PK unusable
(PK not connected)
K -118
2.9.3 C-1137 (FS-531/612)

Code
C-1137 (FS-531/612)
Classification
Cause
The gate home sensor (PS16) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the gate motor (M12) turns ON.
Gate motor (M12)
Gate home sensor (PS16)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FNSCB.
2.9.4 C-1140 (FS-521)

Code
C-1140 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
After the paper exit arm motor /Fr (M23) starts operations, it does not complete operations within a specified period of time, and the paper
exit arm home sensor /Fr (PS9) does not turn ON. Or, it operates for more than the allowed time at a speed out of the specified one.
Paper exit arm motor (M23)
Paper exit arm home sensor (PS9)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the paper exit arm section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS9.
7. Replace M23.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
2.9.5 C-1141 (FS-521)

Code
C-1141 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
The stack assist home sensor (PS32) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the home position search operation of the
stack assist motor (M24) starts.
Stack assist guide motor (M24)
Stack assist home sensor (PS32)
Correction
K -119
Note
Solution
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FS-521:5-G)
6. Replace PS32.
7. Replace M24.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
2.9.6 C-1142 (FS-521)

Code
C-1142 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
The intermediate roller home sensor (PS33) does not turn ON even after a specified period of time after the intermediate roller open/close
motor (M25) starts the home position search operation.
Alignment motor /Fr (M22)
Alignment motor /Rr (M5)
Intermediate roller release solenoid (SD7)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the intermediate roller open close section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS33.
7. Replace M25.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
2.9.7 C-1143 (FS-521)

Code
C-1143 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
The conveyance motor (M1) does not turn ON when the start button is turned ON. Or the conveyance motor (M1) does not shift the speed
for each processing.
Paper exit sensor (PS37)
FNS entrance sensor (PS4)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
K -120
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between FNSDB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M1.
6. Replace FNSDB.
7. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-5
FS unusable
(FS not connected)
2.9.8 C-1144 (FS-521)

Code
C-1144 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
The paper exit alignment plate home sensor /Fr (PS18) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the paper exit alignment
motor /Fr (M15) starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M15 starts the operation, it does
not stop.
Paper exit alignment motor /Fr (M15)
Paper exit alignment plate home sensor /Fr (PS18)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the front side of the paper exit alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS18.
7. Replace M15.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
2.9.9 C-1145 (FS-521)

Code
C-1145 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
The paper exit alignment plate home sensor /Rr (PS19) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the paper exit alignment
motor /Rr (M14) starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M14 starts the operation, it does
not stop.
Paper exit alignment motor /Rr (M14)
Paper exit alignment plate home sensor /Rr (PS19)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the rear side of the paper exit alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS19.
7. Replace M14.
K -121
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
2.9.10 C-1146 (FS-521)

Code
C-1146 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
The bypass roller release home sensor (PS13) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the bypass roller release motor
(M12) starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M12 starts the operation, it does not stop.
Bypass roller release motor (M12)
Bypass roller release home sensor (PS13)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the bypass roller section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FS-521:5-C)
6. Replace PS13.
7. Replace M12.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
2.9.11 C-1147 (FS-521)

Code
C-1147 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
The paper exit alignment plate retraction home sensor (PS24) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the paper exit
alignment plate retraction home motor (M18) starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M18
starts the operation, it does not stop.
Paper exit alignment plate retraction motor (M18)
Paper exit alignment plate retraction home sensor (PS24)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the paper exit alignment retraction section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FS-521: 7-M)
6. Replace PS24.
7. Replace M18.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
K -122
2.9.12 C-1148 (FS-521)

Code
C-1148 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
The stacker entrance roller release home sensor (PS23) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the stacker entrance roller
release motor (M16) starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M16 starts the operation, it
does not stop.
Stacker entrance roller release motor (M16)
Stacker entrance roller release home sensor (PS23)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the stacker entrance roller release section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS23.
7. Replace M16.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
2.9.13 C-1201
Code
C-1201
Classification
LS (1st tandem): LS abnormality
Cause
The stacker tray encoder sensor (PS2) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the stacker tray up down motor (M1) turns
ON. Or, the initial operation or the stacker tray down operation is not completed within a specified period of time.
The main body and the LS stop immediately to turn OFF the main relay (RL1).
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the stacker tray up down section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between LSCB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:LS-505:5-A)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:LS-505:5-A)
5. Replace PS2.
6. Replace M1.
7. Replace LSCB.
DIPSW6-6
LS (1st tandem) unusable
2.9.14 C-1202
Code
C-1202
Classification
Cause
K -123
The shift unit home sensor (PS11) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the shift unit motor (M5) turns ON. Or, PS11
Shift unit motor (M5)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the shift unit section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: LS-505: 6-A)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: LS-505: 5-H)
5. Replace PS11.
6. Replace M5.
7. Replace LSCB.
DIPSW6-6
2.9.15 C-1203
Code
C-1203
Classification
Cause
The alignment plate home sensor (PS12) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the alignment motor (M7) turns ON. Or,
PS12 does not turn ON within a specified period of time.
Alignment motor (M7)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace PS12.
6. Replace M7.
7. Replace LSCB.
DIPSW6-6
2.9.16 C-1204
Code
C-1204
Classification
Cause
The grip conveyance home sensor (PS5) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the grip conveyance motor (M4) turns
ON.
Grip conveyance motor (M4)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the grip conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
K -124
5. Replace PS5.
6. Replace M4.
7. Replace LSCB.
DIPSW6-6
2.9.17 C-1205
Code
C-1205
Classification
Cause
The stacker tray upper limit switch (MS2) is ON when the stacker tray up down motor (M1) is in the up operation.
Stacker tray upper limit switch (MS2)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between LSCB and motor/switch, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the operation of the switch, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: LS-505: 7-A)
5. Replace MS2.
6. Replace M1.
7. Replace LSCB.
DIPSW6-6
2.9.18 C-1206
Code
C-1206
Classification
Cause
The stacker tray lower limit switch (MS3) is ON when the stacker tray up down motor (M1) is in the down operation.
Stacker tray lower limit switch (MS3)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace MS3.
6. Replace M1.
7. Replace LSCB.
DIPSW6-6
2.9.19 C-1211
Code
C-1211
Classification
LS (2nd tandem): LS abnormality
Cause
K -125
The stacker tray encoder sensor (PS2) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the stacker tray up down motor (M1) turns
ON. Or, the initial operation or the stacker tray down operation is not completed within a specified period of time.
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:LS-505:5-A)
5. Replace PS2.
6. Replace M1.
7. Replace LSCB.
DIPSW6-6
2.9.20 C-1212
Code
C-1212
Classification
Cause
The shift unit home sensor (PS11) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the shift unit motor (M5) turns ON. Or, PS11
Shift unit motor (M5)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the shift unit section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace PS11.
6. Replace M5.
7. Replace LSCB.
DIPSW6-6
2.9.21 C-1213
Code
C-1213
Classification
Cause
The alignment plate home sensor (PS12) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the alignment motor (M7) turns ON. Or,
PS12 does not turn ON within a specified period of time.
Correction
Note
Solution
K -126
5. Replace PS12.
6. Replace M7.
7. Replace LSCB.
DIPSW6-6
2.9.22 C-1214
Code
C-1214
Classification
Cause
The grip conveyance home sensor (PS5) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the grip conveyance motor (M4) turns
ON.
Grip conveyance motor (M4)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the grip conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace PS5.
6. Replace M4.
7. Replace LSCB.
DIPSW6-6
2.9.23 C-1215
Code
C-1215
Classification
Cause
The stacker tray upper limit switch (MS2) is ON when the stacker tray up down motor (M1) is in the up operation.
Stacker tray upper limit switch (MS2)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace MS2.
6. Replace M1.
7. Replace LSCB.
DIPSW6-6
2.9.24 C-1216
Code
C-1216
Classification
Cause
K -127
The stacker tray lower limit switch (MS3) is ON when the stacker tray up down motor (M1) is in the down operation.
Stacker tray lower limit switch (MS3)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace MS3.
6. Replace M1.
7. Replace LSCB.
DIPSW6-6
2.9.25 C-1221
Code
C-1221
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
The 1st folding cam home sensor (PS55) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the 1st folding release motor (M14) turns
ON.
1st folding release motor (M14)
Folding drive board (FDB)
1st folding cam home sensor (PS55)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the 1st folding section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between FDB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FD-503: 1-B)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FD-503: 2-B)
5. Replace PS55.
6. Replace M14.
7. Replace FDB.
DIPSW6-0
The use of the folding function and the punch section is unavailable
2.9.26 C-1222
Code
C-1222
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
The 2nd folding cam home sensor (PS56) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the 2nd folding release motor (M15)
turns ON.
2nd folding release motor (M15)
2nd folding cam home sensor (PS56)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the 2nd folding section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
K -128
5. Replace PS56.
6. Replace M15.
7. Replace FDB.
DIPSW6-0
2.9.27 C-1223
Code
C-1223
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
The 3rd folding cam home sensor (PS57) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the 3rd folding release motor (M16) turns
ON.
3rd folding release motor (M16)
3rd folding cam home sensor (PS57)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the 3rd folding section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace PS57.
6. Replace M16.
7. Replace FDB.
DIPSW6-0
2.9.28 C-1224
Code
C-1224
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
The 2 holes punch home sensor (PS8) does not turn OFF within a specified period of time after the 2-holes punch home position return
operation starts. Or, after the punch motor (M10) turns ON, the 2 holes punch home sensor (PS8) does not turn OFF.
Punch motor (M10)
2 holes punch home sensor (PS8)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the 2-hole punch section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FD-503:5-F)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FD-503: 5-E)
5. Replace PS8.
6. Replace M10.
7. Replace PDB.
DIPSW6-0
K -129
2.9.29 C-1225
Code
C-1225
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
The 3 holes/4 holes punch home sensor (PS9) does not turn OFF within a specified period of time after the 3 holes/4 holes punch home
position return operation starts. Or, after the punch motor (M10) turns ON, the 3 holes/4 holes punch home sensor (PS9) does not turn
OFF.
Punch motor (M10)
3 holes/4 holes home sensor (PS9)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the 3-hole/4-hole punch section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FD-503:5-E)
5. Replace PS9.
6. Replace M10.
7. Replace PDB.
DIPSW6-0
2.9.30 C-1226
Code
C-1226
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
The alignment plate home sensor (PS10) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the alignment plate home position return
operation starts. Or, after the alignment motor (M12) turns ON, the alignment plate home sensor (PS10) does not turn OFF.
Alignment plate home sensor (PS10)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the punch alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FD-503:3-D)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FD-503:5-D)
5. Replace PS10.
6. Replace M12.
7. Replace PDB.
DIPSW6-0
2.9.31 C-1227
Code
C-1227
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
The punch registration home sensor (PS11) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the punch registration claw home
position return operation starts. Or, after the punch registration motor (M13) turns ON, the punch registration home sensor (PS11) does
not turn OFF.
K -130

Punch registration motor (M13)
Punch registration home sensor (PS11)
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FD-503: 5-E)
5. Replace PS11.
6. Replace M13.
7. Replace PDB.
DIPSW6-0
2.9.32 C-1228
Code
C-1228
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
The main tray upper limit sensor (PS20) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the main tray home position search starts.
Or, after the tray up down motor (M11) turns ON, the main tray upper limit sensor (PS20) does not turn OFF.
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FD-503: 3-D)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FD-503: 6-D)
5. Replace PS20.
6. Replace M11.
7. Replace PDB.
DIPSW6-1
Main tray unusable
2.9.33 C-1229
Code
C-1229
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
The main tray lower limit sensor (PS22) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the tray up down motor (M11) is in the
down operation.
Main tray lower limit sensor (PS22)
Correction
Note
Solution
K -131
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FD-503: 3-D)
5. Replace PS22.
6. Replace M11.
7. Replace PDB.
DIPSW6-1
Main tray unusable
2.9.34 C-1230
Code
C-1230
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
After the FD paper lift motor /Up (M8) is in the down operation, the PI lift plate home sensor /Up (PS34) does not turn ON within a
specified period of time. Or, after the paper lift motor /Up (M8) is in the up operation, the PI tray upper limit sensor /Up (PS32) does not
turn ON.
Paper lift motor /Up (M8)
PI lift plate home sensor /Up (PS34)
PI upper limit sensor /Up (PS32)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the PI upper tray section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FD-503:9-A)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FD-503:8-A, 9-A)
6. Replace M8.
7. Replace PIDB.
DIPSW6-2
The use of the PI section unavailable
2.10 Solution 6 (C-1231_1270)

2.10.1 C-1231
Code
C-1231
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
After the FD paper lift motor /Lw (M9) is in the down operation, the PI lift plate home sensor /Lw (PS40) does not turn ON within a
specified period of time. Or, after the paper lift motor /Lw (M9) is in the up operation, the PI upper limit sensor /Lw (PS38) does not turn
ON.
Paper lift motor /Lw (M9)
PI lift plate home sensor /Lw (PS40)
PI upper limit sensor /Lw (PS38)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FD-503: 9-A)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FD-503: 7-A, 8-A)
6. Replace M9.
7. Replace PIDB.
DIPSW6-2
K -132
2.10.2 C-1232
Code
C-1232
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the entrance conveyance motor (M1) is ON.
Paper lift motor /Lw (M9)
PI lift plate home sensor /Lw (PS40)
PI upper limit sensor /Lw (PS38)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the entrance conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PDB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace M1.
5. Replace PDB.
2.10.3 C-1233
Code
C-1233
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of M3 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the intermediate conveyance motor (M3) is ON.
Intermediate conveyance motor (M3)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the intermediate conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace M3.
5. Replace PDB.
2.10.4 C-1234
Code
C-1234
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of M7 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the PI conveyance motor (M7) is ON.
PI conveyance motor (M7)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the PI conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PIDB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
K -133
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FD-503: 9-A)
4. Replace M7.
5. Replace PIDB.
DIPSW6-2
2.10.5 C-1235
Code
C-1235
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of M17 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the main tray exit motor (M17) is ON.
Main tray exit motor (M17)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the main tray exit section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace M17.
5. Replace PDB.
2.10.6 C-1241
Code
C-1241
Classification
Cause
The scraps press home sensor (PS48) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the bundle exit motor (M5) starts the home
position search operation.
Bundle exit motor (M5)
Scraps press home sensor (PS48)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the bundle exit section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SDDB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SDDB and SDCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: SD-506: 22-D)
5. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: SD-506: 24-D)
6. Replace PS48.
7. Replace M5.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
The use of the saddle stitching, multi-center folding and trimmer unavailable
2.10.7 C-1242
Code
C-1242
Classification
K -134
Cause
The folding main scan alignment home sensor /Fr1 (PS18) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the folding main scan
alignment motor /Fr (M7) starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M7 starts the operation,
it does not stop.
Folding main scan alignment motor /Fr (M7)
Folding main scan alignment home sensor /Fr1 (PS18)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the folding main scan alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS18.
7. Replace M7.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-2
DIPSW7-3
The use of the saddle stitching, multi-center folding, multi tri-folding and trimmer unavailable
2.10.8 C-1243
Code
C-1243
Classification
Cause
The folding exit home sensor (PS24) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the folding sub scan alignment exit motor
(M8) starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M8 starts to decelerate, it does not stop.
Folding sub scan alignment exit motor (M8)
Folding exit home sensor (PS24)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the folding sub scan alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS24.
7. Replace M8.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-2
DIPSW7-3
The use of the saddle stitching, multi-center folding, multi-tri-folding and trimmer unavailable
2.10.9 C-1244
Code
C-1244
Classification
K -135
Cause
The saddle stitching alignment home sensor /Rt (PS28) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the saddle stitching
alignment motor /Rt (M9) starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M9 starts the operation,
it does not stop.
Saddle stitching alignment motor /Rt (M9)
Saddle stitching alignment home sensor /Rt (PS28)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the saddle stitching alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS28.
7. Replace M9.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
2.10.10 C-1245
Code
C-1245
Classification
Cause
The bundle arm home sensor (PS32) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the bundle arm motor (M10) starts the home
position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M10 starts the operation, it does not stop.
Bundle arm motor (M10)
Bundle arm home sensor (PS32)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the bundle arm section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS32.
7. Replace M10.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
2.10.11 C-1246
Code
C-1246
Classification
Cause
K -136
The bundle clip upper limit sensor (PS33) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the bundle clip motor (M11) starts the
home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M11 starts the operation, it does not stop.
Bundle clip motor (M11)
Bundle clip upper limit sensor (PS33)
Bundle clip lower limit sensor (PS30)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the bundle clip section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:SD-506:16-D)
5. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:SD-506:19-D)
6. Replace PS33.
7. Replace M11.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
2.10.12 C-1247
Code
C-1247
Classification
Cause
The bundle registration home sensor (PS34) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the bundle registration motor (M12)
starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M12 starts the operation, it does not stop.
Bundle registration motor (M12)
Bundle registration home sensor (PS34)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the bundle registration section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS34.
7. Replace M12.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
2.10.13 C-1248
Code
C-1248
Classification
Cause
The overlap home sensor (PS17) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the overlap motor (M13) starts the home position
search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M13 starts the operation, it does not stop.
K -137

Overlap motor (M13)
Overlap home sensor (PS17)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the overlap section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS17.
7. Replace M13.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-2
DIPSW7-3
2.10.14 C-1249
Code
C-1249
Classification
Cause
The folding main scan alignment home sensor /Rr (PS19) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the folding main scan
alignment motor /Rr (M14) starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M14 starts the
Folding main scan alignment motor /Rr (M14)
Folding main scan alignment home sensor /Rr (PS19)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the folding main scan alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS19.
7. Replace M14.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-2
DIPSW7-3
2.10.15 C-1250
Code
C-1250
Classification
Cause
The stapler movement home sensor (PS25) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the home position search operation of
the stapler movement motor (M15) starts. Or, even after a specified period of time after M15 starts the operation, it does not stop.
K -138

Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace PS25.
7. Replace M15.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
2.10.16 C-1251
Code
C-1251
Classification
Cause
The saddle stitching alignment home sensor /Lt (PS29) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the saddle stitching
alignment motor /Lt (M16) starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M16 starts the
Saddle stitching alignment motor /Lt (M16)
Saddle stitching alignment home sensor /Lt (PS29)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the saddle stitching alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS29.
7. Replace M16.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
2.10.17 C-1252
Code
C-1252
Classification
Cause
The bundle press movement home sensor (PS36) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the bundle press movement
motor (M17) starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M17 starts the operation, it does not
stop.
K -139
Bundle press movement motor (M17)
Bundle press movement home sensor (PS36)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the bundle press movement section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS36.
7. Replace M17.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
2.10.18 C-1253
Code
C-1253
Classification
Cause
The 1st folding blade home sensor (PS21) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the 1st folding blade motor (M18) starts
the home position search operation. Or 1st folding blade home sensor /1 (PS20) does not turned ON within a specified period of time after
M18 starts the operation.
1st folding blade motor (M18)
1st folding blade home sensor /1 (PS20), /2 (PS21)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the 1st folding section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS20.
7. Replace M18.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-2
DIPSW7-3
2.10.19 C-1254
Code
C-1254
Classification
Cause
The 2nd folding blade home sensor /2 (PS23) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the 2nd folding blade motor (M19)
starts the home position search operation. Or the 2nd folding blade home sensor /1 (PS22) does not turned ON within a specified period of
time after M19 starts the operation.
K -140
2nd folding blade motor (M19)
2nd folding blade home sensor /1 (PS22), /2 (PS23)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the 2nd folding section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:SD-506:12-D, 13-D)
6. Replace PS22.
7. Replace M19.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-2
The use of the multi-tri-folding unavailable
2.10.20 C-1255
Code
C-1255
Classification
Cause
The clincher up down home sensor (PS26) does not turn ON even after a specified period of time after the clincher up down motor (M20)
starts the home position search. Or, even after a specified period of time after M20 starts the operation, it does not stop.
Clincher up down motor (M20)
Clincher up down home sensor (PS26)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the clincher up down section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS26.
7. Replace M20.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
2.10.21 C-1256
Code
C-1256
Classification
Cause
The saddle stitching press home sensor (PS27) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the saddle stitching press motor
(M21) starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M21 starts the operation, it does not stop.
Saddle stitching press motor (M21)
Saddle stitching press home sensor (PS27)
K -141

Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the saddle stitching press section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS27.
7. Replace M21.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
2.10.22 C-1257
Code
C-1257
Classification
Cause
The bundle arm rotation home sensor (PS31) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the bundle arm rotation motor (M22)
starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M22 starts the operation, it does not stop.
Bundle arm rotation motor (M22)
Bundle arm rotation home sensor (PS31)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the bundle arm rotation section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS31.
7. Replace M22.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
2.10.23 C-1258
Code
C-1258
Classification
Cause
The bundle press home sensor (PS37) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the bundle press motor (M23) starts the
Bundle press motor (M23)
Bundle press home sensor (PS37)
Bundle press lower limit sensor (PS47)
Correction
K -142
Note
Solution
1. Check the bundle press section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
7. Replace M23.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
2.10.24 C-1259
Code
C-1259
Classification
Cause
The bundle press home sensor (PS35) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the bundle press stage up down motor
(M24) starts the home position search operation. Or PS35 or the bundle press stage up down upper limit sensor (PS45) does not turned
ON after a specified period of time M24 starts the operation.
Bundle press stage up down motor (M24)
Bundle press stage up down home sensor (PS35)
Bundle press stage up down limit sensor (PS45)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the bundle press stage up down section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: SD-506: 24-D, 25-D)
7. Replace M24.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
2.10.25 C-1260
Code
C-1260
Classification
Cause
The guide shaft home sensor (PS46) does not turn ON even after a specified period of time after the guide shaft motor (M25) starts the
Guide shaft motor (M25)
Guide shaft home sensor (PS46)
Correction
K -143
Note
Solution
1. Check the guide shaft, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS46.
7. Replace M25.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
2.10.26 C-1261
Code
C-1261
Classification
Cause
The stapler home sensor /Rt (HS1) or the clincher start sensor /Rt (HS2) does not turn ON even after a specified period of time after the
stapler motor /Rt (M29) starts the operation.
Stapler assembly /Rt
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the stapler unit /Rt, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SDDB and the stapler unit /Rt, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Replacing the stapler assy /Rt
4. Replace SDDB.
5. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0, DIPSW7-3
The use of the saddle stitching and trimmer unavailable
2.10.27 C-1262
Code
C-1262
Classification
Cause
The stapler home sensor /Lt (HS3) or the clincher start sensor /Lt (HS4) does not turn ON even after a specified period of time after the
stapler motor /Lt (M30) starts the operation.
Stapler assembly /Lt
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the stapler unit /Rt, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SDDB and the stapler unit /Rt, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Replacing the stapler assy /Rt
4. Replace SDDB.
5. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0, DIPSW7-3
K -144
The use of the saddle stitching and trimmer unavailable
2.10.28 C-1263
Code
C-1263
Classification
Cause
It does not stop even after a specified period of time after the trimmer blade motor (M31) starts the operation.
Trimmer blade home sensor (PS50)
Trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the trimmer blade, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:SD-506:22-R)
5. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: SD-506: 23-R)
7. Replace M31.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-3
The use of the trimmer unavailable
2.10.29 C-1264
Code
C-1264
Classification
Cause
It does not stop even after a specified period of time after the trimmer press motor (M32) starts the operation.
Trimmer press motor (M32)
Trimmer press home sensor (PS53)
Trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the trimmer press section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:SD-506:22-R)
5. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:SD-506:23-R)
7. Replace M32.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
2.10.30 C-1265
Code
C-1265
Classification
K -145

Cause
It does not stop even after a specified period of time after the bundle arm assist motor (M26) starts the operation.
Bundle arm assist motor (M26)
Bundle arm assist home sensor (PS38)
Bundle arm assist upper limit sensor (PS39)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the bundle arm assist section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
7. Replace M26.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
2.10.31 C-1266
Code
C-1266
Classification
Cause
Rotation abnormality is detected for a specified period of time in succession while the entrance conveyance motor (M1) is driving.
Entrance conveyance motor (M1)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SDDB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M1.
6. Replace SDDB.
7. Replace SDCB.
2.10.32 C-1267
Code
C-1267
Classification
Cause
Rotation abnormality is detected for a specified period of time in succession while the horizontal conveyance motor (M2) is driving.
Horizontal conveyance motor (M2)
Correction
Note
K -146
Solution
1. Check the horizontal conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M2.
6. Replace SDDB.
7. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-4
Sub tray, paper exit to subsequent stage and FS unavailable
2.10.33 C-1268
Code
C-1268
Classification
Cause
Rotation abnormality is detected for a specified period of time in succession while the folding entrance motor (M3) is driving.
Folding entrance motor (M3)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the folding entrance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M3.
6. Replace SDDB.
7. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0, DIPSW7-1, DIPSW7-2, DIPSW7-3
2.10.34 C-1269
Code
C-1269
Classification
Cause
Rotation abnormality is detected for a specified period of time in succession while the folding transfer motor (M4) is driving.
Folding transfer motor (M4)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the folding conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M4.
6. Replace SDDB.
7. Replace SDCB.
K -147
2.10.35 C-1270
Code
C-1270
Classification
Cause
Rotation abnormality is detected for a specified period of time in succession while the bundle exit motor (M5) is driving.
Bundle exit motor (M5)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the bundle exit section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M5.
6. Replace SDDB.
7. Replace SDCB.
2.11 Solution 7 (C-1271_1400)

2.11.1 C-1271
Code
C-1271
Classification
Cause
Rotation abnormality is detected for a specified period of time in succession while the folding sub scan alignment exit motor (M8) is driving.
Folding sub scan alignment exit motor (M8)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the folding sub scan alignment exit section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M8.
6. Replace SDDB.
7. Replace SDCB.
2.11.2 C-1272
Code
C-1272
Classification
Cause
Rotation abnormality is detected for a specified period of time in succession while the trimmer paddle motor (M33) is driving.
Trimmer paddle motor (M33)
K -148
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the trimmer paddle, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: SD-506: 11-W)
4. Replace M33.
5. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-3
2.11.3 C-1273
Code
C-1273
Classification
Cause
The trimmer completion sensor (PS62) does not turn ON even after a specified period of time after the trimmer blade motor (M31) is in the
up operation.
Trimmer completion sensor (PS62)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the trimmer blade upper limit, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: SD-506: 22-R)
5. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: SD-506: 10-U)
6. Replace PS62.
7. Replace M31.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-3
2.11.4 C-1275
Code
C-1275
Classification
Cause
The wire slack sensor (PS66) detected the slack of the trimmer edge drive wire.
Wire slack prevention sensor (PS66)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the wire slack, and repair the trimmer blade if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SDCB and the sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: SD-506: 10-U)
4. Replace PS66.
5. Replace SDCB.
K -149
2.11.5 C-1281
Code
C-1281
Classification
Causes
FD alignment motor (M3) drive abnormality. The FD alignment home sensor (PS3) does not turn ON even after a specified period of time
after M3 starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M3 starts the operation, it does not stop.
Resulting operation
Main body and RU stop immediately and main relay (RY1) is turned OFF.
FD alignment motor (M3)
FD alignment home sensor (PS3)
Correction
Note
Procedure
1. Check the FD alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between RUCB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (RU-506: 1-B)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (RU-506: 5-B)
5. Replace PS3.
6. Replace M3.
7. Replace RUCB
DipSW
2.11.6 C-1282
Code
C-1282
Classification
Causes
CD alignment motor (M4) drive abnormality. The CD alignment home sensor (PS4) does not turn ON even after a specified period of time
after M4 starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M4 starts the operation, it does not stop.
Resulting operation
Main body and RU stop immediately and main relay (RY1) is turned OFF.
CD alignment motor (M4)
CD alignment home sensor (PS4)
Correction
Note
Procedure
1. Check the CD alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between RUCB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (RU-506: 2-B)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (RU-506: 5-B)
5. Replace PS4
6. Replace M4
7. Replace RUCB
DipSW
2.11.7 C-1290
Code
C-1290
Classification
Cause
Rotation abnormality is detected for a specified period of time in succession while the de-curler conveyance motor (M3) is driving.
De-curler conveyance motor (M3)
Correction
K -150
Note
Solution
1. Check the de-curler section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between RUCB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: RU-509: 11-F)
4. Replace M3.
5. Replace RUCB
2.11.8 C-1291
Code
C-1291
Classification
Cause
The home position search operation of the de-curler pressure motor /Lw (M5) does not complete within a specified period of time.
De-curler pressure motor /Lw (M5)
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace M5.
5. Replace RUCB
2.11.9 C-1292
Code
C-1292
Classification
Cause
The home position search operation of the de-curler pressure motor /Up (M6) does not complete within a specified period of time.
De-curler pressure motor /Up (M6)
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace M6.
5. Replace RUCB
2.11.10 C-1293
Code
C-1293
Classification
Cause
Rotation abnormality is detected for a specified period of time in succession while the humidification section conveyance motor (M8) is
driving.
Humidification section conveyance motor (M8)
K -151

Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the humidification section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between RUDB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between RUDB and RUCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: RU-509: 13-O)
5. Replace M8.
6. Replace RUDB.
7. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-2
Humidification unusable
2.11.11 C-1294
Code
C-1294
Classification
Cause
The home position search operation of the humidification section roller pressure motor /Rt (M9) does not complete within a specified
period of time.
Humidification section roller pressure motor /Rt (M9)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace M9.
6. Replace RUDB.
7. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-2
2.11.12 C-1295
Code
C-1295
Classification
Cause
The home position search operation of the humidification section roller pressure motor /Lt (M10) does not complete within a specified
period of time.
Humidification roller pressure motor /Lt (M10)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace M10.
K -152
6. Replace RUDB.
7. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-2
2.11.13 C-1296
Code
C-1296
Classification
Cause
Color density sensor detection preparation adjustment value abnormality
Color density sensor unit
Color density control board (CDCB)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the color density sensor unit, and clean/repair them if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between the color density sensor and CDCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between CDCB and RUCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace the color density sensor unit if any abnormality.
5. Replace the color density sensor unit.
6. Replace CDCB.
7. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-3
Color density sensor cannot be used
2.11.14 C-1297
Code
C-1297
Classification
Cause
Color density sensor detection start abnormality
Shutter solenoid (SD5)
Color density sensor unit
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between the color density sensor and CDCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the installation place of the shutter solenoid (SD5) and adjust it when the value is not within the standard value.
5. Turn ON the shutter solenoid (SD5) by I/O to check the shutter position.
6. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace the color density sensor unit if any abnormality.
8. Replace CDCB.
9. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-3
2.11.15 C-1298
Code
C-1298
Classification
K -153

Cause
EPPROM read out abnormality in the color density relay board (CDRLB)
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Reinstall the RU firmware.
6. Replace CDCB.
7. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-3
2.11.16 C-1299
Code
C-1299
Classification
Cause
The water tank full sensor (PS13) detects ON continuously for more than a specified period of time.
Drain path
Water tank full sensor (PS13)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the drain path, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring of RUDB, the pump motor (1) and the sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: RU-509: 16-O)
4. Replace PS13.
5. Replace RUDB.
DIPSW13-2
2.11.17 C-1301
Code
C-1301
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper cooling fan motor /Fr (FM1) is ON.
Paper cooling fan motor /Fr (FM1)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between LSCB and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: LS-505: 4-A)
3. Replace FM1.
4. Replace LSCB.
K -154
2.11.18 C-1302
Code
C-1302
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper cooling fan motor /1 (FM2) is ON.
Paper cooling fan motor /1 (FM2)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: LS-505: 6-H)
3. Replace FM2 or FM6.
4. Replace LSCB.
2.11.19 C-1303
Code
C-1303
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper cooling fan motor/Mi (FM3) is ON.
Paper cooling fan motor /Mi (FM3)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM3
4. Replace LSCB.
2.11.20 C-1304
Code
C-1304
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM4 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the motor cooling fan motor (FM4) is ON.
Motor cooling fan motor (FM4)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM4
4. Replace LSCB.
K -155
2.11.21 C-1305
Code
C-1305
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM5 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper cooling fan motor /Rr (FM5) is ON.
Paper cooling fan motor /Rr (FM5)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM5.
4. Replace LSCB.
2.11.22 C-1306
Code
C-1306
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper cooling fan motor /Fr (FM1) is ON.
Paper cooling fan motor /Fr (FM1)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM1.
4. Replace LSCB.
2.11.23 C-1307
Code
C-1307
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper cooling fan motor/1 (FM2) is ON.
Paper cooling fan motor /1 (FM2)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM2 or FM6.
4. Replace LSCB.
2.11.24 C-1308
Code
C-1308
Classification
K -156

Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper cooling fan motor /Mi (FM3) is ON.
Paper cooling fan motor /Mi (FM3)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM3
4. Replace LSCB.
2.11.25 C-1309
Code
C-1309
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM4 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the motor cooling fan motor (FM4) is ON.
Motor cooling fan motor
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM4
4. Replace LSCB.
2.11.26 C-1310
Code
C-1310
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM5 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper cooling fan motor /Rr (FM5) is ON.
Paper cooling fan motor /Rr (FM5)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM5.
4. Replace LSCB.
2.11.27 C-1311
Code
C-1311
Classification
Cause
A rotation error detection signal is detected continuously for specified period of time while the scraps removal fan motor (FM1) is started or
driving.
K -157

Scraps removal fan motor (FM1)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SDDB and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: SD-506: 26-D)
4. Replace FM1.
5. Replace SDDB.
6. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-3
2.11.28 C-1330
Code
C-1330
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
A rotation error detection signal is detected continuously for specified time period while the cover paper tray fan /1 (FM71) is started or
driving.
Cover paper tray fan /1 (FM71)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PBDB/PBDB1 and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PB-503: 21-D)
3. Replace FM71.
4. Replace PBDB1.
DIPSW7-5
Paper feed from the PB is unavailable.
2.11.29 C-1331
Code
C-1331
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
A rotation error detection signal is detected continuously for specified time period while the cover paper tray fan /2 (FM72) is started or
driving.
Cover paper tray fan /2 (FM72)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM72.
4. Replace PBDB1.
DIPSW7-5
K -158
2.11.30 C-1332
Code
C-1332
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
A rotation error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified time period while the exhaust fan /1 (FM80) is started or driving.
1. PB control board (PBCB)
2. PB drive board (PBDB)
3. Exhaust fan /1 (FM80)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PB-503: 3-D, 19-U)
3. Replace FM80, FM97 and FM98.
4. Replace PBDB1 and PBDB3.
DIPSW7-6
Ejecting onto the sub tray is possible.
2.11.31 C-1333
Code
C-1333
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
A rotation error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified time period while the exhaust fan /2 (FM81) is started or driving.
Exhaust fan /2 (FM81)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:PB-503:3-D)
3. Replace FM81.
4. Replace PBDB1.
DIPSW7-6
2.11.32 C-1334
Code
C-1334
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
A rotation error detection signal is detected continuously for specified period of time while the pellet supply cooling fan (FM4) is started or
driving.
Pellet supply cooling fan (FM4)
Correction
Note
K -159
Solution
3. Replace FM4
4. Replace PBDB1.
DIPSW7-6
2.11.33 C-1341
Code
C-1341
Classification
Causes
Stack assist fan /Fr (FM1) rotation abnormality. Rotation abnormality detected continuously for the specified time during FM1 operation.
Resulting operation
Stack assist fan /Fr (FM1)
Correction
Note
Procedure
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between RUCB and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Rotate the fan by I/O or hand, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (RU-506: 3-B)
3. Replace FM1
4. Replace RUCB
DipSW
2.11.34 C-1342
Code
C-1342
Classification
Causes
Stack assist fan /Rr (FM2) rotation abnormality. Rotation abnormality detected continuously for the specified time during FM2 operation.
Resulting operation
Stack assist fan /Rr (FM2)
Correction
Note
Procedure
2. Rotate the fan by I/O or hand, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (RU-506: 3-B)
3. Replace FM2
4. Replace RUCB
DipSW
2.11.35 C-1351
Code
C-1351
Classification
Cause
Error detection signals of FM1, FM2 and FM3 are detected continuously for a specified period of time while the entrance paper fans /1
(FM1), /2 (FM2) and /3 (FM3) are ON.
Entrance paper fan /1 (FM1)
Correction
K -160
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair or replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: RU-509: 8-F, 9-F)
4. Replace RUCB
2.11.36 C-1352
Code
C-1352
Classification
Cause
Error detection signals of FM4 and FM5 are detected continuously for a specified period of time while the ventilation assist fans /1 (FM4)
Ventilation assist fan /1 (FM4)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: RU-509: 9-F, 8-H)
4. Replace RUCB
2.11.37 C-1353
Code
C-1353
Classification
Cause
(FM15), /5 (FM16) and /6 (FM17) are ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: RU-509: 17-L, 18-L)
4. Replace RUCB
2.11.38 C-1354
Code
C-1354
Classification
Cause
(FM18), /8 (FM19) and /9 (FM20) are ON.
K -161
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: RU-509: 18-L)
4. Replace RUCB
2.11.39 C-1355
Code
C-1355
Classification
Cause
Error detection signals of FM21 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the ventilation assist fan /3 (FM21) is ON.
Jumper connector CN108
Correction
Note
Solution
1. When HM-102 is not connected, check if the jumper connector CN108 is connected. Connect the connector if it is not connected.
3. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: RU-509: 19-L)
4. Replace FM21.
5. Replace RUCB
2.11.40 C-1356
Code
C-1356
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM6 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the humidification section paper fan /1 (FM6)
is ON.
Humidification section paper fan /1 (FM6)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between RUDB and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: RU-509: 19-O)
4. Replace FM6.
5. Replace RUDB.
6. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-2
K -162
2.11.41 C-1357
Code
C-1357
Classification
Cause
is ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace FM7.
5. Replace RUDB.
6. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-2
2.11.42 C-1358
Code
C-1358
Classification
Cause
is ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace FM8.
5. Replace RUDB.
6. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-2
2.11.43 C-1359
Code
C-1359
Classification
Cause
is ON.
K -163
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace FM9.
5. Replace RUDB.
6. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-2
2.11.44 C-1360
Code
C-1360
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM10 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the humidification section paper fan /5
(FM10) is ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace FM10.
5. Replace RUDB.
6. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-2
2.11.45 C-1361
Code
C-1361
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM11 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the humidification section paper fan /6
(FM11) is ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace FM11.
5. Replace RUDB.
6. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-2
K -164
2.11.46 C-1364
Code
C-1364
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM14 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the humidification section paper fan (FM14)
is ON.
Power supply fan (FM14)
DC power supply (DCPS)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between DCPS and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: RU-509: 6-I)
4. Replace FM14.
5. Replace DCPS.
2.12 Solution 8 (C-1401_1500)

2.12.1 C-1402
Code
C-1402
Classification
FS: FS abnormality
Cause
Non-volatile memory abnormality.
FS control board (LSCB)
Correction
Note
Solution
seconds.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring of FNSCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Reinstalling FS firmware
4. Replace FNSCB.
2.12.2 C-1403
Code
C-1403
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
seconds.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring of FDCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Reinstalling FD firmware
K -165
4. Replace FDCB.
2.12.3 C-1404
Code
C-1404
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
seconds.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring of SDCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Reinstalling SD firmware
4. Replace SDCB.
2.12.4 C-1406
Code
C-1406
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
Non-volatile memory abnormality in the PB control board (PBCB)
Control program
Correction
Note
Solution
seconds.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring of PBCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Reinstalling PB firmware
4. Replace PBCB.
2.12.5 C-1407
Code
C-1407
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
seconds.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring of RUCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace RUCB
K -166
2.12.6 C-1408
Code
C-1408
Classification
Causes
Non-volatile memory error.
Resulting operation
Correction
Note
Procedure
seconds.
3. Reinstalling RU firmware
4. Replace RUCB
DipSW
2.12.7 C-1411
Code
C-1411
Classification
Cause
5V power abnormality in the SD drive board (SDDB)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring of SDDB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Replace SDDB.
4. Replace SDCB.
2.12.8 C-1431
Code
C-1431
Classification
FS: FS abnormality
Cause
Communication error in FS
Software bug
Correction
Note
Solution
seconds.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring of FNSCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Reinstall FS-612 firmware
4. Replace FNSCB.
K -167
2.12.9 C-1432
Code
C-1432
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
Communication error in FD
Software bug
Correction
Note
Solution
seconds.
4. Replace FDCB.
2.12.10 C-1433
Code
C-1433
Classification
Cause
Communication error in SD
Software bug
Correction
Note
Solution
seconds.
4. Replace SDCB.
2.12.11 C-1435
Code
C-1435
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
Message queue full or the control abnormality of Sub CPU1 in the PB control board (PBCB)
Control program
Correction
Note
Solution
seconds.
4. Replace PBCB.
2.12.12 C-1436
Code
C-1436
K -168
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
Message queue full or the control abnormality of Sub CPU2 in the PB control board (PBCB)
Control program
Correction
Note
Solution
seconds.
4. Replace PBCB.
2.12.13 C-1437
Code
C-1437
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
Message queue of the communication among tasks in the PB is full.
Control program
Correction
Note
Solution
seconds.
4. Replace PBCB.
2.12.14 C-1438
Code
C-1438
Classification
Cause
Communication error in RU
Software bug
Correction
Note
Solution
seconds.
4. Replace RUCB
2.12.15 C-1439
Code
C-1439
Classification
K -169
Causes
RU received operation start from the main body when unready.
Resulting operation
Software bug
Correction
Note
Procedure
seconds.
4. Replace RUCB
DipSW
2.12.16 C-1440
Code
C-1440
Classification
Cause
RU SubCPU communication error (Main side)
RU program
Correction
Note
Solution
seconds.
4. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-3
2.12.17 C-1441
Code
C-1441
Classification
Cause
RU SubCPU communication error (Sub side)
RU program
Correction
Note
Solution
seconds.
4. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-3
K -170
2.12.18 C-1451
Code
C-1451
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
When the FD is unready, a signal to start operations is received from the main body.
Software bug
Correction
Note
Solution
seconds.
4. Replace FDCB.
2.12.19 C-1452
Code
C-1452
Classification
Cause
When the SD is unready, a signal to start operations is received from the main body.
Software bug
Correction
Note
Solution
seconds.
4. Replace SDCB.
2.12.20 C-1454
Code
C-1454
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
PB operation prohibition abnormality.
PB received operation start signal from the main body when the PB is unready.
Control program
Correction
Note
Solution
seconds.
4. Replace PBCB.
2.12.21 C-1455
Code
C-1455
K -171
Classification
Cause
When RU is unready, a signal to start operations is received from the main body.
Software bug
Correction
Note
Solution
seconds.
4. Replace RUCB
2.12.22 C-1456
Code
C-1456
Classification
Causes
RU received operation start signal from the main body when the RU is unready.
Resulting operation
Software bug
Correction
Note
Procedure
seconds.
4. Replace RUCB
DipSW
2.13 Solution 9 (C-1501_1539)

2.13.1 C-1501
Code
C-1501
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The entrance conveyance has not been completed within a specified period of time after the entrance conveyance motor (M1) turns ON.
Entrance conveyance motor (M1)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PBDB/PBDB1 and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PBDB/PBDB1 and PBCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PB-503: 1-D)
5. Replace M1.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
K -172
The use of the PB is unavailable
2.13.2 C-1502
Code
C-1502
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
A rotation error detection signal is detected for a specified period of time in succession while the intermediate conveyance motor (M2) is
driving.
Intermediate conveyance motor (M2)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the intermediate conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:PB-503:2-D)
5. Replace M2.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.3 C-1504
Code
C-1504
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The SC entrance conveyance has not been completed within a specified period of time after the SC entrance conveyance motor (M11)
turns ON.
SC entrance conveyance motor (M11)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the SC entrance conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M11.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.4 C-1505
Code
C-1505
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The switchback conveyance has not been completed within a specified period of time after the SC switchback conveyance motor (M12)
turns ON.
K -173

SC switchback conveyance motor (M12)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the SC switchback conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M12.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.5 C-1506
Code
C-1506
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The switchback roller release operation has not been completed within a specified period of time after the SC switchback release motor
(M13) turns ON.
SC switchback release motor (M13)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the SC switchback release section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M13.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.6 C-1507
Code
C-1507
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The SC alignment has not been completed within a specified period of time after SC alignment motor (M15) turns ON.
SC alignment motor (M15)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the SC alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M15.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
K -174

2.13.7 C-1508
Code
C-1508
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The SC paper bundle conveyance has not been completed within a specified period of time after the SC bundle conveyance motor (M17)
turns ON.
SC bundle conveyance motor (M17)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the SC bundle conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M17.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.8 C-1509
Code
C-1509
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The SC roller release operation has not been completed within a specified period of time after the SC roller release motor (M18) turns ON.
SC roller release motor (M18)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the SC roller release section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M18.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.9 C-1510
Code
C-1510
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The SC entrance movement operation has not been completed within a specified period of time after the clamp entrance movement motor
(M19) turns ON.
K -175

Clamp entrance movement motor (M19)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the clamp entrance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M19.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.10 C-1511
Code
C-1511
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The clamp entrance roller release operation has not been completed within a specified period of time after the clamp entrance roller
release motor (M20) turns ON.
Clamp entrance roller release motor (M20)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the clamp entrance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M20.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.11 C-1512
Code
C-1512
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The clamp alignment has not been completed within a specified period of time after clamp alignment motor (M21) turns ON.
Clamp alignment motor (M21)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the clamp alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M21.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
K -176

2.13.12 C-1513
Code
C-1513
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The clamp section open/close operation has not been completed within a specified period of time after the clamp motor (M22) turns ON.
Clamp motor (M22)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the clamp section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M22.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.13 C-1514
Code
C-1514
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The clamp rotation operation has not been completed within a specified period of time after the clamp rotation motor (M23) turns ON.
Clamp rotation motor (M23)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the clamp section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M23.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.14 C-1515
Code
C-1515
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The glue tank movement operation has not been completed within a specified period of time after the glue tank movement motor (M31)
turns ON.
K -177
Glue tank movement motor (M31)

Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the glue tank movement section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M31.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.15 C-1516
Code
C-1516
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
A rotation error detection signal is detected for a specified period of time in succession while the glue apply roller motor (M32) is driving.
Glue apply roller motor (M32)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the glue apply section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M32.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.16 C-1517
Code
C-1517
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The count of a specified number of pellets, which is counted by the pellet supply passage sensor (PS37), has not been reached after the
pellet supply pipe motor (M33) turns ON.
Pellet supply pipe motor (M33)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the pellet supply section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M33.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
K -178
2.13.17 C-1518
Code
C-1518
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The operation of the pellet supply arm has not been completed within a specified period of time after the pellet supply arm motor (M34)
turns ON.
Pellet supply arm motor (M34)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace M34.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.18 C-1519
Code
C-1519
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The alignment in the cover paper table up/down section has not been completed within a specified period of time after the cover paper
alignment motor (M41) turns ON.
Cover paper alignment motor (M41)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the cover paper alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M41.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.19 C-1520
Code
C-1520
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The booklet exit has not been completed within a specified period of time after the booklet exit motor (M42) turns ON.
K -179
Booklet exit motor (M42)

Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the booklet exit section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M42.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.20 C-1521
Code
C-1521
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The driven arm /Rt swing operation start has not been completed within a specified period of time after the cover paper conveyance arm
motor /Rt (M43) turns ON
Cover paper conveyance arm motor /Rt (M43)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the cover paper conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M43.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.21 C-1522
Code
C-1522
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The driven arm /Lt swing operation start has not been completed within a specified period of time after the cover paper conveyance arm
motor /Lt (M44) turns ON
Cover paper conveyance arm motor /Lt (M44)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace M44.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
K -180

2.13.22 C-1523
Code
C-1523
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The cover paper conveyance start has not been completed within a specified period of time after cover paper conveyance motor (M45)
turns ON.
Cover paper conveyance motor (M45)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace M45.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.23 C-1524
Code
C-1524
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The cover paper table up or down movement has not been completed within a specified period of time after the cover paper table up down
motor /Fr (M46) turns ON.
Cover paper table up down motor /Fr (M46)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the cover paper table up down section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:PB-503: 11-D)
5. Replace M46.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.24 C-1525
Code
C-1525
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The cover paper table up or down movement has not been completed within a specified period of time after the cover paper table up down
motor /Rr (M47) turns ON.
K -181

Cover paper table up down motor /Rr (M47)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the cover paper table up down section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M47.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.25 C-1526
Code
C-1526
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The movement of the cover paper folding plate /Rt has not been completed within a specified period of time after the cover paper folding
motor /Rt (M48) turns ON.
Cover paper folding motor /Rt (M48)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the cover paper folding section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M48.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.26 C-1527
Code
C-1527
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The movement of the cover paper folding plate /Lt has not been completed within a specified period of time after the cover paper folding
motor /Lt (M49) turns ON.
Cover paper folding motor /Lt (M49)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the cover paper folding section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M49.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
K -182

DIPSW7-6
2.13.27 C-1528
Code
C-1528
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The trimming of the cover paper has not been completed within a specified period of time after the cutter motor (M50) turns ON.
Cutter motor (M50)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the trimmer section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M50.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.28 C-1530
Code
C-1530
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The booklet movement of the booklet conveyance section has not been completed within a specified period of time after the booklet
conveyance belt motor (M61) turns ON.
Booklet conveyance belt motor (M61)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the booklet conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M61.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.29 C-1531
Code
C-1531
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The size changing operation of the carriage section has not been completed within a specified period of time after the booklet conveyance
belt movement motor (M62) turns ON.
K -183

Booklet conveyance belt movement motor (M62)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace M62.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.30 C-1532
Code
C-1532
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The up/down movement operation of the carriage section has not been completed within a specified period of time after the booklet
conveyance belt up down motor (M63) turns ON.
Booklet conveyance belt up down motor (M63)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace M63.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.31 C-1534
Code
C-1534
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The booklet rear edge pressing process has not been completed within a specified period of time after the booklet stopper motor (M65)
turns ON.
Booklet stopper motor (M65)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace M65.
6. Replace PBDB1.
K -184
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.32 C-1537
Code
C-1537
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The tray moving up process has not been completed within a specified period of time after the cover paper tray lift motor (M73) turns ON.
Cover paper tray lift motor (M73)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the cover paper tray section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M73.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-5
2.13.33 C-1538
Code
C-1538
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The cover paper feed has not been completed within a specified period of time after the cover paper feed motor (M74) turns ON.
Cover paper feed motor (M74)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the cover paper feed section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M74.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-5
2.14 Solution 10 (C-1540_1567)

2.14.1 C-1540
Code
C-1540
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
After the warm-up is started, temperature detected by the glue tank temperature sensor /Md (TH3) has not risen to a prescribed level
within a specified time period.
K -185

Glue tank heater (H1)
Glue apply roller heater (H2)
Glue tank temperature sensor /Md (TH3)
Correction
Be sure to change the software DIPSW3-1 from 1 to 0 and turn OFF/ON the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body after fixing the
defective parts.
WARNING
If DIPSW3-1 is set to 0 before defective parts are fixed, it may cause fire.
Solution
1. Check the glue tank heater, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PBCB and the temperature sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the installation conditions of the heater and the temperature sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:
PB-503: 27-Q, 10-U)
5. Replace TH3.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.2 C-1541
Code
C-1541
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
After the warm-up is started, temperature detected by the glue tank temperature sensor /Lw (TH4) has not risen to a prescribed level
Glue tank temperature sensor /Lw (TH4)
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
If DipSW3-1 is set to 0 before defective parts are fixed, it causes fire.
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 10-U)
5. Replace TH4.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.3 C-1542
Code
C-1542
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
K -186
After the warm-up is started, temperature detected by the glue apply roller temperature sensor (TH1) has not risen to a prescribed level
Glue apply roller temperature sensor (TH1)
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
1. Check the glue apply heater, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
PB-503: 27-Q, 9-U)
5. Replace TH1.
6. Replace H2.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.4 C-1543
Code
C-1543
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
After the pellet supply, temperature detected by the glue tank temperature sensor /Up (TH2) has not risen to a prescribed level within a
Glue tank temperature sensor /Up (TH2)
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 9-U)
5. Replace TH2.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.5 C-1544
Code
C-1544
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
K -187
Cause
During standby, after the glue tank heater (H1) is turned ON, temperature detected by the glue tank temperature sensor /Md (TH3) has not
risen to a prescribed level within a specified time period.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 10-U)
5. Replace TH3.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.6 C-1545
Code
C-1545
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
When the prescribed temperature is obtained and after the glue tank heater (H1) is turned ON, temperature detected by the glue tank
temperature sensor /Lw (TH4) has not risen to a prescribed level within a specified time period.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 10-U)
5. Replace TH4.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.7 C-1546
Code
C-1546
Classification
K -188
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
When the prescribed temperature is obtained and after the glue tank heater (H1) is turned ON, temperature detected by the glue apply
roller temperature sensor (TH1) has not risen to a prescribed level within a specified time period.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 9-U)
5. Replace TH1.
6. Replace H2.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.8 C-1547
Code
C-1547
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The glue apply roller temperature sensor (TH1) detects an abnormal high temperature.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 9-U)
5. Replace TH1.
6. Replace H2.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.9 C-1548
Code
C-1548
Classification
K -189
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The glue tank temperature sensor /Up (TH2) detects an abnormal high temperature.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 9-U)
5. Replace TH2.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.10 C-1549
Code
C-1549
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The glue tank temperature sensor /Md (TH3) detects an abnormal high temperature.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 10-U)
5. Replace TH3.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.11 C-1550
Code
C-1550
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
K -190
Cause
The glue tank temperature sensor /Lw (TH4) detects an abnormal high temperature.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 10-U)
5. Replace TH4.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.12 C-1551
Code
C-1551
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The glue apply roller temperature sensor (TH1) detects an abnormal high temperature (hardware) TH1 detects an abnormal high
temperature of the glue apply roller.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 9-U)
5. Replace TH1.
6. Replace H2.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.13 C-1552
Code
C-1552
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
K -191
Cause
The glue tank temperature sensor /Up (TH2) detects an abnormal high temperature (hardware). TH2 detects an abnormal high
temperature of the glue tank.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 9-U)
5. Replace TH2.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.14 C-1553
Code
C-1553
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The glue tank temperature sensor /Md (TH3) detects an abnormal high temperature (hardware). TH3 detects an abnormal high
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 10-U)
5. Replace TH3.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.15 C-1554
Code
C-1554
Classification
K -192
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The glue tank temperature sensor /Lw (TH4) detects an abnormal high temperature (hardware). TH4 detects an abnormal high
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 10-U)
5. Replace TH4.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.16 C-1555
Code
C-1555
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
After warming-up is completed, the glue apply roller temperature sensor (TH1) detects an abnormal low temperature.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 9-U)
5. Replace TH1.
6. Replace H2.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.17 C-1556
Code
C-1556
Classification
K -193
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
When glue supply control temperature is reached, the glue tank temperature sensor /Up (TH2) detects an abnormal low temperature.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 9-U)
5. Replace TH2.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.18 C-1557
Code
C-1557
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
After warming-up is completed, the glue tank temperature sensor /Md (TH3) detects an abnormal low temperature.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 10-U)
5. Replace TH3.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.19 C-1558
Code
C-1558
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
K -194
Cause
After warming-up is completed, the glue tank temperature sensor /Lw (TH4) detects an abnormal low temperature.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 10-U)
5. Replace TH4.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.20 C-1559
Code
C-1559
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The glue apply roller temperature sensor (TH1) detects an abnormal low temperature (hardware). After warming-up is completed, TH1
detects the glue apply roller error signal of abnormal low temperature.
The main body stops immediately to turn OFF the main relay (RL1).
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 9-U)
5. Replace TH1.
6. Replace H2.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.21 C-1560
Code
C-1560
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
K -195
Cause
The glue tank temperature sensor /Up (TH2) detects an abnormal low temperature (hardware). After glue supply control temperature is
reached, TH2 detects the glue tank error signal of abnormal low temperature.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 9-U)
5. Replace TH2.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.22 C-1561
Code
C-1561
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The glue tank temperature sensor /Md (TH3) detects an abnormal low temperature (hardware). After warming-up is completed, TH3
detects the glue tank error signal of abnormal low temperature.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 10-U)
5. Replace TH3.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.23 C-1562
Code
C-1562
Classification
K -196
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The glue tank temperature sensor /Lw (TH4) detects an abnormal low temperature (hardware). After warming-up is completed, TH4
detects the glue tank error signal of abnormal low temperature.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 10-U)
5. Replace TH4.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.24 C-1565
Code
C-1565
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
Relay conveyance motor drive abnormality
The relay conveyance does not start within the specified period of time after M92 turns ON.
Relay conveyance motor (M92)
Correction
Solution
1. Check the relay conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PBDB2 and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:PB-503: 23-V)
4. Replace M92.
5. Replace PBDB2.
6. Replace PBCB.
2.14.25 C-1566
Code
C-1566
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
Relay conveyance exit motor drive abnormality
A rotation error detection signal is detected for a specified period of time in succession while the relay conveyance exit motor (M91) is
driving.
Relay conveyance exit motor (M91)
Correction
K -197
Solution
1. Check the relay conveyance paper exit section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PB-503: 26-W)
5. Replace M91.
6. Replace PBDB2.
7. Replace PBDB1.
8. Replace PBCB.
2.14.26 C-1567
Code
C-1567
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
Pellet supply pipe motor drive abnormality
The pellet supply pipe has not completed the operations within a specified period of time after the pellet supply pipe motor (M33) turns ON.
Pellet supply pipe motor (M33)
Correction
Solution
4. Replace M33.
5. Replace PBDB1.
6. Replace PBCB.
2.15 Solution 11 (C-2001_2400)

2.15.1 C-2001
Code
C-2001
Classification
Cause
Communication error between the printer control board (PRCB) and the drum motor /Y (M14).
Drum motor /Y (M14)
Drum motor /M (M15)
Correction
Note
Solution
(3/3): 8-P, 7-P)
4. Replace M14 or M15.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.15.2 C-2003
Code
C-2003
Classification
Cause
Communication error between the printer control board (PRCB) and the belt motor (M18).
K -198
Belt motor (M18)
Correction
Note
Solution
(3/3):17-O)
4. Replace M18.
5. Replace PRCB
2.15.3 C-2004
Code
C-2004
Classification
Cause
Communication error between the printer control board (PRCB) and the drum motors /Y (M14) or /M (M15).
Drum motor /Y (M14)
Drum motor /M (M15)
Correction
Note
Solution
(3/8): 8-P, 7-P)
4. Replace M14 or M15
5. Replace PRCB
2.15.4 C-2006
Code
C-2006
Classification
Cause
Communication error between the printer control board (PRCB) and the belt motor (M18).
Belt motor (M18)
Correction
Note
Solution
(3/3):17-O)
4. Replace M18.
5. Replace PRCB
2.15.5 C-2201*
Code
C-2201*
K -199
Classification
Main body: Developing motor abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of M20 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the developing motor /Y (M20) is ON.
Developing motor /Y (M20)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:Main body (3/3):
18-O)
3. Replace M20 and PRCB.
2.15.6 C-2202*
Code
C-2202*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of M21 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the developing motor /M (M21) is ON.
Developing motor /M (M21)
Correction
Note
Solution
19-O)
2.15.7 C-2203*
Code
C-2203*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of M22 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the developing motor /C (M22) is ON.An error
detection signal of M22 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the developing motor /C (M22) is ON.
Developing motor /C (M22)
Correction
Note
Solution
20-O)
2.15.8 C-2204*
Code
C-2204*
Classification
Cause
K -200
An error detection signal of M23 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the developing motor /K (M23) is ON.
Developing motor /K (M23)
Correction
Note
Solution
21-O)
2.15.9 C-2220
Code
C-2220
Classification
Main body: Transfer belt unit abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of M18 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the belt motor (M18) is ON.
Belt motor (M18)
Encoder sensor belt /1 (PS89), /2 (PS90)
Intermediate transfer unit
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the intermediate transfer unit and repair/replace it if any abnormality.
(3/3):17-O)
4. Check the connector connection and the wiring between DCPS2 and PRCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M18.
6. Replace PS89 and PS90.
7. Replace DCPS2.
8. Replace PRCB.
2.15.10 C-2221
Code
C-2221
Classification
Main body: 1st transfer motor abnormality
Cause
While the 1st transfer HP sensor (PS15) is ON, PS15 does not turn OFF within a specified period of time after the 1st transfer pressure
release motor (M19) turns ON.
While PS15 is OFF, PS15 does not turn ON within a specified period of time after M19 turns ON.
1st transfer pressure release motor (M19)
1st transfer HP sensor (PS15)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the 1st transfer fusing pressure release section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between ACDB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the connector connection and the wiring between ACDB and PRCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
(1/3): 10-B)
K -201
6. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/3): 16-O)
7. Replace PS15.
8. Replace M19.
9. Replace ACDB.
10. Replace PRCB.
11. Replace M19 and ACDB at a time.
2.15.11 C-2222
Code
C-2222
Classification
Main body: Toner supply abnormality
Cause
While one of the toner supply motors /Y (M49), /M (M50), /C (M51), /K (M52), toner bottle motor (M53), and toner bottle clutches /Y
(CL14), /M (CL15), /C (CL16) and /K (CL17) are ON, an error detection signal of one of them is detected for a specified period of time.
Toner supply drive board (TSDB)
Toner supply motor /Y (M49)
Toner supply motor /M (M50)
Toner supply motor /C (M51)
Toner supply motor /K (M52)
Toner bottle motor (M53)
Toner bottle clutch /Y (CL14)
Toner bottle clutch /M (CL15)
Toner bottle clutch /C (CL16)
Toner bottle clutch /K (CL17)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the toner supply section, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between TSDB and motor/clutch, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and TSDB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and clutch and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:
Main body (3/3): 17-C, 18-A, 19-A, 17-A, 20-A)
5. Replace CL14, CL15, CL16 or CL17
6. Replace M49, M50, M51, M52 or M53
7. Replace TSDB.
8. Replace PRCB.
9. Replace TSDB and one of M49, M50, M51, M52, M53, CL14, CL15, CL16, CL17 at a time
2.15.12 C-2223
Code
C-2223
Classification
Main body: Low drum load torque abnormality
Cause
One of the torque is not recovered within a specified period of time after the low load torque recovery control of the drum motors /Y
(M14), /M (M15), /C (M16), /K (M17) starts.
Drum motor /Y (M14)
Drum motor /M (M15)
Drum motor /C (M16)
Drum motor /K (M17)
Correction
Note

Solution
1. Check the drum unit, and repair it if any abnormality.
(3/3): 8-P, 7-P, 11-P, 9-P)
4. Replace M14, M15, M16 or M17.
5. Replace PRCB.
K -202
2.15.13 C-2231*
Code
C-2231*
Classification
Main body: Drum motor abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of M14 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the drum motor /Y (M14) is ON.
Drum motor /Y (M14)
Encoder sensor /Y1 (PS81), /Y2 (PS82)
Drum Unit /Y
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the drum unit and repair/replace it if any abnormality
(3/3):8-P)
6. Replace M14.
7. Replace PRCB.
8. Replace DCPS2.
2.15.14 C-2232*
Code
C-2232*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of M15 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the drum motor /M (M15) is ON.
Drum motor /M (M15)
Encoder sensor /M1 (PS83), /M2 (PS84)
Drum Unit /M
Correction
Note
Solution
(3/3):7-P)
6. Replace M15.
7. Replace PRCB.
8. Replace DCPS2.
2.15.15 C-2233*
Code
C-2233*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of M16 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the drum motor /C (M16) is ON.
K -203

Drum motor /C (M16)
Encoder sensor /C1 (PS85), /C2 (PS86)
Drum Unit /C
Correction
Note
Solution
(3/3):11-P)
6. Replace M16.
7. Replace PRCB.
8. Replace DCPS2.
2.15.16 C-2234*
Code
C-2234*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of M17 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the drum motor /K (M17) is ON.
Drum motor /K (M17)
Encoder sensor /K1 (PS87), /K2 (PS88)
Drum Unit /K
Correction
Note
Solution
(3/3):9-P)
6. Replace M17.
7. Replace PRCB.
8. Replace DCPS2.
2.15.17 C-2241*
Code
C-2241*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of M14 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the drum motor /Y (M14) is ON.
Drum motor /Y (M14)
Encoder sensor /Y1 (PS81), /Y2 (PS82)
Drum unit /Y
Correction
Note
Solution
K -204
(3/3): 8-P)
6. Replace M14.
7. Replace PRCB
8. Replace DCPS2.
2.15.18 C-2242*
Code
C-2242*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of M15 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the drum motor /M (M15) is ON.
Drum motor /M (M15)
Encoder sensor /M1 (PS83) and /M2 (PS84)
Drum unit /M
Correction
Note
Solution
(3/3): 7-P)
6. Replace M15.
7. Replace PRCB
8. Replace DCPS2.
2.15.19 C-2243*
Code
C-2243*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of M16 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the drum motor /C (M16) is ON.
Drum motor /C (M16)
Encoder sensors /C1 (PS85) and /C2 (PS86)
Drum unit /C
Correction
Note
Solution
(3/3): 11-P)
6. Replace M16.
7. Replace PRCB
8. Replace DCPS2.
2.15.20 C-2244*
Code
K -205
C-2244*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of M17 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the drum motor /K (M17) is ON.
Drum motor /K (M17)
Encoder sensors /K1 (PS87) and /K2 (PS88)
Drum unit /K
Correction
Note
Solution
(3/3): 9-P)
6. Replace M17.
7. Replace PRCB
8. Replace DCPS2.
2.15.21 C-2301
Code
C-2301
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of M48 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the charge intake fan (FM48) is ON.
Toner supply drive board (TSDB)
Charge intake fan (FM48)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between TSDB and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and TSDB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Rotate the fan by I/O or by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/3): 22-A)
4. Replace FM48
5. Replace TSDB
6. Replace PRCB
7. Replace FM48 and TSDB at a time.
2.15.22 C-2302*
Code
C-2302*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM12 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the motor cooling fan /1 (FM12) is ON.
Motor cooling fan /1 (FM12)
Correction
Note
Solution
K -206

2.15.23 C-2303*
Code
C-2303*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM11 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the transfer belt fan (FM11) is ON.
Transfer belt fan (FM11)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM11.
4. Replace PRCB.
2.15.24 C-2304*
Code
C-2304*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM45 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the developing fan /1 (FM45) is ON.
Developing fan /1 (FM45)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.15.25 C-2305*
Code
C-2305*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM46 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the developing fan /2 (FM46) is ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM46.
4. Replace PRCB.
K -207
2.15.26 C-2306*
Code
C-2306*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM13 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the motor cooling fan /2 (FM13) is ON.
Drum fan /2 (FM13)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM13.
4. Replace PRCB.
2.16 Solution 12 (C-2401_2500)

2.16.1 C-2401
Code
C-2401
Classification
Main body: Erase lamp abnormality
Cause
The erase lamp /Y (EL/Y) set status cannot be detected.
Erase lamp /Y (EL/Y)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check that the process unit is correctly installed without looseness, and reinstall/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the EL section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/3): 1-O)
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and EL, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace EL.
5. Replace PRCB.
6. Replace EL and PRCB at a time.
2.16.2 C-2402
Code
C-2402
Classification
Cause
The erase lamp /M (EL/M) set status cannot be detected.
Erase lamp /M (EL/M)
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace EL.
5. Replace PRCB.
K -208
2.16.3 C-2403
Code
C-2403
Classification
Cause
The erase lamp /C (EL/C) set status cannot be detected.
Erase lamp /C (EL/C)
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace EL.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.16.4 C-2404
Code
C-2404
Classification
Cause
The erase lamp /K (EL/K) set status cannot be detected.
Erase lamp /K (EL/K)
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace EL.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.16.5 C-2411
Code
C-2411
Classification
Main body: TCR sensor abnormality
Cause
The output of the TCR sensor /Y (TCRS/Y) cannot be controlled.
TCR sensor /Y (TCRS/Y)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check TCRS, and clean/repair it if there is sensor dirt or any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/3): 3-O)
3. Check the developing section, and clean/repair it if there is sensor dirt or any abnormality.
4. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and TCRS, and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace TCRS.
6. Replace PRCB.
K -209
7. Replace TCRS and PRCB at a time.

2.16.6 C-2412
Code
C-2412
Classification
Cause
The output of the TCR sensor /M (TCRS/M) cannot be controlled.
TCR sensor /M (TCRS /M)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace TCRS.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.16.7 C-2413
Code
C-2413
Classification
Cause
The output of the TCR sensor /C (TCRS/C) cannot be controlled.
TCR sensor /C (TCRS /C)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace TCRS.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.16.8 C-2414
Code
C-2414
Classification
Cause
The output of the TCR sensor /K (TCRS/K) cannot be controlled.
TCR sensor /K (TCRS /K)
Correction
Note
Solution
K -210
5. Replace TCRS.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.16.9 C-2421
Code
C-2421
Classification
Main body: Developing drive abnormality
Cause
While the developing motor /Y (M20) is ON or after a specified period of time from the TCR sensor /Y (TCRS/Y) initial adjustment starts,
TCRS/Y detects a value lower than the prescribed one.
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and the developing motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
6. Rotate the developing motor by I/O, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/3): 18-O)
7. Replace TCRS.
8. Replace M20.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.16.10 C-2422
Code
C-2422
Classification
Cause
While the developing motor /M (M21) is ON or after a specified period of time from the TCR sensor /M (TCRS/M) initial adjustment starts,
TCRS/M detects a value lower than the prescribed one.
TCR sensor /M (TCRS/M)
Correction
Note
Solution
7. Replace TCRS.
8. Replace M21.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.16.11 C-2423
Code
C-2423
Classification
K -211
Cause
While the developing motor /C (M22) is ON or after a specified period of time from the TCR sensor /C (TCRS/C) initial adjustment starts,
TCRS/C detects a value lower than the prescribed one.
TCR sensor /C (TCRS/C)
Correction
Note
Solution
7. Replace TCRS.
8. Replace M22.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.16.12 C-2424
Code
C-2424
Classification
Cause
While the developing motor /K (M23) is ON or after a specified period of time from the TCR sensor /K (TCRS/K) initial adjustment starts,
TCRS/K detects a value lower than the prescribed one.
TCR sensor /K (TCRS/K)
Correction
Note
Solution
7. Replace TCRS.
8. Replace M23.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.16.13 C-2431
Code
C-2431
Classification
Main body: TCR sensor initial adjustment abnormality (low density)
Cause
While in the initial adjustment of the TCR sensor /Y (TCRS/Y), TCRS/Y detects a value higher than the prescribed one with the minimum
control voltage.
Correction
Note
Solution
K -212
7. Replace TCRS.
8. Replace M20.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.16.14 C-2432
Code
C-2432
Classification
Cause
While in the initial adjustment of the TCR sensor /M (TCRS/M), TCRS/M detects a value higher than the prescribed one with the minimum
control voltage.
Correction
Note
Solution
7. Replace TCRS.
8. Replace M21.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.16.15 C-2433
Code
C-2433
Classification
Cause
While in the initial adjustment of the TCR sensor /C (TCRS/C), TCRS/C detects a value higher than the prescribed one with the minimum
control voltage.
Correction
Note
Solution
7. Replace TCRS.
8. Replace M22.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.16.16 C-2434
Code
C-2434
K -213
Classification
Cause
While in the initial adjustment of the TCR sensor /K (TCRS/K), TCRS/K detects a value higher than the prescribed one with the minimum
control voltage.
Correction
Note
Solution
7. Replace TCRS.
8. Replace M23.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.16.17 C-2441
Code
C-2441
Classification
Main body: TCR sensor initial adjustment abnormality (high density)
Cause
While in the initial adjustment of the TCR sensor /Y (TCRS/Y), TCRS/Y detects a value lower than the prescribed one with the maximum
control voltage.
Correction
Note
Solution
7. Replace TCRS.
8. Replace M20.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.16.18 C-2442
Code
C-2442
Classification
Cause
While in the initial adjustment of the TCR sensor /M (TCRS/M), TCRS/M detects a value lower than the prescribed one with the maximum
control voltage.
Correction
Note
K -214
Solution
7. Replace TCRS.
8. Replace M21.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.16.19 C-2443
Code
C-2443
Classification
Cause
While in the initial adjustment of the TCR sensor /C (TCRS/C), TCRS/C detects a value lower than the prescribed one with the maximum
control voltage.
Correction
Note
Solution
7. Replace TCRS.
8. Replace M22.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.16.20 C-2444
Code
C-2444
Classification
Cause
While in the initial adjustment of the TCR sensor /K (TCRS/K), TCRS/K detects a value lower than the prescribed one with the maximum
control voltage.
Correction
Note
Solution
7. Replace TCRS.
8. Replace M23.
9. Replace PRCB.
K -215
2.16.21 C-2451
Code
C-2451
Classification
Main body: Toner low density abnormality
Cause
When the developing motor /Y (M20) is ON, the maximum detection value of TCR sensor /Y (TCRS/Y) is the specified value and the
difference between the maximum detection value and the minimum detection value is over the specified value.
Correction
Note
Solution
7. Replace TCRS.
8. Replace M20.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.16.22 C-2452
Code
C-2452
Classification
Cause
When the developing motor /M (M21) is ON, the maximum detection value of TCR sensor /M (TCRS/M) is the specified value and the
Correction
Note
Solution
7. Replace TCRS.
8. Replace M21.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.16.23 C-2453
Code
C-2453
Classification
Cause
When the developing motor /C (M22) is ON, the maximum detection value of TCR sensor /C (TCRS/C) is the specified value and the
K -216
Correction
Note
Solution
7. Replace TCRS.
8. Replace M22.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.16.24 C-2454
Code
C-2454
Classification
Cause
When the developing motor /K (M23) is ON, the maximum detection value of TCR sensor /K (TCRS/K) is the specified value and the
Correction
Note
Solution
7. Replace TCRS.
8. Replace M23.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.16.25 C-2470
Code
C-2470
Classification
Main body: Process unit mount connection abnormality
Cause
Process unit mount is not connected.
Process mount
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the process mount, and repair/replace it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and the process mount, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace PRCB.
2.17 Solution 13 (C-2701_2800)

2.17.1 C-2701
Code
K -217
C-2701
Classification
Main body: High voltage unit /1 abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of the charging corona /Y is detected while the charging corona /Y is ON. The signal is detected even after
turning OFF/ON for a prescribed time.
High voltage unit /1 (HV1)
Charging corona /Y
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connection of the high voltage contact of the process unit, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the charger (charging wire and the grid), and clean/repair it if there is any dirt or abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between HV1 and the charger, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main
body (2/3): 1-P)
4. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and HV1, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body
(2/3): 1-M)
5. Replace HV1.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.17.2 C-2702
Code
C-2702
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of the charging corona /M is detected while the charging corona /M is ON. The signal is detected even after
Charging corona /M
Correction
Note
Solution
body (2/3): 32-P).
(2/3): 1-M).
5. Replace HV1.
6. Replace PRCB
2.17.3 C-2703
Code
C-2703
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of the charging corona /C is detected while the charging corona /C is ON. The signal is detected even after
Charging corona /C
Correction
Note
Solution
K -218
body (2/3): 3-P).
(2/3): 1-M).
5. Replace HV1.
6. Replace PRCB
2.17.4 C-2704
Code
C-2704
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of the charging corona /K is detected while the charging corona /K is ON. The signal is detected even after
Charging corona /K
Correction
Note
Solution
body (2/3): 4-P).
(2/3): 1-M).
5. Replace HV1.
6. Replace PRCB
2.17.5 C-2711
Code
C-2711
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of the 1st transfer /Y is detected while the 1st transfer /Y is ON. The signal is detected even after turning OFF/ON
1st transfer roller /Y
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between HV2 and the 1st transfer unit, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring
diagram: Main body (2/3): 6-O)
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and HV2, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace HV2.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.17.6 C-2712
Code
C-2712
Classification
Cause
K -219
An error detection signal of the 1st transfer /M is detected while the 1st transfer /M is ON. The signal is detected even after turning OFF/
ON for a prescribed time.
1st transfer roller /M
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace HV2.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.17.7 C-2713
Code
C-2713
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of the 1st transfer /C is detected while the 1st transfer /C is ON. The signal is detected even after turning OFF/ON
1st transfer roller /C
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace HV2.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.17.8 C-2714
Code
C-2714
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of the 1st transfer /K is detected while the 1st transfer /K is ON. The signal is detected even after turning OFF/ON
1st transfer roller /K
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace HV2.
5. Replace PRCB.
K -220
2.17.9 C-2720
Code
C-2720
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of the 2nd transfer is detected while the 2nd transfer is ON. The signal is detected even after turning OFF/ON for
a prescribed time.
2nd transfer roller
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between HV2 and the 2nd transfer unit, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring
4. Replace HV2.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.17.10 C-2721
Code
C-2721
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of the separation charger is detected while the separation charger is ON. The signal is detected even after
Separation charger
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between HV2 and the separation charger, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring
4. Replace HV2.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.18 Solution 14 (C-2801_3000)

2.18.1 C-2801
Code
C-2801
Classification
Main body: Gamma correction abnormality
Cause
The output voltage of the IDC sensor (IDCS) is detected more that the specified value on the patch /Y of the developing DC maximum
output.
Developing unit /Y
IDC sensor (IDCS)
IDC shutter solenoid (SD3)
Correction
K -221
Note
Solution
2. Check the installation of developing unit and I/O, and repair/replace it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and IDCS, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O of SD3 and repair/replace it if any abnormality.
5. Check the sensor and clean/replace it if any dirt or abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/3): 5-P)
6. Replace IDCS.
7. Replacing the developing unit
8. Replace PRCB.
2.18.2 C-2802
Code
C-2802
Classification
Cause
The output voltage of the IDC sensor (IDCS) is detected more that the specified value on the patch /M of the developing DC maximum
output.
Developing unit /M
IDC sensor (IDCS)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Check the sensor, and clean/repair it if any dirt or abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/3): 5-P)
6. Replace IDCS.
8. Replace PRCB.
2.18.3 C-2803
Code
C-2803
Classification
Cause
The output voltage of the IDC sensor (IDCS) is detected more that the specified value on the patch /C of the developing DC maximum
output.
Developing unit /C
IDC sensor (IDCS)
Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace IDCS.
8. Replace PRCB.
K -222
2.18.4 C-2804
Code
C-2804
Classification
Cause
The output voltage of the IDC sensor (IDCS) is detected more that the specified value on the patch /K of the developing DC maximum
output.
Developing unit /K
IDC sensor (IDCS)
Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace IDCS.
8. Replace PRCB.
2.18.5 C-2811
Code
C-2811
Classification
Cause
The proper value cannot be figured out within the specified time by the correction of the patch density correction /Y. Or, the proper value of
the developing DC output is 0 or lower.
Developing unit /Y
IDC sensor (IDCS)
Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace IDCS.
8. Replace PRCB.
2.18.6 C-2812
Code
C-2812
Classification
Cause
The proper value cannot be figured out within the specified time by the correction of the patch density correction /M. Or, the proper value
of the developing DC output is 0 or lower.
Developing unit /M
IDC sensor (IDCS)
K -223

Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace IDCS.
8. Replace PRCB.
2.18.7 C-2813
Code
C-2813
Classification
Cause
The proper value cannot be figured out within the specified time by the correction of the patch density correction /C. Or, the proper value of
Developing unit /C
IDC sensor (IDCS)
Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace IDCS.
8. Replace PRCB.
2.18.8 C-2814
Code
C-2814
Classification
Cause
The proper value cannot be figured out within the specified time by the correction of the patch density correction /K. Or, the proper value of
Developing unit /K
IDC sensor (IDCS)
Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace IDCS.
8. Replace PRCB.
K -224
2.18.9 C-2821
Code
C-2821
Classification
Main body: Dot diameter correction abnormality
Cause
The output voltage of the IDC sensor (IDCS) is detected more that the specified value on the patch /Y of the MPC maximum output.
Developing unit /Y
IDC sensor (IDCS)
Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace IDCS.
8. Replace PRCB.
2.18.10 C-2822
Code
C-2822
Classification
Cause
The output voltage of the IDC sensor (IDCS) is detected more that the specified value on the patch /M of the MPC maximum output.
Developing unit /M
IDC sensor (IDCS)
Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace IDCS.
8. Replace PRCB.
2.18.11 C-2823
Code
C-2823
Classification
Cause
The output voltage of the IDC sensor (IDCS) is detected more that the specified value on the patch /C of the MPC maximum output.
Developing unit /C
IDC sensor (IDCS)
K -225
Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace IDCS.
8. Replace PRCB.
2.18.12 C-2824
Code
C-2824
Classification
Cause
The output voltage of the IDC sensor (IDCS) is detected more that the specified value on the patch /K of the MPC maximum output.
Developing unit /K
IDC sensor (IDCS)
Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace IDCS.
8. Replace PRCB.
2.18.13 C-2831
Code
C-2831
Classification
Cause
The proper value cannot be figured out within the specified time by the correction of the dot diameter correction /Y. Or, the MPC proper
value is 0 or lower.
Developing unit /Y
IDC sensor (IDCS)
Writing unit /Y
Printer image processing board (PRIPB)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check that the writing unit is correctly installed without looseness, and reinstall/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Check the connector connection and the wiring between the writing unit and PRIPB, and repair it if any abnormality.
8. Replace IDCS.
K -226
10. Replace PRIPB.

11. Replace PRCB.
2.18.14 C-2832
Code
C-2832
Classification
Cause
The proper value cannot be figured out within the specified time by the correction of the dot diameter correction /M. Or, the MPC proper
Developing unit /M
IDC sensor (IDCS)
Writing unit /M
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Check the connector connection and the wiring between writing unit and PRIPB, and repair it if any abnormality.
8. Replace IDCS.
10. Replace PRIPB.
11. Replace PRCB.
2.18.15 C-2833
Code
C-2833
Classification
Cause
The proper value cannot be figured out within the specified time by the correction of the dot diameter correction /C. Or, the MPC proper
Developing unit /C
IDC sensor (IDCS)
Writing unit /C
Correction
Note
Solution
8. Replace IDCS.
10. Replace PRIPB.
11. Replace PRCB.
K -227
2.18.16 C-2834
Code
C-2834
Classification
Cause
The proper value cannot be figured out within the specified time by the correction of the dot diameter correction /K. Or, the MPC proper
Developing unit /K
IDC sensor (IDCS)
Writing unit /K
Correction
Note
Solution
8. Replace IDCS.
10. Replace PRIPB.
11. Replace PRCB.
2.18.17 C-2840
Code
C-2840
Classification
Cause
The IDC sensor (IDCS) output value is detected not within the specified range on the IDC sensor (IDCS) base correction when the rough
adjustment ends.
IDC sensor (IDCS)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check that the belt cleaner blade on the intermediate transfer section is not curled and reinstall/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace IDCS.
7. Replace PRCB.
2.18.18 C-2841
Code
C-2841
Classification
Cause
The LED applied voltage is detected not within the specified range on the IDC sensor (IDCS) base correction.
K -228
IDC sensor (IDCS)

Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check that there is no curling-up of belt cleaner blade of the intermediate transfer section, and install/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace IDCS.
6. Replace PRCB.
7. Replace IDCS and PRCB at a time
2.19 Solution 15 (C-3001_3500)

2.19.1 C-3101
Code
C-3101
Classification
Main body: Motor abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of M29 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the fusing motor (M29) is ON.
Fusing motor (M29)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connection between the rear side connector of the fusing unit and the main body side connector, and repair it if any
abnormality.
2. Check the fusing unit, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between CDB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and CDB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3-I)
6. Replace M29.
7. Replace CDB.
8. Replace PRCB.
2.19.2 C-3102
Code
C-3102
Classification
Cause
While the fusing release home sensor (PS16) is ON, PS16 does not turn OFF within a specified period of time after the fusing motor (M29)
turns ON. While PS16 is OFF, PS16 does not turn ON within a specified period of time after M29 turns ON.
Fusing motor (M29)
Fusing release home sensor (PS16)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check that the front door is closed properly, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the fusing unit, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the fusing drive gear system, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the connector connection and the wiring between CDB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3-I)
7. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (1/3): 2-I)
K -229
8. Replace M29.
9. Replace PS16.
10. Replace CDB.
11. Replace PRCB.
12. Replace M29 and CDB at a time.
2.19.3 C-3103
Code
C-3103
Classification
Cause
The 2nd transfer pressure release motor (M34) does not turn OFF within a specified period of time after it turns ON.
2nd transfer pressure release motor (M34)
2nd transfer HP sensor (PS24)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the 2nd transfer intermediate transfer unit, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between CDB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check I/O of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (1/3): 7-O)
10-P)
6. Replace PS24.
7. Replace M34.
8. Replace CDB.
9. Replace M34 and CDB at a time.
2.19.4 C-3301*
Code
C-3301*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM37 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the fusing ventilation fan (FM37) is ON.
Fusing ventilation fan (FM37)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Rotate the fan by I/O or by hand, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/3): 15-D)
3. Replace FM37.
4. Replace PRCB
5. Replace FM37 and PRCB at a time
2.19.5 C-3302*
Code
C-3302*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM10 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the fusing belt ventilation fan (FM10) is ON.
Fusing belt ventilation fan (FM10)
K -230
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM10.
4. Replace PRCB.
2.19.6 C-3303
Code
C-3303
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM65 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the fusing cooling fan (FM65) is ON.
Fusing cooling fan (FM65)
Correction
Note
Solution
abnormality.
3. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (1/3): 2-I)
4. Replace FM65.
5. Replace CDB.
2.19.7 C-3304
Code
C-3304
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of any of FM7, FM8 or FM9 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the fusing separation
fans /1 (FM7), /2 (FM8) and /3 (FM9) are ON.
Fusing separation fan /1 (FM7)
Correction
Note

Solution
4. Replace PRCB.
5. Replace FM7, FM8, FM9 and PRCB at a time.
2.20 Solution 16 (C-3501_4000)

2.20.1 C-3501*
Code
C-3501*
Classification
Main body: Fusing high temperature abnormality
Cause
K -231
Fusing high temperature abnormality

The temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detects 250 C or higher value continuously for a specified period of time.
Fusing unit
Fusing heater lamp /1 (L2)
Temperature sensor /1 (TH1)
Correction
WARNING
After replacing the defective parts, be sure to set the DIPSW 3-1 to 0. If DIPSW3-1 is set to 0 before defective parts are fixed,
it may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and the temperature sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between ACDB and the fusing heater lamp, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring
diagram: Main body (1/3): 3-E)
4. Check the installation condition of the fusing heater lamp and ON/OFF with I/O, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring
diagram: Main body (1/3): 3-D)
5. Check the installation condition of TH1 and temperature of I/O, and adjust/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body
(1/3): 3-F)
6. Replace TH1.
7. ReplaceL2, L3 and L4.
8. Replace ACDB.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.20.2 C-3502*
Code
C-3502*
Classification
Cause
Fusing unit
Correction
WARNING
After replacing the defective parts, be sure to set the DIPSW3-1 to 0. If DIPSW3-1 is set to 0 before defective parts are fixed, it
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between ACDB and the fusing heater lamp, and repair/replace it if any abnormality
(Wiring diagram: Main body (1/3): 3-E)
4. Check the installation condition of the fusing heater lamp and ON/OFF by the I/O, and repair/replace it if any abnormality (Wiring
5. Check the installation condition of TH3 and the temperature by I/O, and adjust/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main
body (1/3): 3-F)
6. Replace TH3.
7. Replace L2, L3 and L4.
8. Replace ACDB.
9. Replace PRCB
2.20.3 C-3503*
Code
C-3503*
K -232
Classification
Cause
Fusing unit
Correction
WARNING
it may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
diagram: Main body (1/3): 3-G)
(1/3): 3-G)
6. Replace TH2.
7. Replace L5.
8. Replace ACDB.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.20.4 C-3504*
Code
C-3504*
Classification
Cause
Fusing unit
Correction
WARNING
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
(Wiring diagram: Main body (1/3): 3-G)
body (1/3): 3-G)
6. Replace TH4.
7. Replace L5.
8. Replace ACDB.
9. Replace PRCB
2.20.5 C-3505*
Code
C-3505*
Classification
K -233

Cause
Fusing unit
Correction
WARNING
Be sure to set the DIPSW3-1 to 0 after replacing the defective parts. If DIPSW3-1 is set to 0 before defective parts are fixed, it
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between ACDB and the fusing heater lamp, and repair/replace it if any abnormality.
(1/3): 3-F)
6. Replace TH1.
8. Replace ACDB.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.20.6 C-3506*
Code
C-3506*
Classification
Cause
Fusing unit
Correction
WARNING
it may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
diagram: Main body (1/3): 3-E, 3-G)
(1/3): 3-F, 3-G)
6. Replace TH2.
7. Replace L5.
8. Replace ACDB.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.20.7 C-3508*
Code
C-3508*
K -234
Classification
Cause
Paper is wound around the fusing roller.
J31-02 occurs 4 times in a row.
Fusing unit
Registration motor (M30)
Fusing paper exit sensor (PS17)
Correction
WARNING
it may cause fire.
Solution
1. Check the fusing roller, and repair it if any abnormality such as paper wrap.
2. Check the toner on the transfer belt and clean it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between CDB and the sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (1/3):10-O)
5. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (1/3): 3-I)
6. Replace PS17.
7. Replace CDB.
8. Replace HV /1 and /2.
9. Replace PRCB.
10. Replace fusing unit.
2.20.8 C-3509*
Code
C-3509*
Classification
Cause
Fusing roller /Up temperature gap abnormality
When the fusing roller /Up is higher than the specified temperature, the gap detected by the temperature sensors /1 (TH1) and /3 (TH3)are
larger than the specified value.
Fusing unit
Correction
WARNING
Be sure to set the DIPSW 3-1 to 0 after replacing the defective parts. If DIPSW3-1 is set to 0 before defective parts are fixed, it
may cause fire.
Solution
1. Check that the front door is not opened/closed frequently, and wait for several minutes with the front door closed.
abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring of the heater and the sensor, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main
body (1/3): 3-E, 3-F, 3-G)
4. Check the RL1, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (1/3): 8-C)
5. Check the conduction of thermostat.
diagram: Main body (1/3): 3-E, 3-G)
8. Check the installation condition of TH1 and TH3 and temperature of I/O, and adjust/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main
body (1/3): 3-F, 3-G)
9. Replace TH1 and TH3.
11. Replace ACDB.
12. Replace PRCB.
K -235

2.20.9 C-3801*
Code
C-3801*
Classification
Main body: Fusing low temperature abnormality
Cause
Fusing low temperature abnormality.
While fusing idling or printing, the temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detects lower than the specified temperature for a specified period of time.
Fusing unit
Thermostat /1 (TS1)
Thermostat /2 (TS2)
Correction
WARNING
it may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
body (1/3): 3-E, 3-F)
(1/3): 3-F)
9. Replace TH1.
10. Replace TS1 and TS2.
12. Replace ACDB.
13. Replace PRCB.
2.20.10 C-3802*
Code
C-3802*
Classification
Cause
Fusing unit
Thermostat /1 (TS1)
Thermostat /2 (TS2)
Correction
WARNING
may cause fire.
Solution
K -236
abnormality.
body (1/3): 3-E, 3-F)
8. Check the installation condition of TH3 and the temperature of I/O, and adjust/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body
(1/3): 3-F)
9. Replace TH3.
12. Replace ACDB.
13. Replace PRCB.
2.20.11 C-3803*
Code
C-3803*
Classification
Cause
Fusing unit
Thermostat /3 (TS3)
Correction
WARNING
it may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
body (1/3): 3-G)
(1/3): 3-G)
9. Replace TH2.
10. Replace TS3.
11. Replace L5.
12. Replace ACDB.
13. Replace PRCB.
2.20.12 C-3804*
Code
C-3804*
Classification
Cause
Fusing unit
K -237

Thermostat /3 (TS3)
Correction
WARNING
it may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
body (1/3): 3-G)
(1/3): 3-G)
9. Replace TH4.
10. Replace TS3.
11. Replace L5.
12. Replace ACDB.
13. Replace PRCB.
2.20.13 C-3805*
Code
C-3805*
Classification
Cause
Fusing unit
Thermostat /1 (TS1)
Thermostat /2 (TS2)
Correction
WARNING
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
body (1/3): 3-E, 3-F)
(1/3): 3-F)
9. Replace TH1.
12. Replace ACDB.
13. Replace PRCB.
K -238
2.20.14 C-3806*
Code
C-3806*
Classification
Cause
Fusing unit
Thermostat /3 (TS3)
Correction
WARNING
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring of the heater and the sensor, and repair it if any abnormality (Wiring diagram: Main
body (1/3): 3-G)
5. Check the conduction of the thermostat
(Wiring diagram: Main body (1/3): 3-G)
body (1/3): 3-G)
9. Replace TH2.
10. Replace TS3.
11. Replace L5.
12. Replace ACDB.
13. Replace PRCB
2.20.15 C-3901*
Code
C-3901*
Classification
Main body: Fusing sensor abnormality
Cause
Fusing high temperature abnormality (hardware detection).
The temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detects an error detection signal continuously for a specified period of time.
Fusing unit
Correction
WARNING
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
K -239
(1/3): 3-F)
6. Replace TH3.
8. Replace ACDB.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.20.16 C-3902*
Code
C-3902*
Classification
Cause
Fusing unit
Correction
WARNING
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
(Wiring diagram: Main body (1/3): 3-E, 3-G)
body (1/3): 3-F, 3-G)
6. Replace TH4.
7. Replace L5.
8. Replace ACDB.
9. Replace PRCB
2.20.17 C-3903*
Code
C-3903*
Classification
Cause
Fusing low temperature abnormality (hardware detection)
Fusing unit
Thermostat /1 (TS1)
Thermostat /2 (TS2)
Correction
WARNING
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
body (1/3): 3-E, 3-F)
K -240
(1/3): 3-F)
9. Replace TH1.
12. Replace ACDB.
13. Replace PRCB.
2.20.18 C-3904*
Code
C-3904*
Classification
Cause
Fusing low temperature abnormality (hardware detection)
Fusing unit
Thermostat /1 (TS1)
Thermostat /2 (TS2)
Correction
WARNING
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
body (1/3): 3-E, 3-F)
(1/3): 3-F)
9. Replace TH3.
12. Replace ACDB.
13. Replace PRCB.
2.20.19 C-3905*
Code
C-3905*
Classification
Cause
Fusing low temperature abnormality (hardware detection).
Fusing unit
K -241

Thermostat /3 (TS3)
Correction
WARNING
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
body (1/3): 3-G)
(1/3): 3-G)
9. Replace TH2.
10. Replace TS3.
11. Replace L5.
12. Replace ACDB.
13. Replace PRCB.
2.20.20 C-3906*
Code
C-3906*
Classification
Cause
Fusing unit
Thermostat /3 (TS3)
Correction
WARNING
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
body (1/3): 3-G)
(1/3): 3-G)
9. Replace TH4.
10. Replace TS3.
11. Replace L5.
12. Replace ACDB.
13. Replace PRCB.
2.20.21 C-3907*
Code
K -242
C-3907*
Classification
Cause
Fusing unit
Correction
WARNING
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
body (1/3): 3-E, 3-F)
6. Check the installation condition of TH1, and adjust/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (1/3): 3-F)
7. Replace TH1.
9. Replace ACDB.
10. Replace PRCB.
2.20.22 C-3908*
Code
C-3908*
Classification
Cause
Fusing unit
Thermostat /1 (TS1)
Thermostat /2 (TS2)
Correction
WARNING
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
body (1/3): 3-E, 3-F)
K -243
(1/3): 3-F)
9. Replace TH1.
12. Replace ACDB.
13. Replace PRCB.
2.20.23 C-3909*
Code
C-3909*
Classification
Cause
Fusing unit
Correction
WARNING
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
(1/3): 3-G)
6. Replace TH2.
7. Replace L5.
8. Replace ACDB.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.20.24 C-3910*
Code
C-3910*
Classification
Cause
Fusing unit
Thermostat /3 (TS3)
Correction
WARNING
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
body (1/3): 3-G)
K -244
4.Check the RL1, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (1/3): 8-C)
5.Check the conduction of thermostat.
6.Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and the temperature sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
7.Check the connector connection and the wiring between ACDB and the fusing heater lamp, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring
(1/3): 3-G)
9. Replace TH2.
10. Replace TS3.
11. Replace L5.
12. Replace ACDB.
13. Replace PRCB.
2.20.25 C-3911*
Code
C-3911*
Classification
Cause
The detected temperature of the temperature sensor /1 (TH1) has not reached to 100C within the specified period of time after the sub
power switch (SW2) turned ON.
Fusing unit
Thermostat /1 (TS1)
Thermostat /2 (TS2)
Correction
WARNING
it may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
body (1/3): 3-E, 3-F)
(1/3): 3-F)
9. Replace TH1.
12. Replace ACDB.
13. Replace PRCB.
14. Replace ACDB and L2, L3, L4 at a time
2.20.26 C-3912*
Code
C-3912*
Classification
Cause
The detected temperature of the temperature sensor /2 (TH2) has not reached to 100C within the specified period of time after the sub
power switch (SW2) turned ON.
Fusing unit
K -245

Thermostat /3 (TS3)
Correction
WARNING
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
body (1/3): 3-G)
(1/3): 3-G)
9. Replace TH2.
10. Replace TS3.
11. Replace L5.
12. Replace ACDB.
13. Replace PRCB.
2.20.27 C-3913*
Code
C-3913*
Classification
Cause
The fusing unit is not set.
Fusing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check that the fusing unit is properly set and repair it if any abnormality.
abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and the fan on the main body side, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace PRCB.
2.20.28 C-3914*
Code
C-3914*
Classification
Cause
Fusing unit
Correction
K -246
WARNING
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
6. Replace TH1.
8. Replace ACDB.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.20.29 C-3915*
Code
C-3915*
Classification
Cause
Fusing unit
Correction
WARNING
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
6. Replace TH2.
7. Replace L5.
8. Replace ACDB.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.21 Solution 17 (C-4001_5000)

2.21.1 C-4101
Code
C-4101
Classification
Main body: Polygon motor abnormality
Cause
When the polygon motor /Y (M70) in the writing unit starts up or its speed changes, the lock signal of M70 is not detected within a
Writing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
K -247
1. Check the write unit, and replace it if there is any abnormality.

2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and write unit, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Replace write unit.
4. Replace PRCB.
5. Replace writing unit and PRCB at a time.
2.21.2 C-4102
Code
C-4102
Classification
Cause
When the polygon motor /M (M71) in the writing unit starts up or its speed changes, the lock signal of M71 is not detected within a
Writing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRCB.
5. Replace write unit and PRCB at a time.
2.21.3 C-4103
Code
C-4103
Classification
Cause
When the polygon motor /C (M72) in the writing unit starts up or its speed changes, the lock signal of M72 is not detected within a
Writing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRCB.
2.21.4 C-4104
Code
C-4104
Classification
Cause
When the polygon motor /K (M73) in the writing unit starts up or its speed changes, the lock signal of M73 is not detected within a
Writing unit
Correction
Note
K -248
Solution
4. Replace PRCB.
5. Replace writing unit and PRCB at a time
2.21.5 C-4111
Code
C-4111
Classification
Cause
A temperature abnormality of the polygon motor /Y (M70) in the writing unit is detected.
Writing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRCB.
2.21.6 C-4112
Code
C-4112
Classification
Cause
A temperature abnormality of the polygon motor /M (M71) in the writing unit is detected.
Writing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRCB.
2.21.7 C-4113
Code
C-4113
Classification
Cause
A temperature abnormality of the polygon motor /C (M72) in the writing unit is detected.
Writing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
K -249
4. Replace PRCB.
2.21.8 C-4114
Code
C-4114
Classification
Cause
A temperature abnormality of the polygon motor /K (M73) in the writing unit is detected.
Writing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRCB.
2.21.9 C-4120
Code
C-4120
Classification
Cause
The temperature sensor in the writing unit /K detects the temperature abnormality.
Writing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace writing unit /K.
4. Replace PRCB.
2.21.10 C-4301
Code
C-4301
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of any of M45 or M46 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the developing fans (FM45)
Correction
Note
Solution
K -250
4. Replace PRCB.
2.21.11 C-4501
Code
C-4501
Classification
Main body: Writing correction drive abnormality
Cause
The tilt correction home sensor /Y (PS70) turns OFF while the tilt correction motor /Y (M74) in the writing unit is ON.
Writing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRCB.
2.21.12 C-4502
Code
C-4502
Classification
Cause
The tilt correction home sensor /M (PS71) turns OFF while the tilt correction motor /M (M75) in the writing unit is ON.
Writing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRCB.
2.21.13 C-4503
Code
C-4503
Classification
Cause
The tilt correction home sensor /C (PS72) turns OFF while the tilt correction motor /C (M76) in the writing unit is ON.
Writing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRCB.
K -251

2.21.14 C-4504
Code
C-4504
Classification
Cause
The tilt correction home sensor /K (PS73) turns OFF while the tilt correction motor /K (M77) in the writing unit is ON.
Writing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRCB.
2.21.15 C-4511
Code
C-4511
Classification
Cause
The tilt correction motor /Y (M74) does not turn OFF within a specified period of time after it turns ON. Or, the installation position of the tilt
correction home sensor /Y (PS70) is improper.
Tilt correction motor /Y (M74)
Skew correction home sensor /Y (PS70)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor, and replace the write unit if any abnormality.
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and replace the write unit if any abnormality.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.21.16 C-4512
Code
C-4512
Classification
Cause
The tilt correction motor /Y (M75) does not turn OFF within a specified period of time after it turns ON. Or, the installation position of the tilt
correction home sensor /M (PS71) is improper.
Tilt correction motor /M (M75)
Skew correction home sensor /M (PS71)
Correction
Note
Solution
K -252
6. Replace PRCB.
2.21.17 C-4513
Code
C-4513
Classification
Cause
The tilt correction motor /C (M76) does not turn OFF within a specified period of time after it turns ON. Or, the installation position of the tilt
correction home sensor /C (PS72) is improper.
Tilt correction motor /C (M76)
Tilt correction home sensor /C (PS72)
Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace PRCB.
2.21.18 C-4514
Code
C-4514
Classification
Cause
The tilt correction motor /K (M77) does not turn OFF within a specified period of time after it turns ON. Or, the installation position of the tilt
correction home sensor /K (PS73) is improper.
Tilt correction motor /K (M77)
Tilt correction home sensor /K (PS73)
Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace PRCB.
2.21.19 C-4520
Code
C-4520
Classification
Main body: Color registration abnormality
Cause
The color registration correction has terminated abnormally.
Color registration sensor /Fr (PS8)
K -253
Color registration sensor /Rr (PS9)

Correction
Note
Solution
1. When a SC occurs, store the log by the Log Store in the service mode.
2. Report it with that log to KMBT.
2.21.20 C-4521
Code
C-4521
Classification
Cause
The color registration base line correction /Fr has terminated abnormally.
Color registration shutter solenoid (SD2)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the shutter and around the color registration sensor, and clean/replace if there is any dirt or abnormality.
2. Check the intermediate transfer belt, and clean/replace it if there is any dirt or abnormality.
4. Check I/O and the I/O rate of the sensor by I/O of SD2, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/3): 6-P)
5. Replace PS8.
6. Replace PRCB
7. Replace SD2 and PRCB at a time
2.21.21 C-4522
Code
C-4522
Classification
Cause
The color registration base line correction /Rr has terminated abnormally.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the shutter and around the color registration sensor, and clean/replace if there is any dirt or abnormality.
2. Check the intermediate transfer belt, and clean/replace it if there is any dirt or abnormality.
4. Check the I/O rate of the sensor by I/O of SD2, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/3): 6-P)
5. Replace PS9.
6. Replace PRCB.
7. Replace SD2 and PRCB at a time.
2.21.22 C-4545
Code
C-4545
Classification
Main body: Beam interval correction abnormality
Cause
The beam interval correction (Y) has terminated abnormally.
K -254

Writing unit
Correction
Note

Solution
2.21.23 C-4546
Code
C-4546
Classification
Cause
The beam interval correction (M) has terminated abnormally.
Writing unit
Correction
Note

Solution
2.21.24 C-4547
Code
C-4547
Classification
Cause
The beam interval correction (C) has terminated abnormally.
Writing unit
Correction
Note

Solution
2.21.25 C-4548
Code
C-4548
Classification
Cause
The beam interval correction (K) has terminated abnormally.
Writing unit
Correction
Note

Solution
K -255

2.21.26 C-4601
Code
C-4601
Classification
Main body: Color registration board /Fr (Y) data undetected abnormality
Cause
The color registration board /Fr (CRB/Fr) has not detected any data of Y toner.
Color registration board /Fr (CRB/Fr)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Output the test pattern to check the Y toner density or whether white spot occurs.
2. Output the test pattern No.25 to check the registration mark position in main scan direction.
3. When the registration mark is not output properly, check the writing, developing, and transfer relation, and repair/replace it if any
abnormality.
4. When the registration mark is output properly, check the connector connection and wiring between PRCB and the color registration
sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
Check the color registration sensor, color registration shutter solenoid, and color registration board, and repair/replace it is any
abnormality.
5. Check the I/O drive of SD2 and repair/replace it if any abnormality.
6. Replace SD2.
7. Replace PS8.
8. Replace CRB /Fr.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.21.27 C-4602
Code
C-4602
Classification
Main body: Color registration board /Fr (M) data undetected abnormality
Cause
The color registration board /Fr (CRB/Fr) has not detected any data of M toner.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Output the test pattern to check the M toner density or whether white spot occurs.
3. When the registration mark is not output properly, check the writing, developing, and transfer relations and repair/replace it if any
abnormality.
4. When the registration mark is output properly, check the connection and wiring harness between PRCB and the color registration
sensor and repair it if any abnormality.
Check the color registration sensor, color registration shutter solenoid, and color registration board and repair/replace it if any
abnormality.
6. Replace SD2.
7. Replace PS8.
8. Replace CRB/Fr.
9. Replace PRCB.
K -256
2.21.28 C-4603
Code
C-4603
Classification
Main body: Color registration board /Fr (C) data undetected abnormality
Cause
The color registration board /Fr (CRB/Fr) has not detected any data of C toner.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Output the test pattern to check the C toner density or whether white spot occurs.
abnormality.
abnormality.
6. Replace SD2.
7. Replace PS8.
8. Replace CRB/Fr.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.21.29 C-4604
Code
C-4604
Classification
Main body: Color registration board /Fr (K) data undetected abnormality
Cause
The color registration board /Fr (CRB/Fr) has not detected any data of K toner.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Output the test pattern to check the K toner density or whether white spot occurs.
abnormality.
abnormality.
6. Replace SD2.
7. Replace PS8.
8. Replace CRB/Fr.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.21.30 C-4621
Code
C-4621
Classification
K -257
Main body: Color registration board /Rr (Y) data undetected abnormality
Cause
The color registration board /Rr (CRB/Rr) has not detected any data of Y toner.
Color registration board /Rr (CRB/Rr)
-
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Output the test pattern to check the Y toner density or whether white spot occurs.
3. When the registration mark is not output properly, check the writing, developing, and transfer relation, and repair/replace it if any
abnormality.
4. When the registration mark is output properly, check the connector connection and wiring between PRCB and the color registration
sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
Check the color registration sensor, color registration shutter solenoid, and color registration board, and repair/replace it is any
abnormality.
6. Replace SD2.
7. Replace PS9.
8. Replace CRB /Rr.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.21.31 C-4622
Code
C-4622
Classification
Main body: Color registration board /Rr (M) data undetected abnormality
Cause
The color registration board /Rr (CRB/Rr) has not detected any data of M toner.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Output the test pattern to check the M toner density or whether white spot occurs.
abnormality.
abnormality.
6. Replace SD2.
7. Replace PS9.
8. Replace CRB/Rr.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.21.32 C-4623
Code
C-4623
Classification
Main body: Color registration board /Rr (C) data undetected abnormality
Cause
The color registration board /Rr (CRB/Rr) has not detected any data of C toner.
K -258
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Output the test pattern to check the C toner density or whether white spot occurs.
abnormality.
abnormality.
6. Replace SD2.
7. Replace PS9.
8. Replace CRB/Rr.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.21.33 C-4624
Code
C-4624
Classification
Main body: Color registration board /Rr (K) data undetected abnormality
Cause
The color registration board /Rr (CRB/Rr) has not detected any data of K toner.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Output the test pattern to check the K toner density or whether white spot occurs.
abnormality.
abnormality.
6. Replace SD2.
7. Replace PS9.
8. Replace CRB/Rr.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.21.34 C-4631
Code
C-4631
Classification
Main body: Color registration board /Fr (Y) abnormality
Cause
The histogram processing of Y toner has terminated abnormally on the color registration board /Fr (CRB/Fr).
K -259

Correction
Note
Solution
1. Output the test pattern to check whether the uneven density occurs on Y toner area.
2. Check the intermediate transfer belt, and clean/replace it if there is toner image or damage.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and the color registration sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the color registration sensor, the color registration shutter solenoid and the color registration board, and repair/replace it if any
abnormality.
5. Check the drive of I/O of SD2, and repair/replace it if any abnormality.
6. Replace SD2
7. Replace PS8
8. Replace CRB /Fr
9. Replace PRCB
2.21.35 C-4632
Code
C-4632
Classification
Main body: Color registration board /Fr (M) abnormality
Cause
The histogram processing of M toner has terminated abnormally on the color registration board /Fr (CRB/Fr).
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Output the test pattern to check whether the uneven density occurs on M toner area.
4. Check the color registration sensor, color registration shutter solenoid, and color registration board and repair/replace it if any
abnormality.
6. Replace SD2.
7. Replace PS8.
8. Replace CRB/Fr.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.21.36 C-4633
Code
C-4633
Classification
Main body: Color registration board /Fr (C) abnormality
Cause
The histogram processing of C toner has terminated abnormally on the color registration board /Fr (CRB/Fr).
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Output the test pattern to check whether the uneven density occurs on C toner area.
K -260
abnormality.
6. Replace SD2.
7. Replace PS8.
8. Replace CRB/Fr.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.21.37 C-4634
Code
C-4634
Classification
Main body: Color registration board /Fr (K) abnormality
Cause
The histogram processing of K toner has terminated abnormally on the color registration board /Fr (CRB/Fr).
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Output the test pattern to check whether the uneven density occurs on K toner area.
abnormality.
6. Replace SD2.
7. Replace PS8.
8. Replace CRB/Fr.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.21.38 C-4651
Code
C-4651
Classification
Main body: Color registration board /Rr (Y) abnormality
Cause
The histogram processing of Y toner has terminated abnormally on the color registration board /Rr (CRB/Rr).
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Output the test pattern to check whether the uneven density occurs on Y toner area.
abnormality.
6. Replace SD2.
7. Replace PS9.
8. Replace CRB/Rr.
9. Replace PRCB.
K -261
2.21.39 C-4652
Code
C-4652
Classification
Main body: Color registration board /Rr (M) abnormality
Cause
The histogram processing of M toner has terminated abnormally on the color registration board /Rr (CRB/Rr).
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Output the test pattern to check whether the uneven density occurs on M toner area.
abnormality.
6. Replace SD2.
7. Replace PS9.
8. Replace CRB/Rr.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.21.40 C-4653
Code
C-4653
Classification
Main body: Color registration board /Rr (C) abnormality
Cause
The histogram processing of C toner has terminated abnormally on the color registration board /Rr (CRB/Rr).
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Output the test pattern to check whether the uneven density occurs on C toner area.
abnormality.
6. Replace SD2.
7. Replace PS9.
8. Replace CRB/Rr.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.21.41 C-4654
Code
C-4654
Classification
Main body: Color registration board /Rr (K) abnormality
Cause
The histogram processing of K toner has terminated abnormally on the color registration board /Rr (CRB/Rr).
K -262

Correction
Note
Solution
1. Output the test pattern to check whether the uneven density occurs on K toner area.
abnormality.
6. Replace SD2.
7. Replace PS9.
8. Replace CRB/Rr.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.21.42 C-4661
Code
C-4661
Classification
Main body: Color registration correction abnormality (Y)
Cause
The color registration correction /Y has terminated abnormally.
Color registration sensor /Fr (PS8), /Rr (PS9)
Color registration board /Fr (CRB/Fr), /Rr (CRB/Rr)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Perform the color registration automatic adjustment.
2. When the error 2 occurs, acquire the log and analyze.
3. When the error 1 occurs, it means that the color registration error level is not abnormal but not good. In this case, the error is cleared
by returning to the normal mode. However it may occur again.
abnormality.
7. Replace SD2.
9. Replace CRB/Fr and CRB/Rr.
10. Replace PRCB.
2.21.43 C-4662
Code
C-4662
Classification
Main body: Color registration correction abnormality (M)
Cause
The color registration correction /M has terminated abnormally.
Correction
Note
K -263
Solution
abnormality.
7. Replace SD2.
10. Replace PRCB.
2.21.44 C-4663
Code
C-4663
Classification
Main body: Color registration correction abnormality (C)
Cause
The color registration correction /C has terminated abnormally.
Correction
Note
Solution
abnormality.
7. Replace SD2.
10. Replace PRCB.
2.21.45 C-4701
Code
C-4701
Classification
Main body: Image processing abnormality
Cause
FIFO address abnormality for the printer. While in the image write, the expansion processing of image data that is read in does not
terminate correctly.
Overall control board (OACB)
Memory control board /1 (MCB1)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between MCB1 and OACB, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between OACB and PRCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Replace MCB1.
4. Replace OACB.
5. Replace PRCB.
K -264
2.21.46 C-4702
Code
C-4702
Classification
Cause
An error interrupt occurs with the compression/expansion chip FIFO.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Replace MCB1.
3. Replace OACB.
2.21.47 C-4703
Code
C-4703
Classification
Cause
Image data expansion abnormality.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Replace MCB1.
3. Replace OACB.
2.21.48 C-4705
Code
C-4705
Classification
Cause
While in the image write, the expansion processing from the memory to the printer does not terminate within a specified period of time.
The output from the page memory to the printer does not terminate within a specified period of time. The PVV is not detected within a
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection between MCB1 and PRIPB/between MCB1 and OACB, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between OACB and PRCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace MCB1.
5. Replace PRIPB.
6. Replace PRCB.
K -265
2.21.49 C-4706
Code
C-4706
Classification
Cause
While in the image write, despite of no resource provided, an inappropriate processing such as accessing to the elongation device is
made.
Program of overall control board (OACB)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rewrite the firmware for image control.
3. Replace MCB1.
4. Replace OACB.
2.21.50 C-4708
Code
C-4708
Classification
Cause
When accessing to the memory device, a defective software is detected.
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace MCB1.
4. Replace OACB.
2.21.51 C-4709
Code
C-4709
Classification
Cause
The expansion processing from the memory to the page memory does not terminate within a specified period of time. The compression
processing from the page memory to the memory does not terminate within a specified period of time. The development from the memory
to the page memory does not terminate within a specified period of time. The transmission of the compressed data from memory to
memory does not terminated within a specified period of time.
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace MCB1.
K -266
4. Replace OACB.
2.21.52 C-4713
Code
C-4713
Classification
Cause
A page memory for printing cannot be secured.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRIPB and write unit, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection on MCB1 and PRIPB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace PRIPB.
5. Replace MCB1.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.21.53 C-4714
Code
C-4714
Classification
Main body: Image processing abnormality /Y
Cause
When executing APC, the Index sensor output does not change. The index sensor failed to detect the laser because the polygon mirror
does not rotate, the position of the index sensor is improper, or the index sensor is defective.
Writing unit /Y
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the write unit, and repair/replace it if there is any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRIB and write unit, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace PRIPB.
2.21.54 C-4715
Code
C-4715
Classification
Main body: Image processing abnormality /M
Cause
Writing unit /M
Correction
Note
Solution
K -267

4. Replace PRIPB.
2.21.55 C-4716
Code
C-4716
Classification
Main body: Image processing abnormality /C
Cause
Writing unit /C
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRIPB.
2.21.56 C-4717
Code
C-4717
Classification
Main body: Image processing abnormality /K
Cause
Writing unit/K
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRIPB.
2.21.57 C-4718
Code
C-4718
Classification
Cause
APC abnormality.
The laser does not turn ON because 12V DC power source for driving laser is not fed, MPC is wrong, or the laser is defective.
Writing unit /Y
Correction
Note
Solution
K -268
4. Replace PRIPB.
2.21.58 C-4719
Code
C-4719
Classification
Cause
APC abnormality.
Writing unit /M
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRIPB.
2.21.59 C-4720
Code
C-4720
Classification
Cause
APC abnormality.
Writing unit /C
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRIPB.
2.21.60 C-4721
Code
C-4721
Classification
Cause
APC abnormality.
Writing unit/K
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRIPB.
K -269

2.21.61 C-4722
Code
C-4722
Classification
Cause
Connection abnormality between the index board /Y (IDB/Y) or the laser drive board /Y (LDB/Y) and the printer image processing board
(PRIPB).
Writing unit /Y
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRIPB.
2.21.62 C-4723
Code
C-4723
Classification
Cause
Connection abnormality between the index board /M (IDB/M) or the laser drive board /M (LDB/M) and the printer image processing board
(PRIPB).
Writing unit /M
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRIPB.
2.21.63 C-4724
Code
C-4724
Classification
Cause
Connection abnormality between the index board /C (IDB/C) or the laser drive board /C (LDB/C) and the printer image processing board
(PRIPB).
Writing unit /C
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRIPB.
K -270
2.21.64 C-4725
Code
C-4725
Classification
Cause
Connection abnormality between the index board /K (IDB/K) or the laser drive board /K (LDB/K) and the printer image processing board
(PRIPB).
Writing unit/K
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRIPB.
2.21.65 C-4840
Code
C-4840
Classification
Cause
The engine section has kept driving continuously for a specified period of time without producing image or process patch.
Printer control program
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring on PRCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Rewrite the firmware of printer system
3. Replace PRCB.
2.21.66 C-4850*
Code
C-4850*
Classification
Cause
The overall control software accesses an illegal address.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring on OACB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Replace OACB.
2.22 Solution 18 (C-5001_6000)

2.22.1 C-5001
Code
K -271
C-5001
Classification
Cause
12V DC abnormality.
An error signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Start up the main body with CN301 on PRCB disconnected to check the V output of CN301-2.
2. If there is no 12V output, check the connector connection and the wiring of PRCB and DCPS1. Repair it if any abnormality. If no
abnormality exists, replace DCPS1.
3. Replace PRCB if 12V output performed.
4. Replace PRCB and SCPS1 at a time.
2.22.2 C-5002
Code
C-5002
Classification
Cause
24V DC abnormality.
An error signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time after REN/2 turns ON.
Each loading of PRCB connection (motor, solenoid and clutch)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Start up the main body with CN302 on PRCB disconnected to check the 24V output of CN302-1 and CN302-3.
3. Replace PRCB if 24V output performed.
4. Check the loading of PRCB connection (motor, solenoid and clutch), and repair/replace if any abnormality.
5. Replace PRCB and DCPS2 at a time.
2.22.3 C-5003
Code
C-5003
Classification
Cause
Conveyance drive board (CDB) 24VDC abnormality.
An error signal of 24VDC for CDB is detected.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the operation of the front door switch (MS1), and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between DCPS2 and CDB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace DCPS2.
5. Replace CDB.
6. Replace DCPS2 and CDB at a time.
K -272
2.22.4 C-5004
Code
C-5004
Classification
Cause
Laser correction motor 5VDC abnormality
An abnormality of 5VDC for the tilt correction motors /Y (M74), /M (M75), /C (M76), /K (M77)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Start up the main body with CN301 on PRCB disconnected to check the 5V output of CN301-1.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and CDB. Repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace DCPS1.
2.22.5 C-5005
Code
C-5005
Classification
Cause
Conveyance drive board (CDB) 12VDC abnormality.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Replace CDB.
3. Replace PRCB
4. Replace CDB and PRCB at a time
2.22.6 C-5010
Code
C-5010
Classification
Cause
A line status error or a checksum error occured between the overall control board (OACB) and the printer control board (PRIPB) is
detected and it cannot be recovered by sending a retransmission request. Recovery failed even after the requested retransmission is
performed. A sufficient space cannot be obtained in the circular buffer within a specified period of time.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRIPB and OACB, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Replace PRCB.
3. Replace OACB.
K -273
2.22.7 C-5301
Code
C-5301
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM1 or FM3 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the power supply cooling fan /1 (FM1)
Power supply cooling fan /1 (FM1)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (1/3): 15-E)
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between OACB and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace OACB.
5. Replace FM1, FM3 and OACB at a time.
2.22.8 C-5302
Code
C-5302
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM5 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the image processing cooling fan /1 (FM5) is
ON.
Image processing cooling fan /1 (FM5)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM5.
4. Replace OACB.
5. Replace FM5 and OACB at a time
2.22.9 C-5303
Code
C-5303
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM6 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the image processing cooling fan /2 (FM6) is
ON.
Image processing cooling fan /2 (FM6)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM6.
4. Replace OACB.
5. Replace FM6 and OACB at a time.
K -274

2.22.10 C-5304
Code
C-5304
Classification
Main body: HDD unit cooling fan abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of FM81 or FM82 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the HDD unit cooling fans /1
An error detection signal is detected continuously while retrying power feed several times.
HDD unit cooling fan /1 (FM81)
HDD unit cooling fan /2 (FM82)
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace FM81, FM82 and OACB at a time
2.22.11 C-5305
Code
C-5305
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM4 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the power supply cooling fan /4 (FM4) is ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (1/3): 14-E)
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Replace FM4.
2.23 Solution 19 (C-6001_7000)

2.23.1 C-6101
Code
C-6101
Classification
Main body: Scanner abnormality
Cause
While in the home position search operation, the scanner home sensor (PS1) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the
scanner motor (M1) turns ON.
Scanner drive board (SCDB)
Scanner motor (M1)
Scanner home sensor (PS1)
Correction
Note
Solution
K -275
1. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor and motor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/3): 5-B, 3-
B)
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between the sensor and motor and SDCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SCDB and PRCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace PS1.
5. Replace M1.
6. Replace SCDB.
7. Replace PRCB
8. Replace M1 and SCDB at a time.
2.23.2 C-6102
Code
C-6102
Classification
Main body: Scanner abnormality
Cause
When in optics scan returning operation, the scanner home sensor (PS1) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the
scanner motor (M1) turns ON.
Scanner motor (M1)
Scanner home sensor (PS1)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor/motor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/3): 5-B, 3-B)
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between the sensor/motor and SDCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace PS1.
5. Replace M1.
6. Replace SCDB.
7. Replace PRCB.
2.23.3 C-6301
Code
C-6301
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM2 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the scanner cooling fan (FM2) is ON.
Scanner cooling fan (FM2)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/3): 6-B)
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SCDB and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace FM2.
5. Replace SCDB.
6. Replace PRCB.
7. Replace FM2 and SCDB at a time.
2.23.4 C-6701
Code
C-6701
Classification
Main body: Image processing
Cause
K -276
When processing images, a filter coefficient cannot be created normally.

Scanner image processing board (SCIPB)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SCIPB and MCB1, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Replace SCIPB.
2.23.5 C-6702
Code
C-6702
Classification
Cause
Address error of the scanner FIFO. While in the image read, the compression processing of image data that is read in does not terminate
correctly.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between OACB and MCB1, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Replace SCIPB.
3. Replace OACB.
2.23.6 C-6703
Code
C-6703
Classification
Cause
After negation of SW, the compression of images that are read in and their development into the page memory are not terminated within a
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SCIP and MCB1, between MCB1and OACB, and between OACB and PRCB,
and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Replace SCIPB.
3. Replace MCB1.
4. Replace OACB.
5. Replace PRCB
2.23.7 C-6704
Code
C-6704
Classification
Cause
K -277
While in the image read, the compression processing from the scanner into the memory does not terminate within a specified period of
time. The development from the scanner into the page memory does not terminate within a specified period of time. The SVV is not
detected within a specified period of time.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SCIPB and MCB1 /between OACB and PRCB, and repair it if any
abnormality.
2. Replace SCIPB.
3. Replace MCB1.
4. Replace OACB.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.23.8 C-6705
Code
C-6705
Classification
Cause
While in the image read, despite of no resource provided, an inappropriate processing such as accessing to the compression device is
made.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Replace SCIPB.
3. Replace MCB1.
2.23.9 C-6706
Code
C-6706
Classification
Cause
While in the image read, SVV does not turn OFF within a specified period of time and the preparation for scanning the next page cannot
be started.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SCIPB and MCB1 /between OACB and PRCB, and repair it if any
abnormality.
2. Replace SCIPB.
3. Replace MCB1.
4. Replace OACB.
5. Replace PRCB.
K -278
2.23.10 C-6707
Code
C-6707
Classification
Cause
Shading correction abnormality (GA abnormality).
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between MCB1and SCIPB, between SCIPB and CCDB, and repair it if any
abnormality.
2. Replace SCIPB.
2.23.11 C-6708
Code
C-6708
Classification
Cause
AOC/AGC adjustment abnormality
The light blocking cover and the lens cover of the scanner section are removed.
The connector of the CCD board (CCDB) is not disconnected.
The power cable of CCDB is disconnected.
The IC protector of the CCD board (CCDB) is removed.
Overexposure of the exposure lamp (L1).
L1 does not light.
CCD board (CCDB)
CCD lens unit
Exposure lamp (L1)
Scanner inverter board (S_INVB)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the scanner section, and repair it if any abnormality such as cover off.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between L1 and S_INVB, SCDB, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:
Main body (3/3): 4-B)
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between CCDB and SCIPB and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main
body (2/3): 13-C)
4. Check the connector connection and the wiring of SCIPB, MCB1, OACB, PRCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Check the I/O of L1 and replace it if any abnormality.
6. Replace S_INVB.
7. Replace SCIPB.
8. Replace SCDB.
9. Replace CCDB and SCIPB at a time.
2.23.12 C-6709
Code
C-6709
Classification
Cause
The adjustment data evacuated by resolutions is not available.
K -279
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace SCIPB.
4. Replace MCB1.
2.23.13 C-6710
Code
C-6710
Classification
Cause
A density conversion gamma curve cannot be created normally.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SCIPB, MCB1 and OACB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Replace SCIPB.
4. Replace MCB1.
2.23.14 C-6711
Code
C-6711
Classification
Cause
Pulse width modulation IC calibration cannot be started normally.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SCIPB, MCB1 and OACB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Replace SCIPB.
4. Replace MCB1.
2.23.15 C-6712
Code
C-6712
Classification
Cause
Pulse width modulation IC calibration cannot be completed normally.
Correction
K -280
Note
Solution
3. Replace SCIPB.
4. Replace MCB1.
2.23.16 C-6713
Code
C-6713
Classification
Cause
APC initial sampling is started before MPC is completed.
Writing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring on PRIPB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Replace PRIPB.
2.23.17 C-6714
Code
C-6714
Classification
Cause
MPC is started before APC is in progress.
Writing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace PRIPB.
2.23.18 C-6715
Code
C-6715
Classification
Cause
Sub scan beam correction is started before APC or MPC is completed.
Program of printer control board (PRCB)
Correction
Note
Solution
K -281
3. Replace PRIPB.
2.23.19 C-6716
Code
C-6716
Classification
Cause
Sub scan beam interval correction is started with write clock abnormality occurred due to noncompletion of AD9561 initialization.
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace PRIPB.
2.23.20 C-6717
Code
C-6717
Classification
Cause
N-in-1 page area abnormality. Due to an image area abnormality of the memory, images cannot be expanded on the memory.
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace PRIPB.
2.23.21 C-6720
Code
C-6720
Classification
Cause
The scan operation starts before the centering adjustment is terminated.
Software bug
Correction
Note
Solution
1. When a SC occurs, store the log by the Log Store in the service mode.
2. Report it with that log to KMBT.
2.23.22 C-6721
Code
K -282
C-6721
Classification
Cause
The AGC is retried due to the decreased light volume of the exposure lamp (L1). However, no error occurs.
CCD board (CCDB)
CCD lens unit
Exposure lamp (L1)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between CCDB and SCIPB and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main
body (2/3): 13-C)
4. Check the connector connection and the wiring of SCIPB, MCB1, OACB, PRCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace CCDB.
7. Replace SCDB.
8. Replace SCIPB.
2.23.23 C-6722
Code
C-6722
Classification
Cause
A PWM gamma curve is not created properly.
Writing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Replace PRIPB.
2.23.24 C-6723
Code
C-6723
Classification
Cause
Connection abnormality between the CCD board (CCDB) and the image processing board (IPB).
CCD board (CCDB)
CCD lens unit
Exposure lamp (L1)
Correction
Note
Solution
K -283
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between CCDB and SCIPB and between SCDB and L1, and repair it if any
abnormality. (Wiring diagram:Main body (2/3): 13-C, (3/3): 4-B)
5. Replace CCDB.
6. Replace SCDB.
7. Replace SCIPB.
2.23.25 C-6724
Code
C-6724
Classification
Cause
When the sub power switch (SW2) turns ON, connection check of reading system board failed.
CCD board (CCDB)
CCD lens unit
Exposure lamp (L1)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between CCDB and SCIPB and between SCDB and L1, and repair it if any
abnormality. (Wiring diagram:Main body (2/3): 13-C, (3/3): 4-B)
6. Replace CCDB.
7. Replace SCDB.
8. Replace SCIPB.
2.23.26 C-6725
Code
C-6725
Classification
Cause
The parameter setting cannot be performed while preparing for scanning.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Replace SCIPB.
2.23.27 C-6801
Code
C-6801
Classification
Cause
After the sub power switch (SW2) turns ON, the communication between the overall control board (OACB) and the operation board /1
(OB1) is not started within a specified period of time.
Operation board /1 (OB1)
K -284
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring on OACB and OB1, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Replace OB1.
3. Replace OACB.
2.24 Solution 20 (C-7001_9999)

2.24.1 C-7001
Code
C-7001
Classification
Cause
The main body and the post processing machine stop immediately to turn OFF the power relay (RL1).
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between the main body and the post processing machine, and repair it if any
abnormality.
2. Replace PRCB
2.24.2 C-8001
Code
C-8001
Classification
DF: DF communication error
Cause
Communication error between the main body and DF.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between DFCB and PRCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Replace DFCB.
3. Replace PRCB.
2.24.3 C-8101
Code
C-8101
Classification
DF: Paper feed motor error
Cause
Paper feed motor (M301) error
Correction
Note
K -285
Solution
1. Check the original feed section, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between DFCB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: DF: 7-A)
4. Replace M301.
5. Replace DFCB.
2.24.4 C-8102
Code
C-8102
Classification
DF: Conveyance motor error
Cause
Conveyance motor (M302) error
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: DF: 7-A)
4. Replace M302.
5. Replace DFCB.
2.24.5 C-8103
Code
C-8103
Classification
DF: Reverse/paper exit motor error
Cause
Reverse/paper exit motor (M303) error.
Reverse/paper exit motor (M303)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: DF: 7-B)
4. Replace M303.
5. Replace DFCB.
2.24.6 C-8401
Code
C-8401
Classification
DF: Registration sensor error
Cause
Registration sensor (PS301) error
Original registration sensor (PS301)
Correction
K -286
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between DFCB and the sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: DF: 1-B)
3. Replace PS301.
4. Replace DFCB
2.24.7 C-8402
Code
C-8402
Classification
DF: Timing sensor error
Cause
Timing sensor (PS302) error
Timing sensor (PS302)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between DFCB and the sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: DF: 1-B)
3. Replace PS302.
4. Replace DFCB
2.24.8 C-8403
Code
C-8403
Classification
DF: Reverse sensor error
Cause
Reverse sensor (PS305) error
Reverse sensor (PS305)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection an

Bizhub PRESS C7000 C7000P C70hc C6000 PRO C6000L E SM v4.1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bizhub PRESS C7000 C7000P C70hc C6000 PRO C6000L E SM v4.1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SERVICE MANUAL

D OVERALL COMPOSITION .........................................................................................................D -1

E SERVICE TOOL ..........................................................................................................................E -1

F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE ....................................................................................................F -1

L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING ...............................................................................L -1

N WIRING DIAGRAM .....................................................................................................................N -1

PA THEORY OF OPERATION DF-622 .......................................................................................PA -1

PB THEORY OF OPERATION PF-602/HT-504/505 ....................................................................PB -1

PC THEORY OF OPERATION LU-202/HT-503 ..........................................................................PC -1

PD THEORY OF OPERATION MB-504 ......................................................................................PD -1

PE THEORY OF OPERATION RU-509/HM-102 .........................................................................PE -1

PF THEORY OF OPERATION FS-521 ........................................................................................PF -1

PG THEORY OF OPERATION FS-531 .......................................................................................PG -1

PH THEORY OF OPERATION FS-612 .......................................................................................PH -1

PI THEORY OF OPERATION PK-512/513......................................................................................PI-1

PJ THEORY OF OPERATION PI-502 ..........................................................................................PJ -1

PK THEORY OF OPERATION LS-505 ........................................................................................PK -1

PL THEORY OF OPERATION FD-503 ........................................................................................PL -1

PM THEORY OF OPERATION SD-506 ......................................................................................PM -1

PN THEORY OF OPERATION PB-503 .......................................................................................PN -1

PO THEORY OF OPERATION IC-601 ........................................................................................PO -1

PP THEORY OF OPERATION RU-506..........................................................................................PP-1

PQ THEORY OF OPERATION GP-501.........................................................................................PQ-1

Q TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Ver2.0 (REPORTS FROM THE MARKET)..................................Q-1

39 I.5.9.26 Cover Trimming Adj. (Perfect Binder Correction of error in writing

bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 Ver. 3.0

bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 Ver. 3.2

bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 Ver. 4.0

No. ID Title Ver. Descriptions of revision Date

bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, bizhub PRO C6000L Ver. 4.1

A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

2. DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING

DANGER : Action having a high possibility of suffering

WARNING : Action having a possibility of suffering death

CAUTION : Action having a possibility of suffering a slight

2.2 Description items for safety and important warning items

3.1.1 Actions requiring special attention

Do not use any part not specified by KMBT.

Do not use any power cord or power plug not

Use only the protective fuses specified by

3.2 POWER PLUG SELECTION

3.2.1 Power Cord Set or Power Plug

Marked with "E", "PE" or " "

3.3 CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

3.3.1 Power Supply

and the product and another electrical

(2) Ground Connection

(3) Power Plug and Cord

3.3.2 Installation Requirements

(2) When not Using the Product for a long time

3.3.3 After Service

(2) Work Performed with the Product Powered On

(3) Safety Checkpoints

(4) Handling of Consumables

(5) Handling of Service Materials

3.5 Used Batteries Precautions

3.5.5 Finland, Sweden

4. WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE

4.1 Warning indications inside the machine

(Duplex section Upper surface)

DO NOT put your hand between

(Toner supply section)

(DF rear side)